HES A Pages1 392 MCD 289 2006 Handbook
User Manual: MCD 289
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 437 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
This Handbook is also on Victoria University’s web site at:
www.vu.edu.au
All rights reserved. This book or any part thereof may not be
reproduced in any form whatsoever, whether by graphic, visual,
electronic, filming, microfilming, tape recording or any means,
except in the case of brief passages for the information of students,
without the prior written permission of the publisher.
© Copyright Victoria University 2006
ISSN 1322-8536
Caution: This Handbook provides a guide to courses available
within the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science at the
University in 2006. The Handbook cannot hope to cover all of the
various options adequately, although it attempts to be as accurate
as possible, and students should always check with the relevant
faculty or school officers in planning their courses. The Handbook
also includes descriptions of courses that may be altered later or
that may not in fact be offered due to insufficient enrolments or
changes in teaching personnel. The fact that details of a course are
included in the Handbook can in no way be taken as creating an
obligation on the part of the University, faculty or school to teach it
in any given year, or to teach it in the manner described. The
University reserves the right to discontinue or vary courses at any
time without notice.
Published by Victoria University
PO Box 14428
MELBOURNE VIC 8001 AUSTRALIA
CONTENTS
How to use this book............................................................ 7
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE....... 9
Research........................................................................... 10
Alternative Entry ................................................................ 10
Further Information............................................................. 10
STAFF ........................................................................ 11
University Officers.............................................................. 11
Principal Officers of the University........................................ 11
Members of the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science.... 11
Centre for Environmental Safety and Risk Engineering ........... 12
Centre for Telecommunication and Micro-Electronics .............. 12
Food Marketing Research Unit............................................. 12
School of Architectural, Civil and Mechanical Engineering...... 13
School of Biomedical Sciences ............................................ 13
School of Computer Science and Mathematics ...................... 13
School of Electrical Engineering........................................... 14
School of Health Sciences................................................... 14
School of Molecular Sciences.............................................. 15
School of Nursing and Midwifery ........................................ 16
Sustainability Group........................................................... 16
Foundation Studies............................................................. 16
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES......................................... 17
Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science ............. 17
Courses Offered ................................................................ 17
Certificate in Foundation Studies (Engineering and Science).... 17
Bachelor of Business Electronic Commerce/
Bachelor of Science ........................................................... 18
Bachelor of Engineering/
Bachelor of Business Electronic Commerce ............................ 18
Bachelor of Engineering/Bachelor of Science........................ 19
Bachelor of Engineering/Bachelor of Laws............................ 19
Bachelor of Engineering/Bachelor of Arts ............................. 19
Bachelor of Science/Bachelor of Laws.................................. 19
Bachelor of Arts/Bachelor of Science ................................... 19
School of Architectural, Civil and Mechanical
Engineering ............................................................ 21
Bachelor of Engineering in Architectural Engineering.............. 24
Bachelor of Engineering in Building Engineering.................... 26
Bachelor of Engineering in Civil Engineering......................... 28
Bachelor of Engineering in Mechanical Engineering............... 30
Bachelor of Engineering in Robotic Engineering..................... 31
Bachelor of Technology in Building Surveying........................ 33
School of Biomedical Sciences ................................. 35
Biology and General Science Teaching for
Physical Education Graduates ............................................. 36
Bachelor of Science in Biomedical Sciences .......................... 37
Bachelor of Science in Nutritional Therapy............................ 38
Bachelor of Science in Occupational Health and Safety.......... 38
Bachelor of Science (Honours) in Biomedical Sciences............ 39
Bachelor of Science/Bachelor of Psychology......................... 39
School of Computer Science and Mathematics ......... 41
Bachelor of Science in Computer Science ............................. 42
Bachelor of Science in Computer and Mathematical Sciences.. 42
Bachelor of Science in Internet Technologies and Applications. 44
Bachelor of Science in Information Technology ...................... 45
Bachelor of Science in Computational Financial Mathematics.. 46
Bachelor of Science in Computer Science and Aviation .......... 46
Bachelor of Science (Honours) in Computer Science............... 47
Bachelor of Science (Honours) in Computer
and Mathematical Sciences................................................. 48
International Programs:
Offshore Program Conducted in Hong Kong.......................... 48
Bachelor of Science in Computer Science.............................. 48
Bachelor of Science in Information Technology ...................... 48
Bachelor of Science in Internet Technologies & Applications.... 48
Offshore Program Conducted in Malaysia............................. 49
Bachelor of Science in Computer Science.............................. 49
Bachelor of Science in Internet Technologies & Applications.... 49
External Program Conducted in Sydney ................................ 49
Bachelor of Science in Computer Science.............................. 49
School of Electrical Engineering ...............................51
Bachelor of Engineering in Electrical
and Electronic Engineering.................................................. 52
Bachelor of Engineering Science in Electrical
and Electronic Engineering.................................................. 54
Bachelor of Science (Honours) in Computer Technology.......... 54
Bachelor of Science (Honours) – Physics................................ 54
School of Health Sciences ........................................57
Bachelor of Chinese Medicine (Acupuncture and Herbs) ......... 57
Bachelor of Health Science – Clinical Dermal Therapies.......... 58
Bachelor of Health Science – Natural Medicine (Conversion)... 59
Bachelor of Health Science Naturopathy & Homoeopathy....... 60
Bachelor of Health Science –
Paramedic (Three-year Pre-service) ....................................... 61
Bachelor of Health Science –
Paramedic (One-year Conversion)........................................ 62
Bachelor of Health Science – Chinese Medicine..................... 62
Bachelor of Health Science
(Chinese Medicine & Clinical Sciences) ................................ 63
Bachelor of Health Science –
Chinese Medicine with Honours........................................... 63
Bachelor of Science – Clinical Sciences ................................ 63
School of Molecular Sciences ...................................65
Bachelor of Applied Science in Chemistry ............................. 66
Bachelor of Science in Biotechnology ................................... 67
Bachelor of Science in Medical, Forensic
and Analytical Chemistry .................................................... 68
Bachelor of Science in Nutrition, Food and Health Science......68
Bachelor of Science (Honours) in Chemical Sciences .............. 69
Bachelor of Science (Honours) in Biology (Biotechnology) ....... 69
Bachelor of Science (Honours) in Nutrition & Food Science ..... 69
School of Nursing and Midwifery ............................71
NON-AWARD SHORT COURSES........................................ 71
Bridging Course (Division 2 Entry)........................................ 71
Bridging Course (Graduate Entry) ........................................ 71
AWARD COURSES ............................................................ 72
Bachelor of Nursing (Division 2 Entry).................................. 72
Bachelor of Nursing (Graduate Entry) ................................... 72
Bachelor of Nursing (Graduate Entry) ................................... 73
Bachelor of Nursing (Pre-Registration) .................................. 73
Bachelor of Nursing (Pre-Registration) .................................. 74
Bachelor of Nursing (Post-Registration)................................. 75
Bachelor of Health Science (Honours) – Nursing .................... 75
Bachelor of Midwifery ........................................................ 76
Bachelor of Midwifery ........................................................ 77
Sustainability Group ...............................................79
Bachelor of Science in Ecology and Sustainability.................. 80
Bachelor of Science (Honours) in Ecology and Sustainability ... 83
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS............................ 85
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES.......................................... 261
Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science ........... 261
Master’s Qualifying Program .............................................261
Master of Engineering and Science, and Doctor
of Engineering Science......................................................261
Centre for Environmental Safety
and Risk Engineering............................................ 263
Graduate Certificate in Performance-Based
Building and Fire Codes....................................................264
Graduate Diploma in Building Fire Safety
and Risk Engineering ........................................................265
Master of Engineering in Building Fire Safety
and Risk Engineering (Coursework).....................................265
Masters (by Research).......................................................266
Doctor of Philosophy.........................................................266
Centre for Telecommunication and
Micro-Electronics................................................... 267
Food Marketing Research Unit .............................. 269
School of Architectural, Civil and
Mechanical Engineering ........................................ 271
Graduate Certificate in Project Management........................273
Graduate Diploma in Project Management..........................274
Master of Engineering (Project Management) (Coursework) ...275
Master of Engineering in Mechanical
Engineering (Coursework) .................................................275
School of Biomedical Sciences ............................... 277
School of Computer Science and Mathematics ....... 279
Doctor of Philosophy.........................................................279
Master of Science (Research) .............................................279
Graduate Diploma in Computer Science .............................280
Graduate Diploma in Computer and Mathematical Sciences..280
Graduate Diploma in Multimedia Information Networking.....280
Graduate Diploma in Software Engineering.........................281
Master of Science in Computer Science...............................282
Master of Science in Computer and Mathematical Sciences...282
Master of Science in Software Engineering..........................283
School of Electrical Engineering ............................. 285
Doctor of Philosophy.........................................................285
Master of Engineering (Research) .......................................285
Master of Science (Research) .............................................285
Graduate Certificate in Microelectronic Engineering .............286
Graduate Diploma in Microelectronic Engineering................286
Master of Engineering in Microelectronic Engineering...........286
Graduate Certificate in Systems and Control Engineering......287
Graduate Diploma in Systems and Control Engineering.........287
Master of Engineering in Systems and Control Engineering....287
Graduate Certificate in Telecommunication Engineering........288
Graduate Diploma in Telecommunication Engineering ..........288
Master of Engineering in Telecommunication Engineering......288
Master of Engineering in Electrical and
Electronic Engineering.......................................................288
Master of Engineering Science in Computer
and Microelectronic Engineering (Coursework) ....................289
Master of Engineering in Microelectronic Engineering/
Master of Engineering Science in Computer
and Microelectronic Engineering........................................290
School of Health Sciences...................................... 293
Graduate Diploma in Clinical Chinese Medicine.................293
Graduate Diploma in Complementary Therapies ..................293
Graduate Diploma in Prepared Chinese Medicines..............294
Master of Health Science – Osteopathy...............................294
Master of Health Science (by Minor Thesis)..........................295
Master of Health Science (by Research)..............................296
Doctor of Philosophy.........................................................296
School of Molecular Sciences ................................. 297
Postgraduate Programs by Research................................... 297
Biotechnology Research Group.......................................... 297
Chemical Synthesis & Analytical Science Research Group .... 297
Food Science Research Group........................................... 298
Graduate Diploma in Environmental Management............... 298
Master of Science in Environmental Management ................ 298
Master of Science (Food Science) ...................................... 299
Master of Science – Biotechnology
(Biotechnology and Bioinformatics Streams) ........................ 299
Packaging and Polymer Research Unit ..................300
International Programs:
Offshore Program Conducted in Netherlands ...................... 301
Master of Engineering Science in Packaging (Coursework) ... 301
School of Nursing and Midwifery.......................... 303
Graduate Diploma in Substance Abuse Studies ................... 303
Master of Nursing............................................................ 304
Graduate Certificates and Graduate Diplomas in
– Cancer Nursing ............................................................ 304
– Emergency Nursing....................................................... 304
– Gerontic Nursing .......................................................... 304
– Neuroscience Nursing................................................... 304
– Orthopaedic Nursing .................................................... 304
– Paediatric Nursing ........................................................ 304
– Nursing Management.................................................... 304
Master of Midwifery......................................................... 305
Graduate Diploma in Midwifery ........................................ 305
Master of Public Health Nursing ........................................ 306
Graduate Certificate in Public Health Nursing .................... 306
Graduate Diploma in Public Health Nursing....................... 306
Master of Nursing (by Research)........................................ 306
Doctor of Philosophy ........................................................ 307
Sustainability Group ............................................. 309
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS .............................311
RECOGNITION – RPL/RCC, CREDIT TRANSFER AND
ADVANCED STANDING ............................................. 393
Pathways........................................................................ 393
Application Process.......................................................... 394
Fees............................................................................... 394
Notification..................................................................... 394
Right of Appeal ............................................................... 394
Selection Criteria for Articulating Students –
Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science......................... 394
ADMISSIONS, ENROLMENTS, EXAMINATIONS,
GRADUATIONS AND ACADEMIC PROCEDURES.......... 395
Student Services Department ............................................. 395
How to Apply for a Victoria University Course..................... 395
Centre for Commencing Students....................................... 396
Portfolio Partnership Program ............................................ 396
Course Entry ................................................................... 396
Special Entry and Access Schemes..................................... 396
Need Help?.................................................................... 397
Flexible Learning ............................................................. 397
Australian Qualifications Framework.................................. 397
Modes of Study ............................................................... 397
Postgraduate Courses....................................................... 398
Undergraduate Courses.................................................... 399
Postgraduate Courses....................................................... 399
Direct Applications........................................................... 399
Selection Procedures ........................................................ 399
Scholarships.................................................................... 400
Enrolment ....................................................................... 400
Student Identity Card........................................................ 401
Continuing Students ......................................................... 401
Enrolment Enquiries.......................................................... 401
5
Enrolment Variations and Course Withdrawal ..................... 402
Leave Of Absence and Deferment...................................... 402
Personal Details ............................................................... 402
Enrolment Related Fees and Charges.................................. 402
Refund Of Fees................................................................ 403
Cross Institutional Enrolment .............................................. 403
Communication from the University To Students ................... 405
Assessment...................................................................... 405
Unit Of Study Assessment and Grading .............................. 408
Academic Progression ...................................................... 409
Graduation Procedures..................................................... 409
Credit Points.................................................................... 410
EFTSL ............................................................................. 410
SERVICES AVAILABLE TO STUDENTS........................... 411
Student Career Development ............................................. 411
Children’s Services........................................................... 411
Graduating Students ........................................................ 412
School of Health Sciences Teaching Clinics......................... 412
Independent Access: Students with a Disability .................... 412
Orientation ..................................................................... 412
Moondani Balluk (Indigenous Services).............................. 412
Student Support ............................................................... 413
VU International Services .................................................. 414
Health Advice ................................................................. 414
First Aid.......................................................................... 414
Student Learning Services [SLS].......................................... 414
Teaching and Learning Support ......................................... 415
Postcompulsory Education Centre (PEC) .............................. 415
Student Career Services.................................................... 415
Staff Learning and Educational Development (SLED) ............. 415
Student Learning Services (SLS).......................................... 415
Sport and Recreation Facilities and Services....................... 416
Student Organisations ...................................................... 416
Travel Concessions........................................................... 416
COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006............. 417
Undergraduate Courses and Programs ................. 417
Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science......................... 417
Faculty of Arts, Education and Human Development............. 419
Faculty of Business and Law .............................................. 421
Postgraduate Courses........................................... 423
Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science......................... 423
Faculty of Arts, Education and Human Development............. 425
Faculty of Business and Law .............................................. 426
TAFE Courses at Victoria University in 2006 .......... 429
7
HOW TO USE THIS BOOK
Welcome to the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science
Handbook 2006. The Handbook is designed to provide students
with detailed information on course structure, subject content,
on-campus facilities and University regulations and procedures
required for the successful completion of study.
This Handbook lists all undergraduate and postgraduate courses
offered by the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science. The
Undergraduate Studies section outlines the requirements and
structure of all undergraduate courses offered by individual Schools
within the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science. The credit
point value for each subject is included with the course details. The
course outlines are followed in the Undergraduate Subject Details
section by a detailed description of all undergraduate subjects,
which are listed in alphanumeric order according to their subject
code. The postgraduate area is similar, outlining each course offered
followed by a description of all postgraduate subjects.
The back sections of the Handbook include useful information about
articulation and credit transfer, recognition of prior learning,
admission and enrolment procedures and services available to
students.
HANDBOOK ON THE WEB
This Handbook is also on Victoria University’s web site at
www.vu.edu.au
CREDIT POINTS
Victoria University has a credit points system in which each subject is
given a value according to its academic weighting. To complete
each year of a course, students must complete subjects to the value
of 120 points. For more information on credit points, see the
‘Admission, Enrolments, Examinations, Graduations and Academic
Procedures’ section in the back of this Handbook.
PLEASE NOTE
The attention of all students and prospective students is drawn to the
possibility that due to circumstances that presently cannot be
foreseen, the details of the programs, courses and subjects set out in
this Handbook might change after the date of publication.
Accordingly, before final decisions are made or enrolment occurs
based on information contained in the Handbook, each student or
prospective student should contact the Faculty Student Information on
(03) 9919 4516 to ensure that the pertinent information is still
accurate.
8
9
FACULTY OF
HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
Welcome to the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science at
Victoria University and to one of the most exciting periods in your
life. Your studies over the next few years will, naturally, be very
important and you will have to be fully committed to your studies if
you are to succeed. However, I have no doubt that it will be worth it
in the end. We will be doing all that we can to help you and this
guide contains some information that should be of assistance.
The Faculty has over 295 staff and the equivalent of 3310 full-time
students located at five of the University’s campuses – City Flinders,
City King, Footscray Park, St Albans and Werribee. The Faculty
Office is located at the St.Albans campus. The Faculty has seven
Schools, two Research Centres, three Research Units and two
Clinics.
SCHOOLS
• Architectural, Civil and Mechanical Engineering
• Biomedical Sciences
• Computer Science and Mathematics
• Electrical Engineering
• Health Sciences
• Molecular Sciences
• Nursing and Midwifery
RESEARCH CENTRES
• Telecommunications and Micro-Electronics
• Environmental Safety and Risk Engineering
RESEARCH UNITS
• Food Marketing Research Unit
• Packaging and Polymer Research Unit
• Sustainability Group
CLINICS
• Health Practice Unit
• Osteopathic Medicine Clinic
The Faculty currently offers courses at Undergraduate and
Postgraduate levels, an external program in Sydney, offshore
courses in China, Hong Kong, Malaysia and the Netherlands,
together with non-award courses, and a range of pathways. The
Faculty also conducts a very successful access program, Foundation
Studies, which is a one-year full-time course for students whose VCE
results or subjects were not satisfactory to gain entry to a science or
engineering course at university or for those who want to return to
study. Successful completion of appropriate subjects will guarantee
students entry to our Engineering and Science courses at Victoria
University.
The Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science provides students
with a sound scientific training with strong emphasis on practical
skills and problem solving that equips them well for a range of
professional careers. There has been a major change to problem-
based learning strategies in the classroom. The Faculty offers a
comprehensive range of courses in health, engineering and science
up to PhD level.
The courses have been developed to meet the vocational needs of
students, and special care has been taken to consult the professional
organisations to ensure that graduating students receive professional
recognition for their qualifications. Students will find the staff of the
Faculty willing to help and advise them during their studies. Staff
members also take a keen interest in the job placement and careers
of graduates.
There is more to university life than just study and I urge you to make
the most of all social opportunities that Victoria University and
student life has to offer. I would especially recommend that you
become involved with any student society our Faculty has to offer.
Make the most of the opportunities that are before you and best
wishes for your time with us now and beyond.
Professor Ian Rouse
Executive Dean
Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
10
RESEARCH
Research in the Faculty is conducted by academic staff, visiting
researchers, postdoctoral fellows and postgraduate students, and
covers a variety of areas. Research by postgraduate students
enrolled in higher degrees under the supervision of academic staff is
an integral part of the Faculty’s research effort. Through the students’
research training the Faculty seeks not only to meet the immediate
needs of the student and industry but also to play a major role in
developing Australia’s future research personnel and prospective
academics. Research activities and topics are listed in the Schools
and Research Centres/Units/Group in the Postgraduate Studies
section of the Handbook.
ALTERNATIVE ENTRY
Engineering (VTAC code 41441)
Science (VTAC code 41451)
Alternative entry program for students who have:
• successfully completed year 12 with the required prerequisites,
but may not have achieved the required study score in all
prerequisites; or
• have not studied the required mathematics prerequisite.
All admissions are on an individual basis.
PREREQUISITES
Units 3 and 4 – English (any) and Mathematics (any).
EXTRA REQUIREMENTS
All applicants offered a place will be required to attend an
appropriate summer bridging program or enrol in one or more
subjects from the Foundation Year or undertake part or all of an
appropriate TAFE program.
FURTHER INFORMATION
Further information about courses and research programs may be
obtained from the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science
Office, Victoria University, PO Box 14428 Melbourne VIC 8001,
telephone (03) 9919 4516, facsimile (03) 9919 4513, or email:
hes@vu.edu.au
11
STAFF
UNIVERSITY OFFICERS
Visitor
His Excellency Mr John Landy AC, MBE
Governor of Victoria
Chancellor
The Hon. Justice Frank Vincent QC
Deputy Chancellor
Dianne Foggo DipTching, DipPhysEd, GradDipMulticultEdMelb
Distinguished Visiting Professor and Chair of the University
Foundation
The Rt Hon. Sir Zelman Cowen AK, GCMG, GCVO, DCLOxf,
QC
Distinguished Professorial Fellow
Professor Jarlath Ronayne AM, MADub, PhDCamb, HonFTCD,
FRSC, FAIM, FTSE
PRINCIPAL OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY
Vice-Chancellor and President
Professor Elizabeth Harman BA, MAAuck, PhDMcM, FIPAA,
FAIM
Deputy Vice-Chancellor (Education Programs) and Director TAFE
Professor John McCallum BEcon(HonsPsych)Qld, MPhil, DPhil
(Oxon)
Deputy Vice-Chancellor (Management Services)
Professor Michael Hamerston BA, MEdMelb, MALond, ATEA,
AUSTAFE
Deputy Vice-Chancellor (Education Services)
Professor Richard Carter BA, DipEdLaT,
GradDipTESL/TEFLSCVToorak, MEdVicMelb
Pro Vice-Chancellor (Industry, Research and Region)
Professor Vaughan Beck DipMechEngFTC, BEng,
MEngScMelb, PhDUNSW, CPEng, FIEAust, FAIB, FTSE
Pro Vice-Chancellor (International)
Professor the Hon. Stephen Martin BAANU, MAAlberta,
MTCPSyd, DipEd UNSW, PhDW’gong
Pro Vice-Chancellor (Institutional Development)
Christine Kotur BA, DipEd, MEdLaT
Pro Vice-Chancellor (Teaching and Learning Support)
Belinda McLennan BAMonash, DipEdRusden,
GradCertEd(Literacy)Deakin, GradCertEd&Trg(Ldrshp&Mgt)WMIT,
MEdLdrshp&MgtRMIT, MACE
Executive Director (Finance and Staffing)
David Nicholson BBus(Acct)WACAE, MBADeakin,
GradDipEdHawthornInst, CPA
Executive Director (Governance, Policy and Planning Services)
Robert Brown BA, DipEdWAust, PGradDipLangStWAustCAE,
MEd, MBAECowan
MEMBERS OF THE FACULTY OF HEALTH,
ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
OFFICE OF THE EXECUTIVE DEAN
Executive Dean
Professor Ian Rouse BSc(Hons), GradDiplHlthSci, PhD
Professorial Fellow
The Honourable Barry Jones AO, MA, LLBMelb, DLittUTS,
DScMacq, FRSA, ANZAAS, FTS
Deputy Dean
Professor Akhtar Kalam BScCalc, BEngScAlig, MSOklahoma,
PhDBath, CPEng, FIEE, CEng, MIEEE, FIEAust
Associate Dean – Teaching and Learning (Acting)
Robert Taylor BSc, MEdMonash, MAIP, MAAIR
Associate Dean – Research and Research Training
Associate Professor Gregory Baxter BSc(Hons), PhDMelb,
MAIP
Associate Dean – International
Fernando Scarmozzino BSc, MAppScRMIT, DipEdMSC
FACULTY OFFICE
Faculty Manager
Gail Ellis BA, BEd, MEdSt, PhDMonash, DipTToorak
OFFICE OF THE EXECUTIVE DEAN
Assistant to the Executive Dean
Claudette Butler
Administrative Assistant to the Deputy Dean and Associate Deans
Pauline Ruberto
Administrative Assistant to the Deputy Dean and Associate Deans
Vacant
RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
Manager – Resources
Irene Brogden AssDipBus(Accounting), ANIA, AIMM
Senior Resources Officer
Lily Ludovico BAPsychPhil, MBAPhil, MATEM
Resources Officers
Linda Tuddenham
Angela Tassone
GOVERNANCE AND COMPLIANCE
Senior Governance and Compliance Officer
Diane Wilkinson
Governance and Compliance Officers
Josephine Georgakopoulos
Daphne D’Souza
MARKETING AND COMMUNICATIONS
Senior Marketing and Communications Officers
Santa Giordano BSc, DipEdMelb
David Nance TSTCSecondaryTeachColl, BA, BEdLaT, MEdMelb
Marketing and Communications Officer
Mayette Mendoza BSc(Acctg)Phil
Administrative Support (Acting)
Tina Kounadis
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
12
STUDENT ADMINISTRATION
Faculty Student Administration Co-ordinator
George Hawkins BEc, DipEdMonash
Senior Student Administration Officer
Crispin Schneider BBusAcctgVicMelb, GradDipBusComp
Student Administraton Officer
Cheryl Alleyn CertBusCompApplicNewportTAFE
Student Advice Officer – International
Patrick Lambert BEcMonash
Student Advice Officer – Research and Graduate Studies
Elizabeth Smith AssocDipSocSc(ChildCare)FootsTAFE
Timetabling Officer
Ann Proctor
Administrative Officers
Margery Bailey
Meryl Bailey
Anna Calabro
Barbara Drapow CertOffice&SectStudiesFootsTAFE
Hao Liu CertAdmVicMelb, AssocDipArtsRMIT, MBAVicMelb,
AIMM
Pushpa Richards
Student Administration Assistants
Linda Denny
Katherine McGhee
Maureen Wetherall
CENTRE FOR ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY AND
RISK ENGINEERING (CESARE)
Director
Professor Ian Thomas BEngMonash, PhDMonash
Senior Advisor
Professor Vaughan Beck DipMechEngFTC, BEngMelb,
MEngScMelb, PhDUNSW, CPEng, FIEAust, FAIB
Visiting Professors
Emeritus Professor Michael Hasofer BEngFarukUni,
BSc(Hons)(Mathematics)Tas, BEc, PhDTas
Emeritus Professor John Stearne BSc(Hons)Adel, PhDAdel,
GradDipOccHygDeakin
Academic Associate
Associate Professor Paula Beaver BSc(Hons)UBirmUK,
PhDLeedsUK, CEng, CPhys, MInstP, MIFS, MSFPE, AMIFE,
Principal Fire Engineer, NZ Fire Service
Associate Professor G Caird Ramsay BSc,PhDAdel
Research Staff
Associate Professor Dorothy Bruck BA(Hons)Tas,
PhDLaT,T.CertTas, Department of Psychology
Dr Paul Clancy BEQld, MEngScMelb, PhDVicMelb, MIEAust
Associate Professor Ozden Turan BScMETUTurkey,
MScCaseWesternUni, USA, PhDManit
Dr Jianguo Qu, BEngJilin (China), MEngRMIT, PhDVicMelb
Huang Yao, BEngNanjing, (China), GradDipSoftware
DevelopmentRMIT,MEngMelb
Senior Administrative Officer
David Nance TSTCSecondaryTeachColl, BA, BEdLaT, MEdMelb
Administrative Officer
Helen Demczuk CertSect&BusStudies, Stott’s Bus. College
ONESTEEL FIRE AND CONSTRUCTION RESEARCH UNIT
Head of Unit
Dr Ian Bennetts BEng(Civil)Monash, MEngScMonash,
PhDMonash, FIEAust
Research Staff
Dr Khalid Moinuddin BScChittagong, BEng(Mech)National
UniSciTech (Pakistan), PhDMelb
Technical Staff
Michael Culton
Robert Ralph
CENTRE FOR TELECOMMUNICATION AND
MICRO-ELECTRONICS (CTME)
Acting Director
Professor Michael Faulkner BSc(Elec)UK, MEngSc, MEUNSW,
PhDUTS, MIEEE
Centre Staff
Professor Jugdutt (Jack) Singh BSc(Hons)UK, MScAlta,
PhDVicMelb, TeachCertUSP, MIEEE, MIEICE
University Associates
Dr Prem Dassanayake BScEngSLanka, MSc, PhDWales, MIEE,
MIEEE
Dr Gregory Martin BE(Elec)(Hons)Melb, MECant, PhDVicMelb,
MIEEE
Associate Professor Aladin Zayegh, BE(Elec)Aleppo, MSc,
PhDClaudeBernard, CPEng, AMSE, MIEAust, MIEEE
Associate Professor Fu-Chun Zheng BSc, MSc, PhDEdin,
AMIEE, MIEE
R&D Project Manager
Dr Scott Leyonhjelm BE(Hons)Melb, PhD(Eng)VicMelb
Research Engineer/Research Fellows
Mr Melvyn Pereira BSc(Hons)Melb, MEMelb
Dr Ying Tan BSc, MEng, PhD (China)
Dr Aaron Reid, BE(Hons)AdeAus, PhDAdeAus
Research Officer
Dr Hai Le, BE(Hons)HobAus, PhDVicMelb
Administrative Officer
Shukonya Benka BA(EngLit), MA(EngLit)Bd,
MBus(AdminMngt)VicMelb
FOOD MARKETING RESEARCH UNIT
Director
Associate Professor Suku Bhaskaran BAMal,
GradDipSocScTas, MBus(Research)VicMelb, PhDMonash, MMIGD
Academic Associates
Dr Alex Buchanan BAgScMassey, MAgScIowa, PhDLond, FTS
Mr Darian Warne MScLond, BAMelb, AssDipFoodTechRMIT
University Associates
Professor John Cary BAgScMassey, MAgrSc, PhDMelb
Professor Ross Robinson BANewEngland, DipEdNewEngland,
MAUNSW, PhDBritishColumbia
Professor Graham Thorpe BSc, PhDNott, DEngMelb, CPEng
FIEAust
Professor Negandra Shah BVSc&AH(Hons)Ranchi,
MScSDakota, PhDAlta, AAIFST, MDIAA
Associate Professor Jack Antonas BscWAust,
GradDipEdWAIT, DipDieteticsWAIT, PhDLond, RegDiet, MDAA
Associate Professor Chris Perera BScSLanka, MScCanada,
PhDMonash
Dr Vijay Mishra BScJabalpur, MScMysore, PhDAlta, MAIFST
Dr James Doughney BBus(Econ)GIAE, PhDVicMelb
Mr Brian Fairman BA(Arts)Monash, DipEdLaT, BEdLaT,
GradCertBusMASwinburne
STAFF – FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
13
SCHOOL OF ARCHITECTURAL, CIVIL AND
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Head of School
Associate Professor Chris Perera BScSLanka, MScCanada,
PhDMonash
Professor
Graham Thorpe BSc, PhDNott, DEngMelb, CPEng FIEAust
Associate Professors
Chandra Bhuta BScKansas, MSKansas, FIEAust, MAIPM, MAIB,
CPEng
Michael Sek MEngSc, PhDPoznan, AIP
Ozden Turan BSc, METUTurkey, MScCaseWesternUni (USA),
PhDManit
Senior Lecturers
Ian Campbell BEngMelb, MScBrunel, MIES
Paul Clancy BEQ’ld, MEngScMelb, PhDVicMelb
Greg Evans BEng, DipEdMelb, MEngScMonash, MIEAust. CPEng
Kevin Hunt BEng, MEngScMelb
Peter Lechte BEng, MEngSc, MEnvStMelb, MIEAust, MAWWA,
MIAA
Jun-de Li BEng(Hons)Tsinghua, PhDMelb
Mariusz Paks MEngScTechUnivWarsaw, AM ASHRAE, MAIRAH
S. Eren Semercigil BSc(Hons), MScMETUTurkey, PhDManit
Danh Tran BE(Hons), BSc, PhDCant, MSEM, MBSSA, MAAEE
Lecturers
Robert Burnell RFD, CertTechBuildSwinburneIT, DipArch,
BArchRMIT, MUrbanPlanMelb, FAIBS, MAIB, RAIA, MPIA, FRMIT,
Reg’d Building Practitioner, Reg’d Architect
Mervyn Minett CertMechEng, BEFIT
David King BEngVicMelb
Josef Rojter BSc, MEngScMonash, MIM, MSPE
Euan Nichol DipCE, BEngRMIT, MIEAust, CEng, CPEng
Vincent Rouillard BE(Dist)FIT, MEngVicMelb, MSEE, MSEM
Vinayaga Sarma BScGlas, MEngScBirm, CPEng, MIEAust,
MASCE, MAIPM, MAIB
Craig Townsend DipCE, BEng, DipEd, MEngScMelb, MIEAust
Computer Systems Engineer
Tien Do BEng(Hons)VicMelb
Technical Staff
Joseph Angelone DipCEFIT, BEng(Civil)VicMelb
Harry Friedrich CertEngAmsterdam, DipBus(Admin)Amsterdam
Laslo Kovacs
Laurence Martin
Norm Welgus
Administrative Officers
Lyn Allis AdvCertRes&CommServ(IntellDis)VicMelb
Glenda Geyer CertCompBusApplicWMCOT
SCHOOL OF BIOMEDICAL SCIENCES
Head of School
Associate Professor Michelle Towstoless BSc(Hons),
PhDMelb, MEPG, MESA, MAPS
Professor
Gabriela Stephenson BSc(Hons)Bucharest, PhDMonash,
GradDipInfoScRMIT
Associate Professors
Jack Antonas BScW Aust, GradDipEdWAIT, DipDieteticsWAIT,
PhDLond
Lily Stojanovska DipMedLabSciRMIT, BSc, MscDePaul,
PhDMelb, MADS, MASMR, MAMS
Senior Lecturers
Kerry Dickson BSc (Hons)WAust, MSc, PhDMonash, MASHB
Alan Hayes BSc (Hons)Melb, PhDMelb, MAuPS, MACSM,
MIRCHAL
Wendy Probert MHScLaT, BSc(Hons)LaT, BAppSc(MedLab)RMIT,
MAIMS, MPHA
Kathy Tangalakis BSc(Hons), PhDMelb
Lecturers
Susan Bevan BSc(Hons), PhDLaT
Beverly Crawford BAppSc(MedLab)RMIT, GradDipEdVicMelb
Neville Critch BScSurrey, MScMonash, GradDipEdHawthorn,
MPHMonash
Catherine Kamphuis BSc(Hons)Melb, PhDMelb, MASMR
Paul Lewandowski BSc(Hons)Deakin, PhDDeakin
Sharleen O’Reilly BSc(Hons), PhDTCDIreland, SRDUK
Siun O’Sullivan BSc(Hons)Melb, PhDMelb
Philip Seymour BEd(PhyEd)BallaratUC, DipAcup, MASEO
Xiao-qun Su BScShaanxi, MScAcademiaSinica, PhDTas,
ASP(Aust)
Research Fellows
Ronny Blazev PhDLaT, BSc(Hons)LaT
Brett O’Connell PhD, BSc(Hon)VicMelb, AUPS
Laboratory Managers
Nikola Popovik MSc
Technical Officers
Lillian Nobile AssocDipBiolSciLabTechWMIT
Danijela Stankovic AssocDipAppSc(LabTech)WMIT
Zheng Tao AssocDipAppSc(LabTech)WMIT
Jillian Vince BScMelb
Administration Officer
Judith Thomas
SCHOOL OF COMPUTER SCIENCE AND
MATHEMATICS
Head of School
Associate Professor Pietro Cerone BScUNSW, PhDW’gong,
FAustMS
Professors
Sever Dragomir BScTim, MEdTim, PhDTim
Clement Leung BScMcG, MScOxf, PhDLond, FBCS, FRSA, CEng
Yanchun Zhang BSc(Hons)Hebei, MScBIT, PhDUQ
Associate Professors
Neil Barnett MScLond, PhDMonash, DipEd
Yuan Miao BScShandongU, MEng, PhDTsinghuaU
Nalin Sharda BTech, PhDITDelhi
Anthony Sofo MScLaT, DipEdMelb, PhDVicMelb
Senior Lecturers
John Horwood DipEd, DipComp, MScMelb, PhDMonash
Fuchun Huang BScPeking, MSc CSA, PhD Sokenda (Japan)
Lutfar Khan BScEngDhaka, MEng, DEngAIT
Alasdair McAndrew BSc(Hons)Melb, MScMonash, PhDMonash
Iwona Miliszewska MScDresden,
GradDipComp&InfoScsVicMelb
Gitesh Raikundalia BEcSydney, MCompNCastle, PhDBond,
PACS, MACM, MIEEE-CS
John Roumeliotis BSc(Hons)LaT, PhDUNSW
Fernando Scarmozzino BSc, MAppScRMIT, DipEdMSC
Hao Shi BEJiaoTong, PhDW’gong
Khalil Shihab BSc(Hons), MScBagdad, PhDUK
Jakub Szajman BSc(Hons), PhDLaT
Grace Tan BScOSU, MScVicMelb
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
14
Champa Weerakoon MSc(IrrEng)S’ton
Xun Yi BScWuhanU, MScZhenghen, PhDXidian
Lecturers
Alan Davidson BSc, DipEdMelb, MScLond
Anthony Doggett BAppSCBallaratUC, GradDipEdGippslandAE,
MScMonash
Ian Gomm BSc(Hons), DipEdMonash, MScMelb
Fuchun Huang BScPeking, MSc, CSA, PhDSokenda (Japan)
Tim Hunt BSc, DipEdMelb
Robert Moore BScMelb, BALaT, DipEd, BEdLaT
Daniel Nelson BMath(Dist), MEdMinn, GradDipCompStudsMelb
Anne Venables BScMelb, GradDipEdMelb,
GradDipCompSciVicMelb, MscVicMelb
MacEwan Wright BEc, DipAcctLat, MAccUNE, AIBF CPA CPL.
Bai-Ling Zhang BEngWuhan, MengChina,PhDNCastle
Academic Associate
Don Watson BSc, DipEdUniSyd, MA, PhDMelb
Visiting Professors
Santosh Kumar MScVikram, PhDDelhi
Research Assistant/Executive Editor
Pui Ling Pang BAppScRMIT, GradDipMelb
Computer Systems Manager
Ponnusamy Rajendran BTechIIT, MEngAIT,
DipCompAppPhysics
Computer Systems Administrator
Cameron Giles BScComSciMelb
Computer Systems Officer
Mark Mojic
Technical Assistant
Danh Ho
Administrative Officers
Janet Grady
SCHOOL OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
Head of School
Associate Professor Aladin Zayegh, BE(Elec)Aleppo, MSc,
PhDClaudeBernard, CPEng, AMSE, MIEAust, MIEEE
Professors
Michael Faulkner BSc(Elec)UK, MEngSc, MEUNSW, PhDUTS,
MIEEE
Jugdutt (Jack) Singh BSc(Hons)UK, MScAlta, PhDVic,
TeachCertUSP, MIEEE,MIEICE
Associate Professors
Gregory Baxter BSc(Hons), PhDMelb, MAIP
Stephen Collins BSc(Hons), PhDMelb, FAIP
Patrick Leung BEng(Elec), MEng(Sc)Melb, PhDCalif, MIEEE
Alexander Simcock BSc(Electronics)Kent, MEngFIT,
GradCert(Tertiary Educ)VicMelb
Nguyen Truyen BE(Elec)Monash, MEngScUNSW, PhDQ’ld,
SMIREE Aust
Fu-Chun Zheng BSc, MSc, PhDEdin, SMIEEE
Principal Lecturer
Robert Taylor BSc, MEdMonash, MAIP, MAAIR
Senior Lecturers
Gregory Cain BSc(Hons)WAust, PhDMonash
Andrew Cramond BAppSci(Dist), MAppSciChisholm, PhDSalford
Prem Dassanayake BScEngSLanka, MSc, PhDWales, MIEE,
MIEEE
Qin Jiang BScEng(Elec)Shanghai Jiao-Tong, MEngCanterbury,
PhDMonash, MIEEE
Wee Sit Lee BEng(Elec)Sing, MScNUS’pore, PhDANU, MIEEE
Roman Malyniak BE(Elec), PhDWAust
Gregory Martin BE(Elec)(Hons)Melb, ME(Distinction)Cant,
PhDVicMelb, MIEEE, Chartered Electrical Engineer
Juan Shi DipEELiaoningLightIndustryCollege,PRC, BE(Elec)North-
East University,PRC, PhDVicMelb, MIEEE
Michael Wingate BE(Elec), DipEd, MAdminMonash, MScManc,
PhDVicMelb, CPEng, MIEAust
Lige Xia BEDalien, PhDANU, MIEEE
Lecturers
John Chlond BSc(Hons)CNAA UK, GradDipEdHawthornInstEd
Robert Ives BSc(Hons)Nott, MEngVicMelb
Yau Man Ng BSc(Hons)NUS’pore, MScUWIST
Aleksandar Stojcevski BE(ElecEng), MEng(ElecEng),
PhDVicMelb, AMSE, MIEEE, MIEICE, MIEE
Ronny Veljanovski BSc, PhDVicMelb, MIEEE, MIEICE, MAMN
Post Doctoral Fellow
Tan Ying BScHesbin, PhDHesbin
Daniel Kitcher BSc(Hons)ImperialCollege, PhDBath
Research Engineer
Melvin Pereira
Technical and Computer Systems
Hayrettin Arisoy AssocDipScComp&AppPhyVicMelb
Donald Ermel
Foster Hayward COTRMIT
Abdurrahman Kuzucu AssocDipElectEngRMIT
Les Nakonieczny CertBasicElectRMIT, DipComm&CompServICS,
AssocDipElectronicsRMIT
Zoltan Varga AssocDipDigElec&CompFIT
Administrative Officer
Maria Pylnyk
SCHOOL OF HEALTH SCIENCES
Acting Head of School
Professor Maureen Ryan TPTCToorak, BAMelb, MEdMonash,
PhDMelb, MAPS
Senior Lecturer
Julie Thacker UCLES/RSA CTEFLALond, BSc (Hons)WAust,
GradDipEdCurtin, PhDANU
Co-ordinator
David Dawson MBusAdminDeakin, GradDipAppPsych,
GradDipCompEd, DipTeaching, BScAuckland, MAPS, AITD
Anatomy Laboratory Manager
Jim Johnson CertMelbLabTechSAInstTech
Clinical Co-ordinator
Christopher MacFarlane DO(BSO) UK
Clinical Laboratory Technicians
Jan Carter SEN
Sal Salanitri BAppScHumanMovementPhillip, DipEdHawthorn
CLINICAL TEACHING UNIT
Co-ordinator
Dawn Bannon
RN,BHScNsgVicMelb,CertMass(East&West)VicMelb
OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCES
Associate Professor
Peter Gibbons MB, BSLond, DO,BSO, DM-SMedSoc.Apoth,
FRSH, MHScVicMelb
Senior Lecturer
Melanie Cameron BAppSc(Osteo)RMIT, MHScVicMelb, PhD
Gary Fryer BAppScOst, ND.PhD (in progress)
STAFF – FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
15
Lecturers
Annie Carter BA (Hons)Melb, GradDipOccHealthMonash,
MBBSMelb, GradDipTertEdVicMelb, PhD (in progress)
Cameron Gosling BAppSciRMIT, GradDipExrcsRehab,
MAppScVicMelb
Jenny Hynes BAppSci(Physio)LincolnInst,
MPhysio(Manips)VicMelb
Jim Kiatos MBBS, DipAppSc(Naturopathy) Fellow ANTA
Patrick McLaughlin BAppScFIT, MappScVicMelb,
PhD (in progress)
Brian Nicholls DO.UK, MACant
Denise Cornall BAppSc(Physio)LincolnInst,
DO(Hons) BritSchOsteopathy
Edwina Ryan BScMonash, BAppSc, BOsteoScRMIT,
GradDipEx RehabVicMelb
PARAMEDIC SCIENCES
Senior Lecturer
Helen Webb MHSc(Hons), BEd, TeachCert, PhD (in progress)
Lecturers
Peter Hartley AssocDipHthScVPSEB, GradDipEdMelb, Cert IV
Workplace Training & Assessment CAECA
Gerard McMahon DipT(Prim)SCVC, Cert IV Workplace Training
& Assessment STBV, DipHthSciOPTE, GradCertTertEdVicMelb
Sue Eastcott AdvDipParamedicSc, DipAppSc, (Ambulance
PreHospital Care), Certificate in Ambulance Studies, Cert IV Work
Place Training & Assessment
Clinical Co-ordinator
Sue Ringham
CHINESE MEDICINE
Senior Lecturers
Shelley Beer BAMonash,GradDipWomensHlthMelb,
GradDipChineseHerbalMedACOM, AdvCertClinClinicalStud
NanjingTCM, GradCertChineseMedPracBeijingCollegeTCM, PhD
(in examination)
Hong Xu BMedChina, PhDVicMelb
Damien Ryan BTheol, BPhilosStColSemSyd, DipAcupAcupColl
Syd, DipHerbMedDorothyHallCNM, MedTechSyd, PhDVicMelb
Kerry Watson DipAc(ACA), DNMN (SNMN), DRM(CNS),
OMD(CAC)
Lecturers
Peter Ferrigno BA, DipEdMonash, BSWLaT, DipAcACA,
GradDipChineseHerbalMedACOM, MAVicMelb
Barry Nester BSc, DipEdLaT, DipAcACA, GradAcOICS,
GDipCHMACOM, DipHomACH, PhDVicMelb
Sue Rodger-Withers BScMelb, DipAcACA,
DipChineseHerbalMedNanjingTCM, GradDipHomACH
GradDipChineseHerbalMedACOM, PhDMelb
Deyuan (David) Wang BMed (China), MHScVicMelb
COMPLEMENTARY & INTEGRATIVE MEDICINE UNIT
Shelley Beer BAMonash, GradDipWomensHlthMelb,
GradDipChineseHerbalMedACOM, AdvCertClinClinicalStud
NanjingTCM, GradCertChineseMedPracBeijingCollegeTCM
Vivienne Williams BHScVicMelb, GradDipHealthCounVicMelb
MHScVicMelb DipAc, CertOrientalMassage, CertHerbalMedAAC,
AdvDipTransRBNSW, CertAcuClinicInternBeijing, PhDCand
CLINICAL DERMAL THERAPIES
Lecturer
Frank Perri BScVicMelb, GradDip(Health Psychology)LaT,
PhD (in progress)
Personal Assistant to Head of School
Suzanne Brand
School Adminstrators
Tracey Hamilton-Scott
Makeleta Taunisila
SCHOOL OF MOLECULAR SCIENCES
Head of School
Associate Professor Stephen Bigger BAppSc, PhDMelb,
MRACI, C.Chem, MACS
Professors
John Orbell BSc, MSc, PhDAuck, FRACI, C.Chem, MACS, MSBIC
Nagendra Shah BVSc&AH(Hons)Ranchi, MScS.Dakota, PhDAlta,
AAIFST, MDIAA, MADSA, MIFT
Associate Professors
Mary Millikan DipAppChemRMIT, BScMonash, PhDLaT, MRACI,
MSCA, ARSC, AAIFST
Andrew Smallridge BSc(Hons), PhDMonash, MRACI, CChem
Grant Stanley BE(Chem), PhDMelb, MABA
Senior Lecturers
Swati Baindur-Hudson BScANU, BAppScUC, PhDEssex,
MASBMB, MAIMS, MABA
Vijay Mishra BScTNKVV, MScMysore, PhDAlberta, MAIFST
Lawrence Ngeh MScOtago, GradDipEdMonash, PhDVicMelb
Rohani Paimin BSc(Hons), PhDLaT
Lecturers
Domenic Caridi BAppScFIT, BSc(Hons), PhDLaT, MRACI, CChem
Alison Duncan BSAc(Hons)Aberdeen, PhD, CNAARGIT
Sarah Fraser BSc(Hons), PhDDundee
Joshua Johnson BSc(Hons), PhDVicMelb
Sandra McKechnie BSc(Hons), PhDVicMelb
Todor Vasiljevic BScFST, PhDAlberta, MAIFST, MIFT
Laboratory Managers
Dale Tomlinson BSc(Hons)
Technical Officers
Charmaine DiQuattro BSc(Hons)VicMelb
Stacey Lloyd BAppSc(Biotech)RMIT,
GradDipEdVicMelb,GradDip(FoodTech), MScVicMelb
Min Thi Nguyen BAppScFIT, CertBCEWMCOT
Joseph Pelle BScVicMelb, GradDip(FoodTech), MScVicMelb
Irawati Prasatya Ir(ITI)Indonesia, MScVicMelb
Michael Rogerson BSc(Hons), MASM
Administration Officer
Yildiz Djelal AdvCert(OffAdmin), DipBus(Admin)VicMelb
PACKAGING AND POLYMER RESEARCH UNIT
Manager
Associate Professor Kees Sonneveld MAgrScWageningen,
MAIP
Laboratory Manager
Robert Richmond BSMichState
Visting Academics
Professor Joseph Miltz BSc(ChemEng)Technion,
MSc(ChemEng)Technion, DScTechnion
Faculty Associates
See ‘Academic Staff’ under School of Molecular Sciences
Mervyn Minett CertMechEng, BEFIT
Vincent Rouillard BE(Dist)FIT, MengVicMelb, MSEE, MSEM
Associate Professor Michael Sek MEngSc, PhDPoznan, AIP
Administrative Officer
Vacant
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
16
SCHOOL OF NURSING AND MIDWIFERY
Head of School
Terence McCann RNDiv1, PhdNewc, MANewc, BA Open, UK
RMN, RGN, RCNT
Associate Professors
Valerie MacKinnon RN Div1, DipAppScComHealthNsgPreston,
BAppScAdvNsgEdPhillipIT, MEdMelb, FRCNA
Senior Lecturers
Chris Au RNDiv3, DNsg, CertEdLond, BACharlesSturt, EdSyd,
PhDMonash.
Patricia Burton RNDiv1, DipAppSc, BAppScPhillipIT, BSc,
MEdMelb, FRCNA
Jenny Cheung RNDiv1, Midwifery, DipNephro-urologicalNsg,
IntensCareCertUK, DipNsgEd, BAppScAdvNsgEdLincolnInst,
MEdStud, PhDMonash, FRCNA
Daniel Chew RNDiv1, ClinicalTeachCertUK, DipEdUK, BEd,
MEdLaT, PhDLaT
Marilyn Richardson-Tench RNDiv1, PhDMonash,
MEdStudMonash, BAppScAdvNsgLaT, RCNT, CORTM
Lecturers
Cally Berryman RNDiv1, SipCHNsg, BAppSc, MEd, PhDMelb
Gayelene Boardman RN Div3, GradDipPsychiatricNursingRMIT,
MastersMentalHealthNursingVicMelb
Mary Carolan
Lee Chiu RNDiv1, Midwifery, MRCNA, ONG(Hons),
BAppScAdvNsgPhillipIT, MNStudiesLaT, DipEdMelb
Joan Deegan RNDiv1, IDCert, BEd, GradDipEdStud, MEdMelb
Finbar Hopkins RNDiv1, Midwifery, BAppScE.Cowan,
GradDipWomen’sHealthMelb, MWomen's Studies
Mary Huynh RNDiv1, BAppScAdvNsgEdPhillipIT, MEdLaT
Gina Kruger RNDiv1, Certified Midwife (UK), GradDipClin Nurse
Prac&Mgt(AdvMid)RMIT, FPC,MN
Karen Lawrence RN Div1, BNsg, GradDip(Mid), GradDip(VET),
MHthSc(Nursing Ed)
Meng Lim RNDiv1, RSCN, BAFlin, BNsgSACAE, MNRMIT
Leonie Murphy RNDiv1, Midwifery, BALaT,
BAppScAdvNsgEdPhillipIT, MEdStudMonash, MRCNA
Geraldine Rebeiro RNDiv1, Midwifery, BAppScLaT,
BEdStudMelb, MEdStudMelb
Julie Watts RNDiv1, CertNeuroMedSurgNsg,
BAppScAdvNsgEdLincolnInst, GradDipHealthServMgtRMIT,
MBusRMIT
Clinical Co-ordinator
Elvira Brown RNDiv1, Midwifery, BAppScAdvNsgEdPhillipIT,
MRCNA
Assistant Clinical Co-ordinators
Angela Cole
Cora Smith
Laboratory Technicians
Maryanne Craker RN Div2
Glenda Iskov RN Div2
Personal Assistant to Head of School
Leanne Howatson CertBus (OfficeAdmin)VicMelb
Research Assistant to Head of School
Lucy Lu
School Administrator
Anna Matkowsky
Administrative Officer
Niluka Weragoda
SUSTAINABILITY GROUP
Professor
Paul Boon BSc(Hons)Syd, PhDGriffith
Professorial Associate
John Orbell BSc, MSc, PhDAuck, FRACI, CChem, MACS, MSBIC
Senior Lecturers
Trevor Burridge BSc(Hons), PhDMonash
Colin Hocking BSc(Hons)LaT, DipEdMelb, PhDLaT
Russell Swann FRMIT(Physics), BAppScRMIT, DipEdHawthorn,
BEd(Science)WASTC, MEnvScMonash, DipEdMelb, MAIP, MACEA,
PhD
Lecturer
Bronwen Scott BSc(Hons)Bristol, GradCertEdJCU, PhDJCU
Technical Officer
Heather Altimari AssocDipApplSci(LabTech), Cert IV
WorkplaceTraining, DipApplSci(BiolSci)
Administration Officer
Vacant
FOUNDATION STUDIES
Co-ordinator
Nicholas Athanasiou BSc(Chem)(Hons)VicMelb
17
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
COURSES OFFERED
The Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science offers the following
undergraduate courses:
• Certificate in Foundation Studies;
• Double Degree courses in;
− Engineering and Business E-Commerce;
− Engineering and Science;
− Engineering and Law;
− Engineering and Arts;
− Science and Business E-Commerce;
− Science and Law;
− Science and Arts;
− Science and Psychology.
CERTIFICATE IN FOUNDATION STUDIES
(ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE)
Course Code: JCFY
PHILOSOPHY AND AIMS OF THE COURSE
Many students are interested in science, health science, computing
and/or engineering but have reservations about some of the
fundamental study areas that define these disciplines. For various
reasons, study areas such as chemistry, physics and mathematics
are regarded as unapproachable.
To remedy this situation, the Faculty of Health, Engineering and
Science provides a year-long Foundation Studies program.
The Foundation Studies has been designed to:
• strengthen a student’s understanding of these ‘difficult’ study
areas;
• endeavour to develop a student’s confidence in these study
areas; and
• foster an intellectual vigour in tackling both further future tertiary
courses and areas of employment that are built upon these
study areas.
Upon successful completion of the Foundation Studies program
prerequisite subjects, students are guaranteed entry into courses
operated by the Engineering and Science areas and access to a
considerable number of courses run by the Health Science area
within the Faculty. Access to Double degree programs run by the
Faculty can also be accessed, however distinction marks across pre
requisite subjects is required to access such programs.
COURSE DESCRIPTION
In general, the Foundation Studies program aims to provide an
opportunity for students:
(i) who have not studied science and mathematics at Year 12
level;
(ii) who have studied basic science and mathematics at Year 12
level but did not achieve appropriate study scores to enable
them to satisfy the entrance requirements for courses in the
Faculty of Science, Engineering and Technology;
(iii) whose recent educational results have not been at the level of
which they are capable of performing;
(iv) who are returning to study after some years away from formal
education; or
(v) who wish to change direction in their education.
To make certain that students receive a concerted education that will
fulfill the entry requirements of the tertiary system whilst taking into
consideration the educational background of the students, the
majority of the foundation study areas are streamed. Different
streams can be undertaken for different subjects if required.
These streams; beginners, intermediate and advanced; offered by
the Foundation Studies program reflect and accommodate the broad
cross-section of the educational backgrounds of students.
STUDIES STREAMS
BEGINNERS STREAM
The beginners stream is designed for students that would like to
pursue a tertiary qualification in a science, computing or an
engineering discipline but:
• have had no prior contact with these disciplines; or
• have previously experienced learning difficulties in the study of
these disciplines.
The beginners stream is specifically designed to introduce students
to the fundamental principles that underpin the disciplines of science
and engineering; to provide students with the ability to recognise,
utilise and interpret these principles; to prepare students for their
further tertiary education and most importantly foster a process of
sustained learning and research.
Recognising the possible lack of confidence and/or trepidation
brought about by the unfamiliarity of these study areas, students
within this stream will be provided with extensive tuition in small
classes over extended semesters. The beginners stream will
commence in March and conclude in early February of the following
year. Upon successful completion of prerequisite subject areas,
students will gain guaranteed entry into one of the undergraduate
courses offered by the Faculty of Science, Engineering and
Technology.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
18
INTERMEDIATE STREAM
The intermediate stream is designed for students that would like to
pursue a tertiary qualification in a science, computing or an
engineering discipline but have not been successful in completing or
meeting the pass requirements of related subject areas previously
undertaken.
The intermediate level will run over two semesters, each of which
will run for 16 weeks and will commence in March and conclude in
December of the same year.
ADVANCED STREAM
Students enrolled into the advanced stream of a particular subject
will undertake an accelerated program. If all the topic areas within
the study area(s) over Semester One are successfully completed a
student may be eligible to enter a first-year undergraduate course or
first-year year undergraduate core subjects within the Faculty in
Semester Two.
CHOICE OF STREAM
Suitability of entry into any of these streams will be assessed upon
completion of an entrance test and an interview. Students that have
not previously attempted study areas that parallel those they wish to
undertake at foundation level may opt not to sit for the test and enter
the beginners stream.
Each stream will be timetabled so as to allow students upon
consultation with Foundation Studies staff to move into an alternate
stream over the duration of the course.
STUDY AREAS CHOICES
The following study areas are offered as part of Foundation Studies:
Biology, Chemistry, English Language and Communication Skills, IT,
Mathematics for Scientists, Mathematics for Engineers and Physics.
Students will generally enrol in four subject areas. Fewer subjects
may be undertaken. This will be determined by considering the
students previous academic record, the results of the grading tests
and via interview with the student. A choice of either a mathematics
for scientists or engineers typically must be undertaken by all
students.
COURSE DURATION
The course is year long course although transfer to other courses is
possible as a subject transfers following semester one. Semester
One is undertaken over 17 weeks and Semester Two over 16
weeks. Beginners students may require to undertake a further session
in early February of the following year for approximately seven
weeks.
COURSE LOCATION
All study areas will be taught at the University’s Footscray Park
campus
COURSE FEE
Students who fit under the Federal Government Guidelines of
disadvantage are HECS exempt with respect to the Foundation
Studies program.
APPLICATION PROCEDURES
Application to Foundation Studies is via direct application. Students
will need to fill out an undergraduate application form available
from Student Admissions, phone on (03) 9919 2286 or download
from the website www.vu.edu.au/admissions. Alternatively the form
can be accessed at www.vu.edu.au/foundationstudies.
Further information regarding the Foundation Studies program can
be obtained from the Faculty Office.
BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ELECTRONIC
COMMERCE/BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
Course Code: BBES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The combined course will provide students with a broad ranging
program of study and learning aimed at satisfying the academic
and professional requirements in both the appropriate field of
science and of business. The double degree course will equip
graduates to obtain employment in business and government, in
major scientific organizations and elsewhere. It was improve
learning by providing a fundamental framework for the application
of business and scientific concepts and ideas and their co-
integration which will ensure that students are capable of engaging
successfully in these professional areas in a commercial
environment.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over four years on a full-time basis or part-time
equivalent. All undergraduate degree subjects carry a value of 12
credit points. If undertaking Co-operative Education, additional
credit points is required for graduation.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course an applicant must have
successfully completed a course of study at year 12 level or
equivalent.
In addition to satisfying the entry requirements for Australian resident
students or demonstrating equivalence, overseas students must
provide evidence of proficiency in the English language:
• International English Language Testing System – overall band
score of 6–7 subject to individual profile; or
• Test of English as a Foreign Language – score of 550, plus a
Test of Written English – score of 5.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Subject to approval.
BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING/BACHELOR OF
BUSINESS ELECTRONIC COMMERCE
Course Code: EBEB
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The combined course will provide students with a broad ranging
program of study and learning aimed at satisfying the academic
and professional requirements in a specialisation in business
together with an appropriate field of engineering. The double
degree course will equip graduates to obtain employment in
business, government, and in major engineering organizations.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over five years on a full-time basis or part-time
equivalent. All undergraduate degree subjects carry a value of 12
credit points.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course an applicant must have
successfully completed a course of study at year 12 level or
equivalent.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
19
In addition to satisfying the entry requirements for Australian resident
students or demonstrating equivalence, overseas students must
provide evidence of proficiency in the English language:
• International English Language Testing System – overall band
score of 6–7 subject to individual profile; or
• Test of English as a Foreign Language – score of 550, plus a
Test of Written English – score of 5.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Subject to approval.
BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING/
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
Course Code: EBSE
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The combined Bachelor of Engineering/Bachelor of Science course
will provide students with a broad ranging program of study and
learning aimed at satisfying the academic and professional
requirements in both science and the appropriate field of
engineering. The double degree course will enable graduates to
obtain employment in business and government, in major
engineering organisations, private industry and elsewhere.
COURSE DURATION
Five years of full-time study.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Subject to approval.
BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING/
BACHELOR OF LAWS
Course Code: EBBL
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The combined Bachelor of Engineering/Bachelor of Laws course will
provide students with a broad ranging program of study and
learning aimed at satisfying the academic and professional
requirements in both law and the appropriate field of engineering.
The double degree course will equip graduates to obtain
employment in law, business and government, in major engineering
organisations, at the Bar and elsewhere.
COURSE DURATION
Six years of full-time study.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Subject to approval.
BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING/
BACHELOR OF ARTS
Course Code: EBEA
Campus: Footscray Park
COURSE DESCRIPTION
The double degree structure of the Bachelor of Engineering/
Bachelor of Arts integrates education, training and research. With
the increasing globalisation of industry, Australia’s close proximity
to Asia and the increasing reliance on technology and in particular
multimedia, there is need for professionally qualified engineers to be
offered the opportunity to be exposed to international studies and
develop more skills in the field of multimedia communications. The
course will give students access to a broad curriculum and to a
program, which transcends disciplinary boundaries.
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The combined Bachelor of Engineering/Bachelor of Arts course will
prepare professionally trained engineers to have a broader outlook
than just the purely technical skills of the engineering program;
enhance their professional engineering skills with LOTE and cultural
studies; and produce graduates capable of performing their
professional functions in culturally diverse settings.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over 5 years on a full-time basis or part-time
equivalent.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Subject to approval.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE/
BACHELOR OF LAWS
Course Code: BLBS
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The combined Bachelor of Science/Bachelor of Laws course will
provide students with a broad ranging program of study and
learning aimed at satisfying the academic and professional
requirements in both law and the appropriate field of science. The
double degree course will equip graduates to obtain employment in
law, business and government, in major scientific organisations, at
the Bar and elsewhere.
COURSE DURATION
Five years of full-time study.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Subject to approval.
BACHELOR OF ARTS/BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
Course Code: ABPS
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The combined Bachelor of Science/Bachelor of Arts course will
prepare professionally trained scientists to take their place in
industrial and government employment; enhance the professional
scientific skills with LOTE and cultural studies; and produce
graduates capable of performing their professional functions in a
culturally diverse setting.
COURSE DURATION
Four years of full-time study.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Subject to approval.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
20
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
21
SCHOOL OF ARCHITECTURAL, CIVIL
AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
COURSES OFFERED
The School of Architectural, Civil and Mechanical Engineering offers
undergraduate courses leading to the award of:
• Bachelor of Engineering in;
− Architectural Engineering;
− Building Engineering;
− Civil Engineering;
− Mechanical Engineering;
− Robotic Engineering;
• Bachelor of Technology;
− Building Surveying.
A degree with Honours program is offered concurrently with the
fourth year of the engineering degrees. Normally, students entering
the final year of a full-time Bachelor of Engineering program (or its
equivalent in part-time mode) will be offered honours candidacy if
they have achieved at least a credit average over year levels 1–3.
THE SCOPE OF ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING
The degree in Architectural Engineering is an exciting new
development involving studies in Architecture, advanced
environmental services and life safety system design and the
integration of Architecture and all engineered building systems.
The need for a degree in Architectural Engineering has arisen from
the increasing complexity of all building systems in the last two
decades, and an increased level of client demand for buildings and
building systems that better meet their needs.
At Victoria University, Architectural Engineering focuses on the
development of planning and design skills for engineered
environmental services and structural systems. The course blends
selected ‘creative’ Architecture skills into an Engineering degree
framework, so that graduates are better enabled to work closely and
in harmony with Architects in the design of buildings to delight both
clients and end users.
This choice reflects the world-wide trend and emergence of
professional Engineering societies whose role is to ensure that the
highest standards of design and construction of such engineered
systems are achieved. In Australia, both the Society for Building
Services Engineering (Institution of Engineers – Australia) and in
Victoria, defined professional engineering design roles within the
Victorian Building Control Act, are recent examples of this
development.
Architectural Engineering graduates will have strong technical and
communication skills, and a good understanding and appreciation
of Architectural design practice as well as the economic, and social
environment in which they will operate. The ongoing and increasing
need for building infrastructure development will ensure there will be
a significant demand both locally and overseas for graduates with
such highly specialised skills, founded on a broad yet integrated
building technology base.
Employment opportunities exist with private consulting firms,
contractors, and government agencies throughout Australia and
overseas. Exciting and flexible opportunities exist for Architectural
Engineering graduates to play a vital role in:
• the private sector including consulting, contracting, construction
and project management firms specialising in the design and
management of building environmental, structural and life
safety systems in the multi-billion dollar national and
international building industry;
• the public sector.
THE SCOPE OF BUILDING ENGINEERING
The degree in Building Engineering has been offered for 25 years
and whilst it covers the entire building process, from planning and
financial feasibility studies, to design of structures and services
systems, and site preparation and construction, it focuses on the
skills needed for project managing the planning and construction
process of buildings to achieve completion on time within budget.
Building engineers require multi-disciplinary training that including
building construction technology, construction and project
management, legal and economic processes, basic structures, and
thermo-fluid and electromagnetic systems. Building Engineering
graduates have strong technical and communication skills, and a
good understanding and appreciation of the environmental,
economic, social and legislative environment in which they must
operate.
The ongoing and increasing need for building infrastructure
development will ensure there will be a significant demand for
graduates with a broad yet integrated set of skills in this area, both
locally and overseas.
Employment opportunities exist with private firms and contractors,
government agencies and authorities throughout Australia and
overseas. Exciting and flexible opportunities exist for Building
Engineering graduates to play an important role in:
• the public and private sector (consulting, contracting,
construction and project management firms specialising in multi-
billion dollar national and international building industry);
• diverse areas such as urban planning; risk assessment and
management; and the operation of buildings.
THE SCOPE OF CIVIL ENGINEERING
Civil engineering is defined as the study, design, construction,
management, and maintenance of lasting community amenities and
infrastructure systems. These include all buildings from houses to
high-rise offices, roads, railways, waterways, reservoirs, sewers,
and all other facilities which are used to improve convenience and
quality of life for the present community and future generations.
There is widespread community concern about conservation issues
and environmental degradation at local, national and global levels.
At the same time, a rapidly increasing world population is imposing
ever-increasing demands on the provision of infrastructure to satisfy
basic and more advanced human needs. Such demands are
particularly illustrated by the rapid urban growth occurring in many
areas, with associated requirements for appropriate types of
building, energy, transportation, water supply and waste
management systems, along with other major community facilities.
These conflicting trends have led to an appreciation by many
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
22
members of the world community that the need for development is
substantial, but at the same time such development must be
sustainable.
Civil Engineering graduates should have strong technical and
communication skills, and a good understanding and appreciation
of the environmental, economic, social and political environment in
which they must operate.
The increasing need for infrastructure provision allied with
substantial forms of development should ensure there will be a
significant demand for graduates with a truly integrated set of skills
in these areas, both on the local scene and overseas.
Employment opportunities exist with private consulting firms and
contractors, government agencies and authorities in Australia and
overseas.
THE SCOPE OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Engineering is the profession in which knowledge of mathematical
and natural sciences is applied to develop technologies to
economically exploit the natural resources for the benefit of
humankind. Mechanical engineering, which began to develop as a
distinctive area of engineering practice in the early part of last
century, has now developed into an extremely diverse and complex
profession.
Mechanical engineers find employment in government and private
enterprise in such wide-spread areas as manufacturing, design of
products and machines such as automotive industry, automatic
control of machines and processes, heating and air conditioning
systems, machine and condition monitoring, hydraulic and
pneumatic systems, computer applications – including finite element
analysis, computer-aided design and computational fluid dynamics
and research and development in a wide range of fields.
This degree course is designed to provide the broad education
required for the mechanical engineer’s professional career. A broad
engineering education leaves engineers better prepared to
communicate with each other, to avoid technological obsolescence
and to learn new skills as technology advances.
The Bachelor of Engineering in Mechanical Engineering program
offered by the School is suitable for men and women and
emphasises achievement across the mechanical engineering
disciplines in concert with problem solving, design, engineering
applications, innovation, management of resources and professional
responsibility.
In addition to these basic studies, the School of Architectural, Civil
and Mechanical Engineering is concerned with bridging the gap
between science and basic knowledge on the one hand, and the
design and development of useful devices and processes on the
other. This is the art of engineering and to teach this art is the
primary object of laboratory practice, industrial projects and
engineering design. Laboratory practice, which takes many forms, is
intended to show how the experimental method is used in the
solution of engineering problems. Design experience includes
devising means to perform specified tasks such as the design of a
device or the synthesis of a system made up of parts having known
characteristics.
THE SCOPE OF ROBOTIC ENGINEERING
Robotic Engineering provides an interface technology that is
concerned with mechanisms, electronics, control systems and
computer design and adaptation. It combines selected studies in
mechanical and electrical engineering.
Robotic engineers are at the forefront of major advances and
improvements in engineering systems in the 21st century and the
opportunities for innovative robotic engineers in industry and
research is rapidly expanding.
The Robotic Engineering course is designed to enable students to
pursue studies orientated towards design and application of
mechanisms, computer adaptation and simulation, electronic
control, instrumentation and automation in industry and research.
The course integrates relevant subjects in engineering and
computing to appeal to incoming good quality students with
mechanical, electronic and computer interests along with the
essential background in mathematics and physics.
This course provides the broad based knowledge required of the
modern engineer to be technically competent in design, problem
solving and analysis while developing important communication and
management skills.
Fundamental studies in engineering mechanics, electrical
engineering, mathematics, design materials and computing are
matched with specialist subject in robotics, mechatronics, control
systems and computer simulation in higher years. Significant
emphasis is placed on project and laboratory activities and industry
exposure throughout the course.
THE SCOPE OF BUILDING SURVEYING
Graduates of the Bachelor of Technology in Building Surveying
course at Victoria University will have gained valuable qualifications
for employment within the building and construction industry where,
as building practitioners or potential building practitioners, they are
likely to be involved in the administration of acts, regulations, codes
and standards relevant to the design, construction, occupation and
maintenance of a wide range of buildings used for residential,
office, retail, storage, industrial, public, etc purposes.
Basic functions that Building Surveyors are authorized (by State
legislation) to perform include the issuing of building permits, the
carrying out of inspections of buildings and building work and the
issuing of occupancy permits and temporary approvals. Building
Surveyors must be sufficiently knowledgeable and experienced to
competently perform the range of professional duties that they are
appointed to carry out.
COMPUTING FACILITIES
The School gives high priority to the provision of quality facilities for
computing-based instruction and research. The University’s centrally
located computing facilities are complemented by special dedicated
facilities within the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science and
the School of Architectural, Civil and Mechanical Engineering.
The School’s facilities include four rooms with some 110 Pentium
PC’s all connected to a central file server and printing facilities. In
addition, most of the School’s laboratories contain high-performance
computing workstations which, when not in use for experiments, are
accessible to students enrolled in the School of Architectural, Civil
and Mechanical Engineering. These computing facilities provide an
extensive range of modern software for engineering applications
such as Computer Aided Design, Finite Element Analysis, Solid and
Surface Modelling, Computational Fluid Dynamics, Digital
Signalling Processing, Statistical Analysis, Control System Design
and Simulation, CivilCAD, EPANET2, MDSolids, Camel, Primavera,
Strand7, Space GASS, Statics and Kinematics Analysis and
Simulation. In addition, major programming languages,
spreadsheets and word processing software are accessible from all
workstations. Access to e-mail, AARNET and the Internet (limited)
are also provided.
The School’s multimedia production studio, containing two high-
performance PCs connected to colour printers, scanners, audio and
video interface devices and CD writers are available to
undergraduate and postgraduate students enrolled at the School.
The School’s computing facilities are managed by a full-time
computer engineer.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
23
ARTICULATION PATHWAYS
Special provision is made for admission into engineering degree
courses on the basis of good results for an Associate Diploma in an
appropriate field of study. Interested persons should refer to the
section on Articulation and Credit Transfer at the back of this book.
Transfer between degree courses with credit for subjects already
passed is a possibility.
ACADEMIC PROGRESSION GUIDELINES AND UNSATISFACTORY
PROGRESS
Each undergraduate course is specified as a unique set of course
subjects. The sequence in which these course subjects are normally
studied is specified, firstly, by grouping them in course years and
secondly, by specifying prerequisites and/or co-requisites for some
subjects.
Normally all of the course subjects in a particular course year must
be completed and all prerequisite/co-requisite requirements satisfied
before enrolment will be permitted in any subject in a subsequent
course year. Enrolment in a group of subjects spanning more than
two course years is not permitted.
In order to satisfy the academic requirements for a course award, all
course subjects must be completed. Such completion may be
obtained by:
• being granted exemption in either individual subjects or in
course years; and/or
• achieving a grade of P (or higher) in the assessment of each
subject; and/or
• being granted compensation in course years.
A stage grading of ‘Year Completed by Compensation’ may be
granted if a student:
• has been given final grades in all subjects in the course year;
and
• has passed subjects equivalent to more than 80 per cent of total
required semester hours for that course year with no assessment
at less then N1 grade; and
• has achieved an hour-weighted average mark of at least 50 per
cent for all subjects in the year.
A grading of ‘Year Completed by Compensation’ recognises an
acceptable overall result but does not constitute a pass in any
individual failed subject.
Students who do not satisfy the requirements for a ‘Year Completed
by Compensation’ must repeat all failed subjects of that year (or
their equivalents) at the earliest opportunity.
Normally, gradings of ‘Year Completed by Compensation’ will not
be granted in consecutive years of a course.
Normal progress through a course requires a student to complete
any defined course year within one year of equivalent full-time
enrolment.
Any of the following may be considered to constitute unsatisfactory
progress by a student:
(i) failure in any subject or unit for the third time.
(ii) failure in any subject or unit at n2 level for the second time.
(iii) failure in 50 per cent or more of their assessed enrolment load
in any semester or calendar year of study;
(iv) failure to complete any two consecutive course years within
three years of equivalent full-time enrolment,
(v) failure to complete the course within any maximum period
defined by University Statute.
(vi) failure to meet a conditional enrolment agreement.
As otherwise defined in the University Statute and subject to being
invited to show cause, a student making unsatisfactory progress will
normally be recommended for exclusion from the course.
EXEMPTIONS
Claims by students for exemptions from subjects of any course on
grounds of special experience or having passed equivalent subjects
at Victoria University, other universities or colleges in Australia or
overseas, should be submitted on the proper form to the Faculty
Office accompanied by proof of the relevant qualifications or
experience. Forms are available from the School or Faculty Office.
Exemption approval is given by notification in writing.
STUDY LOAD
PART-TIME STUDY
Part-time study can be approved at any stage of a course since
progress is by individual subjects rather than by years. Part-time
study involves attending normal day classes. It is unrealistic to
expect to complete a degree course entirely on a part-time basis.
FULL-TIME STUDY
Full-time study of the degree courses is over a four-year period, and
involves from 19 hours of Class Contact per week in first year and
18 lectures per week in subsequent years.
SINGLE SUBJECT ENROLMENT
Suitably qualified persons may be permitted to enrol for single
subjects as a part of their further education but passes in such
subjects may not be counted should the students study later for a
degree or diploma.
SUPPLEMENTARY ASSESSMENT
Supplementary assessment is not normally available in any subject
except at the discretion of the Head of School in exceptional
circumstances.
ENROLMENT AMENDMENT
Enrolment may be changed with agreement by the examiner and
Course Co-ordinator. Application must be made on the appropriate
form. A change for any semester is without penalty up until the
census dates of March 31 and August 31 (refer to published dates).
During the second month a late enrolment amendment fee becomes
payable and HECS liability continues for subjects discontinued.
Thereafter enrolment changes are not normally approved.
ASSIGNMENTS AND LABORATORY REPORTS
During the semester a lecturer may require students to complete
certain assignments and laboratory reports, excursions (and reports
of these), projects, library readings, etc. These are an integral part
of the course and must be satisfactorily completed by the due date.
If, for any legitimate reason a student believes they will be unable to
complete the assignment by the due date, they should obtain prior
approval for an extension of time from the lecturer, who may:
(a) grant an extension of time, with or without mark penalty, or
(b) refuse the request.
In general, 80 per cent of assignment/laboratory work must be
completed satisfactorily before admission to a final examination (if
such is required) or for a pass in the subject (if this is the method of
assessment). Each student must maintain a satisfactory record of
attendance at lectures, tutorials, laboratory sessions, fieldwork
exercises, drawing classes and design sessions.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
24
SPECIAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
Students must buy the drawing instruments specified for engineering
drawing. These will also be required in surveying and other
subjects. A clipboard, heavy boots and waterproof clothing are
required for excursions or surveying field work. Breakages of
University equipment due to misuse must be paid for by students.
COMPUTERS
University and Department computer facilities are provided for use
by students during normal working hours and in extended hours
subject to demand. Extensive relevant software is available.
ELECTRONIC CALCULATORS
Students must have a scientific calculator. Electronic calculators are
used in tutorials, laboratory or fieldwork classes and in
examinations at the discretion of the subject lecturer. Guidelines on
the use of electronic calculators and other electronic storage devices
in examinations are provided in individual subject outlines
distributed to students within the first two weeks of semester and
included on final examination papers.
Electronic calculators and other electronic storage devices will not
be permitted where the above provisions have not been made.
BORROWING OF EQUIPMENT
Students are not permitted to borrow University equipment for use
off-Campus except for survey fieldwork and similar authorised
purposes, in which case students must sign a loan form and assume
full responsibility for the care of the equipment.
FILMS AND EXCURSIONS
Where films or slides are shown as part of a lecture series, these
should be attended by all students of the subject since the material
covered cannot be presented in notes or textbooks and is
examinable. Similarly, excursions outside the University are essential
in bringing students into contact with aspects of professional
practice. These are part of the course and must be attended. Cost of
transport or excursions is normally paid by students as part of the
cost of the course.
MENTORING OF STUDENTS BY STAFF
A staff member to whom each student should refer any problem
likely to affect their progress has been assigned to each course year.
Advisers may be changed only by request of the student or the
adviser to the Head of School. Any problem concerning a service
subject administered by another department should be referred to
the Course Co-ordinator.
OFFICIAL NOTICES
Official notices will be posted on the notice board near the School
Office. Students should view this frequently.
SUGGESTIONS FOR IMPROVEMENT
Student Liaison Committees are a normal forum for students to
express their concerns through student representatives.
Complaints and suggestions for improvement may also be made in
writing at any time to the Head of School or may be placed in the
suggestion box in the library.
PROFESSIONAL SOCIETIES
Students are encouraged to join the Institution of Engineers,
Australia and, where appropriate, The Australian Institute of
Building for a nominal fee.
BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN
ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING
Course Code: EBAE
CRICOS No: 040973D
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course is designed to develop vocational skills for the
engineering planning, design, construction, maintenance and
management of building environmental and life safety systems.
The basic objectives of the course are to produce graduates who:
• have a solid foundation of scientific, engineering and project
management knowledge capped by specific theoretical and
practical exposure to the design of building environmental and
life safety systems;
• have the ability to communicate effectively, both orally and in
writing, and work well in a team situation;
• have an understanding of community need for building
infrastructure in the context of societal aspirations and
expectations;
• are motivated to continually improve their knowledge base; and
• are immediately productive upon completion of the course and
are thus attractive to prospective employers.
COURSE PHILOSOPHY
The first two years of the degree program involves engineering
fundamentals to provide a solid foundation for the applied
engineering subjects in the following years of the course. Studies in
architecture design practices and architectural history are developed
in second and third year. These fundamentals provide students with
the basis of understanding all developments in the profession of
Architectural Engineering and Engineering in general as technology
continually changes and the profession undergoes continual
adjustment.
The applied engineering subjects building structures, building
environmental and life safety systems, and building project
management are introduced. In the final two years of the program,
students undertake a major in either environmental systems design or
structural systems design. An optional integrated 12 weeks industry
placement period is available in Architectural Engineering at the
end of the third year of the course in a ‘summer semester’ subject.
Architectural Engineering graduates will have enhanced skills for
careers in:
• advanced environmental services system design;
• building renovation and refurbishment;
• building structures design;
• computer aided design and drawing;
• construction planning, management and project supervision;
• cost estimating and project feasibility;
• building energy audits and conservation studies;
• engineering consultation and investigations;
• facilities management and programming;
• interior lighting design;
• risk assessment for building system performance;
• support for preservation Architecture; and
• simulation of building environmental system performance.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
25
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
The Bachelor of Engineering in Architectural Engineering will be
submitted for recognition by the Building Practitioners Board and
Building Control Commission in Victoria. This submission is to meet
the minimum academic qualification for registration as a
Mechanical or Electrical Engineer, or as a Civil Engineer (Structures)
as defined by the responsibilities of these categories of ‘Engineer’ in
the Victorian Building Control Act. The degree satisfies the
requirements for accreditation by The Institution of Engineers,
Australia and will be submitted for accreditation by the Australian
Institute of Building.
OVERSEAS EXCHANGE PROGRAM
Each year two students from Victoria University who are enrolled in
either Architectural or Building Engineering, are able to undertake
studies with full credit for one semester in the third year of the
Architectural Engineering degree program at the University of
Nebraska – Omaha (UNO), U.S.A.
University scholarships are available to assist students in undertaking
this exchange. The program at UNO is one of the newest and best
resourced Architectural Engineering degrees in the U.S.A., having
commenced in 1999 within new propose built buildings and
facilities.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS AND PREREQUISITES
The prerequisite subjects for admission into the first year of the
course are based on entry at post Year 12, Victorian Certificate of
Education, or equivalent level, and are as follows:
PREREQUISITES UNITS 3 AND 4
Mathematical Methods or Specialist Mathematics, with a study score
of at least 22 in English
MIDDLE BAND SELECTION
Re-ranking based on study scores in the full range of year 12
student, with particular attention to pre-requisite studies and other
science based studies.
ADMISSION AT OTHER LEVELS
Articulation from Associate Diploma or Diploma courses in Building
Construction and Design or Engineering. Credit will be given to
subjects passed to a sufficient level of competence.
Persons transferring from other courses or having overseas or other
entrance qualifications of at least equivalent standard to those listed
above, should apply for admission in the normal manner.
Full-fee paying international students must have qualifications which
are equivalent to those listed above. In addition, they must provide
evidence of proficiency in the English language:
• IELTS – an overall band score of 6+, subject to individual
profile; or
• TOEFL – a score of 550+, and a Test of Written English score
of 5+.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over four years on a full-time basis of 22
contact hours per week. Part-time study may be approved. The
course however cannot be completed solely on a part-time basis.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Engineering subject codes commence with ‘V’.
Science subject codes commence with ‘R’.
Credit Semester
Points Hours
Year 1
Semester One
REP1001 Engineering Physics 1A 12 60
RMA1001 Engineering Mathematics 1A 12 60
VAN1011 Experimentation & Computing 12 60
VAN1051 Engineering Profession 12 60
Total 48 240
Semester Two
REP1003 Engineering Physics 1C 12 60
RMA1002 Engineering Mathematics 1B 12 60
VAN1022 Solid Mechanics 1 12 60
VAN1032 Introduction to Design 12 60
Total 48 240
Year 2
Semester One
VAA2031 Architectural History & Design 12 60
VAN2021 Solid Mechanics 2 12 60
VAN2041 Thermofluids 12 60
VAN2061 Engineering Materials 12 60
Total 48 240
Semester Two
VAA2002 Electrical Power Systems 1 12 60
VAC2022 Building Materials & Construction 12 60
VAC2042 Hydraulics 12 60
VAN2032 Engineering Design 12 60
Total 48 240
SERVICES STREAM
Year 3
Semester One
VAA3001 Electrical Power Systems 2 12 60
VAA3031 Environmentally Sustainable Design 1 12 60
VAA3071 HVAC Systems 1 12 60
VAA3081 Building Construction and Legislation 1 12 60
Total 48 240
Semester Two
VAN3052 Engineering Management 12 60
VAA3032 Environmentally Sustainable Design 2 12 60
VAA3042 Hydraulic Services Systems 12 60
VAA3072 HVAC Systems 2 12 60
Total 48 240
STRUCTURES STREAM
Year 3
Semester One
VAA3031 Environmentally Sustainable Design 1 12 60
VAA3081 Building Construction and Legislation 1 12 60
VAC3021 Structural Analysis 12 60
VAC3061 Geomechanics 12 60
Total 48 240
Semester Two
VAA3042 Hydraulic Services Systems 12 60
VAC3062 Geotechnical Engineering 12 60
VAC3092 Structural Design 12 60
VAN3052 Engineering Management 12 60
Total 48 240
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
26
SERVICES STREAM
Year 4
Semester One
VAA4001 Architectural Lighting & Communications
Systems 12 60
VAA4051 Building Quantities and Costs 6 36
VAA4071 HVAC Systems 3 6 36
VAN4011 Engineering Project 1 12 48
VAN4051 Engineering Project Management 12 60
Total 48 240
Semester Two
VAA4032 Environmentally Sustainable Design 3 12 60
VAA4042 Building Fire Safety Systems 12 60
VAA4082 Building Construction and Legislation 2 6 36
VAA4092 Building Systems Design and Construction 6 36
VAN4012 Engineering Project 2 12 48
Total 48 240
STRUCTURES STREAM
Year 4
Semester One
VAA4051 Building Quantities and Costs 6 36
VAC4021 Structural Engineering Analysis Design 1 12 60
VAN4011 Engineering Project 1 12 48
VAN4051 Engineering Project Management 12 60
VAA4091 Structural Dynamics 6 36
Total 48 240
Semester Two
VAA4042 Building Fire Safety Systems 12 60
VAA4082 Building Construction and Legislation 2 6 36
VAA4092 Building Systems Design and Construction 6 36
VAC4022 Structural Engineering Analysis & Design 2 12 60
VAN4012 Engineering Project 2 12 48
Total 48 240
ASSESSMENT
Assessment in subjects is designed to monitor a student’s progress
and achievements as well as contribute to and enhance their
learning. Normally a prescribed range of assessment methods is
employed in any subject.
Assessment is by a combination of written assignments, tests,
laboratory work and examinations.
Supplementary assessment is not normally available in any subject
except at the discretion of the Head of School in exceptional
circumstances.
Special Consideration in assessment may be granted on the grounds
defined by the University Statutes.
Guidelines on the use of electronic calculators and other electronic
storage devices in examinations are provided in individual subject
outlines distributed to students within the first two weeks of semester
and included on final examination papers.
Electronic calculators and other electronic storage devices will not
be permitted where the above provisions have not been made.
DEGREE WITH HONOURS
A Degree with Honours Program is offered concurrently with the
fourth year of the ordinary Bachelor of Engineering program.
Normally, students entering the final year of a full-time Bachelor of
Engineering program (or its equivalent in part-time mode), will be
offered honours candidacy, if they have achieved a minimum hour
weighted average of 60 per cent over year levels 1 to 3, have not
repeated a subject throughout levels 1 to 3 and have not been
granted more than one year completion by compensation
throughout the duration of the course. Fourth year honours degree
gradings will be determined by the relevant Examiners Board on the
basis of the hour weighted average for year level 4.
INDUSTRIAL EXPERIENCE
Students are required to undertake a 12 week industrial work
experience period during their course. At the end of third year,
students will have to undertake a 12 week (minimum) integrated
industry placement program. It is intended that this program will
meet the 12 week industrial work experience requirements imposed
upon all accredited Engineering degree courses by Engineers
Australia.
BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN BUILDING
ENGINEERING
Course Code: EBCB
CRICOS No: 002858M
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course is designed to develop vocational skills for the
engineering planning, design, construction, maintenance and
management of buildings and building services systems.
The basic objectives of the course are to produce graduates who:
• have a solid foundation of scientific, engineering and project
management knowledge capped by specific theoretical and
practical exposure to either the design of building structures or
building services systems;
• have the ability to communicate effectively, both orally in
writing, and work well in a team situation;
• have an understanding of community need for building
infrastructure in the context of societal aspirations and
expectations;
• are motivated to continually improve their knowledge base; and
• are immediately productive upon completion of the course and
are thus attractive to prospective employers.
The course recognises societal needs for professional Engineers who
have sound technical knowledge and good communication skills
and capable of providing appropriate building infrastructure that is
affordable, safe and comfortable to live and work within. The course
is founded on a broad base of science and engineering
fundamentals in the first and second year, with emphasis then given
in the third and fourth years to applied discipline-specific topics,
design and project work. The three study areas commence in the
second and third years of the course and are building structures,
building services and building construction and project
management. In the final year, the focus for the course becomes
planning and project management of the building construction
process.
Strong emphasis is given to professionalism, ethics and community
responsibility. Local examples of building projects provide
experiential learning through site visits together with teaching input
from practicing Engineers and other professionals in industry. These
provide valuable ‘real-world’ case studies and are a motivational
asset to the course.
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
The degree satisfies the requirements for accreditation by Engineers
Australia and will be submitted for accreditation by the Australian
Institute of Building.
OVERSEAS EXCHANGE PROGRAM
Each year two students from Victoria University who are enrolled in
either Architectural or Building Engineering, are able to undertake
studies with full credit for one semester in the third year of the
Architectural Engineering degree program at the University of
Nebraska–Omaha (UNO), U.S.A.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
27
University scholarships are available to assist students in undertaking
this exchange. The program at UNO is one of the newest and best
resourced Architectural Engineering degrees in the U.S.A., having
commenced in 1999 within new purpose-built buildings and
facilities.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS AND PREREQUISITES
The prerequisite subjects for admission into the first year of the
course are based on entry at post Year 12, Victorian Certificate of
Education, or equivalent level, and are as follows:
PREREQUISITES UNITS 3 AND 4
Mathematical Methods or Specialist Mathematics, with a study score
of at least 22 in English.
MIDDLE BAND SELECTION
Re-ranking based on study scores in the full range of year 12
student, with particular attention to pre-requisite studies and other
science based studies.
ADMISSION AT OTHER LEVELS
Persons transferring from other courses or having overseas or at
least equivalent standard to those listed above, should apply for
admission in the normal manner.
Full-fee paying international students must have qualifications which
are equivalent to those listed above. In addition, they must provide
evidence of proficiency in the English language:
• IELTS – an overall band score of 6+, subject to individual
profile; or
• TOEFL – a score of 550+, and a Test of Written English score
of 5+.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over four years on a full-time basis. Part-time
study may be approved. However, the course cannot be completed
solely on a part-time basis. Students must complete 384 credit
points.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Engineering subject codes commence with ‘V’.
Science subject codes commence with ‘R’.
Credit Semester
Points Hours
Year 1
Semester One
REP1001 Engineering Physics 1A 12 60
RMA1001 Engineering Mathematics 1A 12 60
VAN1011 Experimentation & Computing 12 60
VAN1051 Engineering Profession 12 60
Total 48 240
Semester Two
REP1003 Engineering Physics 1C 12 60
RMA1002 Engineering Mathematics 1B 12 60
VAN1022 Solid Mechanics 1 12 60
VAN1032 Introduction to Design 12 60
Total 48 240
Year 2
Semester One
VAA2031 Architectural History & Design 12 60
VAN2021 Solid Mechanics 2 12 60
VAN2041 Thermofluids 12 60
VAN2061 Engineering Materials 12 60
Total 48 240
Semester Two
VAA2002 Electrical Power Systems 1 12 60
VAC2042 Hydraulics 12 60
VAC2022 Building Materials & Construction 12 60
VAN2032 Engineering Design 12 60
Total 48 240
SERVICES STREAM
Year 3
Semester One
VAA3001 Electrical Power Systems 2 12 60
VAA3031 Environmentally Sustainable Design 1 12 60
VAA3071 HVAC Systems 1 12 60
VAA3081 Building Construction and Legislation 1 12 60
Total 48 240
Semester Two
VAN3052 Engineering Management 12 60
VAA3042 Hydraulic Services Systems 12 60
VAA3032 Environmentally Sustainable Design 2 12 60
VAA3072 HVAC Systems 2 12 60
Total 48 240
STRUCTURES STREAM
Year 3
Semester One
VAA3081 Building Construction and Legislation 1 12 60
VAC3021 Structural Analysis 12 60
VAA3031 Environmentally Sustainable Design 1 12 60
VAC3061 Geomechanics 12 60
Total 48 240
Semester Two
VAA3042 Hydraulic Services Systems 12 60
VAC3062 Geotechnical Engineering 12 60
VAC3092 Structural Design 12 60
VAN3052 Engineering Management 12 60
Total 48 240
SERVICES STREAM
Year 4
Semester One
VAA4051 Building Quantities and Costs 6 36
VAA4071 HVAC Systems 3 6 36
VAN4051 Engineering Project Management # 12 60
Or #
ECP5726 Project Procurement Management # 12 60
ECP5705 Project Management & Information
Technology 12 60
VAN4011 Engineering Project 1 12 48
Total 48 240
Semester Two
VAA4082 Building Construction and Legislation 2 6 36
VAA4092 Building Systems Design and Construction 6 36
ECP5716 Project Development Analysis 12 60
ECP5736 Facility Life Cycle Costing 12 60
VAN4012 Engineering Project 2 12 48
Total 48 240
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
28
STRUCTURES STREAM
Year 4
Semester One
VAA4051 Building Quantities and Costs 6 36
ECP5726 Project Procurement Management # 12 60
ECP5705 Project Management &
Information Technology 12 60
VAC4091 Structural Engineering Design 1 6 36
VAN4011 Engineering Project 1 12 48
or
VAN4051 Engineering Project Management 12 60
Total 48 240
Semester Two
VAA4082 Building Construction and Legislation 2 6 36
VAA4092 Building Systems Design and Construction 6 36
ECP5716 Project Development Analysis 12 60
ECP5736 Facility Life Cycle Costing 12 60
VAN4012 Engineering Project 2 12 48
Total 48 240
ASSESSMENT
Assessment in subjects is designed to monitor a student’s progress
and achievements as well as contribute to and enhance their
learning. Normally a prescribed range of assessment methods is
employed in any subject.
Assessment is by a combination of written assignments, tests,
laboratory work and examinations.
Supplementary assessment is not normally available in any subject
except at the discretion of the Head of School in exceptional
circumstances.
Special Consideration in assessment may be granted on the grounds
defined by the University Statutes.
Guidelines on the use of electronic calculators and other electronic
storage devices in examinations are provided in individual subject
outlines distributed to students within the first two weeks of semester
and included on final examination papers.
Electronic calculators and other electronic storage devices will not
be permitted where the above provisions have not been made.
DEGREE WITH HONOURS
A Degree with Honours Program is offered concurrently with the
fourth year of the ordinary Bachelor of Engineering program.
Normally, students entering the final year of a full-time Bachelor of
Engineering program (or its equivalent in part-time mode), will be
offered honours candidacy, if they have achieved a minimum hour
weighted average of 60 per cent over year levels 1 to 3, have not
repeated a subject through levels 1 to 3 and have not been granted
more than one year completion by compensation throughout the
duration of the course. Fourth year honours degree gradings will be
determined by the relevant Examiners Board on the basis of the hour
weighted average for year level 4.
INDUSTRIAL EXPERIENCE
Students are required to undertake a 12 week industrial work
experience period during their course. At the end of third year,
students will have an option to undertake a 12 week (minimum)
integrated industry placement program. It is intended that this
program will meet the 12 week industrial work experience
requirements imposed upon all accredited Engineering degree
courses by Engineers Australia.
BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN CIVIL
ENGINEERING
Course Code: EBCC
CRICOS No: 002859K
Civil Engineering is a broad-based discipline involving the planning,
design, construction and management of a wide range of essential
community infrastructure including, commercial and industrial
buildings, water supply and wastewater systems, irrigation,
drainage and flood protection systems, bridges, roads, highways
and transportation systems, and port harbour and airport facilities.
The course philosophy is very much based on a recognition of
society’s need for well-rounded engineers who not only have sound
technical and communication skills but also a good understanding of
the environmental, economic, social and political environment in
which they must operate.
The course is founded on a solid base of science and engineering
fundamentals in the first two years, with emphasis then being given
in years three and four to applied discipline-specific topics, design
and project work. Substantial emphasis is given in a range of
subjects to professionalism, ethics and community responsibility,
team assignments, broad problem solving and communication skills,
and the concepts of sustainability and sustainable engineering
practices. A focus on local engineering examples, experiential
learning and site visits, together with significant input from external
industry-based lecturers, provides students with exposure to real
world problems and is considered a motivational cornerstone of the
course.
There are two major streams in structural and water engineering
running through the course, complemented by minor streams in
geomechanics and transportation engineering. Environmental and
management issues are covered in specific subjects but also more
broadly by integration into a range of other subjects throughout the
course. Subject streams are generally sequential within a well-
defined structure. It is envisaged that this structure may be modified
somewhat in the future with a view to further motivating students by
allowing them a greater degree of flexibility and specialisation,
once a firm foundation has been established in the early years of the
course. The incorporation of more flexibility should also allow
students to remedy any perceived deficiencies in the more basic
communication and technical skills.
A study abroad exchange program is under investigation with the
Department of Civil Engineering at the University of Nebraska at
Omaha, Nebraska, USA.
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course is designed to develop skills for the application of
engineering principles of planning, design, construction and
management of buildings, roads, water supply and all other major
community amenities.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS AND PREREQUISITES
The prerequisite subjects for admission into the first year of the
course are based on entry at post Year 12, Victorian Certificate of
Education, or equivalent level, and are as follows.
PREREQUISITES UNITS 3 AND 4
Mathematical Methods or Specialist Mathematics, with a study score
of at least 22 in English
MIDDLE BAND SELECTION
Re-ranking based on study scores in the full range of year 12
student, with particular attention to pre-requisite studies and other
science based studies.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
29
ADMISSION AT OTHER LEVELS
Persons transferring from other courses or having overseas or other
entrance qualifications of at least equivalent standard to those listed
above, should apply for admission in the normal manner. A
preliminary interview with the Head of School concerned is
advisable for such applicants.
Full-fee paying international students must have qualifications which
are equivalent to those listed above. In addition, they must provide
evidence of proficiency in the English language:
• IELTS – an overall band score of 6+, subject to individual
profile, or
• TOEFL – a score of 550+, and a Test of Written English (TWE)
score of 5+.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over four years on a full-time basis. Part-time
study may be approved. However the course cannot be completed
solely on a part-time basis. Students must complete 384 credit
points.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Engineering subject codes commence with ‘V’.
Science subject codes commence with ‘R’.
Credit Semester
Points Hours
Year 1
Semester One
REP1001 Engineering Physics 1A 12 60
RMA1001 Engineering Mathematics 1A 12 60
VAN1011 Experimentation & Computing 12 60
VAN1051 Engineering Profession 12 60
Total 48 240
Semester Two
REP1003 Engineering Physics 1C 12 60
RMA1002 Engineering Mathematics 1B 12 60
VAN1022 Solid Mechanics 1 12 60
VAN1032 Introduction to Design 12 60
Total 48 240
Year 2
Semester One
VAC2071 Surveying 12 60
VAN2021 Solid Mechanics 2 12 60
VAN2041 Thermofluids 12 60
VAN2061 Engineering Materials 12 60
Total 48 240
Year 2
Semester Two
VAC2022 Building Materials and Construction 12 60
VAC2042 Hydraulics 12 60
VAC2072 Highway Engineering 12 60
VAN2032 Engineering Design 12 60
Total 48 240
Year 3
Semester One
VAC3021 Structural Analysis 12 60
VAC3031 Civil Engineering Design 1 12 60
VAC3041 Hydrology & Water Resources 12 60
VAC3061 Geomechanics 12 60
Total 48 240
Year 3
Semester Two
VAC3042 Hydraulic Engineering 12 60
VAC3062 Geotechnical Engineering 12 60
VAC3092 Structural Design 12 60
VAN3052 Engineering Management 12 60
Total 48 240
Year 4
Semester One
VAC4071 Transportation Engineering 6 36
VAC4081 Environmental Engineering 1 12 60
VAC4091 Structural Engineering Design 1
(or approved elective 1*) 6 36
VAN4011 Engineering Project 1 12 48
VAN4051 Engineering Project Management 12 60
Total 48 240
Year 4
Semester Two
VAC4032 Civil Engineering Design 2 12 60
VAC4072 Environmental Planning and Design
(or approved elective 2*) 6 36
VAC4082 Environmental Engineering 2 12 60
VAC4092 Structural Engineering Design 2
(or approved elective 3 *) 6 36
VAN4012 Engineering Project 2 12 48
Total 48 240
Electives
May be taken to a value of 6, 12 or 18 CP depending on which of
VAC4072, VAC4091 and/or VAC4092 is done (18 max)
*Approved Electives from within the School of ACME
VAA2031 Architectural History and Design 12 60
VAA3031 Environmentally Sustainable Design 1 12 60
VAA3042 Hydraulic Services Systems 12 60
VAA3081 Building Construction and Legislation 1 12 60
VAA4051 Building Quantities and Costs 6 36
VAA4082 Building Construction and Legislation 2 6 36
VAM2011 Computations & Engineering Analysis 12 60
VEM2012 Electrical Engineering 12 60
Electives from outside School of ACME
(Subject to approval of Course Co-ordinator)
ASSESSMENT
Assessment in subjects is designed to monitor a student’s progress
and achievements as well as contribute to and enhance their
learning. Normally a prescribed range of assessment methods is
employed in any subject.
Assessment is by a combination of written assignments, tests,
laboratory work and examinations.
Supplementary assessment is not normally available in any subject
except at the discretion of the Head of School in exceptional
circumstances.
Special Consideration in assessment may be granted on the grounds
defined by the University Statutes.
Guidelines on the use of electronic calculators and other electronic
storage devices in examinations are provided in individual subject
outlines distributed to students within the first two weeks of semester
and included on final examination papers.
Electronic calculators and other electronic storage devices will not
be permitted where the above provisions have not been made.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
30
DEGREE WITH HONOURS
A Degree with Honours Program is offered concurrently with the
fourth year of the ordinary Bachelor of Engineering program.
Normally, students entering the final year of a full-time Bachelor of
Engineering program (or its equivalent in part-time mode), will be
offered honours candidacy, if they have achieved a minimum hour
weighted average of 60 per cent over year levels 1 to 3, have not
repeated a subject throughout levels 1 to 3 and have not been
granted more than one year completion by compensation
throughout the duration of the course. Fourth year honours degree
gradings will be determined by the relevant Examiners Board on the
basis of the hour weighted average for year level 4.
INDUSTRIAL EXPERIENCE
Candidates applying for the award of a degree in civil engineering
must ensure that they have submitted for approval evidence of
having undertaken a minimum of 12 weeks industrial experience
relevant to the course to satisfy Engineers Australia requirements.
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
Engineers Australia has granted full recognition for the Bachelor of
Engineering in Civil Engineering. Recognition is a requirement for
Graduate Membership of Engineers Australia and additionally for
equivalent membership of many overseas professional engineering
institutions.
OVERSEAS EXCHANGE PROGRAM
Victoria University has exchange agreements with universities in
many countries, some of which are the U.S.A., Canada, Mexico,
United Kingdom and many European and Asian countries.
For those students who do wish to study abroad, there is the
opportunity to experience living in a different culture and
environment, and to develop self-responsibility and reliance skills.
Many students achieve improved results in their remaining studies
after returning home, having developed a clearer perception of their
future career with a stronger determination to succeed.
BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Course Code: EBME
CRICOS No: 002861E
The degree is designed to provide the broad education required for
a mechanical engineering career. In addition to theoretical and
practical engineering content, the course contains integrated studies
in economics, administration and communication. The degree
emphasises achievement across mechanical engineering disciplines
in concert with problem solving, design, engineering applications,
innovation, resource management and professional responsibility.
Government institutions and private enterprise employ mechanical
engineers in manufacturing, design of products and machines,
automatic control of machines and processes, heating and air
conditioning systems, machine and condition monitoring, hydraulic
and pneumatic systems, computer applications – including finite
element analysis, computer-aided design and Computational Fluid
Dynamics and research and development in a wide range of fields.
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course is designed to provide an educational standard and
vocational skills which will enable graduates to undertake
professional practice in the discipline of Mechanical Engineering.
Graduates are provided with a basis to progress through
postgraduate studies, continuing education courses and participate
in learned society endeavours.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS AND PREREQUISITES
The prerequisite subjects for admission into the first year of the
course are based on entry at post Year 12, Victorian Certificate of
Education, or equivalent level and are as follows.
PREREQUISITES UNITS 3 AND 4
Mathematical Methods or Specialist Mathematics, with a study score
of at least 22 in English
MIDDLE BAND SELECTION
Re-ranking based on study scores in the full range of year 12
students, with particular attention to pre-requisite studies and other
science based studies.
ADMISSION AT OTHER LEVELS
Persons transferring from other courses or having overseas or other
entrance qualifications of at least equivalent standard to those listed
above, should apply for admission in the normal manner.
Full-fee paying international students must have qualifications which
are equivalent to those listed above. In addition, they must provide
evidence of proficiency in the English language:
• IELTS – an overall band score of 6+, subject to individual
profile; or
• TOEFL – a score of 550+, and a Test of Written English (TWE)
score of 5+.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over four years on a full-time basis. The entire
course cannot be completed on a part-time basis. Students must
complete 384 credit points.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Engineering subject codes commence with ‘V’.
Science subject codes commence with ‘R’.
Credit Semester
Points Hours
Year 1
Semester One
RMA1001 Engineering Mathematics 1A 12 60
REP1001 Engineering Physics 1A 12 60
VAN1051 Engineering Profession 12 60
VAN1011 Experimentation & Computing 12 60
Total 48 240
Semester Two
RMA1002 Engineering Mathematics 1B 12 60
REP1003 Engineering Physics 1C 12 60
VAN1032 Introduction to Design 12 60
VAN1022 Solid Mechanics 1 12 60
Total 48 240
Year 2
Semester One
VAM2011 Computations & Engineering
Analysis 12 60
VAN2021 Solid Mechanics 2 12 60
VAN2061 Engineering Materials 12 60
VAN2041 Thermofluids 12 60
Total 48 240
Semester Two
VEM2012 Electrical Engineering 12 60
VAM2062 Materials and Manufacture 12 60
VAN2032 Engineering Design 12 60
VAM2042 Thermodynamics & Fluid
Mechanics 1 12 60
Total 48 240
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
31
Year 3
Semester One
VAM3021 Stress Analysis 1 12 60
VAM3071 Dynamics 12 60
VAM3031 Mechanical Engineering Design1 12 60
VAM3041 Thermodynamics & Fluid Mechanics 2 12 60
Total 48 240
Semester Two
VAM3012 Signal Analysis 12 60
VAM3022 Stress Analysis 2 12 60
VAM3072 Mechanical Vibration 12 60
VAN3052 Engineering Management 12 60
Total 48 240
Year 4
Semester One
VAM4021 Computational Mechanics 12 60
VAN4051 Engineering Project Management 12 60
VAN4011 Engineering Project 1 12 48
VAM4041 Heat Transfer & Combustion 12 60
Total 48 228
Year 4
Semester Two
VAM4032 Mechanical Engineering Design2 12 60
VAN4012 Engineering Project 2 12 48
VAM4042 Fluid Dynamics 12 60
Elective Stream 12 60
Total 48 228
ASSESSMENT
Assessment in subjects is designed to monitor a student’s progress
and achievements as well as contribute to and enhance their
learning. Normally a prescribed range of assessment methods is
employed in any subject.
Assessment is by a combination of written assignments, tests,
laboratory work and examinations.
Supplementary assessment is not normally available in any subject
except at the discretion of the Head of School in exceptional
circumstances.
Special Consideration in assessment may be granted on the grounds
defined by the University Statutes.
Guidelines on the use of electronic calculators and other electronic
storage devices in examinations are provided in individual subject
outlines distributed to students within the first two weeks of semester
and included on final examination papers.
Electronic calculators and other electronic storage devices will not
be permitted where the above provisions have not been made.
DEGREE WITH HONOURS
A Degree with Honours Program is offered concurrently with the
fourth year of the ordinary Bachelor of Engineering program.
Normally, students entering the final year of a full-time Bachelor of
Engineering program (or its equivalent in part-time mode), will be
offered honours candidacy, if they have achieved a minimum hour
weighted average of 60 per cent over year levels 1 to 3, have not
repeated a subject through levels 1 to 3 and have not been granted
more than one stage completion throughout the duration of the
course. Fourth year honours degree gradings will be determined by
the relevant Examiners Board on the basis of the hour weighted
average for year level 4.
INDUSTRIAL EXPERIENCE
Candidates applying for the award of a degree in mechanical
engineering must ensure that they have submitted for approval
evidence of having undertaken a minimum of 12 weeks industrial
experience relevant to the course to satisfy the Institution of
Engineers, Australia, requirements.
OVERSEAS EXCHANGE PROGRAM
Victoria University has exchange agreements with universities in
many countries, some of which are the U.S.A., Canada, Mexico,
United Kingdom and many European and Asian countries.
For those students who do wish to study abroad, there is the
opportunity to experience living in a different culture and
environment, and to develop self-responsibility and reliance skills.
Many students achieve improved results in their remaining studies
after returning home, having developed a clearer perception of their
future career with a stronger determination to succeed.
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
Engineers Australia recognises the degree as meeting all academic
requirements for corporate membership as a chartered engineer.
Completion of the degree plus 12 weeks approved experience will
admit to Graduate Membership. Victoria University students are
eligible for Student Membership.
BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN ROBOTIC
ENGINEERING
Course Code: EBRE
CRICOS No: 047048G
COURSE OBJECTIVES
This course is envisaged to integrate existing relevant subjects and
resources within the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science to
appeal to incoming high ENTER level students with mechanical,
electronic and computer interests along with the essential
background in mathematics and physics. The structure of the course
is to provide a common core progression with the revised
Mechanical Engineering degree course linked with specialist
subjects in robotics. Student completing this course will find
employment as specialist engineers in the mechanical and electronic
engineering interface in industry and research.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS AND PREREQUISITES
To qualify for admission to the course an applicant must have
successfully completed a course of study at year 12 level or
equivalent.
PREREQUISITES UNITS 3 AND 4
Mathematical Methods or Specialist Mathematics, with study score
of at least 22 in English
MIDDLE BAND SELECTION
Re-ranking based on study scores in the full range of year 12
student, with particular attention to pre-requisite studies and other
science based studies.
ADMISSION AT OTHER LEVELS
In addition to satisfying the entry requirements for Australian resident
students or demonstrating equivalence, overseas students must
provide evidence of proficiency in the English language:
• IELTS – an overall band score of 6-7, subject to individual
profile; or
• TOEFL – a score of 550+, and a Test of Written English (TWE)
score of 5+.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
32
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over four years on a full-time basis or part-time
equivalent
COURSE STRUCTURE
Engineering subject codes commence with ‘V’.
Science subject codes commence with ‘R’.
Credit Semester
Points Hours
Year 1
Semester One
RMA1001 Engineering Mathematics 1A 12 60
REP1001 Engineering Physics 1A 12 60
VAN1051 Engineering Profession 12 60
VAN1011 Experimentation & Computing 12 60
Total 48 240
Semester Two
RMA1002 Engineering Mathematics 1B 12 60
REP1003 Engineering Physics 1C 12 60
VAN1032 Introduction to Design 12 60
VAN1022 Solid Mechanics 1 12 60
Total 48 240
Year 2
Semester One
VEL1001 Circuit Theory and Electronics 1A 12 60
VAN2021 Solid Mechanics 2 12 60
VAN2041 Thermofluids 12 60
VEC1001 Computer Engineering 1A 12 60
Total 48 240
Semester Two
VEL1002 Circuit Theory and Electronics 1B 12 60
VAR2001 Mechatronics 1 12 60
VAN2032 Engineering Design 12 60
VEC1002 Computer Engineering 1B 12 66
Total 48 240
Year 3
Semester One
VEC2001 Computer Engineering 2A 12 60
VAM3071 Dynamics 12 60
VAM3031 Mechanical Engineering Design 1 12 60
VEL2001 Linear Systems & Mathematics 2A 12 60
Total 48 240
Semester Two
VED2002 Engineering Design and
Professional Practice 2 12 60
VAM3012 Signal Analysis 12 60
VEL2002 Linear Systems & Mathematics 2B 12 60
VAN3052 Engineering Management 12 60
Total 48 240
Year 4
Semester One
VEA4400 Robotics and Automation 6 36
VAN4051 Engineering Project Management 12 60
VAN4011 Engineering Project 1 12 48
VEA3000 Control Systems A 12 60
Elective 1 6 36
Total 48 240
Semester Two
VAM4032 Mechanical Engineering Design 2 12 60
VAN4012 Engineering Project 2 12 48
VEA4000 Computer Control Systems B 12 60
Elective Stream 12 60
Total 48 240
Electives
Approved electives from within the School of ACME
VAM4062 Manufacturing and Polymer Technologies 12 60
Approved electives from within the School of Electrical Engineering
VEA4100 Computer Vision & Applications 6 36
VEA4200 Fuzzy Control & Applications 6 36
VEG 4100 Digital Signal Processing A 6 36
RMA4001 Advanced Mathematics for
Electrical Engineers 6 36
Other electives from outside of these Schools
(Subject to approval of Course Co-ordinators)
ASSESSMENT
Assessment in subjects is designed to monitor a student’s progress
and achievements as well as contribute to and enhance their
learning. Normally a prescribed range of assessment methods is
employed in any subject.
Assessment is by a combination of written assignments, tests,
laboratory work and examinations.
INDUSTRIAL EXPERIENCE
Candidates applying for the award of a degree in robotic
engineering must ensure that they have submitted for approval
evidence of having undertaken a minimum of 12 weeks industrial
experience relevant to the course to satisfy the Institution of
Engineers, Australia, requirements.
OVERSEAS EXCHANGE PROGRAM
Victoria University has exchange agreements with universities in
many countries, some of which are the U.S.A., Canada, Mexico,
United Kingdom and many European and Asian countries.
For those students who do wish to study abroad, there is the
opportunity to experience living in a different culture and
environment, and to develop self-responsibility and reliance skills.
Many students achieve improved results in their remaining studies
after returning home, having developed a clearer perception of their
future career with a stronger determination to succeed.
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
The Institution of Engineers, Australia, recognises the degree as
meeting all academic requirements for corporate membership as a
chartered engineer. Completion of the degree plus 12 weeks
approved experience will admit to Graduate Membership. Victoria
University students are eligible for Student Membership.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
33
BACHELOR OF TECHNOLOGY IN BUILDING
SURVEYING
Course Code: EBSB
This course provides a tertiary degree in Building Surveying with exit
points at Diploma of Building Surveying qualification level and
Advanced Diploma of Building Surveying qualification level.
The first three years of the course (at Sunshine campus) focus on
building technology and statutory control of building. This involves
completion of twenty-four units of competency learning over two
years leading to the Diploma of Building Surveying, followed by
completion of an additional nineteen units of competency learning
leading to the Advanced Diploma of Building Surveying. Concurrent
studies (at Footscray Park campus) provide students with basic
professional literacy and numeracy. Subjects prescribed for this
purpose are VAN1051 Engineering Profession, JCM0110
Mathematics and RMA1001 Engineering Mathematics 1A.
In the final (fourth) year of the course (spread over Footscray Park
and Werribee campuses) the focus is on professional practice
primarily in the areas of building design, building approval and
building construction.
Graduates of this course will have completed studies equivalent to
the Graduate Certificate in Performance-Based Building and Fire
Codes (Course Code: ETQB) at Werribee campus.
COURSE OBJECTIVES
Course objectives are to produce graduates who have acquired a
strong technological base for professional practice in the area of
Building Surveying and exhibit valuable graduate attributes as
follows: A sound knowledge of the structure and practices of
Australian building (design and construction) regulatory systems; an
understanding and appreciation of building design and approval,
and building construction and inspection, as it is influenced by a
variety of political, social, economic, cultural, industrial and
technological factors; a broad range of vocational skills that can be
used to manage and operate a building surveying business, within
either the private sector or public sector, and meet the needs of
developers, practitioners, authorities, manufacturers, tradespeople
and other significant stakeholders; specific skills that will lead to
employment in the fields of design consultancy, certification,
approvals and permits, construction management, detailed
hydraulic, electrical and mechanical services installations, inspection
and maintenance, and facility management; an ability to work
independently, ethically and professionally in the provision of
building surveying services to clients and/or employers, whether as
a sole practitioner or within larger organizations including
engineering and building surveying consultancies, building
contractors, manufacturers, statutory authorities, local government
and state government departments; an ability to adapt to the
changing needs of industry, commerce and community, as well as
the ability to take a leadership role in promoting institutional and
social change with social justice initiatives.
Graduates of this course will have had the opportunity to experience
learning in a dual sector environment that assists them in both
finding employment and becoming lifelong learners in the broader
context. Successful graduates of the Bachelor of Technology in
Building Surveying course should be able to demonstrate valuable
capabilities as follows: Be effective problem solvers in a range of
settings including professional practice; Locate, evaluate, manage
and use information effectively, including critical thinking,
information technology skills, information gathering skills, and
carrying out statistical and other calculations; Communicate
effectively in oral and written form as a professional and as a
citizen; Work as a professional both autonomously and
collaboratively.
ADMISSION AT OTHER LEVELS
Admission at other levels may be approved, e.g., in the case of an
applicant having commenced or completed studies leading to a
Diploma or Advanced Diploma at an Institute of TAFE or in the case
of a mature-age applicant.
COURSE DURATION
Four years full-time. Part-time enrolment may also be approved.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit Semester
Points Hours
Year 1 and Year 2
DIPLOMA OF BUILDING SURVEYING
BCGSV5001A Assess the construction of
domestic scale buildings * 100
BCGSV5002A Evaluate materials for construction
of domestic scale buildings * 72
BCGSV5003A Produce working drawings for
residential buildings * 90
BCGSV5004A Apply legislation to urban
development and building controls * 36
BCGSV5005A Apply footing and geomechanical
design principles for domestic
scale buildings * 36
BCGSV5006A Assess construction faults in
residential buildings * 36
BCGSV5007A Undertake site surveys and set
out procedures to building projects * 72
BCGSV5008A Apply building control legislation
to building surveying * 36
BCGSV5009A Assess the impact of fire on
building materials * 36
BCGSV5010A Interact with clients in a regulated
environment * 36
BCGSV5011A Apply building codes and standards
to residential buildings * 36
BCGSV5012A Assess timber framed designs
for one and two storey buildings * 36
BCGSV5013A Apply principles of energy efficient
design to buildings * 36
BCGSV5014A Apply building surveying procedures
to residential buildings * 36
BCGSV5015A Assess structural requirements for
domestic scale buildings * 72
BSBADM506A Manage business document design
and development * 60
BSBCMN406A Maintain business technology * 40
CHCCOM3A Utilise specialist communication skills * 50
CHCCOM4A Develop, implement and promote
effective communication techniques * 75
ICAITU128A Operate a personal computer * 30
ICAITU129A Operate a word processing
application * 30
ICAITU130A Operate a spreadsheet application * 30
ICAITU131A Operate a database application * 30
ICAITU133A Send and retrieve information over
the internet using browsers and email * 25
Subtotal for Diploma 1136
plus Higher Education/Foundation Studies
VAN1051 Engineering Profession
(to be completed in Year 1) 12 60
JCM0110 Mathematics
(to be completed in Year 2) 24 72
Total for Years 1 and 2 N/A 1268
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
34
Year 3
ADVANCED DIPLOMA OF BUILDING SURVEYING
BCGSV6001A Assess the construction of
buildings up to 3 storey * 72
BCGSV6002A Produce working drawings for
buildings up to 3 storey * 40
BCGSV6003A Assess construction faults in
buildings up to 3 storey * 40
BCGSV6004A Apply footings and geomechanical
design principles to buildings
up to 3 storey * 40
BCGSV6005A Evaluate services layout and connection
methods for residential and
commercial buildings up to 3 storey * 40
BCGSV6006A Evaluate the use of concrete for
residential and commercial
buildings up to 3 storey * 40
BCGSV6007A Assess structural requirements for
buildings up to 3 storey * 40
BCGSV6008A Apply building codes and standards
to buildings up to 3 storey * 72
BCGSV6009A Implement performance based codes
and risk management principles for
buildings up to 3 storey * 72
BCGSV6010A Apply fire technology to buildings
up to 3 storey * 40
BCGSV6011A Apply legal procedures to building
surveying * 40
BCGSV6012A Facilitate community development
consultation * 40
BCGSV6013A Co-ordinate asset refurbishment * 72
BCGSV6014A Manage and plan land use * 40
BCGSV6015A Analyse and present building
surveying research information * 90
BCGSV6016A Apply building surveying procedures
to buildings up to 3 storey * 90
BSX154L606 Manage human resources * 40
LGAPLEM502A Apply ecologically sustainable
development principles to the
built environment * 60
LMFFT4010A Identify and calculate production costs * 36
Subtotal for Advanced Diploma 1004
plus Higher Education
RMA1001 Engineering Mathematics 1A 12 60
Total for Year 3 N/A 1064
Year 4
Includes subjects as prescribed for Graduate Certificate in
Performance-Based Building and Fire Codes
Semester One
EQB5611 Risk Assessment & Human Behaviour 12 39
EQB5621 Fire growth, Detection and
Extinguishment 12 39
VAN4011 Engineering Project 1 12 48
VAN4051 Engineering Project Management 12 60
Subtotal Semester One 48 186
Semester Two
EQB5632 Smoke and Fire Spread,
Fire Safety System design 12 39
EQB5642 Performance Codes
Methodology and Structure 12 39
VAN4012 Engineering Project 2 12 48
VAN3052 Engineering Management 2 60
Subtotal for Semester Two 48 186
Total for Year 4 96 372
ASSESSMENT
For the competency learning components of the course, assessment
is conducted in accordance with the Assessment Guidelines for the
Building and Construction Industry. For the other subjects that make
up the degree, the various assessment stipulations specific to
individual subjects are as set out in Subject Details in the Faculty of
Health, Engineering and Science Handbook.
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
The course satisfies the academic requirements of Building Surveyor
practitioner registration boards such as the Building Practitioners
Board of Victoria where legislation makes reference to a degree in
Building Surveying from a university within the meaning of the
Tertiary Education Act 1993. This ensures that graduates who are
interested in registering and practising as a professional Building
Surveyor have the necessary formal educational qualifications.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
35
SCHOOL OF BIOMEDICAL SCIENCES
The School of Biomedical Sciences is located at St Albans Campus
of the University. In line with Faculty objectives, the School is
committed to the development and promotion of science and
technology.
The School seeks to provide students with vocationally and
educationally oriented experiences and expertise which will best
equip them for entry into a work environment in which there is likely
to be significant career changes during their working life.
Consequently, the School provides courses and programs with a
close relationship between theory and practice, and seeks to include
relevant industrial experience within each award course.
The School also seeks to foster within its students a personal pride
in, and a professional attitude to their work and a full understanding
of their responsibilities to society as trained scientists and
technologists.
It is the belief of the School that active involvement in research and
consultancy is vital in providing quality teaching as well as in
developing a viable and practical course for the students. To this
end, most of the academic staff have a doctoral degree and
substantial research and consultancy experience. The School
endeavours to develop close relationships with industry and with the
community to keep abreast of their respective needs. To this end
student projects are performed in collaboration with industry, the
community, government bodies, and research institutes wherever
possible.
The School is equipped with world class laboratories and equipment
for teaching and research as well as for industrial training
programs. These include a state of the art Aquatic Research
Laboratory, high performance liquid chromatographs, gas
chromatograph-mass spectrometers, atomic absorption
spectrophotometers, FTIR spectrometers, NMR, UV-Vis
spectrophotometers, an Instron texture analyser, Infratech and NIR
Systems food and feed analysers as well as excellent facilities for
microbiological and genetic engineering work. Specialist facilities
also include a fully-equipped, pilot-scale food processing hall.
The School also offers Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy
degrees by research and Masters and Graduate Diploma
coursework programs. Further details are given in the Postgraduate
Studies section of the Handbook.
COURSES OFFERED
The School Biomedical Sciences offers undergraduate courses
leading to the award of:
• Bachelor of Science (Honours);
• Bachelor of Science;
− Biomedical Sciences;
− Nutritional Therapy;
− Occupational Health and Safety.
SCHOOL REGULATIONS
The following regulations apply to all courses and subjects
administered or taught by the School of Biomedical Sciences and
are in addition to University regulations governing these areas as
laid down in the Statutes and Regulations.
AWARDS
A student shall qualify to receive an award when that student has
successfully completed all the requirements and prescribed subjects
of the course.
ASSESSMENT
Student assessment will embrace both formal assessment through
final examination and continuous assessment incorporating unit
tests, assignments, report writing, problem solving exercises, class
presentations and laboratory, project and fieldwork.
Students would normally be expected to satisfactorily complete each
component of the assessment to gain a pass in the subject.
PRACTICAL WORK
A minimum of 80 per cent attendance is required at all practical
sessions. Failure to attend at least 80 per cent of practical sessions
will automatically constitute unsatisfactory completion of the subject.
Practical reports will only be accepted from those students who have
attended practical sessions for their full duration.
LATE SUBMISSION
Students failing to submit assessable work by the prescribed
deadline will incur a penalty of five percentage marks per day for
the first ten days after the prescribed deadline. Work submitted after
this time will not be assessed and students will be granted a zero
grade.
This requirement may be varied at the discretion of the subject co-
ordinator.
SUPPLEMENTARY ASSESSMENT
Students may be granted supplementary assessment with a
maximum of two supplementary assessments being permitted in any
one full-time academic year. Supplementary assessment will not be
available for subjects that are being repeated.
USE OF ELECTRONIC CALCULATORS AND STORAGE DEVICES
The use of electronic calculators and electronic storage devices is
not permitted in any examination unless specified in the subject
guide for that subject and/or on the examination paper for that
subject.
UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS
These regulations should be read in conjunction with the Victoria
University’s Statute 6.4.1 – Unsatisfactory Progress. The following
regulations apply to both full-time and part-time students.
Students in any one of the following categories may be asked to
show cause as to why they should not be excluded from the course:
• those who fail 50 per cent or more of their assessable
enrolment load (expressed in subjects) in any semester;
• those who fail the same subject twice;
• those who transgress a conditional enrolment agreement.
DURATION OF EXCLUSION
Excluded students have no automatic right of re-admission to the
course from which they were excluded. Students who have been
excluded may apply for re-admission not less than one calendar
year from the date of exclusion. These students must provide, with
their application, evidence of changed circumstances which
significantly improve the applicant’s chances of academic success.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
36
PROGRESSION
At Examiners’ Meetings at the end of each semester the results and
progress of all students enrolled in the course will be considered.
Progression through the course is based on the following guidelines:
• where any compulsory subject must be repeated, enrolment in
that subject must be at the first opportunity following the initial
failure.
• students may not enrol in any subject for which the prerequisite
has not been passed.
• student enrolment will not normally be approved where the total
proposed subject hours exceeds the normal total subject hours
for a course year.
• where enrolment in a co-requisite subject is required, enrolment
in the co-requisite subject must take preference over enrolment
in an elective.
• where a subject is being repeated, requests for exemptions for
part of the subject work are at the discretion of the Department
or School offering the subject. Any exemption granted will
normally apply for one year only.
DISCIPLINARY FAILURE
A student who has failed a subject on disciplinary grounds may not
enrol in any further subjects without the permission of the Faculty
Dean.
REPEATING SUBJECTS
A student who has withdrawn twice in any subject without receiving
a penalty grade must seek the permission of the lecturer in charge
before being permitted to re-enrol in that subject.
STAGE COMPLETION
A student may apply for a Stage Completion if:
• all subjects in the course except one have been passed;
• a result of N1 (40 per cent – 49 per cent) is achieved in the
failed subject;
• the failed subject is not a prerequisite for any other subject in
the course.
The granting of a Stage Completion is at the discretion of the Head
of School and is not regarded as a pass in the failed subject.
DEFERMENT FROM AWARD COURSE
The following rules apply to the courses of the School and are in
addition to University regulations governing these areas.
• Approval of deferment is not automatic.
• Each application to defer will be dealt with on an individual
basis by the School Administrator in consultation with
appropriate academic staff members.
• A deferment will not be granted to VTAC applicants requesting
a deferment at their first enrolment session. Students who fall
into this category will be advised to re-apply for a place at the
end of the year.
• In normal circumstances students must have successfully
completed at least one semester of study, by passing at least 50
per cent of subjects undertaken, to be eligible for deferment.
• Except under exceptional circumstances students may apply to
defer their studies for a total period not exceeding twelve
months.
• Deferment will not normally be granted until consultation has
taken place with the Course Co-ordinator (or nominee) and/or
a student counsellor.
• Students failing to re-enrol at the end of their deferment period
will automatically be withdrawn from their course of study.
FURTHER INFORMATION
For further information please contact the School of Biomedical
Sciences on (03) 9919 2691 or fax (03) 9919 2465.
BIOLOGY AND GENERAL SCIENCE TEACHING
FOR PHYSICAL EDUCATION GRADUATES
The School of Biomedical Sciences and the Sustainability Group
have arranged elective subjects to assist Physical Education and
Recreation students planning a secondary teaching career. The
School offers two elective programs designed to facilitate the entry
of Bachelor of Applied Science – Physical Education graduates into
a second teaching method in a Diploma of Education course and to
subsequently gain registration with the Ministry of Education to
teach either Biology or General Science, in addition to Physical
Education.
To obtain registration in General Science, the Ministry of Education
requires that students take subjects equivalent to one quarter of the
first year of their Bachelor of Applied Science course in each of two
science areas, both of which have the potential to be extended to
sub-majors. A sub-major in a science area is defined by the Ministry
as a commitment of one quarter of the first year load and one
quarter of the second year load to subjects in this science area.
The physical education degree at Victoria University, Footscray Park
Campus, is based upon a unit system such that one semester-hour of
contact is equivalent to one unit. Since the degree requires a
minimum of 144 units (48 units per year), then one quarter of a year
corresponds to 12 units. To obtain General Science registration
based upon chemistry and biology therefore, requires at least 12
units devoted to chemistry and 12 units to biology in the first year of
the degree.
To obtain registration in biology, it is necessary to take sufficient
biology subjects to constitute a sub-major, i.e. at least 12 units of
biology in first year and 23 units of biology in second year.
Details of the two streams of study are set out below; the code
number is given for each subject.
General Science Stream
RCS1006 Chemistry 1
RBM1518 Human Physiology 1 or RBF1310 Biology 1
RBM1528 Human Physiology 2 or RBF1320 Biology 2
RBM2260 Diet and Nutrition
Biology Stream
RBM2360 Medical Microbiology
RBM1518 Human Physiology 1 or RBF1310 Biology 1
RBM1528 Human Physiology 2 or RBF1320 Biology 2
RBM2260 Diet and Nutrition
RBM3264 Advanced Nerve and Muscle Physiology
RBF2610 Fundamentals of Ecology
RBF2620 Australian Plants
RBF2640 Australian Animals
RBF3600 Aquatic Ecology
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
37
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN BIOMEDICAL
SCIENCES
Course Code: SBBS
CRICOS No: 023699C
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The Bachelor of Science in Biomedical Sciences is designed to
provide professional training in the application of science to human
biology in the market place. The course aims to produce highly
flexible but well-trained graduates who will be adequately equipped
to adapt to a changing environment. Four different streams are
available for this degree in Biomedical Sciences including wellness
management, science media and communications, marketing of
biomedical products, and medical research/clinical sciences.
Although, students are encouraged to follow one of these streams,
they are able to choose from the entire range of subjects offered in
the Biomedical Sciences degree. The overall objectives of the
degree in Biomedical Sciences are to provide graduates with an
excellent knowledge of human physiological functions together with
skills in critical analysis and with highly developed communication
skills. Complementary knowledge will be developed in a wide range
of selected disciplines including psychology, human development,
management, marketing, visual and audiovisual communications
and a language.
The Wellness Management stream is designed to produce graduates
with an understanding of human function. Graduates will be eligible
for employment as Wellness consultants either in private practice or
within government agencies, large companies or corporations. The
Science, Media and Communications specialisation is more
specifically designed to produce graduates who would be
knowledgeable in human biology and biomedical sciences.
Graduates would have a broad education, being highly literate and
articulate in specialised areas such as an Asian Language,
Professional Writing, and Communications. Graduates in the
Management and Marketing of Biomedical Products stream will
have an in-depth knowledge of basic human biological function
combined with specialised skills in either human resource
management or in marketing. This combination of skills appears to
be unique in Australia as there seems to be no other course in
Australia with this combination of subjects. The Medical
Research/Clinical Sciences stream will provide students with a
range of skills appropriate to leading edge medical research. This
degree offers a range of subjects appropriate for further
postgraduate study in medical and paramedical fields.
DURATION OF THE COURSE
The course will be equivalent to three years of full-time study for
students entering the course at Year 1 or part-time equivalent.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
UNITS 3 AND 4 ENGLISH
MIDDLE BAND SELECTION
Completing Biology and/or Chemistry can lead to an ENTER 3.5
points higher per study.
LOCATION
The course is currently offered at the St Albans Campuses, but
individual subjects may be offered at the Footscray or Werribee
Campuses.
COURSE STRUCTURE
The course will comprise of two 12 week semesters or 24 weeks per
year for three years. The course outline together with the contact
hours per week is contained in the following pages. First year
subjects listed are currently running at the St Albans Campus.
Electives may be taken from the wide range of science and general
subjects listed below. Other suitable electives (not listed below) may
also be chosen subject to the approval of the course co-ordinator. If
general electives are selected, students are encouraged to take a
four–six semester sequence in one of the following areas including
Human Resource Management, Marketing, Communications,
Psychology, Professional Writing or a language other than English.
Electives will be offered subject to adequate demand.
Students enrolled in the Biomedical Science course Degree must take
a minimum of 60 per cent of their total credit points from subjects
offered by the School of Biomedical Sciences. In addition, no more
than 40 credit points from general elective subjects shall be at first
year level, and at least one elective shall be commensurate with the
year of the student’s course.
Credit Semester
Points Hours
Year 1
RBM1501 Foundations in Biomedical Sciences A 1 12
RBM1514 Functional Anatomy 1 1 12
RBM1518 Human Physiology 1 1 12
RBM1502 Foundations in Biomedical Science B 2 12
RBM1524 Functional Anatomy 2 2 12
RBM1528 Human Physiology 2 2 12
Electives
RCS1110 Chemistry for Biological Sciences A 1 12
APP1012 Psychology 1A 1 12
RCS1120 Chemistry for Biological Sciences B 2 12
APP1013 Psychology 1B 2 12
Other electives 1 or 2 12
Year 2
RBM2260 Diet & Nutrition 1 12
RBM2530 Pathophysiology 1 1 12
RBM2540 Pathophysiology 2 2 12
RBM2800 Cardiorespiratory & Renal Physiology 2 12
Electives
RBM1580 Functional Anatomy 31,4 1 12
RBM2360 Medical Microbiology1,4 1 12
RBM2560 Medical Biochemistry4 1 12
RBM2610 Biomedical Sciences & Society1,2 1 12
RBF2330 Cell Biology4 2 12
RBM2580 Advanced Functional Anatomy1 2 12
RBM3610 Bioscience, Ethics & Values1,2,4 2 12
Other electives 1 or 2 12
Year 3
Choose at least three of following core subjects below per semester
RBM3264 Advanced Nerve & Muscle Physiology4 1 12
RBM3550 Growth & Early Development1,4 1 12
RBM3590 Advanced Experimental Techniques3,4 1 12
RBM3720 Immunology4 1 12
RBM3810 Wellness 11,2 1 12
RBM3540 Advanced Neurosciences4 2 12
RBM3560 Growth, Development and Ageing1,4 2 12
RBM3660 Human Developmental & Clinical Genetics4 2 12
RBM3800 Pharmacology3,4 2 12
RBM3820 Wellness 21,2 2 12
RBM3910 Project1,2,3,4 2 12
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
38
Electives
RBM3650 Advanced Reproduction & Development1,4 1 12
RBM3960 Nutritional Frontiers1,4 2 12
Other electives 1 or 2 12
1 Students in the Wellness Management stream are encouraged to
take these electives (Students in the Wellness stream who decide
to focus on individual and social issues in mental health should
choose Psychology 2A and 2B)
2 Students in the Science, Media and Communication stream are
encouraged to take these electives
3 Students in the Management and Marketing of Biomedical
Products stream are encouraged to take these electives
4 Students in the Medical Research and Clinical Sciences stream
are encouraged to take these electives
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN NUTRITIONAL
THERAPY
Course Code: SBNT
Nutritional Therapy is founded in medical science and on peer-
reviewed evidence-based research. Nutritional Therapists use
manipulation of food and diet for therapeutic purposes. Often a
patient’s condition can be improved by suitably matching food
intake to their condition, together with nutriceutical prescription and
appropriate lifestyle advice. The graduates from this course will not
be Dieticians, but will be able to treat chronic non-life threatening
conditions.
This course is modelled on the highly successful BSc Nutritional
Therapy courses offered in Europe. At present there is no similar
course in Nutritional Therapy in Australia, and this course will be the
first in Australasia.
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The Bachelor of Science in Nutritional Therapy will provide an
alternative education and training program for those wishing to
apply their knowledge of Nutrition to the treatment of a range of
clients by high-quality nutrition care and therapy. The objectives of
the course are to produce Graduates able to function independently
as Nutritional Therapists. At the end of the course, Graduates will be
able to; evaluate and process requests for nutritional therapy; assess
the client and formulate an appropriate course of nutritional therapy;
educate the client in self–care therapy, and evaluate the client’s
response to the course of treatment.
The Graduates of this course will be able to make a valuable
contribution to society as Nutritional Therapists in private practice,
as Nutrition Consultants to the healthcare and fitness industries, and
as practitioners in integrated health centres.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Points
Year 1
RBF2410 Food Components 12
RBM1514 Functional Anatomy 12
RBM1518 Human Physiology 1 12
RBM1528 Human Physiology 2 12
RBM1810 Nutritional Biochemistry 12
RBM1820 Nutrition, Society & Communication 12
RBM1830 Diet Therapy 1 12
RBM2575 Phytopharmaceutics 12
Year 2
HHN0021 Counselling Skills for Natural
Medicine Practitioners 12
RBF3240 Functional Foods 12
RBM2260 Diet and Nutrition 12
RBM2530 Pathophysiology 1 12
RBM2540 Pathophysiology 2 12
RBM2560 Medical Biochemistry 12
RBM2850 Nutritional Therapeutics A 12
RBM2855 Nutritional Therapeutics B 12
Year 3
RBM3810 Wellness 1 12
RBM3820 Wellness 2 12
RBM3850 Nutritional Therapeutics C 12
RBM3855 Nutritional Therapeutics D 12
RBM3950 Nutritional Therapy in Practice 1 12
RBM3955 Nutritional Therapy in Practice 2 12
RBM3960 Nutrition Frontiers 12
RBM3970 Operating a Clinical Practice 12
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
Graduates will be eligible for full membership of the following
professional bodies upon completion of the course
(awaiting formal notification):
• Australian Nutrition Society;
• British Association of Nutritional Therapy;
• Australian Complementary Health Association;
• Australasian Integrative Medicine Association.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN OCCUPATIONAL
HEALTH AND SAFETY
Course Code: SBOH
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aims of the courses are to produce graduates with a
combination of knowledge and skills of science and disciplines
related to occupational health and safety while having a focus on
the management of occupational health and safety.
At the end of the course graduates should be able to: utilise methods
of scientific investigation in solving, occupational health and safety
problems; thoroughly understand the scientific and technological
bases of occupational health and safety; engender the professional
confidence and respect of others; identify health hazards and safety
problems and be able to make appropriate recommendations to
management; understand and be able to effectively participate in
decision-making processes in organisations in order to manage the
promotion and implementation of occupational health and safety
matters; act as an agent of change to improve OH&S at a
workplace.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Normal entry requirements for articulation to the Bachelor of Science
is the successful completion of a Diploma in Occupational Health
and Safety that is equivalent with the course undertaken at Swan
TAFE. A significant number of such applicants are expected to be
occupational health and safety professionals seeking to upgrade
their Diploma qualifications to a degree in Occupational Health and
Safety. Admission requirements may be varied by the Head of
School for applicants who possess other appropriate TAFE or
university qualifications related to occupational health and safety.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
39
Students with a Diploma in Health Occupational Health and Safety,
will complete 13 units to upgrade their qualification to a Bachelor of
Science in Occupational Health and Safety. Students who enrol with
a Diploma of Science in Occupational Health and Safety that is not
equivalent with subjects undertaken at Swan TAFE may need to
undertake a mix of additional units if they wish to upgrade to a
degree.
The course aims at maximising student access by providing flexibility
and modulation in the delivery of subjects. Block mode teaching
delivered at Swan TAFE, Western, Australia, is available. Students
complete all units by distance education mode.
COURSE DURATION
Students who enrol into the degree course with a Diploma in
Occupational Health and Safety (equivalent with Swan TAFE
Diploma OHS) may complete the upgrade after two years of part-
time study. Students with other qualifications may need to complete
additional subjects.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Level 3 Subjects required to upgrade from Diploma in Health-
Occupational Health and Safety to Bachelor of Science in
Occupational Health and Safety.
Credit
Points
RBM2061 Occupational Hygiene Science 12
RBM2161 Ergonomic Science 12
RBM2261 Public and Environmental Health 12
RBM2361 Safety Practice 12
RBM3061 Epidemiology 12
RBM3161 Toxicology 12
RBM3261 Risk Management 12
RBM3361 Occupational Health & Safety Project 12
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (HONOURS) IN
BIOMEDICAL SCIENCES
Course Code: SHBM
RBM4000 Science Honours will comprise a research project
including two oral presentations, a literature review and the project
thesis.
HONOURS COURSE WORK
There will be two course work units comprising of Advanced
Experimental Design and Statistics, and Research Conduct, Ethics
and Training. In special cases undergraduate units of studies may
be substituted for course work units when it is felt that a student
would require further studies of a specialised nature. The lecture or
reading programs that make up the course work units will be
determined by student’s preferences and will vary from time to time.
Course work units will be assessed by oral presentations, written
assignments or a written examination.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE/
BACHELOR OF PSYCHOLOGY
Double Degree
Course Code: SBSP
CRICOS No: 047051A
COURSE OBJECTIVE
The overall objective of the combined Bachelor of Science/Bachelor
of Psychology is to provide graduates with an excellent knowledge
of human physiological and psychological function together with
highly developed skills in critical analysis, social research methods
and communication. The psychology units in this degree comprise an
approved sequence for registration with the Australian Psychological
Society for entry into a fourth year program. Students will be
equipped to enter careers in counselling, health promotion,
laboratory science or as crime scene officers. With further study,
students will be equipped for employment as clinical psychologists
or medical research scientists.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over four years on a full-time basis or part-time
equivalent.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Course structure for Psychology/Biomedical Sciences
Credit Semester
Points Hours
RBM1518 Human Physiology 1 1 12
RBM1514 Functional Anatomy 1 (Head and neck) 1 12
APP1012 Psychology 1A 1 12
AXF1001 Knowing and Knowledge, or
Arts elective 1 12
Total 48
RBM1528 Human Physiology 2 2 15
RBM1524 Functional Anatomy 2
(Thorax and Trunk) 2 12
APP1013 Psychology 1B 2 15
AXF1002 Knowing and Knowledge B or
Arts elective 2 12
Total 48
RBM2530 Pathophysiology 1 3 12
RCS1110 Chemistry for Biological Sciences A* 3 12
APP2013 Psychology 2A 3 12
APP2031 Developmental issues in Psychology 3 12
Total 48
RBM2540 Pathophysiology 2 4 12
RCS1120 Chemistry for Biological Sciences * 4 12
APP2014 Psychology 2B 4 12
APS2040 Quantitative Social Research Methods 4 12
Total 48
*Alternative Biomedical Sciences units below may be substituted for
Chemistry for Biological Sciences A and B subject to the approval of
the course co-ordinator
RBM1580 Functional Anatomy 3 1 12
RBM2360 Medical Microbiology 1 12
RBM2610 Biomedical Sciences & Society 1 12
RBF2330 Cell Biology 2 12
RBM2580 Advanced Functional Anatomy 2 12
RBM3610 Bioscience, Ethics and Values 2 12
Other electives as available – can
include first year units 1 or 2 12
RBM2260 Diet and nutrition 5 12
RBM2560 Medical Biochemistry
or
RBM2360 Medical Microbiology 5 12
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
40
APP3035 Research methods in psychology 5 12
APS2030 Qualitative research methods 5 12
RBM2800 Cardiorespiratory & renal physiology 6 12
RBM3610 Biomedical science, ethics and values
or
RBF2330 Cell biology 6 12
APP3037 Clinical issues in Psychology
Psychology elective 12
APP3036 History and theories of Psychology 7 12
APP3023 Psychological issues in the workplace
(Capstone task) 7 12
Third year Biomedical Sciences unit 7 12
Third year Biomedical Sciences unit 7 12
RBM3910 Biomedical Sciences Project 8 12
Third year Biomedical Sciences unit 8 12
Psychology elective 8 12
Psychology elective 8 12
THIRD YEAR BIOMEDICAL SCIENCE UNITS
RBM3264 Advanced Nerve & Muscle Physiology 1 12
RBM3550 Growth and Early Development 1 12
RBM3590 Advanced Experimental Techniques 1 12
RBM3720 Immunology 1 12
RBM3810 Wellness 1 1 12
RBM3540 Advanced Neurosciences 2 12
RBM3560 Growth, Development and Ageing 2 12
RBM3660 Human Developmental and
Clinical Genetics 2 12
RBM3800 Pharmacology 2 12
RBM3820 Wellness 2 2 12
RBM3650 Advanced Reproduction and
Development 1 12
RBM3960 Frontiers in Nutrition 2 12
Other electives 1 or 2 12
PSYCHOLOGY ELECTIVE UNIT OPTIONS
APP3015 Counselling theory and practice 12
APP3016 Group Behaviour 12
APP3018 Organisations and Work 12
APP3019 Psychobiology 12
APP3020 Psychoanalysis 12
APP3021 Psychology of adjustment 12
APP3025 Psychological assessment 12
Course Total 384
Arts elective units that can be substituted for Knowing and
Knowledge in first year (These are all at St Albans Campus)
ACC1047 Culture and Communication
ACC1048 Media, culture and society
ACL1001 Reading contemporary fiction
ACL1002 Studying poetry and poetics
ACP1053 Introduction to creative writing
ACP1054 Introduction to media writing
ACS1071 Spanish A: Basic Spanish 1
ACS1072 Spanish B: Basic Spanish 2
ACW1020 Sex and gender
ACW1021 Fashioning gender
ASS1012 Sociology 1A – Introduction to Australian society
and cultures
ASS1013 Sociology 1B – Issues in Australian Society
and Culture
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
41
SCHOOL OF COMPUTER SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS
The School of Computer Science and Mathematics offers
undergraduate courses leading to the award of:
• Bachelor of Science;
− Computer Science;
− Computer and Mathematical Sciences;
− Internet Technologies and Applications;
− Information Technology;
− Computational Financial Mathematics;
− Computer Science and Aviation;
• Bachelor of Science (Honours);
− Computer Science;
− Computer and Mathematical Sciences.
The School of Computer Science and Mathematics offers a number
of postgraduate and undergraduate programs in Computer Science
and Computer & Mathematical Sciences by course work and by
research.
Our courses equip graduates with the analytical ability, factual
knowledge and communication skills to enable them to work
effectively in business and industry. A significant feature of the
courses is the effort made to involve students in the solution of real
world problems.
Recent experience indicates that graduates can expect to find
employment in industry, commerce and government in areas such as
software engineering, programming, information systems, quality
management, statistical analysis, economic planning, systems
development, market research, production planning and secondary
teaching.
Graduates are eligible for membership of the Australian Computer
Society at the professional level (which is the highest possible level
for students). and the Institute of Mathematics and its Applications
(UK).
The School also offers Computer Science degree programs in Hong
Kong, Malaysia, and Sydney. Postgraduate programs in Computer
Science are also conducted in Hong Kong.
We invite you do spend some time on our web site to find out more
about the School and its staff, its courses and research interests.
Details of the School’s research activities and postgraduate degree
programs are described in the Postgraduate Studies section of the
Handbook.
The School has a large enrolment of both local and international
students. Some programs are offered offshore in Hong Kong and
other parts of Asia.
The Bachelor of Science awards have a large degree of
commonality of subjects in first year which facilitates possible
transfer between courses.
COMPUTER FACILITIES
The School has a number of computing laboratories for teaching
and research. These laboratories are equipped with the latest
equipment such as Pentium PCs, Unix workstations, and high speed
line printers and laser printers. Graphical user interfaces and menu-
driven interfaces are provided for easy access to services. Recent
acquisitions include multimedia facilities.
ARTICULATION PATHWAYS
Holders of a TAFE Associate Diploma in Information Technology
may be admitted into Year One of the School’s undergraduate
courses.
Special advanced admission provisions apply to certain overseas
Diploma and Higher Diploma qualifications.
ASSESSMENT
Assessment in subjects is designed to monitor a student’s progress
and achievement as well as contribute to and enhance their
learning. Normally a prescribed range of assessment methods is
employed in any subject.
Assessment is by a combination of written assignments, tests,
laboratory work and examinations.
Supplementary assessment is not normally available in any subject
except at the discretion of the Head of School in exceptional
circumstances.
Special Consideration in assessment may be granted on the grounds
defined by the University Statutes.
Guidelines on the use of electronic calculators and other electronic
storage devices in examinations are provided in individual subject
outlines distributed to students within the first two weeks of semester
and included on final examination papers.
Electronic calculators and other electronic storage devices will not be
permitted where the above provisions have not been made.
COURSE REGULATIONS
PROGRESS REGULATIONS
The Academic Progress Committee (Board of Examiners’ Meeting
will, at the end of each semester consider the results and progress of
all students enrolled in the courses.
Progression through each course is based on the following
guidelines:
(i) Where any compulsory subject must be repeated, enrolment in
that subject must be at the first opportunity following the initial
failure;
(ii) Students will not normally be allowed to enrol in any subject for
which at least a P grade has not been attained in any of the
prerequisite subjects;
(iii) Student enrolment will not normally be approved where the
total proposed subject hours exceeds the normal semester load.
COMPLETION BY COMPENSATION
No stage completions by compensation will be granted.
UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS
These regulations should be read in conjunction with the Victoria
University Statute 6.4.1 – Unsatisfactory Progress.
(i) The following shall constitute unsatisfactory progress:
(a) failure in at least 50 per cent of the assessed subjects for
which a student has enrolled in a semester of study;
(b) failure in any subject twice;
(c) transgression of a conditional enrolment stipulation and
agreement.
(ii) Where a student’s progress is unsatisfactory, the section
Academic Progress Committee may recommend the following:
(a) a restricted and conditional enrolment only be approved;
(b) exclusion from the course.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
42
(c) A student who wishes to appeal against the section’s
written recommendation is required to do so in accordance
with the University Statutes. The procedures to be followed
in lodging a submission, hearing of submissions and
communicating the results of hearings are set out in the
University Statutes.
(d) Excluded students have no right of re-admission to the
course from which they were excluded. Students who have
been excluded may apply for re-admission not less than
one calendar year from the date of the exclusion. Students
must provide, with their application, evidence of changed
circumstances which significantly improve the applicant’s
likelihood of academic success.
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
Graduates are eligible for membership of the Australian Computer
Society at the professional level.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN COMPUTER
SCIENCE
Course Code: SBCO
CRICOS No: 023700D
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN COMPUTER AND
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES
Course Code: SBCM
CRICOS No: 002814A
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The two programs both aim to provide graduates with the analytical
ability, factual knowledge and communication skills that will suit
them for employment in business and industry in one or more of the
following areas:
• computing: programming, software development, systems
design and analysis, applications development, technical
support.
• statistics: data analysis, quality improvement, market research,
forecasting, econometrics.
• operations research: production planning and scheduling,
simulation studies, transportation planning, resource allocation.
• financial modelling: investment analysis, project evaluation.
• secondary teaching: mathematics, computer science.
One of the most significant features of the courses is the attempt to
involve students in the solution of real world problems. Naturally,
problem-solving is a large component of all the subjects taught in the
course but, starting in the first year, special emphasis is placed on
problem formulation and report writing.
All students undertake at least one industry project in the third year
of the course. These projects tend to be related to problems
encountered in specific areas of the manufacturing industry, banking
or finance, government statutory authorities, or services such as
hospitals and local councils.
As evidenced by the high rate of job placement in the areas listed
above, graduates have been well-received in industry, commerce
and government.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course an applicant should have
successfully completed Year 12 of the Victorian Certificate of
Education (VCE), with a study score of at least 20 in English and 22
in Mathematical Methods, or have the equivalent of these
qualifications. Completing Specialist Mathematics leads to an
ENTER score 3 points higher.
Alternatively, entry is via TAFE articulation or under mature age
provisions.
COURSE DURATION
The courses are offered on a full-time basis over three years. Summer
evening subjects are also offered to assist these students to complete
their studies.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Semester Points
COMPUTER SCIENCE
Year 1
ACE1145 CSM English Language and
Communication (if needed) – this
replaces RCM1613 in Semester One 1 12
RCM1115 Computer Systems & Architecture 1 12
RCM1311 Programming 1 1 12
RCM1613 Applied Statistics 1 1 12
RCM1711 Mathematical Foundations 1 1 12
RCM1114 Introduction to Computing
and the Internet
or
RCM1614 Applied Statistics 2 2 12
RCM1211 Database Systems 1 2 12
RCM1312 Programming 2 2 12
RCM1613 Applied Statistics 1 2 12
(for those that did ACE1145 in
Semester One and this replaces the
1st year elective)
RCM1713 Discrete Mathematics 2 12
Year 2
RCM2312 Software Engineering 1 1 12
Three electives from lists A, B or C
below (each worth 12 credit points) 1 36
Four electives from lists A, B or C
below (each worth 12 credit points) 2 48
Year 3
ACE3145 CSM Professional Communication 1 12
RCM3001 Project 1 1 12
Two electives from lists A, B or C
below (each worth 12 credit points) 1 24
RCM3002 Project 2 2 12
Three electives from lists A, B or C
below (each worth 12 credit points) 2 36
LIST A
RCM2111 Data Communications and Networks 1
RCM2112 Operating Systems
RCM2113 Multimedia Systems Design
RCM2213 Computer Graphics
RCM2218 Database Systems 2
RCM2311 Object Oriented Programming 1
RCM2313 Software Development
RCM2315 Advanced Programming
RCM2316 Network Operating Systems Administration
RCM2810 Advanced Internet Programming
RCM2930 3D Web Technologies
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
43
LIST B
RCM3111 Data Communications & Networks 2
RCM3112 User Interface Design
RCM3115 Architectures for Enterprise Wide Computing
RCM3211 Database Systems 3
RCM3311 Object Oriented Programming 2
RCM3312 Intelligent Systems
RCM3313 Software Engineering 2
RCM3314 Object Oriented Analysis and Design
RCM3820 Internet Computing using XML
RCM3950 Internet Data Management
RCM3960 Internet Security
RCM3970 Computer Graphics for Game Programming
LIST C
RCM1712 Mathematical Foundations 2
RCM2321 Mathematics of Continuous Processes B
RCM2511 Image Processing 1
RCM2611 Linear Statistical Models
RCM2612 Forecasting
RCM2614 Statistical Data Mining
RCM2712 Mathematics of Continuous Processes A
RCM2713 Modelling for Decision Making
RCM2911 Linear Optimisation Modelling
RCM2912 Project Scheduling
RCM2915 Stochastic and Combinatorial Optimisation
RCM3511 Image Processing 2
RCM3611 Regression Analysis
RCM3613 Time Series Analysis
RCM3615 Multivariate Statistics
RCM3617 Quality Improvement and Experimental Design
RCM3711 Computational Methods
RCM3720 Cryptography, Computer and Network Security
RCM3911 Simulation
To qualify for the award of Bachelor of Science in Computer
Science, a total of 288 credit points are needed. No stage
completions exist for this course.
Additionally, students must complete a minimum of 3 subjects from
List A and 5 subjects from List B.
COMPUTER AND MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES
Credit
Semester Points
Year 1
ACE1145 CSM English Language and
Communication (if needed) – this
replaces RCM1613 in Semester One 1 12
RCM1115 Computer Systems & Architecture 1 12
RCM1311 Programming 1 1 12
RCM1613 Applied Statistics 1 1 12
RCM1711 Mathematical Foundations 1 1 12
RCM1211 Database Systems 1 2 12
RCM1312 Programming 2 2 12
RCM1614 Applied Statistics 2 2 12
RCM1712 Mathematical Foundations 2 2 12
RCM1613 Applied Statistics 1 2 12
(for those that did ACE1145 in Semester One and this
replaces the 1st year elective)
Year 2
RCM2312 Software Engineering 1 1 12
RCM2611 Linear Statistical Models 1 12
One elective from list B below 1 12
One elective from lists A, B, C or D below
(each worth 12 credit points) 1 12
RCM2713 Modelling for Decision Making 2 12
One elective from list B below 2 12
Two electives from list A, B, C, or D below
(each worth 12 credit points) 2 24
Year 3
ACE3145 CSM Professional Communication 1 12
RCM3001 Project 1 1 12
One elective from list D below 1 12
One elective from list C or D below 1 12
RCM3002 Project 2 2 12
Two electives from lists C or D below
(each worth 12 credit points) 2 24
One elective from list D below 2 12
LIST A
RCM2111 Data Communications and Networks 1
RCM2112 Operating Systems
RCM2113 Multimedia Systems Design
RCM2213 Computer Graphics
RCM2218 Database Systems 2
RCM2311 Object Oriented Programming 1
RCM2313 Software Development
RCM2315 Advanced Programming
RCM2316 Network Operating Systems Administration
RCM2810 Advanced Internet Programming
RCM2930 3D Web Technologies
LIST B
RCM2321 Mathematics of Continuous Processes B
RCM2511 Image Processing 1
RCM2612 Forecasting
RCM2614 Statistical Data Mining
RCM2712 Mathematics of Continuous Processes A
RCM2911 Linear Optimisation Modelling
RCM2912 Project Scheduling
LIST C
RCM3111 Data Communications & Networks 2
RCM3112 User Interface Design
RCM3115 Architectures for Enterprise Wide Computing
RCM3211 Database Systems 3
RCM3311 Object Oriented Programming 2
RCM3312 Intelligent Systems
RCM3313 Software Engineering 2
RCM3314 Object Oriented Analysis and Design
RCM3820 Internet Computing using XML
RCM3950 Internet Data Management
RCM3960 Internet Security
RCM3970 Computer Graphics for Game Programming
LIST D
RCM3311 Advanced Mathematical Techniques
RCM3413 Financial Modelling
RCM3511 Image Processing 2
RCM3611 Regression Analysis
RCM3613 Time Series Analysis
RCM3615 Multivariate Statistics
RCM3617 Quality Improvement and Experimental Design
RCM3711 Computational Methods
RCM3720 Cryptography, Computer and Network Security
RCM3911 Simulation
RCM3940 Computational Risk Modelling
To qualify for the award of Bachelor of Science in Computer and
Mathematical Science, a total of 288 credit points are needed. No
stage completions exist for this course.
ASSESSMENT
Assessment for each subject is detailed in the subject listings.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
44
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN INTERNET
TECHNOLOGIES AND APPLICATIONS
Course Code: SBIA
CRICOS No: 052405D
COURSE OBJECTIVES
Internet and web-based computing has in recent years assumed a
huge importance in industry, for theoretical and applied computer
science, and research.
This course has been established to provide students with the
fundamental background for the development and maintenance of
Internet and web-based services. A new Internet Technologies and
Applications Research Lab has been established recently to support
academic and research activities in the areas.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over three years full-time and part-time
equivalent.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course an applicant should have
successfully completed Year 12 of the Victorian Certificate of
Education (VCE), with a study score of at least 20 in English and 22
in Mathematical Methods or have the equivalent of these
qualifications.
Alternatively, entry is via TAFE articulation or under mature age
provisions.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Semester Points
Year 1
ACE1145 CSM English Language and
Communication (if needed) – this
replaces RCM1613 in Semester One 1 12
RCM1115 Computer Systems & Architecture 1 12
RCM1311 Programming 1 1 12
RCM1613 Applied Statistics 1 1 12
RCM1711 Mathematical Foundations 1 1 12
RCM1312 Programming 2 2 12
RCM1114 Introduction to Computing
and the Internet
or
RCM1614 Applied Statistics 2 2 12
RCM1211 Database Systems 1 2 12
RCM1713 Discrete Mathematics 2 12
RCM1613 Applied Statistics 1 2 12
(for those that did ACE1145 in
Semester One and this replaces the
1st year elective)
Year 2
RCM2112 Operating Systems 1 12
RCM2311 Object Oriented Programming 1 1 12
RCM2312 Software Engineering 1 1 12
One subject from lists A, B or C below
(each worth 12 credit points) 1 12
RCM2111 Data Communications and
Networks 1 2 12
RCM2810 Advanced Internet Programming 2 12
RCM2313 Software Development 2 12
One subject from lists A, B or C
below (each worth 12 credit points) 2 12
Year 3
ACE3145 CSM Professional Communication 1 12
RCM3001 Project 1 1 12
RCM3820 Internet Computing using XML 1 12
One subject from lists A, B or C below
(each worth 12 credit points) 1 12
RCM3002 Project 2 2 12
RCM3960 Internet Security 2 12
RCM3950 Internet Data Management 2 12
One subject from lists A, B or C below
(each worth 12 credit points) 2 12
LIST A
RCM2111 Data Communications and Networks 1
RCM2112 Operating Systems
RCM2113 Multimedia Systems Design
RCM2213 Computer Graphics
RCM2218 Database Systems 2
RCM2311 Object Oriented Programming 1
RCM2313 Software Development
RCM2315 Advanced Programming
RCM2316 Network Operating Systems Administration
RCM2810 Advanced Internet Programming
RCM2930 3D Web Technologies
LIST B
RCM3111 Data Communications & Networks 2
RCM3112 User Interface Design
RCM3115 Architectures for Enterprise Wide Computing
RCM3211 Database Systems 3
RCM3311 Object Oriented Programming 2
RCM3312 Intelligent Systems
RCM3313 Software Engineering 2
RCM3314 Object Oriented Analysis and Design
RCM3820 Internet Computing using XML
RCM3950 Internet Data Management
RCM3960 Internet Security
RCM3970 Computer Graphics for Game Programming
LIST C
RCM1712 Mathematical Foundations 2
RCM2511 Image Processing 1
RCM2611 Linear Statistical Models
RCM2612 Forecasting
RCM2614 Statistical Data Mining
RCM2712 Mathematics of Continuous Processes A
RCM2713 Modelling for Decision Making
RCM2911 Linear Optimisation Modelling
RCM2912 Project Scheduling
RCM2915 Stochastic and Combinatorial Optimisation
RCM3511 Image Processing 2
RCM3611 Regression Analysis
RCM3613 Time Series Analysis
RCM3615 Multivariate Statistics
RCM3617 Quality Improvement and Experimental Design
RCM3711 Computational Methods
RCM3720 Cryptography, Computer and Network Security
RCM3911 Simulation
To qualify for the award of Bachelor of Science in Internet
Technologies and Applications, a total of 288 credit points are
needed. No stage completions exist for this course.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
45
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN INFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY
Course Code: SBIT
CRICOS No: 052403F
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course aims to equip students with the skills required to deal
with advanced data processing. Students will develop skills and
conceptual understanding needed to design, install, configure and
manage various advanced data management technologies, and to
develop data management processes at both the intranet and
Internet level for modern organizations and enterprises.
On completion of the course, students will:
• have acquired skills in the development of database
applications such as relational, object-oriented and multimedia
systems;
• be familiar with online transaction and application processing;
• be able to design, install, configure and maintain various data
storage systems;
• have a sound understanding and competence in the use of
technologies that are utilised in data warehousing and data
mining;
• have a sound understanding of distributed systems, including
the ability to establish and maintain data storage strategies
within local area networks, wide area networks, and across the
Internet.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over three years full-time and part-time
equivalent.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course an applicant should have
successfully completed Year 12 of the Victorian Certificate of
Education (VCE), with a study score of at least 20 in English and
22 in Mathematical Methods or have the equivalent of these
qualifications.
Alternatively, entry is via TAFE articulation or under mature age
provisions.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Semester Points
Year 1
ACE1145 CSM English Language and Communication
(if needed) – this replaces RCM1613 in
Semester One 1 12
RCM1115 Computer Systems & Architecture 1 12
RCM1311 Programming 1 1 12
RCM1613 Applied Statistics 1 1 12
RCM1711 Mathematical Foundations 1 1 12
RCM1312 Programming 2 2 12
RCM1114 Introduction to Computing and the Internet or
RCM1614 Applied Statistics 2 2 12
RCM1211 Database Systems 1 2 12
RCM1713 Discrete Mathematics 2 12
RCM1613 Applied Statistics 1 2 12
(for those that did ACE1145 in Semester One and this
replaces the 1st year elective)
Year 2
RCM2112 Operating Systems 1 12
RCM2311 Object Oriented Programming 1 1 12
RCM2312 Software Engineering 1 1 12
One subject from lists A, B or C below
(each worth 12 credit points) 1 12
RCM2111 Data Communications and Networks 1 2 12
RCM2218 Database Systems 2 2 12
RCM2313 Software Development 2 12
One subject from lists A, B or C below
(each worth 12 credit points) 2 12
Year 3
ACE3145 CSM Professional Communication 1 12
RCM3001 Project 1 1 12
RCM3314 Object Oriented Analysis & Design 1 12
One subject from lists A, B or C below
(each worth 12 credit points) 1 12
RCM3002 Project 2 2 12
RCM3312 Intelligent Systems 2 12
RCM3313 Software Engineering 2 2 12
One subject from lists A, B or C below
(each worth 12 credit points) 2 12
LIST A
RCM2111 Data Communications & Networks 1
RCM2112 Operating Systems
RCM2113 Multimedia Systems Design
RCM2213 Computer Graphics
RCM2218 Database Systems 2
RCM2311 Object Oriented Programming 1
RCM2313 Software Development
RCM2315 Advanced Programming
RCM2316 Network Operating Systems Administration
RCM2810 Advanced Internet Programming
RCM2930 3D Web Technologies
LIST B
RCM3111 Data Communications & Networks 2
RCM3112 User Interface Design
RCM3115 Architectures for Enterprise Wide Computing
RCM3211 Database Systems 3
RCM3311 Object Oriented Programming 2
RCM3312 Intelligent Systems
RCM3313 Software Engineering 2
RCM3314 Object Oriented Analysis and Design
RCM3820 Internet Computing using XML
RCM3950 Internet Data Management
RCM3960 Internet Security
RCM3970 Computer Graphics for Game Programming
LIST C
RCM1712 Mathematical Foundations 2
RCM2511 Image Processing 1
RCM2611 Linear Statistical Models
RCM2612 Forecasting
RCM2614 Statistical Data Mining
RCM2712 Mathematics of Continuous Processes A
RCM2713 Modelling for Decision Making
RCM2911 Linear Optimisation Modelling
RCM2912 Project Scheduling
RCM2915 Stochastic and Combinatorial Optimisation
RCM3511 Image Processing 2
RCM3611 Regression Analysis
RCM3613 Time Series Analysis
RCM3615 Multivariate Statistics
RCM3617 Quality Improvement and Experimental Design
RCM3711 Computational Methods
RCM3720 Cryptography, Computer and Network Security
RCM3911 Simulation
To qualify for the award of Bachelor of Science in Information
Technology, a total of 288 credit points are needed. No stage
completions exist for this course. Additionally, students must
complete a minimum of two electives from List B.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
46
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN COMPUTATIONAL
FINANCIAL MATHEMATICS
Course Code: SBCF
CRICOS No: 052404E
COURSE OBJECTIVES
A great many businesses in the unpredictable world of commerce
employ sophisticated and computationally intensive mathematical
tools to help corporations determine strategies for market trading
and risk profiling. As a result, virtually all major banking, investment
and energy companies employ graduates with expertise in
mathematics and/or computing.
This course is designed to address this demand by coupling a
program in computing and mathematical sciences with a focus on
finance and risk management. There is no other undergraduate
course in the country, and indeed very few internationally, that seeks
to combine Finance with both the disciplines of Computer Science
and the Mathematical Sciences in this way.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over three years full-time and part-time
equivalent.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course an applicant should have
successfully completed Year 12 of the Victorian Certificate of
Education (VCE), with a study score of at least 20 in English and
22 in Mathematical Methods or have the equivalent of these
qualifications.
Alternatively, entry is via TAFE articulation or under mature age
provisions.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Semester Points
Year 1
BAO1101 Accounting for Decision Making 1 12
RCM1311 Programming 1 1 12
RCM1711 Mathematical Foundations 1 1 12
RCM1613 Applied Statistics 1 1 12
or
ACE1145 CSM English Language and
Communication
Instead of RCM1613 for
those requiring English
RCM1211 Database Systems 1 2 12
RCM1312 Programming 2 2 12
RCM1712 Mathematical Foundations 2 2 12
RCM1614 Applied Statistics 2 2 12
or
*RCM1613 Applied Statistics 1 2 12
*For those doing ACE1145 in
Semester One, RCM1614 to be taken
over summer semester.
Year 2
RCM2312 Software Engineering 1 1 12
RCM2612 Forecasting 1 12
RCM2712 Mathematics of Continuous
Processes A 1 12
One elective from list A 1 12
RCM2611 Linear Statistical Models 2 12
RCM2713 Modelling for Decision Making 2 12
RCM2321 Mathematics of Continuous
Processes B 2 12
One elective from list A 2 12
Year 3
ACE3145 CSM Professional Communication 1 12
RCM3413 Financial Modelling 1 12
RCM3001 Project 1 (Financial Computing) 1 12
One elective from list B or list C 1 12
RCM3002 Project 2 (Financial Computing) 2 12
RCM3711 Computational Methods 2 12
One elective from list B 2 12
One elective from list C 2 12
LIST A
RCM2111 Data Communications and Networks
RCM2218 Database Systems 2
RCM2311 Object Oriented Programming 1
RCM2313 Software Development
RCM2315 Advanced Programming
RCM2614 Statistical Data Mining
RCM2810 Advanced Internet Programming
RCM2911 Linear Optimization Modelling
RCM2912 Project Scheduling
RCM3112 User Interface Design
RCM3311 Object Oriented Programming 2
LIST B
RCM3316 Advanced Mathematical Techniques
RCM3613 Time Series Analysis
RCM3615 Multivariate Statistics
RCM3720 Cryptography, Computer and Network Security
RCM3911 Simulation
LIST C
BAO3307 Corporate Finance
BAO3403 Investment Portfolio Analysis
RCM3940 Computational Risk Modelling
To qualify for the award of Bachelor of Science in Computational
Financial Mathematics, a total of 288 credit points are needed. No
stage completions exist for this course.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN COMPUTER
SCIENCE AND AVIATION
Course Code: SBCA
CRICOS No: 023702B
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The Bachelor of Science in Computer Science and Aviation aims to
provide participants with:
• a practical and applied approach to the concepts of computer
science and aviation;
• a range of skills in computer science, the mathematical sciences
and aeronautical theory subjects at a level sufficient to satisfy
the requirements for the issue of a Commercial Pilot’s Licence
(CPL), and Instrument Rating.
The specific aims of the course are to provide students with the
opportunity to:
• obtain level two accreditation from the Australian Computer
Society (ACS) by passing all compulsory computer science
subjects, and thus gaining professional recognition;
• develop skills and competence in aviation theory. The course is
structured so that students can integrate practical flying training
along with their academic studies and if choosing to do so and
following the guidelines given, will complete the degree at the
same time as qualifying for the issue of a Commercial Pilot’s
Licence (CPL) and Command Instrument Rating.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
47
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over three years full-time and part-time
equivalent.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
ORDINARY ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course an applicant should have
successfully completed Year 12 of the Victorian Certificate of
Education (VCE), with a study score of at least 20 in English and 22
in Mathematical Methods, or have the equivalent of these
qualifications. Completing Specialist Mathematics leads to an
ENTER score 3 points higher.
Alternatively, entry is via TAFE articulation or under mature age
provisions. In addition, students must pass the prescribed medical
examination conducted by a Civil Aviation Safety Authority-
Approved Aviation Medical Examiner in order to be permitted to
commence flying training.
Applicants may be interviewed. Consideration by a Faculty panel
may be given to relevant work experience, and any other activities
undertaken demonstrating ability to achieve in this course.
ADVANCED STANDING
Applicants entering with a Private Pilot’s License or higher will be
given full credit for completed aviation subjects and can join the
course with advanced standing provided they meet the admission
requirements. The course provides existing pilots the opportunity to
upgrade their non-flying skills as well as providing them with a
degree qualification which is likely to be necessary if they are to
further their career in the aviation industry.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Semester Points
Year 1
RCA1010 Introductory Aviation 1 12
RCM1115 Computer Systems & Architecture 1 12
RCM1311 Programming 1 1 12
RCM1711 Mathematical Foundations 1 1 12
RCM1114 Introduction to Computing and
the Internet 2 12
RCM1312 RCM 1312 Programming 2 2 12
RCM1713 Discrete Mathematics 2 12
RCA1020 Basic Aeronautical Knowledge 2 12
Year 2
RCA2020 Meteorology and Human
Factors for the CPL 1 12
RCA2030 Navigation and Flight law
for the CPL 1 12
RCM2312 Software Engineering 1 12
One computing elective from
the list below 1 12
RCA2040 Aerodynamics for the CPL 2 12
RCA2050 Aircraft General Knowledge
for the CPL 2 12
RCA2060 Operations Performance and
Flight Planning for the CPL 2 12
RCM1211 Database Systems 1 2 12
Year 3
ACE3145 CSM Professional Communication 1 12
RCA3010 Instrument Rating (IREX) 1 12
RCA3030 Meteorology and Human Factors
for the ATPL 1 12
RCA3040 Flight Planning for the ATPL 1 12
RCA3050 Navigation & Air law for the ATPL 2 12
RCA3060 Aerodynamics and Aircraft Systems
for the ATPL 2 12
RCA3070 Performance and Loading
for the ATPL3 2 12
RCA3080 One computing elective from
the list below 2 12
Computing Electives
RCM2111 Data Communications & Networks 1
RCM2112 Operating Systems
RCM2113 Multimedia Systems Design
RCM2213 Computer Graphics
RCM2311 Object Oriented Programming 1
RCM2313 Software Development
RCM2810 Advanced Internet Programming
RCM2930 3D Web Technologies
RCM3960 Internet Security
To qualify for the award of Bachelor of Science in Computer
Science and Aviation, a total of 288 credit points are needed. No
stage completions exist for this course.
ASSESSMENT
The assessment for each subject is detailed in the subject listing.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (HONOURS) IN
COMPUTER SCIENCE
Course Code: SHCS
Students who do exceptionally well in their degree studies may be
given the opportunity to gain an Honours degree by completing a
fourth year of study in a specific field. This year is designed to assist
students who may wish to proceed to higher degrees by research,
but it also enables students to concentrate their studies more
intensely on areas of particular interest.
The Honours year requires students to select coursework units from
one of the fields of Computer Science, Statistics, and Operations
Research. As well, a minor thesis must be completed.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Semester Points
RCM6106 Thesis (4 units) 1 24
RCM6827 Research Perspectives in 1 12
Computer Science
1 approved Computer
Science elective 1 12
RCM6107 Thesis (4 units) 2 24
2 approved Computer Science electives 2 24
Total 96
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
48
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (HONOURS) IN
COMPUTER AND MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES
Course Code: SHCM
Students who do exceptionally well in their degree studies may be
given the opportunity to gain an Honours degree by completing a
fourth year of study in a specific field. This year is designed to assist
students who may wish to proceed to higher degrees by research,
but it also enables students to concentrate their studies more
intensely on areas of particular interest.
The Honours year requires students to select coursework units from
one of the fields of Computer Science, Statistics, and Operations
Research. As well, a minor thesis must be completed.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Semester Points
RCM6106 Thesis(4 units) 1 24
1 approved Maths/Stats elective 1 12
RCM6107 Thesis(4 units) 2 24
RCM6827 Research Perspectives in 2 12
Computer Science
1 approved Maths/Stats elective 2 12
1 approved Maths/Stats elective 2 12
Total 96
INTERNATIONAL PROGRAMS: OFFSHORE
PROGRAM CONDUCTED IN HONG KONG
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN COMPUTER
SCIENCE
Course Code: SBCO
COURSE OBJECTIVES
This course specifically caters for part-time students in Hong Kong
who wish to obtain a professional qualification in Computer Science.
The course aims to produce graduates who have a sound
conceptual foundation including practical understanding of recent
developments in computer science and how computer science based
techniques may be applied to solve a wide range of problems in
business and industry.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Students are admitted at either level 1 or level 2.
LEVEL 1
Applicants should have a certificate (or equivalent) qualification with
a quantitative background.
LEVEL 2
Applicants should have qualifications in Engineering, Science or
Computing at the Higher Certificate (or equivalent) level.
COURSE REGULATIONS
Students entering the program at level 1 are required to obtain a
pass in at least fifteen subjects. Students entering the program at
level 2 are required to obtain a pass in at least eleven subjects.
Assessment throughout the course consists of tests, assignments,
project work and end of semester examinations.
Regulations also include:
(i) A student cannot enrol in any subject without having passed the
prerequisite;
(ii) A student cannot undertake a project without having completed
what the Academic Committee considers to be a suitable
academic preparation;
(iii) The following shall constitute unsatisfactory progress.
(a) failure in 100 per cent of enrolled subjects.
(b) failure in any subject twice. (Failures in any examination
and subsequent supplementary examination will be
considered as having failed the subject once.)
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN INFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY
Course Code: SBIT
COURSE OBJECTIVES
This course specifically caters for part-time students in Hong Kong
who wish to obtain a professional qualification in Information
Technology.
The course aims to produce graduates who have a sound conceptual
foundation including practical understanding of recent developments
in Information Technology and how Information Technology based
techniques may be applied to solve a wide range of problems in
business and industry.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Students are admitted at either level 1 or level 2
LEVEL 1
Applicants should have a certificate (or equivalent) qualification with
a quantitative background.
LEVEL 2
Applicants should have qualifications in Engineering, Science or
Computing at the Higher Certificate (or equivalent) level.
COURSE REGULATIONS
Students entering the program at level 1 are required to obtain a
pass in at least fifteen subjects. Students entering the program at
level 2 are required to obtain a pass in at least eleven subjects.
Assessment throughout the course consists of tests, assignments,
project work and end of semester examinations.
Regulations also include:
(i) A student cannot enrol in any subject without having passed the
prerequisite;
(ii) A student cannot undertake a project without having completed
what the Academic Committee considers to be a suitable
academic preparation;
(iii) The following shall constitute unsatisfactory progress.
(a) failure in 100 per cent of enrolled subjects.
(b) failure in any subject twice. (Failures in any examination
and subsequent supplementary examination will be
considered as having failed the subject once.)
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN INTERNET
TECHNOLOGIES AND APPLICATIONS
Course Code: SBIA
COURSE OBJECTIVES
This course specifically caters for part-time students in Hong Kong
who wish to obtain a professional qualification in Internet
Technology.
The course aims to produce graduates who have a sound
conceptual foundation including practical understanding of recent
developments in Internet Technology and how Internet Technology
based techniques may be applied to solve a wide range of
problems in business and industry.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
49
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Students are admitted at either level 1 or level 2
LEVEL 1
Applicants should have a certificate (or equivalent) qualification with
a quantitative background.
LEVEL 2
Applicants should have qualifications in Engineering, Science or
Computing at the Higher Certificate (or equivalent) level.
COURSE REGULATIONS
Students entering the program at level 1 are required to obtain a
pass in at least fifteen subjects. Students entering the program at
level 2 are required to obtain a pass in at least eleven subjects.
Assessment throughout the course consists of tests, assignments,
project work and end of semester examinations.
Regulations also include:
(i) A student cannot enrol in any subject without having passed the
prerequisite;
(ii) A student cannot undertake a project without having completed
what the Academic Committee considers to be a suitable
academic preparation;
(iii) The following shall constitute unsatisfactory progress.
(a) failure in 100 per cent of enrolled subjects.
(b) failure in any subject twice. (Failures in any examination
and subsequent supplementary examination will be
considered as having failed the subject once.)
OFFSHORE PROGRAM CONDUCTED IN
MALAYSIA
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN COMPUTER
SCIENCE
Course Code: SBCO
The Bachelor of Science in Computer Science course is offered as
an advanced standing program in conjunction with Sunway
University College in Malaysia. Suitably qualified students (as
determined by the School) are able to complete the final year of the
course in Malaysia.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN INTERNET
TECHNOLOGIES AND APPLICATIONS
Course Code: SBIA
The Bachelor of Science in Internet Technologies and Applications
course is offered as an advanced standing program in conjunction
with Sunway College in Malaysia. Suitably qualified students (as
determined by the School) are able to complete the final year of the
course in Malaysia.
EXTERNAL PROGRAM CONDUCTED IN
SYDNEY
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN COMPUTER
SCIENCE
Course Code: SBCO
The program is offered at Alpha Beta Colleges in Sydney. The
normal entry level is an approved Advanced Diploma of IT (or
equivalent) which is normally of eighteen months duration.
Graduates of such approved programs will be granted subject
exemption equivalent to twelve months (two semesters) of study.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
50
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
51
SCHOOL OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
The School of Electrical Engineering offers undergraduate courses
leading to the award of:
• Bachelor of Engineering in;
− Electrical and Electronic Engineering;
• Bachelor of Engineering Science in;
− Electrical and Electronic Engineering.
The School of Electrical Engineering offers a comprehensive portfolio
of undergraduate, postgraduate and research study programs in the
fields of applied physics, electrical and electronic engineering and
photonics. From 2006 our undergraduate courses will be taught
using a Problem Based Learning (PBL) methodology. This is a
teaching and learning paradigm which actively engages students in
the solution of ‘real world’ problems. Through the solution of these
problems the students are guided to learn the necessary technical
and non-technical skills which are essential for professional
engineers. Experience has shown that the exciting challenges posed
by the PBL problems motivates students to achieve higher levels of
success than they might have otherwise accomplished. The new PBL
courses will be rolled out progressively with first year starting in
2006, second year in 2007 and so on.
All courses are designed to have a strong practical bias and include
a significant amount of ‘hands-on’ project work component. They
are taught in laboratories with modern equipment and computing
facilities. As a result, our graduates are highly regarded and sought
after by industry.
Details of the School’s research activities and postgraduate degree
programs are described in the Postgraduate Studies section of the
Handbook.
The School has a large enrolment of both local and international
students.
The Engineering awards have a common first semesters.
The Bachelor of Engineering Science course is of three years
duration and the Bachelor of Engineering course is four years.
DEGREE WITH HONOURS
A Degree with Honours Program is offered concurrently with the
fourth year of the ordinary Bachelor of Engineering program.
Normally, students entering the final year of a full-time Bachelor of
Engineering program (or its equivalent in part-time mode), will be
offered honours candidacy, if they have achieved a minimum hour
weighted average of 60 per cent over year levels 1 to 3, have not
repeated a subject through levels 1 to 3 and have not been granted
more than one stage completion by compensation throughout the
duration of the course. Fourth year honours degree gradings will be
determined by the relevant Examiners Board on the basis of the hour
weighted average for year level 4.
COMPUTER FACILITIES
The School has a number of computing laboratories for teaching
and research. These laboratories are equipped with the latest
equipment such as Pentium PCs, Unix workstations, and high speed
line printers and laser printers. Graphical user interfaces and menu-
driven interfaces are provided for easy access to services.
RESEARCH
The School's research activities are quite varied, and attract
significant government and private funding. Current research areas
include:
• telecommunication;
• microelectronics;
• optical technology;
• automation and energy systems.
Additional research in the School reflects staff expertise that spans
electrical and electronic engineering and applied physics.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Admission to the course will be governed by the University
Regulations for undergraduate courses as set out in the Faculty of
Health, Engineering and Science Handbook in either of the
categories of Normal Entry or Alternative Category Entry.
The prerequisite subjects for admission into the first year of the
course are based on entry at post Year 12, Victorian Certificate of
Education, or equivalent level, and are as follows.
PREREQUISITES UNITS 1 AND 2
Physics
PREREQUISITES UNITS 3 AND 4
Mathematical Methods or Specialist Mathematics, English
MIDDLE BAND SELECTION
Completing Physics and/or Specialist Mathematics gives an ENTER
3 points higher per study.
ADMISSION AT OTHER LEVELS
Full-fee paying international students must have qualifications which
are equivalent to those listed above. In addition, they must provide
evidence of proficiency in the English language:
• IELTS – an overall band score of 6+, subject to individual
profile; or
• TOEFL – a score of 550+, and a test of written English (TWE)
score of 5+.
ARTICULATION PATHWAYS
Holders of a TAFE Associate Diploma in Electronics (with
appropriate mathematics and results at Distinction level) may be
admitted into Year One of the School’s undergraduate courses. If
the TAFE Associate Diploma has been completed at High Distinction
level, advanced admission to Year Two may be considered.
Special advanced admission provisions apply to certain overseas
Diploma and Higher Diploma qualifications.
ASSESSMENT
Assessment in subjects is designed to monitor a student’s progress
and achievement as well as contribute to and enhance their
learning. Normally a prescribed range of assessment methods is
employed in any subject.
Assessment is by a combination of written assignments, tests,
laboratory work and examinations.
Assessment in PBL components is by means of a portfolio. Students
keep a journal of their learning experiences through the solution of
the problems which they have been set. Students demonstrate the
satisfactory achievement of the various learning outcomes
associated with problems.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
52
Supplementary assessment is not normally available in any subject
except at the discretion of the Head of School in exceptional
circumstances.
Special Consideration in assessment may be granted on the grounds
defined by the University Statutes.
Guidelines on the use of electronic calculators and other electronic
storage devices in examinations are provided in individual subject
outlines distributed to students within the first two weeks of semester
and included on final examination papers.
Electronic calculators and other electronic storage devices will not
be permitted where the above provisions have not been made.
The assessment of each subject is detailed in the subject listings.
COURSE REGULATIONS
PROGRESSION AND EXCLUSION
Each Engineering undergraduate course is specified as a unique set
of course subjects. The sequence in which these course subjects are
normally studied is specified, firstly, by grouping them in course
years and secondly, by specifying prerequisites and/or co-requisites
for some subjects.
Normally, all of the course subjects in a particular course year
should be completed and all prerequisite/co-requisite requirements
satisfied before enrolment will be permitted in any subject in a
subsequent course year. Enrolment in subjects spanning more than
two course years is not permitted.
In order to satisfy the academic requirements for a course award, all
course subjects must be completed. Such completion may be
obtained by:
(a) being granted exemption in either individual subjects or in
course years; and/or
(b) achieving a grade of P (or higher) in the assessment of each
subject; and/or
(c) being granted compensation in course years.
A stage grading of ‘Year Completed by Compensation’ may be
granted if a student:
(i) has been given final grades in all subjects in the course year;
and
(ii) has passed subjects equivalent to more than 80 per cent of total
required semester hours for that course year with no assessment
at less than N1 grade; and
(iii) has achieved an hour-weighted average mark of at least 50 per
cent for all subjects in the year.
A grading of ‘Year Completed by Compensation’ recognises an
acceptable overall result but does not constitute a pass in any
individual failed subject.
Students who do not satisfy the requirements for a ‘Year Completed
by Compensation’ must repeat all failed subjects of that year (or their
equivalents) at the earliest opportunity.
Normally, gradings of ‘Year Completed by Compensation’ will not
be granted in consecutive years of a course.
Normal progress through a course requires a student to complete
any defined course year within one year of equivalent full-time
enrolment.
Any of the following may be considered to constitute unsatisfactory
progress by a student:
(i) failure in any subject or unit for the third time;
(ii) failure in any subject or unit at N2 level for the second time;
(iii) failure in 50 per cent or more of their assessed enrolment load
in any semester or calendar year of study;
(iv) failure to complete any two consecutive course years within
three years of equivalent full-time enrolment;
(v) failure to complete the course within the maximum period
defined by University Statute;
(vi) failure to meet a conditional enrolment agreement.
As otherwise defined by University Statute and subject to being
invited to show cause, a student making unsatisfactory progress will
normally be recommended for exclusion from the course.
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
All current courses are recognised by Engineers Australia and all
new courses are in the process of being submitted for recognition.
The new courses place much more significance on the ‘Professional
Engineering Graduate Attributes’ required by industry and
necessary to ensure accreditation for the courses and professional
recognition and corporate membership for the graduates by
Engineers Australia.
The graduate attributes of Engineers Australia closely align with
those of the University. The PBL model will enhance industry’s
acceptance of the courses and should virtually ensure recognition
and accreditation by Engineers Australia and other professional
bodies such as the Institution of Radio and Electronics Engineers,
Australia, The Australian Computer Society, the British Computer
Society, the Institution of Electrical Engineers (UK) the Institution of
Electrical and Electronic Engineers (USA), the Australian Institute of
Physics, the Institute of Engineers, Malaysia and other bodies which
are parties to the ‘Washington Accreditation’.
INDUSTRIAL EXPERIENCE
Candidates applying for the award of an engineering degree must
ensure that they have submitted for approval evidence of having
undertaken a minimum of 12 weeks industrial experience relevant to
the course to satisfy Engineers Australia requirements.
BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING IN ELECTRICAL
AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
Course Code: EBEE
CRICOS No: 002860F
The Bachelor of Engineering in Electrical and Electronic Engineering
is a flexible degree that allows students to specialise in a wide range
of disciplinary areas such as Computer Engineering, Software
Engineering, Microelectronic Systems, Telecommunications, Power
Systems Engineering, Control Systems, Photonics, Robotics and
Automation.
The first two years of the course develop the basic concepts in
electrical and electronic engineering, computer systems and
programming, together with related engineering sciences,
mathematics, design projects and laboratory studies. Students have
the opportunity to choose their field of specialisation in later years of
the course.
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The main objectives of the course are to: provide an integrated
foundation for electrical disciplinary studies and course
specialisation into the particular areas of communication, computer,
control, electronic and power engineering; develop attitudes of
personal initiative and enquiry in students that may continue to
further education and meet the technological changes in their
profession; develop oral and written communications and an
understanding of society and the engineer’s role in society; provide
for professional recognition by the Engineers Australia and other
professional bodies.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
53
COURSE STRUCTURE
Only the first year of our new PBL based course is shown in the
following course structure. The later years are indicative of the
existing (non PBL) course. These later years will be replaced as the
PBL course is progressively introduced.
Engineering subject codes commence with ‘V’.
Science subject codes commence with ‘R’.
… A subjects = Semester1, ... B subjects = Semester 2
Credit Semester
Points Hours
Year 1
Subjects total 2 x 48 Credit Points
VEF1001 Enabling Sciences 1A 12 60
VEF1002 Enabling Sciences 1B 12 60
VEF1003 Electrical Fundamentals 1A 12 60
VEF1004 Electrical Fundamentals 1B 12 60
VEB1001 PBL & Engineering Practice 1A 24 120
VEB1002 PBL & Engineering Practice 1B 24 120
Year 2
Subjects total 2 x 48 Credit Points
VEL2001 Linear Systems and Mathematics 2A 12 60
VEL2002 Linear Systems and Mathematics 2B 12 60
VEH2001 Electronic Systems 2A 12 60
VEH2002 Electronic Systems 2B 12 60
VEC2001 Computer Engineering 2A 12 60
VAG1001 Engineering Profession 1A 12 60
VED2002 Engineering Design &
Professional Practice 2 12 60
VEG2002 Introduction to Engineering
Systems 2 12 60
Year 3 A
Subjects total 2 x 48 Credit Points
*Stream Specialization Subjects A 12 60
*Stream Specialization Subjects B 12 60
VED3001 Engineering Design & Projects 3A 12 60
VED3002 Engineering Design & Projects 3B 12 60
Elective (2 x 6 or 1 x 12 credit points) 12 60
Elective (2 x 6 or 1 x 12 credit points) 12 60
*Stream Subjects: Stream subject A is a prerequisite for B.
Students to complete 6 stream subjects (in Sem5-8), selecting a
minimum of two stream A and two stream B subjects.
Year 4
Subjects total 2 x 48 Credit Points
VEG4001 Professional Engineering Practice 4A 12 60
VEG4002 Professional Engineering Practice 4B 12 60
*Stream Specialization Subjects A 12 60
*Stream Specialization Subjects B 12 60
VED4001 Engineering Design & Projects 4A 12 60
VED4002 Engineering Design & Projects 4B 12 60
Elective (2 x 6 or 1 x 12 credit points) 12 60
Elective (2 x 6 or 1 x 12 credit points) 12 60
*Stream Subjects: Stream subject A is a prerequisite for B.
Students to complete 6 stream subjects (in Sem5-8), selecting a
minimum of two stream A and two stream B subjects
Minimum number of Subjects for Specialisation award other than
Electrical and Electronic Engineering
Completion of:
• Stream A & Stream B Subject of the Specialisation;
• 18 Credit points of the Specialisation related Elective Subjects;
• Final Project in the field of the Specialisation
Stream Specialization or Elective Subjects (12 Credit pts)
REP4100 Data Acquisition 12 60
REP4200 Directed Studies in Physics 2 12 48
REP4300 Einstein’s Theory of Relativity 6 24
VEA3000 Control Systems A 12 60
VEA4000 Computer Controlled Systems B 12 60
VEA4100 Computer Vision and Applications 6 30
VEA4200 Fuzzy Control and Applications 6 30
VEA4300 Optimal Control Systems 6 30
VEA4400 Robotics and Automation 6 30
VEA4500 Robust Control Systems 6 30
VEA4600 System Identification for Control 6 30
VEE3000 Electrical Machines and Energy Systems A 12 60
VEE4000 Power Electronics and Drives B 12 60
VEE4100 Electric Energy Systems Analysis
and Operation 6 30
VEE4200 Electric Energy Systems Protection 6 30
VEE4300 Electric Energy Transmission and Distribution 6 30
VEE4400 High Voltage Engineering 6 30
RMA4001 Advanced Mathematics for
Electrical Engineers 12 60
VEG4100 Digital Signal Processing A 6 30
VEH3000 Computer and Digital Design A 12 60
VEH4000 Computer and Digital Design B 12 60
VEH4300 Systems on a Programmable Device 6 30
VEM3000 EDA Tools and Design Methodology A 12 60
VEM4000 Integrated Circuit Design B 12 60
VEM4100 Analog and Mixed Signal Design 6 30
VEM4200 ASIC Design 6 30
VEM4300 Embedded Systems Design 6 30
VEM4400 High Level Synthesis – Verilog 6 30
VEM4500 VLSI Design 6 30
VEP3000 Photonics A 12 60
VEP4000 Photonics B 12 60
VES3000 Data Structures and Algorithms Analysis A 12 60
VES4000 Programming Tools and Compilers B 12 60
VES4100 Computer Systems 12 60
VES4200 Network Software & Management 12 60
VES4300 Software Engineering 12 60
VET3000 Telecommunication A 12 60
VET4000 Telecommunication B 12 60
VET4100 Computer Communications 1 6 30
VET4200 Computer Communications 2 6 30
VET4300 Digital Communications 6 30
VET4400 Digital Signal Processing in
Telecommunications 2 6 30
VET4500 Satellite Communications 6 30
VET4600 Wireless Communications 6 30
VET4700 Communication System and Network Design 6 30
VET4800 Multimedia and IP-Based Networks 6 30
Electives from outside School of Electrical Engineering
(Subject to approval of Course Director) 12 60
Electives from outside School of Electrical Engineering
(Subject to approval of Course Director) 6 30
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
54
BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING SCIENCE IN
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
Course Code: EBES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The Bachelor of Engineering Science in Electrical and Electronic
Engineering is a flexible degree that allows students to specialise in
a wide range of disciplinary areas such as Computer Engineering,
Software Engineering, Microelectronic Systems, Telecom-
munications, Power Systems Engineering, Control Systems,
Photonics, Robotics and Automation.
Course structure: First common year of electrical, electronic,
computing, mathematics and physics studies designed to provide a
foundation for students to select from a wide range of higher level
subjects in later years of their course. Students will have the
opportunity to complete a generic Electrical and Electronic
Engineering Science course or specialize in any of the above titled
streams. The course has a focus on practical applications and
design and project work forms a significant component of the total
program.
Student completing their studies at an appropriate standard and
with appropriate subjects may be granted up to three years credit
into the Bachelor of Engineering degree.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Only the first year of our new PBL based course is shown in the
following course structure. The later years are indicative of the
existing (non PBL) course. These later years will be replaced as the
PBL course is progressively introduced.
Engineering subject codes commence with ‘V’.
Science subject codes commence with ‘R’.
… A subjects = Semester1, … B subjects = Semester 2
Credit Semester
Points Hours
Year 1
Subjects total 2 x 48 Credit Points
VEF1001 Enabling Sciences 1A 12 60
VEF1002 Enabling Sciences 1B 12 60
VEF1003 Electrical Fundamentals 1A 12 60
VEF1004 Electrical Fundamentals 1B 12 60
VEB1001 PBL & Engineering Practice 1A 24 120
VEB1002 PBL & Engineering Practice 1B 24 120
Year 2
Subjects total 2 x 48 Credit Points
VEH2001 Electronic Systems 2A 12 60
VEH2002 Electronic Systems 2B 12 60
VEC2001 Computer Engineering 2A 12 60
VAG1001 Engineering Profession 1A 12 60
VED2002 Engineering Design & Professional Prac 2 12 60
Elective 12 60
Elective 12 60
Elective 12 60
Year 3
Stream Subject 12 60
Stream Subject 12 60
Stream Subject 12 60
VED3001 Engineering Design and Projects 3A 12 60
VED3002 Engineering Design and Projects 3B 12 60
or
VED3102 Engineering Design and Projects 3C 12 60
VEG4001 Professional Engineering Practice 4A 12 60
Electives (6 or 12 credit points) 24 120
Stream Subjects: Students to complete a minimum of three stream
subjects.
Stream Specialization or Elective Subjects (12 Credit pts)
Students may choose any subject for which they are qualified from
the Bachelor of Engineering.
Minimum number of Subjects for Specialisation award other than
Electrical and Electronic Engineering
Completion of:
• Stream A & Stream B Subject of the Specialisation;
• 24 Credit points of the Specialisation related Elective Subjects.
*Students entering the degree without the equivalent of pass in
Mathematical Methods at VCE level will be advised to undertake
foundation or transition mathematics as a preparation.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (HONOURS) IN
COMPUTER TECHNOLOGY
Course Code: EHEC
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course is designed to enhance the skills acquired in the
Computer Technology Degree course, by developing the research
potential of the students and allowing in-depth study topics in a
range of computer technology subjects.
The Honours Degree provides for a research project and a selection
of advanced elective subjects. This year may lead to further
postgraduate opportunities. The choice of subjects is dependent
upon the student’s background and intended area of further study.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS AND PREREQUISITES
To qualify for admission the student must have completed an
appropriate undergraduate course of at least three years in
duration, and obtained results of 60 per cent and higher in the
majority of subjects undertaken.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered on a full-time basis over one year, or part-time
equivalent.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Points
Semester One
VEC4701 Research Project 24
Semester Two
VEC4702 Research Project 24
Elective subjects (24 credit points per semester)
The elective subjects are to be chosen from the range of final year
undergraduate subjects (no more than two at third year level) and
postgraduate subjects, as approved by the Course Co-ordinator.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (HONOURS) –
PHYSICS
Course Code: SHPC
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course aims to broaden and deepen the student’s knowledge
and understanding of physics by the completion of advanced
courses and to provide a basic training in the skills necessary to
undertake research in physics. Research training will include the
ability to devise, design and carry out research intended to yield
data relevant to the solution of specific problems, the ability to
develop and refine working hypotheses, to critically analyse data
and to report results in an appropriate manner.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
55
The research project is normally undertaken in one of the following
areas of expertise of the section: optical fibre sensors, laser physics,
optoelectronic imaging, applied optics and vacuum technology.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for entry to the Honours program the applicant should
have completed the requirements for a pass degree with major
studies in an appropriate discipline. Entry is at the discretion of the
Applied Physics section and applicants should normally have
obtained a ‘credit’ average in the final year of the pass degree. For
mature age applicants, an appropriate combination of qualifications
and experience will be considered.
COURSE DURATION
The course will be offered on a full-time basis over one year or part-
time equivalent.
COURSE STRUCTURE
RPH4411 Physics 4 (Honours) 96 credit points
(48 per semester)
ACADEMIC PROGRESSION
A student will not be allowed to repeat the Honours year or any
component of it without the permission of the Course Co-ordinator.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
56
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
57
SCHOOL OF HEALTH SCIENCES
The School of Health Sciences aims both to enhance post-secondary
educational opportunities and to expand vocational opportunity,
particularly for those who live and work in the western metropolitan
region. This will be achieved by progressively offering a range of
courses designed to facilitate the access of students across a range
of educational levels to educational programs which are
professionally and educationally oriented. Three major disciplines
are represented in the School of Health Sciences: Osteopathic
Medicine, Paramedic Sciences, and Chinese Medicine.
Curriculum and teaching approaches adopted by the School include
encouraging students to define their learning needs and to take
responsibility for their learning. The School also aims to foster
students’ personal, professional and educational growth and
development.
Courses are developed in consultation with staff within the
University, with members of the professions, accrediting authorities
and members of the community to ensure the relevance and quality
of courses.
COURSE OFFERINGS
In 2006, the School of Health Sciences will offer the following
undergraduate courses:
*Campus Full-time Part-time
Bachelor Chinese Medicine
(Acupucture & Herbs) S Y Y
Bachelor of Health Science
– Clinical Dermal Therapies J n/a Y
– Natural Medicine S,ZA Y Y
– Paramedic (3yr pre-service) S,I Y n/a
– Paramedic (1yr conversion) ZA,H Y Y
– Chinese Medicine S Y n/a
– Naturopathy & Homoeopathy S Y Y
Bachelor of Science
– Clinical Sciences (Osteopathy) C Y n/a
*Campus C=City Flinders J=City King S=St Albans
H=Hong Kong ZA=Internet
BACHELOR OF CHINESE MEDICINE
(ACUPUNCTURE AND HERBS)
Double Major
(For students commencing 2005 onwards)
Course Code : HBAH
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aims of the course are to:
• provide students with detailed training in Chinese medical
theory and practice, including acupuncture and Chinese herbal
medicine;
• provide students with comprehensive Chinese medical skills in
both acupuncture and Chinese herbal medicine, incorporating
adjunctive approaches such as meditation, health enhancement
and CM dietary modalities;
• ensure that students practise from Chinese medical theory,
whilst integrating western medical information as appropriate,
to ensure that graduates are safe and competent in the practice
of Chinese Medicine;
• provide students with quality clinical experiences in hospitals
and complementary health clinics from Year One of the
program;
• provide students with the option of undertaking a clinical
internship placement in an appropriate hospital settting in
China or other countries; and
• provide students with opportunities for research and higher
degree in Chinese Medicine on the completion of their
undergraduate degree.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must have
satisfactorily completed the Victorian Certificate of Education (VCE),
or equivalent with a study score of at least 20 in Units 3 and 4
English. It is also desirable, but not essential, that applicants have
completed VCE level studies in biology, chemistry, psychology, or
Asian studies.
Applicants who do not meet the normal admission requirements but
who possess appropriate educational qualifications, or work
experience which would enable them to successfully undertake the
course, will be considered for admission.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered on a full-time basis over four years or part-time
equivalent.
COURSE LOCATION
This course if offered at the St Albans campus.
CLINICAL PLACEMENT
Students will be required to undergo a Victorian Police Check before
commencing placement subjects. Police checks need to be
conducted annually throughout the program. Prospective and
continuing students should be aware that not passing relevant police
checks may restrict access to clinical placements necessary for
graduation. Students will be required to show evidence of a current
first aid in the workplace level 2 qualification whilst enrolled in the
clinical practice unit.
Teaching clinics operate 50 weeks per year, and students will be
required to attend clinical sessions on a rotation basis including
outside of semester hours to maintain a public service and provide
continuity of patient care.
COURSE STRUCTURE
All students will study both Acupuncture and Chinese Herbal
Medicine throughout the four years of this integrated program.
Credit Hours
Points per week
Year One
Semester One
HHT1000 Introduction to Major Classics – Nei Jing 6 3
HHT1001 Introduction to Chinese Medical Literacy 8 3
HHT1002 Fundamentals of Chinese Medicine 12 11
HHT1100 Introduction to Health
Enhancement (Yang Sheng) 6 2
HHT1101 Acupuncture Point Location 1 8 5
RBM1515 Anatomy & Physiology 8 6
Semester Two
HHT1005 Chinese Medical Diagnosis &
Pathogenesis 1 8 6
HHT1007 Chinese Pharmacopoeia 6 7
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
58
HHT1009 Introduction to Chinese Medicine
Clinical Practice 12 48*
HHT1201 Acupuncture Point Location 2 8 5
RBM1525 Anatomy and Physiology 8 6
RBM1910 Microbiology for Chinese
Medicine Practitioners 6 3
Year Two
Semester One
HHT2003 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and
Pathogenesis 2 8 6
HHT2009 Pharmacopoeia and Dispensing 8 6
HHT2011 Chinese Medicine Clinical Practice1 12 72*
HHT2100 Formulae and Strategies 1 6 6
HHT2104 Acupuncture Needling:
Theory and Practice 1 6 4
RBM2911 Pathophysiology 1 8 6
Semester Two
HHT2000 Health Enhancement (Yang Sheng) 6 3
HHT2200 Formulae and Strategies 2 6 6
HHT2202 Acupuncture Theory: Systems and Methods 6 3
HHT2203 Chinese Medicine Clinical Practice 2 16 72*
HHT2205 Acupuncture Needling: Theory
and Practice 2 6 4
RBM2912 Pathophysiology 2 8 6
Year Three
Semester One
HHT3100 Chinese Medical Micro-Systems 6 3
HHT3103 Chinese Medicine Clinical Practice 3 6 72
HHT3104 Major Classics – Shang Han Lun &
Wen Bing 1 8 5
HHT3106 Internal Medicine 1 6 6
HHT3108 Chinese Medicine Therapeutic
Applications 1 6 5
RBM3921 Western Medical Diagnoses
and Interventions 1 6 6
Semester Two
HHT3003 Counselling Skills 8 4
HHT3105 Major Classics – Shang Han Lun
& Wen Bing 2 6 5
HHT3203 Chinese Medicine Clinical Practice 4 16 108*
HHT3207 Internal Medicine 2 6 6
HHT3111 Chinese Medicine Therapeutic
Applications 2 6 5
RBM3922 Western Medical Diagnoses and
Interventions 2 6 6
Year Four
Semester One
HHT4002 Research Methods for Chinese Medicine 6 3
HHT4108 Chinese Medicine Traumatology 6 4
HHT4100 Case Conferencing & Clinical Issues 1 6 4
HHT4101 Chinese Medicine Obstetrics & Gynaecology 6 6
HHT4103 Chinese Medicine Clinical Internship 1 16 156*
RBM4923 Western Medical Diagnoses and
Interventions 3 8 6
Semester Two
HHT4004 Professional Issues for Chinese
Medical Practice 6 4
HHT4200 Case Conferencing and Clinical Issues 2 6 6
HHT4201 Chinese Medicine Paediatrics 6 5
HHT4203 Chinese Medicine Dermatology 6 5
HHT4204 Chinese Medicine Clinical Internship 2 16 264*
RBM4924 Western Medical Diagnosis and
Interventions 4 8 6
Totals 384 3276
GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS
In order to be awarded a Bachelor of Chinese Medicine
(Acupuncture and Herbs) degree, students must pass all components
of assessment and satisfactorily complete all theoretical and clinical
hurdle requirements to proficiency standards as specified in
Ferrigno, P. (Compiler). (2005). School of Health Sciences Chinese
Medicine Clinical Logbook [CD and manual]. Melbourne: Victoria
University of Technology, School of Health Sciences, CM Unit; and
Mathieson, L. (Producer). (2005). School of Health Sciences Chinese
Medicine Clinical Practice demo CD [CD]. Melbourne: Victoria
University of Technology, School of Health Sciences, CM Unit.
Students should presume that the content in those references
constitutes Required Reading throughout the entire Chinese Medicine
degree.
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
It is expected that graduates will meet the requirements of the
Chinese Medicine Registration Board of Victoria and be eligible for
membership of the major professional associations.
BACHELOR OF HEALTH SCIENCE – CLINICAL
DERMAL THERAPIES
Course Code: HBCD
(This course is currently under review.)
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aims of the course are to:
• provide an opportunity for qualified Beauty Therapists to
establish and develop knowledge and skills in advanced
dermal therapy treatments;
• instruct appropriately qualified practitioners in safe and
effective therapies to supplement their existing dermal therapies
practice and enhance the health of the client;
• extend and expand interpersonal skills in relation to the
demands of practice;
• examine current developments in dermal therapy, advanced
dermal therapy techniques and the application of these in
practice;
• develop research perspectives within the context of Clinical
Dermal Therapy and Clinical Dermal Therapy practice;
• provide a pathway to Degree level for Diploma of Beauty
Therapy students;
• enhance career options for those Beauty Therapists working in
the field;
• establish an educational benchmark for the practice of Clinical
Dermal Therapies.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must have
completed the Diploma of Beauty Therapy, or equivalent, and have
a minimum of one years' work experience in the field. Applicants
may be required to attend an interview. International students are
eligible to apply for entry to the course.
Students will be required to undergo a Victoria Police check before
commencing placement subjects. Police checks need to be
conducted annually throughout the program. Prospective and
continuing students should be aware that not passing relevant police
checks may restrict access to clinical placements necessary for
graduation.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
59
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over three semesters full-time or part-time
equivalent.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Classes are conducted over three semesters each year, one day a
week.
Credit Hours
Points per week
Year One
Semester One
APU3001 Psychological Issues 16 3
HHD3000 Health Science 1 16 6
HHD3110 Dermal Techniques 1 16 3
Semester Two
HHD3002 Health Science 2 12 3
HHD3100 Clinical Practice 1 12 4
HHD3102 Research Perspectives & Practice 12 2
HHD3220 Dermal Techniques 2 12 3
Semester Three
HHD3103 Nutrition for Health and Well-Being 12 2
HHD3104 Graduating Seminar 12 3
HHD3200 Clinical Practice 2 12 4
HHD3330 Dermal Techniques 3 12 3
Total 144 432
CLINICAL TRAINING
Teaching clinics operate 50 weeks per year, and students will be
required to attend clinical sessions on a rotation basis including
outside of semester hours to maintain a public service and provide
continuity of patient care.
WEBSITE
www.staff.vu.edu.au/cdt
GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS
In order to be awarded a Bachelor of Science – Clinical Dermal
Therapies degree, students must pass all components of assessment
where indicated and satisfactorily complete all theoretical and
clinical hurdle requirements to proficiency standards as specified by
local industry and government requirements.
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES
Students will obtain knowledge and skills to equip them for
professional careers in the growing field of Clinical Dermal Therapy.
Graduates find career paths that allow them to perform advanced
treatments such as laser on their clients and to work together with
medical, paramedical and allied health professionals to enhance
aesthetic outcomes in exciting areas like dermal plastic surgery and
re-constructive surgery.
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
All graduates should be eligible for membership with the Australian
Society of Dermal Clinicians.
BACHELOR OF HEALTH SCIENCE – NATURAL
MEDICINE (CONVERSION)
Course Code: HBMN (internet)/HBNL (local)
(These courses are currently under review.)
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aims of the course are to:
• augment skills and knowledge of health practice in relation to
critical reflection and research;
• provide an education which further develops the individual’s
personal, professional and intellectual growth;
• enable graduates to broaden their understanding of the
physical, socio-economic and psychological factors impacting
upon health; and
• enable graduates to articulate into higher degree pathways.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must have a
Diploma or Advanced Diploma in natural medicine, complementary
therapies; or equivalent in a related area. In addition to this,
applicants would normally be expected to be practising in the field
of natural medicine, complementary therapies or an equivalent
related field.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered on a one-year full-time basis or part-time
equivalent.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit Hours
Points per week
Year One
Semester One
HHN0011 Philosophical Concepts in
Natural Medicine 12 3
HHN0012 Ethical and Legal Issues 12 6
HHN0013 Research Skills 12 6
HHN0014 Developing Pharmacological
Understanding in Natural
Medicine Practice 12 8
Semester Two
HHN0021 Counselling Skills for Natural
Medicine Practitioners 12 3
HHN0022 Professional Writing in
Natural Medicine 12 9
HHN0023 Research Project 14 11
Total 96 552
ARTICULATION PATHWAYS AND CREDIT
Students who successfully complete the course will be eligible to
apply for credit towards the Graduate Diploma in Western Herbal
Medicine and Graduate Diploma in Complementary Medicine. In
turn, completion of either of the Graduate Diplomas provides
eligibility for entry to the Master of Health Science by Coursework.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
60
BACHELOR OF HEALTH SCIENCE
NATUROPATHY & HOMOEOPATHY
Course Code: HBNH
(This course is currently under review.)
COURSE OBJECTIVES
• demonstrate the principles and practice of bodywork,
naturopathy and homoeopathy;
• develop skills to an advanced level for the promotion of health
and wellbeing within the Community;
• perform clinical skills to an advanced level with the use of
naturopathy and homoeopathy;
• apply and demonstrate safe practices in the prescribing and the
preparation of naturopathic herbal preparations;
• apply and demonstrate safe practices in the prescribing and
preparation of homoeopathic preparations;
• demonstrate skills for the clinical assessment of patients and
demonstrate an ability to prescribe the most appropriate form
of treatment;
• recognise and refer patients to medical facilities where
appropriate;
• communicate effectively within practice;
• work both autonomously and collaboratively as a professional;
and
• accurately assess the health of patients after completing a
thorough naturopathic or homoeopathic consultation.
COURSE STRUCTURE
The course is full-fee paying and comprises:
• two years in TAFE – Advanced Diploma in Naturopathy;
• integration semester – a combined summer program;
• two years Higher Education – degree conversion.
SUMMER SCHOOL
Credit Hours
Points per week
HHH2301 University Skills for Natural
Medicine Students 12 36
HHH2302 Iridology 1 12 48
HHH2303 Bodywork Therapies 1 12 48
HHH2304 Aromatherapy 12 36
Total 48 277
Year 3
Semester One
HHH3100 Bodywork Therapies 2 8 48
HHH3101 Iridology 2 8 36
HHH3102 Homoeopathy 1 8 96
HHH3103 Phytotherapeutic Materia Medica 1 12 48
HHH3104 Naturopathic and Homoeopathic Clinicals 12 36
Semester Two
HHH3200 Homoeopathy 2 8 96
HHH3201 Nutriceuticals 8 24
HHH3202 Counselling Skills for Natural
Medicine Practitioners 8 48
HHH3203 Developing Pharmacological
Understanding in Natural Medicine Practice 8 48
HHH3204 Vibrational Medicine 8 48
HHH3205 Naturopathic and Homoeopathic
Clinical Internship 1 8 96
Year 4
Semester One
HHH4100 Homoeopathy 3 8 120
HHH4101 Research Methods 8 24
HHH4102 Ethical and Legal Issues 8 48
HHH4103 Phytotherapeutic Materia Medica 2 12 48
HHH4104 Naturopathic and Homoeopathic
Clinical Internship 2 12 48
Semester Two
HHH4200 Advanced Nutritional Understanding 8 36
HHH4201 Advanced Diagnosis & Symptomology
for Natural Medicine Practice 12 48
HHH4202 Professional Issues 8 36
HHH4203 Current Research Trends in
Natural Medicine 8 36
HHH4204 Naturopathic and Homoeopathic
Clinical Internship 3 12 120
Total 288 1032
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for entry into the course students must have completed the
Advanced diploma in Naturopathy or equivalent conducted by
TAFE. Applicants must also have successfully completed the Victoria
Certificate of Education (not more than two attempts) or the
equivalent, with a pass or better in English and either Chemistry or
Biology.
Mature age applicants will need to complete a supplementary
information form, giving references to the applicant’s life and work
experience, motivation and past education record.
Students will be required to undergo a Victorian Police check before
commencing placement subjects. Police checks need to be
conducted annually throughout the program. Prospective and
continuing students should be aware that not passing relevant police
checks may restrict access to clinical placements necessary for
graduation.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered fulltime over nine semesters with an integrated
summer semester or part-time equivalent.
CLINICAL TRAINING
Teaching clinics operate 50 weeks per year, and students will be
required to attend clinical sessions on a rotation basis including
outside of semester hours to maintain a public service and provide
continuity of patient care.
GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS
In order to be awarded a Bachelor of Science – Naturopathy &
Homoeopathy degree, students must pass all components of
assessment where indicated and satisfactorily complete all
theoretical and clinical hurdle requirements to proficiency standards
as specified in Williams, V. (Ed.). (2005). Clinical Policies and
Procedures Manual. Melbourne: Victoria University, School of
Health Science, CIMU. Students should presume that the contents in
this reference constitute Required Reading throughout the entire
Naturopathy & Homoeopathy degree.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
61
BACHELOR OF HEALTH SCIENCE –
PARAMEDIC (THREE-YEAR PRE-SERVICE)
Course Code: HXPA
(This course is currently under review.)
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aims of this course are to produce graduates who can:
• identify, evaluate and manage the physical, psychological and
social needs of patients and members of the community
undergoing paramedic assessment, treatment and transport,
and apply problem solving skills when planning and
implementing out-of-hospital care;
• perform paramedic skills and techniques within paramedic
protocols and apply paramedic knowledge necessary for safe,
efficient and effective practice within paramedic environments;
• interpret the paramedic needs of patients and members of the
community within a holistic framework and apply an integrated
holistic approach in paramedic practice;
• perform effectively and safely as an independent person and as
a member of a health care team in paramedic environments;
• be sensitive to contemporary issues within socially and culturally
diverse communities and predict and respond effectively to such
issues when providing paramedic practice;
• examine current research and developments in paramedic
practice and evaluate their implications for paramedics and the
profession.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must normally have
successfully completed the Victoria Certificate of Education (VCE),
with Units 3 and 4 and a study score of at least 20 in English, or
equivalent. Preference will be given to applicants who have
successfully completed biology, physics or mathematics.
Applicants who do not meet the normal admission requirements but
who possess appropriate educational qualifications, work or life
experiences which would enable them to successfully undertake the
course, will be considered for admission.
Students enrolled in the Bachelor of Health Science degree will be
required to produce a current Victorian drivers’ licence, and
undergo a Victorian Police Check, a medical check and a physical
capacity test before commencing placement subjects. Police checks
need to be conducted annually throughout the program. Prospective
and continuing students should be aware that not passing relevant
police checks may restrict access to clinical placements necessary
for graduation.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered on a full-time basis or part-time equivalent for
Years One and Two only, and part-time only for Year Three. Clinical
placements will be facilitated to suit individual needs of international
students.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit Hours
Points per week
Year One
Semester One
HFB1101 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 1 12 4
HFB1102 Paramedic Sciences 1 12 4
HFB1801 Out of Hospital Practice 12 6
HFB1802 Prehospital Clinical 12 10
Semester Two
HFB1203 Paramedic Practice 1 12 6
HFB1204 Paramedic Clinical 1 12 10
HFB1205 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 2 12 4
HFB1206 Paramedic Sciences 2 12 4
Total Year One 96 536
Year Two
Semester One
HFB2100 Paramedic Practice 2 12 6
HFB2101 Paramedic Clinical 2 12 10
HFB2102 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 3 12 4
HFB2103 Paramedic Sciences 3 12 4
Semester Two
HFB2204 Paramedic Practice 3 12 6
HFB2205 Paramedical Internship 12 10
HFB2206 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 4 12 4
HFB2207 Paramedic Sciences 4 12 4
Total Year Two 96 536
Year Three (Part-time only)
Semester One
HFB3111 Professional Basis of Paramedic Practice 1 12 4
HFB3301 Issues in Prehospital Health Service Delivery 12 3
Semester Two
HFB3122 Professional Basis of Paramedic Practice 2 12 4
HFB3211 Integration of Paramedic Practice 1 12 4
Year Two
Semester One
HFB3401 Prehospital Ethical and Legal Issues 12 4
Elective A 12 3
Semester Two
HFB3501 Research in paramedic Practice 12 4
Elective B 12 3
Total Year Three 96 348
Course Total 288 1,500
GENERAL ELECTIVES
Students may choose electives from any other higher education
courses offered by the University, subjects to the approval of the
Course Co-ordinator, Elective contact hours may be greater than
three contact hours.
COURSE REGULATIONS
The following should be read in conjunction with the Faculty
Regulations detailed earlier in this handbook, and the University
Statutes and Regulations.
UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS
Students may be asked to show cause why they should not be
excluded from the course if they fail to complete the course within
seven calendar years on a full-time basis or part-time equivalent.
GRADUATE REQUIREMENTS
In order to be awarded the degree Bachelor of Health Science-
Paramedic, students must attain proficiency standard as stipulated
by local industry guidelines in all paramedic practical assessments
and must obtain an Upgraded Pass in all practical subjects. In order
to be enrolled in Year Three, students must have successfully
completed Years One and Two, or equivalent.
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES
Students will obtain skills, knowledge and personal attributes
necessary for employment in an ambulance service. The skills,
knowledge and attributes should also provide graduates with a
competitive advantage for selection and promotion in the
paramedicine career pathways
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
All graduates are eligible to apply for membership of the Australian
college of Ambulance Professionals.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
62
BACHELOR OF HEALTH SCIENCE –
PARAMEDIC (ONE-YEAR CONVERSION)
Course Code: HBPA
(This course is currently under review.)
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aims of the course are to:
• provide a route to a degree qualification in paramedic practice
for qualified paramedics who currently hold an Associate
Diploma or equivalent;
• enhance the knowledge and skills of paramedics enabling them
to function more effectively in their current practice;
• provide opportunities for paramedic practitioners to explore
practice behaviours and attitudes in light of contemporary
multicultural and multidisciplinary environments;
• stimulate paramedic practitioners to use problem solving skills
when planning and implementing prehospital emergency care;
• produce graduate paramedics who can apply a research
approach relevant to present practice;
• produce graduates who can examine current developments in
paramedic practice and their implications for paramedics and
paramedicine.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must:
• have an Associate Diploma of Health Science (Ambulance
Officer), Diploma of Health Science (Paramedic), or equivalent;
or
• be eligible for registration as a paramedic by the relevant body
within the applicant’s state or country of residence; and
• have a minimum of one-year post-qualification experience.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over one year on a full-time basis or part-time
equivalent, as demand requires.
The course is offered on a full-time basis or part-time equivalent and
is conducted completely via distance education using online
teaching methodologies.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit Hours
Points per week
Year One
Semester One
HFB3111 Professional Basis of Paramedic Practice 1 12 4
HFB3222 Integration of Paramedic Practice 2 12 4
HFB3301 Issues in Prehospital Health
Service Delivery 12 3
HFB3401 Prehospital Ethical and Legal Issues 12 4
Semester Two
HFB3122 Professional Basis of Paramedic Practice 2 12 4
HFB3211 Integration of Paramedic Practice 1 12 4
HFB3501 Research in Paramedic Practice 12 4
Elective 12 3
Year Total 48 180
Course Total 96 360
GENERAL ELECTIVES
Student may choose an elective from any other higher education
course offered by the University, subject to the approval of the
Course Co-ordinator. Elective contact hours may be greater than
three contact hours.
COURSE REGULATIONS
The following should be read in conjunction with the Faculty
Regulations detailed earlier in this Handbook, and the University
Statutes and Regulations.
UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS
Students may be asked to show cause why they should not be
excluded from the course if they fail to complete the course within
three calendar years full-time or six years part-time.
BACHELOR OF HEALTH SCIENCE –
CHINESE MEDICINE
Course Code: HBAT Acupuncture Stream
HBHE Chinese Herbal Medicine Stream
(Continuing students only. Courses not available after 2006.)
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit Hours
Points per week
Year Four
Semester One
HHT4100 Case Conferencing & Clinical Issues 1 6 4
HHT4002 Research Methods for Chinese Medicine 6 3
HHT4003 Chinese Medical Specialties 6 3
Plus one of the following streams:
Acupuncture Stream
HHK4001 Treatment of Musculo-Skeletal Disorders 6 3
HHK4002 Chinese Medical Specialties – Acupuncture 8 3
HHK4010 Chinese Medicine Clinical
Internship 1 – Acupuncture Major 16 104*
Chinese Herbal Medicine Stream
HHI4001 Major Classics: Shang Han Lun
and Wen Bing 6 5
HHI4002 Chinese Medical Gynaecology:
Herbal Medicine 6 3
HHI4003 Chinese Medical Paediatrics and
Dermatology: Herbal Medicine 6 2
HHI4010 Chinese Medicine Clinical
Internship 1 – Herb Major 12 104*
Total: – Acupuncture 48 296
– Chinese Herbal Medicine 48 344
Semester Two
HHT4200 Case Conferencing & Clinical Issues 2 6 6
HHT4004 Professional Issues for Chinese
Medical Practice 6 4
HHT4005 Chinese Medicine Acute Interventions 6 40*
Plus one of the following streams:
Acupuncture Stream
HHK4004 Schools of Thought in Acupuncture 6 20*
HHK4020 Chinese Medicine Clinical
Internship 2 – Acupuncture Major 24 208*
Chinese Herbal Medicine Stream
HHI4005 Schools of Thought in
Chinese Herbal Medicine 8 30*
HII4020 Chinese Medicine Clinical
Internship 2 Herb Major 30 208*
Total: – Acupuncture 48 388
– Chinese Herbal Medicine 48 358
Total Year Four:
– Acupuncture 96 684
– Chinese Herbal Medicine 96 702
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
63
CLINICAL TRAINING
Teaching clinics usually operate 50 weeks per year, and students
will be required to attend clinical sessions outside of semester hours
to maintain a public service and provide continuity of patient care.
GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS
In order to be awarded a Bachelor of Science – Chinese Medicine
degree, students must pass all components of assessment and
satisfactorily complete all theoretical and clinical hurdle
requirements to proficiency standards as specified in Beer, S. (Ed.).
(1999). Clinical Policies and Procedures Manual. Melbourne:
Victoria University, School of Health Science, TCM Unit; Ferrigno, P.
(Ed.). (2003). Logbook of clinical hours [CD and manual].
Melbourne: Victoria University, School of Health Sciences, TCM
Unit; and Williams, V. (Ed.). (2001). Clinical Policies and
Procedures Manual. Melbourne: Victoria University, School of
Health Science, TCM Unit. Students should presume that the content
in those references constitutes required reading throughout the entire
Chinese Medicine degree.
BACHELOR OF HEALTH SCIENCE
(CHINESE MEDICINE & CLINICAL SCIENCES)
(Double Major)
Course Code: HBDH Chinese Herb specific (Year5)
(Continuing students only)
Credit Hours
Points per week
Year Five
Semester One
HHT1000 Introduction to Major Classics – Nei Jing 6 3
HHT4100 Case Conferencing & Clinical Issues 6 4
HHT4002 Research Methods
for Chinese Medicine 6 3
HHT4108 Chinese Medicine Traumatology 6 4
HHK4002 Chinese Medical Specialties: Acupuncture 8 3
HHK4010 Chinese Medicine Clinical
Internship 1 – Acupuncture Major 16 104*
Total 48 308
Semester Two
HHT4200 Case Conferencing & Clinical Issues 6 6
HHT4004 Professional Issues for
Chinese Medical Practice 6 4
HHT4005 Chinese Medicine Acute Interventions 6 40*
HHK4004 Schools of Thought in Acupuncture 6 20*
HHK4020 Chinese Medicine Clinical
Internship 2 – Acupuncture Major 24 208*
Total 48 388
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
It is expected that graduates will meet the requirements of the
Chinese Medicine Registration Board of Victoria and be eligible for
membership of the major professional associations
BACHELOR OF HEALTH SCIENCE –
CHINESE MEDICINE WITH HONOURS
To graduate with honours a student must:
(a) maintain grades of distinction ‘D’ or above in all graded
subjects throughout 2nd, 3rd and 4th year of the program; and
(b) have satisfactory reports from all clinical teachers and
supervisors throughout the four years of the program.
ARTICULATION PATHWAYS
Successful completion of the Bachelor of Health Science – Chinese
Medicine allows direct articulation to various Graduate Diplomas
and the Master of Health Science. Further articulation is then
possible to the Doctor of Philosophy in Chinese Medicine.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE –
CLINICAL SCIENCES
Course Code: HBOS
(Subject to approval by the Osteopaths Registration Board)
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aims of the course are to:
• prepare graduates for entry into the Master of Health Science –
Osteopathy. Upon completion of the Masters degree, a
graduate will be eligible to apply for registration as an
osteopath;
• provide an education which contributes to the individual’s
personal, professional and intellectual growth;
• provide an education which contributes to the preparation of
competent primary health care practitioners who, upon
graduation from the Masters degree, are able to: apply
osteopathic principles to formulate and prescribe suitable and
safe management of patients; assess the health status of the
patient, including physical, socio-economic and psychological
factors; communicate with the patient and interact with other
health care providers and advisers for the benefit of the patient.
• prepare graduates for entry into the Master of Health Science –
Osteopathy. Upon completion of the Masters degree, a
graduate will be eligible to apply for registration as an
osteopath;
• provide an education which contributes to the individual’s
personal, professional and intellectual growth;
• provide an education which contributes to the preparation of
competent primary health care practitioners who, upon
graduation from the Masters degree, are able to:
− apply osteopathic principles to formulate and prescribe
suitable and safe management of patients;
− assess the health status of the patient, including physical,
socio-economic and psychological factors;
• communicate with the patient and interact with other health
care providers and advisers for the benefit of the patient.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must have
completed the Victorian Certificate of Education (after not more than
two attempts), or equivalent, Units 3 and 4 in Chemistry and one of
Physics or Mathematics (any), with a study score of at least 20 in
English. Applicants over the age of 21 who have not attempted an
approved year 12 course in the three years prior to application may
apply to enter the course but are still required to meet the
prerequisite study hurdles.
Students will be required to undergo a Victoria Police check before
commencing placement subjects. Police checks need to be
conducted annually throughout the program. Prospective and
continuing students should be aware that not passing relevant police
checks may restrict access to clinical placements necessary for
graduation.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
64
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit Hours
Points per week
Year One
Semester One
HHA1171 Anatomy 1 12 6
HHO1171 Osteopathic Science 1 12 7
HHP1171 Physiology 1 6 3
HHU1171 Clinical Practicum 1 6 24*
RMS1171 Biochemistry 1 (Osteopathy) 6 4
RBF1170 Cell Structure and Function 6 2
Semester Two
HHA1272 Anatomy 2 12 4
HHD1271 Clinical Diagnosis &
Management 1 6 2
HHO1272 Osteopathic Science 2 12 7
HHU1272 Clinical Practicum 2 6 24*
HHY1271 Pathology 1 6 2
RMS1272 Biochemistry 2 (Osteopathy) 6 3
Total Year One 96 598
Year Two
Semester One
HHA2173 Anatomy 3 8 4
HHC2171 Biomechanics 1 6 3
HHD2172 Clinical Diagnosis & Management 2 6 4
HHO2173 Osteopathic Science 3 8 6
HHP2172 Physiology 2 6 3
HHU2173 Clinical Practicum 3 8 77*
HHY2172 Pathology 2 6 3
Semester Two
HHA2274 Anatomy 4 8 4
HHC2272 Biomechanics 2 6 3
HHD2273 Clinical Diagnosis &
Management 3 6 4
HHO2274 Osteopathic Science 4 8 5
HHP2273 Physiology 3 6 3
HHU2274 Clinical Practicum 4 8 77*
HHY2273 Pathology 3 6 3
Total Year Two 96 687
Year Three (old structure: continuing students)
Semester One
HHC3173 Biomechanics 3 6 3
HHD3174 Clinical Diagnosis & Management 4 6 2
HHO3175 Osteopathic Science 5 8 5
HHP3174 Physiology 4 6 3
HHS3171 Psychology & Social Sciences 1 6 1
HHU3175 Clinical Practicum 5 8 133*
HHY3174 Pathology 4 8 2
Semester Two
HHA3275 Anatomy 5 6 7
HHC3274 Biomechanics 4 6 3
HHD3270 Professional Ethics 8 1
HHO3276 Osteopathic Science 6 8 5
HHP3275 Physiology 5 6 2
HHS3272 Psychology & Social Sciences 2 6 2
HHU3276 Clinical Practicum 6 8 133*
Total Year Three 96 838
Total Course 288 2,123
*Total Semester Hours for Unit
Check subject details with course co-ordinator.
CLINICAL TRAINING
For registration as an Osteopath, students must have completed the
minimum clinical subject attendance requirements over the combined
Bachelor of Science – Clinical Sciences and Master of Health
Science – Osteopathy courses. Completion of the Bachelor of
Science – Clinical Sciences course alone does not make graduates
eligible for registration as Osteopaths.
Teaching clinics operate 50 weeks per year, and students will be
required to attend clinical sessions on a rotation basis including
outside of semester hours to maintain a public service and provide
continuity of patient care.
CLINIC WEBSITE
www.omc.org.au
SCHOOL REGULATIONS
The following should be read in conjunction with the Faculty
Regulations detailed earlier in this Handbook, and the University
Statutes and Regulations.
DISCIPLINARY FAILURE
A student who has been awarded a fail in a subject on disciplinary
grounds, e.g. for cheating, may not enrol in any further subjects in
any major sequence of which the subject forms a part without the
permission of the Faculty Progress Committee.
GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS
In order to be awarded a Bachelor of Science – Clinical Sciences,
students must complete the hurdle clinical requirements.
CAREER OPPORTUNITIES
Students will obtain knowledge and skills to equip them for
professional careers as osteopaths in today’s international market.
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
All graduates will be eligible for registration with the Osteopaths
Registration Board of Victoria, and for registration as an osteopath
in all other Australian states by mutual recognition with the
Osteopaths Registration Board. Registered Osteopaths are also
eligible for membership with other professional associations.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
65
SCHOOL OF MOLECULAR SCIENCES
The School of Molecular Sciences operates at the Werribee Campus
of the University. In line with Faculty objectives, the School is
committed to the development and promotion of science and
technology.
The School seeks to provide students with vocationally and
educationally oriented experiences and expertise which will best
equip them for entry into a work environment in which there is likely
to be significant career changes during their working life.
Consequently, the School provides courses and programs with a
close relationship between theory and practice, and seeks to include
relevant industrial experience within each award course.
The School also seeks to foster within its students a personal pride
in, and a professional attitude to their work and a full understanding
of their responsibilities to society as trained scientists and
technologists.
It is the belief of the School that active involvement in research and
consultancy is vital in providing quality teaching as well as in
developing a viable and practical course for the students. To this
end, all of the academic staff have a doctoral degree and
substantial research and consultancy experience. The School
endeavours to develop close relationships with industry and with the
community to keep abreast of their respective needs. To this end
student projects are performed in collaboration with industry, the
community, government bodies, and research institutes wherever
possible.
The School is equipped with world class laboratories and equipment
for teaching and research as well as for industrial training
programs. These include high performance liquid chromatographs,
gas chromatograph-mass spectrometers, atomic absorption
spectrophotometers, FTIR spectrometers, NMR, UV-Vis
spectrophotometers, an Instron texture analyser, Infratech and NIR
Systems food and feed analysers as well as excellent facilities for
microbiological and genetic engineering work. Specialist facilities
also include a fully-equipped, pilot-scale food processing hall.
The School also offers Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy
degrees by research and Masters and Graduate Diploma
coursework programs. Further details are given in the Postgraduate
Studies section of the Handbook.
COURSES OFFERED
The School of Molecular Sciences offers undergraduate courses
leading to the award of:
• Bachelor of Applied Science;
− Chemistry;
• Bachelor of Science;
− Biotechnology;
− Medical, Forensic and Analytical Chemistry;
− Nutrition, Food and Health Science;
• Bachelor of Science (Honours).
SCHOOL REGULATIONS
The following regulations apply to all courses and subjects
administered or taught by the School of Molecular Sciences and are
in addition to University regulations governing these areas as laid
down in the Statutes and Regulations.
AWARDS
A student shall qualify to receive an award when that student has
successfully completed all the requirements and prescribed subjects
of the course.
ASSESSMENT
Student assessment will embrace both formal assessment through
final examination and continuous assessment incorporating unit
tests, assignments, report writing, problem solving exercises, class
presentations and laboratory, project and fieldwork.
Students would normally be expected to satisfactorily complete each
component of the assessment to gain a pass in the subject.
PRACTICAL WORK
A minimum of 80 per cent attendance is required at all practical
sessions. Failure to attend at least 80 per cent of practical sessions
will automatically constitute unsatisfactory completion of the subject.
Practical reports will only be accepted from those students who have
attended practical sessions for their full duration.
LATE SUBMISSION
Students failing to submit assessable work by the prescribed
deadline will incur a penalty of five percentage marks per day for
the first ten days after the prescribed deadline. Work submitted after
this time will not be assessed and students will be granted a zero
grade.
This requirement may be varied at the discretion of the subject co-
ordinator.
SUPPLEMENTARY ASSESSMENT
Students may be granted supplementary assessment with a
maximum of two supplementary assessments being permitted in any
one full-time academic year. Supplementary assessment will not be
available for subjects that are being repeated.
USE OF ELECTRONIC CALCULATORS AND STORAGE DEVICES
The use of electronic calculators and electronic storage devices is
not permitted in any examination unless specified in the subject
guide for that subject and/or on the examination paper for that
subject.
UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS
Students in any one of the following categories may be asked to
show cause as to why they should not be excluded from the course:
• those who fail 50 per cent or more of their assessable
enrolment load (expressed in subjects) in any semester;
• those who fail the same subject twice;
• those who transgress a conditional enrolment agreement.
DURATION OF EXCLUSION
Excluded students have no automatic right of re-admission to the
course from which they were excluded. Students who have been
excluded may apply for re-admission not less than one calendar
year from the date of exclusion. These students must provide, with
their application, evidence of changed circumstances which
significantly improve the applicant’s chances of academic success.
PROGRESSION
Progression through the course is based on the following guidelines:
• Where any compulsory subject must be repeated, enrolment in
that subject must be at the first opportunity following the initial
failure.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
66
• Students may not enrol in any subject for which the prerequisite
has not been passed.
• Student enrolment will not normally be approved where the
total proposed subject hours exceeds the normal total subject
hours for a course year.
• Where enrolment in a co-requisite subject is required, enrolment
in the co-requisite subject must take preference over enrolment
in an elective.
• Where a subject is being repeated, requests for exemptions for
part of the subject work are at the discretion of the Department
or School offering the subject. Any exemption granted will
normally apply for one year only.
DISCIPLINARY FAILURE
A student who has failed a subject on disciplinary grounds may not
enrol in any further subjects without the permission of the Faculty
Dean.
REPEATING SUBJECTS
A student who has withdrawn twice in any subject without receiving
a penalty grade must seek the permission of the lecturer in charge
before being permitted to re-enrol in that subject.
STAGE COMPLETION
A student may apply for a Stage Completion if:
all subjects in the course except one have been passed;
• a result of N1 (40 per cent–49 per cent) is achieved in the
failed subject;
• the failed subject is not a prerequisite for any other subject in
the course.
The granting of a Stage Completion is at the discretion of the Head
of School and is not regarded as a pass in the failed subject.
DEFERMENT FROM AWARD COURSE
The following rules apply to the courses of the School and are in
addition to University regulations governing these areas.
• Approval of deferment is not automatic.
• Each application to defer will be dealt with on an individual
basis by the School Administrator in consultation with
appropriate academic staff members.
• A deferment will not be granted to VTAC applicants requesting
a deferment at their first enrolment session. Students who fall
into this category will be advised to re-apply for a place at the
end of the year.
• In normal circumstances students must have successfully
completed at least one semester of study, by passing at least 50
per cent of subjects undertaken, to be eligible for deferment.
• Except under exceptional circumstances students may apply to
defer their studies for a total period not exceeding twelve
months.
• Deferment will not normally be granted until consultation has
taken place with the Course Co-ordinator (or nominee) and/or
a student counsellor.
• Students failing to re-enrol at the end of their deferment period
will automatically be withdrawn from their course of study.
FURTHER INFORMATION
For further information please contact the School of Molecular
Sciences on (03) 9919-8271 or fax (03) 9919 8284.
BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE IN
CHEMISTRY
Course Code: SBCP
COURSE OBJECTIVES
This course provides a sound background in the fundamentals of
chemistry and leads to a professional qualification which meets the
membership requirements of the Royal Australian Chemical Institute.
The course has major emphasis on analytical and organic chemistry
and includes significant studies in other areas.
COURSE DURATION
This course is specifically designed for part-time study by students
employed in chemical and related industries. The course recognises
that students in employment develop a wide range of on-the-job skills
and consequently it only includes a limited number of subjects in
areas other than chemistry. The course is organised to enable
completion in six years but may be completed in a shorter time if
work commitments permit. Employment in a chemical or related
industry for a minimum of three years is a co-requisite and is
required for graduation.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Applicants should have successfully completed VCE or another Year
12 qualification with studies in English and Mathematics. Applicants
with other qualifications should seek advice from the Faculty of
Health, Engineering and Science. An aptitude for science should be
evident.
Potential students for the Bachelor of Applied Science in Chemistry
should apply directly to the University.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Points Hours
Year 1
Semester One
RCS1000 Medical, Forensic & Analytical
Chemistry 1 12 48
RCS1008 Industrial Experience 1 12 -
RCS1601 Chemistry 1A 12 84
RMA1110 Mathematics for the Biological
& Chemical Sciences 1 12 48
Semester Two
ACE1913 Professional Communication 12 48
RCS1008 Industrial Experience 1 12 -
RCS1602 Chemistry 1B 12 84
RMA1120 Statistics for the Biological
& Chemical Sciences 1 12 48
Year 2
Semester One
RCS2000 Industrial Experience 2 12 -
RCS2521 Applied Chemistry (Organic) 12 60
RCS2601 Analytical Chemistry 2A 12 60
Elective 12 60
Semester Two
RCS2000 Industrial Experience 2 12 60
RCS2521 Applied Chemistry (Organic) 12 60
RCS2602 Analytical Chemistry 2B 12 60
RMA2120 Mathematics for the Biological
& Chemical Sciences 2 12 48
Year 3
Semester One
ACE3010 Written and Oral Communications 3 6 12
RCS3000 Industrial Experience 3 12 -
RCS3601 Analytical Chemistry 3A 12 72
RCS3603 Medical Chemistry 3A 12 60
RMA3071 Introduction to Computer Utilization 6 36
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
67
Semester Two
ACE3010 Written and Oral Communications 3 6 12
RCS3000 Industrial Experience 3 12 -
RCS3602 Analytical Chemistry 3B 12 72
Elective (to 18cps over Session 2)(1) 18 12-36
PROGRESSION AND EXCLUSION REGULATIONS
1. Failure in more than 50 per cent of enrolled subjects (semester
or whole of year) will be grounds for exclusion.
2. Failure in any subject three times shall constitute grounds for
exclusion from the course.
STAGE COMPLETION BY COMPENSATION
Each degree course is composed of three years.
YEAR COMPLETED
0120 Completed First Year (SBCP)
0220 Completed Second Year (SBCP)
0320 Completed Third Year (SBCP)
STAGE COMPLETED BY COMPENSATION
1020 Stage Completed by Compensation, First Year (SBCP)
2020 Stage Completed by Compensation, Second Year (SBCP)
3020 Stage Completed by Compensation, Third Year (SBCP)
COURSE COMPLETED
3320 Course Complete (SBCP)
Under certain conditions a student may be granted Stage
Completion by Compensation for a Stage of the course even though
pass results have not been obtained for all subjects in that Stage.
This does not mean that a student is granted passes in the subjects
failed; rather, it means that the overall performance in the Stage is
such as to allow the student to progress to the next Stage of the
course without repeating the subjects failed.
Stage Completion by Compensation will not be granted where a fail
assessment (N1 or N2) has been obtained in any of the following
subjects:
RCS1006 Chemistry 1
RCS2511 Applied Chemistry 2 – Analytical
RCS3511 Applied Chemistry 3 – Analytical
ACE3010 Written and Oral Communication 3 (P/T)
Where one or more subjects within a Stage are assessed as N1
(40–49 per cent) Stage Completion by Compensation may be
granted provided that the semester hours associated with the failed
subjects do not total more than eight hours (a semester hour is
defined as one hour of contact per week for one semester)
A student granted a Stage Completion by Compensation should be
aware that a statement to this effect will appear on the student’s
academic record.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN BIOTECHNOLOGY
Course Code: SBBY
CRICOS No: 038482G
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The biotechnology degree prepares students for exciting careers in
cutting edge science. This program provides in depth education in
many areas of modern biology including: genetic engineering,
medical research, cloning, forensics, environmental biotechnology,
microbiology and biochemistry. There is a strong emphasis on the
development of laboratory-based skills for which the school is
equipped with state-of-the-art facilities.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
The minimum entry requirement for persons under 21 years of age
on 1 January 2006 is the satisfactory completion of a Year 12
course of study approved by the Victorian Curriculum and
assessment Board (VCAB), or an equivalent program approved by
Victoria University for entry.
Prerequisites are Units 3 and 4 in the following subjects: English,
and Mathematics (any).
There is also provision for mature age entry and entry as a
disadvantaged person. Mature age provisions apply to those
persons aged 21 and over as at 1 January for the year in which
they are applying. Entry into the degree can also be attained
through TAFE articulation.
COURSE DURATION
The Bachelor of Science program requires the equivalent of three
years full-time study.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Points Hours
Year 1
ACE1913 Professional Communication 12 48
RBF1310 Biology 1 12 60
RBF1320 Biology 2 12 60
RCS1601 Chemistry 1A 12 84
RCS1602 Chemistry 1B 12 84
RMS1000 Biotechnology Profession 12 48
RMA1110 Mathematics for the Biological
and Chemical Sciences 1 12 48
RMA1120 Statistics for the Biological and
Chemical Sciences 1 12 48
Year 2
RBF2300 Microbiology 1 12 60
RBF2310 Microbiology 2 12 60
RBF2330 Cell Biology 12 48
RBF2390 Molecular Genetics 12 48
RBF2520 Biochemistry 1 12 72
RBF2530 Biochemistry 2 12 72
Elective (Semester One)1 12
Elective (semester 2)1 12
Year 3
RMS3010 Bioprocessing Applications 12 60
RMS3020 Genomics, Proteomics and Bioinformatics 12 60
RMS3030 Genetic Engineering 12 60
RMS3100 Bioprocessing Technology 12 60
RMS3050 Advanced Medical Microbiology2 6 36
RMS3060 Microbial Technology and Cell Culture2 6 36
RMS3040 Project 1-Biotechnology 12 72
RMS3045 Project 2-Biotechnology 12 72
RBM3720 Immunology 12 60
1The second year electives can be units chosen from any course
within the university subject to the approval of the course co-
ordinator.
2The two six credit point units will both be taken in semester 2.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
68
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN MEDICAL,
FORENSIC AND ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY
Course Code: SBMF
CRICOS No: 036142M
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course provides theoretical and practical training in medical,
forensic and analytical chemistry. The design of the course has
taken account of recent market research indicating that employers
seek graduates with specific skills in analytical chemistry as applied
to industrial, medical and forensic issues. Concomitant studies in
Molecular Sciences, Biosciences, Communication, Mathematics and
Computer Literacy give the graduate the employment skills that
support the technical expertise.
The course is designed to meet the professional membership
requirements of The Royal Australian Chemical Institute (RACI).
The course commences with a typical first year that exposes the
student to a wide range of science disciplines. Second year has
core of subjects and a selection of electives. In the final year
chemical knowledge and applications are consolidated through
appropriate choices of subjects and electives.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Admission will be based upon completion of VCE or equivalent Year
12 qualification. Prerequisites are Units 3 and 4 in English and
Mathematics (any). Thus, in keeping with the intention of the
University to operate an open access policy, the absence of prior
studies in chemistry in particular, and science in general will not
preclude admission to the proposed course. However, applicants
who have successfully completed Chemistry and/or Specialist
Mathematics and/or Physics will be deemed to have a TER of 3
percentage points higher for each study. Certain subjects passed in
other courses at Victoria University or at other Institutions may be
considered for advanced standing. Provision will be made for
articulation from TAFE science programs with appropriate credit.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered on a full-time basis over three years or part-
time equivalent. Under some circumstances, mid-year entry will be
permitted.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Points Hours
Year 1
Semester One
RCS1000 Medical, Forensic & Analytical
Chemistry 1 12 48
RCS1601 Chemistry 1A 12 84
RCS1310 Biology 1 12 60
RMA1110 Mathematics for the Biological
& Chemical Sciences 1 12 48
Semester Two
ACE1913 Professional Communication 12 48
RCS1320 Biology 2 12 60
RCS1602 Chemistry 1B 12 84
RMA1120 Statistics for the Biological &
Chemical Sciences 1 12 48
Year 2
Semester One
RBF2520 Biochemistry 1 12 60
RCS2502 Medical Chemistry 2 12 60
RCS2521 Applied Chemistry (Organic) 12 60
RCS2601 Analytical Chemistry 2A 12 60
Semester Two
RCS2503 Forensic Chemistry 2 12 60
RCS2521 Applied Chemistry (Organic) 12 60
RCS2602 Analytical Chemistry 2B 12 60
RMA2120 Mathematics for the Biological
& Chemical Sciences 2 12 48
Year 3
Semester One
ACE3010 Written and Oral Communications 3 6 12
RCS3601 Analytical Chemistry 3A 12 72
RCS3603 Medical Chemistry 3A 12 60
RCS3605 Forensic Methods 3A 12 60
RMA3071 Introduction to Computer Utilization 6 36
Semester Two
ACE3010 Written and Oral Communications 3 6 12
RCS3602 Analytical Chemistry 3B 12 72
RCS3604 Medical Chemistry 3B 12 72
RCS3606 Forensic Methods 3B 12 60
Elective (to 6cps over Session 2) 6 12–36
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN NUTRITION,
FOOD AND HEALTH SCIENCE
Course Code: SBNH
CRICOS No: 011610E
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The Nutrition, Food and Health Science degree is designed to
develop the knowledge and skills in the science of food, its safety
and quality as required by today’s nutritionist’s and food scientists.
Increasing consumer awareness and demands in regard to food
related health issues and the increasingly important role of nutrition
in the development and evaluation of food products has generated a
rapidly growing need for graduates with a good understanding of
both food manufacturing nutrition and health. The course has been
specifically designed to meet the demand for such graduates.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
The minimum entry requirement for persons under 21 years of age
on 1 January 2001 is the satisfactory completion of a Year 12
course of study approved by the Victorian Curriculum and
Assessment Board (VCAB), or an equivalent program approved by
Victoria University for entry. Prerequisites for the Nutrition, Food and
Health Science course are Units 3 and 4 in English and
Mathematics (any). There is also provision for mature age entry and
entry as a disadvantaged person. Mature age provisions apply to
those persons aged 21 and over as at 1 January for the year in
which they are applying. Certain subjects passed in other courses at
Victoria University or at other Institutions may be considered for
advanced standing. Provision will be made for articulation from
TAFE science programs with appropriate credit.
COURSE DURATION
The Bachelor of Science program requires the equivalent of three
years full-time study.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Points
Year 1
Semester One
ACE1913 Professional Communication 12
RBF1310 Biology 1 12
RCS1601 Chemistry 1A 12
RBF1140 Intro to Food Nutrition
and Health Science 1 12
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
69
Semester Two
RMA1120 Statistics for the Biological and
Chemical Science 1 12
RBF1320 Biology 2 12
RCS1602 Chemistry 1B 12
RBF1145 Intro to Food, Nutri and HealthScience 2 12
Year 2
Semester One
RBF2410 Food Components & Interactions 12
RBF2210 Nutri & Food Analysis 1 12
RBF2520 Biochemistry 1 12
RBM2750 Nutrition 12
Semester Two
RBF2740 Food Preservation 12
RBF2215 Nutri & Food Analysis 2 12
RBF2218 Nutrition in Community Health 12
RNH2110 Disease and Health 12
Year 3
Semester One: Core
RBF3230 Animal Food Processing 6
RBF3730 Food Microbiology 12
RBF3810 Nutrient and Drug Interaction 12
RBF3250 Food Safety and Quality 12
RNH3210 Special topics in FNH 6
Semester Two: Core
RBF3235 Plant Food Processing 6
RBF3240 Functional foods 12
RBM3960 Nutritional Frontiers 12
RBF3900 Project Food Nutrition & Health 12
RBF3255 Product Development 6
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
The Food Science and Technology specialisation has been
accredited by the Australian Institute of Food Science and
Technology and graduates in this specialisation will be eligible for
membership.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (HONOURS) IN
CHEMICAL SCIENCES
Course Code: SHCB
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (HONOURS) IN
BIOLOGY (BIOTECHNOLOGY)
Course Code: SHBT
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (HONOURS) IN
NUTRITION AND FOOD SCIENCE
Course Code: SHFT
COURSE OBJECTIVES (FOR SHBT, SHFT AND SHCB)
An Honours program is available in each of the degree
specialisations. The aim of the honours program is to provide a
course of advanced study at a fourth year level which builds on the
knowledge and skills developed at degree level, and to prepare
students for postgraduate research by developing skills in: working
independently, critical analysis of information, problem-solving,
devising, designing and conducting experimental work and written
and oral communication
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for entry to the honours program, applicants must hold a
degree or equivalent with major studies in a relevant discipline and
should normally have obtained a ‘credit’ average, or equivalent, in
the final year of the degree.
COURSE DURATION
The courses are offered on a full-time basis over one year or
equivalent if on a part-time basis. Entry to the Honours program for
the Conservation Biology and Environmental Management
specialisation can be either at the beginning of the academic year
(February) or at a mid-year intake (July) to allow for field-based
research with seasonal limitations.
COURSE STRUCTURES
The structure of these three honours courses is as follows:
Credit
Points
RBF4000 Science Honours or 98
RCS4610 Honours Project (Part-Time) 48
The course consists of advanced coursework and a research thesis.
Assessment will be based on written assignments, seminar
presentations, a written examination and the research thesis.
Coursework assessment will be based on seminar presentations,
written assignments and examination.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
70
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
71
SCHOOL OF NURSING AND MIDWIFERY
The School of Nursing and Midwifery promotes excellence in
nursing research and practice through education. A diverse range
of programs are offered, from undergraduate degree, articulated
post graduate nursing, midwifery and health-related programs, to
Research Masters and PhD. Courses within the School provide
students with flexible career options in family and community
health, mental health, aged care and acute care nursing. Courses
are developed to meet the requirements of the professional and
accrediting bodies.
The Bachelor of Nursing (pre-registration) is a three-year degree
program which prepares students for registration as Division 1
nurses with the Nurses Board of Victoria. Graduates will be
qualified to practice in a range of health care settings, including
acute care, extended care and the community. The School has a
comprehensive clinical program, providing students with exposure
to contemporary nursing practice. A feature of the program is the
range of practice opportunities available. Articulation pathways are
available to students registered as Division 2 nurses.
The Bachelor of Nursing (post registration) is offered to Division 1,
3 and 4 nurses with a Certificate or Diploma, on a one-year full-
time or two-year part-time basis. The course provides students with
the opportunity to update and critique current nursing practice and
to develop skills in evidence based nursing practice.
The Bachelor of Nursing (Honours) is an opportunity for graduates
to develop advanced skills in nursing theory and research.
COURSE OFFERINGS
In 2006, the School of Nursing and Midwifery will offer the
following undergraduate courses at the St Albans campus:
Full-time Part-time
NON AWARD SHORT COURSES
Bridging Course (Division 2) Y n/a
Bridging Course (Graduate Entry) Y n/a
AWARD COURSES
Bachelor of Nursing
– (Pre-Registration) Y Y
– (Graduate Entry) Y Y
– (Division 2 Entry) Y Y
Bachelor of Health Science
– Nursing (Post-Registration) Y Y
– Nursing (Honours) Y Y
Bachelor of Midwifery Y Y
NON-AWARD SHORT COURSES
BRIDGING COURSE (DIVISION 2 ENTRY)
Course Code: HSVN
Degree preparation for Division 2 Nurses
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aim of this non-award course is to prepare Division 2
Registered Nurses who have completed the 12-month TAFE course
for entry into the Bachelor of Nursing Course.
Students who have successfully completed the entire Bridging course
will proceed into the Bachelor of Nursing (Pre-Registration) course.
COURSE DURATION
This course will be offered over a 4-week period during the Summer
School.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Current Registration as a Division 2 registered nurse (or eligibility
for registration) with the Nurses Board of Victoria.
COURSE STRUCTURE
HSD1114 Introduction to Health Assessment Studies
APP1021 Developmental Psychology
RBM1536 Human Bioscience B
BRIDGING COURSE (GRADUATE ENTRY)
Course Code: HSGN
Degree preparation for Graduate Entry
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aim of this non-award course is to prepare Graduate Entry
applicants who have successfully completed a Degree for entry into
the Bachelor of Nursing course.
Students who have successfully completed all of the Bridging course
will proceed into the Bachelor of Nursing (Pre-Registration) course
COURSE DURATION
This course will be offered over a 4-week period during the Summer
School.
COURSE STRUCTURE
HSG1113 Introduction to Nursing Studies
APP1021 Developmental Psychology
RBM1536 Human Bioscience A
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
72
AWARD COURSES
BACHELOR OF NURSING
(DIVISION 2 ENTRY)
Course Code: HBVN
Credit Hours
Points per week
Semester One
HNB2133 Nursing Practice 2: Acute Care 8 40
HNB2134 Clinical Practicum 2: Acute Care 8 70
HNB2135 Nursing Practice 3: Health & Illness
in Older Adults 8 40
HNB2136 Clinical Practicum 3: Health & Illness
in Older Adults 8 70
RBM2517 Human Bioscience 3 8 40
HNB2137 Ethics & Legal Studies 8 40
Semester Two
HNB2233 Nursing Practice 4: Acute Care 8 40
HNB2234 Clinical Practicum 4: Acute Care 8 70
HNB2235 Nursing Practice 5: Mental Health & Illness 8 40
HNB2236 Clinical Practicum 5: Mental Health & Illness 8 70
RBM2527 Human Bioscience 4 8 40
HNB2237 Nursing Therapeutics: Applied Medication
Management 8 40
Semester Three
HNB3236 Transition to Professional Practice 8 40
HNB3237 Research Practice 8 40
HNB3226 Nursing Practice 6: Child, Adolescent
and Family 8 40
HNB3104 Clinical Practicum 6: Child, Adolescent
and Family 8 70
HNB3136 Nursing Practice 7: Mental Health & Illness 8 40
HNB3137 Clinical Practicum 7: Mental Health & Illness 8 70
Semester Four
HNB3107 Health & Illness in the Community 8 40
Nursing Practice 8: Electives
HNB3238 Acute Care 8 40
HNB3239 Mental Health & Illness
HNB3228 Child, Adolescent and Family
HNB3242 Health & Illness in Older Adults
Clinical Practicum 9: Electives
HNB3243 Acute Care 16 140
HNB3244 Mental Health & Illness
HNB3228 Child, Adolescent and Family
HNB3246 Health & Illness in Older Adults
Consolidation
HNB3250 Clinical Practicum 9: Consolidation 16 140
CAREER PROSPECTS
Career opportunities for Division 1 Registered Nurses are available
in clinical practice, clinical management, education and research
areas. Nurses are able to practice in a range of settings including
hospitals community and mental health agencies, aged care and
health care industries.
COURSE REGULATIONS
The following should be read in conjunction with the Faculty
Regulations detailed earlier in this Handbook, and the University
Statutes and Regulations.
CLINICAL PLACEMENT
Students should note that they will be subject to safety screening
(Victoria Police) checks before placement, in accordance with
Department of Human Services policy. Students will also be asked
to declare their immunisation status to satisfy the requirements of the
hospital/agency at which they will be placed.
CLINICAL MAKEUP
Students who have been absent from clinical experience during
semester, are required to provide appropriate documentation (e.g.
medical certificate or a statutory declaration) to account for their
absence.
Absence from clinical placement may affect a student's ability to
demonstrate an acceptable level of competency. Students will be
rated as 'incomplete' if documentary evidence for their absence can
be provided. Further clinical learning and assessment may be
offered to replace the day/s of absence. The provision of make-up
time is at the discretion of the School and students should not
assume that it is an automatic right. Students who do not provide
documentary evidence or do not attend the arranged clinical make-
up will incur a 'fail' or 'unacceptable' grade and will be required to
repeat the relevant Nursing subject.
BACHELOR OF NURSING
(GRADUATE ENTRY)
Course Code: HBGN
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The Course aims to provide students with the following attributes:
• a sound knowledge of the theory and practice of nursing;
• an understanding and appreciation of health and illness as it is
influenced by a variety of political, social, psychological,
economic, cultural, and biological factors;
• a broad range of clinical practice skills that can be used to
provide care to individuals, families, and communities within
the context of the promotion of health, the prevention of ill
health, the management of in ill health, and attempts to
promote recovery from ill health;
• comprehension nursing skills that will lead to employment and
beginning practice in a broad range of health care settings;
• an ability to practice independently, in an ethical and
professional manner and collaboratively in multidisciplinary
settings;
• an ability institutional and social change in health care settings;
• locate, evaluate, manage and use information technology effectively.
COURSE DURATION
This course will be offered full-time over two years.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to this course applicants must be graduates
of other degree programs and must have satisfactory completion of
recognised graduate study in Introduction to Nursing, Human
Bioscience and Psychology.
For students who have not completed the appropriate higher degree
study, a bridging program is available prior to commencement of
the course in order to meet the above prerequisites. The program is
offered in January – February each year and will consist of the
following subjects:
• Introduction to Nursing Studies;
• Human Bioscience;
• Psychology.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
73
BACHELOR OF NURSING
(GRADUATE ENTRY)
Course Code: HBGN
(Continuing students only))
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit Hours
Points per week
Year One
Semester One
HNB2133 Nursing Practice 2: Acute Care 8 40
HNB2134 Clinical Practicum 2: Acute Care 8 70
HNB2135 Nursing Practice 3: Health & Illness
in Older Adults 8 40
HNB2136 Clinical Practicum 3: Health & Illness
in Older Adults 8 70
RBM2517 Human Bioscience 3 8 40
HNB2137 Ethics & Legal Studies 8 40
Semester Two
HNB2233 Nursing Practice 4: Acute Care 8 40
HNB2234 Clinical Practicum 4: Acute Care 8 70
HNB2235 Nursing Practice 5: Mental Health & Illness 8 40
HNB2236 Clinical Practicum 5: Mental Health & Illness 8 70
RBM2527 Human Bioscience 4 8 40
HNB2237 Nursing Therapeutics: Applied Medication
Management 8 40
Year Two
Semester Three
HNB3236 Transition to Professional Practice 8 40
HNB3237 Research Practice 8 40
HNB3226 Nursing Practice 6: Child, Adolescent
and Family 8 40
HNB3104 Clinical Practicum 6: Child, Adolescent
and Family 8 70
HNB3136 Nursing Practice 7: Mental Health & Illness 8 40
HNB3137 Clinical Practicum 7: Mental Health & Illness 8 70
Semester Four
HNB3107 Health & Illness in the Community 8 40
Nursing Practice 8: Electives
HNB3238 Acute Care 8 40
HNB3239 Mental Health & Illness
HNB3228 Child, Adolescent and Family
HNB3242 Health & Illness in Older Adults
Clinical Practicum 9: Electives
HNB3243 Acute Care 16 140
HNB3244 Mental Health & Illness
HNB3228 Child, Adolescent and Family
HNB3246 Health & Illness in Older Adults
Consolidation
HNB3250 Clinical Practicum 9: Consolidation 16 140
CAREER PROSPECTS
Career opportunities for Division 1 Registered Nurses are available
in clinical practice, clinical management, education and research
areas. Nurses are able to practice in a range of settings including
hospitals community and mental health agencies, aged care and
health care industries.
COURSE REGULATIONS
The following should be read in conjunction with the Faculty
Regulations detailed earlier in this Handbook, and the University
Statutes and Regulations.
CLINICAL PLACEMENT
Students should note that they will be subject to safety screening
(Victoria Police) checks before placement, in accordance with
Department of Human Services policy. Students will also be asked
to declare their immunisation status to satisfy the requirements of the
hospital/agency at which they will be placed.
CLINICAL MAKEUP
Students who have been absent from clinical experience during
semester, are required to provide appropriate documentation (e.g.
medical certificate or a statutory declaration) to account for their
absence.
Absence from clinical placement may affect a student's ability to
demonstrate an acceptable level of competency. Students will be
rated as 'incomplete' if documentary evidence for their absence can
be provided. Further clinical learning and assessment may be
offered to replace the day/s of absence. The provision of make-up
time is at the discretion of the School and students should not
assume that it is an automatic right. Students who do not provide
documentary evidence or do not attend the arranged clinical make-
up will incur a 'fail' or 'unacceptable' grade and will be required to
repeat the relevant Nursing subject.
BACHELOR OF NURSING
(PRE-REGISTRATION)
Course Code: HBRN
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aims of the course are to:
• prepare competent beginning nurse practitioners who are
eligible and able to practice in a variety of health care settings;
• provide an education which contributes to the student’s
personal, professional, and intellectual growth;
• prepare students in ways to help them begin to deal with the
world of work with its attendant uncertainties, ambiguities,
conflicts and change.
• prepare students who can participate effectively in a teamwork
approach; and
• enable graduates to register professionally as Division 1 nurses
with the Nurses Board of Victoria
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over three years on a full-time or part-time
equivalent.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must have
successfully completed the Victorian certificate of Education (VCE)
including Units 3 and 4 with a study score of at least 25 in English
any and study score of at least 20 in one of biology, chemistry,
health and human development, physics, psychology or
mathematics (any combination).
Applicants who do not meet the normal admission requirements but
who process appropriate educational qualifications, work or life
experiences which would enable them to successfully undertake the
course, will be considered for admission.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
74
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit Hours
Points per week
Year 1
Semester One
HNB1113 Foundations in Professional Practice 12 60
HNB1114 Healthcare Informatics 8 40
RBM1519 Human Bioscience 1: Body
Structure & Function 8 48
APT1311 Psychology Across the Lifespan 12 60
HNB1115 Healthcare Law and Ethics 8 40
Semester Two
HNB1232 Nursing Practice 1: Acute Care 16 80
HNB1233 Clinical Practicum 1: Acute Care 8 56
ASE1320 Sociology of Indigenous Health 8 40
HNB3101 Research for Practice 8 40
RBM1530 Human Bioscience 2: Body
Structure & Function 8 48
Year 2
Semester Three
HNB2133 Nursing Practice 2: Acute Care 8 40
HNB2134 Clinical Practicum 2: Acute Care 8 70
HNB2135 Nursing Practice 3: Health & Illness
in Older Adults 8 40
HNB2136 Clinical Practicum 3: Health & Illness
in Older Adults 8 70
RBM2517 Human Bioscience 3: Pathophysiology 16 80
Semester Four
HNB2233 Nursing Practice 4: Acute Care 8 40
HNB2234 Clinical Practicum 4: Acute Care 8 70
HNB2235 Nursing Practice 5:
Mental Health & Illness 16 80
HNB2236 Clinical Practicum 5:
Mental Health & Illness 16 140
Year 3
Semester Five
HNB3236 Transition to Professional Practice 8 40
HNB2237 Nursing Therapeutics: Applied Medication
Management 8 40
HNB3103 Nursing Practice 6: Child, Adolescent
and Family 8 40
HNB3104 Clinical Practicum 6: Child, Adolescent
and Family 8 70
HNB3105 Nursing Practice 7: Acute Care 8 40
HNB3106 Clinical Practicum 7: Acute Care 8 70
Semester Six
HNB3107 Health and Illness in the Community 8 40
Nursing Practice 8: Electives (Choose one)
HNB3108 Acute Care 8 40
HNB3109 Mental Health & Illness
HNB3203 Child, Adolescent and Family
HNB3204 Health & Illness in Older Adults
Clinical Practicum 8: Electives (Choose one)
HNB3206 Acute Care 16 140
HNB3208 Mental Health & Illness
HNB3209 Child, Adolescent and Family
HNB3210 Health & Illness in Older Adults
Consolidation
HNB3215 Clinical Practicum 9: Consolidation 16 140
BACHELOR OF NURSING
(PRE-REGISTRATION)
Course Code: HBUN
Credit Hours
Points per week
Year Two
(Continuing Students Only)
Semester One
HNB2133 Nursing Practice 2: Acute Care 8 40
HNB2134 Clinical Practicum 2: Acute Care 8 70
HNB2135 Nursing Practice 3:
Health & Illness in Older Adults 8 40
HNB2136 Clinical Practicum 3:
Health & Illness in Older Adults 8 70
RBM2517 Human Bioscience 3 8 40
HNB2137 Ethics & Legal Studies 8 40
Semester Two
HNB2233 Nursing Practice 4: Acute Care 8 40
HNB2234 Clinical Practicum 4: Acute Care 8 70
HNB2235 Nursing Practice 5: Mental Health & Illness 8 40
HNB2236 Clinical Practicum 5: Mental Health & Illness 8 70
RBM2527 Human Bioscience 4 8 40
HNB2237 Nursing Therapeutics:
Applied Medication Management 8 40
Year Two Total 96 570
Year Three
Semester One
HNB3236 Transition to Professional Practice 8 40
HNB3237 Research Practice 8 40
HNB3226 Nursing Practice 6: Child, Adolescent
and Family 8 40
HNB3104 Clinical Practicum 6: Child, Adolescent
and Family 8 70
HNB3136 Nursing Practice 7: Mental Health & Illness 8 40
HNB3137 Clinical Practicum 7: Mental Health & Illness 8 70
Semester Two
HNB3107 Health & Illness in the Community 8 40
Nursing Practice 8: Electives
HNB3238 Acute Care 8 40
HNB3239 Mental Health & Illness
HNB3228 Child, Adolescent and Family
HNB3242 Health & Illness in Older Adults
Clinical Practicum 9: Electives
HNB3243 Acute Care 16 140
HNB3244 Mental Health & Illness
HNB3228 Child, Adolescent and Family
HNB3246 Health & Illness in Older Adults
Consolidation
HNB3250 Clinical Practicum 9: Consolidation 16 140
CAREER PROSPECTS
Career opportunities for Division 1 Registered Nurses are available
in clinical practice, clinical management, education and research
areas. Nurses are able to practice in a range of settings including
hospitals community and mental health agencies, aged care and
health care industries.
COURSE REGULATIONS
The following should be read in conjunction with the Faculty
Regulations detailed earlier in this Handbook, and the University
Statutes and Regulations.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
75
CLINICAL PLACEMENT
Students should note that they will be subject to safety screening
(Victoria Police) checks before placement, in accordance with
Department of Human Services policy. Students will also be asked
to declare their immunisation status to satisfy the requirements of the
hospital/agency at which they will be placed.
CLINICAL MAKEUP
Students who have been absent from clinical experience during
semester, are required to provide appropriate documentation (e.g.
medical certificate or a statutory declaration) to account for their
absence.
Absence from clinical placement may affect a student's ability to
demonstrate an acceptable level of competency. Students will be
rated as 'incomplete' if documentary evidence for their absence can
be provided. Further clinical learning and assessment may be
offered to replace the day/s of absence. The provision of make-up
time is at the discretion of the School and students should not
assume that it is an automatic right. Students who do not provide
documentary evidence or do not attend the arranged clinical make-
up will incur a 'fail' or 'unacceptable' grade and will be required to
repeat the relevant Nursing subject.
BACHELOR OF NURSING
(POST-REGISTRATION)
Course Code: HBPN
(Course not offered in 2006)
COURSE OBJECTIVES
This course aims to:
• develop and enhance interpersonal and group skills;
• describe, subject to critical analysis, and apply to practice,
some contemporary theories of nursing and models of practice;
• examine several of the current issues and trends related to
nursing and health care and consider their implications for
practice and the provision of service to the community;
• gain knowledge and skills in various research methods and
develop competence in conducting research;
• extend knowledge, deepen understanding and increase
competence in a chosen field of practice; and
• explore and pursue alternative approaches to nursing practice
within the context of the Australian health care system.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over one year on a full-time basis or part-time
equivalent.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must be registered
as a Division 1, 3 or 4 nurse; and hold, or be eligible to hold, a
current Practising Certificate with the Nurses Board of Victoria.
Diplomates who wish to apply for entry are invited to seek
exemption for up to fifty per cent (50 per cent) of the course. It
should be noted, however, that the subject HHR1243 Nursing
Studies 3 Clinical Project is not available for exemption.
Preference will be given to non-diplomate applicants who have
completed a degree preparation course, for example Learning
Options or similar bridging course.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit Hours
Points per week
Semester One
HHF1124 Issues and Trends in Health 12 39
HHF1125 Knowledge and Nursing Knowledge 12 39
HHF1243 Nursing Studies 3 Clinical Project 24 78
Total 48 156
Semester Two
HNB1234 Professional Nursing 2 12 40
HNB3237 Research Practice 12 40
Nursing Studies (1) electives 12 40
Nursing Studies (2) elective 12 40
Total 48 160
Course total 96 316
Electives
Semester One/Semester Two
HNB1235 Evidence Based Health Care 12 40
(Nursing Studies 1 elective)
HNB3236 Transition to Professional Practice 12 40
(Nursing studies 2 elective)
Electives to be offered offshore only.
HHE1673 Health Assessment 12 39
HHE0001 Introduction to Nursing Management 12 39
BACHELOR OF HEALTH SCIENCE (HONOURS)
– NURSING
Course Code: HHNU
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aims of the course are to enable graduates to:
• demonstrate advanced knowledge and specialised skill in the
selection, application and integration of qualitative research
methods to generate, test and extend theory;
• assess how the concepts of causality, correlation and
probability impact on choice of scientific design derived from
the classic experimental model;
• recognise the relationship between a research problem and
research design;
• examine a variety of philosophical positions and be able to
determine their contribution to nursing’s epistemology; and
• facilitate professional ethical and moral development in
practice and research.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must:
• have satisfactorily completed a bachelor degree in nursing with a
grade average of Credit (C) or higher throughout the course; and
• be eligible for registration as a Division 1 Nurse with the
Nurses Board of Victoria.
Applicants who do not meet the normal entry requirements will be
considered for entry if they meet the following criteria:
• satisfactory completion of a one-year post-registration degree
in nursing with a grade average of Credit (C) or higher
throughout the course; and
• eligibility for registration as a Division 1 or Division 3 Nurse
with the Nurses Board of Victoria; or
• satisfactory completion of a bachelor degree in a discipline
other than nursing with a grade average of Credit (C) or
higher throughout the course; and
• eligibility for registration as a Division 1 or Division 3 Nurse
with the Nurses Board of Victoria.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
76
COURSE DURATION
The duration of the course is offered over one year on a full-time
basis or part-time equivalent.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Students are required to study three specified subjects and to
complete a minor thesis within two semesters of full-time study (or
the part-time equivalent). The structure of the course permits some
flexibility in that all four subjects of one-semester duration, may be
taken in any order and do not have any prerequisite or Corequisite
requirements.
In order to be awarded a Bachelor of Health Science (Honours) –
Nursing students must complete all subjects with Honours H3 or
above.
Credit Hours
Points per week
Semesters One and Two
HNH4312 Minor Thesis A 16 39 or 39
HNH4314 Minor Thesis B (full-time) or 48 78 or 78
HNH4313 Minor Thesis B (part-time) (2 x 12) 24 39 & 39
HFR0001 Advanced Quantitative Research
Methods 16 39
HFR0002 Advanced Qualitative Research
Methods 16 39
HHM6000 Nursing Inquiry & Knowledge 16 39
BACHELOR OF MIDWIFERY
Course Code: HBNW
(Subject to approval by the Nurses Board of Victoria)
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course aims to prepare midwives who will be able to:
• practice competently and confidently in a variety of maternity
settings;
• demonstrate practice which is evidence-informed, according to
the ACMI Competency Standards for Midwives (2001);
• reflect attitudes which are congruent with the philosophy of
valuing women, women-centred care, and woman-midwife
partnership;
• work both as a primary carer and in collaboration with other
healthcare professionals in providing comprehensive care
through women’s reproductive life; and
• achieve employment in a variety of maternity care settings.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course, an applicant must have
successfully completed the Victorian Certificate of Education (VCE),
with Units 1 and 2 Maths (any); Units 3 and 4 English and a study
score of at least 25; Units 3 and 4 of at least one of the following:
Biology, Chemistry, Health Education, Psychology, Human
Development, Physics, or Maths (any).
Applicants who do not meet the normal admission requirements but
who possess appropriate educational qualifications, work or life
experiences which would enable them to successfully undertake the
course, will be considered for admission.
COURSE REGULATIONS
The following should be read in conjunction with the faculty
regulations detailed earlier in this Handbook, and the University
Statutes and Regulations.
PRACTICAL PLACEMENT
Students should note that they will be subject to safety screening
(Police checks) before placement in accordance with Department of
Human Services policy (March 2000). Students may also be asked
to declare their immunization status to satisfy the requirements of the
hospital/agency at which they will be placed.
Students’ progress towards competency is gauged against the
expected minimum competency rating for each semester of the
course. Absence from practice placement may affect a student's
ability to demonstrate the expected level of competency. Students
who have been absent from practice experience during semester,
are required to provide appropriate documentation (eg medical
certificate or a statutory declaration) to account for their absence.
The provision of make-up time is at the discretion of the School and
students should not assume that it is an automatic right. At the
discretion of the School additional midwifery practice may be
negotiated within a maximum stated time frame to attain
competency. Students who do not provide documentary evidence or
do not attend the arranged additional practice hours will incur a
‘fail’ grade and will be required to repeat the relevant Midwifery
subjects.
ACADEMIC PROGRESSION
UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS
Students will be deemed to have made unsatisfactory progress if
they fail to complete the course in six calendar years (on full-time
basis).
Each sequential stage of the course must be completed before
progression to a subsequent stage.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over three years on a full-time basis.
COURSE STRUCTURE
(Year 1 only commencing in 2006)
Credit Hours
Points per week
Year 1
Semester One
RBM1515 Anatomy & Physiology 1 8 52
APT 1310 Psychology 1 12 60
HNM7113 Foundations in Midwifery Practice 12 140
HNM7115 Midwifery Studies 1:
The Childbearing Journey 8 70
HNM7114 Continuity of Care 1 8 144
Semester Two
RBM 1525 Anatomy & Physiology 2 8 52
HNB1115 Healthcare law and ethics 8 56
HNM7201 Midwifery Studies 2:
The Childbearing Journey 8 70
HNM7202 Midwifery Practice 2:
The Childbearing Journey 24 208
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
77
Year 2
Semester Three
ASE1320 Sociology of Indigenous Health 8 40
RBM 2528 Pathophysiology in Midwifery 8 56
HNM7203 Midwifery Studies 3:
Childbearing Complications 8 70
HNM7204 Midwifery Practice 3:
Childbearing Complications 24 208
Semester Four
HNB3101 Research for practice 8 56
HNM7205 Midwives working with women
from diverse backgrounds 8 56
HNM7206 Midwifery Practice 4: Women’s Health 8 60
HNM7207 Midwifery Studies 4: Women’s Health 16 120
HNM7208 Continuity of Care 2 8 136
Year 3
Semester Five
HNB7309 Applied Medication Management 8 56
HNM7310 Midwifery Studies 5:
Childbearing Complications 8 70
HNM7311 Midwifery Practice 5:
Childbearing Complications 24 208
HNM7312 Continuity of Care 3 8 126
Semester Six
HNM7313 Midwifery Studies 6:
Babies Needing Extra Care 8 60
HNM7314 Midwifery Practice 6:
Babies Needing Extra Care 16 120
HNM7315 Midwifery Practice 7: Consolidation 24 208
For theoretical subjects 1 credit point = 7 hours approximately
For clinical subjects 1 credit point = 10 hours approximately but
varies according to NBV requirements.
BACHELOR OF MIDWIFERY
Course Code: HBMI
COURSE STRUCTURE
(Continuing students only)
Credit Hours
Points per week
Year Two
Semester One
HNM2010 Practice Allegiances 16 208*
JAC0216 With Women Rethinking Pain 16 4
JAC0217 Unpacking Midwifery Knowledge 8 4
HNB2137 Ethics and Legal Studies 8 5
Semester Two
HNM2020 Towards A Midwife Self 16 208*
JAC0219 Women’s Health: Sociopolitical Context 12 4
HNM7006 Midwives Working With Diversity 12 4
HNB1235 Evidence Based Health Care 8 2
Total Year Two 96 328
Year Three
Semester One
HNM3010 Navigating Childbearing Obstacles 16 208*
HNM3011 Women's Health Practice 16 120*
HNM7007 Childbearing Obstacles 8 4
JMO3105 Women’s Health: Women’s Business 8 4
Semester Two
HNM3020 Working With Babies 16 208*
HNM3021 Independent Lerning Unit 8 78
JAC0335 Babies Needing Extra Care 16 4
HNM7010 Hanging up a Shingle (Monash) 8 52
Total Year Three 96 810
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
Graduates from this program will be eligible for registration with
the Nurses Board of Victoria. Graduates may also apply for
membership of the Australian College of Midwives Inc.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
78
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
79
SUSTAINABILITY GROUP
The Sustainability Group operates on the St Albans Campus of the
University. In line with Faculty objectives, the Group is committed to
the development and promotion of science.
The Group seeks to provide students with vocationally- and
educationally-oriented experiences and expertise which will equip
them for entry into a work environment in which there is likely to be
significant career changes during their working life. Consequently,
the Group provides courses and programs with a close relationship
between theory and practice and seeks to include relevant industrial
experience within each award course.
The Group also seeks to foster within its students a personal pride in
and a professional attitude to their work and a full understanding of
their responsibilities to society as trained scientists.
It is the belief of the Group that active involvement in research and
consultancy is vital in providing quality teaching as well as in
developing a viable and practical course for the students. To this
end, all academic staff have doctoral degrees and substantial
research and consultancy experience. The Group endeavours to
develop close relationships with industry and the community to keep
abreast of their respective needs. To this end, student projects are
performed in collaboration with industry, the community,
government bodies and research institutes wherever possible.
The Group is equipped with world class laboratories and
equipment for teaching and research. These include access to the
Queenscliff laboratories of the Victorian Marine Science
Consortium, a well equipped aquatic research laboratory, SCUBA
equipment, a 4WD vehicle, GPS units, various environmental
measurement devices and excellent facilities for microbiological
work.
The Group also offers Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy
degrees by research and Masters and Graduate Diploma
coursework programs. Further details are given in the Postgraduate
Studies section of the Handbook.
COURSES OFFERED
The Sustainability Group offers undergraduate courses leading to
the award of:
• Bachelor of Science;
− Ecology and Sustainability;
• Bachelor of Science (Honours).
GROUP REGULATIONS
The following regulations apply to all courses and subjects
administered or taught by the Sustainability Group and are in
addition to University regulations governing these areas as laid
down in the Statutes and Regulations.
AWARDS
A student shall qualify to receive an award when that student has
successfully completed all the requirements and prescribed subjects
of the course.
ASSESSMENT
Student assessment will embrace both formal assessment through
final examination and continuous assessment incorporating unit
tests, assignments, report writing, problem solving exercises, class
presentations and laboratory, project and field work.
Students would normally be expected to satisfactorily complete each
component of the assessment to gain a pass in the subject.
PRACTICAL WORK
A minimum of 80 per cent attendance is required at all practical
sessions. Failure to attend at least 80 per cent of practical sessions
will automatically constitute unsatisfactory completion of the subject.
Practical reports will only be accepted from those students who
have attended practical sessions for their full duration.
LATE SUBMISSION
Students failing to submit assessable work by the prescribed
deadline will incur a penalty of five percentage marks per day for
the first ten days after the prescribed deadline. Work submitted
after this time will not be assessed and students will be granted a
zero grade.
This requirement may be varied at the discretion of the subject co-
ordinator.
SUPPLEMENTARY ASSESSMENT
Students may be granted supplementary assessment with a
maximum of two supplementary assessments being permitted in any
one full-time academic year. Supplementary assessment will not be
available for subjects that are being repeated.
USE OF ELECTRONIC CALCULATORS AND STORAGE DEVICES
The use of electronic calculators and electronic storage devices is
not permitted in any examination unless specified in the subject
guide for that subject and/or on the examination paper for that
subject.
UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS
Students in any one of the following categories may be asked to
show cause as to why they should not be excluded from the course:
• those who fail 50 per cent or more of their assessable
enrolment load (expressed in subjects) in any semester;
• those who fail the same subject twice;
• those who transgress a conditional enrolment agreement.
DURATION OF EXCLUSION
Excluded students have no automatic right of re-admission to the
course from which they were excluded. Students who have been
excluded may apply for re-admission not less than one calendar
year from the date of exclusion. These students must provide, with
their application, evidence of changed circumstances that
significantly improve the applicant’s chances of academic success.
PROGRESSION
Progression through the course is based on the following guidelines:
• where any compulsory subject must be repeated, enrolment in
that subject must be at the first opportunity following the initial
failure;
• students may not enrol in any subject for which the prerequisite
has not been passed;
• student enrolment will not normally be approved where the
total proposed subject hours exceeds the normal total subject
hours for a course year;
• where enrolment in a co-requisite subject is required, enrolment
in the co-requisite subject must take preference over enrolment
in an elective;
• where a subject is being repeated, requests for exemptions for
part of the subject work are at the discretion of the Department
or School offering the subject. Any exemption granted will
normally apply for one year only.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
80
DISCIPLINARY FAILURE
A student who has failed a subject on disciplinary grounds may not
enrol in any further subjects without the permission of the Faculty
Dean.
REPEATING SUBJECTS
A student who has withdrawn twice in any subject without receiving
a penalty grade must seek the permission of the lecturer in charge
before being permitted to re-enrol in that subject.
STAGE COMPLETION
A student may apply for a Stage Completion if:
• all subjects in the course except one have been passed;
• a result of N1 (40 per cent–49 per cent) is achieved in the
failed subject;
• the failed subject is not a prerequisite for any other subject in
the course.
The granting of a Stage Completion is at the discretion of the Head
of Group and is not regarded as a pass in the failed subject.
DEFERMENT FROM AWARD COURSE
The following rules apply to the courses of the Group and are in
addition to University regulations governing these areas:
• approval of deferment is not automatic;
• each application to defer will be dealt with on an individual
basis by the Group Administrator in consultation with
appropriate academic staff members;
• a deferment will not be granted to VTAC applicants requesting
a deferment at their first enrolment session. Students who fall
into this category will be advised to re-apply for a place at the
end of the year;
• in normal circumstances students must have successfully
completed at least one semester of study, by passing at least
50 per cent of subjects undertaken, to be eligible for
deferment;
• except under exceptional circumstances students may apply to
defer their studies for a total period not exceeding twelve
months;
• deferment will not normally be granted until consultation has
taken place with the Course Co-ordinator (or nominee) and/or
a student counsellor;
• students failing to re-enrol at the end of their deferment period
will automatically be withdrawn from their course of study.
FURTHER INFORMATION
For further information please contact the Sustainability Group on
(03) 9919-2667 or fax (03) 9919 2493.
BIOLOGY AND GENERAL SCIENCE TEACHING FOR PHYSICAL
EDUCATION GRADUATES
The School of Biomedical Sciences and Sustainability Group have
arranged elective subjects to assist Physical Education and
Recreation students planning a secondary teaching career. The
School offers two elective programs designed to facilitate the entry
of Bachelor of Applied Science – Physical Education graduates into
a second teaching method in a Diploma of Education course and to
subsequently gain registration with the Ministry of Education to
teach either Biology or General Science, in addition to Physical
Education.
To obtain registration in General Science, the Ministry of Education
requires that students take subjects equivalent to one quarter of the
first year of their Bachelor of Applied Science course in each of two
science areas, both of which have the potential to be extended to
sub-majors. A sub-major in a science area is defined by the Ministry
as a commitment of one quarter of the first year load and one
quarter of the second year load to subjects in this science area.
The physical education degree at Victoria University, Footscray Park
Campus, is based upon a unit system such that one semester-hour of
contact is equivalent to one unit. Since the degree requires a
minimum of 144 units (48 units per year), then one quarter of a
year corresponds to 12 units. To obtain General Science
registration based upon chemistry and biology therefore, requires at
least 12 units devoted to chemistry and 12 units to biology in the
first year of the degree.
To obtain registration in biology, it is necessary to take sufficient
biology subjects to constitute a sub-major, i.e. at least 12 units of
biology in first year and 23 units of biology in second year.
Details of the two streams of study are set out below; the code
number is given for each subject.
GENERAL SCIENCE STREAM
RCS1006 Chemistry 1
RBM1518 Human Physiology 1
or
RBF1310 Biology 1
RBM1528 Human Physiology 2
or
RBF1320 Biology 2
RBM2260 Diet and Nutrition
BIOLOGY STREAM
RBF2192 Applied Microbiology
RBM1518 Human Physiology 1
or
RBF1310 Biology 1
RBM1528 Human Physiology 2
or
RBF1320 Biology 2
RBM2260 Diet and Nutrition
RBM3264 Advanced Nerve and Muscle Physiology
RBF2610 Fundamentals of Ecology
RBF2640 Australian Animals
RBF2620 Australian Plants
RBF3600 Aquatic Ecology
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN ECOLOGY AND
SUSTAINABILITY
Course Code: SBES
CRICOS No: 047050B
COURSE OBJECTIVES
This course provides the flexible combinations of professional
education and technical training that are required to develop the
practical solutions necessary to achieve sustainable management of
the Australian environment. There is a strong emphasis on hands-on
skills, including building links across scientific, social and business
sectors environmental analysis, effective communication and project
management.
The course structure is based on a limited number of core subjects
which provide a solid foundation to understanding of the biology,
ecology and sustainable management of the Australian landscape,
supplemented by a wide range of electives drawn from the
environmental engineering, business, tourism, community
development and human bioscience disciplines.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
81
Students can choose from electives according to the four major
streams in the course: a) ecology and natural resource management
(with specialisations in aquatic engineering and environmental
engineering); b) ecology and community development; c) ecology
and tourism/business; d) ecology and human bioscience/wellness.
These are suggested streams only and students may select electives
according to their desired academic and career pathway, subject to
approval from the Head of Group.
The course teaches students the necessary skills to perform a wide
range of activities in ecology and environmental science in addition
to environmental issues and community studies, and the skills for
communicating their ecological knowledge to science professionals
and non-professionals. The course structure is practically based and
flexible, allowing a mix of in-depth studies and specializations with
novel combinations of subjects and skills across diverse disciplines
not usually covered in science courses.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
The minimum entry requirement for persons under 21 years of age
on 1 January 2005 is the satisfactory completion of a Year 12
course of study approved by the Victorian Curriculum and
Assessment Board (VCAB) or an equivalent program approved by
Victoria University for entry.
The minimum ENTER score for 2005 is 70. Prerequisites are Units 3
and 4 – a study score of at least 20 in English (any).
There is also provision for mature age entry and entry as a
disadvantaged person. Mature age provisions apply to those
persons aged 21 years and over as at 1 January 2006.
COURSE DURATION
The Bachelor of Science in Ecology and Sustainability program
requires the equivalent of three years full-time study. A fourth year
may be taken in the Honours program.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Semester Points
Year 1
ACE1911 Communications for the
Professional Scientist 1 1 12
ACE1912 Communications for the
Professional Scientist 2 2 12
RBF1310 Biology 11 1 12
RBF1320 Biology 2 2 12
RBF1150 Global Environmental Issues 2 12
RBF1160 Australian Landscapes and Biota 2 12
RCS1110 Chemistry for Biological Sciences A2 or 1 12
RCS1120 Chemistry for Biological Sciences B2 or 2 12
RMA1110 Mathematics for the Biological
& Chemical Sciences 1 or 1 12
RMA1120 Mathematics for the Biological &
Chemical Sciences 22 or 2 12
Prescribed and free electives 1, 2 24
Year 2
RBF2610 Fundamentals of Ecology 1 12
RBF2640 Australian Animals 1 12
RBF2630 Community and Environment 2 12
RBF2620 Australian Plants 2 12
RCS1110 Chemistry for Biological Sciences A2 or 1 12
RCS1120 Chemistry for Biological Sciences B2 or 2 12
RMA1110 Mathematics for the Biological &
Chemical Sciences 12 or 1 12
RMA1120 Mathematics for the Biological &
Chemical Sciences2 or 2 12
Prescribed and free electives3 1, 2 24
Year 3
Minimum of four from list below plus up to four electives
RBF3600 Aquatic Ecology 1 12
RBF3610 Biostatistics 1 12
RBF3620 Conservation and Sustainability 1 12
RBF3630 Environmental Impacts & Monitoring 2 12
RBF3640 Terrestrial Environments and
Rehabilitation 2 12
RBF3650 Pollution Biology 2 12
RBF3660 Indigenous Society & Environmental
Management 2 12
RCS3411 Environmental Legislation 2 12
Electives3
1 Students taking the Ecology and Human Bioscience/Wellness
stream can take RBF1310 Biology 1 or RBF1510 Human
Bioscience 1A
2 Students enrolled in the Natural Resource Management stream
would be advised to take RCS1110 Chemistry for Biological
Sciences A and RCS1120 Chemistry for Biological Sciences B,
as these subjects are prerequisites for some 2/3 level core
subjects in that stream. Students in other streams would not be so
advised.
Students taking either of the Engineering specialisations within
the Natural Resource Management stream should take RCS1110
Chemistry for Biological Sciences A and RCS1120 Chemistry for
Biological Sciences B in their second year of study. All others
within the stream should take these subjects in their first year.
Students enrolled in the Natural Resource Management stream
would be required to take RMA1110 Mathematics for the
Biological & Chemical Sciences 1 and RMA1120 Mathematics
for the Biological & Chemical Sciences 2 if they lack VCE
Mathematics, but could take an elective if they have VCE
Mathematics. This is at the discretion of the course co-ordinator.
Students taking either of the Engineering specialisations within
the Natural Resource Management stream should take
RMA1110 Mathematics for the Biological & Chemical Sciences
1 and RMA1120 Mathematics for the Biological & Chemical
Sciences 2 in first second year of study. All others within the
stream should take these subjects in their second year.
3 Prescribed and free electives are those listed below.
ELECTIVES
At least 6 electives are required to be taken over the course of the
degree. Electives other than those listed below may be taken at the
discretion of the Head of School. The total subject hours must be
within the prescribed range and due consideration must be given
for prerequisites.
Science electives may be chosen from any of the degree subjects
offered by the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science. Subjects
from programs offered by other Faculties may also be selected as
elective subjects, subject to the approval of the appropriate Faculty.
Students should refer to the subject outlines listed within other
Schools and Faculties for further information.
Students are advised to seek the assistance of academic staff when
making their elective choice, as the judicious selection of electives
can provide an opportunity to undertake a second major study
alongside the primary degree specialization.
PRESCRIBED ELECTIVES
ECOLOGY AND NATURAL RESOURCE MANAGEMENT STREAM
RCS1110 Chemistry for Biological Sciences A 12
RMA1110 Maths 1 or Elective – from list below 12
RCS1120 Chemistry for Biological Sciences B 12
RMA1120 Maths 2 or Elective – from list below 12
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
82
AQUATIC ENGINEERING SPECIALIZATION
VNF2841 Fluid Mechanics 1 12
VCF2842 Hydraulics 12
VCF3841 Engineering Hydrology 12
VCF3842 Water Resources Engineering 12
VCG3861 Geomechanics 12
VCF4842 Geohydrological Engineering 12
ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING SPECIALIZATION
VCN3882 Introduction to Environmental
Engineering 12
VCN4881 Environmental Engineering 1 12
VCN4882 Environmental Engineering 2 12
VCT4872 Environmental Planning & Design 12
ECOLOGY AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT STREAM
ASA1021 Community Development
Theory and Practice 1 12
ASA1022 Community Development
Theory and Practice 2 12
Students taking this stream should choose two electives from the
following
ASA2021 Community Development
Theory and Practice 3 12
ASA2022 Community Development
Theory and Practice 4 12
ASA3010 Sociology 3A 12
ASA3011 Sociology 3B 12
ASS3035 Sociology 2.3E (Environmental Policy) 12
ASC3095 Conflict Resolution in Groups
and Communities 12
ECOLOGY AND TOURISM/BUSINESS STREAM
BHO1190 Introduction to Tourism 12
BHO2286 Nature-based Tourism 12
Students taking this stream should choose two electives from the
following:
BHO2255 Tourism Enterprise Management 12
BHO1192 Travel Industry Management 12
BHO3437 Destination Planning and Development 12
BHO3500 Hospitality and Tourism Industry
ProjVCT 12
BHO1171 Introduction to Marketing 12
BAO1101 Accounting for Decision Making 12
ECOLOGY AND HUMAN BIOSCIENCE/WELLNESS STREAM
RBM2530 Human Bioscience 3A
(pathophysiology 1) 12
RBM2540 Human Bioscience 4A, or 12
RBM3810 Wellness 1 20
RBM3820 Wellness 2 20
Students taking this stream could include electives from the
following:
RBM2260 Diet and Nutrition 20
RBM2560 Medical Biochemistry 12
RBM2610 Biomedical Sciences and Society 12
RBM1514 Functional Anatomy 1 20
RBM1524 Functional Anatomy 2 20
RBM2361 Epidemiology 12
SUITABLE FREE ELECTIVES
Some electives may be prescribed for certain streams.
RCS1110 Chemistry for Biological Sciences A 12
RMA1110 Maths 1 12
RCS1120 Chemistry for Biological Sciences B 12
RMA1120 Maths 2 12
VNF2841 Fluid Mechanics 1 12
VCF2842 Hydraulics 12
VCF3841 Engineering Hydrology 12
VCF3842 Water Resources Engineering 12
VCG3861 Geomechanics 12
VCF4842 Geohydrological Engineering 12
VCN3882 Introduction to Environmental
Engineering 12
VCN4881 Environmental Engineering 1 12
VCN4882 Environmental Engineering 2 12
VCT4872 Environmental Planning & Design 12
VCT2871 Surveying 12
ACE1801 Engineering Communication 12
ASA1021 Community Development
Theory and Practice 1 12
ASA1022 Community Development
Theory and Practice 2 12
ASA2021 Community Development
Theory and Practice 3 12
ASA2022 Community Development
Theory and Practice 4 12
ASA3010 Sociology 3A 12
ASA3011 Sociology 3B 12
ASS3035 Sociology 2.3E (Environmental Policy) 12
ASC3095 Conflict Resolution in Groups
and Communities 12
BAO1101 Accounting for Decision Making 12
BHO1171 Introduction to Marketing 12
BHO1190 Introduction to Tourism 12
BHO1192 Travel Industry Management 12
BHO2255 Tourism Enterprise Management Ecology 12
BHO2286 Nature-based Tourism 12
BHO3437 Destination Planning and Development 12
BHO3500 Hospitality and Tourism Industry
ProjVCT 12
RBM1514 Functional Anatomy 1 20
RBM1524 Functional Anatomy 2 20
RBM2260 Diet and Nutrition 20
RBM2361 Epidemiology 12
RBM2530 Human Bioscience 3A
(pathophysiology 1) 12
RBM2540 Human Bioscience 4A, OR 12
RBM2560 Medical Biochemistry 12
RBM2610 Biomedical Sciences and Society 12
RBM3810 Wellness 1 20
RBM3820 Wellness 2 20
RBF3530 Environmental Philosophy 12
RBF3540 Leadership & the Environment 12
RCS2562 Environmental Chemistry 12
RCS2610 Plastics in the Environment 12
RCS3361 Environmental Health 12
RCS3401 Occupational Health and Safety
Best Practice 12
RCS3431 Environmental Measurement
and Analysis 2 12
Students are advised to seek assistance and advice of academic
staff when making their elective selection. Engineering and
Tourism/Business subjects are offered only on the Footscray Park
Campus in the first instance. Timetable constraints make
combinations of subjects offered on more than one Campus difficult
and so must be selected with care.
UNDERGRADUATE STUDIES
83
FIELD TRIPS
Students will be required to participate in field trips throughout the
course. These will vary from one-day excursions to three-day field
camps. Some field trips may be held over weekends. Participation
in these activities forms part of the assessment of the subjects, and
provides essential experience in field techniques. Exemption from
these activities is available only by prior application where
circumstances preclude participation.
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
Graduates of the course are eligible to join professional and
learned societies such as the Ecological Society of Australia and the
Australian Institute of Biologists.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (HONOURS) IN
ECOLOGY AND SUSTAINABILITY
Course Code: SHAB
COURSE OBJECTIVES
An Honours program is available in each of the degree
specialisations. The aim of the honours program is to provide a
course of advanced study at a fourth year level that builds on the
knowledge and skills developed at degree level, and to prepare
students for postgraduate research by developing skills in working
independently, critical analysis of information, problem-solving,
devising, designing and conducting experimental work and written
and oral communication.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for entry to the honours program, applicants must hold a
degree or equivalent with major studies in a relevant discipline and
should normally have obtained a ‘credit’ average, or equivalent, in
the final year of the degree.
COURSE DURATION
The courses are offered on a full-time basis over one year or
equivalent if on a part-time basis. Entry to the Honours program in
Ecology and Sustainability specialisation can be at either at the
beginning or the academic year (February) or at mid-year intake
(July) to allow for field-based research with seasonal limitations.
COURSE STRUCTURE
The structure of these three honours courses is as follows:
RBF4000 Science Honours 120 credit points
(60 per semester)
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
84
85
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
For Learning Outcomes of each of the following subjects, visit the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science website at www.vu.edu.au or
telephone the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science on (03) 9919 4191.
LANGUAGE AND COMMUNICATION SUBJECTS
Language and Communication subjects are offered at three levels:
Australian English is offered as a preliminary subject designed
for students who are not sufficiently competent in English to
successfully undertake a mainstream communication subject.
Language and Communication is a core unit consisting of
either a one-semester subject or a two-semester subject with
necessary variations tailored to the requirements of varying course
structures.
Professional Communication focuses on the preparation and
delivery of a major written and oral report, as well as employment
preparation for final-year students.
ACC1047 CULTURE AND COMMUNICATION
Campus Footscray Park, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This foundation subject introduces the study of
communication and the intricate web of relationships involving
communication and cultural organisation. Language is studied as a
principal component of communication as are non-verbal aspects
such as style and body language. The subject also examines how
cultures develop a sense of collective and individual identity through
stories, myths and films as forms of communication.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Written assignments.
ACC1048 MEDIA, CULTURE AND SOCIETY
Campus Footscray Park, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Normally students should have passed ACC1047
Culture and Communication
Content Explores how mass communication is today increasingly
implicated in the way perceptions of the world are formed, and the
way 'self' is shaped and understood. Topics to be covered include:
The way images communicate, the role of advertising, media
ownership in Australia, new media technologies, community media,
audience studies special emphasis will be given to how media
structures related to notions of the public sphere' and democratic
process.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Written assignments, 70%; final examination, 30%.
ACC3045 VIDEO PRODUCTION
Campus St Albans and Sunway (Malaysia)
Prerequisite(s) ACC1047 Culture and Communication,
ACC1048 Media, Culture and Society.
Content Students will be given a working understanding of the
basic techniques and processes involved in single camera video
production. The subject will deal with video recording techniques;
composition; lighting; editing and dubbing; crew functions;
interview techniques. Special emphasis will be given to video
production work in a television studio context.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
one one-hour lecture, one two-hour workshop and one one-hour
screening.
Assessment Short exercises, 10%; Group video production, 50%;
Essay, 30%: class presentation,10%.
ACC3046 COMMUNICATING WITH RADIO
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) To be eligible for this subject, students will have to
be in their third and final year of a Communication Studies or
Professional Writing major.
Content Students will be provided with the opportunity to engage
with some basic radio production techniques and processes. The
major emphasis of the subject is on spoken-word radio with a
specific focus on interviewing and 'magazine' formats. Production
work will include field interviewing with portable equipment, studio
work, writing for radio, editing, elementary sound mixing and voice
performance. If done to an adequate standard, production exercises
will be broadcast on local community radio stations. Students are
advised that the work required is substantial, with continuous
assessment and that deadlines for work submissions must be kept
through the semester.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures and workshops.
Assessment Production work, 80%; written commentaries, 20%.
ACC3047 COMMUNICATING IN ORGANISATIONS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Normally, ACC3041 Language in Society,
ACC3043 Interpersonal, Group and Organisational
Communication.
Content Topics covered include: theories of organisational
communication; communication roles in organisations; effect of
gender, age and ethnicity on communication patterns and
processes; communication flow and networks within organisations;
accessibility and control of information. Weekly workshops will
develop skills in the diagnosis and solution of communication
problems in organisations, including network analysis, measurement
of communication load, monitoring of information flow,
communication auditing, Delphi groups and quality circles, analysis
of organisational discourses.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
one two-hour lecture/seminar and one one-hour tutorial.
Assessment Essay, 20%; class based activities, 20%; journals,
30%; test, 30%.
ACE1145 CSM ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND COMMUNICATION
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The skills of listening, speaking, reading and writing will be
taught within the context of computing and mathematics. Basic
grammar structures and writing conventions will be presented. Skills
taught will develop the ability to take notes, summarise, synthesise,
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
86
research and reference. This will culminate in the research and writing
of a correctly referenced report. Reading and listening comprehension
will be enhanced through practice exercises. Oral skills will be
developed through small group work and formal oral presentations.
Required Reading Handbook of Communication Skills for First Year
Students in the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science. Victoria
University, 2006; Murphy R., English Grammar in Use, Cambridge,
CUP 1994.
Recommended Reading Mc Evedy, R., Learning Grammar in
Context, Nelson, Australia, 1994.
Class Contact 2x two hr workshops for one semester.
Assessment Oral Presentations, 20%; Summary, 10%; Synthesis,
10%; Research Report(1000 words), 15%; Aural Test, 10%; Class
Exercises, 5%; Examination (2 hours), 30%.
ACE1911 COMMUNICATIONS FOR THE PROFESSIONAL SCIENTIST 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content A series of lectures and workshops that will provide
students with an introduction to communication theory and
professional practice. This will cover the written communication skills
of summarising, synthesising, note taking, report and essay writing,
researching and referencing. Students will be encouraged to
develop self-editing skills. Oral presentation techniques such as
debating, formal, impromptu presentations and small group
presentations will be developed. Students will be encouraged to
focus on the holistic nature of the communication process. Context
specific materials about sustainability and ecology will be delivered
through lectures, videos and seminars.
Required Reading Handbook of Communication Skills for First
Year Students in the Faculty of Science, Engineering and
Technology. Victoria University, 2006.
Recommended Reading Mohan T (et al.) Communicating as
Professionals, Thomson, Southbank, 2004.
Class Contact four hours per week for one semester, two hours
lectures, two hours workshops.
Assessment Synthesis (500 words), 10%; Essay (1500 words),
25%; Oral presentations, 25%; Exam, 40%.
ACE1912 COMMUNICATIONS FOR THE PROFESSIONAL SCIENTIST 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content A series of lectures and workshops that develop and build
upon the communication and professional skills acquired in
Communications for the Professional Scientist 1. The writing of a
group industry report, writing professional applications, preparing
for and role playing interviews and extending oral presentation skills
will be included. Small group interaction and meeting procedure will
also be covered.
Required Reading Handbook of Communication Skills for First
Year Students in the Faculty of Science, Engineering and
Technology. Victoria University, 2006.
Recommended Reading Mohan T (et al.) Communicating as
Professionals, Thomson, Southbank, 2004.
Class Contact Four hours per week: two hours of lectures, two
hours of practicals.
Assessment Group Industry report (up to 2000 words), 15%;
Written Application (up to 1000 words), 15%; Interview, 15%; Oral
Presentation, 15%; Exam, 40%.
ACE1913 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Context specific materials from the world of science will be
used to develop the written communication skills of summarising,
synthesising, note taking, report and essay writing, researching and
referencing. Students will be encouraged to develop self-editing skills.
Oral presentation techniques such as debating, formal and impromptu
presentations and small group presentations will be developed.
Required Reading Handbook of Communication Skills for First Year
Students in the Faculty of Science, Engineering and Technology 2006,
Victoria University.
Recommended Reading Mohan T. (et al) 2004, Communicating as
Professionals, Thomson, Southbank.Class Contact Two hours per week
for one semester.
Class Contact 2 x two hr workshops per week.
Assessment Evaluation Exercise (500 words) , 10%; Synthesis (500
words), 10%; Essay (1500 words), 20%; Oral Presentations,20%;
Exam, 40%.
ACE3145 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Malaysia and Hong Kong.
Prerequisite(s) ACE1145 or Year 12 English or competence in
English.
Content The student’s ability as a competent communicator in the IT
industry will be developed through a series of lectures and workshops.
Perspectives on professional and organisational communication, as well
as oral and written skills for the IT professional will form the basis of the
lecture content. The writing of a group project report, writing
professional applications, preparing for and role playing interviews and
developing oral presentation skills will be included in the workshops.
Required Reading Mohan T (et al) Communicating as Professionals,
Thomson, Melbourne, 2004.
Recommended Reading Handbook of Communication Skills for
First Year Students in the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science.
Victoria University, 2006.
Class Contact 2x one hr lectures; 1x two hr workshop.
Assessment Oral Presentation, 10%; Group Project Report 1000
words, 10%; Written Application(s)1500 words, 20%; Interview(s),
20%; Exam (3 hours), 40%.
ACP1053 INTRODUCTION TO CREATIVE WRITING
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content This subject introduces students to the creative writing
strand in the major in Professional Writing. The subject focuses on
three writing areas – autobiography, short story and short film – and
teaches key techniques used to write about personal life experience,
and to write short stories and short film scripts. Students read a
variety of personal writing, from poetry to essays, and a range of
mainly Australian short stories by established writers and film scripts
which have been produced as films. Students also read the
published fiction of Professional Writing students in the literary
magazine Offset, and are encouraged to contribute to the
magazine. Lectures focus on historical and contemporary aspects of
writing and creative writing, and on the contexts in which creative
writers work. The course also features short film screenings and
guest lectures by creative writers.
Required Reading A book of readings; Offset literary magazine
(2002).
Recommended Reading Kate Grenville, The Writing Book
(2000); Garry Disher (ed.), Below the Waterline (1999); William
Phillips, Writing Short Scripts (1991).
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
87
Class Contact One one-hour lecture and one two-hour workshop
each week for one semester.
Assessment Personal essay, 30%; Short story, 30%; Short film
script, 30%; Lecture test, 10%.
ACP1054 INTRODUCTION TO MEDIA WRITING
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Normally ACP1053 Introduction to Creative
Writing.
Content This subject introduces students to the media writing strand
in the major in Professional Writing. The subject focuses on three
writing areas – advertising, journalism and public relations – and
teaches key techniques used to write advertisements, and news and
feature stories for the print media, and to write a range of public
relations materials, from media releases to speeches. Students read
a variety of media material, ranging from advertisements to news
and feature stories from newspapers and magazines, and the
speeches of politicians. Lectures focus on the historical development
of the media industries, their contemporary context, and the role of
the advertising copywriter, journalist and public relations
professional in these industries. The course also features guest
lectures by media writers.
Required Reading A book of readings.
Recommended Reading Helen Garner, The Feel of Steel
(2001); David Leser, The Whites of Their Eyes (1999); David
Herzbrun, Copywriting (1997); Kay Chung, Going Public (1999).
Class Contact One one-hour lecture and one two-hour workshop
each week for one semester.
Assessment Advertising portfolio, 30%; Feature article, 30%;
Examination, 40%.
ACP2069 WRITING FOR THE WEB
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) (Normally) ACP 1053 Introduction to Creative
Writing; ACP 1054 Introduction to Media Writing.
Content This subject examines forms and content areas in Web
publication, and develops journalistic writing for the electronic
publishing industry. The subject explores the diversity of Web
publications and electronic communities, and enables students to
research and practice writing for the Web. Topics covered include:
the electronic publishing industry, online publications, writing for
print compared to computer screen, interactivity, Web audiences
and Web communities. Skills taught will include: writing styles for
the Web, hard and soft news, types of feature article; writing for
content areas such as sports, arts, humour, music and science, and
for non-mainstream independent publishers; research, including
interviewing and accessing online sources; Web publishing forms,
interface design and context, writing links and summaries.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading M. Batschelet, 2001, Web
writing/Web designing); K. Crawford, 2000, Writing for the Web;
S. Quinn, 2001, Newsgathering on the net; A Bonime, 1998,
Writing for new media.
Class Contact One one-hour lecture and one two-hour workshop
each week for one semester.
Assessment Two assignments, each 30%; Portfolio comprising
four pieces of writing, 40%.
ACP2070 EDITING PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Normally ACP1053 Introduction to Creative
Writing; ACP1054 Introduction to Media Writing.
Content This subject examines the principles and practices of
editing and publishing, with special emphasis on their role and
influence in history and contemporary society. Students will learn a
range of practical techniques and applied theories of text editing in
the context of small press and desktop publishing. The subject looks
at the principles and practice of structural editing, copy editing,
proof reading and the forms of communication used by editors,
designers, authors and printers. It also includes consideration of
communications law in relation to editing and publishing, such as
copyright law.
Required Reading Elizabeth Flann and Beryl Hill, 2000, The
Australian Editing Handbook.
Class Contact One one-hour lecture and one two-hour tutorial
each week for one semester.
Assessment Take home layout and critique assignment, 20%;
Editing project or essay, 40%; Examination, 40%.
ACP2079 PUBLISHING PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Normally ACP2070 Editing Principles and
Practice.
Content This subject examines the principles and processes of
contemporary publishing in their cultural, political and economic
contexts, and will include a special focus on their practical
application. Students will learn advanced desktop publishing skills
using a range of software programs. The subject will also involve a
number of face-to-face meetings with industry professionals either in
lectures or via excursions to their workplaces. It includes further
consideration of communications law in relation to publishing, such
as copyright and libel law.
Required Reading Euan Mitchell, 2000, Self-Publishing Made
Simple.
Class Contact One one-hour lecture and one two-hour workshop
each week for one semester.
Assessment Group publication project, 50%; Publishing proposal,
20%; Essay, 30%.
ACP3051 WRITING FOR PUBLIC RELATIONS AND ADVERTISING
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Normally ACP1053 Introduction to Creative
Writing; ACP1054 Introduction to Media Writing; ACP2070
Editing Principles and Practice.
Content What does it mean to be a citizen in Australian society?
What are a citizen's rights to express an opinion and participate in
a democratic society? Public relations is often confused with men in
grey suits and a great deal of hand shaking-advertising with
gimmickry and the corporate product. Yet 'relating' to the 'public' is
not a specialist activity. We all have the right to be involved in the
'public sphere', promote different forms of information, hold 'public
opinions' and persuade others of our point of view. In this subject
we look at some theoretical and social contexts for public relations
and advertising and the different perspectives involved. We
consider beliefs and ideology, the public sphere and public opinion,
the media, rhetoric, arguments and audiences. In the section on
advertising, we look at the economics, regulation and production of
advertising and methods of reading its meanings. Students will have
the opportunity to analyse the professional writing skills covered and
develop their own writing skills.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
88
Recommended Reading Bivins, Thomas, Handbook for Public
Relations Writing, 2nd edn. Cunningham, Stuart and Turner,
Graeme (eds), The Media in Australia. Windshuttle, Keith, The
Media, 3rd edn.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
one one-hour lecture and one two-hour workshop.
Assessment Essay in public relations and advertising, 30%;
portfolio, 25%; client task, 30%; tutorial presentation, 15%.
ACP3053 ADVANCED FICTION WRITING
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) ACP 1053 Introduction to Creative Writing and
either ACP2067 Gender and Genre in Short Fiction or ACP2064
Writing and Cultural Difference, or demonstrated interest and
competence in creative writing. A folio of creative writing may be
requested prior to approval of enrolment.
Content This subject focuses primarily on short story writing and
further develops the writing techniques and approaches to fiction
practised in first and second year creative writing subjects. The
subject will revisit conventional realist writing techniques but
emphasis will be placed on innovative departures from realism (such
as new Gothic, magic realism, metafiction and intertextual fiction)
and students will be encouraged to experiment with story length and
form. Students will read a range of short fiction by Australian and
international writers, several recently published novels, and a variety
of extracts by contemporary writers on writing technique. Students
will become familiar with a range of contemporary Australian
literary magazines and will be required to submit at least one short
story to a literary magazine for publication; they will also be
required to read a range of book reviews from newspapers and
literary magazines. At least one workshop in the subject will be
conducted by a locally-based fiction writer.
Required Reading Jack Hodgins, A Passion for Narrative
(1993); Offset literary magazine (2002); a book of readings.
Recommended Reading Daniel Halpern (ed), The Art of the
Story (1999); Stephen King, On Writing (2000).
Class Contact Two 90-minute workshops each week for one
semester.
Assessment One short short story, 20%; two short stories, 30%
each; one book review, 20%.
APP1012 PSYCHOLOGY 1A
Campus St Albans, Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The subject aims to provide students with an introduction
to the discipline of psychology, giving a general view of the social
and biological influences on human behaviour while establishing a
solid basis for further, detailed work in subsequent years. The
subject involves psychological experimentation including application
of descriptive statistics. Topics covered include perception, learning,
memory and information processing, social psychology, motivation
and emotion, intelligence and abilities.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Five hours per week for one semester comprising
three one-hour lectures and one two-hour laboratory.
Assessment Semester examination, 50%; laboratory reports and
quizzes, 50%. There is a requirement that students attend 80% of
laboratory classes. (Subject to change.)
APP1013 PSYCHOLOGY 1B
Campus St Albans, Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) APP1012 Psychology 1A
Content The subject aims to further introduce students to the
discipline of psychology, continuing to consider the social and
biological influences on human behaviour while consolidating a firm
basis for more advanced, detailed work in subsequent years. The
subject involves further work on psychological experimentation and
application of inferential statistics. Topics covered include brain and
behaviour, personality-theory and assessment, health and stress,
abnormal psychology and therapy, language and the brain. Basic
computer analysis is also taught
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Five hours per week for one semester comprising
three one-hour lectures and one two-hour laboratory.
Assessment Semester examination, 50%; laboratory reports,
tutorial work and/or essay, 50%. There is a requirement that
students attend 80% of laboratory classes. Students planning to take
APP2011 Psychology 2 must pass the design and analysis
component of APP1013 Psychology 1B. Students who fail Design
and Analysis but pass other components will be graded with (S)
ungraded pass. (Subject to change.)
APP2013 PSYCHOLOGY 2A
Campus St Albans, Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) APP1012 Psychology 1A; APP1013 Psychology
1B and a pass in Design and Analysis assessment or a pass in
APS2040 Quantitative Social Research Methods.
Content The aim of the subject is to promote a more integrated
understanding of life long development of the human being, by
studying such topics as: personality development, developmental
psychobiology, developmental cognition, and interpersonal
interaction. There is also emphasis on methods used in
psychological inquiry, including statistical computer skills.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Five hours per week, including three one-hour
lectures.
Assessment Two end of semester examinations, 40%; Course
work including a literature review, essay, article review and a
laboratory report, 60%. In addition students will need to meet a
80% minimum requirement attendance for laboratory classes to pass
this subject. Students intending to pursue psychology intensively at a
postgraduate level may consider also enrolling in Qualitative and
Quantitative Social Research Methods as electives.
APP2014 PSYCHOLOGY 2B
Campus St Albans, Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) APP2013 Psychology 2A.
Content This subject builds on the work completed in the first
semester and looks to further enhance students understanding of
human life span development. Topics include the family, child
development, adult development, aging and special topics such as
reading development. As in semester one there is also emphasis on
methods used in psychological inquiry, including statistical computer
skills.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Five hours per week, including three one-hour
lectures.
Assessment Two end of semester examinations, 40%; Course
work including a poster paper, seminar presentation, article review
and a laboratory report, 60%. In addition students will need to meet
a 80% minimum requirement attendance for laboratory classes to
pass this subject. Students intending to pursue psychology intensively
at a postgraduate level may consider also enrolling in Qualitative
and Quantitative Social Research Methods as electives.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
89
APP3011 PSYCHOLOGY 3A
Campus St Albans, Werribee
Prerequisite(s) APP2013 Psychology 2A and APP2014
Psychology 2B.
Content The aim of the subject is to: extend the breadth and depth
of students’ understanding and skills in the area of psychological
research; explore particular topics at some depth, and gain an
appreciation of the extent of theory and research within any given
area; enhance students’ competence and sophistication in
theoretical argument and evaluation; contrast and draw connections
between the theoretical constructs and forms of explanation used in
diverse fields of psychology; provide opportunities for students to
develop their interaction skills in dynamic, group and organisational
settings. There are four compulsory topics. Research Methods
Historical, descriptive, quasi-experimental and experimental design
research. Computerised data handling including multivariate
analysis. History and Theories The place of psychological theories
and practices in twentieth century thought is pursued through lecture
presentations on: positivism, behaviourism, cognitivism,
psychoanalysis, recent philosophies of science, and post-modernism;
complemented by case studies and a seminar program based on
selected readings. Psychological Assessment The assessment of
personality and abilities. Topics include test construction and
administration, tests of personality, intelligence and achievement,
advanced tests of personality, intelligence and achievement,
advanced theory and practice of interviewing. Social Psychology An
examination of various personal and situational determinants of
social behaviour. Topics likely to include aggression, self and
person-perception, attraction and pro-social behaviour. Two
compulsory units will be offered in each semester.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Average of four hours per week for two semesters
comprising two two-hour topics.
Assessment Each topic is equally weighted at 25%. assessment
methods vary from topic to topic, but may include essays, seminar
presentations, practical reports, case studies and examinations.
There is an 80% attendance requirement for some units.
APP3012 PSYCHOLOGY 3B
Campus St Albans, Werribee
Prerequisites APP2013 Psychology 2A and APP2014 Psychology
2B
Content The overall subject aims are as stated for APP3011
Psychology 3A. Psychology 3B consists of four topics, two in each
semester. Topics may vary from year to year but will cover some of
the following areas of psychology. Counselling Theory and Practice
This topic will examine some major theories of counselling
(psychodynamic, humanistic, cognitive-behavioural and family
therapy) and will include experiential work on counselling practice.
Group Behaviour Human groups from perspective of psychodynamic
and systems theories, linking behaviour in the group to
intrapersonal, interpersonal and social processes. Introduction to
Neuropsychology A study of human brain-behaviour relationships
focusing on the impact of brain impairment on behaviour. Topics
covered include the effects of head injury, epilepsy and brain
diseases on the child, adult and family. Organisations and Work
Organisational behaviour, discussed in the light of theories of
management and leadership, sociotechnical systems and the
motivations and meanings of work. Personality Theories This topic
examines a small group of personality theories in depth. Theories
covered may include the psychoanalytic school, phenomenological
and trait approaches, learning and social learning theories.
Psychobiology Selected aspects of the psychobiology of hunger,
overeating, pain, pleasure, addiction, drug effects, biological
rhythms, sleeping and waking. Psychoanalysis This topic will study
the writings of Sigmund Freud and include topics relevant to
psychoanalysis as a method of observation, a theory and in clinical
practice. Psychology of Adjustment This topic begins with a study of
maladjustment and examines some core issues in ‘abnormal
psychology’, followed by a study of adjustment; stress and coping in
relation to ‘normal’ life-cycle problems and atypical or catastrophic
events. Stress, Crisis and Trauma This topic examines, through
experiential workshops, how different experiences and events are
encountered and managed in everyday life or in traumatic
situations. Psychological Issues in the Workplace This topic is only
available to students engaged in work (paid or voluntary) and
considers the wide range of work-related issues from a
psychological point of view. The topic is particularly aimed at
students who are not intending to become psychologists. Aboriginal
People and Psychology Such topics as the psychology of unequal
power relations between groups, the significance of Aboriginal
spirituality, deaths in custody and family separation will be
discussed amongst others. Students are made aware that questions
of psychological practice cannot be meaningfully considered in
isolation from the contextual questions of dispossession and
genocide.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Four hours per week for two semesters comprising
two topics in each semester.
Assessment Each topic is equally weighted, 25%. Assessment
methods vary from topic to topic but may include essays, seminar
presentations, practical reports, case studies and examinations.
There is an 80% attendance requirement for some units.
APP3015 COUNSELLING THEORY AND PRACTICE
Campus St Albans, Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Psychology 2A (APP 2013) & 2B (APP 2014)
Content An overview of the principles and practices of counselling
from a range of paradigms. Specifically Person-Centred, Gestalt,
Behavioural, Rational-Emotive, Cognitive Behavioural and
Psychodynamic perspectives are explored in relation to their
historical background, theoretical premises, therapeutic techniques
and strengths and limitations in clinical practice. Students are also
challenged to explore their own understanding of therapeutic
change and to interface this personal perspective with the models
presented.
Required Reading Corey, G. (1996). Theory and Practice of
Counseling and Psychotherapy. (5th Ed). NY: Brooks/Cole.
Recommended Reading Corsini, R.J., & Wedding, D. (1995).
Current Psychotherapies. (5th Ed.). Illinois: Peacock. Geldard, D.
(1998). Basic Personal Counselling. (3rd Ed.) NY: Prentice Hall. A
series of applied research articles are also provided in class for
student reading
Class Contact Two hours per week for one semester.
Assessment 80% attendance is required as a hurdle requirement.
One 1500–2000 word essay.
APP3017 INTRODUCTION TO NEUROPSYCHOLOGY
Campus St Albans, Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Psychology 2A (APP 2013) & 2B (APP 2014)
Content This subject is focused on the methods and some of the
knowledge base of human neuropsychology. As such it includes
examples of clinical neuropsychological disorders, as well as some
aspects of normal neuropsychological functioning. Topics included
are: elements of neuroscience, neuropsychological syndromes,
developmental neuropsychology, learning disabilities, amnesic
syndromes, effects of traumatic brain injury, neuropsychology of
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
90
language, the agnosia’s, emotion, dementia, recovery of function
after brain damage.
Required Reading Zillmer, E.A. & Spiers, M.V. 2001 Principles
of Neuropsychology Wadsworth/Thompson Learning, Belmont, CA.
Recommended Reading Current journal articles and books as
recommended by the lecturer.
Class Contact Two hour seminar per week for one semester.
Assessment Written short answer questions based on the
discussions and material presented in the seminars (4 sets during the
semester; 4 x 10% = 40%). Multiple choice exam at the end of the
semester based on the various topics covered in the seminars (60%).
APP3018 ORGANISATIONS AND WORK
Campus St Albans, Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Psychology 2A (APP 2013) & 2B (APP 2014)
Content In general the unit examines the relation between
organisational members and their organisational context in a bi-
directional relation is proposed through the way organisational
members are affected by an organisation, and the way an
organisation is affected by its members.
Required Reading Riggio, E (2000), Introduction to
Industrial/Organizational Psychology. New Jersey: Prentice-Hall.
Recommended Reading Current journal articles and books as
recommended by the lecturer.
Class Contact Two hours per week for one semester.
Assessment One essay (2000-2500 words) (40%). Multiple
choice mid-semester test (20%), Multiple choice Exam at end of
semester (40%).
APP3019 PSYCHOBIOLOGY
Campus St Albans, Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Psychology 2A (APP 2013) & 2B (APP 2014)
Content Topics covered in the course include: Anatomy of the
brain and nervous system; Neural transmission; Psychobiological
research methods; Psychobiology of normal and abnormal eating
and drinking behaviour; Neuroendocrine systems (hormones);
Sleep, dreaming and circadian rhythms; Drug addiction and reward
circuits in the brain; Psychobiology of emotions, stress and mental
illness; Evolution, genetics and genetic counselling.
Required Reading Pinel J P J (1997). Biopsychology. (4th edn).
London: Allyn & Bacon.
Recommended Reading Pinel JPJ (1990) Biopsychology. (3rd
edn.) London: Allyn and Bacon.
Class Contact A one hour lecture each week and a 2-hour
laboratory/seminar each second week in one semester.
Assessment An essay plan and reference exercise (10%),One
(2000 word) essay (40%),50 item multiple choice examination
(50%).
APP3020 PSYCHOANALYSIS
Campus St Albans, Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Psychology 2A (APP 2013) & 2B (APP 2014)
Content Each psychoanalytic concept is illustrated by clinical
examples and its use in psychology, psychiatry, cultural and
women’s studies, philosophy, literary criticism, sociology,
anthropology and other disciplines. Key post-Freudian contributions
to psychoanalysis, as well as critical evaluations of Freudian theory
and practice are discussed.
Required Reading Selected readings from The Pelican Freud
Library – Student to be advised
Recommended Reading Freud, S. The Pelican Freud Library
Harmondsworth: Penguin. In particular, Volumes 1, 4, 5, 6, 7, 11 &
15. Laplanche, J. & Pontalis, J.B. (1980)The language of psycho-
Analysis London: Hogarth Press.
Class Contact Two hours per week for one semester.
Assessment An original essay (3000 words).
APP3021 PSYCHOLOGY OF ADJUSTMENT
Campus St Albans, Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Psychology 2A (APP 2013) & 2B (APP 2014).
Content The subject discusses the concepts of psychopathology
and diagnostic classification and includes a study of anxiety
disorders, mood disorders, schizophrenia and substance
dependence. This is complemented by a study of adjustment, stress
and coping in relation to life events such as loss and grief,
migration, and chronic illness.
Required Reading Current Available Abnormal Psychology Text
Book – Student to be Advised.
Recommended Reading As advised in class.
Class Contact Two hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Multiple choice exam (50%); Written paper (2000
words) (50%). The written paper will incorporate a case study which
may be based on conducting an interview (eg about experience of
migration) or on researching autobiographical writings – as
determined by the lecturer from each year.
APP3022 STRESS, CRISIS AND TRAUMA
Campus St Albans, Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Psychology 2A (APP 2013) & 2B (APP 2014)
Content This course begins by discussing the experience and
handling of stress in every day life, and its relation to anxiety. The
use of the unconscious defence mechanisms, conscious problem
solving and support through social relationships is explored. The
course then examines the concepts of crisis and trauma and the
place of such experiences in psychological development across
stages of the life cycle and in emergency situations. A
psychodynamic perspective will be emphasised, with reference to
cognitive behavioural approaches, and the role of different styles of
psychotherapy is reviewed.
Required Reading Andrews, G., Pollock, C. and Stewart, G.
(1989). The determination of defense style by questionnaire.
Archives of General Psychiatry, 46: 455-460. Cameron, N. and
Rychlak, J. F. (1985). Personality development and
psychopathology. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
Lazarus, R. S. and Folkman, S. (1984). Stress, appraisal, and
coping. New York: Springer. Zinbarg, R. E., Barlow, D. H., Brown,
T. A. and Hertz, R. H. (1992). Cognitive-behavioral approaches to
the nature and treatment of anxiety. Annual Review of Psychology,
43: 235-267.
Recommended Reading An extensive reading list is provided
from which students can select material appropriate to the essay
topic they elect to address.
Class Contact Two hours per week for one semester.
Assessment One (2000 word) essay (50%) One hour
examination at the end of semester (50%).
APP3023 PSYCHOLOGICAL ISSUES IN THE WORKPLACE
Campus St Albans, Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Psychology 2A (APP 2013) & 2B (APP 2014).
Content The course will examine organisational, legal, political,
ethical, professional, physical, and psychological issues
encountered by employees in the workplace. Concerns pertinent to
the particular occupations and workplaces of the class participants
will be identified, and considered in relation to other occupational
groups. Issues such as, role and task definitions, the extrinsic and
intrinsic meaning or value of work to the individual, personality
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
91
characteristics and work, a recognition of mental health factors in
relation to work, and the suitability of an employee for a specific
occupation will be discussed. How psychological measures and
techniques may be useful in choosing employees, managing change
and conflict, dealing with occupational health and safety issues and
maintaining employee satisfaction will also be explored.
Required Reading Current Available Text Book – Student to be
Advised.
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Two hours per week for one semester.
Assessment 2500 word essay (50%), Work Application Exercise
(35%), Workshop Exercise (15%)
APT1310 PSYCHOLOGY 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject provides, at an introductory level, an
integrated understanding of life-long human development, and of the
family and relationship context within which development occurs. A
survey of social, emotional, cognitive and personality development
in infancy, childhood, adolescence, adulthood and old age will be
carried out. Theories of personality/social/emotional development
and theories of cognitive development will be introduced; and the
relationships between cognitive and social/emotional development
examined. Also an introduction to the theory of family systems and
to developmental changes in the family will be given.
Required Reading Papalia, D.E., Olds, S., and Feldman, R.
(2001). Human Development (8th Edn.) Sydney: McGraw Hill.
Recommended Reading Flavell, J. 1988, Cognitive
Development 2nd edn. Englewood Cliffs NJ: Prentice Hall. Garrod,
A., Smulyan, L., Powers, S. and Kilkenny, R. 1992, Adolescent
Portraits: Cases in Identity Relationships and Challenges. Boston:
Allyn and Bacon. Gething, L., Hatchard, D., Papalia, D. and Olds,
S. 1989, Lifespan Development. Sydney: McGraw Hill.
Hergenhahn, B. 1990, An Introduction to Theories of Personality
3rd edn. Englewood Cliffs NJ: Prentice Hall. Kendig, H. Ed. 1986,
Ageing and Families. Sydney: Allen and Unwin. Wallerstein, J. and
Kelly, J. 1980, Surviving the Breakup. New York: Basic Books.
Class Contact four hours per week for one semester; comprising
two hours of lectures and one two-hour,. midwifery focussed tutorial
(Bachelor of Midwifery).
Assessment Assignment/essay 40%; tutorial assessment 20%;
examination 40%.
APT1311 PSYCHOLOGY ACROSS THE LIFESPAN
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Human development across the lifespan: social,
emotional, personality and cognitive development, relationship
contexts and the family lifecycle. Introduction to theories in
psychology: psychodynamic, behavioural, cognitive,
attachment/interpersonal and family systems. Concepts of health
and illness. Experiences of health, illness and treatment across the
lifespan. Psychological processes relevant to health and illness
including pain, sleep, anxiety, grief, and coping. Developmental
processes and adaptation in chronic illness and disability.
Required Reading Papalia, D.E., Olds, S.W. & Feldman, R.D.
(2004). Human development (9th Ed) Sydney: McGraw Hill
Recommended Reading Bowlby, J. (1988). A secure base:
Clinical applications of attachment theory. London: Routledge
Caltabiano, M.L, & Sarafino, E.P. (2002). Health psychology:
Biopsychosocial interactions, an Australian perspective. Milton, Qld:
Wiley: Fuller, A. (2002). Raising real people: Creating a resilient
family (2nd Ed) Camberwell, Vic: ACER Press: Lubkin, I.M. (2002).
Chronic illness: Impact and interventions (5th Ed) Boston: Jones &
Bartlett: Marks, I.M. (2001). Living with fear: Understanding and
coping with anxiety. (2nd Ed) London: McGraw Hill: Parkes, C.M.
(1998). Bereavement: Studies of grief in adult life (3rd Ed) London:
Penguin: Thomas, R.M. (2000). Comparing theories of child
development (5th Ed) Belmont CA: Wadsworth: Thomas, R.M. &
Roy, R. (1999). The changing nature of pain complaints over the
lifespan. New York: Plenum: Tobin, S.S. (1991). Personhood in
advanced old age: Implications for practice. New York: Springer
Subject Hours Equivalent of 60 hours.
Assessment Examination – 40%, Essay (1200 words.) 30%, Field
study assignment – 30%.
APT2050 PSYCHOLOGY FOR CHINESE MEDICINE PRACTITIONERS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1002 Fundamentals of Chinese Medicine; or
equivalent.
Content An overview of: Psychoanalysis (Freud and others);
Behaviorism (Skinner) and cognitive behavioral perspectives;
Humanistic psychology (Maslow, Rogers); Transpersonal psychology
(Jung, Grof, Laing and others); applications of psychological theory
in the context of health and disease; Traditional Eastern perspectives
on mind and consciousness; Contemporary research into mind and
consciousness.
Required Reading Grof, S. & Bennett, H.Z. (1994). The
Holotropic Mind. San Francisco, Harper Collins. Monte, C.F.
(1999). Beneath the Mask: An introduction to theories of
personality, 6th edn. Fort Worth, Harcourt Brace. Nye, R.D. (1996).
Three Psychologies: Perspectives from Freud, Skinner and Rogers,
5th edn. Pacific Grove Calif, Brooks/Cole. Wilber, K. (1989). The
Spectrum of Consciousness. Wheaton, Illinois, Theosophical
Publishing House.
Recommended Reading Capra, F. (1982). The Turning Point.
New York, Bantam Books. Carter, B. & McGoldrick, M. (1989). The
Changing Family Life Cycle: A framework for family therapy, 2nd
edn. Boston, Allyn and Bacon. Chambers, D. (1996). The Conscious
Mind: In Search of a Fundamental Theory. New York, Oxford
University Press. Corey, G. (1996). Theory and Practice of
Counselling & Psychotherapy, 5th edn. Pacific Grove, CA,
Brooks/Cole Publishing Company. Corsini, R.J. & Wedding, D.
(Eds.) (latest edition). Current Psychotherapies. Illinois, F.E. Peacock
Publishers Inc. Davies, M.D. & Humphreys, G.W. (Eds.) (1993).
Consciousness: Psychological and Philosophical Essays. Blackwell.
Dennett, D.C. (1991). Consciousness Explained. Penguin.
Goodheart, C.D. & Lansing, M.H. (1997). Treating people with
chronic disease: A psychological guide. Washington, American
Psychological Association. Hammer, L. (1990). Dragon Rises, Red
Bird Flies. New York, Station Hill Press. Hergenhahn, B.R. & Olson,
M.H. (1999). An introduction to theories of personality, 5th edn.
Upper Saddle River NJ, Prentice Hall. Scotton, B.W., Chinen, A.B.
& Battista. J.R. (1996). Textbook of Transpersonal Psychiatry and
Psychology. New York, Basic Books. Watson, K. (1994). The
psychology of Oriental philosophy. Meeting Point – Australian
College of Acupuncturists, Vol. 3, Winter. Watts, A. (1969).
Psychotherapy East and West. New York, Ballantine Books. Wilber,
K. (1979). No Boundary. Boston, Massachusetts, Shambhala.
Wilber, K. (1990). Eye to Eye – The Quest for the New Paradigm.
Boston, Shambala. Wilber, K. (1975). Psychologia perennis: The
spectrum of consciousness. The Journal of Transpersonal Psychology,
Vol. 7(2).
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester consisting of two x one hour lectures and a one hour
tutorial per week.
Assessment One 1500 word essay (50%) and an examination
(50%). A pass must be gained in each component of assessment.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
92
APU3001 PSYCHOLOGICAL ISSUES
Campus City King, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject will provide students with a basic
understanding of psychological principles and their applications to
health sciences. A focus on self-esteem, body image, ageing,
terminal illness, disability and resulting loss or grief outcomes will be
addressed from a psychological perspective. The social context of
these issues, as well as their effects upon individuals, will be
examined. The subject will also consider interpersonal processes in
a health care context and address the issues of recognizing serious
psychological distress and disturbance. The focus of this subject will
be primarily directed at understanding that assists students to
facilitate the health and well-being of clients. Emphasis includes
greater self understanding, workplace psychology and psychology
with clients.
Required Reading Atwater, E., & Duffy, K. G. (2000).
Psychology for living: Adjustment, growth and behaviour today (6th
ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
Recommended Reading Ashmore, R. (Ed). (1997). Self and
identity. New York: Oxford University Press. Beck, C., & Rowell, G.
(1992). Psychology: An introduction for nurses and allied health
professionals. New York: Prentice Hall. Cloninger, S. (1995).
Personality. Melbourne: Macmillan. Northourse, P., & Northourse, L.
(1992). Health communication: Strategies for health professionals.
Connecticut: Appeleton and Lange. Oltmanns, T., & Emery, R.
(1998). Abnormal psychology (2nd ed.). Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice Hall. Otto, S. (1997). Oncology nursing. Missouri: Morsley
Year Book Inc. Swann, W. (1996). Self-traps: The elusive quest for
higher self-esteem. Melbourne: Macmillan. Weston, R., Martin, T., &
Anderson, Y. (Eds.) (1998). Loss and bereavement: Managing
change. London: Blackwell Science.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures and tutorials.
Assessment Essay (2000 words) (55%); tutorial journal (2000
words) (45%).
ASE1311 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The aim of this subject is to introduce nursing students to
the major concepts in sociology. It aims to develop an awareness of
social, cultural and historical contexts in which issues of health and
illness impact on the practice of nursing and on the distribution and
delivery of health care in Australia. It situates the examination of
health care issues within an exploration of critical sociological
perspectives. In particular it examines the distribution of the health
and illness the nursing profession and the health care system and
their relationship to social class gender ethnicity and religion as
these categories are articulated in the Australian community. It also
offers a sociological critique of the dominant paradigms of medical
practice.
Required Reading Germov, J. Second Opinion, Oxford
University Press, Oxford, 1999. (A book of readings prepared for
this subject will also form part of the Required Readings.)
Recommended Reading Bauum, F (1998) The New Public
Health: An Australian Perspective Oxford University Press Grbich, C
(Ed) (1999) Health in Australia Prentice Hall. George J and Davis, A
(1998) States Of Health Addison Wesley Longman Lupton G and
Najman J (Ed) (1995) Sociology of Health and Illness Macmillan.
Petersen, A (1994) In a Critical Condition Allen and Unwin
Subject Hours A total of 48 hours over one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials, seminars and workshops.
Assessment Continuous assessment through weekly journal entries
on set questions requiring research and reflection (80%) Tutorial
presentation and written report (20%).
ASE1320 SOCIOLOGY OF INDIGENOUS HEALTH
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content historical and social contours of current indigenous health
disadvantage, significance of past and present policies (Protection,
Assimilation, Self Determination) on indigenous communities,
epidemiological profile of indigenous health in contemporary
Australia (morbidity, mortality), limitations of the biomedical
tradition in relation to Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander
populations, social and medical requirements for improving
‘Aboriginal’ health status, Innovative initiatives and strategies within
‘Aboriginal health policies and service provision, value of
sociological approaches for understanding indigenous health issues.
Required Reading A specific Book of Readings will be prepared
for this subject and made available for purchase at the University
bookshop.
Anderson, Ian. (2004), Aboriginal Health, in Grbich, Carol,
(2004), Health In Australia, Sociological Concepts and Issues, 3rd
Edition, Pearson Longman, NSW, pp.75-101.
Recommended Reading Thomas, David Piers, (2004) Reading
doctors’ writing; race politics and power in indigenous health and
research, 1870- 1969, Acton, ACT: Australian Institute of
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Studies. Anderson, Ian,
(2001), Aboriginal society and health: critical issues demand what
from sociologists? Health Sociologyreview, 10(2), pp.5-20..
Haebich, Anne, (000), Broken Circles: Fragmenting Indigenous
Families 1800- 2000, Fremantle Arts Centre Press, Fremantle. Read,
Peter, (2000), Australian, Place and Aboriginal Ownership,
Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, Melbourne. Australian
Indigenous health InfoNet < www.healthinfonet.ecu.edu.au>. Birch,
Tony, (1997), ‘Nothing has Changed: The Making and Unmaking
of Koori Culture’, in Race matters, eds, G. Cowlishaw and B.
Morris, Aboriginal Studies Press, Canberra. Healy, Chris, (1997)
From the Ruins of Colonialism; History as Social Memory,
Cambridge University Press, Melbourne. Schroff, F. (20000,
‘Ayuveda: Mother of Indigenous Health Knowledge, in G. Dei, L.
Budd and D. Rosenberg, eds, Indigenous Knowledges in Global
Contexts: MultipleReadings of our World, University of Toronto
Press. Toronto, pp. 215-33. Saggers, S. and Gray, D. (1991)
Aboriginal Health and Society; The Traditional and Contemporary
Struggle for Better Health, Allen & Unwin, Sydney. Healy, Justin, ed.
(2004), Indigenous Health, Spinney Press, Balmain, NSW.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours
Assessment Continuous assessment through; (i) weekly journal
entries on set questions requiring research and reflection 40% (ii)
scenario and problem based learning exercises dealing with
specific situations/issues within indigenous health 40% (iii) Tutorial
presentation and written report 20%.
AXH1012 KEY DEBATES IN THE HUMANITIES AND SOCIAL SCIENCES
Campus Footscray Park, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Completion of three years of an approved BA
course.
Content A review of some of the contemporary theoretical debates
informing humanities and social sciences. Students are encouraged
to reflect on the discourses and conventions of their disciplinary
areas; to critique different epistemological and methodological
approaches; to evaluate the application of these debates to their
closer research area.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
93
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Review essay, 25%; seminar paper, 25%; essay,
50%.
BAO1101 ACCOUNTING FOR DECISION MAKING
Campus Footscray Park, Melton, St Albans, Sunbury, Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The objectives of the subject are to provide a basis for
further accounting studies, yet meet the needs of students from other
areas of business studies; to introduce students to basic accounting
concepts and selected accounting practices; and to introduce
students to the role of, and the processes involved in planning and
decision making within the business environment. Topics include:
introduction to the roles of accounting; management planning and
decision making; accounting concepts; cash and accrual
accounting; preparation of financial statements; forms of business
ownership, and effect on financial statements; budgeting – an
introduction; budgets; control and performance reports; analysis and
interpretation; evaluation of performance; the operating cycle; short
term decision making and cost behaviour; capital budgeting.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per week for one semester
comprising two hours of lectures and one hour tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 70%; coursework, 30%. Students
are expected to satisfactorily complete each component of the
assessment to gain a pass in the subject. Supplementary assessment
will not be available. Note: Any hand-held calculator without text
facility may be used in examinations.
BCF9110 INTRODUCTORY COMPUTING (ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
SERVICE SUBJECT)
Campus Werribee.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content This introductory subject aims to give students a broad
insight into the use and application of computers in the sciences.
Topics covered include: computer systems, hardware and software,
word processing, spreadsheets, databases, data communications,
artificial intelligence, computers as a research tool, social
implications of computing.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week. Normally to be delivered as
two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials, workshops or
modules: or a delivery mode as approved by the Faculty of Business
and Law.
Assessment Practical work, 50%; examination, 50%. Students
must satisfactorily complete each component of the assessment to
gain a pass in the subject. Supplementary assessment will not be
available.
BEO1103 MICROECONOMIC PRINCIPLES
Campus Footscray Park, Melton, Sunbury, St Albans, Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This is the first of two Economic Principles subjects. The
subject aims to provide a study of basic economic principles, to
develop an introduction to economic methods, and to apply these
principles and methods to aspects of the Australian economy. Topics
include: introduction to economics, nature, method and objectives of
economics; the economising problem, relative scarcity, production
possibilities, opportunity costs, nature of economic resources; the
market economy, demand and supply, theory and applications,
including pricing ceilings, price floors, tariffs, taxes, and the labour
market; consumer theory; theory of the firm, production and costs;
introduction to market structure conduct and performance; price
determination in perfect and imperfect competition; workable
competition and competition policy in Australia; alternative theories
of the firm; market imperfections.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Baumol, W., Blinder, A., Gunther, A.
and Hicks, J. 1992, Economics: Principles and Policy, Harcourt
Brace Jovanovich. Jackson, J. McIver, R. & McEachern, W. 1994,
Economics, McGraw Hill. McTaggert, D., Findlay, C. & Parkin, M.
1996, Microeconomics, Addison-Wesley.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per week comprising two
one-hour lectures and one one-hour tutorial/computer workshop for
one semester.
Assessment Continuous assessment, 50%; examination, 50%.
Students must satisfactorily complete each component of the
assessment to gain a pass in the subject. Supplementary assessment
will not be available.
BEO1104 MACROECONOMIC PRINCIPLES
Campus Footscray Park, Melton, St Albans, Sunbury, Werribee
Prerequisite(s) BEO1103 Microeconomic Principles.
Content This subject aims to develop the basic macroeconomic
principles applicable to the Australian economy and familiarise
students with the macroeconomic environment within which
Australian business operates. Topics include: the measurement of
macroeconomic performance with reference to national income
accounting and trade cycle analysis; the classical economic model
and the Keynesian revolution; Keynesian economics and the theory
of income determination; monetary influences on aggregate
economic activity; inflation, unemployment; traditional demand
management; the Phillips Curve revisited; interflation; incomes
policies; the foreign trade sector and policies for external balance.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Waud, R., Hocking, A., Maxwell, P.,
Bonnici, J., and ward. I., 1996, Macroeconomics, Longman.
Jackson, J., McIver, R., McConnell, C. and Bruce, S., 1997,
Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill. Quayle, M., Robinson. M., and
McEarchern, W., 1994, Macroeconomics: A Contemporary
Introduction, Thomas Nelson.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours of contact per week
comprising two one-hour lectures and one one-hour tutorial/
computer workshop for one semester.
Assessment Continuous assessment, 50%; examination, 50%.
Students are expected to satisfactorily complete each component of
assessment to gain a pass in the subject. Supplementary assessment
will not be available. Note: Any hand-held calculator may be used
in examinations.
BEO1106 BUSINESS STATISTICS
Campus Footscray Park, Sunbury, Werribee, Kuala Lumpur,
Hong Kong.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content This subject enables students to acquire the skills and
techniques required to analyse data in a business environment.
Topics include: introduction to statistics; descriptive statistics;
introduction to probability and probability distributions; normal
probability distribution; sampling distributions and parameter
estimation; hypotheses testing; simple linear regression and
correlation; time-series analysis and forecasting; index numbers. Use
will be made of a statistical computer package.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Selvanathan, A. et al. 1994,
Australian Business Statistics, Thomas Nelson. Jeffcoat, C. &
Belgrave, P. 1998, Business Statistics, McGraw Hill. Berenson, M.L.
& Levine, D.M. 1992, Basic Statistics, Prentice-Hall.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
94
Class Contact Three hours per week. Normally to be delivered as
two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials, workshops or
modules: or a delivery mode as approved by the Faculty of Business
and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Case study(s)/assignment(s), 40%; final examination,
60%. Students must satisfactorily complete each component of the
assessment to gain a pass in the subject. Supplementary assessment
will not be available.
BEO2186 DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park St Albans, Werribee
Prerequisite(s) BEO1185 Retail Management Principles or
BHO1171 Introduction to Marketing
Content This subject provides an introduction to the logistic
distribution functions and an overview of the major sectors in the
distribution area, in terms of being able to optimise all elements of
the trade push strategy. Topics include: critical role of distribution
function in marketing; channels of distribution and channel
participants; logistics of integrating manufacturers, wholesalers,
retailers and other service providers; customer service function in
marketing.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Stock, J.R. & Lambert, D.M. 1992,
Strategic Logistic Management, Irwin. Gilmour, P. 1993, Logistic
Management, Longman Cheshire. Walters, D. 1994, Retailing
Management: Analysis, Planning and Control, Macmillan.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per week comprising two
one-hour lecture and one one-hour tutorial/computer workshop for
one semester.
Assessment Tutorial exercises, case study presentation and
participation, mid-semester test, and assignment, 40%; final
examination, 60%. Students must satisfactorily complete each
component of the assessment to gain a pass in the subject.
Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BEO2254 STATISTICS FOR BUSINESS AND MARKETING
Campus Footscray Park, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) BEO1106 Business Statistics.
Content This subject provides an understanding of the use of
statistical techniques in analysing marketing and business problems.
Topics include: sampling methods and estimation of point and
interval estimates; application of classical and non parametric tests;
goodness of fit test: and introduction to regression and time-series
analysis. Use will be made of an appropriate statistical package.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Hildebrand, D.K. and Ott, L. 1998,
Statistical Thinking for Managers, 3rd edn, Duxbury, Boston.
Selvanathan, A. et al 1994, Australian Business Statistics, Thomas
Nelson. Bowerman B.L. & O’Connell, R.T. 1997, Applied Statistics,
Irwin.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per week comprising two
one-hour lectures and one one-hour tutorial/computer workshop for
one semester.
Assessment Examination, 60%; case studies, 40%. Students are
expected to satisfactorily complete each component of the
assessment to gain a pass in the subject. Supplementary assessment
will not be available. Note: Any hand-held calculator can be used in
examinations.
BHO1171 INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING
Campus Footscray Park, Werribee, Sunbury, Kuala Lumpur, Hong
Kong.
Prerequisite(s) BHO1171 Introduction to Marketing.
Content Introduction to Marketing is an introductory unit in
marketing management with a focus on the marketing of consumer
and industrial goods and services. Students will be introduced to the
concepts of marketing strategies, using case studies and tutorial.
Required Reading Kotler, Philip, Stewart Adam, Linden Brown
and Gary Armstrong, 2003, Principles of Marketing, 2nd edn,
Prentice-Hall, Sydney, plus accompanying workbook.
Recommended Reading Miller and Layton, 2000,
Fundamentals of Marketing, McGraw Hill, Sydney.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per week. Normally to be
delivered as two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials,
workshops or modules or a delivery mode as approved by the
Faculty of Business and Law. Subject is equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Two assignments, 25% each; final examination,
50%. Students are expected to satisfactorily complete each
component of the assessment to gain a pass in the subject.
Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BHO2250 ADVERTISING AND PUBLIC RELATIONS
Campus Footscray Park, Werribee, Sunbury, Kuala Lumpur.
Prerequisite(s) BHO1171 Introduction to Marketing.
Content This subject aims to develop an understanding of the
terminology of promotion, in general, and advertising, in particular,
an understanding of the role of advertising both in the firm and in
society, and an ability to integrate the different aspects of
advertising into a comprehensive promotional plan. In addition, the
subject will provide students with a knowledge of aspects of public
relations and an appreciation of the processes of identifying the
policies and procedures of the organisation with the view to
marketing of image. Topics include: communication theory and its
application; advertising; sales promotion; direct marketing.
Required Reading Russell, J.T. and Lane, W.R., 2002,
Kleppner’s Advertising Procedure, Prentice-Hall, New Jersey.
Recommended Reading Shimp, Terence A., 2003, Advertising,
Promotion and Supplemental Aspects of Integrated Marketing
Communications, Thomson South-Western, United States; Belch,
George and Belch, Michael, 2001, Advertising and Promotion: An
Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective, Mc-Graw Hill
Irwin, Boston; Arens, W.F., 2002, Contemporary Advertising, Mc-
Graw Hill Irwin, Boston.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per week. Normally to be
delivered as two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials,
workshops or modules or a delivery mode as approved by the
Faculty of Business and Law. Subject is equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Project based assignment, 50%; Final examination,
50%. Students are expected to satisfactorily complete each
component of the assessment to gain a pass in the subject.
Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BHO2251 PRODUCT AND PRICING STRATEGY
Campus Footscray Park, Werribee, Sunbury, Kuala Lumpur.
Prerequisite(s) BHO1171 Introduction to Marketing.
Content This subject will enable students to understand how
marketers develop strategy, and appreciate the variety of
organisational alternatives for managing products. The subject will
give insights into how existing products can be modified and how
businesses develop ideas into successful products. Students will be
able to recognise and appreciate the different types of product life
cycles, understand the concepts and tools of strategy formulation
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
95
and the management of products during the various stages of their
life cycle, as well as appreciate the importance of branding and the
factors affecting the branding decisions. The subject will also cover
pricing, and how pricing strategies are formulated. Topics include:
Product concepts; product strategies; positioning strategies; market
strategies; pricing strategies.
Required Reading Anderson, C.H. and Vincze, J.W., 2000,
Strategic Marketing Management, Houghton Mifflin, Boston.
Recommended Reading Dolan, Robert J. and Hermann Simon,
1997, Power Pricing, Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Crawford, CM,
1997, New Products Management, Irwin, Boston. Dodge, Robert
and Nessim Hanna, 1997, Pricing: Policies and Procedures,
Macmillan, London. Dolan, Robert, 1993, Managing the New
Product Development Process – Cases and Notes, Addison-Wesley;
Jain, S.C, 2000, Marketing Planning and Strategy, 6th edn, South
Western, Ohio.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per week. Normally to be
delivered as two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials,
workshops or modules or a delivery mode as approved by the
Faculty of Business and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Assignments and/or mid-semester tests, 50%; Final
examination, 50%. Students are expected to satisfactorily complete
each component of the assessment to gain a pass in the subject.
Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BHO2252 SELLING AND SALES MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park, Werribee, Sunbury.
Prerequisite(s) BHO1171 Introduction to Marketing.
Content Selling and Sales Management will introduce students to
the principles of selling and selling theory, and the various activities
involved in setting up a sales force. The responsibilities of the sales
manager will also be covered. Topics include: personal selling;
theories of selling; organisational buyer behaviour; communication
in the sales process; preparation in the selling process; the sales
presentation; handling objections; follow-up after the sale; sales
force management; organizing the sales force; forecasting sales;
controlling, supervising and evaluating the sales force; international
sales management; ethical issues in selling.
Required Reading Stanton, W., Buskirk, R. Spiro, R. Balderstone,
R. and Power, M., 1999, Management of the Sales Force, McGraw-
Hill, Sydney.
Recommended Reading Callender, Guy and Kevin P. Reid,
1993, Australian Sales Management, Macmillan Education
Australia, South Melbourne. Churchill, Gilbert A., Jr., Neil M. Ford
and Orville C. Walker, Jr., 1997, Sales Force Management, Irwin,
Boston. Jackson R. and Hisrich R, 1996, Sales and Sales
Management, Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Manning, Gerald L. and
Barry L. Reece, 1995, Selling Today, Prentice Hall, Englewood
Cliffs, New Jersey.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per week. Normally to be
delivered as two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials,
workshops or modules or a delivery mode as approved by the
Faculty of Business and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Case Study, 20%; report, 30%; Final examination,
50%. Students are expected to satisfactorily complete each
component of the assessment to gain a pass in the subject.
Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BHO2254 TOURISM AND HOSPITALITY MARKETING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) BHO1171 Introduction to Marketing
Content The purchase-decision as applied to tourism and
hospitality products and services. Factors influencing the decision-
making process. The role of information and communications
technology in tourism and hospitality marketing. Electronic
communication and distribution strategies.
Required Reading Kotler, P., Bowen, J. and Makens, J. (1998).
Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism. Prentice-Hall, New Jersey.
Recommended Reading Middleton, V. (2001). Marketing in
Travel and Tourism. Butterworth Heinemann, Oxford. Morrison,
A.M. (1996). Hospitality and Travel Marketing. Swarbrooke, J. and
Horner, S. (1999). Consumer Behaviour in Tourism. Butterworth
Heinemann, Oxford.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester. Normally to
be delivered as two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials; or a
delivery mode as approved by the Faculty of Business and Law.
Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Progressive assessment (60%); Final Exam (40%).
BHO2285 MARKETING RESEARCH
Campus St Albans, Sunbury
Prerequisite(s) BEO1106 Business Statistics; BHO1171
Introduction to Marketing.
Content The subject aims to familiarise students with the
applications for market research and its importance in making
sound business and marketing decisions; and to complete
successfully an applied research project. Topics include:
introduction; the role of marketing research; research management
and design; data acquisition and processing; design of surveys;
marketing research and the behavioural sciences; introduction to
multivariate techniques; applications of marketing research.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per week comprising two
hours of lectures and one one-hour tutorial/computer workshop for
one semester.
Assessment Case studies and project, 50%; final examination,
50%. Students must satisfactorily complete each component of the
assessment to gain a pass in the subject. Supplementary assessment
will not be available.
BHO2434 CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR
Campus Footscray Park.
Prerequisite(s) BHO1171 Introduction to Marketing.
Content The aim of the subject is to provide a detailed study, for
both consumer and organisational buying behaviour, of purchasing,
processes and the factors which influence them. Topics include:
characteristics of individuals, groups and organisations and their
influence on purchasing behaviour; consumer behaviour;
organisational buying behaviour.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week per comprising of two hours
lectures and one hour tutorial.
Assessment Assignments and case study, 40%; final examination
and test, 60%.
BHO3373 INTERNATIONAL MARKETING
Campus Footscray Park, Sunbury, Kuala Lumpur.
Prerequisite(s) BHO1171 Introduction to Marketing.
Content Marketing in an international environment; international
marketing research/intelligence; market segmentation on a global
scale; consumer behaviour in different countries/cultures;
international product/service policy; international distribution;
international promotion/advertising; pricing in international markets;
marketing planning on an international scale; organisation and
control of international marketing; importing and exporting.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
96
Recommended Reading Cateora, P., 1990, International
Marketing, 7th edn, Irwin, NY. Czinkota, M.R. and Ronkainen, I.A,
1990: International Marketing, 2nd edn, The Dryden Press,
Orlando, Florida. Jain, S.C., 1990, International Marketing
Management, PWS-Kent, Boston. Muhlbacher, H., Dahringer, L.,
1991, International Marketing:, Addison Wesley; Terpstra, V. &
Sarathy, R., 1987, International Marketing, Irwin, NY.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per week. Normally to be
delivered as two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials,
workshops or modules or a delivery mode as approved by the
Faculty of Business and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Mid-Semester Test, 10%; Major project, 30%; Class
participation, 10%; Formal Examination, 50%. Students are
expected to satisfactorily complete each component of the
assessment to gain a pass in the subject. Supplementary assessment
will not be available.
BHO3254 ADVANCED MARKETING RESEARCH
Campus Footscray Park, Werribee, Sunbury, Kuala Lumpur.
Prerequisites BEO2254 Statistics for Business and Marketing,
BHO1171 Introduction to Marketing, BHO2285 Marketing
Research.
Content The subject is principally of an applied nature and is data
and technology driven. It will focus on the use of quantitative and
qualitative data in the marketing research setting relating to
marketing decision making. It will build upon the underlying
concepts and the techniques of gathering and analysing data for
effective marketing decisions and communication of results covered
in Marketing Research and will introduce more advanced
methodology, concepts and technology. This unit is designed to
equip students with the techniques and skills to access and analyse
information relevant to the marketing research activities of both
private and public enterprises.
Required Reading Malhotra, N.K., Hall, J.E., Shaw, M., Crisp,
M., 1996, Marketing Research: An Applied Orientation 1st
Australian edn, Prentice-Hall, Sydney.
Recommended Reading Crask, M., Fox, R.J., Stout, R.G.,
1995, Marketing Research: Principles and Applications, Prentice
Hall, New Jersey. Dillon, W.R., Madden, T.J., Firtle, N.H., 1993,
Essentials of Marketing Research, Irwin, Boston. Aaker, D.A. Day,
G.S, 1990, Marketing Research, 4th edn, John Wiley and Sons,
New York. Burns, A.C., Bush, R.F., 1995, Marketing Research,
Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey. Churchill, G.A. Jr.,
1991, Marketing Research: Methodological Foundations, The
Dryden Press, Chicago.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per week. Normally to be
delivered as two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials,
workshops or modules or a delivery mode as approved by the
Faculty of Business and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Project, 50%; Final examination, 50%. Students are
expected to satisfactorily complete each component of the
assessment to gain a pass in the subject. Supplementary assessment
will not be available and Rudd, D.P., 1996, Introduction to Casino
and Gaming Operations, Prentice-Hall, New Jersey.
Recommended Reading An extensive reading list is handed to
the students at the beginning of the semester
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per week. Normally to be
delivered as two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials,
workshops or modules or a delivery mode as approved by the
Faculty of Business and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Project, 30%; Case Studies, 20%; Examination, 50%.
Students are expected to satisfactorily complete each component of
the assessment to gain a pass in the subject. Supplementary
assessment will not be available.
BHO3432 SERVICES MARKETING
Campus Footscray Park, Werribee
Prerequisite(s) BHO1171 Introduction to Marketing.
Content This is an advanced unit in marketing which examines the
special requirements for successfully marketing services. The various
activities in the services marketing mix are examined with particular
reference to product development, pricing, promotion, place
decisions, process design, people, performance and physical
evidence. In addition, the role and importance of the service sector
to the Australian economy is examined.
Required Reading Bateson, John 1995, Managing Services
Marketing, 3rd edn, Dryden.
Recommended Reading Extensive reading lists are throughout
the semester.
Class Contact Equivalent to two hours of lectures and one hour of
tutorial per week.
Assessment Tutorial paper(s), 20%; research project, 20%; final
examination, 60%. Students must satisfactorily complete each
component of the assessment to gain a pass in the subject.
Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BHO3435 MARKETING PLANNING AND STRATEGY
Campus Footscray Park, Werribee, Sunbury, Kuala Lumpur.
Prerequisite(s) Please enquire, BHO1171 Introduction to
Marketing.
Content This subject adopts a strategic approach to marketing. The
tools, techniques and analyses performed in the preparation of a
marketing strategy plan will be covered in detail. In addition, the
subject will evaluate a number of theories developed to assist with
strategy formulation. Topics covered include: trends in marketing
strategy, portfolio analysis, competitor audits, customer audits,
situation analysis, selecting strategic alternatives, the business vision
and mission, implementation and control processes. The culmination
of this subject may involve the preparation of a marketing plan.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer
Recommended Reading Aaker, David, 1995, Strategic Market
Management, 2nd ed., Wiley; Dibb, S., Simkin, L. & Bradley J.,
1996, The Marketing Planning Workbook
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per week. Normally to be
delivered as two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials,
workshops or modules or a delivery mode as approved by the
Faculty of Business and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Final examination, 40%; Individual essay, 20%;
Group project, 40%. Students are expected to satisfactorily
complete each component of the assessment to gain a pass in the
subject. Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BHO3473 HUMAN RELATIONS
Campus Footscray Park.
Prerequisite(s).Nil.
Content Tuning in to one’s experience; communication skills;
forming relationships; assertion and personal rights; influence and
persuasion; dealing with emotions; personal presentation skills.
Required Reading De Vito, J. 1991, Human Communication: The
Basic Course, 5th edn, Harper & Row, New York. Johnson, D.W.
1997, Reaching Out, 6th edn, Allyn & Bacon, Boston. Nelson-Jones,
R. 1991, Human Relationship Skills, 2nd edn, Holt Rinehart &
Winston, Sydney.
Recommended Reading.Adler, R.B., Rosenfeld, L.B. and Towne,
M., 1995, Interplay: The Process of Interpersonal Communication,
6th edn. Harcourt Brace, Sydney. Pearce, W.B., 1994,
Interpersonal Communication: Making Social Worlds, Harper, New
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
97
York. Weiten, W. and Lloyd, M. 1994, Psychology Applied to
Modern Life, 4th edn, Brooks/Cole, Pacific Grove.
Class Contact Three hours per week. Normally to be delivered as
two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials, workshops or
modules: or a delivery mode as approved by the Faculty of Business
and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Assignments, tests, and reflective journals, 100%.
Students must satisfactorily complete each component of the
assessment to gain a pass in the subject. Supplementary assessment
will not be available.
BMO1102 MANAGEMENT AND ORGANISATION BEHAVIOUR
Campus Footscray Park, Sunbury, Werribee, Kuala Lumpur
Hong Kong.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The aims of this subject are to provide students with an
understanding of organisational behaviour and management theory;
to assess critically the underlying values of these theories; to assess
critically the utility and application of the management practices
informed by these theories in the Australian context; and to analyse
critically the values of Australian managers concerning behaviour in
organisations and to evaluate the effectiveness of these assumptions.
This subject includes the following topics: overview of the
development of organisation/management theory; analysis of
scientific management, human relations theory; individual
behaviour/perception, personality, learning, motivation; group
behaviour; group dynamics, conflict resolution, leadership,
concentrating on Australian case studies and incorporating a
consideration of issues of gender, ethnicity and age; applications of
management/organisation theory in Australia; communication
processes, and quality of work life.
Required Reading Bartol, K., Martin, D., Tein, M. and Matthews,
G., 2000, Management, A Pacific Rim Focus, 3rd Edition, McGraw-
Hill, Sydney.
Recommended Reading Dunford, R.W. 1992, Organisational
Behaviour: An Organisational Analysis Perspective, Addison-Wesley
Publishing Company, Sydney. Fulop, L. and Linstead, S. 1999,
Management A Critical Management Text, MacMillan, South Yarra.
Class Contact Three hours per week. Normally to be delivered as
two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials, workshops or
modules: or a delivery mode as approved by the Faculty of Business
and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Three internal assessment tasks worth 60% of the
subject assessment and a final examination worth 40% of the
subject assessment. Students must successfully complete each part of
the assessment to gain a pass in the subject. Supplementary
assessment will not be available. Subject is equal to 15 credit
points.
BMO1110 MANAGING KNOWLEDGE
Campus Footscray Park, Sunbury
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The subject includes the following topics: information and
knowledge, sources and forms of knowledge, organizational
memory and learning, developing knowledge systems, documenting
knowledge, documents in electronic environments, knowledge
management tools, aligning knowledge management and business
strategy, knowledge enabled customer relationship management
and using knowledge for competitive advantage.
Required Reading Davenport, T.H. & Prusak, L. 2000, Working
knowledge: how organizations manage what they know, McGraw
Hill, New York.
Recommended Reading Pfeffer, J. & Sutton, R.I. 1999, The
Knowing-Doing Gap: How Smart Companies Turn Knowledge into
Action, Harvard Business School Publishing, USA. Nonaka, I. &
Nishiguchi, T. (Editors) 2001, Knowledge Emergence: Social,
Technical and Evolutionary Dimensions of Knowledge Creation,
Oxford University Press. Tiwana, A. 2001, The Essential Guide to
Knowledge Management: E-Business and CRM Applications,
Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
Class Contact Equivalent to 39 hours per semester.
Assessment Class assignments (50%); final examination (50%).
BMO1192 BUSINESS COMMUNICATION
Campus Footscray Park, Werribee, Sunbury
Prerequisites Nil
Content The aims of this subject are to develop an understanding
of the principles of effective business communication and to develop
and integrate oral and written communication skills so as to enhance
organisational communication ability. This subject includes the
following topics: How is business communication relevant?;
communication systems within organisations; the structure and
organisation of business documents; the problem solving approach
to effective communication; logic and reasoning in organizational
communication; improving communication competence; the process
of writing; business research and analysis skills; oral presentations
and speeches, improving listening skills, copy editing; referencing
and footnoting; non-verbal communication; the formal and human
sides to decision making in meetings; cross-cultural communication.
Required Reading Dwyer, J., 2002, Communicating in Business
Strategiesand Skills, 2nd edn, Pearson Education, Sydney.
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per week. Normally to be
delivered as two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials,
workshops or modules or a delivery mode as approved by the
Faculty of Business and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Class assignments, 60%; Examination, 40%.
Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BMO2181 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park.
Prerequisites Nil
Content The aim of this subject is to enable business graduates to
co-ordinate the operations functions effectively. This requires an
understanding of both the activities involved in the operations
function and the decision making techniques needed to control it.
This subject includes the following topics: definition of operations
function in manufacturing and service industries; the planning and
control of the operations process; application of analytical methods
and techniques to production.
Required Reading Gaither, N, 1998, Production and
Operations Management, 8th edn, Duxbury Press, USA.
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per week. Normally to be
delivered as two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials,
workshops or modules or a delivery mode as approved by the
Faculty of Business and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Computer workshop assignment, 20%; Research
assignment, 20%; Group presentation, 10%; Final examination,
50%. Students are expected to satisfactorily complete each
component of the assessment to gain a pass in the subject.
Supplementary assessment will not be available.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
98
BMO2271 ORGANISATIONS
Campus Footscray Park, Werribee.
Prerequisite(s) BMO1102 Management and Organisation
Behaviour.
Content This subject examines the practices and functioning of
organisations at micro levels, with an emphasis on how the
individual interacts and impinges on such organisational settings. It
is designed specifically to provide students with practical skills and a
better understanding of themselves as people which will enable them
to be more effective managers. The topics covered in this subject
include: personality, social perception, group dynamics, motivation
and the management of personal behaviour such as stress
management, conflict negotiation and career management
strategies.
Required Reading Shermerhorn, J.R., Hunt, J.G. & Osborn, R.N.,
1994, Managing Organisational Behaviour, 6th edn, Wiley, New
York.
Recommended Reading Bateman, T.S. & Zeithaml, C.P., 1993,
Management:Function and Strategy, 2nd edn, Irwin, Homewood.
Ivancevich, J., Olekalns, M. & Matteson, M. 1997, Organisational
Behaviour and Management, (Australasian edn, ) Irwin, Sydney.
Hellriegel, D., Slocum, J.W. & Woodman, R.W. 1995,
Organizational Behaviour, 7th edn, West Publishing,
Minneapolis/St Paul. Moorhead, G. & Griffin, R.W. 1995,
Organizational Behaviour: Managing People and Organizations,
4th edn, Houghton Mifflin, Boston. Nelson-Jones, R. 1996, Human
Relationship Skills, 3rd edn, Harcourt Brace, Sydney.
Class Contact. Three hours per week. Normally to be delivered as
two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials, workshops or
modules: or a delivery mode as approved by the Faculty of Business
and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Major assignment, 35%; presentation, 15%; final
examination, 50%. Students must satisfactorily complete each
component of the assessment to gain a pass in the subject.
Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BMO3220 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park Sunbury.
Prerequisite(s) BMO1102 Management and Organisation
Behaviour.
Content The aim of this subject is to introduce the principal
components of the human resource management function; and to
examine the links between the effective utilisation of human
resources and overall organisational effectiveness. This subject
includes the following topics: overview of personnel and human
resource management; influences on HRM function, recruitment,
selection, orientation, equal employment opportunity and affirmative
action, motivation, job design, performance appraisal and training
and career development; total remuneration, employment relations,
OHS and developments and research in Human Resource
Management.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Stone R.J. 1998 Human Resource
Management, 3rd edn, John Wiley & Sons, Brisbane, Kramar R.,
McGraw, P. & Schuler, R. 1997, Human Resource Management in
Australia, Longman, Sydney
Class Contact Three hours per week. Normally to be delivered as
two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials, workshops or
modules: or a delivery mode as approved by the Faculty of Business
and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Group case study and report 35%; individual
presentation 10%; mid-semester test 15%; final examination 40%.
Students must satisfactorily complete each component of the
assessment to gain a pass in the subject. Supplementary assessment
will not be available.
BMO3320 INTERPERSONAL AND ORGANISATION NEGOTIATION
Campus Footscray Park, St Albans, Sunbury
Prerequisite(s) BMO1102 Management and Organisation
Behaviour.
Content The aims of this subject are to introduce the application of
experiential learning to the teaching of interpersonal and
organisational negotiation; to provide a theoretical framework
linking communication and negotiation in groups and organisations
and to develop students' skills in negotiation in these contexts. The
subject includes the following topics: the role of a negotiator;
negotiation theory, conflict and bargaining power; communication
skills; preparing to negotiate; negotiating tactics; role of the third
party in negotiations; negotiation skills training; critical issues in
negotiation exercises and international negotiation models.
Required Reading To be advised by the subject lecturer.
Recommended Reading Lewicki, R.J. et al. (1994). Negotiation,
2nd edn. Irwin Inc., Sydney.
Subject Hours Equivalent to three hours per week for one
semester comprising one two-hour lecture and one one-hour tutorial.
Assessment Seminar presentation (20%); group assignment
(30%); final examination (50%). Students must satisfactorily
complete each component of assessment to gain a pass in the
subject. Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BMO3323 EMPLOYEE RELATIONS MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park, St Albans, Sunbury
Prerequisite(s) BMO1102 Management and Organisation
Behaviour.
Content Employee Relations Management – the nature and
meaning of Australian employee relations and an analysis of the
components of the systems. Conflict – the nature and function of
conflict in a work situation. Parties in Employee Relations – employer
associations and trade unions, their history, rules and objectives,
current issues and challenges. The role and functions of governments
in employee relations. Dispute Settlement Techniques – conciliation,
arbitration and wages bargaining. An evaluation of the techniques.
The changing nature of dispute settlement. Industrial Tribunals – their
role in the settlement of industrial conflict and history of wage
determination. The structure and operation of Federal and State
tribunals.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Deery, S., Plowman, D. & Walsh, J.
1997, Industrial Relations A Contemporary Analysis, McGraw Hill,
Sydney. Alexander, R. & Lewer, J. 1996, Understanding Australian
Industrial Relations, 4th edn, Harcourt-Brace.
Class Contact Equivalent to thirty nine hours per semester. Two-
one hour lectures and one one-hour workshop per week for one
semester.
Assessment Class role play exercise, including 300 word
reflective piece, 15%; tutorial workbook and class exercises, 10%;
essay (1500−2000 words), 25%; final examination, 50%. Students
must satisfactorily complete each part of the assessment to gain a
pass in the subject. Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BMO3324 CONSULTING AND COUNSELLING
Campus St Albans, Sunbury
Prerequisite(s) BMO3220 Human Resource Management.
Content The aims of this subject are to enhance students’
understanding of workplace interpersonal relationships and
communication skills; to provide students with an understanding of
the theory and practice of interviewing especially their interview
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
99
types, purposes and aims; to enable a student to develop
knowledge and skills with regard to the interviewing and counselling
processes at the individual, group and organisational level; and to
assess critically the role of consulting, interviewing and counselling
activities in organisations. This subject includes the following topics:
the importance of interviewing for human resource managers;
consulting and counselling as specific forms of interviewing;
interview interpersonal and assertiveness skills; selection, induction,
goal setting, appraisal, disciplinary, termination, and exit
interviews; coaching and team building; the counselling and
consulting roles of the human resource manager.
Recommended Reading Robbins, S.P. & Hunsaker, P.L. 1996,
Training in Interpersonal Skills: Tips for Managing People at Work,
2nd edn, Prentice-Hall, Sydney.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per week comprising one
two-hour lecture and one one-hour tutorial/workshop for one
semester.
Assessment Class presentation, 20%; skills diary, 10%; video role
play, 20%; final examination, 50%. Students must satisfactorily
complete each component of the assessment to gain a pass in the
subject. Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BMO3325 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT EVALUATION
Campus St Albans, Sunbury
Prerequisite(s) BMO3476 Training and Development.
Content The aims of this subject are to enhance students’
understanding of the influences that shape the strategic provision of
training; to enable students to evaluate critically training systems; to
develop students’ abilities to match training and development
techniques methods with learning styles; and to enable students to
determine and evaluate the output of training and development
activities so as to demonstrate their usefulness to an organisation.
This subject includes the following topics: the strategic planning
approach to training within organisations; designing training for
effective learning; instructional theory and behavioural
considerations; objectives in adult learning and types of learning
goals; evaluation of training systems; and evaluation of the training
function.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Phillips, J. 1996, Accountability in
Human Resource Management, Gulf, London. Robinson, D. &
Robinson, J. 1996, Performance Consulting: Moving Beyond
Training, Bennett-Koehler Publishing. San Francisco.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours a week comprising one
two-hour lecture and one one-hour tutorial/workshop for one
semester.
Assessment Written report, 50%; final examination, 50%.
Students must satisfactorily complete each component of the
assessment to gain a pass in the subject. Supplementary assessment
will not be available.
BMO3327 ORGANISATION CHANGE AND DEVELOPMENT
Campus St Albans, Sunbury
Prerequisite(s) BMO1102 Management and Organisation
Behaviour or equivalent subject.
Content The aims of this subject are to develop a sound knowledge
of organisations, their design, development and change;
implementing change strategies and evaluating change. This subject
includes the following topics: an introduction to organisation
development and change; levels of organisational change –
individual, group, intergroup and organisation level; managing
continuous versus discontinuous change; the learning environment;
managing resistance to change.
Required Reading Cummings, T.G. and Worley, C.G. 1997,
Organisation Development and Change, 6th edn, South-Western
College Publishing, Cincinnati, Ohio. French, W. and Bell, C.
1995, Organisation Development: Behavioural Science Intervention
for Organisational Improvement, Prentice Hall International Inc.,
New Jersey. Harvey, Donald, F. and Brown, R. 1996, An
Experiential Approach to Organisation Development, 5th edn,
Prentice Hall International Inc., New Jersey.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per week for one semester
comprising two one-hour lectures and one-hour tutorial/workshop.
Assessment Class presentation, 20%; research assignment, 30%;
final examination, 50%. Students must satisfactorily complete each
component of the assessment to gain a pass in the subject.
Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BMO3328 HEALTH AND SAFETY MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park, City – Flinders Lane
Prerequisite(s) BMO1102 Management & Organisation
Behaviour.
Content Overview of Occupational Health & Safety problems in
Australia. Explanation and comparison of major disciplinary
perspectives on OH&S, including occupational medicine, industrial
psychology and sociological perspectives. Theories of injury
causation: sociological and labour process explanations. The role of
the state in OH&S: historical and contemporary perspectives. Case
Studies on specific OH&S issues (RSI, Working Time, Back Injuries,
NESB workers, and gender). Management, unions and preventative
practices, including: management programs and strategies; OH&S
and risk management processes; OH&S committees; and workers
compensation and rehabilitation management. Democratising
OH&S: the Scandinavian experience. Lean production and OH&S.
Workplace reform and Best Practice OH&S management. Enterprise
bargaining and the incorporation of OH&S. Safety regulations in
relation to equipment and technology in the workplace.
Required Reading Quinlan, M. & Bohle, P , 2000, Managing
Occupational Health and Safety: A Multidisciplinary Approach, 2nd
edn, Macmillan, Melbourne.
Recommended Reading Mayhew, C. and Peterson, C.L., 1999,
Occupational Health and Safety in Australia: Industry, Public Sector
and Small Business, Allen and Unwin, Sydney.
Class Contact Thirty-nine hours for one semester, comprising two
one-hour lectures and one one-hour tutorial per week.
Assessment Case study analysis 50%; Final examination 50%.
BMO3420 HUMAN RESOURCE INFORMATION SYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park, St Albans, Sunbury
Prerequisite(s) BCO1101 Computer Applications; BMO3220
Human Resource Management.
Content The aims of this subject are to study and critically evaluate
the principles and methodologies involved in the management of
information about human resources; and to develop the knowledge
and skills to effectively use and manage human resource information
systems (HRIS). The subject includes the following topics: information
technology; human resource management information requirements;
features and users of HRIS’s; analysis, development, implementation
and management of HRIS’s; practical use of an HRIS for entering
information and writing reports; and issues in the development of
HRISs for strategic purposes
Recommended Reading Kavanagh, M.J., Gueutal, H.G. and
Tannenbaum, S.I. 1990, Human Resource Information Systems
Development and Application, PWS-KENT Publishing Company,
Boston, Massachusetts.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
100
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per weeks comprising one
two hour lecture, one one-hour tutorial/computer workshop for one
semester.
Assessment Practical test 10%; Research Project and Presentation
50%; Final Examination 40%. Students must satisfactorily complete
each component of the assessment to gain a pass in the subject.
Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BMO3421 MANAGING THE SERVICE ORGANISATION
Campus Footscray Park, City – Flinders Lane
Prerequisite(s) BMO1102 Management & Organisation
Behaviour.
Content Introduction to the service industries. Service sector:
changes in organisation structure. Service management: service
quality; service culture; customer service. Service staff: recruitment
and selection; leadership and empowerment; staff development;
entrepreneurship and careers.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Chicester, Go F., Monachello, M. and
Baurn, T., 1996, Human Resource Management in the Hospitality
Industry, Wiley, New York. Glyn W.J. & Barnes, J.G., 1995,
Understanding Services Management, Wiley, New York. Lovelock,
C.H., 1992, Managing Services Marketing, Operations and Human
Resources, 2nd edn., Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
Class Contact Thirty-nine hours for one semester, comprising one
two-hour lecture and one one-hour tutorial per week.
Assessment Individual report 15%; Presentation 10%; Group
survey assignment 25%; Final examination 50%.
BMO3422 STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park, St Albans, Sunbury, Werribee
Prerequisite(s) BMO1102 Management and Organisation
Behaviour or equivalent subject.
Content The aims of this subject are to study normative theories
and models of organisation strategy, policy and decision making, to
assess critically their value to an organisation and its shareholders;
and to develop knowledge, personal skills and competencies in the
application of the above approaches. This subject includes the
following topics: the nature of strategic management; analyse the
environment; planning direction; planning strategy; implementing
strategy; global strategic management and future directions.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours per week comprising two
one-hour lectures and one one-hour tutorial/workshop.
Assessment Industry analysis, 20%; group case study, 30%; final
examination, 50%. Students must satisfactorily complete each
component of the assessment to gain a pass in the subject.
Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BMO3476 TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT
Campus Footscray Park, Sunbury.
Prerequisite(s) BMO3220 Human Resource Management
Content The aims of this subject are to provide students with an
understanding of the theory and practice of training and
development; to assess critically the effectiveness of adult learning
principles and training and development techniques; to enable
students to develop knowledge and skills with regard to the design,
management and evaluation of training and development; and to
enable students to analyse the training needs of individuals and to
design an appropriate development program. This subject includes
the following topics: the importance of training for organisational
effectiveness and individual career development; training
productivity and quality of worklife; training needs analysis and
skills audit and job analysis; computer assisted and managed
learning; selling, training and development programs within an
organisation.
Required Reading Noe, R.A. 2002, Employee Training and
Development, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill, Sydney.
Recommended Reading An extensive reading list is handed to
students at the beginning of the semester.
Class Contact Three hours per week. Normally to be delivered as
two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials, workshops or
modules: or a delivery mode as approved by the Faculty of Business
and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Group presentations 20%; syndicate group project
30%; final examination 50%. Students must satisfactorily complete
each component of the assessment to gain a pass in the subject.
Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BMO4551 HUMAN AND INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS (ENGINEERING AND
SCIENCE SERVICE SUBJECT)
Campus Footscray Park.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Overview of personnel and human resource management;
managing and influencing people; motivation; use of power;
management styles; facilitating teams; effective team communication
and development; developing and using procedural and operational
guidelines; current trends in people management. Major institutions
in Australian industrial relations. Nature of workplace relations. The
causes, functions and resolution processes of industrial conflict;
changing management strategies in industrial relations.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Alexander, R. and Lewer, J. 1998,
Understanding Australian Industrial Relations, 5th edn, Harcourt
Brace, Sydney. Stone, R.J. 1999, Human Resource Management,
3rd edn, John Wiley, Brisbane.
Class Contact Three hours per week. Normally to be delivered as
two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials, workshops or
modules: or a delivery mode as approved by the Faculty of Business
and Law.
Assessment Major assignment, 30%; final examination, 70%.
Students are expected to complete each component of the
assessment to gain a pass in the subject. Supplementary assessment
will not be available.
HFB1101 FUNDAMENTALS OF PARAMEDICINE 1
Campus St Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject introduces the fundamentals of paramedicine.
Students are introduced to the anatomical, physiological,
biochemical, and pathophysiological basis of care from paramedic
perspectives. Analysis of cell structures, types and groups culminates
in examinations of the musculoskeletal and integumentary systems.
Brief pathophysiological details from a limited range of acute and
chronic conditions encountered by paramedics are also included.
Topics studied in this subject may be interchangeable with those in
HFB1205 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 2, HFB2101
Fundamentals of Paramedicine 3 and HFB2206 Fundamentals of
Paramedicine 4. Topics will be related directly to paramedic care.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester or
equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and
computer-based self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Online test given in two parts (20%); essay (1200
words) (30%); written examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass
in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (online test and
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
101
essay) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum
possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.
Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination
will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary
examination will be 50%.
HFB1102 PARAMEDIC SCIENCES 1
Campus St Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject is concerned with developing the students’
understanding of the sciences underpinning paramedic practice. An
introduction to microbiology and pharmacology related to
paramedic practice provides the theoretical explanations for specific
paramedic practices taught in later subjects. Pharmacological
concepts such as route of administration, distribution, metabolism
and excretion of drugs are introduced and developed with specific
reference to paramedic practice. Topics studied in this subject may
be interchangeable with those in HFB1206 Paramedic Sciences 2,
HFB2101 Paramedic Sciences 3 and HFB2207 Paramedic Sciences
4.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester or
equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and
computer-based self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Weekly online or workbook activities including one
online test (Microbiology and Pharmacology combined) (30%);
media review (1000 words) (20%); final written examination (50%).
To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of
assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items
(weekly activities and media review) may be re-attempted and
resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is
failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum
possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.
HFB1203 PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HFB1801 Out of Hospital Practice and HFB1802
Prehospital Clinical 1; or equivalents.
Corequisite(s) HFB1204 Paramedic Clinical 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject builds on HFB1801 Out of Hospital Practice
and continues to develop the students’ understanding and practice
of paramedic emergency management. A problem-oriented
approach extends students’ paramedic knowledge and introduces
paramedic protocols and practice requirements of individualizing
patient care. Skill development is introduced and specifically
integrated into particular paramedic medical and surgical case
studies that highlight the nervous, respiratory, cardiovascular, and
endocrine systems. Basic principles of applied clinical
pharmacology, e.g., drug administration, and basic
electrocardiology and interpretation and an introduction to
advanced life support procedures including manual defibrillation are
also included. Topics in this subject may be interchanged with
HFB2100 Paramedic Practice 2 and HFB2204 Paramedic Practice
3.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Six hours per week for one semester or equivalent,
comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and self-directed
learning activities.
Assessment Proficiency multi-station practical and theory
examination (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); portfolio (50%); final
examination (50%). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Failed assessment items (multi-station examination and
portfolio) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted multi-
station examination. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
resubmission of the portfolio will be 50%. Where the final
examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered.
The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will
be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.
HFB1204 PARAMEDIC CLINICAL 1
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HFB1801 Out of Hospital Practice and HFB1802
Prehospital Clinical; or equivalents.
Corequisite(s) HFB1203 Paramedic Practice 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject is designed to facilitate the application of
theory and skills presented in HFB1203 Paramedic Practice 1.
Students participate in the delivery of health care initially in
classroom laboratory settings and later in selected clinical settings.
The clinical focus is on developing skills of assessment and care of
people who require acute emergency medical and surgical care.
Routes of medication administration are included and the nervous,
respiratory, cardiovascular, and endocrine systems are presented in
greater detail.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours A minimum of ten hours per week for one semester
or equivalent, comprising at least sixty hours clinical placement in
the semester (hurdle requirement), lectures, tutorials, practical
sessions and self-directed learning activities. Clinical placement
needs to be flexible pending available clinical positions in hospitals,
other medical facilities and ambulance services. Where possible,
students will be notified at the beginning of the semester of their
clinical arrangements.
Assessment To obtain an Ungraded Pass, students must
successfully complete the proficiency multi-station practical and
theory examination (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); reflective
journal (maximum 1500 words); four case studies; clinical log book;
overall satisfactory appraisal from all placements (hurdle
requirement). This subject is a hurdle requirement.
HFB1205 FUNDAMENTALS OF PARAMEDICINE 2
Campus St Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) HFB1101 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 1; or
equivalent.
Content This subject continues the topics presented in HFB1101
Fundamentals of Paramedicine 1 and introduces examinations of the
anatomy, physiology and pathophysiology of the nervous,
respiratory, cardiovascular and endocrine systems. Function is
explored in detail from discrete, interactive and holistic perspectives.
Topics studied in this subject may be interchanged with those in
HFB1101 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 1, HFB2102
Fundamentals of Paramedicine 3 and HFB2206 Fundamentals of
Paramedicine 4. Topics will be related directly to paramedic care of
the emergency patient.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester or
equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and
computer-based self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Online test given in two parts (20%); essay (1500
words) (30%); written examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass
in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (online test and
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
102
essay) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum
possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.
Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination
will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary
examination will be 50%.
HFB1206 PARAMEDIC SCIENCES 2
Campus St Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) HFB1102 Paramedic Sciences 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject presents the pharmacological aspects of
dysfunction in the nervous, respiratory, cardiovascular and gastro-
intestinal systems and relates those aspects to paramedic practice
and out-of-hospital settings. The concept of host microbe interactions
in microbiology introduces students to the body’s defense systems
and principles of disease and epidemiology. Topics studied in this
subject may be interchangeable with those in HFB1102 Paramedic
Sciences 1, HFB2103 Paramedic Sciences 3 and HFB2207
Paramedic Sciences 4. Topics will be related directly to paramedic
care.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester or
equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and
computer-based self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Weekly workbook or online activities including one
online test (Microbiology and Pharmacology combined) (30%);
online test (20%); final written examination (50%). To obtain at least
a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (weekly activities
and online test) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will
be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary
examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the
supplementary examination will be 50%.
HFB1801 OUT-OF-HOSPITAL PRACTICE
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HFB1802 Prehospital Clinical; or equivalent.
Content This subject introduces students to out-of-hospital care and
the paramedic profession. The subject is divided into three areas.
The first area introduces modes of paramedic and out-of-hospital
emergency and non-emergency practice. Ambulance operations
including written communications in paramedicine, occupational
health and safety issues, and an introduction to aspects of law and
ethics are presented. The second area introduces paramedic
diagnostics, emergency and non-emergency examinations, basic life
support, and elementary management at a systems level of various
medical and surgical conditions. The third area introduces trauma
and its effects on the body. Throughout the subject, a problem-based
learning model is used to promote development of critical thinking
and individualized care is emphasized through assessment of
patient priorities and care of their families.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Six hours per week for one semester or equivalent,
comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and self-directed
learning activities.
Assessment Mid semester test (10%) (pass/fail) (hurdle
requirement); proficiency multi-station practical and theory
examination (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement) (40%); written
examination (50%). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Failed assessment items (mid semester test and multi-station
examination) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency standards
must be obtained on any re-attempted mid semester test and multi-
station examination. Where the final examination is failed, a
supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible
mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is
a hurdle requirement.
HFB1802 PREHOSPITAL CLINICAL
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HFB1801 Out of Hospital Practice; or equivalent.
Content This subject is designed to facilitate the application of
theory and skills presented in HFB1801 Out of Hospital Practice.
Students will participate in the delivery of health care in classroom
laboratory settings and in selected clinical settings. The clinical focus
is on developing skills related to assessment and care of people
requiring elementary medical and surgical care, transport and
prehospital attention.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours A minimum of ten (10) hours per week for one
semester or equivalent, comprising at least forty (40) hours clinical
placement in the semester (hurdle requirement), lectures, tutorials,
practical sessions and self-directed learning activities. Clinical
placement needs to be flexible pending available clinical positions
in hospitals, other medical facilities and ambulance services. Where
possible, students will be notified at the beginning of the semester of
their clinical arrangements.
Assessment To obtain an Ungraded Pass, students must
successfully complete the proficiency multi-station practical and
theory examination (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); reflective
journal (maximum 1500 words); four case studies; clinical log book;
overall satisfactory appraisal from all placements (hurdle
requirement). This subject is a hurdle requirement.
HFB2100 PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 2
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HFB1203 Paramedic Practice 1; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HFB2101 Paramedic Clinical 2; or equivalent.
Content This subject continues to develop the students’
understanding and practice of paramedic emergency management.
A problem-oriented approach emphasizing application of
knowledge guides students in trauma management and systems,
environmental emergencies, introductory aeromedicine and major
incident responses within specific medical specialties and out-of-
hospital emergencies. Topics in applied clinical pharmacology will
reinforce paramedic emergency management of patients at home
and during emergency medical transport. To build individual and
team skills and strengthen the awareness for individualized care,
students will work with other students to provide supervised student
mentoring. Topics in this subject may be interchanged with
HFB1203 Paramedic Practice 1 and HFB2204 Paramedic Practice
4.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Six hours per week for one semester or off-
Campus equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical
sessions and self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Proficiency multi-station practical and theory
examination (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); portfolio (50%);
examination (50%). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Failed assessment items (multi-station examination and
portfolio) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency standards must
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
103
be obtained on any re-attempted multi-station examination.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on resubmission of any
portfolio will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a
supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible
mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is
a hurdle requirement.
HFB2101 PARAMEDIC CLINICAL 2
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HFB1204 Paramedic Clinical 1; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HFB2100 Paramedic Practice 2; or equivalent.
Content This subject is designed to facilitate the application of
theory and skills presented in HFB2100 Paramedic Practice 2.
Students will participate in the delivery of health care in selected
clinical settings and classroom laboratory practices. The clinical
focus is on developing paramedic Assessment, competency and
management of patients in a variety of circumstances.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours A minimum of ten (10) hours per week for one
semester or equivalent, comprising at least sixty (60) hours clinical
placement in the semester (hurdle requirement), lectures, tutorials,
practical sessions and self-directed learning activities. Clinical
placement needs to be flexible pending available clinical positions
in hospitals, other medical facilities and ambulance services. Where
possible, students will be notified at the beginning of the semester of
their clinical arrangements.
Assessment To obtain an Ungraded Pass, students must
successfully complete the proficiency multi-station practical and
theory examination (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); reflective
journal (maximum 1500 words); four case studies; clinical log book;
overall satisfactory appraisal from all placements (hurdle
requirement). This subject is a hurdle requirement.
HFB2102 FUNDAMENTALS OF PARAMEDICINE 3
Campus St Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) HFB1205 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 2; or
equivalent.
Content The subject builds on the earlier Fundamentals of
Paramedicine 1 and 2, and includes the anatomy and physiology of
the lymphatic, digestive, reproductive and urinary systems to
illustrate their relationships within a range of common and important
acute and chronic illnesses. An overview of human nutrition,
metabolism and temperature regulation is included. Topics may be
interchanged with those in HFB1101 Fundamentals of Paramedicine
1, HFB1205 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 2 and HFB2206
Fundamentals of Paramedicine 4 subjects. Topics will be related
directly to paramedic care of the emergency patient.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Six hours per week for one semester or equivalent,
comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and computer-based
self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Online test in two parts (20%); essay (1500 words)
(30%); written examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the
subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted
and passed. Failed assessment items (online test and essay) may be
re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to
be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final
examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered.
The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will
be 50%.
HFB2103 PARAMEDIC SCIENCES 3
Campus St Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) HFB1206 Paramedic Sciences 2; or equivalent.
Content This subject introduces students to prescribed and over-the-
counter drug treatments for endocrine and immunological disorders.
Diagnosis and treatment of infections and inflammatory, neoplastic,
and allergic conditions link the pharmacological and
microbiological components of this subject. Topics studied in this
subject may be interchangeable with those in HFB1102 Paramedic
Sciences 1, HFB1206 Paramedic Sciences 2 and HFB2207
Paramedic Sciences 4. Topics will be related directly to paramedic
care.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester or
equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and
computer-based self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Weekly workbook or online activities including one
online test (Microbiology and Pharmacology combined) (30%);
clinical review (1500 words) (20%); final written examination
(50%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, normally all components of
assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items
(weekly activities and clinical review) may be re-attempted and
resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is
failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum
possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.
HFB2204 PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 3
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HFB2100 Paramedic Practice 2; or equivalent.
Content This subject continues develop the students understanding
and practice of paramedical emergency management. This subject
has been designed to continue the study of knowledge using a
problem-orientated approach. The introduction of skill development
and knowledge has been specifically integrated to ensure students
have an underlying knowledge and then are able to apply skills to a
particular situation. The framework of this subject will be based
around medical specialities and out of hospital emergencies and will
be related to emergency care of the elderly, obstetrics and
midwifery, neonatal care, paediatrics, abdominal and reproductive
emergencies. Students will be introduced to the principles of applied
clinical pharmacology in the form of paramedical guidelines, drug
administration, and management of these patients in emergency
situations, in the home and during emergency medical transport.
Students will also be introduced to clinical instruction and mentoring.
To enhance student relationships, students will work with other
students providing supervised student mentoring arrangements. The
integration of this approach will further facilitate the need for
individualised patient care. Topics in this subject may be
interchanged with HFB1203 Paramedic Practice 1 or HFB2204
Paramedic Practice 3.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Subject Hours Six hours per week for one semester or off
Campus equivalent comprising lecturers, tutorials, practical
sessions and discussion and/or workbooks.
Assessment Examination (50%), Portfolio (50%)and mastery
exams (pass/fail). Normally to obtain a pass in the subject all
components of assessment must be passed. To obtain a pass in the
subject all components of assessment must be successfully
completed. If resubmission of the assignment or a supplementary
examination is required for this subject, the total mark available for
the task will be a maximum of 50%, and the overall grade for the
subject will be no higher than pass.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
104
HFB2205 PARAMEDICAL INTERNSHIP
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HFB2101 Paramedic Clinical 2; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HFB2204 Paramedic Practice 3; or equivalent.
Content This subject is designed to build on past clinical subjects
and to place the student into actual paramedic practice. The subject
aims to make students aware of the expectations of them in pre-
hospital environments and acute medical settings. To further develop
paramedic skills and an awareness of professional and ethical
behaviours, students will be expected to practise primarily in the
ambulance environment within selected clinical settings or in
supervised classroom laboratory settings. Students will practise
patient consultations and clinical practice under supervision. Clinical
tutorials and case presentations will emphasize and expand upon
clinically relevant material obtained during clinical placement.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours A minimum of ten (10) hours per week for one
semester or equivalent, comprising at least sixty (60) hours clinical
placement in the semester (hurdle requirement), lectures, tutorials,
practical sessions and self-directed learning activities. Clinical
placement needs to be flexible pending available clinical positions
in hospitals, other medical facilities and ambulance services. Where
possible, students will be notified at the beginning of the semester of
their clinical arrangements.
Assessment To obtain an Ungraded Pass, students must
successfully complete the proficiency multi-station practical and
theory examination (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); reflective
journal (maximum 1500 words); four case studies; clinical log book;
overall satisfactory appraisal from all placements (hurdle
requirement). This subject is a hurdle requirement.
HFB2206 FUNDAMENTALS OF PARAMEDICINE 4
Campus St Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) HFB2102 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 3; or
equivalent.
Content This subject furthers the understanding of principles and
diseases introduced in earlier paramedic subjects. Topics include the
anatomy and physiology of the special senses; fluids, electrolytes
and acid-base balance; and pregnancy and human development.
The impacts of trauma and fluid and electrolytic imbalances on the
body and the pathophysiological basis of pain and shock are
presented. Fundamental differences between paediatric and adult
care are highlighted. Students will study the acute paediatric onset
of illnesses affecting the cerebral, respiratory, cardiovascular and
other systems. Causes and prevention of paediatric trauma will be
introduced and extended into its management in a prehospital
setting. Emotional effects on parents, paramedics and bystanders
will also be discussed. Topics may be interchanged with those in
HFB1101 Fundamentals of Paramedicine 1, HFB1204
Fundamentals of Paramedicine 2 and HFB2102 Fundamentals of
Paramedicine 3. Topics will be related directly to paramedic care of
the emergency patient.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester or
equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and
computer-based self-directed learning activities.
Assessment Online test given in two parts (20%); essay (1500
words) (30%); written examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass
in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (online test and
essay) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum
possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.
Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination
will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary
examination will be 50%.
HFB2207 PARAMEDIC SCIENCES 4
Campus St Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) HFB2103 Paramedic Sciences 3; or equivalent.
Content This subject develops the students’ knowledge on drugs
used for CNS and psychiatric conditions and extends knowledge on
fluid imbalances. Attitudes towards recreational and prescribed
drugs are explored. Principles of microbiology with reference to
sterilisation and disinfection, infection control and antibiotic
treatment of microorganisms and nosocomial infections are linked to
public health issues later in the course. Topics studied in this subject
may be interchangeable with those in HFB1102 Paramedic Sciences
1, HFB1206 Paramedic Sciences 2 and HFB2103 Paramedic
Sciences 3. Topics will be related directly to paramedic care of the
emergency patient.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website dingo.vu.edu.au/~paramedics
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester or
equivalent, comprising lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and self-
directed learning activities.
Assessment Clinical review (1500 words) (20%); essay (1500
words) (30%); final written examination (50%). To obtain at least a
Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (clinical review and
essay) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum
possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.
Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination
will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary
examination will be 50%.
HFB3111 PROFESSIONAL BASIS OF PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 1
Campus St Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of Years One and Two; or
equivalents.
Content This subject challenges students to analyse their present
practice by examining the principles of intervention for the acutely ill
or injured person. An integral part of this subject will be the
development of students’ health assessment and practice skills
necessary to care for the acutely ill or injured person and the
adoption of those skills to improve and extend current practice.
Integration of material from basic and paramedic sciences, applied
clinical sciences, paramedic clinical practice and professional issues
will be incorporated throughout the subject.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website webct.vu.edu.au/
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials, practicals and self-directed learning activities or
online equivalents.
Assessment Portfolio (100%) To obtain at least a Pass in the
subject, normally the assessment task must be attempted and
passed. If the assessment item is failed, it may be re-attempted and
resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any resubmission will be 50%.
HFB3122 PROFESSIONAL BASIS OF PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 2
Campus St Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of Years One and Two; or
equivalents.
Content This subject challenges students to analyse their present
practice by examining the principles of intervention for the acutely ill
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
105
or injured person. An integral part of this subject is the development
of students’ understanding of electrocardiology and pharmacology,
and their ability to apply principles in electrocardiology and
pharmacology to their present practice. Integration of material from
basic and paramedic sciences, applied clinical sciences, paramedic
clinical practice and professional issues will be incorporated
throughout this subject.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website webct.vu.edu.au/
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials, practicals and self-directed learning activities or
online equivalents.
Assessment Portfolio including contribution to online discussions
(500-800 words each) (100%). To obtain at least a Pass in the
subject, normally the assessment task must be attempted and
passed. If the assessment item is failed, it may be re-attempted and
resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any resubmission will be 50%.
HFB3211 INTEGRATION OF PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 1
Campus St Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of Years One and Two; or
equivalents.
Content This subject will allow each student to extend and refine
their particular area of professional paramedic practice. Students
are expected to apply the principles developed in Professional Basis
of Paramedic Practice 1 and 2 to their current paramedic practice
and to concentrate on the professional development of their
nominated area through observation, participation, discussion, and
self-reflection.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website webct.vu.edu.au/
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials, practicals and self-directed learning activities or
equivalents.
Assessment Portfolio (100%). To obtain at least a Pass in the
subject, normally the assessment task must be attempted and
passed. If the assessment item is failed, it may be re-attempted and
resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any resubmission will be 50%.
HFB3222 INTEGRATION OF PARAMEDIC PRACTICE 2
Campus St Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Restricted to students enrolled in the Bachelor of
Health Science – Paramedic (1 yr Conversion) degree course.
Content This subject re-introduces and extends the fundamentals of
paramedicine. A systems approach reinforces the anatomical,
physiological, pathophysiological and pharmacological aspects of
care from the perspectives of the paramedic. Applied considerations
will be given to a range of adult and paediatric emergencies.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website webct.vu.edu.au/
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures and self-directed learning activities or online equivalent.
Assessment Essay (1500 words) (25%); weekly online activities
including contributions to online discussions (15%); final online
examination of multiple-choice questions only (60%). To obtain at
least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment
must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (essay and
weekly activities) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will
be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary
examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the
supplementary examination will be 50%.
HFB3301 ISSUES IN PREHOSPITAL HEALTH SERVICE DELIVERY
Campus St Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of Years One and Two; or
equivalents.
Content This subject introduces students to a range of key concepts
that influence health service delivery in out-of-hospital practice.
Students will relate to their own perspectives and experiences in
order to explore and analyse the many roles of the paramedic in
health service delivery.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website webct.vu.edu.au/
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials, practicals and self-directed learning activities or
online equivalents.
Assessment Portfolio (100%). To obtain at least a Pass in the
subject, normally the assessment task must be attempted and
passed. If the assessment item is failed, it may be re-attempted and
resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any resubmission will be 50%.
HFB3401 PREHOSPITAL ETHICAL AND LEGAL ISSUES
Campus St Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of Years One and Two; or
equivalents.
Content This subject enables students to explore ethical and legal
issues and their implications for paramedics and paramedicine.
Students’ experiences will be drawn upon to demonstrate and
scrutinise their responses to common situations that occur in
paramedic practice which may cause ethical and legal dilemmas.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website webct.vu.edu.au/
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials, practicals and self-directed learning activities or
online equivalents.
Assessment Negotiated written report or portfolio (100%). To
obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally the negotiated
assessment task must be attempted and passed. If the assessment
item is failed, it may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will
be 50%.
HFB3501 RESEARCH IN PARAMEDIC PRACTICE
Campus St Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of Years One and Two; or
equivalents.
Content This subject investigates major research considerations
and focuses on facilitating the students’ abilities to critically analyse
research reports. Emphasis is placed on the application of research
findings to paramedic practice and ways in which applications can
be facilitated.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website webct.vu.edu.au/
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials, practicals and self-directed learning activities or
online equivalents.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
106
Assessment Negotiated written report or portfolio (100%). To
obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally the negotiated
assessment task must be attempted and passed. If the assessment
item is failed, it may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will
be 50%.
HFB3700 PARAMEDIC INSTRUCTION AND MENTORING (ELECTIVE)
(Offered in 2005 subject to demand)
Campus St Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of Years One and Two; or
equivalents.
Content The subject will introduce students to the concept of
clinical precentorship, mentoring, instruction and action-based
research in a paramedic focused settings. Students will plan and
implement a specific activity based on a literature review and
participation in professional practice. Students will be assisted to
develop skills in goal and outcomes setting, data collection and
interpretation of action research based on their clinical mentoring
experience.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website webct.vu.edu.au/
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials, practicals and self-directed learning activities or
online equivalents.
Assessment Negotiated written report or portfolio (100%). To
obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally the negotiated
assessment task must be attempted and passed. If the assessment
item is failed, it may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will
be 50%.
HFB3800 PARAMEDIC PROFESSIONAL WRITING (ELECTIVE)
(Offered in 2005 subject to demand)
Campus St Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of Years One and Two; or
equivalents.
Content This subject will introduce students to the practice of
developing a paramedic body of knowledge through professional
writing. Students will rely on their professional experience and the
professional literature to produce a paper (or series of papers)
suitable for submission to a refereed professional journal. Students
will use publication guidelines and instructions to authors in
paramedic or other suitable journals and will be assisted in the
development of their journal paper(s). Emphasis will be on
extending the students’ critical appraisal, synthesis and higher order
cognitive skills when developing their professional writing skills.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website relevant journal sites
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials, practicals and self-directed learning activities or
online equivalents.
Assessment Portfolio or submission of a journal article (100%). To
obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally the assessment task
must be attempted and passed. If the assessment item is failed, it
may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible
marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.
HFB3900 EMERGENCY MEDICAL SERVICES MANAGEMENT (ELECTIVE)
Campus St Albans, Off Campus, Online
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of Years One and Two; or
equivalents.
Content This subject examines two organizational areas (practices
and functioning of organisations, and theories and models of
organisational structure, policy and decision making) and how they
relate to emergency medical services (EMS). Emphasis is on
individuals within EMS organisational settings and the critical value
of structure, policy and decision making to the organisation. Topics
covered in the first area include personality, social perception,
group dynamics, motivation and specific personal behaviour
management issues such as stress management, conflict resolution
and career management strategies. Topics in the second area
include the nature of strategic planning, analysis of the environment,
planning directions, strategy formulation and implementation, and
global strategic management and future directions.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Website webct.vu.edu.au/
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials, practicals and self-directed learning activities or
online equivalents.
Assessment Portfolio (100%). To obtain at least a Pass in the
subject, normally the assessment task must be attempted and
passed. If the assessment item is failed, it may be re-attempted and
resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any resubmission will be 50%.
HFC1001 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER MEDIATED ART
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject is designed to provide beginning artists with
an understanding of the ways that computers can and do affect their
lives. Practical experience in applications which directly and
indirectly concern artists will be examined. Students will explore
Macintosh Operating Systems and PC Operating Systems and
related hardware, basic word processing and desktop publishing
software, and basic graphic software packages. Database software
packages and Zip drive software and hardware will be examined in
order for students to manage their beginning image collection.
Graphic file formats such as TIFF, PICT, EPS, and JPEG will be dealt
with and format conversion software. Lectures will address bit-
mapped and object-orientated graphics. CD ROM technology will
be explored as well as data compression and storage systems.
Students will be encouraged to use the computer as a tool for other
subjects and as a tool for personal use. Dabbler will be the main art
software package used.
Required Reading DiNucci, D. et al 1994. The Macintosh Bible.
5th edn. Peachpit Press. Berkeley. CA.
Recommended Reading Wired Magazine.
Subject Hours Fours hours per week for one semester comprising
one one-hour lecture and one three-hour workshop.
Assessment Folio, 50%; Class presentation, 25%; Electronic
journal, 25%.
HFC1002 INTRODUCTION TO DRAWING AND PAINTING
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject consists of the two most basic analogue
artspainting and drawingand examines the relationships between
the two disciplines. The subject will examine elements common to
both areas such as types of supports used to draw and paint upon,
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
107
the different types of media which can be employed, and mark
making. Students will use basic and common elements in the visual
arts and explore them in making visual art works. In addition to
exploring commonalities, this subject will also explore differences
unique to each discipline. Drawing will introduce students to
traditional approaches to line, mark making, shape, modelling and
perspective while painting will focus upon colour, types of paint and
methods of application. Lectures will draw upon historical and
contemporary examples of drawing and painting, the relationships
between art and gender and beginning issues in two dimensional
design. Gallery visits will be included in the program as well as
lectures by visual artists.
Required Reading Edwards, B. 1988. Drawing on the Artist
Within: a Guide to Innovation, Invention, Imagination and
Creativity. Collins. London.
Recommended Reading Stephenson, J. 1993. The Materials
and Techniques of Painting. Thames and Hudson. NY.
Subject Hours Fours hours per week for one semester comprising
one one-hour lecture and one three-hour workshop.
Assessment Folio and support work, 80%; visual arts journal,
20%.
HFC1003 COMPUTING FOR ARTISTS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HCF1001 Introduction to Computer Mediated Art
or equivalent.
Content This subject builds upon the variety of computing uses
available to students but in particular the art making process.
content will focus on distinctions between computer mediated art,
image processing, and computer art and will contextualise a variety
of software packages within a theoretical framework. Students will
continue to employ word processing, basic graphic, spreadsheet,
database and desktop publishing software packages, but will begin
to engage with a variety of electronic drawing and painting
packages in conjunction with hardware such as pressure sensitive
digitising tablets. Students will also begin working with digital
scanning devices and simple two-dimensional animation will be
introduced. This subject addresses the needs of persons who make
art using the computer as the primary agent, but does so within an
emerging theoretical framework. Painter will be the main software
package used.
Required Reading Grotto, S. and Grotto, D. 1994. Digital
Imaging for Visual Artists. Windcrest/McGraw Hill. U.S.A.
Recommended Reading Wired Magazine.
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising
one one-hour-lecture and three-hour workshop.
Assessment Folio, 50%; class presentation, 25%; electronic
journal, 25%.
HFC1004 LIFE DRAWING AND PAINTING
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HFC1002 Introduction to Drawing and Painting or
equivalent.
Content This subject will continue to combine the two disciplines of
drawing and painting and build upon issues examined in HFC1002
Introduction to Drawing and Painting. The traditional subject of the
nude-male and female-will be used to link both areas. Working from
models, students will refine visual skills, techniques and language.
Drawing will emphasise the ability to judge proportions, understand
the underlying skeletal and muscular structure and the placing of the
figure in space. Painting will further structure the nude art work by
organising the elements of colour, texture and scale. Lectures will
emphasise the relationship between the ability to judge proportions,
understand underlying structures, placing objects in space, colour,
texture and scale and computer mediated art. Lectures will also
address further issues in two dimensional design and begin to
discuss colour theory as it relates to the nude and by implication, to
computer mediated art. Finally, lectures will address the issue of
observation as a research methodology.
Required Reading McDaniel, R. 1993. The Drawing Book:
materials and techniques. Watson-Guptill. NY.
Recommended Reading Smith, R. 1994. An Introduction to Oil
Paint. RD Press. Sydney.
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising
one one-hour lecture and one three-hour workshop.
Assessment Folio and support work, 80%; visual arts journal,
20%.
HFC2002 STILL LIFE DRAWING AND PAINTING
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HFC1004 Life Drawing and Painting or
equivalent.
Content Drawing and painting will be linked in this subject through
the medium of the still life. Again, students will required to judge
proportions, understand underlying structures, place objects in
space, colour, texture and scale in relation to compositional
outcomes. Students will also be required to demonstrate the ability to
control the various drawing and painting media. The still life objects
will draw upon the objects of different cultures to generate and
develop ideas for making visual art works and to affirm the
multicultural nature of the western suburbs. Lectures will address the
colour theories of Albers and Itten, and issues of perspective such as
one, two and three point perspective drawing which will result in
work with convincing depth of field and focus. Lectures will reiterate
the relationship between these visual elements and computer
mediated art as well the notion of research in the visual arts.
Lectures will draw upon the use of colour, perspective and two
dimensional design through the study of various historical and
contemporary art works.
Required Reading Mayer, R. (Third Edition) 1985. The Artist’s
handbook of materials and techniques. Viking Press. UK.
Recommended Reading Montague, J. 1993. Basic Perspective
Drawing: a visual approach. Van Nostrand Reinhold. NY.
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising
one one-hour lecture and one three-hour workshop.
Assessment Folio and support work, 80%; visual arts journal,
20%.
HFC2004 EXPERIMENTAL ART
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HFC2002 Still Life Drawing and Painting or
equivalent.
Content This subject combines the three disciplines of drawing,
painting and sculpture in order to focus on non-traditional art
making. Students explore two dimensional and three dimensional
surface and mark making systems outside traditional wet and dry
media. Conceptual aspects of visual arts are explored in conjunction
with digitally and photographically generated images which draw
upon advanced techniques and interpretation. Students will
demonstrate processes of critical analysis to support judgements
about their work. Lectures will focus on fundamental principles of
three dimensional design and analysis of forms in space as well as
basic joining techniques. Students will move from the production of
finished work intended primarily for display against a flat surface to
the concept of installation. The issue of complex compositions which
select, combine and manipulate numerous images will be addressed
and their relationship to computer mediated art highlighted.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
108
Required Reading Kaupelis, R. 1993. Experimental Drawing.
Watson-Guptill. NY.
Recommended Reading Schodek, D.L. 1993. Structure in
Sculpture. MIT Press. Cambridge. MASS. Schaeffer, J.P. 1992.
Basic Techniques of Photography. Little Brown. Boston.
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising
one one-hour lecture and one three-hour workshop.
Assessment Folio and support work, 80%; visual arts journal,
20%.
HFC2005 INTRODUCTION TO VIDEO ART
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HFC1003 Computing for Artists; or equivalent.
Content This course is a studio experience introducing students to
basic video and animation concepts and techniques leading to the
production of experimental animation and video. Through the
creation of digital presentations, this studio experience emphasises
visual structure and artistic conceptualisation while examining
emerging artistic media and technology. Students will investigate the
interrelationships between traditional static art forms and the new
technologies of animation and video art.
Required Reading Bolante, A. (2000). Visual QuickPro Guide,
Adobe After Effects. Berkeley: Peachpit Press. Goulekas, K. (2000).
Visual Effects in a Digital World. New York: Morgan Kaufman.
Meyer, T. (2000). Creating Motion Graphic with After Effects: High
Impact Animation for Video. New York: Miller Freeman Books.
Recommended Reading Spalter, A.M. (1999). The Computer in
Visual Arts. Chicargo: Addison-Wesley.
Subject Hours One hour lecture and a three hour tutorial per
week. In addition to this, it is expected that students devote at least
three hours self directed hours per week.
Assessment Folio of Photoshop images (25%); animated title
sequence and credit sequence (25%); and an animation using After
Effects presented as a VHS video (50%).
HFC2006 VIDEO ART
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HFC2005 Introduction to Video Art; or equivalent.
Content Through advanced projects involving digital time based
media and a variety of visual technologies, students will produce
refined artistic statements involving elements of video, digital media,
animation and audio. Lectures will focus on advanced conceptual
and experimental approaches to video and digital media related to
current developments in contemporary art.
Required Reading Bolante, A. (1999). Visual Quickstart Guide:
Adobe Premiere 5.1. Peachpit Press. Pogue, D. (2001). IMovie2:
The Missing Manual. Pogue Press.
Recommended Reading Current web sites on video art which
will be made available by the lecturer.
Subject Hours One hour lecture and a three hour tutorial per
week. In addition to this, it is expected that students devote at least
three hours self directed hours per week.
Assessment Group video project (50%); folio of video artworks
(50%).
HFC3001 THE DIGITAL IMAGE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HFC2005 Introduction to Video Art or equivalent.
Content This subject will draw upon all the major art software
packages in order for students to develop, implement and complete
several projects and related support work for the semester. The
projects will also draw upon completed analogue projects students
have completed elsewhere with a view to producing a cohesive
portfolio of finished work. The finished work will include both static
and video displays. Students will be introduced to post production
techniques for their computer mediated art when opportunities are
provided for students to transfer their finished work to video to
produce a CD-ROM. Students will begin developing their own
WWW site for their art work. content will deal with editing styles,
computer mediated art aesthetics and cyber culture. Dreamweaver
will be used.
Required Reading Benton Foundation www.yahoo.com/
Society_and_Culture/Organisations/Foundations/Benton_Foundatio
n and Open Studio: The Arts Online www.openstudio.org/
Recommended Reading Slouka, M. 1995. War of the Worlds.
Abacus. London. Wajcman, J. 1991. Feminism Confronts
Technology. Cambridge. Polity. UK.
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising
one one-hour lecture and one three-hour workshop.
Assessment Folio, 50%; class presentation, 25%; electronic
journal, 25%.
HFC3005 INSTALLATION ART
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HFC2006 Video Art and HFC2004 Experimental
Art; or equivalent.
Content This subject locates the students own installation practice
within historical and contemporary forms of practice. In particular, it
extends the sorts of issues raised in Experimental Art and Video Art
in year two and seeks to integrate these forms of studio practice.
Installation Art will employ virtual immateriality in order to simulate
an exhibition of digital art presented in a public space. This will
result in an exhibition presented in ‘real time’ via video or computer,
or net based site specific work.
Required Reading Davies, H. (Ed.) (1997). Blurring the
Boundaries: Installation Art 1969-1996 Art Publishers. Reiss, J.
(2000). From Margin to Centre: The Spaces of Installation Art. MIT
Press. Suderburg, E. (Ed.). (2000). Space, Site, Intervention:
Situating Installation Art. Uni of Minnesota Press.
Recommended Reading De Oliveira, N. (1996). Installation
Art. Smithsonian Institute.
Subject Hours One hour lecture and a three hour tutorial per
week. In addition to this, it is expected that students devote at least
three hours self directed hours per week.
Assessment Folio of three minor installation works (50%); one
major ephemeral installation situated in the university grounds (50%)
HFC4001 HONOURS INDIVIDUAL CREATIVE
PROJECT A
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The content of the student’s creative output will be outlined
in the research proposal submitted by the student prior to admission
into the honours course. Individual projects will be further refined
through consultation between student and supervisor throughout the
semester. In general it is expected that a student’s work will be
developing toward a professional standard suitable for public
exhibition.
Required Reading Supervisors will supply appropriate reading at
the beginning of the semester.
Recommended Reading Dery, M. (1996). Escape Velocity:
Cyberculture at the end of the century. New York: Grove Press.
Wolmark, J. (Ed.). (1999). Cybersexualities: a reader on feminist
theory, cyborgs and cyberspace. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University
Press.
Subject Hours Formal contact with a supervisor will be one hour
per week. In addition it is expected that the student devote at least 8
self-directed hours per week to the project.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
109
Assessment A progress review at the end of the semester. A
review panel must be satisfied that the student is making satisfactory
progress in his or her practical creative work. Creative work will be
submitted as a folio comprising a CD ROM and/or analogue
product, depending on the student’s particular project. A written
progress report will be given to the student and a copy placed on
file.
HFC4002 HONOURS INDIVIDUAL CREATIVE PROJECT B
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HFC4001 Honours Individual Creative Project A.
Content This subject builds on work undertaken in HFC4001
Honours Individual Creative Project A. The student will complete the
project in consultation with his/her supervisor. In general it is
expected that the student complete a body of creative visual work of
a professional standard suitable for public exhibition.
Required Reading Supervisors will supply appropriate reading at
the beginning of the semester.
Recommended Reading Druckrey, T. (1996). Electronic Culture:
technology and visual representation. New York. Lovejoy, M.
(1997). Postmodern Currents: Art and artists in the age of electronic
media, 2nd edn. Prentice Hall. Tofts, D. (1999). Parallax: Essays on
art, culture and technology. Sydney: Interface.
Subject Hours Formal contact with a supervisor will be one hour
per week. In addition it is expected that the student devote at least 8
self-directed hours per week to the project.
Assessment The student will submit his/her completed project to
the honours exhibition held at the end of semester. Work will be
assessed by a panel composed of at least two academic members
of staff including the student’s supervisor. A written assessment
report will be supplied to the student.
HHA1171 ANATOMY 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The student will cover topics including the definition of
anatomical terms; arthrology, osteology, angiology and myology;
the somatic nervous system, anatomy of the back, abdomen and
thorax; autonomic nervous system and respiratory muscles; the neck;
the upper limb; the pelvis; the lower limb; clinical applications of
musculoskeletal anatomy..
Required & Recommended Reading Basmajian & Slonecker.
1989. Grant’s method of anatomy: A clinical, problem-solving
approach. 11th Ed.. Williams & Wilkins. Moore & Dalley, 1999.
Clinically oriented anatomy. 4th Ed. Williams & Wilkins.
Advanced texts Williams, Warwick, Dyson & Bannister. 1995.
Gray’s anatomy. 38th Ed. Williams & Wilkins. Review texts
Dykes & Ameerally. Crash course anatomy. Mosby. (Any edition
will suffice); Goldberg. 1984. Clinical anatomy made ridiculously
simple. MedMaster Inc. Whitaker & Borley. 2000. Instant anatomy.
2nd Ed. Blackwell Science. Atlases Abrahams, Marks & Hutchings.
2003 McMinn’s color atlas of human anatomy. 5th Ed. Mosby.
Aqur.1999 Grant’s atlas of anatomy. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Rohen, Yakochi & Lutjen-Drecoll. 2002 Color atlas of anatomy. 5th
Ed. Williams & Wilkins.
Subject Hours Semester One: Six hours per week, comprising – 2
x two hr lectures/week, 1 x one hr tutorial class/week, 1 x one hr
laboratory practical/week. Semester Two: Four hours per week,
comprising – 1 x two hr lectures/week, 1 x one hr tutorial
class/week, 1 x one hr laboratory practical/week.
Assessment Semester One: Written examination, three hours
duration. Laboratory examination, one hour duration.
HHA2173 ANATOMY 3
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHA1171 Anatomy 1; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to develop and consolidate knowledge
acquired in HHA1171 Anatomy 1. Students study the embryological
development of the major systems, visceral anatomy and histology.
At the completion of the subject student will understand the
embryonic development of all the major systems, gross anatomy of
the head, neck, thorax, abdomen and pelvis and histology.
Recommended Reading As for HHA1171 Anatomy 1.
Subject Hours One 1-hour tutorial and one 1-hour laboratory
session per week for two semesters.
Assessment Per semester – Laboratory exam 50%. Written exam
50%.
HHA3275 ANATOMY 5
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHA2173 Anatomy 3, HHP2172 Physiology 2,
or equivalent
Content This subject aims to expand on the knowledge gained in
HHA1171 and HHA2249 Anatomy 1 and 2, and develop an
appreciation of functional and radiographic, as well as static
anatomy. By the end of the subject the students will, in addition to
gaining an understanding of functional and relational anatomy,
have developed dissecting skills for cadavers. content will include
functional musculoskeletal anatomy. Clinically based learning
involving clinical workshops and dissection of cadavers.
Required Reading As for HHA1129 Anatomy 1 and HHA2173
Anatomy 3.
Subject Hours Four hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lab sessions and self-directed study.
Assessment Written examination, 50%; practical examination,
50%.
HHC2272 BIOMECHANICS 2 1
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHA1171 Anatomy 1; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to introduce the principles of
biomechanics and the terminology used. To introduce students to the
measuring equipment used for biomechanics. To study basic
biomechanical concepts as applied to particular structures and
tissues. By the end of the subject the students should have an
understanding of basic joint and tissue mechanics, and should be
able to use appropriate lab equipment for measuring purposes.
content will include introduction to equipment used in the
Biomechanics Laboratory and rules of use; use of video/joint
centres; kinematics – linear and angular; kinetics; centre of gravity,
levers, isokinetics, gait; joints (general type, structure and function);
mechanics of biological tissue – bone, muscle, ligament, cartilage;
EMG.(2001)
Required Reading Norkin CC & Levangie PK (2001) Joint
Structure & Function; A Comprehensive Analysis, FA Davis Co.,
Philadelphia.
Recommended Reading Kriegbaun E, and Barthess M, (1996)
Biomechanics: a qualitative approach for studying human
movement, Allyn and Bacon, Boston.
Subject Hours Two hours per week or equivalent for two
semesters comprising lectures and laboratory workshop/tutorial
sessions.
Assessment Mid-year exam 20%; tests, 20%; article synthesis &
student presentation, 20%; weekly log reports, 10%; semester two
final exam, 30%.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
110
HHC3172 BIOMECHANICS 3
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHC2272 Biomechanics 2 1; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to expand on the knowledge gained in
HHC2272 Biomechanics 2 1, and to analyse biomechanics of
everyday activities and the factors affecting these in both health and
injury. By the end of the subject the students should have an
understanding of the biomechanics of typical activities and how
these may be compromised in the development of injury. content will
include continued development of biomechanical principles; analysis
of posture/biomechanics in common everyday life activities;
biomechanical factors affecting movement and injury in daily
activities; joint range of motion; gait; throwing. Second semester
entails the completion of a major assignment using previously
published research as a model for replication of a study.
Required Reading Norkin CC & Levangie PK (2001) Joint
Structure & Function; A Comprehensive Analysis, FA Davis Co.,
Philadelphia.
Recommended Reading Individual readings for each topic will
be advised at beginning of ( semester one.)
Subject Hours Two hours per week or equivalent for two
semesters comprising lectures & laboratory workshops/tutorial
sessionsAssessment Semester one exam, 30%; weekly work &
participation (Semester One), 20%; student presentation, 20%;
Major assignment – 3000-4000 words, 30%.
HHD1271 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 1
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject will enable students to develop skills in Basic
History taking, and the examination and assessment of the
following: mental status, skin, head and neck, eye and ear,
pulmonary system, heart, peripheral vascular system, cranial nerves,
abdomen, peripheral nervous system, musculoskeletal system.
Training in the use of equipment employed in clinical examinations,
including the: stethoscope, otoscope, ophthalmoscope, reflex
hammer, tuning fork, and sphygmomanometer.
Required Reading Bickley L, 1999 Bates' Guide to Physical
Examination and History Taking 7th Ed. Lippincott Publishers;
Dorland W. A. N. 2000, Dorland's Illustrated Medical Dictionary
29th Ed. W B Saunders Co
Recommended Reading Hoppenfeld S 1976 Physical
Examination of the Spine and Extremities Appleton-Century-Crofts,
New York. Seidel H 2003 Mosby’s Guide to Physical Examination
5th Ed. Mosby-Year Book. Swash M. 2002 Hutchison's Clinical
Methods. 21st Ed. W B Saunders Co
Subject Hours Semester Two: Lecture: one hour per week;
Practical: one hour per week
Assessment Practical/viva voce: 100%.
HHD1272 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HHA1171 Anatomy 1; HHO1171 Osteopathic
Science 1; HHP1171 Physiology 1; or equivalent.
Content The Introduction to clinical osteopathic practice, so as to
make students aware of the expectations of them in clinic. Ethical
and professional behaviour in the VU Osteopathic Medicine Clinic.
Legal aspects of record keeping and account keeping in the clinical
situation. Introduction to, and tutorials in the running of the reception
at the VU Osteopathic Medicine Clinic. Introduction to the Rx Osteo
practice management software package. Level two first aid
certificate course, which will be held prior to the commencement of
year 2.
Required Reading Students should have an understanding of the
major points of the Federal Privacy Act (www.privacy.gov.au,) and
of the Victorian Health Records Act 2001 (www.health.vic.gov.au.)
Subject Hours Two hours per week of lectures and reception
tutorials for one semester in semester 2. Level 2 first aid certificate –
24 hours. Total 48 hours.
Assessment Level 2 first aid certificate test, completion of required
hours attendance and reception skills assessments as recorded in
clinical diary.
HHD3000 HEALTH SCIENCE 1
Campus St Albans, City King
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HHD3110 Dermal Techniques 1; or equivalent.
Content The subject will introduce students to theoretical aspects of
anatomy, physiology, pathophysiology, microbiology, immunology,
chemistry, cosmetic dermatology, cellular damage, immunity, allergy
inflammation, wound repair, neoplasia and tissue responses to stress
relevant to the practice of Dermal Therapy. The subject will provide
important underpinning knowledge that students will require in their
practical applications throughout the degree program. Knowledge
to be developed will include: wound rehabilitation, skin and deeper
tissue physiology, inflammatory response and associated damage,
identification and biochemistry of micro-organisms, allergic response
inflammation, composition of cosmetics and the range of aesthetic-
based skin diseases that can be dealt with by the Dermal Therapist.
Required Reading Rotstein, H., Delauney, W. E., & Land, W. A.
(1993). Principles and practice of dermatology (3rd ed.). Sydney:
Butterworth. Tortora, G., & Grabowski, S. (1996). Principles of
anatomy and physiology. New York: Harper Collins.
Recommended Reading Caswell, A. (1998). MIMS annual.
(27th ed.). St. Leonards, NSW: Multimedia. Fitzpatrick, T. B.,
Johnson, R. A., Wolff, K., Polano, M. K., & Suurmond, D. (1997).
Colour atlas and synopsis of clinical dermatology. (3rd ed.). USA:
McGraw-Hill. Gawkrodger, D. J. (1997). Dermatology an illustrated
coloured text. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Rohen, J. W.,
Yokochi, C., & Lutjen- Drecoll, E. (1993). Colour atlas of anatomy.
(4th ed.). Baltimore: Williams and Wilkins.
Subject Hours Six hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials and laboratory sessions.
Assessment Reading exercises (20%); research assignment (1500
words) (20%); final examination (60%). To obtain at least a Pass in
the subject, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (research assignment)
may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be
obtained on any re-attempt and resubmission will be 50%. Where
the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be
offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary
examination will be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.
HHD3002 HEALTH SCIENCE 2
Campus St Albans, City King
Prerequisite(s) HHD3000 Health Science 1; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HHD3220 Dermal Techniques 2; or equivalent.
Content This subject will build on the knowledge base covered in
Health Science 1 by further researching advanced skin structure and
cosmetic dermatology, specifically in the area of dermatological
conditions that develop as a result of cosmetic substances put on the
skin. This subject will also cover the management of non-infectious
dermatological conditions such as dermatitis, eczema, psoriasis,
benign and pre-malignant skin lesions and skin cancers. A large
range of vascular skin disorders and nail diseases will also be
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
111
considered. This will lead into related pharmacology and toxicology
areas and will include studies of the effects of various drugs and
chemicals, both topical and oral, on the skin. Students will also be
expected to investigate the effects on the skin of various cosmetic
ingredients especially those in chemical peels and herbal
preparations. In addition to this, students will be expected to
become familiar with the Therapeutic Goods Act and other
legislation relevant to their practical work.
Required Reading Rotstein, H., Delauney, W. E., & Land, W. A.
(1993). Principles and practice of dermatology (3rd ed.). Sydney:
Butterworth. Tortora, G., and Grabowski, S. (1996). Principles of
anatomy and physiology. New York: Harper Collins. Therapeutic
Goods Act, (1989~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government
Web site, www.tga.gov.au/docs/html
Recommended Reading Caswell, A. (1998). MIMS annual.
(27th ed.). St. Leonards NSW: Multimedia. Fitzpatrick, T. B.,
Johnson, R. A., Wolff, K., Polano, M. K., & Suurmond, D. (1997).
Colour atlas and synopsis of clinical dermatology. (3rd ed.). USA:
McGraw-Hill. Galbraith, A., Bullock, S., & Manias, E. (2004).
Fundamentals of pharmacology: A text for nurses and allied health
professionals (4th ed.). Australia: Pearson Education. Gawkrodger,
D. J. (1997). Dermatology an illustrated coloured text. Edinburgh:
Churchill Livingstone. Rohen, J. W., Yokochi, C., & Lutjen- Drecoll,
E. (1993). Colour atlas of anatomy. (3rd ed.). Baltimore: Williams
and Wilkins.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials and laboratory sessions.
Assessment Essay (2000 words) (25%); reading exercises (20%);
class presentation (25%); final examination (30%). To obtain at least
a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (essay) may be re-
attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to
be obtained on any re-attempt and resubmission will be 50%.
Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination
will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary
examination will be 50%.
HHD3100 CLINICAL PRACTICE 1
Campus St Albans, City King
Prerequisite(s) HHD3000 Health Science 1; HHD3110 Dermal
Techniques 1; or equivalents.
Content In this subject students will be introduced to theoretical
aspects of specific medical and therapeutic procedures. Medical
and aesthetic reasons for a range of approaches will be outlined.
Students will observe a representative range of face and body
procedures related to the lectures. In addition, students will develop
theatre and sterile techniques including dressings, personal
preparation for theatre and setting up for minor cosmetic or
aesthetic procedures. Topics include, medical terminology, wound
management, infection, infection control, asepsis, sterilization,
complications of wound healing, wound redressing, compression
bandages and equipment, eye toilets, complications from
bandaging and eye toilets, a review of first aid procedures, gloving
and gowning, latex allergy, proper documentation and a review of
common procedures in cosmetic surgery.
Required Reading Meers, P., McPherson, M., & Sedgewick, J.
(1997). Infection control in health care. Cheltenham, UK: Starley
Thornes. Rohen, J W., Yokochi, C., & Lutjen- Drecoll, E. (1993).
Colour atlas of anatomy. (4th ed.). Baltimore, USA: Williams and
Wilkins.
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials and laboratory sessions.
Assessment Class exercises (20%); case study assignment (2000
words) (30%); final examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in
the subject, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (case study
assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt and
resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a
supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible
mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is
a hurdle requirement.
HHD3102 RESEARCH PERSPECTIVES AND PRACTICES
Campus City King, St. Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HHD3002 Health Science 2; HHD3220 Dermal
Techniques 2; or equivalents.
Content This subject provides an introductory research focus for
health care professionals with an emphasis on quantitative and
qualitative paradigms. A primary aim of this introductory research
subject will be to facilitate the students’ ability to critically analyse
and evaluate selected research literature relating to health sciences
with particular reference to the safe practice of applied dermal
therapies. An introduction to the experimental method, basic
quantitative and qualitative analytical techniques, case study
reports, report writing and ethics in research will also be covered.
Required Reading Polgar, S., & Thomas, S. (2000). Introduction
to research in the health sciences. Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Abbott, P., & Sapsford, R. (1998).
Research methods for nurses and the caring professionals (2nd ed.).
Buckingham, UK: Open University Press. Burns, N., & Grove, S.
(1993). The practice of nursing research: Conduct, critique and
utilisation. Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders. Hood, S., Mayall, B., &
Oliver, S. (Eds.). (1998). Critical issues in social research.
Buckingham, United Kingdom: Open University Press. Jenkinson, C.
(1997). Assessment and evaluation of health and medical care.
Buckingham, United Kingdom: Open University Press.
Subject Hours Two hours of lectures per week for one semester.
Assessment Assignment (1500 words) (50%); written examination
(50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all
components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted
once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-
attempt and resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination
is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The
maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be
50%.
HHD3103 NUTRITION FOR HEALTH AND WELL-BEING
Campus City King, St. Albans
Prerequisite(s) Students must have satisfactorily completed the
first two semesters of coursework for the degree Bachelor of Health
Science – Applied Dermal Therapies; or equivalent.
Content The aim of this subject is to build upon student’s
knowledge of nutrition as presented in the Diploma program and
consolidated through ‘work experience’. In this subject students will
further their understanding of the role of various vitamins/minerals,
food groups and nutritional supplements in healing and well-being.
Students will also study the beneficial and deleterious effects of
various diets on skin health and the relationship of nutrition and
eating patterns to conditions such as anorexia, bulimia and obesity.
Attention will be given to factors which promote nutritional well-
being, conditions in which it is appropriate to provide nutritional
advice to clients and the identification of situations in which it is
necessary to refer clients to specialist health practitioners. Topics
include carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, energy balance, water
soluble vitamins, fat soluble vitamins, minerals, dieting, how to
recognize the relationship between dieting disorders and skin
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
112
conditions, referrals, nutritional status of skin, discussions on popular
diets- advantages & disadvantages, client management of specific
dieting needs in respect of vitamins and minerals, the effects of
excessive amounts of vitamins and minerals.
Required Reading Koch, M. (1991). Laugh with health. Ulmarra,
NSW: Renaissance & New Age Creations.
Recommended Reading Dunn, L. (1990). Nutrition almanac.
New York: McGraw-Hill. Edlin, G., Golanty, E., & McCormack
Brown, K. (2002). Health and wellness. (7th ed.). USA: Jones &
Bartlett Pub. Hall, D. (1976). The natural health book. Australia:
Penguin Books. Pritchford, P. (1993). Healing with whole foods.
Berkley, CA: North Atlantic Books. Thomas, B. (1996). Nutrition in
primary care. Blackwell Science Inc. Thomson, C., & Ritehbaugh, C.
(Eds.). (1996). Preventative and therapeutic nutrition handbook.
Chapman & Hall.
Subject Hours Two hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures and tutorials.
Assessment One written assignment (1500 words) (40%); one 2-
hour examination (60%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted
and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained
on any re-attempt and resubmission will be 50%. Where the final
examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered.
The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will
be 50%.
HHD3104 GRADUATING SEMINAR
Campus City King, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Students must have satisfactorily completed the
first two semesters of coursework for the degree Bachelor of Health
Science – Clinical Dermal Therapies; or equivalent.
Content Graduating Seminar is an integrating subject for the
course and has been designed to provide students with a framework
to link the main elements of the course. The subject enables students
to enhance their critical thinking and integration of knowledge.
Particular emphases will be given to 1) ethical and legal issues and
dilemmas confronting dermal therapies and 2) networking with
medical practitioners and other health professionals including
referrals and approaches to establishing effective and safe working
relationships. 3) Presenting research findings and clinical results.
Required Reading Covey, S. (1990). The 7 habits of highly
effective people. New York: Simon and Schuster.
Recommended Reading Ashmore, R. (Ed.). (1997). Self and
identity. New York: Oxford University Press. Covey, S., Merrill, A.,
& Merrill, R. (1997). First things first. Sydney: Simon and Schuster.
Germou, U. (Ed.). (1997). Second opinion: An introduction to health
sociology. Sydney: Oxford University Press. Johnstone, M. (1994).
Bio-ethics: A nursing perspective. Sydney: W. B. Saunders. Petersen,
A., & Waddell, C. (Eds.). (1998). Health matters: A sociology of
illness, prevention and care. Buckingham, UK: Open University
Press. Weston, R., Martin, T., & Anderson, Y. (Eds.). (1998). Loss
and bereavement: Managing change. London: Blackwell Science.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours of lectures and one hour seminar.
Assessment Public presentation (50%); research article (2500
words) (40%); ethics examination 10%. To obtain at least a Pass in
the subject, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (research article and
examination) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt and
resubmission will be 50%.
HHD3110 DERMAL TECHNIQUES 1
Campus St Albans, City King
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HHD3000 Health Science 1 or equivalent.
Content The subject will enhance the student’s knowledge and
practice of advanced manual and machine dermal therapies. This
will consist of micro-dermabrasion and clinical lymphatic drainage.
The basis of these therapies will be investigated and recommended
regimes established. Skills will be developed in the application of
advanced massages and electrical equipment techniques
appropriate to the needs of the client/patient. In addition, this
subject will introduce the concepts of treatment sequencing,
planning and reappraisals with special emphasis on peri-operative
services.
Required Reading Kurz, I. (1982). Introduction to Dr Vodder’s
manual lymph drainage – manual of Dr Vodder’s manual lymph
drainage. (Vol. 1). Basic course (2nd Rev. ed.). Heidelberg: Haug
Publishers. Pierantoni, H. (1986). Treatments of the face – practical
manual of esthetics (Vol. 2). USSR: H. Pierantoni & Les Nouvelles
Esthetics. Prentice, W. F. (1998). Therapeutic modalities for allied
health professionals. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Recommended Reading Therapeutic Goods Act, (1989~ &
Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site,
www.tga.gov.au/docs/html Physiotherapists Registration Act,
(1978~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site,
www.health.vic.gov.au/legislation/
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials and laboratory sessions.
Assessment Micro-dermabrasion exam (50%); practical lymphatic
exam (50%). Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary
examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the
supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is a hurdle
requirement.
HHD3200 CLINICAL PRACTICE 2
Campus City King, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHD3100 Clinical Practice 1; or equivalent.
Content In this subject students will begin to focus on a specific
range of medical and therapeutic procedures with a view to
specialisation of peri-operative support using clinical dermal therapy
techniques. Students will be expected to work in a case
management context under the supervision of a selected practitioner
through a mentoring arrangement. Topics include: further
procedures in cosmetic surgery; complications of cosmetic
procedures; using ultrasound and micro currents; diathermy,
pressotherapy for post liposuction; radio therapy with cosmetic
surgeons; galvano therapy and other therapies that can enhance
surgical outcomes.
Required Reading Meers, P., McPherson, M., & Sedgewick, J.
(1997). Infection control in health care. Cheltenham, UK: Starley
Thornes. Rohen, J. W., Yokochi, C., & Lutjen- Drecoll, E. (1993).
Colour atlas of anatomy (4th ed.). Baltimore, USA: Williams and
Wilkins.
Subject Hours A minimum of (48) hours in an approved clinical
setting normally spread across one entire semester (hurdle
requirement).
Assessment Successful completion of required 48 clinical hours
(pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); presentation of case studies (60%);
final examination (40%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary
examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the
supplementary examination will be 50%.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
113
HHD3220 DERMAL TECHNIQUES 2
Campus St Albans, City King
Prerequisite(s) HHD3110 Dermal Techniques 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject will build on the knowledge and techniques
covered in Dermal Techniques 1. Students will undertake study in the
basics of low and high level laser together with practical
applications. This will include an introduction to laser and light
physics, laser & light tissue interaction, laser safety, introduction to
intense pulsed light, resurfacing lasers, light based treatment of hair,
practical aspects of light based hair removal, light based treatment
of vascular & pigmented lesions and tattoos, photo rejuvenation,
practical aspects of photo rejuvenation and light based treatment of
acne. A number of case studies based on treatment planning, skin
analysis, acne management, scar management and ageing skin
management will also be presented. They will apply a range of
techniques and treatment regimes to affect successful outcomes for
the client. Students will also be expected to consider the
psychological and physiological needs of the client.
Required Reading Kurz, I. (1982). Introduction to Dr Vodder’s
manual lymph drainage – manual of Dr Vodder’s manual lymph
drainage (Vol. 1). Basic course (2nd Rev. ed.). Heidelberg: Haug
Publishers. Pierantoni, H. (1986). Treatments of the face – practical
manual of esthetics. (Vol. 2). USSR: H. Pierantoni & Les Nouvelles
Esthetics. Prentice, W. F. (1998). Therapeutic modalities for allied
health professionals. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Recommended Reading Therapeutic Goods Act, (1989~ &
Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site,
www.tga.gov.au/docs/html Physiotherapists Registration Act,
(1978~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site,
www.health.vic.gov.au/legislation/
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials and laboratory sessions.
Assessment Practical assessment (50%); assignment (2000 words)
(30%); final examination (20%). To obtain at least a Pass in the
subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted
and passed. Failed assessment item (essay) may be re-attempted
and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained
on any re-attempt and resubmission will be 50%. Where the final
examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered.
The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will
be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.
HHD3174 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS & MANAGEMENT 4 CLINICAL
DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 3
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHD1271 Clinical Diagnosis 1; HHD2200
Clinical Diagnosis and Management 2 or equivalent.
Content The content will be divided between lectures and practical
classes and will focus on the in musculoskeletal system in Semester
One. The lectures will introduce the student to a diagnostic algorithm
for the examination of the musculoskeletal system. It will then focus
on the common radiological, laboratory and special diagnostic
procedures used to explore the musculoskeletal system. The student
will also be introduced to the specific characteristics of a number of
common tumours affecting the skeletal system. M Tutorials: Following
an introduction to pain and how it manifests in the musculoskeletal
system, the student will be taught how to conduct a detailed
examination the shoulder, elbow, wrist and hand, hip and buttock,
knee, ankle and foot joints.
Required Reading Semester One: Bickley L, 1999 Bates' Guide
to Physical Examination and History Taking 7th Ed. Lippincott
Publishers. Dorland W. A. N. 2000, Dorland's Illustrated Medical
Dictionary 29th Ed. W B Saunders Co
Recommended Reading Semester One: Apley A G. Warwick
D. Nayagam S., Solomon L. 2001 Apley's System Of Orthopaedics
And Fractures 8th Ed. Edward Arnold Bouchier I.A.D., Ellis H.,
Fleming P.R. (ed), 1996 French's Index of Differential Diagnosis
13th Ed. Oxford University Press; Hertling D, Kessler R.M, 1996
Management of Common Musculoskeletal Disorders 3rd Ed.
Lippincott Publishers Rubenstein D., Wayne D, Bradley J. 1997
Lecture Notes on Clinical Medicine 5th Ed. Blackwell Science Inc
Subject Hours Semester One: 2 hours per week: one hour lecture,
one hour practical.
Assessment Written Examination, 60%; practical/viva voce,
40%.
HHD3330 DERMAL TECHNIQUES 3
Campus St Albans or City King.
Prerequisite(s) HHD3220 Dermal Techniques 2; or equivalent.
Content This subject builds on techniques covered in Dermal
Techniques 1 and 2 by further developing treatment planning and
sequencing as part of case management. This will occur through the
on-going evaluation of treatments in progress and final evaluation of
completed treatments. Practical application of advanced dermal
treatment techniques will be undertaken. Specific techniques used to
support the clinical procedures will be used this includes micro-
pigmentation and further practice in laser therapy, micro-
dermabrasion, , specialised lymphatic drainage massage and
chemical peels. Further study into the pharmacology of topical
medication and use of drugs/chemicals, cosmetic chemistry, factor
of penetration, active ingredients, and the action of skin peels.
Students will be expected to work with a specialised practitioner as
a mentor to support this arrangement.
Recommended Reading Australian Attorney-General’s
Department. 1989. Therapeutic Goods Act. Canberra, ACT: AGPS.
Victorian Attorney-General’s Department. 1978. Physiotherapist’s
Act. Government Printer.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials and laboratory.
Assessment Presentation of case study, 60%; final exam, 40%.
Students must satisfactorily complete each component of the
assessment in order to gain a pass in the subject.
HHE0001 INTRODUCTION TO NURSING MANAGEMENT
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This elective subject is designed to enable students to
examine critically organisation theory and the principles of
management, and their application to nursing administration and
clinical practice. Theoretical concepts include: bureaucracy,
leadership, styles of management, decision-making, supervision,
conflict management, and social change. The subject will also
provide opportunities for students to develop knowledge and skills in
the application of a range of management techniques. These include
time management, problem-solving/evaluation, strategic planning,
human and material resource management, quality of nursing care.
Recommended Reading To be advised.
Contact Hours 39 hours
Assessment To be advised.
HHE1673 HEALTH ASSESSMENT
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This unit is designed to utilise scientific foundations to
describe normal physical, psychosocial, cultural tendencies and
health concerns of individuals throughout the life cycle. From this
basis of health of the individual the student will begin to develop the
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
114
ability to discriminate abnormal assessment findings. In the
discrimination of abnormal physical assessment findings a decision
making process is employed and during this process the clinical
significance of the abnormality is determined.
Recommended Reading To be advised.
Contact Hours 39 hours
Assessment Practical Examination 50%; Case Study 50%.
HHE1684 EMERGENCY NURSING CARE IN THE COMMUNITY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The student will utilise knowledge of human anatomy,
physiology and pathophusiology to critically evaluate a situation
and safety and effectively administer emergency nursing care to an
individual(s) in the community. the student’s physical assessment
skills will be further developed to include discrimination of clinical
signs and symptoms arising from trauma and medical emergencies.
Required Reading Australian Resuscitation Council. (2002). ARC
Policy Statements. Melbourne: Royal Australasian College of
Surgeons; Huckstep, R. L. (1995). A Simple Guide to Trauma (5th
ed.). Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone. Kitt, S., Selfridge-Thomas, J.,
Proehl, J. A. and Kaiser, J. (1995). Emergency Nursing: a
physiologic and clinical perspective (2nd ed.). Philadelphia: W. B.
Saunders Company; Newberry, L. (1998). Sheey’s Emergency
Nursing: principles and practice. (4th ed.). St Louis: Mosby. Pearn,
J. (Ed). (1996) The Science of First Aid: the theoretical and
experimental basis of modern first aid practice. ACT: St John
Ambulance Australia.
Recommended Reading Madjar, N. (1995). First Aid:
Responding to Emergencies. Sydney: Mosby Lifeline. McCance, K.
and Huether, S. E. (2002). Pathophysiology the Biologic Basis for
Disease in Adults and Children (4th ed.). St Louis: Mosby. Smeltzer,
S. and Bare, B. (2000). Brunner and Suddarth’s Textbook of
Medical-Surgical Nursing (9th ed.). Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott.
Stanhope, M. and Knollmueller, R. N. (1996). Handbook of
Community and Home Health Nursing: tool for Assessment,
intervention and education (2nd ed.). St Louis: Mosby. Tortora, G. J.
(2002). Principles of Human Anatomy (9th ed.). New York: Wiley.
Subject Hours Thirty-nine hours, comprising twentyseven hours of
workshop and twelve hours of fieldwork during one semester.
Assessment Written examination 100% Practical Examination –
satisfactory/unsatisfactory; fieldwork – satisfactory/unsatisfactory.
Students must achieve a pass grade in each of the above
components to pass the subject.
HHF1124 ISSUES AND TRENDS IN HEALTH
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Origin and development of the Australian health care
system. The development of 19th century tradition of charity in the
present ‘mixed economy’ health care system, the concept of policy,
the stage involved in policy development, stakeholders in policy
development and implementation, the structure of Australia health
care services, political parties and their health care policies.
Required Reading Cheek, J., Shoebridge,J., Willis,E., &
Zadoroznyj, M.(1996). Society and Health: Social Theory For
Health Workers. Melbourne: Longman. Ellis, J.R., & Hartley,
C.L.(1992). Nursing In Today's World: Challenges, Issues, And
Trends (4th ed). Philadelphia: Lippincott Co. Grbich, C (Ed). (1997).
Health In Australia: Sociological Concepts And Issues. Sydney:
Prentice Hall. Gardner, H. (ED). (1991). The Politics Of Health.
London: Churchill Livingstone. Hamer, S., and Collinson, G. (1999).
Achieving Evidence-Based Practice: A Handbook For Practitioners.
Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall (Royal College of Nursing). Helman,
C.G. (1994). Culture, Health and Illness: An Introduction for Health
Professionals. Oxford: Butterworth-Heinemann. Leddy, S. (1998).
Leddy, S., and Pepper, J,M. Conceptual Bases Of Professional
Nursing(4th ed). Philadelphia: Lippincott. McMurray, A. (1999).
Community Health And Wellness: A Sociological Approach. Sydney:
Mosby. McMurray, A. 1990. Community Health Nursing: Primary
Health Care In Practice. Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone. Waddell, C.,
& Petersen, A.R. (ED).1994. Just Health: Inequality In Illness. Care And
Prevention. Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone. Wass, A. 1994.
Promoting Health: The Primary Health Care Approach. Philadelphia:
W.B. Saunders. Palmer, G., and Short, S. (1994). Health Care and
Public Policy. South Melbourne: Macmillan Education Australia Pty
Ltd. Porter, S. (1998). Social Theory And Nursing Practice. London:
Macmillan Press Ltd. Kemm, J and Close A. (1995). Health Promotion:
Theory and Practice. London: Macmillan Press Ltd.
Subject Hours 39 hours comprising lectures, tutorials, and class
participations.
Assessment Seminar presentation and written assignment, 30%;
assignment 70%.
HHF1125 KNOWLEDGE AND NURSING KNOWLEDGE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject encourages students to examine critically
some of the theories and ideologies that influence the development
of the various kinds of knowledge, including nursing knowledge.
This will include an examination of a number of significant theories
about human nature – Christianity, Existentialism, Freud, Lorenz,
Plato, Skinner and some oppositional theories and challenges from
Feminist, non-Western and other ‘marginalised’ areas. Further, a
number of concepts found in the history and philosophy of science
will be considered – Newtonian thought, Kuhn and paradigms, and
the bio-medical model as the conceptual foundation of modern
medicine. Feminist ways of knowing and analysis of the Relationship
between knowledge and social and cultural factors, including
theories of discourse and power will be offered. The subject
encourages students to generate and apply nursing knowledge
through a process of theory analysis and development. In particular,
a number of theories and models, for example, those of King, Orem,
Levine, Leininger, and Rogers will be analysed and the potential for
nursing innovation explored.
Required Reading Greenwood, J. (Ed) (1996). Nursing Theory In
Australia: Development & Application. Pymble: Harper Educational
Publishers. Lindberg, J. B., Hunter, M. L., Kruszewski, A. Z. (1998).
Introduction To Nursing: Concepts, Issues, And Opportunities (3rd
Ed). Philadelphia: Lippincott. Leddy, S., Pepper, J., Mae, (1998).
Conceptual Bases Of Professional Nursing (4th Ed). Philadelphia:
Lippincott. Robinson, K., Vaughan, B. (1996). Knowledge for
Nursing Practice. Oxford: Butterworth-Heinemann. Watson, J.
(1999). Postmodern Nursing and Beyond. Edinburgh: Churchill.
Subject Hours 39 hours, comprising lectures, tutorials, and
informal discussion/study workshops.
Assessment Tutorial presentation 50%; essay 50%. Students must
pass all components of the assessment in order to ain a pass in this
subject.
HHF1243 NURSING STUDIES (2) CLINICAL PROJECT
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This is a culminating unit which aims to provide students
with an opportunity to develop and apply their learning acquired in
the previous units in the course. The main focus will be on the
application of knowledge and skills in the provision of health care to
clients/patients in a diversity of locations/settings. Students will
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
115
present a proposal for a project, which forms the basis of their
theoretical, field and assessment undertakings. Following
acceptance the project will be drawn up (cf. Appendix 1).
Recommended Reading To be advised.
Contact Hours 78 hours
Assessment Preparation of learning contract of a research project
20%. Written research project 80%.
HHG5125 THEORETICAL FOUNDATIONS OF HEALING
Campus City Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HHG5115 Philosophical Concepts of Healing or
equivalent
Content This subject provides a theoretical foundation for the study
of a range of approaches to health and healing examined during
the course. Students will critically appraise the increasing body of
literature and research related to the environmental, social,
psychological and spiritual dimensions of health and illness. The
subject provides a framework that unifies the diverse approaches to
healing. The principles informing the understanding of innate
healing tendencies and the interconnection of mind and body are
studied.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Ader, R. (ed.) 1981, Psychoneuro-
immunology, Plenum, New York. Aldridge, D. 1991, Spirituality,
healing and medicine British Journal of General Practice 41(351):
425–7. Baum, M. 1989, Rationalism versus irrationalism in the care
of the sick: science versus the absurd Medical Journal of Australia
15 December 4(18): 607–8. Capra, F. 1988, Uncommon Wisdom,
Collins, London. Foss, L. 1989, The challenge of biomedicine: a
foundations perspective Journal of Medical Philosophy 14(2): 165–
91. Gawler, I. 1989, Peace of Mind, Hill of content , Melbourne.
Hassed, C. and Sommer, S. 1994, The practical aspects of stress
management and meditation Australian and New Zealand
Association for Medical Education Conference Newcastle July 6–9.
Heath, J. 1986, Alternative medicine resources Library Association
of Australia Conference and Proceedings pp. 783–98. Husband, A.
1992, of Healing, Penguin, Ringwood. Kaptschuk, T. and Crouder
Psychoimmunology: frontier or fantasy? Today’s Life Science 4(1):
12-17. Joske, R. and Segal, W. 1987, Ways, M. 1986, The
Healing Arts, British Broadcasting Commission, London. Kleinman,
A. 1979, Patients as Healers in the Context of Culture, University of
California Press, Los Angeles. Krieger, D. 1990, Therapeutic touch:
two decades of research, teaching and practice Imprint 37(3): 83,
86–8. Lewith, G. 1985, Alternative Therapies: A Guide to
Complementary Medicine for Health Professionals, Heinemann,
London. McClellan, R., The Healing Forces of Music: History, Theory
and Practice, Amity House, New York. McGinnis, L.S. 1991,
Alternative therapies: an overview Cancer 67(6): 1788–92. Owens,
K. and Ehrenreich, D. 1991, Literature review of non-pharmacologic
methods for the treatment of chronic pain Holistic Nurse Practitioner
6(10): 24–31. Patel, M. 1987, Problems in the evaluation of
alternative medicine Social Science and Medicine 25(6): 669–78.
Salmon, J. and Warren, J. 1984, Alternative Medicine: Popular and
Policy Perspectives, Tavistock, London. Sommer, S. 1993, Stress
illness and the mind body connection: a discussion paper
(unpublished), Department of Community Medicine, Monash
University Melbourne. Sudsuang, R., Chentanez, V. and Velluvan,
K. 1991, Effect of Buddhist meditation on serum cortisol, total
protein levels, blood pressure, pulse rate, lung volume and reaction
time Physiological Behaviour 50: 293–325. Sutherland, J.E. 1991,
The link between stress and illness: do our coping methods influence
our health? Postgraduate Medicine 89(1): 159–64.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures and tutorials.
Assessment Two 2500 word assignments; 50% each.
HHH2301 UNIVERSITY SKILLS FOR NATURAL MEDICINE STUDENTS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Library orientation and tour; the study of and in an holistic
paradigm; introduction to computer skills for Natural Medicine
studies; introduction to Internet skills for Natural Medicine studies;
Natural Medicine study skills; research skills; introduction to active
learning, self-managed learning, problem solving and problem
based learning; and the development of mentor relationships for
learning in practice based subjects.
Required Reading Anderson, J., & Poole, M. (1995). Thesis and
assignment writing (2nd ed.). Brisbane: John Wiley & Sons. Strunk,
W. (1979). Elements of style. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
Recommended Reading Williams, J. M. (1997). Style – Ten
lessons in clarity and grace (5th ed.). New York: Addison-Wesley
Educational Publishers Inc.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester
comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Student portfolio (hurdle requirement); two written
assignments (50% each). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass
must be gained in each of the two written assignments. Failed
assessment items (assignments) may be re-attempted and resubmitted
once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any
resubmission will be 50%.
HHH2302 IRIDOLOGY 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The study of ‘Iris diagnosis’. Iridology will be explored
covering the observation of the structural, functional and chemical
changes in the body, rather than the diagnosis of specific diseases.
Iridology will be covered from the perspective of the science and art
of reading the ‘big picture’, in terms of constitutional strengths, the
vitality of key body systems, and the degree of encumbrance. The
classes will include practical work where students will examine the
iris with their own suitable hand held equipment, so that the
theoretical understanding is consistently accompanied by practical
experience.
Required Reading Jackson, A. (1994). Alternative health
iridology. A guide to iris analysis and preventative health care.
London: MacDonald Optima. Mamer, D. (1996). Practical iridology
and sclerology. Utah, USA: Woodland Publishing. Jensen, B.
(1982). Iridology simplified: An introduction to the science of
iridology and its relation to nutrition. Escondido, CA: Bernard
Jensen Enterprises.
Recommended Reading Deck, J. (1982). Principles of iris
diagnosis; Textbook with atlas and indications to treatment.
Germany: Ettlingen Publishers. Hall, D. (1980). Iridology;
Personality and health analysis through the iris. Melbourne: Keats
Health Books. Hall. D. (1984). Iridology. Melbourne: Thomas
Nelson. Jensen, B. (1952). The science and practice of Iridology. A
system of analysing and curing the body through the use of drugless
and nature cure methods. Los Angeles, CA: Bernard Jensen
Enterprises. Sharan, F. (1989). Iridology. A complete guide to
diagnosing through the iris and to related forms of treatment.
Wellingborough, UK: Thorsons. Vriend, J. (1989). Eyes talk.
Melbourne: Lothian.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning
activities.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
116
Assessment Practical (30%), clinical participation (10%) (hurdle
requirement); one examination (60%). To obtain a Pass in the
subject, a pass must be gained for each component of assessment.
Failed assessment item (practical) may be re-attempted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will
be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary
examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the
supplementary examination will be 50%.
HHH2303 BODYWORK THERAPIES 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject will introduce the student to basic concepts
involved in all aspects of bodywork including the, musculoskeletal
system and will include practitioner/client relationship skills involved
in performing relaxation massage and remedial massage.
Required Reading Cassar, M. (1999). Handbook of massage
therapy. A complete guide for the student and professional massage
therapist. Oxford: Utterworth-Heinmann. Fitz, S. (2000). Mosby’s
fundamentals of therapeutic massage. (2nd ed.). St Louis: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Chia, M. (1982). Awakening healing
energy through the Tao. NY: Aurora. Salvo, S. G. (1999). Massage
therapy. Principles and practice. Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning
activities.
Assessment One practical assessment (50%); one written
assignment (50%); one personal reflections journal (hurdle
requirement). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained
for the practical assessment and the written assignment. Failed
assessment items (practical assessment and written assignment) may
be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible
marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.
HHH2304 AROMATHERAPY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content A basic introduction to a full range of aromatherapy oils,
their uses, contra indications.
Required Reading Battaglia, S. (1997). The complete guide to
aromatherapy. Perfect potion. Queensland: Virginia. Price, S.
(2000). Aromatherapy workbook. London: Thorsons.
Recommended Reading Arcier, M. (1992). Aromatherapy.
London: Hamlyn. Davis, P. (1988). Aromatherapy an A-Z. Essex,
UK: Daniels Co. Fischer-Rizzi, S. (1990). Complete aromatherapy
handbook. NY: Sterling Publishing Co. International Journal of
Aromatherapy, Available at Harcourt Web site,
htttp:/www.harcourt-international.com/journal/ijar Tiran, D.
(1996). Aromatherapy in midwifery practice. London: Balliere
Tindall. Worwood, V. (1991). The fragrant pharmacy. UK: Bantam
Books.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester
comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One written assignment (40%); one case study
(30%); practical assessment (30%). To obtain a Pass in the subject,
a pass must be gained in each component of assessment. Failed
assessment items (written assignment, case study, and practical
Assessment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any reattempt or
resubmission will be 50%.
HHH3100 BODYWORK THERAPIES 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHH2303 Bodywork Therapies 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject will expand the students knowledge involved
in all aspects of bodywork and will include practitioner/client
relationship, knowledge and skills involved in performing various
bodywork therapies, including Reflexology, Alexander Technique,
Bowen Therapy, Feldenkrais, Shiatsu, Relaxation Massage and
Remedial Massage.
Required Reading Byers, D. (2001). Better health with foot
reflexology. USA: Inham Publications. Chaitow, L. (1997). Palpation
skills: assessment and function. (4th. ed.). London: Butterworth
Heineman. Fitz, S. (2000). Mosby’s fundamentals of therapeutic
massage. (2nd ed.). St Louis: Mosby. Ingham, E. (1985). Stories the
feet have told. USA: Ingham Publications. Petty, N., & Moore, A. P.
(2001). Neuromuscular examination and Assessment: A handbook
for therapits. London: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Cassar, M. (1999). Handbook of
massage therapy. A complete guide for the student and professional
massage therapist. Oxford: Utterworth-Heinmann. Chia, M. (1982).
Awakening healing energy through the Toa. NY: Aurora. Kaptchuk,
T. (1983). Chinese medicine; The web that has no weave. (2nd
ed.). London: Rider. Prentice, W. W., & Voight, M. (2001).
Techniques in musculoskeletal rehabilitation. NY: McGraw-Hill.
Salvo, S. G. (1999). Massage therapy. Principles and practice.
Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning
activities.
Assessment One personal reflections journal (hurdle requirement);
one practical assessment (50%); one written assignment (50%). To
obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained in each
component of assessment. Failed assessment items (practical
assessment and written assignment) may be re-attempted and
resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any reattempt or resubmission will be 50%.
HHH3101 IRIDOLOGY 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHH2302 Iridology I, or equivalent.
Content The study of ‘Iris diagnosis’. The classes will include
practical work with a view to fine-tuning treatment strategies for the
patients, where students will examine the iris with suitable hand held
equipment, so that the theoretical understanding is consistently
accompanied by practical experience. The individual iris is
examined as an aid to practical assessment of the individual patient
condition, which is most important to assist the patient in,
developing his or her own self-care strategies for achieving health.
Emotional and mental health patterns will be explored using the
Rayid method of iris diagnosis. Practical work in the classroom as
well as outside the classroom is encouraged. The practical nature of
iris analysis is consistently explored.
Required Reading Deck, J. (1983). Differentiation of iris
markings. (Differential Diagnosis) Textbook II, Germany: Ettlingen
Publishers. Jackson, A. (1994). Alternative health iridology; A guide
to iris analysis and preventative health care. London: MacDonald
Optima. Jensen, B. (1982). The science & practice in the healing
arts. (Vol. II). Escondido, CA: Bernard Jensen Enterprises. Johnson,
D. R., & Ness, E. J. (1995). What the eye reveals. Boulder, CO:
Rayid Publication. Jensen, B. (1982). Iridology simplified: An
introduction to the science of iridology and its relation to nutrition.
Escondido, CA: Bernard Jensen Enterprises. Mamer, D. (1996).
Practical iridology and sclerology. Utah: Woodland Publishing.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
117
Recommended Reading Deck, J. (1982). Principles of iris
diagnosis. Textbook with atlas and indications to treatment.
Germany: Ettlingen Publishers. Hall, D. (1980). Iridology;
personality and health analysis through the iris. Melbourne: Keats
Health Books. Hall, D. (1984). Iridology. Melbourne: Thomas
Nelson. Jensen, B. (1952). The science and practice of iridology: A
system of analysing and curing the body through the use of drugless
and nature cure methods. Los Angeles, CA: Bernard Jensen
Enterprises. Lindlahr, H. (1985). Natural therapeutics: Vol. IV:
Iridiagnosis and other diagnostic methods. Walden, UK: C.W.
Daniel Company. Sharan, F. (1989). Iridology; A complete guide to
diagnosing through the iris and to related forms of treatment.
Wellborough, UK: Thorsons.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester
comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Practical assessment (35%); written assignment
(35%); logbook of at least three case studies (30%) (hurdle
requirement). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained
for each component of assessment. Failed assessment items
(practical assessment and written assignment) may be re-attempted
once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any
resubmission will be 50%.
HHH3102 HOMOEOPATHY 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The Homoeopathic Materia Medica is introduced through
an exploration of the components of a homoeopathic 'drug picture',
including 'subjective symptom' 'modality' 'sphere of action', 'QPRS
symptom', 'causation', 'generality', 'characteristic particular' and
'keynote'. This is illustrated through a detailed study of the simplexes
most frequently used in Homoeopathic practice. Following on from
this is an introduction to the structure of the Periodic Table; 'cations'
and 'anions', synthetic prescribing, and a differentiation of remedy
groups on the table in terms of common psychological
characteristics and sequential patterning. An in-depth study of some
of the most significant of these groups such as The Calcareas, The
Phosphoricums, The Magnesiums, and the Sulphuricums, with
reference to a wide variety of sources.
Required Reading Boericke, W. (1993). Pocket manual of
Materia Medica and repertory. New Delhi: B. Jain. Kent, J. T.
(1995). Lectures on Materia Medica. New Delhi: B. Jain. Scholten,
J. (1993). Homoeopathy and minerals. Utrecht: Stichting Alonnissos.
Schotlen, J. (1996). Homoeopathy and the elements. Utrecht:
Stichting Alonnissos.
Recommended Reading Allen, T. F. (1990). The encyclopaedia
of pure Materia Medica. Vol. 1–12. New Delhi: B. Jain. Allen, H.
C. (1992). Allen's key notes. New Delhi: B. Jain. Blackie, M. G.
(1990). Classical homoeopathy. Beaconsfield, UK: Beaconsfield
Publishers Ltd. Boger, C. M. (1993). A synoptic key to Materia
Medica. New Delhi: B. Jain. Gibson, D. M. (1990). Studies of
homoeopathic remedies. Beaconsfield, UK: Beaconsfield Press.
Hardy-Clarke, G. (1988). The ABC manual of Materia Medica and
therapeutics. New Delhi: B. Jain. Hering, C. (1995). The guiding
symptoms of our Materia Medica. Vol 1–10. Indian Books and
Periodicals Syndicate. Hering, C. (1999). Condensed Materia
Medica. New Delhi: B. Jain. Jouanny, J. (1984). The essentials of
homoeopathic Materia Medica. Bourdeaux: Laboratoire Boiron.
Morrison, R. (1993). Desktop guide to keynotes and confirming
symptoms. Nevada City, CA: Hahnemann Clinic Publishers. Nash,
E. B. (1984). Leaders in homoeopathic therapeutics. New Delhi: B.
Jain. Phatak, S. R. (1982). Materia Medica of homoeopathic
medicines. Bombay: S. R. Phatak. Shepherd, D. (1992).
Homoeopathy for the first aider. The C.W. Daniel Co. Ltd.
Vermeulen. F. (1997). Concordant Materia Medica. Netherlands:
Emryss. BV Publishers. Von Lippe, A. (1989). Key notes and red line
symptoms of the Materia Medica. New Delhi: B.Jain. Ward, J. W.
(1983). Unabridged dictionary of the sensations as if … New Delhi:
B. Jain.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning
activities.
Assessment One written assignment (50%); one examination
(50%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for
each component of assessment. Failed assessment item (written
assignment) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible
marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the
final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be
offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary
examination will be 50%.
HHH3103 PHYTOTHERAPEUTIC MATERIA MEDICA 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject will introduce students to phytochemical and
pharmacological principles as they relate to Herbal Medicines. In
addition this subject will enable students to identify fresh plant
materials used in herbal medicine. Teaching will focus on the nature
of the bioactive principles and their interaction with human
pathological processes where possible. Emphasis will be on the
pharmacognosy and pharmacology of herbal medicine as it
pertains to clinical practice. The subject will cover the main classes
of Phytochemical compounds. Attention will also be given to the
toxicity of plants.
Required Reading Mill S., & Bone, K. (2000). Principles and
practice of phytotherapy. UK: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading De Smet, P., Keller, K., Hansel, R., &
Chandler, R. F. (1993). Adverse effects of herbal drugs Volumes I –
II. Germany: Berlin Springer-Verlag. Duke, J. A. (1992). Handbook
of biologically active phytochemicals and their activities. CRC Press,
Boca Raton. Holmes, P. (1989). Energetics of western herb.
Colorado: Artemis Press. Mills, S. (1991). Essential book of herbal
medicine. England: Arkana. Weiss, R. (1988.) Herbal medicine.
Beaconsfield, UK: Beaconsfield publishers.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning
activities.
Assessment Individual presentation (20%) (hurdle requirement);
written assignment (40%); theory examination (40%). To obtain a
Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for each component of
assessment. Failed assessment item (written assignment) may be re-
attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is
failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum
possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.
HHH3104 NATUROPATHIC AND HOMEOPATHIC CLINICALS
Campus St Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content During this semester students will commence their clinical
training in the role of a assistant practitioner under the guidance of
a clinical supervisor and will be required to fulfil all aspects of case
taking and assessment, planning a treatment strategy and providing
and dispensing the treatment, including all aspects of Naturopathic
and Homoeopathic principles as it applies to the individual patient.
Students will be required to complete 50% of their total hours with a
naturopath or homoeopath currently in practice in Melbourne.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
118
Required Reading British Herbal medicine Association 1984,
British Herbal Pharmacopoeia, British Herbal Medicine Association
Publishing. England. Skidmore-Roth, L. (2001). Mosby’s handbook
of Herbs & Natural Supplements. USA: Mosby Publications.
Recommended Reading Bone, K. (2002). Potential herb-drug
interactions for commonly used herbs. [Chart]. Warwick,
Queensland: MediHerb. Health Department Victoria (1990). Health
and Infectious Diseases Regulations, Health Department Victoria.
Lininger. S. (Ed.) (1999). A-Z guide to drug-herb-vitamin
interactions. USA: Prima Health. Murray, M. (1994). Natural
alternatives to over-the-counter and prescription drugs. NY: William
Morrow & Co.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours in an approved
clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester (hurdle
requirement).
Assessment Placement comprising successful completion of
required 36 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); overall
satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle
requirement); student portfolio (hurdle requirement); combined
practical and oral herbal dispensing and recognition exam (50%)
(hurdle requirement); combined practical and oral homoeopathic
assessment (50%). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the
first instance with the Subject Co-ordinator. This subject is a hurdle
requirement.
HHH3200 HOMEOPATHY 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHH3102 Homoeopathy 1; or equivalent.
Content A detailed study of the Chronic Miasms: Psora, Sycosis,
Tubercular, and Syphilitic. Case Taking Analysis: Sensitivity and
Susceptibility; Pre-Disposition, Disposition, Diathesis and Disease;
Life-Space Chart and Evolutionary Totality. Posology and Remedy
Reaction. Homoeopathic Pharmacy. Hahnemann's Organon of
Medicine, his life and work. In-depth study of Homoeopathic
Philosophy including Hahnemann's Organon of Medicine’ and
works and lesser writings of Hahnemann, Kent and
Boenninghausen. Practical skills in Case-Taking, Repertorization and
Analysis techniques.
Required Reading Boericke, W. M. (1993). A compend of the
principles of homoeopathy. New Delhi: B. Jain. Choudhury, H.
(1999). Indications of miasm. New Delhi: B. Jain. Hahnemann, S.
(2000). The Organon of Medicine. (W. Boericke, Trans.) (6th ed.).
New Delhi: B. Jain. Kent, J. T. (1900). Lectures on homoeopathic
philosophy. North Atlantic Books. Berkeley. California. U.S.A.
Speight, P. (1948). A comparison of the chronic miasms. New
Delhi: B. Jain.
Recommended Reading Allen, T. F. (1990). Boenninghausen's
therapeutic pocket book. New Delhi: B. Jain. Bannerjee, N.K. &
Sinha, N. (1992). A treatise on homoeopathic pharmacy. New
Delhi: B. Jain. Blackie, M. (1977). The patient, not the cure. Rupa &
Co. Bradford, T. L. (1988). The lesser writings of C.M.F. Von
Boenninghausen. New Delhi: B. Jain. Dudgeon, R. E. (1990). The
lesser writings of Samuel Hahnemann. New Delhi: B. Jain. Hael, R.
(1995). Samuel Hahnemann, his life and work. New Delhi: B. Jain.
Hobhouse, R. W. (1995). Life of Christian Samuel Hahnemann.
New Delhi: B. Jain. Kent, J. T. (1992). New remedies, clinical
cases, lesser writings, aphorisms and precepts. New Delhi: B. Jain.
Shepherd, D. (1995). The magic of the minimum dose. Essex, UK:
C.W. Daniel.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning
activities.
Assessment Clinical participation (10%) (hurdle requirement);
written assignment (50%); written examination (50%). To obtain a
Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for each component of
assessment. Failed assessment item (written assignment) may be re-
attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to
be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final
examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered.
The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will
be 50%.
HHH3201 NUTRICEUTICALS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject will introduce the student to basic concepts of
nutriceuticals, their actions and interaction and availability of
products, when to prescribe to clients and how they should be used
in conjunction with a balanced diet.
Required Reading Groff, J. L., & Gropper, S. S. (1999).
Advanced nutrition and human metabolism (3rd ed.). Australia:
Wadsworth. Hendler, S., & Rorvik, D. (Eds). (2001). PDR for
nutritional supplements. Montvale, NJ: Medical Economics
Company. Murray, M. (1996). Encyclopaedia of nutritional
supplements. USA: Prima Health.
Recommended Reading Australian Journal of Nutrition and
Dietetics. Other journals and web sites to be advised by Lecturers.
Subject Hours A minimum of twenty-four (24) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning
activities.
Assessment One written assignment (40%); one theory
assessment (40%); one case study (20%). To obtain a Pass in the
subject, a pass must be gained for each component of assessment.
Failed assessment items (written assignment and theory
Assessment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will
be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary
examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the
supplementary examination will be 50%.
HHH3202 COUNSELLING SKILLS FOR NATURAL MEDICINE
PRACTITIONERS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content An introduction to the role of the counsellor and
relationship between the client and practitioner. The following
theories will be covered; Psychoanalytic, Alderian, Existential,
Person Centred, Gestalt, Reality, Behavioural, Cognitive, Family
Systems, Ego State Therapies, as well as meditation, relaxation
therapy; and Ethical and Legal issues of Counselling.
Required Reading Corey, G. (1997). Theory and practice of
counselling and psychotherapy. (5th ed). California: Brooks/Cole
Pub Co. Corsini, R. J., & Wedding, D. (Eds.). Current
psychotherapies. (5th ed.). IL: F.E. Peacock. Publisher Inc.
Recommended Reading Grof, S., & Bennett, H. Z. (1990). The
holotropic mind. San Francisco: Harper Collins. Hammer, L. (1990).
Dragon rises, red bird flies. NY: Station Hill Press. Wilber, K.
(1989). The spectrum of consciousness. Wheaton, IL: Theosophical
Publishing House. Wilber, K. (1975). Psychologia perennis: The
spectrum of consciousness. The Journal of Transpersonal Psychology
7, (2).
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning
activities.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
119
Assessment Class participation (25%); written theory assignment
(50%); reflective journal (25%) (hurdle requirement). To obtain a
Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained in class participation
activities and the written theory assignment. Failed assessment items
(practical assessment and written assignment) may be re-attempted
and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained
on any resubmission will be 50%.
HHH3203 DEVELOPING PHARMACOLOGICAL UNDERSTANDING IN
NATURAL MEDICINE PRACTICE
Campus St Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Interactions and contraindications of drug use;
understanding Pharmacology and its interactions upon the systems
of the body; the effect of drugs on adults and children by following
the general principles of absorption, distribution, metabolism and
elimination.
Required Reading Craig, C., & Stitzer, R. (1997). Modern
pharmacology with clinical applications. (5th ed.). Boston, USA:
Little Brown. Galbraith, A., Bullock, S., & Manias, E. (2004).
Fundamentals of pharmacology: A text for nurses and allied health
professionals (4th ed.). Australia: Pearson Education Australia.
Hardman, J. G., Limbird, L. E., Molinoff, P. B., Ruddon, R. W., &
Gilman, A. G. (Eds.). (1996). Goodman & Gilman's the
pharmacological basis of therapeutics. (9th ed.). NY: McGraw-Hill,
Health Professions Division.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning
activities.
Assessment Seminar presentation (20%); two written assignments
(40% each). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained
for both written assignments. Failed assessment items (written
assignments) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible
marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.
HHH3204 VIBRATIONAL MEDICINE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject will introduce the student to basic concepts of
vibrational medicine including, Therapeutic touch, colour, sound,
meditation, homoeopathy and flower essences. Energy healing, the
role of intuition, spirituality and all other areas related to the
metaphysical.
Required Reading Brennan, B. (1987). Hands of light. NY:
Bantam Books. Capra, F. (1983). The turning point: Science, society
and the rising culture. London: Fontana.
Recommended Reading Ackernecht, E. (1982). A short history
of medicine. Baltimore: John Hopkins University Press. Benoist, J., &
Cathebras, P. (1993). The body from immateriality to another social
science and medicine (UK) 39 (7): 857-65. Brennan, B. (1993).
Light emerging. NY: Bantam Books. Capra, F. (1983). The Tao of
physics. London: Fontana Paperbacks. Charlesworth, M. (1982).
Science, non science and pseudoscience. Geelong; Deakin
University Press. Chopra, D. (1989). Quantum healing: Exploring
the frontiers of medicine. NY: Bantam Books. Clifford, T. (1989).
The diamond healing: Tibetan Buddhist medicine and psychiatry.
Northamptonshire: Woolnough. Eagle, R. (1978). Alternative
medicine guide to the medical underground. Great Britain: Future
Publications. Gerber, R. (1988). Vibrational medicine. Santa Fe,
USA: Bear & Co. Griggs, B. (1981). Green pharmacy: A history of
herbal medicine. London: Robert Hale. Grossinger, R. (1980). Plant
Medicine. Berkley, CA: North Atlantic Books. Holbrook, B. (1981).
The Stone Monkey: An Alternative Chinese-Scientific Reality.
William Morrow. New York. Kaptchuk. T. J. 1983. Chinese
Medicine: The Web that Has No Weaver. NY: Congdon and
Week. Manning, C., & Vanrenen. L. (1988). Bioenergetic Medicine
East and West. CA: North Atlantic Books. McClenon, J. (1993). The
Experiential Foundations of Shamanic Healing. Journal of Medical
Philosophy 18 (2): 107-270 Payer, L.1989. Medicine and Culture.
Victor Gollancz. London. Wilber. K. 1989. The Spectrum of
Consciousness. Wheaton, IL: Theosophical Publishing House.
Wilber, K. (1990). Eye to Eye-The Quest for the New Paradigm.
Boston: Shambhala. Zukav, G. (1988). The Dancing Wu Li Master.
London: Fontana.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning
activities.
Assessment One combined oral and practical examination (50%)
(hurdle requirement); one written assignment (50%). To obtain a
Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for each component of
assessment. Failed assessment items (practical examination and
written assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will
be 50%.
HHH3205 NATUROPATHIC AND HOMOEOPATHIC INTERNSHIP 1
Campus St Albans, City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHH3104 Naturopathic and Homoeopathic
Clinicals; or equivalent.
Content During this semester students will assume the role of the
practitioner under the guidance of a clinical supervisor and will be
required to fulfil all aspects of case taking and Assessment, planning
a treatment strategy and providing and dispensing the treatment,
including all aspects of Naturopathic and Homoeopathic principles
as it applies to the individual patient. Students will be required to
complete 50% of their hours with a naturopathy or homoeopath
currently in practice in Melbourne.
Required Reading British Herbal medicine Association 1984,
British Herbal Pharmacopoeia, British Herbal Medicine Association
Publishing. England. Skidmore-Roth, L. (2001). Mosby’s handbook
of herbs & natural supplements. USA: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Health Department Victoria 1990.
Health and Infectious Diseases Regulations, Health Department
Victoria. Lininger, S. (Ed.). (1999). A-Z Guide to Drug-Herb-Vitamin
Interactions, USA: Prima Health. Bone, K. (2002). Potential herb-
drug interactions for commonly used herbs. [Chart]. Warwick,
Queensland: MediHerb. Murray, M. (1994). Natural alternatives to
over-the-counter and prescription drugs. NY: William Morrow & Co.
Subject Hours A minimum of ninety-six (96) hours in an approved
clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester (hurdle
requirement).
Assessment Placement comprising successful completion of
required 96 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); overall
satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle
requirement); student portfolio (hurdle requirement); combined
practical and oral herbal dispensing and recognition exam (50%)
(hurdle requirement); combined practical and oral homoeopathic
assessment (50%). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the
first instance with the Subject Co-ordinator. This subject is a hurdle
requirement.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
120
HHH4100 HOMOEOPATHY 3
Campus St Albans and Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) University Skills for Natural Medicine students,
Iridology I, Bodywork Therapies, I Vibrational Medicine I,
Nutriceuticals
Content An in-depth study of the Homoeopathic Materia Medica
with a focus on the major mineral remedy groups, including groups
such as The Siliciums, The Ferrums, The Zincums, The Mercuries, The
Nitricums, and The Acids. These groups are studied by drawing on
a wide variety of sources and with reference to psychological
characteristics common to the groups according to their position on
the periodic table. Some of the major plant and animal remedies
are introduced.
Required Reading Boericke, W. 1993. Pocket Manual of
Materia Medica and Repertory. B. Jain. New Delhi. Kent, J.T.
1995. Lectures on Materia Medica. B. Jain. New Delhi. Scholten, J.
1993. Homoeopathy and Minerals. Stichting Alonnissos. Utrecht.
Schotlen, J. 1996. Homoeopathy and the Elements. Stichting
Alonnissos. Utrecht. Tyler, M.L. 1952. Homoeopathic Drug Pictures.
B. Jain. New Delhi.
Recommended Reading Borland, D. 1988. Homoeopathy in
Practice. B. Jain. New Delhi Borland, D. (ND) Children’s Types. B.
Jain. New Delhi Coulter, C. 1986. Portraits of Homoeopathic
Medicines. Vol. 1. North Atlantic Books. Berkeley. California.
U.S.A. Coulter, C. 1988. Portraits of Homoeopathic Medicines. Vol
2. North Atlantic Books. Berkeley. California. U.S.A. Dunham, C.
1999. Lectures on Materia Medica. B. Jain. New Delhi. Farrington,
E.A. 1991. Clinical Materia Medica. B. Jain. New Delhi Julian,
O.A. 1981. Dictionary of Homoeopathic Materia Medica. B. Jain.
New Delhi. Teste, A. (ND) The Homoeopathic Materia Medica. B.
Jain. New Delhi. Vithoulkas, G. 1988. The Essence of Materia
Medica. B. Jain. New Delhi
Subject Hours The equivalence of 60 Hours for one semester
Assessment One written assignment 50%, One examination 50%.
A pass must be gained for each component of the assessment.
HHH4101 RESEARCH METHODS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Evaluation of the health care professionals role in the
research process and the significance of research to health care.
Discussion of the different trends and issues within health care
research. Exploration of legal and ethical considerations in
research. Examination of qualitative and quantitative research
methods. Consideration of how research ideas/questions can be
generated and which research methodology may be appropriate.
Data analysis and Computation.
Required Reading Polgar, S., & Thomas, S. (1995). Introduction
to research in the health science. Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone.
Paton, M. Q. (1990). Qualitative evaluation and research methods.
NY: Sage Publications.
Recommended Reading DePoy, E., & Gitlin, L. (1994).
Introduction to research: Multiple strategies for health and human
services. St Louis: Mosby. Marlin, P., & Pearce, R. (1994). Practical
statistics for the health sciences. Melbourne: Thomas Nelson.
Minichiello, V. et al (1991). In depth Interviewing: Researching
People Melbourne Longman Cheshire Wilson, H. S. (1989).
Introducing research in nursing. CA: Addison and Wesley
Publishing Company. Woods, N. F., & Catanzo, M. (1988).
Nursing research: Theory and practice. St Louis: Mosby.
Subject Hours A minimum of twenty-four (24) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning
activities.
Assessment Seminar presentation with staff and peer assessment
(50%); written assignment (50%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a
pass must be gained for each component of assessment. Failed
assessment item (written assignment) may be re-attempted and
resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any resubmission will be 50%.
HHH4102 ETHICAL AND LEGAL ISSUES
Campus St Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The Law and Health Care, Introduction to Ethics, Ethics
and Law in Health practice, Consent, Negligence, Foregoing and
withdrawing treatment, Dying and the law, Mental Health,
Confidentiality, Employment: legal and ethical obligations, Resource
allocation.
Required Reading Beauchamp, T. L., & Childress, J. F. (1994).
Principles of biomedical ethics (4th ed.). New York: Oxford
University Press. Eburn, M. (1999). Emergency law. Marrickville,
NSW: The Federation Press. Wallace, M. (1995). Health care and
the law (2nd ed.). North Ryde, NSW: Law Book Company. Weir,
M. (2000). Complementary medicine, ethics and law. Brisbane:
Promethus publications.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning
activities.
Assessment Online or face-to-face presentation and interactive
discussion (40%); written assignment (60%). Failed assessment item
(written assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once
only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission
will be 50%.
HHH4103 PHYTOTHERAPEUTIC MATERIA MEDICA 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHH3103 Phytotherapeutic Materia Medica I; or
equivalent.
Content This subject will continue the study of the Western Materia
Medica. Medicinal plants will be studied in the context of their
actions on the different organs and physiological systems. The
subject will examine in detail the phytochemistry, history, ecology,
actions, indications, combinations, contra-indications and toxicity of
the principal western herbal medicines used in clinical practice
Required Reading British Herbal Medicine Association, 1991.
British Herbal Pharmacopoeia, England: British Herbal medicine
Association Publishing. Mill, S., & Bone, K. (2000). Principles and
practice of phytotherapy. UK: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Ah Ket, G. (1990). Herbal treatment
for common ailments. Melbourne Compendium Alstat, E. Eclectic
dispensatory of botanical therapeutics Portland Eclectic Institute. De
Smet, P., Keller, K., Hansel, R., & Chandler, R. F. (1993). Adverse
effects of herbal drugs Volumes I – II. Germany: Berlin Springer-
Verlag. Duke. J. A. (1992). Handbook of biologically active
phytochemicals and their activities. Boca Raton: CRC Press. Felter,
H. W. (1983). The eclectic Materia Medica pharmacology and
therapeutics. Portland, USA: Eclectic Medical Publications. Holmes,
P. (1989). Energetics of western herb. Colorado: Artemis Press.
Hoffman D. (1993). An Elder’s Herbal, Healing Arts Press.
Rochester. USA Mowray, D. (1990). Next generation herbal
medicine New Canaan Connecticut Keats Publishing Mills, S 1994.
Comprehensive Guide to Herbal Medicine. Arkana. U.K. Mills S.
1991. The Essential Book of Herbal Medicine. Arkana Penguin.
Middlesex England. Murray M 1992 The healing power of herbs.
Prima Publishing. Rocklyn. U.S.A. O’Donohue S. 2001. Reference
Manual of Therapeutics 2. Self-Published, Melbourne Werbach, M.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
121
R. & Murray, M. T. 1994. Botanical influences on illness: a
sourcebook of clinical research Tarzana Third Line Press. Upfal, J.
(2000). Australian Drug Guide (5th ed.). Melbourne: Bookman
Press.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning
activities.
Assessment One written assignment (50%); written examination
(50%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for
each component of assessment. Failed assessment items (written
assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will
be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary
examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the
supplementary examination will be 50%.
HHH4104 NATUROPATHIC AND HOMEOPATHIC CLINICAL
INTERNSHIP 2
Campus St Albans, City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHH3205 Naturopathic and Homoeopathic
Clinical Internship I; or equivalent.
Content During this semester students will assume the role of the
practitioner under the guidance of a clinical supervisor and will be
required to fulfil all aspects of history taking and Assessment,
planning a treatment strategy and providing and dispensing the
treatment, including all aspects of Naturopathic and Homoeopathic
principles as it applies to the individual patient.
Required Reading: British Herbal medicine Association 1984,
British Herbal Pharmacopoeia, British Herbal Medicine Association
Publishing. England. Murray, M. 1994. Natural Alternatives to
Over-the-Counter and Prescription Drugs. William Morrow & Co.
New York.
Recommended Reading: Bone, K. (2002). Potential herb-drug
interactions for commonly used herbs. [Chart]. Warwick,
Queensland: MediHerb. Health Department Victoria 1990. Health
and Infectious Diseases Regulations, Health Department Victoria.
Lininger, S. (Ed.). (1999). A-Z Guide to drug-herb-vitamin
interactions, USA: Prima Health. Skidmore-Roth, L. (2001). Mosby’s
handbook of herbs & natural supplements. USA: Mosby.
Subject Hours A minimum of ninety-six (96) hours in an approved
clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester (hurdle
requirement).
Assessment Placement comprising successful completion of
required 96 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); overall
satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle
requirement); student portfolio (hurdle requirement); combined
practical and oral herbal dispensing and recognition exam (50%)
(hurdle requirement); combined practical and oral homoeopathic
assessment (50%). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the
first instance with the Subject Co-ordinator.
HHH4200 ADVANCED NUTRITIONAL UNDERSTANDING
Campus St Albans
Prerequisites Nil
Content To introduce student to the advance concepts of nutrition
reviewing the building blocks, proteins, carbohydrates, fats, fibre,
water, vitamins, minerals, trace elements and accessory nutrients.
Daily requirements, deficiency states and nutritional supplementation
Required Reading Bland, J., Costarella, L., Levin, B., Liska, D.,
Lukaczer, D., & Schiltz, B. (1999). Clinical nutrition: A functional
approach. Washington, USA: Institute for Functional Medicine Inc.
Lieberman, S., & Bruning, N. (1997). The real vitamin and mineral
book. (2nd ed.). NY: Avery. Lyon, M. (2000). Healing the hyper
active brain. Calgary, Canada: Focused Publishing.
Recommended Reading Cabot, S. (1997). The Liver Cleansing
Diet. Paddington, NSW: Women’s Health Advisory Service. English,
R., & Lewis, J. (1992). Nutritional values of Australian foods.
Canberra: AGPS. Erasmus, U. (1986). Fats that heal Fats that Kill.
Burnaby, Canada: Alive Books. Flaws, B., & Wolfe, H. (1983).
Prince Wen Hui's Cook. Paradigm Publications. Massachusetts,
U.S.A. Garrow, J., & James, W. (1996). Human Nutrition and
Dietetics, (9th ed.). Churchill Livingstone. Hass, E. (1992). Staying
Healthy with Nutrition. California: Celestial Arts. Montimore, D.
(1998). The Complete Illustrated Guide to Nutritional Healing,
Element Books. Ringwood, Melbourne. Pitchford, P. 1993. Healing
with Wholefood. North Atlantic Books, California. Sears, B. 1995.
Enter the Zone. Regan Books. New York. Wahlqvist, M. 1997.
Food and Nutrition, Australia, Asia and the Pacific. Allen and
Unwin. St. Leonards. N.S.W. Australia Werbach, M. 1999.
Textbook of Nutritional Medicine. Third Line Press. California.
U.S.A.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester
comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One written assignment (50%); written examination
(50%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for
each component of assessment. Failed assessment items (written
assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will
be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary
examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the
supplementary examination will be 50%.
HHH4201 ADVANCED DIAGNOSIS AND SYMPTOMOLOGY FOR
NATURAL MEDICINE PRACTITIONERS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisites HHH3104 Naturopathic and Homoeopathic
Clinicals; HHH3205 Naturopathic and Homoeopathic Internship 1;
HHH4104 Naturopathic and Homoeopathic Clinical Internship 2; or
equivalents.
Corequisites HHH4204 Professional Issues; or equivalent.
Content Further development of the biomedical approaches,
including the recognition of potential risks of illness and diseases,
signs and symptoms are discussed. There will be ongoing discussion
of patient self-care and aspects of the practitioner/client relationship
in this subject.
Required Rreading Davis. A., & Bolin, T. (1977). Symptom
analysis and physical diagnosis in medicine. Australia: Pergamon
Press.
Recommended Reading Mills, S., & Bone, K. (2000). Principles
and practice of phytotherapy. London: Churchill Livingstone.
Werbach, M. R., & Murray, M. T. (1994). Botanical influences on
illness: A sourcebook of clinical research Tarzana: Third Line Press.
Upfal, J. (2000). Australian Drug Guide (5th ed.). Melbourne:
Bookman Press.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning
activities.
Assessment Seminar presentation with peer review (20%); written
assignment (30%); clinical review (50%). To obtain a Pass in the
subject, a pass must be gained for each component of assessment.
Failed assessment items (written assignment and clinical review) may
be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible
marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
122
HHH4202 PROFESSIONAL ISSUES
Campus St Albans
Prerequisites Nil
Content Community Health: legal aid, relationship counselling,
child guidance, rehabilitation services, fertility clinics, practice
management: employer responsibilities, record keeping, taxation,
workers compensation, legal and civil requirements; Department of
Health regulations: local council regulations, licensing of premises,
public risk, the practitioners responsibilities; the bioethical
requirements of the profession as they relate to research and to
professional practice; Naturopathic and Homoeopathic
organisations: professional accreditation, Health funds and
indemnity insurance, peer group associations Australian and
international, the current status of Naturopathy and Homoeopathy
Naturopathic and Homoeopathic Health politics; an update on
recent research into Naturopathy and Homoeopathy; Naturopathy
and Homoeopathy and Health education and promotion; alternative
perspective’s on Health care: osteopathy, chiropractic,
physiotherapy,. TCM, Aboriginal medical herbalism; working in
various clinical settings.
Required Reading To be advised by Guest Lecturers.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester
comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Class presentation (40%); public presentation report
(20 %), written assignment (40 %). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a
pass must be gained for each component of assessment. Failed
assessment item (written assignment) may be re-attempted and
resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any resubmission will be 50%.
HHH4203 CURRENT RESEARCH TRENDS IN NATURAL MEDICINE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisites HHH4104 Research Methods; or equivalent.
Content This subject will include the reviewing of the latest
research literature into all aspects of naturopathy and homoeopathy,
including nutrition, herbals medicine, iridology, body-mind
connection in healing, new developments in homoeopathy. Students
will review this research enabling them to have an understanding of
the development within their industry and its impact on their patients
and other medical disciplines.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester
comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One written assignment (50%); class presentation
(50%). To obtain a Pass in the subject, a pass must be gained for
each component of assessment. Failed assessment item (written
assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will
be 50%.
HHH4204 NATUROPATHIC AND HOMOEOPATHIC CLINICAL
INTERNSHIP 3
Campus St Albans, City Flinders, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HHH4104 Naturopathic & Homoeopathic Clinical
Internship II.
Content During this semester students will assume the role of the
practitioner under the guidance of a clinical supervisor and will be
required to fulfil all aspects of case taking and assessment, planning
a treatment strategy and providing and dispensing the treatment,
including all aspects of Naturopathic and Homoeopathic principles
as it applies to the individual patient. Students can also have the
opportunity to complete their internships in approved overseas
settings at their own expense, in India, Nepal and in Europe.
Required Reading British Herbal medicine Association 1984,
British Herbal Pharmacopoeia, British Herbal Medicine Association
Publishing. England. Bone, K. (2002). Potential herb-drug
interactions for commonly used herbs. [Chart]. Warwick,
Queensland: MediHerb. Health Department Victoria (1990). Health
and Infectious Diseases Regulations, Health Department Victoria.
Lininger. S. (Ed.). (1999). A-Z Guide to drug-herb-vitamin
interactions. USA: Prima Health. Murray, M. (1994). Natural
alternatives to over-the-counter and prescription drugs. NY: William
Morrow & Co. Skidmore-Roth, L. (2001). Mosby’s handbook of
herbs & natural supplements. USA: Mosby.
Subject Hours A minimum of one hundred and twenty (120) hours
in an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire
semester (hurdle requirement).
Assessment Placement comprising successful completion of
required 120 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); overall
satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle
requirement); student portfolio (hurdle requirement); combined
practical and oral herbal dispensing and recognition exam (50%)
(hurdle requirement); combined practical and oral homoeopathic
assessment (50%). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the
first instance with the Subject Co-ordinator.
HHI2001 ADVANCED FORMULAS AND STRATEGIES
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1005 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and
Pathogenesis; HHT1007 Chinese Pharmacopea; or equivalents.
Corequisite(s) HHT2001 Fundamental Herbal Formulas;
HHT2003 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and Pathogenesis 2;
RBM2575 Phytopharmaceutics; or equivalents.
Content Additional major formulas, including modifications,
scheduled herbs and supplementary pharmacopoeia studies;
historical development of formula studies; the traditional formulary
methods; formulas and treatment methods; the categories of
formulas; the composition and changes of formulae, the types of
formulas; usage of formulas. The categories of the traditional
formulary (external dispersing, clear heat, downward evacuating,
tonifying, harmonising, internal warming, restraining essence, Shen
calming, orifice opening, wind managing, dryness managing, Qi
regulating, blood regulating, damp dispelling, phlegm dispelling,
enrich yin, moisten dryness, reducing food stagnation, parasite
expelling).
Required Reading Bensky, D. & Barolet, R. (1990). Chinese
herbal medicine, formulas and strategies. Seattle: Eastland Press.
Flaws, B. (1993). How to write a CM prescription. Boulder, CO:
Blue Poppy Press. Xu. H. (2004). Chinese herbal formulas and
strategies [workbook]. St Albans: Victoria University of Technology,
School of Health Science, TCM Unit.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Three hours per week or equivalent for two
semesters comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning
activities.
Assessment Semester One: End-of-semester examination (50%).
Semester Two: End-of-semester examination (50%). To obtain at
least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment
must be attempted and passed. Where any end-of-semester
examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered.
The maximum possible mark on any supplementary examination will
be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
123
HHI3020 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE – HERB MAJOR 4
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHI2001 Advanced Formulas and Strategies;
HHI3010 Chinese Medicine Clinical Practice – Herb Major 3; or
equivalents.
Corequisite(s) HHT3001 Internal Medicine; or equivalent.
Content During the first week of semester, students will seminars to
orient students to this level of the clinical program, to revisit
expectations required of them as learners, to review standard
operating procedures of the clinical dispensary as preparation for
continuation of the clinical program. Reinforce their understanding
of the role of acupuncture as an adjunct to their herbal skills and
knowledge. Advanced dispensary work: ordering stock in
consultation with the supervisor, cost appreciation and prescription
accounting.
Required Reading Sionneau, P. (1995). Pao Zhi. An introduction
to the use of processed Chinese medicinals (B. Flaws, Trans.).
Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Therapeutic Goods Act, (1989~ &
Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site,
www.tga.gov.au/docs/html Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act
(1994~ & Am.).
Available from Government of Victoria Web site,
dms003.dpc.vic.gov.au/l2d/T/ Wildlife Protection (Regulation of
Exports and Imports) Act, (1982~ & Am.). Available from Australian
Government Web site, frli.law.gov.au/
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of seventy-eight (78) hours in an
approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester
(hurdle requirement).
Assessment Combined practical and oral examination (hurdle
requirement); placement comprising successful completion of
required 78 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement) and
overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail)
(hurdle requirement). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the
first instance with the Subject Co-ordinator.
HHI4001 MAJOR CLASSICS – SHANG HAN LUN AND WEN BING
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHI2001 Advanced Formulas and Strategies; or
equivalent.
Content Shang Han Lun and Wen Bing: The difference between
Shang Han and Wen Bing; Zhang Zhong Jing, meaning of Shang
Han and Six Channels, the three Yang patterns, the three Yin
patterns; concept of Bian Zeng Lun Zhi; warm disease concepts: Ye
Tian Shi and Wu Ju Tong, four heat types, Wei Qi Ying Xue, San
Jiao, aetiology and outbreak, differentiation, changes through the
systems, treatments. Character writing and pronunciation of Chinese
medical terminology.
Required Reading Clavey, S. (Trans.). (1988). Venting
insubstantial pathogens and deep lying Qi. Special topics in warm
disease theory. Journal of the Australian Chinese Medicine
Education and Research Council, 3, 1-12. Clavey, S. (Trans.).
(1988). Deep lying pathogens. Journal of the Australian Chinese
Medicine Education and Research Council, 3, 12-15. Lei, S.-Y.
(1998). More on deep lying pathogens. Treatment of hidden
pathogens (S. Clavey, Trans.). Journal of the Australian Chinese
Medicine Education and Research Council, 3, 3-10. Mitchell, C.,
Feng, Y., & Wiseman, N. (1999). Shang Han Lun. On cold
damage. Translation & Commentaries. Brookline, MA: Paradigm
Publications. Scheid, V. (1988). Shi Wen Bing. Damp-warm disease
(B. Brill, Trans.). Journal of the Australian Chinese Medicine
Education and Research Council, 3, 7-16. Zhang, Z. J. (1986).
Treatise on febrile diseases caused by cold with 500 cases (X.-W.
Luo, Trans. & Ed.). Beijing: New World Press. (Original work
published circa 250AD)
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Two hours or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures, tutorials and self-directed learning activities.
Assessment One essay (1500 words) (40%); one examination
(60%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all
components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment item (essay) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once
only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission
will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary
examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the
supplementary examination will be 50%.
HHI4002 CHINESE MEDICAL GYNECOLOGY: HERBAL MEDICINE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT3001 Internal Medicine; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HHT3202 Chinese Medical Specialties; or
equivalent.
Content This subject extends the generic theory subject Chinese
Medical Specialties with particular reference to the use of Chinese
herbs for gynaecological disorders including menstrual, vaginal,
gestational and post-partum disorders. Specific case studies and
selected Materia Medica will also be emphasized. This subject is
conducted in conjunction with HHT3202 Chinese Medical
Specialties.
Required Reading Maciocia, G. (1988). Obstetrics and
gynecology in Chinese medicine. Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone.
Qian, M., & Beer, S. L. (2004 ). TCM gynaecology student work
book. Introduction to the use of TCM in gynaecology. Melbourne:
Authors.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Three hours or equivalent per week for one
semester comprising lectures and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One assignment (1000 words) (50%); final
examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally
all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted
once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any
resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a
supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible
mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.
HHI4003 CHINESE MEDICAL PEDIATRICS AND DERMATOLOGY:
HERBAL MEDICINE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT 3001 Internal Medicine; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HHT4001 Case Conferencing and Clinical Issues;
HHT3202 Chinese Medical Specialties; or equivalent.
Content This subject extends the generic theory subject Chinese
medical specialties with particular reference to the use of Chinese
herbs for pediatric and dermatological conditions. This subject is
conducted in conjunction with HHT4001 Case Conferencing and
Clinical Issues.
Required Reading Hai, J.-L. (Ed.). (1995). Treatment of pediatric
disease in TCM. Beijing: Academy Press. Shen D.-H., Wu X.-S., &
Wang, N. (1995). Manual of dermatology in Chinese medicine.
Seattle: Eastland Press. Xu, X.-C. (Ed.). (1988). Complete external
therapies of Chinese drugs. Beijing: Foreign Languages Press.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Two hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures and self-managed learning activities.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
124
Assessment One assignment (1500 words) (60%); one final
examination (40%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally
all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted
once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any
resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a
supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible
mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.
HHI4005 SCHOOLS OF THOUGHT IN CHINESE HERBAL MEDICINE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHI3001 Chinese Herbal Medicine Practice; or
equivalent.
Content The emphasis of this subject is to look at the practical
ways in which classical schools of thought have influenced the
practice of Internal Medicine. This subject will explore the Cold
Injury School, He Jian School, Yi Shui School, Pathogen attacking
School, Dan Xi School, Warming and Reinforcing School, Warm
Disease School, Blood Stasis School and other influential
approaches. The perspectives of Wu Shiji’s External Medicine and
Chen Shigong’s Wai Ke will also be introduced.
Required Reading Li, D.-Y. (1993). Li Dong-yuan’s treatise on the
spleen & stomach. A translation of the Pi Wei Lun (S.-Z. Yang & J.-Y.
Li, Trans.). Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. State Administration of
TCM. (1995). Advanced textbook on traditional Chinese medicine
and pharmacology (Vol. 1). Beijing: New World Press.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Thirty (30) hours or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures and self-managed learning activities. This subject
will be delivered in its entirety before the mid-semester break to
allow students to undertake their final clinical internship in China.
Assessment One class presentation (50%); one written assignment
(1000 words) (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted
and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained
on any resubmission will be 50%.
HHI4010 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL INTERNSHIP 1 – HERB
MAJOR
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHI3020 Chinese Medicine Clinical Practice –
Herb Major 4; HHT3001 Internal Medicine; or equivalents.
Content During the first week of semester, students will attend two
2-hour seminars to orientate them to the final level of the clinical
program; to review expectations of them in the clinic; to review
student ethics and professional behaviour; to review standard
operating procedures of the clinical dispensary and system in use
for public consultations, in preparation for continuation of the
clinical program. Students undertake their final year clinical
placement as the Intern Practitioner in approved settings. Much of
the placement will be undertaken in the on-campus student clinic.
This subject must be completed before off shore clinical placements
can be approved. Internship Practitioner: The student practitioner is
expected to conduct themselves in the professional manner as
demonstrated by Practitioner Clinicians, working under the
supervision of a qualified Chinese medicine practitioner. Skills
required of the intern practitioner: take all case notes, define
diagnosis, herbs and main formulas that the prescription could be
based upon, define treatment principles and where appropriate
apply acupuncture. The intern practitioner works independently and
assumes full responsibility for the conduct of each consultation, and
production of a final prescription. The supervising practitioner is
accessed as required. Prescriptions must be approved by the
supervising practitioner as suitable and safe to dispense for each
client consulted, before being processed in the dispensary.
Internship Mentor: final year students are to work closely with junior
students to assist them in the development of clinical skills.
Dispensary supervision- final year students will spend part of their
time as supervisor in the dispensary. This will give the Internship
practitioner the opportunity to provide mentorship for junior students
and assume responsibility for the running of the practice dispensary.
While the supervising practitioner has overall authority, the
Internship practitioner must liaise with the supervising practitioner for
all financial decisions and must report discipline issues. During the
mentorship process, the Intern practitioner has the authority to
ensure HPU policies and procedures are followed.
Required Reading Chinese Medicine Registration Act, (2000~ &
Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site,
www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/ Sionneau, P. (1995). Pao Zhi. An
introduction to the use of processed Chinese medicinals (B. Flaws,
Trans.). Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Therapeutic Goods Act,
(1989~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site,
www.tga.gov.au/docs/html Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act,
(1994~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site,
dms003.dpc.vic.gov.au/l2d/T/ Wildlife Protection (Regulation of
Exports and Imports) Act, (1982~ & Am.). Available from Australian
Government Web site, frli.law.gov.au/
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of one hundred and four (104) hours in
an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire
semester (hurdle requirement).
Assessment Combined practical and oral examination (hurdle
requirement); placement (50%) comprising successful completion of
required 104 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement) and
overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail)
(hurdle requirement). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the
first instance with the Subject Co-ordinator.
HHI4020 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL INTERNSHIP 2 – HERB
MAJOR
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHI4010 Chinese Medicine Clinical Internship 1
– Herb Major; or equivalent.
Content During the first week of semester, students will attend a
two-hour seminar to orientate them to the final level of the clinical
program; to review expectations of them in the clinic; to review
student ethics and professional behaviour; to review standard
operating procedures of the clinical dispensary and system in use
for public consultations, in preparation for continuation of the
clinical program. Students undertake their final year clinical
placement as the Intern Practitioner in approved settings. Much of
the placement will be undertaken in the on-campus student clinic.
This subject must be completed before off shore clinical placements
can be approved. Internship Practitioner: The student practitioner is
expected to conduct themselves in a professional manner, working
under the supervision of a qualified Chinese medicine practitioner.
Skills required of the intern practitioner: take all case notes, define
diagnosis, herbs and main formulas that the prescription could be
based upon, define treatment principles and where appropriate
apply acupuncture. The intern practitioners work independently and
assume full responsibility for the conduct of each consultation, and
production of a final prescription. The supervising practitioner is
accessed as required. Prescriptions must be approved by the
supervising practitioner as suitable and safe to dispense for each
client consulted, before being processed in the dispensary.
Internship Mentor: Final year students are to work closely with junior
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
125
students to assist them develop clinical skills. Dispensary supervision:
Final year students will spend part of their time as supervisor in the
dispensary. This will give the Internship practitioner the opportunity
to provide mentorship for junior students and assume responsibility
for the running of the practice dispensary. While the supervising
practitioner has overall authority. The Internship practitioner must
liaise with the supervising practitioner for all financial decisions and
must report discipline issues. During the mentorship process, the
Internship practitioner has the authority to ensure HPU policies and
procedures are followed. Internship observer status: Clinical hours
may also be obtained if a student ‘observes’ clinical practice with a
recognized Herbalist with a minimum of 10 years clinical practice
(15–20 minimum recommended). The nature of the ‘observation’ will
need to extend to internship status for approval to be granted.
Required Reading Chinese Medicine Registration Act, (2000~ &
Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site,
www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/ Sionneau, P. (1995). Pao Zhi. An
introduction to the use of processed Chinese medicinals (B. Flaws,
Trans.). Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Therapeutic Goods Act,
(1989~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site,
www.tga.gov.au/docs/html Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act,
(1994~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site,
dms003.dpc.vic.gov.au/l2d/T/ Wildlife Protection (Regulation of
Exports and Imports) Act, (1982~ & Am.). Available from Australian
Government Web site, frli.law.gov.au/
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer
Subject Hours A minimum of two hyndred and eight (208) hours
in an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire
semester (hurdle requirement)
Assessment Final dispensary practical examination (10%) (hurdle
requirement); final combined practical and oral examination (50%)
(hurdle requirement); placement (40%) comprising successful
completion of required 208 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle
requirement) and overall satisfactor report(s) from clinical
placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement). To obtain an
Ungraded Pass in the subject, normally all components of
assessment must be attempted and passed. Any failed assessment
item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Subject
Co-ordinator.
HHK3020 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE – ACUPUNCTURE
MAJOR 4
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HHK3010 Chinese Medicine Clinical Practice –
Acupuncture Major 3; HHT2005 Chinese Medicine Asepsis and
Sterilization; HHT2006 Acupuncture Needling; or equivalents.
Content Topics include: moxibustion, cupping, gua sha, needle
manipulation techniques, the appropriateness of applying other
therapeutic methods such as electro-acupuncture, laser therapy,
muscle energy testing approaches. Tui Na, shi liao and other micro-
systems approaches. Assist practitioner as requested: provide
preliminary diagnostic report to the practitioner; carry out
therapeutic procedures. Students undertake undertake clinical
education in a variety of settings both on and Off Campus
Supervision is provided by Victoria University appointed clinical
educators, in the Health Practice Unit or other approved locations,
or with approved acupuncture practitioners in their private clinics.
Herbal formulae prescriptions (prepared and powered extracts).
Required Reading Australian Acupuncture & Chinese Medicine
Association Code of Ethics. Available from AACMA Web site,
www.acupuncture.org.au/code_of_ethics.cfm Bensky, D., Gamble,
A., & Kaptchuk, T. J. (1993). Chinese herbal medicine: Materia
Medica (Rev. ed.). Seattle: Eastland Press. Flaws, B. (1993). How to
write a CM prescription Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Infection
Control Guidelines for Acupuncture – Consultation Draft, (2004).
Available from Chinese Medicine Registration Board Web site,
www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-
news/draft/InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf
Standards of Practice for Acupuncture. Health (Infectious Diseases)
Regulations, (1990~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria
Web site, www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of seventy-eight (78) hours in an
approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester
(hurdle requirement).
Assessment Combined practical and oral examination (hurdle
requirement); placement comprising successful completion of
required 78 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement) and
overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail)
(hurdle requirement) and. To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the
subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted
and passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in
the first instance with the Subject Co-ordinator.
HHK4001 TREATMENT OF MUSCULO-SKELETAL DISORDERS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHK2003 Musculo-skeletal assessment Skills for
Acupuncture; HHK3002 Acupuncture Therapeutic Applications; or
equivalents.
Content This subject consolidates theory and practical skills learnt
in previous subjects and applies these to the context of specific
musculo-skeletal and neurological disorders. The material covered
will include the further applications of acupuncture in Wei and Bi
syndrome; Zhong Feng; the diagnosis and treatment of specific
musculo-skeletal conditions; the application of external herbal
preparations; movement exercises specific to particular musculo-
skeletal conditions; the protocols and application of electro-
acupuncture, point injection therapy, laser therapy, magnet therapy,
Tui Na, cupping, moxibustion and Gua Sha as these apply to
musculo-skeletal disorders; the treatment and management of
sporting injuries.
Required Reading Legge, D. (1990). Close to the bone. Woy
Woy: Sydney College Press.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Three hours per week or equivalent for one
semester comprising seminars, workshops and self-managed
learning activities.
Assessment One practical exam (40%) (hurdle requirement); one
class presentation (20%); one written examination (40%). To obtain
at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment
must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (practical
examination) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency standard
must be obtained on any re-attempted practical examination.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any reattempt will be
50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary
examination will be offered. The maximum possible mark on the
supplementary examination will be 50%.
HHK4002 CHINESE MEDICAL SPECIALTIES: ACUPUNCTURE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHK3002 Acupuncture Therapeutic Applications;
HHT3001 Internal Medicine; or equivalents.
Corequisite(s) HHT3202 Chinese Medical Specialties; or
equivalent.
Content In these specialist areas of study, attention will be given to
enhancing the student’s theoretical knowledge concerning
diagnosis, CM aetiology, treatment principles and management
strategies. Ways of selecting acupuncture points, needle techniques
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
126
and manipulation, application of moxibustion techniques and the
role of electro-acupuncture are considered.
Required Reading Hai, J.-L. (Ed.). (1995). Treatment of pediatric
disease in TCM. Beijing: Academy Press. Maciocia, G. (1988).
Obstetrics and gynecology in Chinese medicine. Melbourne:
Churchill Livingstone. Shen, D.-H., Wu, X.-S., & Wang, N. (1995).
Manual of dermatology in Chinese medicine. Seattle: Eastland
Press. West, Z. (2001). Acupuncture in pregnancy and childbirth.
Sydney: Churchill Livingstone. Xu, X.-C. (Ed.). (1988). Complete
external therapies of Chinese drugs. Beijing: Foreign Languages
Press.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Three hours per week or equivalent for one
semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning
activities.
Assessment Assignment (1000 words) (45%); theory examination
(55%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all
components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted
once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any
resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a
supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible
mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.
HHK4004 SCHOOLS OF THOUGHT IN ACUPUNCTURE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHK3002 Acupuncture and Therapeutic
Applications; or equivalent.
Content Detailed explorations of a broad range of schools of
thought from classical and contemporary Chinese medical literature,
other Oriental and Western applications. Emphasis will be given to
understanding these approaches and their relevance in a
contemporary Australian clinical setting. Areas such as Zi wu liu
zhu, ling gui ba fa, yuan wu bi lei, the application of the ‘Ghost
Points’ and Japanese approaches are addressed. Special emphasis
is given to clinical concerns connected to the notion of two important
Chinese medical ideas: dispersing xie Qi and supporting zheng Qi.
Required Reading Maciocia, G. (1994). The practice of Chinese
medicine: The treatment of diseases with acupuncture and Chinese
herbs. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Pirog, J. E. (1996). The
practical application of meridian style acupuncture. Berkeley, CA:
Pacific View.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Twenty (20) hours or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
This subject will be delivered in its entirety before the mid-semester
break to allow students to undertake their final clinical internship in
China.
Assessment One class presentation (50%); one assignment (1000
words) (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all
components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted
once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any
resubmission will be 50%.
HHK4010 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL INTERNSHIP 1 –
ACUPUNCTURE MAJOR
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHK3020 Chinese medicine clinical practice –
Acupuncture major 4; HHT3001 Internal medicine; or equivalent.
Content During the first two weeks of semester the students will be
required to attend a two hour seminar to detail the expectations in
this subject, revisit ethical professional issues, and review clinical
operating procedures. Students practice as interns under the
supervision of approved clinical teachers. Students are required to
spend time in at least five of the Victoria University clinical locations
in Melbourne to gain broad clinical experience and be guided by a
variety of clinical teachers. Skills required: Advanced acupuncture
and prepared Chinese medicine theory, needling and Tui Na
therapy, excellent interpersonal skills, and a professional attitude
and presentation. Practical skills to be developed and assessed:
monitoring the consultation process, ability to give supervisors a CM
diagnosis of the client they are treating, ability to locate and needle
accurately acupuncture points appropriate to the clients needs. Be
able to use, and know when to use, moxa, cupping, Gua Sha, point
injection therapy, dermal hammer, laser, electric stimulator and
prepared Chinese medicine. Assess the client’s needs for on going
treatment, and be able to communicate with the client their course of
treatment. Liaise and work effectively with clinical teachers and
mentor students in the clinic.
Required Reading Infection Control Guidelines for Acupuncture
(1997), Melbourne. Health Department Victoria. Williams V. (Ed)
(2001) Clinical Policies and Procedures Manual. St Albans TCM
Unit, School of Health Sciences, Victoria University of Technology.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of one hundred and four (104) hours in
an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire
semester (hurdle requirement). During the first week students will
attend three 2-hour seminars in preparation for commencement of
their internship studies and practice. From Week 2, students will
undertake clinical placement as interns in approved clinical settings
Assessment Combined practical and oral examination (hurdle
requirement); placement comprising successful completion of
required 104 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement) and
overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical placement(s) (pass/fail)
(hurdle requirement). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the subject,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the
first instance with the Subject Co-
HHK4020 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL INTERNSHIP 2 –
ACUPUNCTURE MAJOR
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HHK4010 Chinese Medicine Clinical Internship 1
– Acupuncture Major; or equivalent.
Content During the first two weeks of semester the students will be
required to attend a 2-hour seminar to detail the expectations in this
subject, Revisit ethical professional issues, and Review clinical
operating procedures. Students practise as interns under the
supervision of approved clinical educators. Students are required to
spend time in at least five of the Victoria University clinical locations
in Melbourne to gain broad clinical experience and be guided by a
variety of clinical educators. Skills required: Advanced acupuncture
and prepared Chinese medicine theory, needling and Tui Na
therapy, excellent interpersonal skills, and a professional attitude
and presentation as demonstrated by clinical educators. Practical
skills to be developed and assessed: monitoring the consultation
process, ability to give supervisors a CM diagnosis of the client they
are treating; ability to locate and needle accurately acupuncture
points appropriate to the clients needs. Students will be able to use,
and know when to use moxa, cupping, Gua Sha, point injection
therapy, dermal hammer, laser, electric stimulator and prepared
Chinese medicine. Other skills include being able to assess the
client’s needs for ongoing treatment, to communicate with the client
about their course of treatment, to liaise and work effectively with
clinical educators and to mentor students in the clinic.
Required Reading Infection Control Guidelines for Acupuncture –
Consultation Draft, (2004). Available from Chinese Medicine
Registration Board Web site, www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
127
news/draft/InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf
Standards of Practice for Acupuncture. Health (Infectious Diseases)
Regulations, (1990~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria
Web site, www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of two hundred and eight (208) hours
in an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire
semester (hurdle requirement).
Assessment Final combined clinical practical and oral
examination (hurdle requirement); placement comprising successful
completion of required 208 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle
requirement) and overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical
placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement). To obtain an
Ungraded Pass in the subject, normally all components of
assessment must be attempted and passed. Any failed assessment
item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Subject
Co-ordinator.
HHM1419 BIOMETRY 1
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The subject aims to introduce students to concepts of
academic research, data collection and statistical analysis, with
particular reference to clinical research. The students will acquire a
basic knowledge of research procedures in the clinical field, and
will develop an understanding of how data is acquired, correlated
and analysed. Statistical skills will be further developed in
HHM2429 Biometry 2. content will include: Introduction to statistics.
Knowledge acquisition, science and research. Research logic and
language. Social research and statistics. Report Writing.
Introduction to research ethics. Displaying data. Descriptive
statistics. Correlation. Prediction. Multiple regression. Introduction to
hypothesis testing.
Required Reading Munro BH, 1997, Statistical methods for
health care reseacrh, Lipincott, Philadelphia. Aron A & Aron EN,
1994, Statistics for psychology, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
Recommended Reading Burdess N, 1994, The really
understandable stats book, Prentice Hall, Australia. Graziano AM,
and Raulin, ML (1995), Research methods: A process of enquiry,
Harper Collins, New York.
Subject Hours Two hours per week for one semester comprising
one one-hour lecture and one one-hour workshop or equivalent.
Assessment Written examination, 100%.
HHM2429 BIOMETRY 2
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHM1419 Biometry 1; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to consolidate and further develop skills
gained in HHM1419 Biometry 1, and to further investigate methods
of statistical analysis. At the completion of the subjects students
should have a broad understanding of quantitative and qualitative
research methods, and should be able to collate and display data
using a variety of basic techniques. content will include: Concepts
for inferential statistics. Hypothesis testing. Hypothesis testing with
means. Introduction to T tests. T tests for dependent means. T tests
for independent means. Power and effect size. Chi square tests.
Qualitative research methods. Introduction to Qualitative Methods.
Required Reading Munro BH, 1997, Statistical methods for
health care reseacrh, Lipincott, Philadelphia. Aron A & Aron EN,
1994, Statistics for psychology, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
Recommended Reading Burdess N, 1994, The really
understandable stats book, Prentice Hall, Australia. Graziano AM,
and Raulin, ML, Research methods: A process of enquiry, Harper
Collins, New York.
Subject Hours Two hours per week for one semester comprising
one two-hour workshop or equivalent.
Assessment Written exam, 50%, assignment (2500 words), 50%.
HHM3439 BIOMETRY 3
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHM2429 Biometry 2; or equivalent.
Content The aims of the subject are to further develop and
consolidate knowledge gained in HHM1419 Biometry 1 and
HHM2429 Biometry 2. To study more advanced statistical
procedures used in clinical research. At the completion of the subject
students should be able to use a variety of more advanced
techniques for data collation and display, and should have a
thorough understanding of clinical research methodology. content
will include: Revision of correlational statistics. Revision of basic
inferential statistics. Analysis of variance. Selected non-parametric
techniques. Advanced statistical procedures. Overview of statistics in
the research process.
Required Reading Munro BH, 1997, Statistical methods for
health care reseacrh, Lipincott, Philadelphia. Aron A and Aron EN,
1994, Statistics for psychology, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
Recommended Reading Graziano AM, and Raulin, ML,
Research methods: A process of enquiry, Harper Collins, New York.
SPSS studentware package and a scientific calculator.
Subject Hours Two hours per week for one semester comprising
one one-hour lecture and one one-hour workshop or equivalent.
Assessment Written exam, 30%; computer test, 20%; assignment
(2500 words), 50%.
HHM6000 NURSING ENQUIRY AND KNOWLEDGE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject is designed to encourage students to examine
critically some of the theories and ideologies that influence the
development of the various kinds of knowledge. The subject also
aims to enable students to generate and apply nursing knowledge
through the process of theory analysis and development. Topics
covered in this subject include: intellectual culture – contextual
knowledge; the nature, creation and legitimation of knowledge;
nursing ‘knowledge’’; nursing theories and their application to
practice; future directions.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Barnett, R.A. et al. 1978, Models of
professional preparation: pharmacy, nursing and teacher education,
Studies in Higher Education 12(1): 51–63. Benner, P. 1984, From
Novice to Expert: Excellence and Power in Clinical Nursing
Practice, Menlo Park, California. Berger, P. and Luckmann, T. 1971,
The Social Construction of Reality, Penguin, London. Capra, F.
1983, The Turning Point: Science, Society and the Rising Culture,
Flamingo (Fontana), London. Carper, B. 1978, Fundamental
Patterns of Knowing in Nursing: Advances in Nursing Science,
Aspen, California. Charlesworth, M. 1982, Science, Non-Science
and Pseudoscience, Deakin Uni Press, Geelong. Chinn, P.L. and
Jacobs, M.K. 1987, Theory and Nursing: A Systematic Approach,
C.V.Mosby, St Louis. Collins, R.J. and Fielder. J.H. 1981,
Beckstrand’s concept of practice theory, a critique, Research in
Nursing and Health 4(3): Sept 317–21. Crowley, D.J. 1986,
Perspectives of pure science, Nursing Research 17: 497–9, Nov-
Dec. Fitzpatrick, J. and Whall, A. 1983, Conceptual Models of
Nursing: Analysis and Application, Roberts Brady Co., Bowie Md.
Freidson, E. 1986, Professional Powers: A Study of the
Institutionalisation of Formal Knowledge, Uni of Chicago Press.
George, J.B. (ed.) 1985, Nursing Theories: The Base for
Professional Nursing Theories, Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Gjertsen,
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
128
D. 1989, Science and Philosophy: Past and Present, Penguin,
London. Gwen, S. (ed.) 1990, A Reader in Feminist Knowledge,
Routledge, London. Kuhn, T. 1970, The Structure of Scientific
Revolutions, Uni of Chicago Press. Meleis, A.I. 1985, Theoretical
Nursing: Development and Progress, Lippincott, Philadelphia.
Nicoll, L. 1987, From Grounded Theory to Practice, Little Brown,
Boston. Nightingale, F. 1968 (original 1859), Notes on Nursing:
What it is and what it is not, Dover, New York. Orem, D.E. 1980,
Nursing: Concepts of Practice, McGraw Hill, New York. Passmore,
J. 1986, A Hundred Years of Philosophy, Penguin, London. Parse,
R.R. 1987, Nursing Science: Major Paradigms, Theories and
Critique, W B Saunders Co., Philadelphia Pa. Ramazanoglu, C.
1989, Feminism and the Contradictions of Oppression, Routledge,
London. Remmling, E.W. 1973, Towards the Sociology of
Knowledge, Routledge and Kegan Paul, London. Riehl, J.P. and Roy,
C. 1980, Conceptual Models for Nursing Practice, Appleton-
Century-Crofts, New York. Schon, D. 1982, The Reflective
Practitioner: How Professionals Think in Action, Basic Books. New
York. Stanley, L. (ed.) 1990, Feminist Praxis, Routledge, London.
Stevenson, L. 1980, Seven Theories of Human Nature, Oxford
University Press. Stevenson, L. (ed.) 1981, The Study of Human
Nature, Oxford University Press. Suppe, F. 1977, The Structure of
Scientific Theories, Chicago University of Illinois Press. Tong, R.
1989, Contemporary Feminist Thought, Allen and Unwin, Sydney.
Trigg, R. 1985, Understanding Social Science, Blackwells, Oxford.
Watson, J. 1980, The Philosophy and Science of Caring, Little
Brown and Co., Boston. Weedon, C. 1987, Feminist Practice and
Poststructuralist Theory, Blackwell, Oxford. Young, M.F.D. (ed.)
1971, Knowledge and Control, Collier-Macmillan, London. Zukav,
G. 1988, The Dancing Wu Li Masters, Fontana, London.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
a variety of teaching strategies including lectures, tutorials and
workshops.
Assessment Paper and seminar presentation, 50%; written paper,
50%.
HHN0011 PHILOSOPHICAL CONCEPTS IN NATURAL MEDICINE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Approaches to healing throughout the world are
embedded in notions of reality, truth, and values about health and
illness. The subject explores the philosophies that underpin the major
traditions of health and healing. Students are provided with the
opportunity to explore and critically appraise the various
philosophies. Areas of inquiry will include the general principles of:
Oriental Medicine: Chinese and Japanese healing; Ayurveda and
Yoga: Indian and Pranic healing; Naturopathy: European natural
therapy; Australian Aboriginal healing; Western healing;
Shamanistic healing practices. The opportunity to explore the
philosophies underlying health and healing practices will provide a
broad foundation for the study of the sensory and cognitive healing
approaches in the course.
Required Reading Capra, F. (1983). The turning point: Science,
society and the rising culture. London: Fontana. Wilber, K. (1996).
A brief history of everything. Melbourne: Hill of content.
Recommended Reading Ackernecht, E. (1982). A Short History
of Medicine. John Hopkins University Press Baltimore. Benoist, J.,
Cathebras, P. (1993). The Body from Immateriality to Another Social
Science and Medicine (UK), 39(7), 857-65. Capra, F. (1983). The
Tao of Physics. London Fontana Paperbacks. Charlesworth, M.
(1982). Science, Non Science and Pseudoscience. Deakin
University Press Geelong. Chopra, D. (1989). Quantum Healing:
Exploring the Frontiers of Medicine. Bantan Books New York.
Clifford, T. (1989). The Diamond Healing: Tibetan Buddhist
Medicine and Psychiatry. Woolnough Northamptonshire. Eagle, R.
(1978). Alternative Medicine Guide to the Medical Underground.
Future Publications Great Britain. Griggs, B. (1981). Green
Pharmacy: A History of Herbal Medicine. London Robert Hale.
Grossinger, R. (1980). Plant Medicine. North Atlantic Books
Berkeley. Holbrook, B. (1981). The Stone Monkey: An Alternative
Chinese-Scientific Reality. William Morrow New York. Kaptchuk, T.
J. (1983). Chinese Medicine: The Web that Has No Weaver.
Congdon and Week New York. Manning, C. & Vanrenen, L.
(1988). Bioenergetic Medicine East and West. North Atlantic Books
California. McClenon, J. (1993). The Experiential Foundations of
Shamanic Healing. Journal of Medical Philosophy, 18(2), 107-270.
Payer, L. (1989). Medicine and Culture. Victor Gollancz London.
Wilber, K. (1989). The Spectrum of Consciousness. Wheaton Illinois
Theosophical Publishing House. Wilber, K. (1990) Eye to Eye-The
Quest for the New Paradigm. Shambhala Boston. Zukav, G.
(1988). The Dancing Wu Li Master. Fontana London.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester
comprising lectures, tutorials seminars and self-managed learning.
Assessment Personal reflective journal (hurdle requirement); class
participation/group work (20%); written assignment (2000 words)
(80%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all
components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment item (written assignment) may be re-attempted and
resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any resubmission will be 50%.
HHN0012 ETHICAL AND LEGAL ISSUES
Campus St Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The Law and Health Care, Introduction to Ethics, Ethics
and Law in Health practice, Consent, Negligence, Foregoing and
withdrawing treatment, Dying and the law, Mental health,
Confidentiality, Employment: legal and ethical obligations, Resource
allocation.
Required Reading Beauchamp, T. L., & Childress, J. F. (1994).
Principles of biomedical ethics (4th ed.). New York: Oxford
University Press. Eburn, M. (1999). Emergency law. Marrickville,
NSW: The Federation Press. Wallace, M. (1995). Health care and
the law (2nd ed.). North Ryde, NSW: Law Book Company.
Recommended Reading Recommended Reading that
includes textbooks, Journals and Web sites will be posted in the
Subject Information folder within the coursework section of this
subject prior to the commencement of each semester.
Subject Hours A minimum of seventy-two (72) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, tutorials, seminars and self-managed
learning.
Assessment Online or face-to-face presentation (30%); written
assignment (70%).
HHN0013 RESEARCH SKILLS
Campus St Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Evaluation of the health care professionals role in the
research process and the significance of research to health care.
Discussion of the different trends and issues within health care
research. Exploration of legal and ethical considerations in
research. Examination of qualitative and quantitative research
methods. Consideration of how research ideas/questions can be
generated and which research methodology may be appropriate.
Data analysis and Computation. Prepare a literature based research
proposal.
Required Reading Polgar, S. & Thomas, S. (1995). Introduction
to research in the health science. Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
129
Paton, M. Q. (1990). Qualitative evaluation and research methods.
NY: Sage Publications.
Recommended Reading DePoy, E. & Gitlin, L. (1994).
Introduction to Research: Multiple Strategies for Health and Human
Services. St Louis Mosby. Marlin, P. & Pearce, R. (1994). Practical
Statistics for the Health Sciences. Melbourne Thomas Nelson.
Minichiello, V., et al. (1991). In depth Interviewing: Researching
People. Melbourne Longman Cheshire. Wilson, H. S. (1989).
Introducing Research in Nursing. California Addison and Wesley
Publishing Company. Woods, N. F. & Catanzo, M. (1988).
Nursing Research: Theory and Practice. St Louis CV Mosby and
Company.
Subject Hours A minimum of seventy-two (72) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, tutorials, seminars and self-managed
learning.
Assessment Seminar presentation and class participation (30%);
written proposal submission (70%). To obtain at least a Pass in the
subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted
and passed. Failed assessment item (proposal submission) may be
re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to
be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.
HHN0014 DEVELOPING PHARMACOLOGICAL UNDERSTANDING IN
NATURAL MEDICINE PRACTICE
Campus St Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Drug interactions and contraindications of use,
understanding pharmacology and its interactions upon the
endocrine system, the nervous system, and the circulatory system.
Endocrinology of the function and pathology of the endocrine
glands, hormones and the associated diseases and conditions.
Required Reading Birkett, D. J. (1995) Pharmacodynamics: The
concentration effect relationship. Australian Prescriber. Chahl, L. A.
(1996). Experimental and Clinical Pharmacology: Opioids –
Mechanisms of Actions. Australian Prescriber, 19, 3: 66-68.
Galbraith, A., Bullock, S., & Manias, E. (2004). Fundamentals of
pharmacology: A text for nurses and allied health professionals (4th
ed.). Australia: Pearson Education Australia.
Websites
www.australianprescriber.com/magazines/vol18no4/concentration
.htm www.
australianprescriber.com/magazines/vol19no3/opioids.htm
Recommended Reading Students will be informed of further
Recommended Reading by the lecturer which will include
textbooks, Journals and Websites.
Subject Hours A minimum of ninety-six (96) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, tutorials, seminars and self-managed
learning.
Assessment Class presentation and participation (20%); written
assignment(s) (80%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Failed assessment item (assignments) may be re-attempted
and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained
on any resubmission will be 50%.
HHN0021 COUNSELLING SKILLS FOR NATURAL MEDICINE
PRACTITIONERS
Campus St Albans, Off Campus.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content An introduction to the role of the counsellor and relationship
between the client and practitioner. The following theories will be
covered: Psychoanalytic, Alderian, Existential, Person Centred,
Gestalt, Reality, Behavioral, Cognitive, Family systems, Ego State
Therapies, as well as meditation, relaxation therapy. Ethical and legal
issues of counselling.
Required Reading Corey, G. (1997). Theory and Practice of
Counselling and Psychotherapy. 5th Ed, Brooks/Cole Pub Co,
California, USA. Corsini, R. J. & Wedding, D. (eds), (1998). 5th
Edition. Current Psychotherapies. F.E. Peacock Publisher Inc. Illinois.
Recommended Reading Grof, S. with Bennett, H.Z. (1990). The
Holotropic Mind. Harper Collins, San Francisco. Hammer, L. (1990).
Dragon Rises, Red Bird Flies. Station Hill Press, New York. Wilber, K.
(1989). The Spectrum of Consciousness. Theosophical Publishing
House, Wheaton, Illinois. Wilber, K. (1975). Psychological Perennis:
The spectrum of consciousness. The Journal of Transpersonal
Psychology 7(2). Additional reading as directed by the lecturer.
Subject Hours The equivalence of 39 hours per semester delivered
in burst mode over two weeks or over one semester of 13 weeks.
Assessment Seminar presentation (15%); class participation
(25%); written theory assignment (1500 words) (40%); reflective
journal (20%). A pass must be gained for each component of the
assessment.
HHN0022 PROFESSIONAL WRITING IN NATURAL MEDICINE
Campus St Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Preparing a journal article based on the evaluation of
professional literature in the field of Natural Medicine. Discuss and
understand the process of writing a paper(s). Understand library
research skills, professional writing and reading skills.
Required Reading Anderson, J. & Poole, M. (1995). Thesis and
assignment writing. (2nd ed.). Brisbane: John Wiley & Sons. Paton,
M. Q. (1990). Qualitative evaluation and research methods. NY:
Sage Publications. Polgar, S., & Thomas S. (1995). Introduction to
research in the health science. Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Australian Traditional Medicine
society, et al. (2000) Journal of the Australian Traditional-Medicine
Society. A.T.M.S. N.S.W. Clavey, S. et al. (2000). Journal of the
Australian Chinese Medicine Education and Research Council, Ltd.
Melbourne A.CM.E.R.C. Marlin, P. & Pearce, R. (1994). Practical
Statistics for the Health Sciences. Melbourne Thomas Nelson.
Minichiello, V., et al. (1991). In depth Interviewing: Researching
People. Melbourne Longman Cheshire. Williams, J. M. (1997).
Style-Ten Lessons in Clarity and Grace (5th ed. ). New York
Addison-Wesley Educational Publishers inc. Additional reading as
directed by the lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of one hundred and eight (108) hours
for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, seminars and self-
managed learning.
Assessment One written assignment (2500 words) (100%) or one
written journal article (1500 words) (50%); and a written
assignment (1000 words) (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the
subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted
and passed. Failed assessment items may be re-attempted and
resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any resubmission will be 50%.
HHN0023 RESEARCH PROJECT
Campus St Albans, Online
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Students will undertake a task based on professional
experience and/or the professional literature and produce a
research project. Students are expected to prepare a proposal. On
acceptance of the proposal students are expected to develop this
into a research project. Interaction between facilitator and students
is essential.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
130
Required Reading Paton, M. Q. (1990). Qualitative evaluation
and research methods. NY: Sage Publications. Polgar, S., & Thomas
S. (1995). Introduction to research in the health science. Melbourne:
Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading DePoy, E. & Gitlin, L. (1994).
Introduction to research: Multiple Strategies for Health and Human
Services. St Louis Mosby. Marlin, P. & Pearce, R. (1994). Practical
Statistics for the Health Sciences. Melbourne Thomas Nelson.
Minichiello, V., et al. (1991). In depth Interviewing: Researching
People. Melbourne Longman Cheshire. Wilson, H. S. (1989).
Introducing Research in Nursing. California Addison and Wesley
Publishing Company. Woods, N. F. & Catanzo, M. (1988).
Nursing research: Theory and Practice. St Louis CV Mosby and
Company. Additional reading as directed by the Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of one hundred and thirty-two (132)
hours for one semester comprising lectures, tutorials, seminars and
self-managed learning.
Assessment Class presentation of project (20%); minor research
project assignment (5000 words) (80%). To obtain at least a Pass in
the subject, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be
re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to
be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.
HHO1171 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject aims to introduce student to the Osteopathic
principles both theoretical and based on research. Development of
the conceptual framework of osteopathy and an understanding of
osteopathic philosophy. Consideration of the functioning of the
individual as a whole. ART and the application of this principle to
patient care. Somatic dysfunction and ita diagnosis including barrier
principles. Contraindications of to osteopathic care both absolute
and relative. Students will develop palpatory skills and awareness of
tissue characteristics both normal and abnormal. Research and
presentation skills relating to the published literature on palpation
will be developed. Basic soft tissue techniques applicable to the
tissues of the musculoskeletal system. The use of leverages to induce
motion within these tissues. Emphasis is placed on palpatory skills,
osteopathic articulatory and soft tissue techniques, surface anatomy
and tissue awareness. The palpation and technique components will
augment and reinforce anatomy learnt in the subject Anatomy 1.
Required Reading Chaitow L (1997) Palpation Skills New York
Churchill Livingstone Field D (1994) Anatomy – Palpation and
Surface Markings London, Butterwoth-Heinemann Greenman P
(1989) Principles of Manual Medicine Baltimore Williams and
Wilkins Hoppenfeld S (1976) Physical Examination of the Spine and
Extremities. Norwalk Connecticut Appleton-Century Crofts Kuchera
W The Philosophy of Osteopathy Kirksville College of Osteopathic
Medicine USA Lederman E (1997) Fundamentals of Manual
Therapy New York Churchill Livingstone Lumley JSP (1996) Surface
Anatomy Edinburgh Churchill Livingstone. Tucker C & Deoora T K
(1994) Fundamental osteopathic techniques Research Publications
Pty Ltd Melbourne, Australia Victoria University Osteopathy Unit
Student Manual 2004.
Recommended Reading Basmajian J, Nyberg R (1993) Rational
Manual Therapies Williams & Wilkins Hartman L S (1996)
Handbook of Osteopathic Technique Chapman & Hall London
Hawkins P, O'Neill A (1990) Osteopathy in Australia P.I.T. Press
Victoria Hoag J M (1969) Osteopathic Medicine McGraw-Hill New
York Korr I M (1969) The Physiological Basis of Osteopathic
Medicine Post-graduate Institute of Osteopathic Medicine New York
Neumann H D (1989) Introduction to Manual Medicine Springer-
Verlag Berlin Tixa S (1999) Atlas of palpatory anatomy of the lower
extremities. McGraw-Hill, New York.
Subject Hours Seven hours per week for two semesters: one hour
lecture- History & Principles; two-hour workshop – Osteopathic
Palpation; four hours workshop (2 x- Osteopathic Technique).
Osteopathic science 1 is a clinically oriented subject and as a
consequence material presented within clinical practicum 1 tutorials
will necessarily augment and support Osteopathic Science 1 course
content.
Assessment Written examination – History & Principles;
Assignment – History & Principles (2000 words); Presentation &
paper critiques – Palpation; Practical Examinations – Palpation and
Osteopathic Technique. Students must gain a mandatory pass, or
better, in all components of assessment before they can be awarded
an overall pass within the subject title: Osteopathic Science 1.
Please note that Osteopathic Science 1 is a two semester subject.
First semester passing grades will appear on academic transcripts
as X. First semester fail grades will appear as N1 or N2, and will
be amended if the subject is passed in entirety at the end of the
academic year. First semester grades will be published by the
lecturer after the meeting of the examination board.
HHO2173 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 3
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHO1171 Osteopathic Science 1; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims: To consolidate and develop knowledge
gained in HHO1171 Osteopathic Science 1. To introduce high
velocity, low amplitude thrust techniques for various joints. To further
explore osteopathic history and principles. To introduce the students
to the full osteopathic physical examination. At the completion of the
subject students should have a thorough understanding of
osteopathic history and principles. They should be able to carry out
an osteopathic physical examination, and should be capable of
carrying out the major high velocity low amplitude thrust techniques.
content will include: Further development of osteopathic manual soft
tissue skills and the uses of leverage in treatment regimes. Continued
refinement of treatment approaches to effect reflex and structural
changes in muscle. Introduction to the use of high velocity thrust
techniques applicable to the spine. Stress is placed upon
observation prior to palpation and the need to recognise the
anatomical relationships of one region of the body to others.
Osteopathic principles and application of forces to all soft tissues
and joints of the body to normalise mechanics. Contraindications to
the use of osteopathic techniques. Application and interpretation of
tests and protocols relating to patient safety. Further exploration of
the principles and practice of osteopathic medicine as distinct from
allopathic and other complementary therapies. The role of the
Autonomic Nervous System in relation to osteopathic principles and
practice. Introduction to the osteopathic case history, examination
and tissue diagnosis. Joint biomechanics – classification, structure
and function, abnormalities of function, biomechanics of individual
joints. The vertebral unit & somatic dysfunction. Spinal biomechanics
– development of normal curves, assessment of posture both static
and dynamic, assessment of occupational stresses. Peripheral Joint
biomechanics, assessment, diagnosis and integrated treatment
approach to peripheral joint lesions. Abnormal spinal mechanics –
congenital, acquired, developmental. Clinical assessment of joints of
the spine and extremities. Review of surface and regional anatomy.
High Velocity Low Amplitude techniques to the spine.
Required Reading DiGiovanna E and Schiowitz E (1991) An
Osteopathic Approach to Diagnosis and Treatment Lippincott
Philadelphia. Greenman P (1996) Principles of Manual Medicine
2nd ed.Williams and Wilkins Baltimore. Lederman E (1997)
Fundamentals of Manual Therapy Churchill Livingstone New York.
Refshauge K and Gass E (1995) Musculoskeletal Physiotherapy.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
131
Clinical Science and Practice. Butterworth Heinemann Oxford.
Stoddard A (1983) Manual of Osteopathic Practice Hutchinson 2nd
ed London. Stoddard A (1980) Manual of Osteopathic Technique
Hutchinson 3rd ed London. Tucker C and Deoora T K (1994)
Fundamental osteopathic techniques Research Publications Pty Ltd
Melbourne, Australia. Ward R C (Ed) (1997) Foundations for
Osteopathic Medicine Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore.
Recommended Reading Cailliet R (1987) Soft Tissue Pain and
Disability F A Davis Philadelphia. Cailliet R (1987) Low Back Pain
Syndrome F A Davis Philadelphia. Cailliet R (1987) Knee Pain and
Disability F A Davis Philadelphia. Cailliet R (1987) Neck and Arm
pain F A Davis Philadelphia. Walton W J (1989) Osteopathic
Diagnosis and Technique Procedures American Academy of
Osteopathy, Col.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for two semesters
comprising lectures, laboratory/practical workshops and tutorials.
Osteopathic Science 2 is a clinically oriented subject and as a
consequence material presented within Clinical Practicum 2 tutorials
will necessarily augment and support Osteopathic Science 2 subject
content.
Assessment Written examination, practical assessment. A pass in
all components must be achieved before an overall pass can be
awarded.
HHO3175 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 5
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHO2173 Osteopathic Science 3; or equivalent.
Content The aim of the subject is to further develop and
consolidate skills learned in HHO1171 and HHO2549 Osteopathic
Science 1 and 2. To introduce concepts of osteopathic patient
management. To introduce muscle energy techniques for axial and
peripheral areas. At the completion of the subject students will be
able to apply high velocity low amplitude thrust techniques and
muscle energy techniques to all major areas of the body, and will be
able to formulate a management plan for patients suffering from
typical musculoskeletal conditions. This subject is a composite
subject comprising two distinct core elements – 1. Osteopathic
Principles & Practice. 2. Osteopathic Diagnosis & Management.
These core elements will be taught and assessed as distinct subjects.
Students will have to gain a mandatory pass, or better, in all core
elements before they can be awarded a pass within the subject title:
Osteopathic Science 3. Material covered will include: Reinforcement
of history and examination skills acquired in both Osteopathic
Science 1 & 2 and the Clinical Diagnosis and Management subject.
Emphasis will be placed upon osteopathic evaluation of the patient
concentrating upon the neuro-musculoskeletal system. Continued
development of the concepts and skills acquired in osteopathic
Science 1 & 2. Further evolution of osteopathic skills with awareness
of the nature of the forces used; soft tissue and articulatory,
rhythmic, low velocity, and high velocity low amplitude thrust
techniques. Development of the ability to formulate suitable and safe
treatment programs for the diverse range of patients that attend for
osteopathic treatment. Attention being given to those factors which
impact upon patient presentation including relevance of
predisposing and maintaining factors. Continued development, and
further refining, of high velocity low amplitude thrust techniques, the
principles underlying their use, and their place within the
manipulative prescription. The application of HVLA techniques to
functional areas of the spine. Introduction and elaboration of the
concepts and practice of Muscle Energy Technique to include
diagnostic and Neuro physiological models. Muscle Energy
Techniques applicable to the spine and peripheral joints.
Osteopathic assessment and management of peripheral joint
disorders. Development of a differential diagnosis, formulating a
prognosis and prescribing suitable and safe osteopathic treatment.
Introduction to the psycho-social aspects of osteopathic patient
management allowing integration with the units of Psychology and
Sociology.
Required Reading Cailliet R (1987) Soft Tissue Pain and
Disability F A Davis Philadelphia. Cailliet R (1987) Low Back Pain
Syndrome F A Davis Philadelphia. Cailliet R (1987) Knee Pain and
Disability F A Davis Philadelphia. Cailliet R (1987) Neck and Arm
pain F A Davis Philadelphia. Greenman P (1996) Principles of
Manual Medicine 2nd ed.Williams and Wilkins Baltimore. Tucker C
and Deoora T K (1994) Fundamental osteopathic techniques
Research Publications Pty Ltd Melbourne, Australia. Stoddard A
(1983) Manual of Osteopathic Practice Hutchinson 2nd Ed London.
Stoddard A (1980) Manual of Osteopathic Technique Hutchinson
3rd Ed London. DiGiovanna E and Schiowitz E (1991) An
Osteopathic Approach to Diagnosis and Treatment Lippincott
Philadelphia. Walton W J (1989) Osteopathic Diagnosis and
Technique Procedures American Academy of Osteopathy. Mitchell F
L (1995) The Muscle Energy Manual MET Press Michigan. Ward R
C (Ed) (1997) Foundations for Osteopathic Medicine Williams &
Wilkins, Baltimore.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for both
semesters comprising lectures, tutorials/workshops and practical
classes.
Assessment Semester one: Written examination, ; practical,
Semester two: Written examination, practical. All components must
be achieved before an overall pass can be awarded.
HHP1171 PHYSIOLOGY 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The subject includes the introduction to the principles and
concepts of basic human physiological methodology. Major
concepts involved: homeostasis, cellular physiology, blood and the
body’s natural defences, introduction to the nervous system,
membrane and action potentials, transmission of nervous impulses,
muscle and skeletal physiology. The theoretical physiological
knowledge is integrated with laboratory skills enhancing and
extending knowledge through the use of laboratory reports and
questions. Development of critical thinking, research skills and
writing is undertaken throughout the subject.
Required Reading Berne, R.M., Levy, M.N., Koeppen, B.M. &
Stanton, B.A. (2004) Physiology. 4th Edition. Mosby-Year Book, St.
Louis, USA. Or Guyton, A.C. and Hall, J.E. (2000) Textbook of
Medical Physiology. 10th Edition. Saunders, Philadelphia, USA.
Recommended Reading Best, C.H. & Taylor, N.B. (1991)
Physiological Basis of Medical Practice. 12th Edition. Williams &
Wilkins, Baltimore, USA. Ganong, W.F. (2001) Review of Medical
Physiology. 20th Edition. Appleton & Lange, Connecticut, USA.
Guyton, A.C. & Hall, J.E. (2000) Pocket Companion to the Textbook
of Medical Physiology. 10th Edition. Saunders, Philadelphia, USA.
Rhoades, R. & Pflanzer, R. (1996) Human Physiology. 3rd Edition.
Saunders, Philadelphia, USA. Vander, A.J., Sherman, J.H. &
Luciano, D.S. (2004) Human Physiology: The Mechanisms of Body
Function. 9th Edition. McGraw-Hill Book Company, USA
Subject Hours Two one-hour lectures per week and one two-hour
laboratory/workshop on alternate weeks for one semester.
Assessment Semester 2: End of semester exam, 50%; laboratory
reports, 15%; multiple choice mid semester exams (x2), 20%;
assignment (2000 words), 15%. All components must be passed to
achieve an overall pass in the subject.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
132
HHP2172 PHYSIOLOGY 2
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHP1171 Physiology 1; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to consolidate and further develop
knowledge gained in HHP1171 Physiology 1. To study the
physiology of systems not covered in Physiology 1, and to develop a
review process for physiology research papers. At the completion of
the subject students should have a thorough understanding of the
basic physiology of the major systems, and should be able to
demonstrate a critical approach to physiological research. content
will include: Expansion of the fundamental principles and concepts
covered in Physiology 1. The relation of theoretical physiology
knowledge to clinical cases. Understanding the major physiological
concepts involved in respiratory physiology, gastro-intestinal
physiology, metabolism and endocrinology. Further development of
a critical thinking and assessment model for physiology research
papers.
Required Reading As for HHP1171 Physiology 1.
Recommended Reading As for HHP1171 Physiology 1.
Subject Hours One two-hour lecture, one one-hour laboratory
workshop/tutorial or equivalent every week for two semesters.
Assessment Semester One: End of semester exam, 25%; case
study tutorial work, 10%; assignment, 10%; multiple choice mid
semester exam (x2), 10%. Semester 2: End of semester exam, 25%;
case study tutorial work, 10%; multiple choice mid semester exam
(x2), 10%.
HHP3174 PHYSIOLOGY 4
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHP2172 Physiology 2; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to introduce the students to theoretical
and practical concepts of exercise physiology and exercise
prescription, and to consider exercise prescription for specific
patient groups. At the completion of the subject students should have
a broad understanding of the principles of exercise physiology and
exercise prescription, and should understand the principles of
drawing up exercise prescriptions for specific patient groups.
content will include: Physiology of exercise prescription. Principles of
exercise prescription Fitness definitions. Cardiovascular & skeletal
responses to exercise. Aerobic and anaerobic exercise. Exercise
prescription for specific groups.
Required Reading As for HHP2172 Physiology 2.
Recommended Reading Students will be provided with further
reading references for individual lecture topics.
Subject Hours One one-hour lecture and one one-hour tutorial
practical per week in semester one.
Assessment Written examination, 80% assignment 20%
HHR1243 NURSING STUDIES (3) CLINICAL PROJECT
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This is a culminating subject which aims to provide
students with an opportunity to develop and apply their learning
acquired in the previous subjects in the course. The main focus will
be on the application of knowledge and skills in the provision of
health care to clients/patients in a diversity of locations/settings.
Students’ will present a proposal for a project, which forms the basis
of their theoretical, field and assessment undertakings. Following
acceptance the project will be drawn up. The clinical project should
draw on and/or encompass-advanced nursing skills and techniques,
problem-solving techniques, organisation and management
strategies, the incorporation of appropriate biological and social
sciences, relevant research findings, teaching-learning approaches.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Subject Hours Six hours per week for one semester or equivalent.
Assessment Preparation of contract, 20%; written project, 80%.
HHR4114 A & M CLINICAL MEDICINE 3
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHR3244 A & M Therapeutic Applications;
HHR4114 A & M Clinical Medicine 1; HHR4124 A & M Clinical
Medicine 2; HHP3434 Counselling Skills for TCM Practitioners;
HHA3254 Clinical Practice (A&M) 4; or equivalent.
Content Using a wide range of case studies, students will
undertake TCM differential diagnosis, establish the treatment
principal, develop a treatment and management plan and where
appropriate carry out treatment under supervision for clients
experiencing the following: jing luo disharmonies; zang fu
disharmonies; fundamental substance disharmonies; wu xing
disharmonies; 6 division disharmonies; san jiao disharmonies; 8
extra meridian disharmonies; four radical disharmonies; mixed
disharmonies; continuing development of communication skills;
exploring the many facets of the client/practitioner relationship.
Required Reading Ellis, A., Wiseman, N. and Boss, K. 1991,
Fundamentals of Chinese Medicine, Paradigm Publications,
Brookline, Massachusetts. Rogers, C. and C. 1989, Point Location
and Point Dynamics Manual, Acupuncture Colleges Publishing,
Sydney.
Recommended Reading Berkow, R. (ed.) 1991, The Merck
Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, Merck, Sharp and Dohme
Research Laboratories, New Jersey. Chen, J. and Wang, N. (eds)
1988, Acupuncture Case Histories from China, Eastland Press,
Seattle. Chen, Y. and Deng L. (eds) 1989, Essentials of
Contemporary Chinese Acupuncturists Clinical Experiences, Foreign
Languages Press, Beijing. Cheng, X. (ed.) 1987, Chinese
Acupuncture and Moxibustion, Foreign Languages Press, Beijing.
Crancher, J. 1991, Counselling skills: the role in an acupuncture
practice Australian Journal of Acupuncture Vol 6, No 2. Jackson,
D.M. and Soothill, R. 1989, Is The Medicine Making You Ill? Angus
and Robertson, Sydney. Flaws, B. 1990, Migraine and Traditional
Chinese Medicine, Blue Poppy Press, Boulder Co. Kurishima, S.
1977, Circulatory Diseases, Unicorn Press, Hong Kong. Liu, F. and
Mau, L.Y. 1980, Chinese Medical Terminology, Commercial Press,
Hong Kong. Maciocia, G. 1989, The Foundations of Chinese
Medicine, Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh. Qui, M.L. and Su, X.M.
(ed P. Deadman) 1985, Nanjing Seminars Transcript, London The
Journal Of Traditional Chinese Medicine. Ross, J. 1985, Zang Fu
The Organ Systems of Traditional Chinese Medicine 2nd edn,
Churchill Livingstone, New York. Seem, M. 1993, A New American
Acupuncture, Blue Poppy Press, Boulder, Colorado. Shanghai
College of TCM (trans and ed J. O’Connor and D. Bensky) 1981,
Acupuncture. A Comprehensive Text, Eastland Press, Chicago. Tai,
D. 1987, Acupuncture and Moxibustion, Harper and Row, Sydney.
Watson, K. 1984, A Diagnostic Manual for the Traditional
Acupuncturist, Acupuncture Colleges Publishing, Sydney.
Subject Hours Fifty two hours for one semester comprising lectures
and tutorials or equivalent.
Assessment Seminar presentation, 30%; one test, 30%; one
written assignment, 40%. A pass must be gained for each
component of the assessment.
HHS3171 PSYCHOLOGY AND SOCIAL SCIENCES 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The subject aims to introduce students to the different
psychological and sociological aspects of healthcare practice.
Students study gender, age, ethnicity and socio-economics status
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
133
and the relevance in healthcare practice. Students examine the
needs of individuals with a terminal illness and their carers, and the
potential role of the Osteopath. Students develop communication
and interviewing skills relevant to Osteopathic practice. Students
learn to understand the effects of stress on the patient as well as the
healthcare practitioner and how this may be addressed. Students
study health compromising behaviours and appropriate intervention
as well gain an understanding of psychological issues relating to
human development.
Required ReadingFrench, Sally (1998) Physiotherapy, A
Psychosocial Approach 2nd ed. Butterworth-Heinemann, Oxford.
Allen Felicity (1998) Health Psychology Theory and Practice, Allen
and Unwin, Australia.
Recommended Reading To be advised by subject lecturer.
Subject Hours One, One hour lecture per week for the first
semester. One, one hour tutorial per week for the second semester.
Assessment Assignment 70%, written exam 30%.
HHT1000 MAJOR CLASSICS – NEI JING
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1002 Fundamentals of Chinese Medicine; or
equivalent.
Content Specific attention will be directed to such ideas as yin-
yang; wu xing; the heaven, earth and humanity principle; the nature
and meaning of Shen; the different ways of specifying and locating
Qi in the body and external world; the notion of body-mind; the
cultivation of life (Qi) and the idea of the good practitioner. The
exploration of Nei Jing ideas is linked to major philosophical
concepts, which inform the theory and practice of CM.
Required Reading Ni, M.-S. (1995). The Yellow Emperor’s
classic of medicine. Boston: Shambala Publication. Wu, J.-N.
(1993). Ling Shu or the spiritual pivot. Washington, DC: The Taoist
Center.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Three hours per week or equivalent for one
semester comprising lectures and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One written project comprising two parts (2000
words) (100%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all
components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt will be
50%.
HHT1001 INTRODUCTION TO CHINESE MEDICAL LITERACY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Basic terms in Chinese medicine including: names of
commonly used herbs; names of common acupuncture points and
general terminology used in Chinese Medicine theory; writing
Chinese characters including: stroke order and balance; pin yin
transliteration and use of tone marks; pronunciation of Chinese
terms; introduction to Chinese medical dialogue.
Required Reading Xu, H., & Xu, Y. (1999). Chinese medical
literacy (Vols. 1 & 2). Melbourne: Victoria University of Technology,
School of Health Sciences. Xu, H., & Xu, Y. (2003). Introduction to
Chinese medical literacy. Melbourne: Victoria University of
Technology, School of Health Science.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One oral examination (20%); two written
examinations. To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all
components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment item (oral examination) may be re-attempted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt will be
50%. Where the final examinations are failed, supplementary
examinations will be offered. The maximum possible mark on any
supplementary examination will be 50%.
HHT1002 FUNDAMENTALS OF CHINESE MEDICINE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The clinical gaze of Chinese medicine; overview of
historical and philosophical context; function and dysfunction
according to Chinese Medicine; introductory illness states – Yin
Yang, Wu Xing, Qi, Xue, Jin Ye, Ba Gang; psyche according to
Chinese medicine; causes and occurrences of disease; Zang Fu
organ system, Curious Fu; introduction to diagnostic methods; Zang
fu/jing luo interrelationships; mechanisms of disease development;
basic herbal properties, functions and theories: Si Qi, Wu Wei, four
directions, courier herbs, classification, compatibility, cautions,
contraindication, quality, harvesting.
Required Reading Maciocia, G. (1989). The foundations of
Chinese medicine. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone
Recommended Reading Bensky, D., Clavey, S., & Schrojer, E.
(2004). Chinese herbal medicine: Materia Medica (3rd ed.).
Seattle: Eastland Press. Geng, J., Juang, W., Ren, T., & Ma, X.
(1991). Practical traditional Chinese medicine and pharmacology:
Herbal formulas. Beijing: New World Press. Hicks, A., Hicks, J., &
Mole, P. (2004). Five element constitutional acupuncture.
Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Huang, Y.-R. (1995). Advanced
textbook of traditional Chinese medicine and pharmacology (Vol.
11, Book 1). Beijing: New World Press. Kaptchuk, T. (2000).
Chinese medicine: The web that has no weaver (Rev. ed.). London:
Rider. Seifert, G. (1983). The cause of disease and the classification
of symptoms patterns in Chinese medicine. Sydney: Author. State
Administration of TCM. (1995). Advanced textbook on traditional
Chinese medicine and pharmacology (Vol. 1). Beijing: New World
Press. Wiseman, N., & Ellis, A. (1996). Fundamentals of Chinese
medicine. (Rev. ed.). Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications. Yin, H.-
H., & Shuai, X.-Z. (Eds.). (1991). Fundamentals of traditional
Chinese medicine. Beijing: Foreign Languages Press. Zhang, E.-Q.
(Ed.). (1988). The Chinese Materia Medica. Shanghai: Publishing
House of Shanghai University of Traditional Chinese Medicine.
Subject Hours Eleven (11) hours per week or equivalent for one
semester comprising lectures, tutorials and workshops. Four hours
per week dedicated to herbs. Students should reasonably expect to
devote additional private contact hours of at least 2-3 times more
than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One assignment (1200 words) (30%); one combined
practical and oral examination (10%) (hurdle requirement); two final
theory examinations (30% each part, total 60%). To obtain at least
a Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (assignment and
combined practical and oral examination) may be re-attempted
once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-
attempt will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a
supplementary examination may be offered. The maximum possible
mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This unit is a
hurdle requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as
indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
HHT1005 CHINESE MEDICAL DIAGNOSIS AND PATHOGENESIS 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1002 Fundamentals of Chinese Medicine; or
equivalent.
Content The ‘four examinations’; the eight principles of diagnosis;
additional Oriental diagnostic methods e.g., hara diagnosis; the
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
134
aetiology and manifestation of the energetic patterns of disharmony
as they pertain to the jing luo, wu xing, zang fu and fundamental
substances; etiology and pathomechanisms of symptom
presentations; methods of differential diagnosis; overview of febrile
disease differentiation – six channels, four levels, San Jiao
syndromes; case histories and individual symptom differentiation;
Materia Medica and Jing-luo system consolidated in relation to
diagnostic treatment design.
Required Reading Deng, T.-T. (1999). Practical diagnosis in
traditional Chinese medicine. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Wiseman, N., & Ellis, A. (1995). Fundamentals of Chinese
medicine. (Rev. ed.). Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications. Lu
Yubin. (1996). Pulse diagnosis. Jian: China Shandong Science &
Technology Press. Maciocia, G. (2004). Diagnosis in Chinese
medicine: A comprehensive guide. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures, tutorials, workshops and self managed learning
activities.
Assessment One combined practical and oral examination (50%)
(hurdle requirement); one final examination (50%). To obtain at least
a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (combined practical
and oral examination) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency
standard must be obtained on any re-attempted combined practical
and oral examination. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any reattempt will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a
supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible
mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is
a hurdle requirement.
HHT1006 ACUPUNCTURE POINT LOCATION
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1002 Fundamentals of Chinese Medicine; or
equivalent.
Content Introduction to Jing-luo theory and an overview of
acupuncture point function and dynamics; proportional
measurements; gross surface anatomy as it pertains to the location
of acupuncture points; the location of acupuncture points on the 12
primary meridians, Ren Mai and Du Mai; contraindications of
specific acupuncture points; depths of needling of acupuncture
points.
Required Reading Chen, E. (1995). Cross-sectional anatomy of
acupoints. New York: Churchill Livingstone. Deadman, P., Al-
Khafaji, M., & Baker, K. (1998). A manual of acupuncture (Rev.
ed.). California: Eastland Press. Lian, Y.-L., Chen, C.-Y., Hammes,
M., & Kolster, C. (2000). The seirin pictorial atlas of acupuncture:
An illustrated manual of acupuncture points. Koln: Konemann. State
Administration of TCM China. (1990). The location of acupuncture
points. Beijing: Foreign Languages Press.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Seven hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, workshops and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One oral examination (50%) (hurdle requirement);
one practical examination (50%) (hurdle requirement). To obtain at
least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment
must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (oral
examination and practical examination) may be re-attempted once
only. Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted
examination. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any
reattempt will be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.
HHT1007 CHINESE PHARMACOPEIA
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1002 Fundamentals of Chinese Medicine; or
equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HHT1005 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and
Pathogenesis 1; HHT1008 Introduction to Clinical Practice; or
equivalents.
Content Introduction and overview of the historical development of
Chinese herbal medicine; the categories of the Chinese Materia
Medica; major herb theories, precautions, naming of herbs: regions,
colours, plant parts, names and alternatives; the categories of the
Materia Medica (e.g., release exterior, clear heat, drain downward,
drain dampness, expel wind-damp, transform phlegm and stop
cough, aromatically transform dampness, relieve food stagnation
regulate Qi, regulate Xue, warm interior and expel cold, tonifying,
restrain essence, Shen calming, orifice opening, extinguish wind
and stop tremors, expel parasites); external applications; character
writing and pronunciation of Chinese medical terminology will be
extended. The characters for the names of the herbs will be
emphasized along with the Latin binomial (botanical) and common
names of the herbs. The principles and application of Pao Zhi.
Required Reading Bensky, D., Gamble, A., & Kaptchuk, T. J.
(1993). Chinese herbal medicine: Materia Medica (Rev. ed.).
Seattle: Eastland Press. Coop, P., & Hoang, P. (1997). Character
writing manual and index for Chinese Materia Medica. Melbourne:
Victoria University of Technology, Department of Health Sciences.
Siefert, G. (Ed.). (1996). Understanding Chinese herbs, medical
substances. Sydney: Siefert. Sionneau, P. (1995). Pao Zhi. An
introduction to the use of processed Chinese medicinals (B. Flaws,
Trans.). Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Xu, H., & Xu, Y. (2003).
Introduction to Chinese medical literacy. Melbourne: Victoria
University of Technology, School of Health Science.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures, tutorials and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One project (50%); one tutorial presentation (30%);
one examination (20%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Failed assessment item (project) may be re-attempted and
resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is
failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum
possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This
subject is a hurdle requirement.
HHT1101 ACUPUNCTURE POINT LOCATION 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Introduction to Jing-luo theory and an overview of
acupuncture point function and dynamics; proportional
measurements; gross surface anatomy as it pertains to the location
and depth of acupuncture points; location of acupuncture points on
the 12 primary meridians, Ren Mai and Du Mai, and the major
extra-ordinary channels; contraindications of specific acupuncture
points; depths of needling of acupuncture points. Naming and
numbering of the acupuncture points.
Required Reading Chen, E. (1995). Cross-sectional anatomy of
acupoints. New York: Churchill Livingstone. Deadman, P., Al-
Khafaji, M., & Baker, K. (2001). A manual of acupuncture (Rev.
ed.). California: Eastland Press. Lian, Y.-L., Chen, C.-Y., Hammes,
M., & Kolster, C. (2000). The seirin pictorial atlas of acupuncture:
An illustrated manual of acupuncture points. Koln: Konemann.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
135
Recommended Reading Agur, A. M. R., & Dalley, A. F. (2004).
Grant's atlas of anatomy (11th ed.). Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Moore, K. L. (1992). Clinically oriented anatomy (3rd ed.).
Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins. Rogers, C., & Rogers, C. (1995).
Point location and points dynamics manual (Rev. ed.). Sydney: ACA
Publications. State Administration of TCM China. (1990). The
location of acupuncture points. Beijing: Foreign Languages Press.
Subject Hours Five hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures and workshops. Students should reasonably
expect to devote additional private contact hours of at least 2-3
times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One practical examination (50%) (proficiency
standard hurdle requirement); one written examination (50% )
(hurdle requirement). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally
all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment items (examinations) may be re-attempted once only.
Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted practical
examination. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any
reattempt will be 50%. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All
assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the
Learning Outcomes.
HHT2000 HEALTH ENHANCEMENT (YANG SHENG)
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The medicinal use of foods, the use of foods to prevent
disease and maintain health, Chinese dietary theory and practice,
the role of lifestyle activities, the meaning of mental cultivation,
breathing and physical exercises (introduction to Tai Qi or Qi
Gong).
Required Reading Chia, M., & Li, J. (1996). The inner structure
of tai chi kung. Huntington, New York: Healing Tao Books.
Gunaratana, H. (1991). Mindfulness in plain English. Boston:
Wisdom Publications. Leggett, D. (1999). Recipes for self-healing.
Totnes, Devon: Meridian Press. Sun, G.-N., Liu, Z.-C., Li, H.-
0.,Yang, S.-I., &Yang, C.-N.(1990). Health preservation and
rehabilitation (X.-Z. Li, Trans. & E. Q. Zhang, Ed.). Shanghai:
Shanghai College of Traditional Chinese Medicine Press.
Recommended Reading Chang, C.-l., Cao, Q.-R., & Li, B.-Z.
(1996). Vegetables as medicine (R. Edwards & D.-Y. Zeng, Trans.)
(2nd ed.). Kurandra, Queensland: Rams Skull Press. Dai, Y.-F., &
Liu, C.-J. (1996). Fruit as medicine (R. Edwards & Z.-M. Gong,
Trans.) (3rd ed.). Kurandra, Queensland: Rams Skull Press. Flaws,
B., & Wolf, H. L. (1993). Prince Wen Hui’s cook: Chinese dietary
therapy. Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications. Liu, J.-l., & Peck, G.
(Eds.). (1995). Chinese dietary therapy. Melbourne, Australia:
Churchill Livingstone.
Pitchford, P. (1996).Healing with whole foods. Oriental traditions
and modern nutrition (Rev. ed.). Berkeley: North Atlantic. Wilson,
G., D. (1993). Take this pebble from my hand. Exploring
philosophy, food, energy and balance through Chinese medicine.
Brisbane: Seventh Heaven Books.
Subject Hours Three hours per week or equivalent for one
semester comprising lectures, laboratories, demonstrations and
workshops. Students should reasonably expect to devote additional
private contact hours of at least 2-3 times more than the stipulated
class contact hours.
Assessment One combined practical and oral assessment (50%);
one theory examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Failed assessment item (combined practical and oral
assessment) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency standard
must be obtained on any re-attempted examination. Maximum
possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt will be 50%.
Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary examination
may be offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary
examination will be 50%. All assessment items address the CGA
levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
HHT2001 FUNDAMENTAL HERBAL FORMULAS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1005 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and
Pathogenesis; HHT1007 Chinese Pharmacopea; or equivalents.
Corequisite(s) HHT2003 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and
Pathogenesis 2; RBM2575 Phytopharmaceutics; or equivalents.
Content The Traditional Formulary methods: formulas and
treatment methods, the categories of formulas, the composition and
changes of formulae; the CM function of specific formulas; usage of
each formulas. The categories of the Traditional Formulary (external
dispersing, downward evacuating, internal warming, restraining
essence, Shen calming, orifice opening, wind managing, dryness
managing, Qi regulating, blood regulating, damp dispelling,
phlegm dispelling, reducing food stagnation, parasite expelling) For
each formula studied students will explore the relationship of
traditional formulas to treatment strategies and pathophysiology of
presentation, the relationships between the traditional
pharmacopoeia and the design of the formula, including contra-
indications. Script writing using Chinese characters will expand the
base knowledge of formula study.
Required Reading Bensky, D., & Barolet, R. (1990). Chinese
herbal medicine, formulas and strategies. Seattle: Eastland Press.
Ehling, D., & Swart, S. (1996). The Chinese herbalist's handbook
(Rev. ed.). Santa Fe: Inword Press. Therapeutic Goods Act, (1989~
& Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site,
www.tga.gov.au/docs/html Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act,
(1994~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site,
dms003.dpc.vic.gov.au/l2d/T/.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Four hours per week or equivalent for two
semesters comprising lectures, tutorials and self-managed learning
activities.
Assessment One written assignment (1000 words) (20%); two
examinations (40% each) over two semesters. To obtain at least a
Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (written assignment)
may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible
marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where any
final examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be
offered. The maximum possible mark on any supplementary
examination will be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.
HHT2002 ACUPUNCTURE POINT DYNAMICS AND JING LUO THEORY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1002 Fundamentals of Chinese Medicine;
HHT1006 Acupuncture Point Location; or equivalents.
Content Jing-luo including the muscle-tendino meridians, luo mai,
divergent meridians, internal pathways and the inter-relationships
between the various elements and meridians; the functions and
dynamics of the major categories of acupuncture points.
Required Reading Deadman, P., Al-Khafaji, M., & Baker, K.
(1998). A manual of acupuncture (Rev. ed.). California: Eastland
Press. Rogers, C., & Rogers, C. (1995). Point location and points
dynamics manual (Rev. ed.). Sydney: ACA Publications.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Three hours per week or equivalent for one
semester comprising seminars, workshops and self-managed
learning activities.
Assessment One mid semester examination (50%); one final
examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
136
all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment item (mid semester examination) may be re-attempted
once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any
reattempt will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a
supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible
mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is
a hurdle requirement.
HHT2003 CHINESE MEDICAL DIAGNOSIS AND PATHOGENESIS 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1005 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and
Pathogenesis 1; HHT1006 Acupuncture Point Location; HHT1007
Chinese Pharmacopea; or equivalents.
Content Further development of four the ‘four examinations’,
including palpation of channels, points and Hara diagnosis; detail
of the differential diagnostic process; disease aetiology illness, Jing
luo syndromes, Zang-fu mixed syndromes, febrile disease
differentiation – six channels complicated patterns; Wen Bing detail
combining Zang Fu, San Jiao and Latent diseases; examination of
tongue, skin, and teeth; diagnosis and case histories; individual
symptom differentiation; application of Materia Medica and Jing-luo
theory in relation to diagnostic outcomes.
Required Reading Deng, T.-T. (1999). Practical diagnosis in
traditional Chinese medicine. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Wiseman, N., & Ellis, A. (1995). Fundamentals of Chinese
medicine. (Rev. ed.). Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications. Liu
Yanchi. (Ed.). (1995). Basic theories of traditional Chinese
medicine. Beijing: Academy Press. Maciocia, G. (2004). Diagnosis
in Chinese medicine: A comprehensive guide. Edinburgh: Churchill
Livingstone
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures, seminars, workshops and self managed
learning activities.
Assessment One assignment (1200 words) (30%); one combined
practical and oral assessment (30%) (hurdle requirement); one final
examination (40%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally
all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment items (assignment and combined practical and oral
examination) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency standard
must be obtained on any re-attempted combined practical and oral
examination. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any
reattempt or resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination
is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The
maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will be
50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.
HHT2005 CHINESE MEDICINE ASEPSIS AND STERILIZATION
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1006 Acupuncture Point Location; SBM1525
Anatomy and Physiology 2; or equivalents.
Content Asepsis in Chinese Medicine practice; disinfection and
sterilization in Chinese Medicine practice; basic microbiology and
epidemiology for Chinese Medicine practice; cross infection,
infection control and risk factors in Chinese Medicine practice; legal
issues for the safe practice of acupuncture and herbal medicine.
Required Reading Infection Control Guidelines for Acupuncture –
Consultation Draft, (2004). Available from Chinese Medicine
Registration Board Web site, www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-
news/draft/InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf Lee,
G., & Bishop, B. (1997). Microbiology and infection control for
health professionals. Australia: Prentice Hall. Tortora, G. J., Funke,
B. R., & Case, C. L. (2004). Microbiology: An introduction (8th ed.).
Prentice Hall. Standards of Practice for Acupuncture. Health
(Infectious Diseases) Regulations, (1990~ & Am.). Available from
Government of Victoria Web site,
www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Three hours per week or equivalent for one
semester comprising lectures, laboratory sessions, workshops and
self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Two laboratory reports (15% each); one examination
(70%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all
components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment items (laboratory reports) may be re-attempted and
resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any reattempt and resubmission will be 50%. Where any final
examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered.
The maximum possible mark on any supplementary examination will
be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.
HHT2006 ACUPUNCTURE NEEDLING
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1006 Acupuncture Point Location; HHT2002
Acupuncture Point Dynamics and Jing Luo Theory; or equivalents.
Corequisite(s) HHT2005 Chinese Medicine Asepsis and
Sterilization; or equivalent.
Content Locating and correctly needling acupuncture points; the
notion of intent as it applies in CM practice, needle insertion;
obtaining the de Qi sensation; moving Qi; management of needle
accidents and contra-indications; review of cupping in the context of
needle techniques; the relationship between acupuncture point
selection and ‘reading’ the radial pulse before and after needling
will be explored; introduction to plum blossom needling and three-
edge bleeding techniques.
Required Reading Auterouche, B., Gervais, G., Auteroche, M.,
Navailh, P., & Toui-Kan, E. (1992). Acupuncture & moxibustion. A
guide to clinical practice (O. Kivity, Trans.). Melbourne: Churchill
Livingstone. Li, S., & Tan, X. (1998) Chinese therapeutic methods of
acupoints. Hunan: Hunan Science and Technology Press. Infection
Control Guidelines for Acupuncture – Consultation Draft, (2004).
Available from Chinese Medicine Registration Board Web site,
www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-
news/draft/InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf Lian,
Y.-L., Chen, C.-Y., Hammes, M., & Kolster, C. (2000). The seirin
pictorial atlas of acupuncture: An illustrated manual of acupuncture
points. Koln: Konemann. O’Connor, J., & Bensky, D. (1983).
Acupuncture: A Comprehensive Text. Shanghai College of
Traditional Chinese Medicine. Chicago: Eastland Press. Standards
of Practice for Acupuncture. Health (Infectious Diseases) Regulations,
(1990~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site,
www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Two hours per week or equivalent of workshops for
one semester.
Assessment Two combined practical and oral exams (50% each)
(pass/fail) (hurdle requirements). To obtain an Ungraded Pass in the
subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted
and passed. Failed assessment items (combined practical and oral
examinations) may be re-attempted once only. Proficiency standard
must be obtained on any re-attempted combined practical and oral
examination. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any
reattempt will be 50%. This subject is a hurdle requirement.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
137
HHT2007 TCM REMEDIAL MASSAGE (AN MO TUI NA)
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1005 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and
Pathogenesis 1; HHT1006 Acupuncture Point Location, or
equivalents.
Content Adult and paediatric Tui Na techniques. Client care
(privacy and sensitivity). Consolidation of Channel pathways, point
location and functions of major points used in Tui Na practice. Gua
Sha techniques and protocols. Cupping and Moxibustion theory and
practice. Contra-indications for Tui Na, Gua Sha, Moxibustion and
Cupping.
Required Reading Auterouche, B., Gervais, G., Auteroche, M.,
Navailh, P., & Toui-Kan, E. (1992). Acupuncture & moxibustion. A
guide to clinical practice (O. Kivity, Trans.). Melbourne: Churchill
Livingstone. Nielson, A. (1995). Gua Sha: Traditional technique for
modern practice. New York: Churchill Livingstone. Zhang, E.-Q.
(Ed.). (1988). Chinese massage. A practical English-Chinese library
of traditional Chinese medicine (Vol. 10). Shanghai: Publishing
House of Shanghai University of Traditional Chinese Medicine.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Two hours per week for two semesters comprising
workshops, seminars and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Semester One: One combined practical and oral
assessment (50%) (hurdle requirement). Semester Two: One
combined practical and oral assessment (50%) (hurdle requirement).
To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of
assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items
(combined practical and oral assessment) may be re-attempted once
only. Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted
combined practical and oral assessment. Maximum possible marks
to be obtained on any reattempt will be 50%.
HHT2009 PHARMACOPOEIA AND DISPENSING
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1005 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and
Pathogenesis 1; HHT1007 Chinese Pharmacopoeia; or equivalents.
Content The lesser used herbs from the categories of the Materia
Medica: release exterior, clear heat, drain downward, drain
dampness, expel wind-damp, transform phlegm and stop cough,
aromatically transform dampness, relieve food stagnation, regulate
qi, regulate xue, warm interior and expel cold, tonifying, (Qi, Yang,
Yin, Xue) restrain essence, (stabilise and bind) shen calming, orifice
opening, extinguish wind and stop tremors. Pao Zhi theory and
practical.
Required Reading Bensky, D., Clavey, S., & Schrojer, E. (2004).
Chinese herbal medicine: Materia Medica (3rd. ed.). Seattle:
Eastland Press. Siefert, G. (Ed.). (1996). Understanding Chinese
herbs, medical substances. Sydney: Author. Sionneau, P. (1995).
Pao Zhi. An introduction to the use of processed Chinese
medicinals. Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Sionneau, P. (1997).
Dui Yao. The art of combining Chinese medicinals. Boulder, CO:
Blue Poppy Press.
Recommended Reading Chen, S., & Li, F. (1993). Clinical
guide to Chinese herbs and formula. London: Churchill Livingstone.
Coop, P., & Hoang, P. (1997). Character writing manual and index
for Chinese Materia Medica. Melbourne, Australia: Victoria
University of Technology, Department of Health Sciences. Flaws, B.
(1999). 260 essential Chinese medicinals. Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy
Press. Huang, Y.-R. (1995). Advanced textbook of traditional
Chinese medicine and pharmacology (Vol. 11, Book 1). Beijing:
New World Press. Xu, H. (Ed.). (1999). Herb selection booklet. St
Albans, Australia: Victoria University, School of Health Sciences. Xu,
L., & Wang, W. (2002). Chinese Materia Medica. Combinations
and applications. Hertz: Donica Publishing.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures, tutorials and practical cooking laboratories.
Students should reasonably expect to devote additional private
contact hours of at least 2-3 times more than the stipulated class
contact hours.
Assessment One written assignment (1200 words) (20%); one
combined practical and oral examination (40%) (proficiency
standard hurdle requirement); one 2-hour written theory examination
(40%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally all components
of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment
item (written assignment and combined practical and oral
assessment) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible
marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Proficiency
standard must be obtained on any re-attempted practical and oral
examination. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed
in the first instance with the Unit Co-ordinator. Where the final
examination is failed, a supplementary examination may be offered.
The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will
be 50%. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All assessment items
address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
HHT2011 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE 1
Campus St Albans, Flinders Lane, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Satisfactory completion of Year 1 of the HBAH
degree; or equivalent
Content During the first week of the semester, students will attend
seminars to orient themselves to the second level of this supervised
clinical program and to revisit learning expectations required of
students in the clinic. Topics include: preparation of necessary
acupuncture equipment for each clinic room; maintenance of client
records; methods of Pao Zhi including grinding, dry frying, char
frying and honey frying; practical skills include the monitoring
consultation processes; herbal identification, use of scales, accurate
and safe dispensing of herbs; explanation of herbal preparation to
clients; storage and handling of herbs, Materia Medica substitutions;
arriving at diagnosis and treatment principle; practitioner diagnosis
and treatment details; general client care and comfort; pulse taking;
arranging appointments; the role of assistant in the clinical setting;
privacy and confidentiality issues.
Required Reading Australian Acupuncture & Chinese Medicine
Association Code of Ethics. (n.d.). Available from AACMA Web
site, http://www.acupuncture.org.au/code_of_ethics.cfm
Ferrigno, P. (Ed.). (2005). Clinical manual [CD-ROM]. Chinese
Medicine Unit, School of Health Sciences, Victoria University of
Technology, Australia.
Infection Control Guidelines for Acupuncture – Consultation Draft,
(2004). Available from Chinese Medicine Registration Board Web
site, http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-
news/draft/InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf
Standards of Practice for Acupuncture. Health (Infectious Diseases)
Regulations, (1990~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria
Web site, http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of seventy-two (72) hours in an
approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester
(hurdle requirement).
Assessment Supervised placement comprising successful
completion of required 72 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle
requirement) and overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical
placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); combined practical
and oral examination (proficiency standard hurdle requirement). To
obtain at least an Ungraded Pass in the unit, normally all
components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment items (combined practical and oral examination) may be
re-attempted once only. Proficiency standard must be obtained on
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
138
any re-attempted practical and oral examination. Any failed
assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with
the Clinical Co-ordinator. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All
assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the
Learning Outcomes.
HHT2100 FORMULAE AND STRATEGIES 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1005 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and
Pathogenesis 1; HHT1007 Chinese Pharmacopoeia; or equivalents.
Content The fourteen categories in which formulae are assembled.
Formula construction. Treatment strategies. Functions, indications
and associated treatment principles. Classical and modern
applications and interpretations of formulae. Relationship to clinical
usage. Differentiation amongst similar formulae. Guidelines for
determining correct formulae for particular clinical situations.
Notions of dosage and the appropriateness of varying dosages.
Formulae modifications.
Required Reading Bensky, D., & Barolet, R. (2004). Chinese
herbal medicine. Formulas and strategies. Seattle: Eastland Press.
Ellis, A. (2003). Notes from south mountain. A guide to
concentrated herb granules. Berkeley: Thin Moon Publishing.
Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, (1994~ & Am.). Available from
Government of Victoria Web site,
http://dms003.dpc.vic.gov.au/l2d/T/. Therapeutic Goods Act,
(1989~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site,
http://www.tga.gov.au/docs/html. Wildlife Protection (Regulation
of Exports and Imports) Act, (1982~ & Am.). Available from
Australian Government Web site, http://frli.law.gov.au/.
Recommended Reading Dharmananda, S. (1988). Pearls from
the golden cabinet. Long Beach, CA: Oriental Healing Arts Institute.
Flaws, B. (1993). How to write a CM prescription. Boulder, CO:
Blue Poppy Press. Geng, J., Juang, W., Ren, T., & Ma, X. (1991).
Practical traditional Chinese medicine and pharmacology: Herbal
formulas. Beijing: New World Press. Qiao, Y., & Stone, A. (2002).
The traditional Chinese medicine. Formula study guide. Boulder,
CO: Snow Lotus Press. State Administration of TCM. (1995).
Advanced textbook on traditional Chinese medicine and
pharmacology (Vols. 1 and 2). Beijing: New World Press.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures and tutorials. Students should reasonably expect
to devote additional private contact hours of at least three times
more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One written examination (end-of-semester) (100%). To
obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally all components of
assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item
(examination) may be resubmitted and re-attempted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt will be
50%. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All assessment items address
the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
HHT2104 ACUPUNCTURE NEEDLING: THEORY AND PRACTICE 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT1201 Acupuncture Point Location 2;
RBM1910 Microbiology for Chinese Medicine Practitioners; or
equivalents.
Content Surface anatomy relevant to locating and needling of
acupuncture points; anatomy relevant to the depths of needling
acupuncture points; locating and correctly needling acupuncture
points; the notion of intent as it applies in CM practice, needle
insertion; obtaining the de Qi sensation; moving Qi; management of
needle accidents; contraindications for needling. Review of cupping
in the context of needle techniques. The relationship between
acupuncture point selection and ‘reading’ the radial pulse before
and after needling. Introduction to plum blossom needling and three-
edge bleeding techniques. Jing-luo theory including the muscle-
tendino meridians, luo mai, divergent meridians, internal pathways
and the inter-relationships between the various elements and
meridians; the functions and dynamics of the major categories of
acupuncture points.
Required Reading Chen, E. (1995). Cross-sectional anatomy of
acupoints. New York: Churchill Livingstone. Deadman, P., Al-
Khafaji, M., & Baker, K. (1998). A manual of acupuncture (Rev.
ed.). California: Eastland Press. Guidelines on Basic Training and
Safety in Acupuncture, (1996). Available from World Health
Organization Web site, www.who.int/medicines/library/trm/
acupuncture/who-edm-trm-99-1/who-edm-trm-99-1.pdf. Infection
Control Guidelines for Acupuncture – Consultation Draft, (2004).
Available from Chinese Medicine Registration Board Web site,
http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-
news/draft/InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf. Pirog,
J. E. (1996). The practical application of meridian style
acupuncture. Berkeley, CA: Pacific View Press. Standards of Practice
for Acupuncture. Health (Infectious Diseases) Regulations, (1990~ &
Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site,
http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html.
Recommended Reading Auteroche, B., Gervais, G., Auteroche,
M., Navilh, P., & Toui-Kan, E. (1992). Acupuncture and
moxibustion. A guide to clinical practice (O. Kivity, Trans.).
Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone. Bai, J. (Ed.). (1977). Advanced
textbook on traditional Chinese medicine and pharmacology (Vol.
4). Acupuncture and moxibustion. Beijing: New World Press.
Charles, S. (1986). Clinical relationship of the five elements and
pathology. Australian Journal of Acupuncture, 2, 8-13. Deadman, P.
(1984). Needle technique. Part 1. Journal of Chinese Medicine, 14,
11-14. Deadman, P. (1984). Needle technique. Part 2. Journal of
Chinese Medicine, 15, 21-23. De Schepper, L. (1995).
Acupuncture in practice. New Mexico: Full of Life Publishing. Fraser,
P. (1985). Modern needle technique and clinical practice. Journal of
Chinese Medicine, 17, 18-21. Gao, L. (1990). Understanding the
theory of acupuncture contra-indications according to the Nei Jing.
Journal of Chinese Medicine, 34, 21-22. Lade, A. (1989).
Acupuncture points: Images and functions. Washington: Eastland
Press. Lee, M. (1992). Insights of a senior acupuncturist. Boulder,
CO: Blue Poppy Press. Li, S., & Tan, X. (1998). Chinese therapeutic
methods of acupoints. Hunan: Hunan Science and Technology
Press. Lian, Y.-L., Chen, C.-Y., Hammes, M., & Kolster, C. (2000).
The seirin pictorial atlas of acupuncture: An illustrated manual of
acupuncture points. Köln: Könemann. Lou, B. (1985). Needle
technique. Part 1. Australian Journal of Acupuncture, 2, 16-19. Lou,
B. (1989). Moving qi by needling. Australian Journal of
Acupuncture, 11, 27-28. Low, R. (1983). The secondary vessels of
acupuncture. Northamptonshire: Thorsons. State Administration of
TCM China. (1990). The location of acupuncture points. Beijing:
Foreign Languages Press.
Subject Hours Five hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures, tutorials and workshops. Students should
reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at
least 2-3 times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment Class participation (80% participation in tutorials,
workshops and laboratory activities) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement);
one combined practical and oral examination (50% each)
(proficiency standard hurdle requirement); one written examination
(50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally all components
of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment
items (progressive tests and combined practical and oral
examinations) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible
marks to be obtained on any re-attempt will be 50%. Proficiency
standard must be obtained on any re-attempted practical and oral
examination. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
139
in the first instance with the Unit Co-ordinator. Where the final
examination is failed, a supplementary examination may be offered.
The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will
be 50%. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All assessment items
address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
HHT2200 FORMULAE AND STRATEGIES
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT2100 Formulae and Strategies 2; or
equivalent
Content The fourteen categories in which formulae are assembled.
Formula construction. Advanced formulae. Treatment strategies.
Functions, indications and associated treatment principles. Classical
and modern applications and interpretations of formulae.
Relationship to clinical usage. Differentiation amongst similar
formulae. Guidelines for determining correct formulae for particular
clinical situations. Notions of dosage and the appropriateness of
varying dosages. Formulae modifications.
Required Reading Bensky, D., & Barolet, R. (2004). Chinese
herbal medicine. Formulas and strategies. Seattle: Eastland Press.
Ellis, A. (2003). Notes from south mountain. A guide to
concentrated herb granules. Berkeley: Thin Moon Publishing.
Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, (1994~ & Am.). Available from
Government of Victoria Web site,
http://dms003.dpc.vic.gov.au/l2d/T/. Therapeutic Goods Act,
(1989~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government Web site,
http://www.tga.gov.au/docs/html. Wildlife Protection (Regulation
of Exports and Imports) Act, (1982~ & Am.). Available from
Australian Government Web site, http://frli.law.gov.au/.
Recommended Reading Dharmananda, S. (1988). Pearls from
the golden cabinet. Long Beach, CA: Oriental Healing Arts Institute.
Flaws, B. (1993). How to write a CM prescription. Boulder, CO:
Blue Poppy Press. Geng, J., Juang, W., Ren, T., & Ma, X. (1991).
Practical traditional Chinese medicine and pharmacology: Herbal
formulas. Beijing: New World Press. Qiao, Y., & Stone, A. (2002).
The traditional Chinese medicine. Formula study guide. Boulder,
CO: Snow Lotus Press. State Administration of TCM. (1995).
Advanced textbook on traditional Chinese medicine and
pharmacology (Vols. 1 and 2). Beijing: New World Press.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one
comprising lectures and tutorials semester. Students should
reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at
least three times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One essay (1000 words) (30%); one written
examination (end-of-semester) (70%). To obtain at least a Pass in the
unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Failed assessment item (essay and examination) may be
resubmitted and re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to
be obtained on any re-attempt will be 50%. This unit is a hurdle
requirement.
All assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the
Learning Outcomes.
HHT2203 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE 2
Campus St Albans, Flinders Lane, Off Campus.
Prerequisite(s) HHT2003 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and
Pathogenesis 2; HHT2011 Chinese Medicine Clinical Practice 1; or
equivalents.
Content During the first week of the semester, students will attend
seminars to orient themselves to the second level of this supervised
clinical program and to revisit learning expectations required of
students in the clinic. Topics include: preparation of necessary
acupuncture equipment for each clinic room; maintenance of client
records, general procedures involved in managing files including:
retrieving and storing of client files, updating files, and preserving
the confidentiality of client files; arriving at diagnosis and treatment
principle; practitioner diagnosis and treatment details; general client
care and comfort; pulse taking; arranging appointments; review of
procedures in dispensing herbs (herbal identification, use of scales,
accurate dispensing, safe dispensing); an introduction to the more
complex methods of processing of herbs. Pao Zhi, Shi liao,
moxibustion and acupuncture skills; the role of the assistant in the
clinical setting; privacy and confidentiality issues.
Required Reading Australian Acupuncture & Chinese Medicine
Association Code of Ethics. (n.d.). Available from AACMA Web
site, http://www.acupuncture.org.au/code_of_ethics.cfm. Ferrigno,
P. (Ed.). (2005). Clinical manual [CD-ROM]. Chinese Medicine Unit,
School of Health Sciences, Victoria University of Technology,
Australia. Infection Control Guidelines for Acupuncture –
Consultation Draft, (2004). Available from Chinese Medicine
Registration Board Web site, http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-
news/draft/InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf.
Standards of Practice for Acupuncture. Health (Infectious Diseases)
Regulations, (1990~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria
Web site, http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of seventy-two (72) hours in an
approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester
(hurdle requirement).
Assessment Supervised placement comprising successful
completion of required 72 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle
requirement) and overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical
placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); combined practical
and oral examination (proficiency standard hurdle requirement). To
obtain at least an Ungraded Pass in the unit, normally all
components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment items (combined practical and oral examination) may be
re-attempted once only. Proficiency standard must be obtained on
any re-attempted practical and oral examination. Any failed
assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance with
the Clinical Co-ordinator. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All
assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the
Learning Outcomes.
HHT2205 ACUPUNCTURE NEEDLING: THEORY AND PRACTICE 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT2104 Acupuncture Needling: theory and
Practice 1; RBM1910 Microbiology for Chinese Medicine
Practitioners; or equivalents.
Content Surface anatomy relevant to locating and needling of
acupuncture points; anatomy relevant to the depths of needling
acupuncture points; locating and correctly needling acupuncture
points; the notion of intent as it applies in CM practice, needle
insertion; obtaining the de Qi sensation; moving Qi; management of
needle accidents; contraindications for needling. Review of cupping
in the context of needle techniques. The relationship between
acupuncture point selection and ‘reading’ the radial pulse before
and after needling. Introduction to plum blossom needling and three-
edge bleeding techniques. Jing-luo theory including the muscle-
tendino meridians, luo mai, divergent meridians, internal pathways
and the inter-relationships between the various elements and
meridians; the functions and dynamics of the major categories of
acupuncture points. Safety issues; review of aseptic procedures,
infection control and risk management strategies.
Required Reading Chen, E. (1995). Cross-sectional anatomy of
acupoints. New York: Churchill Livingstone. Deadman, P., Al-
Khafaji, M., & Baker, K. (1998). A manual of acupuncture (Rev.
ed.). California: Eastland Press. Guidelines on Basic Training and
Safety in Acupuncture, (1996). Available from World Health
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
140
Organization Web site, www.who.int/medicines/library/trm/
acupuncture/who-edm-trm-99-1/who-edm-trm-99-1.pdf. Infection
Control Guidelines for Acupuncture – Consultation Draft, (2004).
Available from Chinese Medicine Registration Board Web site,
http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-news/draft/
InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf. Pirog, J. E.
(1996). The practical application of meridian style acupuncture.
Berkeley, CA: Pacific View Press. Standards of Practice for
Acupuncture. Health (Infectious Diseases) Regulations, (1990~ &
Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site,
http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html.
Recommended Reading Auteroche, B., Gervais, G., Auteroche,
M., Navilh, P., & Toui-Kan, E. (1992). Acupuncture and
moxibustion. A guide to clinical practice (O. Kivity, Trans.).
Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone. Bai, J. (Ed.). (1977). Advanced
textbook on traditional Chinese medicine and pharmacology (Vol.
4). Acupuncture and moxibustion. Beijing: New World Press.
Charles, S. (1986). Clinical relationship of the five elements and
pathology. Australian Journal of Acupuncture, 2, 8-13. Deadman, P.
(1984). Needle technique. Part 1. Journal of Chinese Medicine, 14,
11-14. Deadman, P. (1984). Needle technique. Part 2. Journal of
Chinese Medicine, 15, 21-23. De Schepper, L. (1995).
Acupuncture in practice. New Mexico: Full of Life Publishing. Fraser,
P. (1985). Modern needle technique and clinical practice. Journal of
Chinese Medicine, 17, 18-21. Gao, L. (1990). Understanding the
theory of acupuncture contra-indications according to the Nei Jing.
Journal of Chinese Medicine, 34, 21-22. Lade, A. (1989).
Acupuncture points: Images and functions. Washington: Eastland
Press. Lee, M. (1992). Insights of a senior acupuncturist. Boulder,
CO: Blue Poppy Press. Li, S., & Tan, X. (1998). Chinese therapeutic
methods of acupoints. Hunan: Hunan Science and Technology
Press. Lian, Y.-L., Chen, C.-Y., Hammes, M., & Kolster, C. (2000).
The seirin pictorial atlas of acupuncture: An illustrated manual of
acupuncture points. Köln: Könemann. Lou, B. (1985). Needle
technique. Part 1. Australian Journal of Acupuncture, 2, 16-19. Lou,
B. (1989). Moving qi by needling. Australian Journal of
Acupuncture, 11, 27-28.
Low, R. (1983). The secondary vessels of acupuncture.
Northamptonshire: Thorsons. State Administration of TCM China.
(1990). The location of acupuncture points. Beijing: Foreign
Languages Press.
Subject hours Five hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures, tutorials and workshops. Students should
reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at
least 2-3 times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment Class participation (80% participation in tutorials,
workshops and laboratory activities) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement);
one combined practical and oral examination (50% each)
(proficiency standard hurdle requirement); one written examination
(50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally all components
of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment
items (progressive tests and combined practical and oral
examinations) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum possible
marks to be obtained on any re-attempt will be 50%. Proficiency
standard must be obtained on any re-attempted practical and oral
examination. Any failed assessment item will need to be discussed
in the first instance with the Unit Co-ordinator. Where the final
examination is failed, a supplementary examination may be offered.
The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will
be 50%. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All assessment items
address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
HHT3001 INTERNAL MEDICINE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT2001 Fundamental Herbal Formulas;
HHT2006 Acupuncture Needling; or equivalents.
Corequisite(s) HHI3003 Therapeutic Applications – Chinese
Herbal Medicine; HHK3002 Acupuncture Therapeutic Applications;
or equivalents.
Content This subject examines in detail traditional Chinese internal
medicine (Nei Ke) based on the fifty-two disorders as specified in
the classic the Jin Gui Yao Lue and additional disorders of clinical
significance. The diagnosis of these disorders and their
differentiation into patterns (zheng) according to the system of bian
zheng lun zhi receives detailed attention. The origin of each
disorder and the pathomechanisms by which its symptoms manifest
and develop are discussed. The design of treatment interventions
using herbal prescription, acupuncture, moxibustion and dietary
therapy (shi liao) according to the differentiation of the disorder is
examined.
Required Reading Maciocia, G. (1994). The practice of Chinese
medicine: The treatment of diseases with acupuncture and Chinese
herbs. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. MacLean, W., & Lyttleton, J.
(1998). Clinical handbook of internal medicine (Vol 1.). Sydney:
UWS Macarthur. MacLean, W., & Lyttleton, J. (2002). Clinical
handbook of internal medicine (Vol 2). Sydney: UWS Macarthur.
Pirog, J. (1996). Meridian style acupuncture. Berkeley, CA: Pacific
View Press. Yan, W., & Fischer, W. (1997). Practical therapeutics
of traditional Chinese medicine. Brookline, MA: Paradigm
Publications. Zhang Z.-J., Luo, X.-W. (Trans.)., & Chi, J. L. (Rev).
(1987). Synopsis of prescriptions from the golden chamber. Beijing:
New World Press. (Original work published circa 250AD)
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for two semesters
comprising lectures, tutorials and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment One assignment (1500 words) (20%); two
examinations (40% each) over two semesters. To obtain at least a
Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be
re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any re-attempt will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a
supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible
mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is
a hurdle requirement.
HHT3003 COUNSELLING SKILLS FOR CHINESE MEDICAL PRACTICE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHI2020 Chinese Medicine Clinical Practice –
Herb Major 2; or HHK2020 Chinese Medicine Clinical Practice –
Acupuncture Major 2; or equivalent.
Content This subject explores and reflects upon the evolution of
current popular counselling techniques. The subject allows the
student to experience how they may adapt counselling techniques to
the CM framework of clinical practice. This subject explores many
facets of the client/practitioner relationship, ethical issues,
professionalism and confidentiality. In preparation for the student’s
future role as a primary health care CM practitioner, the subject will
also cover such topics as death and dying; trauma; sexual,
emotional and physical abuse; the elderly; and cross cultural
counselling.
Required Reading Corey, G. (1997). Theory and practice of
counselling and psychotherapy (5th ed.). California: Brooks/Cole
Publishers. Corsini, R. J., & Wedding, D. (Eds.). Current
psychotherapies (5th ed.). Illinois: Peacock Publisher Inc. Williams,
V. (Ed.). (2004). Counselling manual. St Albans: Victoria University
of Technology, School of Health Sciences.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
141
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Four hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising seminars, workshops and self-managed learning
activities.
Assessment Class participation (80% attendance requirement and
appropriate participation) (25%); reflective journal (1000 words)
(25%); one assignment (1000 words) (50%). To obtain an
Ungraded Pass in the subject, normally all components of
assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item
(assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any re-submission will
be 50%.
HHT3004 CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY FOR CHINESE MEDICAL
PRACTICE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT2001 Fundamental Herbal Formulas;
SBM2575 Phytopharmaceutics; SBM3515 Clinical Pharmacology
and Pathophysiology; or equivalents.
Content Concentration response relationships, adsorption of drugs,
xenobiotics and drug/xenobiotic distribution; metabolism of
xenobiotics including roles in drug elimination, detoxification,
production of toxic and mutagenic intermediates, excretion,
pharmacokinetics and clearance; overview of drugs used in major
diseases in relation to drug mechanisms, basic pharmacokinetics,
adverse reactions and interactions known to occur with herbal
remedies; the interface between the biological actions of herbs and
modern pharmaceuticals; current scheduling process for therapeutic
products; reporting procedures for adverse drug-herb interactions.
Required Reading Bensky, D., Gamble, A., & Kaptchuk, T. J.
(1993). Chinese herbal medicine: Materia Medica (Rev. ed.).
Seattle: Eastland Press. Evans, W. C. (1996). Trease and Evans’
pharmacognosy. (14th ed.). London: W. B. Saunders. Galbraith,
A., Bullock, S., & Manias, E. (2004). Fundamentals of
pharmacology: A text for nurses and allied health professionals (4th
ed.). Australia: Pearson Education Australia.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Three hours per week of equivalent for one
semester comprising lectures, seminars and self-managed learning
activities.
Assessment One written assignment (2000 words) (50%); one 2-
hour examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted
and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained
on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is
failed, a supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum
possible mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.
HHT3100 CHINESE MEDICAL MICRO-SYSTEMS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM1910 Microbiology for Chinese Medicine
Practitioners; HHT2205 Acupuncture Needling: Theory and Practice
2; or equivalents.
Content Ear and scalp acupuncture history, theory and practice;
ankylo-capsular acupuncture and skin sections theory and practice;
scar therapy; the use of electronic devices including electro-
acupuncture, laser and TENS in micro-system point location,
diagnosis and therapy; further application of chrono-acupuncture;
magneto-therapy theory and practice; combined micro-system and
body acupuncture point treatment principles and protocols;
discrimination in the selection and application of the various
techniques of micro-systems treatments
Required Reading O’Connor, J., & Bensky, D. (1981).
Acupuncture: A comprehensive text. Shanghai College of Traditional
Chinese Medicine. Chicago: Eastland Press. Wiseman, N., & Ellis,
A. (1995). Fundamentals of Chinese medicine. (Rev. ed.). Brookline,
MA: Paradigm Publications.
Recommended Reading China's new needling treatment (2nd
ed.). (1977). Hong Kong: Medicine & Health Publishing Co. Dale,
R. A. (1989). The face micro-acupuncture system. The American
Journal of Acupuncture, 17, 367-370. Dale, R. A. (1990). The
holograms of hand micro-acupuncture: A study in systems of
correspondence. The American Journal of acupuncture, 18, 141-
162. Dale, R. A. (1991). Acupuncture meridians and the
homunculus principle. The American Journal of Acupuncture, 19,
73-75. Dale, R. A. (1991). The principles and clinical applications
of the triple warmer and the five phases in eye orbit micro-
acupuncture. The American Journal of Acupuncture, 19, 349-356.
Subject Hours Dale, R. A. (1999). The systems, holograms, and
theory of micro-acupuncture. The American Journal of Acupuncture,
27, 207-242. Huang, H. L. (Trans.). (1974). Nanking army team
ear acupuncture. A Chinese medical report. Pennsylvania: Rodale
Press Inc.
Jiao, S. F. (1987). Head acupuncture. Shanxi: Shanxi Publishing
House. Kho, L. K. (Ed. and Trans.). (1989). How to apply face,
nose, hand & foot acupuncture. Hong Kong: Medicine and Health
Publishing Company. Lo, C. K. (1976). Nose, hand and foot
acupuncture. Hong Kong: The Commercial Press Ltd. Lu, H. C.
(1975). A complete textbook of auricular acupuncture. Vancouver:
Oriental Heritage Books. Lu, H. C. (Trans.). (1975). Scalp
acupuncture: Therapy and anaesthesia. Vancouver: Oriental
Heritage Books. Medicine and Health (Ed. and Trans.). (1977).
Practical ear-needling therapy. Hong Kong: Medicine & Health
Publishing Co. Nogier, P. M. F. (1981). Handbook of
auriculotherapy (J. N. Kenyon, Trans.). Paris: Maisonneuve. Oleson,
T. D. (1983). A comparison of Chinese and Nogier auricular
acupuncture points. The American Journal of Acupuncture, 11, 205-
223. Richardson, P. (1992). Yan Zhen Liao Fa: Eye acupuncture
therapy. The Australian Journal of Acupuncture, 19, 21-23. Shunfa,
J. (1997). Scalp acupuncture and clinical cases. Beijing: Foreign
Languages Press. Wang, S., & Wang, W. (Compilers). Hand
Therapy: Traditional Chinese Remedies. Beijing: Foreign Languages
Press. Wexu, M. (1975). A modern guide to ear acupuncture. New
York: A. S. I. Publishers Inc. Yau, P. S. (Ed.). (1975). Scalp needling
therapy. Hong Kong: Medicine and Health Publishing Co. Yoo, T.
(1988). Koryo hand acupuncture (Vol. 1). Seoul: Eum Yang Mck Jin
Publishing Co. Zhao, X. (Ed.)., & Wang, T. (Trans.). (1997). Eye
acupuncture therapy. Beijing: Academy Press. Zhao, X. (Ed.)., &
Wang, T. (Trans.). (1997). Foot acupuncture therapy. Beijing:
Academy Press. Zhu, M. (D. C. King and Y. Zhang, Trans.). (1992).
Zhu’s scalp acupuncture. Hong Kong: Eight Dragons Publishing.
Subject Hours Three hours per week or equivalent for one
semester comprising lectures and workshops. Students should
reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at
least three times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One combined practical and oral exam (50%)
(proficiency standard hurdle requirement); one written examination
(50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally all components
of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment
items (combined practical and oral examinations) may be re-
attempted once only. Proficiency standard must be obtained on any
re-attempted combined practical and oral examination. Maximum
possible marks to be obtained on any reattempt will be 50%. All
assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the
Learning Outcomes.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
142
HHT3103 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE 3
Campus St Albans, Flinders Lane, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Satisfactory completion of year 2 of the HBAH
degree; or equivalent.
Content Topics include: assisting the practitioner during treatment;
applying moxibustion, needle manipulation as required; assisting
with cupping, moxibustion, shi liao and herbs; engage in discussion
about developing a tentative diagnosis and treatment principle;
carrying out therapeutic procedures as requested by the practitioner;
review of standard operating procedures in dispensing herbs
(herbal identification, use of scales, accurate, safe dispensing,
ordering herbs, accounting procedures). Introduction to more
complex methods of processing of herbs in preparation for
continuation of the clinical program. Methods of Pao Zhi,
moxibustion and acupuncture skills. The notion of pathogenesis and
relationship to herbal prescriptions. Materia Medica substitutions,
advanced herbal recognition.
Required Reading Australian Acupuncture & Chinese Medicine
Association Code of Ethics. (n.d.). Available from AACMA Web
site, http://www.acupuncture.org.au/code_of_ethics.cfm. Bensky,
D., Clavey, S., & Schrojer, E. (2004). Chinese herbal medicine:
Materia Medica (3rd. ed.). Seattle: Eastland Press. Ferrigno, P.
(Ed.). (2005). Clinical manual [CD-ROM]. Chinese Medicine Unit,
School of Health Sciences, Victoria University of Technology,
Australia. Flaws, B. (1993). How to write a CM prescription.
Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Infection Control Guidelines for
Acupuncture – Consultation Draft, (2004). Available from Chinese
Medicine Registration Board Web site,
http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-
news/draft/InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf.
Sionneau, P. (1995). Pao Zhi. An introduction to the use of
processed Chinese medicinals (B. Flaws, Trans.). Boulder, CO: Blue
Poppy Press. Standards of Practice for Acupuncture. Health
(Infectious Diseases) Regulations, (1990~ & Am.). Available from
Government of Victoria Web site,
http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of seventy-two (72) hours in an
approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire semester
(hurdle requirement).
Assessment Supervised placement comprising successful
completion of required 72 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle
requirement) and overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical
placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); combined practical
and oral examination (proficiency standard hurdle requirement);
case report (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement). To obtain at least an
Ungraded Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment
must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (combined
practical and oral examination and case report) may be re-
attempted and resubmitted once only. Proficiency standard must be
obtained on any re-attempted practical and oral examination. Any
failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance
with the Clinical Co-ordinator. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All
assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the
Learning Outcomes.
HHT3104 MAJOR CLASSICS – SHANG HAN LUN & WENG BING 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT2003 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and
Pathogenesis 2; or equivalent.
Content Shang Han Lun and Wen Bing as part of history of ideas
in Chinese medicine. Underlying theories associated with these two
texts. Comparison of the Shang Han and Wen Bing treatment
strategies. Onset and transmission of disease according to Shang
Han and Wen Bing. The concept of Pattern Identifications by the Six
Channels. The application of the Eight Guiding Principles. The
concept of externally contracted diseases caused by pathogenic
cold and wind. Onset and transmission of wen bing diseases.
Correlation of the Four Aspects with the Triple Jiao, and Six
Channels, diagnosis of Wen Bing (fever, tongue, Ban, Zhen,
Miliaria Alba), Fu xie (latent disease), Wen Bing treatment
strategies. Character writing of terminology.
Required Reading Liu, G. H. (2001). Warm disease. A clinical
guide. Seattle: Eastland Press. Mitchell, C., Feng, Y., & Wiseman,
N. (1999). Shang Han Lun. On cold damage. Translation &
commentaries. Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications.
Recommended Reading Clavey, S. (Trans.). (1988). Venting
insubstantial pathogens and deep lying Qi. Special topics in warm
disease theory. Journal of the Australian Chinese Medicine
Education and Research Council, 3, 1-12. Deng, T. (1999).
Practical diagnosis in traditional Chinese medicine. Sydney:
Churchill Livingstone. Li, W. R., & Li, Q. G. (1999). Shang Han Lun
Tang Zheng Lun Zhi. Beijing: Zhong Guo Ke Ji Publications. (in
Chinese). Wen, J. M., & Seifert, G. (Trans.). (2000). Warm disease
theory (Wen Bing Xue). Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications.
Zhang, Z. J. (1993). Treatise on febrile diseases caused by cold
with 500 cases (X.-W. Luo & J. L. Shi, Trans. & Ed.). Beijing: New
World Press. (Original work published circa 250AD).
Subject Hours Five hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures and tutorials. Students should reasonably expect
to devote additional private contact hours of at least three times
more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One assignment (1500 words) (40%); SML tasks
(20%); one examination (40%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be resubmitted
once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any
resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a
supplementary examination may be offered. The maximum possible
mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This unit is a
hurdle requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as
indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
HHT3106 INTERNAL MEDICINE 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT2003 Chinese Medical Diagnosis and
Pathogenesis 2; HHT2200 Formulae and Strategies 2;
HHT2205 Acupuncture Needling: Theory and Practice 2; or
equivalents.
Content This unit examines in detail traditional Chinese internal
medicine (Nei Ke) based on the fifty-two disorders as specified in
the classic the Jin Gui Yao Lue and additional disorders of clinical
significance. The diagnosis of these disorders and their
differentiation into patterns (zheng) according to the system of bian
zheng lun zhi receives detailed attention. The origin of each
disorder and the pathomechanisms by which its symptoms manifest
and develop are discussed. The design of treatment interventions
using herbal prescriptions, acupuncture, moxibustion and dietary
therapy (shi liao) according to the differentiation of the disorder is
examined.
Required Reading Maciocia, G. (1997). The practice of Chinese
medicine: The treatment of diseases with acupuncture and Chinese
herbs. New York: Churchill Livingstone. MacLean, W., & Lyttleton, J.
(1998). Clinical handbook of internal medicine (Vol 1.). Sydney:
UWS Macarthur.
MacLean, W., & Lyttleton, J. (2002). Clinical handbook of internal
medicine (Vol 2). Sydney: UWS Macarthur. Pirog, J. (1996).
Meridian style acupuncture. Berkeley, CA: Pacific View Press.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
143
Recommended Reading Deadman, P., Al-Khafaji, M., & Baker,
K. (1998). A manual of acupuncture (Rev. ed.). California: Eastland
Press. Wiseman, N., & Ellis, A. (1995). Fundamentals of Chinese
medicine. (Rev. ed.). Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications. Yan,
W., & Fischer, W. (1997). Practical therapeutics of traditional
Chinese medicine. Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications. Zhang Z.-
J., Luo, X.-W. (Trans.)., & Chi, J. L. (Rev). (1987). Synopsis of
prescriptions from the golden chamber. Beijing: New World Press.
(Original work published circa 250AD).
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures and tutorials. Students should reasonably expect
to devote additional private contact hours of at least three times
more than the stipulated class contact hours
Assessment One final written cases examination (50%); one final
written theory examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the
unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Failed assessment item (case analyses examination) may be
re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any re-attempt will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a
supplementary examination may be offered. The maximum possible
mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This unit is a
hurdle requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as
indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
HHT3108 CHINESE MEDICINE THERAPEUTIC APPLICATIONS 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT2200 Formulae and Strategies 2; or
equivalent
Content The focus of this unit is to prepare students for their
internship year. Attention is given to an mo tui na techniques,
approaches to wu guan, diagnosis, treatment and management
strategies (acupuncture and herbs), wu guan, an in-depth
exploration of contemporary treatment techniques and approaches,
and the notion of yi (intent) as it applies to Chinese medicine.
Critical analysis of case studies, approaches to acupoint selection,
discrimination between points and herbal prescription.
Required Reading Deng, T. (1999). Practical diagnosis in
traditional Chinese medicine. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Li,
X.-M., & Zhao, J.-Y. (1993). Acupuncture patterns and practice.
Seattle: Eastland Press. Maciocia, G. (1994). The practice of
Chinese medicine: The treatment of diseases with acupuncture and
Chinese herbs. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Bates, B. (1995). A guide to physical
examination and history taking (6th ed.). Philadelphia: J. B.
Lippincott Company. Bensky, D., Clavey, S., & Schrojer, E. (2004).
Chinese herbal medicine: Materia Medica (3rd. ed.). Seattle:
Eastland Press. Chen, J., & Wang, N. (Eds.) (1988). Acupuncture
case histories from China. Seattle: Eastland Press. Farquhar, J.
(1994). Knowing practice. The clinical encounter of Chinese
medicine. Boulder, CO: Westview Press. Flaws, B., & Sionneau, P.
(2001). The treatment of modern western medical diseases with
Chinese medicine. Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Infection Control
Guidelines for Acupuncture – Consultation Draft, (2004). Available
from Chinese Medicine Registration Board Web site,
http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-
news/draft/InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf.
MacDonald, J. (1986). Zang Fu patterns. Sydney: NSW College of
Natural Medicine. MacPherson, H., & Kaptchuk, T. (1997).
Acupuncture in practice. New York: Churchill Livingstone. Standards
of Practice for Acupuncture. Health (Infectious Diseases) Regulations,
(1990~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site,
http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html
Subject Hours Five hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising seminars and workshops. Students should reasonably
expect to devote additional private contact hours of at least three
times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment Class participation (80% attendance requirement and
appropriate participation as outlined in the unit outline) (hurdle
requirement); one assignment (1500 words) (40%); one practical
examination (60%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally all
components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment items (assignment and practical examination) may be
resubmitted or re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to
be obtained on any resubmission or re-attempt will be 50%.
Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted practical
examination. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All assessment items
address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
HHT3003 COUNSELLING SKILLS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This unit explores and reflects upon the evolution of current
popular counselling techniques. The unit allows students to
experience how they may adapt counselling techniques and apply
them to the CM framework of clinical practice. The unit explores
many facets of the client-practitioner relationship, ethical issues,
professionalism and confidentiality in preparation for the student’s
future role as a primary health-care Chinese medicine practitioner.
Assertiveness skills and conflict resolution along with the
management of angry clients will be introduced. Effective
communication skills and self-awareness are also explored. The unit
also covers related topics, such as death and dying; trauma; sexual,
emotional and physical abuse; the elderly; and cross-cultural
counselling.
Required Reading Corey, G. (1997). Theory and practice of
counselling and psychotherapy (5th ed.). California: Brooks/Cole
Publishers. Corsini, R. J., & Wedding, D. (Eds.). Current
psychotherapies (5th ed.). Illinois: Peacock Publisher Inc. Geldard,
D. (1999). Basic personal counselling; A training manual for
counsellors (5th ed.). New York: Brooks-Cole. Williams, V. (Ed.).
(2004). Counselling manual. St Albans, Australia: Victoria
University of Technology, School of Health Sciences.
Recommended Reading Bradshaw, J. (1992) Homecoming-
reclaiming and championing your inner child. New York: Bantam.
Briggs Myers, I., & Meyers, P. B. (1995). Gifts differing:
Understanding personality type. California: Davies-Black. Cornelius,
H., & Faire, S. (1999). Everyone can win-how to resolve conflict.
Brookvale: Simon & Schuster. Grof, S., & Bennett, H. Z. (1994). The
holotropic mind. San Francisco: Harper Collins. Hammer, L. (1990).
Dragon rises, red bird flies. New York: Station Hill Press. Malouf, D.
(1998). Power up your people skills. Communicate in the new
millennium. Sydney: Simon & Schuster. Northhouse, L. L., &
Northhouse, P. G. (1998). Health communications: Strategies for
health professionals. Stanford: Appleton and Lange. Wilber, K.
(1989). The spectrum of consciousness. Wheaton, IL: Theosophical
Publishing House.
Subject Hours Four hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures, seminars and workshops. Students should
reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at
least three times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment Two case studies (25% each); one assignment (1500
words) (50%); reflective journal (hurdle requirement). To obtain a
Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (case studies and
assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will
be 50%. All assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated
in the Learning Outcomes.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
144
HHT3105 MAJOR CLASSICS-SHANG HAN LUN WENG BING 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT3104 Major Classics – Shang Han & Wen
Bing 1; or equivalent
Content Further development of Shang Han Lun and Wen Bing as
part of the history of ideas in Chinese medicine. Complex theories
associated with these two texts. Onset, transmission and
transmutation of disease. Complex presentations according to
Shang Han and Wen Bing. Alternative uses of shang han and wen
bing formulae.
Required Reading Clavey, S. (Trans.). (1988). Deep lying
pathogens. Journal of the Australian Chinese Medicine Education
and Research Council, 3, 12-15. Clavey, S. (1997). Xu shu-wei.
Discourses on the shang han lun. Available from J. R. Wahnish
Website,
http://www.tcmcentral.com/articles/herbs_shu_shanghanlun.htm.
Liu, G. H. (2001). Warm disease. A clinical guide. Seattle: Eastland
Press. Mitchell, C., Feng, Y., & Wiseman, N. (1999). Shang Han
Lun. On cold damage. Translation & commentaries. Brookline, MA:
Paradigm Publications.
Recommended Reading Clavey, S. (Trans.). (1988). Venting
insubstantial pathogens and deep lying Qi. Special topics in warm
disease theory. Journal of the Australian Chinese Medicine
Education and Research Council, 3, 1-12. Li, W. R., & Li, Q. G.
(1999). Shang Han Lun Tang Zheng Lun Zhi. Beijing: Zhong Guo
Ke Ji Publications. (in Chinese). Scheid, V. (1988). Shi Wen Bing.
Damp-warm disease (B. Brill, Trans.). Journal of the Australian
Chinese Medicine Education and Research Council, 3, 7-16. Wen,
J. M., & Seifert, G. (Trans.). (2000). Warm disease theory (Wen
Bing Xue). Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications. Zhang, Z. J.
(1993). Treatise on febrile diseases caused by cold with 500 cases
(X.-W. Luo & J. L. Shi, Trans. & Ed.). Beijing: New World Press.
(Original work published circa 250AD).
Subject Hours Five hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures and workshops. Students should reasonably
expect to devote additional private contact hours of at least three
times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One research report (1500 words) (40%); one case
study report (20%); one examination (40%). To obtain at least a
Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (research report and
case study report) may be resubmitted once only. Maximum possible
marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%. Where the
final examination is failed, a supplementary examination may be
offered. The maximum possible mark on the supplementary
examination will be 50%. All assessment items address the CGA
levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
HHT3203 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE 4
Campus St Albans, Flinders Lane, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HHT3103 Chinese Medicine Clinical Practice 3; or
equivalent
Content During the first week of semester, students attend a
seminar to orient themselves to this level of the clinical program, to
revisit expectations required of them as learners, and to review
operating procedures of the clinical dispensary as preparation for
continuation of the clinical program. Topics include: moxibustion,
cupping, gua sha, needle manipulation techniques; the
appropriateness of applying other therapeutic methods such as
electro-acupuncture, laser therapy, muscle energy testing
approaches, shi liao and other micro-systems approaches. Herbal
formula prescriptions. Advanced dispensary work – ordering stock
in consultation with a supervisor, cost appreciation and prescription
accounting. Assisting practitioner as requested; providing
preliminary diagnostic report to the practitioner; carrying out
therapeutic procedures as requested by the practitioner.
Required Reading Bensky, D., Clavey, S., & Schrojer, E. (2004).
Chinese herbal medicine: Materia Medica (3rd. ed.). Seattle:
Eastland Press. Chinese Medicine Registration Act, (2000~ & Am.).
Available from Government of Victoria Web site,
http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/
Ferrigno, P. (Ed.). (2005). Clinical manual [CD-ROM]. Chinese
Medicine Unit, School of Health Sciences, Victoria University of
Technology, Australia. Flaws, B. (1993). How to write a CM
prescription. Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Sionneau, P. (1995).
Pao Zhi. An introduction to the use of processed Chinese medicinals
(B. Flaws, Trans.). Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Therapeutic
Goods Act, (1989~ & Am.). Available from Australian Government
Web site, http://www.tga.gov.au/docs/html. Therapeutic Goods
(Victoria) Act, (1994~ & Am.). Available from Government of
Victoria Web site, http://dms003.dpc.vic.gov.au/l2d/T/.
Recommended Reading Farquhar, J. (1994). Knowing practice:
The clinical encounter of Chinese medicine. Boulder: Westview
Press. The Institute of Chinese Materia Medica and China Academy
of Traditional Chinese Medicine. (1989). Medicinal plants in China.
Manila: World Health Organization (Regional Office for the
Western Pacific). Yen, K.-Y. (1992). The illustrated Chinese Materia
Medica. Taipei: SMC Publishing Inc.
Subject Hours A minimum of one hundred and eight (108) hours
in an approved clinical setting normally spread across one entire
semester (hurdle requirement).
Assessment Supervised placement comprising successful
completion of required 108 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle
requirement) and overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical
placement(s) (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); combined practical
and oral examination (proficiency standard hurdle requirement);
case report (pass/fail) (hurdle requirement). To obtain at least an
Ungraded Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment
must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (combined
practical and oral examination and case report) may be re-
attempted and resubmitted once only. Proficiency standard must be
obtained on any re-attempted practical and oral examination. Any
failed assessment item will need to be discussed in the first instance
with the Clinical Co-ordinator. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All
assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the
Learning Outcomes.
HHT3207 INTERNAL MEDICINE 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT3106 Internal Medicine 2; or
Equivalent.
Content This unit examines in detail traditional Chinese internal
medicine (Nei Ke) based on the fifty-two disorders as specified in
the classic the Jin Gui Yao Lue and additional disorders of clinical
significance. The diagnosis of these disorders and their
differentiation into patterns (zheng) according to the system of bian
zheng lun zhi receives detailed attention. The origin of each
disorder and the pathomechanisms by which its symptoms manifest
and develop are discussed. The design of treatment interventions
using herbal prescriptions, acupuncture, moxibustion and dietary
therapy (shi liao) according to the differentiation of the disorder is
examined.
Required Reading Maciocia, G. (1997). The practice of Chinese
medicine: The treatment of diseases with acupuncture and Chinese
herbs. New York: Churchill Livingstone. MacLean, W., & Lyttleton, J.
(1998). Clinical handbook of internal medicine (Vol 1.). Sydney:
UWS Macarthur.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
145
MacLean, W., & Lyttleton, J. (2002). Clinical handbook of internal
medicine (Vol 2). Sydney: UWS Macarthur. Pirog, J. (1996).
Meridian style acupuncture. Berkeley, CA: Pacific View Press.
Recommended Reading Deadman, P., Al-Khafaji, M., & Baker,
K. (1998). A manual of acupuncture (Rev. ed.). California: Eastland
Press. Wiseman, N., & Ellis, A. (1995). Fundamentals of Chinese
medicine. (Rev. ed.). Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications. Yan,
W., & Fischer, W. (1997). Practical therapeutics of traditional
Chinese medicine. Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications. Zhang Z.-
J., Luo, X.-W. (Trans.)., & Chi, J. L. (Rev). (1987). Synopsis of
prescriptions from the golden chamber. Beijing: New World Press.
(Original work published circa 250AD).
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures and tutorials. Students should reasonably expect
to devote additional private contact hours of at least three times
more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One oral case analyses examination (40%); one final
written theory examination (60%). To obtain at least a Pass in the
unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Failed assessment item (case analyses examination) may be
re-attempted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any re-attempt will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a
supplementary examination may be offered. The maximum possible
mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This unit is a
hurdle requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as
indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
HHT3111 CHINESE MEDICINE THERAPEUTIC APPLICATIONS 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT3106 Internal Medicine 1;
HHT3108 Chinese Medicine Therapeutic Applications 1; or
equivalents.
Content This unit further prepares students for their internship year.
Attention is given to an mo tui na techniques, approaches to wu
guan, diagnosis, treatment and management strategies (acupuncture
and herbs), wu guan, an in-depth exploration of contemporary
treatment techniques and approaches, and the notion of yi (intent)
as it applies to Chinese medicine. Critical analysis of case studies,
approaches to acupoint selection, discrimination between points
and herbal prescription.
Required Reading Deng, T. (1999). Practical diagnosis in
traditional Chinese medicine. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Li,
X.-M., & Zhao, J.-Y. (1993). Acupuncture patterns and practice.
Seattle: Eastland Press. Maciocia, G. (1994). The practice of
Chinese medicine: The treatment of diseases with acupuncture and
Chinese herbs. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Bates, B. (1995). A guide to physical
examination and history taking (6th ed.). Philadelphia: J. B.
Lippincott Company. Bensky, D., Clavey, S., & Schrojer, E. (2004).
Chinese herbal medicine: Materia Medica (3rd. ed.). Seattle:
Eastland Press. Chen, J., & Wang, N. (Eds.) (1988). Acupuncture
case histories from China. Seattle: Eastland Press. Farquhar, J.
(1994). Knowing practice. The clinical encounter of Chinese
medicine. Boulder, CO: Westview Press. Flaws, B., & Sionneau, P.
(2001). The treatment of modern western medical diseases with
Chinese medicine. Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Infection Control
Guidelines for Acupuncture – Consultation Draft, (2004). Available
from Chinese Medicine Registration Board Web site,
http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-
news/draft/InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf.
MacDonald, J. (1986). Zang Fu patterns. Sydney: NSW College of
Natural Medicine. MacPherson, H., & Kaptchuk, T. (1997).
Acupuncture in practice. New York: Churchill Livingstone. Standards
of Practice for Acupuncture. Health (Infectious Diseases) Regulations,
(1990~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site,
http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html.
Subject Hours Five hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising seminars and workshops. Students should reasonably
expect to devote additional private contact hours of at least three
times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment Class participation (80% attendance requirement and
appropriate participation as outlined in the unit outline) (hurdle
requirement); one final combined practical and oral examination
(40%); one 3-hour final examination (60%). To obtain at least a
Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (combined practical
and oral examination) may be re-attempted once only. Maximum
possible marks to be obtained on any re-attempt will be 50%.
Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-attempted practical
and combined practical and oral examination. Where the final
examination is failed, a supplementary examination may be offered.
The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will
be 50%. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All assessment items
address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
HHT4001 CASE CONFERENCING AND CLINICAL ISSUES
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT3001 Internal Medicine; or equivalent.
Co-requisite(s) HHI4003 Chinese Medical Pediatrics and
Dermatology: Herbal Medicine; or equivalent.
Content Topics covered are determined by the experience students
have in treating clients. The subject will also revisit aspects of
aseptic procedures; history taking; principles of diagnosis; treatment
protocols; herb and point functions; dosages; pao zhi theory and
practice; needling difficult points; point injection therapy,
moxibustion, cupping, Gua Sha, acupuncture; prepared Chinese
herbs; interpersonal skills and legal issues pertaining to acupuncture
and herbal medicine practice. Case conferencing will require
students to present to the class cases they have treated within the
Victoria University of Technology clinical locations, giving a full
history and treatments given. Students will be encouraged to discuss
and reflect upon all aspects of the clinical encounters, including
integrating supplementary published materials.
Required Reading Bensky, D., Clavey, S., & Stoeger, E. (2004).
Chinese herbal medicine: Materia Medica (3rd ed.). Seattle:
Eastland Press. McPherson, H., & Kaptchuk, T. (Eds.). (1997).
Acupuncture in practice: Case history insights from the west. New
York: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Forty-four (44) hours or equivalent for two
semesters comprising seminar workshops and self-directed learning
activities. The Semester Two component of this subject will be
delivered in its entirety before the mid semester break to allow
students the opportunity to undertake their final clinical internship in
China.
Assessment Class participation (80% attendance requirement and
appropriate participation for both semesters) (hurdle requirement);
two case conference seminars in this subject’s designated
assessment week (Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory). To obtain an
Ungraded Pass in the subject, normally all components of
assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items
(seminars) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
146
HHT4002 RESEARCH METHODS FOR CHINESE MEDICINE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT3001 Internal Medicine; HHT1002
Fundamentals of Chinese Medicine; or equivalents.
Content Introduction to CM research design and methodology;
paradigms of research; ways of obtaining CM knowledge;
quantitative and qualitative research methods; research ethics; the
application of the scientific method to CM research; non-
experimental research designs; the evaluation of research; the
computer as a research tool; scientific writing and the
communication of research.
Required Reading Bowling, A. (1997). Research methods in
health: Investigating health and health services. Philadelphia: Open
University Press. Polgar, S., & Thomas, S. (1995). Introduction to
research in the health sciences (3rd ed.). Melbourne: Churchill
Livingstone.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Three hours per week or equivalent for one
semester comprising lectures, tutorials and self-managed learning
activities.
Assessment Two assignments (1000 words each) (50% each). To
obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of
assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items
(assignments) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will
be 50%.
HHT3202 CHINESE MEDICAL SPECIALTIES
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT3001 Internal Medicine; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HHI4002 Chinese Medical Gynaecology: Herbal
Medicine; or equivalent.
Content Attention will be given to enhancing the student’s
theoretical knowledge of CM diagnosis, aetiology, treatment
principles and management strategies with regard to obstetrics,
gynaecology, dermatology and paediatrics. This subject is
conducted in conjunction with HHI4002 Chinese Medical
Gynaecology: Herbal Medicine.
Required Reading Hai, J.-L. (Ed.). (1995). Treatment of pediatric
disease in TCM. Beijing: Academy Press. Maciocia, G. (1988).
Obstetrics and gynecology in Chinese medicine. Melbourne:
Churchill Livingstone. Shen, D.-H., Wu, X.-S., & Wang, N. (1995).
Manual of dermatology in Chinese medicine. Seattle: Eastland
Press. West, Z. (2001). Acupuncture in pregnancy and childbirth.
Sydney: Churchill Livingstone. Xu, X.-C. (Ed.). (1988). Complete
external therapies of Chinese drugs. Beijing: Foreign Languages
Press.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Three hours per week or equivalent for one
semester comprising lectures and self-managed learning activities.
Assessment Assignment (1000 words) (40%); theory examination
in three parts: Dermatology (15%), Gynaecology (30%), Paediatrics
(15%) (total 60%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally
all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted
once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any
resubmission will be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a
supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible
mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%. This subject is
a hurdle requirement.
HHT4004 PROFESSIONAL ISSUES FOR CHINESE MEDICAL PRACTICE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHI3020 Chinese Medicine Clinical Practice –
Herb Major 4; or HHK3020 Chinese Medicine Clinical Practice –
Acupuncture Major 4; or equivalent.
Content Community health: legal aid, relationship Counselling,
child guidance, rehabilitation services, fertility clinics etc; practice
management: employer responsibilities, record keeping, taxation,
workers compensation, legal and civil requirements; Department of
Health regulations: local council regulations, licensing of premises,
public risk, the practitioners responsibilities; the bioethical
requirements of the profession as they relate to research and to
professional practice; CM organizations: professional accreditation,
health funds and indemnity insurance, peer group associations
Australian and international, the current status of CM; CM health
politics; an update on recent research into CM; CM and health
education and promotion; exposure to alternative perspectives on
health care: osteopathy, chiropractic, physiotherapy, Alexander
technique, naturopathy, European medical herbalism and
homeopathy; psychology; working in various clinical settings.
Required Reading May, B. (1996). Review and discussion of the
literature on the risks associated with traditional Chinese medicine.
Ultimo: The Register of Acupuncture and Traditional Chinese
Medicine. May, B. (1997). The need for the concurrent registration
of dispensers of Chinese herbs and the licensing of retailers and
wholesalers of TCM products. Ultimo: The Register of Acupuncture
and Traditional Chinese Medicine. National Health and Medical
Research Council. (1989). Acupuncture Working Party. Report on
Acupuncture. Canberra: Author.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Forty (40) hours or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures, seminars and self-directed learning activities.
This subject will be delivered in its entirety before the mid semester
break to allow students the opportunity to undertake their final
clinical internship in China.
Assessment Class presentation (30%); public presentation report
(800 words) (20%); written assignment (1500 words) (50%); subject
participation (80% attendance requirement and appropriate
participation) (hurdle requirement). To obtain at least a Pass in the
subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted
and passed. Failed assessment items (report and assignment) may
be re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible
marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.
HHT4005 CHINESE MEDICINE ACUTE INTERVENTIONS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT3202 Chinese Medical Specialties; or
equivalents.
Content Basic first aid; the diagnosis, treatment, monitoring and
management of acute onset of illness; the diagnosis, treatment,
monitoring and management of clinical emergencies.
Required Reading Flaws, B. (1985). Tieh ta ke: Traditional
Chinese traumatology and first aid. Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press.
Talley, N., & O'Connor, S. (1989). Clinical examination – a guide
to physical diagnosis. Sydney: MacLennan & Petty.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Forty (40) hours or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures, seminars and self-directed learning activities
and attending a Level 2 First Aid Certificate course (24 hours). This
subject will be delivered in its entirety before the mid semester break
to allow students the opportunity to undertake their final clinical
internship in China.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
147
Assessment Satisfactory completion of Level 2 First Aid Certificate
(pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); one theory examination (100%). To
obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of
assessment must be attempted and passed. Where the final
examination is failed, a supplementary examination will be offered.
The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will
be 50%.
HHT4100 CASE CONFERENCING & CLINICAL
ISSUES 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Satisfactory completion of year 3 of the HBAH
degree; or equivalent.
Content This unit integrates Chinese medicine theory and practice
via interrogation of student case presentations. Case presentations
will be determined by the experiences of students when treating
clients. The focus will be on commonly seen cases in the Chinese
medicine clinical specialties. The unit reinforces aspects of aseptic
procedures; history taking; principles of diagnosis; treatment
protocols; herb and point functions; dosages; a range of treatment
skills; legal issues; and interpersonal and professional
communication skills.
Required Reading Australian Acupuncture & Chinese Medicine
Association Code of Ethics. (n.d.). Available from AACMA Web
site, http://www.acupuncture.org.au/code_of_ethics.cfm.
Brinkman, M. (1996). The amazing Dr. Zhang. Oriental Medicine
Journal, 5(3/4), 41-50. Chinese Medicine Registration Act, (2000~
& Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site,
http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/. Infection Control Guidelines for
Acupuncture – Consultation Draft, (2004). Available from Chinese
Medicine Registration Board Web site:
http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-
news/draft/InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf.
National Drugs and Poisons Schedule Committee. (2003). Standard
for the Uniform Scheduling of Drugs and Poisons (No. 18).
Available from Australian Government Web site,
http://www.health.gov.au/tga/ndpsc/susdp.htm. Standards of
Practice for Acupuncture. Health (Infectious Diseases) Regulations,
(1990~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site,
http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html.
Recommended Reading Bensky, D., Clavey, S., & Schrojer, E.
(2004). Chinese herbal medicine: Materia Medica (3rd. ed.).
Seattle: Eastland Press. Chen, J. and Wang, N. (Eds.) (1988).
Acupuncture case histories from China. Seattle: Eastland Press.
Farquhar, J. (1994). Knowing practice: The clinical encounter of
Chinese medicine. Boulder: Westview Press. Flaws, B. (1997). A
handbook of TCM pediatrics. Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press.
Flaws, B., & Sionneau, P. (2001). The treatment of modern western
medical diseases with Chinese medicine. Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy
Press. Hullar, T. E., Sapers, B. L., Ridker, P. M., Jenkins, R. L., Huth,
T. S., & Farraye, F. A. (1999). Herbal toxicity and fatal hepatic
failure. The American Journal of Medicine, 106(2), 267-268. Jiao,
S.-D. (2003). Ten lectures of the use of medicinals from the personal
experience (C. Mitchell, N. Wiseman, M. Ergil & S. Ochs,Trans.).
Brookline, MA: Paradigm Publications. Loo, M. (2002). Pediatric
acupuncture. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Lyttleton, J. (2004).
Treatment of infertility with Chinese medicine. Sydney: Churchill
Livingstone. Maciocia,G. (1988).Obstetrics and gynecology in
Chinese medicine. Melbourne, Australia: Churchill Livingstone.
McPherson, H., & Kaptchuk, T. (Eds.). (1997). Acupuncture in
practice: Case history insights from the west. New York: Churchill
Livingstone. Shen D.-H., Wu X.-S., & Wang, N. (1995). Manual of
dermatology in Chinese medicine. Seattle: Eastland Press.
Subject Hours Four hours or equivalent for one semester
comprising seminar workshops. Students should reasonably expect
to devote additional private contact hours of at least three times
more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment Class participation (80% attendance requirement as
well as participation as stipulated in the unit tutorial guidelines)
(pass/fail) (hurdle requirement); two case conference seminars
comprising one clinical review and one report in the designated
assessment week(s) (Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory). To obtain an
Ungraded Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment
must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (seminars)
may be re-attempted once only. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All
assessment items address the CGA levels as indicated in the
Learning Outcomes.
HHT4101 CHINESE MEDICINE OBSTETRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHT3207 Internal Medicine 2; or equivalent.
Content This unit examines the Chinese medicine clinical specialty
of gynaecology with particular reference to treating gynaecological
disorders with Chinese herbal formulae and acupuncture. Emphasis
is on selected Materia Medica. The specialised role of acupuncture
in obstetrics, including labour, and the role of Chinese medicine in
relation to fertility and IVF are also examined. Professional issues in
the patient-CM practitioner relationship and ethical issues in
gynaecology and obstetrics in the Australian context are raised
throughout.
Required Reading Liang, L.-F. (2003). Acupuncture and IVF.
Increase IVF success by 40-60%. Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press.
Maciocia, G. (1998). Obstetrics and gynecology in Chinese
medicine. Melbourne, Australia: Churchill Livingstone. Qian, M., &
Beer, S. L. (2004). TCM gynaecology student work book.
Introduction to the use of TCM in gynaecology. Melbourne,
Australia: Author. West, Z. (2001). Acupuncture in pregnancy and
childbirth. Sydney: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Beer, S. (1989). Finger tip therapy:
Dietary therapeutics for the treatment of endometriosis. Unpublished
diploma thesis, Australian Acupuncture College, Camberwell,
Australia. Flaws, B. (1993). Path of pregnancy: Vol. 1. A handbook
of traditional Chinese gestational and birthing diseases. Boulder,
CO: Blue Poppy Press. Flaws, B. (1993). Path of pregnancy: Vol. 2.
A handbook of traditional Chinese post-partum diseases. Boulder,
CO: Blue Poppy Press. Flaws, B. (1997). A handbook of menstrual
diseases in Chinese medicine. Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press. Hou,
J. (Ed.). (1995). Acupuncture and moxibustion therapy in
gynecology and obstetrics (Zhen jiu zhi liao fu ke ji bing). Beijing:
Beijing Science & Technology Press. Low, R. H. (1990).
Acupuncture in gynaecology and obstetrics: An essential guide for
practitioners and students. Wellinborough, UK: Thorsons. Williams,
V. J. (1985). Gynaecological problems and acupuncture.
Unpublished diploma thesis, Australian Acupuncture College,
Camberwell, Australia. Xu, X.-C. (Ed.). (1990). Chinese
encyclopaedia of practical TCM: Vol. 12. Gynaecology. Beijing:
Higher Education Press. Zhejiang College of Traditional Chinese
Medicine. (1991). A handbook of traditional Chinese gynecology
(2nd ed.). Boulder, CO: Blue Poppy Press.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures, tutorials and student directed learning. Students
should reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours
of at least three times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment One assignment (1500 words) (50%); one 3-hour
examination (50%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally all
components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment item (assignment) may be resubmitted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
148
be 50%. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary
examination may be offered. The maximum possible mark on the
supplementary examination will be 50%. This unit is a hurdle
requirement for graduation. All assessment items address the CGA
levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
HHT4103 CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL INTERNSHIP 1
Campus St Albans, Flinders Lane, Off Campus.
Prerequisite(s) Satisfactory completion of year 3 of the HBAH
degree; or equivalent
Co-requisite(s) HHT4100 Case Conferencing & Clinical Issues 1;
or equivalent.
Content During the first week of semester, students will attend two
2-hour seminars to orient them to the final level of the clinical
program; to review expectations of them in the clinic; to review
student ethics and professional behaviour; to review standard
operating procedures of the clinical dispensary and system in use
for public consultations, in preparation for continuation of the
clinical program. Students undertake their final year clinical
placement as the Intern Practitioner in approved settings. Students
are required to spend time in at least five of the Victoria University
clinical locations in Melbourne to gain broad clinical experience in
both acupuncture and herbs and be guided by a variety of clinical
educators. This unit must be completed before off-shore clinical
placements can be approved. Internship Practitioner: The student
practitioner is expected to conduct themselves in the professional
manner as demonstrated by Practitioner Clinicians, working under
the supervision of a qualified Chinese medicine practitioner. Skills
required of the intern practitioner: take all casenotes, define
diagnosis, herbs and main formulae that could the prescription
could be based upon, define treatment principles and where
appropriate apply acupuncture. The intern practitioner works
independently and assumes full responsibility for the conduct of each
consultation, and production of a final prescription. The supervising
practitioner is accessed as required. The supervising practitioner
must approve prescriptions as suitable and safe to dispense for each
client consulted, before the prescription is processed in the
dispensary. Internship Mentor: Final year students are to work
closely with junior students to assist them in the development of
clinical skills. Dispensary supervision: Final year students will spend
part of their time as supervisor in the dispensary. This will give the
Internship practitioner the opportunity to provide mentorship for
junior students and assume responsibility for the running of the
practice dispensary. While the supervising practitioner has overall
authority, the Internship practitioner must liaise with the supervising
practitioner for all financial decisions and must report discipline
issues. During the mentorship process, the Intern practitioner has the
authority to ensure School of Health Sciences Teaching Clinics
policies and procedures are followed.
Required Reading Chinese Medicine Registration Act, (2000~ &
Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web site,
http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/
Sionneau, P. (1995). Pao Zhi. An introduction to the use of
processed Chinese medicinals (B. Flaws, Trans.). Boulder, CO: Blue
Poppy Press. Therapeutic Goods Act, (1989~ & Am.). Available
from Australian Government Web site, http://www.tga.gov.au/
docs/html. Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, (1994~ & Am.).
Available from Government of Victoria Web site, http://
dms003.dpc.vic.gov.au/l2d/T/. Wildlife Protection (Regulation of
Exports and Imports) Act, (1982~ & Am.). Available from Australian
Government Web site, http://frli.law.gov.au/.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of one hundred and fifty-six (156)
hours in an approved clinical setting normally spread across one
entire semester (hurdle requirement).
Assessment Supervised placement comprising successful
completion of required 156 clinical hours (pass/fail) (hurdle
requirement) and overall satisfactory report(s) from clinical
placement(s) (50%) (hurdle requirement); combined practical and
oral examination (50%) (proficiency standard hurdle requirement).
To obtain at least a Pass in the unit, normally all components of
assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment item
(combined practical and oral examination) may be re-attempted
once only. Proficiency standard must be obtained on any re-
attempted practical and oral examination. Any failed assessment
item will need to be discussed in the first instance with the Clinical
Co-ordinator. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All assessment items
address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
HHU2173 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 3
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHO1171 Osteopathic Science 1; HHA1171
Anatomy 1; HHP1171 Physiology 1; HHU1272 Clinical Practicum
2; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HHO2173 Osteopathic Science 3; HHA2173
Anatomy 3; HHP2172 Physiology 2; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to further develop students awareness of
the requirements for osteopathic practice and to reinforce the case
history taking and examination skills taught in HHO2173
Osteopathic Science 3. By the end of the subject the students should
be sufficiently competent in basic history taking, technique and
patient handling skills to be ready to begin treating patients under
supervision in year 3. content will include: Continuation of subject
allowing further development of skills acquired during HHD1272
Clinical Practicum 2.& HHO1171 Osteopathic Science 1. To
reinforce professional ethics and preparatory skills. To practice the
skill of interviewing/case history taking. To demonstrate the
application of basic clinical skills. Increasing observation of patient
consultations with qualified supervision. Preparatory technique
application within patient consultation. Practical workshops relating
to consultation, basic clinical and osteopathic examination,
including diagnosis and management. Reinforcement of basic
physical examination skills.
Required Reading This is a clinical subject and has no specific
required reading, however, relevant material is contained in the
reading for HHO2173 Osteopathic Science 3.
Subject Hours Three hours workshops/tutorials per week for 46
weeks and sixteen hours external placement – total 154 hours.
Assessment Completion of required hours attendance, skills
assessment and patient contacts (initial consultation and returning
point) as recorded in clinical diary. Practical exam in case history
taking.
HHU3175 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 5
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHO3175 Osteopathic Science 5; HHA2173
Anatomy 3; HHP2172 Physiology 2; HHU2173 Clinical Practicum
3; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HHO3175 Osteopathic Science 5; HHA3275
Anatomy 5; HHP3174 Physiology 4; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to further develop clinical skills from
HHU1129 and HHU2129 Clinical Practicum 1 and 2. To introduce
the students to treating patients under supervision in the teaching
clinic. At the completion of the subject students will be able to apply
skills learned in previous Osteopathic Science and Clinical
Practicum subjects to the actual treatment of clinic patients, and will
begin to apply diagnostic and treatment planning skills. content will
include: Continuation of subject allowing further development of
skills acquired in HHD1272 Clinical Practicum 2, HHU2173
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
149
Clinical Practicum 3, HHO1171 Osteopathic Science 1 &
HHO2173 Osteopathic Science 3. Reinforcement of the increasing
skills in osteopathic techniques, physical examination and clinical
management. Development of skills in medical and osteopathic
diagnoses and prognosis, including use of adjunctive investigations.
urther development of patient interview skills. Continuing
observation of patient consultation. Increasing participation as
primary clinician in cases. Tutorials on osteopathic and medical
clinical skills.
Required Reading This is a clinical subject and has no specific
required reading. However, relevant material is contained in the
reading for HHO3175 Osteopathic Science 5.
Subject Hours 6 hours a week for 40 weeks, plus 26 hours
external placements – total 266 hours.
Assessment Completion of required hours attendances, skills
Assessments and patient contacts (initial consult and returning
patient); completion of required tasks as per clinical diary.
Practical/viva examination.
HHY1271 PATHOLOGY 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM1738 Cell Structure and Function or
equivalent.
Content The introduction to clinical osteopathic practice, so as to
make students aware of the expectations of them in clinic. Ethical
and professional behaviour in the VU Osteopathic Medicine Clinic.
Legal aspects of record keeping and account keeping in the clinical
situation. Introduction to, and tutorials in the running of the reception
at the VU Osteopathic Medicine Clinic. Introduction to the Rx Osteo
practice management software package. Level two first aid
certificate course, which will be held prior to the commencement of
year 2.
Required Reading Students should have an understanding of the
major points of the Federal Privacy Act (www.privacy.gov.au,) and
of the Victorian Health Records Act 2001 (www.health.vic.gov.au.)
Recommended Reading Nil
Subject Hours Semester Two: Lecture – one hour per week.
Tutorial – one hour per week.
Assessment Two-hour written examination
HHY2172 PATHOLOGY 2
Campus Flinders Lane
Prerequisite(s) HHY1271 Pathology 1; HHP1171 Physiology 1;
HHA1171 Anatomy 1 or equivalent.
Content Common and life-threatening diseases affecting the
Cardiovascular, Respiratory and Gastrointestinal systems will be
discussed in Semester One. In semester 2 Endocrine,
Haematological, Gynaecologic and Genito-Urinary tract disorders
are discussed. Particular emphasis will be given to conditions that
are of special interest to Osteopaths.
Required Reading To be advised by the Lecturer.
Recommended Reading Cotran, Ramzi, S et al 1999, Robbins
Pathological Basis of Disease. 6th ed., W.B Saunders Company,
McCance, Kathryn L. and Huether, Sue E., 2002. Pathophysiology,
The Biological Basis for Disease in Adults and Children 4th ed.
Mosby. Murtagh J, 2003 General Practice 2nd ed, McGraw-Hill.
Subject Hours Semester One & Two: one hour of lecture and one
hour of tutorial each week.
Assessment The mark at the end of Semester One will be added
to the mark at the end of Semester Two and it is the aggregate
mark, which is the final mark for the subject. Each examination is a
three-hour written paper comprising short answers to questions
derived from tutorials. End of Semester One: written examination
50%. End of Semester Two: written examination 50%. Students must
complete each part of the assessment and achieve a satisfactory
level of performance (ie. a pass) in ALL parts of the assessment.
Please note that Pathology 2 is a two semester subject. First semester
passing grades will appear on academic transcripts as X. First
semester fail grades will appear as N1 or N2, and will be amended
if the subject is passed in entirety at the end of the academic year.
First semester grades will be published by the lecturer after the
meeting of the examination board.
HHY2619 PATHOLOGY 1
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHA1171 Anatomy 1; HHP1171 Physiology 1;
RBM1738 Cell Structure and Function; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to introduce students to basic concepts
and theories of pathology and the development of disease
processes. To develop an understanding of the body’s reactions to
pathological changes. The students will develop an understanding of
the pathogenesis and progression of disease, and the body’s
response at a gross and cellular level. This will provide the basis for
further study in HHY3629 Pathology 2. content will include:
Introduction to basic concepts of pathology and pathophysiology;
general principles of disease processes and the body’s response to
such changes; infective; acute, sub-acute and chronic; inflammatory;
traumatic; neoplastic; degenerative; ischaemic; metabolic; auto-
immune etc; tissue response to injury, inflammation, infection,
ischaemia, necrosis etc; healing of tissues – following insult both
macro and micro; vascular disorders – ischaemia and infarction,
thrombosis, embolism.
Required Reading Cotran RS, Kumar V, Robbins SL (1999)
Robbins Pathological Basis of Disease (6th ed.) WB Saunders Co.,
Philadelphia, Dorland’s Illustrated Medical Dictionary, (2000) (29th
ed.) WB Saunders Co., Philadelphia.
Recommended Reading Chandrasoma P, Taylor CR (latest
edition) Concise Pathology (3rd ed.) Prentice-Hall International.
Underwood JCE (ed) (latest edition) General and Systemic
Pathology, Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh. Rubin E and Farber JL
(l;atest edition) Essential Pathology, JB Lippincott Co., Philadelphia.
McCance K and Huether SE (latest edition) Pathophysiology: The
Biological Basis for Disease in Adults and Children, Mosby,
Missouri. MacSween RNM and Whaley K (latest edition) Muir’s
Textbook of Pathology, Edward Arnold, London. Burkitt HG, Stevens
A, Lowe JS and Young B (latest edition) Wheater’s Basic
Histopathology, Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh. Riott, I. (latest
edition), Essential Immunology, Blackwell Science, UK. Students are
also encouraged to use the wide range of library resources
available.
Subject Hours Two hours per week for one semester comprising
one one-hour lecture and one one-hour tutorial/workshop or
equivalent.
Assessment Written examination, 100%.
HHY3174 PATHOLOGY 4
Campus City-Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Pass in HHY1271 Pathology 1; HHY2172
Pathology 2 or equivalent
Content The students will cover during the first semester, the
content will include an introduction to the main diseases affecting
the musculoskeletal system and other connective tissues of the body
with an emphasis on metabolic, degenerative and autoimmune
conditions commonly affecting bones and joints.
Required Reading Adams J C. Hamblen D L., 2001 Outline Of
Orthopaedics 13th Ed. Churchill Livingstone, Chandrasoma P,
Taylor C R., 1997 Concise Pathology 3rd Ed. McGraw-
Hill/Appleton & Lange, Kumar V, Fausto N. Abbas A K., 2003
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
150
Robbins & Cotran Pathologic Basis of Disease 7th Ed W.B.
Saunders Company, Underwood J C E (ed)., 2000 General and
Systematic Pathology 3rd Ed. Churchill Livingstone, Young B,
Stevens A, Lowe J S., 2002 Wheater's Basic Histopathology: A
Colour Atlas and Text 4th Ed. Churchill Livingstone
Recommended Reading Adams J C., 1983 Outline Of Fractures
: Including Joint Injuries Churchill Livingstone, Apley A G. Warwick
D. Nayagam S., Solomon L., 2001 Apley's System Of
Orthopaedics And Fractures 8th Ed Edward Arnold, Berkow R. (Ed),
Beers M H. (Ed), 2003 The Merck Manual 17th Ed. John Wiley &
Sons, Cyriax J., 1998 Textbook of Orthopaedic Medicine:
Diagnosis of Soft Tissue Lesions 8th Ed. W B Saunders, MacSween
R N M., Whaley K., 1992 Muir's Textbook of Pathology 13th Ed.
Edward Arnold Publishers, McCance K, Huether S E., 1993
Pathology: The Biological Basis for Disease In Adults and Children
2nd Ed. Mosby-Year Book
Subject Hours Semester Two: Lecture – one hour per week;
Tutorial – one hour per week.
Assessment Two-hour written examination
HHY3629 PATHOLOGY 2
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHY2619 Pathology 1; RBM1738 Cell Structure
and Function; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to further expand and develop concepts
taught in HHY2619 Pathology 1. To study specific pathological
processes occurring in the named organs or systems. Students will
develop an understanding of major pathological processes affecting
the musculoskeletal and nervous systems, their clinical presentations,
and the body’s mechanisms for dealing with these pathologies.
content will include: Expansion of the microbiology covered in cell
structure and function and the pathological concepts taught in
HHY2619 Pathology 1 to include disease processes within specific
named organs or systems. Development of the pathological process
through dysfunction to disease; clinical presentation of named
pathological processes; treatment and prognosis of named
pathology. Conditions affecting the musculoskeletal system will be
considered in Semester One, with pathologies of the nervous system
and skeletal muscle considered in semester 2.
Required Reading Chandrasoma P, Taylor CR (latest edition)
Concise Pathology Prentice-Hall International. Cotran RS, Kumar V,
Robbins SL (latest edition) Robbins Pathological Basis of Disease WB
Saunders Co., Philadelphia, Underwood JCE (ed) (latest edition)
General and Systemic Pathology, Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.
Burkitt HG, Stevens A, Lowe JS and Young B (latest edition)
Wheater’s Basic Histopathology, Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.
Recommended Reading Apley AG (latest edition) Apley’s
System of Orthopaedics and Fractures, , Butterworth-Heinemann,
Oxford. Adams JC (latest edition) Outline of Fractures: Including
Joint Injuries, Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh, Adams JC (latest
edition) Outline of Orthopaedics, Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.
Cyriax J (latest edition) Textbook of Orthopaedic Medicine, Volume
1, Balliere Tindall, London. Berkow R (ed) (latest edition) The Merck
manual (17th ed), Merck and Co., Rathway NJ. McCance K and
Huether SE (latest edition) Pathophysiology: The Biological Basis for
Disease in Adults and Children, Mosby, Missouri. MacSween RNM
and Whaley K (latest edition) Muir’s Textbook of Pathology, Edward
Arnold, London.
Subject Hours Two hours per week or equivalent for two
semesters comprising lectures and tutorial/laboratory workshops.
Assessment Semester two: written examination, 100%;
HNB1113 FOUNDATIONS IN PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(S) Nil
Content Module 1: Functional Health Patterns; empasis on health
perception and management; clinical reasoning process;
occupational health and safety; procedural hand washing and
asepsis; the complete nursing health history and general survey;
assessment of family health; assessment of mental health status;
cultural assessment including indigenous cultures; and physical
examination of body systems. Module 2: Topic content in this
module includes: an introduction to the Australian Nursing and
Midwives Council (ANWC) and their role in nursing regulation
including both the historical and contemporary influences on the
development of nursing as a profession in Australia; and the
structures both within and outside of nursing that influence scope of
practice and professional boundaries. Credit Transfer Arrangements
(including Articulation Pathways) if applicable.
Required Reading Bickley, L.S. (2003) Bates’ guide to physical
examination and history taking (8th ed). Sydney: Lippincott,
Williams & Wilkins. Fuller, J. & Schaller-Ayers J. (2000). Health
Assessment. A nursing approach (3rd ed.). Philadelphia, USA:
Lippincott.
Recommended Reading/Audio Visual Alfaro-Lefevre, R (2006)
Applying nursing Process: A tool for critical thinking. (6tg/ed,)
Philadelphia , Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Anderson, D.M., Keith,
J., Novak, P.D. & Elliot. M.A. (2001). Mosby’s medical, nursing
and allied health dictionary (6th ed.). St Louis: Mosby. Bates, B
(2000). A visual guide to examination. Philadelphia, USA: JP
Lippincott. Bauer, M & Huynh, M. (1995). How to measure blood
pressure. Melbourne, Aust.: Victoria University. Huynh, M., Bauer,
M., Brown, V. (2000). Examination of the abdomen, thorax and
lungs [CD-ROM]. Melbourne: Victoria University.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 60 hours.
Assessment 1½ hour Examination 40%, evaluation of health
assessment skills and clinical reasoning 40%, annotated
bibliography on professional issues 20%.
HNB1114 HEALTHCARE INFORMATICS
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content broad content areas in this subject – The gathering of
information for evidenced based practice. In this theme students will
learn about the sources of best practice information including the
Cochrane library and the Joanna Briggs institute as well as journal
data-bases and the World Wide Web. The student will also be
taught the beginnings of how the information gathered from these
sources may be evaluated and the skills needed to turn this
information into appropriate written works for both the tertiary and
clinical field students will be working in. The use of technology to
record and evaluate heath care. HealthConnect, the Government’s
universal health record, will be used as an example of where the
government sees electronic health records being used in the future.
Students will be introduced to how technology is increasingly being
used to mange risk assessment, nursing workloads through patient
dependency systems and to give first line managers financial and
turnover information so that they may manage their work areas
through such systems as Trendcare and Excelcare. The use of
technology in patient education. This can vary from the many Web
sites that offer health information, such as the Better Health Channel
to small ‘in-house’ technology based programs that are used to
educate patients to the production of low cost information sheets
produced by ‘desktop publishing’ programs put together by many
wards and departments. The emerging use of technology in the
remote and rural areas through the use of ‘tele-health’ technology
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
151
and the nurses’ participation and role in this area. Credit Transfer
Arrangements (including Articulation Pathways) if applicable
Required reading Zilm, G. & Entwistle, C. (2002) The SMART
way: An introduction to writing for nurses. W.B. Saunders, Toronto.
Other titles to be advised.
Recommended reading Ellis, J & Hartley, C. (2005) Chapter 13
Nursing Informatics and Evidence-based Practice. In Managing and
co-ordinating Nursing Care (4th Ed.) Lippincott Williams & Wilkins,
Philadelphia. On-Line Journal of Nursing Informatics found at
http://www.eaa-knowledge.com/ojni/ or via Victoria University
Library catalogue. Websites Victoria University Library Guides and
Tutorials found at http://w2.vu.edu.au/library/clientinfo/
guides_tuts.htm Trend Care Systems Nurse Management
Software http://www.trendcare.com.au/ Excelcare
http://www.excelcare.com/
Subject hours Equivalent of 40 hours.
Assessment Written assignment (1500 words.) – 40%, annotated
bibliography – including search strategies used – 40%, on-line
participation in discussion groups 20%.
HNB1115 HEALTHCARE LAW AND ETHICS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This module introduces the student to core legal and
ethical principles required for beginning professional practice within
the Australian Health Care system and covers the following topics:
Introduction to Australian Law, Working within the Law, Legal
Concepts, Professional Regulation, The regulation of drugs, Life and
Death Issues, Professional practice and the ethical perspective.
Module 2 This module introduces the student to: The interrelations
between Commonwealth, state and private sector roles in health
care, Health insurance and the funding of health services including:
Healthcare funding, DRGs and Casemix, Pressures on the
Pharmaceutical Benefits Schemes, The organisation of Health care
services, Reforms of the Health Service.
Required Reading Australian College of Midwives ( ACMI).
(2001). Code of Ethics. and National Code of Practice. Available at
http://www.acmi.org.au. Australian College of Midwives
Incorporated (ACMI). (2002). Competency Standards for Midwives.
Available at http://www.acmi.org.au. Australian Nursing Council.
(2000). ANC National competency standards for the registered
nurse (3rd ed.). Canberra: Author. (Can be ordered online at
http://www.anc.org.au ). Australian Nursing Council. (2002).
Code of ethics for nurses in Australia [Brochure]. Canberra: Author.
(Available at http://www.anc.org.au ). Australian Nursing Council.
(2003). Code of professional conduct for nurses in Australia
[Brochure]. Canberra: Author. (Available at http://www.anc.org.au
) Forrester, K. & Griffiths, D. (2004). Essentials of law for health
professionals. Sydney: Harcourt. Johnstone, M.J. (2004). Bioethics:
A nursing perspective. (4th ed.). Sydney: Harcourt. Jones, S.R.
(2000). Ethics in Midwifery 2nd ed. Sydney: Mosby. Nurses Act
1993, No111.1993, Victorian Government Printing
Office.(incorporating amendments as of 2000). (Available at
http://www.dms.dpc.vic.gov.au ). Nurses Board of Victoria.
(1999). Code of practice for midwives in Victoria. Available at
http://www.nbv.org.au. Nurses Board of Victoria. (1999).
Professional conduct information for registered nurses. Melbourne:
Author. (Available at http://www.nbv.org.au). Nurses Board of
Victoria. (2001). Professional boundaries. Guidelines for registered
nurses in Victoria. Melbourne: Author. (Available at
http://www.nbv.org.au ). Legislation: Mental Health Act 1986
(Vic), Human Tissue Act 1982 (Vic), Age of Majority Act 1982
(Vic), Medical Treatment Act 1988 (Vic), Guardianship and
Administration Act 1986 (Vic), Mental Health (Amendment) Act
1995, Health Services Act 1988 (Vic), Freedom of Information Act
1982 (Vic), Privacy Act 2000 (Cth) (available at
http://www.privacy.gov.au/act/). Public Record Act 1973 (Vic).
Drugs, Poisons & Controlled Substances Act 1981 (Vic). Drugs,
Poisons & Controlled Substances Regulations 1995 (Vic). Nurses
Act, Coroners Act 1985. The Victorian Acts are available on-line at
http://www.health.vic.gov.au/legistation/ or
http://www.dms.dpc.vic.gov.au
Recommended Reading Beauchamp, T.L., & Childress, J.F.
(2001). Principles of biomedical ethics. (5th ed.). New York, NY:
Oxford University Press, Burkhardt, A., & Nathaniel, A. (2002).
Ethics and issues in contemporary nursing. (2nd ed.). New York:
Delmar Thompson Learning. Chiarella, M. (2002). The legal and
professional status of nursing. Sydney: Churchill Livingstone
MacFarlane, P.J.M. (2000). Health law in Australia & New
Zealand: Commentary and materials. (3rd ed.). Leichardt, NSW:
Federation Press. Palmer, G.R., & Short, S.D. (2000). Health care
and public policy. (3rd ed.). Melbourne: MacMillan. Staunton, P.J.,
& Chiarella, M. (2003). Nursing and the law. (5th ed.).Marrickville,
NSW: Elsevier. Wallace, M. ( 2001). Health care and the law. (3rd
ed.). Pyrmont, NSW: Law Book Co. Australasian Legal Information
Institute (URL http://www.austlii.edu.au/) has some pages on ethics
if you search using that term plus any other terms that may be
relevant to your search.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 56 hours
Assessment Learning folio – 60%, oral presentation – 40%
HNB1133 FOUNDATIONS IN NURSING 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite Nil
Content on completion of this subject, students should be able to
emonstrate beginning health assessment skills; practice assessment
for mental health and family health; utilise interpersonal and
professional communication skills required for interviewing for health
assessment; incorporate the principles of occupational health and
safety to the practice of nursing health assessment; practice the
principles and process of infection control in the conduct of health
assessment; document health assessment data clearly and
accurately; adapt the health assessment process to the person in the
community environment; apply critical thinking skills to the practice
of nursing health assessment in the health care and community
environment; integrate the relevant ethical and legal issues
associated with the conduct of health assessment of the adult and
the older person; incorporate relevant theoretical concepts from
associated subjects in the planning, implementation and evaluation
of the practice of nursing health assessment.
Required Reading Anderson, D.M., Keith, J., Novak, P.D. &
Elliot. M.A. (2001). Mosby’s medical, nursing and allied health
dictionary (6th Ed) St Louis. MO: Mosey Crisp, J. & Taylor, C.
(2002). Potter & Perry’s fundamentals of Nursing. Sydney, Australia:
Mosey Weber, Kelly, J. (2002). Health Assessment in Nursing.
Philadelphia, USA: Lippincott School of Nursing (2002). Health
Assessment Workbook. Melbourne [Author] Huynh, M., Bauer, M. &
Brown, V. (2001). Physical examination of the abdomen, thorax
and lungs. Melbourne, Aust: Victoria University [CD-ROM].
Recommended Reading Bates, B. (1995). A visual guide to
physical examination. Philadelphia, USA: JP Lippincott Company.
[Video-recording]. Wilcox, J. (1994). Nursing Assessment: More
than merely ‘doing the obs’. Contemporary Nurse. 10(3). Pp.13-16
Milligan, K & Neville, S (2001). Health Assessment and its
relationship to nursing Practice in New Zealand. Contemporary
Nurse. 10(1-2). Pp.7-11.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
152
Subject Hours Equivalent of 62 hours organised according to
teaching mode used.Assessment One, one hours written
examiniation 50% two health assessment documents representing
staged health assessment activities aligned with subject information
input 50% physical examination skill testing Ungraded
(Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory)
HNB1134 FOUNDATIONS IN NURSING 2
Campus St Albans
Content The aim of this subject is to introduce and develop the
students’, knowledge base required for providing nursing care to
persons who need assistance in meeting basic human needs.
Knowledge for beginning understanding of the psychosocial
dimensions of the health of families, and mental health nursing will
also be introduced. The focus of the subject is the practice of
fundamental nursing skills, family health, mental health, the scientific
basis for nursing practice, and nursing care that meets the special
needs of the adult and the older person experiencing compromised
health and wellness. The fieldwork component of this subject is
designed to enable the student to develop confidence in the practice
of problem solving in the provision of fundamental health care for
the individual in the community.
Required Reading Anderson, D.M., Keith, J., Novak, P.D. &
Elliot. M.A. (2001). Mosby’s medical, nursing and allied health
dictionary (6th Ed) St Louis. MO: Mosby
Crisp, J & Taylor, C. (2002). Potter & Perry’s fundamentals of
Nursing. Sydney, Australia: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Cohen, E. (2000). Dirty little secrets
about traditional bathing practices. Nursing 2000. (May).
Supplement. Kayser-Jones, J. & Schell, E. The effect of staffing on the
quality of care at mealtimes. Nursing Outlook. 45(2). Pp. 64–72.
National Health & Medical Research Council. (1996). Infection
control in the health care setting. Canberra, Australia: Australian
Government Publishing Service. Victorian WorkCover Authority.
(2002). Worksafe Victoria. Transferring people safely. A practical
guide to managing risk. Melbourne, Australia: [Author]
Subject Hours Equivalent of 57 hours organised according to
teaching mode used.
Assessment One, two hour examination (75%); attendance and
participation in simulated clinical workshop. Ungraded.
(Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory); Field work assignment (25%)
HNB1135 PROFESSIONAL NURSING 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content An introduction to the Australian Nursing Council
Incorporated (ANCI) Competencies, historical and contemporary
influences on the development of nursing as a profession and
nursing role, and structures within nursing that influence scope of
practice and professional boundaries, and culture and diversity of
care as components of nursing practice.
Required Reading Australian Nursing Council Incorporated
(2002). Code of ethics for nurses in Australia. [Brochure].
Canberra: Author. Australian Nursing Council Incorporated (1995).
Code of professional conduct for nurses in Australia. [Brochure].
Canberra: Author. Australian Nursing Council Incorporated (2002).
ANCI National Competency Standards for the Registered Nurse and
the Enrolled Nurse. [Brochure]. Canberra: Author.
Recommended Reading Benner. P. (1984). From novice to
expert. Menlo Park, CA: Addison-Wesley. Bishop, A. Scudder, J.
(1991) Nursing: The practice of caring. New York: National
League. Benner. P. (1984). From novice to expert. Menlo Park, CA:
Addison-Wesley. Bishop, A. Scudder, J. (1991) Nursing: The
practice of caring. New York: National League of Nursing. Knepfer,
G., & Johns, C. (1989). Nursing for life. Sydney: Pan. Lindberg, J.
Hunter, M. Kruszewski, A. (1998) Introduction to nursing: Concepts,
issues and opportunities. New York: Lippincott. McCoppin, B., &
Gardner, H. (1994). Tradition and reality: Nursing and politics
inAustralia. Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone. Nelson, S. (2001)
Say little, do much: Nursing, nuns and hospitals in the nineteenth
century. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press. Nightingale.
F. (1969). Nursing: what it is and what it is not. New York: Dover
Publications. Nurses Act 1993. No 111 of 1993. Parliament of
Victoria (1996, September).
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours organised according to
teaching mode used.
Assessment Achievement of subject objectives will be determined
through the use of more than one type of assessment methodology.
A combination of the following, or other appropriate methodologies
will be used: written
Assessment, reflective journal, learning folio, oral presentation.
Seminar presentation – 40%, Essay – 2000 words, 60%.
HNB1232 NURSING PRACTICE 1: ACUTE CARE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HNB1113 FoundationS in Professional Practice
Content The content of this subject will be organised around the
Functional Health Patterns, in particular: Activity & Exercise,
Nutrition & Metabolism, Elimination and Cognition & Perception.
Oxygenation and Oxygen administration; Cardiopulmonary
Resuscitation; Drug calculations and the principles of administration
of therapeutic substances; Skin integrity and wound care; Prevention
of infection in acute care settings; Peri-operative nursing care; ‘No
Lift’ policy; The ‘Activities of Daily Living’; Fluid and electrolyte
balance; Use of technology in the clinical setting; and Care needs,
including spiritual and religious needs, in relation to loss; end of life
care, including death, grief, and palliation and including the needs
of indigenous and other cultures.
Required Reading Crisp, J & Taylor, C. (2005). Potter & Perry’s
Fundamentals of Nursing. (2nd ed) Sydney: Mosby. Fuller, J. &
Schaller-Ayers J. (2000). Health Assessment. A nursing approach
(3rd ed.). Philadelphia, USA: Lippincott. Tollefson, J. (2004).
Clinical psychomotor skills. Assessment tools for nursing students
(2nd ed.). Tuggerah, NSW: Social Science Press
Recommended Reading Alfaro-Lefevre, R (2006) Applying
nursing Process: A tool for critical thinking. (6tg/ed,) Philadelphia ,
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Brown, D., & Edwards, H (Eds).
(2005). Lewis’s medical-surgical nursing. Assessment and
management of clinical problems. Marrickville, NSW: Elsevier
Australia. Evans-Smith, P. (2005). Taylor’s clinical; nursing skills. A
nursing process approach. Philadelphia, USA: Lippincott. Hext, V.,
& Mayner, L. (2003). Practical nursing calculations. Crows Nest,
NSW: Allen & Unwin.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours.
Assessment 1½ hour Examination – 40%, Group Problem Based
Learning exercise – 30%, Group focused literature review 30%
Drug Calculation: Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory.
HNB1233 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 1: ACUTE CARE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Foundations in Professional Practice
Content Students will be required to participate in the delivery of
health care to patients in a variety of acute care settings under the
supervision of a clinical teacher/preceptor. Using the ANCI
Competencies, students’ clinical performance will be guided and
assessed by experienced clinical teachers and/or preceptors. Credit
Transfer Arrangements (including Articulation Pathways) if
applicable.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
153
Required Reading Crisp, J & Taylor, C. (2005). Potter & Perry’s
Fundamentals of Nursing. (2nd ed) Sydney, Australia: Mosby
Fuller, J. & Schaller-Ayers J. (2000). Health Assessment. A nursing
approach (3rd ed.). Philadelphia, USA: Lippincott.
Tollefson, J. (2004). Clinical psychomotor skills. Assessment tools for
nursing students (2nd ed.). Tuggerah, NSW: Social Science Press
Recommended Reading Brown, D., & Edwards, H (Eds).
(2005). Lewis’s medical-surgical nursing. Assessment and
management of clinical problems. Marrickville, NSW: Elsevier
Australia. Evans-Smith, P. (2005). Taylor’s clinical; nursing skills. A
nursing process approach. Philadelphia, USA: Lippincott. Hext, V.,
& Mayner, L. (2003). Practical nursing calculations. Crows Nest,
NSW: Allen & Unwin.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 56 hours.
Assessment In order to be awarded a satisfactory grade for this
subject, the student must successfully complete each of the following:
satisfactory performance of holistic assessment of one client, as
demonstrated by care planning documentation; demonstration of
competence in selected skills, according to specified criteria, and in
line with the ANC Competencies as defined for a student at this
stage of the course; satisfactory participation in reflective practice,
as defined by completion of personal learning objectives and
reflective journal entries during each week of clinical placement;
and demonstration of safe and competent practice in line with the
ANC Competencies as defined for a student at this stage of the
course. Final assessment: Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory.
HNB1234 PROFESSIONAL NURSING 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HNB1135 Professional Nursing 1
Content This subject aims to introduce students to professional
issues in acute care nursing including communication processes as
well as funding initiatives and mechanisms that impact on the
nursing care of acutely ill patients.
Required Reading Duckett, S. (2000). The Australian health care
system. South Melbourne: Oxford University Press. Stein-Parbury, J.
(2000). Patient & Person: Developing interpersonal skills in nursing.
Sydney: Harcourt. Adler, R.B. & Rodman, G. (2003) Understanding
human communication. (8th ed). New York: Oxford University Press.
Alfaro-LeFevre, R. (1999). Critical thinking in nursing: a practical
approach (2nd ed). Philadelphia Saunders. Holly, M.L. (1991).
Keeping a personal-professional journal. Victoria: Deakin University
Press. Smith, S. (1992). Communication in nursing. St Louis: Mosby
Year Book.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours organised according to
teaching mode used.
Assessment Critical observation exercise/dicussion (50% ). Essay
(50%).
HNB1235 EVIDENCE BASED HEALTH CARE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The aim of this subject is to consider the rationale for
evidence based professional practice in nursing and midwifery, the
skills that are needed to understand and appraise a systematic
review and meta-analysis, and the approaches that can be used to
implement research based practice. The focus will be on how to
appraise and use research in clinical practice
Required Reading Crombie, I K (1996) The pocket guide to
critical appraisal London: BMJ Publishing Glasziou, P, Irwig, L, Bain,
C., & Colditz, G. (2001). Systematic Reviews In Health Care: A
Practical Guide Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Critical
Skills Appraisal Programme (1999) Evidence-Based Health Care: An
Open Learning Resource For Health Care Practitioners Plymbridge
Distributors, Plymouth.
Recommended Reading Bandolier: Evidence-based healthcare
www.jr2.ox.ac.uk/bandolier/backnos.html. Dawes. M. (Ed)
(1999). Evidence-based practice: a primer for health care
professionals. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Evidence-based
mental health (Online version). ebmh.bmjjournals.com Le May, A.
(1999). Evidence-based practice. London: Nursing Times Books.
McKenna, H., Cutcliff, J., McKenna, P. (2000). Evidence-based
practice: demolishing some myths. Harrow, Middlesex, England:
Scutari Projects Ltd. Muir Gray, J. A. (2001). Evidence based
healthcare: How to make health policy and management decisions
(2nd Ed). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Trinder, L., & Reynolds,
S. (Eds) (2000). Evidence-based practice: a critical appraisal.
Oxford: Blackwell Science.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 32 hours organised according to
teaching mode used.
Assessment Devise and conduct a systematic literature search
strategy (not review) on a nominated clinical topic 50%; Appraisal
of a systematic review or research paper on the nominated clinical
topic 50%.
HNB2133 NURSING PRACTICE 2: ACUTE CARE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 1; Human Bioscience 2: Body
Structure and Function
Content The content of this subject will be organised around the
Functional Health Patterns, in particular: Activity & Exercise,
Nutrition & Metabolism, Cognition and perception (neurological
dysfunction). Specific nursing skills to be taught will relate to
parenteral medication administration; pain assessment and
management; nutrition and metabolism maintenance including IV
therapy; occupational health and safety protocols and knowledge of
infection control principles in relation to the above; hospitalisation
and acute episodic illness including the planning, implementing and
evaluation of care with a variety of medical and surgical conditions,
including respiratory, cardiac, vascular, and neurological; patient
education processes and skills; and factors such as cultural and
indigenous issues, legal and ethical issues, communication skills,
and organisational factors will also be considered in the analysis of
client care in clinical settings. Credit Transfer Arrangements
(including Articulation Pathways) if applicable
Required Reading Brown, D., & Edwards, H (Eds). (2005).
Lewis’s medical-surgical nursing. Assessment and management of
clinical problems. Marrickville, NSW: Elsevier Australia. Bennett, B.,
& Murphy, L. (2002). Style guide [Booklet]. St Albans, Vic: Victoria
University. Evans-Smith, P. (2005). Taylor’s clinical; nursing skills. A
nursing process approach. Philadelphia, USA: Lippincott. Hext, V.,
& Mayner, L. (2003). Practical nursing calculations. Crows Nest,
NSW: Allen & Unwin. Tollefson, J. (2004). Clinical psychomotor
skills. Assessment tools for nursing students (2nd ed.). Tuggerah,
NSW: Social Science Press. *Laboratory skills pack to be obtained
from the bookshop. Price $15.00 approximately.
Recommended Reading Australian Nursing Council. (2000).
ANC National competency standards for the registered nurse (3rd
ed.). Canberra: Author. (Can be ordered online at
http://www.anc.org.au )
Australian Nursing Council. (2002). Code of ethics for nurses in
Australia [Brochure]. Canberra: Author. (Available at
http://www.anc.org.au )
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
154
Australian Nursing Council. (2003). Code of professional conduct
for nurses in Australia [Brochure]. Canberra: Author. (Available at
http://www.anc.org.au )
Evans-Smith, P. (2005). Taylor’s clinical; nursing skills. A nursing
process approach. Philadelphia, USA: Lippincott.
Galbraith, A., Bullock, S., & Manias, E. (2004). Fundamentals of
pharmacology. (4thed.). Frenchs Forest, NSW: Pearson Education
Australia.
Nurses Board of Victoria. (1999). Professional conduct information
for registered nurses. Melbourne: Author. (Available at
http://www.nbv.org.au )
Nurses Board of Victoria. (2001). Professional boundaries.
Guidelines for registered nurses in Victoria. Melbourne: Author.
(Available at http://www.nbv.org.au )
Recommended Journals American Journal of Nursing,
Australian Family Physician, Australian Nurses Journal, Australian
Journal of Advanced Nursing, British Medical Journal,
Contemporary Nurse Image, Journal of the American Medical
Association, Journal of Advanced Nursing, Medical Journal of
Australia, Nursing 98+.
Recommended Websites Department of Human Services,
Victorian State Government: http://www.dhs.vic.gov.au
Australian Department of Health and
Aging:http://www.health.gov.au/
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare:
http://www.aihw.gov.au/
Australian Bureau of Statistics: http://www.abs.gov.au/
Australian Resuscitation Council: http://www.resus.org.au/
Heart Foundation (Australia): http://www.heartfoundation.com.au/
Lung net (Australian Lung Foundation): http:www.lungnet.org.au/
Asthma Victoria: http://www.asthma.org.au/index.html
Asthma Australia: http://www.asthmaaustralia.org.au/
National Asthma Council: http://www.nationalasthma.org.au/
The Cancer Council: http://www.accv.org.au
National Breast Cancer Centre: http://www.nbcc.org.au/
Papscreen Victoria: http://www.papscreen.org/
Communicable Diseases Australia:
http://www.health.gov.au/pubhlth/cdi/nndss/
Diabetes Australia: http://www.diabetesaustralia.com.au
International Diabetes Institute: http://www.idi.org.au/home.htm
Virtual Hospital: http://www.vh.org/
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours.
Assessment Problem based learning (PBL) group exercise – 30%,
1½ hour Examination – 40%, case study related literature review –
30%, Drug Calculation: Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory.
HNB2134 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 2: ACUTE CARE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 1: Acute Care, Clinical Practicum
1: Acute Care, Human Bioscience 2: Body Structure and Function
Content Students will be expected to develop an increasingly
independent role in the delivery of nursing care to clients in acute
medical/surgical settings. Students will to be supervised by clinical
teachers and/or preceptors during this period of experiential
learning. The ANC Competencies will be used as an assessment
framework by preceptors and clinical instructors. The students will
be expected to focus on the themes they have been exposed to in
the accompanying theory subject taken prior to this clinical
practicum as outlined in the subject guide. Reflective practice will be
encouraged in order to enable students to critically evaluate their
clinical practice. The completion of University-specific client care
documentation at intervals throughout the clinical placement will
enhance the students’ clinical communication/documentation skills.
Client-student ratios will be graduated throughout the placement and
numbers will depend upon the level of acuity. Credit Transfer
Arrangements (including Articulation Pathways) if applicable.
Required Reading Australian Nursing Council Incorporated
(2000). ANCI competency standards for the registered nurse and
the enrolled nurse (3rd Ed) Canberra: Author. (Available at
www.anci.org.au )Australian Nursing Council Incorporated (2002).
Code of ethics for nurses in Australia [Brochure]. Canberra: Author.
(Available at www.anci.org.au ) Australian Nursing Council
Incorporated (1995). Code of professional conduct for nurses in
Australia [Brochure]. Canberra: Author. (Available at
www.anci.org.au ) Bennett, B., & Murphy, L. (2002). Style guide
[Booklet]. St Albans, Vic: Victoria University. (also available at
www.staff.vu.edu.au/AcuteCareNsg) Fiscbach, F.T. (1999). A
manual of laboratory and diagnostic tests (6th Ed) Philadelphia, PA:
Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins. Galbraith, A., Bullock, S., & Manias,
E. (2001). Fundamentals of pharmacology (3rd Ed) Frenchs Forest,
NSW: Pearson Education Australia. Harrison, R. & Daly, L. (2001).
Acute medical emergencies. A nursing guide. London: Churchill
Livingstone. Lewis, S. M., Heitkemper, M.M., & Dirksen, S. R.
(2000). Medical-surgical nursing. Assessment and management of
clinical problems (5th Ed) St Louis, MO: Mosby. McCance, K.L., &
Huether, S.E. (2002). Pathophysiology. The biological basis for
disease in adults & children (4th Ed) St Louis, MO: Mosby. Perry, P.,
& Potter, A. (2001). Clinical nursing skills and techniques (5th Ed) St
Louis, MO: Mosby. Tiziani, A. (2002). Havard’s nursing guide to
drugs (6th Ed) Marrickville, NSW: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Australian Nursing Council. (2000).
ANC National competency standards for the registered nurse (3rd
ed.). Canberra: Author. (Can be ordered online at
http://www.anc.org.au ). Australian Nursing Council. (2002).
Code of ethics for nurses in Australia [Brochure]. Canberra: Author.
(Available at http://www.anc.org.au ) Australian Nursing Council.
(2003). Code of professional conduct for nurses in Australia
[Brochure]. Canberra: Author. (Available at
http://www.anc.org.au) Evans-Smith, P. (2005). Taylor’s clinical;
nursing skills. A nursing process approach. Philadelphia, USA:
Lippincott. Galbraith, A., Bullock, S., & Manias, E. (2004).
Fundamentals of pharmacology. (4thed.). Frenchs Forest, NSW:
Pearson Education Australia. Nurses Board of Victoria. (1999).
Professional conduct information for registered nurses. Melbourne:
Author. (Available at http://www.nbv.org.au ) Nurses Board of
Victoria. (2001). Professional boundaries. Guidelines for registered
nurses in Victoria. Melbourne: Author. (Available at
http://www.nbv.org.au ).
Subject Hours Equivalent of 70 hours.
Assessment In order to be awarded a satisfactory grade for this
subject, the student must successfully complete each of the following:
satisfactory performance of holistic assessment of one client, as
demonstrated by care planning documentation; demonstration of
competence in selected skills, according to specified criteria, and in
line with the ANC Competencies as defined for a student at this
stage of the course; satisfactory participation in reflective practice,
as defined by completion of personal learning objectives and
reflective journal entries during each week of clinical placement;
and demonstration of safe and competent practice in line with the
ANC Competencies as defined for a student at this stage of the
course. Final assessment: Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory.
HNB2135 NURSING PACTICE 3: HEALTH & ILLNESS IN OLDER ADULTS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 1: Acute Care
Content The content of this subject will be organised around the
Functional Health Patterns: Health Perception & Management;
Activity & Exercise, Nutrition & Metabolism, Sleep & Rest, Cognition
and Perception, Sexuality and Reproduction and Values and Beliefs.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
155
This subject includes exploration of demographics of the Australian
population and the contribution to society of older adults; ageism:
stereotypes, myths and reality; the normal ageing process and
adjustment to change; risk assessment and safety: includes issues
relating to sensory changes, musculoskeletal changes and falls;
considerations that impact on the wellbeing of the older person:
includes promotion of sleep, nutrition, and exercise; dementia,
depression and other disorders common in the older population:
includes impact on the person and the family; factors that impact on
care needs including culture, spirituality and sexuality; ethical and
legal concerns: focus on the rights of the confused older person and
alternatives to restraint; options and care services: includes
accommodation choices, case management and community
supports; supporting older adults and their families in the
community; specific care needs of older people from a variety of
cultural and sub-cultural groups, with a particular focus on
Australia’s Indigenous population; and specific care needs of the
older adult in acute care settings. Credit Transfer Arrangements
(including Articulation Pathways) if applicable.
Required Reading Ebersole & Hess 2001, Mosby: StLouis. Nay,
R. & Garratt, S. (2004) Nursing older people: issues and
innovations. (2nd ed.). Sydney: Churchill Livingstone
Recommended Reading Cluning, T. (2001) Ageing at home –
practical approaches to community care. Melbourne:Ausmed
Publications. Elioplous, C. (2001) Gerontological nursing (5th ed.).
Philadelphia: Lippincott. Koch, S. & Garratt, S. (2001) Assessing
older people. Sydney: MacLennan and Petty.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours.
Assessment Essay (2500 words) – 60%, Individual portfolio –
40%.
HNB2136 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 3: HEALTH AND ILLNESS IN OLDER
ADULTS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 1: Acute Care, Clinical Practicum
1: Acute Care Content Drawing on experience from preceding
subjects and clinical experiences students will be expected to
develop the foundation skills and knowledge for evolving
independence in the delivery of nursing care to the older adult. The
completion of a University-specific assessment tool will enhance the
students’ clinical communication/documentation skills. Client-student
ratios will be graduated throughout the placement depending on the
capacity of the agencies providing the experience. Credit Transfer
Arrangements (including Articulation Pathways) if applicable
Required Reading Ebersole, P., Hess, P. & Luggen, A. (2004).
Toward healthy aging (6th ed.). St. Louis: Mosby. Nay, R. &
Garratt, S. (2004) Nursing older people: issues and innovations.
(2nd ed.). Sydney: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Cluning, T. (2001) Ageing at home –
practical approaches to community care. Melbourne:Ausmed
Publications. Elioplous, C. (2001) Gerontological nursing (5th ed.).
Philadelphia: Lippincott. Koch, S. & Garratt, S. (2001) Assessing
older people. Sydney: MacLennan and Petty.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 70 hours organised to teaching mode
used.
Assessment In order to be awarded a satisfactory grade for this
subject, students must complete a university specific work-book
related to their experience, to a standard commensurate with their
level in the course; demonstrate competence in selected skills,
according to specified criteria, and in line with the ANC
Competencies as defined for a student at this stage of the course;
and demonstrate safe and competent practice in line with the ANC
Competencies as defined for a student at this stage of the course.
Final assessment: Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory.
HNB2137 ETHICS AND LEGAL STUDIES
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The aim of this subject is to introduce nursing and
midwifery students to key concepts in ethics and law. The subject
aims to develop an understanding of ethical and legal dimensions of
practice with the opportunity to examine theory, principles and
moral arguments related to professional practice and health care
issues.
Required Reading Australian College of Midwives Incorporated
(1998). ACMI Competency standards for midwives. Melbourne:
Author Australian Nursing Council Incorporated (2002). Code of
ethics for nurses in Australia. [Brochure]. Canberra:
Author.)Australian Nursing Council Incorporated (1995). Code of
professional conduct for nurses in Australia. [Brochure]. Canberra:
Author.) Australian Nursing Council Incorporated (2002). ANCI
National Competency Standards for the Registered Nurse and the
Enrolled Nurse. [Brochure]. Canberra: Author. Forrester, K. &
Griffiths, D. (2001). Essentials of law for health professionals.
Sydney: Harcourt. Johnstone, M.J. (1999). Bioethics: A nursing
perspective. (3rd Ed) Sydney: Harcourt. MacFarleena, P.J.M.
(2000). Health law: Commentary and materials. (3rd Ed) Leichardt,
NSW: Federation Press. Nurses Board of Victoria. (1999). Code of
practice for midwives in Victoria. [Brochure]
Recommended Reading Beauchamp, T.L., & Childress, J.F.
(1994). Principles of biomedical ethics. (4th Ed) Sydney: Harcourt
Australia Pty. Ltd. Burkhardt, A. & Nathaniel, A., (2002). Ethics and
issues in contemporary nursing. (2nd Ed) New York: Delmar:
Thompson Learning. Chiarella, M. (2002). The legal and
professional status of nursing. Sydney: Churchill Livingston Jones,
S.R. (2000). Ethics in midwifery (2nd Ed) Sydney: Mosby. Palmer,
G.R., & Short, S.D. (2000). Health care and public policy. (3rd Ed)
Melbourne: MacMillan Staunton, P.J., & Whyburn, B. (1997).
Nursing and the law. (4th Ed) Sydney: Harcourt Brace. Wallace, M.
( 2001). Health care and the law. (3rd Ed) Sydney: Lawbook Co.
Legislation Mental Health Act 1986 (Vic) Human Tissue Act 1982
(Vic) Age of Majority Act 1982 (Vic) Medical Treatment Act 1988
(Vic) Guardianship and Administration Act 1986 (Vic) Mental
Health (Amendment) Act 1995, Health Services Act 1988 (Vic)
Freedom of Information Act 1982 (Vic) Privacy Act 2000 (Cth)
Public Record Act 1973 (Vic) Drugs, Poisons & Controlled
Substances Act 1981 (Vic) Drugs, Poisons & Controlled Substances
Regulations 1995 (Vic)
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours organised according to
teaching mode used.
Assessment Achievement of subject objectives will be determined
through the use of more than one type of assessment methodology.
A combination of the following, or other appropriate methodologies
will be used: written assessment, reflective journal, learning folio,
oral presentation.
HNB2233 NURSING PRACTICE 4: ACUTE CARE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 2: Acute Care, Nursing Practice
3: Health & Illness in Older Adults
Content The content of this subject will be organised around the
Functional Health Patterns, in particular: Nutrition & Metabolism,
Elimination (gastrointestinal & renal); Movement and co-ordination
(musculoskeletal skeletal trauma); Sexuality and reproduction
(reproductive cancers). Specific nursing skills to be taught will relate
to parenteral medication administration; complex care needs for
those patients who are unable to care for their own health needs;
elimination pattern; sexuality and reproduction pattern; occupational
health and safety protocols and knowledge of infection control
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
156
principles in relation to the above; hospitalisation and acute
episodic illnesses including the planning, implementing and
evaluation of care used to treat clients with a variety of medical and
surgical conditions, including gastrointestinal, renal, musculoskeletal
trauma, reproductive cancers; patient education processes and
skills; and factors such as cultural and indigenous issues, legal and
ethical issues, communication skills, and organisational factors will
also be considered in the analysis of client care in clinical settings.
Credit Transfer Arrangements (including Articulation Pathways) if
applicable.
Required Reading Brown, D., & Edwards, H (Eds). (2005).
Lewis’s medical-surgical nursing. Assessment and management of
clinical problems. Marrickville, NSW: Elsevier Australia. Bennett, B.,
& Murphy, L. (2002). Style guide [Booklet]. St Albans, Vic: Victoria
University. Bryant, B., Knights, K. & Salerno, E. (2003)
Pharmacology for health professionals. Marrickville, NSW: Mosby.
Dillon, P.M. (2003). Nursing Health Assessment. Acritical thinking,
case studies approach. Philadelphia, USA: Lippincott. Evans-Smith,
P. (2005). Taylor’s clinical; nursing skills. A nursing process
approach. Philadelphia, USA: Lippincott. Hext, V., & Mayner, L.
(2003). Practical nursing calculations. Crows Nest, NSW: Allen &
Unwin. Tollefson, J. (2004). Clinical psychomotor skills. Assessment
tools for nursing students (2nd ed.). Tuggerah, NSW: Social Science
Press.
Recommended Reading Galbraith, A., Bullock, S., & Manias,
E. (2004). Fundamentals of pharmacology. (4thed.). Frenchs Forest,
NSW: Pearson Education Australia. Nurses Board of Victoria.
(1999). Professional conduct information for registered nurses.
Melbourne: Author. (Available at http://www.nbv.org.au ). Nurses
Board of Victoria. (2001). Professional boundaries. Guidelines for
registered nurses in Victoria. Melbourne: Author. (Available at
http://www.nbv.org.au ).
Recommended Journals American Journal of Nursing,
Australian Family Physician, Australian Nurses Journal, Australian
Journal of Advanced Nursing, British Medical Journal
Contemporary Nurse, Image, Journal of the American Medical
Association, Journal of Advanced Nursing, Medical Journal of
Australia, Nursing 98+.
Recommended Websites Department of Human Services,
Victorian State Government: www.dhs.vic.gov.au, Australian
Department of Health and Ageing www.health.gov.au, Australian
Institute of Health and Welfare www.aihw.gov.au, Australian
Bureau of Statistics www.abs.gov.au, Australian Resuscitation
Council www.resus.org.au, Heart Foundation (Australia)
www.heartfoundation.com.au, Lung net (Australian Lung
Foundation) www.lungnet.org.au, Asthma Victoria
www.asthma.org.au, Asthma Australia
www.asthmaaustralia.org.au, National Asthma Council
www.nationalasthma.org.au, The Cancer Council
www.accv.org.au, National Breast Cancer Centre
www.nbcc.org.au, Papscreen Victoria www.papscreen.org,
Communicable Diseases Australia
www.health.gov.au/pubhlth/cdi/nndss, Diabetes Australia
www.diabetesaustralia.com.au, International Diabetes Institute
www.idi.org.au, Virtual Hospital www.vh.org (In addition, students
will be provided with more specific website information under set
topic areas).
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours.
Assessment Problem based learning (PBL) group exercise 30%,
1½ hour Examination 40%, case study related literature review
(1200 words.) 30%.
HNB2234 PRACTICUM 4: ACUTE CARE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 2: Acute Care, Clinical Practicum
2: Acute Care, Nursing Practice 3: Health & Illness in Older Adults,
Clinical Practicum 3: Health & Illness in Older Adults
Content Students will be expected to develop an increasingly
independent role in the delivery of nursing care to clients in acute
medical/surgical settings. Students will to be supervised by clinical
teachers and/or preceptors during this period of experiential
learning. The ANC Competencies will be used as an assessment
framework by preceptors and clinical instructors. The students will
be expected to focus on the themes they have been exposed to in
the accompanying theory subject taken prior to this clinical
practicum as outlined in the subject guide. Reflective practice will be
encouraged in order to enable students to critically evaluate their
clinical practice. The completion of University-specific client care
documentation at intervals throughout the clinical placement will
enhance the students’ clinical communication/documentation skills.
Client-student ratios will be graduated throughout the placement and
numbers will depend upon the level of acuity.
Required Reading Brown, D., & Edwards, H (Eds). (2005).
Lewis’s medical-surgical nursing. Assessment and management of
clinical problems. Marrickville, NSW: Elsevier Australia. Bennett, B.,
& Murphy, L. (2002). Style guide [Booklet]. St Albans, Vic: Victoria
University. Bryant, B., Knights, K. & Salerno, E. (2003)
Pharmacology for health professionals. Marrickville, NSW: Mosby.
Dillon, P.M. (2003). Nursing Health Assessment. Acritical thinking,
case studies approach. Philadelphia, USA: Lippincott. Evans-Smith,
P. (2005). Taylor’s clinical; nursing skills. A nursing process
approach. Philadelphia, USA: Lippincott. Hext, V., & Mayner, L.
(2003). Practical nursing calculations. Crows Nest, NSW: Allen &
Unwin. Tollefson, J. (2004). Clinical psychomotor skills. Assessment
tools for nursing students (2nd ed.). Tuggerah, NSW: Social Science
Press.
Recommended Reading Galbraith, A., Bullock, S., & Manias,
E. (2004). Fundamentals of pharmacology. (4thed.). Frenchs Forest,
NSW: Pearson Education Australia.Nurses Board of Victoria.
(1999). Professional conduct information for registered nurses.
Melbourne: Author. (Available at http://www.nbv.org.au ).Nurses
Board of Victoria. (2001). Professional boundaries. Guidelines for
registered nurses in Victoria. Melbourne: Author. (Available at
http://www.nbv.org.au )
Subject Hours Equivalent of 70 hours.
Assessment In order to be awarded a satisfactory grade for this
subject, the student must successfully complete each of the following:
satisfactory performance of holistic assessment of one client, as
demonstrated by care planning documentation. Demonstration of
competence in selected skills, according to specified criteria, and in
line with the ANCI Competencies as defined for a student at this
stage of the course; satisfactory participation in reflective practice,
as defined by completion of personal learning objectives and
reflective journal entries during each week of clinical placement;
and demonstration of safe and competent practice in line with the
ANC Competencies as defined for a student at this stage of the
course.
HNB2235 NURSING PRACTICE 5: MENTAL HEALTH & ILLNESS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HNB1133 Foundations in Nursing 1, HNB1134
Foundations in Nursing 2, APT1311 Psychology Across the Lifespan
Content The aim of this subject is to develop students' knowledge,
skills and attitudes in the promotion of mental health. To meet the
needs of people with altered mental health status in institutional and
community settings.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
157
Required Reading Stuart, G. W., & Laraia, M. T. (2001).
Principles and practice of psychiatric nursing (7th Ed) St. Louis:
Mosby.
Recommended Reading American Psychiatric Association
(2000) Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders DSM-
IV-TR. Washington DC: American Psychiatric Association. Frisch,
N.C. & Frisch, L.E., (1998) Psychiatric mental health nursing.
Albany: Delamar Publishers Geldard, D. (1998) Basic personal
counselling (3rd ed) Sydney: Prentice Hall Gorman, L. M., Raines,
M. L. & Sultan, D. F., (2002) Psychosocial Nursing for General
Patient care. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Company Haber, J.,
Krainovich-Miller, B., McMahon, A. L. & Price-Hoskins, P (1997).
Comprehensive psychiatric nursing. (5th. ed ) St- Louis: Mosby
Keltner, N. L., Schwecke, L.H., Bostrom, C. E. (1999) Psychiatric
nursing (3rd Ed) St Louis: Mosby Year Book Newell, R., & Gournay,
K., (2000). Mental health nursing – an evidence-based approach.
London: Churchill Livingstone. Thompson, T. & Mathias, P. (Eds)
(2000) Lyttle’s mental health and disorder London: Bailliere Tindall
Townsend, M. C., (2000) Psychiatric mental health nursing:
Concepts of care (3rd Ed) Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Company
Videbeck, S. L. (2001) Psychiatric mental health nursing
Philadelphia: Lippincott
Recommended Websites hna.ffh.vic.gov.au/acmh/
mh/index.htm, Home page of the Victorian Government mental
health branch and provides numerous interesting and helpful links.
hna.ffh.vic.gov.au/acmh/mh/policy_legislation/abstracts, Provides
a complete list of all the branches publications, complete with
abstracts. www.healthsci.utas.edu.au/nursing/college/ Link is to the
Australian and New Zealand College of Mental Health Nurses
home page. The College is the professional body for mental health
nurses and the site provides many useful links, including a
newsgroup email subscription (free). www.span.com.au/mhrc/,
Mental Health Resource Centre www.mhca.com.au Mental Health
Council of Australia auseinet.flinders.edu.au AusEinet–Australian
Early Intervention Network home.vicnet.net.au/~eppic/ Early
Psychosis Prevention and Intervention Centre,
mhcs.health.nsw.gov.au/health-public-affairs/mhcs/ NSW
Multicultural Health Communication Service,
www.health.gov.au/hsdd/mentalhe/ Mental Health Branch of
Department of Health & Aged Care
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours organised according to
teaching mode used.
Assessment Seminar presentartion 35%; Clinical related
assignment – 65%
HNB2236 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 5: MENTAL HEALTH AND ILLNESS
CAMPUS ST ALBANS
Prerequisite(s) HNB1133 Foundations in Nursing 1, HNB1134
Foundations in Nursing 2, APT1311 Psychology Across the
Lifespan.
Content The aim of this subject is to develop students' knowledge,
skills and attitudes in mental health and illness. To promote mental
health and to meet the needs of people with altered mental health
status in institutional and community settings. Clinical practice
involves the provision of, or assistance with, mental health nursing to
selected clients in mental health hospitals, mental health units, and
community settings, under the guidance of either a clinical teacher
or preceptor.
Required Reading Stuart, G. W., & Laraia, M. T. (2001).
Principles and practice of psychiatric nursing (7th Ed) St. Louis:
Mosby
Recommended Reading American Psychiatric Association
(2000) Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders DSM-
IV-TR. Washington DC: American Psychiatric Association.Frisch,
N.C. & Frisch, L.E., (1998) Psychiatric mental health nursing.
Albany: Delamar PublishersGeldard, D. (1998) Basic personal
counselling (3rd ed) Sydney: Prentice Hall Gorman, L. M., Raines,
M. L. & Sultan, D. F., (2002) Psychosocial Nursing for General
Patient care. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Company Haber, J.,
Krainovich-Miller, B., McMahon, A. L. & Price-Hoskins, P (1997).
Comprehensive psychiatric nursing. (5th. ed ) St- Louis: Mosby
Keltner, N. L., Schwecke, L.H., Bostrom, C. E. (1999) Psychiatric
nursing (3rd Ed) St Louis: Mosby Year Book Newell, R., & Gournay,
K., (2000). Mental health nursing – an evidence-based approach.
London: Churchill Livingstone. Thompson, T. & Mathias, P. (Eds)
(2000) Lyttle’s mental health and disorder London: Bailliere Tindall
Townsend, M. C., (2000) Psychiatric mental health nursing:
Concepts of care (3rd Ed) Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Company
Videbeck, S. L. (2001) Psychiatric mental health nursing
Philadelphia: Lippincott
Recommended Websites hna.ffh.vic.gov.au/acmh/
mh/index.htm Home page of the Victorian Government mental
health branch and provides numerous interesting and helpful links.
hna.ffh.vic.gov.au/acmh/mh/policy_legislation/abstracts provides
a complete list of all the branches publications, complete with
abstracts. www.healthsci.utas.edu.au/nursing/college/ Link is to the
Australian and New Zealand College of Mental Health Nurses
home page. The College is the professional body for mental health
nurses and the site provides many useful links, including a
newsgroup email subscription (free). www.span.com.au/mhrc/
Mental Health Resource Centre www.mhca.com.au Mental Health
Council of Australia auseinet.flinders.edu.au AusEinet — Australian
Early Intervention Network home.vicnet.net.au/~eppic/ Early
Psychosis Prevention and Intervention Centre
mhcs.health.nsw.gov.au/health-public-affairs/mhcs/ NSW
Multicultural Health Communication Service
www.health.gov.au/hsdd/mentalhe/ Mental Health Branch of
Department of Health & Aged Care.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 70 hours organised according to
teaching mode used
Assessment Achievement of clinical competencies (Ungraded
Pass/Fail)
HNB2237 NURSING THERAPEUTICS: APPLIED MEDICATION
MANAGEMENT
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Human Bioscience 3: Pathophysiology, Nursing
Practice 4: Acute Care, Nursing Practice 5: Mental Health & Illness
Content General principles of pharmacology; individual responses
to medications; principles and guidelines for storage, checking,
administration and ocumentation of medications; legal and ethical
principles of drug administration; quality use of medications
including safety and efficacy issues; medication use across the
lifespan and polypharmacy; sociocultural factors influencing drug
therapy; adverse drug reactions and interactions; the role of nurses
in education and medication therapeutic intervention; and
exemplars of commonly used drug groups. Credit Transfer
Arrangements (including Articulation Pathways) if applicable.
Required Reading Galbraith, A., Bullock, S and Manias, E.
(2004). Fundamentals of pharmacology: A text for nurses and allied
health professionals (4th ed.). Frenchs Forest: Pearson Education.
Tiziani, A. (2002). Havard’s nursing guide to drugs (6th ed.).
Sydney: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Aschenbrenner, D. S. & Cleveland, L.
W. & Venable, S. J. (2002). Drug therapy in nursing. Philadelphia:
Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins. Asperheim, M. K. (2002).
Pharmacology: An introductory text (9th ed.). Philadelphia: W. B.
Saunders. Begg, E. (2003). Instant clinical pharmacology. Oxford:
Blackwell. Bryant, B. J., Knights, K. & Salerno, E. (2003).
Pharmacology for health professionals. Marrickville: Mosby.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
158
Chernecky, C. (Ed). (2001). Real-world nursing survival guide: Drug
calculations and drug administration. Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders.
Clayton, B. D. & Stock, Y. N. (2004). Basic Pharmacology for
nurses (13th ed.). St Louis: Mosby. Craig, C. R. & Stitzel, R. E. (Eds).
(2003). Modern pharmacology with clinical applications (6th ed.).
Baltimore: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins. Dawson, J. S. (2002).
Pharmacology (2nd ed.). London: Mosby. Downie, G., Mackenzie,
J. and Williams, A. (2003). Pharmacology and medicines for nurses
(3rd ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Edmunds, M. W.
(2003). Introduction to clinical pharmacology (4th ed.). St Louis:
Mosby. Golan, D. E. (Ed). (2004). Principles of pharmacology: The
pathophysiologic basis of drug therapy. Baltimore: Lippincott,
Williams & Wilkins. Grahame-Smith, D. G.& Aronson, J. K. 2002.
Oxford textbook of clinical pharmacology and drug therapy (3rd
ed.). Oxford: Oxford University Press. Hardman, J. G. & Limbird, L.
E. (Ed). (2001). Goodman and Gilman’s The pharmacological basis
of therapeutics (10th ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill. Hollinger, M. A.
(2003). Introduction to pharmacology (2nd ed.). London: Taylor and
Francis. Kemp, C. A. (Ed). (2002). Paediatric pharmacopoeia (13th
ed.). Melbourne: Royal Children’s Hospital. Lehne, R. A., Moore, L.
A., Crosby, L. J. and Hamilton, B. (2003). Pharmacology for nursing
care (5th ed.). St Louis: Saunders. Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins.
(2003). Australia New Zealand nursing drug handbook (2nd ed.).
Philadelphia: Lippincott, Williams and & Wilkins. Lippincott,
Williams & Wilkins. (2005). Clinical pharmacology made
incredibly easy (2nd ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott, Williams and &
Wilkins. Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins. (2005). Nursing
pharmacology made incredibly easy. Philadelphia: Lippincott,
Williams and & Wilkins. Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins. (2004).
Straight A’s in nursing pharmacology. Philadelphia: Lippincott,
Williams and & Wilkins. McCuistion, L. E. & Gutierrez, K. J. (2002).
Real-world nursing survival guide: Pharmacolgy. Philadelphia: W. B.
Saunders. McGavock, H. (2003). How drugs work: Basic
pharmacology for health care professionals. Ascot Vale: Ausmed
Publications. McKenry, L. M. & Salerno, E. (2003). Mosby’s
pharmacology in nursing (21st ed.). St Louis: Mosby. Page, C. P.
(2002). Integrated pharmacology (2nd ed.). Edinburgh: Mosby.
Rang, H. P. (2003). Pharmacology (5th ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill
Livingstone. Winstanley, P. & Walley, T. (2002). Medical
pharmacology: A clinical core text for integrated curricula with self-
assessment (2nd ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hour.
Assessment 1½ hour Examination. Written critique on Quality
Use of Medicines (2500 words) – 60%, drug calculation test:
Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory.
HNB2238 NURSING THEORY 5: MENTAL HEALTH & ILLNESS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(S) Psychology Across the Lifespan
Content Concepts of mental health and illness and their application
to mental health nursing; Structure and function of Victoria’s mental
health services; Victorian Mental Health Act 1986; Concepts of
mental health prevention, early intervention, and promotion;
Common therapeutic modalities including psychopharmacology and
electro convulsive therapy (ECT); Psychiatric nursing theory;
Classification of mental illness (DSM-IV-TR, ICD-10); Mental health
and illness research; Psychiatric illness, including anxiety disorders,
depression, schizophrenia, schizoaffective, bi-poplar, personality
disorders; Mental health skills in interviewing, assessment and
therapeutic relationships; Consumer participation; Concordance
with medication taking; Mental health and illness research;
Psychiatry of older age, including dementia and confusion; Risk
assessment and crisis intervention; The planing, implementation and
evaluation of psychiatric nursing care for individuals and families;
Motivational interviewing; and Culturally appropriate assessment
and interventions including that for indigenous people.
Required Reading Stuart, G. W., & Laraia, M. T. (2005).
Principles and practice of psychiatric nursing (8th Ed) St. Louis:
Mosby.
Recommended Reading American Psychiatric Association
(2000). Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders DSM-
IV-TR. Washington DC: American Psychiatric Association. Frisch,
N.C. & Frisch, L.E. (2002). Psychiatric mental health nursing. (2nd
Ed) Albany: Delamar Publishers. Geldard, D. (2002). Basic
personal counselling (4th ed) Sydney: Prentice Hall. Gorman, L. M.,
Raines, M. L. & Sultan, D. F., (2002). Psychosocial Nursing for
General Patient Care. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Company. Haber,
J., Krainovich-Miller, B., McMahon, A. L. & Price-Hoskins, P (1997).
Comprehensive psychiatric nursing. (5th. ed) St- Louis: Mosby.
Harrison, M., Howard, D. & Mitchell D., (2004) Acute Mental
Health Nursing. London: Sage Publications. Keltner, N. L.,
Schwecke, L.H., Bostrom, C. E. (1999) Psychiatric nursing (3rd Ed)
St Louis: Mosby Year Book. Meier, S.T. & Davis, S.T. (2005). The
Elements of Counselling. Melbourne: Thompson. Newell, R., &
Gournay, K., (2000). Mental health nursing – an evidence-based
approach. London: Churchill Livingstone. Thompson, T. & Mathias,
P., (Eds) (2000). Lyttle’s mental Health and Disorder. London:
Bailliere Tindall. Townsend, M. C., (2000). Psychiatric mental health
nursing: Concepts of care (3rd Ed) Philadelphia: F. A. Davis
Company. Victoria’s Mental Health Service: The Framework for
Service Delivery. (1996). Health & Community Services, Psychiatric
Division (Victoria). Videbeck, S. L., (2001) Psychiatric mental health
nursing. Philadelphia: Lippincott. Watkins, P. (2002). Mental Health
Nursing: The Art of ompassionate Care. Oxford: Butterworth
Heinemann.
Recommended Websites Home page of the Victorian
Government mental health branch and provides numerous
interesting and helpful links.
http://hna.ffh.vic.gov.au/acmh/mh/index.htm, Provides a complete
list of all the branches publications, complete with abstracts,
http://www.healthsci.utas.edu.au/nursing/college/. Link is to the
Australian and New Zealand College of Mental Health Nurses
home page. The College is the professional body for mental health
nurses and the site provides many useful links, including a
newsgroup email subscription (free). www.span.com.au/mhrc/
Mental Health Resource Centre. www.mhca.com.au Mental Health
Council of Australia. http://auseinet.flinders.edu.au AusEinet —
Australian Early Intervention Network.
http://home.vicnet.net.au/~eppic/ Early Psychosis Prevention and
Intervention Centre. http://mhcs.health.nsw.gov.au/health-public-
affairs/mhcs/ NSW Multicultural Health Communication Service.
www.health.gov.au/hsdd/mentalhe/ Mental Health Branch of
Department of Health & Aged Care.
Recommended Journals Australian and New Zealand Journal
of Mental Health Nursing, Journal of Child and Adolescent
Psychiatric and Mental Health Nursing, Journal of Psychosocial
Nursing and Mental Health, Journal of Mental Health Counselling
Journal of Mental Health, Journal of Psychiatric and Mental Health
Nursing, Journal of Infant Mental Health, Journal of Mental Health
Nursing, Psychiatric Rehabilitation Journal.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 80 hours
Assessment Presentation – 20%, assignment (2500 words) –
40%, three hour Examination 40%.
HNB3101 RESEARCH FOR PRACTICE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Significance of research in nursing; links between nursing
education, theory and practice; approaches to research process:
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
159
qualitative and quantitative designs including mixed and
triangulation methods; classification and characteristics of
exploratory, descriptive and explanatory studies; steps in the
research process: identification of problem statement, literature
review, theoretical framework, sampling, data collection and
analysis using descriptive and inferential statistics; ethics and
research; disseminating and applying nursing research; evaluate
research reports and appraise a systematic review of the literature;
basic statistics for appraisal of systematic reviews, including
statistical significance, chance, probability, confidence intervals,
odds ratios, numbers needed to treat and pitfalls in analysis; and
how to appraise the professional application of a systematic review
and meta analysis to an aspect of professional practice. Credit
Transfer Arrangements (including Articulation Pathways) if
applicable.
Required Reading Roberts, K., Taylor, B. (2002). Nursing
Research Processes- An Australian Perspective. (2nd Ed.) Australia:
Thomson.
Recommended Reading
Borbasi, S., Jackson & D., Langford, R.W. (2004). Navigating the
maze of nursing research: An interactive learning adventure.
Sydney: Mosby. Brink, P. & Wood, M. (2001). Basic steps in
planning nursing research: From question to proposal (5th ed.).
Boston: Jones & Bartlett. Burns, N. & Grove, S. (2001). The practice
of nursing research: Conduct, critique, & utilisation (4th ed.).
Philadelphia: Lippincott. Burns, R. (2000). Introduction to research
methods (4th ed.). Frenchs Forest: Pearson Education. Clifford, C.
and Harkin, L. (1997). Inferential statistics in nursing and health
care. New York: Churchill Livingstone. Cormack, D. F. S. (Ed).
(2000). The research process in nursing (4th ed.). Oxford: Blackwell
Science. Crookes, P and Davies, S. (Eds). (2004). Research into
practice: essential skills for reading and applying research in
nursing and health care (2nd ed.). Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall.
Dempsey, P. & Dempsey, A. (2000). Using nursing research:
Process, critical evaluation.and utilization. Philadelphia: Lippincott.
Freshwater, D & Bishop, V. (Eds). (2004). Nursing research in
context: Appreciation, application and professional development.
Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan. Gillis, A. & Jackson, W. (2002).
Research for nurses: Methods and interpretation. Philadelphia: F. A.
Davis. Grbich, C. F. (1999). Qualitative research in health: An
introduction. St Leonards: Allen and Unwin. Holloway, I. &
Wheeler, S. (2002). Qualitative research in nursing (2nd ed.).
Oxford: Blackwell Science. Minichiello, V. (ed). (2003). Handbook
of research methods for nursing and health science (2nd ed.).
Frenchs Forest:: Prentice Hall Heath. Polgar, S. & Thomas, S. A.
(2000). Introduction to research in the health sciences (4th ed.).
Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Polit, D. F. & Beck, C.T. (2004).
Nursing research: Principles and methods (7th ed). Philadelphia:
Lippincott. Polit D. F., Beck. C. T., & Hungler, B. P. (2001).
Essentials of nursing research: Methods, appraisals and utilisation
(5th ed.). London: Lippincott. Schneider, Z., Elliott, D., LoBiondo-
Wood, G. & Haber, J. (2003). Nursing research: Methods, critical
appraisal and utilisation (2nd ed.). Sydney: Mosby. Streubert, H. J.
& Carpenter, D. R. (1999). Qualitative research in nursing;
Advancing the humanistic imperative (2nd ed.). Philadelphia:
Lippincott.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours.
Assessment Assignment (2000 words) – 50%, two hour
examination – 50%.
HNB3103 NURSING PRACTICE 6: CHILD, ADOLESCENT & FAMILY
Campus St Albans.
Prerequisite(s) Human Bioscience 4, Nursing Practice 4: Acute
Care, Nursing Practice 5: Mental Health & Illness.
Content The content of this subject will reflect the following: family
centred care and the effects of hospitalisation on the child; the effect
of different cultural, indigenous and ethnic backgrounds on the care
and role of children and adolescents within the family and health
care setting; growth and developmental stages of the child from
infancy to adolescence; prevention and early intervention of sexually
transmitted diseases (excluding HIV/AIDS); episodic illnesses and
life events including the planning, implementing and evaluation of
care used to treat clients with a variety of medical and surgical
conditions, including diabetes and planned and unplanned
pregnancy; medication issues in relation to child and adolescent
nursing; infectious childhood diseases and their impact on the
child’s health, including immunization programs available to various
cultural and indigenous groups; basic life support for children;
services available to assist adolescents work through individual
health issues; the role of the nurse in child and adolescent nursing in
relation to mandatory reporting requirements; Mental health issues
of the older child and adolescent, including homelessness, abuse
(physical, psychological, sexual), eating disorders, and the early
onset of other mental health disorders; suicide, self-harm, substance
abuse prevention and intervention in cultural groups including
indigenous Australians; and family assessment. Credit Transfer
Arrangements (including Articulation Pathways) if applicable.
Required Reading Hockenberry-Eaton, M., Wilson, D., &
Winkelstein, M.L. (Eds). (2005). Wong’s Essentials of Paediatric
Nursing. (7th Ed.) St. Louis: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Australian Department of Family &
Community Services. (2003). The national agenda for early
childhood: a draft framework [electronic resource]. Canberra:
Author. (Available at electronically via the VU Library Internet site).
Australian Department of Health & Aged Care. (2000). Mental
Health of young people in Australia [Report]. Canberra: Author.
Borkowski, J.G., Ramey, S.L. & Bristol-Power, M. (Eds.) (2002).
Parenting and the child’s world: influences on academic, intellectual,
and social-emotional development. Mahwah: Erlbaum. Hayward, C.
(Ed.) (2003). Gender differences at puberty. New York: Cambridge
University Press. Healy, J. (Ed.) (2002). Adolescent health. Rozelle:
Spinney Press. Hogan, M.J. & White, J.E. (Eds.) (2003) Child health
nursing: reviews & rationales. Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall.
Mifflin, P.C. (2003) Saving very premature babies: key ethical
issues. Edinburgh: BFM Books for Midwives. Pillitteri, A. (2003).
Maternal and child health nursing: Care of the childbearing and
childrearing family (4th Ed) Philadelphia: Lippincott. Sofronoff, K.,
Kosky, R. & Dalgliesh, L. (Eds). (2005). Out of options: a cognitive
model of adolescent suicide and risk-taking. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press. Tinsley, B.J. (2003). How children learn to be
healthy. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours.
Assessment Two hour examination 60%, tutorial presentation
(Case study) 20%, written summary of tutorial presentation 20%.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
160
HNB3104 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 6: CHILD, ADOLESCENT & FAMILY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Human Bioscience 3: Pathophysiology, Nursing
Practice 4: Acute Care, Clinical Practicum 4: Acute Care, Nursing
Practice 5: Mental Health & Illness, Clinical Practicum 5: Mental
Health & Illness
Content Students will undertake 70 hours of clinical practice and
engage in reflective practice with a mentor/clinical educator.
Required Reading Hockenberry-Eaton, M., Wilson, D., &
Winkelstein, M.L. (Eds). (2005). Wong’s Essentials of Paediatric
Nursing. (7th Ed.) St. Louis: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Australian Department of Family &
Community Services. (2003). The national agenda for early
childhood: a draft framework [electronic resource]. Canberra:
Author. (Available at electronically via the VU Library Internet site).
Australian Department of Health & Aged Care. (2000). Mental
Health of young people in Australia [Report]. Canberra: Author.
Borkowski, J.G., Ramey, S.L. & Bristol-Power, M. (Eds.) (2002).
Parenting and the child’s world: influences on academic, intellectual,
and social-emotional development. Mahwah: Erlbaum. Hayward, C.
(Ed.) (2003). Gender differences at puberty. New York: Cambridge
University Press. Healy, J. (Ed.) (2002). Adolescent health. Rozelle:
Spinney Press. Hogan, M.J. & White, J.E. (Eds.) (2003) Child health
nursing: reviews & rationales. Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall.
Mifflin, P.C. (2003) Saving very premature babies: key ethical
issues. Edinburgh: BFM Books for Midwives. Pillitteri, A. (2003).
Maternal and child health nursing: Care of the childbearing and
childrearing family (4th Ed) Philadelphia: Lippincott. Sofronoff, K.,
Kosky, R. & Dalgliesh, L. (Eds). (2005). Out of options: a cognitive
model of adolescent suicide and risk-taking. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press. Tinsley, B.J. (2003). How children learn to be
healthy. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 70 hours.
Assessment In order to be awarded a satisfactory grade for this
subject, the student must successfully complete each of the following:
demonstration of competence in selected skills, according to
specified criteria, and in line with the ANCI Competencies as
defined for a student at this stage of the course; satisfactory
participation in reflective practice, as defined by completion of
personal learning objectives and reflective journal entries during
each week of clinical placement; and demonstration of safe and
competent practice in line with the ANC Competencies as defined
for a student at this stage of the course.
Final assessment: Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory.
HNB3105 NURSING PRACTICE 7: ACUTE CARE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HNB2233 Nursing Practice 4: Acute Care;
RBM2233 Human Bioscience 3: Pathophysiology
Content The content of this subject will be organised around health
breakdown, which causes significant dysfunction in several
Functional Health Patterns: The role of the Division 1 Registered
Nurse as co-ordinator of patient care; models of co-ordinated care
used in Australia; clinical pathways; critique of Patterns of Care;
multi-disciplinary communication and co-ordination skills; ‘holistic
care’; the effect cultural or indigenous background may have on the
care needed/provided; the role and function of ‘Hospital in the
Home’ programs; the role of ‘care co-ordinators’; and care of
patients with complex health breakdown, including HIV/AIDS, shock
and multi system failure, adult respiratory distress syndrome, chronic
renal failure, burns, cancer.
Required Reading Brown, D., & Edwards, H (Eds). (2005).
Lewis’s medical-surgical nursing. Assessment and management of
clinical problems. Marrickville, NSW: Elsevier Australia. Bennett, B.,
& Murphy, L. (2002). Style guide [Booklet]. St Albans, Vic: Victoria
University. Evans-Smith, P. (2005). Taylor’s clinical; nursing skills. A
nursing process approach. Philadelphia, USA: Lippincott. Hext, V.,
& Mayner, L. (2003). Practical nursing calculations. Crows Nest,
NSW: Allen & Unwin. Tollefson, J. (2004). Clinical psychomotor
skills. Assessment tools for nursing students (2nd ed.). Tuggerah,
NSW: Social Science Press.
Recommended Reading Galbraith, A., Bullock, S., & Manias,
E. (2004). Fundamentals of pharmacology. (4thed.). Frenchs Forest,
NSW: Pearson Education Australia. Nurses Board of Victoria.
(1999). Professional conduct information for registered nurses.
Melbourne: Author. (Available at http://www.nbv.org.au ). Nurses
Board of Victoria. (2001). Professional boundaries. Guidelines for
registered nurses in Victoria. Melbourne: Author. (Available at
http://www.nbv.org.au
Recommended Journals American Journal of Nursing,
Australian Family Physician, Australian Nurses Journal, Australian
Journal of Advanced Nursing, British Medical Journal,
Contemporary Nurse, Image, Journal of the American Medical
Association, Journal of Advanced Nursing, Medical Journal of
Australia, Nursing 98+.
Recommended Websites Department of Human Services,
Victorian State Government:http://www.dhs.vic.gov.au, Australian
Department of Health and Aging:http://www.health.gov.au/,
Australian Institute of Health and Welfare:
http://www.aihw.gov.au/, Australian Bureau of Statistics:
http://www.abs.gov.au/, Australian Resuscitation Council:
http://www.resus.org.au/, Heart Foundation (Australia):
http://www.heartfoundation.com.au/, Lung net (Australian Lung
Foundation): http:www.lungnet.org.au/, Asthma Victoria:
http://www.asthma.org.au/index.html, Asthma Australia:
http://www.asthmaaustralia.org.au/, National Asthma Council:
http://www.nationalasthma.org.au/, The Cancer Council:
http://www.accv.org.au, National Breast Cancer Centre:
http://www.nbcc.org.au/, Papscreen Victoria:
http://www.papscreen.org/, Communicable Diseases Australia:
http://www.health.gov.au/pubhlth/cdi/nndss/, Diabetes Australia:
http://www.diabetesaustralia.com.au, International Diabetes
Institute: http://www.idi.org.au/home.htm, Virtual Hospital:
http://www.vh.org/
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours
Assessment Written critique paper (2000 words) – 50%, scenario
based clinical decision-making exercise – 50%.
HNB3106 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 7: ACUTE CARE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 4: Acute Care, Clinical Practicum
4: Acute Care, Human Bioscience 3: Pathophysiology
Content Students will undertake 70 hours of clinical practice and
engage in reflective practice with a mentor/clinical educator. The
focus of the patients allocated to the students should be those
patients who are in need of co-ordinated care so that the students
can observe the complexities of managing this type of patient in the
clinical area.
Required Reading Brown, D., & Edwards, H (Eds). (2005).
Lewis’s medical-surgical nursing. Assessment and management of
clinical problems. Marrickville, NSW: Elsevier Australia. Bennett, B.,
& Murphy, L. (2002). Style guide [Booklet]. St Albans, Vic: Victoria
University. Evans-Smith, P. (2005). Taylor’s clinical; nursing skills. A
nursing process approach. Philadelphia, USA: Lippincott. Hext, V.,
& Mayner, L. (2003). Practical nursing calculations. Crows Nest,
NSW: Allen & Unwin. Tollefson, J. (2004). Clinical psychomotor
skills. Assessment tools for nursing students (2nd ed.). Tuggerah,
NSW: Social Science Press.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
161
Recommended Reading Galbraith, A., Bullock, S., & Manias,
E. (2004). Fundamentals of pharmacology. (4thed.). Frenchs Forest,
NSW: Pearson Education Australia. Nurses Board of Victoria.
(1999). Professional conduct information for registered nurses.
Melbourne: Author. (Available at http://www.nbv.org.au ). Nurses
Board of Victoria. (2001). Professional boundaries. Guidelines for
registered nurses in Victoria. Melbourne: Author. (Available at
http://www.nbv.org.au)
Subject Hours Equivalent of 70 hours.
Assessment In order to be awarded a satisfactory grade for this
subject, the student must successfully complete each of the following:
demonstration of competence in selected skills, according to
specified criteria, and in line with the ANCI Competencies as
defined for a student at this stage of the course; satisfactory
participation in reflective practice, as defined by completion of
personal learning objectives and reflective journal entries during
each week of clinical placement; and demonstration of safe and
competent practice in line with the ANC competencies as defined
for a student at this stage of the course. Final assessment:
Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory.
HNB3107 HEALTH & ILLNESS IN THE COMMUNITY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(S) Nil
Content The content of this subject will be organised around the
Functional Health Patterns, in particular: Health Perception &
Management (community, health education and health promotion).
Epidemiological transition and its relationship to community nursing
from the 19th to the 21st Century; Frameworks, for understanding
community nursing in the 21st century; What the differences mean –
comparing contemporary community nursing roles; The social
determinants of health – understanding the mechanisms;
Determining need – different approaches to needs assessment;
Demographic data – what can it suggest about a community and its
likely health needs?; Epidemiological data – revisiting the social
determinants of health; Successful health education and promotion
interventions – a world view; Using health education and health
promotion strategies; Working with disadvantaged groups – whose
needs?; Working across cultures, including with Aboriginal groups;
Behavioural interventions and their strengths and limitations; Family
and community assessment; Accessing community services; Current
and future challenges facing community nurses; and Global and
local prevention of infectious diseases, including, HIV/AIDS, bird
flu, SARS.
Required Reading Baum, F. (2002). The new public health
(2nd.). South Melbourne: Oxford University Press. Stanhope, M., &
Lancaster, J. (2002). Community and public health nursing. St Louis,
MI: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Eckersley, R., Dixon, J., & Douglas, B.
(Eds.). The social origins of well-being. Sydney: Cambridge
University Press. McMurray, A. (2003). Community health and
wellness: A sociological approach. Marrickville, NSW: Mosby.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours.
Assessment Assignment (2000 words) – 50%, two hour
examination – 50%.
HNB3134 NURSING PRACTICE 6: HEALTH OF THE COMMUNITY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HNB 1133 foundation of Nursing 1, HNB1134
Foundation of Nursing 2, HNB 1135 Professional Nursing 1,
HNB1234 Professional Nursing 2
Content The aim of this subject is to provide an important basis for
professional nursing in all practice settings as it should enhance
students understanding about health outcomes in the Australian
population as a whole as well as subsections of that population,
including Aboriginal Australians. Strategies aimed at improving the
health of aggregates of people will also be examined for their
effectiveness. In addition, students will gain an understanding of the
approaches commonly used to assess the needs of a geopolital
area.
Required Reading Allender, J. A., & Spradley, B. W. (2001).
Community nursing: Concepts and practice. Philadelphia: Lipponcott
Williams & Wilkins.Australian Bureau of Statistics. (undated) The
ABS and Indigenous statistics. www.abs.gov.au Australian Institute
of Health and Welfare. (2002). Australia’s health 2002. Canberra:
Author. Baum, F. (1998). The new public health: An Australian
perspective. Melbourne: Oxford University Press. Helman, C.
(2000). Culture, health and illness. Oxford: Butterworth-Heinemann.
Recommended Reading Carr, T., & Descheemaeker, K. (2002).
Nutrition and health. Oxford: Blackwell Science. Hunt, R. (Ed)
(2000). Readings in community based nursing. Philadelphia:
Lipponcott. O‘Connor-Fleming, M. O., & Parker, E. (2001). Health
promotion (2Ed) Singapore: Allen & Unwin. Petersen, D. J. &
Alexander, G. R. (2001). Needs assessment in public health. New
York: Kluwar Academic/Plenum Publishers. Trinder, L., & Reynolds,
S. (2000). Evidence-based practice: A critical appraisal. Oxford:
Blackwell. Unwin, N. (1997). An introductory guide to public health
and epidemiology. Philadelphia: Open University Press.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours organised according to
teaching mode used.
Assessment The students will be required to undertake a group
assignment that involves a population/community health concern. A
total of 2000 words per student – 100%
HNB3135 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 6: HEALTH OF THE COMMUNITY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HNB3134 Nursing Practice 6: The Health of the
Community
Content The aim of this subject is to further develop a number of
process skills important in nursing as well as life-long learning and
consolidate theory from the pre-requisite subject, The Health of
Communities. In particular, students should gain a deeper
appreciation of the factors that lead to variation in health outcomes
by undertaking a community needs analysis.
Required Reading Allender, J. A., & Spradley, B. W. (2001).
Community nursing: Concepts and practice. Philadelphia: Lipponcott
Williams & Wilkins. Australian Bureau of Statistics (Undated) The
ABS and Indigenous statistics www.abs.gov.au Australian Institute of
Health and Welfare (2002) Australia’s health 2002. Canberra:
Author. Baum, F (1998) The new public health: An Australian
perspective. Melbourne: Oxford University Press. Helman, C (2000)
Culture, health and illness. Oxford: Butterworth-Heinemann
Recommended Reading Carr, T., & Descheemaeker, K. (2002).
Nutrition and health. Oxford: Blackwell Science.Hunt, R. (Ed)
(2000). Readings in community based nursing. Philadelphia:
Lipponcott. O‘Connor-Fleming, M. O., & Parker, E. (2001). Health
promotion (2Ed) Singapore: Allen & Unwin.Petersen, D. J. &
Alexander, G. R. (2001). Needs assessment in public health. New
York: Kluwar Academic/Plenum Publishers. Trinder, L., & Reynolds,
S. (2000). Evidence-based practice: A critical appraisal. Oxford:
Blackwell. Unwin, N. (1997). An introductory guide to public health
and epidemiology. Philadelphia: Open University Press.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 70 Hours organised according to
teaching mode used.
Assessment Students will be required to work in groups to
undertake a community needs analysis in a nominated geopolital
area drawing upon theory presented in the pre-requisite subject, The
Health of Communities. In the first instance, students will draw upon
normative data including Australian Bureau of Statistics
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
162
demographic and Department of Human Services Burden of Disease
data. Then students will be required to gather their own information
in their nominated area using one recognised framework for guiding
their data collection, analysis and presentation. A graded mark will
be given for each group Poster and separate summary.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 70 hours organized according to
teaching mode used.
HNB3136 NURSING PRACTICE 7: MENTAL HEALTH & ILLNESS
CAMPUS ST ALBANS
Prerequisite(s) HNB2235 Nursing Practice 5: Mental health &
Illness, HNB2236 Clinical Practicum 5: Mental Health & Illness
Content The aim of this subject is to further develop students'
knowledge, skills and attitudes in the promotion of mental health. To
meet the needs of people with altered mental health status in
institutional and community settings. To provide culturally
appropriate care to individuals from various cultural groups,
including Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islanders.
Required Reading Stuart, G. W., & Laraia, M. T. (2001).
Principles and practice of psychiatric nursing (7th Ed) St. Louis:
Mosby.
Recommended Reading American Psychiatric Association (
2000 ) Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders DSM-
IV-TR. Washington DC: American Psychiatric Association. Frisch,
N.C. & Frisch, L.E., (1998) Psychiatric mental health nursing.
Albany: Delamar Publishers. Geldard, D. (1998) Basic personal
counselling (3rd ed) Sydney: Prentice Hall. Gorman, L. M., Raines,
M. L. & Sultan, D. F., (2002) Psychosocial Nursing for General
Patient care. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Company. Haber, J.,
Krainovich-Miller, B., McMahon, A. L. & Price-Hoskins, P (1997).
Comprehensive psychiatric nursing. (5th. ed ) St- Louis: Mosby.
Keltner, N. L., Schwecke, L.H., Bostrom, C. E. (1999) Psychiatric
nursing (3rd Ed) St Louis: Mosby Year Book. Newell, R., & Gournay,
K., (2000). Mental health nursing – an evidence-based approach.
London: Churchill Livingstone. Thompson, T. & Mathias, P., (Eds)
(2000) Lyttle’s mental health and disorder London: Bailliere Tindall.
Townsend, M. C., (2000) Psychiatric mental health nursing:
Concepts of care (3rd Ed) Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Company.
Videbeck, S. L., (2001) Psychiatric mental health nursing
Philadelphia: Lippincott
Websites hna.ffh.vic.gov.au/acmh/mh/index.htm Home page of
the Victorian Government mental health branch and provides
numerous interesting and helpful links. hna.ffh.vic.gov.au/acmh/
mh/policy_legislation/abstracts provides a complete list of all the
branches publications, complete with abstracts.
www.healthsci.utas.edu.au/nursing/college/ Link is to the
Australian and New Zealand College of Mental Health Nurses
home page. The College is the professional body for mental health
nurses and the site provides many useful links, including a
newsgroup email subscription (free). www.span.com.au/mhrc/
Mental Health Resource Centre. www.mhca.com.au Mental Health
Council of Australia. auseinet.flinders.edu.au AusEinet — Australian
Early Intervention Network. home.vicnet.net.au/~eppic/ Early
Psychosis Prevention and Intervention Centre.
mhcs.health.nsw.gov.au/health-public-affairs/mhcs/ NSW
Multicultural Health Communication Service
www.health.gov.au/hsdd/mentalhe/ Mental Health Branch of
Department of Health & Aged Care.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours organised according to
teaching mode used.
Assessment Seminar presentation 35%; Examination 65%
HNB3137 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 7: MENTAL HEALTH & ILLNESS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisites(s) HNB22435 Nursing Practice 5: Mental Health &
Illness, HNB22356 Clinical Practicum 5: Mental Health & Illness.
Content The aim of this subject is to further enhance students'
knowledge, skills and attitudes in mental health and illness. To
promote mental health, and to meet the needs of people with altered
mental health status in institutional and community settings. To
provide culturally appropriate care to individuals from various
cultural groups, including Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islanders.
Clinical practice involves the provision, or assistance with the
provision of mental health nursing care to selected clients/patients in
mental health hospitals or units, and community settings, under the
guidance of either a clinical teacher or preceptor.
Required Reading Stuart, G. W., & Laraia, M. T. (2001).
Principles and practice of psychiatric nursing (7th Ed) St. Louis:
Mosby.
Recommended Reading American Psychiatric Association
(2000) Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders DSM-
IV-TR. Washington DC: American Psychiatric Association. Frisch,
N.C. & Frisch, L.E., (1998) Psychiatric mental health nursing.
Albany: Delamar Publishers Geldard, D. (1998) Basic personal
counselling (3rd ed) Sydney: Prentice Hall Gorman, L. M., Raines,
M. L. & Sultan, D. F., (2002) Psychosocial Nursing for General
Patient care. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Company Haber, J.,
Krainovich-Miller, B., McMahon, A. L. & Price-Hoskins, P (1997).
Comprehensive psychiatric nursing. (5th. ed ) St- Louis: Mosby
Keltner, N. L., Schwecke, L.H., Bostrom, C. E. (1999) Psychiatric
nursing (3rd Ed) St Louis: Mosby Year Book Newell, R., & Gournay,
K., (2000). Mental health nursing – an evidence-based approach.
London: Churchill Livingstone. Thompson, T. & Mathias, P. (Eds)
(2000) Lyttle’s mental health and disorder London: Bailliere Tindall
Townsend, M. C., (2000) Psychiatric mental health nursing:
Concepts of care (3rd Ed) Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Company
Videbeck, S. L. (2001) Psychiatric mental health nursing
Philadelphia: Lippincott.
Websites hna.ffh.vic.gov.au/acmh/mh/index.htm Home page of
the Victorian Government mental health branch and provides
numerous interesting and helpful links.
hna.ffh.vic.gov.au/acmh/mh/policy_legislation/abstracts Provides
a complete list of all the branches publications, complete with
abstracts. www.healthsci.utas.edu.au/nursing/college/ Link is to the
Australian and New Zealand College of Mental Health Nurses
home page. The College is the professional body for mental health
nurses and the site provides many useful links, including a
newsgroup email subscription (free). www.span.com.au/mhrc/
Mental Health Resource Centre. www.mhca.com.au Mental Health
Council of Australia. auseinet.flinders.edu.au AusEinet — Australian
Early Intervention Network. home.vicnet.net.au/~eppic/ Early
Psychosis Prevention and Intervention Centre.
mhcs.health.nsw.gov.au/health-public-affairs/mhcs/ NSW
Multicultural Health www.health.gov.au/hsdd/mentalhe/ Mental
Health Branch of Department of Health & Aged Care.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 70 hours organised according to
teaching mode used.
Assessment Achievement of clinical competencies (Ungraded:
pass/fail)
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
163
HNB3138 NURSING PRACTICE 8: CHILD AND FAMILY HEALTH
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) SBM2527 Human Bioscience 4: HNB2333
Nursing Practice 4: Acute Care, HNB2234 Clinical Practicum 4:
Acute Care
Content The aim of this subject is to provide students with a broad
overview and knowledge of family health from the perspective of a
continuum across women's health care and childbearing, formation
of the family unit and growth of the child into an adolescent. The
underpinning concept of this subject is to provide students with a
framework in which to provide maternity and child health care from
a family-centred approach.
Required Reading Lowdermilk, D. L., Perry, S. E. & Bobak, I.
(Eds). (2000). Maternity and Women's Health Care (7th Ed) St.
Louis: Mosbyor Olds, S., London, M. & Ladewig, P. (2000).
Maternal newborn nursing: A family centred approach (6th Ed)
Sydney: Addison-Wesley. or Littleton, L. Y. & Engebretson, J. C.
(2002). Maternal, neonatal, and women’s health nursing. Australia:
Delmar. Wong, L. D., Hockenberry-Eaton, M., Winkelstein, M. L.,
Wilson, D., Ahmann, E., & DiVito-Thomas, P. A. (Eds). (1999).
Whaley & Wong's Nursing Care of Infants and Children. (6th Ed)
St. Louis: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Bowden, V. R., Dickey, S. B. &
Greenberg, C. S. (1999). Children and their families: The
continuum of care. Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders. Burroughs, A.
(1997). Maternity nursing: An introductory text. (7th Ed)
Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders. Department of Human Services.
(2001). The Three Centre Guidelines for Antenatal Care.
Department of Human Services: Melbourne, Victoria. Enkin, M.,
Keirse, M., Neilson, J., Crowther, C., Duley, L., Hodnett, E. &
Hofmeyr, J. (2000). A guide to effective care in pregnancy and
childbirth. (3rd Ed) Oxford: Oxford University Press. Pillitteri, A.
(1999). Maternal and child health nursing: Care of the childbearing
and childrearing family (3rd Ed) Philadelphia: Lippincott.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 Hours organised according to
teaching mode used.
Assessment One 3-hour written examintion 60% one written essay
40 %
HNB3139 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 8: CHILD AND FAMILY HEALTH
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) SBM2527 Human Bioscience 4, HNB2233
Nursing Practice 4: Acute Care, HNB2234 Clinical Practicum 4:
Acute Care.
Content The aim of this subject is to enable the student to provide
care across the health continuum to women, their families and the
child from birth through to adolescence. Furthermore, the focus of
health care provision will be on a framework in which to provide
maternity and child health care from a family-centred approach.
Required Reading Australian Nursing Council Inc. ANCI
National Competency Standards for the registered Nurse and the
Enrolled Nurse, Canberra May 2000. Nurses Board of Victoria.
(2001). Code of practice for midwives in Victoria [Pamphlet].
Melbourne: Author. Cooper, T. & Emden, C. (2001). Portfolio
Assessment: A guide for nurses and midwives. Western Australia:
Praxis Education. Lowdermilk, D., L., Perry, S. E. & Bobak, I. (Eds).
(2000). Maternity and women’s health care (7th Ed) St. Louis:
Mosby. Wong, L. D., Hockenberry Eaton, M., Winkelstein, M. L.,
Wilson, D., Ahmann, E., * DiVito-Thomas, P. A. (Eds). (1999).
Whaley & Wong’s nursing care of infants and children (6th Ed) St.
Louis: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Bowden, V. R., Dickey, S. B. &
Greenberg, C. S. (1999). Children and their families: The
continuum of care. Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders. Burroughs, A.
(1997). Maternity nursing: An introductory text. (7th Ed)
Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders. Department of Human Services.
(2001). The Three Centre Guidelines for Antenatal Care.
Department of Human Services: Melbourne, Victoria. Enkin, M.,
Keirse, M., Neilson, J., Crowther, C., Duley, L., Hodnett, E. &
Hofmeyr, J. (2000). A guide to effective care in pregnancy and
childbirth. (3rd Ed) Oxford: Oxford University Press. Pillitteri, A.
(1999). Maternal and child health nursing: Care of the childbearing
and childrearing family (3rd Ed) Philadelphia: Lippincott.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 70 hours organised according to
teaching mode used.
Assessment Achievement of the specified ANCI Competencies
(Ungraded: pass/fail) Submission of two reflective journals (one per
week)
HNB3201 NURSING THEORY 8 (ELECTIVE): HEALTH & ILLNESS IN
OLDER ADULTS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisites Nursing Practice 3: Health & Illness in Older Adults
Content Current gerontological research; review of the
physiological and psychosocial consequences of normal ageing:
focus on health promotion/illness prevention; overview of major
theories of ageing; complex clients: refinement of assessment skills
including use of specific assessment tools; assessment and clinical
decision making: includes assessment and management of pain and
bowel function, assessment and promotion of urinary continence
and the assessment and management of challenging behaviours in
confused clients; and Review care frameworks: includes intra-agency
transfers and discharge planning.
Required Reading Ebersole, P., Hess, P. & Luggen, A. (2004).
Toward healthy aging (6th ed.). St. Louis: Mosby. Nay, R. &
Garratt, S. (2004) Nursing older people: issues and innovations.
(2nd ed.). Sydney: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Cluning, T. (2001) Ageing at home –
practical approaches to community care. Melbourne:Ausmed
Publications. Elioplous, C. (2001) Gerontological nursing (5th ed.).
Philadelphia: Lippincott. Koch, S. & Garratt, S. (2001) Assessing
older people. Sydney: MacLennan and Petty.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours
Assessment Written assignment (2500 words) – 60%, Individual
portfolio (1500 words) – 40%.
HNB3226 NURSING PRACTICE 6: CHILD, ADOLESCENT & FAMILY.
Campus St Albans.
Prerequisite(s) Human Bioscience 4, Nursing Practice 4: Acute
Care, Nursing Practice 5: Mental Health & Illness,
Content The content of this subject will reflect the following: Family
centred care and the effects of hospitalisation on the child; The effect
of different cultural, indigenous and ethnic backgrounds on the care
and role of children and adolescents within the family and health
care setting; Growth and developmental stages of the child from
infancy to adolescence; Prevention and early intervention of sexually
transmitted diseases (excluding HIV/AIDS); Episodic illnesses and
life events including the planning, implementing and evaluation of
care used to treat clients with a variety of medical and surgical
conditions, including diabetes and planned and unplanned
pregnancy; Medication issues in relation to child and adolescent
nursing; Infectious childhood diseases and their impact on the
child’s health, including immunization programs available to various
cultural and indigenous groups; Basic life support for children;
Services available to assist adolescents work through individual
health issues; The role of the nurse in child and adolescent nursing
in relation to mandatory reporting requirements; Mental health
issues of the older child and adolescent, including homelessness,
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
164
abuse (physical, psychological, sexual), eating disorders, and the
early onset of other mental health disorders; Suicide, self-harm,
substance abuse prevention and intervention in cultural groups
including indigenous Australians; and Family assessment.
Required Reading Hockenberry-Eaton, M., Wilson, D., &
Winkelstein, M.L. (Eds). (2005). Wong’s Essentials of Paediatric
Nursing. (7th Ed.) St. Louis: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Australian Department of Family &
Community Services. (2003). The national agenda for early
childhood: a draft framework [electronic resource]. Canberra:
Author. (Available at electronically via the VU Library Internet site)
Australian Department of Health & Aged Care. (2000). Mental
Health of young people in Australia [Report]. Canberra: Author.
Borkowski, J.G., Ramey, S.L. & Bristol-Power, M. (Eds.) (2002).
Parenting and the child’s world: influences on academic, intellectual,
and social-emotional development. Mahwah: Erlbaum. Hayward, C.
(Ed.) (2003). Gender differences at puberty. New York: Cambridge
University Press. Healy, J. (Ed.) (2002). Adolescent health. Rozelle:
Spinney Press. Hogan, M.J. & White, J.E. (Eds.) (2003) Child health
nursing: reviews & rationales. Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall.
Mifflin, P.C. (2003) Saving very premature babies: key ethical
issues. Edinburgh: BFM Books for Midwives. Pillitteri, A. (2003).
Maternal and child health nursing: Care of the childbearing and
childrearing family (4th Ed) Philadelphia: Lippincott. Sofronoff, K.,
Kosky, R. & Dalgliesh, L. (Eds). (2005). Out of options: a cognitive
model of adolescent suicide and risk-taking. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press. Tinsley, B.J. (2003). How children learn to be
healthy. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Class Contact Equivalent of 40 hours.
Assessment two hour Examination 60%
Tutorial Presentation (Case study) 20%
Written summary of tutorial presentation 20%
HNB3228 NURSING PRACTICE 8 (ELECTIVE): CHILD, ADOLESCENT &
FAMILY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 6: Child, Adolescent & Family
Content Review of principles of growth and development in
relation to acute paediatric nursing, such as the sick child and
adolescent in a variety of settings; Health promotion and societal
concerns of childhood and adolescence such as AIDS, behaviour
problems, sexual assault; The more common child and adolescent
genetic and development disorders requiring short/long term
nursing interventions/management; A variety of conditions including
prevention strategies encountered in children and adolescents
including childhood accidents and trauma, and sexually transmitted
disease prevention; and Adapt aspects of the above to various
cultural and indigenous groups.
Required Reading Hockenberry-Eaton, M., Wilson, D., &
Winkelstein, M.L. (Eds). (2005). Wong’s Essentials of Paediatric
Nursing. (7th Ed.) St. Louis: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Australian Department of Family &
Community Services. (2003). The national agenda for early
childhood: a draft framework [electronic resource]. Canberra:
Author. (Available at electronically via the VU Library Internet site)
Australian Department of Health & Aged Care. (2000). Mental
Health of young people in Australia [Report]. Canberra: Author.
Borkowski, J.G., Ramey, S.L. & Bristol-Power, M. (Eds.) (2002).
Parenting and the child’s world: influences on academic, intellectual,
and social-emotional development. Mahwah: Erlbaum. Hayward, C.
(Ed.) (2003). Gender differences at puberty. New York: Cambridge
University Press. Healy, J. (Ed.) (2002). Adolescent health. Rozelle:
Spinney Press. Hogan, M.J. & White, J.E. (Eds.) (2003) Child health
nursing: reviews & rationales. Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall.
Mifflin, P.C. (2003) Saving very premature babies: key ethical
issues. Edinburgh: BFM Books for Midwives. Pillitteri, A. (2003).
Maternal and child health nursing: Care of the childbearing and
childrearing family (4th Ed) Philadelphia: Lippincott. Sofronoff, K.,
Kosky, R. & Dalgliesh, L. (Eds). (2005). Out of options: a cognitive
model of adolescent suicide and risk-taking. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press. Tinsley, B.J. (2003). How children learn to be
healthy. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Class Contact Equivalent to 40 hours.
Assessment Case study (2000 words.) 50%: Project (2000
words.) 50%
HNB3229 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 8 (ELECTIVE): CHILD, ADOLESCENT
& FAMILY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 6: Child, Adolescent & Family,
Clinical Practicum 6: Child, Adolescent & Family
Content Students will undertake 140 hours of clinical practice in a
range of institutional, residential or community health care settings.
Required Reading Hockenberry-Eaton, M., Wilson, D., &
Winkelstein, M.L. (Eds). (2005). Wong’s Essentials of Paediatric
Nursing. (7th Ed.) St. Louis: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Australian Department of Family &
Community Services. (2003). The national agenda for early
childhood: a draft framework [electronic resource]. Canberra:
Author. (Available at electronically via the VU Library Internet site)
Australian Department of Health & Aged Care. (2000). Mental
Health of young people in Australia [Report]. Canberra: Author.
Borkowski, J.G., Ramey, S.L. & Bristol-Power, M. (Eds.) (2002).
Parenting and the child’s world: influences on academic, intellectual,
and social-emotional development. Mahwah: Erlbaum. Hayward, C.
(Ed.) (2003). Gender differences at puberty. New York: Cambridge
University Press. Healy, J. (Ed.) (2002). Adolescent health. Rozelle:
Spinney Press. Hogan, M.J. & White, J.E. (Eds.) (2003) Child health
nursing: reviews & rationales. Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall.
Mifflin, P.C. (2003) Saving very premature babies: key ethical
issues. Edinburgh: BFM Books for Midwives. Pillitteri, A. (2003).
Maternal and child health nursing: Care of the childbearing and
childrearing family (4th Ed) Philadelphia: Lippincott. Sofronoff, K.,
Kosky, R. & Dalgliesh, L. (Eds). (2005). Out of options: a cognitive
model of adolescent suicide and risk-taking. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press. Tinsley, B.J. (2003). How children learn to be
healthy. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Class Contact 140 hours of clinical experience.
Assessment In order to be awarded a satisfactory grade for this
subject, the student must successfully complete each of the following:
Demonstration of competence in skills in line with those required for
a graduate nurse at beginning level, in line with the ANCI
competencies (1998); Satisfactory participation in reflective
practice, as defined by completion of personal learning objectives
and reflective journal entries during each week of clinical
placement; and, demonstration of safe and competent practice in
line with that required for a graduate nurse at beginning level, and
in line with the ANCI competencies (1998).
Final assessment Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory
HNB3230 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 8 (ELECTIVE): MENTAL HEALTH &
ILLNESS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 5: Mental Health & Illness,
Clinical Practicum 5: Mental Health & Illness
Content Students will be provided with opportunities to practise a
range of mental health nursing skills, including observing and
participating in psychotherapeutic approaches to care, such as
cognitive behaviour therapy, and group therapy; observing and
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
165
assisting in the prevention and therapeutic management of
aggression; observing and participating in case management;
reflecting on his or her practices in the prevention and management
of aggression; and developing an understanding of mental health
policy and issues related to mental health service provision.
Required Reading Barker, P. (2003). Psychiatric and Mental
Health Nursing: The Craft of Caring. London: Arnold. Antai-Otong,
D. (2003). Psychiatric Nursing: Biological & Behavioural Concepts.
London: Thompson.
Recommended Reading American Psychiatric Association
(2000). Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders DSM-
IV-TR. Washington DC: American Psychiatric Association. Frisch,
N.C. & Frisch, L.E. (2002). Psychiatric mental health nursing. (2nd
Ed) Albany: Delamar Publishers. Geldard, D. (2002). Basic
personal counselling (4th ed) Sydney: Prentice Hall. Gorman, L. M.,
Raines, M. L. & Sultan, D. F., (2002). Psychosocial Nursing for
General Patient Care. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Company. Haber,
J., Krainovich-Miller, B., McMahon, A. L. & Price-Hoskins, P (1997).
Comprehensive psychiatric nursing. (5th. ed) St- Louis: Mosby.
Harrison, M., Howard, D. & Mitchell D., (2004) Acute Mental
Health Nursing. London: Sage Publications. Keltner, N. L.,
Schwecke, L.H., Bostrom, C. E. (1999) Psychiatric nursing (3rd Ed)
St Louis: Mosby Year Book. Meier, S.T. & Davis, S.T. (2005). The
Elements of Counselling. Melbourne: Thompson. Newell, R., &
Gournay, K., (2000). Mental health nursing – an evidence-based
approach. London: Churchill Livingstone. Thompson, T. & Mathias,
P., (Eds) (2000). Lyttle’s mental Health and Disorder. London:
Bailliere Tindall. Townsend, M. C., (2000). Psychiatric mental health
nursing: Concepts of care (3rd Ed) Philadelphia: F. A. Davis
Company. Victoria’s Mental Health Service: The Framework for
Service Delivery. (1996). Health & Community Services, Psychiatric
Division (Victoria). Videbeck, S. L., (2001) Psychiatric mental health
nursing. Philadelphia: Lippincott. Watkins, P. (2002). Mental Health
Nursing: The Art of Compassionate Care. Oxford: Butterworth
Heinemann.
Subject Hours 140 hours of clinical experience.
Assessment In order to be awarded a satisfactory grade for this
subject, the student must successfully complete each of the following:
demonstration of competence in skills in line with those required for
a graduate nurse at beginning level, in line with the ANCI
competencies (1998); demonstrate safe and competent practice in
line with the ANCI Competencies and Australian and New Zealand
College of Mental Health Nurses Inc. Standards of Practice for
Mental Health Nursing, as defined for a student at this stage of the
course; and demonstrate competency in conducting a Mental Health
Status Examination. Final assessment: Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory.
HNB3236 TRANSISTION TO PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s)Nil.
Content The topics to be taught in this subject are: the health care
system and various forces influencing health care delivery including
health policy; organisational structures and functions; leadership,
followership; principles of management and management of
resources; organisational culture; effective communication strategies,
problem solving, prioritising and decision making; quality
improvement and outcomes; and consumer consultation;
professional role expectation, employer and employee relationship;
and development of a CV and interview techniques. Credit Transfer
Arrangements (including Articulation Pathways) if applicable.
Required Reading Chang, E. and Daly, J. (2001). Transitions in
nursing. Sydney: MacLennan & Petty
Recommended Reading Australian Nursing Council
Incorporated (2002). Code of ethics for nurses in Australia
[Brochure]. Canberra: Author). Australian Nursing Council
Incorporated (1995). Code of professional conduct for nurses in
Australia. [Brochure]. Canberra: Author). Australian Nursing
Council Incorporated (2002). ANCI National Competency
Standards for the Registered Nurse and the Enrolled Nurse.
[Brochure]. Canberra: Author. Palmer, G. R. & Short, S. (2000).
Health care and public policy: An Australian analysis. (3rd Ed)
Melbourne: MacMillian Publishers. Wheeler, N., & Grice. D.
(2000). Management in health care. Cheltenham, UK: Stanley
Thomas.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours.
Assessment Presentation 30%, management case study
assignment (2000 words) – 50%, development of a CV or
Professional Portfolio – 20%.
HNB3237 RESEARCH PRACTICE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The aim of this subject is to provide fundamental
knowledge in the research process. The subject builds upon previous
knowledge and skills gained in Evidence Based Health Care to
develop an understanding of the relationship between nursing
research and nursing practice. It aims to provide a broad range of
research designs and methodologies that are currently utilised by
nurse researchers and to validate and refine existing nursing
knowledge in order to improve nursing practice.
Required Reading Polit D.F., Beck.C.T., & Hungler, B.P. (2000)
Essentials of Nursing Research. (5th.Ed) London: Lippincott or
Beanland, C., Schneider, Z., LoBiondo-Wood, G. & Haber, J.
(2000). Nursing Research: Methods, Critical Appraisal and
Utilisation. Sydney: Mosby
Recommended Reading Australian Nursing Federation (1997),
Standards for Research for the Nursing Profession, ANF, Melbourne
Bell, P., Daly. & Chang, E. (1997) ‘A study of the educational and
research priorities of registered nurses in rural ustralia’. Journal of
Advanced Nursing, vol.25,no.4, 794-800 Brink, P. & Wood, M.
(1994). Basic Steps in Planning Nursing Research: From Question to
Proposal. (4th Ed) Boston: Yokes & Barlette Burns, N & Grove, S.
(2001). The Practice of Nursing Research: Conduct, Critique, &
Utilisation. 4th Edition. Philadelphia: Lippincott Dempsey, P. &
Dempsey, A. (2000). Using Nursing Research: Process, Critical
Evaluation. And Utilization. Philadelphia: Lippincott Field, P.A. &
Morse, J. M. (1996). Qualitative Nursing Research: The Application
of Qualitative Approaches. Sydney: Croom Helm Garrard, J.
(1999), Health Sciences Literature Review Made Easy: The Matrix
Method, Aspen Publishers Inc., Gaitherburg, Maryland Holloway, I.
& Wheeler, S. (1996). Qualitative Research for Nurses. Oxford:
Blackwell Science Martin, P. & Pierce, R. (1994). Practical Statistics
for Health Sciences. Melbourne: Thomson Minichiello, V., Aroni, R.,
Timewell, E. & Alexander, L. (1995). In-depth Interviewing:
Principles, Technique Analysis ( 2nd Ed) Melbourne: Longman
Cheshire Nieswiadomy, R.M. (1998). Foundations of Nursing
Research (3rd Ed) Stamford: Appleton & Lange Polit, D. F. &
Hungler, B.P. (1999). Nursing Research: Principles and Methods.
(6th Ed) Philadelphia: Lippincott Smith, P. (1997). Research
Mindedness for Practice: An Interactive Approach for Nursing and
Health Care New York: Churchill Livingstone Robbers, K & Taylor,
B, (2002) Nursing Research Processes – An Australian Perspective,
2nd Edition, Melbourne: Nelson Thomas
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours organised according to
teaching mode used.
Assessment Assignment – 1,500 words: 40% Critically appraise a
specific nursing research article related to the subject aims.
Examination – two hours: 60%. This will be a combination of
multiple choice questions and short answer questions.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
166
HNB3238 NURSING PRACTICE 9: (ELECTIVE) ACUTE CARE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HNB3134 Nursing Practice: Health of the
Community, HNB3135 Clinical Practicum 6: Health of the
Community, HNB3136 Nursing Practice 7: Mental Health & Illness,
HNB3137 Clinical Practicum 7: Mental Health and Illness,
HNB3138 Nursing Practice 8: Child and Family Health, HNB3139
Clinical Practicum 8: child and Family Health.
Content The aim of this subject is to consolidate students’
knowledge and skills to deliver safe nursing care to clients requiring
acute nursing in medical/surgical areas. Students will be expected
to utilize critical thinking and problem solving skills and to integrate
all knowledge previously acquired in the course to demonstrate the
skills necessary to practice safely as a graduate nurse at beginning
level.
Required Reading Australian Nursing Council Incorporated
(2000). ANCI competency standards for the registered nurse and
the enrolled nurse (3rd Ed) Canberra: Author. (Available at
www.anci.org.au) Australian Nursing Council Incorporated (2002).
Code of ethics for nurses in Australia [Brochure]. Canberra: Author.
(Available at www.anci.org.au) Australian Nursing Council
Incorporated (1995). Code of professional conduct for nurses in
Australia [Brochure]. Canberra: Author. (Available at
www.anci.org.au) Bennett, B., & Murphy, L. (2002). Style guide
[Booklet]. St Albans, Vic: Victoria University. (also available at
www.staff.vu.edu.au/AcuteCareNsg) Fiscbach, F.T. (1999). A
manual of laboratory and diagnostic tests (6th Ed) Philadelphia, PA:
Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins. Galbraith, A., Bullock, S., & Manias,
E. (2001). Fundamentals of pharmacology (3rd Ed) Frenchs Forest,
NSW: Pearson Education Australia. Harrison, R. & Daly, L. (2001).
Acute medical emergencies. A nursing guide. London: Churchill
Livingstone. Lewis, S. M., Heitkemper, M.M., & Dirksen, S. R.
(2000). Medical-surgical nursing. Assessment and management of
clinical problems (5th Ed) St Louis, MO: Mosby. McCance, K.L., &
Huether, S.E. (2002). Pathophysiology. The biological basis for
disease in adults & children (4th Ed) St Louis, MO: Mosby. Perry, P.,
& Potter, A. (2001). Clinical nursing skills and techniques (5th Ed) St
Louis, MO: Mosby. Tiziani, A. (2002). Havard’s nursing guide to
drugs (6th Ed) Marrickville, NSW: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Anderson, D.M., Keith, J., Novak, P.D.,
& Elliot, M.A. (2001). Mosby's medical, nursing, and allied health
dictionary (6th Ed) St Louis, MO: Mosby. Bullock, B.A., & Henze, R.L.
(2000). Focus of pathophysiology. Philadelphia: Lippincott. Estes,
M.E.Z. (2002). Health Assessment and physical examination (2nd Ed)
Albany: Delmar homson Learning. Gatford, J.D., & Anderson, R.E.
(1998). Nursing calculations (5th Ed) Melbourne: Churchill
Livingstone. Lemone, P., & Burke, K.M. (2000). Medical-surgical
nursing. Critical thinking in client care (2nd Ed) Upper Saddle River,
NJ: Prentice-Hall. Salerno, E. (1999). Pharmacology for health
professionals. St Louis, MO: Mosby. Winningham, M.L., & Preusser,
B.A. (2001). Critical thinking in medical-surgical settings: A case
study approach (2nd Ed) St Louis, MO: Mosby. Wong, D.L. (1999).
Whaley and Wong’s nursing care of infants and children (6th Ed) St
Louis, MO: Mosby.
Recommended Journals American Journal of Nursing,
Australian Family Physician, Australian Nurses Journal, Australian
Journal of Advanced Nursing, British Medical Journal,
Contemporary Nurse, Image, Journal of the American Medical
Association, Journal of Advanced Nursing, Medical Journal of
Australia, Nursing 98+ (In addition, students will be provided with
more specific journals or articles under set topic areas).
Recommended Websites Department of Human Services,
Victorian State Government: www.dhs.vic.gov.au, Australian
Department of Health and Ageing www.health.gov.au, Australian
Institute of Health and Welfare www.aihw.gov.au, Australian
Bureau of Statistics www.abs.gov.au, Australian Resuscitation
Council www.resus.org.au, Heart Foundation (Australia)
www.heartfoundation.com.au, Lung net (Australian Lung
Foundation) www.lungnet.org.au, Asthma Victoria
www.asthma.org.au, Asthma Australia
www.asthmaaustralia.org.au, National Asthma Council
www.nationalasthma.org.au, The Cancer Council
www.accv.org.au, National Breast Cancer Centre
www.nbcc.org.au, Papscreen Victoria www.papscreen.org,
Communicable Diseases Australia
www.health.gov.au/pubhlth/cdi/nndss,
Diabetes Australia www.diabetesaustralia.com.au, International
Diabetes Institute www.idi.org.au, Virtual Hospital www.vh.org (In
addition, students will be provided with more specific website
information under set topic areas).
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours organised according to
teaching mode used.
Assessment Problem based learning (PBL) exercise x 1: 20% This
exercise will assess the student’s ability to integrate the relevant
theoretical concepts and problem based learning skills to a case
study of a client requiring acute care intervention. Simulated patient
care situation: 20% Utilising the case study client in a simulated
setting, the student will be required to demonstrate competence in
assessment and prioritisation of the client’s health care needs. Skills
performance assessment Ungraded (Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory) The
student’s achievement of competence in the selected clinical skills
will be assessed in the simulated setting prior to the commencement
of the first acute care clinical placement. Self-testing exercises online
(not graded) A number of self-testing exercises related to clinical skill
and knowledge development will be placed online using WebCT to
assist student preparation and learning. Examination: 60%. The
student’s ability to demonstrate an understanding of knowledge, and
to apply it to various acute care situations will be assessed.
Students’ comprehension and analytical skills will be assessed
through the interpretation of specific case studies, requiring
explanation and prioritisation of client management and with due
regard to the role of other health care professionals.
HNB3239 NURSING PRACTICE 9: (ELECTIVE) MENTAL HEALTH &
ILLNESS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HNB3134 Nursing Practice: Health of the
Community, HNB3135 Clinical Practicum 6: Health of the
Community, HNB3136 Nursing Practice 7: Mental Health & Illness,
HNB3137 Clinical Practicum 7: Mental Health and Illness,
HNB3138 Nursing Practice 8: Child and Family Health, HNB3139
Clinical Practicum 8: child and Family Health.
Content The aim of this subject is to develop students' knowledge,
skills and attitudes in order to promote mental health and to meet the
needs of people with altered mental health status in institutional and
community settings. To consolidate previously acquired knowledge
in mental health nursing.
Required Reading Stuart, G. W., & Laraia, M. T. (2001).
Principles and practice of psychiatric nursing (7th Ed) St. Louis:
Mosby.
Recommended Reading American Psychiatric Association
(2000) Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders DSM-
IV-TR. Washington DC: American Psychiatric Association. Frisch,
N.C. & Frisch, L.E., (1998) Psychiatric mental health nursing.
Albany: Delamar Publishers Geldard, D. (1998) Basic personal
counselling (3rd ed) Sydney: Prentice Hall Gorman, L. M., Raines,
M. L. & Sultan, D. F., (2002) Psychosocial Nursing for General
Patient care. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Company Haber, J.,
Krainovich-Miller, B., McMahon, A. L. & Price-Hoskins, P (1997).
Comprehensive psychiatric nursing. (5th. ed ) St- Louis: Mosby
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
167
Keltner, N. L., Schwecke, L.H., Bostrom, C. E. (1999) Psychiatric
nursing (3rd Ed) St Louis: Mosby Year Book Newell, R., & Gournay,
K., (2000). Mental health nursing – an evidence-based approach.
London: Churchill Livingstone. Stuart, G. W., & Laraia, M. T.
(2001). Principles and practice of psychiatric nursing (7th Ed) St.
Louis: Mosby. Thompson, T. & Mathias, P., (Eds) (2000) Lyttle’s
mental health and disorder London: Bailliere Tindall Townsend, M.
C., (2000) Psychiatric mental health nursing: Concepts of care (3rd
Ed) Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Company Videbeck, S. L., (2001)
Psychiatric mental health nursing Philadelphia: Lippincott.
Websites hna.ffh.vic.gov.au/acmh/mh/index.htm Home page of
the Victorian Government mental health branch and provides
numerous interesting and helpful links. hna.ffh.vic.gov.au/acmh/
mh/policy_legislation/abstracts Provides a complete list of all the
branches publications, complete with abstracts.
www.healthsci.utas.edu.au/nursing/college/ Link is to the
Australian and New Zealand College of Mental Health Nurses
home page. The College is the professional body for mental health
nurses and the site provides many useful links, including a
newsgroup email subscription (free). www.span.com.au/mhrc/
Mental Health Resource Centre. www.mhca.com.au Mental Health
Council of Australia. auseinet.flinders.edu.au AusEinet — Australian
Early Intervention Network
home.vicnet.net.au/~eppic/ Early Psychosis Prevention and
Intervention Centre. mhcs.health.nsw.gov.au/health-public-
affairs/mhcs/ NSW Multicultural Health Communication Service.
Communication Service. www.health.gov.au/hsdd/mentalhe/
Mental Health Branch of Department of Health & Aged Care.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours over one semester
comprising of lectures, tutorials and seminars & workshops
Assessment Case management study, comprising: Interview and
assessment 40% (1900-2100 words); Case management report
60% (2800-3000 words).
HNB3241 NURSING PRACTICE 9: (ELECTIVE) CHILD AND FAMILY
HEALTH
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 6: Health of the Community,
Clinical Practicum 6: Health of the Community, Nursing Practice 7:
Mental Health and Illness, Clinical Practicum 7: Mental Health and
Illness, Nursing Practice 8: Child and Family Health and Clinical
Practicum 8: Child and Family Health
Subject Aims The aim of this subject is to develop in students,
knowledge and skills to meet the need of child and family in a
paediatric environment. It aims to emphasize on the growth and
developmental perspectives of childhood and adolescence, health
promotion and support during these developmental experiences,
including common paediatric conditions and specific needs of sick
children and their families.
Content Review of principles of growth and development in
relation to acute paediatric nursing, such as sick child and
adolescent in hospital or community, the effects of hospitalisation,
common medical/surgical conditions, long term/terminal illness. the
effects of the child’s illness on the family. Communication with
children, adolescents, the families. This includes communication with
families from diverse cultural backgrounds. Health promotion and
societal concerns of childhood and adolescence such as substance
abuse, AIDS, child abuse, suicide.
Methods of Teaching The focus of teaching-learning approaches
is to draw upon and extend the students’ knowledge in lectures,
tutorials, seminars, group work and presentation. A range of multi
media will be utilised to enhance and stimulate discussion.
Required Reading Wong, L.D., Hockenberry-Eaton, M.,
Winkelstein, M.L., Wilson, D., Ahmann, E. & DiVito-Thomas, P.A.
(Eds). (1999). Whaley & Wong’s Nursing Care of Infants and
Children. (6th Ed) St. Louis: Mosey.
Recommended Reading Bowden, V.R., Dickey, S.B. &
Greenberg, C.S. (1999). Children and their families: The continuum
of care. Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders; Pillitteri, A. (1999). Maternal
and child health nursing: Care of the childbearing and childrearing
family (3rd Ed) Philadelphia: Lippincott.
Subject Hours Equivalent to 40 hours distributed according to the
teaching mode used.
Assessment Case management study, comprising: Interview and
assessment 40% (1900-2100 words); Case management report
60% (2800-3000 words).
HNB3242 NURSING PRACTICE 9: (ELECTIVE) HEALTH & ILLNESS IN
OLDER ADULTS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 6: Health of the Community,
Clinical Practicum 6: Health of the Community, Nursing Practice 7:
Mental Health and Illness, Clinical Practicum 7: Mental Health and
Illness, Nursing Practice 8: Child and Family Health and Clinical
Practicum 8: Child and Family Health
Subject Aims The aim of this subject is to build upon the student’s
awareness and knowledge about special health issues older people
by examining the key issues in gerontological nursing and the
essential elements of planning care that is creative, sensitive and
effective for older people.
Content The physiological and psychosocial consequences of
changes for physical and mental health for older people;
implications for of the special needs of older people for assessment
and clinical decision making; assessment considerations including
use of specific assessment tools, refinement of clinical assessment
skills; the clinical management of common issues experienced by
older people for example management of pain, bowel management,
promotion of urinary continence, polypharmacy.
Methods of Teaching A range of teaching and learning
approaches will be used in this subject, including lectures, tutorials,
role play activities, and group discussion. Audiovisual materials will
be used to explore some topics. Students will be encouraged to
actively participate in their own learning.
Required Reading Cluning, T. (2001). Ageing at home –
practical approaches to community care. Melbourne: Ausmed
Publications; Eliopolous, C. (2001). Gerontological nursing (5th Ed)
Philadelphia: Lippincott; Hudson, R. & Richmond, J. (2000). Living,
Dying, Caring. Life and death in a nursing home. Melbourne:
Ausmed Publications
Recommended Reading Cavanaugh, J. & Whitbourne, S. (Eds).
(1999). Gerontology: An Interdisciplinary Perspective. New York:
Oxford University Press; Ebersole & Hess (2001). Geriatric Nursing
& Healthy Ageing. Mosby: St Louis; Hogstel, M. (2001).
Gerontology: nursing care of the older adult. Albany, New York:
Delmar. In addition access to specific sites will be encouraged. For
example: www.alzvic.asn.au Alzheimer’s Association of Victoria;
www.cas.flinders.edu.au/aag Australian Association of
Gerontology; www.health.gov.au/index.htm Australian Department
of Health & Ageing; www.vahec.com.au/aboutus.htm Victorian
Association of Health & Extended Care;
www.accreditation.aust.com/reports/reports.html Residential Aged
Care Accreditation Reports.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours organised according to
teaching mode used.
Assessment Assignment 3000 words – 60%; class presentation
1500-2000 words – 40%.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
168
HNB3243 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 89: (ELECTIVE) ACUTE CARE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 7: Acute Care, Clinical Practicum
7: Acute Care
Content Utilising experience from the previous acute care
placement, students will be expected to develop an increasingly
independent role in the delivery of nursing care to clients in an acute
medical/surgical setting and be capable of planning implementing
and evaluating care with minimal supervision. Students will be
supervised by clinical teachers and/or preceptors during this period
of experiential learning. The ANCI Competencies will be used as an
assessment framework by preceptors and clinical instructors.
Reflective practice will be encouraged in order to enable students to
critically evaluate their clinical practice. A debriefing session once
or twice a week will provide an opportunity to share and reflect on
their progress with their peers. Client-student ratios will be
graduated throughout the placement and numbers will depend upon
the level acuity.
Required Reading Brown, D., & Edwards, H (Eds). (2005).
Lewis’s medical-surgical nursing. Assessment and management of
clinical problems. Marrickville, NSW: Elsevier Australia. Bennett, B.,
& Murphy, L. (2002). Style guide [Booklet]. St Albans, Vic: Victoria
University. Evans-Smith, P. (2005). Taylor’s clinical; nursing skills. A
nursing process approach. Philadelphia, USA: Lippincott. Hext, V.,
& Mayner, L. (2003). Practical nursing calculations. Crows Nest,
NSW: Allen & Unwin. Urden, L.D., Stacy, K.M. & Lough, M.E.
(2004) Priorities in Critical Care Nursing (4th ed) St Louis: Mosby.
Tollefson, J. (2004). Clinical psychomotor skills. Assessment tools for
nursing students (2nd ed.). Tuggerah, NSW: Social Science
Press.Australian Nursing Council. (2000). ANC National
competency standards for the registered nurse (3rd ed.). Canberra:
Author. (Can be ordered online at http://www.anc.org.au ).
Australian Nursing Council. (2002). Code of ethics for nurses in
Australia [Brochure]. Canberra: Author. (Available at
http://www.anc.org.au ). Australian Nursing Council. (2003).
Code of professional conduct for nurses in Australia [Brochure].
Canberra: Author. (Available at http://www.anc.org.au ). Evans-
Smith, P. (2005). Taylor’s clinical; nursing skills. A nursing process
approach. Philadelphia, USA: Lippincott. Galbraith, A., Bullock, S.,
& Manias, E. (2004). Fundamentals of pharmacology. (4thed.).
Frenchs Forest, NSW: Pearson Education Australia.
Subject Hours 140 hours of clinical experience
Assessment In order to be awarded a satisfactory grade for this
subject, the student must successfully complete each of the following:
satisfactory performance of holistic assessment of one client, as
demonstrated by care planning documentation; demonstration of
competence in skills in line with those required for a graduate nurse
at beginning level, in line with the ANCI competencies (1998);
satisfactory participation in reflective practice, as defined by
completion of personal learning objectives and reflective journal
entries during each week of clinical placement; and Demonstration
of safe and competent practice in line with that required for a
graduate nurse at beginning level, and in line with the ANCI
competencies (1998).
HNB3244 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 9: (ELECTIVE) MENTAL HEALTH &
ILLNESS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 6: Health of the Community,
Clinical Practicum 6: Health of the Community, Nursing Practice 7:
Mental Health and Illness, Clinical Practicum 7: Mental Health and
Illness, Nursing Practice 8: Child and Family Health and Clinical
Practicum 8: Child and Family Health
Subject Aims The aim of this subject is to develop students’
knowledge, skills and attitudes in mental health practice using a
range of psychotherapeutic interventions. To consolidate previously
acquired clinical skills in mental health nursing. To prepare students
to be beginning mental health practitioners.
Methods of Teaching Students will be expected to meet regularly
with their mentor to review their progress in meeting the intended
learning objectives of the subject.
Required Reading Stuart, G. W., & Laraia, M. T. (2001).
Principles and practice of psychiatric nursing (7th Ed) St. Louis:
Mosby.
Recommended Reading American Psychiatric Association
(2000). Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders DSM-
IV-TR. Washington DC: American Psychiatric Association; Frisch,
N.C. & Frisch, L.E. (1998). Psychiatric mental health nursing.
Albany: Delamar Publishers; Geldard, D. (1998) Basic personal
counselling (3rd ed) Sydney: Prentice Hall; Gorman, L.M., Raines,
M.L. & Sultan, D.F. (2002). Psychosocial Nursing for General
Patient care. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Company; Haber, J.,
Krainovich-Miller, B., McMahon, A.L. & Price-Hoskins, P. (1997).
Comprehensive psychiatric nursing. (5th. ed ) St- Louis: Mosby;
Keltner, N.L., Schwecke, L.H. & Bostrom, C.E. (1999). Psychiatric
nursing (3rd Ed) St Louis: Mosby Year Book; Newell, R. & Gournay,
K. (2000). Mental health nursing – an evidence-based approach.
London: Churchill Livingstone; Thompson, T. & Mathias, P. (Eds)
(2000). Lyttle’s mental health and disorder London: Bailliere Tindall;
Townsend, M.C. (2000). Psychiatric mental health nursing:
Concepts of care (3rd Ed) Philadelphia: F.A. Davis Company;
Videbeck, S.L. (2001). Psychiatric mental health nursing
Philadelphia: Lippincott
Internet links hna.ffh.vic.gov.au/acmh/mh/index.htm Home
page of the Victorian Government mental health branch and
provides numerous interesting and helpful links.
hna.ffh.vic.gov.au/acmh/mh/policy_legislation/abstracts Provides
a complete list of all the branches publications, complete with
abstracts.
www.healthsci.utas.edu.au/nursing/college/ Link is to the
Australian and New Zealand College of Mental Health Nurses
home page. The College is the professional body for mental health
nurses and the site provides many useful links, including a
newsgroup email subscription (free). www.span.com.au/mhrc/
Mental Health Resource Centre; www.mhca.com.au Mental Health
Council of Australia; auseinet.flinders.edu.au AusEinet — Australian
Early Intervention Network; home.vicnet.net.au/~eppic Early
Psychosis Prevention and Intervention Centre;
mhcs.health.nsw.gov.au/health-public-affairs/mhcs/ NSW
Multicultural Health Communication Service;
www.health.gov.au/hsdd/mentalhe/Mental Health Branch of
Department of Health & Aged Care
Subject Hours 210 hours of clinical experience, comprising of
five days per week, seven hours per day for six weeks.
Assessment Achievement of clinical competencies (Ungraded:
Pass/Fail).
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
169
HNB3245 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 9: (ELECTIVE) CHILD AND FAMILY
HEALTH
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 6: Health of the Community,
Clinical Practicum 6: Health of the Community, Nursing Practice 7:
Mental Health and Illness, Clinical Practicum 7: Mental Health and
Illness, Nursing Practice 8: Child and Family Health and Clinical
Practicum 8: Child and Family Health
Subject Aims The aim of this subject is to give students the
opportunity to practice clinical skills in caring for the child and
family in a paediatric clinical environment. It is designed to help
students make the often difficult transition from study to work
practice. Students are therefore given the opportunity to consolidate
their knowledge of the principles of paediatric nursing and skills
acquired throughout the course. It also aims to provide students with
the opportunity to develop and apply management skills in the
delivery of paediatric nursing care.
Content Students will undertake 210 hours of clinical practice in
an acute paediatric setting.
Methods of Teaching A clinical nurse will be appointed by the
School of Nursing on a ratio of 1:8 to supervise students during
their clinical practicum experience. Alternatively, a preceptorship
approach may be used, depending on the requirement of the
agency at which the student is placed.
Required Reading Wong, L.D., Hockenberry-Eaton, M.,
Winkelstein, M,L., Wilson, D., Ahmann, E., DiVito-Thomas,
P.A.(Eds).(1999). Whaley & Wong’s Nursing Care of Infants and
Children (6th Ed) St Louis: Mosby; Bowden, V,R., Dickey, S.B. &
Greenberg, C.S.(1999). Children and Families: The Continuum of
Care. Philadelphia: W.B.Saunders.; Rudolf, M.C. & Levene, M.I.
(1999). Paediatrics and Child Health. Malden: Blackwell Science
Inc.
Recommended Reading Glasper, E.A. & Ireland, L. (2000).
Evidence-based Child Health Care: Challenges for Practice. London:
MacMillan Press Ltd; Lissauer, T. & Clayden, G.(1997). Illustrated
Textbook of Paediatrics. St Louis: Mosby; Robinson, M.J. &
Robertson, D.M. (1998). Practical Paediatrics(4th Ed) Edinburgh:
Churchill Livingstone.
Subject Hours 210 hours of clinical experience, comprising of
five days per week, seven hours per day for six weeks.
Assessment Achievement of the specified ANCI Competencies
(Ungraded: Pass/Fail).
HNB3246 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 9: (ELECTIVE) HEALTH & ILLNESS IN
OLDER ADULTS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 6: Health of the Community,
Clinical Practicum 6: Health of the Community, Nursing Practice 7:
Mental Health and Illness, Clinical Practicum 7: Mental Health and
Illness, Nursing Practice 8: Child and Family Health and Clinical
Practicum 8: Child and Family Health
Subject Aims The aim of this subject is to offer the student the
opportunity to apply their knowledge and participate in the delivery
of care of older people in a setting which offers a range of
opportunity – in particular sub-acute, rehabilitation, community and
residential aged care.
Content The student will undertake 210 hours of clinical practice
and engage in reflective practice with a mentor.
Methods of Teaching A clinical nurse will be appointed by the
School of Nursing on a ratio of 1:8 to supervise students during
their clinical practicum experience. Alternatively, a preceptorship
approach may be used, depending on the requirement of the
agency at which the student is placed.
Required Reading Ebersole & Hess (2001). Geriatric nursing &
health ageing. Mosby: St Louis
Recommended Reading Cluning, T. (2001). Ageing at home –
practical approaches to community care. Melbourne: Ausmed
Publications; Eliopolous, C. (2001). Gerontological nursing (5th Ed)
Philadelphia: Lippincott; Hudson, R. & Richmond, J. 2000 Living,
Dying, Caring. Life and death in a nursing home. Melbourne:
Ausmed Publications
Subject Hours 210 hours of clinical experience, comprising of
five days per week, seven hours per day for six weeks.
Assessment Achievement of the specified ANCI Competencies
(Ungraded: Pass/Fail).
HNB3247 NURSING PRACTICE 8 (ELECTIVE): CHILD, ADOLESCENT &
FAMILY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 6: Child, Adolescent & Family
Content Review of principles of growth and development in
relation to acute paediatric nursing, such as the sick child and
adolescent in a variety of settings; health promotion and societal
concerns of childhood and adolescence such as AIDS, behaviour
problems, sexual assault; the more common child and adolescent
genetic and development disorders requiring short/long term
nursing interventions/management; a variety of conditions including
prevention strategies encountered in children and adolescents
including childhood accidents and trauma, and sexually transmitted
disease prevention; and adapt aspects of the above to various
cultural and indigenous groups.
Required Reading Hockenberry-Eaton, M., Wilson, D., &
Winkelstein, M.L. (Eds). (2005). Wong’s Essentials of Paediatric
Nursing. (7th Ed.) St. Louis: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Australian Department of Family &
Community Services. (2003). The national agenda for early
childhood: a draft framework [electronic resource]. Canberra:
Author. (Available at electronically via the VU Library Internet site).
Australian Department of Health & Aged Care. (2000). Mental
Health of young people in Australia [Report]. Canberra: Author.
Borkowski, J.G., Ramey, S.L. & Bristol-Power, M. (Eds.) (2002).
Parenting and the child’s world: influences on academic, intellectual,
and social-emotional development. Mahwah: Erlbaum. Hayward, C.
(Ed.) (2003). Gender differences at puberty. New York: Cambridge
University Press. Healy, J. (Ed.) (2002). Adolescent health. Rozelle:
Spinney Press. Hogan, M.J. & White, J.E. (Eds.) (2003) Child health
nursing: reviews & rationales. Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall.
Mifflin, P.C. (2003) Saving very premature babies: key ethical
issues. Edinburgh: BFM Books for Midwives. Pillitteri, A. (2003).
Maternal and child health nursing: Care of the childbearing and
childrearing family (4th Ed) Philadelphia: Lippincott. Sofronoff, K.,
Kosky, R. & Dalgliesh, L. (Eds). (2005). Out of options: a cognitive
model of adolescent suicide and risk-taking. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press. Tinsley, B.J. (2003). How children learn to be
healthy. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Subject Hours Equivalent to 40 hours.
Assessment Case study (2000 words) – 50%, Project (2000
words) – 50%.
HNB3248 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 8 (ELECTIVE): CHILD, ADOLESCENT
& FAMILY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 6: Child, Adolescent & Family,
Clinical Practicum 6: Child, Adolescent & Family
Content Students will undertake 140 hours of clinical practice in a
range of institutional, residential or community health care settings.
Required Reading Hockenberry-Eaton, M., Wilson, D., &
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
170
Winkelstein, M.L. (Eds). (2005). Wong’s Essentials of Paediatric
Nursing. (7th Ed.) St. Louis: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Australian Department of Family &
Community Services. (2003). The national agenda for early
childhood: a draft framework [electronic resource]. Canberra:
Author. (Available at electronically via the VU Library Internet site).
Australian Department of Health & Aged Care. (2000). Mental
Health of young people in Australia [Report]. Canberra: Author.
Borkowski, J.G., Ramey, S.L. & Bristol-Power, M. (Eds.) (2002).
Parenting and the child’s world: influences on academic, intellectual,
and social-emotional development. Mahwah: Erlbaum. Hayward, C.
(Ed.) (2003). Gender differences at puberty. New York: Cambridge
University Press. Healy, J. (Ed.) (2002). Adolescent health. Rozelle:
Spinney Press. Hogan, M.J. & White, J.E. (Eds.) (2003) Child health
nursing: reviews & rationales. Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall.
Mifflin, P.C. (2003) Saving very premature babies: key ethical
issues. Edinburgh: BFM Books for Midwives. Pillitteri, A. (2003).
Maternal and child health nursing: Care of the childbearing and
childrearing family (4th Ed) Philadelphia: Lippincott. Sofronoff, K.,
Kosky, R. & Dalgliesh, L. (Eds). (2005). Out of options: a cognitive
model of adolescent suicide and risk-taking. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press. Tinsley, B.J. (2003). How children learn to be
healthy. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Subject Hours 140 hours of clinical experience.
Assessment In order to be awarded a satisfactory grade for this
subject, the student must successfully complete each of the following:
demonstration of competence in skills in line with those required for
a graduate nurse at beginning level, in line with the ANCI
competencies (1998); Satisfactory participation in reflective
practice, as defined by completion of personal learning objectives
and reflective journal entries during each week of clinical
placement; and Demonstration of safe and competent practice in
line with that required for a graduate nurse at beginning level, and
in line with the ANCI competencies (1998). Final assessment:
Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory.
HNB3249 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 8 (ELECTIVE): HEALTH & ILLNESS IN
OLDER ADULTS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 3: Health & Illness in Older
Adults, Clinical Practicum 3: Health & Illness in Older Adults.
Content The student will undertake clinical practice and engage in
reflective practice with a mentor/clinical educator.
Required Reading Ebersole, P., Hess, P. & Luggen, A. (2004).
Toward healthy aging (6th ed.). St. Louis: Mosby. Nay, R. &
Garratt, S. (2004) Nursing older people: issues and innovations.
(2nd ed.). Sydney: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Cluning, T. (2001) Ageing at home –
practical approaches to community care. Melbourne:Ausmed
Publications. Elioplous, C. (2001) Gerontological nursing (5th ed.).
Philadelphia: Lippincott. Koch, S. & Garratt, S. (2001) Assessing
older people. Sydney: MacLennan and Petty.
Subject Hours 140 hours of clinical experience.
Assessment In order to be awarded a satisfactory grade for this
subject, the student must successfully complete each of the following:
Demonstration of competence in skills in line with those required for
a graduate nurse at beginning level, in line with the ANCI
competencies (1998); Satisfactory participation in eflective practice,
as defined by completion of personal learning objectives and
reflective journal entries during each week of clinical placement;
and demonstration of safe and competent practice in line with that
required for a graduate nurse at beginning level, and in line with
the ANCI competencies (1998). Final assessment:
Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory.
HNB3250 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 9: CONSOLIDATION
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 3: Health & Illness in Older
Adults, Clinical Practicum 3: Health & Illness in Older
Adults.Content The student will undertake clinical practice and
engage in reflective practice with a mentor/clinical
educator.Required Reading Ebersole, P., Hess, P. & Luggen, A.
(2004). Toward healthy aging (6th ed.). St. Louis: Mosby. Nay, R.
& Garratt, S. (2004) Nursing older people: issues and innovations.
(2nd ed.). Sydney: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Cluning, T. (2001) Ageing at home –
practical approaches to community care. Melbourne:Ausmed
Publications. Elioplous, C. (2001) Gerontological nursing (5th ed.).
Philadelphia: Lippincott. Koch, S. & Garratt, S. (2001) Assessing
older people. Sydney: MacLennan and Petty.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 140 hours of clinical experience.
Assessment In order to be awarded a satisfactory grade for this
subject, the student must successfully complete each of the following:
demonstration of competence in skills in line with those required for
a graduate nurse at beginning level, in line with the ANCI
competencies (1998); satisfactory participation in eflective practice,
as defined by completion of personal learning objectives and
reflective journal entries during each week of clinical placement;
and demonstration of safe and competent practice in line with that
required for a graduate nurse at beginning level, and in line with
the ANCI competencies (1998). Final assessment:
Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory.
HNB3251 NURSING THEORY 8: (ELECTIVE) ACUTE CARE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nursing Practice 7: Acute Care
Content The content of this subject will be organised around the
Functional Health Patterns, in particular: Cognition & Perception
(neurological dysfunction complex pain); Nutrition and metabolism
(endocrine disorders complex wounds). This subject will cover the
nursing management of patients in the acute care setting including:
Co-morbidities, complex acute or chronic illnesses, including the
management of patients with multiple sclerosis, autoimmune,
endocrine disorders (excluding diabetes), advanced cardiac
conditions, spinal injuries and infectious diseases in acute care
settings; Focused assessment, planning, implementation and
evaluation of nursing interventions of patients with complex care
needs and their significant others; Complex wound assessment and
interventions; Chronic or complex pain assessment and
management; The helping role of the nurse; A problem based
learning approach will facilitate students in the formulation and
implementation of appropriate interventions in the management of
clients experiencing illness. Students are expected to develop
knowledge and skill appropriate for a graduate nurse at the
beginning level; Critique of evidenced based nursing; A functional
health patterns approach will be used as organising framework for
client assessment; and Factors such as cultural and indigenous
issues, legal and ethical issues, communication skills, and
organisational factors will also be considered in the analysis of
client care in acute medical/surgical settings.
Required Reading Brown, D., & Edwards, H (Eds). (2005).
Lewis’s medical-surgical nursing. Assessment and management of
clinical problems. Marrickville, NSW: Elsevier Australia. Bennett, B.,
& Murphy, L. (2002). Style guide [Booklet]. St Albans, Vic: Victoria
University. Evans-Smith, P. (2005). Taylor’s clinical; nursing skills. A
nursing process approach. Philadelphia, USA: Lippincott. Hext, V.,
& Mayner, L. (2003). Practical nursing calculations. Crows Nest,
NSW: Allen & Unwin. Urden, L.D., Stacy, K.M. & Lough, M.E.
(2004) Priorities in Critical Care Nursing (4th ed) St Louis: Mosby.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
171
Tollefson, J. (2004). Clinical psychomotor skills. Assessment tools for
nursing students (2nd ed.). Tuggerah, NSW: Social Science Press.
Recommended Reading Australian Nursing Council. (2000).
ANC National competency standards for the registered nurse (3rd
ed.). Canberra: Author. (Can be ordered online at
http://www.anc.org.au ) Australian Nursing Council. (2002). Code
of ethics for nurses in Australia [Brochure]. Canberra: Author.
(Available at http://www.anc.org.au ). Australian Nursing Council.
(2003). Code of professional conduct for nurses in Australia
[Brochure]. Canberra: Author. (Available at http://www.anc.org.au
). Evans-Smith, P. (2005). Taylor’s clinical; nursing skills. A nursing
process approach. Philadelphia, USA: Lippincott. Galbraith, A.,
Bullock, S., & Manias, E. (2004). Fundamentals of pharmacology.
(4thed.). Frenchs Forest, NSW: Pearson Education Australia.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 40 hours.
Assessment Case study assignment (2000 words) – 50%. Project
(2000 words.) 50%
HNH4312 MINOR THESIS A
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The aim of this subject is to provide students with the
opportunity to plan for successful conduction of research. The major
emphasis of this subject will focus on the planning and development
of the research proposal. The topics covered in this subject will result
from negotiation between the student and the supervising lecturer
and will be influenced by the needs of individual students. Topics
which would be expected to be considered include the role of a
literature review, how to clarify a research problem, method(s) of
inquiry relevant to the problem and writing a research proposal.
Required Reading Nil
Subject Hours Students will meet with a supervisor on a regular
basis. The nature of the work required could be estimated as
equivalent to three contact hours per week.
Assessment Research proposal.
HNH4313 MINOR THESIS B (PART-TIME)
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HNH4312 Minor Thesis A; or equivalent.
Content The minor thesis is intended to provide students with an
opportunity to undertake independent enquiry into an area of
personal interest and applicable to the profession of nursing. The
thesis will be a research paper of not less than 10,000 words and
not more than 20,000 words. It will report on independently
conducted research which demonstrates a student’s ability to clearly
define a problem, to undertake a detailed literature search and
review the relevant theoretical and practical literature on the topic
area. Good data selection, collection and analysis skills should also
be demonstrated. The thesis should involve a high standard of
written communication skills. The topic which is chosen should allow
the candidate to develop a methodology and to apply it to an
appropriate problem or situation. It is intended that the topic chosen
for investigation will be in consultation with an appropriate
supervisor who will oversee the conduction of the research. Course
regulations guiding the conduct and supervision of the research will
be developed in the Course Rules and Regulations and will reflect
the regulations to be developed by the Faculty Graduate Studies
Research Committee.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Subject Hours To be arranged with supervisor.
Assessment A thesis of a minimum of 10,000 words and
maximum of 20,000 words.
HNH4314 MINOR THESIS B (FULL-TIME)
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HNH4312 Minor Thesis A; or equivalent.
Content The minor thesis is intended to provide students with an
opportunity to undertake independent enquiry into an area of
personal interest and applicable to the profession of nursing. The
thesis will be a research paper of not less than 10,000 words and
not more than 20,000 words. It will report on independently
conducted research which demonstrates a student’s ability to clearly
define a problem, to undertake a detailed literature search and
review the relevant theoretical and practical literature on the topic
area. Good data selection, collection and analysis skills should also
be demonstrated. The thesis should involve a high standard of
written communication skills. The topic which is chosen should allow
the candidate to develop a methodology and to apply it to an
appropriate problem or situation. It is intended that the topic chosen
for investigation will be in consultation with an appropriate
supervisor who will oversee the conduction of the research. Course
regulations guiding the conduct and supervision of the research will
be developed in the Course Rules and Regulations and will reflect
the regulations to be developed by the Faculty Graduate Studies
Research Committee.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Subject Hours To be arranged with supervisor.
Assessment A thesis of a minimum of 10,000 words and
maximum of 20,000 words.
HNM2010 PRACTICE ALLEGIANCES
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) JAC0216 With Woman: Rethinking Pain.
Content All students will follow through in a care capacity a
minimum of ten women experiencing childbirth. Assessment:
assessment of the woman; Culture & Family; Pain Assessment; Fetal
Assessment; Progress of the birth process; Support structures;
Environment. Midwifery care in partnership during birthing women:
Comfort; Orientation to environment; Partnership, dignity and
respect; Support and position; Mobilization; Pharmacological
methods of pain control; Non pharmacological methods of pain
control. Support: Communication; Counselling; Partnership with
woman. Hygiene: Showers Bathing, Perineal care, Mouth & hand
washing. Nutrition & Elimination: Breastfeeding with emphasis on
providing extra support; Fluid balance; Energy; IV Infusion &
Infusion Pumps; Urinalysis. Ethico-Legal Issues: Documentation;
Informed Consent; Maintenance of Dignity, privacy and respect;
Relevant components of the Scope of midwifery practice; Advocacy;
Loss. Environment: Technology; Maternity Team. Obstetrical Matters:
Induction of labour; Instrumental birth; Mal presentations; Multiple
birth; Epidural Anaesthesia; Episiotomy & Repair of perineum;
Principles of asepsis.
Required Reading To be advised by subject lecturer.
Recommended Reading Fraser, D.M. Cooper M.A (2003).
Myles textbook for midwives. (14th ed). Melbourne: Churchill
Livingstone. Brown, S., Lumley, J., Small, R., & Astbury, J. (1994).
Missing voices; The experience of motherhood. Melbourne: Oxford
University Press. Enkin, M., Keirse, M.,Neilson,J.,Crowther, C.,
Duley,L., Hodnett, E., & Hofmeyr, J. (2000). Guide to effective care
in pregnancy and childbirth. (3rd ed.). Oxford: Oxford University
Press. Geraghty, B. (1997). Homoeopathy for midwives.
Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone. Lowdermilk, D.L., Perry, S.E. &
Bobak, I. (Eds.). (1997). Maternity and women's health care. (6th
ed.). St. Louis: Mosby. Olds,S., London, M., & Ladewig, P. (1996).
Maternal newborn nursing: A family centred approach. (5th ed.).
Sydney: Addison-Wesley. Page, L. (Eds.) (2000). The new
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
172
midwifery. Sydney: Churchill Livingstone. Proctor, S. & Renfrew, M.
(Eds). (2000). Linking research and practice in midwifery: A guide
to evidence-based practice. Sydney: Bailliere Tindall. Stables, D.
(1999). Physiology in childbearing. Sydney: Bailliere Tindall. Tiran,
D. (2000). Clinical aromatherapy for pregnancy and childbirth.
(2nd ed.). Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone. Yerby, M. (Ed.).
(2000). Pain in childbearing. Sydney: Bailliere Tindall.
Subject Hours A practice subject of 208 hours for one semester.
Assessment Practice assessment based on ACMI competency
standards. Partnership log, focussing on contact and follow-through
of women Reflective journal
HNM2020 TOWARDS A MIDWIFE SELF
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content All students will ‘follow through’ in a care capacity within
a maternity unit, a minimum of ten women experiencing childbirth.
Emphasis on: reflection on self and the experiences that influence
the development of the concept of self; application of skills and
techniques for the development of effective interpersonal
relationships in midwifery. Continuing to develop: personal and
professional philosophies and how they influence one’s perception
of midwifery as well as the midwives’ role and function; carving a
new identity: going from a known world to an unknown world;
connecting with the passion of midwifery; exploring strategies for
enhancing the vision of midwifery. In partnership with women: work
with a variety of women’s transition from pregnancy to parenthood;
work with women in a variety of settings and models including as a
‘named’ midwife.
Required Reading To be advised by subject lecturer.
Recommended Reading Byrne, D. & Byrne, A. (1996).
Counselling Skills for Health Professionals. South Melbourne:
Macmillan Education Australia Pty.Ltd. Kent, J. (2000). Social
Perspectives of Pregnancy and Childbirth for Midwives, Nurses and
the Caring Professions. UK: Open University Press. Page, L.A.
(2000). The New Midwifery. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Pauwels, A. (1995). Cross-Cultural Communication in the Health
Sciences. South Melbourne: Macmillan Education Australia Pty.Ltd.
Raphael-Leff, J. (1994). Psychological Processes of Chidbearing.
London: Chapman & Hall. Robertson, A. (1997). The Midwife
Companion. Camperdown, Australia: ACE Graphics. Schott,J. &
Henley, A. (1996). Culture, Religion and Childbearing in a
Multiracial Society. Oxford: Butterworth Heinman. Taylor, B.
(2000). Reflective Practice: A Guide for Nurses and Midwives.
Sydney: Allen & Unwin. Van Teijlingen, E., Lowis, G., McCaffery, P.
& Porter, M. (2000). Midwifery and the Medicalization of
Childbirth: Comparative Perspectives. New York: Nova Science
Publishers, Inc.
Subject Hours A practice subject of 208 hours for one semester.
Assessment Practice assessment based on ACMI competency
standards. Partnership log, focussing on contact and follow-through
of women and reflective journals.
HNM3010 NAVIGATING CHILDBEARING OBSTACLES
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content All students will ‘follow through’ in a care capacity within
a maternity unit, a minimum of five women with obstacles in
childbearing. Care and assessment during pregnancy, labour and
birth and after birth: assessment for malpresentation and
malposition; Conduct vaginal examination; Artificial rupture of
membranes; Episiotomy and perineal care; Breastfeeding problems;
Dynamap and blood pressure monitoring; Blood sugar monitoring.
Use of technology: Ultrasound use; Cardiotograph monitoring;
Oestreiol monitoring; Central Venous Pressure (CVP) monitoring;
Epidural infusions and care; Intravenous therapies; Syntocinon
infusion in therapy; Magnesium sulphate infusion; IV antibiotics;
IVAC pumps. Collaborative and referral role of the midwife. Assist
in Obstetrical intervention; Induction of labour; Forceps birth;
Ventouse birth; Caeserian Birth and care. Ethio-legal Issues:
Informed consent; Rights of the woman; Use of technology.
Principles of primary level counselling.
Required Reading To be advised by subject lecturer.
Recommended Reading Fraser, D.M.& Cooper M.A (2003).
Myles Textbook for Midwives. (13th ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill-
Livingstone. National Health and Medical Research Council
(NH&MRC Bulletin). (1988). Standards of Antenatal Care.
Canberra: Australian Government Publishing. National Health and
Medical Research Council (NH&MRC Report). (1996). Options For
Effective Care in Childbirth. Canberra: Australian Government
Publishing. Proctor, S. & Renfew, M. (2000). Linking Research and
Practice in Midwifery: A guide to Evidence Based Practice.
Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall. The Cochrane Collaboration.
(1997/1998/1999/2000/2001). Pregnancy and Childbirth
DataBase. Oxford: update Software. Cochrane Library Users
website at www.hcn.net.au/caul to enter. [The username and
password are as follows: ID: guest184 and Password: Se02mite].
Varney, H. (1997). Varney’s Midwifery. (3rd ed.). Sudbury: Jones
and Bartlett.
Subject Hours A practice subject of 208 hours for one semester.
Assessment Practice assessment based on ACMI competency
standards. Partnership log, focussing on contact and follow-through
of women and reflective journals.
HNM3011 WOMEN'S HEALTH PRACTICE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Within a framework of working with woman in
partnership, the role of the midwife providing primary and
collaborative care for women throughout the reproductive lifespan
will be explored under the several subheadings. Undertaking a
comprehensive women’s health assessment. Guidelines for practice
and skill development. Primary care midwife promoting women’s
wellness: strategies for promoting; breast awareness and
mammography screening (mammocheck program); regular cervical
screening; healthy diet, regular weight-bearing exercise, pelvic floor
exercises. Midwife providing women’s centred collaborative care in
the acute care setting: Physical and psychological pre and post
operative considerations; Caring for women experiencing
diagnostic & therapeutic procedures for reproductive and urinary
conditions reflecting the specific care requirements; Caring for
women experiencing diagnostic & therapeutic procedures for breast
related conditions reflecting the specific care requirements; Caring
for women experiencing treatment for cancers of the reproductive or
breast related conditions; Consequences of chemotherapy to be
taken into consideration when planning care for women.
Required Reading To be advised by subject lecturer.
Recommended Reading Allen, K.M. (1997). Women’s health
across the lifespan: a comprehensive perspective. Philadelphia:
Lippincott. Asian-Pacific Resource & Resource Centre for Women.
(1994). Towards women-centred reproductive health. Kuala Lumpur:
Asian-Pacific Resource & Research Centre for Women (ARROW).
Edge, V. & Miller, M. (1994). Women’s health care. St Louis:
Mosby. Firth, P. & Watanabe, S. (1996(. Instant nursing
Assessment: women’s health. Albany: Delmar Publishers. Holloway,
N. (1999). Medical surgical care planning. Springhouse:
Springhouse Corp. LeMone, P. & Burke, K.M. (2000). Medical-
surgical nursing: critical thinking in client care. New Jersey: Prentice
Hall. Lowdermilk, D., Perry, S. & Bobak, I. (2000). Maternity and
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
173
women’s health care. St Louis: Mosby. Olshansky, E. (2000).
Integrated women’s health: holistic approaches for comprehensive
care. Gaithersburg: Aspen Publishers. Smith, A. (1992). Women’s
health in Australia. New South Wales, Armidale.
Subject Hours A practice subject of 108 hours for one semester.
Assessment Practice assessment based on ACMI competency
standards. Partnership log, focussing on contact and follow-through
of women and reflective journals.
HNM3020 WORKING WITH BABIES
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Neonatal Nursery Environment: Cots; Oxygen saturation
equipment; Assisted Ventilation Equipment; Monitors; Stress
management strategies. Care of the Baby: Gestational, physical &
psychosocial assessment; Facilitation of Growth & Development;
Stimulation; Rest; Touch; Comfort/pain control; Position; Kangaroo
Care; Oxygenation; Resuscitation; Oxygen therapy; CPAP;
Surfactant Therapy; Oxygen saturation; Blood gases; Nutrition &
Elimination; Breast feeding – expand on previous knowledge;
Gastric feeds; IV therapy; Breast milk substitutes; Fluid Balance &
electrolytes; Specimen collections; Phototherapy; Immunity; Universal
precautions; Hygiene; Temperature; Neutral thermal environment.
Care of the family: Support & counselling; Involvement in care and
decision making; Education; Transition to parenthood; Transition
from hospital to home.
Required Reading To be advised by subject lecturer.
Recommended Reading Enkin, M., Keirse,
M.,Neilson,J.,Crowther, C., Duley,L., Hodnett, E., & Hofmeyr,J.
(2000). Guide to effective care in pregnancy and childbirth. (3rd
ed.). Oxford: Oxford University Press. Fraser, D. (2000).
Professional studies for midwifery practices. Melbourne: Churchill
Livingstone. Johnston, P. (1998). The newborn child. (8th ed.).
Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone. Lang, S. (1997). Breastfeeding
special care babies. London: Bailliere Tindall. Lowdermilk, D.L.,
Perry, S.E. & Bobak, I. (Eds.). (1997). Maternity and Women's
Health Care. (6th ed.). St. Louis: Mosby. Merenstein & Gardner.
(2000). Neonatal Intensive Care (to complete reference). Olds, S.,
London, M. & Ladewig, P. (1996). Maternal Newborn Nursing: A
family centred approach. (5th Ed.). Sydney: Addison-Wesley.
Richmond, S. (Ed.). (1996). Principals of resuscitation at birth.
Newcastle Upon Tyne: Northern Neonatal Network. Sparshott, M.
(1997). Pain distress and the newborn baby. Melbourne: Blackwell
Science.
Subject Hours A practice subject of 208 hours for one semester.
Assessment Practice assessment based on ACMI competency
standards. Partnership log, focussing on contact and follow-through
of sick baby; reflective journals.
HNM7006 MIDWIVES WORKING WITH DIVERSITY
Campus Distance Education
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Module One: Framing the subject: Knowing self; Feminist
and Humanistic principles in working with diversity; Defining
sexuality and its relationship to childbearing. Module Two: Cultural
diversity: Cultural safety/sensitivity; Aboriginality; Women from
diverse cultural and ethnic backgrounds; Spiritual differences &
cultural practices. Module Three: Social diversity: Social justice,
equity and access; Poverty and maternity; homelessness; physical
and sexual abuse; chemical dependency.
Required Reading Campbell, S. (2000) From here to maternity:
A report to the VACCHO members and the Victorian Department of
Human Services about the maternity services for Aboriginal women
of Victoria Melbourne.* Centre for the Study of Mothers and
children’s Health. (1999). Mothers in a new country report ( &
shared care report). Melbourne La Trobe University.* Department of
Immigration and Multicultural Affairs. (1998) Women at risk
program. Melbourne AGPS.* Koori Health Unit,.(1996a). Koori
health counts: Providing services to Koori women having a baby. &
(1996b). Koori Pilot Birthing Service Projects. Melbourne.
Department of Human Services. Schott, J. & Henley, A. (1996).
Culture, religion and childbearing in a multiracial society. Oxford
Butterworth Heineman. * available at relevant websites.
Recommended Reading Baum, F. (1998). The new public
health: an Australian perspective. Sydney. Oxford University Press.
Cultural Practices, Law & Reproductive Health. (1998). Issues
relating to female genital mutilation conference. Melbourne. La
Trobe University. Kent, J. (2000) Social perspectives on pregnancy
and childbirth for midwives, nurses and the caring professions.
Philadelphia. Open University Press. Kuldepp, B. & Anderson, P.
(1995) An overview of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander health:
present and future trends. Canberra./Australian Institute of Health
and Welfare. Marsh, G & Renfrew, M. (Eds). (1998). Community
based maternity care. Oxford. Oxford University Press. Pauwels, A.
(1995). Cross cultural communication in the health sciences. South
Melbourne. Macmillan. Stanley, L. (Ed). (1997). Knowing
feminisms. London. Sage.
Subject Hours Thirty-six hours for one semester, conducted via
flexible delivery.
Assessment A combination of the following, or other appropriate
methodologies will be used: examination; written assignment;
reflective journal; and learning folio.
HNM7007 CHILDBEARING OBSTACLES
Campus Distance Education.
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Module One: Pregnancy Obstacles: Collaborative role of
midwife; Anaemia; Blood disorders; Infections; Miscarriage; Intra-
uterine growth restriction; Fetal death in utero; Antepartum
haemorrhage; Variations in blood pressure; Diabetes; Chemical
dependency; Surgical conditions. Module Two: Midwifery and
Obstetric Care: Positions, lie and presentations of the fetus; Preterm
labour; Induction and augmentation of labour; Inco-ordinated
uterine action; ‘Intervention cascade’; Medical technology;
ultrasound; cardiotocography; epidural analgesia; forceps &
ventouse; caesarean section. Module Three: Unexpected Obstacles
During Labour & Birth: Cord presentation and prolapse; Fetal
distress; Primary postpartum haemorrhage; Shoulder dystocia;
Maternal shock and collapse. Module Four: Maternal Obstacles in
First Weeks After Birth: Breast feeding challenges; Pyrexia;
Secondary postpartum haemorrhage; Haematomas; Post-caesarean
section: extra care; Mood variation: psychological distress;
Implications for woman and midwifery practice.
Required Reading To be advised by subject lecturer.
Recommended Reading Fraser, D.M. & Cooper M.A. (2002).
Myles textbook for midwives. (14th ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill-
Livingstone. The Consultative Council on Obstetric and Paediatric
Mortality and Morbidity. (1999/2000). Annual Report for the year
1999. Melbourne. Fraser, D. (2000). Professional Studies for
Midwifery Practice. Edinburgh: Churchill-Livingstone. National
Health and Medical Research Council (NH&MRC Bulletin). (1988).
Standards of Antenatal Care. Canberra: Australian Government
Publishing. National Health and Medical Research Council
(NH&MRC) Report. (1996). Options For Effective Care in Childbirth.
Canberra: Australian Government Publishing. Page L & Percival P.
(2000). The New Midwifery Science and Sensitivity in Practice.
Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Proctor, S. & Renfew, M. (2000).
Linking Research and Practice in Midwifery: A guide to Evidence
Based Practice. Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindal. The Cochrane
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
174
Collaboration. (1999/2000/2001). Pregnancy and Childbirth
Database. Oxford: update Software. Cochrane Library Users
website at www.hcn.net.au/caul to enter. (the username and
password are as follows: ID: guest184 and Password: Se02mite).
Varney, H. (1997). Varney’s Midwifery. (3rd ed.). Sudbury: Jones
and Bartlett.
Website Nine months of pregnancy interactive multimedia learning
resource: wysiwyg: main.11/www.pregnancycalender.com/
first9months/main.html
Subject Hours Thirty-six hours for one semester, conducted via
flexible delivery.
Assessment A combination of the following, or other appropriate
methodologies will be used: examination; written assignment;
reflective journal; and learning folio.
HNM7012 BEGINNING THE JOURNEY
Campus St Albans
Co-requisite(s) HNM 7000 With Childbearing Woman
Content Skill development and application of principles in basic
midwifery care; Establishing a safe and therapeutic environment;
Principles and practice of infection control techniques; Mobility and
‘no lift policy’; Safe practices in medication: principles and practices
of administration of oral and other medications; assessment, history
taking, data collection and recording; Legal and ethical
considerations in midwifery practices; Health assessment and
physical examination skills; Monitoring: documenting baseline
observations such as temperature, pulse, respiration, blood pressure,
foetal heart sounds, urinalysis and care of equipment; Engaging in
health promotion activities.
Required Reading Dunckley J, (2000), Health Promotion in
midwifery practice, A resources for health professionals. Sydney:
Bailliere Tindall. Enkin, M., Keirse, M., Neilson, J., Crowther, C.,
Duley, L., Hodnett, E., & Hofmeyr, J. (2000), Guide to effective care
in pregnancy and childbirth. (3rd Edition), Oxford: Oxford
University Press. Fraser, D. (2000). Professional studies for
midwifery practices. Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone. Johnson, R. &
Taylor, W. (2000), Skills for midwifery practice. Sydney: Churchill
Livingstone. Page, L & Percival, P. (2000), The New Midwifery:
science and sensitivity in practice. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Doenges, M.E, M., & Moorhouse, M.F,
(1999), Maternal/newborn plans of care: Guidelines for
individualising care, (3rd ed.), Philadelphia: Davis. Johnston, P.
(1998). The newborn child. (8th ed.), Melbourne: Churchill
Livingstone. Kent, J., (2000), Social perspectives on pregnancy and
chidbirth for midwives, Nurses and the caring professions.
Philadelphia: Open University Press. Kirkham, M. J., and Perkins,
E.R, (1997), Reflections on midwifery. Sydney: Bailliere Tindall.
Kroll, D, (1996), Midwifery care for the future. London: Bailliere
Tindall. Lowdermilk, D. L., Perry, S.E. & Bobak, I, (1997), Maternity
and women’s health care. (6thEd. ) St Louis: Mosby. Moore, S.
(1997), Understanding pain and its relief in labour. Melbourne:
Churchill Livingstone. Nicholas, F.H., & Zwelling, E, (1997),
Maternal-Newborn nursing theory and practice. Sydney: Saunders.
Proctor, S. & Renfrew, M. (2000), Linking research and practice in
midwifery: a guide to evidence based practice. Edinburgh: Bailliere
Tindall. Wass, A. (2000). Promoting health: the primary health care
approach, (2nd Ed.). Sydney: Harcourt Saunders.
Subject Hours The equivalent of 24 hours for one semester
organised according to the teaching mode used.
Assessment Practical skills examination partnership log focussing
on contact and follow-through of women (includes field work and
reflective journals).
HNM7113 FOUNDATIONS IN MIDWIFERY PRACTICE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Module 1 The subject will include the following content:
Functional Health Patterns, emphasis on health perception and
management, clinical reasoning process, occupational health and
safety, Procedural hand washing and asepsis, the complete
midwifery health history and general survey, general health
assessment, assessment of family health, assessment of mental health
status, cultural assessment.
Module 2 Defining the role of the midwife in contemporary practice,
exploring the desirable attributes of a midwife, exploring the
philosophical basis underpinning the role of the midwife in
contemporary midwifery practice:, being with woman, woman
centeredness, working in partnership, establishing relationships with
childbearing women. Explore the art of midwifery, relationship,
communication, boundaries of care, midwife as primary carer,
midwife’s role in collaborative practice, establishing a partnership,
philosophy of care.
Required Reading Australian College of Midwives Incorporated
(ACMI). (2002). Competency Standards for Midwives. Available at
http://www.acmi.org.au. Australian College of Midwives
Incorporated (ACMI). (2001). Code of Ethics and National Code of
Practice. Available at http://www.acmi.org.au. Bickley, L.S. (2003)
Bates’ guide to physical examination and history taking (8th ed).
Sydney: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins. Fuller, J. & Schaller-Ayers J.
(2000). Health Assessment. A nursing approach (3rd ed.).
Philadelphia, USA: Lippincott. Johnson R. & Taylor W. (2003). Skills
for midwifery practice. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. NH&MRC.
(1998). Review of services offered by midwives. Canberra: AGPS.
Page L. (Ed. (2000). The new midwifery: Science and sensitivity in
practice. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Tollefson, J. (2004).
Clinical Psychomotor skills: Assessment Tools for Nursing Students.
2nd ed. Sydney: Social Science Press.
Recommended Reading Anderson, D.M., Keith, J., Novak, P.D.
& Elliot. M.A. (2001). Mosby’s medical, nursing and allied health
dictionary (6th ed.). St Louis: Mosby. Bates, B (2000). A visual
guide to examination. Philadelphia, USA: JP Lippincott. Bauer, M &
Huynh, M. (1995). How to measure blood pressure. Melbourne,
Aust.: Victoria University. Huynh, M., Bauer, M., Brown, V. (2000).
Examination of the abdomen, thorax and lungs [CD-ROM].
Melbourne: Victoria University.
Subject Hours 140 hours – 60 hours theory, 80 hours block
clinical placement.
Assessment One 1½ hour written examination: 40%, evaluation
of health assessment skills and clinical reasoning 40%, annotated
bibliography on professional issues: 20%, demonstration of safe
and competent practice according to this stage of the course.
Competencies as defined for a student at this stage.
HNM7115 MIDWIFERY STUDIES 1: THE CHILDBEARING JOURNEY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(S) Nil
Content This subject will include: pre-conception, sexuality,
fertility/infertility, pre-conception health, environmental issues. The
foetus and the woman during pregnancy: embryology, foetal growth
& development, physiological and psychosocial alteration &
adaptation during pregnancy, maintenance of health, principles of
optimal nutrition for the woman and her baby, pregnancy
assessment. Labour and birth: physiological and psychosocial
alteration and adaptation during labour and birth, facilitating a
normal process of birth, supporting a woman during labour,
continuity of care, assessment, reception of the newborn. Skill
development and application of principles in basic midwifery care:
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
175
Assessment, history taking, interviewing techniques, data collection and
recording (using women-held records); Introduction to clinical paths:
health assessment and physical examination skills – pregnancy
assessment including abdominal examination – labour assessment
including vaginal examination. Introduction to primary health
counseling: guidelines for undertaking primary health counseling;
facilitating informed decision making; accessing relevant
information; engaging in health promotion activities; communication;
counseling; partnership with woman. Assessment in labour:
assessment of the woman, culture & family, pain assessment, foetal
assessment, progress of the birth process. Midwifery care in
partnership during birthing: comfort; orientation to environment;
partnership, dignity and respect; support and position; mobilization.
Required Reading Enkin M, Keirse M, Neilson J, Duley L,
Hodnett E & Hofmeyr J. (2000). A guide to effective care in
pregnancy and childbirth. Oxford: University Press. Students are
encouraged to utilise the www copy of this text via the following
website: www.maternitywise.org. Fraser DM & Cooper MA. (Eds.).
(2003). Myles Textbook for Midwives. (14th ed.). Edinburgh:
Churchill Livingstone. Henderson C & MacDonald S. (2004).
Mayes’ Midwifery: A textbook for midwives. (13th ed.). Edinburgh:
Bailliere Tindall. Johnson R. & Taylor W. (2003). Skills for midwifery
practice. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Jordan S. (2002).
Pharmacology for midwives. The evidence basis for safe practice.
Hampshire: Palgrave. Stables D & Rankin J (2005). Physiology in
Childbearing with Anatomy and Related Biosciences. Edinburgh:
Bailliere Tindall or Coad J. (2001). Anatomy and physiology for
midwives. Edinburgh: Mosby. Tiran D. (2003). Midwives’
Dictionary. (10th ed.). London: Bailliere Tindall. Or Williams &
Wilkins. (Eds.). (2002). (27th ed.). Stedman’s Medical Dictionary.
Philadelphia: Lippincott. Tollefson, J. (2004). Clinical Psychomotor
skills: Assessment Tools for Nursing Students. (2nd ed.) Sydney:
Social Science Press. A booklet for use as a Personal-Professional
Journal.
Recommended Reading Cooper T & Emden C. (2001). Portfolio
assessment: A guide for nurses and midwives. Quinn Rocks WA:
Praxis Education. Doenges, M.E. & Moorhouse, M.F. (1999).
Maternal/newborn plans of care: guidelines for individualizing
care. (3rd Ed.) Philadelphia: Davis. Dunkley, J. (2000). Health
Promotion in Midwifery Practice. A Resource for Health
professionals. Sydney: Bailliere Tindall. Miller A & Hanretty KP.
(1997). Obstetrics Illustrated. (5th ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill
Livingstone Page L. (Ed.). (2000). The New Midwifery: Science and
sensitivity in practice. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Subject Hours 70 hours – 60 hours theory, – 10 hours self
directed.
Assessment 3-hour examination – 60%, Essay [1500 words] –
40%.
HNM7114 CONTINUITY OF CARE 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s)
Content Students will be introduced to the Continuity of Care
program in which they make contact with pregnant women in
clinical venues or in the community. Students will be assisted to
develop a professional midwifery practice relationship with
emphasis on basic interviewing and history taking; reflective practice;
journal writing; application of principles of communication; assessment
of the woman and her baby; working with a woman giving birth;
working with the woman to feed her baby; working with the woman to
care for herself and her baby before and after birth; and documentation
of midwifery actions and women’s attitudes and responses. Students
will explore the position of contemporary midwifery practice with
emphasis on: historical context; evolution of the profession of
midwifery; midwifery identity: the uneasy tensions between midwifery
and nursing and midwifery and medicine; role of the midwife; and
models of care.
Required Reading Australian College of Midwives Incorporated
(ACMI). (2002). Competency Standards for Midwives. Available at
http://www.acmi.org.au. ACMI. (2001). Code of Ethics. And
National Code of Practice. Available at http://www.acmi.org.au.
Cooper T & Emden C. (2001). Portfolio assessment: A guide for
nurses and midwives. Quinn Rocks WA: Praxis Education. Guilliland
K & Pairman L. (1995). The midwifery partnership: A model for
practice. Wellington: Victoria University of Wellington. Nurses
Board of Victoria. (1999). Code of practice for midwives in
Victoria. Download from http://www.nbv.org.au. Page L. (Ed.).
(2000). The new midwifery: Science and sensitivity in practice.
Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading ACMI (Vic. Branch). (1999). Reforming
midwifery: A discussion paper on the introduction of Bachelor of
Midwifery programs into Victoria. Melbourne: ACMI (Vic. Branch).
Health Department of Victoria (HDV). (1990). Final report of the
ministerial review of birthing services in Victoria: Having a baby in
Victoria. Melbourne: HDV. Jones S. (2000). Ethics in Midwifery.
Edinburgh: Mosby. Kent J. (2002). Social perspectives on
pregnancy and childbirth for midwives, nurses and the caring
professions. Philadelphia: Open University Press. Kirkham MJ &
Perkins ER. (1997). Reflections on midwifery. Sydney: Bailliere
Tindall. National Health & Medical Research Council. (NH&MRC).
(1996). Options for effective care in childbirth. Canberra:
Australian Government Printing Service (AGPS). NH&MRC. (1998).
Review of services offered by midwives. Canberra: AGPS. Proctor S
& Renfrew M. (2000). Linking research and practice in midwifery: A
guide to evidence based practice. Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall.
Senate Community Affairs References Committee. (1999). Rocking
the cradle: a report into childbirth procedures. Canberra: AGPS.
VanTeijlingen E, Lowis G, McCaffery P & Porter M. (1999).
Midwifery and the medicalisation of childbirth. New Jersey: Nova
Science.
Subject Hours 144 hours – 24 hours theory, 120 follow-through
journey clinical hours.
Assessment Partnership log focusing on contact and follow-
through of ten women: Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory. Continuity of
care report [1000 words]: Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory.
HNM7115 MIDWIFERY STUDIES 1: THE CHILDBEARING JOURNEY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(S) Nil
Content This subject will include: pre-conception, sexuality,
fertility/infertility, pre-conception health, environmental issues. The
foetus and the woman during pregnancy: embryology, foetal growth
& development, physiological and psychosocial alteration &
adaptation during pregnancy, maintenance of health, principles of
optimal nutrition for the woman and her baby, pregnancy
assessment. Labour and birth: physiological and psychosocial
alteration and adaptation during labour and birth, facilitating a
normal process of birth, supporting a woman during labour,
continuity of care, assessment, reception of the newborn. Skill
development and application of principles in basic midwifery care:
Assessment, history taking, interviewing techniques, data collection and
recording (using women-held records); Introduction to clinical paths:
health assessment and physical examination skills – pregnancy
assessment including abdominal examination – labour assessment
including vaginal examination. Introduction to primary health
counseling: guidelines for undertaking primary health counseling;
facilitating informed decision making; accessing relevant
information; engaging in health promotion activities; communication;
counseling; partnership with woman. Assessment in labour:
assessment of the woman, culture & family, pain assessment, foetal
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
176
assessment, progress of the birth process. Midwifery care in
partnership during birthing: comfort; orientation to environment;
partnership, dignity and respect; support and position; mobilization.
Required Reading Enkin M, Keirse M, Neilson J, Duley L,
Hodnett E & Hofmeyr J. (2000). A guide to effective care in
pregnancy and childbirth. Oxford: University Press. Students are
encouraged to utilise the www copy of this text via the following
website: www.maternitywise.org. Fraser DM & Cooper MA. (Eds.).
(2003). Myles Textbook for Midwives. (14th ed.). Edinburgh:
Churchill Livingstone. Henderson C & MacDonald S. (2004).
Mayes’ Midwifery: A textbook for midwives. (13th ed.). Edinburgh:
Bailliere Tindall. Johnson R. & Taylor W. (2003). Skills for midwifery
practice. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Jordan S. (2002).
Pharmacology for midwives. The evidence basis for safe practice.
Hampshire: Palgrave. Stables D & Rankin J (2005). Physiology in
Childbearing with Anatomy and Related Biosciences. Edinburgh:
Bailliere Tindall or Coad J. (2001). Anatomy and physiology for
midwives. Edinburgh: Mosby. Tiran D. (2003). Midwives’
Dictionary. (10th ed.). London: Bailliere Tindall or Williams &
Wilkins. (Eds.). (2002). (27th ed.). Stedman’s Medical Dictionary.
Philadelphia: Lippincott. Tollefson, J. (2004). Clinical Psychomotor
skills: Assessment Tools for Nursing Students. (2nd ed.) Sydney:
Social Science Press. A booklet for use as a Personal-Professional
Journal.
Recommended Reading Cooper T & Emden C. (2001). Portfolio
assessment: A guide for nurses and midwives. Quinn Rocks WA:
Praxis Education. Doenges, M.E. & Moorhouse, M.F. (1999).
Maternal/newborn plans of care: guidelines for individualizing
care. (3rd Ed.) Philadelphia: Davis. Dunkley, J. (2000). Health
Promotion in Midwifery Practice. A Resource for Health
professionals. Sydney: Bailliere Tindall. Miller A & Hanretty KP.
(1997). Obstetrics Illustrated. (5th ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill
Livingstone Page L. (Ed.). (2000). The New Midwifery: Science and
sensitivity in practice. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Subject Hours 70 hours – 60 hours theory, 10 hours self directed.
Assessment Three-hour examination – 60%, Essay [1500 words]
– 40%.
HNM7201 MIDWIFERY STUDIES 2: THE CHILDBEARING JOURNEY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(S) Midwifery Studies 1: The Childbearing Journey
Content Pain and its management: Pain, Pain theory, Working
with pain, Recognition of pain as a normal component of labour,
Sources of pain, The process of loss and grief, Pain assessment,
Expression of pain. Factors influencing the pain process:
Philosophical, Psychosocial influences, Physiological, Environmental,
Spiritual & culture. Pain management options/strategies: After Birth
The Woman And Baby, Adaptation to extrauterine life, Lactation.
Breastfeeding practices and support: Attachment & bonding,
Development of the family unit, Discharge planning, Assessment of
mother & baby. Midwifery care requirements during labour, birth
and the postpartum period: Showers bathing, perineal care, mouth
& hand washing, Oxygenation, Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation,
Neonatal resuscitation. Examination of the newborn. Drug
calculations and the principles of administration of therapeutic
substances. Oxygen administration, Skin integrity and wound care,
Peri-operative midwifery care, ‘No Lift’ policy, Use of technology in
the clinical setting, Fluid balance, Urinalysis.
Required Reading Enkin M, Keirse M, Neilson J, Duley L,
Hodnett E & Hofmeyr J. (2000). A guide to effective care in
pregnancy and childbirth. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Students
are encouraged to utilised the www copy of this text via the
following website: www.maternitywise.org. Fraser DM & Cooper
MA. (Eds.). (2003). Myles Textbook for Midwives. (14th ed.).
Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Henderson C & MacDonald S.
(Eds.). (2004). Mayes’ Midwifery: A textbook for midwives. (13th
ed.). Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall. Johnson R. & Taylor W. (2003).
Skills for midwifery practice. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Jordan S. (2002). Pharmacology for midwives. The evidence basis
for safe practice. Hampshire: Palgrave. Menihan CA & Zottoli.
(2001). Electronic foetal monitoring: Concepts and applications.
Philadelphia: Lippincott. Stables D & Rankin J (2005). Physiology in
Childbearing with Anatomy and Related Biosciences. Edinburgh:
Bailliere Tindall or Coad J. (2001). Anatomy and physiology for
midwives. Edinburgh: Mosby. Tiran D. (2003). Midwives’
Dictionary. (10th ed.). London: Bailliere Tindall. Or Williams &
Wilkins (eds.)(2002)(27th ed). Stedman’s Medical Dictionary.
Philadelphia: Lippincott. Royal College of Midwives. (2002).
Successful breastfeeding. (3rd ed.). London: Churchill Livingstone.
Tollefson, J. (2004). Clinical Psychomotor skills: Assessment Tools for
Nursing Students. 2nd ed. Sydney: Social Science Press. Yerby M.
(Ed.). (2000). Pain in childbearing: Key issues in management.
Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall. A booklet for use as a Personal-
Professional Journal.
Recommended Reading Bick D, MacArthur C, Knowles H,
Winter H. (2002). Postnatal Care: Evidence and Guidelines for
Management. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Cooper T & Emden
C. (2001). Portfolio assessment: A guide for nurses and midwives.
Quinn Rocks WA: Praxis Education. Miller A & Hanretty KP. (1997).
Obstetrics Illustrated. (5th ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Page L. (Ed.). (2000). The New Midwifery: Science and sensitivity
in practice. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Subject Hours 70 hours – 60 hours theory, 10 hours self-directed
study.
Assessment Three hour examination – 60%, Essay [1500 words]
– 40%.
HNM7202 MIDWIFERY PRACTICE 2: THE CHILDBEARING JOURNEY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Midwifery Studies 1: The Childbearing Journey
Co-Requisite(s) Midwifery Studies 2: The Childbearing Journey
Content Supervised midwifery practice will include: interviewing
and history taking techniques; reflection in and on action; journal
writing; and application of principles of communication. In
partnership with the woman and under supervision: Assessment of
the woman and her baby; working with a woman giving birth;
working with a woman to give nourishment to her baby; working
with a woman to care for herself and her baby before and after
birth; and documentation of midwifery actions and women’s
attitudes and responses.
Required Reading Johnson, R. & Taylor, W. (2000). Skills for
midwifery practice. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Fraser DM &
Cooper MA (2003). Myles textbook for midwives (14th ed.).
Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone. Or Henderson C & MacDonald S.
(Eds.). (2004). Mayes’ Midwifery: A textbook for midwives. (13th
ed.). Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall. Tollefson, J. (2004). Clinical
Psychomotor skills: Assessment Tools for Nursing Students. 2nd ed.
Sydney: Social Science Press.
Recommended Reading Dunkley, J. (2000). Health promotion in
midwifery practice. A resource for health professionals. Edinburgh:
Churchill Livingstone.Enkin M, Keirse M, Neilson J, Duley L, Hodnett
E & Hofmeyr J. (2000). A guide to effective care in pregnancy and
childbirth. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Students are
encouraged to utilised the www copy of this text via the following
website: www.maternitywise.org. Johnson R. & Taylor W. (2003).
Skills for midwifery practice. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Jordan S. (2002). Pharmacology for midwives. The evidence basis
for safe practice. Hampshire: Palgrave National Health & Medical
Research Council. (NH&MRC). (1996). Options for effective care in
childbirth. Canberra: Australian Government Printing Service
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
177
(AGPS) NH&MRC. (1998). Review of services offered by midwives.
Canberra: AGPS. Page L. (Ed.). (2000). The new midwifery:
Science and sensitivity in practice. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Proctor S & Renfrew M. (2000). Linking research and practice in
midwifery: A guide to evidence based practice. Edinburgh: Bailliere
Tindall. Royal College of Midwives. (2002). Successful
breastfeeding. (3rd ed.). London: Churchill Livingstone. Yerby M.
(Ed.). (2000). Pain in childbearing: Key issues in Management.
Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall.
Subject Hours Block clinical placement of 208 hours.
Assessment Practice assessment based on ACMI competency
standards: Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory. Three Reflective journals:
Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory.
HNM7203 MIDWIFERY STUDIES 3: CHILDBEARING COMPLICATIONS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Midwifery Studies 1 & 2: The Childbearing
Journey, Midwifery Practice 2: The Childbearing Journey
Content Pregnancy Problems: Anaemia, Blood disorders including:
Rhisoimmunisation, Infections, Foetal assessment, Early pregnancy
bleeding and loss, Intrauterine growth restriction
Foetal death in utero, Antepartum haemorrhage, Variations in blood
pressure, Diabetes, Surgical conditions, Induction of labour
Multiple pregnancy, Malposition. Care and Assessment during
pregnancy, labour and birth and after birth, Assessment for
malpresentation and malposition, Conduct vaginal examination,
Artificial rupture of membranes, Episiotomy and perineal care,
Epidural infusions and care, Venepuncture, Intravenous cannulation,
Intravenous therapies, Syntocinon infusion in therapy
IV antibiotics, Blood sugar monitoring, Mental Health Issues,
Psychopathology of pregnancy and childbirth, Motherhood and
mental illness, Assessment and management, Midwifery role
Referral and collaboration.
Required Reading ACMI. (2004). National Midwifery
Guidelines for Consultation and Referral. Canberra. Available at
http://www.acmi.org.au. Enkin M, Keirse M, Neilson J, Duley L,
Hodnett E & Hofmeyr J. (2000). A guide to effective care in
pregnancy and childbirth Oxford: Oxford University Press. Students
are encouraged to utilised the www copy of this text via the
following website: www.maternitywise.org. Fraser, D.M. & Cooper,
M.A. (2003). Myles Textbook for Midwives. (14th ed.). Edinburgh:
Churchill Livingstone. Or Henderson C & MacDonald S. (2004).
Mayes’ Midwifery: A Textbook for Midwives. Dinburgh: Bailliere
Tindall. Johnson R. & Taylor W. (2003). Skills for midwifery
practice. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Johnston P, Flood K &
Spinks K. (2003). The newborn child. (9th ed.). Sydney: Churchill
Livingstone. Menihan CA & Zottoli. (2001). Electronic foetal
monitoring: Concepts and applications. Philadelphia: Lippincott.
Riley M & King J (2003). Births in Victoria 2001-2002. Perinatal
Data Collection Unit, Victorian Government Department of Human
Services, Melbourne. Available at
http://www.health.vic.gov.au/perinatal. WHO. (2003) Managing
complications in pregnancy and childbirth. A guide for midwives
and doctors. Geneva: WHO.
Recommended Reading Fraser D. (2000). Professional studies
for midwifery practice. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. National
Health and Medical Research Council. (NH&MRC Bulletin). (1988).
Standards of Antenatal Care. Canberra: AGPS. National Health
and Medical Research Council. (NH&MRC Report). (1996). Options
for effective care in childbirth. Canberra: AGPS. Page L. (ed.).
(2000). The New Midwifery: Science and sensitivity in practice.
Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Proctor S & Renfrew M. (2000).
Linking research and practice in midwifery: A guide to evidence
based practice. Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall. Stables D & Rankin J
(2005). Physiology in Childbearing with Anatomy and Related
Biosciences. Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall.
Subject Hours 70 hours – 60 hours theory, 10 hours self-directed
study.
Assessment Three hour examination: 60%, Essay (1500 words),
40%.
HNM7204 MIDWIFERY PRACTICE 3: CHILDBEARING COMPLICATIONS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Midwifery Studies 1 & 2: The Childbearing
Journey, Midwifery Practice 2: The Childbearing Journey
Co-requisite(s) Midwifery Studies 3: Childbearing Complications
Content In partnership with the woman and under supervision:
Assessment of the woman and her baby; Working with a woman to
give birth; Working with a woman to give nourishment to her baby;
Working with a woman to care for herself and her baby before and
after birth; and Documentation of midwifery actions and women’s
attitudes and responses.
Required Reading Cooper, T. & Emden, C. (2001). Portfolio
assessment: A guide for nurses and midwives. Quinn Rocks WA:
Praxis Education Johnson, R. & Taylor, W. (2000). Skills for
midwifery practice. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone Fraser DM &
Cooper MA (2003). Myles textbook for midwives (14th ed.).
Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone Or Henderson C & MacDonald S.
(Eds.). (2004). Mayes’ Midwifery: A textbook for midwives. (13th
ed.). Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall Tollefson, J. (2004). Clinical
Psychomotor skills: Assessment Tools for Nursing Students. 2nd ed.
Sydney: Social Science Press
Recommended Reading Dunkley, J. (2000). Health promotion
in midwifery practice. A resource for health professionals.
Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.Enkin M, Keirse M, Neilson J,
Duley L, Hodnett E & Hofmeyr J. (2000). A guide to effective care in
pregnancy and childbirth. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Students
are encouraged to utilised the www copy of this text via the
following website: www.maternitywise.org Fraser, D. (2000).
Professional studies for midwifery practice. Edinburgh: Churchill
LivingstoneJohnson R. & Taylor W. (2003). Skills for midwifery
practice. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone Johnston P, Flood K &
Spinks K. (2003). The newborn child. (9th ed.). Sydney: Churchill
Livingstone Jordan S. (2002). Pharmacology for midwives. The
evidence basis for safe practice. Hampshire: Palgrave Menihan CA
& Zottoli. (2001). Electronic foetal monitoring: Concepts and
applications. Philadelphia: Lippincott National Health & Medical
Research Council. (NH&MRC). (1996). Options for effective care in
childbirth. Canberra: Australian Government Printing Service
(AGPS) NH&MRC. (1998). Review of services offered by midwives.
Canberra: AGPS Page L. (Ed.). (2000). The new midwifery: Science
and sensitivity in practice. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone Proctor S
& Renfrew M. (2000). Linking research and practice in midwifery: A
guide to evidence based practice. Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall Royal
College of Midwives. (2002). Successful breastfeeding. (3rd ed.).
London: Churchill Livingstone Yerby M. (Ed.). (2000). Pain in
childbearing: Key issues in management. Edinburgh: Bailliere
Tindall
Subject Hours Block clinical placement of 208 hours
Assessment Practice assessment based on ACMI Competency
Standards: Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory
3 Reflective Journals: Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory
HPE1202 BIOMECHANICS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) None
Content (i) biomechanical concepts and terminology, (ii) human
motion and ways to measure it, (iii) forces applied to the human and
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
178
equipment during sport & exercise, and (iv) basic biomechanical
analysis techniques.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Appropriate reading material for each
week's topic are listed in the course material. Students are required
to read one or more items from the reading list. They are all from
five texts including: Hay, J.G. 1993, The Biomechanics of
SportsTechniques, Prentice-Hall, Sydney. Enoka, R.M. 1994,
Neuromechanical Basis of Kinesiology, Human Kinetics,
Champaign, Illinois. Hall, S.J. 1995, Basic Biomechanics, Mosby,
St. Louis. Bartlett, R.M. 1997, Introduction to Sports Biomechanics,
E. & F.N. Spon, London.
Class Contact Subject Hours: three hours per week for one
semester: two hours lecture, one hour tutorial session.
Assessment Mid-semester exam, 40%; Final exam, 60%.
HPE2101 SPORT PHYSIOLOGY
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) HPE1204 Exercise Physiology
Content This subject builds on the student’s knowledge of exercise
physiology, studying the essential importance of exercise physiology
in understanding sport and exercise performance, including elite
sports and recreational exercise. The subject emphasises
understanding the physiologic requirements of exercise and sport,
evaluates the importance of physiological systems in athlete
performance; the essential role of nutrition in exercise and sport,
sport-specific adaptations to physical training and comparisons of
different forms of training. The subject studies basic principles
underlying physiological exercise testing, with emphases on sport
specificity, lab-based and field-based testing. Laboratory and field-
based classes require students to administer and interpret exercise
tests that are fundamental to exercise physiology including
measurements of maximal oxygen consumption, muscle strength and
fatiguability, skinfold measurements and anaerobic power testing.
The subject will include competency evaluation for these tests. The
subject examines the important role of exercise physiology in
sustaining and enhancing sport performance. The subject is
designed to lead to more detailed mechanistic studies in the core
subject Advanced Exercise Physiology and applied studies in the
elective subject Applied Exercise Physiology, in the Exercise and
Sport Science stream.
Required Reading Specific journal articles to be advised
Recommended Reading Gore Christopher John. Physiological
Tests For Elite Athletes/Australian Sports Commission. Human
Kinetics, Champaign, IL; Leeds, U.K. 2000. Gore Christopher J. Test
methods manual: sport specific guidelines for the physiological
assessment of elite athletes Australian Sports Commission, Canberra
1998, 3rd ed. Powers Scott K., Edward T. Howley. Exercise
Physiology: Theory And Application To Fitness And Performance.
4th ed. McGraw Hill, Boston c2001. McArdle William D., Frank I.
Katch, Victor L. Katch. Exercise Physiology. Energy, Nutrition, And
Human Performance. 5th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins,
Philadelphia c2001. Robergs Robert A., Steven J. Keteyian.
Fundamentals of Exercise Physiology for Fitness, Performance, and
Health. 2nd ed. McGraw-Hill, Boston c2003. Brooks George A.
Exercise Physiology: Human Bioenergetics And Its Applications. 3rd
ed. Mayfield Pub., Mountain View, Calif. 2000. American College
of Sports Medicine 1998, ACSM’s Resource Manual For Guidelines
For Exercise Testing And Exercise Prescription, 3rd edition, Williams
& Wilkins, Baltimore. Hargreaves Mark and John Hawley
Physiological Bases Of Sports Performance. McGraw-Hill Australia.
2003. Hampton,J.R. 1997, The ECG Made Easy. 3rd edition,
Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh, U.K. Huff, J., Doernbach, DP &
White, RD. 1993, ECG Workout: Exercises in Rhythm Interpretation
2nd edition, JB Lippincott Company, Philadelphia, USA.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two one-hour lectures and one two-hour laboratory class.
Assessment Laboratory reports, 20%; short tests and assignments,
10%; final examination, 30%, laboratory and field test competency
40%
HPE2102 SPORTS BIOMECHANICS
Campus Footscray Park and City Flinders Street (Biomechanics
Laboratory)
Prerequisite(s) HPE1202 Biomechanics; or equivalent.
Content (i) developing biomechanical principles through
application to sport/exercise specific examples and analysis, (ii)
working with some of the available technologies/techniques and
using them in exercise and sports application and (iii) familiarizing
students with laboratory practice and data handling in sports
biomechanics.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Appropriate sections from relevant texts
including: Introduction to Sports Biomechanics, E. & F.N. Spon,
London. Whittle, M.W. 2002, Basic Biomechanics, Mosby, St.
Louis. Bartlett, R.M. 1997, Hay, J.G. 1993, The Biomechanics of
Sports Techniques, Prentice-Hall, Sydney. Kreighbaum, E. and
Barthels, K.M. 1996, Biomechanics: a Qualitative Approach for
Studying Human Movement, Allyn and Bacon, Boston. Enoka, R.M.
1994, Neuromechanical Basis of Kinesiology, Human Kinetics,
Champaign, Illinois. Hall, S.J. 1995, Gait Analysis: An Introduction,
Butterworth Heinemann, Boston. Winter, D.A. 1991, The
Biomechanics & Motor Control of Human Gait: Normal, Elderly and
Pathological, University of Waterloo Press, Canada.
Class Contact four hours per week for one semester: two hours
lecture/tutorial, two hours lab/tutorial.
Assessment Essay, 20%; Lab work, 30%; final exam, 50%.
HPE2104 EXERCISE PHYSIOLOGY
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) SBM1174 Human Physiology
Content This subject applies the student’s knowledge of Human
Physiology to understanding the acute and chronic responses to
exercise, as well as the physiological bases of exercise
performance. The subject examines the acute effects of exercise on
the cardiovascular, respiratory and thermoregulatory systems, the
metabolic supply of energy to exercising muscles, both nutritional
and biochemical, and neural mechanisms controlling movement and
associated exercise responses. The second part of the unit examines
longer term (chronic) physiological responses of exercise training,
with foci on cardiorespiratory and musculoskeletal adaptations.
Practical sessions will complement topics covered in lectures and will
include topics such as energy metabolism at rest and during
exercise, maximal oxygen consumption, cardiovascular and
respiratory responses to exercise, indirect measurement of body fat
and anaerobic power testing. The subject will include both
descriptive and mechanistic approaches, to enhance student
understanding of exercise physiology principles. This subject forms
the basis for advanced core and elective studies in the Exercise and
Sport Science Stream.
Required Reading Specific journal articles to be advised
Recommended Reading Powers Scott K., Edward T. Howley.
Exercise Physiology: Theory And Application To Fitness And
Performance. 4th ed. McGraw Hill, Boston c2001. McArdle
William D., Frank I. Katch, Victor L. Katch. Exercise Physiology.
Energy, Nutrition, And Human Performance. 5th ed. Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia c2001. Robergs Robert A., Steven
J. Keteyian. Fundamentals of Exercise Physiology for Fitness,
Performance, and Health. 2nd ed. McGraw-Hill, Boston c2003.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
179
Brooks George A. Exercise Physiology: Human Bioenergetics And Its
Applications. 3rd ed. Mayfield Pub., Mountain View, Calif. 2000.
American College of Sports Medicine 1998, ACSM’s Resource
Manual For Guidelines For Exercise Testing And Exercise
Prescription, 3rd edition, Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore.
Hampton,J.R. 1997, The ECG Made Easy. 3rd edition, Churchill
Livingstone, Edinburgh, U.K Huff, J., Doernbach, DP & White, RD.
1993, ECG Workout: Exercises in Rhythm Interpretation 2nd
edition, JB Lippincott Company, Philadelphia, USA.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two one hour lectures and one two hour laboratory class every
second week.
Assessment Final examination, 60%; mid-semester examination,
25%; laboratory quizzes, 10%; laboratory oral exam, 5%.
HPE3100 ADVANCED EXERCISE PHYSIOLOGY
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) HPE 1204 Exercise Physiology
Content This subject explores in-depth the physiological responses
to exercise, building on the knowledge gained in previous core
subjects Human Physiology, Exercise Physiology, and Sports
Physiology in the Exercise and Sport Science stream. The subject
focuses on the regulation of the cardiovascular, respiratory,
metabolic, endocrine, neural and muscular responses to acute
exercise. The subject details the role of exercise in metabolic rate
and weight control and associated impact on human health,
including major chronic diseases such as diabetes, cardiovascular
disease. The subject includes measurement and interpretation of the
electrocardiogram (6 and 12 lead) during exercise. Practical
sessions include measurement of limb blood flow with exercise,
metabolism and electrolyte regulation during intense and prolonged
exercise; ECG during graded exercise; respiratory control during
exercise, regulation of blood pressure and cardiac responses to
exercise; and examination of factors influencing muscle fatigue.
Required Reading Specific journal articles to be advised
Recommended Reading Hargreaves Mark and John Hawley
Physiological Bases Of Sports Performance. McGraw-Hill Australia.
2003. Powers Scott K., Edward T. Howley. Exercise Physiology:
Theory And Application To Fitness And Performance. 4th ed.
McGraw Hill, Boston 2001. McArdle William D., Frank I. Katch,
Victor L. Katch. Exercise Physiology: Energy, Nutrition, And Human
Performance. 5th ed. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia
2001. Robergs Robert A., Steven J. Keteyian. Fundamentals Of
Exercise Physiology For Fitness, Performance, And Health. 2nd ed.
McGraw-Hill, Boston 2003. Brooks George A. Exercise Physiology:
Human Bioenergetics And Its Applications 3rd ed. Mayfield Pub.,
Mountain View, Calif. 2000. American College of Sports Medicine
1998, ACSM’s Resource Manual For Guidelines For Exercise
Testing And Exercise Prescription, 3rd edition, Williams & Wilkins,
Baltimore. American College of Sports Medicine 1995, ACSM’s
Guidelines For Exercise Testing And Exercise Prescription, 5th
edition, Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore. Jones N.L. 1997, Clinical
Exercise Testing, 4th Edition, Saunders Publishers. Wasserman K.,
Hansen J.E., Sue D.Y., Whipp B.J. 1994, Principles Of Exercise
Testing And Interpretation, 2nd edition, Williams & Wilkins,
Philadelphia. West, J.B. 1990, Respiratory Physiology: The
Essentials, 4th edition, Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore.
Understanding Normal and Clinical Nutrition; Whitney E.N.,
Cataldo C.B., and Rolfes S.R., Wadsworth, 2002.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two one hour lectures and one two hour laboratory class.
Assessment Laboratory reports, 30%; short tests and assignments,
20%; final examination, 50%.
HPL2186 EXERCISE PRESCRIPTION
Campus Footscray Park, Melton.
Prerequisite(s) HPL1180 Introductory Anatomy; HPL1190
Introductory Physiology; or equivalent.
Content The subject will draw upon the basic skills developed in
other subjects to develop the theoretical knowledge and the
practical skills necessary to the task of prescribing exercise. A broad
range of resources will be accessed to provide insight and
information necessary to prescription for a variety of special
populations. A series of case studies will be used in parallel with the
topics of discussion to provide practical application of the principles
developed in lectures. Students will be required to present written
solutions to problems which they can defend on logical, practical
and theoretical bases.
Required Reading Skinner, J.S. 1987, Exercise Testing and
Exercise Prescription for Special Cases: Theoretical Basis and
Clinical Application, Lea and Febiger, Philadelphia.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
one two-hour lecture and one hour tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Case study evaluations, 60%; take home
examination, 40%.
HPL3127 RESISTANCE TRAINING 1
Campus Footscray Park, Melton.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content This subject is an introduction to the theories, principles
and practice of resistance training. The specific contents are as
follows: the physiological theories, principles and effects of
resistance training; the biomechanical theories and principles of
resistance training; resistance training for strength, power and
endurance; major muscle groups; compound and isolation
exercises; exercise variations; technique and safety; resistance
training technology; designing and practicing a personal resistance
training program; nutrition and weight training.
Required Reading Berger, R. 1984, Introduction to Weight
Training, Prentice Hall. Garhammer, J. 1986, Sports Illustrated
Strength Training, Harper and Row.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
lecture/laboratory.
Assessment Take home examination, 60%; exercise logbook,
10%; three exercise demonstrations, 30%.
JAC0216 WITH WOMAN: RETHINKING PAIN (CONSORTIUM SUBJECT)
Campus Distance Education
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HNM2010 Practice Allegiances;
Content Spiritual Midwifery: Philosophy; The body systems; Altered
states of consciousness; Left brain-right brain; Birth as part of a
continuum. Principles of pre and post-operative care. Pain: Pain
theory; Working with pain; Sources of pain; The process of loss and
grief; Pain Assessment; Expression of pain. Factors influencing the
pain process: Philosophical; Psychosocial influences; Physiological;
Environmental; Spiritual & culture. Pharmacological therapies:
Anaesthetics; Narcotics; Analgesics. Non pharmacological
therapies: Support; Water; Movement; Position; TENS.
Complementary therapies: Aromatherapy; Tactile therapies;
Homoeopathy. The Baby: assessment & monitoring; Influence of
pain strategies upon the baby.
Required Reading Menihan, C.A. & Zottoli, (2001). Electronic
fetal monitoring: Concepts and applications. Phildelphia, Lippincott.
Recommended Reading Banks, M. (1998). Breech birth:
Woman wise. Hamilton NZ. Birthspirit Books. Enkin, M. Keirse, M.
Neilson, J. Duley, L., Hodnett, E. & Hofmeyr, J. (2000). A guide to
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
180
effective care in pregnancy and childbirth. Oxford University Press.
Fiske, L. (2001). The child within: Surviving the shattered dreams of
motjherhood. Melbourne, Hill of content. Galbraith, A. Bullock, S. &
Manias, E. (2001), Fundamentals of pharmacology: A text for
nurses and allied health professionals, Frenches Forrest, Pearson
Education. Jordan, S. (2002). Pharmacology for midwives. The
evidence basis for safe practice. Hampshire, Palgrave. Sweet, B.
(1997). Mayes midwifery: A textbook for midwives. (12th ed).
London, Bailliere Tindall. Yerby, M. (Ed). (2000). Pain in
childbearing: Key issues in management./Edinburgh, Bailiere-
Tindall.
Subject Hours Thirty-six hours for one semester conducted via
flexible delivery.
Assessment A combination of the following, or other appropriate
methodologies will be used: examination; written assignment;
reflective journal; and learning folio.
JAC0217 UNPACKING MIDWIFERY KNOWLEDGE (CONSORTIUM
SUBJECT)
Campus Distance Education
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Frameworks and paradigms for knowledge generation
and substantiation. Types of knowledge and ways of knowing
drawing on contemporary literature. Philosophical views and
theories influencing contemporary theorists in midwifery. Current
debates in knowledge generation, feminist and postmodern
critiques. Evidence informed practice, reflective practice. Overview
of research approaches contributing to midwifery knowledge.
Required Reading Nil
Recommended Reading Cluett, E.R. & Bluff, R. (Eds). (2000).
Principles and practice of research in midwifery. London, Bailliere
Tindall. Fraser, D. (Ed). (2000) Professional studies for midwifery
practice. Edinburgh. Churchill Livingstone. Guilliland, K. &Pairman,
S. (1995). The midwifery partnership: A model for practice.
Wellington, NA. Victoria University of Wellington. Proctor, S. &
Renfrew, M. (2000). Linking research and practice in midwifery: A
guide to evidence based practice. Edinburgh. Bailliere Tindall.
Schneider, Z, Elliott, D, & Lo Biondo-Wood, G, & Harber, J. (2002).
Nursing research: Methods, critical appraisal and utlization. (2nd
ed). StLouis: Mosby.
Subject Hours Thirty-six hours for one semester conducted via
flexible delivery.
Assessment A combination of the following, or other appropriate
methodologies will be used: examination; written assignment;
reflective journal; and learning folio.
JAC0219 WOMEN’S HEALTH: SOCIOPOLITICAL CONTEXT
(CONSORTIUM SUBJECT)
Campus Distance Education.
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Opposing theories and ideologies of female sexuality and
health. The relationship between gender and health. Sociocultural
influences on sexuality and health. The politics of women’s health:
poverty, social class, ethnicity; body image; sexual orientation;
rape, incest, pornography and violence; genital mutilation; fertility
treatments. Women’s experiences of health care. The new public
health, and women’s health care initiatives in Australia.
Required Reading Nil
Recommended Reading Lake, M. (1999). Getting equal: The
history of Australian feminism. Sydney. Allen & Unwin. Rogers-
Clark, C. & Smith, A. (1998). Women’s health: A primary health
care approach. Sydney. Mac Lennan & Petty.
Subject Hours Thirty-six hours for one semester, conducted via
flexible delivery.
Assessment A combination of the following, or other appropriate
methodologies will be used: examination; written assignment;
reflective journal; and learning folio.
JAC0335 BABIES NEEDING EXTRA CARE (CONSORTIUM SUBJECT)
Campus Distance Education.
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Growth and Development. Level two nursery environment:
Noise; Equipment; Personnel; Influence upon the wellbeing of the
baby; Impact upon the family; Role of the midwife in the team.
Circumstances that may require babies to be admitted to a Level
Two Nursery; pre-term; Post-term; Congenital anomalies; Metabolic
disturbances; Small for gestational age; Chemical dependency; Birth
asphyxia; Jaundice; Anaemia. Care of the baby: Gestational
Assessment; Facilitation of growth and development; Oxygenation;
Elimination; Nutrition; Immunity; Temperature. Care of the family:
Support and counselling; Involvement in care and decision making;
Education; Transition to parenthood. Ethio-legal Issues: Informed
consent; Rights of the baby; Economic challenges; Maintenance of
life support. Neonatal Emergency Transport Service: History of the
service; Role of the service; Referral, stabilization and retrieval.
Required Reading To be advised by subject lecturer.
Recommended Reading Enkin, M., Keirse, M., Neilson. J.,
Crowther, C., Duley,L., Hodnett, E. & Hofmeyr, J. (2000). Guide to
effective care in pregnancy and childbirth. (3rd ed.). Oxford:
Oxford University Press. Fraser, D. (2000). Professional studies for
midwifery practices. Melbourne: Churchill Livingstone. Johnston,P.
(1998). The newborn child. (8th ed.). Melbourne: Churchill
Livingstone. Lang, S. (1997). Breastfeeding special care babies.
London: Bailliere Tindall. Lowdermilk, D.L., Perry, S.E. & Bobak, I.
(Eds.). (1997). Maternity and Women's Health Care. (6th ed.). St.
Louis: Mosby. Merenstein & Gardner (2000). Neonatal Intensive
Care (to complete reference). Olds, S., London, M., & Ladewig, P.
(1996). Maternal Newborn Nursing: A family centred approach.
(5th Ed.). Sydney: Addison-Wesley. Richmond, S. (Ed.). (1996).
Principals of resuscitation at birth. Newcastle Upon Tyne: Northern
Neonatal Network. Sparshott, M. (1997). Pain distress and the
newborn baby. Melbourne: Blackwell Scientific.
Subject Hours Thirty-six hours for one semester,conducted via
flexible delivery.
Assessment A combination of the following, or other appropriate
methodologies will be used: examination; written assignment;
reflective journal; and learning folio.
JMO1001 WITH CHILDBEARING WOMAN (CONSORTIUM SUBJECT)
Campus Distance Education
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Module One: Setting the Scene – defining the role of the
midwife in contemporary practice; exploring the desirable attributes
of a midwife. Exploring the philosophical basis underpinning the
role of the midwife in contemporary midwifery practice – being with
woman; woman centredness; working in partnership; establishing
relationships with childbearing women. Module Two: Preparing for
the role of the Midwife. Introduction to the principles of basic
midwifery care – promoting a safe environment – occupational
health and safety; principles of infection control; principles of oral
medication administration/Poisons Act; principles of optimal
nutrition for the woman and her baby; introduction to care maps.
Introduction to the principles of health promotion: facilitating
informed decision making; accessing relevant information.
Undertaking a health assessment: history taking process; baseline
observations; guidelines for undertaking physical health assessment.
Introduction to primary health counselling; guidelines for
undertaking primary health counselling.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
181
Required Reading Johnson, R & Taylor, W. (2000). Skills for
midwifery practice, Edinburgh, Churchill Livingston. Fraser, D.M. &
Cooper, M.A. (2003) Myles textbook for midwives (14th Ed)
London, Bailliere Tindall. Jordan, S. (2002). Pharmacology for
midwives. The evidence basis for safe practice. Hampshire,
Palgrave. Stables, D. (1999) Physiology in childbearidng.
Edinburgh, Bailliere Tindall. or Coad, J. (2001). Anatomy and
physiology for midwives. Edinburgh, Mosby.
Recommended Reading Cooper, T. and Emden, C. (2001).
Portfolio Assessment: A guide for nurses and midwives. Quinn Rocks
WA. Praxis Education. Miller, A & Hanretty, KP (2003) Obstetrics
illustrated. (6th ed). Edinburgh, Churchill Livingstone. Page, L, (Ed)
(2000). The new midwifery: Science and sensitivity in practice.
Edinburgh, Churchill Livingstone.
Subject Hours Forty-eight hours for one semester conducted by
flexible delivery.
Assessment Written Examination 50% Assignment and
presentation 50%.
JMO1003 THE CHILDBEARING JOURNEY (CONSORTIUM SUBJECT)
Campus Distance Education
Prerequisite(s) JMO1001 With Childbearing Woman
Content Module One: The art of midwifery: Relationship;
Communication; Boundaries of care; Midwife as primary carer;
Midwife’s role in collaborative practice; Establishing a partnership;
Philosophy of care; Reflection. Module Two: Pre-conception:
Sexuality; Fertility/Infertility; Pre-conception health; Environmental
issues. Module Three: The baby and the woman during pregnancy:
Embryology; Fetal growth & development; Alteration & adaptation
during pregnancy; Maintenance of health; Pregnancy assessment.
Module Four: Birthing: Physiological and psychosocial alteration
and adaptation during birthing; Facilitating a normal process of
birth; With woman; Continuity of care; Assessment; Reception of the
newborn. Module Five: After birth of the woman and baby:
Adaptation to extrauterine life; Lactation; Breastfeeding practices;
Attachment & bonding; Development of the family unit; Discharge
planning; assessment of mother & baby.
Required Reading Sweet, B. (1997). Mayes midwifery: A
textbook for midwives. (12th ed). London Bailliere Tindall. Jordan, S.
(2002). Parmacology for midwives. The eveidence basis for safe
practice. Hampshire, Palgrave. Stabl;es, D. (1999). Physiology in
childbearing, Edinburgh, Bailliere Tindall. or Coad, J. (2001).
Anatomy and physiology for midwives. Edinburgh, Mosby. Johnson,
R. & Taylor, W. (2000). Skills for midwifery practice., Edinburgh,
Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Cooper, T. & Emden, C. (2001).
Portfolio Assessment: A guide for nurses and midwives. Quinn Rocks
WA. Praxis Education. Miller, A. & Hanretty, KP (2003). Obstetrics
illustrated (6th ed). Edinburgh. Churchill Livingstone. Page, L. (Ed.)
(2000) The new midwifery: Science and sensitivity in practice.
Edinburgh, Churchill Livingstone.
Subject Hours Forty-eight hours for one semester conducted via
flexible delivery.
Assessment A combination of the following, or other appropriate
methodologies will be used: examination; written assignment;
reflective journal; and learning folio.
JMO3105 WOMEN'S HEALTH: WOMEN'S BUSINESS (CONSORTIUM
SUBJECT)
Campus Distance Education.
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Skill development in woman’s health assessment will be
built in a simulated learning environment. The role of the midwife in
primary health care will be discussed promoting health and wellness
throughout the reproductive lifespan. content will be explored within
three modules representing common health problems experienced
by women. Module 1: Women’s health across the lifespan – First
impressions: Puberty; Controlling fertility/contraception; Sexually
transmitted diseases and infections (non HIV); Menstrual disorders;
Eating disorders and body image; Rape, sexual assault, incest and
domestic violence. Module 2: Women’s health across the lifespan –
Physical problems: Pelvic pain, Endometriosis; Infertility; IVF; HIV &
AIDS; Breast health and disease; Women’s cancers; Continence, the
pelvic floor, vaginal repair; Hysterectomy; Menopause; Chronic
illness; Health in the workplace, working in the home. Module 3:
Women’s health across the lifespan – Mental health & addictive
disorders: Depression; Alcohol and Chemical dependency;
Gambling addiction.
Required Reading To be advised by subject lecturer.
Recommended Reading Allen, K.M. (1997). Women’s health
across the lifespan: a comprehensive perspective. Philadelphia:
Lippincott. Asian-Pacific Resource & Resource Centre for Women.
(1994). Towards women-centred reproductive health. Kuala Lumpur:
Asian-Pacific Resource & Research Centre for Women (ARROW).
Edge, V. & Miller, M. (1994). Women’s health care. St Louis:
Mosby. Firth, P. & Watanabe, S. (1996). Instant nursing
Assessment: women’s health. Albany: Delmar Publishers. Health and
Community Services. (1999). Victorian Women’s Health Plan.
Melbourne: Health and Community Services, Victorian Government.
Holloway, N. (1999). Medical surgical care planning. Springhouse,
Springhouse Corp. LeMone, P. & Burke, K.M. (2000). Medical-
surgical nursing: critical thinking in client care. New Jersey: Prentice
Hall. Lowdermilk, D., Perry, S. & Bobak, I. (2000). Maternity and
women’s health care. St Louis: Mosby. Olshansky, E. (2000).
Integrated women’s health: holistic approaches for comprehensive
care. Gaithersburg: Aspen Publishers. Smith, A. (1992). Women’s
health in Australia. New South Wales, Armidale.
Subject Hours Thirty-six hours for one semester, conducted via
flexible delivery.
Assessment A combination of the following, or other appropriate
methodologies will be used: examination; written assignment;
reflective journal; and learning folio.
RBF1130 INTRODUCTORY FOOD SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The aim of this subject is to provide an introduction to the
Food Industry, its components and organisation, both in Australia
and internationally; the composition of foods, food safety and the
preservation and processing of fruits and vegetables, grains and
oilseeds, dairy products, meat, poultry, fish and beverages.
Required Reading Jelen, P., 1985, Introduction to Food
Processing, Reston Publishing, Virginia. McKean, C., (ed), 1999,
Australian Food, 2nd edn, Agrifood Media Pty Ltd.
Class Contact Two hours per week comprising lectures/tutorials
for two semesters.
Assessment Assignments, 40%; final examinations (two), 60%.
RBF1140 INTRODUCTION TO FOOD, NUTRITION AND HEALTH
SCIENCE-1
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Introduction to food industry, its components and
organisation, both in Australia and internationally; the composition
of foods, food processing and food safety; Introduction to the
preservation and processing of fruits and vegetables, grains and
oilseeds, dairy products, meat, poultry, fish and beverages.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
182
Required Reading Parker, R., 2003, Introduction to Food
Science, Delmar, Thomson Learning Inc. Albany, USA.
Recommended Reading Carroll, KK, (ed), Current Perspectives
on Nutrition and Health, McGill-Queen’s university Press; Nutritional
Values of Australian Foods, Australian Government Publishing
Service, Canberra.
Class Contact four hours per week comprising of three hours of
lectures and one hour of tutorial/demonstration.
Assessment Assignment (2x2000 words), 40%; Examination (1x3
hrs), 60%.
RBF1145 INTRODUCTION TO FOOD, NUTRITION AND HEALTH
SCIENCE-2
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Principles of nutrition and nutritional aspects of various
food commodities and their impact on health.
Required Reading Parker, R., 2003, Introduction to Food
Science, Delmar, Thomson Learning Inc. Albany, USA.
Recommended Reading Carroll, KK, (ed), Current Perspectives
on Nutrition and Health, McGill-Queen’s university Press; Nutritional
Values of Australian Foods, Australian Government Publishing
Service, Canberra.
Class Contact four hours per week comprising of three h of
lectures and one hour of tutorial/demonstration.
Assessment Assignment (2x2000 words), 40%; Examination (1x3
hrs), 60%.
RBF1150 GLOBAL ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES
Campus St Albans
Prerequisites Nil
Content Human population growth and measurement factors;
population regulation in China and India; population growth
momentum; environmental history and spectrum of environmental
thought; environmental groups and their work; connections between
social justice and environmental issues – education levels, status of
women, human rights and relative levels of wealth, resource
consumption and pollution in developing and developed countries;
deforestation and biodiversity loss; food production – green and
gene revolutions and the African experience; energy resources – a
contrast of renewables and fossil fuels/nuclear; water and soil
resources – appropriate agriculture and permaculture; chemistry and
sources of indoor and outdoor air pollution – the enhanced
greenhouse effect and depletion of stratospheric ozone; the role of
traditional economics in environmental degradation.
Required Reading Miller, G.T., 2002, Living in the Environment,
Wadsworth, Belmont.
Recommended Reading Botkin, D.B. and Keller, E.A., 2000,
Environmental science: Earth as a living planet, 3rd edn, New York:
Wiley. Bucholz, R.A., 1998, Principles of environmental
management: The greening of business, 2nd edn, New Jersey:
Prentice-Hall. Chiras, D.D., 1998, Environmental science: A systems
approach to sustainable development , 5th edn, Belmont, CA:
Wadsworth. Suzuki, D., 1997, The sacred balance: Rediscovering
our place in nature, St.Leonards, N.S.W.: Allen and Unwin
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester
Assessment Case study and assignments: 60 %; Examination:
40 %
RBF1160 AUSTRALIAN LANDSCAPES AND BIOTA
Campus St Albans
Prerequisites Nil
Content To introduce students to the range of environments and
landscapes that are present across the Australian continent, and the
nature of the plants and animals that inhabit these landscapes. This
will be achieved by: 1) discussing the factors that have shaped the
various Australian environments, including geomorphological and
climatic processes, and historical factors; 2) introducing the
distinctive flora and fauna of Australia and the evolutionary
pressures that have shaped the Australian biota; and 3) reviewing
relationships between the biota and the environment. The subject
will provide a foundation of knowledge about the Australian
environment even for students not continuing in the biological
sciences.
Required Reading To be advised
Recommended Reading Augee, M. & Fox, M,. 1999, The
Biology of Australia and New Zealand, Pearson Education, Sydney.
Foreman, D.B. & Walsh, N.G. Eds., 1993, Flora of Victoria. Vol. 1,
Inkata Press. Groves, R.H. Ed., 1994, Australian Vegetation, 2nd
edn, Cambridge University Press. Mulvaney, D.J. & Kamminga, J.,
1999, The Prehistory of Australia, Allen & Unwin, St Leonards,
NSW. Sturman A.P. & Tapper N.J., 1996, The weather and climate
of Australia and New Zealand, Oxford University Press. White,
M.E., 1994, After the greening: The browning of Australia,
Kangaroo Press. Williams M.A.J. et al, 1993, Quaternary
Environments, Edward Arnold, London.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, but
comprising two hours of lectures each week and a series of all-day
field trips.
Assessment Field work reports: 40 %; Assignments: 20 %;
Examination: 20 %.
RBF1310 BIOLOGY 1
Campus St Albans, Werribee.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Biology of the cell. Mammalian biology with particular
reference to the structure and function of various human
physiological systems.
Required Reading Solomon, Berg and Martin Biology,. latest
edn, Thomson or as advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Five hours per week for one semester comprising
three hours of lectures and two hours of practical work.
Assessment Assignments, 10%; practical work, 30%; final
examination, 60%.
RBF1320 BIOLOGY 2
Campus St Albans, Werribee.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Plant biology with particular reference to higher plants.
Principles of genetics. Evolution and diversity. Biological
classification. Ecological studies. Bioenergetics.
Required Reading Solomon, Berg and Martin Biology,. latest
edn, Thomson or as advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Five hours per week for one semester comprising
three hours of lectures and two hours of practical work.
Assessment Assignments, 10%; practical work, 30%; final
examination, 60%.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
183
RBF1738 CELL STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION
Campus St Albans, City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Microscopic cell structure an funtion; cellular reproduction
to include bacteria and viruses etc; cell membranes and transport;
nuclear structure and function; mitochondrial acticvity; ribosomal
activity; cell type specificity; lysosomes; autolysis etc; histology;
human genetics; microbiology; spread and transmission of
infection/microbes; categories of infective agents; bacterial; viral;
fungal; parasitic etc; sterilization and disinfection; resistance; host
and infective agents.
Required Reading Erlandsen, S.L. and Magney, 1992, Color
Atlas of Histology, Mosby Year Book, St Louis. Albert, B., 1994,
Molecular Biology of the Cell, 3rd edn, Garland Publishers, New
York. Tobin, A.J., and Morel, R.E., 1997, Asking About Cells,
Saunders College Publishing, Sydney. Becker, W.M., Kleinsmith,
L.J., and Hardin, J., 2000, The Word of the Cell, 4th edn,
Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Co Inc. Lee, G. & Bishop, B, 2002,
Microbiology and Infection Control for Health Professionals, 2nd
edn Prentice Hall Australia.
Recommended Reading Jenkins, J., 1990, Human Genetics,
2nd edn, Harper and Rowe, New York. Tortora, G.J., Funke and
Case, 2001, Microbiology: An Introduction,7th edn, Benjamin
Cummings, Redwood City. Black, J.G., 2002, Microbiology:
Principles and Explorations, 5th edn, Prentice Hall Inc.
Class Contact Two hours per week for one semester comprising
two one-hour lectures every other week and one two-hour laboratory
session every other week.
Assessment Written examinations, 60%; reports, 40%.
RBF1738 CELL STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Microscopic cell structure and function; cellular
reproduction to include bacteria and viruses; cell membranes and
transport; nuclear structure and function; mitochondrial activity;
ribosomal activity; cell type specificity; lysosomes; autolysis;
histology; human genetics; microbiology; spread and transmission
of infection and microbes; categories of infective agents; bacterial;
viral; fungal; parasitic; sterilisation and disinfection; resistance; host
and infective agents.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Subject Hours Two hours per week for one semester comprising
two 1-hour lectures and one 2-hour laboratory session in alternate
weeks.
Assessment Reports (40%); written examination (60%).
RBF2192 APPLIED MICROBIOLOGY
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RBM1570 Biology 1.
Content The aim of this subject is to provide an overview of the
structure and characteristics of microorganisms. To study growth of
microorganisms in culture, metabolism and function. To investigate
application of microorganisms in industry and biological waste
treatment. Mutagenics, genetic and strain improvement.
Required Reading Tortora, G., Funke, B. and Case, C. 1995,
Microbiology, An Introduction, 5th edn, Benjamin Cummings,
Redwood-City, California. Prac Book: Johnson, T.R. and Case, C.
1995, Laboratory Experiments in Microbiology, brief edn, 5th edn,
Benjamin Cummings, Redwood City, California.
Class Contact Two hours of lecture and three hours of practical
work per week for one semester.
Assessment Based upon short tests, practical reports and an end-
of-semester examination
RBF2215 NUTRITION AND FOOD ANALYSIS LABORATORY-2
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RBF1145 Introduction to Food, Nutrition and
Health Science and RCS1601 Chemistry A and RCS1602 Chemistry
B or equivalent.
Content Rationale for experimental procedures used in nutrition,
experimental design, statistical analysis, anthropometry, feeding
trials, N balance studies, amino acid score, digestibility of food,
nutritional survey and data collection, dietary instrument design, diet
analysis, calorimetry, analysis of specific nutrients, use of analysis
software, site visits. Pitfalls and complications encountered in human
nutrition experimentation, and strategies commonly used to
overcome these.
Required Reading Margetts, B.M. and Neslon, M. (eds.) 1997.
Design in Nutritional Epidemiology. Oxford, University Press, New
York , USA.
Recommended Reading Nollet, L.M.L. 2000. Food Analysis by
HPLC (2nd ed.) Marcel Dekker. New York, USA; Wardlaw, G.M.
1992. Diet Analysis: Quick Reference. Mosby Year Book. St Louis.
Mo., USA; Marks, DB, Marks, AD, Smith, CM. Basic Medical
Biochemistry: A Clinical Approach; Nutritional Values of Australian
Foods, Australian Government Publishing services, Canberra.
Class Contact four h per week, comprising two hours of lecture
and two hours of lab
Assessment Assignment (2x2000 words), 20%; Examination (1x3
hrs), 50%; Practical work (6 lab reports), 30%.
RBF2218 NUTRITION AND COMMUNITY HEALTH
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RBM 2750 Nutrition or equivalent.
Content Importance of community nutrition in public health
promotion. Health behavior theories. Food security. Community
nutrition throughout the lifespan (breastfeeding promotion; childhood
and adolescence; adults and chronic disease prevention; nutrition-
related problems in the elderly). Development of effective
communication programs. Education and intervention programs in
locating public health data and health epidemiology. Cultural
competency and International nutrition.
Required Reading Endres, J. 1999. Community Nutrition:
Challenges and Opportunities. Columbus, O: Prentice Hall, Inc.
Recommended Reading Rothman, K.J., 2002, Epidemiology.
An Introduction, Oxford University Press. Berdanier, C.D. (ed).
2002. Handbook of Nutrition and Food. CRC Press, London, UK;
Gould, B.E. 1997. Pathophysiology for the Health Related
Professions, Saunders, USA; Wiseman, G. 2002. Nutrition and
Health. Taylor and Francis, London, UK; William, S.R. 2001. Basic
Nutrition and Diet Therapy. 11th Ed. Mosey Inc. USA.
Class Contact four h per week, comprising of three hours of
lecture and one hour of tutorial.
Assessment Assignment (2x2000 words), 20%; Examination (1x3
hrs), 50%; Case study 1, 30%.
RBF2300 MICROBIOLOGY 1
Campus Werribee.
Prerequisite(s) RBF1310 Biology 1.
Content Introduction to the biology of bacteria, protozoans, fungi
and viruses. Microbial cell morphology; structure and function of cell
components. Growth, reproduction and enumeration of micro-
organisms. Control of microbial growth: the effect of physical and
chemical environments on growth. Microbial metabolism and
genetics.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
184
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Five hours per week comprising two hours of
lectures and three hours of practical for one semester.
Assessment Assignment, 20%; practical work, 25%; examination,
55%.
RBF2310 MICROBIOLOGY 2
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RBF2300 Microbiology 1.
Content This subject aims to build on material covered in RBF2300
Microbiology 1 to further develop the student’s knowledge of
microbiology. Topics include: introduction to microbial ecology,
evolutionary and ecological aspects of interactions between
microbes and higher organisms, microbiota associated with selected
animals and plants, non-specific host defences in a range of plants
and animals, entry of pathogens into a range of plant and animal
hosts, pathogenic effects in a range of plant and animal hosts,
clinical and diagnostic microbiology, basic principles of public
health microbiology.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Five hours per week comprising two hours of
lectures, two hours of laboratory work and one one-hour tutorial for
one semester.
Assessment Assignment, 20%; practical work, 25%; final
examination, 55%.
RBF2330 CELL BIOLOGY
Campus St Albans, Werribee.
Prerequisite(s) RBF1310 Biology 1 or RBM1528 Human
Physiology 2 or equivalent.
Content This unit complements units in Biochemistry and provides a
strong foundation for students moving into areas such as:
biotechnology, molecular biology, medical sciences and
environmental sciences. Topics covered include: Eukaryotic cell
organisation (covering all of the major organelles) and
compartmentalisation; membranes and transport mechanisms; the
cell surface; intracellular targeting of proteins including
cotranslational and post translational pathways; transport and
docking of vesicles; motor proteins, movement and the cytoskeleton;
communication between cells including receptors and signal
transduction pathways; cell cycle and its regulation; apoptosis; the
molecular basis of cancer.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester based on
three hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial.
Assessment Assignments, 40%; examination, 60%.
RBF2390 MOLECULAR GENETICS
Campus Werribee
Prerequisites RBF2520 Biochemistry I.
Content Introduction to developments at the forefront of molecular
biology of gene structure and function and molecular genetics. The
subject will build on material covered in Biochemistry 1 and Cell
Biology and strengthen the foundations for the unit ‘Genetic
Engineering’ in the final year of the degree program. Main topics
include: organisation of eukaryotic genomes including repetitive and
nonrepetitive DNA sequences, multigene families, pseudogenes;
organisation of prokaryotic genomes; genomic rearrangements
including transposable genetic elements, retroviruses and other
mechanisms, genetic rearrangements in the immune system,
replication of DNA, telomeres and telomerases, methylation and
imprinting of DNA, mutations and repair mechanisms, regulation of
gene expression, specialised genetic systems including genes in
early development, genes responsive to hormones and heat shock.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Class Contact Four hours per week, comprising three hours of
lectures and one hour tutorial, for one semester.
Assessment Assignment work, 40%; examination, 60%.
RBF2410 FOOD COMPONENTS AND INTERACTIONS
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RBF1140 Introduction to Food, Nutrition and
Health Science and RCS1601 Chemistry A and RCS1602 Chemistry
B or equivalent.
Content Food constituents; water; structure, chemistry, stability and
functional properties of proteins, carbohydrates, fats and oils,
vitamins and minerals. Food colour, texture and flavour. Reactions
leading to deterioration of foods: oxidative deterioration and
rancidity, anti-oxidants, browning reactions; food additives, natural
and synthetic colorants and flavouring agents; gels, colloids, foams
and emulsions.
Required Reading Fennema, O.R. (ed), 1996, Food Chemistry,
3rd edn, Marcel Dekker Inc., New York. English, R. and Lewis, J.,
1992.
Class Contact four hours per week, comprising of three hours of
lecture and one hour of tutorial.
Assessment Assignment (2x2000 words), 40%; Examination (1x3
hrs), 60%.
RBF2520 BIOCHEMISTRY 1
Campus St Albans, Werribee.
Prerequisite(s) RBF1310 Biology 1 and RCS1601 Chemistry 1A
or equivalent.
Content This subject aims to provide a general introduction to
biochemistry and includes: structure and functions of carbohydrates,
lipids, proteins and nucleic acids. Biological membranes. Enzymes:
kinetics and regulatory enzymes. Metabolism: bioenergetics,
glycolysis, citric acid cycle, chemiosmosis, gluconeogenesis, amino
acid metabolism, fatty acid metabolism, photosynthesis. DNA:
structure, replication, expression, and basic gene cloning.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Six hours per week, comprising three hours of
lectures, two hours of laboratory, and one hour of tutorial work for
one semester.
Assessment Practical work, 30%; final examination, 25%;
assignment/test, 15%.
RBF2530 BIOCHEMISTRY 2
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) SBF2520 Biochemistry 1.
Content The aim of this subject is to expand on material covered in
Biochemistry 1, and complement the Molecular Cell Biology and
Microbiology subjects. Along with Biochemistry 1, this subject will
provide a solid foundation in biochemical principles, reactions and
applications. Topics covered include bioenergetics, the pentose
phosphate pathway, amino acid and nucleotide metabolism,
photosynthesis, aspects of plant metabolism and biochemistry of
neurotransmitters. Other topics covered will include the structure and
function of biological molecules, ligand binding and conformational
changes, mechanisms of enzyme action, advanced enzyme kinetics,
regulation of biochemical systems such as hormonal and
transcriptional control. Applied aspects of biochemistry will also be
considered.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Six hours per week, comprising three hours of
lectures, two hours of laboratory work and one hour tutorial for one
semester.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
185
Assessment Assignments, 15%; practical work (including test),
25%; final examination 60%.
RBF2610 FUNDAMENTALS OF ECOLOGY
Campus St. Albans
Prerequisites RBF1310 Biology 1, RBF 1320 Biology2
Content History and nature of ecology; Ecology & evolution –
natural selection & speciation; Niche concept – ecophysiology,
limiting factors; Population biology – individuals, species &
populations, population growth, demographics, life tables, age
distributions, population regulation, intra- & interspecific
competition, predation, parasitism, mutualism; Behaviour;
Community – species diversity, species abundance models,
succession, food chains, trophic relationships; Ecosystems – energy
transfer, geochemical cycles, global patterns & processes; World
biogeography & biomes; Palaeoecology
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two hours of lectures and two hours of practicals (mainly field
excursions)
Assessment Field studies and assignments: 50 %; Examination:
50%.
RBF2620 AUSTRALIAN PLANTS
Campus St. Albans
Prerequisites RBF1310 Biology 1, RBF1320 Biology 2
Content An understanding of: 1) the diversity and evolution of
plants and fungi, with emphasis on Australian native plants and
fungi; 2) the characteristic morphology and life history of the major
plant groups and fungi; 3) the basic principles of the systematics of
Australian plants including biological nomenclature, identification
and classification; and 4) how the biogeography of Australian
plants can be explained by their life history and the history of the
continent, particularly to instill an understanding of how and why
that Australia has evolved a diverse and highly endemic primarily
sclerophyllous flora where the forests and woodlands are dominated
by two tree genera, Eucalyptus and Acacia.
Required Reading Knox, B., Ladiges, P., Evans, B. & Saint, R.,
2001, Biology,. 2nd edn, McGraw-Hill.
Recommended Reading Clarke, I. & Lee, H. 1987, Name that
flower. The identification of flowering plants, Melbourne University
Press. Costermans, L., 1994, Native trees and shrubs of south-
eastern Australia, Lansdowne. Duncan, B.D. & Isaac, G., 1994,
Ferns and allied plants of Victoria, Tasmania and South Australia,
Melbourne University Press. Foreman, D.B. & Walsh, N.G., eds,
1993, Flora of Victoria. Vols. 1-3, Inkata Press. Orchard, A.E. ed,
1999, Flora of Australia. Vol.1. Introduction, 2nd edn,
CSIRO/ABRS, Canberra. Scagel, R.F., Bandoni, R.J., Maze, J.R.,
Rouse, G.E., Schofield, W.B. & Stein, J.R., 1984, Plants. An
evolutionary survey, Wadsworth Publ. Co. Thiele, K.R. & Adams,
L.G., 2002, Families of Flowering Plants of Australia. An interactive
identification guide, Revised edn, CD-ROM & Manual,
CSIRO/ABRS.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two hours of lectures and two hours of practical.
Assessment Practicals and assignments: 60 %; examination: 40
%.
RBF2630 COMMUNITY AND ENVIRONMENT
Campus St. Albans
Prerequisites Nil
Content Exploration of the various socially-based conceptual
frameworks for understanding the range of environmental viewpoints
in the community, and the consequences of these frameworks for
practical environmental protection and repair. Practical experience
in working with a wide range of community representatives on
environmental protection and repair projects. Practical skills
development in how to communicate with community groups and
individuals, including clear, simple explanations, active and
reflective listening, negotiating, consulting and drawing up and
presenting project proposals. Insights into the range of skills and
experience required to gain employment in environmental
management fields, and the range of employment available.
Required Reading To be advised
Recommended Reading Anderson, S., et al., 2001,
Incorporating biodiversity into environmental management systems
for Victorian agriculture, State of Victoria, Department of Natural
Resources & Environment (Melbourne). Hay, P., 2002, Main
currents in Western environmental thought, University of New South
Wales Press. Ife, J., 1995, Community development, Longman.
Irwin, A., 2001, Sociology and the environment, Polity (Blackwell –
Oxford). Soule, M. & Lease, G., 1995, Reinventing nature?
Responses to postmodern deconstruction, Island Press (Washington).
Wallace, H. ed, 1996, Developing alternatives. Community
development strategies and environmental issues in the Pacific,
Victoria University Faculty of Arts. Yencken, D. and Wilkinson, D.,
2001, Resetting the compass. Australia’s journey towards
sustainability, CSIRO Publishing.
Class Contact Four hours per week in total, timetabled as a block,
and consisting of a mix of lectures, tutorials, practical workshops
and site visits.
Assessment Assignment: 20 %; practical workshop and field
reports: 30 %; final examination: 50 %.
RBF2640 AUSTRALIAN ANIMALS
Campus St. Albans
Prerequisites RBF 1310 Biology 1, RBF 1320 Biology 2
Content Diversity of animal life, with an emphasis on the Australian
fauna; the science of systematics, including cladistic analysis;
Bauplans; evolution and origin of biodiversity in marine and
terrestrial environments; historical and ecological biogeography,
including faunal regions and habitat types; ‘uniqueness’ of the
Australian fauna.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Dyne, D.R. & Walton, D.W., eds,
1987, Fauna of Australia, General articles, Vol 1A, AGPS. Harvey,
M.S. & Yen, A.L., 1989, Worms to wasps, Oxford University Press.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two hours of lectures and two hours of practical classes composed
mainly of field excursions.
Assessment Practical: 50 %; Examination: 50 %
RBF2740 PRINCIPLES OF FOOD PRESERVATION
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RBF1130 Introductory Food Science and
Technology
Content A basic introduction to unit operations. Preservation by
moisture control: water activity, intermediate moisture foods,
concentration, dehydration and freeze drying. Preservation by heat
treatment: pasteurisation, sterilisation, canning. Preservation by
chilling and freezing. Chemical preservation and fermentation.
Preservation by irradiation. Modified atmospheres. Influence of
processing on product safety, quality and nutritional value of food.
Principles of food packaging, packaging requirements.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Ackermann, P., 1995, Food and
Packaging Materials-Chemical Interactions, Royal Society of
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
186
Chemistry, Cambridge. Gould, G.W. (ed), 1995, New Methods for
Food Preservation, Blackie Academic and Professional, New York.
Fellows, P. 1990, Food Processing Technology: Principles and
Practice, Ellis Horwood, Chichester, England.
Class Contact Four hours per week comprising lectures/tutorials
for one semester.
Assessment Assignments and tests, 30%; final examination, 70%.
RBF2922 SCIENCE AND SOCIETY
Campus St Albans, Werribee.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The subject aims to encourage students to appreciate
modern scientific culture as historically unique phenomenon, and
thus to enable them to analyse specific developments and events in
modern society. The subject looks at the failure of philosophical
attempts to establish a scientific method, and explores the view that
science is fantastically creative rather than ‘dull-but-honest’. Two
case-studies are used: the development of Darwinism, and the
transition from Newton’s theory of gravitation to Einstein’s theory of
general relativity. The development of modern scientific culture is
analysed in the following case studies in particular: China and
Japan’s divergent responses to confrontation with Western culture,
technological developments in Nazi Germany and Stalinist Russia,
the structure and funding of American basic research, and the
development of the nuclear industry. The teaching of science subject
and popular perceptions of science will also be looked at.
Required Reading Chalmers, A.F. 1982, What Is This Thing
Called Science?, 2nd edn, University of Queensland Press, St Lucia,
Qld. A course reader available at St. Albans.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
one two-hour lecture and one two-hour tutorial.
Assessment Assignments, 50%; semester examination, 50%. A
satisfactory assessment will require satisfactory attendance (80%) at
tutorials.
RBF3230 ANIMAL FOOD PROCESSING
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content World animal food resources: nature, distribution and
production. Meat and Meat Products: muscle composition, structure
and conversion to meat, post mortem glycolysis and meat quality,
nutritional and sensory properties, chilling, freezing, curing and
processing. Marine products: composition, structure, quality,
spoilage, preservation and processing including chilling, freezing,
salting, drying, smoking and fermenting. Milk and Milk Products:
composition, chemical and physical properties of milk processing of
milk including butter, powdered, fermented and fractionated product
manufacture, by-product utilisation. Egg and Poultry Products:
structure and composition of egg, storage and preservation of eggs,
egg products, poultry processing and poultry products.
Required Reading To be advised by the instructor.
Recommended Reading Hedrick, H.B., Aberle, E.D., Forrest,
J.C. and Judge, M.D., 1994, Principles of Meat Science, 3rd edn,
Kendall/Hunt Publishing Co; Kosikowski, F.V. and Mistry, V.V.,
1997, Cheese and Fermented Milk Foods Vol. I and II, F.V.
Kosikoski, Westport, CT. Robinson, R.K., 1993, Modern Dairy
Technology, Elsevier Applied Science Publishers, New York.
Class Contact three hours per week comprising lecture and
tutorial.
Assessment Assignment (2x3000 words), 50%; Exam (1x three
h), 50%.
RBF3235 PLANT FOOD PROCESSING
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content World plant food resources: nature, distribution and
production. Cereals and Grains: structure, composition, properties
and uses, wheat and rice processing, baking. Fruit and Vegetables:
composition, post-harvest physiology and storage, processing.
Sugar: production and processing. Oils and Fats: sources,
composition and processing. Alcoholic and Non-alcoholic
beverages: tea, coffee, cocoa, wine, beer and vinegar. Plant Based
Food Ingredients: sources, isolation and uses. Anti nutritional
components.
Required Reading To be advised by the instructor.
Recommended Reading Arthey, D. and Dennis, C. (eds), 1997,
Vegetable Processing, John Wiley and Sons; Arthey, D. and
Ashurst, P.R. (eds), 1996, Fruit Processing, Blackie Academic and
Professional. Hoseney, R.C., 1994; Principles of Cereal Science and
Technology, 2nd edn, American Association of Cereal Chemists.
Class Contact Three hours per week comprising lecture and
tutorial.
Assessment Assignment (2x3000 words), 50%;Exam (1x three h),
50%.
RBF3240 FUNCTIONAL FOODS
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RBM2750 Nutrition
Content This subject examines the role and potential of functional
ingredients and foods in human nutrition; natural anti-microbial
substances in human nutrition; the role of intestinal flora in human
health; prebiotics, probiotics, probiotic bacteria and symbiosis.
Required Reading Mazza, G., 1998, Functional Foods –
Biochemical and Processing Aspects, Technomic, Lancaster,
Pennsylvania.
Class Contact Three hours per week comprising lectures/tutorials
for one semester.
Assessment Assignments, 40%; final examination, 60%.
RBF3250 FOOD SAFETY AND QUALITY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RBF1140 Introduction to Food, Nutrition and
Health Science.
Content Major factors used in assessing food quality, sampling,
control charts, shelf-life testing, product recalls, collaborative testing,
cleaning and sanitizing, rapid testing methods, government
regulations, and overall quality plans such as HACCP. Human
sensory perception of food components and their interactions and
role of sensory methods in assessment of food quality and safety.
Toxicology and allergenicity of foods.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Hubbard, M.R., 1996, Statistical
Quality Control for the Food Industry, Chapman and Hall, New
York; Marriott, N.G., 1994, Principles of Food Sanitation, 3rd edn,
Chapman and Hall, London; Stone, H. and Sidel. J.L., 1993,
Sensory Evaluation Practices, 2nd edn, Academic Press Inc., San
Diego.
Class Contact four hours per week comprising three h of lectures
and one hour of tutorial/demonstration/practical work.
Assessment Assignment (2x2500 words),30%; Exam (1x three h),
50%; Practical reports/class tests 2/2, 20%.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
187
RBF3255 PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RBF1140 and RBF1145 Introduction to Food,
Nutrition and Health Science-1 and 2.
Content Product idea generation; concept development and
testing; Marketing-strategy development, Product and process
development process (project planning, formulation development,
process development, shelf-life testing): Consumer testing: Market
trial methods and estimation of market size; Product specifications
(raw materials, process, finished product); Packaging and labelling,
product evaluation, product costing and pricing; Production
planning; Market development and product launch.
Required Reading Earle, M., Earle, R. and Anderson, A. 2001.
Food Product Development. CRC Press, Boca Raton.
Recommended Reading Baker, R.C., Hahn, P.W. and Robins,
K.R. 1988. Fundamentals of New Food Product Development.
Developments in Food Science 16. Elsevier Science Publ. Co. Inc.,
New York, N.Y.
Fuller, G. 1994. New Food Product Development from Concept to
Marketplace. CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL; Graf, E. and Saguy, I.S.
1991. Food Product Development from Concept to Marketplace.
Chapman & Hall, New York, N.Y.
Class Contact Three hours per week comprising two hours of
lectures and one hour of tutorial/demonstration/practical work.
Assessment Assignment (1x3000 words), 20%; Exam (1x three
h), 50%
Practical reports/class tests 2, 30%.
RBF3382 INTRODUCTION TO MOLECULAR BIOLOGY AND
BIOTECHNOLOGY
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RBF2192 Applied Microbiology.
Content This subject will cover current knowledge about genes
(what they are, how they work and how they are manipulated), and
examine various techniques used to study and manipulate genes.
Topics include: the function of genes, the chemical identity, structure
and properties of genes, strategies used by nature or developed in
the laboratory for manipulating genes and specific uses of
laboratory based gene manipulation.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Class Contact Two hours of lectures per week and two hours of
practicals on alternate weeks.
Assessment Short tests, practical reports and end-of-semester
examination.
RBF3530 ENVIRONMENTAL PHILOSOPHY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Philosophy: a brief overview of Ancient, Medieval and
Modern Western philosophy. Environmental Philosophy as the
search for principles for guidance in conducting our lives in a
practical way that is beneficial to the environment and as a
spectrum of thought from Anthropocentrism to Ecocentrism. A focus
on Ecocentrism, in particular what informs Deep (or Transpersonal)
Ecology and the role of nature-based religions and patriarchy in the
development of Ecofeminism.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester
Assessment Assignments, 50%; examination, 50%.
RBF3540 LEADERSHIP AND THE ENVIRONMENT
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Three phases in the history of leadership studies: the
characteristics or traits of leaders from studies done in the first half
of this century; the thirty years of theories of what would lead to
effective leader behaviour in certain situations; the 1980’s and after
when a broader picture of what might explain leader success began
to develop. The current place of ethics, morals, values, feelings and
power as sources of information regarding leader behaviour.
Leadership as an art and as a service – as a weaving of
relationships rather than an amassing of information. The strong
links which exist between holistic environmentalism and emerging
leadership theory. Case studies from business, government and
environmental organisations of successful leaders who show
evidence of wholeness, care and service for the other.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week.
Assessment Assignments, 50%; examination, 50%.
RBF3600 AQUATIC ECOLOGY
Campus St. Albans
Prerequisites RBF 1310 Biology 1, RBF 1320 Biology 2, RBF
2610 Fundamentals of Ecology
Content This subject provides an overview to the ecology and
management of freshwater, estuarine and marine ecosystems in
southern Australia. The material covered includes: ecology of upland
and lowland-floodplain rivers (including impact of flow regulation
and environmental water allocations); ecology of lakes and
reservoirs (including algal bloom control and impacts of recreation);
wetland ecology and management (including international
conventions on waterbirds); seagrass, mangrove and saltmarsh
ecology and management; significance of rocky shore habitats in
southern Australia; estuarine ecology (with particular emphasis on
Port Phillip Bay and the Gippsland Lakes) and environmental
degradation and repair of aquatic systems.
Required Reading Boulton, A.J. & Brock M.G., 1999, Australian
freshwater ecology, CRCFE Press, Canberra. Underwood, A.J. &
Chapman M.G., 1995, Coastal marine ecology of south-eastern
Australia, UNSW Press, Sydney.
Recommended Reading Young W.J., 2001, Rivers as
ecological systems: The Murray-Darling Basin, CSIRO, Canberra.
Hammond, L.S. & Synnot, R.N., 1994, Marine biology,. Longman,
Sydney. CSIRO, 1996, Port Phillip Bay environmental study, CSIRO,
Canberra.
Class Contact four hours per week, comprising 1 x two hour
lecture, 1 x one hour tutorial/directed learning and 2 x day-long
field excursions.
Assessment Within-semester (on-going) assessment at Weeks 6
and 13 (60 %) plus two field reports (40 %).
RBF3610 BIOSTATISTICS
Campus St. Albans (offered subject to minimum enrolments in
2004).
Prerequisites Year 12 Mathematics or co-ordinators discretion,
RMA1110 Maths 1 and RMA1120 Maths 2
Content This subject aims to introduce students to the practical use
of statistics in the biological, ecological and health sciences.
Particular emphasis is given to experimental design and ‘real world’
use of statistical procedures. Material covered includes: Revision of
statistical concepts and the significance of statistics/biometrics in
biological/environmental analysis. Distributions and the nature of
data; the use of correlation and regression in developing
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
188
hypotheses. Sampling regimes and units, confounding variables,
hypothesis testing, parametric versus non-parametric procedures and
assumptions, post-hoc testing. Design tools for experimental and
field collection of data; type-I versus type-II errors, statistical power
and the use of statistical power in experimental design. BACI models
and design issues; pseudoreplication and true replication.
Optimisation of sampling regime for a given sampling unit and
variance. Inferential procedures, multiple factorial designs,
univariate versus multivariate procedures in biological and
environmental programs.
Required Reading Zar, J.H., 1984, Biostatistical analysis,
Prentice Hall
Recommended Reading Rosner, R., 2000, Fundamentals of
biostatistics, 5th edn, Duxbury. Pagano, M. & Qauvreau, K., 2000,
Principles of biostatistics, 2nd edn, Duxbury. Schork, M.A. &
Remington, R.D., 2000, Statistics with applications to the biological
and health sciences, Prentice Hall. Daniel, W.W., 1995,
Biostatistics: A foundation for analysis in the health sciences, 6th
edn, John Wiley and sons. Fowler, J. and Cohen, L., 1990,
Practical statistics for the field biologist, John Wiley and sons.
Class Contact Four hours per week over one semester, comprising
two hours of lectures and two hours of interactive practicals/tutorials
per week.
Assessment Assignments: 30 %; Examinations: 70 %.
RBF3620 CONSERVATION AND SUSTAINABILITY
Campus St. Albans (offered subject to minimum enrolments in
2004)
Prerequisites RBF1310 Biology 1, RBF1320 Biology 2, RBF2610
Fundamentals of Ecology, or at the discretion of the subject
co-ordinator
Content The subject ties together, in both theoretical and practical
ways, concepts and practices for maintaining biological diversity,
and how these concepts and practices can be integrated with social
and economic needs. The subject covers: the development of
conservation theory and practice in Australia; extinction and its
significance, including pathways to extinction; the meanings, levels
and interpretation of concepts of biodiversity; ecological and
adaptive management approaches to conservation and recovery,
including design of reserves, setting priorities, off-reserve
conservation and ex-situ (captive breeding, reintroduction and
translocation). Practical field studies and site visits will investigate
the contributions of zoo’s, national and state parks, friends groups,
councils and shires, other government agencies and private
landholders to the conservation and recovery of plant and animal
species, from insects to mammals, and from mushrooms to trees. The
subject will also include practical appraisals of techniques used to
determine integrity of ecosystems, landscapes and overall
environment, the contributions made by biodiversity to ecosystem
services and integrated methods for recovery and sustainable
management of species and ecosystems.
Required Reading New, T., 1999, Conservation Biology. An
Introduction for Southern Australia, Oxford University Press, United
Kingdom and Australia.
Recommended Reading Clark, T. & Seebeck, J., eds, 1990,
Management and conservation of small populations, Chicago
Zoological Society. Cox, G., 1997, Conservation biology –
concepts and applications. Department of Natural Resources &
Environment, 2000, Victoria’s biodiversity. Directions in
Management, DNRE Victoria (Melbourne). Environment Australia,
2001, State of the environment, EA, Canberra. Gilpin A., 1995,
Environmental impact assessment, Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two hours of lectures and two hours of practical.
Assessment Practicals and assignments: 40%; examination: 60%.
RBF3630 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MONITORING
Campus St. Albans (offered subject to minimum enrolments in
2004)
Prerequisites RBF1310 Biology 1, RBF1320 Biology 2
Content This subject aims to introduce students to the ‘real world’
application of ecological studies, especially in the process of
sustainable development. Topics covered will include: Overview of
Australian natural resources subject to environmental degradation
(e.g. land, soil, water, biota); The social and industrial factors
responsible for degradation (e.g. erosion, water pollution,
salinisation, habitat destruction, exotic species, extraction,
biodiversity loss etc); The Environmental Impact Assessment process
used to quantify impacts (e.g. role of consultants, the EEI process
itself); Approaches to monitoring environmental degradation and
recovery (e.g. sampling design, monitoring procedures, rapid
assessment protocols, ANZECC guidelines); Mechanisms and
approaches available to minimise impacts (reserve systems, limits of
acceptable change technologies, financial tools, role of government
departments). Particular emphasis is given to ‘hands on’ experience.
Required Reading Environment Australia, 2001, State of the
environment, EA, Canberra. Thomas I., 1998, Environmental impact
assessment in Australia, Federation Press, Sydney.
Recommended Reading ANZECC, 2000, Australian guidelines
for water quality monitoring and reporting, ANZECC, Canberra.
Downes B., et al., 2001, Monitoring ecological impacts,
Cambridge University Press, Cambridge. Gilpin A., 1995,
Environmental impact assessment, Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge. Tonkin C., 1999, The Australian consultant’s guide,
BPP Press, Sydney. Worboys G., 2001, Protected area
management, Oxford University Press, Oxford.
Class Contact four hours per week, comprising 1 x two hr lecture,
1 x two hr interactive tutorial/directed learning session (including
group presentations).
Assessment Within-semester (on-going) assessment at Weeks 6
and 13 (60 %) plus one case study report or project (40 %,
including group presentation ).
RBF3640 TERRESTRIAL ENVIRONMENTS AND REHABILITATION
Campus St. Albans (offered subject to minimum enrolments in
2004)
Prerequisites RBF1310 Biology 1, RBF1320 Biology 2, RBF2610
Fundamentals of Ecology, or at the discretion of the subject
co-ordinator.
Content The major types of ecosystems, including forests,
woodlands, grasslands, tundra and desert. The biological limits and
adaptations of the organisms contained in these ecosystems and key
ecological relationships between organisms. Case studies of
rehabilitation of several of these ecosystems, including approaches
based on understanding of biology and ecology. Practical
experience in rehabilitation projects.
Required Reading Cox, G., 1997, Conservation biology –
concepts and applications.
Recommended Reading Bradley, J., 1988, Bringing back the
bush, Sandowne Press (Sydney). Clark, T. & Seebeck, J., eds,
1990, Management and conservation of small populations,
Chicago Zoological Society. Department of Natural Resources &
Environment., 2000, Victoria’s biodiversity. Directions in
Management, DNRE Victoria (Melbourne). Groves, R.H., 1994,
Australian vegetation, 2nd edn, Cambridge Univ. Press
(Cambridge). Ladiges, P. & Gleadow, R., 1998, Biology of
Australian flora and fauna, Revised edn, CD-ROM. McGraw Hill &
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
189
Melbourne Univ. Press. Summers, W., 2000, Restoration ecology –
principles and perspectives, Blackwell (Melbourne).
Class Contact Four hours per week in total, timetabled as a block,
and consisting of a mix of lectures, tutorials, practical workshops
and site visits, including discussions with those currently employed in
the field.
Assessment Final examination: 50 %; Report on field monitoring
projects: 20 %; Workshop and practical reports: 30 %.
RBF3650 POLLUTION BIOLOGY
Campus St. Albans (this subject will first run in 2006)
Prerequisites RBF2610 Fundamentals of Ecology, RBF1310
Biology 1, RBF1320 Biology 2, Biometrics RBF3610, or subject
co-ordinators discretion.
Content This subject aims to introduce students to the impact of
pollutants on natural ecosystems. Topics covered include: Principles
and concepts which apply to the analysis and evaluation of pollutant
impacts on the natural environment. Experimental methodology
employed in the evaluation of organism and ecosystem responses to
pollutant exposure with special emphasis on statistical procedures
which can be employed in evaluating impacts. Types of and
significance of different groups of pollutants. Tolerance and
susceptibility of organisms and biological systems to pollutants;
pollution monitoring, biological indicators of pollution induced
environmental stress; sequestering of exogenous compounds;
partitioning; sources and environmental transport; uptake and
depuration; case studies.
Required Reading To be advised
Recommended Reading Laws, E.A., 1993, Aquatic pollution.
An introductory text, John Wiley & Sons. Cockerham, L.G. & Shane,
B.S., eds, 1994, Basic environmental toxicology, CRC Press.
Francis, M., 1994, Toxic substances in the environment, John Wiley
and Sons. Klaassen, C.D., et.al., eds, 1986, Toxicology, the basic
science of poisons, McMillan. Manahan, S.E., 1992, Toxicological
chemistry, 2nd edn, Lewis. Cox, G.W., 1997, Conservation
biology, Wm. C. Brown
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two hours of lectures and two hours of practical.
Assessment Practicals and assignments: 40 %; examination: 60
%.
RBF3660 INDIGENOUS SOCIETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL
MANAGEMENT
Campus St Albans (offered subject to minimum enrolments in
2004)
Prerequisites Nil
Content Traditional Aboriginal society. Relationship of Indigenous
people with the environment and the impact of
colonisation/dispossession. Contemporary Indigenous Society. Self-
determination and control of cultural heritage. Native Title – the
meaning of Mabo, Wik and the 10 point plan. Indigenous society
and plant resources.
Management of protected areas. Structure and work of the Council
for Aboriginal Reconciliation and ATSIC. Kulin Nation Cultural
Heritage. Spirituality and Environment.
Required Reading Presland, G., 1994, Aboriginal Melbourne:
The lost land of the Kulin people, McPhee Gribble: Melbourne.
Reynolds, H., 1999,. Why weren’t we told? A personal search for
the truth about Our history, Viking: Ringwood, Vic.
Recommended Reading Coombs, H.C., 1994, Aboriginal
autonomy: issues and strategies, Cambridge: UK. Flannery, T.,
1994, The future eaters, Reed Books: Kew, Victoria. Reynolds, H.,
1998, This whispering in our hearts, Allen and Unwin: St.Leonards,
NSW. Zola, N. and Gott, B., 1992, Koorie plants koorie people:
traditional aboriginal food, fibre and healing plants of Victoria,
Green Poles Design: Melbourne.
Class Contact Two hours per week
Assessment Folder plus Case Study/Video/Art Work/Story/Photo
Essay; Contribution.
RBF3730 FOOD MICROBIOLOGY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RBF2300 Microbiology 1.
Content The aim of this subject is to develop and increase the
student’s knowledge and skills in microbiology with particular
reference to the role of micro-organisms in food processing, food
spoilage and food-borne disease. Topics include: characteristics of
major groups of micro-organisms of importance in foods; ecology of
food spoilage. Microbial growth in foods; microbial fermentation
and fermented products; biomass; waste treatment; food-borne
infections and food poisoning; control and prevention of food-borne
disease; hygiene and sanitation; mycotoxins; legislation and
standards will be covered.
Required Reading Jay, J.M. 2000, Modern Food Microbiology,
6th edn, Aspen Publishers Inc.
Recommended Reading Banwart, G.J. 1989, Basic Food
Microbiology, 2nd edn, Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York. Board,
R.G. 1983, A Modern Introduction to Food Microbiology, Blackwell
Scientific, Oxford.
Class Contact Six hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials and practical work.
Assessment Assignments, 15%; practical work, 25%; final
examination, 60%.
RBF3810 NUTRIENT AND DRUG INTERACTION
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RBF 2550 Nutrition, SBM 2260 Diet and Nutrition
or equivalent, SNH2110 Disease and Health.
Content The aim is to study metabolic fate of drugs and nutrient
and drug interactions. Metabolic fates of drugs and xenobiotics,
known drug-nutrient interactions, role of nutrient-drug interactions in
the development of nutritional imbalance. Pharmacodynamics.
Major classes of prescription drugs and their indications, and their
effects on gastrointestinal and metabolic function. Role of nutrient-
drug interactions in the aetiology and treatment of significant
disease conditions. Impact of hepatic and renal insufficiency on
drug and nutrient bioavailability.
Required Reading Woolf, T. F. 1999. Handbook of Drug
Metabolism. Dekker, New York, USA.; Gibson, G.G., and Skett, P.
1994. Introduction to Drug Metabolism, 2nd ed. Blackie Academic
and Professional, U.K.
Recommended Reading Hollinger, M.A. 2003. Introduction to
Pharmacology (2nd ed.) Taylor & Francis, New York, USA.;
Coleman, Y. 2002. Nutrient-Drug Interactions: the Handbook.
Nutrition Consultants Australia, Hawthorn, Victoria.; Holt, G.A.
1998. Food and Drug Interactions: a Guide for Consumers. Precept
Press, Chicago, USA.; Stockley, I.H. 1992. Drug Interactions: a
Source Book of Adverse Interactions, their Mechanisms, Clinical
Importance and Management. Blackwell Scientific. Melbourne,
Australia.; Taylor, P. 1990. Principles of Drug Action. The basis of
Pharmacology, 3rd Ed. Churchill Livingston.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures and tutorials.
Assessment Assignments 40%, final examination 60%.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
190
RBF3900 PROJECT FOOD, NUTRITION AND HEALTH
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Students would normally be expected to have
successfully completed all Year 1 and 2 subjects.
Content The subject aims to enable students to become competent
in applying research methodology to a specific problem and to
enable them to develop an area of personal interest relevant to their
degree specialisation. This subject covers project methodology,
experimental design and analysis, and research plan preparation.
The project will be, as far as is possible, concerned with a real
problem and will require the presentation of an oral and written
report and may form all or part of a research publication. The
project will be chosen by the student in consultation with staff
members.
Required Reading There are no prescribed texts for this subject.
Class Contact Eight hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials and practical work.
Assessment A choice of research project will be made halfway
through semester five and an assignment concerned with
establishing the methodology for this project will be assessed and
will contribute 20% to the overall assessment of the project. The
written project will contribute 60% and the oral presentation will
contribute 20% to the overall assessment.
RBM1171 APPLIED NEUROMUSCULAR PHYSIOLOGY
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Students will gain an appreciation of those aspects of
nerve and muscle function which form the basis of human
movement. Topics will include: basic cell concepts, energy systems,
physiology of the neuron, structure and function of muscle fibres
control of muscle contraction; sensory mechanism, higher functions
of the nervous system.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Vander, Sherman and Luciano 1990,
Human Physiology, 6th edn, McGraw-Hill.
Class Contact Two hours of lectures and two hours of laboratory
class or tutorial per week for one semester.
Assessment Tutorial preparation, topic tests and a final
examination.
RBM1174 HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The general aim of the subject is to give students an
understanding of basic concepts in human physiology. The subject
will comprise a description of basic cell structures and functions for
generalised and specialised cells; outline co-ordinated body
functions with specific applications to the cardiovascular,
respiratory, musculo-skeletal, neural, alimentary and renal systems.
In addition, basic concepts in organic metabolism and energy
balance will be considered.
Required Reading Sherwood, LA., 2004. Human Physiology:
From Cells to Systems,, 56th edn, Thomson Learning.
Recommended Reading Vander, A.V. et al. 2004. Human
Physiology: The Mechanisms of Body Function, 9th edn, McGraw-
Hill.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two one-hour lectures per week and a two hour laboratory session
every second week.
Assessment Practical 20%; topic tests 20%; examination 60%
RBM1174 HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The general aim of the subject is to give students an
understanding of basic concepts in human physiology. Successful
completion of the subject will enable students to describe basic cell
structures and functions for generalised and specialised cells; outline
co-ordinated body functions with specific applications to the
cardiovascular, respiratory, musculo-skeletal, neural, alimentary and
renal systems; understand basic concepts in organic metabolism and
energy balance.
Required Reading Vander, A.V. et al. 1995, Human Physiology
– The Mechanisms of Body Function 6th edn, McGraw-Hill.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two one-hour lectures per week and one two hour laboratory on
alternate weeks.
Assessment Practical, 20%; topic tests 20%; examination, 60%.
RBM1501 FOUNDATIONS IN BIOMEDICAL SCIENCES A
(COMMUNICATION)
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content A series of lectures and workshops that will provide
students with an introduction to communication theory and
professional practice. This will cover communication skills of
summarising, synthesising, note taking, laboratory report and essay
writing, researching and referencing. Students will be encouraged
to develop critical thinking and self-editing skills. Oral presentation
techniques such as debating, formal talks, impromptu presentations
and small group presentations will be developed. Students will be
encouraged to focus on the holistic nature of the communication
process. Context specific materials about biomedical science will be
delivered through lectures, video and seminars.
Required Reading Handbook of Communication Skills for First
Year Students in the Faculty of Science, Engineering and
Technology.
Recommended Reading Mohan T, et al. 2004 Communicating
as Professionals, Thomson, Southbank
Class Contact 2 x one hr lecture; 1 x two hr laboratory; 1 x two
hr workshop.
Assessment Synthesis (500 words), 5%; Essay (1500 words),
15%; Oral Presentations, 20%; Laboratory reports, 15%; Laboratory
participation, 15%; Exam, 30%.
RBM1502 FOUNDATIONS IN BIOMEDICAL SCIENCES B
(BIOSTATISTICS)
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content This unit of study enables students to acquire the skills and
techniques required to critically analyse written material, particularly
scientific reports and to analyse scientific data. Topics include: basic
mathematical principles, scientific notation and SI units, biophysics,
introduction to data; descriptive statistics; introduction to probability;
normal distribution; the t statistic; hypotheses testing and ‘p’ values.
Use will be made of statistical and other computer packages
commonly used within biomedical sciences
Required Reading Strube P 2003 Bodyworks, 2nd ed. Prentice
Hall; Utts & Heckard 2004 Mind On Statistics, 2nd ed. Thomson;
Handbook of biophysics and biostatistics for biomedical science
students in the Faculty of Science, Engineering and Technology.
Recommended Reading Lange, Basic & Clinical Biostatistics,
3rd ed. McGraw-Hill ; Larson & Farber 2003 Elementary Statistics,
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
191
2nd ed, Prentice Hall; Weiss 2002 Introductory Statistics, 6th ed.
Addison Wesley.
Class Contact Five hours per week, 3h lectures, 2h
practicals/workshops.
Assessment Laboratory assessment tasks, 25%; Assignment, 25%;
Biophysics test, 25%; Statistics test, 25%.
RBM1510 HUMAN BIOSCIENCE 1A
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This unit provides a basic knowledge and understanding
of human cells, tissues and organ systems. It also introduces
chemical and physical principles and relates these principles to the
human body. Concepts of physiological regulation and homeostasis
are discussed and applied to functions of body systems. This subject
provides an overview of the structure and function of the human
body.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturers.
Class Contact Seven hours per week comprising four hours
lectures, three hours laboratory and/or tutorial.
Assessment Tests and examinations, 55%; laboratory reports,
laboratory tests and assignments, 45%.
RBM1514 FUNCTIONAL ANATOMY 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Co-requisite(s) RBM1518 Human Physiology 1
Content This unit of study introduces students to functional
anatomy. After a brief introduction to bones, joints, muscles, vessels
and nerves; students study gross, histological and some surface
anatomy of the head and neck and the back. The following regions
are studied: skull and cranial cavity, brain and the associated
nervous system, scalp and face, eye and ear, nasal and oral
cavities, major structures of the neck, vertebral column and deep
and superficial muscles of the back. The relevance of functional
anatomy to health and healing will be highlighted. Topics studied in
this unit of study may be interchanged with those of the unit of study
Functional Anatomy 2 and/or 3.
Required Reading Moore, K.L. Clinically Oriented Anatomy,
Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, USA, 5th edition 2004.
Recommended Reading Mathers, L.H., Chase, R.A. Dolph, J.,
Glasgow, E.F., Gosling, J. Clinical Anatomy Atlas, Mosby, St Louis,
1996
Class Contact Five hours per week, 3h lectures, 2h practicals.
Assessment Topic Test x 2, 10%; Practical exam, 35%; Theory
exam, 55%.
RBM1515 ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The subject provides students with a basic knowledge and
understanding of the structure and function of human body. Cells
and tissues are introduced. Basic concepts in chemistry and
biochemistry are covered in relation to the human body. The bones,
joints and muscles of the body are taught in an integrated way using
a regional approach. The nervous system and endocrine system are
discussed to highlight their regulatory role for control, co-ordination
and communication. The physiology of nerve cells is also covered,
and this is followed by a discussion of special senses, in particular
sight, hearing and balance.
Required Reading Marieb, E. N. (2003). Human anatomy and
physiology (6th ed., International). Benjamin Cummings Publishing.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials and laboratory work.
Assessment Test and assignment (20%); laboratory work/test
(40%); theory examination (40%).
RBM1518 HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The importance of homeostasis and the role of the neuro-
endocrine system in maintaining equilibrium within the body is
emphasised. The nervous system and endocrine system are
introduced in an integrated way to highlight their regulatory role for
control, co-ordination and communication. The nervous system will
be represented as the body’s most rapid means of maintaining
homeostasis via sensations, integration and response to changes,
both within the body and in the outside environment. The physiology
of nerve cells will be used to introduce bioelectrical concepts. This
provides the groundwork to support an understanding of the various
types of cells within the body and their functions. The
musculoskeletal system and cellular replication processes are
covered. Topics studied in this subject may be interchanged with
those of RBM1528 Physiology 2.
Required Reading Seeley, Stephens & Tate 2003, Anatomy and
Physiology, 6th edn, McGraw-Hill.
Recommended Reading Silverthorn, D., 2001, Human Physiology:
An Integrated Approach, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Five hours per week for one semester, comprising
three hours of lectures, two hours of practical on alternate weeks
and one hour tutorial class per week.
Assessment Practical reports/test and assignment/worksheets,
45%; test/examination, 55%.
RBM1519 HUMAN BIOSCIENCE 1: BODY STRUCTURE & FUNCTION
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content In this subject, Human Bioscience will be introduced and
placed in context with nursing in an integrated fashion. Content will
include a brief overview of the organization of the human body;
students will be introduced to the structure and functions of cells and
the various types of tissues in the body. Basic concepts in chemistry
and biochemistry will be covered providing the groundwork to
support an understanding of the various types of cells and their
functions within the body. Students are also introduced to
microbiology and the importance of infection control. The
importance of homeostasis is continuously highlighted and the role
of the neuro-endocrine system in maintaining equilibrium within the
body is emphasised. This will be followed by discussions of other
body systems emphasizing the relationship between structure and
function and their relevance to Nursing.
Required Reading Marieb, E.N. (2004). Human Anatomy and
Physiology. 6th Edition, Addison Wesley Longman, California, USA.
Available with seven CDs on Interactive Physiology for Windows &
Macintosh.
Recommended Reading Tortora, G.J. and Grabowski, S.R.
(2003). Principles of Anatomy and Physiology, (10th Ed), Wiley
New York. Seeley, R.R., Stephens, T.D. and Tate, P. (2003).
Anatomy and Physiology, 64th Ed) McGraw-Hill, New York. Lee,
G., & Bishop, B. (2002). Microbiology and Infection Control for
Health Professionals; (2nd Ed) Prentice Hall Australia. Black, J.G.
(2002). Microbiology: Principles and Applications (5th edition),
Prentice-Hall Inc. Martini F. (2004). Fundamentals of Anatomy and
Physiology, (6th ed) Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
Recommended Websites Department of Human Services, Vic. State
Government:www.dhs.vic.gov.au, Australian Department of Health
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
192
& Aging, www.health.gov.au, Communicable diseases Australia
www.health.gov.au/pubhlth/cdi/nndss.
Subject Hours A total of 48 hours, comprising lectures, tutorials
and practicals.
Assessment Practical assignments and test 50%, theory test and
examination 50%.
RBM1520 HUMAN BIOSCIENCE 2A
Campus St Albans, Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Students would normally be expected to
successfully complete RBM1510 Human Bioscience 1A.
Content This subject aims to enable the students to extend
theoretical knowledge of normal human structure and function
developed in RBM1510 Human Bioscience 1A by examining more
complex integrated functioning of the various systems in health and
comparing these with selected deviations from health. Students will
be introduced to fluid and electrolyte dynamics, the role of
membrane structures and capillary dynamics, and integration of the
neural, endocrine, circulatory, respiratory, and renal sub-systems in
maintaining fluid, electrolyte and acid-base balance. Metabolism,
body temperature control and nutrition are examined. Microbiology
is introduced.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Six hours per week comprising three hours of
lectures, three hours of laboratory and/or tutorials for one semester.
Assessment Test and examination, 55%; laboratory reports and
assignments, 45%.
RBM1524 FUNCTIONAL ANATOMY 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM1514 Functional Anatomy 1 and RBM1518
Human Physiology.
Co-requisite(s) RBM1528 Human Physiology 2.
Content Students study gross, histological and some surface
anatomy of the thorax, abdomen and pelvis. The following regions
are studied: thoracic cage, pleura and lungs, heart, mediastinal
structures, abdominal wall, pelvic girdle, gastrointestinal organs,
urinary organs and reproductive organs. The relevance of functional
anatomy to health and healing will be highlighted. Topics studied in
this unit of study may be interchanged with those of the unit of study
Functional Anatomy 2 and/or 3
Required Reading Moore, K.L. Clinically Oriented Anatomy,
Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, USA, 5th edition 2004.
Recommended Reading Mathers, L.H., Chase, R.A. Dolph, J.,
Glasgow, E.F., Gosling, J. Clinical Anatomy Atlas, Mosby, St Louis,
1996.
Class Contact Five hours per week, 3h lectures, 2h practicals.
Assessment Topic Test x 2, 10%; Practical exam, 35%; Theory
exam, 55%.
RBM1525 ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The aim of this subject is to build upon the introductory
knowledge of human structure and function covered in RBM1515
Anatomy and Physiology 1 in order for students to gain an
integrated understanding of human organs and body systems. The
cardiovascular, respiratory, urinary, gastrointestinal and
reproductive systems are placed in context with their overall
regulation and co-ordination via the neuro-endocrine system. This
provides an understanding of how homeostatic mechanisms regulate
variables such as blood pressure, blood gas status, fluid and
electrolyte balance and acid-base balance. The provision of
nutrients to the body by the gastrointestinal system is integrated with
the study of biochemistry and metabolism. An introduction to basic
concepts of inheritance is followed by the study of the male and
female reproductive systems.
Required Reading Marieb, E. N. (2003). Human anatomy and
physiology (6th ed., International). Benjamin Cummings Publishing.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures, tutorials and laboratory work.
Assessment Test and assignment (20%); laboratory work/test
(40%); theory examination (40%).
RBM1528 HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM1518 Physiology 1
Content This subject continues the study of the structure and
functions of the body, using homeostatic regulation of the internal
environment as the ongoing theme. The cardiovascular, respiratory,
urinary, gastrointestinal and reproductive systems are placed in
context with their overall regulation and co-ordination via the neuro-
endocrine system. This provides an understanding of how
homeostatic mechanisms regulate variables such as blood pressure,
blood gas status, acid-base balance, fluid and electrolyte balance
and blood glucose. The provision of nutrients to the body by the
gastrointestinal system is integrated with the study of biochemistry
and metabolism. An introduction to basic concepts of inheritance is
followed by the study of the male and female reproductive systems.
Topics studied in this subject may be interchanged with those of
RBM1518 Physiology 1.
Required Reading Seeley, Stephens & Tate 2003, Anatomy and
Physiology, 6th edn, McGraw-Hill.
Recommended Reading Silverthorn, D., 2001, Human Physiology:
An Integrated Approach, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Five hours per week for one semester, comprising
three hours of lectures, two hours of practical on alternate weeks
and one hour tutorial class per week
Assessment Practical reports/test and assignment/worksheets,
45%; test/examination, 55%.
RBM1530 HUMAN BIOSCIENCE 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM1519 Human Bioscience 1: Body Structure
and Function
Content In this subject, Human Bioscience 2 (Nursing), will be
continued in context with nursing in an integrated fashion. Anatomy,
physiology and basic concepts in chemistry and microbiology will
be taught in an integrated fashion. Content will expand previous
knowledge of the organization of the human body, structure and
functions of cells and the various types of tissues in the body. Further
concepts in chemistry, microbiology, infection control, homeostasis
and the role of the neuro-endocrine system in maintaining
equilibrium within the body are emphasized. The nervous system
and endocrine system are expanded to highlight their regulatory
role for control, co-ordination and communication. This will be
followed by discussions of other body systems emphasizing the
relationship between structure and function and their relevance to
Nursing.
Required Reading Marieb, E.N., 2004, Human Anatomy and
Physiology, 6th edn, Addison Wesley Longman, California; USA.
Available with five CDs on Interactive Physiology for Windows and
Macintosh.
Recommended Reading Martini, F., 2004, Fundamentals of
Anatomy and Physiology, 6th edn, Benjamin Cummings, Prentice
Hall.Tortora, G. J. and Grabowski, S. R., 2003, Principles of
Anatomy and Physiology, 10th edn, Wiley, New York. Seeley, R.R.,
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
193
Stephens, T. D. and Tate, P., 1998, Anatomy and Physiology, 4th
edn, McGraw-Hill, New York. Lee, G. & Bishop, B., 2002,
Microbiology and Infection Control for Health Professionals, 2nd
edn, Prentice Hall Australia. Black, J.G., 2002, Microbiology:
Principles and Explorations, 5th edn, Prentice Hall Inc.
Class Contact Four hours per week for 12 weeks of one semester;
comprising of two hours of lectures and two or three hours of
practical/tutorial class.
Assessment Practical/test/assignment,50%; Theory
test/examination, 50%
RBM1580 FUNCTIONAL ANATOMY 3
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM1514 or RBM1528
Content This subject introduces students to functional anatomy.
After a brief introduction to the bones, joints, muscles, vessels and
nerves of the body; students study gross anatomy using a regional
approach. The following regions are studied in detail: pelvic girdle,
gluteal region, hip, thigh, knee, leg, ankle and foot; pectoral girdle,
shoulder, arm, elbow, forearm, wrist and hand. The relevance of
functional anatomy to health and healing will be highlighted by
introducing students to gross anatomy, using models and wet
specimens, cross-sectional anatomy using xrays and scans; surface
anatomy; acupoint anatomy; kinesiology, gait analysis, posture,
massage, muscle testing, exercise, stretching and awareness
through movement and posture techniques. Topics studied in this
subject may be interchanged with those of the subject Functional
Anatomy 2 and/or 3.
Required Reading Lecture synopsis booklet for RBM1580;
Moore, K.L. Clinically Oriented Anatomy, 3rd Edition, Williams &
Wilkins, Baltimore, USA, 1992.
Class Contact Six hours per week for one semester; three hours
lecture, three hours practical/tutorial.
Assessment Theory examination 55%, practical examination and
oral examination 45%.
RBM1810 NUTRITIONAL BIOCHEMISTRY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Chemical bonding, water and buffers; structure-function
relationships of macromolecules, including carbohydrates, proteins,
lipids and nucleic acids; nutritional importance of essential amino
acids and lipids; the role of biomolecules in transport around the
body and the storage of energy; biomembranes; protein synthesis;
major metabolic pathways.
Required Reading Bloomfield, M M & Stephens, L J, 1996,
Chemistry and the Living Organism, 6th edn, John Wiley and Sons.
Recommended Reading Bender, D.A, 2003, Introduction to
Nutrition and Metabolism, 3rd edn, Taylor and Francis. Nelson D.L.
& Cox M.M., 2000, Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry, 3rd edn,
Worth. Holum J.R.,1994, Fundamentals of General, Organic and
Biological Chemistry, 5th edn, John Wiley and Sons.
Class Contact four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hour lecture and two hour tutorial.
Assessment Two assignments, 1500 words each 50%;
examination (3 hours), 50%.
RBM1820 NUTRITION, SOCIETY, AND COMMUNICATION
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Fundamental principles of nutrition science, including the
importance of the various food groups in a balanced diet; common
cultural dietary practices; effect of cultural and socio-economic
influences on dietary habits; common nutritional epidemics; media
and communication tools; strategies and attributes of nutrition health
campaigns; the potential impact of such campaigns; maintenance of
a media communication portfolio.
Required Reading Handbook of communication skills for first
year students in the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science.
Recommended Reading Walquist M., 2002, Food and
Nutrition, Australia and New Zealand, Allen and Unwin, NSW.
Bender, D.A., 2003, Introduction to Nutrition and Metabolism, 3rd
edn, Taylor and Francis.
Class Contact four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours lecture, two hours tutorial.
Assessment Oral presentation, 20%; assignments(two of 1500
words), 40%; examination, 40%.
RBM1830 DIET THERAPY 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Dietary assessment techniques, case history taking to
assess the dietary habits of clients, dietary nutrient requirements for
a balanced and healthy diet, basic counselling skills with respect to
the assessment and evaluation of dietary habits and the
communication of corrective strategies to clients, codes of ethical
practice in dealing with clients.
Required Reading Colbin A (1996) Food and Healing, 2nd
edition, USA, Ballantine. Thomas B, (2001) The Manual of Dietetic
Practice, 3 rd Ed, Oxford Blackwell Science.
Recommended Reading Barasi, M E (1997) Human Nutrition, a
Health Perspective, Edward Arnold. Garrow J T, James W P & Ralph
A (2000) Human Nutrition and Dietetics, 10th edition, Churchill
Livingstone. Pengelly A (1997) The Constituents of Medicinal Plants,
2nd edition, Glebe NSW, Sunflower Herbals.
Class Contact four hours/week for one semester comprising
3hours lecture, 1 hour tutorial
Assessment Examination (3 hour), 50%; Clinic observation
journal, 50%.
RBM1910 MICROBIOLOGY FOR CHINESE MEDICINE PRACTITIONERS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Types of micro-organism and their place in, on and
around us; how micro-organisms grow and how their growth is
prevented or controlled in clinical settings; micro-organisms as
agents of disease in the individual and in the population; how the
body defends itself against microbial invasion and the role of the
health practitioner in preventing the spread of disease.
Required Reading Lee, G., & Bishop, B. (2002). Microbiology
and infection control for health professionals (2nd ed.). Australia:
Prentice Hall.
Recommended Reading Black, J. G. (2005). Microbiology:
Principles and applications (6th ed.). Australia: Prentice-Hall.
Gardner, J. F., & Peel, M. J. (1998). Introduction to sterilization,
disinfection and infection control (3rd ed.). Marrickville, NSW:
Churchill Livingstone. Guidelines on Basic Training and Safety in
Acupuncture, (1996). Available from World Health Organization
Web site, www.who.int/medicines/library/trm/acupuncture/who-
edm-trm-99-1/who-edm-trm-99-1.pdf. Infection Control Guidelines
for Acupuncture – Consultation Draft, (2004). Available from
Chinese Medicine Registration Board Web site,
http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/current-
news/draft/InfectionControlGuidelinesAcupuncture_web.pdf.
Standards of Practice for Acupuncture. Health (Infectious Diseases)
Regulations, (1990~ Am.). Available from Government of Victoria
Web site, http://www.cmrb.vic.gov.au/registration/standards.html.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
194
Tortora, G. J., Funke, B. R., & Case, C. L. (2004). Microbiology: An
introduction (8th ed.). San Francisco: Benjamin Cumming.
Subject Hours Three hours per week or equivalent for one
semester comprising lectures, tutorials and laboratories. Students
should reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours
of at least 2-3 times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment Practical reports and laboratory work (30%); one
topic test (15%); one end-of-semester examination (55%). To obtain
at least a Pass in the unit, normally all components of assessment
must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (practical
reports, topic test) may not be re-attempted. Where the final
examination is failed, a supplementary examination may be offered.
The maximum possible mark on the supplementary examination will
be 50%. This unit is a hurdle requirement. All assessment items
address the CGA levels as indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
RBM2061 OCCUPATIONAL HYGIENE SCIENCE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Minimal requirement – completion of Diploma of
Occupational Health and Safety (or equivalent)
Content This unit covers and reviews basic chemical, microbial
and physical concepts, that relate to occupational hygiene.
Particular attention is given to sampling strategies and the
measurement of exposures that lead to energy transfer to organisms
or disruption of energy within organisms
Required Reading Ashton, I Gill, FS. 2000 Monitoring for Health
Hazards at Work. 3rd Ed. Blackwell Science Oxford Fisher J.
Arnold JRP. 2004 Instant Notes Chemistry for Biologists 2nd Ed.
Bios Scientific Publishers, Taylor and Francis Group.
Class Contact Three and half hour lecture equivalents for 12
weeks and one hour tutorial equivalents delivered over 6 weeks
online for one semester.
Assessment Assignments, tutorial topic questions and tests.
RBM2161 ERGONOMIC SCIENCE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Minimal requirement – Completion of Diploma of
Occupational Health and Safety (or equivalent)
Content Ergonomics utilizes a number of contemporary inter-
disciplines – anatomy and physiology, sociology and psychology,
physics and engineering etc., which will extend and merge together
toward solving ergonomic problems. Topics will include the
maintenance and distribution or impact of energy in the body,
application of forces in regard to human movement, the physiology
of sense organs, work design, man/machine information exchange;
psychological, social, and economic contributions to work. The
subject will also cover qualitative measurements, task analysis and
job design
Required Reading Bridger RS 2003. Introduction to ergonomics.
2nd edition Taylor and Francis, Kumar S. (Ed).2000
Multidisciplinary approach to rehabilitation. Butterworth – Heinmann
Woburn MA, Marieb EN 2003 Essentials of human anatomy &
physiology 7th ed Benjamin Cummings San Francisco, Wilson A.
2001. Medical terminology Tertiary Press Croydon, Victoria, Worth,
D.R. (ed) 2000. Moving in on occupational injury. Melbourne,
Butterworth-Heinemann
Recommended Reading Bohle, P. and Quinlan, M. 2000.
Managing occupational health and safety: a multidisciplinary
approach. South Yarra, Macmillian Publishers Australia Pty. Ltd,
Karwowski W. Marrus W.S. 2003 Occupational ergonomics:
Principles of work design (Principles and applications in
engineering). CRC Press, Kroemer KHE 1997 Fitting the task to the
human. Taylor and Francis Ltd, McCabe PT (ed) 2004
Contemporary ergonomics 2004. Taylor and Francis
Class Contact Three and half hour lecture equivalents for 12
weeks and one hour tutorial equivalents delivered online over 6
weeks for one semester.
Assessment Assignments, tutorial topic questions and tests.
RBM2260 DIET AND NUTRITION
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM1528 Human Physiology 2 or equivalent
Content This subject will demonstrate the relationships between
gastrointestinal function, diet and human health. The subject
examines the gastrointestinal structure and function, body
composition, anthropometry, chemical nature of the nutrients, and
their roles in body structure and function, energy intake and
regulation, metabolism of nutrients, nutritional requirements under
various environmental and physiological states, diet and disease,
dietary guidelines, hormonal control of digestion, vitamins as
antioxidants, nutrition and prevention of disease, role of intestinal
flora in nutrition.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Six hours per week for one semester comprising
three hours lecture, two hours laboratory and one hour tutorial.
Assessment Tests, 20%; laboratory reports, 30%; final
examination, 50%.
RBM2261 PUBLIC AND ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH
Campus Saint Albans
Prerequisite(s) Minimal requirement – Completion of Diploma of
Occupational Health and Safety (or equivalent) OR Completion of
Level 1 BSc Biomedical Sciences (or equivalent)
Content The decisions a society makes about its public and
environment health are based on scientific information to assess the
degree and distribution of its risks. These are measures of the
determinants of risks the strategies to reduce or remove risk reflect
the values of the society. These values are expressed in its customs
and laws. The sciences underlying the environmental and public
laws include not only biology and chemistry, but others such as
psychology, sociology and economics. The role of the public health
political process is critically dependent on measurements of health
and illness, the compromise between waste and the balance of
communal wealth with the perceived impacts of these in drafting
public and environmental health laws and their implementation.
Required Reading Baum F. 2002 The New Public Health. 2nd
Edition Oxford University Press Australia State of the Environment
2001.
Recommended Reading Irwin, A. 2001. Sociology and the
environment. A critical introduction to society, nature and
knowledge. Blackwell Publishing.Taylor S. Ed, (1999), Sociology:
Issues and debates, London
Class Contact Two hour online lecture and one hour tutorial
equivalents delivered online per week for one semester.
Assessment Assignments, tutorial topic questions and tests.
RBM2360 MEDICAL MICROBIOLOGY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM1528 Human Physiology 2 or equivalent.
Content Topics include: nature and classification of micro organisms
and their growth requirements, microbial genetics, normal flora, host
defence mechanisms, immunoresponse, host microbe interaction,
infection, sterilisation, disinfection, asepsis, antisepsis, sources and mode
of transfer of infectious agents and the compromised host, principles of
safe clinical practice, antibiotics, epidemiology, analytical methods and
food safety. To investigate application of microorganisms in medicine,
industry and biological work products.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
195
Required Reading Lee, G and Bishop, P 2002 Microbiology and
Infection Control for Health Professionals. Prentice Hall, Sydney;
Tortora, GJ, Fuuke, BR and Case, CL 2004 Microbiology: an
Introduction, 8th edition, Benjamin Cummings, San Francisco.
Recommended Reading Madigan, MT, Martinko, JM and
Parker, J 2003 Brock Biology of Micro organisms. Prentice Hall,
Upper Saddle River, NJ
Class Contact four hours per week for one semester, 2-3 hours
lectures, 1-2 hours tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Assignment, 15%; Oral presentation, 5%; Laboratory
reports, 20%; End of semester examination, 60%.
RBM2361 SAFETY PRACTICE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM2161 Ergonomic Science (equivalent) OR
Completion of Level 1 BSc Biomedical Sciences (or equivalent).
Content Skills in making the Occupational Health and Safety unit
of a business become part of the organization. These require that
there is sufficient understanding of ergonomics – to achieve optimum
productivity and cost efficiency and minimum risk of injury, quality
management, environmental affairs, behavioural safety and basic
financial management.
Required Reading Frick K Jensen PL Quinlan M Wilthagen T
Ed.2000 Systematic occupational health and safety management:
perspectives on an international development. Elsevier Science Ltd,
Oxford, Institute of Medicine. 2000. Safe work in the 21st century.
Education and training needs for next decades occupational safety
and health personnel. Washington, National Academy Press,
Manuele FA. 2003 On the Practice of Safety. 3rd Ed. Wiley-
Interscience. John Wiley and Sons Inc. Hoboken NJ Premium
Calculations Links
Recommended Reading Grovier T. 2001. A practical study of
argument. 5th ed. Belmont (California) Wadsworth Thompson
Learning, Kumar R. 1999 Research methodology; a step by step
guide for beginners. Melbourne, Addison Wesley Longman
Australia Pty. Ltd, Meredith, J.R. Mantel, J.S 2002 Project
management. 5th Edition, Brock, P 2001. Flawless consulting field
book and companion. San Francisco (Calif.), Jossey-Bass Pfeiffer.
Class Contact Two hour lecture and one hour tutorial equivalents
delivered online per week for one semester.
Assessment Assignments, tutorial topic questions and tests
RBM2517 HUMAN BIOSCIENCE 3
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM1530 Human Bioscience 2.
Content The presentation of major concepts and principles of
pathophysiology; illustrating their relationship to a range of
common/important acute and chronic illness. This subject supports
the topics in concurrent nursing units by providing a scientific basis
for understanding disease processes such as cellular injury,
inflammation, infection, and shock; by elucidating the underlying
mechanisms which results in clinical manifestations; and by
presenting the rationale for therapeutic interventions. Microbiology
will be discussed with reference to the growth and physiology of
micro-organisms, their pathogenic potential, infection control and
antibiotic treatment. The pathophysiological principles underlying
disorders of major body systems and subsystems will be discussed;
for example, in cardiovascular pathophysiology, shock, cardiac
failure, hypertension and atherosclerosis will be examined. Other
topics covered may include haematology, the respiratory system,
renal system, and fluid and electrolyte imbalances, however specific
systems in this subject may be interchanged with those in the fourth
semester subject as appropriate.
Required Reading Perth, C.M., 2002, Pathophysiology:
Concepts of Altered Health States, 6th edn, Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, Philadelphia or McCance, K.L., and Huether, S.E., 2002,
Pathophysiology: The Biologic Basis for Disease in Adults and
Children, 4th edn, Mosby, Missouri.
Recommended Reading Lee, G. & Bishop, P., 2002,
Microbiology and Infection Control for Health Professionals, 2nd
edn, Prentice Hall, Sydney. Bryant, B., Knights, K. & Salerno, E.,
2003, Pharmacology for Health Professionals, Mosby, Sydney.
Recommended Websites Department of Human Services, Vic
State Government: www.dhs.vic.gov.au; Australian Department of
Health & Ageing: www.health.gov.au; Communicable Diseases
Australia: www.health.gov.au/pubhlth/cdi/nndss; National Heart
Foundation: www.heartfoundation.com.au/; Diabetes Australia:
www.diabetesaustralia.com.au/da_national.htm; Anti-cancer
Council: www.accv.org.au/; Asthma Foundation:
www.asthma.org.au/; Australian Kidney Foundation:
www.kidney.org.au/.
Subject Hours 40 hours comprising three per week (3 hours of
lectures and two-hours of tutorial/laboratory) for eleven weeks.
Assessment Assignment and tutorial/laboratory reports, 40%;
examination, 60%.
RBM2524 FUNCTIONAL ANATOMY 3
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM1580.
Content The relevance of functional anatomy to health and healing
will be highlighted by studying to clinical anatomy, kinesiology,
biomechanics, gait analysis, posture, massage, muscle testing,
exercise, stretching, basic soft tissue techniques, and awareness
through movement and posture. There will be a particular emphasis
on muscle testing and surface anatomy. Topics studied in this subject
may be interchanged with those of the subject RBM1514 Functional
Anatomy 1 and RBM1580 Functional Anatomy 2.
Required Reading Moore, K.L. Clinically Oriented Anatomy, 3rd
Edition, Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, USA, 1992.
Class Contact Sixteen hours for one semester.
Assessment Theory examination 55%, practical examination and
oral examination 45%
RBM2527 HUMAN BIOSCIENCE 4
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM2517 Human Bioscience 3
Content This subject furthers the understanding of
pathophysiological principles and disease processes introduced in
SBM2517 Bioscience 3. Topics will include neoplasia, and
disorders of the nervous, endocrine and musculoskeletal systems and
gastrointestinal tract. Disorders of the reproductive tract including
infertility will be presented. Important genetic disorders such as
cystic fibrosis and their modes of inheritance will also be examined.
But this content may be interchanged with systems listed in the third
semester subject.
Required Reading Perth, C.M., 2002, Pathophysiology:
Concepts of Altered Health States, 6th edn, Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, Philadelphia. or McCance, K.L., and Huether, S.E., 2002,
Pathophysiology: The Biologic Basis for Disease in Adults and
Children, 4th edn, Mosby, Missouri.
Recommended Reading Lee, G. & Bishop, P., 2002,
Microbiology and Infection Control for Health Professionals, 2nd
edn, Prentice Hall, Sydney. Bryant, B., Knights, K. & Salerno, E.,
2003, Pharmacology for Health Professionals, Mosby, Sydney.
Recommended Websites Department of Human Services, Vic State
Government: www.dhs.vic.gov.au; Australian Department of Health
& Ageing: www.health.gov.au; Communicable Diseases Australia:
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
196
www.health.gov.au/pubhlth/cdi/nndss; National Heart Foundation:
www.heartfoundation.com.au/; Diabetes Australia:
www.diabetesaustralia.com.au/da_national.htm; Anti-cancer
Council: www.accv.org.au/; Asthma Foundation:
www.asthma.org.au/; Australian Kidney Foundation:
www.kidney.org.au/.
Subject Hours 40 hours per semester of lectures and tutorial.
Assessment Test, 30%; examination, 70%.
RBM2528 PATHOPHYSIOLOGY IN MIDWIFERY
Campus St Albans
Pre-requisite(s) Anatomy & Physiology 1 & 2
Content This unit of study will introduce pathophysiological
concepts, principles and disease processes, illustrating their
relationship to a range of common and important acute and chronic
disease conditions, relevant to midwifery practice. The aims of the
subject are: to provide a scientific basis for understanding disease
processes such as cellular injury, inflammation and neoplasia; to
elucidate the underlying mechanisms which result in clinical
manifestation; and to present the rationales for therapeutic
interventions. Microbiology will be discussed with reference to the
pathogenic potential and infection control of microorganisms. The
pathophysiological principles underlying disorders of body systems
will be discussed with an emphasis on midwifery; for example, in
cardiovascular pathophysiology: hypertensive disorders of
pregnancy and shock associated with blood loss will be examined.
Other topics to be covered will include disorders of: blood (eg.
anemias) and body defences (eg. incompatibilities), the renal
system, fluid and electrolytes, the reproductive system (eg. sexually
transmitted diseases, infertility), endocrinology, metabolism (eg.
diabetes) and nutrition associated with pregnancy. Genetic and
developmental abnormalities of the foetus will also be examined.
Required Reading Porth, C.M. 2005, Pathophysiology: Concepts
of Altered Health States, 7th ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins,
Philadelphia.
Recommended Reading Lee, G., & Bishop, B., Microbiology
and Infection Control for Health Professionals; (2nd Ed) Pearson
Education, Australia; 2002.
Recommended websites Department of Human Services,
VictorianState Government – www.dhs.vic.gov.au, Australian
Department of Health & Aging: www.health.gov.au, Communicable
diseases Australia, www.health.gov.au/pubhlth/cdi/nndss,
National Heart Foundation www.heartfoundation.com.au/.
Diabetes Australia www.diabetesaustralia.com.au/da_national.htm.
Anti-cancer council www.accv.org.au/
Asthma Foundation www.asthma.org.au/.
Australian Kidney Foundation www.kidney.org.au/.
Subject Hours 56 hours comprising lectures (3 hours/week);
laboratories/tutorial (1 hour/week). Laboratory report – 15%, Test –
15%, Examination – 70%.
RBM2530 PATHOPHYSIOLOGY 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM1520 or RBM1528 or equivalent
Content This subject aims to provide students with an
understanding of the control and co-ordination of body systems and
the effects of disturbances to body functions. The mental status and
some psychosocial factors associated with these processes will be
discussed. Students are introduced to major pathologic processes
which may affect all parts of the body. Topics include tissue injury,
inflammation and repair, normal immune function and deviations
from normal, cancer from the molecular level to the whole person,
neural and endocrine dysfunction including impaired cognition such
as dementia and impaired co-ordination and control. In the
laboratory, students will be introduced to basic laboratory
techniques and apply scientific principles to the assessment of
dysfunction in humans. Students are also introduced to the research
literature, research techniques and the communication of scientific
information by a series of presentations. There may be some
interchange of topic material relating to specific body systems
between RBM2530 and RBM2540 and the specific diseases chosen
to illustrate major processes may vary as appropriate.
Required reading Rubin E, Gorstein F, Rubin R, Schwarting R
and Strayer D (eds). (2005). Pathology: clinicopathologic
foundations of medicine. (4th edition). Lippincott Williams and
Wilkins, Philadelphia.
Recommended Reading Selected material drawn from the
following: Govan ADT, Macfarlane PS and Callender R, 1995,
Pathology illustrated, Edinburgh, Churchill-Livingstone.
Chandrasoma P and Taylor CR, 1995, Concise pathology (2nd
edition), Lange. Cotran RS, Kumar V and Robbins SL, 1994,
Robbins pathologic basis of disease (5th edition), WB Saunders.
Guyton, AC, Textbook of Medical Physiology, (8th ed), WB
Saunders, Philadelphia, 1991. McCance KL and Huether SE, 2002,
Pathophysiology: the Biologic Basis for Disease in Adults and
Children (2nd edition), Mosby. General and Systematic Pathology,
Edinburgh, Churchill-Livingstone, Medical Journal of Australia,
Modern Medicine and other journal literature provided by lecturers.
Class Contact Seven hours per week comprising three hours of
lectures, three hours of laboratory and one one-hour tutorial for one
semester.
Assessment Test and examinations, 50%; practical work, 35%;
Assignment, 15%. Students are required to obtain a satisfactory
grade in all components of the assessment to obtain a pass grade.
RBM2540 PATHOPHYSIOLOGY 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM2530 Pathophysiology 1 or equivalent
Content This subject primarily examines the effects of dysfunction in
particular human body systems, drawing on the knowledge of basic
pathological processes and overall regulation of the human body
discussed in RBM2530. Overall organ and system dysfunction such
as hepatic, renal, cardiovascular and respiratory failure will be
discussed. Specifc disorders of the following systems will also be
discussed: cardiovascular, renal, respiratory, blood, reproductive,
gastrointestinal and musculoskeletal. Major disease types and
processes such as circulatory shock, atherosclerosis, disorders of
acid-base balance and sexually transmitted diseases will be
examined and the psychosocial effects of such disorders will be
included. Specific diseases will be chosen to illustrate the major
concepts as appropriate. Students are introduced to further
techniques for assessment of disorders, which may include physical
assessements, spirometry, electocardiography and various
biochemical analyses. There may be some interchange of topic
material relating to specific body systems between RBM2530 and
RBM2540 and the specific
diseases chosen to illustrate major processes may vary as
appropriate.
Required Reading Rubin E, Gorstein F, Rubin R, Schwarting R
and Strayer D (eds). (2005). Pathology: clinicopathologic
foundations of medicine. (4th edition). Lippincott Williams and
Wilkins, Philadelphia.
Recommended Reading Selected material drawn from the
following: Govan ADT, Macfarlane PS and Callender R, 1995,
Pathology illustrated, Edinburgh, Churchill-Livingstone.
Chandrasoma P and Taylor CR, 1995, Concise pathology (2nd
edition), Lange. Cotran RS, Kumar V and Robbins SL, 1994,
Robbins pathologic basis of disease (5th edition), WB Saunders.
Guyton, AC, Textbook of Medical Physiology, (8th ed), WB
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
197
Saunders, Philadelphia, 1991. McCance KL and Huether SE, 2002,
Pathophysiology: the Biologic Basis for Disease in Adults and
Children (4th edition), Mosby. JB Lippincott. Underwood JCE, 1992,
General and systematic pathology, Edinburgh, Churchill-Livingstone,
Medical Journal of Australia, Modern Medicine and other journal
literature provided by lecturers.
Class Contact Seven hours per week comprising three hours of
lectures, three hours of laboratory and one one-hour tutorial for one
semester.
Assessment Test and examinations, 50%; practical work, 35%,
assignment 15%. Students are required to obtain a satisfactory
grade in all components of the assessment to obtain a pass grade.
RBM2560 MEDICAL BIOCHEMISTRY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM1518 Human Physiology 1, RCS1120
Chemistry for Biomedical Sciences B.
Content The aim of this subject is provide a foundation in
biochemical principles with special emphasis on medical conditions
and applications. Firstly, foundations of biochemistry will be covered,
e.g. biological buffers, structures of amino acids, nucleotides,
carbohydrates, lipids, protein and nucleic acids, vitamins and cofactors.
The major biochemical pathways will be covered such as glycolysis,
TCA cycle, oxidative phosphorylation, gluconeogenesis, lipid, amino
acid and nucleotide metabolism. The biochemistry of diseases such as
cystic fibrosis, phenylketonuria (PKU), myasthenia gravis, thalassemia,
anorexia nervosa and heart disease will be examined. Other topics
covered will be DNA replication, RNA transcription, gene regulation,
genetic diseases and their diagnosis neurotransmitter metabolism,
action and detoxification of drugs/toxins and hormonal regulation.
Clinically measured enzymes for diseases will be studied and assayed.
Required Reading Marks, D.B., Marks, A.D. and Smith, C.M.,
1996, Basic Medical Biochemistry: A Clinical Approach, Williams
and Wilkins. Gaw, A., Cowan, R.A., O’Reilly, D. St J., Stewart,
M.J. and Shepherd, J., 1996, Clinical Biochemistry, Churchill
Livingstone.
Class Contact Five hours per week, comprising two hours of
lectures and three hours of practicals/tutorials for one semester.
Assessment Tutorials and assignments, 25%; practical work
(including test), 25%; final examination 50%.
RBM2575 PHYTOPHARMACEUTICS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM1525 Anatomy and Physiology 2
Content Basic Phytochemistry and Phytopharmacology;
Pharmacological Activities – Chinese natural drugs acting on the
various body systems; Active Constituents of the Chinese pharmacy;
Toxic dosages – LD 50 concept; toxic dosages of the Scheduled
Poisons List – Chinese herbs; poisoning records and Chinese
Medical antidotes.
Required Reading Bisset, N.G. (Ed.), Herbal Drugs and
Phytopharmaceuticals, CRC Press, London. Kanagaratnum, N.,
1999, Botany Monograph, St Albans, School of Life Sciences and
Technology, Victoria University.
Recommended Reading Acts of the Victorian Parliament, 1994,
Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, The Law Printer, Melbourne. Chang,
H.M. and But, P., P-H Eds, 1987, Pharmacology and Applications of
Chinese Materica Medica, Vol. 1 and Vol. 2, World Scientific
Publishing. Commonwealth of Australia, 1989, Therapeutic Goods Act
1989, AGPS, Canberra. Duke, J.A., 1992, Handbook of Biologically
Active Phytochemicals and Their Activities, CRC Press, London.
Harborne, J.B. and Baxter, H., 1993, Phytochemical Dictionary. A
Handbook of Bioactive Compounds from Plants, Taylor and Francis,
London. Hostettman, K., Ed., 1995, Phytochemistry of Plants used in
Traditional Medicine, Clarendon Press, London.
Class Contact The equivalent of two hours per week over two
semesters consisting of lectures, tutorials and workshops.
Assessment One assignment, 40%; final examination, 60%. A
pass must be gained in each component of assessment.
RBM2580 ADVANCED FUNCTIONAL ANATOMY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM 1524
Content The relevance of functional and clinical anatomy to health
and healing will be highlighted through a detailed study of the
mechanics and muscles affecting the movement of joints in the body.
This information will be presented and highlighted through the study
of a number of different areas including kinesiology, biomechanics,
gait analysis, posture, massage, muscle testing, exercise, stretching,
basic soft tissue techniques, and awareness through movement and
posture. There will be a particular emphasis on muscle testing and
surface anatomy. Topics included in the subject may be
interchanged with those of the subject RBM 1514 Functional
Anatomy 1 and RBM 1524 Functional Anatomy 2
Required Reading. Behnke, R.S., 2000, Kinetic Anatomy,
Human Kinetics Australia.
Class Contact Six hours per week for one semester comprising
three one-hour lectures and one three-hour tutorial/practical session
Assessment Theory examination 55%, practical examination
20%, written assignment 25%
RBM2610 BIOMEDICAL SCIENCES AND SOCIETY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Completion of a full first year of tertiary study
which must include two semester units in biology/human
physiology/human bioscience and two semester units in either
psychology or communications or foundations/knowledge.
Content The subject examines images of the human body in society
with particular reference to health and disease. There are several
themes within this subject. The first theme examines how biomedical
science defines health and disease, sanity and mental illness and
influences our concepts of the human body. The second theme
provides a brief introduction to the evolution of humans and the
evolution of consciousness, drawing upon Darwinian theory.
Questions such as what it means to be human, what consciousness
is and whether there are biologically determined roles for men and
women may be discussed. The human genome project will be
examined. The third theme is the current image of the human body
in society with respect to what is considered healthy and what is
considered to be acceptable modification of the human body.
Topics which may be discussed here include body image disorders,
cloning, tissue engineering, and xenotransplantation.
Required Reading Aries, P. and Duby, G. (general eds) 1988-9,
A History of Private Life vols I-IV, Belknap Harvard, Cambridge,
Massachusetts. Bleier, R. 1984, Science and Gender: A Critique of
Biology and Its Theories on Women, Pergamon Press. Carmichael,
A.G. and Ratzan, R.M. (eds) 1991, Medicine in Literature and Art,
Koneman, Koln. Feher, M., Naddaff, R. and Tazi, N. 1989,
Fragments for a History of the Human Body, Parts 1-3, Zone, New
York. Fisher, S. 1986, In the Patient’s Best Interest: Women and the
Politics of Medical Decisions, Rutgers University Press, New
Brunswick. Richards, G. 1987, Human Evolution: An Introduction for
the Behavioural Sciences, Routledge and Kegan Paul, London.
Tanner, N. 1981, On Becoming Human, Cambridge University
Press, Cambridge.
Class Contact Four hours per week comprising two one hour
lectures and one two hour tutorial/seminar session for one semester.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
198
Assessment Two essays, 30% each; one tutorial
presentation/debate, 25%; tutorial attendance and participation,
15%.
RBM2750 NUTRITION
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RBF1310 Biology 2 or equivalent. Students would
be expected to have studied or undertake concurrent study in
RBF2520 Biochemistry 1.
Content The subject aims to provide an introduction to the
principles of human nutrition as a background for further studies in
Food Technology (units RBF3731 and RBF3732), to enable students
to appreciate the nutritional consequences and responsibilities
associated with the provision, processing and development of food
and food products. This subject examines: body composition and
anthropometry; nutrient requirements and role in body structure and
function; energy intake and expenditure; food and nutrient supply;
nutritional requirements under different environmental and
physiological states; diet and health; dietary guidelines; dietary
requirements and special dietary foods.
Required Reading Whitney, E.N. and Rolfes, S.R., 1998,
Understanding Nutrition, 8th edn, West Publishing Co.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
three hours of lectures and one hour of tutorials.
Assessment Assignments, 30%; final examination, 70%.
RBM2800 CARDIORESPIRATORY AND RENAL PHYSIOLOGY
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RBM1518 Human Physiology 1 and RBM1528
Human Physiology 2.
Content This subject aims to provide students with an
understanding of the function, control and co-ordination of the
cardiovascular, respiratory and renal systems. The subject will
examine cardiac, pulmonary and renal function and normal
circulatory, respiratory and renal dynamics. An overview of the
co-ordination of these systems will be achieved through an
examination of the mechanisms involved in maintaining fluid and
electrolyte balance including; the role of membrane structures and
capillary dynamics, and the integration of neural, endocrine function
in the control of cardiovascular, respiratory and renal systems.
Homeostatic control of the cardiac, pulmonary and renal systems
will also be examined by investigating their responses to stresses,
including exercise, high altitude, increased temperature, spaceflight
and aging.
Required Reading Beachey, W. 1998, Respiratory Core
Anatomy and Physiology: Foundations for a Clinical Practice,
Mosby.
Recommended Reading West, I.B., Respiratory Essentials,
Mosby Vander, A.S., Neural Physiology, McGraw-Hill. Berne &
Levy, Cardiovascular Physiology. Mosby Astrand. Text book of
Work Physiology – Human Kinetics.
Class Contact Six hours per week for one semester comprising
three hours of lectures and three hours of practical and/or tutorial
per week.
Assessment Semester examination, 60%; practical reports, 20%;
assignment, 20%.
RBM2850 NUTRITIONAL THERAPEUTICS A
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM1820 Nutrition, Society and Communication:
RBM1810 Nutritional Biochemistry: RBM1830 Diet Therapy 1.
Content Normal GIT function; signs and pathophysiology of GIT
dysfunction; lifestyle effects on normal function; effects of stress on
function; pathogenesis of untreated signs and symptoms; nutritional
support of liver function; clinical laboratory evaluation of GIT;
nutrients required for normal GIT function; use of dietary
supplements to restore normal GIT function; contraindications to the
use of food supplements.
Required Reading Jamison, J.R., 2004, Clinical Guide to
Nutrition and Dietary Supplements, Churchill Livingstone, Melb.
Toohey, L. and Krettle, M.S., 1999, Nutritional Physiology: Clinical
Applications and Scientific Research, Healthquest Publishing.
Recommended Reading Gropper, S.S., Smith, J.L, Groff, J.L.,
2006, Advanced Nutrition and Human Metabolism, 4th edn,
Wadsworth. G. Thomas, B. (ed), 2001, The Manual of Dietetic
Practice, 3rd edn, Oxford, Blackwell Science. Nichols, T., 1999,
Functional Medicine Adjunctive Nutritional Support, Irritable Bowel
Syndrome, Clinical Protocols, USA, Institute of Functional Medicine.
Detoxification: A Clinical Monograph, USA, Institute of Functional
Medicine textbook.
Class Contact four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours lecture, two hours tutorial/workshop.
Assessment Two assignments, 2000 words each , 50%; case
history, 50%.
RBM2855 NUTRITIONAL THERAPEUTICS B
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM 1830 Diet Therapy 1; RBM 2850 Nutritional
Therapeutics A.
Content Symptoms of system dysfunction in the following body
systems – skin, respiratory system, nervous system, circulatory
system, genetio-urinary system, immune system, musculoskeletal
system and hormonal system; using observation and evaluating case
histories; working from case history records; identification of
nutritional deficiency within a patients case history; prioritising
treatment, including the use of dietary supplements; lifestyle effects
that may flow from the treatment; lifestyle effects on normal function.
Required Reading Jamison, J.R., 2004, Clinical Guide to
Nutrition and Dietary Supplements, Churchill Livingstone, Melb.
Pizzono, J., Murray, M., Joiner-Bey, H., 2002, The Clinician’s
Handbook of Nutritional Medicine, Churchill Livingstone. Toohey, L.,
Krettle, M.S., 1999, Nutritional Physiology: Clinical Applications
and Scientific Research, Healthquest Publishing.
Recommended Reading Gropper, S.S., Smith, J.L, Groff, J.L.,
2006, Advanced Nutrition and Human Metabolism, 4th edn,
Wadsworth. G. Thomas, B.(ed), 2001, The Manual of Dietetic
Practice, 3rd edn, Oxford, Blackwell Science. Werbach, M.R.,
1996, Nutritional Influence on Illness, 2nd edn, Third Line Press,
USA. Lopez, D.A., Williams, R.M., Miehike, M., 1994, Enzymes:
The Fountain of Life, USA, Neville Press.
Class Contact four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours lecture, two hours tutorial/workshop.
Assessment Examination (3 hours), 50%; case history, 50%.
RBM2910 PATHOPHYSIOLOGY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Human Bioscience 2: Body Structure and Function
Content In this subject major concepts and principles of
pathophysiology illustrating their relationship to a range of
common/important acute and chronic illnesses will be presented.
This subject supports the topic in concurrent nursing units by
providing a scientific basis for understanding disease processes
such as cellular injury, inflammation, infection, neoplasia and shock;
by elucidating the underlying mechanisms which result in clinical
manifestations; and by presenting the rationales for therapeutic
interventions. Microbiology will be discussed with reference to the
growth and physiology of micro-organisms, their pathogenic
potential and infection control. The pathophysiological principles
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
199
underlying disorders of body systems will be discussed; for example,
in cardiovascular pathophysiology, shock, cardiac failure,
hypertension and atherosclerosis, will be examined. Other topics
covered will include disorders of the haematological,
immunological, respiratory, renal, nervous, endocrine,
gastrointestinal, musculoskeletal and reproductive systems; genetic
disorders such as cystic fibrosis; and conditions resulting in
acid/base and fluid and electrolyte imbalances. The
epidemiological basis for distribution of disease conditions in
population sub-groups (eg. Indigenous, migrant, socio-economic)
will also be examined.
Required Reading Porth, C.M. (2002). Pathophysiology:
Concepts of Altered Health States. (6th Ed). Lippincott, Williams and
Wilkins, Philadelphia, USA. OR McCance, K.L. and Huether, S.E.
(2002). Pathophysiology; the Biological Basis for Disease in Adults
and Children. (4th Ed). Mosby, USA.
Recommended Reading
Marieb, E.N. (2004). Human Anatomy and Physiology. (6th Ed),
California, USA: Addison Wesley Longman. Lee, G. & Bishop, B.
(2002). Microbiology and Infection Control for Health Professionals.
(2nd Ed) Australia: Pearson Education. Bryant, B., Knights, K &
Salerno, E. (2003), Pharmacology for Health Professionals, Mosby,
Sydney.
Recommended Websites Department of Human Services, Vic.
State Government:www.dhs.vic.gov.au, Australian Department of
Health & Ageing: www.health.gov.au, Communicable diseases
Australia www.health.gov.au/pubhlth/cdi/nndss, National Heart
Foundation www.heartfoundation.com.au/, Diabetes Australia
www.diabetesaustralia.com.au/da_national.htm, Anti-cancer
council www.accv.org.au/, Asthma Foundation
www.asthma.org.au/, Australian Kidney Foundation
www.kidney.org.au/.
Subject Hours Equivalent of 80 hours organised according to
teaching mode used. Delivery of this subject is negotiated in relation
to the students’ practicum commitments.
Assessment Laboratory report and topic tests – 40%, examination
– 60%.
RBM2911 PATHOPHYSIOLOGY 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM1525 Anatomy And Physiology; Or
Equivalent.
Content Emphasis on fundamental pathophysiological processes
affecting body and cellular systems; introduction to acute and
chronic conditions and common and rare disease profiles;
presentation and aetiology of common conditions across the
lifespan; treatment regimes and outcomes; pertinent medical
terminology and medical case note reporting.
Required Reading Bullock, S., & Rosendahl, P. (1992).
Pathophysiology: Adaptations and alterations in function. Boston:
Little-Brown. Gascoigne, S. (1994). The manual of conventional
medicine for alternative practitioners. Surrey: Jime Press. McCance,
K., & Huether, S. (1994). Pathophysiology: The biologic basis for
disease in adults and children. St. Louis, MO: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Galbraith, A, Bullock, S., & Minias, E.
(2004). Fundamentals of pharmacology: A text for nurses and allied
health professionals (4th. ed.). Australia: Pearson Ed. Lumley, J.
(1990). Surface anatomy: anatomical basis of clinical examination.
New York. Churchill Livingstone. Moore, K. L. (1992). Clinically
oriented anatomy (3rd. ed.). Baltimore. Williams & Wilkins.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures, tutorials and practicals. Students should
reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at
least three times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment Two assignments (1500 words each) (10% each);
one 2-hour examination (30%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary
examination may be offered. The maximum possible mark on the
supplementary examination will be 50%. This unit is a hurdle
requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as
indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
RBM2912 PATHOPHYSIOLOGY 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM2911 Pathophysiology 1; or equivalent
Content Fundamental pathophysiological processes affecting body
and cellular systems. Emphasis on acute and chronic conditions and
common and rare disease profiles; presentation and aetiology of
common conditions across the lifespan; treatment regimes and
outcomes. Pertinent medical terminology and medical case note
reporting.
Required Reading Bullock, S., & Rosendahl, P. (1992).
Pathophysiology: Adaptations and alterations in function. Boston:
Little-Brown. Gascoigne, S. (1994). The manual of conventional
medicine for alternative practitioners. Surrey: Jime Press. McCance,
K., & Huether, S. (1994). Pathophysiology: The biologic basis for
disease in adults and children. St. Louis, MO: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Galbraith, A, Bullock, S., & Minias, E.
(2004). Fundamentals of pharmacology: A text for nurses and allied
health professionals (4th. ed.). Australia: Pearson Ed. Lumley, J.
(1990). Surface anatomy: anatomical basis of clinical examination.
New York. Churchill Livingstone. Moore, K. L. (1992). Clinically
oriented anatomy (3rd. ed.). Baltimore. Williams & Wilkins.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures, tutorials and practicals. Students should
reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at
least three times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment Two assignments (1500 words each) (10% each);
one 2-hour examination (30%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary
examination may be offered. The maximum possible mark on the
supplementary examination will be 50%. This unit is a hurdle
requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as
indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
RBM3061 EPIDEMIOLOGY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM2061 Occupational hygiene Science and
RBM2161 Ergonomic Science or equivalent subjects OR Completion
of Level 1 BSc Biomedical Sciences (or equivalent)
Content This unit will introduce basic concepts of epidemiology. Some
statistics will be covered. – Asking a question – what information do
you need?, designing a study, testing hypotheses, designing forms
and questionnaires for studies, setting up the data file, summarising
data, from sample to population, testing hypotheses about
independence, testing hypotheses about dependence, measuring
association.
The subject topics will describe types of epidemiological study, the
research design and the advantages and disadvantages of each
study type and covers the measurement of indicators of disease.
Other topics covered include reviewing studies that show the
causative factors relating to specific diseases; measurement of the
association between causative factors and disease; the advantages
and disadvantages of different types of epidemiological study;
epidemiological findings to show the degree of risk associated with
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
200
exposure to specific hazards in industry; and the impact of chance,
bias and confounding on findings of epidemiological studies.
Required Reading Rothman, K.J., 2002, Epidemiology. An
Introduction, Oxford University Press, Fink A 2002 How to design
survey studies. 2nd Edition Sage Publications, Graziano A.M. and
Raulin M.L. 1999. 4th ed. Research method; a process of inquiry.
Pearson Allyn & Bacon
Recommended Reading Beaglehole, R., Bonita, R. and
Kjellstrom, T., Basic Epidemiology World Health Organisation.
Olsen, J. and, Mertetti, F., 1991, Searching for causes of Work-
Related Diseases. An Introduction to Epidemiology at the Work Site,
Oxford University Press. Hennekens, C.H. (ed), Buring, J.E., 1987,
Epidemiology in Medicine, Little, Brown and Company. Rowland,
D.T. 2003 Demographic methods and concepts. Oxford University
Press
Class Contact Two-hour lecture and one hour tutorial equivalents
delivered online per week for one semester.
Assessment Assignment, tutorial topic questions and test
RBM3161 TOXICOLOGY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM2061 Occupational Hygiene Science (or an
equivalent subject) OR RBM2530 Pathophysiology 1 (or equivalent)
Content Topics covered in this subject include mechanisms of
action, biotransformation pathways and metabolic bioactivation,
toxicokinetics and protection of cellular toxicity by antioxidants.
Descriptions of genotoxins, teratogens and carcinogens are included
with topics showing specific organ toxins.
Required Reading Klaassen CD Watkins JB 2003. Casarett and
Doull's essentials of toxicology. McGraw-Hill Companies Inc.,
Boelsterli UA 2003 Mechanistic Toxicology: the molecular basis of
how chemicals disrupt biological targets. Taylor and Francis
London.
Recommended Reading Ballantyne B Marrs TC Syversen T. Ed
2002. General and Applied Toxicology 2nd Ed. Macmillan
Reference Ltd; London, Klaassen CD 2001.Casarett and Doull's
Toxicology: The basic science of poisons 6th Edition Ed McGraw-
Hill
Class Contact Two hour online lecture and one hour tutorial
equivalents delivered online per week for one semester.
Assessment Based on assignments, tutorial topic questions and
essays.
RBM3171 ENDOCRINOLOGY AND REPRODUCTION
Campus Footscray Park, St Albans.
Prerequisite(s) RBM1528 Human Physiology 2 or equivalent
Content This subject examines the mechanisms by which hormones
exert their effects on metabolism, renal function, reproductive
function and growth. This subject encompasses the basic principles
involved in understanding the mechanisms of hormone action and
specifically concentrates on the following areas. Mechanisms of
hormone action: peptide hormones and steroids; hormonal control
of metabolism; the importance of renal function in maintaining
homeostasis; reproductive endocrinology; growth and development;
hormonal and metabolic control of growth.
Required Reading Greenspan, F.S. and Baxter, J.D. 1994, Basic
and Clinical Endocrinology, 4th edn, Appleton and Lange.
Class Contact Two hours per week for one semester comprising
20 hours of lectures and 6 hours of practical work.
Assessment Based on assignments, practical reports and an end-
of-semester examination.
RBM3261 RISK MANAGEMENT
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM2261 Public and Environmental Health (or
equivalent)
Content The terms of risk analysis are specifically defined to show
that risk this is a process of risk assessment as well as risk
management. For risk management the risk aversion and risk
assessment need to be qualified as being distinct from risk
assessments that are more quantified. With regard to risk
management there are economic – to include the more valuable,
beneficial, cost effective, activities; personal – try to avoid those
activities which you did not prefer and; communal – what is done is
consistent with what the community expects (risks in the case of risk
management.
These definitions levels are examined in this subject.
Required Reading Rowe, P. 1988 The anatomy of risk. Malabar
(Florida) Krieger Publishing Co. Inc, Klaassen CD Watkins JB
Casarett and Doull's essentials of toxicology. 2003, McGraw-Hill
Companies Inc.
Recommended Reading Ridley, J. and Channing, J. 1999 Risk
management for occupational health and safety. Butterworth and
Heinemann, Sadhra S.S. Rumpal K.G. Sadhra S.S. 1999
Occupational health: Risk Assessment and management. Blackwell
Science Inc., Johnstone, R. 2004 Occupational health and safety
law and policy., 2nd Ed. LBC Information Services. North Ryde,
Perrow C. (1999) Normal Accidents: Living with high risk
technologies. Princeton University Press
Class Contact Two hour lecture and one hour tutorial equivalents
delivered online per week for one semester.
Assessment Based on assignments, and tutorial topic questions
RBM3264 ADVANCED NERVE AND MUSCLE PHYSIOLOGY
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RBM2800 Cardiorespiratory and Renal
Physiology or equivalent
Content The aim of the subject is to examine in detail the
mechanisms of nerve and muscle function. Topics include: physico-
chemical principles underlying nerve and muscle function; behaviour
of excitable cells; mechanisms of muscle contraction; neural
influences over muscles and muscle fibre types; muscle fibre
recruitment; metabolic processes in active muscle; neuromuscular
fatigue; co-ordinating motor activity, and diseases of the nervous
and muscular systems. Research techniques in nerve and muscle
physiology.
Required Reading Nerve and muscle physiology section of any
basic physiology textbook.
Recommended Reading McComas, A.J. 1996, Skeletal Muscle:
Form and Function, Human Kinetics. Astrand, P.O., 2004, Textbook
of Work Physiology, Human Kinetics.
Class Contact Two hours of lectures, one one-hour tutorial and
three hours of practical work each week for one semester.
Assessment Based on laboratory reports, tutorial assignments and
an end-of-semester examination.
RBM3361 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY PROJECT
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM2361 Safety Practice OR Completion of level
2 Biomedical Sciences (or equivalent)
Content This subject is based on setting up, conducting and
successfully completing, an occupational health and safety project.
Methodologies in ergonomics, incident investigation, occupational
hygiene, risk analysis and management, system safety etc., are
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
201
demonstrated through problem formulation and problem definition,
project management, publication of project outcomes.
Required Reading Hignett, K.C. 1996. Practical safety and
reliability assessment. London E&F.N. Spon., Hurley, PJ 2003 A
concise guide to logic 8th ed, Belmont (California), Wadsworth
Publishing Co.
Recommended Reading Baum, F. 2002. The new public health.
Melbourne. Oxford University Press, Beck, U. 1998 The brave new
world of work. Open University Press, Bohle, P. and Quinlan, M.
2000. Managing occupational health and safety: a multidisciplinary
approach. South Yarra, Macmillian Publishers Australia Pty. Ltd..,
Gunningham, N. and Johnstone, R. 1999. Regulating workplace
safety. Melbourne, Oxford University PressHopkins, A. 1995.
Making safety work. Sydney, Allen and Unwin Pty. Ltd.., Irwin, A.
2001. Sociology and the environment. A critical introduction to
society, nature and knowledge. Blackwell Publishing., Johnstone, R.
2004 Occupational health and safety law and policy., 2nd Ed. LBC
Information Services. North Ryde (Sydney)
Class Contact One hour lecture and case study tutorial equivalents
delivered online per week for the first half of a semester. The final
half of the semester will concern student completion of their project
reports.
Assessment Based on tutorial topic questions assignments and a
project report (50%).
RBM3515 CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY AND PATHOPHYSIOLOGY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM2570 Phytopharmaceutics
Content Fundamental pathophysiology, commonly used
pharmaceuticals, and pertinent medical terminology with particular
emphasis on understanding the actions of specific pharmaceuticals
and the identification of potentially life-threatening conditions.
Required Reading Bates, B., 1997, A Guide to Physical
Examination and History Taking, 5th edn, J.P. Lippincott Co.,
Philadelphia. Gascoigne, S., 1994, The Manual of Conventional
Medicine for Alternative Practitioners, Jime Press, Surrey. Galbraith,
A., Bullock, S. and Minias, E., 1997, Fundamentals of
Pharmacology: A Text for Nurses and Allied Health Professionals,
2nd edn, Addison-Wesley Publishing Co.
Recommended Reading Bullock, B.A. & Henze, R.L., 2000, Focus
on Pathophysiology, Lippincott. St Louis. Society of Hospital Pharmacists
of Australia, 1995, Pharmacology and Drug Information for Nurses, 4th
edn, WB Saunders, Balliere Tindall.
Class Contact The equivalent of six hours per week for one
semester consisting of lectures, tutorials and clinical observation in
appropriate health care settings.
Assessment One assignment, 25%; one examination, 50%; and
one clinical report, 25%.
RBM3550 GROWTH AND EARLY DEVELOPMENT
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM2540 Pathophysiology 2 or equivalent.
Content This subject builds on the work of first and second year
Human Bioscience. The overall concept to be studied is the process
of human development and aging and the physiological and
pathological changes that occur throughout the life cycle. This
subject presents the major regulating systems of the body and thus
involves advanced study in the areas of neurological, hormonal and
reproductive changes. Life stages from the embryo to senescence
will be studied and environmental, societal, psychological and
cultural influences will also be discussed. The subject allows
exposure to a range of scientific techniques through the laboratory
component and may include a minor project.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Eight hours per week comprising three hours of
lectures and five hours of workshop/laboratory for one semester.
Assessment Examination 55% and project/practical work 45%.
Students are required to obtain a satisfactory grade in all
components of the assessment to obtain a pass grade.
RBM3560 GROWTH, DEVELOPMENT AND AGING
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM3550 Growth and Early Development or
equivalent.
Content This subject continues on the theme of development and
ageing and the physiological processes that occur, building on
RBF3550 Advanced Bioscience 5A. This includes the exploration of
changes that occur throughout the life cycle and interaction with the
environment. The subject allows exposure to a range of scientific
skills and techniques through the laboratory/workshop component
and includes a minor project.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Eight hours per week comprising three hours of
lectures and five hours of workshop/laboratory work for one
semester.
Assessment Examination 55% and laboratory work and project
45%. Students are required to obtain a satisfactory grade in all
components of the assessment to obtain a pass grade.
RBM3590 ADVANCED EXPERIMENTAL TECHNIQUES
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) All year two core units (RBM2800, RBM2260,
RBM2530, RBM2540), RBM2590 Functional Histology and
RBM2560 Medical Biochemistry.
Content This subject introduces students to a variety of histological
techniques and the role they play in medical research. There will be
a particular emphasis on students receiving practical skills in a
histology laboratory setting. Students will obtain skills in tissue
sampling, preparation of fixed and frozen sections for light and
electron microscopy, basic tissue staining, immunohistochemistry
and in situ hybridization. Students will be introduced to light
microscopy, confocal microscopy, transmission and scanning
electron microscopy, morphology and morphometry.
Required Reading Burkitt, H.G; Young, B; Heath, J.W.
Wheater’s Functional Histology, 3rd Edition, Churchill Livingstone,
London, UK, 1993.
Class Contact Six hours per week for one semester comprising
three hours of lectures and three hours of practicals
Assessment Theory examination 55%, practical
examination/assignment, 45%.
RBM3610 BIOMEDICAL SCIENCE, ETHICS AND VALUES
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of a full first year of tertiary
study and appropriate subject(s) in human biology or psychology at
second year tertiary level.
Content Students will be introduced to ethical practice in animal
and human research, incorporating the various policies and codes
of practice for conducting research within Victoria University.This
subject discusses, with examples, how scientists have investigated
the functioning of the human body in health and disease: in-vitro
experiments, forced or voluntary participation in experimentation,
the use of animal models etc. The ethics of these practices are
examined – how do we justify or choose the practices which
elucidate the function of the human body? Who regulates the
conduct of research? Can research into humans be objective and is
objectivity a gendered concept? Issues arising from the practice of
biomedical sciences will be examined, such as in-vitro fertilisation,
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
202
the human genome project, genetic screening, competition and
fraud, and toxicity testing. Reference may also be made to ethical
practice in sociological and psychological research. The selected
topics may vary as appropriate.
Required Reading Cartwright, S. 1988, The report of the
cervical cancer inquiry, Committee of Inquiry into allegations
concerning the treatment of cervical cancer at National Women’s
Hospital and into other related matters, Auckland. Coney, S. 1988,
The Unfortunate Experiment, Penguin, Auckland. Suzuki, D. and
Knudson 1988, Genethics: The Ethics of Engineering Life, Allen and
Unwin, Sydney.
Class Contact Four hours per week comprising two one hour
lectures and one two hour tutorial/seminar session for one semester.
Assessment One essays, 30%; one VU animal or human ethics
proposal 30%, one tutorial presentation/debate, 25%; tutorial
attendance and participation, 15%.
RBM3620 CHALLENGING THE SCIENTIFIC PARADIGM
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBF2922 Science and Society or an appropriate
unit from the health sciences or complementary therapies.
Content This subject examines how biomedical science in the
twentieth century is under question. Alternative theories of the
functioning of the human body will be explored – for example, from
the complementary theories and from non-Western cultures.
Critiques of complementary therapies from a biomedical sciences
viewpoint and critiques of biomedical science from a
complementary therapies viewpoint will be examined to address
questions such as whether the two perspectives overlap and whether
there can be a synthesis of biomedical science with aspects of
complementary therapies. Environmental philosophy will be drawn
upon to examine how humans perceive themselves in relation to the
environment in general and other species in particular. Some
human-centred versus eco-centric views will be explored.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Achterberg, J. 1990, Woman as
Healer, Shambala, Boston. Bleier, R. 1984, Science and Gender: A
Critique of Biology and Its Theories on Women, Pergamon Press.
Capra, F. 1982, The Turning Point, Bantam Books, New York.
Diamond, I. and Orenstein, G.F. (eds) Reweaving the World, The
Sierra Club, USA. Kaptchuk, T.J. 1983, The Web That Has No
Weaver, Congdon and Weed, New York. Plant, J. (ed.) 1989,
Healing the Wounds, New Society Publishers, Philadelphia.
Unscheduled PU 1986, Medicine in China: A History of
Pharmaceutics, Regents of the University of California, USA.
Wakeford, T. and Walters, M. 1995, Science for the Earth, Wiley,
Chichester.
Class Contact Four hours per week comprising two one-hour
lectures and one two-hour tutorial/seminar session for one semester.
Assessment Two essays, 60%; one tutorial presentation, 25%;
tutorial attendance and participation, 15%.
RBM3630 SCIENCE, MEDIA AND COMMUNICATION
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) ACC1047 Culture and Communication;
ACC1043 Communications B or equivalent.
Content In this subject, students will be introduced to the forms by
which information about biomedical sciences and health is
communicated via the media. A critical understanding will be
developed of the ways in which media information is used to
persuade individuals about the value or otherwise of biomedical
information to market products and influence behaviour will be
examined with particular attention paid to the marketing of
pharmaceutical products, medical practice, health education
programs and complementary therapies. Students will examine
materials such as newspapers, popular magazines concerned with
health, health education material and examples of the scientific
reports of public institutions concerned with the biomedical sciences.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Four hours per week comprising two one-hour
lectures and one two-hour seminar session for one semester.
Assessment Assignment, 40%; class presentation, 20%; media
scrapbook and critical journal, 40%.
RBM3640 ADVANCED NEUROSCIENCES
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM2530 Pathophysiology.
Content This subject aims to provide insights into the most
important current ideas in the study of neuroanatomy,
neurophysiology and developmental neurobiology. This subject
provides an advanced series of lectures in specialised areas of
neuroscience research. The content of the subject may vary with the
expertise and research interests of the lecturing staff.
Required Reading Various scientific journals
Class Contact Four hours of lectures per week for one semester
Assessment Theory examination 55%, practical
examination/assignment 45%
RBM3650 ADVANCED REPRODUCTION AND DEVELOPMENT
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM2540 Pathophysiology.
Content This subject provides an advanced series of lectures
examining current research questions in the area of reproduction
and development. Topics include: maternal recognition of
pregnancy via foetal signalling and the resultant maternal response
during the period of implantation; development of the embryonic
neural crest, including epithelial-mesenchymal transformation,
migration, and contribution to mature differentiated cell types; the
role of steroid hormones in placental function; the role of autocrine
and paracrine growth factors in the development of the foetal lung;
the role of various extracellular matrix cytokines in the breakdown of
the foetal membranes at birth. The content of this subject may vary
with the expertise and research interests of the lecturing staff.
Required Reading Various scientific journals
Class Contact Three hours of lectures per week for one semester
Assessment Theory examination 55%, practical
examination/assignment 45%
RBM3660 HUMAN DEVELOPMENTAL AND CLINICAL GENETICS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM 2540 Pathophysiology 2 and either RBM
2560 Medical Biochemistry or RBF2330 Cell Biology
Content The subject is designed to introduce students to
developmental and clinical genetics with a specifically human focus.
The major emphasis is on the importance of gene expression in
normal development and variation, and the contribution of genetic
abnormalities to disease.
Topics may include: The role of genes in development;
differentiation and congenital malformation; human genetic
principles such as assortment and segregation of genes, genetic
variation and genetic defects, the importance of genetic
heterogeneity, mendelian inheritance and gene frequencies in
populations; Diagnosis and classification of genetic disorders;
prenatal screening and diagnosis; disorders with genetic and
environmental associations.
Required Reading Research and review articles as appropriate
Class Contact Three hours of lectures and three hours practical
work for one semester
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
203
Assessment Theory examination 50%, practical
reports/assignment 50%
RBM3670 MOLECULAR PSYCHOLOGY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM3550 Growth and early development or
equivalent
Content This subject explores the relationships between Molecular
Biology, Psychology, Anatomy and Genetics and Human Behaviour
and Emotions. These relationships will be discussed in light of
current research findings and current literature. The lecture series will
explore the current zeitgeist of the medical and scientific community
with respect to Molecular psychology. e.g; Topics may include
explanation of brain anatomy and psychology and anti-social
behaviour patterns. e.g; violent criminal behaviour.
Required Reading Research and review articles as appropriate
Class Contact Three hours of lectures 1 semester
Assessment Theory examination 50%, assignments 50%
RBM3720 IMMUNOLOGY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM2360 Medical Microbiology 1 or RBM2530
and RBM2540 Pathophysiology 1&2.
Content The aim of this subject is to provide students with an
understanding of theoretical and practical bases of immunology.
Subject topics include: active and passive immunity, components of
the immune system, the immune response, immunological techniques
and their application, molecular diagnostics including the use of
monoclonal antibodies. The subject will be explored as a basic
science with applications in the agriculture industry, food science,
environmental science and medical science.
Required Reading Roitt, I.M., Brostoff, J. and Male, D.K. 1993,
Immunology, 3rd edn, Mosby, St Louis.
Class Contact Six hours per week comprising three hours of
lectures and three hours of laboratory/tutorial work for one
semester.
Assessment Assignments, 20%; practical work, 30%; final
examination, 50%.
RBM3750 NUTRITION AND PUBLIC HEALTH
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) SBF2750 Nutrition, or RBM2260 Diet and
Nutrition
Content The aim is to study the role of nutritional factors in
aetiology of significant diseases conditions and processes involved
in deriving public health data and statistics. Nutritional factors in the
aetiology of significant disease conditions, designing and delivering
nutritional education and intervention programs, case studies in
nutritional education and intervention programs, locating public
health data and health epidemiology.
Required Reading Caballero, B., Trugo, L.C. and Finglas, P. M.
(eds.) 2003. Encyclopaedia of Food Sciences and Nutrition.
Academic, San Diego, CA, USA. Berdanier, C.D. (ed). 2002.
Handbook of Nutrition and Food. CRC Press, London, UK. Gould,
B.E. 1997. Pathophysiology for the Health Related Professions,
Saunders, USA..
Recommended Reading Wiseman, G. 2002. Nutrition and
Health. Taylor and Francis, London, UK.William, S.R. 2001. Basic
Nutrition and Diet Therapy. 11th Ed. Mosey Inc. USA; Bender, D.A.
1997. Nutrition: a Reference Handbook. Oxford University Press,
New York, USA.; Eastwood, M.A.M.A. 1997. Principles of human
nutrition. Chapman & Hall, London, UK.
Class Contact Four hours per week comprising lectures/tutorials
for one semester.
Assessment Assignments, 40%; final examination, 60%.
RBM3800 PHARMACOLOGY
Campus St Albans.
Prerequisite(s) RCS1100 Chemistry for Biological Sciences,
RBM2560 Medical Biochemistry, RBM1518 and RBM1528 Human
Physiology 1 and 2, or equivalent units.
Content The unit examines the pharmacodynamic processes of
drug action, molecular pharmacology and specific drug therapies.
Aspects relating to both medicinal chemistry, toxicity testing, clinical
trials and requirements for the admission of new drugs are covered
in topics that relate to new drug development. Pharmacokinetics,
pharmacogenetics, sensitivity and resistance to drug therapies are
further topics that address variation in drug outcomes. Social drug
abuse and types of drug dependence are also discussed in this unit.
Required Reading Rang, H.P., Dale, M.M., Ritter, J.M., Moore
PK 2003, Pharmacology, 5th edn, Churchill Livinstone; Web-CT
Lecture notes.
Recommended Reading Katzung, B.L.,2001, Basic Clinical
Pharmacology, 8th edn, McGraw Hill.. Pratt, W.B. and Taylor, P.,
1990, Principles of Drug Action. The basis of pharmacology, 3rd
edn, Churchill Livingstone.
Class Contact Five hours per week over one semester based on
two hours of lecture, one hour of tutorial and two hours of practical
sessions.
Assessment Assignment 20%; practical reports 35%; end of
semester examination 45%.
RBM3810 WELLNESS 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM2530Pathophysiology 1 and RBM2540
Pathophysiology 2 or equivalent, or RBM2800 Cardiorespiratory
and Renal Physiology plus other relevant second year units at the
discretion of the co-ordinator.
Content Module A: This unit introduces the concepts of mind, body
and spirit. These areas are explored from psychological,
physiological, philosophical and sociological perspectives. Current
literature will be used to introduce the areas of psychophysiology
and psychoneuroimmunology and their connections to the
mind/body/spirit paradigm. The ethics of human research and
evaluation will be discussed throughout the series of lectures. In
addition, students will be introduced to basic methods of information
gathering with respect to the mind-body-spirit paradigm including
the evaluation of its status in individuals. Further, aspects of
psychophysiology and psychoneuroimmunology such as stress and
disease, sexuality and the impact of environment on the health of the
mind, body and spirit are examined. Current research literature in
the area will be analysed.
Module B: Students will be introduced to fundamental concepts of
health and wellness. The difference between professional/scientific
concepts and lay concepts will be explored. Wellness promotion
will be presented primarily in the context of established public health
approaches utilised in health education, promotion and prevention
including medical, behavioural, educational, social and
empowerment strategies. Some of the dilemmas and pitfalls in health
promotion will be canvassed. Students will also be introduced to
base concepts of occupational health and safety and workplace
health promotion. Risk assessment, material safety, manual handling
and relevant legislation will be discussed. Context will be provided
by guest speakers from relevant organisations.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
204
Required Reading Module A: To be advised by lecturers.
Module B: Wass, A., 1995, Promoting Health , the Primary Health
Care Approach, Harcourt Brace and Company. Naidoo, J. and
Wills, J., 1994, Health Promotion: Foundations for Practice, Bailliere
Tindall. WHO, 1978, Alma Ata Declaration. WHO, 1986,
Ottawa.Charter for Health Promotion.
Recommended Reading Module A: Watkins, A., (ed), 1997,
Mind-Body Medicine: A Clinician’s Guide to
Psychoneuroimmunology, Churchill Livingstone. Module B: A set of
readings will be provided that is regularly updated.
Class Contact Module A: Three hours per week for one semester,
comprising two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial. Module B:
Three hours per week for one semester comprising one and a half
hours of lectures and one and a half hours tutorial/seminar.
Assessment Assignment/tutorial work, 25%; examination, 25%
for each of Module A and B.
RBM3820 WELLNESS 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM3810 Wellness 1.
Content Module A: The subject extends the material covered with
respect to Mind, Body and Spirit, and explores complimentary
therapies, techniques, treatments and strategies that are used to
promote and maintain health and well-being as well as treat
disease.
Module B: Students will be introduced to the systematic planning of
health and wellness education and promotion. Examples and
discussion will be provided in the context of relevant issues, for
example , community participation, the role of professionals, young
people and STD’s/AIDs, alcohol use, and the role of the media in
health. Guest speakers from health-promoting organisations will be
provided to explore health education and promotion issues.
Examples include the local government planning process/healthy
cities approach, Alzheimers Disease, Eating disorders and the Quit
campaign. Other relevant speakers/issues may be discussed as
appropriate. An individual health promotion project within the unit
requires students to assess their own health/wellness needs, then
design, implement and evaluate an appropriate program for
themselves over the semester. Students are further strongly
encouraged to take the third year project in conjunction with this
unit, and to apply their skills to the development of the project as a
health promotion and education exercise oriented to the workplace
or conducted within an organisation that promotes health.
Required Reading Module A: To be advised by lecturers.
Module B: Wass, A., 1995, Promoting Health , the Primary Health
Care Approach, Harcourt Brace and Company. Naidoo, J. and
Wills, J., 1994, Health Promotion: Foundations for Practice, Bailliere
Tindall.
Recommended Reading Module A: Watkins, A., (ed), 1997,
Mind-Body Medicine: A Clinician’s Guide to
Psychoneuroimmunology, Churchill Livingstone. Module B: A set of
readings will be provided that is regularly updated.
Class Contact Module A: Three hours per week for one semester,
comprising two hours of lectures and one hour of tutorial. Module B:
Three hours per week for one semester comprising one and a half
hours of lectures and one and a half hours tutorial/seminar.
Assessment Assignment/tutorial work, 30%; examination, 20%
for each of Module A and B.
RBM3850 NUTRITIONAL THERAPEUTICS C
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM2850 and RBM2855 Nutritional Therapeutics
A and B.
Content Diet, novel and common food supplementation support for
the following – energy metabolism dysfunction, neurological
dysfunction, behavioural disorders, life threatening illnesses;
laboratory testing for system dysfunction; formulation and costing of
supplementation programs to meet patient needs; regulation and
boundaries when working with practitioners who treat patients with
life threatening illnesses; Analysis of patient follow-up and
reformulation of treatment protocols where required.
Required Reading Jamison, J.R., 2004, Clinical Guide to
Nutrition and Dietary Supplements, Churchill Livingstone, Melb.
Pizzono, J., Murray, M., Joiner-Bey, H., 2002, The Clinician’s
Handbook of Nutritional Medicine, Churchill Livingstone. Toohey, L.,
Krettle, M.S., 1999, Nutritional Physiology: Clinical Applications
and Scientific Research, Healthquest Publishing. Werbach, M.R.,
1996, Nutritional Influences on Illness, 2nd edn, Third Line Press.
Recommended Reading Gropper, S.S., Smith, J.L, Groff, J.L.,
2006, Advanced Nutrition and Human Metabolism, 4th edn,
Wadsworth. G. Werbach, M., 1999, Textbook of Nutritional
Medicine, 2nd edn, Third Line Press. Frilis, H., 2001, Micronutrients
and HIV Infection, USA CRC Press. Watson, R.R., 1995, Nutrition
and Cancer Prevention, USA CRC Press.
Class Contact four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours lecture, two hours tutorial/workshop.
Assessment Examination (3 hours), 50%; case history, 50%.
RBM3855 NUTRITIONAL THERAPEUTICS D
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Completion of 2nd year; RBM 3850 Nutritional
Therapeutics C.
Content Diet, novel and common food supplementation support,
laboratory testing for system dysfunction, formulation and costing of
supplementation programs to meet patient needs: Analysis of patient
follow-up and reformulation of treatment protocols.
Required Reading Jamison, J.R., 2004, Clinical Guide to
Nutrition and Dietary Supplements, Churchill Livingstone, Melb.
Pizzono, J., Murray, M., Joiner-Bey, H., 2002, The Clinician’s
Handbook of Nutritional Medicine, Churchill Livingstone. Toohey, L.,
Krettle, M.S., 1999, Nutritional Physiology: Clinical Applications
and Scientific Research, Healthquest Publishing. Werbach, M.R.,
1996, Nutritional Influences on Illness, 2nd edn, Third Line Press.
Recommended Reading Gropper, S.S., Smith, J.L, Groff, J.L.,
2006, Advanced Nutrition and Human Metabolism, 4th edn,
Wadsworth.
Class Contact four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours lecture, two hours tutorial/workshop.
Assessment Examination (3 hours), 50%; case history, 50%.
RBM3910 PROJECT
Campus Footscray Park, St Albans, Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of the second year of the
Biomedical Sciences degree
Content Third year student projects provide students with an
opportunity to select and undertake either (a) a brief research
project in an area of interest with members of the Biomedical
Sciences staff; or (b) a work-based placement in the industry he/she
intends to enter. Both the research and work-based placements
enable the student to undertake a structured work experience
program as an integral part of their degree course. Gaining
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
205
practical experience in their chosen field enables students to test
interest and ability in these areas.
Selection The number of Project places will be limited by the
number of available projects. Places will be allocated on the basis
of academic merit. It would be expected that students wishing to do
Project would have a Credit average and be in their final semester
of the course.
Required Reading Selected material as advised by the project
supervisor
Class Contact Six hours per week for one semester comprising
laboratory work or work-based placement
Assessment 20% project proposal; 80% final report
RBM3921 WESTERN MEDICAL DIAGNOSIS AND INTERVENTIONS 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(S) RBM2912 Pathophysiology 2; or equivalent
Content Development of material covered in pathophysiology with
particular emphasis on basic pharmacology and toxicology
concepts; routes of administration; mechanisms of actions;
distribution, metabolism and excretion; indications and
contraindications; adverse reactions of the major classes of drugs;
resistance and tolerance; interactions with herbs and nutrients; plant
contaminants; Australian drugs and poisioning schedules and
reporting mechanisms. A western medical emphasis will be given to
the treatment of conditions presented in the CM clinical specialties.
Contemporary medical and psychiatric conditions are included.
Required Reading Students should have access to a copy of the
most recent MIMS or the Australian medicines handbook available
from Australian Medicines Handbook Web site,
http://www.amh.org.au. Bensky, D., & Gamble, A. (1991).
Chinese herbal medicine: Materia Medica. Seattle, WA: Eastland
Press. Evans, W. C. (1996). Trease and Evans’ pharmacognosy
(14th ed.). London: WB Saunders. Galbraith, A, Bullock, S., &
Minias, E. (2004). Fundamentals of pharmacology: A text for nurses
and allied health professionals (4th. ed.). Australia: Pearson Ed.
Gascoigne, S. (1994). The manual of conventional medicine for
alternative practitioners. Surrey: Jime Press. Newman Dorland, W.
A. (2003). Dorland's illustrated medical dictionary (30th ed.). W. B.
Saunders Co. Springhouse Corporation. (2000). Clinical
pharmacology made incredibly easy. New York: Lippincott Williams
& Wilkins. Therapeutic Goods Act, (1989~ & Am.). Available from
Australian Government Web site,
http://www.tga.gov.au/docs/html. Therapeutic Goods (Victoria)
Act, (1994~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web
site, http://dms003.dpc.vic.gov.au/l2d/T/. Upfal, J. (2002). The
Australian drug guide (6th ed.). Black Inc.
Recommended Reading Bickley, L. S. (2004). Bates' guide to
physical examination and history taking (8th. ed.). Lippincott,
Williams and Wilkins. Chang, H. M., & But, P. P.-H. (Eds.). (1987).
Pharmacology and applications of Chinese Materia Medica (Vol. 1
and Vol. 2). World Scientific Publishing. Duke, J. A. (1992).
Handbook of biologically active phytochemicals and their activities.
London: CRC Press. Huang, K. C. (1993). The pharmacology of
Chinese herbs. Boca Raton: CRC Press. Katzung, B. G. (2003).
Lange’s basic and clinical pharmacology (9th ed.). New York:
McGraw-Hill. Keys, J.. (1976). Chinese herbs. Their botany,
chemistry and pharmacodynamics. London: Charles E Tuttle.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures, tutorials and practicals. Students should
reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at
least three times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment Two assignments (1500 words each) (10% each);
one 2-hour examination (30%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary
examination may be offered. The maximum possible mark on the
supplementary examination will be 50%. This unit is a hurdle
requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as
indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
RBM3922 WESTERN MEDICAL DIAGNOSES AND INTERVENTIONS 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM3921 Western Medical Diagnoses and
Interventions 1; or equivalent.
Content Development of material covered in pathophysiology with
particular emphasis on the identification of potentially life-
threatening acute and chronic conditions. Knowledge of main
pathology tests and diagnostic and treatment techniques; indications
and complications of diagnostic procedures; anticipated outcomes
of disease profiles; the use of the stethoscope, sphygmomanometer,
otoscope, ECG, organ palpation and other basic procedures
employed by health care professionals. A systems approach is used
to present a western medical emphasis on conditions presented in
the CM clinical specialties. Contemporary medical and psychiatric
conditions are included.
Required Reading Students should have access to a copy of the
most recent MIMS or the Australian medicines handbook available
from Australian Medicines Handbook Web site,
http://www.amh.org.au. Bensky, D., & Gamble, A. (1991).
Chinese herbal medicine: Materia Medica. Seattle, WA: Eastland
Press. Evans, W. C. (1996). Trease and Evans’ pharmacognosy
(14th ed.). London: WB Saunders. Galbraith, A, Bullock, S., &
Minias, E. (2004). Fundamentals of pharmacology: A text for nurses
and allied health professionals (4th. ed.). Australia: Pearson Ed.
Gascoigne, S. (1994). The manual of conventional medicine for
alternative practitioners. Surrey: Jime Press. Newman Dorland, W.
A. (2003). Dorland's illustrated medical dictionary (30th ed.). W. B.
Saunders Co. Springhouse Corporation. (2000). Clinical
pharmacology made incredibly easy. New York: Lippincott Williams
& Wilkins. Therapeutic Goods Act, (1989~ & Am.). Available from
Australian Government Web site,
http://www.tga.gov.au/docs/html. Therapeutic Goods (Victoria)
Act, (1994~ & Am.). Available from Government of Victoria Web
site, http://dms003.dpc.vic.gov.au/l2d/T/. Upfal, J. (2002). The
Australian drug guide (6th ed.). Black Inc.
Recommended Reading Students should have access to a copy
of the most recent MIMS or the Australian medicines handbook
available from Australian Medicines Handbook Web site,
http://www.amh.org.au. Bensky, D., & Gamble, A. (1991).
Chinese herbal medicine: Materia Medica. Seattle, WA: Eastland
Press. Evans, W. C. (1996). Trease and Evans’ pharmacognosy
(14th ed.). London: WB Saunders. Galbraith, A, Bullock, S., &
Minias, E. (2004). Fundamentals of pharmacology: A text for nurses
and allied health professionals (4th. ed.). Australia: Pearson Ed.
Gascoigne, S. (1994). The manual of conventional medicine for
alternative practitioners. Surrey: Jime Press. Newman Dorland, W.
A. (2003). Dorland's illustrated medical dictionary (30th ed.). W. B.
Saunders Co. Springhouse Corporation. (2000). Clinical
pharmacology made incredibly easy. New York: Lippincott Williams
& Wilkins. Therapeutic Goods Act, (1989~ & Am.). Available from
Australian Government Web site, http://www.tga.gov.au/
docs/html. Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, (1994~ & Am.).
Available from Government of Victoria Web site,
http://dms003.dpc.vic.gov.au/l2d/T/. Upfal, J. (2002). The
Australian drug guide (6th ed.). Black Inc.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures, tutorials and practicals. Students should
reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at
least three times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
206
Assessment Two assignments (1500 words each) (10% each);
one two-hour examination (30%). To obtain at least a Pass in the
unit, normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary
examination may be offered. The maximum possible mark on the
supplementary examination will be 50%. This unit is a hurdle
requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as
indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
RBM3950 NUTRITIONAL THERAPY IN PRACTICE 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHN0021 Counselling Skills for Natural
Therapies.
Content Nutritional treatment for patients at critical life stages;
managing patients with challenging nutritional and behavioural
characteristics, eg addiction, non-compliance, aggression, eating
disorders, vulnerable client groups; ethical dilemmas in clinical
practice, patient record keeping.
Required Reading Jamison, J.R., 2004, Clinical Guide to
Nutrition and Dietary Supplements, Churchill Livingstone, Melb.
Pizzono, J., Murray, M., Joiner-Bey, H., 2002, The Clinician’s
Handbook of Nutritional Medicine, Churchill Livingstone. Toohey, L.,
Krettle, M.S., 1999, Nutritional Physiology: Clinical Applications
and Scientific Research, Healthquest Publishing. Werbach, M.R.,
1996, Nutritional Influences on Illness, 2nd edn, Third Line Press.
Recommended Reading Gropper, S.S., Smith, J.L, Groff, J.L.,
2006, Advanced Nutrition and Human Metabolism, 4th edn,
Wadsworth.
Class Contact Minimum of 90 hours supervised clinical practice.
Assessment Examination (3 hours),50%; case history, 50%.
RBM3955 NUTRITIONAL THERAPY IN PRACTICE 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM3950 Nutritional Therapy in Practice 1;
RBM3850 Nutritional Therapeutics C.
Content Nutritional treatment for patients at critical life stages,
managing patients with challenging nutritional and behavioural
characteristics, eg addiction, non-compliance, aggression, eating
disorders, vulnerable client groups; ethical dilemmas in clinical
practice; patient record keeping.
Required Reading Jamison, J.R., 2004, Clinical Guide to
Nutrition and Dietary Supplements, Churchill Livingstone, Melb.
Pizzono, J., Murray, M, Joiner-Bey, H., 2002, The Clinician’s
Handbook of Nutritional Medicine, Churchill Livingstone. Toohey, L.,
Krettle, M.S., 1999, Nutritional Physiology: Clinical Applications
and Scientific Research, Healthquest Publishing. Werbach, M.R.,
1996, Nutritional Influences on Illness, 2nd edn, Third Line Press.
Recommended Reading Gropper, S.S., Smith, J.L, Groff, J.L.,
2006, Advanced Nutrition and Human Metabolism, 4th edn,
Wadsworth.
Class Contact Minimum 90 hours supervised clinical practice.
Assessment Examination (3 hours), 50%; case history, 50%.
RBM3960 NUTRITIONAL FRONTIERS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Advances in nutrition research in selected topics,
including, cardiovascular, cancer, infectious disease, mental,
reproductive and public health, nutrigenomics. Evidence for and
against the effectiveness of various therapies and non invasive
solutions; comparison of qualitative and quantitative paradigms; role
of audit in monitoring and evaluation of clinical work; social science
research methods.
Required Reading Current nutrition scientific journals. Lewith, G.,
Jonas, W.B., & Walach, H., 2002, Clinical Research in
Complementary Therapies : Principles, Problems and Solutions,
Edinburgh, Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Armstrong, D. & Grace, J. 1994,
Research Methods and Audit in General Practice, 2nd edn, Oxford,
Oxford University Press. Bowling, A., 1991, Research Methods in
Health, Milton Keynes, Open University Press. Silverman, D., 2000,
Doing Qualitative Research: A Practical Handbook, London, SAGE
Publications.
Class Contact four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours lecture, two hours tutorial/seminar.
Assessment Two essays, 2500 words each, 50%; examination (3
hours), 50%.
RBM3970 OPERATING A CLINICAL PRACTICE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Factors in establishing and operating a clinical practice;
legal, professional and insurance issues, including personal and
professional indemnity and OHS regulations; business banking and
accountancy, including taxation laws and essential business record
keeping and reporting requirements; basic marketing techniques;
codes of ethics and practice; using media in practice; to find
appropriate employment.
Required Reading Jones, G., 1999, How to Start Business from
Home, 4th edn, How To Books. Brown, R. and Barrow, C., 2001,
The Business Plan Workbook, 4th edn, Kogan Page, London.
Recommended Reading Harland, N. and Sinn, G., 1995,
Healthy Business; The Natural Practitioners Guide to Success, 4th
edn, Hyden House. Barrow, C., 2001, Financial Management for
the Small Business, Kogan Page, London. Butler, D., 2000, Business
Planning: A Guide to Business Start-up, Butterworth Heinemann,
London.
Class Contact four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours lecture, two hours workshop.
Assessment Examination (3 hours), 40%; assignment 2500 words
each, 40%; written application and interview, 20%.
RBM4923 WESTERN MEDICAL DIAGNOSES AND INTERVENTIONS 3
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM3922 Western Medical Diagnoses and
Interventions 2; or equivalent
Content Development of material covered in pathophysiology with
particular emphasis on the identification of potentially life-
threatening acute and chronic conditions. An understanding of the
main pathology tests and diagnostic techniques; reinforcement of
skills in using the stethoscope, sphygmomanometer, otoscope, organ
palpation and other basic procedures employed by the health care
professional. A systems approach is used to present a western
medical emphasis on conditions presented in the CM clinical
specialties. Contemporary medical and psychiatric conditions are
included.
Required Reading Bickley, L. S. (2004). Bates' guide to physical
examination and history taking (8th. ed.). Lippincott, Williams and
Wilkins. Gascoigne, S. (1994). The manual of conventional
medicine for alternative practitioners. Surrey: Jime Press. Newman
Dorland, W. A. (2003). Dorland's illustrated medical dictionary
(30th ed.). W. B. Saunders Co.
Recommended Reading Bouchier, I. A. D., Ellis, H., & Fleming,
P. R. (Eds.). (1996). French's index of differential diagnosis (13th
ed.). Boston: Butterworth-Heinemann. Hughes, J., & Hughes, M.
(1997). Imaging: Picture tests. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
207
Mace, J. D., & Kowalczyk, N. (1994). Radiographic pathology for
technologists (2nd ed.). St Louis: Mosby.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures, tutorials and practicals. Students should
reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at
least three times more than the stipulated class contact hours.
Assessment Two assignments (2500 words minimum) (10% each);
one 2-hour examination (30%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary
examination may be offered. The maximum possible mark on the
supplementary examination will be 50%. This unit is a hurdle
requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as
indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
RBM4924 WESTERN MEDICAL DIAGNOSES AND INTERVENTIONS 4
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RBM4923 Western Medical Diagnoses and
Interventions 3; Or Equivalent.
Content Development of material covered in pathophysiology with
particular emphasis on the identification of potentially life-
threatening acute and chronic conditions. An understanding of
advanced pathology tests and complex diagnostic techniques;
reinforcement of skills in using the stethoscope, sphygmomanometer,
otoscope, organ palpation and other procedures used by health
care professionals. Conditions discussed in the CM clinical
specialties are presented using a western medicine systems
approach. Contemporary medical and psychiatric conditions are
included.
Required Reading Bickley, L. S. (2004). Bates' Guide To
Physical Examination And History Taking (8th. Ed.). Lippincott,
Williams and Wilkins. Gascoigne, S. (1994). The manual of
conventional medicine for alternative practitioners. Surrey: Jime
Press. Newman Dorland, W. A. (2003). Dorland's illustrated
medical dictionary (30th ed.). W. B. Saunders Co.
Recommended Reading Bouchier, I. A. D., Ellis, H., & Fleming,
P. R. (Eds.). (1996). French's index of differential diagnosis (13th
ed.). Boston: Butterworth-Heinemann. Hughes, J., & Hughes, M.
(1997). Imaging: Picture tests. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Mace, J. D., & Kowalczyk, N. (1994). Radiographic pathology for
technologists (2nd ed.). St Louis: Mosby.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures, tutorials and practicals. Students should
reasonably expect to devote additional private contact hours of at
least three times more than the stipulated class contact hours. This
unit may be delivered in its entirety in burst mode to allow students
the opportunity to undertake their VU-approved final clinical
internship.
Assessment Two assignments (2500 words minimum) (10% each);
one 2-hour examination (30%). To obtain at least a Pass in the unit,
normally all components of assessment must be attempted and
passed. Where the final examination is failed, a supplementary
examination may be offered. The maximum possible mark on the
supplementary examination will be 50%. This unit is a hurdle
requirement. All assessment items address the CGA levels as
indicated in the Learning Outcomes.
RCA1010 INTRODUCTORY AVIATION
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Aerodynamics and theory of flight, flight control systems,
basic instruments. Domestic and international flight procedures, social
structure of the regulatory system, domestic and international. Domestic
legal rules, international treaties, domestic safety systems and safety
experience. International safety experience.
Required Reading As set by the lecturer in charge.
Recommended Reading As recommended by the lecturer in
charge.
Class Contact One four hour seminar per week for one semester.
Assessment One major assignment 30% and one final
examination 70%.
RCA1020 BASIC AERONAUTICAL KNOWLEDGE
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCA1010 (The Civil Aviation Safety Authority also
expects that students will have flown five hours before attempting
this subject).
Content Basic Aeronautics, engineering and mechanics sufficient to
pass the BAK test as required by the CASA.
Required Reading As required by the Lecturer in charge.
Recommended Reading As recommended by the Lecturer in
charge.
Class Contact The equivalent of one four hour seminar per week
for one semester. A concentrated mode of delivery may be used.
Students may be required to attend classes off campus. Students
should be aware that they are expected to obtain five hours flying
experience on their own account before attempting the examination
this subject.
Assessment One final (principally multiple choice) examination
worth 100% as required by the Civil Aviation Safety Authority.
RCA2020 METEOROLOGY AND HUMAN FATORS FOR THE CPL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCA1020 Basic Aeronautical Knowledge (the Civil
Aviation Safety Authority requires students to complete the General
Flying Proficiency Test before attempting this subject).
Content Aircraft navigation theory, and legal theory as required for
the Commercial Pilot’s Licence theory subjects ‘CHUF Human Factors
(Aeroplane and Helicopter) for the CPL’ and ‘CMET Meteorology
(Aeroplane and Helicopter) for the CPL’ examined by the Civil Aviation
Safety Authority.
Required Reading As required by the Lecturer in charge.
Recommended Reading As recommended by the Lecturer in
charge.
Class Contact The equivalent of one four hour seminar per week for
one semester. Students may be required to undertake multiple seminars
each week, for less than one semester.
Assessment Two Multiple Choice Examination as required by the
Civil Aviation Safety Authority.
RCA2030 NAVIGATION AND FLIGHT AND AIR LAW FOR THE CPL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCA1020 Basic Aeronautical Knowledge (the Civil
Aviation Safety Authority requires students to complete the General
Flying Proficiency Test before attempting this subject).
Content Aircraft navigation theory, and legal theory as required for
the Commercial Pilot’s Licence theory subjects ‘CNAV Navigation
(Aeroplane and Helicopter) for the CPL’ and ‘CLWA Flight rules and Air
Law (Aeroplane and Helicopter) for the CPL’ examined by the Civil
Aviation Safety Authority.
Required Reading As advised by the Lecturer in Charge of the
subject.
Recommended Reading As advised by the Lecturer in Charge of
the subject.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
208
Class Contact The equivalent of one four hour seminar per week for
one semester. Students may be required to undertake multiple seminars
each week, for less than one semester.
Assessment Two Multiple Choice Examination as required by the
Civil Aviation Safety Authority.
RCA2040 AERODYNAMICS FOR THE CPL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCA1020 Basic Aeronautical Knowledge (the Civil
Aviation Safety Authority requires students to complete the General
Flying Proficiency Test before attempting this subject).
Content Aircraft navigation theory, and legal theory as required for
the Commercial Pilot’s Licence theory subjects ‘CADA Aerodynamics
(Aeroplane and Helicopter) for the CPL’ examined by the Civil Aviation
Safety Authority.
Required Reading As advised by the Lecturer in Charge of the
subject.
Recommended Reading As advised by the Lecturer in Charge of
the subject.
Class Contact The equivalent of one four hour seminar per week for
one semester. Students may be required to undertake multiple seminars
each week, for less than one semester.
Assessment Two Multiple Choice Examination as required by the
Civil Aviation Safety Authority.
RCA2050 AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE FOR THE CPL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCA1020 Basic Aeronautical Knowledge (the
Civil Aviation Safety Authority requires students to complete the
General Flying Proficiency Test before attempting this subject).
Content Aircraft navigation theory, and legal theory as required
for the Commercial Pilot’s Licence theory subjects ‘CSYA Aircraft
General Knowledge for the CPL’ examined by the Civil Aviation
Safety Authority.
Required Reading As advised by the Lecturer in Charge of the
subject.
Recommended Reading As advised by the Lecturer in Charge of
the subject.
Class Contact The equivalent of one four hour seminar per week
for one semester. Students may be required to undertake multiple
seminars each week, for less than one semester.
Assessment One Multiple Choice Examination as required by the
Civil Aviation Safety Authority.
RCA2060 OPERATIONS PERFORMANCE AND FLIGHT PLANNING FOR
THE CPL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCA1020 Basic Aeronautical Knowledge (the
Civil Aviation Safety Authority requires students to complete the
General Flying Proficiency Test before attempting this subject).
Content Aircraft Operations theory, and flight planning as required
for the Commercial Pilot’s Licence theory subject ‘CFPA CPL
Operations Performance and Flight Planning’ examined by the Civil
Aviation Safety Authority.
Required Reading As advised by the Lecturer in Charge of the
subject.
Recommended Reading As advised by the Lecturer in Charge of
the subject.
Class Contact The equivalent of one four hour seminar per week
for one semester. Students may be required to undertake multiple
seminars each week, for less than one semester.
Assessment One Multiple Choice Examination as required by the
Civil Aviation Safety Authority..
RCA3010 INSTRUMENT RATING (IREX)
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s)
Content Aircraft flight planning theory sufficient to complete the
IREX examination set by the Civil Aviation Safety Authority.
Required Reading Thom, T. et al, 2000, The Instrument Rating
Manual, Aviation Theory Centre, Melbourne. Subject study notes as
provided by the subject lecturer.
Class Contact 2 x three hour workshops per week for one
semester, or equivalent.
Assessment Examination as required by the Civil Aviation Safety
Authority.
RCA3030 METEOROLOGY AND HUMAN FATORS FOR THE ATPL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCA 2020, RCA 2030, RCA 2040, RCA 2050,
RCA 2060.
Content Meteorology and Human Factors sufficient to meet the
requirements of the CASA examinations in these topics.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact The equivalent of one three hour seminar each week
for one semester.
Assessment One 90 minute multiple choice examination and one
60 minute multiple choice examination.
RCA3O40 FLIGHT PLANNING FOR THE ATPL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) SCA2051, SCA2053, SCA2055, SCA2057,
SCA2059, SCA2061, SCA2063
Content Aircraft flight planning theory sufficient to pass the Air
Transport Pilot’s Licence theory subject ‘ATPL Flight Planning’
examined by the Civil Aviation Safety Authority.
Required Reading Thom, T. et al, 2000, Aeroplane Operations
Performance and Planning for the Air Transport Pilot, Aviation
Theory Centre, Melbourne. Subject study notes as provided by the
subject lecturer.
Class Contact 1 x three hour workshops per week for one
semester, or equivalent.
Assessment Examination as required by the Civil Aviation Safety
Authority.
RCA3050 NAVIGATION AND AIR LAW FOR THE ATPL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCA 2020, RCA 2030, RCA 2040, RCA 2050,
RCA 2060.
Content Navigation and flight and air law sufficient to meet the
requirements of the CASA examinations in these topics.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact The equivalent of one three hour seminar each week
for one semester.
Assessment Two 90 minute multiple choice examinations.
RCA3060 AERODYNAMICS AND AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS FOR THE ATPL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) TBA
Content Aircraft aerodynamics and systems theory sufficient to
pass the Air Transport Pilot’s Licence theory subject ‘ATPL
Aerodynamics and Systems’ examined by the Civil Aviation Safety
Authority
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
209
Required Reading Thom, T. et al, 2000, Aeroplane Operations
Performance and Planning for the Air Transport Pilot, Aviation
Theory Centre, Melbourne. Subject study notes as provided by the
subject lecturer.
Class Contact 1 x three hour workshop per week for one semester
or equivalent.
Assessment Examination as required by the Civil Aviation Safety
Authority.
RCA3070 PERFORMANCE AND LOADING FOR THE ATPL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s)
Content Aircraft performance theory, and loading theory sufficient
to pass the Air Transport Pilot’s Licence theory subject ‘ATPL
Performance and Loading’ examined by the Civil Aviation Safety
Authority.
Required Reading Thom, T., et al, 2000, Aeroplane Operations
Performance and Planning for the Air Transport Pilot, Aviation
Theory Centre, Melbourne. Subject study notes as provided by the
subject lecturer.
Class Contact 1 x three hour workshop per week for one semester
or equivalent.
Assessment Examination as required by the Civil Aviation Safety
Authority.
RCM1114 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTING AND THE INTERNET
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Malaysia, Singapore
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Algorithms for computational tasks, Overview of the
Internet, Internet Connections, Web Design and Authoring,
Characteristics and functions of browsers, Resources on the Intenet,
Surfing the Internet, Future of the Internet, Scripting Languages, The
law and computer crimes, Reliability and safety of software systems,
Australian Computer Society code of ethics.
Required Reading Ibrahim, Z.,2000, Mastering the Internet and
HTML, Prentice Hall.
Recommended Reading Green, R. & Hepp, E., 1999,
Fundamentals of the Internet, McGraw Hill; Sharda, N., 1999,
Multimedia Inforamtion Networking, Prentice Hall; and Weinman, L.
& Weinman, W., 1998, Creative HTML Design 2, New Riders.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester, comprising
one hour lecture and two hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination 70%; assignment/laboratory work,
30%.
RCM1115 COMPUTER SYSTEMS AND ARCHITECTURE
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Computer systems components and their relationships.
Operating system and its functions. Overview of Computer Science.
Database management. Key milestones, concepts, and historical
developments of computer systems. Representation of Information in
Computer Systems: Equivalence of number systems, Operations on
numbers. System architecture. Instruction execution processes and
data structures, Machine instructions design, Assembly level
programming. Novel and emerging architectures.
Required Reading Nil.
Recommended Reading Brookshear, J.G., 2005, Computer
Science: An Overview, 8th edn, Addison-Wesley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and two one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 70%; assignment and tests, 30%.
RCM1211 DATABASE SYSTEMS 1
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong
Prerequisite(s) RCM1115 Computer Systems and Architecture;
RCM1311 Programming 1.
Content Overview of database management and database
application development process. The SQL language: data
definition and data manipulation. Relational model, relational
calculus and relational algebra. Implementation and performance
issues. Three-level architecture for database systems. Database
design: normalization and entity-relationship modelling. Issues of
security, multi-user environment, and application development.
Required Reading Elmasri, R. and Navathe, S. 2005,
Fundamentals of Database Systems, 4th edn, Benjamin/Cummings
Publishing Company.
Recommended Reading Data, C.J. 2004, An Introduction to
Database Systems, 8th edn, Addison-Wesley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and two one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 70%; assignment and tests, 30%.
RCM1311 PROGRAMMING 1
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Introduction to object oriented programming. Basic
constructs of a programming language; sequence, selection and
iteration. Use of classes and objects. Applets.
Recommended Reading Cohoon, J. and Davisdon, J., 2004,
Java 1.5 Program Design, Mc Graw Hill; Lewis, J. and Loftus, W.,
2003
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two hours of lectures and two hours of laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; assignment, 10% and
practical work, 10%.
RCM1312 PROGRAMMING 2
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Hong Kong, Tianjin
Prerequisite(s) SCM1311 Programming 1.
Content Structured program development through user defined
classes. Array, vectors and string data types. File I/O. Inheritance,
exceptances, graphical user interface.
Recommended Reading Lewis, J. and Loftus, W., 2003, Java
Software Solutions, 3rd edn, Addison-Wesley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two hours of lectures and two hours of laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 70%; assignment, test and
practical work, 30%.
RCM1613 APPLIED STATISTICS 1
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Displaying and describing data. Control charts, Time
series, Experimental design, Survey designs.
Required Reading Albright, Winston, Zappe, Data Analysis for
Managers, 2nd edn, Thompson.
Recommended Reading Moore, D.S. and McCabe, G.P.,
1998, Introduction to the Practice of Statistics, 3rd edn; Johnson, R.
and Kuby, P., 1999, Just the Essentials of Elementary Statistics, 2nd
edn, Duxbury Press.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and two one-hour tutorials.
Assessment Final examination, 60%; tests, 40%.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
210
RCM1614 APPLIED STATISTICS 2
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong
Prerequisite(s) RCM1611 Applied Statistics 1.
Content Inference on sample mean. Confidence intervals. T-Tests.
Comparing two means. Inference for population spread. Comparing
two proportions. Two-way tables. Regression and correlation. Using
a Statistical Package.
Required Reading Albright, Winston, Zappe, Data Analysis for
Managers, 2nd edn, Thompson.
Recommended Reading Moore, D.S. and McCabe, G.P.,
1998, Introduction to the Practice of Statistics, 3rd edn.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and two one-hour tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 60%; tests, 40%.
RCM1711 MATHEMATICAL FOUNDATIONS 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VCE Mathematical Methods or equivalent
Content Set theory: basic principles, operations and applications.
Propositional logic and Boolean algebra. Introduction to calculus:
limits, derivatives; applications to analysis of functions and solution
of non-linear equations. Integration and its relationship to
differentiation. Linear algebra: bectors, matrices; applications to
geometry and linear equations. Use of computer algebra systems for
exploration and enhancement.
Required Reading Gersting, J.L. 1993, Mathematical Structures
for Computer Science, W.H. Freeman and Company.
Recommended Reading Dossey, J.A., Otto, A.D., Spence, L.E.
and Vanden Eynden C. 1987, Discrete Mathematics, Scott
Foresman and Co. Graham, R.L., Knuth, D.E. and Patashnik, O.
1989, Concrete Mathematics: A Foundation for Computer Science,
Addison-Wesley. Mott, J.L., Kandel, A. and Baker, T.P. 1986,
Discrete Mathematics for Computer Science, Prentice Hall. Norris,
F.R. 1985, Discrete Structures: An Introduction to Mathematics for
Computer Science, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Two hours per week of lectures; one hour per week
of tutorial and one hour per week of laboratory work.
Assessment Final examination, 75%; mid semester test, 15%;
laboratory work, 10%.
RCM1712 MATHEMATICAL FOUNDATIONS 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCM1711 Mathematical Foundations 1.
Content Discrete mathematics: recursion, induction and recurrence
relations; analysis of algorithms; permutations and combinations
with applications to the binomial and multinomial theorems. Further
calculus: optimization problems; elementary differential equations
with applications; numerical integration: trapezoidal rule and
Simpson’s rule. Further linear algebra: determinants and matrix
inversion; applications to linear and multilinear regression and
interpolation. Further use of computer algebra systems for
exploration and enhancement.
Recommended Reading Dossey, J.A., Otto, A.D., Spence, L.E.
and Vanden Eynden C. 1987, Discrete Mathematics, Scott
Foresman and Co. Graham, R.L., Knuth, D.E. and Patashnik, O.
1989, Concrete Mathematics: A Foundation for Computer Science,
Addison-Wesley. Mott, J.L., Kandel, A. and Baker, T.P. 1986,
Discrete Mathematics for Computer Science, Prentice Hall. Norris,
F.R. 1985, Discrete Structures: An Introduction to Mathematics for
Computer Science, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Two hours per week of lectures; one hour per week
of tutorial and one hour per week of laboratory work.
Assessment Final examination, 75%; mid semester test, 15%;
laboratory work, 10%.
RCM1713 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong
Prerequisite(s) RCM1711 Mathematical Foundations 1.
Content Algorithmics– worst case and asymptotic analysis, o, O
and θ notation. Algorithm design – greedy algorithms, divide and
conquer, dynamic programming, backtracking, branch and bound
heuristics. Comparisons and applications. Graph theory –
definitions, terminology, adjacency, incidence, paths, cycles,
multigraphs, digraphs, weighted graphs, Eulerian graphs and
digraphs, Hamiltonian graphs and digraphs, path algorithms, trees,
graph colouring, matching.
Required Reading Nil.
Recommended Reading Brassard, G. and Bratley, P., 1996,
Fundamentals of Algorithms, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two hours of lectures, and two hour of laboratory/one hour tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; tests, 20%.
RCM2111 DATA COMMUNICATIONS AND NETWORKS 1
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong
Prerequisite(s) RCM1115 Computer Systems and Architecture.
Content History and fundamentals of data communications and
networks. Standards. Data communications principles and protocols.
Network architectures and protocols. Standard interfaces and
transmission techniques. Data integrity and security. Local area
networks. Data link control. Wireless LANS connecting LANS.
Required Reading Forouzan, B., 2004, Data Communications
and Networking, 3rd edn, McGraw Hill.
Recommended Reading Shay, W.A., 2004, Understanding
Data Communications and Networks, 3rd edn, Brooks Cole.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
three one-hour lectures and two one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; assignment and tests, 20%.
RCM2112 OPERATING SYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Malaysia, Singapore
Prerequisite(s) RCM1115.
Content Processes. Deadlocks. Synchronization, Memory
Management. File Systems. I/O Management Case Studies.
Required Reading Operating Systems Concepts, Sixth Edition,
by Silberschatz, Galvin, and Gagne, 2003
Recommended Reading Operating Systems, Third Edition, Gary
Nutt, 2004
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one hour lectures and two hours laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment 70% final examination 30% test and assignment
RCM2113 MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCM1114 Introduction to Computing and the
Internet, RCM1115 Computer systems and Architecture
Content Fundamentals and history of multimedia systems.
Multimedia applications. Elements of a multimedia systems: text,
graphics, animation, audio, and video. Compression techniques
and standards. Multimedia authoring systems. Multimedia
Communications and Networking, Social, legal, and business
aspects of multimedia.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
211
Recommended Reading F. T. Hofstetter, Multimedia Literacy,
McGraw-Hill, Third Edition. 2001. James E. Shuman, Multimedia
Concepts, Thompson Learning, 2001. James L. Mohler, Flash
MX2004: Graphics, Animation and Interactivity, Thomson
Publishing, 2004.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
one two-hour lectures and one two-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 70%; assignment and tests, 30%.
RCM2213 COMPUTER GRAPHICS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCM1312 Programming 2 or equivalent.
Content This subject introduces the principles of computer graphics
and the art in the representation of 2D and 3D pictures, and gives
experience in using graphics package OpenGL. The topics
coverage also includes popular graphics algorithms and techniques
for generating 2D and 3D animations. In addition, some advanced
topics, such as curves, surface and shading are discussed. Students
will have considerable practice in 2D and 3D graphics
programming with package OpenGL.
Required Reading Angel, E., Interactive Computer Graphics – a
top down approach with OpenGL, 2nd edn, Addison-Wesley.
OpenGL Programming Guide, The Official Guide to Learning
OpenGL, 2nd edn, ver1.1 or 1.2, Addison-Wesley.
Recommended Reading Foly, J.D., Introduction to Computer
Graphics, Addison-Wesley. Foly, J.D., 1994, Computer Graphics –
Principles and Practice, Addison-Wesley.
Class Contact Two one-hour lectures and two one-hour laboratory
for one semester.
Assessment Laboraoty, 10%; Two assignment, 30%; Final
examination, 60%.
RCM2218 DATABASE SYSTEMS 2
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) RCM1211 Database Systems 1, or equivalent.
Content Data analysis and modelling using the Enhanced Entity-
Relationship model and normalization. Constraints beyond the EER
model, and advanced data modeling issues. Database transactions:
concept, ACID properties, specification. Transaction processing:
commit and rollback, concurrency control, locking, scheduling, and
recovery. Database application development using embedded SQL.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Elmasri, R. and Navathe, S. 2004,
Fundamentals of Database Systems, 4th edn, Addison Wesley.
Bernstein, A., and Lewis, P.M., 2nd edn., 2006. Database and
Construction Processing, An Application Oriented Approach,
Addison Wesley.
Class Contact Two-hour lecture and two-hour laboratory per week.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; tests, 20%.
RCM2311 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING 1
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) RCM1312 Programming 2
Content This subject covers the critical concepts and features that
support object-oriented programming. Classes and data abstraction,
graphical user interfaces, threads, streams, exceptions and system
design and Multimedia applications. Mastery of these concepts
provide the foundation to practice object-oriented programming in a
productive way and the subsequent mastery of the finer points of
object-oriented programming.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Deitel, H.M. and Deitel, P.J. 2005,
JAVA How to Program, 6th edn, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two hours of lectures and two hour of laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 70%; assignment, and practical
work 30%.
RCM2312 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Hong Kong
Prerequisite(s) RCM1312 Programming 1; RCM1312
Programming 2.
Content This subject represents an introduction to traditional
software development and object oriented analysis and design. It is
designed to prepare students for final year computer projects. Topics
to be covered include: software life cycle, requirements analysis and
specification, structured and object oriented design, documentation
of software systems. Testing. Reusability and Portability. Planning
and Estimating. Implementation.
Required Reading Schach, S., 2005, Object Oriented and
Classical Software Engineering, 6th edn, McGraw Hill.
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
three one-hour lectures and one one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; assignments: 20%.
RCM2313 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Hong Kong
Prerequisite(s) RCM2312 Software Engineering 1, RCM1312
Programming 2
Content The aim of this subject is to develop an appreciation of the
process whereby software is developed in a production environment
students will build upon and reinforce their knowledge of software
engineering principles by working in a team on a real-life
production project.
Required Reading <<Visual Basic Net Programming From
Problem Analysis to Program Design>>, E. Doke, Susan Rebstock
Williams C Nov 2004, Course technology, ISBN: 0619160101
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and two one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 20% Labs, 30%Assignments, 25%
Mid-Semester Test, 25% Final Test.
In order to pass, students must obtain at least 25% of labs and
assignments, and 25% of tests in this subject
RCM2315 ADVANCED PROGRAMMING
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Malaysia, Singapore
Prerequisite(s) RCM1312 Programming 2
Content Fundamental data types; Class definition; Polymorphism;
Operator overloading; Characters and strings; Input & Output;
Exception handling; Features and facilities found in this
programming language.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Eckel, B., 2000, Thinking in C++, 2nd
edn, Prentice Hall. Lippman, S.B., 1998, C++ Primer, 3rd edn,
Addison Wesley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and two one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 70%; assignment and tests: 30%.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
212
RCM2316 NETWORK OPERATING SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCM2111 Data Communications and
Networks 1.
Content Protocols and Standards. TCP/IP protocol suite,
connecting devices. Addressing. Routing. ARP. IP. ICMP. IGMP.
UDP. TCP. SCTP. Multilcasting. DNS. TELNET. SMTP. SNMP.
Required Reading. B. Forouzan, TCP/IP Protocol Suite, 3rd Ed.,
McGRaw Hill, 2006
Recommended Reading A. Tanenbaum, Computer Networks,
4th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2003. F. Halsall. Computer Networking and
the Internet, 5th Edition, Addison-Wesley, 2005
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising of
two one hour lectures and one hour laboratory and one hour
tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; laboratory work 20%.
RCM2321 MATHEMATICS OF CONTINUOUS PROCESSES B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCM2712 Mathematics of Continuous
Processes A.
Content Matrix Algebra: matrices, vectors, norms, matrix
equations, inverse, Gauss-Jordan and LU decomposition. Linear
Algebra: linear dependence, span, vector spaces, basis, orthogonal
expansions, the eigenvalue problem, eigenvectors, special matrices,
properties of the characteristic equation, diagonalisation, symmetric
forms, singular value decomposition, Cayley-Hamilton, matrix
functions and matrix polynomials. Differential Equations: reduction
of order, variation of parameters, Green’s methods for ordinary
differential equations, Dirac delta and unit Heaviside function,
method of separation of variables for partial differential equations,
solution via Laplace transform and Fourier series, boundary value
problems and initial value problems.
Required Reading Nil.
Recommended Reading M. Tenenbaum and H. Pollard,
Ordinary Differential Equations, Dover, 1985; R. Haberman,
Applied Partial Differential Equations, Prentice Hall, 2003; D.C.
Lay, Linear Algebra and its Applications, Addison Wesley, 2002.
Class Contact 2 x one hour lecture and 2 x one hour tutorial for
one semester.
Assessment 20% mid-semester test; 80% end of semester
examination.
RCM2511 IMAGE PROCESSING 1
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) RCM1114 Introduction to Computing and the
Internet, and one of RCM1711 or RCM1712.
Co-requisites Nil
Content Image processing hardware: CCD cameras, scanners,
frame-grabbing cards. Aspects of image processing: image
restoration; image enhancement; computer vision; object
recognition. Quantization and sampling; binary and grey-scale
images. Basic point operations: thresholding; histogram
equalization and stretching. Thinning and boundary following.
Spatial filtering: linear and non-linear filters; applications to noise
reduction, deblurring, and edge enhancement. Line recognition: the
Hough transform. Filtering in the frequency domain: introduction to
the Fourier transform and its uses. Low and high pass filtering;
removal of periodic noise. Mathematical morphology: dilation and
erosion; opening and closing. Applications to object recognition,
boundary detection and skeletonization. Colour images:
investigation of the colour spaces RGB and HSI; processing colour
images. Image compression and storage; Huffman and run-length
encoding.
Required Reading None.
Recommended Reading McAndrew A., 2004, An
Introductionto Image Processing with Matlab, Thomson Learning.
Gregory A. Baxes, 1994, Digital Image Processing: Principles and
Applications, John Wiley and Sons, New York, NY; Rafael C.
Gonzalez and Richard E. Woods, 2002, Digital Image Processing,
2nd edn, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Reading, MA;
Adrian Low, 1991, Introductory Computer Vision and Image
Processing, McGraw-Hill, New York, NY; John C. Russ, 2002, The
Image Processing Handbook, 4th edn, CRC Press, Boca Raton.
Class Contact Two hours of lectures, one hour of practical work,
one hour tutorial per week.
Assessment Final examination 75%, laboratory assessment 25%;
RCM2611 LINEAR STATISTICAL MODELS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCM1614 Applied Statistics 2.
Content Analysis of Variance and Simple Experimental Design.
Two-way factorial designs without and with interaction. An
introduction to Repeated Measures. Simple linear regression.
Multiple Regression. Simple Diagnostics. Model Building and
validation.
Required Reading Moore, D.S. and McCabe, G.P. 1993,
Introduction to the Practice of Statistics, 2nd edn, Freeman Press.
Recommended Reading Myers, R. 1990, Classical and Modern
Regression with Applications, 2nd edn, PWS/KENT. Weisburg, S.
1985, Applied Linear Regression, 2nd edn, Wiley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
one two-hour lecture and one one-hour tutorial and one one-hour
laboratory.
Assessment Final examination, 70; assignment: 30%
RCM2612 FORECASTING
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) RCM1614
Content Introduction to forecasting- Overview, reason for use,
procedure, basic steps. Basic forecasting tools – Plots, numerical
summaries, Measuring forecast accuracy, prediction intervals.
Smoothing methods – Moving averages, exponential smoothing,
Holt’s, Winters’ and damped-tren models. Decomposition methods –
Classical Decomposition and Census methods. Mixed models.
Regression models. Time series analysis: autocorrelation patterns,
Box-Jenkins methods for ARIMA models. Transfer
FunctionsApplication to ‘real’ data. Uses of forecasting methods in
practice. Real world issues.
Required Reading Nil.
Recommended Reading Bowerman, B. and O’Connell, R.
1993, Forecasting and Time Series – An Applied Approach, 3rd
edn, Duxbury. Chatfield, C., 1996, The Analysis of Time Series, 5th
edn, Chapman and Hall. Cryer, J.D., 1986, Time Series Analysis,
Duxbury. Diebold, F.X., 2001, Elements of Forecasting, 2nd edn,
South Western. DeLurgio, S.A., 1998, Forecasting Principles and
Applications, McGraw Hill. Kendall, M. and Ord, J.K., 1990, Time
Series, 3rd edn, Edward Arnold. Makriadakis, S., Wheelwright,
S.C. and Hyndman, R.J., 1998, Forecasting – Methods and
Applications, 3rd edn, Wiley. Makriadakis, S. and Wheelwright,
S.C., 1989, Forecasting Methods for Management, 5th edn, Wiley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and two one-hour laboratory.
Assessment Project, 40%; Examination, 60%.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
213
RCM2614 STATISTICAL DATAMINING
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Malaysia, Singapore
Prerequisite(s) RCM1614.
Content Statistical datamining methods, cluster analysis,
discriminant analysis, issues in sampling and estimation, using the
bootstrap, non-parametric methods.
Required Reading Giudici, P. 2004 Applied Data Mining,
Wiley.
Recommended Reading Venables, W. and Ripley, B., 2001,
Modern Applied Statistics with S-Plus, 3rd edn, Springer
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures, one one-hour tutorial and one one-hour
practical.
Assessment Final examination, 60%; assignments and tests, 40%.
RCM2713 MODELLING FOR DECISION MAKING
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Malaysia, Singapore
Prerequisite(s) RCM1712
Content Overview of the modelling process: problem identification,
factors and assumptions, formulation and solution, interpretation
comparison of results with original problem. Setting up models,
interpretation of mathematical models. Interpolation, extrapolation,
spectral decomposition and fitting models to data. Applications of
continuous models via differential equations and data fitting.
Discrete versus continuous modelling and discrete/continuous
combinations with examples of general interest in a variety of fields.
Required Reading Edwards, D. and Hamson, M., 1996,
Mathematical Modelling Skills, Macmillan Press.
Recommended Reading COMAP, 1997, For All Practical
Purposes: Introduction to Contemporary Mathematics, 4th edn,
W.H. Freeman and Co. Epp, S.S., 1995, Discrete Mathematics with
Applications, 2nd edn, ITP. Mathews, J.H., 1987, Numerical
Methods for Computer Science, Engineering and Mathematics,
Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; assignments, 20%.
RCM2810 ADVANCED INTERNET PROGRAMMING
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney (Alpha Beta College), Hong
Kong, Malaysia.
Prerequisite(s) RCM1114, RCM1311, RCM1711
Content XHTML and JavaScript: interaction between a web-page
and a user; input validation and submission of a form; response to
submission of a form; connecting an OOM to a GUI. The bridge
between XHTML/JavaScript and an embedded object: applets and
scriptlets as examples of embedded objects; how to use XHTML to
initialize parameters of an an applet, and to us JavaScript to control
the parameters at runtime; how to adapt an applet to read initial
values of parameters from an XHTML page, and to read parameter
values at run-time from an XHTML/JavaScript page; DHTML: CSS
style-sheets, positioning elements, layering a page, interaction
between the user and the web-page; Server-side topics:
communication through sockets, creating a simple browser and a
simple HTTP server, PHP, MySQL; Emerging Internet technologies
such as SOAP for accessing objects, and Wireless ML for WAP-
enabled devices.
Required Reading The five parts of D.R. Watson's interactive
hypertexts on Internet Programming. Powell, T. and Schneider, F.,
2001 or later, JavaScript: The Compete Reference, McGraw-Hill.
Recommended Reading Deitel, H.M., Deitel P.J. and Nieto,
T.R., 2002 or later, Internet and WWW: How to Program, 2nd edn,
Prentice-Hall.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
one two-hour lecture and one two-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Laboratory work, 12%; mid-semester practical
examination (3 hours duration), 30%; end-of-semester practical
examination (3 hours duration), 58%. In order to pass, students must
obtain at least 50% of the total marks given in this subject.
RCM2911 LINEAR OPTIMISATION MODELLING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Introduction to linear programming; Mathematical models;
Graphical solution; Maximisation and minimisation problems;
Spreadsheet models. Sensitivity analysis for LP; Applications of LP.
Transportation problem. Assignment & Trans-shipment Simplex
method, Hungarian method. Pure and mixed integer linear
programming; Knapsack problems.
Required Reading Winston, W.L., 2004, Operations Research:
Applications and Algorithms, 4th edn, Duxbury Press.
Recommended Reading Anderson, S. & W., 1999,
Contemporary Management Science with Spreadsheets, South
Western College Publishing.
Class Contact Four hours per week; two hours and two hours
tutorial and/or laboratory.
Assessment Participation in tutorials, 5%; test 15%; assignment,
10%; final examination, 70% three hours; to obtain a grade of pass
or better, a student must obtain 40% or more in the final
examination.
RCM2912 PROJECT SCHEDULING
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content A selection of topics from the following. Standard Flow
Shop and Job Shop Scheduling Techniques, Project Scheduling and
Management-Finding a critical path, PERT calculations, Time/Cost
Trade-offs in reducing total project time, Crashing and indirect costs,
Time-Charting and Resource leveling, Use of MSProject, EXCEL and
Leuin Scheduling Systems. Project Risk Analysis. Materials
Requirement Planning, Current Trends in Scheduling and real-Time
Computing Systems. Emphasis will be on real-world problems using
computing applications
Required Reading Lecture notes provided by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Michael Pinedo and Xiuli Chao.
Operations Scheduling with Applications in Manufacturing and
Services, Irwin/McGraw Hill, 1999, Schwalbe, K, Information
Technology Project Management (2nd edition, Course Technology,
2002. Taha, Hamdy A., Operations research : an introduction (6th
edition), Prentice Hall, 1997, Winston, W.L., and Albright, S. C.,
Data analysis and decision making with Microsoft Excel, Duxbury,
1999, Winston, W.L., Operations Research (3rd edition), Duxbury,
1994.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours lectures and two hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Two Assignments 30%, Final Examination 70%.
RCM2915 STOCHASTIC AND COMBINATORIAL OPTIMISATION
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Malaysia, Singapore
Prerequisite(s) RCM1613 or equivalent.
Content Decision Analysis: Decision Making without and with
Probabilities; Decision Tress, EVPI and EVSI. Multicriteria Decision
Making: Scoring Model, Analytical Hierarchy Process; Spreadsheet
Analysis. Selected Combinatorial Optimisation Models: Network
Models – spanning tree, shortest path, and maximum flow problems;
Set Covering Problem; Cutting Stock Problem; Bin Packing Problem.
Queuing Theory: Basic components of a queuing model, arrival and
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
214
service time distributions; operating characteristics of a queuing
system; multiple server models; no waiting time and finite calling
population; Economic Analysis; Spreadsheet Analysis.
Required Reading Winston, W.L., 2004, Operations Research:
Applications and Algorithms, 4th edn, Duxbury.
Recommended Reading Anderson, Sweeney and Williams,
1999, Contemporary Management Science with Spreadsheets,
South Western College Publishing. Subject notes will be supplied to
supplement the textbook as necessary.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester; two hours
lecture and two hour tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Participation in Tutorials, 5%; Class Test, 15%;
Assignment, 10% Final examination, 70%. To obtain a grade of
pass or better a student must obtain 40% or more in the final
examination.
RCM2930 3D WEB TECHNOLOGIES
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Hong Kong, Malaysia.
Prerequisite(S) RCM1312
Content VRML/Java3D programming. Structure of a VR Object;
Basic structures and adjustment of predefined simple and complex
scenes. Adding processing capabilities to VR models by scripting
languages. Adding audio-visual effects (light, sound, image texture
mapping, audio and video), higher level tools for creating 3D virtual
worlds and other approaches to 3D web content; scene graphs.
Creating and navigating the virtual world. Creating interactive 3D
graphic models and animations by Java 3D.
Required Reading Lectures notes provided by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Daniel Selman, 2002, Java 3D
Programming Manning Publications Company. Justin Couch, 2004,
Java 3D Techniques for real Applications, Apress S Diehl, 2001,
Distributed Virtual Worlds: Foundations and Implementation
Techniques Using VRML, Java and Corba, Springer Verlag Aaron E.
Walsh, 2000, Mikael Bourges-Sevenier, Core Web 3D, Prentice
Hall PTR Andrea L. Ames, David R. Nadeau, John L. Moreland,
1996, VRML 2.0 Sourcebook, 2nd Edn, John Wiley & Sons. Jedd
Hartman and Josie Wernecke, 1996, The VRML 2.0 Handbook,
Addison-Wesley Publishing Company Inc. Henry Sowizral, Kevin
Rushforth, Michael deering, 2000, The Java 3D (TM) API
Specification, 2nd Edn, Addison-Wesley Pub Co. Jon Barrilleaux,
2000, 3D User Interfaces With Java 3D, Manning Publications
Company.
Class Contact four hours per week comprising of lectures and two
hour of tutorial and computer laboratory.
Assessment Normally Two Assignments, 30%; final examination,
70%.
RCM3001 PROJECT 1
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) 10 Electives
Content This subject is based and involves projects with industry
sponsors selected by the University. Students work in groups under
the supervision of an Academic Staff member. For computing
projects students are required to submit a specification document, a
final project report and demonstrate the software. For non-
computing projects students are required to submit a project
specification and a final project report. In addition, all groups
present progress and final oral presentations to other students, staff
and industry partners.
Required Reading Nil.
Recommended Reading Nil
Class Contact four hours per week
Assessment Based on performance in the projects oral
presentations and quality of final reports.
RCM3002 PROJECT 2
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) ACE1145 or Year 12 English or competence in
English, Must have completed year 2.
Content Appropriate to the project involved, the student will be
required to produce a number of documents such as test plan,
design project report, user manual, e-poster and CD-ROM. The
student will be continually supervised under the guidance of the
subject co-ordinator and their project supervisors via weekly
meetings at various stages of the project.
The student’s ability as a competent communicator in industry
settings will be further developed through workshop activities. The
writing of a group project report, writing professional applications,
preparing for and role playing interviews and developing oral
presentation skills will be included in the workshops.
Required Reading Mohan T (et al) Communicating as
Professionals, Thomson, Melbourne, 2004.
Recommended Reading Handbook of Communication Skills for
First Year Students in the Faculty of Science, Engineering and
Class Contact 1x two hr project meetings with subject co-ordinator
and project supervisor; 1x two hr workshop.
Assessment Demo Presentations, 10%; User Acceptance Test,
20%; Attendance of Meetings and Online Logbook, 5%;
Documentation, User Manual, 20%; Final Presentation & e-Poster,
20%Written Employment Application, 15%; Interviews, 10%.
All items of assessment must be completed in order for a final result
to be obtained in this subject
RCM3111 DATA COMMUNICATIONS & NETWORKS 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequiste(S) RCM2111 Data Communications & Networks 1
Content Review of data communication principles, standards and
signals. Networked multimedia applications. Fundamentals of
multimedia communications. Temporal relationships multimedia
communications. Multimedia communications over wide area
networks and local area networks. Internetworking and atm
protocol.
Required Reading to be advised by lecturer
Recommended Reading Halsall, F., Data Communications,
Computer Networks and Open Systems, 4th edn, Addison Wesley.
Sharda, N. 1999, Multimedia Information Networking, Prentice
Hall.
Class Contact Four hours contact per week for one semester
comprising two one hour lectures and two one-hour
laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 70%, assignments, 30%.
RCM3112 USER INTERFACE DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s)RCM1114, RCM1115
Content Cognitive frameworks for HCI. Interaction styles. Help and
error messages. Direct manipulation. Prototyping, Evaluation of the
interface. Multimedia authoring. Computing Supported Co-operative
Work. Usability testing. Prototyping. Rapid application
development. User testing. Software metrics
Required Reading Preece, J., Rogers, Y., Sharp, H., 2002,
Interaction Design, Wiley.
Recommended Reading Shneiderman, B., 1997, Designing the
User Interface, Addison Wesley. Nielsen, J. 1993, Usability
Engineering, AP Professional, Cambridge. Norman, D., 1990, The
Design of Everyday Things¸ Doubleday, New York. Neilsen, J.,
2000, Designing Web Usability, New Riders, Indianopolis.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
215
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and one one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 60%; assignment and tests, 40%.
RCM3115 ARCHITECTURES FOR ENTERPRISE WIDE COMPUTING
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) RCM2218, RCM2315
Content The client/server model. Comparison to mainframe
environment; legacy system connections; mission critical services.
Client and server roles. Network services; middleware and
controlware; Two, three and n-tier architectures; integration layers;
interfacing protocols and procedures. Client/server analysis
modeling. Requirements determination; data models and object
modeling; business process concepts and models. Data Base and
user Interface Design. Database systems and services; integrated
information architectures; linking multiple databases; GUI standards
and design recommendations. Client/server development
environments. Object building blocks; prototyping services; rapid
application development; testing and validation. Extensions of the
client/server model. Remote method invocation; CORBA;
applications involving remote processing.
Required Reading Linthicum, D, 1997, Guide to Client/Server
and Intranet Development, Wiley
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
of two hours of lectures and two hours of laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 70%; tests/assignments, 30%.
RCM3211 DATABASE SYSTEMS 3
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) RCM2218 Database Systems 2.
Content Data warehouse, datamart, knowledge discovery in
databases, data mining algorithms, online analytic processing
(OLAP), online transaction processing (OLTP), hypercubes, star
schemas, Multidimensional analysis, ROLAP and MOLAP.
Required Reading Nil.
Recommended Reading Inmon, W.H., 2002, Building the Data
Warehouse, 3rd edn, Wiley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and two one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 70%; assignment and tests, 30%.
RCM3311 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING 2
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) RCM1312 Programming 2; RCM2311 Object
Oriented Programming 1.
Content The subject explores advanced Java object-oriented
programming yechniques and their distributed characteristics in the
Internet environment. Topics covered include JavaBeans, Security,
JDBC, Servlets, Java Server Pages (JSP), Remote Method Invocation
(RMI)
Required Reading To be advised by lecturere.
Recommended Reading Deitel, H. M., and Deitel, P.J., Java
How to Program, 6th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2005
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
three one hour lectures and one one hour lab/tute.
Assessment Final examination, 80% assignments and tests, 20%.
RCM3312 INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) RCM1312 Programming 2 and RCM1115
Computer Systems and Architecture
Content Introduction to intelligent systems and artificial intelligence,
including a study of knowledge representation and problem solving
strategies of rule-based expert systems, fuzzy logic, artificial neural
networks and genetic algorithms. Practical work includes JESS
expert system shell.
Required Reading Negnevitsky, M., 2005, Artificial Intelligence,
A Guide to Intelligent Systems, 2nd edn. Addison Wesley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and two one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; assignment(s), 20%.
RCM3313 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING 2
Campus Footscray Park, Malaysia, Hong Kong
Prerequisite(s) RCM2312, RCM2311
Content Topics include inspection and formal review, good
programming practice, software testing, software estimation, project
planning, software process improvement and capability maturity
models.
Recommended Reading Schach, S., 2005, Object Oriented
and Classical Software Engineering, 6th edn, McGRaw Hill. Persse,
2001, Implementing the Capability Maturity Model, Wiley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and two one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; assignment 20%. In order to
pass, students must obtain at 50% of the total marks given in this
subject, including at least 40% of the examination mark and at least
40% of the internal marks.
RCM3314 OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) RCM2311 Object Oriented Programming 1.
Content Review of object oriented design approaches; the Unified
Modeling Language (UML); introduction to Rational Rose; the
Unified Method; and Agile Modeling approach. design of domain
layer; design of storage layer for the use of persistent objects; user
interface design considerations; applying the patterns approache to
analysis and design.
Required Reading Larman, C., 2005, Applying VML and
Patterns Pearson Education.
Recommended Reading Braude, E., 2003, Software Design:
From Programming to Architecture, Addison Wesley. Jacobson, I.,
1999, The Unified Software Development Process, Addison Wesley,
Quatrani, T., 2002, Visual Modelling with Rational Rose, and UML,
Addison Wesley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising of
two one-hour lectures and two one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 70%; Assignment and test, 30%.
RCM3316 ADVANCED MATHEMATICAL TECHNIQUES
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCM2321
Content A selection of one or more of the following topics:
Asymptotic and perturbation techniques:
Taylor’s Theorem and 1’Hospital’s Rule, Order Symbols, Asympotic
Expansions, Asymptotic series versus convergent series, introduction
to perturbation theory, Taylor’s method, perturbation and Asymptotic
of Algebraic and Transcendental Equations, application to solution
of differential equations, regular versus singular perturbation,
application to expansion of integrals, Gamma function, transforms,
integration by parts, Laplace method, method of stationery phase,
method of steepest descent, developing Maple code to solve
applicable problems.
Advanced techniques for differential equations: methods for non-
constant coefficient ordinary differential equations, analytic
techniques to solve linear partial differential equations, heat
equations, wave equation, Black-Schole option pricing formula,
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
216
Navier Stokes equation including viscous and inviscid flow. Green’s
functions and reformation to integral form.
Computional techniques to include finite element method, Crank-
Nicholson, elementary methods for integral equations and singular
quadrature.
Advanced computional techniques: Integration and quadrature
including Newton-Cotes, weighted Newton-Cotes,adaptive schemes,
Gaussian quadrature, Peano theorem and generation of error
bounds for a variety of measures, application to Taylor theorem,
integral transforms and integral equations of the first and second
kind, multi-dimensional quadrature.
Required Reading Nil
Recommended Reading N. Bleistein and R.A. Handelsman,
Asymptotic Expansion of Integrals, Dover 1986, N. De Bruin,
Asymptotic methods in Analysis, Dover 1981, R. Bellman,
Perturbation Techniques in Mathematics, Engineering and Physics,
Dover 2003, N. Asmar, Partial Differential Equations and Boundary
Value Problems, Prentice Hall 2000, R. Haberman, Applied Partial
Differential Equations, Prentice Hall, 2003.
Class Contact 2 x one hr, 1x1hr tutorial, 1x1hrs Laboratory for
one semester.
Assessment 15% Lab work, 15% mid-semester test (90 minutes),
70% end of semester examination (3 hours).
RCM3511 IMAGE PROCESSING 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCM2511 Image Processing, RCM1312
Programming 2
Content Image file types. Topology and geometry; applications to
boundary detection, skeletonization and image resizing.
Quantization and dithering. Advanced frequency domain filtering,
including inverse filtering and Wiener filtering; the Fast Fourier
Transform. Shape and size analysis: greyscale morphology and
shape descriptors. Lossy compression and the JPEG standard.
Wavelets and their applications. Implementation of image
processing algorithms.
Required Reading Gonzalez, R.C. and Woods, R.E., Digital
Image Processing, 2nd edn, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company.
Recommended Reading Russ, J.C., The Image Processing
Handbook, CRC Press, Boca Raton. Serra, J.P., Image Analysis and
Mathematical Morphology, Academic Press, London.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and two one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 70%; assignment and tests, 30%.
RCM3611 REGRESSION ANALYSIS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(S): RCM2611
Content Review of linear model theory. The signs of, and solution
to, common problems with the assumptions necessary for inference
in the least squares regression method. Using Generalised Linear
Models to overcome a number of these problems. Logistic regression
and log linear models. Non-linear regression methods.
Required Reading Myers, R.H. ‘Classical and Modern
Regression with Applications’ 2nd Ed. 1990, Duxbury.
Recommended Reading Venables W., & Ripley B. ‘Modern
Applied Statistics with S-Plus’ 3rd Ed. 2001 Springer.
Class Contact four hours per week for one semester, mix of
lectures, tutorials and computer laboratory.
Assessment Final Examination 60% Assignments 40%.
RCM3613 TIME SERIES ANALYSIS
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Malaysia, Singapore
Prerequisite(s) RCM2612 Forecasting or equivalent.
Content Review of Basic Time Series and Forecasting Concepts.
Time Series Regression. Box-Jenkins Models and their Identification.
Concepts of Stationarity. Theoretical Autocorrelations and Partial
Autocorrelations. Seasonal and Non-Seasonal ARIMA Models.
Invertibility. Mutlivariate Transfer Functions. Cross-Correlations.
Intervention models. Combining Models. Cyclical Forecasting
Methods. Long-Term Forecasting. Real world applications.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer
Recommended Reading Bowerman, B.L. and O’Connell, R.T.
1993, Forecasting and Time Series – An Applied Approach, 3rd
edn, Duxbury. Chatfield, C. 1996, The Analysis of Time Series, 5th
edn, Chapman and Hall. Cryer, J.D. 1986, Time Series Analysis,
Duxbury. Kendall, M. and Ord, J.K., 1990, Time Series, 3rd edn,
Edward Arnold. Diebold, F.X., 2001, Elements of Forecasting, 2nd
edn, South Western. Makridakis, S., Wheelwright, S.C. and
Hyndman, R.J., 1998, Forecasting – Methods and Applications, 3rd
edn, Wiley. Makridakis, S. and Wheelwright, S.C., 1989,
Forecasting Methods for Management, 5th edn, Wiley. Wei, W.S.,
1990, Time Series Analysis, Addison Wesley.
Class Contact Four hours per week comprising two hours lecture
and two hour laboratory.
Assessment Final examination, 50%; project, 50%.
RCM3615 MULTIVARIATE STATISTICS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCM2611 Linear Statistical Models, RCM1713
Discrete Mathematics.
Content Revision and extension of work previously covered on
matrix algebra. Brief discussion ofmultivariate distributions with
particular reference to the multivariate normal distribution and
discussion fo multivariate statistical tests. A selection of topics from,
discriminant analysis, principal components, factor analysis,
regression analysis.
Required Reading Johnson, R.A. and Wichern, D.W., Applied
Multivariate Statistical Analysis, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two hours of lectures and two hour of laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; Test, 20%.
RCM3617 QUALITY IMPROVEMENT AND EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCM1614 Applied Statistics 2.
Content Fundamental ‘quality’ and ‘quality management’ issues.
Specifications and the loss function. Process capability and statistical
process control. An introduction to feedback control. Factorial
experiments and fractional factorial designs. Taguchi methods.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Class Contact Four hour mix of lectures, tutorials, practice and
laboratory classes.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; Mid-semester test, 20%.
RCM3711 COMPUTATIONAL METHODS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCM2712 or RMA2201 or RMA2801.
Content This subject is designed for students interested in applying
knowledge of programming techniques to solving applied
computational problems. Topics include approximation and
interpolation, optimization and root finding, quadrature, spectral
decomposition and methods for differential equations. A variety of
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
217
practical applications will be considered, set in a high level
programming environment.
Required Reading Nil
Recommended Reading Atkinson, K.E., 1989, An Introduction
to Numerical Analysis, John Wiley & Sons.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and two one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; assignment and tests, 20%.
RCM3712 CODING, CRYPTOGRAPHY AND COMPUTER SECURITY
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCM1711 Mathematical Foundations 1 and
RCM1712 Mathematical Foundations 2.
Content Information Theory, error correcting and error control
codes, cryptosystems, one way functions, public key systems, Data
Encryption Standard.
Required Reading Beckett, B. 1989, Introduction to
Cryptography, Blackwell Scientific. Adamek, J. 1991, Foundation of
Coding, Wiley.
Recommended Reading Pretzel, O. 1992, Error-Correcting
Codes and Future Fields, Oxford UP. Seberry, J. and Pieprzyk, J.
1989, Cryptography: An Introduction to Computer Security,
Prentice-Hall. Sloane, N.J.A. and McWilliams, F.J. 1981, The
Theory of Error Correcting Codes, Elsevier Science, North-Holland,
N.Y. Welsh, D. 1989, Codes and Cryptography, Oxford,
Clarendon.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and one one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; assignment and tests, 20%.
RCM3720 CRYPTOGRAPHY, COMPUTER AND NETWORK SECURITY
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) RCM1711 Mathematical Foundations 1 and
RCM1712 Mathematical Foundations 2 or equivalent.
Content Basic terminology of cryptography and cryptanalysis.
Number theory: primes, factoring, congruences. Classical
cryptosystems: Caesar, Vigenère, Hill. Public key cryptography:
RSA, Rabin, El Gamal. Digital Signatures. Knapsack cryptosystems:
definition and cryptanalysis. Block ciphers and hash functions:
security, modes of encryption. The Data Encryption Standard:
definition, security issues. Finite fields and the Advanced Encryption
Standard.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Trappe, W., and Washington, L.C.,
2002, Introduction to Cryptography with Coding Theory, Prentice
Hall. Scheneier, B., 1996, Applied Cryptography, 2nd edn, John
Wiley & Sons. Stallings, W., 2003, Cryptography and Network
Security: Principles and Practice, 3rd edn, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Four hours per week: two hours lecture, and two
hour tutorial or laboratory.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; assignment and tests, 20%.
RCM3820 INTERNET COMPUTING USING XML
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney (Alpha Beta College), Hong
Kong, Malaysia.
Prerequisite(s) RCM1114
Content Introduction to XML: definition, benefits, etc.; XML tools;
XML namespaces; Document Type Definitions; XML Schema;
Extensible Stylesheet Language; XML Forms; XSL Formatting Objects;
Resource Description Framework and Dublin Core.
Required Reading To be advised.
Recommended Reading Bradley, N., 2002, The XML
Companion, Addison-Wesley. Ray E., 2001, Learning XML: (Guide
to) Creating Self-Describing Data, O'Reilly & Associates, Inc.
Shepherd, D., 2000, Sams Teach Yourself XML in 21 Days, 2nd
edn, Sams Publishing. http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-xml (World
Wide Web Consortium’s XML specification); http://www.xml.com/
(xml.com)
Class Contact four hours/week: two hours of lectures and two
hours of computer laboratory.
Assessment Two assignments, 30%; final examination, 70% (3
hours duration). In order to pass, students must obtain at least 50%
of the total marks given in this subject.
RCM3911 SIMULATION
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong
Prerequisite(s) Pass in eight electives (advisory). Students should
have successfully completed second year.
Content On completion of the subject, students should be able to:
understand the philosophy and concepts of simulation; have a good
knowledge and understanding of a modern simulation language
including principles of modelling; design, justify, and implement
computer-based models of the operation of manufacturing and
business systems.
Required Reading SCM3911 Lecture Notes.
Recommended Reading Pegden, C.D., Shannon. R.E. and
Sadowski, R.P. 1995, Introduction to Simulation using SIMAN, 2nd
edn, McGraw-Hill.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and two one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 70%; assignment and tests, 30%.
RCM3940 COMPUTATIONAL RISK MODELLING
Campus Footscray Park.
Prerequisite(s) RCM1311, RCM1711
Content Futures: Mechanics of futures and forward markets;
Determination of forward and futures prices; Hedging strategies
using futures. Options: Mechanics of options markets; Trading
strategies using options; Properties of stock options; Valuation of
stock options using: binomial trees, simulation. Pricing of stock
options using Black-Scholes. Interest-rate futures. Swaps. Introduction
to credit, weather, energy and insurance options.
Required Reading Hull, J.C., 2002 or later, Fundamentals of
Futures and Options Markets, 4th edn, Prentice Hall. Watson, D.R.,
2003, Complement to Financial Risk Management, a hypertext
book available on the web. Subject lecturer to advise on web
access.
Recommended Reading Hull, J.C., 2003, Options, Futures, and
Other Derivatives, 5th edn, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Two hrs of lectures and two hr tutorial/laboratory
per week for one semester.
Assessment Assignment, 20%; final examination, 80%.
RCM3950 INTERNET DATA MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney (Alpha Beta College), Hong
Kong, Malaysia.
Prerequisite(s) RCM2313
Content Introduction to Class; Introduction to ASP.NET; Introduction
to Visual Studio NET; Using Server Controls; Using ASP.NET Rich
Controls; Using Visual Basic.NET Within an ASP.NET Page;
Managing Data Sources; Building Data-Driven ASP.NET
Applications; Building Data-Driven Web Applications; Configuring
an ASP.NET Application; Troubleshooting and Deploying an
ASP.NET Application.
Required Reading Introduction to ASP.NET, Kathleen Kalata, ©
2002 Course Technology, 0-619-06321-1.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
218
Recommended Reading ASP.NET by Example, Steven A. Smith,
© 2002 Que, 0-7897-2562-2. Beginning ASP.NET using C#, Chris
Ulman, Chris Goode, Juan T. Llibre, Ollie Cornes et al, © 2001
Wrox Press, 1-861006-15-2.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
one two-hour lecture and two one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Laboratory, 15%; Assignments,35%; mid-Semester
Test (1 hour duration), 25%; final test (1 hour duration), In order to
pass, students must obtain at least 25% of Labs and Assignment,
and 25% of Tests in this subject
RCM3960 INTERNET SECURITY
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney (Alpha Beta College), Hong
Kong, Malaysia.
Prerequisite(s) RCM1711 and RCM1712 or equivalent.
Content Basic definitions and concepts; security as a continued
process; human factors; hardware and software considerations
Physical security and hardware: system access; modems: dialup and
ADSL. Encryption principles: private/public key cryptosystems,
protocols. Cryptanalysis; attacks. Public key encryption: RSA and
variants. Key exchange protocols and key rings. Private key
encryption: DES and Rijndael. Authentication: password security;
password entropy. Dictionary attacks. Firewalls: hardware and
software. Port security. Communications: telnet and ftp; ssh and sftp.
WWW security: web browsers and servers. Secure Socket Layer
(SSL). Email security: PGP and GnuPG, S/MIME. Use and
implementation. Hackers, viruses and malicious attacks: dealing
with break-ins. Minimizing damage.
Required Reading Supplied notes.
Recommended Reading Ferguson, N. and Schneier, B., 2003,
Practical Cryptography, Wiley. Schneier, B., 2000, Secrets and
Lies: Digital Security in a Networked World, John Wiley & Sons.
Garfinkel, S., Schwartz, A., Spafford, G., 2003, Practical Unix &
Internet Security, 3rd edn, O'Reilly & Associates. Bishop, D., 2002,
Introduction to Cryptography with Java Applets, Jones & Bartlett.
Oaks, S., 2001, Java Security, 2nd edn, O'Reilly & Associates.
Knudsen, J., 1998, Java Cryptography, O'Reilly & Associates.
Galbreath, N., 2002, Cryptography for Internet and Database
Applications: Developing Secret and Public Key Techniques with
Java, Wiley. Stallings, W., 2003, Cryptography and Network
Security: Principles and Practice, 2nd edn, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact four hours/week: two lectures and two computer
laboratory, one tutorial.
Assessment two mid semester tests, 15% each (1 hour duration);
one final exam,70% (3 hours duration). In order to pass, students
must obtain at least 50% of the total marks given in this subject.
RCM3970 COMPUTER GRAPHICS FOR GAME PROGRAMMING
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney (Alpha Beta College), Hong
Kong, Malaysia, China.
Prerequisite(s) RCM1713 or equivalent, RCM2213
Content The graphics pipeline and graphics performance: texture
mapping; description of surface and curve; advanced topics on
hidden surface removal; using and manipulating scene graphs;
design of interactive applications; collision detection, geometric
level of detail; special effects such as shadows, billboarding and
motion blur; and hardware procedural shading.
Required Reading Lecture notes provided by lecturer.
Recommended Reading D. Astle and K. Hawkins, 2001,
OpenGL Game Programming, Premier Press. David H. Eberly,
2001, 3D Game Engine Design, Morgan Kaufmann. T.Akenine-
Moller, E.Haines, 2002, Real-Time Rendering, A K Peters Ltd. David
Luebke, Jonathan D. Cohen, Martin Reddy, Amitabh Varshney,
Robert Huebner, Level of Detail for 3D Graphics. Alan Watt, Fabio
Policarpo, 3D Games, Addison-Wesley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester, comprising
one two-hour lecture and two one-hour tutorial and computer
laboratory.
Assessment Normally two assignments, 30%; final examination,
70%.
RCS1000 MEDICAL, FORENSIC AND ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 1
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Overview and introduction to the principles and
methodology of medical, forensic and analytical chemistry. Medical
chemistry: introduction to medical therapeutics and diagnostics,
organic and inorganic medical chemistry, nuclear medicine and
drug design. Forensic chemistry: introduction to physical evidence,
fire and explosion investigation, firearm investigation, drug analysis
and the analysis of chemical evidence such as fibres. An
introduction to the relevant areas of analytical chemistry include an
overview of measurements in the analytical laboratory, solutions and
concentrations, and an introduction to classical analytical chemistry
including volumetric analysis and methods based on analytical
separations.
Required Reading Chang, R., Essential Chemistry, 3rd edition,
McGraw-Hill. Saferstein, R., Criminalistics: An Introduction to
Forensic Science, 8th edition, Prentice-Hall.
Recommended Reading Students will be directed towards
relevant sections of the medical, forensic and analytical chemistry
literature.
Class Contact Three hours of lectures and one hour of
tutorials/demonstrations per week.
Assessment Written examination, 100%.
RCS1110 CHEMISTRY FOR BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES A
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Chemistry relevant to biological sciences including the
topics which follow: Matter and energy, Measurement, Atomic
theory and the periodic table, Chemical and physical bonding,
Chemical formulae, reactions and equations, Molecular structure
and the state of matter, Solutions and aqueous chemistry.
Required Reading Bettelheim, F.A., Brown, W.H. and March, J.,
2001, Introduction to General, Organic and Biochemistry, 6th edn,
Harcourt College Publishers.
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Six hours per week for one semester comprising
three hours of lectures, one hour tutorial and two hour practical
classes.
Assessment Assignment, 10%; Practical work, 20%; Examination,
70%.
RCS1120 CHEMISTRY FOR BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES B
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) RCS1110 Chemistry for Biological Sciences A or
equivalent
Content Chemistry topics relevant to biological sciences and which
incorporate specific reference to biological systems. Topics will
include the following: Basic physical chemistry including chemical
equilibrium and kinetics, acids and bases, Thermochemistry,
Oxidation and reduction, Inorganic and nuclear chemistry with
reference to selected elements of biological chemistry, Organic
chemistry and biological chemistry.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
219
Required Reading Bettelheim, F.A., Brown, W.H. and March, J.,
2001, Introduction to General, Organic and Biochemistry, 6th edn,
Harcourt College Publishers.
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Six hours per week for one semester comprising
three hours of lectures, one hour tutorial and two hour practical
classes.
Assessment Assignment, 10%; Practical work, 20%; Examination,
70%.
RCS1601 CHEMISTRY 1A
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Chemistry methods and measurements; atomic theory and
the periodic table; structures and properties of ionic and covalent
compounds; chemical equation, reactions and solutions;
co-ordination chemistry, acids and bases.
Required Reading Chang, R., Essential Chemistry ( A Core Text
for General Chemistry), 2nd edn, McGraw Hill. Laboratory manuals
as directed.
Recommended Reading Denniston, Topping, Caret, General,
Organic and Biochemistry, 3rd edn, McGraw-Hill.
Class Contact Seven hours per week comprising three hours of
lecture, three hours of laboratory and one hour of tutorial.
Assessment Laboratory work, 30%; tutorial assessments, 15%;
examination, 55%.
RCS1602 CHEMISTRY 1B
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content States of matter; physical and chemical changes (energy,
rate and equilibrium); oxidation-reduction reaction
(electrochemistry); the nucleus, radioactivity and nuclear medicine;
Organic chemistry: saturated and unsaturated hydrocarbons;
alcohol phenols, thiols and ethers; aldehydes and ketones;
carboxylic acids and their derivatives; amines and amides;
biological chemistry.
Required Reading Chang, R., Essential Chemistry ( A Core Text
for General Chemistry), 2nd edn, McGraw Hill. Laboratory manuals
as directed.
Recommended Reading Denniston, Topping, Caret, General,
Organic and Biochemistry, 3rd edn, McGraw-Hill.
Class Contact Seven hours per week comprising three hours of
lecture, three hours of laboratory and one hour of tutorial.
Assessment Practical work, 30%; tutorial assessments, 15%;
examination and assignment, 55%.
RCS2250 PROCESS ENGINEERING 1
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Students would normally be expected to have
successfully completed SPH1210 Physics 1F and RMA1110
Mathematics for the Biological and Chemical Sciences 1.
Content The subject aims to introduce students to basic engineering
principles and to unit operations involved in food processing. Topics
covered include: dimensions and units; material and energy
balances; process flow diagrams; fluid flow theory and applications;
heat transfer theory, applications and equipment; mechanical
separation processes; instrumentation and control.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Four hours per week comprising lectures and
tutorials for one semester.
Assessment Assignments, 30%; final examination, 70%.
RCS2372 TOXICOLOGY 1B
Campus Werribee
Prerequisites RCS1110/RCS1120 Chemistry for Bioscience and
SBM1518/1528 Human Physiology or equivalent units.
Content The dose determines if a chemical produces a toxic or no
toxic response and this is the basic tenet of this unit. Topics will
introduce students to principles applied to studying dose and toxic
responses attributable to substances. This unit can be sectioned into
four modules. These are toxicology and society; thresholds and the
dose response effects; toxicokinetics and biotransformation; and
mechanisms of toxicity. The unit also covers sources of chemical and
toxicological information and how to approach the assessment of a
problem involving a chemical hazard that will cause toxic injury. On
completion of the unit, students are expected to be familiar with
mechanisms of toxicity and the way that sensitive cells can be
affected by specific substances as well as recognising the ways that
the body process xenobiotics.
Required Reading Timbrel, J.A., 1995, Introduction to
Toxicology, 2nd edn Taylor and Francis. Lecture Notes
Class Contact Two hour lectures or tutorials for one semester
delivered through Web-CT.
Assessment Assignments (65%) and a case studies (35%)
RCS2373 TOXICOLOGY 1A
Campus St Albans
Prerequisites RCS1110/RCS1120 Chemistry for Bioscience and
RBM1518/1528 Human Physiology or equivalent units.
Content The unit covers the possible adverse effects from exposure
to hazardous chemicals in work environments. Topics include the
description of adverse outcomes such as neurotoxicity,
hepatotoxicity and carcinogenicity that follow exposure to specific
substances. In covering these and other toxic outcomes the student
will recognise various substances that have documented effects on
the nervous, reproductive, cardiovascular, renal and hepatic
systems, or are listed as genotoxins, mutagens or carcinogens. On
completion of the unit, students are expected to be familiar with
substances that show specific toxicological effects and recognise the
mechanism of toxicity for specific drugs, solvents, metals and
pesticides. Additional topics discussed in this subject are biological
monitoring, health surveillance, ecotoxicology; effects of food toxins,
and ionising radiation and electromagnetic field effects. Part of the
unit assessment involves reviewing toxicology and occupational
medicine journal articles.
Required Reading Casarett and Doulls, 2001, Toxicology: The
Basic Science of Poisons, 6th edn, McGraw Hill. Lecture Notes.
Class Contact Two hour lectures or tutorials for one semester
delivered through Web-CT.
Assessment Assignment (50%) and a case study (50%)
RCS2502 MEDICAL CHEMISTRY 2
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RCS1601 Chemistry 1A and RCS1603 Medical,
Forensic and Analytical Chemistry 1A.
Content The aim of this subject is to introduce students to aspects
of Medical Chemistry. The topics covered include Nuclear Chemistry
and the application of Radioisotopes in Medical Chemistry.
Bioinorganic Chemistry and the role of inorganic compounds in
medicine. The synthesis and analysis of proteins, the structure and
physiology of carbohydrates and lipids and a brief introduction to
drug/molecule interactions.
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer
Class Contact Two hours of lectures and three hours of practical
classes per week for one semester.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
220
Assessment A combination of assignments, practical work, short
tests and a final examination.
RCS2503 FORENSIC CHEMISTRY 2
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RCS1603 Medical, Forensic & Analytical
Chemistry 1A or equivalent.
Content This subject draws upon real life investigations to
introduce students to forensic chemical techniques. Modern methods
of analysis and materials identification will be studied as applied to
crimes against property such as arson, burglary, vehicle accidents
and theft; crimes against the person such as assault, sexual offences
and murder; and crimes involving the possession, illicit manufacture
and distribution of drugs of abuse.
Required Reading Saferstein, R., Criminalistics – An Introduction
to Forensic Science, 7th edn, Prentice Hall. White, P., (ed), 1998,
Crime Scene to Court: The Essentials of Forensic Science, Royal
Society of Chemistry, Cambridge.
Recommended Reading Students will be directed to relevant
sections of Saferstein, R., (ed.), Forensic Science Handbook Vol 1, 2
and 3, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Two hours of lectures and three hours of practical
classes per week for one semester.
Assessment A combination of assignments, 15%; practical work,
30%; and examination, 55%.
RCS2521 APPLIED CHEMISTRY 2 – ORGANIC
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RCS1006 Chemistry 1
Content The aims of this subject are to introduce students to
fundamental aspects of synthetic organic chemistry, organic reaction
mechanisms along with applications of spectroscopy to organic
chemistry. Aromaticity. Electrophilic and nucleophilic aromatic
substitution – use in synthesis. Physical, organic chemistry,
spectroscopy, including UV, IR, NMR and mass spectroscopy.
Chemistry of carbanions – applications in synthesis. The chemistry of
free radicals. The chemistry of carbocations. Organic synthesis,
particular emphasis will be placed on the relationship of this
chemistry to industrial chemistry. Practical exercises providing
substantial ‘hands-on’ experience with chromatographic and
spectroscopic instrumentation will complement the lecture material.
Required Reading Morrison, R.T., and Boyd, R.N., 1992,
Organic Chemistry, 6th edn, Prentice Hall, Silverstein, R.M., Bassler,
G.C. and Morrill, T.C., 1991, Spectrometric Identification of
Organic Compounds, 5th edn, Wiley, Zubrick, J.W. 1992.
Class Contact Five hours per week for two semesters, comprising
two hours of lectures and three hours of practical work.
Assessment End-of-semester examination, 60%; practical work
20% and two assignments 20%.
RCS2601 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 2A
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RCS1601 Chemistry 1A, RCS1602 Chemistry 1B
or equivalent.
Content Statistics of errors and treatment of analytical data.
Sampling of complex materials. Analytical methods based on
emission and absorption of radiation including UV visible and
fluorescence spectroscopy. Introduction to NMR and mass
spectrometry. Practical exercises will provide substantial ‘hands on’
experience with modern analytical instruments and will illustrate
important analytical and physicochemical techniques.
Required Reading Students should possess a good basic
analytical chemistry text such as Skoog, D.A., West, D.M. and
Holler, F.J., Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry, Holt Rinehart and
Winston. Students are advised to buy one of the following as a
reference of enduring value. Bauer, H.H., Christian, C.D.E. and
O’Reilly, J.E., Instrumental Analysis, Allyn and Bacon. Skoog, D.A.
and Leary, J.J., Principles of Instrumental Analysis, Saunders.
Willard, H.W., Merritt, H.G., Dean, J.A. and Settle, F.A.,
Instrumental Methods of Analysis, Wadsworth.
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer and will be
based on the most current texts and journal articles that are relevant
to the subject.
Class Contact Two hours per week of lectures and three hours of
laboratory classes per week for one semester.
Assessment Students will be assessed on the basis of an
examination, 70%; and practical work, 30%. Students must pass the
practical component in order to pass this subject.
RCS2602 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 2B
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RCS1601 Chemistry 1A, RCS1602 Chemistry 1B
or equivalent.
Content Prinicples of instrumentation. Chromatographic methods
including gas chromatography and liquid chromatography.
Introduction to electrochemical methods. Analytical separation
techniques and processes. Practical exercises will provide
substantial ‘hands on’ experience with modern analytical instruments
and will illustrate important analytical and physiocochemical
techniques.
Required Reading Students should possess a good basic
analytical chemistry text such as Skoog, D.A., West, D.M. and
Holler, F.J., Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry, Holt Rinehart and
Winston. Students are advised to buy one of the following as a
reference of enduring value. Bauer, H.H., Christian, C.D.E. and
O’Reilly, J.E., Instrumental Analysis, Allyn and Bacon. Skoog, D.A.
and Leary, J.J., Principles of Instrumental Analysis, Saunders.
Willard, H.W., Merritt, H.G., Dean, J.A. and Settle, F.A.,
Instrumental Methods of Analysis, Wadsworth.
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer and will be
based on the most current texts and journal articles that are relevant
to the subject.
Class Contact Two hours per week of lectures and three hours of
laboratory classes per week for one semester.
Assessment Students will be assessed on the basis of an
examination, 70%; and practical work, 30%. Students must pass the
practical component in order to pass this subject.
RCS3411 ENVIRONMENTAL LEGISLATION
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Philosophy of pollution control and control regulations.
Environmental legislation and its implementation. Environmental law
in Victoria. Environmental impact statements. Social, economic and
political factors. Case studies.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Four hours of lectures per week for one semester.
Assessment Fieldwork and assignments, 40%; examinations,
60%.
RCS3601 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 3A
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RCS2601 Analytical Chemistry 2A and RCS2602
Analytical Chemistry 2B or equivalent.
Content Chemical literature and use of library resources; modern
trends in chemical analysis; review of analytical methodologies; an
operational model for analytical chemistry; evaluation and criticism
of analytical results; development of new analytical methods and
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
221
trends in analytical research; project planning; selection and
purchase of analytical equipment and apparatus; optimisation of
analysis. Applications of advanced spectroscopy to organic analysis
and structure elucidation. Analysis of carbohydrates, lipids,
terpenes, steroids, heterocyclic compounds and proteins.
Required Reading Students are advised to buy one of the
following as a reference of enduring value: Christian, C.D.E. and
O’Reilly, J.E. Instrumental Analysis, Allyn and Bacon. Skoog, D.A.
and Leary, J.J., Principles of Instrumental Analysis, Saunders.
Willard, H.W., Merritt, H.G., Dean, J.A. and Settle, F.A.
Instrumental Methods of Analysis, Wadsworth.
Recommended Reading Students will be referred to various
texts and journals during the subject and will be expected to read
widely from them.
Class Contact Two hours of lectures per week and four hours of
laboratory classes per week for one semester.
Assessment Students will be assessed on the basis of an
examination, 70%; and practical work, 30%. Students must pass the
practical component in order to pass this subject.
RCS3602 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 3B
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RCS2601 Analytical Chemistry 2A and RCS2602
Analytical Chemistry 2B or equivalent.
Content Principles, instrumentation, interferences and applications
in chemical analysis of absorption and emission spectroscopy
including vibrational, rotational, advanced UV visible and
fluorescence spectroscopy, and flameless AAS. Electrochemical
methods of analysis including ion-selective electrodes, and modern
polarography and stripping volumetry. Flow injection analysis.
Capillary electrophoresis. Specialized physical techniques of
analysis including thermal methods, techniques for surface analysis
and the analysis of polymer molecular weights. Practical work
providing substantial ‘hands on’ experience will complement the
lecture material.
Required Reading Students are advised to buy one of the
following as a reference of enduring value: Christian, C.D.E. and
O’Reilly, J.E. Instrumental Analysis, Allyn and Bacon. Skoog, D.A.
and Leary, J.J., Principles of Instrumental Analysis, Saunders.
Willard, H.W., Merritt, H.G., Dean, J.A. and Settle, F.A.
Instrumental Methods of Analysis, Wadsworth.
Recommended Reading Students will be referred to various
texts and journals during the subject and will be expected to read
widely from them.
Class Contact Two hours of lectures per week and four hours of
laboratory classes per week for one semester.
Assessment Students will be assessed on the basis of an
examination, 70%; and practical work, 30%. Students must pass the
practical component in order to pass this subject.
RCS3603 MEDICAL CHEMISTRY 3 (DRUG DESIGN)
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RCS2502 Medical Chemistry 2.
Content The synthesis of new chemicals and biochemicals which
mimic natural molecules. Methods used to assess the purity of
synthetically generated products. Methods used for the bioassay of
chemically synthesized chemical. The design of chemicals using 3D
drug design.
Required Reading Current available text book – student to be
advised. Crother, J.R., 1995, ELISA: Theory and Practice, Humara
Press. Innes, A.M., Gelford, D.H. and Sninsky, J.J., PCR
Applications, Academic Press.
Class Contact Two hours of lectures and four hours of practical
classes per week.
Assessment Practical work, 40%; final examination, 60%.
RCS3604 MEDICAL CHEMISTRY 3 (MEDICAL DIAGNOSTICS)
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RCS2502 Medical Chemistry 2.
Content Students enrolled in medical chemistry 3 will become
skilled in the use of the theoretical basis of advanced physico-
chemical and biochemical methods for body fluid analysis for the
diagnosis of human diseases. These techniques will include ELISA
assays and the analysis of human tissues using techniques such as
PCR to determine the DNA profile of human tissues.
Required Reading A range of textbooks and journal articles will
be recommended by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Leach, A., 1996, Molecular Modelling:
Principles and Application, Longman.
Class Contact Two hours of lectures and four hours of practical
classes per week.
Assessment Practical work, 40%; examinations, 60%.
RCS3605 FORENSIC METHODS 3A
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RCS1603 Medical, Forensic & Analytical
Chemistry 1A and RCS2503 Forensic Chemistry 2 or equivalent.
Content Forensic Methods 3A provides training in sophisticated
methods of analysis as currently applied to the examination of
materials that have in some way been associated with crime.
Modern methods of analysis and materials identification will be
studies as applied to crimes against property such as arson,
burglary, vehicle accidents and theft; crimes against the person such
as assault, sexual offences and murder; and crimes involving the
possession, illicit manufacture and distribution of drugs of abuse.
Required Reading Saferstein, R., Criminalistics – An Introduction
to Forensic Science, 7th edn, Prentice Hall. White, P., (ed), 1998,
Crime Scene to Court: The Essentials of Forensic Science, Royal
Society of Chemistry, Cambridge.
Recommended Reading Students will be directed to relevant
sections of Saferstein, R., (ed.), Forensic Science Handbook Vol 1, 2
and 3, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Two hours of lectures and three hours of practical
classes per week for one semester.
Assessment Practical work, 30%; and examination, 70%.
RCS3606 FORENSIC METHODS 3B
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RCS1603 Medical, Forensic & Analytical
Chemistry 1A and RCS2503 Forensic Chemistry 2 or equivalent.
Content Forensic Methods 3B provides training in sophisticated
methods of analysis as currently applied to the examination of
materials that have in some way been associated with crime.
Modern methods of analysis and materials identification will be
studies as applied to crimes against property such as arson,
burglary, vehicle accidents and theft; crimes against the person such
as assault, sexual offences and murder; and crimes involving the
possession, illicit manufacture and distribution of drugs of abuse.
Various topics in this subject will be delivered by practicing forensic
scientists. Legal studies is also included and introduces students to
the legal system, courtroom practices and expert testimony.
Required Reading Saferstein, R., Criminalistics – An Introduction
to Forensic Science, 7th edn, Prentice Hall. White, P., (ed), 1998,
Crime Scene to Court: The Essentials of Forensic Science, Royal
Society of Chemistry, Cambridge.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
222
Recommended Reading Students will be directed to relevant
sections of Saferstein, R., (ed.), Forensic Science Handbook Vol 1, 2
and 3, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Two hours of lectures and three hours of practical
classes per week for one semester.
Assessment Practical work, 30%; and assignments/examination,
70%.
REP1001 ENGINEERING PHYSICS 1A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Physical Units and Dimensions: Physical quantities, system
of units and standards, dimensions, unit conversion, significant
figures.
Mechanics: Scalars and vectors, displacement, velocity and
acceleration, motion in one and two dimensions, force, Newton’s
laws of motion, friction, work and energy, conservation laws.
Momentum and conservation laws, impulse and collisions, rotational
motion, moments of inertia, centre of mass, torque, angular
momentum, statics
Wave Motion & Optics: SHM, damped harmonic motion, forced
oscillations and resonance, oscillatory motion, mechanical and
acoustic waves, superposition and standing waves, electromagnetic
waves, reflection and refraction of light, mirrors and lenses, wave
optics, thin films, polarization.
Fluids: Density, pressure, Pascal’s law, equation of continuity,
Bernouill’s equation.
Required Reading Giancoli, D.C. Physics for Scientists and
Engineers with Modern Physics, 3rd Edition, 2000, Prentice Hall
Engineering Physics !A Laboratory Manual Victoria University.
Class Contact Students will be required to use the text book
(required reading) extensively.
Assessment Class tests conducted throughout the semester (5 x
4% multiple choice internet based tests of 30 munutes duration
each), 20%; Laboratory performance (5 x 4% laboratories during
the semester), 20%; End of semester, open book examination 60%.
REP1003 ENGINEERING PHYSICS 1C
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) REP1001 Engineering Physics 1A or equivalent.
Students without formal academic qualifications in physics but with
significant relevant experience may be considered for direct entry
into this subject.
Content A selection of topics taken from the following:
Thermodynamics: temperature, thermal expansion, heat conduction
and insulation, heat capacity, specific and latent heat, ideal gases,
work and heat in the thermal process, 1st law of thermodynamics,
heat engines and the 2nd law of thermodynamics, thermal
radiation.
Electrical Devices: Fundamentals of electric circuits, series and
parallel circuits, circuit analysis, DC and AC circuits, operation,
performance characteristics and selection of motors and generators
Required Reading Giancoli, D.C. Physics for Scientists and
Engineers with Modern Physics, 3rd Edition, 2000, Prentice Hall
Engineering Physics !A Laboratory Manual Victoria University
Class Contact Students will be required to use the text book
(required reading) extensively.
Assessment Class tests conducted throughout the semester (5 x
4% multiple choice internet based tests of 30 munutes duration
each), 20%; Laboratory performance (5 x 4% laboratories during
the semester), 20%; End of semester, open book examination, 60%.
REP4100 DATA ACQUISITION
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completion of 1st year in an appropriate B.Eng.,
B.Eng.Sc., B.Sc. or B.App.Sc course.
Content Experimental data handling: measurements and errors.
Types of errors, combining errors. Graphical analysis, statistical
distributions.
Sensors and transducers: Transducer types, e.g. resistive, voltage,
current, capacitive, inductive. Transducer circuits such as bridges
and operational amplifiers. Generalised measurement systems.
Computer laboratory interfacing: Analogue to digital conversion:
Data acquisition, time varying signals and the sampling theorem.
Digital to analogue conversion: Generation of DC and AC voltages.
Adaptive computer control: Open-loop system response,
performance criteria. Control types, hysteresis. Digital input and
output. General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB); description and
overview.
Graphical programming: Fundamentals of a graphical programming
environment for the creation of a ‘virtual instrument’, e.g. LabVIEW.
Project: Students will be assigned projects that will involve the
automation of an experiment, both in terms of the hardware and
software requirements.
Required Reading Kirkup, L, 1994, Experimental Methods, John
Wiley & Sons, Qld; Travis, J, 2001, LabVIEW for Everyone, 2nd
edn, Prentice Hall NJ.
Recommended Reading Squires, G. L., 1991, Practical Physics,
3rd Edition, Cambridge University Press, UK; Usher, M.J. 1985,
Sensors and Transducers, MacMillan, London; Essick, C., 1998,
Advanced Labview Labs, Prentice-Hall NJ.
Class Contact 48 hours per semester of lecture/tutorial/laboratory
sessions.
Assessment 20% assignments submitted throughout the semester;
40% written examination; 40% project and report.
REP4200 DIRECTED STUDIES IN PHYSICS 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Satisfactory completion of a first year physics
sequence of at least two semester’s duration.
Content A selection of topics from the following:
Classical Mechanics; Thermodynamics*; Electromagnetism *;
Optics*; Quantum Mechanics*; Nuclear Physics*; Relativity; High
Energy Physics; Electrical and Electronic Machines.
* Advanced studies which extend the material covered in first year
subjects.
Required Reading No text will be prescribed. Students will be
expected to read widely around the topics in the subject.
Recommended Reading General Physics Texts: Giancoli, D.C.
Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics, 3rd
Edition. 2000; Serway, R. A., Beichner, R. J., Physics for Scientists
and Engineers with Modern Physics, 5th Edition. 2000 ; Halliday,
D., Resnick, R. and Walker, J. Fundamentals of Physics, 6th Edition.
2001; Hecht, E., Physics (Calculus Edition), 2nd Edition. 2000;
Cuttnell, J. D. and Johnson, K. W., Physics, 5th Edition. 2001;
Serway, R. A. and Jewett, J. W., Physics for Scientists and
Engineers, 5th Edition, 2004.
Specialist Books: According to the topics chosen for each student or
group of students with a similar background.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester of
lecture/tutorial/seminar/laboratory sessions.
Assessment A series of regular group assignments and tests will
be negotiated for each individual student or group of students with a
similar background. The assessment regime will be equivalent to that
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
223
for a second year physics subject in a technological degree in the
content areas covered by this subject whilst recognising the differing
backgrounds of the students undertaking the subject – especially in
mathematics.
REP4300 EINSTEIN’S THEORY OF RELATIVITY
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Newtonian Relativity; Frame of Reference transformations;
Einstein’s relativistic postulates; Time dilation and length contraction;
Relativistic velocity and mass; E=mc2; Introduction to General
Relativity.
Required Reading No text will be prescribed. Students will be
expected to read widely around the topics in the subject.
Recommended Reading General Physics Texts: Giancoli, D.C.
Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics, 3rd
Edition, 2000; Serway, R. A., Beichner, R. J., Physics for Scientists
and Engineers with Modern Physics, 5th Edition, 2000; Halliday,
D., Resnick, R. and Walker, J. Fundamentals of Physics, 5th Edition,
1997; Hecht, E., Physics (Calculus Edition), 2nd Edition, 2000;
Cuttnell, J. D. and Johnson, K. W. Physics, 2nd Edition, 1992;
Serway, R. A. and Faughn, J. S., College Physics, 4th Edition,
1995.
Specialst Books: Francey, J. L. A., Relativity, 1974; French A. P.
Special Relativity, 1968; Resnick, R., Introduction to Special
Relativity, 1968; Fritzsch, H., An Equation that Changed the World,
1994; Hawking, S.W., A Brief History of Time, 1988.
Class Contact 24 hours per semester of lecture/tutorial/seminar
sessions.
Assessment 60 % assignments submitted throughout the semester
– approximate length of no more than eight A4 pages each; 40 %
classroom presentation chosen from a range of topics provided by
the lecturer in charge.
RMA1000 TRANSITION MATHEMATICS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VCE Further Mathematics or equivalent
Content Co-ordinate Geometry. Circular (trigonometric) functions.
Functions and graphs. Statistics and Probability. Real and complex
numbers. Basic and fundamental algebra. Exponential and
Logarithmic functions. Basic sequences and series. Basic linear
algebra. An introduction to the concept of Calculus.
Required Reading Technical mathematics with calculus, D.Ewen,
J.S.Gary, and J.E.Trefzger. Prentice hall, 2005
Recommended Reading G.F.Fitzgerald and I.A. Peckham.
Mathematical Methods for Engineers and Scientists, Pearson
Education Australia Pty. Ltd. 2003.
Class Contact Five hour mix of lectures, tutorials and practical
seesions for one semester.
Assessment End of semester examination of three hours duration
equalling 60% of the total assessment of the subject. 5 in- semester
practical experiences totalling 40% of the total assessment.
RMA1001 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS 1A
Campus Footscray Park, Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Year 12 mathematics or its equivalent
Content Basic algebra, including index, log laws, indicial and log
equations, algebraic expansions; Functions, straight line, parabola,
circle etc. Mod function. Domain, range, inverse functions; Trig.
Functions and their graphs, period amplitude, degrees radians.
Basic trig identities, Inverse Trig functions. Converting aCosx+-bSinx
to single Sin, Cosine terms; Limits, continuity, differentiation, rules,
higher derivatives, Implicit differentiation. Tangents and Normals;
Parametric differentiation, derivatives of logs and exponentials.
Rates of change, maximum and minimum problems. Trig and inverse
trig derivatives, logarithmic differentiation; Introduction to
integration. Fundamental theorem of Integral Calculus. Substitution
rule. Areas, Mean values, Root mean square; Methods of
integration, partial fractions, simple integration by parts;
Introduction to differential equations, separation of variables,
population growth, air resistance; Complex numbers; Vectors.
Required Reading D.Hughes-Hallett, A.Gleason, W.McCallum et
al. Single and Multivariate calculus. John Wiley and Sons, Inc. New
York, 2005.
Recommended Reading G.F.Fitzgerald and I.A. Peckham.
Mathematical Methods for Engineers and Scientists, Pearson
Education Australia Pty. Ltd. 2003.
Class Contact 60 hours of lectures/tutorials per semester.
Assessment There will be class tests, worth 30%, and an end of
semester examination worth 70%. No word length limit applies.
RMA1002 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS 1B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) A pass in RMA1001 Engineering Mathematics
1A.
Content Descriptive statistics, data, histograms etc. Describing
data, mean, median, mode, quantiles, measures of dispersion.
Introduction to probability, sample space, mutually exclusive and
independent events. Intro to PDF’s and intro to Normal distribution.
Normal distribution, mean of n variate values, 3,2,1 sigma
confidence limits. Binomial, Poisson distributions.
Exponential, Hypergeometric distr. Normal approx. to Binomial and
Poisson. Sample mean. Central limit theorem.
Determinants, matrices, Cramer’s rule, inversion.
Solution of systems of algebraic equations. Row operation,
Gaussian elimination, echelon form, ranks.
Newton Raphson, numerical integration. Midpoint, Trapezoidal and
Simpsons rules.
Introduction to series and some convergence tests.
Simple power series and the Maclaurin series.
Partial differentiation, algebraic, trig, exp, and log functions. Rules.
Partial differentiation, conditions for max/min. Simple problems.
Intro to second order constant coefficient, homogeneous D.E’s. Three
types of solutions via the auxiliary equation.
Required Reading D.Hughes-Hallett, A.Gleason, W.McCallum et
al. Single and Multivariate calculus, John Wiley and Sons, Inc. New
York, 2005.
Recommended Reading G.F.Fitzgerald and I.A. Peckham.
Mathematical Methods for Engineers and Scientists, Pearson
Education Australia Pty. Ltd. 2003.
Class Contact 60 hours of lectures/tutorials per semester.
Assessment There will be class tests, worth 30% and an end of
semester examination worth 70%. No word length limit applies
RMA1010 INTRODUCTORY MATHEMATICS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Semester one: Algebra and Graph Sketching: Polynomials
and other algebraic functions, expansion and factorisation. Factor
theorem and algebraic division. Equation solving—linear quadratic
and general polynomial. Simultaneous equations. Factorial and
sigma notation. Binomial theorem for positive integer indices. Graph
sketching—general polynomial functions, straight lines, parabolae,
circles, ellipses, hyperbolae, rational functions. Indices, Logarithms
and Trigonometry: Indices and logarithms. Exponential and
logarithmic functions. Exponential growth and decay. Revision of
basic Trigonometry. Trigonometric functions and identities. Graphs
of simple trigonometric functions. Solution of simple trigonometric
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
224
equations. Semester two: Introductory Calculus: Co-ordinate
geometry of the straight line. Limits and continuity. Differentiation
from first principles. Derivatives of algebraic, logarithmic
exponential and trigonometric functions. Product quotient and chain
rules. Applications of differentiation: tangents and normals, maxima
and minima, rates of change, etc. Basic rules of integration:
algebraic, trigonometric and exponential functions. Integration as a
process of summation. Applications. Statistics and Probability:
Introductory probability including independent, mutually exclusive
events, conditional probability. Data analysis. Discrete and
continuous probability distributions. Special discrete and continuous
probability distributions, e.g. binomial, Poisson, geometric, normal
distributions.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Heffernan, J. et al. (1995).
Mathematical Methods, V.C.E. Units 3 & 4, Jacaranda.
Subject Hours Four hours per week for two semesters based on
two hour lectures and two hour tutorial sessions.
Assessment Tests and assignments, 40%; one three-hour
examination at the end of each semester, 60%. A satisfactory level
of assessment for each component is required for a subject pass..
RMA1110 MATHEMATICS FOR THE BIOLOGICAL AND CHEMICAL
SCIENCES 1
Campus Werribee, St. Albans
Prerequisite(s) One of the Year 12 mathematics subjects
Content Revision of basic algebra and logarithms. Discussion of
units, accuracy, precision and significant figures in experimental
work. An introduction to matrices and matrix manipulation.
Functions and graphs. Solutions of polynomial equations and the
general concept of an equation and its solution. Introduction to the
methods and applications of differential calculus – local and global
max/min. Fitting functions to points and the method of least squares.
Required Reading Bittinger, M.L., Calculus and Its Applications,
7th Edition, Addison Wesley.
Recommended Reading Some web based references provided
during presentation of the subject.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester consisting of
one, one hour lecture and three hours of practice classes.
Assessment Test 1 (week 3), 15%; Test 2 (week 10), 25%; Final
Examination, 60%.
RMA1120 STATISTICS FOR THE BIOLOGICAL AND CHEMICAL
SCIENCES 1
Campus Werribee, St. Albans
Prerequisite(s) One of the Year 12 mathematics subjects
Content Representing data graphically and standard summary
statistics. Elementary notions of probability and random variable
(discrete and continuous). The binomial and normal variables. Point
and interval estimation and testing hypotheses on proportions,
means and variances.
Required Reading Samuels, M.L., Witmer, J.A., Statistics for the
Life Sciences, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester consisting of
one, one hour lecture, one, two hour tutorial and one, one hour
computer laboratory.
Assessment Tutorial test (15%), computer test/assignment (15%)
examination (70%).
RMA2120 MATHEMATICS FOR THE BIOLOGICAL AND CHEMICAL
SCIENCES 2
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RMA1110.
Content Review of trigonometric functions. Basic integration.
Ordinary differential equations. Multiple integrals. Partial derivatives
and the heat and wave equations. Matrices. Series expansions of
functions – Taylor and Fourier series.
Required Reading To be advised.
Recommended Reading Mohan T (et al) 2004, Communicating
as Professionals, Thomson, Southbank; Barnum S. R. 2005,
Biotechnology, An Introduction, Thomson Brooks/Cole, California,
USA.
Class Contact 2 x two hr workshops per week.
Assessment Assignments (2 x 1000 words), 30%; Oral
Presentations (2 x 5 mins), 20%; Exam (1 x two hours), 50%.
RMA3071 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER UTILISATION
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Web design, Hypertext Mark-up Language (HTML), C
Program, Microsoft Excel.
Required Reading To be advised.
Recommended Reading C. Xavier. World Wide Web Design
with HTML. McGraw-Hill, 2001; Tony Royce. C Programming.
Macmillan Press, 1996; Michael R. Middleton. Data Analysis using
Microsoft Excel. Third Edition, Duxbury Press, 2003.
Class ContactThree hours per week for one semester, comprising
one-hour lectures and two one-hour tutorial/lab.
Assessment Final examination: 70%; Assignment/test: 30%.
RMA4001 ADVANCED MATHEMATICS FOR ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEL2002 Linear Systems and Mathematics 2B.
Content A range of topics are to be selected from the following
areas: (1) Numerical linear algebra, (2) Constraint and unconstraint
optimization problems, (3) Iterative solutions of nonlinear algebraic
equations and ordinary differential equations, (4) Mean square
theory of random processes.
Required Reading Advanced Mathematics for Electrical
Engineers Subject Notes, Victoria University.
Mathematical Methods for Scientists and Engineers.
D.A.McQuarrie. University Science Books, 2003.
Recommended Reading Advanced Engineering Mathematics.
M.D.Greenberg. Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 1998.
Class Contact 60 hours of lecture/tutorial per semester.
Assessment Mid-semester test 40% Examination 60%.
RMS1000 BIOTECHNOLOGY PROFESSION
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Context specific materials from the world of biotechnology
will be used to develop the students’ awareness and understanding
of the professional skills and duties that comprise professional
practice. Practicing biotechnologists and other scientists will be
invited to give presentations on their experiences in the profession.
The ethics of biotechnology practice will be emphasised and
students will be will be encouraged to give formal and impromptu
presentations on biotechnology and society.
Required Reading Students will be asked to review a selection of
papers from the literature.
Recommended Reading To be advised
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
225
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester consisting of
2 x 2hr workshops per week..
Assessment Assignment two x 1000 word (30%), Oral
presentations x 2 (20%), Examination (50%).
RMS1171 BIOCHEMISTRY 1 (OSTEOPATHY)
Campus St Albans, City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content An overview of dietary requirements and how nutrients
such as proteins, carbohydrates and fats are metabolised and the
energy requirements of the body will be provided. Relevant
biochemical pathways will be discussed for normal function of
viscera, bone and soft tissue. The role of major molecules of neural
pathways (neurotransmitters) as well as mediators of tissue growth,
pain and inflammation will be discussed. Common abnormal
conditions such as hepatic and cardiac disease, and muscle
degeneration will be discussed, and biochemical tests for these will
be introduced. An overview of nucleotide metabolism, DNA and
RNA metabolism: inborn errors of metabolism and hormonal
regulation of metabolism will also be covered.
Required/Recommended Reading Baynes, J. Dominiczak,
M.H., (1999), Medical Biochemistry, Mosby. Campbell, M.K. and
Farrell S.O., (2003) Biochemistry, 4th edition, Thomson-Brooks-Cole.
Gaw, A., O'Reilly, D. St. J., Stewart, M.J. & Shephard, J. (1999)
Clinical biochemistry : an illustrated colour text/illustrated by Robert
Britton. Publisher Edinburgh : Churchill Livingstone.
Subject Hours Semester One: four hours per week each semester
comprising a mixture of three hours of lectures and one hour of
tutorial. Semester Two: three hours of laboratory/workshops.
Assessment Written exam 60% Reports 40%. Please note that
Biochemistry is a two semester subject. First semester passing grades
will appear on academic transcripts as X. First semester fail grades
will appear as N1 or N2, and will be amended if the subject is
passed in entirety at the end of the academic year. First semester
grades will be published by the lecturer after the meeting of the
examination board.
RMS3100 BIOPROCESSING TECHNOLOGY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisites RBF2300 Microbiology 1
Content Topics include the principles of biochemical engineering,
process flow charts, material and energy balances, fluid statics and
dynamics, bioreactor design, production and maintenance of
commercial strains, scale up, downstream processing including
harvesting, concentration and purification of bioproducts,
sterilization.
Required Reading Shuler, M.L. and Kargi, F., 2002. Bioprocess
Engineering: Basic Concepts, 2nd edn, Prentice-Hall Inc.
Recommended Reading Singh, R.P. and Heldman, D.R., 1993,
Introduction to Food Engineering, 2nd edn, Academic Press; Doran,
P. M. 1995. Bioprocess Engineering Principles. Academic Press.
Class Contact 5 hours per week comprising three hours of lectures
and two hours of laboratory work.
Assessment Assignment (1 x 2000 words), 20%; Laboratory
Reports (4 x reports), 30%; Exam (1 x three hrs), 50%.
RMS3010 BIOPROCESSING APPLICATIONS
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s)Nil
Content Topics include enzyme production and applications, algal
biotechnology, bioremediation, bioleaching of metals from low
grade ore, commercial and domestic wastewater treatment, biomass
conversion and microbial fuel production. The ethical issues
associated with these topics will be discussed.
Required Reading Mitchell, R. 1993. Environmental
Microbiology, Wiley-Liss Inc.; Shuler, M.L. and Kargi, F., 2002.
Bioprocess Engineering: Basic Concepts, 2nd edn, Prentice-Hall Inc.
Recommended Reading Bu’Lock, J. and Kristiansen, B., 1987,
Basic Biotechnology, Academic Press; Doran, P. M. 1995.
Bioprocess Engineering Principles. Academic Press.
Class Contact 5 hours per week comprising three hours of lectures
and two hours of laboratory work.
Assessment Assignment (1 x 2000 words), 20%; Laboratory
Reports (4 x reports), 30%; Exam (1 x three hrs), 50%.
RMS3020 GENOMICS, PROTEOMICS AND BIOINFORMATICS
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RBF2520 Biochemistry 1.
Content An overview and definitions of terms; the logic, scope and
rationale of genomics and proteomics; descriptions of approaches
used in genomics and proteomics; applications of bioinformatics
including accessing internet resources such as GenBank and EMBL,
data mining, and using programs such as BLAST and FASTA;
examples of applications in a range of settings including forensics,
drug design, medical research. The theory underpinning a range of
analytical techniques used in nucleic acid and protein analysis will
also be covered. Ethical issues concerning the ownership of and
access to information in databanks will be covered.
Required Reading Primrose, S.B. & Twyman, R.M. (2003)
Principles of Genome Analysis and Genomics. Blackwell Science
Publishing; Campbell, A.M. & Heyer, L.J. (2003) Discovering
Genomics, Proteomics & Bioinformatics, CSHL Press, Benjamin-
Cummings. San Francisco, CA, USA; Switzer, R. L. & Garrity, L.F.
(2000) Experimental Biochemistry. W.H. Freeman & Co., New
York, USA.
Recommended Reading Wilson, K. & Walker, J. M. (2000)
Principles and techniques of practical biochemistry. Cambridge
University Press, New York, USA; Wilson, K. & Walker, J. M.
(2000) Principles and techniques of practical biochemistry.
Cambridge University Press, New York, USA; Switzer, R. L. &
Garrity, L.F. (2000) Experimental Biochemistry. W.H. Freeman &
Co., New York, USA.
Class Contact 5 hours per week comprising three hours of lectures
and two hours of laboratory work.
Assessment Assignment (1 x 3000 words), 20%; Laboratory
Reports (10 x reports), 30%; Exam (1 x three hrs), 50%.
RMS3030 GENETIC ENGINEERING
Campus Werribee, St Albans
Prerequisites RBF2520 Biochemistry 1; RBF2390 Molecular
Genetics.
Content The subject will include gene cloning, PCR, restriction
enzymes and their uses; site-directed mutagenesis; heterologous
gene expression systems; DNA profiling and forensics; Southern and
Northern Blotting; gene mapping; transgenics and gene knockouts;
the Human Genome Project and gene therapy; recombinant DNA-
based medical diagnostics; positional cloning; plant genetic
engineering; and the ethics, risks and benefits of genetic
engineering.
Required Reading Glick, B.R. & Pasternak, J.J. (2003) Molecular
Biotechnology: Principles and Applications of Recombinant DNA,
3rd Edition. American Society for Microbiology; Miesfeld,
R.L.(1999) Applied Molecular Genetics. Wiley-Liss Publications.
Recommended Reading Walker, J.M. & Rapley, R. (Editors)
(2001). Molecular Biology and Biotechnology, 4th Edition. Royal
Society of Chemistry.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
226
Class Contact 5 hours per week comprising three hours of lectures
and two hours of laboratory work.
Assessment Assignment (1 x 3000 words), 20%; Laboratory
Reports (10 x reports), 25%; Exam (1 x three hrs), 55%.
RMS3050 ADVANCED MEDICAL MICROBIOLOGY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RBF2310 Microbiology 2 or equivalent.
Content The unit will focus on the molecular aspects of microbial
pathogenesis and highlight the principal intervention strategies used
to treat infectious diseases. The emphasis will be on the relationship
between a pathogen (bacteria, viruses and protozoans) and its
human host. An in depth review of the life cycles of several
organisms will inform discussion of the current research in the areas
of pathogenesis, genetic and phenotypic variation in pathogens and
the implications for treatment and control strategies. Consideration
will be given to the ethical issues relating to eg vaccination protocols
and antimicrobial therapy.
Required Reading Students will be asked to review a selection of
papers from the current literature.
Recommended Reading Selected readings from a range of
texts, including those below, will furnish the students with the
recommended reading; Salyers, A. 2001. Bacterial Pathogenesis: a
molecular approach. ASM Press Soc. Microbiology; Nathanson, N.
2001. Viral Pathogenesis and Immunity. Raven Press; Hughes, D
and Andersson, D. 2001. Antibiotic development and resistance.
Routledge.
Class Contact Three hours per week comprising lectures and
tutorials.
Assessment Assignment (1 x 3000 words), 40%; Exam (1 x three
hrs), 60%.
RMS3060 MICROBIAL TECHNOLOGY AND CELL CULTURE
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) RBF2300 Microbiology 1 or equivalent.
Content Topics include batch, fed-batch and continuous culture,
bioreactors and their various modes of operation, plant cell culture
and animal cell culture. Topical issues related to the ethics
associated with the source and use of various cell lines eg. stem
cells, will be discussed.
Required Reading Sharp, J. Crowley, B.R. and Kwok, K.H.
1995. Plant Cell Culture, TAFE Productions; Jenkins, N. 1999.
Animal Cell Culture; Methods and Protocols, Humana Press Inc.
Recommended Reading Bu’Lock, J. and Kristiansen, B., 1987,
Basic Biotechnology, Academic Press.
Class Contact three hours per week, comprising lectures and
practical work in alternating weeks.
Assessment Laboratory Reports (3 x reports), 40%; Exam (1 x two
hrs), 60%.
RMS3040 PROJECT 1 – BIOTECHNOLOGY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Students would normally be expected to have
completed all Year 1 and 2 subjects.
Content This subject covers project methodology, experimental and
analytical design, and research plan preparation. A project will be
selected by the student in consultation with academic staff and will,
as far as is possible, address a genuine research issue related to
Biotechnology.
Required Reading Third Year Project Study Guide, 2006,
Victoria University; Students will be required to review from the
current literature a selection of papers related to their chosen topic.
Recommended Reading Texts and peer-reviewed literature
related to the chosen topic.
Class Contact 6 hours per week, comprising workshops (1 hr) and
laboratory work (5 hours).
Assessment Written Proposal (1 x 2,500 words), 40%;Oral
Presentation (2 x 15 mins), 30%; Critical Overview (1 x 2,000
words), 30%.
RMS3045 PROJECT 2 – BIOTECHNOLOGY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Students would normally be expected to have
completed Project 1-Biotechnology.
Content This subject covers project methodology, experimental and
analytical design, research plan preparation, analysis of results and
thesis writing. A project will normally have been selected by the
student in consultation with academic staff in the prerequisite
subject, Project 1-Biotechnology.
Required Reading Third Year Project Study Guide, 2006,
Victoria University; Students will be required to review from the
current literature a selection of papers related to their chosen topic.
Recommended Reading Texts and peer-reviewed literature
related to the chosen topic.
Class Contact 6 hours per week, comprising workshops (1 hr) and
laboratory work (5 hours).
Assessment Final Report Introduction (1 x 2,500 words), 30%;
Oral Presentation (1 x 20 mins), 20%; Final Report (1 x 5,000
words), 50%.
RNH2110 DISEASE AND HEALTH
Campus Werribee
Prerequisites Nil.
Content The unit will study inflammatory and immune responses
and pathogenic process of common disorders. Inflammatory and
immune responses, essentials of the pathologic process of the
common disorders with nutritional involvement, including; anaemia,
alimentary dysfunction, cardiovascular disease, cancer, obesity,
diabetes, inborn errors of metabolism. Diagnostic and therapeutic
modalities.
Required Reading Gould, BE. 1997. Pathophysiology for the
Health Related Professions, Saunders, USA.
Recommended Reading Crowley, L.V. 2001. An Introduction to
Human Disease: Pathology and Pathophysiology Correlations. Jones
and Bartlett Publishers. Sudbury, Mass., USA.; Nyhan, W.L. 1998.
Atlas of Metabolic Diseases. Chapman & Hall. London, UK.;
Tomlinson, S. 1997. Mechanisms of Disease: an Introduction to
Clinical Science. Cambridge University Press. New York, USA.;
Burtis, G. 1988. Applied Nutrition and Diet Therapy. WB.
Saunders, USA..
Class Contact Four hours per week comprising of
lecture/tutorial/workshop for one semester.
Assessment Assignment, 40%; final examination, 60%.
RNH3210 SPECIAL TOPICS IN NUTRITION, FOOD AND HEALTH
SCIENCE
Campus Werribee
Prerequisites RBF2750 Nutrition, or RBF2260 Diet and Nutrition,
or equivalent, and RBF2210 Food Components or equivalent
Content To develop and study a selected aspect of nutrition and
food science, requiring conduct of a project of a selected topic.
Recent advances and controversies in selected topics of nutrition and
food science, including: GMO’s, nutrition labelling, nutrient
fortification, reference intake levels, nutrigenomics.
Required Reading Student will be responsible for reviewing
current literature on their project topic.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
227
Class Contact Nil, however, students are expected to spend at
least three hours per week in the library..
Assessment Presentation 20%, report 80%.
RPH4411 PHYSICS 4 (HONOURS)
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to the Bachelor of Science
(Honours) in Physics program.
Content This subject consists of advanced coursework and a
research thesis.
Coursework: Compulsory core units of quantum mechanics,
statistical mechanics and research methods, plus elective units from
the following areas: optical waveguides and sensors, relativity,
surface physics, ion beam techniques, optics of materials, laser
physics, lasers and optoelectronics, fibre optics, solid state physics,
diffraction from crystals, nuclear physics. Other electives may be
approved, including those offered at other universities. All electives
must be approved by the Course Co-ordinator.
Research Thesis: A research project will be undertaken in one of the
Physics research areas, under the supervision of a member of
academic staff. Subject to approval, research may be undertaken at
a laboratory outside the University.
Required Reading Messiah, A. 1961, Quantum Mechanics Vols
1 and 2, North Holland, Amsterdam. Kittel, C., Thermal Physics,
John Wiley and Sons.
Class Contact Average of 20 hours per week for two semesters.
Assessment is based on coursework, 50%; research thesis, 50%.
The research project will consist of oral presentation and a thesis of
approximately 5,000–10,000 words.
VAA2002 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) REP 1003 Engineering Physics 1C
Content Electrical Circuits. Provides students with a sound
knowledge of elementary electrical circuits, performance
characteristics of motors and generators, and basic electronic
devices.
Power Distribution. Overview of power generation and distribution
in Australia. The role of a specialist electrical services system design
engineer. Regulations, standards and codes of practice. High,
medium and low voltage distribution practices. An introduction to
the range of transformers used in power distribution systems. System
‘fault’ capacity and calculation. Cable properties and cable
selection based on current, temperature, voltage drop and fault
levels. An introduction to switchboard design and construction.
Required Reading J.R.Cogdell, 1999, Foundations of Electric
Circuits, Prentice Hall; J.R. Cogdell, 1999, Foundations of Electric
Power, Prentice Hall; Australian Standard AS3000, AS30088 and
AS3439.1
Recommended Reading Smith, R.J and Dorf, R.C. (1996),
Circuits, Devices and Systems, 5th ed. Jacaranda Wiley;
Alexander,C.K and Sadiku, M. (2000), Fundamentals of Electric
Circuits, McGraw Hill.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of
tutorials/laboratory per week
Assessment Electrical Circuits (EC) – 8 weeks work: Homework
submissions (4 @ 5%), 20%; Laboratory Report, 10%; Mid-semester
test: (Based on weeks 1-6), 20%. Power Distribution (PD) – four
weeks work: Homework submissions (2 @ 5%), 10%; Project (2000
words equivalence), 15%; three hour examination, 50%;
Weighting, 66.7% of {EC + PD} + 3hr exam = subject assessment.
Based on a project, 20%; and a review of all assignments (which
may include tests and other class exercises) set during the semester,
10%; and a final three hour examination, 70%.
VAA2031 ARCHITECTURAL HISTORY & DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Slide presentation on the History of Architecture;
Presentation of drawing/sketching techniques; Presentation of
design concepts including Anthropometrics, Proportion, Light,
Texture etc; Environmental influences; Workshops on freehand
drawing; Workshops on model making.
Required Reading Victoria University, WebCT, web site
resources for the subject.
Recommended Reading Sir Banister Fletcher, ‘A History of
Architecture’, 19th or 20th edition; Le Corbusier, Towards a New
Architecture (any other publications by), Le Corbusier, and Frank
Lloyd Wright.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials per
week
Assessment Submission of a report on the History of Architecture
– 4000 words (individual report), 30%; Submission of drawing folio
of class generated projects, 30%; Submission of 3D model, 40%;
Based on a major project, 60%; and a review of all assignments
(which may include tests, class exercises and seminar presentations)
set during the semester, 40%; to an equivalent of 5000 words.
VAA3001 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAA 2002 Electrical Power Systems 1
Content Circuit protection devices, power distribution system
protection, configuration of LV distribution systems. Transformers and
their specification. High voltage switchgear.Earthing. Power factor
correction. Electrically hazardous areas. Lightening protection of
buildings. Common electric motor types. Electric motor starters.
Motor protection types. Motor control circuits. Vertical transportation
– an introduction. Methods of achieving reliability in power supply.
Standby power generation systems. Uninteruptible power supplies.
Sizing central battery systems. Battery systems for UPS's. Harmonics
within power distribution systems. Electronic security systems. Exit
and emergency lighting systems.
Energy management in electrical power systems. Operational
planning and maintenance of power systems.
Required Reading J.R.Cogdell, 2003, Foundations of Electric
Circuits, Prentice Hall; J.R. Cogdell, 2003, Foundations of Electric
Power, Prentice Hall; 2006 Australian Standard AS3000, AS30088
and AS3439.1
Recommended Reading Smith, R.J and Dorf, R.C. (1996),
Circuits, Devices and Systems, 5th ed. Jacaranda Wiley;
Alexander,C.K and Sadiku, M. (2000), Fundamentals of Electric
Circuits, McGraw Hill.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of
tutorials/laboratory per week
Assessment Class participation, 5%; Project, 30%; (individual
report 5000 words equivalence); Final three hour examination,65%.
VAA3031 ENVIRONMENTALLY SUSTAINABLE DESIGN 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAN2041 Thermofluids.
Content This subject aims to provide students with an overview of
the main issues involved in the integrated design of buildings aiming
to achieve sustainable development. Although the subject is self-
contained, it is the first component of the suite Engineering
Architectural Engineering Design 1, 2 and 3. Major topics covered
include: climate change, basic principles of ecological buildings;
buildings of tomorrow: examples and ideas, including natural
ventilation in buildings, thermal storage, façade design for
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
228
daylighting and solar energy transmission, air quality improvement;
active measures of renewable energy usage, including solar, wind
and geothermal energy, rainwater and utilisation of the organic
matter.
Required Reading Daniels, K., 1997, The Technology of
Ecological Building, Birkhauser; Notes provided by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Baker, N. and Steemers, K., 2000,
Energy and Environment in Architecture, E&FN Spon.
Class Contact Two hrs of lectures and three hrs of tutorials per
week
Assessment Assignment 1: based on weeks 1-6 (Up to 1500
words – individual report), 35%; Assignment 2: based on weeks 7-
11 (Up to 3500 words – group report), 35%; two hour examination,
30%.
VAA3032 ENVIRONMENTALLY SUSTAINABLE DESIGN 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAA3071 HVAC Systems 1, VAA3031
Environmentally Sustainable Design 1.
Corequisite(s) VAA3072 HVAC Systems 2
Content Heat and its transmission through building structures.
Convective-conductive heat flow. The U-value. Condensation in the
façade cavity. Surface temperatures and thermal comfort. Glazing
systems. Single and double skin facades. Wind pressures. Natural
ventilation. Thermal modelling using computer packages. Steady-
state one-dimensional conduction in building-elements. Discretised
form of the continuous form of the governing equation and its
solution. Convergence of solutions. Steady-state conduction in
composite materials – analytical and numerical solutions. Estimation
of heat flows into building enclosures. Numerical determination of
transient heat transfer in two-dimensional systems. Studies of heat
transfer by convection in fluids.
Required Reading Oesterle, E. et al., 2001, Double-skin
Facades, Prestel Publishing; Thorpe, GR., 2005, Lecture notes on
numerical heat transfer in building-elements; Notes provided by the
lecturer.
Recommended Reading Anderson, JD., 1995, Computational
Fluid Dynamics: The Basics with Applications, McGraw Hill;
Patankar, SV., 1981, Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow,
McGraw Hill. This is the classical text)
Class Contact two hrs of lectures and three hrs of tutorials per
week.
Assessment
Assignment 1: based on weeks 1-4, 15%: Assignment 2: based on
weeks 1–7, 15%: Assignment 3: based on weeks 8–9, 20%:
Assignment 4: based on weeks 10–12, 20%: two hour examination,
30%. The assessment tasks will demonstrate that students are
capable of presenting sustained intellectual arguments. Some of the
arguments take the form of narratives, whilst some of the arguments
will be intensely mathematical, but illustrative of the narratives. It is
expected that the written work will be based on rational argument
and it will not be based on dubious ways of knowing and
epistemologies. It is anticipated that students will be able to
celebrate the achievements of scientific method over primitive myths.
Each assessment task will be 500-1000 words.
VAA3042 HYDRAULIC SERVICES SYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAC 2042 Hydraulics
Content Types and components of building water supply systems.
Assessment of demands and flows. Design criteria, head losses in
pipes and fittings. Analysis and design of hot and cold pipework
systems. Pumps-pump and pipeline selection. Pressure systems.
Selection and arrangement of mains pressure commercial hot water
units to supply to hot water fixture outlets. Theory and design of roof
drainage, storm water systems and sewer drainage systems
including materials, fixtures and fittings, and the general
requirements for fully vented and modified, single stack and
modified sewage plumbing systems, all for building sites, residential
and multi storied commercial buildings. Introduction to sewage
treatment and the treatment processes.
Required Reading Class Notes; AS 3500 (2003), National
Plumbing and Drainage Code Parts 0–4.
Recommended Reading Chadderton, D.V. (2000), Building
Services Engineering, 3rd edn, Spon; Wise, A.F.E. and Swaffield,
J.A. (2002), Water, Sanitary and Waste Services for Buildings, 5th
edn., Butterworth/Heinemann; Building Research Association of
New Zealand (1999), Plumbing and Drainage Guide, BRANZ;
Dagostino, F.R. and Wujek, J.B. (2005), Mechanical and Electrical
Systems in Construction and Architecture, 4th edn., Pearson/
Prentice Hall; Tesoriero, J. (1994), Plumbing Rules Made Simple for
Domestic Dwellings, J & L Publications; Smith B. (1985). Selection
and Sizing of Copper Tubes for Water Piping Systems. IPA Aust;
Smith, R.J and Dorf, R.C. (1996), Circuits,Devices and Systems,5th
ed. Jacaranda Wiley; Alexander,C.K and Sadiku, M. (2000),
Fundamentals of Electric Circuits,McGraw Hill.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials/
laboratory per week.
Assessment Assignment 1: Water supply design and report for
commercial building (Calculations, sketches, max word limit of
2000 words), 15%; Assignment 2: Waste water design and report
for previous building (Calculations, sketches, max word limit of
2000 words), 15%; Assignment 3: Report on particular aspects of a
site visit (Max word of 1500),10%; three hour examination, 60%.
VAA3071 HVAC SYSTEMS 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAN2041 Thermofluids, VAC2042 Hydraulics.
Content Module 1: Refrigeration What is air conditioning? The
concept of enthalpy. Carnot cycle. Vapour compression and
absorption cycles. Refrigeration systems and components. COP.
Refrigerants. Air conditioning and the environment. Module 2:
Psychrometry Thermodynamic properties of air and water.
Psychrometry and psychrometric processes. Psychrometric chart and
its uses. Thermal comfort. Module 3: Load estimation Basic
mechanisms of heat transfer. Heat transfer through composite walls.
Heating load estimation. Solar heat gains. Room and system heat
gains/losses. Cooling load estimation. Program Camel. Energy
conservation in buildings.
Required Reading Cengel, YA and Boles, MA, 2001,
Thermodynamics: An Engineering Approach, 4th ed., McGraw Hill;
Paks, M., 1997, Design of Building Air Conditioning Systems, Part
1: Psychrometry, AS&TP; Jones, WP, 2001, Air Conditioning
Engineering, Butterworth Heinemann; AIRAH, 1997, Air
Conditioning: Load Estimation, AIRAH; Murray, M., Hamilton, T.
and Kingston, T., 2002, User Guide for the Computer Program
Camel, ACADS-BSG; Notes provided by the lecturer; Class notes on
WebCT.
Recommended Reading Legg, R., 1991, Air Conditioning
Systems, Batsford; ASHRAE, 2005, Fundamentals Handbook.
Class Contact Two hrs of lectures and three hrs of tutorials per
week
Assessment Assignment 1: (group assignment, up to 2500
words), 30%; Assignment 2: (group assignment; up to 2000 words
+ calculations + diagrams), 35%; two hour examination, 35%.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
229
VAA3072 HVAC SYSTEMS 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) HVAC Systems 1.
Content Module 4: Air and water systems in buildings Flow of
fluids in pipes and ducts. Open and closed water systems in
buildings. Design of condenser, chilled and hot water systems.
Demand-based water systems. Domestic cold and hot water system
design. Measurement of flow and pressure in building water and air
systems. Pressure distribution and cavitation. Fan and pump
selection. Design of ducted systems. Fan laws and applications.
Types of air conditioning systems. Constant and variable volume
systems. Module 5: System components and selection. Air handling
plant. Thermal plant. Methods of heat rejection. Packaged and built-
up air handling units. System design for full-load and part-load
operation. Energy efficiency in equipment selection and operation.
Duct and pipe configurations to accommodate controls
requirements. Multiple unit installations. Smoke management
systems.
Required Reading Paks, M., 1995, An Introduction to the Design
of Building Air Conditioning Systems, AS&TP; Cengel, YA. and
Turner, RH., 2001, Fundamentals of Thermal-Fluid Sciences,
McGraw Hill; Standards Australia, 1998-2002, Australian
Standards AS1668 Pt. 1, 2 and 3; Wang, SK., 1993, Handbook of
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration, McGraw Hill.
Recommended Reading Wang, SK., Lavan, Z. and Norton, P.,
2000, Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Engineering, CRC Press;
Legg, R, 1991, Air Conditioning Systems: Design, Commissioning
and Maintenance, Batsford; ASHRAE Handbooks.
Class Contact two hrs of lectures and three hrs of tutorials per
week.
Assessment Assignment 1 (group assignment; up to 3000 words),
30%; Assignment 2 (group assignment; up to 3000 words), 35%;
two hour examination, 35%.
VAA3081 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AND LEGISLATION 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) EAH2831
Content Common forms of construction. Foundation conditions and
earthworks. Formwork. Floors in single-storey and low-rise buildings.
Structural frames. Load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls. Tilt-up
construction. Wall and roof cladding. Balconies and stairways.
Lighting and ventilation. Exits. Lining and internal finishes. Services
requirements. Damp-proofing. Thermal insulation. Drainage.
Alternative structural systems. Builders’ plant and equipment. Use of
explosives in construction. Recycling, rehabilitation and renovation
of buildings. Building maintenance. Concept of intelligent buildings.
Establishment of building sites. Site safety. Workmanship. Building
regulatory systems and building codes. Building schematic
documentation and detailing. Specifications and standards.
Construction techniques and sequence of work.
Required Reading Australian Building Codes Board (ABCB)
(2005), Building Code of Australia (BCA) 2005 Volume Two,
CanPrint Communications Pty Ltd; Class Notes
Recommended Reading Milton, H.J., Brown, R.A., and
Dawson, L. (1994), Glossary of Building Terms, Fourth Edition,
National Committee on Rationalised Building (NCRB), Standards
Australia and Suppliers Index Pty Ltd; CSIRO Australia (various),
Notes on the Science of Building; Australian Building Codes Board
(ABCB) (2005), Building Code of Australia (BCA) 2005 Volume
One, CanPrint Communications Pty Ltd; Timber Promotion Council
(1994), Timber Framing Manual; State of Victoria (2001), Building
Act 1993, Anstat Pty Ltd; State of Victoria (1999), Building
Regulations 1994, Anstat Pty Ltd.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials per
week.
Assessment Assignment 1: based on theoretical aspects of
building (sketches, max word limit of 3000), 20%; Assignment 2:
based on practical aspects of building (sketches, max word limit of
3000), 20%; Class Tutorial Exercises (sketches, max word limit of
1500), 10%; three hour Examination, 50%.
VAA4001 ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING AND COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAA 3001 Electrical Power Systems 2.
Content Light, and the visible portion of the electro-magnetic
spectrum. Visual performance characteristics of the human eye.
Photometric concepts and units of measurement. Direct and indirect
surface illuminance calculations. Electric lamp technology, including
incandescence, gaseous/vapour discharges. Principles of
colourimetry. The CIE classification system/colour rendering indices.
User ‘quality’ assessment of illuminated spaces including control of
glare. Daylight as an alternative to electric light. CIE and other
models of sky luminance as a means to simple daylight estimation.
Theory of voice and data telecommunications systems.
Communication mediums. Signal properties. Transmission and
reception system characteristics. Protocols and systems architecture.
Building telecommunication systems. Emergency warning and inter-
communications systems. Security, closed circuit television, fire
alarm communications. Elevator communication systems. Integration
of all systems in a building. System testing and maintenance.
Specifications/tender interpretation for communications system
acquisition.
Required Reading 2002 AS 1680 Code for Interior Lighting,
Australian Standards (2002); Gordon, G. and Nuckolls, J.L. (1995)
Interior lighting for designers 3rd ed. Wiley.
Recommended Reading Kao, Chen., (2002), Energy
management in illuminating systems, Boca Raton : CRC Press;
Ander, G. D., (1995), Daylighting performance and design,Van
Nostrand Reinhold; Cayless, M.A. and Marsden, A.M. (1983)
Lamps and Lighting, Edward Arnold; Boyce, P.R. (1981) Human
Factors in Lighting, Applied Science Publishers; Saadawi, T.N.,
Amma, M.H., and El Hakeem, A. (2003) Fundamentals of
telecommunication networks. Wiley. Held, G. (1991) Understanding
Data Communications, SAMS; Bureau of Transport and
Communications Economics (1994) Emerging communications
services: an analytical framework. Communications Futures Project;
Anderson, R.G. (1994), Data Processing and Management
Informations Systems, MacDonald Evans.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of
tutorials/laboratory per week.
Assessment Architectural Lighting (AL) – three hours per week:
Tutorial work assessment (5 submissions @ 2%), 10%; Project 1 –
Assessment of existing lighting system (2000 words equivalence),
20%; Project 2 – Design of a lighting system, 30%; Communications
Systems (CS) – two hours per week: Project 1 (Individual report
2000 words equivalence), 15%; Project 2 (Individual report 3000
words equivalence), 25%; Final three hour examination, 50%;
Weighting, 50% of ( AL + CS ) + 3hr exam = subject assessment
VAA4032 ENVIRONMENTALLY SUSTAINABLE DESIGN 3
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAA3032 Environmentally Sustainable Design 2,
VAA4071 Architectural Lighting and Communication Systems,
VAA3071 HVAC Systems 1, VAA3072 HVAC Systems 2.
Content Introduction to IES Virtual Environment software package
of integrated building performance analysis tools (commercially
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
230
used by architects, engineers, planners and facilities managers).
Computer modelling of buildings including thermal and solar
performance, natural ventilation, natural and artificial lighting and
CFD. Analysis of alternative scenarios to optimise the performance
of the building through the design process.
Required Reading IES Virtual Environment software manual;
Notes provided by the lecturer; Class notes on WebCT.
Recommended Reading Anderson, JD., 1995, Computational
Fluid Dynamics: The Basics with Applications, McGraw Hill;
Patankar, SV., 1981, Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow,
McGraw Hill; (This is the classical text).
Class Contact two hrs of lectures and three hrs of tutorials per
week.
Assessment Assignment 1: (group assignment; up to 3000 words;
calculations diagrams), 30%; Assignment 2: 70%.
VAA4042 BUILDING FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Fire safety engineering topics to be at introductory level
only. Fire safety and protection provisions in Building Regulations
and Building Codes. Deemed-to-satisfy design, design to standards,
performance based design. Process: stakeholders, fire design brief,
design, certification, commissioning and maintenance. Performance
methods of design: equivalence, absolute evaluation of performance
requirements, use of qualitative and quantitative methods, scientific
(phenomenological) and risk approaches Systems:fire initiation and
development, smoke control, fire spread, detection warning and
suppression, evacuation, fire brigade intervention. Pre-flashover fire
growth. Smoke spread. Post-flashover fire modelling. Occupant
response in fire emergencies. Active sprinkler protection systems and
ancillary equipment. Classes of hazard, design criteria and code
requirements. System requirements for Ordinary Hazard systems.
Full hydraulic calculations method for design of Ordinary Hazard
systems. Assumed area of operation. Design density of discharge.
Design of fire hydrant and fire hose reel systems. Residential and
domestic sprinkler systems. Portable fire extinguishers. Risk – key
statistics, event & fault trees, risk management
Required Reading Australian Building Codes Board (ABCB)
(2005), Building Code of Australia (BCA) 2005 Volume One,
CanPrint Communications Pty Ltd; Class Notes.
Recommended Reading ABCB, 2001, Fire Safety Engineering
Guidelines, Edition 2001, Australian Building Codes Board,
Canberra; Buchanan, A.H. (2001), Fire Engineering Design Guide,
Centre for Advanced Engineering, University of Canterbury;
AS/NZS4360:2004 Risk Management Standard; Australian
Building Codes Board (ABCB) (2005), Building Code of Australia
(BCA) 2005 Volume Two, CanPrint Communications Pty Ltd;
Standards Australia (1994), AS 2419 Fire Hydrant Installations;
Standards Australia (1988), AS 2441 Installation of Fire Hose
Reels; Standards Australia (1999), AS 2118 Automatic Fire
Sprinkler Systems; Standards Australia (1995), AS 2444 Portable
Fire Extinguishers and Fire Blankets – Selection and Location; State
of Victoria (2001), Building Act 1993, Anstat Pty Ltd; State of
Victoria (1999), Building Regulations 1994, Anstat Pty Ltd.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials per
week
Assessment Assignment 1: fire-safety services investigation
(sketches, max word limit of 3000), 20%; Assignment 2: hydraulic
design using hyena software (calculations, sketches, max word limit
of 3000), 20%; Class Tutorial Exercises (sketches, max word limit of
1500), 10%; three hour Examination, 50%.
VAA4051 BUILDING QUANTITIES AND COSTS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAN3052 Engineering Management.
Content The project development process, the parties and the
trades involved in the process. Bill of Quantities. Quantity surveyor’s
role. Introduction to schedule of rates of the bill of quantities and
components, measurements of quantities. Estimating principal
trades, contractors’ cost estimates and standard method of
measurement. Computer applications for estimating process. The
feasibility of construction projects. Life cycle costing (LCC) analysis,
theory of LCC optimization, practical application of LCC to
engineering projects. Project cash flows, budgeting and cost control.
Cost control during project development and construction phase.
Value engineering. Building maintenance and associated costs.
Required Reading Lecture Notes; Marsden, Paul K. (1998) Basic
Building Measurement, 2nd Edition, New South Wales University
Press, Sydney, Australia; Kirk & Dell’Isolla (1999) Life Cycle Costing
for Design Professionals, 2nd Edition
Recommended Reading The Australian Institute of Quantity
Surveyors, The Master Builder's Construction and Housing
Association Australia, Inc. (1990) Australian Standard Method of
Measurement Fifth Edition, Clarke & Maickay, Brisbane, Australia;
Joint Colleges & Practice Board (1995) Guide to Estimating Practice
for Building Work 6th Edition, The Australian Institute of Building,
ACT, Australia; David Picken (1999) Building Measurement:
Worked Examples, , Deakin University Press; Sierra, LE.E. (1999)
Building Measurement 2nd Edition, Open Training and Education
Network, Australia.
Class Contact two hrs of lectures and 1hr of tutorial and computer
lab session per week
Assessment Assignment 1: based on weeks 1-5 (calculations,
sketches, computer applications, max word limit of 1000), 15%;
Assignment 2: based on weeks 6-11 (calculations, sketches,
computer applications, max word limit of 1000), 15%; Class
Tutorial Exercises Based on Weeks 1-11 (calculations, sketches,
computer applications, max word limit of 500),10%; three hour
examination, 60%.
VAA4071 HVAC SYSTEMS 3
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAA3072 HVAC Systems 2.
Content Module 6: Operation of controls in building services
systems. Fundamentals of controls theory. Sensors and their
responses. Operation of dampers and control valves. Control
strategies applicable to air conditioning systems and equipment.
Direct digital controls. Energy management in air conditioning.
Module 7: Fundamentals of sound. Noise criteria and assessment.
Sound in rooms. Sound insulation. Noise sources in buildings: fans
and fan systems. Noise control in ducts.
Required Reading Bies, D. and Hansen, C., 2003, Engineering
Noise Control: Theory and Practice, 3rd ed., E & FN Spon, London;
Coffin, MJ., 1998, Direct Digital Control for Building HVAC
Systems, 2nd ed., Kluwer Academic Publishers; Notes provided by
the lecturers; Class notes.
Recommended Reading Woods, 1979, Woods Practical Guide
to Noise Control, Woods; Haines, RW., 1987, Control Systems for
Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning, Van Nostrand Reinhold;
ASHRAE Handbooks.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures per week.
Assessment Assignment 1: (Group assignment; up to 3000
words), 30%; Assignment 2: (Group assignment; up to 3000 words
+ calculations + diagrams, 35%; three hour examination, 35%.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
231
VAA4082 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AND LEGISLATION 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Column-and-beam construction. Fire-resistance of structural
members. Structural/services cores, suspended slabs and associated
formwork systems. Construction sequence applicable to high-rise
buildings. Spandrel walls and curtain walls. Atriums. Fire-isolated
stairways. Basements and damp-proofing. Ground support systems.
Protection of adjoining property. Exterior finishes. Partitioning.
Artificial lighting and mechanical ventilation. Emergency lighting
and exit signs. Sanitary facilities. Access and facilities for people
with disabilities. Lifts and escalators. Essential services for fire safety.
Temporary site services and amenities. Occupational health and
safety codes of practice. Use of cranes and hoists. Scaffolding.
Temporary overhead protection. Fire protection during construction.
Demolition work. Schematic documentation and detailing specific to
high-rise building. Design and construction standards and statutory
requirements. Medium-density residential development.
Required Reading Australian Building Codes Board (ABCB)
(2005), Building Code of Australia (BCA) 2005 Volume One,
CanPrint Communications Pty Ltd; Class Notes
Recommended Reading Camille Heaney (2004), Infolink
Australia’s Architectural, Building & Construction Directory 2004,
Reed Business Information; CSIRO Australia (various), Notes on the
Science of Building; Australian Building Codes Board (ABCB)
(2005), Building Code of Australia (BCA) 2005 Volume Two,
CanPrint Communications Pty Ltd; State of Victoria (2001), Building
Act 1993, Anstat Pty Ltd; State of Victoria (1999), Building
Regulations 1994, Anstat Pty Ltd; State of Victoria (2000), Planning
and Environment Act 1987, Anstat Pty Ltd; State of Victoria (1998),
Planning and Environment Regulations 1998, Anstat Pty Ltd;
Department of Planning and Development, Government of Victoria
(1995), The Good Design Guide for Medium-Density Housing.
Class Contact two hrs of lectures and one hr of tutorials per week.
Assessment Assignment 1: based on theoretical aspects of major
developments (sketches, max word limit of 3000), 20%; Assignment
2: based on practical aspects of major developments (sketches, max
word limit of 3000), 20%; Class Tutorial Exercises (sketches, max
word limit of 1500), 10%; three hour Examination, 50%.
VAA4091 STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RMA 1002 Engineering Mathematics 1B & REP
1003 Engineering Physics 1C.
Content Introduction to structural vibrations. Degree of freedom of
a system – vibrations of undamped and damped systems,
harmonically excited vibration of systems, response systems to
harmonically forced excitation, general forcing functions. Eigenvalue
for a system, determination of natural frequencies and mode shapes,
structural vibration simulation using computer software.
Required Reading Rao S.S. (1995), Mechanical Vibrations,
Third Ed., Addison-Wesley Publishing Company; Inman D.J. (2001)
Engineering Vibration, Second Ed., Prentice Hall; Class Notes.
Recommended Reading Dynamics, Kurt Gramoll, Engineering
media Lab, Oklahoma University. http://www.ecourses.ou.edu/;
Thomson W.T. and Dahleh M.D. (1997) Theory of Vibration with
Applications, Fifth Ed., Prentice Hall; 2006 [Web Site] Dynamics,
Kurt Gramoll, Engineering media Lab, Oklahoma University.
http://www.ecourses.ou.edu/.
Class Contact two hrs of lectures and one hrs of tutorials per week
Assessment Computer based assignment (3000 words equiv.),
25%; Mid-semester test (1 hr), 15%; Tutorial presentation (15 mins),
5%; three hour examination, 60%.
VAA4092 BUILDING SYSTEMS DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAA3072 HVAC Systems 2.
Content This subject aims to provide students with an overview of
key concepts involved in the integration of building services with
building structure, during the design and construction stages.
Students are exposed, through a range of lectures and site visits, to
constructability/buildability and co-ordination aspects of building
services, as well as to compliance with building codes and
regulations. Issues involving integrated building design to minimise
construction costs and achieve sustainable construction methods are
also introduced.
Required Reading Notes and handouts provided by the lecturers.
Recommended Reading Barton, PK, 1983, Building Services
Integration, E&FN Spon; Hartley, A, 1993, Building Services for
Builders, Chartered Institute of Building; Parlour, RP, 2000, Building
Services: a Guide to Integrated Design: Engineering for Architects,
3rd ed., Integral Publishing; Parsloe, C, 1997, Allocation of Design
Responsibilities for Building Engineering Services, BSRIA; Greeno,
R., 1997, Building Services, Technology and Design, Addison
Wesley Longman; Harrison, HW and Trotman, PM, 2000, Building
Services: Performance, Diagnosis, Maintenance, Repair and the
Avoidance of Defects, BRE Publications; Bownas, D, 2001, Building
Services Design Methodology: A Practical Guide, E&FN Spon;
Marsh, C, 2003, Building Services Procurement, Spon; Holroyd, Y.,
2003, Buildability – Successful Construction from Concept to
Completion, Thomas Telford Services.
In addition, students are required to read current journal articles and
other relevant popular publications.
Class Contact two hrs of lectures and three hrs of tutorials per
week.
Assessment Assignment 1 (5000 words group assignment), 65%;
two hour examination, 35%.
VAC2042 HYDRAULICS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAN2041 Thermofluids
Content Fluid resistance and boundary layers; Development of
pipe friction equations and their use. Fluid flow through pipelines;
inter-reservoir- pipeline flow, branching pipelines, parallel pipelines;
Pumps – positive displacement and rotodynamic systems. Pump
performance equations, affinity laws and specific speed. Pump
selection for particular duties; Flow in open channels – fundamentals
(continuity, energy and momentum equations), discharge equations,
specific energy and critical depth relationships, flow transitions and
weirs and flumes. Gradually varied flow and water surface profiles.
Introduction to unsteady flow condition.
Required Reading Hamill, L. (2001), Understanding Hydraulics,
Second Ed., MacMillan Press. Class Notes
Recommended Reading Chanson H. (2001), The Hydraulics of
Open Channel Flow, Butterworth- Heineman Press; Henderson F. M.
(1966), Open Channel Flow, McMillan Press.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials/
laboratory sessions per week.
Assessment Assignment 1: based on video set on boundary
layers (Report, sketches, max word limit of 1500), 10%; Assignment
2: based on self selected site visit in week 9 (Report, photographs,
sketches, max word limit of 1500), 10%; Tests (3 x 1hr in wks 4,7
&11), 30%; three hour examination, 50%.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
232
VAC2071 SURVEYING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Surveying Reference and Basic Computations, Mapping,
Vertical Measurement and Note Keeping, Angular Measurement
and Note Keeping, Circular Curves, Contours and Contouring, Area
Computations for Polygons, Rectangular co-ordinates, Computations
for Earth Works, Digital Terrain Models, Geographic Positioning
Systems, Victorian Land Title System.
Required Reading Class notes.
Recommended Reading Schofield, 2001, Engineering
Surveying, 5th edn; Irvine, W. 1995, Surveying For Construction,
4th edn; Bannister, A. and Raymond et al. 1998, Surveying, 7th
edn; Uren, J. 1985, Surveying For Engineers; Kavanagh, B. 2003,
Surveying with Construction Applications, 5th edn.
Class Contact two hrs of lectures and three hrs of field/tutorials
per week.
Assessment Field work/tutorials 1: Basic Survey Computations
(Max. 500 words), 5%; Field work/tutorials 2: Mapping (Max. 500
words), 5%; Field work/tutorials 3: Transferring a level to determine
RL of a point (Max. 500 words), 5%; Field work/tutorials 4: Level
traverse to determine RL of many points (Max. 500 words), 5%;
Field work/tutorials 5: Determining angles in horizontal plane (Max.
500 words),5%; Field work/tutorials 6: Circular curve set out (Max.
500 words), 5%; Field work/tutorials 7: Grid leveling and
contouring (Max. 500 words), 5%; Field work/tutorials 8: Area and
perimeter computations using co-ordinates (Max. 500 words), 5%;
two hour examination, 60%; Students are required to pass both
Field Work and Examination to receive a pass in the subject.
VAC2072 HIGHWAY ENGINEERING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Earthworks including equipment, determination of
quantities and costs; preparation and use of mass haul diagrams.
Route location factors, route selection, horizontal alignment
including circular curves and transition curves and superelevation,
determination of sight distance; vertical alignment including grades
and vertical curves. Pavement design methods for both flexible and
rigid pavements, determination of number of equivalent standard
axles, use of California Bearing Ratio. Road construction equipment
capabilities. Introduction to road drainage methods, surface and
subsurface drainage. Road maintenance issues and programs.
Required Reading Austroads (1993), Rural Road Design 7th
edn; Class Notes.
Recommended Reading Banks J.H; (2002), Introduction to
Transportation Engineering, 2nd edn, McGraw Hill; Austroads,
(1992) Pavement Design: Guide to the Structural Design of Road
Pavements; Underwood R; (1991), Geometric Design of Roads,
Macmillan; Rogers, M., (2003), Highway Engineering, Blackwell
Publishing.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials/site
visits per week.
Assessment Assignment 1: site investigations (1500 words), 10%;
Assignment 2: geometric standards and super elevation
(Calculations & drawings equivalent to approx. 2000 words), 10%;
Assignment 3: pavement design (Calculations & drawings
equivalent to approx. 2000 words), 10%; three hour examination,
70%.
VAC3021 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAN2021 Solid Mechanics 2.
Content Virtual Work method of structural analysis: Deflections and
rotations of statically determinate trusses, beams and frames; The
stiffness method of structural analysis; Solution of redundant beams
and frames by equations of slope deflection; The effect of axial force
on flexural stiffness; Stiffness analysis using matrices for determinate
and indeterminate plane trusses and frames.
The flexibility method of structural analysis: Solution of redundant
beams and frames.
Qualitative and approximate analyses of structures: Use with
computer analysis programs to appraise results; Ultimate load
(‘plastic’) method of analysis of beams and frames; Frame stability
analysis and buckling.
Required Reading Hibbler R.C., 2005, Structural Analysis (6th
edition). Pearson International; Victoria University, ‘WebCT’ web
site for the subject.
Recommended Reading Thompson F. & Haywood G.G 1996,
Structural Analysis using Virtual Work, Chapman and Hall; Fraser
D.J 2001, Conceptual Design and Preliminary Analysis of
Structures, Pitman; West H.H & Geschwindner L.F., 2003,
Fundamentals of Structural Analysis, Wiley; Brohn, D. 1990
Understanding Structural Analysis, BSP.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials per
week
Assessment Stage test: Based on weeks 1-6, 10%; Homework
submissions: Based on 5 from 12 weeks, 5%; Assignment 1:
Structural model design/making/testing/reporting (3000 words
equivalence), 20%; Assignment 2: Computer structural analysis,
15%; three hour examination, 50%.
VAC3031 CIVIL ENGINEERING DESIGN 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAC 2072 Highway Engineering, VAC2042
Hydraulics.
Corequisite(s) VAC3041 Hydrology and Water Resources.
Content Students will perform five designs of 12 hours each drawn
from the areas of drainage, hydraulics, structures and highway
engineering. Each design will have associated with it a writing task
on aspects relating to the design. Students must also prepare and
deliver one oral presentation on one of the designs performed
during the semester.
Required Reading Class Notes and texts appropriate for each
design.
Recommended Reading As recommended for each of the
subjects on which each design is based.
Class Contact one hr of lecture and four hr of seminars/design
sessions per week.
Assessment Design 1, 18%; Design 2, 18%; Design 3, 18%;
Design 4, 18%; Design 5, 18%; Oral presentation, 10%.
Each design involves calculations, analysis and preparation of
engineering drawings and a separate written report of 800 words.
VAC3041 HYDROLOGY AND WATER RESOURCES
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAC2042 Hydraulics.
Content Hydrologic cycle. Measurement of precipitation.
Streamgauging. Hydrologic statistics. Rainfall frequency analysis.
Design rainfalls. IFD curves. Statistical rational formula. Flood
frequency analysis. Unit hydrographs. Urban drainage system
analysis and design (system layout; hydrology and hydraulics).
Urban stormwater drainage computer software. Reservoir routing.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
233
River routing. Runoff routing. RORB computer software. Culvert
hydraulics and design. Retarding basin design. Floodplain
management. Structural/non-structural measures for flood damage
mitigation. Introduction to water supply systems. Reservoir design by
critical period methods and simulation. REALM computer software.
Streamflow analysis. Introduction to stochastic streamflow data
generation. River basin planning. Engineering economic analysis for
water resources projects, Drought analysis and management. Water
sharing principles. Environmental flows.
Required Reading Linsley, R.K. et al. (1992), Water Resources
Engineering, Fourth Ed., McGraw Hill; Hamill, L. (2001),
Understanding Hydraulics, Second Ed., MacMillan Press; Class
Notes.
Recommended Reading Mays, L.W. (2001), Water Resources
Engineering, Wiley; McMahon. T.A. and Mein, R.G. (1986), River
and Reservoir Yield, Water Resources Publications, Colorado;
Grayson, R.B., Argent, R.M., Nathan, R.J., McMahon, T.A. and
Mein, R.G. (1996), Hydrological Recipes: Estimation Techniques in
Australian Hydrology, Co-operative Research Centre for Catchment
Hydrology; The Institution of Engineers, Australia (1987), Australian
Rainfall and Runoff – A Guide to Flood Estimation, Vols. 1 and 2.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials per
week. In one week, there will be two hours of laboratory work.
Assessment Assignment 1: based on weeks 1-6 (Calculations,
sketches, max word limit of 1000), 8%; Assignment 2: based on
weeks 7-11(Calculations, sketches, max word limit of 1000), 7%;
Assignment 3: Lab on culverts (Calculations, sketches, max word
limit of 700), 5%; Assignment 4: Use of application software RORB
(Calculations, sketches, max word limit of 1500), 12%; Assignment
5: Use of application software REALM (Calculations, sketches, max
word limit of 1000), 18%; three hour examination, 50%.
VAC3042 HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAC 2042 Hydraulics.
Content Urban Water Supply Schemes: Demand assessment and
management, supply sources, dam types/spillways/outlet
works/construction and safety issues, groundwater development
works, water quality requirements and various types of treatment to
satisfy these, service storage, pumping stations, reticulation system
arrangements/layout and manual/computer analysis, pipeline
design and construction.
Irrigation: Purpose and principles of irrigation, irrigation water
quality, channel design and structures, flood, furrow, sprinkler and
trickle irrigation layout and design principles
Required Reading Linsley, R.K. et al. (1992), Water Resources
Engineering, Fourth Ed., McGraw Hill; Class Notes.
Recommended Reading Mays, L.W. (ed). (2002), Urban Water
Supply Handbook, McGraw Hill; Twort, A.C., Ratnayaka, D.D. &
Brandt, M.J. (2000), Water Supply, 5th edn, Arnold; Novak, P,
Moffat, A.I.B., Nalluri, C. & Narayanan, R. (2001), Hydraulic
Structures, 3rd edn, Spon; McGhee, T.J. (1991), Water Supply and
Sewerage, 6th edn, McGraw Hill; Rural Water Commission of
Victoria (1988), Irrigation and Drainage Practice, RWC.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials per
week.
Assessment Assignment 1: Report based on material covered in
weeks 1-7 (calculations, sketches, max word limit 2000), 15%;
Assignment 2: Site visit report (max word limit of 1000), 5%;
Assignment 3: Report based on material covered in weeks 8-11
(calculations, sketches, max word limit 1500), 10%; 0.5 hr Test (On
material covered in weeks 1-8), 10%; three hour examination, 60%.
VAC3061 GEOMECHANICS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAN 1022 Solid Mechanics 1
Content Importance of geology in engineering. Earth history, rock
formation and basic structural geology. Geological maps and their
interpretation. Erosion/transportation/deposition processes and soil
formation. Geology and soils of Melbourne and related case
studies. Classification, description and engineering properties of soil
and rock, soil phase relationships, clay behaviour. In-ground stress
due to gravity and applied loads, principle of effective stress.
Permeability, seepage of water through soil, flow nets and
applications. Shear strength, friction angle and cohesion in various
soil types under differing moisture conditions, Mohr-Coulomb
strength criterion. Slope failure mechanisms and related stability
analyses, stability charts and methods of slope stabilisation.
Geotechnical site investigation including desk studies,
boring/sampling/testing methods, soil/rock profile logging and
reporting
Required Reading Smith, G.N. and Smith, I.G.N. (1998),
Elements of Soil Mechanics, 7th edn, Blackwell Science; Class
Notes
Recommended Reading Barnes, G.E. (2000), Soil Mechanics,
Principles and Practice, 2nd edn, Palgrave; Das, B.M. (2002),
Principles of Geotechnical Engineering, Wadsworth; Terzaghi, K.,
Peck, R.B. & Mesri, G. (1996), Soil Mechanics in Engineering
Practice, 3rd edn, Wiley; Cochrane, G.W. et al. (1991),
Introducing Victorian Geology, Geol. Soc. Of Australia (Vic Div.);
Peck, W.A. et al. (1992), Engineering Geology of Melbourne,
A.A.Balkema; Abramson, L.W. et al (2002), Slope Stability and
Stabilization Methods, 2nd edn, Wiley
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of
tutorials/laboratory work per week
Assessment Assignment 1: Report based on field geological/soils
investigation (calculations, sketches, max word limit 2000), 15%;
Assignment 2: Lab/practical work report on soil testing
(calculations, sketches, max word limit 1000), 5%; Assignment 3:
Solution of geotechnical problems (calculations, sketches, max word
limit 1500), 10%; 0.5 hr Test On material covered in weeks 1-5,
10%; three hour examination, 60%.
VAC3062 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAC 3061 Geomechanics
Content Earthworks and compaction of soils and crushed rock
including methods, specification and field evaluation. Introduction to
foundation design. Bearing capacity of shallow pad and strip
foundations on fine and coarse-grained soils. Pile foundations
including types and loading conditions. Load capacity of single
driven and bored piles, and of pile groups. Immediate settlement.
Consolidation theory and consolidation settlement of foundations on
fine-grained soils. Settlement rates and allowable settlement. Lateral
stresses in the ground. Active and passive stress states. Analysis and
design of gravity, cantilever, propped and anchored retaining walls.
Intro to structural design of foundations and construction issues
including ground stabilisation and dewatering. Types and uses of
geosynthetic materials. Identification and remediation of
contaminated soils.
Required Reading Smith, G.N. and Smith, I.G.N. (1998),
Elements of Soil Mechanics, 7th edn, Blackwell Science; Class
Notes
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
234
Recommended Reading Barnes, G.E. (2000), Soil Mechanics,
Principles and Practice, 2nd edn, Palgrave; Das, B.M. (2002),
Principles of Geotechnical Engineering, Wadsworth; Terzaghi, K.,
Peck, R.B. & Mesri, G. (1996), Soil Mechanics in Engineering
Practice, 3rd edn, Wiley; Tomlinson, M.J. (2001), Foundation
Design and Construction, 7th edn, Prentice Hall; Bowles, J.E.
(1988), Foundation Analysis and Design, 4th edn, McGraw Hill;
Clayton, C.R.I. et al (1993), Earth Pressure and Earth-retaining
Structures, 2nd edn, Blackie; Koerner, R.M. (1998), Designing with
Geosynthetics, 4th edn, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials/
laboratory work per week
Assessment Assignment 1: Report based on field investigation of
foundations (calculations, sketches, max word limit 2000), 15%;
Assignment 2: Lab/practical work report on soil testing
(calculations, sketches, max word limit 1000), 5%; Assignment 3:
Solution of geotechnical problems (calculations, sketches, max word
limit 1500), 10%; 0.5 hr Test On material covered in weeks 1-5,
10%; three hour examination, 60%.
VAC3092 STRUCTURAL DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAN 2032 Engineering Design
Content Dead and live loads. Timber beams and columns. Nailed
and bolted connections in simple shear. Steel beams, girders with
high shear, columns, bolted and welded connections. Reinforced
concrete simple and continuous beams – bending, deflection and
shear. Single and double reinforcement. Columns.
Required Reading Gorenc, B. Tinyou, R. and Syam, A. (1996),
Steel Designers Handbook, 6th edition, UNSW Press; AS4100 Steel
Structure Code (2002), Standards Association of Australia; Warner,
R.F., Rangan, B.V., Hall, A.S. and Faulkes, K.A. (1998) Concrete
Structures Longman; AS3600. Concrete Structures Code (2002),
Standards Association of Australia; AS1720.1 – 1997, ‘Australian
Standard – Timber Structures – Part 1: Design Methods,’ Standards
Australia; Class Notes.
Recommended Reading Boughton GN (1999), ‘Timber – 8
Hour Introduction to Timber Engineering Resource Pack,’ 2nd
edition, published jointly by the National Timber Development
Council and Forest and Wood Products Research and Development
Corporation. Boughton GN and Crews KI (1998), ‘Timber Design
Handbook – in Accordance with the Australian Limit State Timber
Design Code, AS1720.1 – 1997,’ Standards Australia.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials per
week
Assessment Test (calculations, sketches, max word limit of 2000),
20%; Test (calculations, sketches, max word limit of 2000), 20%;
three hour examination, 60%.
VAC4021 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING ANALYSIS AND DESIGN 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAC3092 Structural Design
Content Analysis: Plastic Analysis/Design of Steel Frames – Stress-
strain curve for steel, moment-curvature relationship, plastic modulus
of section. Mechanisms for failure of beams and frames, yield and
equilibrium conditions. Load factor. Upper and lower bound
theorems. Combined bending and axial loads.Buckling of elastic
structures – Introduction, Euler load, buckling modes, long and short
columns, effective length, slenderness ratio; theoretical and practical
columns, secant formula; tangent modulus and secant modulus
methods. Practical techniques for solving buckling problems.
Australian standards relavant for design of columns. Buckling of
plates.
Design: Wind loads. Design of a steel portal frame building:
cladding, secondary ‘cold formed’ members, framing systems for
low-rise buildings, roof and wall bracing, computer analysis,rafters,
columns, connections, knee and splice connections, and ‘plastic’
design of steel frames. Reinforced concrete elements: continuous
beams, slender columns, slabs: method of coefficients, yield line
analysis and design, strip method, equivalent frame.
Required Reading Hibbler R.C., 2005, Structural Analysis. (6th
edition). Pearson International; Gorenc, B. Tinyou, R. and Syam, A.,
(1996), Steel Designers Handbook 6th edition, UNSW Press;
AS4100 Steel Structure Code (2002), Standards Association of
Australia; Warner, R.F., Rangan, B.V., Hall, A.S. and Faulkes, K.A.
(1998), Concrete Structures Longman; AS3600. Concrete Structures
Code (2002), Standards Association of Australia; ‘WebCT’ VU web
site for this subject and class notes.
Recommended Reading West H.H & Geschwindner L.F 2002
Fundamentals of Structural Analysis. Wiley; Woolcock, S.
Kitipornchai, S. and Bradford, M.A. (1993). Limit State Design of
Portal Frame Buildings. 2nd edition Chapman and Hall; AISC
Economical Structural Steelwork; Trahair, N.S. and Bradford, M.A.
(1994) The Behaviour and Design of Steel Structures. 2nd edition
Chapman and Hall.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials per
week.
Assessment Analysis Part:Stage test: Based on weeks 1-6, 25%;
Assignment 1: Structural model design/making/testing/reporting
(Calculations, sketches, max equivalent word limit of 1000), 20%;
Assignment 2: Computer structural analysis (Calculations, sketches,
max equivalent word limit of 1000), 15%; one hour examination,
40%
Design Part: three hour mid-semester supervised assignment. This
assessment will be largely open-book, 40%;
The assignment will be done under supervision to control plagiarism
(Calculations, sketches, max word limit of 1500)
2 hour examination, 60%; Subject final result derived from
weightings = 60% to Design part and 40% to Analysis part.
VAC4022 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING ANALYSIS AND DESIGN 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAC4021 Structural Engineering Analysis &
Design 1.
Content The analysis topics include the basic concepts of finite
element analysis. Element stiffness matrix and mass matrix. Element
assembly and solution for unknowns. Analysis of 2D and 2D
structures using a commercial finite element analysis package such
as STRAND or ANSYS.
The design topics commence simply supported beams. Basic
methods involving load-balancing, crack control and full prestress.
Prestress losses. Transfer. Bending strength. Web and flexural shear.
Anchorage zones. Continuous beams both rectangular and I-
shaped. Primary and secondary actions. Concordant tendons and
transformations. Slab systems.
Required Reading Cook, R.D. , Malkus, D.S., Plesha, M.E. and
Witt, R.J. (2001), Concepts and Applications of Finite Element
Analysis, 4th edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York; Clough, R.W.
and Penzien, J. (2003), Dynamics of Structures, 2nd Edition,
McGraw-Hill, New York; Warner, R.F., Rangan, B.V., Hall, A.S.
and Faulkes, K.A. (1998) Concrete Structures Longman; AS3600.
Concrete Structures Code (2002), Standards Association of
Australia; Class Notes.
Recommended Reading Gilbert, R.I. and Mickleborough, N.C.
(1990), Design of Prestressed Concrete, Unwin Hyman; Gerwick,
B.C. (1993), Construction of Prestressed Concrete Structures, 2nd
edn, Wiley.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
235
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials per
week
Assessment Analysis part: Stage test: Based on weeks 1-6, 20%;
Assignment 1: Computer structural analysis (Calculations, sketches,
max equivalent word limit of 1500), 40%; one hour examination,
40%.
Design part: Three hour mid-semester supervised assignment, 40%
This assessment will be largely open-book. The assignment will be
done under supervision to control plagiarism. (Calculations,
sketches, max word limit of 1500).
2 hour examination, 60%; Subject final result derived from
weightings = 60% to Design part and 40% to Analysis part.
VAC4032 CIVIL ENGINEERING DESIGN 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAC3031 Civil Design 1; VAC3042 Hydraulic
Engineering; VAC4071 Transportation Engineering; VAC4081
Environmental Engineering.
Content Students will perform five designs of 12 hours each drawn
from the areas of drainage, hydraulics, geotechnical engineering
and transportation engineering. Each design will have associated
with it a writing task on aspects relating to the design. Students must
also prepare and deliver one oral presentation on one of the
designs performed during the semester.
Required Reading Class Notes and texts appropriate for each
design.
Recommended Reading As recommended for each of the
subjects on which each design is based.
Class Contact one hr of lecture and four hr of seminars/design
sessions per week.
Assessment Design 1, 18%; Design 2, 18%; Design 3: 18%,
Design 4, 18%; Design 5, 18%; Oral presentation,10%.
Each design involves calculations, analysis and preparation of
enegineering drawings and a separate written report of 800 words.
VAC4071 TRANSPORATION ENGINEERING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Demand for transport and the significance of transport
and freight movement to the economy; road safety issues; transport
planning techniques including trip generation, trip distribution, mode
split and trip assignment models. Traffic engineering aspects – flow
theory; road capacity; headways; gaps; speed analysis. Intersection
analysis; use of SIDRA program to aid design and analysis of
signalised intersections; traffic survey methods and analysis; local
area traffic management studies; travel demand management.
Required Reading Austroads (1988) Traffic Engineering Practice
Vols. 1-12; Class Notes.
Recommended Reading Banks J.H; (2002) Introduction to
Transportation Planning, 2nd edn. McGraw Hill; Underwood R.
(1995), Road Engineering Practice, Macmillan; Ogden K. and
Bennett D., (1988), Traffic Engineering Practice; 3rd edn. Monash
University; Rogers, M. (2003), Highway Engineering, Blackwell
Publishing.
Class Contact two hrs of lectures and one hr of tutorials per week.
Assessment Assignment 1: Site Investigations Report (2000
words), 15%; Assignment 2: Trip generation and trip distribution
(Calculations & analysis equivalent to approx. 6 pages), 15%; three
hour examination, 70%.
VAC4072 ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING AND DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject covers areas of sustainable rural and urban
land development including biophysical and socio-economic data
collection and inventories, environmental sensitivity mapping and
land capability analysis, green city/urban forest concepts, planning
permit issues and processes including meeting procedure, open
space concepts and energy and water conservation, residential
subdivisions and appropriate street designs.
Required Reading Victoria, Dept. of Infrastructure , 2001,
Victoria Planning Provisions (incorporating Rescode.); Class Notes.
Recommended Reading McCarg, 1992, Design with Nature;
Phillips, 1993, Designing Subdivisions to Save and Manage Water;
Victoria, Dept. of Infrastructure, 2002, Melbourne 2030, Planning
for Sustainable Growth; City of Melbourne, 1999, City Plan –
Municipal Strategic Statement; Victoria, Dept. of Infrastructure,
1996, Transporting Melbourne.
Class Contact two hrs of lectures and one hr of tutorials per week.
Assessment Assignment 1: Land development suitability report
1500 words plus sketches, 16%; Assignment 2: Planning meeting
report – 1200 words, 10%; Assignment 3: Subdivision and street
design – calculations and engineering drawing equivalent to
approx.12 pages, 24%; 1.5 hour examination, 50%.
VAC4081 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAC 2042 Hydraulics.
Content Wastewater characteristics and estimation of wastewater
flows. Types, design, maintenance and rehabilitation of collection
systems. Wastewater treatment plant types and applications, unit
processes involved and design of components. Land treatment
methods and wastewater reuse. On-site wastewater treatment.
Water pollution and quality changes in rivers, estuaries and lakes,
including erosion and siltation problems. Point and non-point source
water pollution and control. Urban runoff quality and its
management. Water quality modelling and overview of available
models. Causes of land degradation and methods of control/
rehabilitation. Principles and design of surface and subsurface land
drainage systems
Required Reading Kiely, G. (1997), Environmental Engineering,
McGraw Hill; Linsley, R.K. et al. (1992), Water Resources
Engineering, Fourth Ed., McGraw Hill; Class Notes.
Recommended Reading Davis, M & Masten, S. (2004),
Principles of Environmental Engineering and Science, McGraw Hill;
Davis, M. & Cornwell, D. (1998), Introduction to Environmental
Engineering, 3rd edn, McGraw Hill; Sincero, A.P. & Sincero, G.A.
(1996) Environmental Engineering: A Design Approach, Prentice
Hall; Metcalf and Eddy (2003), Wastewater Engineering –
Treatment and Reuse, 4th edn, McGraw Hill; Droste, R.L. (1997),
Theory and Practice of Water and Wastewater Treatment, Wiley.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials per
week.
Assessment Assignment 1: Report based on material covered in
weeks 1-5 (calculations, sketches, max word limit 2000), 15%;
Assignment 2: Site visit report (max word limit of 1000), 5%;
Assignment 3: Report based on material covered in weeks 6-11
(calculations, sketches, max word limit 1500), 10%; 0.5 hr Test (On
material covered in weeks 1-6), 10%; three hour examination, 60%.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
236
VAC4082 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Overview of a range of environmental problems, and
introduction to Basic Ecology. Solid Waste Management: sources,
types/quantity of wastes, hierarchy of management options,
collection methods and transfer stations, disposal by landfill and
other methods. Air Pollution: types, causes and effects, clean up and
control. Noise Pollution: sources and effects, solutions to noise
problems. Environmental Management including auditing, risk and
environmental impact assessment, community consultation programs,
and sustainable development issues. Coastal Engineering: coastal
forms, wave generation and height prediction, wave phenomena,
sediment transport and impact, beach erosion/rehabilitation,
marinas and fixed or floating breakwaters, coastal management.
Required Reading Kiely, G. (1997), Environmental Engineering,
McGraw Hill; Class Notes.
Recommended Reading Davis, M & Masten, S. (2004),
Principles of Environmental Engineering and Science, McGraw Hill;
Davis, M. & Cornwell, D. (1998), Introduction to Environmental
Engineering, 3rd edn, McGraw Hill; Sincero, A.P. & Sincero, G.A.
(1996) Environmental Engineering: A Design Approach, Prentice
Hall; US Army Corps of Engineers (2002), Coastal Engineering
Manual, USACE; Sorenson, R.M. (1997), Basic coastal
engineering, 2nd edn, Chapman and Hall.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials per
week.
Assessment Assignment 1: Report based on material covered in
weeks 3-6 (calculations, sketches, max word limit 1500), 10%;
Assignment 2: Site visit report (max word limit of 1500), 10%;
Assignment 1: Report based on material covered in weeks 7-10
(calculations, sketches, max word limit 1500), 10%; 0.5 hr Test (On
material covered in weeks 1-6), 10%; three hour examination, 60%.
VAC4091 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING DESIGN 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAC3092 Structural Design.
Content Wind loads. Design of a steel portal frame building:
cladding, secondary ‘cold formed’ members, framing systems for
low-rise buildings, roof and wall bracing, computer analysis,rafters,
columns, connections, knee and splice connections, and ‘plastic’
design of steel frames. Reinforced concrete elements: continuous
beams, slender columns, slabs: method of coefficients, yield line
analysis and design, strip method, equivalent frame.
Required Reading Gorenc, B. Tinyou, R. and Syam, A. (1996)
Steel Designers Handbook 6th edition, UNSW Press; AS4100 Steel
Structure Code (2002), Standards Association of Australia; Warner,
R.F., Rangan, B.V., Hall, A.S. and Faulkes, K.A. (1998) Concrete
Structures Longman; AS3600. Concrete Structures Code (2002),
Standards Association of Australia; Class Notes.
Recommended Reading Woolcock, S. Kitipornchai, S. and
Bradford, M.A. (1993). Limit State Design of Portal Frame Buildings.
2nd edition Chapman and Hall; AISC Economical Structural
Steelwork; Trahair, N.S. and Bradford, M.A. (1994) The Behaviour
and Design of Steel Structures. 2nd edition Chapman and Hall.
Class Contact two hrs of lectures and one hr of tutorials per week.
Assessment three hour mid-semester supervised assignment (This
assessment will be largely open-book), 40%; two hour
examination,60%.
VAC4092 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING DESIGN 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAC4091Structural Engineering Design 1.
Content Simply supported beams. Basic methods involving load-
balancing, crack control and full prestress. Prestress losses. Transfer.
Bending strength. Web and flexural shear. Anchorage zones.
Continuous beams both rectangular and I-shaped. Primary and
secondary actions. Concordant tendons and transformations. Slab
systems.
Required Reading Warner, R.F., Rangan, B.V., Hall, A.S. and
Faulkes, K.A. (1998) Concrete Structures Longman; AS3600.
Concrete Structures Code (2002), Standards Association of
Australia; Class Notes.
Recommended Reading Gilbert, R.I. and Mickleborough, N.C.
(1990), Design of Prestressed Concrete, Unwin Hyman; Gerwick,
B.C. (1993), Construction of Prestressed Concrete Structures, 2nd
edn, Wiley.
Class Contact two hrs of lectures and one hr of tutorials per week.
Assessment three hour mid-semester supervised assignment. This
assessment will be largely open-book.(Calculations, sketches, max
word limit of 1500), 40%; two hour examination, 60%.
VAG1001 ENGINEERING PROFESSION 1A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content This subject gives students an understanding of how
society has developed as a result of science and engineering and
the need for and responsibilities of the professional engineer. Topics
considered include the role of an engineer, ethics, approaches to
problem solving, the environment and sustainable development. This
constitutes 50% of the subject material, the remaining 50% is
devoted to developing written and oral communication skills.
Required Reading Faculty of Arts, Handbook of Communication
Skills for First Year Students in the Faculty of Health, Engineering
and Science, 2006, Victoria University; ‘Engineering in Society —
Class Notes’.
Recommended Reading Beder, Sharon, The New Engineer,
Macmillan, Johnson S,. Gostelow p., Jones E., 1999, Engineering
and Society: an Australian Perspective, Longman; Burghardt, M.D.
1995, Introduction to the Engineering Profession, 2nd Ed’n, Harper
Collins; Eunson B. 1995, Writing Technical Documents, Qld., John
Wiley.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials per
week.
Assessment Assignment 1: Lecture Summary on one of three
lectures, 10%; Assignment 2: Site Visit 2 report, 15%; Class
contributions: CV submission, Design Exercise, Debate, 15%; three
hour examination, 60%.
VAM2011 COMPUTATIONS AND ENGINEERING ANALYSIS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RMA1002 Engineering Mathematics 1A, and
VAN1011 Experimentation and Computing.
Content Solving engineering problems numerically. Computer
programming. Keywords in a computer language. Variables and
data types. Operators and flow control. Structured programming.
Functions in programming. Visualisation of data. Advanced
graphics – mesh and surface plots. Handles and properties of
graphic objects. Integration of programs into software. Event driven
programs. Creating a Graphical User’s Interface (GUI). Analysis of
engineering systems. Examples of first and second order systems in
engineering. Initial and boundary value problems. Numerical
simulation of the time response of engineering systems by solving
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
237
ordinary differential equations. Frequency domain. Transformation
from the time to the frequency domain by Fourier transform.
Characteristics of a system: impulse response and frequency
response functions.
Required Reading Palm W.J. (2001) Introduction to Matlab 6 for
Engineers, McGraw-Hill; Magrab E.B et al (2005) An Engineer’s
Guide to MATLAB® 2nd edition, Pearson Prentice Hall (ISBN 0-13-
145499-4); Class notes and on-line material
Recommended Reading Harman T.L, Dabney J. and Richtert N.
(2000) Advanced Engineering Mathematics with MATLAB®, 2nd
edition, Brooks/Cole (ISBN 0-534-37164-7); Schilling R.J. and
Harris S.L. (2000) Applied Numerical Methods for Engineers using
MATLAB® and C, Brooks/Cole (ISBN 0-534-37014-4).
Class Contact 60 hours in one semester comprising
lectures/tutorials/computer laboratory.
Assessment Computing test 1: two hours based on weeks 1-–5,
30%. Computing test 2: two hours based on weeks 7–11, 30%;
Theory test – two hours, 30%; On-going lab assignments (Word limit
of 1000), 10%
VAM2042 THERMODYNAMICS AND FLUID MECHANICS 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAN2041 Thermofluids.
Content Second law of thermodynamics and entropy. Gas
mixtures. Refrigeration cycles. Gas-vapour mixture and air-
conditioning. Dimensional analysis, dimensionless numbers and
introduction to modelling principles. Measurements in fluid
mechanics. Introduction to conservation laws in differential forms.
Required Reading Comprehensive class, laboratory and activity
notes. On-Line material; Cengel, Y. A. and Boles, M. A. 2002
Thermodynamics- An Engineering Approach, 4th Edition, McGraw;
White, F., 2002 Fluid Mechanics, 5th edn, McGraw Hill.
Recommended Reading Wark, K. and Donald, E.R. 1999,
Thermodynamics, 6th edn., McGraw Hill. Wylen, V. G., Sonntag,
R., and Borgnakke, C. 1994, Fundamentals of classical
Thermodynamics, Wiley. Potter, M.C. and Wiggert, D.C. 1997,
Mechanics of Fluids, 2nd edn., Prentice Hall. Douglass, Gasiorek
and Swaffield, 1999, Fluid Mechanics, 3rd edn. Longmans.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of
tutorial/laboratory sessions per week.
Assessment Class Test: based on weeks 1- 6 (calculations,
sketches, max word limit of 1000 words), 10%; Class Test: based
on weeks 6- 12 (calculations, sketches, max word limit of 1000
words), 10%; Assessment 3: Lab on Venture tube (calculations,
sketches, max word limit of 1000 words), 10%; Assessment 4: Lab
on refrigeration unit (calculations, sketches, max word limit of 1000
words), 10%; Final Exam: 3hrs, 60%.
VAM2062 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURE
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAN2061 Engineering Materials.
Content Diffusion in solids and the application of mathematical
diffusion models to surface treatments of alloys. Thermo- mechanical
strengthening treatments of metal alloys. Structure and properties of
ferrous, aluminium, magnesium, zinc, nickel, copper and titanium
alloys, and their applications in engineering design. Structure,
properties and heat treatment of ceramics and glasses.Introduction
and structure to polymers, elasomers, foams and polymer
composites. Casting processes metals and polymers. Introduction to
plasticity theory and its application to solid forming processes.
Introduction to surface physics and its application to powder
metallurgy and joining processes.
Required Reading Rojter, J. (2005), Fundamentals of Materials
Technology, Victoria University. Class Notes; Rojter, J. (2005),
Manufacturing Materials: Part 1, Victoria University. Class Notes;
Callister, W.D. Jr (2004), Materials Science and Engineering- An
Introduction, John Wiley and Sons Inc; Higgins, R.A. (2005),
Engineering Metallurgy, Edward Arnold; Kalpakjian, S. (2002),
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, Addison- Wesley.
Recommended Reading Askeland, R.D. (2005), The Science
and Engineering of Materials, Thomson; Flinn, A.R., and Trojan,
K.P. (2003) Engineering Materials and Their Applications,Houghton
Mifflin Company; Groover, P.M. (2004), Fundamentals of Modern
Manufacturing- Materials, Processes and Systems, John Wiley;
Smith, F.W. (2004), Foundations of Materials Science and
Engineering, McGraw Hill; Shackelford, F.J. (2005), Introduction to
Material Science for Engineers, 6th Ed., Pearson Education
International; Smallman, E.R., and Bishop, J.R. (2001), Metals and
Materials: Sciences, Processes, Applications, Butterworth
Heinemann.
Class Contact four hrs of lectures/common tutorials/discussion/
field trip and one hr of tutorials and laboratory per week.
Assessment Test 1 in week 5, 10%; Test 2 in week 11, 10%;
three Laboratory Reports. Students will require to achieve a minimum
of 40% in these assessment tasks to successfully complete the subject
(Maximum of 5000 words including calculations), 25%; three hour
examination, 55%.
VAM3012 SIGNAL ANALYSIS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAM2011 Computation and Engineering
Analysis.
Content Engineering measurement theory and fundamentals.
Instrumentation an sensors for mechanical processes. Dynamic
response of measurement systems. Data acquisition systems:
analogue-to-digital converters, quantisation. Shannon’s sampling
theorem. Aliasing. Anti aliasing filters. Use of data acquisition and
analysis software: Matlab®, DADiSP®, HPVee®, Data File
manipulation. Signal classification: Static, transient and dynamic
signals, deterministic signals, random signals, non-stationary signals.
Analysis and interpretation of digital experimental data: Time
domain analysis: trends, RMS, moving statistics (mean, RMS),
synchronous averaging, transient (shock) signals, probability
distribution statistical estimates. Frequency domain analysis: Fast
Fourier Transform (FFT), frequency spectra, spectrum types and
scaling. Frequency response functions, coherence, signal-to-noise
ratio. Introduction to wavelet transforms. Case studies and
applications in engineering, such impact, vibration, shock, noise
contaminated signals, acoustic signals and sensor response. The
subject relies heavily on the development of computer algorithms
and the use of specialist engineering software.
Required Reading Bendat, J.S. and Piersol, A.G. (1986)
Random Data Analysis and Measurement Procedures, Second Ed.
John Wiley and Sons, New York; Randall R.B. (1987), Frequency
Analysis. Bruel & Kjaer, Demnark; Newland, D.E. (1993) An
Introduction to Random Vibrations, Spectral and Wavelet Analysis,
Third Ed. Longman Scientific & Technical, Harlow U.K.; Class
Notes.
Recommended Reading Press W. H., Flannery B. P., Teukolsky
S. A. and Vetterling W. T. (1992) Numerical Recipes in C: The Art
of Scientific Computing Cambridge University Press; 2nd Ed.
Class Contact 60 hours of lectures, tutorials and laboratory work.
Assessment Laboratory report #1 (1500 words equiv.),
8%;Laboratory report #2 (1500 words equiv.), 8%; Laboratory
report #3 (1500 words equiv.),8%; Laboratory report #4 (1500
words equiv.), 8%; Laboratory report #5 (1500 words equiv.), 8%;
Oral presentation (10 mins), 10%; three hour examination, 50%.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
238
VAM3021 STRESS ANALYSIS 1
Campus: Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAN2021 Solid Mechanics 2.
Content Three-dimensional stress analysis: stress vector, Cartesian
stress components, equation of equilibrium, principal stresses and
principal stress directions. Three-dimensional strain analysis:
displacement vector, Cartesian strain components, similarity
between stress and strain matrix, equation of compatibility.
Experimental stress analysis: strain gauges and photoelasticity.
Introduction in linear elasticity: stress strain relationship, Lame’s
equations and Hooke’s law, various formulation of boundary value
problems, plane stress and plane strain problem, orthotropic
materials, composite materials.
Required Reading: Lecture Notes by Danh Tran.
Recommended Reading: Wuderlich, W. and Pilkey, W. D.,
Mechanics of Structures, Variational and Computational Methods,
CRC Press, 2003; Rees, D W A. (2000), Mechanics of Solids and
Structures, Imperial College Press; Budynas, R. G. (1999),
Advanced Strength and Applied Stress Analysis, WCB/McGraw-
Hill.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials per
week.
Assessment Laboratory 1: three hour on Strain Gauge, report
2000-3000 words, 10%; Laboratory 2: three hour Photoelasticity,
report 2000-3000 words, 10%; Test 1: based on Week 1-4, open
book, one hour ,10%; Test 2: based on Week 6-8, open book, one
hour, 10%; Examination: three hour (open book), 60%.
VAM3022 STRESS ANALYSIS 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAM3021 Stress Analysis 1.
Content Thick cylinders and Rotating Discs. Theory of plates and
shells. Introduction to plasticity. Introduction to viscoelasticity, creep
and stress relaxation. Introduction to finite element. Stress analysis
by Finite Element.
Required Reading Lecture Notes by Danh Tran
Recommended Reading Wuderlich, W. and Pilkey, W. D.,
Mechanics of Structures, Variational and Computational Methods,
CRC Press, 2003; Rees, D W A., Mechanics of Solids and
Structures, Imperial College Press, 2000; Budynas, R. G., Advanced
Strength and Applied Stress Analysis, WCB/McGraw-Hill, 1999;
Benham, P. P., Crawford, R, J. and Armstrong, C. G., Mechanics of
Engineering Materials, Longman, 1996; Cook, R. D., Finite Element
Modelling for Stress Analysis, John Wiley & Son, 1995.
Class Contact 5 hrs of lectures and tutorials per week, including
Finite Element computer based laboratory using a finite element
software.
Assessment Assignment 1: Truss analysis by Solid Mechanics and
Finite Element, 1500-2000 words, 10%; Assignment 2: Stress
analysis by ANSYS, 1500-2000 words, 10%; Test 1: based on
Week 1-4, open book one hour, 10%; Test 2: based on Week 5-8,
open book, one hour, 10%; Examination: three hour, open book,
60%.
VAM3031 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING DESIGN 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAN2032 Engineering Design.
Content Design of mechanical elements: Design of Power Screws
and fasteners. Design of power transmission shafting, gears, cams
and followers, Design and selection of rolling contact and journal
bearings, Selection of chain drives, belt drives, clutches and
couplings. Design of plant equipment: Design of Conveyors, Fan
Duct systems, Piping systems. Pipe Flexibility. Programming for the
Design of Mechanical Elements and plant Design. Solids modelling
of mechanical elements.
Required Reading Shigley J.E. and Mischke C.R. (2004),
Mechanical Engineering Design, Seventh Metric Ed., McGraw Hill;
Lecture and Class Notes.
Recommended Reading Juvinall. R.C. and Marshek. K.M.
(2005) Fundamentals of Machine Component Design, John Wiley;
Magrab Edward B. et, al. (2005), An Engineer’s Guide to Matlab,
Pearson, Prentice Hall; Autocad and Pro-Engineer user manuals and
online help.
Class Contact 60 hours of lectures, tutorials and laboratory work
per semester.
Assessment Assignment 1: based on weeks 1-6 (Written report
with a maximum of 5000 words, including calculations and
sketches/drawings), 20%; Assignment 2: based on weeks 7-12
(Written report with a maximum of 5000 words, including
calculations and sketches/drawings), 20%; Class Test: based on
weeks 6, 10%; three hour examination, 50%.
VAM3041 THERMODYNAMICS AND FLUID MECHANICS 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAM2042 Thermodynamics and Fluid Mechanics
1.
Content Availability analysis and second law efficiency of
Thermodynamics. Carnot engines. Gas power cycles – the Otto
cycle, Diesel cycle, gas-turbine cycle, and jet-propulsion cycle.
Vapor and combined power cycles – Rankine cycle, using reheat
and regeneration to improve the efficiency of the Rankine cycle.
Introduction to viscous flows. Laminar and turbulent flows. Detail
analysis of wall shear flows (pipe and boundary layer) and free
shear flows (jets and wakes).
Required Reading Comprehensive class, laboratory and activity
notes. On-Line material; Cengel, Y. A. and Boles, M. A. 2002
Thermodynamics- An Engineering Approach, 4th Edition, McGraw
Hill. Hamill, I. 2001 Understanding Hydraulics, 2nd edn.,
MacMillan Presses; White, F., 2002, Fluid Mechanics, 5th edn,
McGraw Hill.
Recommended Reading Wark, K. and Donald, E.R. 1999,
Thermodynamics, 6th edn., McGraw Hill. Wylen, V. G. , Sonntag,
R., and Borgnakke, C. 1994, Fundamentals of classical
Thermodynamics, Wiley. Potter, M.C. and Wiggert, D.C. 1997,
Mechanics of Fluids, 2nd edn., Prentice Hall. Douglass, Gasiorek
and Swaffield, 1999, Fluid Mechanics, 3rd edn. Longmans.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of
tutorial/laboratory sessions per week.
Assessment Class Test: based on weeks 1- 6 (calculations,
sketches, max word limit of 1000 words), 10%; Class Test: based
on weeks 6- 12 (calculations, sketches, max word limit of 1000
words), 10%; Assessment 3: Lab on external flows (calculations,
sketches, max word limit of 1000 words), 10%; Assessment 4: Lab
on Engine (calculations, sketches, max word limit of 1000 words),
10%; Final Exam: 3hrs, 60%.
VAM3071 DYNAMICS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RMA1002 Engineering Mathematics 1B and
REP1003 Engineering Physics 1C.
Content Introduction to dynamics, Kinematics of particles –
rectilinear and plane curvilinear motion co-ordinates systems, 3-D
curvilinear motion and relative motion. Plane kinematics of rigid
bodies – rectilinear and plane curvilinear motion, relative velocity,
instantaneous centre of zero velocity, relative acceleration, space
curvilinear motion. Kinetics of particles – Newton’s law, work and
energy, impulse and momentum. Plane kinetics of rigid bodies –
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
239
moments and products of inertia, Newton’s law, work and energy,
impulse and momentum. Three-dimensional dynamics of rigid bodies
– kinematics, kinetics, gyroscopic motion.
Required Reading Meriam J.L. and Kraige L.G (2002),
Engineering Mechanics Vol. 2 DYNAMICS, Fifth Ed., John Wiley
and Sons; Riley W.F. and Sturges L.D. (1996), Engineering
Mechanics, DYNAMICS, Second Ed., John Wiley and Sons; Lecture
Notes.
Recommended Reading Dynamics, Kurt Gramoll, Engineering
media Lab, Oklahoma University. http://www.ecourses.ou.edu/;
Hibbler R.C. (2003) Engineering Mechanics – DYNAMICS, Prentice
Hall; Hannah J. and Stephens R.C. (1972) Mechanics of Machines,
Second Ed., Edward Arnold Publishers.
Class Contact 60 hours of lectures, tutorials and laboratory work.
Assessment Laboratory report #1 (2000 words equiv.), 5%;
Laboratory report #2 (2000 words equiv.), 5%; Laboratory report
#3 (2000 words equiv.), 5%; Computer based assignment, 10%;
Mid-semester test (1 hr), 10%; Tutorial presentation (15 mins), 5%;
three hour examination, 60%.
VAM3072 MICHANICAL VIBRATIONS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RMA1002 Engineering Mathematics 1B and
REP1003 Engineering Physics 1C.
Content Introduction to mechanical vibrations and vibratory
elements;Single Degree of Freedom Systems – free vibrations of
undamped systems, free vibrations with viscous, coulomb and
hysteretic damping, harmonically excited vibrations of undamped
systems, response of damped systems to harmonically forced
excitation and base motion, response of damped systems,
equivalent viscous damping, general forcing functions; Two Degree
of Freedom Systems – free vibrations of undamped systems,
co-ordinate coupling, forced vibrations; Multi Degree of Freedom
Systems – influence coefficients, Eigenvalue problem, determination
of natural frequencies and mode shapes; vibration measurement,
vibration control, random vibration analysis, random vibration
simulation.
Required Reading Rao S.S. (1995), Mechanical Vibrations,
Third Ed., Addison-Wesley Publishing Company; Inman D.J. (2001)
Engineering Vibration, Second Ed., Prentice Hall; Class Notes.
Recommended Reading Dynamics, Kurt Gramoll, Engineering
media Lab, Oklahoma University. http://www.ecourses.ou.edu/;
Thomson W.T. and Dahleh M.D. (1997) Theory of Vibration with
Applications, Fifth Ed., Prentice Hall.
Class Contact 60 hours of lectures, tutorials and laboratory work.
Assessment Laboratory report #1 (2000 words equiv.), 5%;
Laboratory report #2 (2000 words equiv.), 5%; Laboratory report
#3 (2000 words equiv.), 5%; Computer based assignment, 10%;
Mid-semester test (1 hr), 10%; Tutorial presentation (15 mins), 5%;
three hour examination, 60%.
VAM4021 COMPUTATIONAL MECHANICS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAM3022 Stress Analysis 2, VAM3072
Mechanical Vibration.
Content Solid modelling: Bottom-Up and Top-Down approach.
Formulation of Finite Element Problem using Total Potential energy
and Element stiffness matrix. Structural Stiffness matrix. Solution
techniques, error, convergence and stability. Static Stress analysis in
elasticity. Mathematical modelling of dynamic systems. Transient
and steady state analysis. Root locus analysis and control system
design. Frequency response analysis. PID controls. Stability.
Analysis and simulation of control design by MATLAB.
Required Reading Lecture Notes.
Recommended Reading Ogata, K., Modern Control
Engineering, Fourth Edition, Prentice Hall, 2002; Cook, R. D.,
Malkus, D. S., Plesha, M. E. and Wilt, Concepts and Applications of
Finite Element Analysis, 4th edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2002;
Zienkiewicz, O. C., Taylor, R. L. and Zhu, J. Z., The Finite Element
Method: Its Basis and Fundamentals, McGraw-Hill, 2005; Dorf, R.
C. and Bishop. R. H., Modern Control Systsems, 10th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2004; Ogata, K., Systems Dynamics, 4th Edition,
Prentice Hall, 2003; Cook, R. D., Finite Element Modelling for Stress
Analysis, 1995.
Class Contact 5 hrs of lectures and tutorials per week for 12
weeks, including computer based laboratory using software.
Assessment Assignment 1: Solid Modelling of a structure by
ANSYS (2000-3000 words), 25%; Assignment 2: Stress Analysis by
Finite Element by ANSYS (2000-3000 words), 25%; Assignment 3:
Dynamics and Control of systems using MATLAB (2000-3000
words), 25%; Laboratory 1: 3-hour experiment in Automation and
Control, Report of 2000-3000 words, 25%.
VAM4032 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING DESIGN 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAM3031 Mechanical Engineering Design 1.
Content Introduction to design for optimisation. Graphical
optimisation. Analytical and numerical search methods. Linear
Programming. Design for Quality and Taguchi principles.
Experimental optimisation.
Required Reading Lecture notes.
Recommended Reading Arora, J. S. (2004) Introduction to
Optimum Design, 2nd ed. Elsevier, San Diego; Dieter, G. E. (2000)
Engineering Design, 3rd. ed., McGraw Hill; Lochner R. L. and
Matar, J. E. (1990) Designing for Quality : An Introduction to the
Best of Taguchi and Western Methods of Statitical Experimental
Design, Quality resources and ASQC Quality Press; Shigley, J. E.
and C. R. Mischke (2001), Mechanical Engineering Design, 6th
ed., McGraw-Hill.
Class Contact 2-3 hrs of lectures and 3-2 hrs of tutorials per week.
Assessment Substantial assignments/projects based on theory
(sketches, graphs, tables, descriptions; word limit 500-1000), 20%;
Mid-semester test, 30%; three hour examination, 50%.
VAM4041 HEAT TRANSFER AND COMBUSTION
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAM3041 Thermodynamics and Fluid Mechanics
1.
Content Conduction: steady state conduction in simple geometries,
extended surfaces, one-dimensional and two-dimensional steady
state conduction, transient heat conduction, charts for transient heat
conduction. Numerical solution of heat transfers. Finite difference
representation.
Convection: thermal boundary layer, laminar flow, Reynolds
analogy, heat transfer in turbulent boundary layers. Forced
convection inside tubes and ducts and over exterior surfaces. Heat
exchangers. Natural convection – empirical correlations for various
shapes.
Radiation heat transfer: thermal radiation, blackbody radiation,
radiation properties, shape factors, enclosures with black surfaces,
enclosures with grey surfaces. Computer simulation of heat transfer
using finite element software.
Fuel analysis: proximate analysis, ultimate analysis. Basic
combustion equations for solid, liquid and gases fuels. Heating
values of various fuels. The theoretical and actual air to fuel ratios.
Enthalpy of formation. First law analysis of the reacting systems.
Adiabatic flame temperature. Entropy change of reacting systems.
Second law analysis of reacting systems.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
240
Required Reading Kreith F. and Bohn, M.S, 1998, Principles of
Heat Transfer, 6th Edition, Harper and Row; Cengel, Y. A. and
Boles, M. A. 2002 Thermodynamics An Engineering Approach, 4th
edn McGraw Hill; Glassman, I., 1996 Combustion, Academic
Press.
Recommended Reading Incopera F.P. and De Witt D.P. 1990,
Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, 4th Edition, Wylie;
Holman J.P, 1990, Heat Transfer, 8th Edition, McGraw-Hill; Kuo, K.
K. 1986 Principles of Combustion, John Wiley & Sons.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials per
week.
Assessment Assignment 1: based on weeks 1-6 (maximum 1500
words), 10%; Assignment 2: based on weeks 7-12 (maximum 1500
words), 10%; Test 1: based on weeks 1-6, 10%; Test 2: based on
weeks 7-12 , 10%; Laboratory Program: based on weeks 1-10,
10%; three hour examination, 50%.
VAM4042 FLUID MECHANICS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAM3041 Thermodynamics and Fluid
Mechanics 2.
Content An introduction to the power of computational fluid
dynamics. Continuous equations and their discretised form. Solution
of one-dimensional steady-state and transient diffusion problems. The
Thomas algorithm. Generalisation to two- and three-dimensions.
Difficulties inherent in dealing with advection, and an introduction to
up-wind differencing and the power law methods. Advection and
dispersion of scalar quantities. An introduction to commercial
software that is based on the above fundamental principles.
Required Reading Wesseling, P. (2000) Principles of
Computational Fluid Dynamics, Springer-Verlag.
Recommended Reading Anderson, J. D. (1995) Computational
fluid dynamics: The basics with applications, McGraw Hill;
Patankar, S. V. (1981) Numerical heat transfer and fluid flow,
McGraw Hill. (This is the classical text).
Class Contact two hrs of lectures and three hrs of tutorials per
week.
Assessment Assignment 1: based on weeks 1-3, 15%;
Assignment 2: based on weeks 1-6, 15%; Assignment 3: based on
weeks 7-8, 20%; Assignment 4: based on weeks 7-12, 20%;
Assignment 5: based on weeks 7-12, 30%.
The assessment tasks will demonstrate that students are capable of
presenting sustained intellectual arguments. Some of the arguments
take the form of narratives, whilst some of the arguments will be
intensely mathematical, but illustrative of the narratives. It is
expected that the written work will be based on rational argument
and it will not be based on dubious ways of knowing and
epistemologies. It is anticipated that students will be able to
celebrate the achievements of scientific method over primitive myths.
Each assessment task will be 500-1000 words.
VAM4062 MANUFACTURING AND POLYMER TECHNOLOGIES
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAM 2062 Materials and Manufacture.
Content Selection of Materials for engineering design, manufacture
and recycling. Recycling processes of materials. Mathematical
modelling of metal casting processes. Introduction to polymer
rheology and viscoelasticity. Application of rheology in
mathematical modelling of polymer injection moulding, calendering
and extrusion processes. Manufacturing techniques of composite
materials. Energy analysis of materials/manufacturing cycle.
Required Reading Rojter, J. (2005), Fundamentals of Materials
Technology, Victoria University. Class Notes; Rojter, J. (2005),
Manufacturing Materials: Part 1, Victoria University. Class Notes;
Rojter, J. (2005), Manufacturing Materials: Part 1, Victoria
University. Class Notes; Callister, W.D. Jr (2004), Materials Science
and Engineering- An Introduction, John Wiley and Sons Inc;
Higgins, R.A. (2005), Engineering Metallurgy, Edward Arnold;
Kalpakjian, S. (2002), Manufacturing Engineering and Technology,
Addison- Wesley.
Recommended Reading Askeland, R.D. (2005), The Science
and Engineering of Materials, Thomson; Ashby, M.F. (2003),
Material Selection in Mechanical Design, Pergamon Press; Flinn,
A.R., and Trojan, K.P. (2003) Engineering Materials and Their
Applications,Houghton Mifflin Company; Groover, P.M. (2004),
Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing- Materials, Processes and
Systems, John Wiley; Powell, C.P. (2002), Engineering with
Polymers, Chapman and Hall; Progelhof, C.R. (2002), Polymer
Engineering Principles, Hanser Publishers; Smith, F.W. (2004),
Foundations of Materials Science and Engineering, McGraw Hill;
Smallman, E.R., and Bishop, J.R. (2001), Metals and Materials:
Sciences,Processes, Applications, Butterworth Heinemann.
Class Contact four hrs of lectures (common tutorials, site visits) and
one hr of tutorials and laboratory classes per week.
Assessment Test 1 in week 5, 10%; Test 2 in week 11, 10%;
Laboratory Reports and Assignments. Students are required to
achieve a minimum of 40% in these assessment tasks to successfully
complete the subject.
Assignments and laboratory reports have a limit of 2500 words
(excluding diagrams, graphs, appendices and bibliography), 25%;
three hour examination, 55%.
VAM4072 ADVANCED MECHANICS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAM4021 Computational Mechanics.
Content Introduction. Review of MDOF system. Continuous system.
Frequency response function of a MDOF system. Vibration testing:
calibration, vibration tests by shaker, by impact hammer. Modal
analysis by software ICATS. Modal analysis of a continuous system
by Finite Element Modellling.
Fundamental concepts of fracture mechanics: stress intensity factor,
energy balance approach. Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics and
brittle materials. Elastic-plastic fracture mechanics and ductile
materials. Application in fatigue fracture analysis. Crack modelling
by finite element.
Required Reading Lecture notes.
Recommended Reading He, J. and Fu Z., Modal Analysis,
Butterworth-Heinemann, 2001; Sanford, R. J., Principles of Fracture
Mechanics, Prentice Hall, 2002; Maia, M. et al, Theoretical and
Experimental Modal Analysis, Research Studies Press, UK, 1997;
Broberg, K. B., Cracks and Fractures, Academic Press, 1999;
Anderson, T. L., Fracture Mechanics: Fundamentals and
Applications, CRC Press, 1998; Hertzberg, R. W., Deformation and
Fracture Mechanics of Engineering Materials, Wiley, 1996; ICATS
Manuals.
Class Contact 5 hours of lectures and tutorials per week for 12
weeks, including experiments and computer-based laboratory.
Assessment Laboratory 1: three hour Vibration testing (report of
2000-3000 words), 20%; Laboratory 2: three hour Modal analysis
by ICATS (report of 2000-3000 words), 20%; Assignment 1: Modal
analysis by Finite Element (2000-3000 words), 20%; Assignment 2:
Crack modelling by Finite Element Modelling (2000-3000 words),
20%; Assignment 3: J integral by finite element modelling (2000-
3000 words), 20%.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
241
VAM4082 AUTOMOTIVE ENGINES, ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAM3041 Thermodynamics.
Content Engine types and their operation. Engine design and
operational parameters. Engine dynamics. Engine testing and
control. Engine performance characteristics. Thermochemistry of fuel
air mixtures. Ideal models of engine cycles. Air, fuel and exhaust
flow. Gas exchange processes. Heat and mass transfer within the
engine. Combustion is spark ignition and compression ignition
engines. Pollutant formation and control. Engine friction and
lubrication. Fuels and lubricants. Modelling engine flow and
combustion processes.
Available energy resources. Environmental impact of using fossil
fuels. Alternative energy resources. Wind power. Basic acoustics.
Human perceptions and noise criteria. Control of noise.
Required Reading Comprehensive class, laboratory, activity
notes and On-Line materials; Ferguson, C. and Kirkpatrick A.
(2001) Internal Combustion Engines – Applied Thermoscience, 2nd
edition, Wiley (ISBN 0-471-35617-4); Heywood J.B. (1988)
Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals, McGraw Hill (ISBN 0-07-
100499-8).
Recommended Reading Stone R. (1992) Introduction to Internal
Combustion Engines, 2nd edition, MacMillian Publishers; Beranek,
L. L., 1988, Noise and Vibration control, Washington, DC : Institute
of Noise Control Engineering; Cyril M. Harris, 1979, Handbook of
noise control, New York : McGraw-Hill; Culp, A. W. 1991,
Principles of Energy Conversion, McGraw Hill; National Energy
Advisory Committee 1980 Australia’s Energy Resources; Cengel, Y.
A. and Boles, M. A., 2002, Thermodynamics- An Engineering
Approach, 4th Edition, McGraw.
Class Contact 60 hours in one semester comprising lectures,
tutorials and practical laboratory sessions.
Assessment Test 1: based on weeks 1- 6 (calculation, sketch and
maximum 1500 words), 15%; Test 2: based on weeks 6-12
(calculation, sketch and maximum 1500 words), 15%; Written
laboratory reports, assignment and presentation (calculation, sketch
and maximum 2000 words), 20%; Final Exam: three hours, 50%.
VAN1011 EXPERIMENTATION AND COMPUTING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Experimentation and measurement: The use of
instrumentation, laboratory and technical procedures, work-place
safety requirements, machine shop practice, report writing and oral
presentation.
Data analysis and presentation: Algorithm development, Introduction
to Data types, Data file reading and writing, Graphing and analysis
of experimental data, curve fitting. Statistical and error analysis of
experimental data, Solutions of equations.
Required Reading Comprehensive class, laboratory and activity
notes. On-Line material
Kirkup, Les., 2001 ‘Experimental Methods – An Introduction to the
Analysis and Presentation of Data’, Wiley.
Palm, William, J., 2005, ‘Introduction to Matlab 6 for Engineers’,
McGraw-Hill
Recommended Reading Gottfried, B.S., 2004, Spreadsheet
Tools for Engineers, McGraw-Hill.
Class Contact one hrs of lectures and four hrs of
tutorial/laboratory sessions per week
Assessment Computing Assignment 1: based on weeks 1-5 (max
of 1500 words report together with the solution printout and
program source code), 10%; Computing Assignment 2: based on
weeks 6-11 (max of 1500 words report together with the solution
printout and program source code), 10%; Class Test: based on
weeks 1- 6, 15%; Class Test: based on weeks 6- 12, 15%; four –
Laboratory Reports (limit of 500 words reports on the individual
experiments), 40%; Oral Presentation, 10%.
VAN1022 SOLID MECHANICS 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) SPH1601 Physics 1AP
Content Review of concept of force. Equilibrium of coplanar forces.
Resultant forces, component of forces; Levers and moments. 2D
statical equilibrium. Free body force diagrams; Pin jointed trusses;
Beams, loads and reactions. Internal forces in beams. Bending
moment and shearing force diagrams for beams; 3D statical
equilibrium; Direct stress and strain. Elastic modulus. Simple
bending stress and strain. Shear stress and strain. Shear modulus;
Poisson’s ratio.
Required Reading Hibbler, R.C, 2004, Statics and Mechanics of
Materials, Fifth Edition – SI Units, Pearson International; University,
WebCT web site for the subject.
Recommended Reading Hall A., 2001, Engineering Statics,
Fifth Edition, UNSW Press; Hibbler, R.C., 2005, Mechanics of
Materials, Sixth Edition – SI Units, Pearson International; Brohn, D.,
1990, Understanding Structural Analysis, Second Edition,
MacMillan.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials per
week
Assessment Mid-semester test: Based on weeks 1-6, 10%;
Homework submissions: Based on 10 from 12 weeks, 5%;
Assignment: Model design/making/testing/reporting 3000 words
equivalence (individual report), 25%; three hour examination, 60%.
VAN1032 INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) END1832
Content The design process and the history of Engineering design;
Creative thinking in design, generating and evaluating design
alternatives; Technical, environmental, human, economic, legal
criteria for evaluation of design alternatives; Making the final
decision in design; Professional Engineering drawing practice,
projections and views, dimensioning, layout, assembly, detailed
drawings and sketching; Computer generated drawings utilizing the
commercial industry standard software AutoCAD.
Required Reading Fogler, H.S. and LeBlanc, S.E., 2003,
Strategies for Creative Problem Solving, Prentice Hall PTR; Class
Notes (handouts provided by the lecturer and notes on WebCT).
Recommended Reading Voland, G., 2004, Engineering by
Design, Pearson/Prentice Hall.
Class Contact two hrs of lectures and three hrs of
tutorials/computer based drawing classes per week.
Assessment Design: Six tutorial submissions, 24%; Peer review of
draft design reports (1000 words – group assignment), 8%;Group
submission (draft design report), 8%; Design notebooks, 10%; Final
oral presentation,10%; Creative design model, 10%; Final design
report (1000 words – group assignment), 30% Drawing: Class test,
10%; Two computer generated drawing tests, 10%; Eight
assignments (one per week over eight weeks), 80%; Word limits are
not applicable for the drawing component. Weighting: 60% Design
and 40% Drawing = Final Subject %
VAN1051 ENGINEERING PROFESSION
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject gives students an understanding of how
society has developed as a result of science and engineering,
exploring the need for and the responsibilities of the professional
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
242
engineer. Topics considered include the role of an engineer, ethics,
approaches to problem solving and design, the environment and
sustainable development, professional written and oral
communication skills including summarising, synthesising,
referencing, report writing and poster presentation and
communication processes and practices. Content is divided equally
between consideration of these engineering issues and the
development of written and oral communication skills.
Required Reading Engineering in Society 2006, Class Notes.
VU, Faculty of Arts 2006, Handbook of Communication Skills for
first year students in the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science,
7th edn.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester based on
one hour of lecture and two hour workshop.
Assessment Synthesis, 10%; Oral presentations (from
demonstrations, debates, poster presentations, oral reports), 20%;
Research report, 15%; Laboratory report, 15%; Examination, 40%.
VAN2021 SOLID MECHANICS 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAN1022 Solid Mechanics 1
Content Properties of sections, including area, centroids, first and
second 'moments' of area; Polar moment of area. Principal axes of
sections. Parallel axis theorem; Deflection of simple determinate
beams. Deflections by Macaulay's method and superposition;
Failure modes and loads for compression members, includes
squashing/elastic buckling and combined effect of direct and
bending stresses; Stresses and strains in two dimensions, Mohr's
circle, principal stress; Elastic/plastic bending stresses and shear
stress distribution in beams; 3D statical equilibrium. Analysis of 3D
statically determinate structures; Unsymmetrical bending. Shear
centre. Principal axes; Torsion in solid and thin-wall tubes. Open
and closed sections; Simple frames under bending and torsion.
Required Reading Hibbler, R.C (2005), Mechanics of Materials,
Sixth Edition – SI Units, Pearson International; University, ‘WebCT’
web site for the subject.
Recommended Reading Hibbler, R.C (2004), Statics and
Mechanics of Materials, Fifth Edition – SI Units, Pearson
International
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials per
week
Assessment Mid-semester test: Based on weeks 1-6 , 10%;
Homework submissions: Based on 10 from 12 weeks, 5%;
Assignment: Model design/making/testing/reporting: 3000 words
equivalence (individual report), 25%; three hour examination, 60%.
VAN2032 ENGINEERING DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAN 1022 Solid Mechanics 1
Content Static Design: The static design covers static dead and live
loads, the fundamental rationale in choosing design loads and the
calculation of specific loads. Design of simple structural steel beams
and columns. Design of bolted and welded connections in simple
shear or tension.
Dynamic Design: The dynamic design covers, Design uncertainties
and statistics, fits and tolerances. Theories of static failure, Low and
high cycle fatigue failure, Torsional and linear Impact failure
Required Reading Class notes.
Recommended Reading Gorenc, B. Tinyou, R. and Syam, A.
(1996) Steel Designers Handbook 6th edition, UNSW Press;
Woolcock, S. Kitipornchai, S. and Bradford, M.A. (1993). Limit
State Design of Portal Frame Buildings. 2nd edition Chapman and
Hall; AS720-1 Timber Structures Code, Standards Australia;
AS4100 Steel Structure Code (2002), Standards Association of
Australia; Shigley J.E. and Mischke C.R. (2001), Mechanical
Engineering Design Sixth Metric Ed., McGraw Hill.
Class Contact two hrs of lectures and three hrs of tutorials per
week
Assessment three hour mid-semester supervised assignment
(involves calculations, sketches, max word limit of 2000), 20%.
The assignment will be done under supervision to control plagiarism.
3 hour mid-semester supervised assignment (involves calculations,
sketches, max word limit of 2000), 20%.
The assignment will be done under supervision to control plagiarism.
3 hour examination, 60%.
VAN2041 THERMOFLUIDS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) REP1002, RMA1002
Content Basic concepts of thermodynamics and fluid mechanics.
Thermodynamic properties of gases, liquids and solids. The ideal
gas law. Energy transfer by heat, work and mass. The first law of
thermodynamics for closed and open systems. Basic concept of
second law of thermodynamics. Fluid statics-forces on submerged
planes, Archimedes‘ principle, and stability of floating bodies. Fluid
dynamics – basic concepts of fluid flow. Continuity, momentum and
energy equations in control volume forms. Application of these
equations to pipe flows.
Required Reading Comprehensive class, laboratory and activity
notes. On-Line material; Cengel, Y. A. and Boles, M. A. 2002
Thermodynamics- An Engineering Approach, 4th Edition, McGraw
Hill; Hamill, I. 2001 Understanding Hydraulics, 2nd edn., Palgrave
Presses; White, F., 2002, Fluid Mechanics, 5th edition, McGraw
Hill.
Recommended Reading Wark, K. and Donald, E.R. 1999,
Thermodynamics, 6th edn., McGraw Hill. Wylen, V. G. , Sonntag,
R., and Borgnakke, C. 1994, Fundamentals of classical
Thermodynamics, Wiley. Potter, M.C. and Wiggert, D.C. 1997,
Mechanics of Fluids, 2nd edn., Prentice Hall. Douglass, Gasiorek
and Swaffield, 1999, Fluid Mechanics, 3rd edn. Longmans.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of
tutorial/laboratory sessions per week.
Assessment Class Test: based on weeks 1- 6 (calculations,
sketches, max word limit of 1000 words), 10%; Class Test: based
on weeks 6- 12 (calculations, sketches, max word limit of 1000
words), 10%; Assessment 3: Lab on stability of floating body
(calculations, sketches, max word limit of 1000 words), 10%;
Assessment 4: Lab on Tube and Shell heat exchanger (calculations,
sketches, max word limit of 1000 words), 10%; Final Exam: 3hrs,
60%.
VAN2061 ENGINEERING MATERIALS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAN1022 Solid Mechanics 1 and REP1001
Engineering Physics 1A.
Content Atomic structure and bonding. Prediction of properties of
materials. Chemical stoichiometry and application of mass balances
in chemical processes in environment and manufacturing. Extent and
speed of reactions incorporating rate laws and Arrhenius theory and
their applications to materials science, automotive engineering, civil
engineering and biochemical reactions. Reactions involving thermal
and electrical energy production and their application to fuel
technology and fuel cells. Corrosion and corrosion protection of
metals. Processes of polymer, aluminium, steel and copper
production.Introduction to microstructure and crystallography of
materials and their effect on material properties. Formation of metal
grains and casting processes. Dislocation theory and strengthening
processes in metals. Introduction to metal alloys and phase
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
243
equilibria and phase equilibrium diagrams. Phase diagrams and
microstructures of plain carbon steels and cast irons. Construction of
TTT curves and their application in heat treatmebnt of plain carbon
steels and cast irons.
Required Reading Rojter, J. (2005), Fundamental Applications of
Science to Materials Technology, Victoria University. Class Notes;
Rojter, J. (2005), Fundamental Applications of Science to Materials
Technology, Victoria University. Class Notes; Zumdahl, S.S., and
Zumdahl, A.S (2003), Chemistry, 6th Ed, Houghton Mifflin
Company; Callister, W.D. Jr (2004), Materials Science and
Engineering- An Introduction, John Wiley and Sons Inc.
Recommended Reading Glanville, O.J. (2003), General
Chemistry for Engineers- 2nd Preliminary Edition, Prentice Hall; Fine,
W.L., Beall, H., and Stuehr, J. (2000), Chemistry for Scientists and
Engineers, Harcourt College Publishers; Felder, M.R., and Rousseau,
W.R. (2000), Elementary Principles of Chemical Processes, John
Wiley and Sons; Shackelford, F.J. (2005), Introduction to Material
Science for Engineers, 6th Ed., Pearson Education International.
Class Contact four hrs of lectures/common tutorials/field trips/
discussion classes and one hr of tutorials and laboratory classes per
week
Assessment Test 1 in week 3, 7.5%; Test 2 in week 6, 7.5%; 2
Laboratory Reports. Students are required to achieve a minimum of
40% in these assessment tasks to successfully complete the subject
(reports of maximum of 10 pages including calculations), 15%;
three hour examination, 70%; Class tests and assignments, 25%;
end of semester examination, 75%.
VAN3052 ENGINEERING MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Introduction to network planning, critical path analysis
and resource allocation. Introduction to management of the
construction process. Feasibility studies and project evaluation.
Methods for making economic studies of engineering projects.
Strategies for plant selection. Planning and scheduling techniques
for engineering projects. Tools for project control. Planning
techniques for repetitive construction or production. Optimising
resources and trend monitoring. Management of the construction
process using a computer package.
Required Reading C. Bhuta & V. Sarma, Lecture Notes, VUT;
Newman D. & Eschenbach, 2004, Engineering Economic Analysis,
9th Edition Oxford University Press; Antill J.M., 1999, Antill’s
Engineering Management, 3rd ed., Wiley.
Recommended Reading DeGarmo, et al, 1995, Engineering
Economy, Prentice Hall; Harris, F., 2002, Modern Construction
Management, Granada; Antill and Woodhead, 1993, Critical Path
Methods in Construction Practice, Wiley.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures; 1hr of tutorial and 1hr of
computer laboratory session per week.
Assessment Tutorial 1: based on weeks 1-6 (calculation, sketches
max words 200), 10%; Tutorial 2: based on weeks 7-11
(calculation, sketches max words 200), 10%; Assignment 1: Use of
application software Excel (computer applications, max word 300),
10%; Assignment 2: Use of application software MSProject 2000
(computer applications, max word 300), 10%; three hour
examination, 60%.
VAN4011 ENGINEERING PROJECT 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completion of all subject prescribed in Year 3
Content This subject constitutes a major capstone task for the
engineering courses listed above, and provides students with the
opportunity to integrate and further develop a range of technical
and generic skills acquired in earlier course years. It will typically
involve: preliminary investigation and follow-up explicit formulation
of an engineering related problem, review of relevant literature
and/or discussion with a range of stakeholders, critical analysis of
the problem, development/testing of a range of possible alternative
solutions, and evaluation of these against social, environmental and
economic criteria prior to selection of a ‘best’ solution.
This project will normally be continued in VAN4012, semester 2.
Students are also required to undertake a number of activities
relating to improvement in communication skills, resume
preparation, job application, and development of good interview
techniques.
Required Reading Lecture and class notes.
Recommended Reading To be advised by the project supervisor
Class Contact one hr of lecture/discussion and three hrs of
tutorials/project work per week
Assessment Project Report (approximately 30 pages), 50%;
Professional Employment Application, 20%; Mock Interview , 10%;
Oral Presentation, 20%.
VAN4012 ENGINEERING PROJECT 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Satisfactory completion of VAN4011 Engineering
Project 1.
Content This subject constitutes a major capstone task for the
engineering courses listed above, and provides students with the
opportunity to integrate and further develop a range of technical
and generic skills acquired in earlier course years. It will typically
involve: preliminary investigation and follow-up explicit formulation
of an engineering related problem, review of relevant literature
and/or discussion with a range of stakeholders, critical analysis of
the problem, development/testing of a range of possible alternative
solutions, and evaluation of these against social, environmental and
economic criteria prior to selection of a ‘best’ solution.
(The project work undertaken here will normally be a continuation of
that carried out in VAN4011.
Required Reading Lecture and Class Notes
Recommended Reading To be advised by the project
supervisor, and relevant to the specific project undertaken.
Class Contact one hr of lecture/discussion and three hrs of
tutorials/project work per week.
Assessment Final Project Report (approximately 70 pages – will
typically incorporate some material from VAN4011 project report),
70%; Poster Presentation, 10%; Oral Presentation, 20%.
VAN4051 ENGINEERING PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAN3052 Engineering Management
Content The role of engineering project management in the
industry. Tendering process, strategies and practices. Forms of
construction contracts. Contract administration phases. Cost
management system for the progressive cost control of a project.
Plan site administration of medium sized projects. Financial
feasibility for long-term development projects, break-even analysis,
engineering project evaluation, and preparation of project cash flow
budgeting, current construction industry practices. Understand
various forms of project delivery methods. Developing quality
management system, Developing quality assurance process;
measuring process performance; feedback and corrective action;
responding to external changes; alternative approaches to total
quality management; Identifying the required resources – in terms of
human, machines and materials; understanding the need vs. wants;
selecting and apportioning in a resource limited situation; managing
through people; motivation; use of power; management styles;
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
244
effective project communication; Non adversarial approach to
people management; role of unions and employer organisations in
engineering industry; legal aspects relating to contracts,
responsibility and liability of a manager running a small engineering
company.
Required Reading C. Bhuta and V. Sarma, Lecture Notes
Recommended Reading Meredith/Mantel/Shafer/Sutton, 2001
Project Management in Practice, 4th Ed., John Wiley; Nicholas
J.M., 1998, Managing business and engineering projects :
concepts & implementation, Prentice Hall; Kerzner H., 2001, Project
management: a systems approach to planning, scheduling, and
controlling, 7th Ed., John Wiley; Mantel, et al., 2001, Project
Management in Practice, John Wiley & Sons; Imai, M. Kaizen,
1986 The key to Japan’s Competitive Success, McGraw- Hill;
Giltow, H. at al., 1989, Tools and Methods for Quality
Improvement, Irwin; Deery, s. and Plowman, D. 2000 Australian
Industrial Relations, 5th Ed. Harcourt Press; Griffin, G. and Teicher,
J. 1997, Contemporary Australian Industrial Relations, John Wiley.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures; one hr of tutorial and one hr of
computer laboratory session per week
Assessment Assignment 1: based on weeks 1-6 (sketches,
descriptions, max word limit of 1500), 12.5%; Assignment 2: based
on weeks 7-11 (sketches, descriptions, max word limit of 1500),
12.5%Assignment 3: Use of application softwares, 15%; three hour
examination, 60%.
VAR2001 MECHATRONICS 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VAR1001 Robotics 1.
Content Co-ordinate and measurement systems, actuator and
control systems, application of kinematics and dynamic concepts,
trajectory planning and control, electronic and mechanical devices,
sensors and instrumentation, application of power motors, actuators
and transmission devices.
Required Reading John J. Craig, Introduction to Robotics:
Mechanics and Control: International Edition, Prentice Hall, 2004.
Recommended Reading Phillip McKerrow 'Introduction to
Robotics', Addison Wesley, 1995; W.Stadler, Analytical Robotics
and Mechatronics, 1995, McGraw-Hill.
Class Contact three hrs of lectures and two hrs of tutorials per
week.
Assessment Laboratory report #1, 5%; Laboratory report #2, 5%;
Laboratory report #3 , 5%; Assignment (maximum 1500 words),
10%; Mid-semester test, 10%; Tutorial presentation , 5%; three hour
examination, 60%.
VEA3000 CONTROL SYSTEMS A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Linear Systems and Mathematics 2B.
Content Control Theory: Introduction to the control problem and
control systems, based upon continuous time systems. Block
diagrams and signal flow graphs. The relationship between the
transfer function, frequency response and time response of a control
system. System stability. Steady-state errors and tracking ability of
control systems. Root locus analysis. Introduction to the design of
controllers. Controller design based upon root locus techniques. PID
controllers. Introduction to state space models of systems.
Introduction to discrete-time systems. Impulse sampling, difference
equations. Z transform and its application to discrete-time systems.
Matlab and Programming: Introduction to the use of Matlab,
Simulink and the Control Systems Toolbox. Experiments will include
the use of a DSP system programmed in C.
Required Reading Control Systems A Subject Notes, Victoria
University.
Recommended Reading N.S. Nise, Control Systems
Engineering, Wiley; C.L. Phillips & R.D.Harbor, Feedback Control
Systems, Prentice-Hall; B.C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems,
Prentice-Hall.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Mid-semester test 15%; Laboratory performance 10%;
End of semester, open book examination 75%
VEA4000 COMPUTER CONTROLLED SYSTEMS B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEA3000 Control Systems A.
Content Mathematical model of discrete-time systems. Impulse
sampler and the zero-order hold. Aliasing and the sampling
theorem. The z-transform. Pulse transfer functions. The unit-delay
operator. Unit-pulse responses, bounded-input bounded-output
stability. Pole-zero cancellations and internal stability. The zero-order
hold equivalent pulse transfer function of a continuous plant.
Mapping between the s-plane and the z-plane.
Design of simple discrete-time controllers via root-loci. Correlation
between step response specifications and pole-locations in the z-
plane. The Internal Model Principle. Lag compensators, lead
compensators, and lag-lead compensators.
Design of simple discrete-time controllers in the frequency domain.
Lag compensators, lead compensators, and lag-lead compensators.
Design of discrete-time state-feedback controllers. Zero-order hold
equivalent state-variable models. Canonical models and similarity
transformations. Pole placement by state-variable feedback. State
observers design via pole placement. Observed state-variable
feedback and the Separation Principle.
Required Reading Computer Controlled Systems Subject Notes,
Victoria University.
Recommended Reading K. Ogata, Discrete-Time Control
Systems, Prentice-Hall, 1995; F. Nekoogar & G. Moriarty, Digital
Control using Digital Signal Processing, Prentice-Hall, 1999; D.
Frederick & J. Chow, Feedback Control Problems using MatLab and
the Control System Toolbox, Brooks/Cole, 2000.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Laboratory assessment (including a small design
project) 40%; End of semester, open book examination 60%.
VEA4100 COMPUTER VISION AND APPLICATIONS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completion of 2nd year.
Content Computer vision algorithms and applications. Topics
include: image-processing, camera models and calibration, multiple
camera vision, 2D and 3D geometric object recognition. Laboratory
application exercises will be used to reinforce theoretical and
practical aspects.
Required Reading Subject Handouts, David A. Forsyth and Jean
Ponce, ‘Computer Vision: Modern Approach’, Prentice Hall, 2003.
Recommended Reading Fu, K.S., Gonzalez, R.C. and Lee,
C.S.G. 1987, Robotics: Control Sensors, Vision and Intelligence,
McGraw Hill, Machine Vision, Ramesh Jain, Rangachar Kasturi, and
Brian G. Schunck, McGraw-Hill, 1995.
Class Contact 30 hrs of contact comprising 15 hrs of
lectures/tutorials and 15hrs of Laboratory.
Assessment Examination 40%, Tests 10%, Laboratory
Assignments 50%.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
245
VEA4200 FUZZY CONTROL AND APPLICATIONS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEA3000 Control Systems A.
Content Introduction to fuzzy sets theory: vagueness and
uncertainty formalisation problem, fuzzy sets theory and probability
theory comparison and discussion, fuzzy set definitions, properties
of fuzzy sets, operations on fuzzy sets.
Fuzzy relations: classical relations, fuzzy relations, operation on
fuzzy relations, the extension principal. Natural language
formalisation and approximate reasoning: linguistic variables, fuzzy
propositions, fuzzy if – then statements, inference rules.
Theoretical fundamentals of fuzzy control: the structure of a fuzzy
controller, the rule base, the data base, the inference engine, choice
of fuzzification and defuzzification procedures. Software and
hardware tools for fuzzy control. Fuzzy controller design using
software packages. Fuzzy controller implementation. Applications of
fuzzy control.
Required Reading K.M. Passino and S. Yurkovich , Fuzzy
Control, Addison-Wesley, 1998.
Recommended Reading L. Reznik, Fuzzy Controllers, Newnes-
Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford, 1997; D.Driankov, H.Hellendoorn
& M.Reinfrank, An Introduction to Fuzzy Control, Springer-Verlag,
1995; The Theory and Applications of Fuzzy Logic (A set of
videotapes) IEEE 1993.
Class Contact 30 hours per semester comprising 15 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 15 hours of laboratory and project work.
Assessment Class tests/assignments throughout the semester 20%;
Laboratory work 40%; Project work 40%.
VEA4300 OPTIMAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEA3000 Control Systems A.
Content Introduction to optimal analysis. Linear quadratic control.
Kalman filter design. Linear quadratic Gaussian control. Current
trends in optimal control development.
Required Reading Optimal Control Systems Subject Notes,
Victoria University.
Recommended Reading B.D.O Anderson and J.B. Moore,
‘Optimal Control: Linear quadratic methods’ Prentice Hall, 1990.
Class Contact One and a half hours of lecture, one hour tutorial
session per week for 12 weeks.
Assessment 2 assignments: 20% for each assignment;
Examination: 60% (3 hours written examination, open book.)
VEA4400 ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RMA1002 Maths 1B, VEC1002 Computer
Eng.1B.
Content Programmable Logic Controllers: Introduction to PLCs,
programming and application. Overview of Robotics, classification,
control methods, drive mechanisms. Programming and applications
of specific robots. Homogenous transforms, configurations. Euler
angles. Manipulator Kinematics. Introduction to KAREL. Robotic
Vision: vision systems, introduction to image processing, edge
detection algorithms, 2D recognition, stereo vision.
Required Reading Handout Notes.
Recommended Reading McKerrow, P.J. 1991, Introduction to
Robotics, Addison Wesley. Fu, K.S., Gonzalez, R.C. and Lee,
C.S.G. 1987, Robotics: Control Sensors, Vision and Intelligence,
McGraw Hill. Paul, R.P. 1981, Robot Manipulators, MIT Press, PLC
and Robotics Manufactures Handbooks (kept by School).
Class Contact 30 hrs of contact comprising 15 hrs of
lectures/tutorials and 15hrs of Laboratory.
Assessment Examination 40%, Tests 10%, Laboratory
Assignments 50%.
VEA4500 ROBUST CONTROL SYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEA3000 Control Systems A.
Content Tracking and disturbance rejection performance measures
The sensitivity function and the complementary sensitivity function.
Model errors and robustness concepts Conditions for robust stability.
The algebraic constraint and its implications. Two degrees of
freedom controllers.
Internal Model Control Perfect control. Internal Model Control and
IMC filters. Performance and robustness trade-off via loop-shaping.
Introduction to the co-prime factorization approach Co-prime
factorization of transfer functions. The Q-parameterization of all
stabilizing controllers. Model reference design and requency
weighting functions.
Required Reading Robust Control Systems Subject Notes,
Victoria University.
Recommended Reading N.S. Nise, Control Systems
Engineering, John Wiley, 2000; B.C. Kuo, Automatic Control
Systems, Prentice-Hall, 1995; D. Frederick & J. Chow, Feedback
Control Problems using MatLab and the Control System Toolbox,
Brooks/Cole, 2000.
Class Contact 30 hours per semester comprising 24 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 6 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Laboratory assessment (including a small design
project) 30%; End of semester, open book examination 70%.
VEA4600 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION FOR CONTROL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEA3000 Control Systems A.
Content Least squares estimator The principle of orthogonal
projection. Statistical properties of estimators. Bias and variance of
models. Conditions for unbiased estimator. Relation to minimum
variance and maximal likelihood estimators.
Prediction error method Minimization of prediction errors. Residues,
statistical properties.
Model structures and model set AutoregRessive with eXogenous
input, AutoRegressive Moving Average with eXogenous input,
Output Error, and Box-Jenkin models.
Parameter estimation algorithms Linear regression. Pseud-linear
regression. Batch processing and recursive processing.
Input signal design Input signal power spectrum. Effects of chosen
model structure and input signal on bias and variance.
Model unfalsification Cross validation of model. Tests of models for
prediction and control design applications.
Required Reading System Identification for Control Subject
Notes, Victoria University.
Recommended Reading L. Ljung, System Identification: Theory
for the user, latest edition, Prentice-Hall.
Class Contact 30 hours per semester comprising 18 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Laboratory assessment 50%; End of semester, open
book examination 50%.
VEB1001 PBL & ENGINEERING PRACTICE 1A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Year 12 mathematics or its equivalent.
Content This is a practical, PBL mode, subject in which students
work in teams to solve a number of problems specifically designed
to integrate with the learning and content from VEF 1001 and VEF
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
246
1003. Teams of students will have an Electrical Engineering staff
member as a ‘coach or mentor’ whilst working on these problems.
‘Specialist’ staff from the VEF 1001 and VEF 1003 subjects will be
available to assist students with technical aspects of the problems.
Staff members from the Faculty of Arts will be available on a weekly
basis to assist with the development of communications skills. Staff
members from the Faculty of Business and Law, the Teaching &
Learning Centre and the School of Architectural, Civil & Mechanical
Engineering will be available to provide workshops to assist students
with the development of generic skills.
Required Reading The use of a prescribed textbook does not
conform to the philosophy inherent in PBL.
Recommended Reading To be provided upon commencement
of subject.
Class Contact 120 hours of class contact per semester.
Assessment Students will be assessed in this subject on the basis
of a portfolio, in which they are required to demonstrate the
attainment of learning outcomes using:- peer evaluation and
assessment, weekly team/client meetings, a reflective journal,
reflective essays, expositions, audio/visual project presentations and
written project reports.
VEB1002 PBL & ENGINEERING PRACTICE 1B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEB 1001 PBL & Engineering Practice 1A, or
equivalent.
Content This is a practical, PBL mode, subject in which students
work in teams to solve a number of problems specifically designed
to integrate with the learning and content from VEF 1002 and VEF
1004. Teams of students will have an Electrical Engineering staff
member as a ‘coach or mentor’ whilst working on these problems.
‘Specialist’ staff from the VEF 1002 and VEF 1004 subjects will be
available to assist students with technical aspects of the problems.
Staff members from the Faculty of Arts will be available on a weekly
basis to assist with the development of communications skills. Staff
members from the Faculty of Business and Law, the Teaching &
Learning Centre and the School of Architectural, Civil & Mechanical
Engineering will be available to provide workshops to assist students
with the development of generic skills.
Required Reading The use of a prescribed textbook does not
conform to the philosophy inherent in PBL.
Recommended Reading To be provided upon commencement
of subject.
Class Contact 120 hours of class contact per semester.
Assessment Students will be assessed in this subject on the basis
of a portfolio, in which they are required to demonstrate the
attainment of learning outcomes using:- self and peer evaluation and
assessment, weekly team/client meetings, a reflective journal,
reflective essays, expositions, audio/visual project presentations and
written project reports.
VEC1001 COMPUTER ENGINEERING 1A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Number Systems and Codes: Base conversions,
representation of data in the binary and hexadecimal systems,
binary arithmetic, signed and unsigned values.
Computer Programming: An overview of a typical computer system.
The program creation process; editing, compiling and debugging.
Data types, correct choice of type and their range. The use of
variable, assignment, arithmetic and logical operations. Flow control
using loops; if, while and switch statements. An Introduction to
arrays.
Digital Electronics: Logic gates, truth tables and Boolean algebra.
Equation formation in Sum of Products and Product of Sums forms.
Graphical methods of equation minimization including Venn
diagrams and the Karnaugh map. Circuit implementation using
universal gate sets.
Required Reading Savitch, W., Problem Solving with C++, 4th
edition, 2004, Addison-Wesley.
Recommended Reading Tocci, R.J. and Widmer, W.S. Digital
Systems: Principles and Applications, 2001, Prentice-Hall; Deitel,
H.M. and Deitel, P.J., C++ How to Program, 4th edition, Prentice-
Hall, 2002.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Class tests conducted throughout the semester 20%;
Laboratory performance 20%; End of semester examination 60%.
VEC1002 COMPUTER ENGINEERING 1B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEC1001 Computer Engineering 1A.
Content Computer Programming: Functions and function
parameters. Text files and text strings. An introduction to data
structures and classes.
Digital Electronics: Latches and flip-flops, types, triggering,
synchronous and asynchronous signals. Asynchronous counter
design using flip-flop chains and manufacturer’s devices. Multi-mode
synchronous counter and state machine design. Electrical
characteristics of logic devices.
Required Reading Savitch, W. Problem Solving with C++, 4th
edition, 2004, Addison-Wesley.
Recommended Reading Tocci, R.J. and Widmer, W.S. Digital
Systems: Principles and Applications, 2001, Prentice-Hall; Deitel,
H.M. and Deitel, P.J. C++ How to Program, 4th edition, Prentice-
Hall, 2002.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Class tests conducted throughout the semester 20%;
Laboratory performance 20%; End of semester examination 60%.
VEC2001 COMPUTER ENGINEERING 2A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEC1002 Computer Engineering 1B.
Content Computer Programming: Pointers and the use of pointers
in data storage, manipulation and data structures. The creation and
use of ‘classes’. Binary files and random file input/output. An
introduction to image processing using bitmap image files.
Microprocessor Systems: The architectural structure of a simple 8-bit
microprocessor/microcontroller. Program and data organization,
programmers model, register sets, instruction set and addressing
modes. Assembly language programming. Interfacing via external
ports; timers, interrupts and special function peripherals.
Required Reading Roth, C.H. Fundamentals of Logic Design, 5th
edition, Thomson Learning, 2004; Savitch, W. Problem Solving with
C++, 5th edition, 2005, Addison-Wesley.
Recommended Reading Deitel, H.M. and Deitel, P.J. C++ How
to Program, 4th edition, Prentice-Hall, 2002; Dueck, R.K. Digital
Design with CPLD Applications and VHDL, Thomson Learning,
2001; Hamblen, J.O. Rapid Prototyping of Digital Systems: A
Tutorial Approach, 2nd edition, Kluwer Academic Pub, 2001;
Tocci, R.J. and Widmer, W.S. Digital Systems: Principles and
Applications, 2001, Prentice-Hall.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Class tests conducted throughout the semester 20%;
Laboratory performance 20%; End of semester examination 60%.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
247
VED2002 ENGINEERING DESIGN AND PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEH2001 Electronic Systems 2A, VEC2001
Computer Eng. 2A.
Content CAD packages, domestic and industrial installation wiring
practice (conforming to AS3000),
design techniques, documentation, construction, and evaluation of
electronics hardware
Professional engineering practice is considered under the headings
of Engineering Planning and Design, and Self Management, it
constitutes 25% of the subject content. Two projects (one group
project) will be undertaken by each student requiring the meeting of
specifications, PCB fabrication, electronic hardware assembly and
the production of comprehensive reports.
Required Reading Handout Notes and Material. Floyd, T.L.,
2003, Digital Fundamentals with VHDL, Prentice Hall. Penthebridge,
K. & Neeson, I., Electrical Wiring Practice Vol. 1& 2, 6th Ed,
AS/NZS 3000:2000.
Recommended Reading AS/NZS 3000:2000/Audit/2-2000:
Electrical Installations. Graphical Symbols for Electro-technical
Documentation, AS1102 (all parts). AUTOCAD Reference Manual
(2005). Generic Competency Standards – April 1999 for Stage 2
Professional Engineers, An Engineers’ Australia Publication.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising of 30 hours of
lectures/tutorials and 30hours of laboratory.
Assessment Class tests and assignments conducted throughout the
semester 30%; Laboratory performance and project designs 60%;
Project report writing 10%.
VED3001 ENGINEERING DESIGN & PROJECTS 3A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed Year 2 of the course.
Content (a) An individual design task based on a supplied circuit
schematic, including design simulation and revision, circuit board
design, electronics construction, initial testing and troubleshooting,
final performance measurement using laboratory test equipment,
reporting on the project via oral progress talks, a final oral
presentation, and a formal written report. (b) The theory component
covers feedback and amplifier stability, differential amplifiers with
active loads, power amplifiers, heat transfer, heatsink design,
properties of sound, noise exposure limits, noise control, illumination
basics, properties of artificial light sources, and interior illumination
design.
Required Reading Sedra A. and Smith K., Microelectronic
Circuits, 5th edition, Oxford University Press, 2004; Hayes, T.C.
and Horowitz, P. 1989, The Art of Electronics, Cambridge
University Press. Prosser, F.P. and Winkel, D.E. 1987, The Art of
Digital Design, Hall; International. Tuinenga, P.W. 1988, SPICE – A
Guide to Circuit Simulation and Analysis Using SPICE, Prentice Hall.
Recommended Reading Jaeger R. and Blalock T.;
Microelectronic Circuit Design, 2nd edition, McGraw-Hill, 2003;
Cluley, J.C. 1981, Electronic Equipment Reliability, MacMillan.
Dummer, G.W.A. and Griffin, N.B. 1966, Electronics Reliability –
Calculation and Design, Pergamon Press. Fuqua, N.B. 1987,
Reliability Engineering for Electronic Design, Marcel Dekker Inc.
Henderson, S.T. and Marsden, A.M. 1983, Lamps and Lighting,
Edward Arnold. Holman, J.P. 1981, Heat Transfer, McGraw-Hill.
McCormick, E.J. 1993, Human Factors in Engineering Design,
McGraw-Hill. Pritchard, D.C. 1986, Interior Lighting Design, The
Electricity Council (London).
Class Contact 60 hours per semester, consisting of 30 hours of
labs, and 30 hours of lectures. Students are expected to spend
additional non-class time on project work.
Assessment Progress talks 5%, final presentation talk 5%, project
report 10%, project performance and quality 40%, assignment,
exam 40%. Completion of the project, and a pass in both the
project and theory sections of the subject is required.
VED3002 ENGINEERING DESIGN & PROJECTS 3B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed VED3001 Engineering Design &
Projects 3A.
Content (a) An individual design task based on a supplied
specification, including a feasibility study, selection of the best
design approach, design simulation and revision, circuit board
design, electronics construction and housing, initial testing and
troubleshooting, and final performance measurement using
laboratory test equipment.
(b) Reporting on the project using oral progress talks, a final oral
presentation, and a formal written report.
(c) Lecture material covering revision of probability theory, leading
to an introduction to the statistical theory of reliability.
Required Reading Hayes, T.C. and Horowitz, P. 1989, The Art
of Electronics, Cambridge University Press. Prosser, F.P. and Winkel,
D.E. 1987, The Art of Digital Design, Hall International. Tuinenga,
P.W. 1988, SPICE – A Guide to Circuit Simulation and Analysis
Using SPICE, Prentice Hall.
Recommended Reading Cluley, J.C. 1981, Electronic
Equipment Reliability, MacMillan. Dummer, G.W.A. and Griffin,
N.B. 1966, Electronics Reliability – Calculation and Design,
Pergamon Press. Fuqua, N.B. 1987, Reliability Engineering for
Electronic Design, Marcel Dekker Inc. Henderson, S.T. and
Marsden, A.M. 1983, Lamps and Lighting, Edward Arnold.
Holman, J.P. 1981, Heat Transfer, McGraw-Hill. McCormick, E.J.
1993, Human Factors in Engineering Design, McGraw-Hill.
Pritchard, D.C. 1986, Interior Lighting Design, The Electricity
Council (London).
Class Contact 48 hours per semester, consisting of 36 hours of
labs, and 12 hours of lectures. Students are expected to spend
additional non-class time on project work.
Assessment Progress talks 5%, final presentation talk 5%, project
report 10%, project performance and quality 50%, assignment,
exam 30%. A pass in both the project and theory sections of the
subject is required, and the project must be completed and working
on time to qualify for assessment.
VED4001 ENGINEERING DESIGN & PROJECTS 4A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed year 3 of the course.
Content The subject consolidates engineering design experience
by requiring each student to undertake an individual engineering
design project, selected from a list of projects on offer. Projects are
sourced from industry and academia, and span both semesters. In
this subject, progress to a viable halfway stage is expected. Each
student is supervised by a staff member expert in the area of the
project. Oral presentation skills, and report writing ability are further
developed from the level attained in third year.
The theory component covers the philosophy of system design, and
designing for variability, emphasising the gulf between designing a
working prototype, and designing for production. Worst case and
Monte Carlo techniques are covered.
Required Reading Clive, L.D. and Little, P., 2000, Engineering
Design – A Project Based Introduction, John Wiley & Sons Inc.
Denny, H.W., 1983, Grounding for the Control of EMI, Dan White
Consultants Inc. Morrison, R. 1977, Grounding and Shielding
Techniques in Instrumentation, John Wiley. Williams, T., 1995,
EMC for Product Designers, Newnes. Tuinenga, P.W., 1988, SPICE
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
248
– A Guide to Circuit Simulation and Analysis Using SPICE, Prentice
Hall. Mohan, T., McGregor, H., Saunders, S. and Archee, R.,
1997, Communication Theory and Practice, Harcourt Brace.
Recommended Reading Mantle, Meredith, Schafer and Sutton,
2001, Project Management in Practice, John Wiley & Sons Inc.
Hall, A.A., 1972, Methodology for Systems Engineering, Van
Nostrand Wiley. McCormick, E.J., 1970, Human Factors in
Engineering Design, McGraw Hill. Eunson, B., 1994, Writing
Technical Documents, John Wiley, Queensland.
Class Contact 48 hours per semester, consisting of 36 hours of
project work and project reporting, and 12 hours of lectures.
Students are expected to spend additional non-class time on project
work.
Assessment Project contract 5%, feasibility study report 10%,
progress talks 5%, final presentation talk 10%, project stage A
report, and project progress and quality 45%, assignments, tests
25%.
VED4002 ENGINEERING DESIGN & PROJECTS 4B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed VED4001 Engineering Design &
Projects 4A.
Content The subject consolidates engineering design experience
by requiring each student to complete an individual engineering
design project, commenced in stage A of the subject. Projects are
sourced from industry and academia, and span both semesters. In
this subject, completion of a successful working project is expected.
Each student is supervised by a staff member, expert in the area of
the project. Oral presentation skills, and report writing ability are
further developed, culminating in the final formal oral presentation,
and final written report.
The theory component concentrates on electromagnetic interference
(EMI) and electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), giving an
introduction to the need for regulation, and methods of pre-
compliance and compliance testing. Design methods to improve
EMC are discussed.
Required Reading Clive, L.D. and Little, P., 2000, Engineering
Design – A Project Based Introduction, John Wiley & Sons Inc.
Denny, H.W., 1983, Grounding for the Control of EMI, Dan White
Consultants Inc. Morrison, R. 1977, Grounding and Shielding
Techniques in Instrumentation, John Wiley. Williams, T., 1995,
EMC for Product Designers, Newnes. Tuinenga, P.W., 1988, SPICE
– A Guide to Circuit Simulation and Analysis Using SPICE, Prentice
Hall. Mohan, T., McGregor, H., Saunders, S. and Archee, R.,
1997, Communication Theory and Practice, Harcourt Brace.
Recommended Reading Mantle, Meredith, Schafer and Sutton,
2001, Project Management in Practice, John Wiley & Sons Inc.
Hall, A.A., 1972, Methodology for Systems Engineering, Van
Nostrand Wiley. McCormick, E.J., 1970, Human Factors in
Engineering Design, McGraw Hill. Eunson, B., 1994, Writing
Technical Documents, John Wiley, Queensland
Class Contact 48 hours per semester, consisting of 36 hours of
project work and project reporting, and 12 hours of lectures.
Students are expected to spend additional non-class time on project
work.
Assessment Project progress talks 10%, final presentation talk
15%, final report, and project performance and quality 50%,
assignments, tests/exams 25%.
VEE3000 ELECTRIC MACHINES AND ENERGY SYSTEMS A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) 2nd year subject VEG2002 Introduction to
Engineering Systems.
Content Synchronous Machines: Characteristics and circuit models.
Power and torque equations. Operation on an infinite bus.
Parameter estimation. Excitation condition.
Models of Transmission Lines : Basic transmission system concepts.
Transmission and distribution. System representation and symbols.
Circuit models of short, medium and long distance transmission
lines. Current and voltage relations of transmission lines. Power flow
through a transmission line. Reactive power compensation of
transmission.
Load Flow Problem: Bus classifications, bus impedance/admittance
matrix. Formulation of power flow equations.
Required Reading Grainger, J. J & Stevenson, W. D. ‘Power
System Analysis ‘, International Edition 1994, McGraw-Hill.
Recommended Reading Chapman , S. J. ‘ Electric Machinery
and Power Systems Fundamentals’, 2001, McGraw Hill
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Mid semester test 20%; Laboratory
performance/written report 20%; End of semester examination 60%
(close book, three hours).
VEE4000 POWER ELECTRONICS AND DRIVES B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) 2nd year subject VEG2002 Introduction to
Engineering Systems 2B.
Content Power Converters: Single phase diode and SCR rectifiers,
three phase diode and SCR rectifiers. Step up and Step down DC
choppers. Single phase and three phase bridge inverters.
Characteristics, circuit models and power calculations.
Pulse Width Modulation: Bipolar and Unipolar switching of DC
choppers. Two-level and three-level pulse width modulation of AC
drives. Switching losses and harmonic issues.
Three Phase Induction Motors and AC Drive Systems: Principle of
operation, circuit models and performance analysis of induction
motors. The performance of induction motor under constant and
variable speed operating conditions.
Required Reading Mohan, N, Undeland, T. M. & Robbins, W.
P. ‘Power Electronics – Converters, Applications, and Design’, 2nd
Edit. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 1995.
Recommended Reading Theodore Wilde, ‘Electrical Machines,
Drive and Power Systems’, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2000.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Mid semester test 20%; Laboratory
performance/written report 20%; End of semester examination 60%
(close book, three hours).
VEE4100 ELECTRIC ENERGY SYSTEMS ANALYSIS AND OPERATION
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEE3000 Electric Machines & Energy Systems A.
Content Load flow analysis techniques, Gauss Siedel and Newton
Raphson methods, uses of load flow analysis, cases studies.
Short circuit analysis using Zbus, case studies. Steady state and
transient stability analysis, case studies. Load-frequency control and
power system operation. Electric energy system interconnection.
High voltage DC systems and their application in electric energy
transmission. FACTS (power electronics) technology for electric
power transmission systems.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
249
Required Reading Grainger J. J. and Stevenson W.D. Power
System Analysis, 1994, McGraw Hill.
Recommended Reading Stagg.G.W. and El-Abiad A.H.,
Computer Methods in Power System Analysis, 1968, McGraw Hill.
Class Contact 36 hours per semester comprising 24 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Assignment and Laboratory Exercises 40%; End of
semester examination 60%; A pass in each component of
assessment is required for a subject pass.
VEE4200 ELECTRIC ENERGY SYSTEMS PROTECTION
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEE3000 Electric Machines and Energy Systems
A.
Content This subject covers the planning, design and operation of
electrical protection systems for the generation, transmission and
distribution electric energy: planning, design standards and
performance requirements; principles and types of protection
systems (overcurrent, impedance, differential, backup, fuses);
application to generators, motors, transmission lines, transformers,
busbars, and distribution; instrument transformer steady state and
transient behaviour; electrical studies for planning and design of
protection systems; power system communications for protection
application.
Required Reading Lecture notes provided.
Recommended Reading Mason C.R. The Art and Science of
Protective Relaying, 1990.
Class Contact 36 hours per semester comprising 24 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Assignment and Laboratory Exercises 40%; End of
semester examination 60%; A pass in each component of
assessment is required for a subject pass.
VEE4300 ELECTRIC ENERGY TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEE3000 Electric Machines and Energy Systems
A.
Content This subject covers the planning, design and operation of
electrical energy transmission and distribution networks.
- planning, design standards and performance requirements.
- voltage control.
- power quality and reliability.
- overvoltage protection.
- earthing and safety.
- embedded generation.
- power electronic systems for performance improvement.
Required Reading Lecture notes provided.
Recommended Reading Gonen, T. 1986, Electric Power
Distribution System Engineering, McGraw-Hill. Gonen, T. 1988,
Electric Power Transmission System Engineering: Analysis and
Design, McGraw-Hill. Freeman, P.J. 1974, Electric Power
Transmission and Distribution, Harrap. Cotton, H. and Barber, H.
1970, The Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy, The
English University Press
Class Contact 36 hours per semester comprising 24 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Assignment and Laboratory Exercises 40%; End of
semester examination 60%; A pass in each component of
assessment is required for a subject pass.
VEE4400 HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEE3000 Electric Machines & Energy Systems A.
Content Electrical insulation properties an characteristics, insulator
selection, insulation co-ordination in electric energy networks,
sources of overvoltages, lightning impact on transmission and
distribution networks, surge propagation theory, circuit interruption
theory and circuit breaker operation.
Required Reading Lecture notes provided.
Recommended Reading Insulators for High Voltage, J S T
Looms, IEE Power and Energy Series 30; High Voltage Engineering
and Testing, H M Ryan (Editor), IEE Power and Energy Series 30;
High Voltage Engineering, 2nd Edition, M S Naidu, V Kamaraju,
1996, Tata McGraw Hill, Dehli; Electrical Transients in power
Systems, 2nd edition, Allan Greenwood, John Wiley, 1991
Class Contact 36 hours per semester comprising 24 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Assignment and Laboratory Exercises 40%; End of
semester examination 60%; A pass in each component of
assessment is required for a subject pass.
VEF1001 ENABLING SCIENCES 1A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Year 12 mathematics or its equivalent.
Content Basic algebra, including index, log laws, indicial and log
equations, algebraic expansions; Functions, straight line, parabola,
circle etc. Mod function. Domain, range, inverse functions; Trig.
Functions and their graphs, period amplitude, degrees radians.
Basic trig identities, Inverse Trig functions. Converting aCosx+-bSinx
to single Sin, Cosine terms; Limits, continuity, differentiation, rules,
higher derivatives, Implicit differentiation. Tangents and Normals;
Parametric differentiation, derivatives of logs and exponentials.
Rates of change, maximum and minimum problems. Trig and inverse
trig derivatives, logarithmic differentiation; Introduction to
integration. Fundamental theorem of Integral Calculus. Substitution
rule. Areas, Mean values, Root mean square; Methods of
integration, partial fractions, simple integration by parts;
Introduction to differential equations, separation of variables,
population growth, air resistance; Complex numbers.
Physical Units and Dimensions: Physical quantities, system of units
and standards, dimensions, unit conversion, significant figures.
Electrical Devices: Fundamentals of electric circuits, series and
parallel circuits, circuit analysis, DC and AC circuits, operation,
performance characteristics and selection of motors and generators
Solid State Physics: Bonding in molecules, bonding in solids, free
electron model of metals, band theory in solids, semiconductors and
doping, semiconductor diodes, transistors.
Semiconductor Devices: Introduction to applications of
semiconductor devices, diodes and I–V characteristics, rectifying
circuits, bridge rectifiers, smoothing circuits, introduction to
operational amplifiers.
Required Reading D.Hughes-Hallett, A.Gleason, W.McCallum et
al. Single and Multivariate calculus. John Wiley and Sons, Inc. New
York, 2005; Giancoli, D.C. Physics for Scientists and Engineers with
Modern Physics, 3rd Edition, 2000, Prentice Hall (We are awaiting
notification of a new edition of this text); Engineering Physics 1A
Laboratory Manual, Victoria University.
Recommended Reading G.F.Fitzgerald and I.A. Peckham.
Mathematical Methods for Engineers and Scientists. Pearson
Education Australia Pty. Ltd. 2003.
Class Contact 60 hours of lectures/tutorials per semester.
Assessment There will be class tests, worth 30% and an end of
semester examination worth 70%.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
250
VEF1002 ENABLING SCIENCES 1B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEF 1001 Enabling Sciences 1A.
Content Descriptive statistics, data, histograms etc. Describing
data, mean, median, mode, quantiles, measures of dispersion;
Introduction to probability, sample space, mutually exclusive and
independent events. Intro to PDFs and intro. to Normal distribution;
Normal distribution, mean of n variate values, 3,2,1 sigma
confidence limits. Binomial, Poisson distributions; Exponential,
Hypergeometric distr. Normal approx. to Binomial and Poisson.
Sample mean. Central limit theorem; Determinants, matrices,
Cramer’s rule, inversion; Solution of systems of algebraic equations.
Row operation, Gaussian elimination, echelon form, ranks; Newton
Raphson, numerical integration. Midpoint, Trapezoidal and
Simpsons rules; Introduction to series and some convergence tests;
Simple power series and the Maclaurin series; Partial differentiation,
algebraic, trig, exp, and log functions. Rules; Partial differentiation,
conditions for max/min. Simple problems; Intro to second order
constant coefficient, homogeneous D.s. Three types of solutions via
the auxiliary equation – Mechanics: Scalars and vectors,
displacement, velocity and acceleration, motion in one and two
dimensions, force, Newton’s laws of motion, friction, work and
energy, conservation laws. Momentum and conservation laws,
impulse and collisions, rotational motion, moments of inertia, centre
of mass, torque, angular momentum, statics; Nuclear Physics:
Properties of the nucleus, binding energy, radioactive decay, half-
life, radioactive dating, fission and fusion; Quantum Physics Planck’s
hypothesis: photons and the photoelectric effect, photons and the
Compton effect, pair production, wave – particle duality, wave
nature of matter, Bohr model of the atom, Heisenberg uncertainty
principle, quantum numbers.
Required Reading D.Hughes-Hallett, A.Gleason, W.McCallum et
al. Single and Multivariate calculus. John Wiley and Sons, Inc. New
York, 2005; Giancoli, D.C. Physics for Scientists and Engineers with
Modern Physics, 3rd Edition, 2000, Prentice Hall (We are awaiting
notification of a new edition of this text); Engineering Physics 1A
Laboratory Manual Victoria University.
Recommended Reading G.F.Fitzgerald and I.A. Peckham.
Mathematical Methods for Engineers and Scientists, Pearson;
Education Australia Pty. Ltd. 2003.
Class Contact 60 hours of lectures/tutorials per semester.
Assessment There will be class tests, worth 30% and an end of
semester examination worth 70%.
VEF1003 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS 1A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Year 12 mathematics or its equivalent.
Content Circuit Theory and Electronics: Basic concepts of
electricity. KVL and KCL. Analysis of DC circuits using Nodal
Voltage Method. Independent DC sources, ideal and practical.
Resistors. Power of a signal and amplifiers. Dependent sources.
Introduction to the operational amplifier and some application
circuits. Resistive transducers. Volt-ampere characteristics. Thevenin
and Norton’s Theorems. Capacitors. Transient responses of RC
series circuits. Ideal diode. Simple rectifier circuits and power
supplies.
Number Systems and Codes: Base conversions, representation of
data in the binary and hexadecimal systems, binary arithmetic,
signed and unsigned values.
Computer Programming: An overview of a typical computer system.
The program creation process; editing, compiling and debugging.
Data types, correct choice of type and their range. The use of
variable, assignment, arithmetic and logical operations. Flow control
using loops; if, while and switch statements. An Introduction to
arrays.
Digital Electronics: Logic gates, truth tables and Boolean algebra.
Equation formation in Sum of Products and Product of Sums forms.
Graphical methods of equation minimization including Venn
diagrams and the Karnaugh map. Circuit implementation using
universal gate sets.
Required Reading Ives, R Introduction to Electrical and Electronic
Engineering, Victoria University; Savitch, W. Problem Solving with
C++, 4th edition, 2004, Addison-Wesley.
Recommended Reading Floyd, T.L., 2001, Electronics
Fundamentals: Circuits, Devices and Application; Tocci, R.J. and
Widmer, W.S. Digital Systems: Principles and Applications, 2001,
Prentice-Hall; Deitel, H.M. and Deitel, P.J. C++ How to Program, 4th
edition, Prentice-Hall, 2002.
Class Contact 60 hours of lectures/tutorials per semester.
Assessment There will be class tests, worth 30% and an end of
semester examination worth 70%.
VEF1004 ELECTRICAL FUNDAMENTALS 1B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEF 1003 Electrical Fundamentals 1A or
equivalent.
Content Circuit Theory and Electronics: Principle of Superposition.
DC characteristics of real operational amplifiers. AC Circuit theory
and some practical AC circuits. Phasors and complex impedance.
Introduction to magnetism. Self-inductance. Transient & AC RL circuit
responses. Resonance. Passive filters & bandwidth. AC
characteristics of real operational amplifiers. Power in AC circuits
Computer Programming: Functions and function parameters. Text
files and text strings. An introduction to data structures and classes.
Digital Electronics: Latches and flip-flops, types, triggering,
synchronous and asynchronous signals. Asynchronous counter
design using flip-flop chains and manufacturer’s devices. Multi-mode
synchronous counter and state machine design. Electrical
characteristics of logic devices.
Required Reading Ives, R Electrical and Electronic Engineering,
Victoria University.
Recommended Reading Floyd, T.L., 2001, Electronics
Fundamentals: Circuits, Devices and Application; Tocci, R.J. and
Widmer, W.S. Digital Systems: Principles and Applications, 2001,
Prentice-Hall; Deitel, H.M. and Deitel, P.J. C++ How to Program, 4th
edition, Prentice-Hall, 2002.
Class Contact 60 hours of lectures/tutorials per semester.
Assessment There will be class tests, worth 30% and an end of
semester examination worth 70%.
VEG2002 INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING SYSTEMS 2B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content ENERGY SYSTEMS: Mechanical and Electromagnetic
Fundamentals: Magnetic field, Faraday’s Law and Lenz’s Law, Self
and mutual Inductors; Transformers: Single phase transformer, The
ideal and realistic transformer equivalent circuits, parameter
estimation. Transformer performance: efficiency and voltage
regulation; DC machines: Operation principles of DC motors, the
concepts of mechanical power and torque, The calculation of speed,
torque and back emf of shunt excited DC motors. Three phase AC
circuits: Balanced three phase circuits, Delta and Wye connected
voltage sources and load impedance, AC power calculations of
three phase circuits. TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS:
Introduction to analog and digital communications systems: Radio
and television systems. Mobile, microwave and satellite systems.
Cable and fibre optic systems; Signal Analysis: Signal
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
251
representation, Parseval’s theorem, Fourier transforms. Convolution.
Sampling theorem; System Analysis: Pulse Code Modulation, AM
and FM systems, Multiplexing. Multiple access. CDMA; Networks:
Internet protocol. IP-based networks. VoIP. VPN.
Required Reading Chapman , S. J. ‘ Electric Machinery and
Power Systems Fundamentals’, 2001, McGraw Hill Lathi, B. P. ‘
Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems’, 1998,
Oxford University Press Inc.
Recommended Reading Jiang, Qin ‘ Energy Conversion’,
2004, Lecture notes; Truyen, N.N. Jeff’ ‘Communication Theory ‘
2004, Lecture notes.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Mid semester test, 20%; Laboratory
performance/written report, 20%; End of semester examination,
60% (close book, three hours).
VEG4001 PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 4A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Normally, successful completion of the first two
years of an appropriate degree.
Content Engineering Practice (A, B, E): Developing a professional
image; Integration of engineering with other professional input*;
Development of innovative engineering solutions*; Identification of
constraints on potential engineering solutions*. Engineering
Planning and Design (A, B, E): Interpreting and scoping design
requirements*; Preparing concept proposal and seeking advice on
latest technology*; Implementing planning and design process*;
Reviewing design to achieve acceptance*; Reviewing design
outcomes in operation; Preparing and maintaining documentation
during the design process*; Developing written and oral skills to
enhance the quality of documentation and presentation*.
Engineering Business Management (B, E): Contributing to
engineering business solutions; Developing client relationships;
Managing the implementation of engineering plan within a
business; Managing resources; Managing people. Managing
Business Information (B,E): Engineering Project management;
Interpreting and scoping project requirements; Developing project
integration; Managing quality, safety and risks; Managing costs
and procurement; Managing time and progress; Finalizing Projects.
Preparation for Employment (A,B): Preparing a job application;
Constructing a C.V; Preparing for Interviews; Interview Techniques;
Presentation skills; Employees rights and obligations.
*These topics will be closely linked to the student experiences in
VED4001/2 Engineering Design and Projects 4A/4B
Recommended Reading Mantle, Meredith, Schafer & Sutton,
2001, Project Management in Practice, Wiley; Stone, R.J.1999,
Human Resource Management 3rd edn., John Wiley; Mohan, T., (et
al), 2004, Communicating as Professionals Thomson; Teicher J et al,
2002, Employee Relations Management: Australia in a Globalizing
World, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact The equivalent of 60 hours per semester. It is
expected that class contact in this subject will be flexible with
different content areas utilising different attendance regimes.
Assessment Three 10 page* assignments – totalling 60%; One
20-minute seminar presentation – 20%; Construction of a resume,
response to a position application and mock interview. – 20%.
VEG4002 PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE 4B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Normally, successful completion Professional
Engineering 4A or equivalent.
Content Engineering Operations (A ,B, E): Planning operations and
systems; Managing the processes within the operation/systems;
Managing the assets within the operation/systems; Managing
people within the operation/systems; Measuring and documenting
engineering operation/systems#; Developing written and oral skills
to enhance the quality of documentation and presentation#.
Materials – Components – Systems (B, E): Determining engineering
requirements; Designing and developing
materials/components/systems; Defining processes to prepare
materials/components/systems for use in project operation;
Managing the use of materials/components/systems within the
project/operation. Environmental Management Planning (B, E):
Determining the environmental condition; Establishing stakeholders’
expectations: Reviewing existing environmental conditions against
stakeholders’ expectations: Developing and ranking strategies to
achieve sustainable development: Implementation, monitoring and
evaluation of strategies. Investigating and Reporting (A,B,E):
Responding to and identification of problems#; Planning the
investigation#; Implementing the investigation#. Reaching
conclusions and making recommendations (B, E): Research,
Development and Commercialisation; Identification of opportunities
for new or improved process and/or products; Identification of the
resources required for the R & D; Development of concept;
Development of commercialisation proposal. Self Management
(B,E): Managing self – ethical behaviour*; Working effectively in a
team*; Managing information*; Managing work priorities and
resources*. Preparation for Employment (A, B): Preparing a job
application*; Constructing a C.V.*; Preparing for Interviews*;
Interview Techniques*; University Capstone Task.
*Revision and extension of previous studies in this area.
#These topics will be closely linked to the student experiences in
VED4001/2 Engineering Design and Projects 4A/4B
Recommended Reading Mantle, Meredith, Schafer & Sutton,
2001, Project Management in Practice, Wiley; Stone, R.J., 1999,
Human Resource Management, 3rd edn., John Wiley; Mohan, T.,
(et al), 2004, Communicating as Professionals Thomson; Teicher J et
al, 2002, Employee Relations Management: Australia in a
Globalizing World, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact The equivalent of 60 hours per semester. It is
expected that class contact in this subject will be flexible with
different content areas utilising different attendance regimes.
Assessment Two 15 page* assignments – totalling 50%; One 30-
minute seminar presentation – 20%; Completion of student portfolio
and University Capstone Task – 20%; Construction of a resume,
response to a position application and mock interview. – 10%.
VEG4100 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEL2002 Linear Systems and Mathematics 2B.
Content Introduction Continuous-time and discrete-time signals. The
sampling theorem. Impulse sampling and the zero-order hold. The z-
transform.
Analysis of discrete-time systems Unit-pulse response. Causal linear
shift-invariant systems. Ordinary convolution. Bounded-input
bounded output stability. Difference equation and transfer pulse
transfer function. Unit-delay operator and realization structures of
causal linear shift-invariant systems. A stability test. The frequency
response function The discrete-time Fourier transform pairs. Mapping
between the s-plane and the z-plane. Infinite duration Impulse
Response filters Butterworth and Chebyshev filters. Frequency
scaling and transformations. Transformation of analog filters into IIR
filters. Matched z-transform, impulse-invariance, and bilinear
transformations. Finite duration Impulse Response filters Linear phase
response. Filter design with window functions. Frequency sampling
filters. The Discrete-Time Fourier transform Relationship between DFT
and DTFT. The Fast Fourier transform. Computation of frequency
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
252
spectra, zero padding. Cyclic convolutions and its application in
filter realization.
Required Reading Digital Signal Processing 1 Subject Notes,
Victoria University.
Recommended Reading R. Cristi, Modern Digital Signal
Processing, Thomson Brooks/Cole, 2004; C.T. Chen, Digital Signal
Processing, Oxford, 2001.
Class Contact 30 hours per semester comprising 24 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 6 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Laboratory assessment 30%; End of semester, open
book examination 70%.
VEH2001 ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS 2A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEF1002 Enabling Sciences 1B and VEF1004
Electrical Fundamentals.
Content Analog Systems: PN diodes, electrical characteristics,
application in rectification, clipping and limiting. Zener diodes.
Bipolar transistors, characteristics, small signal model, CE, CC and
CB configurations, analysis and design. MOSFET devices,
characteristics, configurations and use in amplifier design. Voltage
regulators, definition of types, performance requirements, design of
simple Zener type, series and shunt types. Digital Systems: Data
path elements including encoders, decoders, comparators,
multiplexers, demultiplexers, multi-mode synchronous counters
registers, shift-registers, arithmetic circuits and ROMs. Applications
of data path elements. Data path element function, description in
VHDL and synthesis onto programmable logic devices.
Required Reading Roth, C.H. Fundamentals of Logic Design, 5th
edition, Thomson Learning, 2004; Sedra, A. and Smith, K,
Microelectronic Circuits, 5th edition, Oxford University Press, 2004.
Recommended Reading Dueck, R.K. Digital Design with CPLD
Applications and VHDL, Thomson Learning, 2001; Hamblen, J.O.
Rapid Prototyping of Digital Systems: A Tutorial Approach, 2nd
edition, Kluwer Academic Pub, 2001; Jaeger, R, Blalock T.;
Microelectronic Circuits, McGraw-Hill, 2003; Rashid, M,
Microelectronic Circuit Analysis and Design, PWS, Jaeger, 1999;
Horenstein, M, Microelectronic Circuits and Devices, Prentice-Hall,
1996.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Class tests conducted throughout the semester 20%;
Laboratory performance 20%; End of semester examination 60%.
VEH2002 ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS 2B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEH2001 Electronic Systems 2A.
Content Analog Systems: Differential amplifiers, models of
operation, gain, CMMR; design for performance characteristic.
Frequency response of amplifiers; an introduction to wide-band and
high frequency amplifier design. Oscillators, RC, LC, phase shift,
integrator and crystal types. Data converters; dual-slope, successive
approximation and ‘flash’ type. Switching regulators and power
supplies. Digital Systems: Synchronous state machine analysis and
design. Moore and Mealy machines. State optimization and
reduction techniques. Races and hazards; effects and elimination.
An introduction to the algorithmic state machine; gate level synthesis
and implementation in VHDL. Simple PLD architectures; macro cells,
clocking and output options, limitations.
Required Reading Roth, C.H. Fundamentals of Logic Design, 5th
edition, Thomson Learning, 2004; Sedra, A. and Smith, K,
Microelectronic Circuits, 5th edition, Oxford University Press, 2004.
Recommended Reading Dueck, R.K. Digital Design with CPLD
Applications and VHDL, Thomson Learning, 2001; Hamblen, J.O.
Rapid Prototyping of Digital Systems: A Tutorial Approach, 2nd
edition, Kluwer Academic Pub, 2001; Horenstein, M,
Microelectronic Circuits and Devices, Prentice-Hall, 1996; Jaeger, R,
and Blalock, T.; Microelectronic Circuits Design, McGraw-Hill,
2003; Rashid, M, Microelectronic Circuit Analysis and Design,
PWS, Jaeger, 1999.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Class tests conducted throughout the semester 20%;
Laboratory performance 20%; End of semester examination 60%.
VEH3000 COMPUTER AND DIGITAL DESIGN A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEC2001 Computer Engineering 2A and
VEH2002 Electronic Systems 2B.
Content The algorithmic state-machine; partitioned and linked
machines. Synthesis of VHDL descriptions of state-machines. Register
Transfer Language modelling of large, complex digital systems and
the VHDL synthesis process. Operator sharing, register optimization,
controller optimization. Asynchronous state-machines; analysis and
design. CPLD and FPGA architectures, features and limitations. An
introduction to hardware testing and design for test. Test vector
generation algorithms, built in self-test, boundary-scan methods.
Required Reading Roth, C.H. Fundamentals of Logic Design, 5th
edition, Thomson Learning, 2004.
Recommended Reading Dueck, R.K. Digital Design with CPLD
Applications and VHDL, Thomson Learning, 2001; Hamblen, J.O.
Rapid Prototyping of Digital Systems: A Tutorial Approach, 2nd
edition, Kluwer Academic Pub, 2001.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Class tests conducted throughout the semester 20%;
Laboratory performance 20%; End of semester examination 60%.
VEH4000 COMPUTER AND DIGITAL DESIGN B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEH3000 Computer and Digital Design A.
Content The algorithmic state-machine; partitioned and linked
machines. Synthesis of VHDL descriptions of state-machines. Register
Transfer Language modelling of large, complex digital systems and
the VHDL synthesis process. Operator sharing, register optimization,
controller optimization. Asynchronous state-machines; analysis and
design. CPLD and FPGA architectures, features and limitations. An
introduction to hardware testing and design for test. Test vector
generation algorithms, built in self-test, boundary-scan methods.
Required Reading Dueck, R.K. Digital Design with CPLD
Applications and VHDL, Thomson Learning, 2001; Hamblen, J.O.
Rapid Prototyping of Digital Systems: A Tutorial Approach, 2nd
edition, Kluwer Academic Pub, 2001.
Recommended Reading Labrosse, J.L., Embedded Systems
Building Blocks, R&D Technical Books, 1995; Valvano, W.J.
Introduction To Embedded Microcomputer Systems, Thomson, 2003;
Valvano, W.J., Embedded Microprocessor Systems: Real Time
Interfacing, Books/Cole, 2000.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Class tests conducted throughout the semester 20%;
Laboratory performance 20%; End of semester examination 60%.
VEH4300 SYSTEMS ON A PROGRAMMABLE DEVICE
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEH4000 Computer and Digital Design B.
Content Commercial ‘intellectual property’ building blocks
including: CPUs, UARTS, I/O devices, timers, and special function
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
253
modules. Incorporating commercial blocks with user-created (VHDL)
blocks. The software development process and tools for ‘system on a
chip’ applications. In-circuit debugging and testing. Use of static
RAM type FPGAs in manufactured products, configuration device
considerations. Conversion of FPGA prototypes to full custom, mass
produced parts.
Required Reading Labrosse, J.L., MicroC/OS-II – The Real Time
Kernal, CMP Books, 1992; Nios 32-Bit Programmers Reference
Manual, Altera Corporation, 2003; Roth, C.H. Fundamentals of
Logic Design, 5th edition, Thomson Learning, 2004.
Recommended Reading Hamblen, J.O. Rapid Prototyping of
Digital Systems: A Tutorial Approach, 2nd edition, Kluwer;
Labrosse, J.L.,Embedded Systems Building Blocks, R&D Technical
Books, 1995; Valvano, W.J. Introduction To Embedded
Microcomputer Systems, Thomson, 2003; Valvano, W.J.,
Embedded Microprocessor Systems: Real Time Interfacing,
Books/Cole, 2000.
Class Contact 30 hours per semester comprising 10 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 20 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Laboratory based, design build and test activities
100%.
VEL1001 CIRCUIT THEORY AND ELECTRONICS 1A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Communication/Information Skills: Instruction and
laboratory report writing. Oral Demonstration.
Circuit Theory and Electronics: Basic concepts of electricity. KVL and
KCL. Analysis of DC circuits using Nodal Voltage Method.
Independent DC sources, ideal and practical. Resistors. Power of a
signal and amplifiers. Dependent sources. Introduction to the
operational amplifier and some application circuits. Resistive
transducers. Volt-ampere characteristics. Thevenin and Norton’s
Theorems. Capacitors. Transient responses of RC series circuits.
Ideal diode. Simple rectifier circuits and power supplies.
Required Reading Handbook of Communication Skills for First
Year Students in the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science,
Faculty of Arts, Victoria University; Ives, R Introduction to Electrical
and Electronic Engineering, Victoria University.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 36 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 24 hours of laboratory/workshops.
Assessment Laboratory Report/Oral Demonstration 20%; Mid-
semester test 10%; Laboratory performance 10%; End of semester,
open book examination 60%.
VEL1002 CIRCUIT THEORY AND ELECTRONICS 2B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEL1001 Circuit Theory and Electronics 1A.
Content Communication/Information Skills: An investigative
research report is to be conducted on some given topic of
engineering. Circuit Theory and Electronics: Principle of
Superposition. DC characteristics of real operational amplifiers. AC
Circuit theory and some practical AC circuits. Phasors and complex
impedance. Introduction to magnetism. Self-inductance. Transient &
AC RL circuit responses. Resonance. Passive filters & bandwidth. AC
characteristics of real operational amplifiers. Power in AC circuits.
Required Reading Handbook of Communication Skills for First
Year Students in the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science,
Faculty of Arts, Victoria University; Ives, R Electrical and Electronic
Engineering, Victoria University.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 36 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 24 hours of laboratory/workshops.
Assessment Laboratory Report/Oral Demonstration 20%; Mid-
semester test 10%; Laboratory performance 10%; End of semester,
open book examination 60%.
VEL2001 LINEAR SYSTEMS AND MATHEMATICS 2A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEL1002 Circuit Theory and Electronics 1B and
RMA1002 Mathematics 1B.
Content Mathematics component: Laplace transformation – One-
sided Laplace transform, properties and theorems. Existence
conditions (omit proofs). Inverse Laplace transform by partial
fractions. Application of Laplace transform to solve ordinary linear
differential equations with constant coefficients (initial-value
problems). Fourier analysis – Trigonometrical Fourier series,
exponential form. Half-range expansions. Fourier transform as a
limiting case of Fourier series in exponential form. Existence
conditions (omit proofs). Linear algebra – Introduction of the
eigenvalue problem as a directional invariance problem in vector
space. Solution of eigenvalue problems (simple eigenvalues case
only). Similarity transformation. Application to the solution of a set of
ordinary linear first order differential equations with constant
coefficients. Superposition structure of the solution set. Linear
Systems component: Lumped models of linear time-invariant system
elements; ideal resistors, capacitors, inductors, springs, masses, and
dashpots. Formulation of system equations and initial conditions for
systems described by first-order and second-order linear constant-
coefficients ordinary differential equations. Natural response of first-
order systems. Forced response of first-order systems; zero-input
response and zero-state response decomposition. Unit-impulse
function; sifting property. Unit-step function and its relation to unit-
impulse function. Unit-impulse response and unit-step response for
first-order systems; relationship between unit-step response and unit-
impulse response. Causality. Obtaining zero-input response and
zero-state response for first-order systems by using convolution
integrals. Definition and properties of Laplace transformation with
the zero-minus lower limit. Obtaining zero-input response and zero-
state response for first-order and second-order systems by using
Laplace transforms. Transfer functions; poles and zeros. Relationship
between impulse response and transfer function. Relationship
between finding zero-state response by using convolution integral
and by using transfer function. Transient response and steady-state
response decomposition. Generalization of time-domain analysis to
finite-order systems.
Required Reading Linear Systems and Mathematics 2A Subject
Notes, Victoria University.
Recommended Reading Mathematics component: E. Kreyszig,
Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley, 1993.
Linear Systems component: C.K. Alexander,and M.N.O. Sadiku,
Fundamentals of Electric Circuits, McGraw-Hill, 2004; W.H. Hayt
Jr., J.E. Kemmerly, and S.M. Durbin, Engineering Circuit Analysis,
McGraw-Hill, 2002; K. Ogata, Systems Dynamics, Prentice Hall,
1998.
Class Contact Mathematics component: 24 hours of
lecture/tutorial per semester; Linear Systems component: 24 hours of
lecture/tutorial per semester; 12 hours of laboratory exercises per
semester.
Assessment Mathematics component: Examination 100%; Linear
Systems component: Laboratory exercises 10%; Examination 90%.
Satisfactory performance in each of the Mathematics and Linear
Systems components of is necessary for an overall subject pass.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
254
VEL2002 LINEAR SYSTEMS AND MATHEMATICS 2B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEL2001 Linear Systems and Mathematics 2A.
Content Mathematics component: Probability theory – Random
experiments or trials, examples. The triplet of probability space,
sample space, sigma-algebra of events, and probability measure.
Axiomatic definition of Probability, properties of probabilities and
Kolmogorov continuity theorem. Relative frequency interpretation.
Conditional probabilities and independent events. Random
variables as measurable functions defined on the sample space,
distribution and density functions. Discrete distributions, Binomial,
and Poisson distributions. Absolutely continuous distributions,
Normal distributions. Functions of random variable, expected value
and moments. Joint distribution and density functions for two random
variables, conditional distributions and densities. Independent
random variables. Jointly Normal random variables. Sum of random
variables, the weak law and the strong law of large numbers (omit
proofs). The Central Limit theorem (omit proof). Introduction to
Random – Processes Definition of random processes, random
sequences. Stationary processes. Correlation, covariance, and
power spectrum. Statistics – Chi-Square and Student’s t distributions.
Parameter estimators, unbiased estimators, efficient estimators,
consistent estimators. Maximum likelihood method. Confidence
intervals and hypothesis testing. Linear Systems component:
Frequency response – Steady-state frequency response of linear time-
invariant systems; phasor analysis of linear time-invariant circuits
with complex exponential representation of sinusoidal functions,
magnitude response and phase response. Generalized frequency
response – Relationship between Laplace transforms and Fourier
transforms. The generalized or complex frequency variable; system
functions in the s-domain. Obtaining frequency response functions
from transfer functions. Bode diagrams; asymptotic straight-line
approximation of frequency response curves. Introduction to active
filters – Types of filters, first-order and second-order lowpass,
highpass, bandpass, and bandstop transfer functions. Bilinear,
Biquadratic, Sallen and Key, and Friend’s circuits for filter
realizations, normalized first-order and second-order sections.
Frequency scaling and transformations, magnitude scaling.
Butterworth and Chebyshev prototype filters.
Required Reading Linear Systems and Mathematics 2B Subject
Notes, Victoria University
Recommended Reading Mathematics component: E. Kreyszig,
Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley, 1993.
Linear Systems component: C.K. Alexander, and M.N.O. Sadiku,
Fundamentals of Electric Circuits, McGraw-Hill, 2004; W.H. Hayt
Jr., J.E. Kemmerly, and S.M. Durbin, Engineering Circuit Analysis,
McGraw-Hill, 2002; A. Sedra, and K. Smith, Microelectronic
Circuits, Oxford University Press, 1998.
Class Contact Mathematics component: 24 hours of
lecture/tutorial per semester; Linear Systems component: 24 hours of
lecture/tutorial per semester; 12 hours of laboratory exercises per
semester.
Assessment Mathematics component: Examination 100%; Linear
Systems component: Laboratory exercises 10%, Examination 90%.
Satisfactory performance in each component of assessment is
necessary for a subject pass.
VEM2012 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) REP1002 Engineering Physics 1C.
Content Fundamentals of electrical circuit theory, DC circuits,
Series/parallel circuits, Introduction to AC circuits. Basic operation,
performance characteristics and selection of motors and generators.
Introduction to electronics. Digital value representation, number
systems, binary arithmetic operations. Boolean algebra, Boolean
expression of digital circuits, Karnaugh Map simplification,
combinational digital circuit design, Nand/Nor design. Circuit
design using MSI components, decoders and multiplexers. Latches,
flip-flops and concepts and sequential digital circuits. Binary counter
and other modulus counter design. Typical circuits for analog to
digital and digital to analog conversion. Devices for microprocessor
interface.
Required Reading Rizzoni, G. (2000), Principles and
Applications of Electrical Engineering,McGraw Hill; Tocci, R.J. and
Widmer, W.D., 1998, DigitalSystems – Principles and Application,
6th edn, Prentice-Hall.
Recommended Reading Smith, R.J and Dorf, R.C. (1996),
Circuits,Devices and Systems,5th ed. Jacaranda Wiley;
Alexander,C.K and Sadiku, M. (2000), Fundamentals of Electric
Circuits,McGraw Hill; Boylesttad, R.L. and Nashelsky, L. (1992),
Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory, Prentice Hall; Nelson et al.
(1995),Digital Logic Circuit Analysis and Design, 2nd edn, Prentice-
Hall.
Class Contact 60 hours of lectures, tutorials and laboratory work.
Assessment Laboratory report #1, 5%; Laboratory report #2, 5%;
Laboratory report #3 , 5%; Computer based assignment, 10%; Mid-
semester test, 10%; Tutorial presentation, 5%; three hour
examination, 60%.
VEM3000 EDA TOOLS AND DESIGN METHODOLOGY A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed second year.
Content EDA design flow environment. Tools integration. Back-end
IC design flow: analog artist environment, layout editor, Cadence
simulation and verification tools. Front-end IC design flow: design
complier, FPGA complier, place and rout tools. Embedded systems
design flow and development tools.
Required Reading Chang, H., Cooke, L., Hunt, M., Martin, G.,
McNelly, A. and Todd, L, 1999, Surviving the SOC Revolution – A
Guide to Platform-Based Design , Kluwer Academic.
Recommended Reading Birnbaum, M., ‘Essential Electronic
Design Automation (EDA)’, Published by Prentice Hall PTR, Series:
Prentice Hall Modern Semiconductor Design Series, 2003; Wayne,
W., ‘Modern VLSI Design: System-on-Chip Design, 3rd Edition’,
Published by Prentice Hall PTR, Series: Prentice Hall Modern
Semiconductor Design Series, 2002.
Class Contact 5 hours per week for one semester, comprising of
two hours lecture and three hours of laboratory work.
Assessment Laboratory Work: 70%; Assignment: 30%.
VEM4000 INTEGRATED CIRCUIT DESIGN B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEM3000 – EDA Tools and Design Methodology
Content Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems. Introduction to
silicon fabrication process. Design Methodology. Basic CMOS
integrated circuits design, including overview of MOS technology,
complex complementary CMOS design, static and dynamic design
techniques. Circuit protection and scaling. Students will develop
hands-on experience in design, simulation, verification and
implementation using industry standard EDA tools.
Required Reading Pucknell, D.A, and Eshraghain, K, 1994,
Basic VLSI Design system and Circuits, Prentice Hall.
Recommended Reading Haskard M.R, and May, I.C, 1990,
Analog VLSI Design NMOS and CMOS, Prentice Hall; Weste, N.
and Eshragian, K, 1993, Principle of CMOS VLSI Design, Addison
Wesley.
Class Contact 5 hours per week for one semester, comprising of
two hour lecture and three hours of laboratory and project work.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
255
Assessment Laboratory exercises: 20%; Project: 20%; Final
Examination: 60%.
VEM4100 ANALOG AND MIXED SIGNAL DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Analog in Second Year and VEM3000 EDA Tools
and Design Methodologies.
Content The design of CMOS analog and mixed-signal integrated
circuits is covered. Design concepts of high speed low power
amplifiers, filters, sample and hold circuits, comparators, digital to
analog and analog to digital converters are fully analysed. Students
will develop hands-on experience in design, simulation, verification
and implementation using industry standard EDA tools.
Required Reading Behzad Razavi, ‘Design of analog CMOS
integrated circuits’, McGraw hill International Edition, 2001.
Recommended Reading Paul R. Gray and Robert Meyer,
‘Analysis and design of Analog integrated circuits’, Fourth Edition,
John Wiley and sons 2001; R. Jacob Baker, ‘CMOS Mixed signal
circuit design’, IEEE press/Wiley inter-science, 2002.
Class Contact 2.5 hours per week for one semester, comprising of
one hour lecture and 1.5 hours of laboratory and project work.
Assessment Laboratory exercises: 20%; Project: 20%; Final
Examination: 60%.
VEM4200 ASIC DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed VEM3000 EDA Tools and Design
Methodologies
Content Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASIC)
introduction, ASIC VLSI design cycle, fundamental approaches and
design aspects, Full and Semi Custom design methodology, IBM
ASIC design flow – place & route, ESD failure, and ESD protection.
Required Reading Chinnery, D., Keutzer, K., Keutzer, K. W.,
‘Closing the Gap Between Asic & Custom: Tools and Techniques for
High-Performance Asic Design’, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2002.
Recommended Reading Smith, M., Sebastian J., ‘Excerpts of
chapters 10 and 11 from Application specific integrated circuits: an
introduction to VHDL and Verilog HDL’ Boston, Mass. : Addison-
Wesley, c2001; Nekoogar, F., ‘From ASICs to SOCs: A Practical
Approach’, Prentice Hall PTR; 1st edition, 2003; Horspool, N.,
Gorman, P., ASIC Handbook, The, Published by Prentice Hall PTR,
Series: Prentice Hall Modern Semiconductor Design Series, 2001.
Class Contact 2.5 hours per week for one semester, comprising of
one hour lecture and 1.5 hours of laboratory and project work.
Assessment Assignment: 20%; Project: 20%; Exam: 60%.
VEM4300 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed Second Year.
Content Overview of embedded systems. Embedded system design
cycle and system modelling. Embedded system hardware and
software. Real-time embedded system. Embedded system
specification and verification. Hardware/software co-design,
partitioning and tradeoffs. Embedded development tools. Analysis
and design methods using graphical notations eg. UML,
implementation considerations, testing strategies and construction of
test cases, software engineering environments and CASE tools.
Embedded system design and verification.
Required Reading Short, K., ‘Embedded System Design’,
Prentice Hall, 1996.
Recommended Reading Baron, C., Geffroy, J. and Motet, G.,
‘Embedded System Applications’, Kluwer, 1997; Heath, S.,
‘Embedded Systems Design’, Newnes Publishing, 1997.
Class Contact 2.5 hours per week for one semester, comprising of
one hour lecture and 1.5 hours of laboratory and project work.
Assessment Assignment: 20%; Project: 20%; Exam: 60%.
VEM4400 HIGH LEVEL SYNTHESIS – VERILOG
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed Second Year.
Content Role of HDL design. Top-down introduction to verilog.
Verilog for description of logic circuits. Verilog language constructs:
behavioural modelling, logic level modelling, concurrent process,
switch level modelling. Synthesis and timing. Test benches.
Required Reading Palnitkar, S., ‘Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital
Design and Synthesis’, IEEE 1364-2001 Compliant, Second Edition,
SunSoft Press, A Prentice Hall Title, 2003.
Recommended Reading Thomas, D. E., Moorby, P. R., ‘The
Verilog Hardware Description Language’, Kluwer Academic
Publishers; 5th Bk&Cdr edition, 2002.
Class Contact 2.5 hours per week for one semester, comprising of
one hour lecture and 1.5 hours of laboratory and project work.
Assessment Laboratory Exercises: 30%; Assignment: 10%; Exam:
60%.
VEM4500 VLSI DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed VEM4000 Integrated Circuit Design.
Content Overview of MOS and sub-micron technology, scaling
and signal integrity, IC design techniques. CMOS cell design:
device-level design constraints, gate design, pas transistor circuits,
sequential circuits, mask level design. Layout considerations, design
rules and mask level design. Circuit optimisation techniques. Timing
issues in VLSI circuit design. Design of VLSI system sub-systems:
Arithmetic and logic processing elements, adders, counters, I/Os,
buffers, data path design and layout, etc. Chip floor planning.
Design tradeoffs-cost, power and performance.
Required Reading Rabaey, J.M., 1996, Digital Integrated
Circuits – A Design Perspective, Prentice Hall.
Recommended Reading Haskard M.R, and May, I.C, 1990,
Analog VLSI Design NMOS and CMOS, Prentice Hall; Weste, N.
and Eshragian, K, 1993, Principle of CMOS VLSI Design, Addison
Wesley.
Class Contact 2.5 hours per week for one semester, comprising of
one hour lecture and 1.5 hours of laboratory and project work.
Assessment Laboratory exercises: 20%; Project: 20%; Final
Examination: 60%.
VEP3000 PHOTONICS A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completion of 2nd year of appropriate degree.
Content Lens systems: thick lens design using matrix methods.
Aberrations: spherical aberration, coma, astigmatism, field
curvature and distortion. Ray intercept plots. Methods for reducing
aberrations. Optical fibres: Overview of optical fibres and their
properties. Attenuation in silica optical fibres. Modes in slab
waveguides and optical fibres. Dispersion and distortion in optical
fibres. Light sources and detectors for optical fibre systems. Noise in
detector systems. Fibre optic communication system design. Optical
amplifiers, WDM systems, Bragg gratings. Fibre optic sensors.
Optical fibre fabrication. Emerging trends.
Required Reading Hecht, E., 2002, Optics, 4th edn, Addison
Wesley, USA; Palais, J.C. 2005, Fibre Optic Communications, 5th
edn, Prentice-Hall: N.J.
Recommended Reading Senior, J., 1992, Optical Fiber
Communications, Prentice Hall, London; Gowar, J., 1993, Optical
Communication Systems, Prentice Hall, London; Cheo, P., 1990,
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
256
Fibre Optics – Devices and Systems, Prentice Hall, NJ; Rogers, A.J.,
2001, Understanding Optical Fiber Communications, Artech House,
Boston.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Assignments conducted throughout the semester 20%;
Laboratory performance 20%; End of semester examination 60%.
VEP4000 PHOTONICS B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEP3000 Photonics A.
Content Lasers: Interaction of radiation with matter; absorption,
spontaneous emission and stimulated emission. Population inversion,
net gain. Introductory ideas of optical cavities, threshold. Time
behaviour of laser output, burst-mode and Q-switched pulses.
General requirements for CW output. Rate equations. Overview of
laser materials and pumping methods. Examples of lasers. Short
pulse and tunable laser techniques. Laser applications. Laser safety
and laser hazards.
Optical fibre waveguides and related devices: rigorous treatment of
Maxwell’s Equations for waveguides, boundary conditions and
eigenvalue equations, planar dielectric waveguides and their
modes, cylindrical dielectric waveguides and their modes, LP mode
description, Gaussian approximation, dispersion in multimode and
single mode fibres, normal mode theory of single mode fibre
couplers. Design and operation of communication systems including
those using dense wavelength division multiplexing.
Optical Fibre Sensors: Introduction and basic concepts, materials
interactions in optical fibre sensors, fibre optic components, special
optical fibres for sensors, interferometric sensors, fibre-optic
gyroscope, intensity and wavelength-based sensors, multiplexed and
distributed sensors, applications of fibre sensors, e.g. smart
structures.
Required Reading Verdeyen, J.T. 1995, Laser Electronics, 3rd
edn, Prentice-Hall International, USA; Buck, J. A., 1995,
Fundamentals of Optical Fibres, John Wiley & Sons, New York.
Recommended Reading Koechner, W. 1995, Solid State Laser
Engineering, Springer-Verlag; Snyder, A.W. and Love, J. D., 1983,
Optical Waveguide Theory, Chapman & Hall, London; Jones, W.
B., 1988, Introduction to Optical Fiber Communication Systems,
Holt Rinehart and Winston, New York; Senior, J. M., 1992, Optical
Fiber Communications: Principles and Practice, Prentice Hall, NJ.
Digonnet, M.J.F., 2001, Rare-Earth-Doped Fiber Lasers and
Amplifiers, 2nd ed., rev. and expanded, Marcel Dekker, New York;
Othonos, A. and Kalli, K., 1999, Fiber Bragg Gratings:
Fundamentals and Applications in Telecommunications and Sensing,
Artech House, Boston; Powers, J., 1997, An Introduction to Fiber
Optic Systems 2nd edn, Irwin, Chicago; Grattan, K.T.V. and
Meggitt, B.T., 1994-2000, Optical Fiber Sensor Technology vols 1-
5,: Chapman & Hall & Kluwer Academic, London & Dordrecht.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Assignments conducted throughout the semester 20%;
Laboratory performance 20%; End of semester examination 60%.
VES3000 DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHM ANALYSIS A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed Second Year.
Content Data Abstraction; Storage Structures; Collection Classes;
Arrays; Linked lists; Iterators; Stacks, Queues, Recursion; Priority
Queues; Trees; Heaps; Sorting algorithms; Searching algorithms;
Tables; Hashing; File processing.
Required Reading Goodrich, M. and Tamissia, R., 2004, Data
Structures and Algorithms in C, Wiley.
Recommended Reading Dietel, H.M. and Dietel, P.J., 1994,
C++ How to Program, 2nd edn, Adison Wesley. Kruse, R.L., Leung,
B.P. and Tondo, C.L., 1991, Data Structures and Program Design in
C, Prentice Hall. Friedman, F.L. and Koffman, E.B., 1994, Problem
Solving, Abstraction and Design Using C++, Addison Wesley.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Class tests conducted throughout the semester 20%;
Laboratory/team project 20%; End of semester, open book
examination 60%.
VES4000 PROGRAMMING TOOLS AND COMPILERS B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed Second Year.
Content Programming tools. Language structures. Lexical analysis.
Syntax analysis. Code generation and optimisation. Compiler
construction tools. LALR.
A team project is undertaken to reinforce the principles taught in
lectures.
Required Reading Aho, A.V., Sethi, R. and Ullman, J.D. 1986,
Compilers: Principles, Techniques, and Tools, Addison Wesley.
Recommended Reading Aho, A.V., Sethi, R. and Ullman, J.D.
1986, Compilers: Principles, Techniques, and Tools, Addison
Wesley.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Class tests conducted throughout the semester 20%;
Laboratory/team project 20%; End of semester, open book
examination 60%.
VES4100 COMPUTER SYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed Second Year.
Content Processes: thread, process synchronisation, distributed
co-ordination, dead locks,File systems : implemenation, distributed
file systems.Computer protection , worm, virus and
secruity.Advanced unix system programming.
Required Reading Silberschatz., Operating Concepts 6th Edition
2003.
Recommended Reading Silberschatz, A. and Galvin, P.B.
1994, Operating Systems Concepts, Addison Wesley. Mullender,
S. 1989, Distributed Systems, ACM Press. Bach, M.J. 1986, The
Design of the Unix Operating Systems, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Class tests conducted throughout the semester 20%;
Laboratory/team project 20%; End of semester, open book
examination 60%.
VES4200 NETWORK SOFTWARE AND MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed Second Year.
Content Local Area Networks (LAN). Access methods: CSMA, ring,
bus. Network operating systems: their structure, configuration and
network management. Protocol layering. Concept of open systems.
OSI and TCP/IP. Network security. Wide area networks (WAN).
Internetworking. TCP Routing. Client Server model. DNS. Network
Simulation Tools.
Required Reading Forouzan, B., 2002, TCP/IP Protocol Suite,
2nd edn, McGraw Hill; Tanenbaum, A. S., 2004, Computer
Networks, Pren. Hall.
Recommended Reading Stevens, W.R. 1993, TCP/IP
Illustrated, Vol 1: The Protocols, Addison Wesley. Halsall, F. 1996,
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
257
Data Communications, Computer Networks and Open Systems, 4th
edn, Addson Wesley.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Class tests conducted throughout the semester 20%;
Laboratory/team project 20%; End of semester, open book
examination 60%.
VES4300 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed Second Year.
Content Introduction to the engineering of quality software. The
software development lifecycle model. System analysis, software
requirements definition, specification, elicitation, analysis and
modelling. Process specifications and data dictionary production.
Software design process, principles and production. User interface
design, information presentation and evaluation. The testing
process, planning and strategies.Comparison of analysis and design
techniques. Software reliability and reuse. Verification and
validation. CASE tools and software engineering environments.
Software project planning and estimating. A team project is
undertaken to reinforce the principles taught in lectures.
Introduction to requirements
Required Reading Schach, S.R.,2002, Object Oriented and
Classical Software Engineering, 5th edn, McGraw.
Recommended Reading Booch, G., Rumbaugh, J., Jacobson, I.,
1999, The Unified Modeling Language User Guide, Addison
Wesley.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Class tests conducted throughout the semester 20%;
Laboratory/team project 20%; End of semester, open book
examination 60%.
VET3000 TELECOMMUNICATION A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEG2002 Introduction to Engineering Systems.
Content Baseband digital signalings: NRZ, RZ, AMI, Manchester
Code, PCM, DM. Continuous-wave (CW) signaling: DSB, SSB, FM.
Autocorrelation, Cross-correlation, Power spectral density, Wiener-
Kinchine theorem, Spectral analysis of random communication
signals. Gaussian noise: Probability density function, Effect of
filtering on noise, Signal to noise ratio (S/N), Bit error rate
calculations. Transmission line theory. Wave equations. Reflection
coefficient. Characteristic impedance. Line properties. VSWR.
Crosstalk, Optical fibre, Coaxial cables, Antenna systems, Free
space propagation.
Required Reading Lathi, B.P. Modern Digital and Analog
Communication Systems, 3rd Edition, 2001, Oxford University
Press; Cheng, D.K. Field and Wave Electromagnetics, 2nd Edition,
1999, Addison Wesley.
Recommended Reading Freeman, R.L. 1991,
Telecommunication Transmission Handbook, John Wiley. Jordan,
E.C. and Balmain, K.G. 1985, Electromagnetic Waves and
Radiating Systems, Prentice Hall. Carlson, A.B. 1990,
Communication Systems, McGraw-Hill. Carlson, A.B., 2002,
Communication Systems, McGraw-Hill. Lathi, B.P. 1989, Modern
Digital and Analog Communication Systems, Holt Rhinehart and
Winston.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lecture/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory works.
Assessment Laboratory reports, assignments and class test
conducted throughout the semester 30%; End of semester, closed
book examination 70%.
VET4000 TELECOMMUNICATION B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VET3000 Telecommunication A.
Content Baseband modem techniques: Nyquist signaling, Eye-
diagram, Intersymbol interference (ISI), Zero-forcing equalizer, Echo
cancellation, Error control coding: Linear block code, Convolutional
code, Decoding strategies, Generator matrix, Viterbi decoding
algorithm, Performance valuation, Data compression coding:
Huffmann code, Lempel-Zev algorithm. MP3 coding scheme.
Data network topology: Point-to-point and Multi-point networks,
Network access control methods: ALOHA, Slotted ALOHA, CSMA,
Token ring, Token bus, FDDI, Wireless LAN, X25, Routing
algorithms, ATM switches, Delay models in data networks., M/M/1
queue, Data network design principles.
Required Reading Lathi, B.P. Modern Digital and Analog
Communication Systems, 3rd edition, 2001, Oxford University
Press; Haykin, S. Communication Systems, 4th Edition, 2001, John
Wiley & Sons; Forouzan, A.B. TCP/IP Protocol Suite, 2003,
McGraw-Hill; Spohn, D.L. Data Network Design, 2002, McGraw-
Hill.
Recommended Reading Carlson, A.B., 2002, Communication
Systems, 4th edn, McGraw Hill. Proakis, J.G., 1989, Digital
Communications, McGraw Hill. Warland, J., 1998, Communication
Networks, McGraw Hill. Tanenbaum, A.S., 1996, Computer
Networks, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact 60 hours per semester comprising 48 hours of
lecture/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory works.
Assessment Laboratory reports, assignments and class test
conducted throughout the semester 30%; End of semester, closed
book examination 70%.
VET4100 COMPUTER COMMUNICATIONS 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Layered structure of computer communication protocols.
ISO OSI 7 layer model and TCP/IP protocol suit. LANs. Ethernet.
WANs. PPP. X..25. Frame relay. ATM. Network connecting
devices. Repeaters, hubs, bridges, routers, and gateways. IP and IP
addressing. Subnetting and supernetting. Routing protocols. ARP
and RARP. ICMP and IGMP. Transport layer protocols. UDP and
TCP. Flow control, error control, and congestion control in TCP.
Required Reading Forouzan, B.A., ‘TCP/IP Protocol Suite’,
McGraw Hill, 2003.
Recommended Reading Cisco Networking Academy Program
CCNA 1 and 2 Companion Guide, Cisco Press, 2003.
Class Contact 30 hours per semester comprising 24 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 6 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Class tests conducted throughout the semester 20%;
Laboratory performance 20%; End of semester, open book
examination 60%.
VET4200 COMPUTER COMMUNICATIONS 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VET4100 Computer Communications 1.
Content Routing protocols. RIP, OSPF, and BGP. Multicast routing.
Application layer. Concurrent clients and servers. BOOTP and
DHCP. Domain name system. Telnet and Rlogin. Network virtual
terminal. Socket interface. FTP and TFTP. SMTP. SNMP. HTTP.
WWW.
Required Reading Forouzan, B.A., ‘TCP/IP Protocol Suite’,
McGraw Hill, 2003.
Recommended Reading Cisco Networking Academy Program
CCNA 1 and 2 Companion Guide, Cisco Press, 2003.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
258
Class Contact 30 hours per semester comprising 24 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 6 hours of laboratory.
Assessment Class tests conducted throughout the semester 20%;
Laboratory performance 20%; End of semester, open book
examination 60%.
VET4300 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VET3000 Telecommunication A.
Content Overview of Digital modulations: QPSK, OQPSK, DQPSK,
MSK, GMSK, QAM. Vector space representation of digital signals,
Correlation receiver, Matched filter receiver, Karhunen-Loeve
representation of noise, Maximum likelihood sequence estimation
(MLSE) detector, Performance in AWGN channels, Trellis coded
modulation. Modem techniques: Classic PLL, Maximum likelihood
carrier phase estimation, Maximum likelihood timing recovery,
Adaptive equalization and echo cancellations, LMS equalization,
DEF equalization.
Required Reading Haykin, S. Communication Systems, 4th
Edition, 2001, John Wiley & Sons; Kurzweil, J, An Introduction to
Digital Communications, 2000, John Wiley & Sons.
Recommended Reading Kurzweil, J, 2000, An Introduction to
Digital Communications, John Wiley. Haykin, S., 2001,
Communication Systems, 4th edition, John Wiley.
Class Contact 36 hours per semester comprising 24 hours of
lecture/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory works.
Assessment Assignments and class test conducted throughout the
semester 30%; End of semester, closed book examination 70%.
VET4400 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING IN TELECOMMUNICATIONS 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEG4100 Digital Signal Processing A.
Content Multi-rate signal processing: decimation and interpolation.
Applications. Multistage implementation. DSP building blocks:
multibank filter, correlators and matched filters.
Oscillators and phase locked loops. Non-linear DSP. Applications of
DFT/FFT. Fast convolution and correlation. Deconvolution. Spectral
analysis. Adaptive DSP and its applications. DSP implementation:
hardware. Mini-projects.
Required Reading Ifeachor, E.C., Jerwis, B.W. Digital Signal
Processing – A Practical Approach, 2nd Edition, 2002, Pearson
Prentice Hall.
Recommended Reading Mulgrew, B., Grant, P. and Thompson,
J., Digital signal processing : concepts and applications,
Basingstoke : Palgrave, 2002, 2nd edn.
Class Contact 36 hours per semester comprising 24 hours of
lecture/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory works.
Assessment Assignments and class test conducted throughout the
semester 30%; End of semester, closed book examination 70%.
VET4500 SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VET3000 Telecommunication A.
Content Satellite orbits: Kelper’s laws, Orbital elements, NASA
two-line orbital element specifications, Low-earth-orbit (LEO),
Geostationary orbit, Perifocal co-ordinate, Geocentric-equatorial
co-ordinate, Topocentric-horizon co-ordinate systems, Subsatellite
point.
Satellite communication engineering: Intelsat, Direct broadcast
system (DBS), Frequency allocation, Antenna look-angle and
polarization alignment angle determination, Rain attenuation,
Transponders, EIRP, Saturation flux, System noise calculation, C/N,
C/No, Fade margins, Link budget for satellite communication,
Single access, Multi-access and Demand assigned access
techniques, FDMA, TDMA, CDMA. System performance.
Required Reading Roddy, D. Satellite Communications, 3rd
Edition, 2001, McGraw-Hill; Kolawole, M, Satellite Communication
Engineering, 2002, Marcel Dekker.
Recommended Reading Network Designers Guide, 1990,
Aussat. Satellite Systems Design, 1985, Telesat (Canada). Feher, K.
Digital Communication – Satellite/Earth Station Engineering,
1984,Prentice Hall
Class Contact 36 hours per semester comprising 24 hours of
lecture/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory works.
Assessment Assignments and class test conducted throughout the
semester 30%; End of semester, closed book examination 70%.
VET4600 WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VET3000 Telecommunication A.
Content Free space propagation, Reflection, Mean path loss, Local
propagation loss, Rayleigh fading, Rician fading. Time selective
channel, Frequency selective channel, Power delay profile, Coherent
bandwidth, Channel estimation and tracking methods.
Receiver diversity: Selective combining, Maximal-ratio combining,
Equal gain combining. Transmitter diversity: Space time coded
modulations, MIMO systems, Space division multiple access.
CDMA: Direct sequence modulation, Gold Codes, Walsh-
Hadamard sequence, RAKE receiver, Near-far problem, Power
control, WCDMA, OFDM.
Required Reading Haykin, S., Moher, M. Modern Wireless
Communications, 2004, Pearson Prentice Hall; Rappaport, T.
Wireless Communications, Principles and Practice, 2nd Edition,
2002, Prentice Hall.
Recommended Reading Parsons and Gardiner, Mobile
Communication Systems, 1999, Blackie; Lee, W.C.Y., Mobile
Communications Engineering, 1998, McGraw Hill.
Class Contact 36 hours per semester comprising 24 hours of
lecture/tutorial and 12 hours of laboratory works.
Assessment Assignments and class test conducted throughout the
semester 30%; End of semester, closed book examination 70%.
VET4700 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND NETWORK DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEG2002 Introduction to Engineering Systems 2.
Content Design methodologies: Project definition, scoping,
feasibility study, market analysis, business analysis, requirement
analysis, system specifications, preliminary design, choice of
technologies, detailed design, testing and commissioning,
maintenance considerations.
Design practice: Under guidance carry out a feasibility study an
design of a typical communication system/network.
Design Standards: Introduction to various international and national
design standards
Presentation: Oral and written presentation of the study and design
in a manner expected in industry.
Required Reading N.N. Truyen, ‘Introduction to Communication
System and Network Design’, 2003. Lecture Notes.
Recommended Reading Long, C., ‘IP Network Design’ 2001.
Osborne/McGraw-Hill; Spohn, D.L., ‘Data Network Design’, 1993,
McGraw-Hill.
Class Contact 30 hours per semester comprising 15 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 15 hours of practical design workshop.
Assessment Design assignments: 80%, Mid-semester test: 20%.
UNDERGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
259
VET4800 MULTIMEDIA AND IP-BASED NETWORKS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEG2002 Introduction to Engineering Systems 2.
Content Internet Protocol-based networks: TCP/IP protocol suite. IP-
based network components. IP traffic. Multimedia Networks:
Integration of voice, data and video. Latency. Quality of Service.
Voice over IP: VoIP technologies. IP signalling protocols. VPN:
Virtual private networks. VPN protocols. Tunnelling. VPN
implementation.
Required Reading Davidson, J. and Peters, J.,’Voice over IP
Fundamentals’, 2000. Cisco Press.
Recommended Reading Long, C., ‘IP Network Design’ 2001.
Osborne/McGraw-Hill; Quiggle, A., ‘Implementing Cisco VPNs’,
2001, McGraw-Hill; Spohn, D.L., ‘Data Network Design’, 1993,
McGraw-Hill.
Class Contact 30 hours per semester comprising 24 hours of
lectures/tutorial and 6 hours of practical work.
Assessment Semester Examination 70%; Mid-semester test: 20%,
Assignment 10%.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
260
261
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
COURSES OFFERED
The Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science offers postgraduate
courses leading to the award of:
• Master’s Qualifying Program;
• Master of Engineering and Science; and
• Doctor of Engineering Science.
MASTER’S QUALIFYING PROGRAM
Course Code: ENMQ
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science Masters Qualifying
Program is designed to facilitate entry to coursework masters
degrees for a wide range of students who lack the formal
qualifications or experience for direct entry into the master by
coursework degree of their choice. Note that the program:
• Does not lead to a formal qualification of the faculty;
• Is suitable for a wide range of students with varying entry
qualifications;
• Is designed to prepare students for the full range of masters
degrees by coursework available in the faculty;
• Has flexible entry points;
• Will be individually designed for each student;
• Can have varying lengths;
• Satisfactory completion of the program will enable a student to
enter directly in to the masters course for which the qualifying
program has been designed.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A wide range of selection criteria will be applied to this program to
cater for the range of prior qualifications and experiences.
For International students a minimum IELTS score of 6.5 is required
for entry into the program.
In exceptional cases a student may be considered for admission
with an IELTS score of 6.0. In these cases the program advisor will
take special care to ensure that the student is meeting the English
language demands of the program and, if necessary, arrange for
special assistance from appropriate sources within the university.
COURSE STRUCTURE
As indicated above, the Masters Qualifying Program is individually
structured for each student undertaking the program. Upon
acceptance into the program each student will be assigned a
program advisor who will, with the student, work out in which areas
the student requires further study and develop a program to meet
those needs. This will generally comprise a selection of
undergraduate and/or postgraduate subjects in the general area of
their preferred Masters degree but may also include English
language and research method instruction.
The length of the program will vary from student to student and may
take one, two or three semesters depending on the ‘gap’ between
the student’s prior experiences and qualifications and the masters
course they are seeking to enter.
MASTER OF ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE,
AND DOCTOR OF ENGINEERING SCIENCE
Course Code: EPES
COURSE OBJECTIVES
Candidates who elect to take the Masters qualification will develop
a detailed understanding of current trends and approaches to
practical problem solving in their professional area. Successful
completion of the course will equip them with the ability to engage
in directed research projects in their industry and to continue to
develop appropriate skills in this area.
Candidates who proceed to the Doctoral level will develop the
ability to apply the work covered at the Masters level to the practical
solution of specific problems of industrial significance. Successful
completion of the course will give them the skills and experience to
act as independent researchers or group leaders for investigations
or practical importance in their professional area over the period of
their professional life.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit Semester
Points Hours
VDS8100 Foundations of Knowledge in
Engineering & Science 16 36
VDS8110 Strategy and Innovation in
Engineering & Science 16 36
VDS8120 Project and Performance
Management 16 36
VDS8200 Professional Studies 1 in
Engineering & Science 16 36
VDS8210 Professional Studies 2 in
Engineering & Science 16 36
VDS8220 Research Proposal Preparation
& Writing 16 36
and
VDS8300 EngScD Dissertation 192
or
VDS8310 Research Project A, and 96
VDS8315 Research Project B 96
or
VDS8320 Research Paper A, and 48
VDS8325 Research Paper B, and 48
VDS8316 Research Project C 96
Total Course Credit Points 288
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
262
ASSESSMENT
Coursework component
Assessmend will be a mixture of examination, minor project,
seminar presentation and peer assessment appropriate to the
learning objective of each subject and the course in general. The
subject presenter will be responsible for the mode of assessment for
individual subjects. Assessments will be moderated by an external
panel to ensure that consistently high levels of attainment are
achieved by all successful students.
The coursework component will include exercises and required work
embedded in the coursework component that will allow potential
Masters students to be assessed for possible Doctoral level.
RESEARCH COMPONENT
Assessment will be by means of professionally presented thesis or
industry report. The final thesis or report will be examined by
independent examiners external to the University and the
candidate’s industry. Examiners will be asked to comment on
students ability to:
(i) articulate a problem of significance;
(ii) develop a project design appropriate to the investigation of the
problem;
(iii) select an appropriate method or methods to investigate the
problem;
(iv) transform the data into a form appropriate for analysis;
(v) analyse the data and draw conclusions consistent with the
findings that contribute to the answering of the research
question; and
(vi) present the work in such a format that it makes an original and
significant contribution to knowledge in the candidate’s field.
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
263
CENTRE FOR ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY
AND RISK ENGINEERING
COURSES OFFERED
The Centre for Environmental Safety and Risk Engineering offers
postgraduate courses leading to the award of:
• Doctor of Philosophy;
• Master of Engineering (Research);
• Master of Engineering in Building Fire Safety and Risk
Engineering (Coursework);
• Graduate Diploma in Building Fire Safety and Risk Engineering;
• Graduate Certificate in Performance-Based Building and Fire
Codes.
INTERNATIONAL PROGRAMS
• Master of Engineering in Building Fire Safety and Risk
Engineering (Coursework);
• Graduate Diploma in Building Fire Safety and Risk Engineering.
FOCUS
The Centre for Environmental Safety and Risk Engineering was
established as the inaugural University Centre in July 1991 to
undertake multi-disciplinary research and graduate programs. The
mission of the Centre is to provide national and international
leadership for the conduct of studies which will lead to the
implementation of efficient designs for hazardous infrastructure
facilities and to ensure that the impact on people, property and the
environment is minimised to acceptable levels.
Example of hazards which are and will be investigated by the
Centre include:
• fire in Buildings;
• hazardous industrial complexes: fire, explosion, and release of
hazardous substances;
• transport of and storage of hazardous goods.
The work of the Centre in building fire safety and protection systems
is internationally recognised.
The Centre undertakes the following multi-disciplinary activities:
• applied research;
• specialist consulting;
• research at PhD and Masters levels;
• Graduate Diploma course;
• Masters by Coursework and Minor Thesis;
• Graduate Certificate course;
• short courses, seminars and workshops.
CURRENT RESEARCH
Research by the Centre into building fire safety and protection is
conducted in a number of areas:
• system modelling and risk assessment (core research);
• fire growth and spread/smoke spread;
• response of building subsystems to fire;
• human behaviour in fire;
• building fire safety systems analysis;
• decision-support for emergency management;
• risk communication.
RECENT RESEARCH GRANTS
The Centre for Environmental Safety and Risk Engineering (CESARE),
Victoria University, in conjunction with the University of Technology,
Sydney, initially received a major Australian Research Grant
(1991/93) to construct an Experimental Building – Fire Facility. This
grant was supplemented by substantial additional ARC Infrastructure
Grants to CESARE to further develop the Facility. These grants were
complemented by extensive design, supervision, technical and
material input from key organisations involved in the fire safety and
protection industry. The value of the original Facility was some
$1.5m. In late 2001, the Centre received a $2,000,000 Systemic
Infrastructure Initiative Grant from the Federal Government to build a
large scale experimental building–fire facility over the top of the
existing facility. This is a step in developing the facility into a major
national and international focus for research on fire. A further
$875,000 was provided by Victoria University and collaborative
partners – SSL/CSIRO, CFA, BHPSteel and OneSteel. This new
facility was completed in 2004.
The Centre has been very successful in attracting research funds
from various bodies, including competitive Australian Research
Council (ARC) Grants. Grants obtained include: ARC Large Grants,
ARC Collaborative Research Grant (with BHP and the National
Association of Forest Industries, NAFI), ARC Infrastructure Grant,
industry grants, contracts and scholarships (for example, from BHP
and NAFI), research contracts from the National Fire Laboratory,
National Research Council of Canada (on behalf of the Department
of National Defence, Canada, and Public Works Canada), research
grants from the Defence, Science and Technology Organisation
(DSTO), and a research grant from the National Fire Protection
Association of the United States (NFPA). The annual research budget
for the Centre is some $1million.
In 1999 the Centre obtained an Australian Research Council
Research Equipment and Facilities Infrastructure Grant to install a
new Fire Research Furnace. The furnace is used to conduct research
on the performance of elements of construction under fire conditions.
The furnace is located at the Centre’s new laboratory and office
complex at the Werribee Campus. A second, larger furnace in a
new building (both donated by BHP Billiton) were installed in early
2002. A cone calorimeter has also been installed at the Werribee
Campus.
EXPERIMENTAL BUILDING – FIRE FACILITY
An Experimental Building – Fire Facility is used to conduct real fire
experiments in realistic prototype buildings. Extensive
instrumentation is used to record the growth and spread of fires and
the effects of fire in the Facility.
The results from these experiments are used to develop and validate
advanced computer models for predicting fire growth and spread in
buildings, the response of building subsystems to fire, and human
behaviour during fire emergencies.
The $1.5m Facility contains a large versatile building based on a
steel frame and composite concrete floor-slab structure, a service
core containing stair, life and air handling shafts, together with
associated services including sprinklers.
The open structure and high inter-floor space permits fitouts of a
wide variety of prototype building occupancies and construction
types.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
264
In late 2001, the Centre received a $2 million Systemic
Infrastructure Initiative Grant from the Federal Government to build a
large scale experimental building–fire facility over the top of the
existing facility. This is a step in developing the facility into a major
national and international focus for research on fire. This new
facility was completed in 2004.
A separate building provides storage, office instrumentation and
workshop facilities.
The Facility is located at the Country Fire Authority Training Wing at
Fiskville, some 90km west of Melbourne.
COLLABORATION WITH INDUSTRY
The Centre undertakes collaborative research and development
projects with key industry and government organisations, including:
• BHPSteel;
• CSIRO;
• Bluescope;
• Bluescope Lysaght;
• Boral.
For example, the Centre was the major research provider to the Fire
Code Reform Centre Ltd (FCRC) that was undertaking a multi-million
dollar reform program of Australian building and fire codes. FCRC
was established with funding provided by Australian Governments,
via the Australian Building Codes Board, and industry. The Centre
now provides research direct to the Australian Building Codes
Board.
The Centre undertakes collaborative research and development
projects, and promotes the practice of fire safety engineering by
technology transfer programs via workshops and short courses. The
Centre provides a forum where industry and government
organisations can interact with the University.
For example, the Centre in conjunction with the Building Control
Commission, Victoria introduced a new Graduate Certificate in
Performance-Based Building and Fire Codes to support the
introduction of the Performance-based Building Code of Australia.
In 1999 the BHP Fire and Construction Research Unit, with five staff,
relocated to the Werribee Campus and is now part of the Centre for
Environmental Safety and Risk Engineering.
RESEARCH DEGREES
Masters by Research and Doctor of Philosophy degree programs are
available. A wide variety of challenging research projects can be
undertaken, including projects of a multi-disciplinary nature.
Entry to these awards is available to applicants who have achieved
high honours results in their undergraduate course. Initial enquiries
regarding research areas should be directed to the Centre on
telephone (03) 9919 8027.
ACADEMIC PROGRESSION GUIDELINES AND UNSATISFACTORY
PROGRESS
Normal progress through a course requires a student to complete
any defined course year within one year of equivalent full-time
enrolment. When all subjects in a course year are passed, a stage
grading of ‘year completed’ may be given.
Any of the following may be considered to constitute unsatisfactory
progress by a student:
• failure in any subject or unit for the second time;
• failure to complete the course within any maximum period
defined by University Statute;
• failure to meet a conditional enrolment agreement.
As otherwise defined by University Statute, and subject to being
invited to show cause, a student making unsatisfactory progress will
normally be recommend for exclusion from the course.
GRADUATE CERTIFICATE IN PERFORMANCE-
BASED BUILDING AND FIRE CODES
Course Code: ETQB
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course aims to enable building surveyors and other allied
professions to:
• make professional use of performance-based building codes;
• introduce the concepts and alternative acceptable frameworks
for performance-based codes, with particular, but not exclusive,
emphasis given to fire safety engineering design;
• provide appropriate knowledge and skills necessary for the
assessment and application of performance-based and fire
codes;
• develop a professional approach to performance-based codes
and a recognition of when to assess designs which are within a
persons field of expertise and when to refer designs onto a
more appropriately qualified assessor;
• develop an appreciation of the legal, statutory and design
integrity requirements and the need for compliance of the
design assumptions throughout the operational life of the
building.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course an applicant must have
successfully completed a diploma in Building Surveying or an
equivalent qualification and at least two years of relevant
professional experience.
Candidates with other academic qualifications can be admitted to
the course provided they can demonstrate an equivalent
combination of additional relevant professional experience and
qualification.
A letter of recommendation and an interview may be required.
Graduates of the course may be offered advanced standing in the
Graduate Diploma in Building Fire Safety and Risk Engineering.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered on a part-time basis over one year, and is
offered in block modules (four blocks of four days, spread
throughout the year). Students must complete 60 credit points. The
maximum time period in which to complete the course is three years.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Semester Points
VQB5611 Risk assessment and Human
Behaviour 1 12
VQB5621 Fire Growth, Detection
and Extinguishment 1 12
VQB5632 Smoke & Fire Spread, Safety
System Design 2 12
VQB5642 Performance Codes Methodology
and Structure 2 12
Total 48
ASSESSMENT
Assessment is by a combination of assignments and examination.
Distribution of marks among each aspect of assessment is
determined individually for each subject.
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
265
Guidelines on the use of electronic calculators and other electronic
storage devices in examinations are provided in individual subject
outlines distributed to students within the first two weeks of semester
and included on final examination papers.
Electronic calculators and other electronic storage devices will not
be permitted where the above provisions have not been met.
GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN BUILDING FIRE
SAFETY AND RISK ENGINEERING
Course Code: EGQB
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course aims to produce professionals who are familiar with fire
science and technology fundamentals, who can apply rational
engineering principles and techniques to identify cost-effective fire
safety system designs for buildings, and will be familiar with the
content and application of fire engineering design codes.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course an applicant must have
successfully completed a degree in engineering or a degree in
science or building surveying.
A corresponding diploma having equivalent content of the relevant
technical subjects will also be considered.
Relevant industrial experience is required.
Applicants must either have previously studied, or demonstrated a
sound basic knowledge of the following topics: fluid dynamics, heat
transfer, properties of materials and structural behaviour. Bridging
subjects may be required to overcome any inadequacies.
A letter of recommendation and an interview may be required.
Provision will be made to enrol a limited number of students in the
course who do not fully meet the required admission standards, but
who have extensive relevant experience and demonstrated aptitude
for high achievement. An interview will be required in this case.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered on a part-time basis and in block modules over
two years. Students must complete 120 credit points. The maximum
time period to complete the course is six years.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Semester Points
Year 1
VQB5611 Risk assessment & Human
Behaviour 1 12
VQB5621 Fire Growth, Detection &
Extinguishment 1 12
VQB5632 Smoke & Fire Spread, Safety
System Design 2 12
VQB5642 Performance Codes Methodology
and Structure 2 12
Year 2
VQB5751 Fire Technology Modelling 1 12
VQB5761 Fire Safety Systems Modelling 1 12
VQB5772 Fire Safety System Design 2 12
VQB5782 Fire Spread & Fire Safety System
Design Project 2 12
Total 96
ASSESSMENT
Assessment is by a combination of written projects, assignments,
submissions, laboratory work and oral presentation. Distribution of
marks among each aspect of assessment is determined individually
for each subject.
Guidelines on the use of electronic calculators and other electronic
storage devices in examinations are provided in individual subject
outlines distributed to students within the first two weeks of semester
and included on final examination papers.
Electronic calculators and other electronic storage devices will not
be permitted where the above provisions have not been made.
MASTER OF ENGINEERING IN BUILDING
FIRE SAFETY AND RISK ENGINEERING
(COURSEWORK)
Course Code: EMQB
The course provides opportunities for professional people to develop
advanced technical skills in a specialist discipline; develop their
understanding of legislation and management relevant to their
employment; develop ability to plan co-ordinate and complete
complex projects; apply and extend research and reporting skills
and gain specialist knowledge of a topic relevant to their
employment.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course applicants are expected to
have completed a Graduate Diploma in Building Fire Safety and
Risk Engineering with honours average.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over four years on a part-time basis or its full-
time equivalent. Students must complete 192 points. Eight approved
subjects of twelve credit points, each from the Graduate Diploma in
Building Fire Safety and Risk Engineering, Industrial Experience of
forty eight credit points, and a minor thesis/project of forty eight
credit points for one semester or twenty four credit points for two
semesters.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Points Hours
Year 1
Semester One
VQB5611 Risk Assessment and Human
Behaviour 12 39
VQB5621 Fire Growth, Detection and
Extinguishment 12 39
Semester Two
VQB5632 Smoke and Fire Spread, Fire
Safety System Design 12 39
VQB5642 Performance Codes Methodology
and Structure 12 39
Year 2
Semester One
VQT5790 Industrial Experience-full-time
(over one semester) 48 156
or
VQT5791 Industrial Experience-part-time
(per semester for two semesters) 24
Year 3
Semester One
VQB5751 Fire Technology Modelling 12 39
VQB5761 Fire Safety Systems Modelling 12 39
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
266
Semester Two
VQB5772 Fire Safety System Design 12 39
VQB5782 Fire Spread and Fire Safety
System Design Project 12 39
Year 4
VQT6050 Building Fire Research-full-time 48 156
(over one semester) or
VQT6060 Building Fire Research-part-time 24
(per semester for two semesters)
ASSESSMENT
Assessment is by a combination of written projects, assignments,
submissions, laboratory work and oral presentations and by the
satisfactory completion of a thesis. Distribution of marks for each
aspect of the assessment is determined individually for each subject.
Guidelines on the use of electronic calculators and other electronic
storage devices in examinations are provided in individual subject
outlines distributed to students within the first two weeks of semester
and included on final examination papers.
Electronic calculators and other electronic storage devices will not
be permitted where the above provisions have not been made.
MASTERS (BY RESEARCH)
Course Code: ERIT, EROT
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY
Course Code: EPHC, EPLC, EPOT
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Semester Points
VQT8001 Full Time 1 48
VQT8002 Full Time 2 48
VQT8011 Part Time 1 24
VQT8012 Part Time 2 24
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
267
CENTRE FOR TELECOMMUNICATION
AND MICRO-ELECTRONICS
The Centre for Telecommunication and Micro-Electronics was
established within the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science
(FoHES) at Victoria University in late 2001. The Centre aims to
provide excellence in research and development in telecom-
munication, micro/nanoelectronics and micro-technologies, ,
particularly through the strong partnerships it has established with
Government, industry and research centres both nationally and
internationally. The major objective of the Centre is to create
technologies that are required for future wireless telecommunication
services and micro/nanoelectronic systems. The Centre pride itself in
selecting research projects that benefit industry as well as being
academically challenging.
AFFILIATIONS
• Australian Telecommunication Co-operative Research Centre;
• Chipskills Project;
• Australian Communications Research Network (ACORN);
• Australian Nanotechnology Network (ANN);
• National Networked Tele Test Facility for Integrated Systems.
AREAS OF RESEARCH
Mobile Communication and Signal Processing.
SYSTEM CONSIDERATION
• capacity enhancement adaptive (smart) antennas;
• air interface.
PROPAGATION MEASUREMENT AND MODELING
• wideband and ultra wide bank channel sounding;
• multiple input multiple output (MIMO).
ALGORITHM DEVELOPMENT FOR HIGH CAPACITY MODULATION
SCHEMES
• OFDM networks and W-CDMA networks;
• MIMO and Space-Time Coding;
• synchronisation, channel estimation.
WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY
• software radio;
• radio terminal design issues;
• base station design issues;
• linearization.
MICRO/NANOELECTRONIC CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS
• advanced digital design and ASIC;
• analog and mixed signal design;
• algorithms for wireless systems;
• low power and reconfigurable systems;
• RF and RF-MEMS circuits;
• smart sensor nodes and network;
• system-on-a-chip (SOC);
• integrated circuit and systems testing;
• DFT;
• MACH-D Testing, Validation and Characterisation.
COLLABORATIVE LINKS
AUSTRALIAN TELECOMMUNICATION CO-OPERATIVE RESEARCH
CENTRE
The Australian Telecommunication Co-operative Research Centre
(ATCRC) is a co-operative research centre supported by
Commonwealth Government of Australia. It is a research partnership
between industry, universities and governments. The ATCRC is
focused on developing solutions that deliver ‘anywhere, anytime,
anything’ enhanced mobile service access with defined Quality of
Service (QoS) across packet networks to support multimedia
applications. The research carried out by ATCRC partners are in the
following areas:
• applications – multimedia over wireless networks, Ipv6
handover;
• networking – AAL type 2 traffic management and switching,
routing algorithms for IP;
• wireless – W-CDMA scanner, Multi-element antenna systems;
• media-cell, coding and modulation and multi-user detection;
• enabling technologies: Electromagnetic compatibility, signal in
electronic and communication systems.
NATIONAL NETWORKED TELE TEST FACILITY (NNTTF)
National Networked TeleTest Facility (NNTTF) was established in
late 2002 as a Major National Research Facility (MNRF) to provide
vital equipment to take Australia to the frontier of critically important
and expanding fields in micro and nano-electronics research and
development. This $15 million facility provides leading edge
capabilities addressing the most complex testing and IP validation
challenges. The NNTTFs’ charter is to enable start-ups, fabless
companies, research centres and integrated circuit manufacturers to
access specialised capabilities without making a huge investment in
very expensive capital equipment. The test facility is based on
Agilent 93000 tester which permits entire MACH-D testing of
integrated circuits and systems including System-on-a-Chip. The
facility is based at Edith Cowan University (WA) with testing nodes
at University of Western Australia (WA), University of Adelaide
(SA), Victoria University (Vic), Griffith University (Qld) and
Australian Microelectronics Network (NSW).
CHIPSKILLS PROGRAMME
Chipskills is a partnership project between Victoria University, RMIT
University, State Government of Victoria and industries to:
• provide educational and research needs of the Micro/Nano-
Electronics Industry;
• promote and encourage R&D collaboration between
Universities and Industries;
• attract high-tech investments in Victoria;
• encourage the development of Start-ups; and
• support the creation of Centre of Excellence in Microelectronics.
Industry standard postgraduate and professional development
courses in micro/nanoelectronic engineering are offered as part of
the Chipskills project.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
268
INTERNATIONAL COLLABORATION
The Centre is a member of the Heterogeneous Signal Processing
Research project, a collaboration with three Swedish Universities.
The Centre has links and MoUs with a number of other Universities
and Research Centres, namely:
• Institute of ECIT, Queens University of Belfast, UK;
• University College Cork, Ireland;
• Bristol University (UK);
• ACREO and Socware, Sweden;
• British Telecom Research Labs;
• BWRC, University of California at Berkeley;
• National Microelectronics Research Centre, Ireland;
• York University, UK;
• Ericsson AB, Sweden.
TRAINING PROGRAMMES
EDUCATION
An important aspect of the Centre is to provide training in core
activity areas. This is done through industrially focused and
sponsored Chipskills project, Australian Telecommunication CRC
and National Networked Tele Test Facility. The School of Electrical
Engineering also provides a number of postgraduate courses to
complement Telecommunication and Microelectronics Strategic
Research Areas.
These courses are:
• M.Eng. (Microelectronic Engineering) – Chipskills Project;
• M.Eng.Sc. in Computer & Microelectronic Engineering;
• Double Degree: M.Eng. (Microelectronic
Engineering)/M.Eng.Sc. in Computer & Microelectronic
Engineering;
• M.Eng.Sc. in Telecommunication Engineering;
• M.Eng. research degree in all the areas of the Centre activity;
• PhD research degree in all the areas of the Centre activity.
SCHOLARSHIPS
Centre for Telecommunication and Micro-Electronics often receives
funds from Industry and Government sources for applied research.
Applications for most Government Scholarship close in October
every year. Industry Scholarships are generally available throughout
the year, depending on the availability of funds.
Research Students are wanted in the following areas:
• radio system design. capacity modeling and performance
enhancement of cellular networks;
• RF Systems circuits, and Antennas. Terminal and Basestation
Architectures. Analog and Digital Electronics, Amplier Design;
• signal Processing. Application of DSP to radio systems, e.g.,
Adaptive antenna systems, Equalisation, Modulation etc;
• micro/nanoelectronics, VLSI, System-on-Chip;
• smart sensor nodes and networks;
• low power and reconfigurable system design;
• RF, analog, mixed signal and RF-MEMS circuits and systems;
• DFT, verification, validation, characterisation and MACH-D
testing
Applicants are required to have a good honours degree in
Electronic or Communications Engineering (or equivalent in
qualifications or experience e.g., Applied Maths), good analytical
and communications skills, and enthusiasm for radio and signal
processing. Australian Postgraduate Awards (APA), International
Postgraduate Research Scholarships (IPRS) and Vice Chancellor’s
Research Scholarships are due October every year. Scholarships
are worth approx. $16,000.
A top-up bonus of $5000 p.a. is offered to successful candidates
undertaking approved research projects with the Centre for
Telecommunication and Micro-Electronics. Scholarship duration is
three years for PhD and two years for MEng. Application forms can
be obtained from Victoria University’s Postgraduate Research Unit.
FACILITIES
HARDWARE
RADIO FREQUENCY RF
The Centre has two RF laboratories and built in screened room
facilities. The laboratories are equipped with modern RF and
microwave test equipment (RF sources, IQ generator, arbitrary
waveform generator, FFT analyzer, spectrum analysers, radio test
set and network analysers etc.) providing continuous coverage of all
frequencies up to 6GHz. A recently acquired scalar network
analyzer extends this range to 50GHz. The Centre has its own
fabrication facilities for microwave circuits using PCB and other
microwave substrate materials.
MICROELECTRONICS
The infrastructure support in micro/nanoelectronics includes industry
standard design and test laboratories for integrated systems. The
design facility includes number of laboratories based on high
powered Sun Workstations supporting Electronics Design
Automation (EDA) tools such as Cadence, Synopsys, Mentor
Graphics, Coventorware, ADS, Xilinx, Altera, etc for analog, mixed
signal, RF, MEMS, ASIC, advanced digital design and verification.
These design facilities are valued at approximately $3 million.
Microelectronic circuits and systems testing is performed through the
$15 million NNTTF facility.
SOFTWARE
The majority of the Centre’s work is performed on dedicated
Workstations and PCs while the University computer is used for
large simulations. High level software packages for
telecommunications research include OPNET for protocol and
network performance analysis, SPW for signal processing and
communication applications, MATLAB (with the DSP, control,
simulink and other toolboxes) for maths and digital signal
processing applications, and a number of other statistical and DSP
packages. Packages for Neural and Fuzzy research are also
available.
SUPERCOMPACT and ADS for RF and microwave circuit design,
simulation, and layout. GAS Station for microwave circuit layout,
HSPICE for analog simulation.
For further information and facility booking please visit the website
www.ctme.vu.edu.au
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
269
FOOD MARKETING RESEARCH UNIT
The Food Marketing Research Unit provides marketing and market-
oriented research, education and consultancy services targeted at all
segments (producers, processors, re-sellers, and industry
stakeholders) of the food value chain. The Unit undertakes projects
awarded through nationally competitive grants and through
negotiated contracts. It has a large number of clients comprising of
government agencies, food processing companies, food re-sellers,
food service companies, industry associations, and R&D
corporations. The Unit also undertakes a number of cross-
disciplinary research projects in partnership with other operational
areas in the University and with other institutions. It has a strong
record of R&D collaborations with Australian and overseas
organisations and has established individual- and institution- level
research partnerships with R&D organisations and universities in the
USA, UK, France, Korea, Japan, India and Malaysia. A summary of
the major activities of the Unit is as follows:
CORE R&D AND POST GRADUATE (PHD AND MASTERS) PROJECTS
The Unit’s R&D and postgraduate research projects cover the entire
food value chain (from paddock to plate) and incorporate a cross-
section of macro and micro issues and trends pertaining to
consumers, firms, industry, government, and stakeholders in the
industry. Past and on-going research projects address issues such as
organisational and governance structures such as business networks,
strategic partnerships, and strategic alliances; entrepreneurship and
the relationship of entrepreneurial orientation to factors such as
innovation orientation, innovation adoption, and business
performance; business-to-business and consumer buyer beliefs and
attitudes, and the influence of buyer beliefs and attitudes on
behaviors such as the consumption and marketing of functional
foods or ‘Green’ foods; business-to-business relationship marketing
and management issues arising from developments such as the
digitisation and convergence of economic activities; problems
focusing on organisational culture and personal culture in business
partnerships, trade relationships, and ethnic/minority community
businesses; externalities such as interest group influence on food
production and marketing; public policy issues and trends in regard
to matters such as the development of ‘new’ industries, and food
trade and investment flows; analysis of the commercialisation of
research and development programs in the food industry; the
interface between community, business and government in food
industry development; and issues on food security, food self-
sufficiency, and the globalization of food markets.
CROSS DISCIPLINARY AND COLLABORATIVE R&D PROJECTS
The Unit also undertakes a wide range of cross-disciplinary projects
in collaboration with other operational areas in Victoria University.
Recent collaborative projects included the sensory evaluation and
development of a quality index for fish (School of Molecular
Sciences); development of an energy saving and water saving
mobile hydro cooler for the fresh vegetable industry (School of
Architectural, Civil and Mechanical Engineering, and School of
Molecular Sciences); sustainable and environmentally friendly food
production and marketing (Key Research Area in Integrated Food
Value Chain; and School. of Hospitality, Tourism and Marketing);
assessment of trends and developments in the use of different
methods of fertilising and irrigating food crops (School of Applied
Economics).
UNDERGRADUATE STUDENT EXCHANGE PROJECTS
The Unit also developed and is lead managing an undergraduate-
level student exchange project, funded by the Department of
Education, Science and Training under its University Mobility in Asia
and the Pacific Program, between the School of Molecular Sciences
in Victoria University and the Faculty of Food Science and
Biotechnology in Universiti Putra Malaysia.
CONTRACT RESEARCH AND CONSULTANCY PROJECTS
The Unit provides contract research and consultancy services for
activities such as developing business plans, undertaking market
and/or product feasibility reports, developing marketing reports,
undertaking customer satisfaction surveys, and the crafting of
proposals for R&D grants.
RESEARCH DISSEMINATION AND MENTORING ACTIVITIES
The Food Marketing Research Unit is the Secretariat for the ASEAN
Food Journal, a peer reviewed academic journal in food science,
food technology, and food business. The ASEAN Food Journal is a
joint enterprise between Victoria University of Technology and
Universiti Putra Malaysia in Malaysia.
The Unit undertakes a wide variety of research dissemination and
mentoring activities such organising and hosting seminars,
workshops, conferences, and assisting in peer reviewing
manuscripts for academic journals, conferences, and trade
publications.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
270
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
271
SCHOOL OF ARCHITECTURAL, CIVIL
AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
COURSES OFFERED
The School of Architectural, Civil and Mechanical Engineering offers
postgraduate courses leading to the award of:
• Graduate Certificate in Project Management;
• Graduate Diploma in Project Management;
• Master of Engineering (Project Management) (coursework
program, based on the above graduate diplomas);
• Master of Engineering in Mechanical Engineering (coursework);
• Master of Engineering (Research);
• Doctor of Philosophy.
RESEARCH ACTIVITIES
Members of staff in the School of Architectural, Civil and
Mechanical Engineering (ACME) carry out a wide range of
fundamental and applied research. Much of the work is carried out
in close collaboration with industry, government bodies and other
research institutions. Research in ACME is focused into three areas,
namely:
• structural dynamics and vibrations;
• thermofluids;
• engineering for sustainability.
STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS AND VIBRATIONS
The Structural Dynamics and Vibrations research group undertakes
research in the fields of vibration, structural dynamics, system
dynamics and protective packaging. Research of this nature is
broad-ranging and finds applications in all modes of transport,
distribution, manufacturing, the military, the electronics industry,
acoustics and sound, offshore activities, power generation and
distribution, mining and resources exploitation, building services
and architecture, structural engineering, seismic and wind
engineering, sensor technology and even space exploration.
Although the potential applications of our research are considerable
in both number and breadth, the activities within the group have
been and are, by necessity, focused on the following applications:
ENVIRONMENTAL VIBRATIONS AND DISTRIBUTION HAZARDS
Investigations include the study and investigation of novel and
practical methods to monitor, measure, analyse and simulate shock
and random vibrations to products and packages being transported.
PAVEMENT–VEHICLE–CONSIGNMENT INTERACTION
The study of the interaction between pavement topography, vehicles
and consignments/passengers. This includes classifying the nature
of random pavement and terrain topography as well as the study of
dynamic forces and motion generated at the interface of pavements
and vehicles and between vehicles and consignments. The
behaviour of packaging systems under stochastic loads is also being
elucidated.
PROTECTIVE PACKAGING AND CUSHIONING MATERIALS
Entails the development of new protective packaging materials,
cushioning systems as well as the development of enhanced
methods to determine the effectiveness and improve the optimisation
of protective packaging systems.
NON-LINEAR VEHICLE DYNAMICS
Involves the study on the non-linear behaviour of vehicles and
suspension systems and includes the development of methods to
identify and non-linearities and simulate non-linear effects.
STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS AND MODAL ANALYSIS
Focuses on the vibrational behaviour of structures and includes the
development of methods for optimising the modal properties of
structures to reduce vibrational response and noise generation as
well as increase the endurance properties of structures.
STRUCTURAL DAMAGE DETECTION
It was common to observe railway workers striking the wheels of
locomotives with hammers – if a wheel did not ring properly it was
an indication that it had a crack in it. A similar, but more refined
method is being developed using frequency response functions to
detect cracks or degradation in engineering structures.
COMPUTATIONAL MECHANICS
Areas of research include development of finite element analysis
methods for structural optimization Fracture and crack analysis
application in nano-mechanics.
LABORATORY FACILITIES
Laboratory facilities used to support the research activities of the
group have been built up since the establishment of the Modal
Analysis Laboratory in 1988 and the Packaging Dynamics
Laboratory in 1991. Since then the School has made significant
investments in dynamics and vibration–based research equipment so
that, today, the laboratory is very well equipped to support activities
in the field. Some of the more significant experimental facilities
available are:
• vibration shakers (ranging from 20 N – 10kN in capacity);
• shock generating system (600 g);
• vibration controller;
• real time signal analysers (3 dual channel systems and one 8-
channel system);
• dynamic universal testing machine;
• modal analysis system;
• cushion testing machines;
• sound level meters and acoustic intensity probe;
• laser vibrometer;
• a wide range of conventional and non-contact displacement
sensors;
• a wide range of strain-gauge type and piezoelectric load cells
• numerous accelerometers and amplifiers;
• miscellaneous test equipment such as function generators, pulse
generators, digital storage oscilloscopes, tuneable frequency
filters, portable data acquisition systems and PC-based data
acquisition systems;
• a variety of specialist software packages such as Matlab®,
Simulink®, Labview®, Dadisp®, HPVee®, SignalStar®,
Adams®, Icats®, MEScope®, Ansys® and Abacus.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
272
THERMOFLUIDS
The thermofluids research group carries out a range of theoretical
and experimental studies on fluid dynamics and heat transfer. A
strand of its work considers the interaction of fires and structures,
and Thermofluids makes significant contributions to the area of
manipulating environments within building-enclosures. Some of the
specific projects include:
THERMAL PLUMES
Thermal plumes arise in many applications, such as the spread of
fires in buildings, heating and ventilation and the spread of
pollutants. The research in this group studies the basic mechanisms
of buoyancy-driven flows and their effect on the behaviour of
turbulence.
DYNAMIC RESPONSE OF HOT-WIRES
Hot-wires are used to measure the not only the average flow rates of
gases, but also they enable small deviations from the average to be
measured. This enables engineers to gain insights into the nature of
turbulent flows. ACME has a strong research team studying the
dynamic response of hot-wires and how their construction can be
improved to avoid erroneous measurements being recorded.
COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS
Computers can be used to study the flow of fluids under very diverse
situations such as air flows in a room, air flows between buildings in
cities, the flow of liquids in oil reservoirs, the sloshing of liquids in
containers and so on. The computer programs used to simulate these
flows depend ultimately on a good understanding of the physics of
fluids and computational algorithms. Members of this research
group develop and use computational fluid dynamics software.
FLUID DYNAMICS AND FIRE ENGINEERING
Members of the Thermofluids research group use the tools of fluid
dynamics and computing to study the behaviour of fires in buildings.
One project involves the study of the spread of smoke in a building,
another is concerned with the response of structural elements of
buildings to fires and a a member of the group is studying flows in a
complex network of an aspiration smoke detector.
ADVERSE PRESSURE FLOWS
We generally think of fluids being forced along a pipe, say, as a
result of a pressure driving force that goes from high to low in the
direction of flow. However, once a flowing fluid has gained
momentum it can continue to flow against a pressure gradient, just
as a cyclist can continue to climb a hill without pedalling (at least for
a little while). ACME has a renowned reputation of studying these
so-called adverse pressure gradient flows.
FLOWS IN POROUS MEDIA
Porous media are encountered in many applications such as the
flow of water in aquifers, air flow through stored food grains and
fluid flows in chemical reactors. A problem is that the flow through
the interstices between the solid particles is on length scales that are
much smaller than the size of the porous medium. A grain silo, for
example, is much larger than the sizes of the grain kernels stored
within it. Researchers in ACME work on reconciling these
differences and formulating appropriate design equations.
AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
Research is being conducted on improving the design of automobile
engines. A new system for actuating valves has been designed and
work is being conducted on the use of alternative fuels.
LABORATORY FACILITIES
The thermofluids research group has well-established facilities that
include:
• a two-metre long hot-wire anemometer calibration facility;
• a flying hot-wire system for traversing large distances;
• a range of wind tunnels – one of which has variable geometry
to study adverse pressure gradients;
• secondary standards for calibrating manometers;
• a range of humidity, temperature sensors and data loggers;
• excellent workshop and fabrication facilities;
• signal analysers to characterise turbulent flows;
• a particle image velocimeter;
• a range of software including computational fluid dynamics
software including CFX® and COMPACT®.
ENGINEERING FOR SUSTAINABILITY
There are a large number of definitions of sustainability, one of
which is:
A sustainable society is one that permits the personal, social,
aesthetic and intellectual well-being of all people to grow
throughout their entire lives.
Engineering is embedded in this definition which implies that people
will be free from drudgery, they will not have to worry about being
hungry and they will have shelter and infrastructure that are
adequate for them to grow physically, emotionally and intellectually.
Research areas in Engineering for Sustainability include:
WATER SUPPLY PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT
Reliable supplies of clean and potable water are increasingly scarce
and they require adequate planning. Research activities in this area
include:
• reservoir management;
• water conservation and demand management;
• urban and rural water supply;
• water sharing principles.
URBAN WATER CYCLE MANAGEMENT
Although much of the water used in cities is harvested and stored in
catchment areas in rural areas a large amount of rain also falls on
urban areas. These areas are characterized by have large areas of
impermeable surfaces such as roofs, roads and perhaps airport
runways, and they have large networks of storm water disposal
systems. Urban environments therefore provide a potential source for
harvesting and supplying water. As a result the following projects
are being carried out:
• water sensitive urban design;
• reuse of wastewater/use of storm water;
• urban drainage;
• holistic management of urban water cycle.
RIVER WATER QUALITY MODELLING AND MANAGEMENT
A safe water supply and environmentally sound water distribution
system relies on a clean, unpolluted system of rivers. This research is
aimed at studying factors that affect the integrity of water quality.
EDUCATIONAL RESEARCH
Universities are the institutions charged with educating future
generations of professional engineers. It is important that this
education process is carried out in a scholarly manner and that it is
effective. For this reason, members of staff work closely with
colleagues in the University’s Centre for Educational Development
and Support in devising and evaluating its courses. The principal
beneficiaries are undergraduate students but it also leads to
members of staff being able to make contributions to the profession
of university teaching. Areas of research include: Sustainability
teaching – how to teach principles/concepts to engineers;
conversazioni as a vehicle for participatory learning; educational
development of concepts specific to Fluid Mechanics.
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
273
POST HARVEST TECHNOLOGY
Each year some $100,000,000,000 worth of stored grains such as
wheat, rice and maize is destroyed during storage. The main causes
of loss result from attack by insect pests and moulds. Insects can be
controlled by applying pesticides to the grains but within a few
years they become resistant to these chemicals, and consumers are
wary of eating chemically treated grains. An alternative to using
pesticides is to cool grains. Moulds can be controlled by ensuring
that all regions of a bulk of stored grains are sufficiently dry. This
research area is developing engineering, as opposed to chemical
methods of maintaining stored grains in good condition. A further
project in post harvest technology is aimed at developing water-
efficient methods of cooling horticultural produce.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
As indicated above, a wide range of challenging research projects
are available leading to Master of Engineering by Research and
Doctor of Philosophy degrees. For admission, high honours results in
a recognised undergraduate course, or an equivalent qualification,
is required. Initial enquiries regarding eligibility for admission and
research projects should be directed to the Postgraduate
Co-ordinator at (03) 9919 4227.
ACADEMIC PROGRESSION GUIDELINES AND UNSATISFACTORY
PROGRESS
Normal progress through a course requires a student to complete
any defined course year within one year of equivalent full-time
enrolment. When all subjects in a course year are passed, a stage
grading of ‘year completed’ may be given.
Any of the following may be considered to constitute unsatisfactory
progress by a student:
• failure in any subject or unit for the second time;
• failure to complete the course within any maximum period
defined by University Statute;
• failure to meet a conditional enrolment agreement.
As otherwise defined by University Statute, and subject to being
invited to show cause, a student making unsatisfactory progress will
normally be recommended for exclusion from the course.
GRADUATE CERTIFICATE IN PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Course Code: ETPM
The School of Architectural, Civil and Mechanical Engineering
conducts the Graduate Diploma in Project Management and the
Masters of Engineering in Project Management.
Currently, major initiatives are in progress which will require
professionals to practice only in certain areas based on their
qualifications and experience. This is particularly the case in the
field of project management.
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course provides opportunities for professional people to:
(a) develop advanced technical skills in a specialist discipline;
(b) develop their understanding of legislation and management
relevant to their employment;
(c) develop ability to plan, co-ordinate and complete complex
projects;
(d) apply and extend research and reporting skills and gain
specialist knowledge of a topic relevant to their employment.
The course will be directed at registered building surveyors and
other building practitioners such as architects, engineers, quantity
surveyors, etc., with at least one year of relevant professional
experience. Other professions directly affected by performance
regulations will be encouraged to participate.
The aims of the course are to:
• introduce the concepts and alternative acceptable frameworks
for performance based codes, with particular, but not exclusive,
emphasis given to project management practices;
• provide building engineering and allied professions with the
appropriate knowledge and skills necessary for the assessment
and application of performance-based project management
practices;
• develop an appreciation of the legal, statutory and design
integrity requirements and the need for compliance of the
design assumptions throughout the operational life of the
building or facility; and
• develop a recognition of the desirability of undertaking
additional courses to further upgrade skills and expertise.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Qualifications accepted are a degree or diploma or associate
diploma in Engineering or Building or Quantity Surveying or
Architecture or Construction from a University or College of
Advanced Education or Technical and Further Education in
Australia.
Applicants with other qualifications deemed to be equivalent to the
degree, diploma or associate diploma may be admitted.
Applicants must have at least one year of relevant experience in the
design, construction and/or management of building and
engineering projects before being admitted to the course.
The formal qualification requirements may be waived in exceptional
circumstances.
• IELTS – an overall band score of 6+, subject to individual
profile.
• TOEFL – a score of 550+, and a Test of Written English score
of 5+.
COURSE DURATION
The course will be delivered as follows:
• each subject will be presented as a three-hour session one
evening per week for one semester;
• two subjects will be presented each semester.
The course will be presented over two semesters during a 12-month
period.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Semester Points
Year 1
Project Management subjects
Core Subjects
VCP5600 Project Management
Fundamentals 1 15
VCP5610 Project Management Planning
and Control 2 15
Elective Subjects
VCP5620 Project Management & Contracts 2 15
VCP5705 Project Management and
Information Technology 2 15
VCP5716 Project Development Analysis 2 15
VCP5726 Project Procurement
Management 1 15
VCP5736 Facility Life Cycle Costing 2 15
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
274
VCP5745 Building Regulatory Management 1 15
VCP5800 Telecommunications Project Management 1 15
plus approved subjects currently available at Victoria University,
Footscray Park Campus, such as:
Computer Science (semesters to be advised)
RCM5404 Financial Decision Support Systems 15
RCM5801 Introduction to Computer Science 15
RCM5802 Information Systems 15
Decision Support Science
RCM5602 Quality Management and Statistics 15
RCM5901 Introduction to Decision Support Systems 15
Business Management
BAO5735 Advanced Forecasting, Planning and Control 15
BLO5513 Law of Employment 15
BLO5537 Business Law 15
BLO 6502 Law of Management 15
Industrial Relations
BAO5544 Human Resource Economics 15
BMO5545 Comparative Industrial Relations Systems 15
BMO5537 Topics in Employee Relations Management 15
BMO5589 Industrial Relations & the Building Industry 15
The availability of electives from other areas/schools depends on
staff resources and enrolments.
GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN PROJECT
MANAGEMENT
Course Code: EGPM
The Graduate Diploma in Project Management at Victoria University
was the first such course set up in Victoria, and only the second in
Australia. Throughout all its first decade it has been an industry
leader. When the first Graduate Diploma in Project Management
began in 1984, the focus was on the narrowly technical. Now, the
course is concerned with the human and social perspective; with
building teams that work well together and with placing the
management of the project firmly within the wider environment.
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course is designed specifically to meet the needs of current or
potential managers in the building construction and related
industries. It will equip the professionals already in the industry with
advanced principles and techniques of project management to
enable them to assume the role of project manager and/or become
effective members of project management teams.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Applicants should have a degree or diploma in architecture,
building, construction, engineering, quantity surveying, or other
relevant discipline and at least two years of experience or current
employment at professional level in the relevant field. Suitable proof
these will be required prior to enrolment.
Other qualifications may be considered acceptable and the formal
qualification requirements may be waived in exceptional
circumstances.
In addition, all applicants applying as full-fee paying international
students must provide evidence of proficiency in the English
language:
• IELTS – an overall band score of 6+, subject to individual
profile;
• TOEFL – a score of 550+, and a Test of Written English score
of 5+.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered on a full-time basis over one year for full-fee
paying international students or on a part-time basis over a minimum
of two years.
COURSE STRUCTURE
The course consists of eight subjects as follows: four ‘core’ subjects
to develop a basic knowledge in fundamentals of project
management, project planning and control, project management of
contracts and industrial relations in the building and construction
industry; four ‘electives’ are selected to achieve a better
understanding and working knowledge of all disciplines involved in
management of a project. Students must complete 120 credit points.
Credit
Semester Points
Year 1
Compulsory core subjects
BMO5589 Industrial Relations and the
Building Industry 1 15
VCP5600 Project Management
Fundamentals 1 15
VCP5610 Project Management Planning
and Control 2 15
VCP5620 Project Management & Contracts 2 15
Elective subjects
Four electives are selected from the following:
VCP5705 Project Management and Information
Technology 1 15
VCP5716 Project Development Analysis 2 15
VCP5726 Project Procurement
Management 1 15
VCP5736 Facility Life Cycle Costing 2 15
VCP5745 Building Regulatory Management 1 15
VCP5800 Telecommunications Project
Management
plus approved subjects currently available at Victoria University,
Footscray Park Campus. These approved subjects may include:
Computer Science Semesters to be advised
RCM5404 Financial Decision Support Systems
RCM5801 Introduction to Computer Science 15
RCM5802 Information Systems 15
Decision Support Science
RCM5602 Quality Management and Statistics 15
RCM5901 Introduction to Decision Support Systems 15
The availability of electives from other departments depends on staff
resources and enrolments.
ASSESSMENT
Assessment will be by projects, submission and examination.
Guidelines on the use of electronic calculators and other electronic
storage devices in examinations are provided in individual subject
outlines distributed to students within the first two weeks of semester
and included on final examination papers.
Electronic calculators and other electronic storage devices will not
be permitted where the above provisions have not been made.
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
275
MASTER OF ENGINEERING (PROJECT
MANAGEMENT) (COURSEWORK)
Course Code: EMPM
COURSE OBJECTIVES
Since 1990s government, industry and individuals increasingly
recognise the Masters degree as an important benchmark measure
of vocational and professional training. The Master of Engineering
(Project Management) provides opportunities for professional
engineers and managers to achieve high level training in
contemporary engineering methods. The course gives students a
large choice of both technical and managerial subjects, and it
enables professional people to:
• develop advanced technical skills in a specialist discipline;
• develop their understanding of legislation and management
relevant to their employment;
• develop ability to plan, co-ordinate and complete complex
projects;
• apply and extend research and reporting skills and gain
specialist knowledge of a topic relevant to their employment.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
An honours degree in a relevant discipline and relevant work
experience will normally be required to enter the course. Advanced
entry may be approved for students who have completed at least
four subjects of a relevant Graduate Diploma with an upper second
class honours average.
In addition, all applicants applying as full-fee paying international
students must provide evidence of proficiency in the English
language:
• IELTS – an overall band score of 6+, subject to individual
profile;
• TOEFL – a score of 550+, and a Test of Written English (TWE)
score of 5+.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over one-and-a-half years on a full-time basis or
over three years on a part-time basis. Students must complete 180
credit points.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Candidates must complete to a satisfactory standard eight approved
subjects of three hours per week Class Contact selected from
approved Graduate Diplomas of Engineering, or any other
postgraduate subject deemed equivalent by the Course
Co-ordinator, plus a minor thesis of 12 hours per week for one
semester or six hours per week for two semesters, or ten subjects of
three hours per week Class Contact selected from approved
Graduate Diplomas of Engineering plus a thesis/project of six hours
per week for one semester or three hours per week for two
semesters.
The Masters Degree structure is:
Credit
Semester Points
Year 1
4 Graduate Diploma subjects 1 60
4 Graduate Diploma subjects 2 60
or part-time over two or three years
Year 2
VCC8000 Research Thesis (full-time) or 1 60
VCC8010 Research Thesis (part-time) or 1&2 30
VCC8040 Project work (full-time) 1 30
2 Graduate Diploma subjects (full-time) or 2 30
VCC8050 Project work (part-time) 1&2 15
2 Graduate Diploma subjects 1&2 15
The Masters Degree program uses subjects of the existing Graduate
Diplomas within the area for the coursework content. Additionally,
students who complete other Graduate Diploma courses with
Honours averages may be admitted to the Degree with advanced
standing.
Students may choose from the following Graduate Diploma subjects:
BLO5537 Business Law
BLO5513 Law of Employment
BAO5735 Advanced Forecasting, Planning and Control
BAO5544 Human Resource Economics
BLO6502 Law for Management
BMO5545 Comparative Industrial Relations Systems
BMO5537 Topics in Employee Relations Management
BMO5589 Industrial Relations and the Building Industry
RCM5404 Financial Decisions Support Systems
RCM5602 Quality Management and Statistics
RCM5801 Introduction to Computer Science
RCM5802 Information Systems
RCM5901 Introduction to Decision Support Systems
VCP5600 Project Management Fundamentals
VCP5610 Project Management Planning and Control
VCP5620 Project Management and Contracts
VCP5705 Project Management and Information Technology
VCP5716 Project Development Analysis
VCP5726 Project Procurement Management
VCP5736 Facility Life Cycle Costing
VCP5745 Building Regulatory Management
VCP5800 Telecommunications Project Management
ASSESSMENT
Assessment will be by a combination of written assignments, oral
presentations, case studies, written examination and by the
satisfactory completion of a thesis. Except in special circumstances
supplementary assessment for subjects taught by the School of
Architectural, Civil and Mechanical Engineering will not be offered.
Guidelines on the use of electronic calculators and other electronic
storage devices in examinations are provided in individual subject
outlines distributed to students within the first two weeks of semester
and included on final examination papers.
Electronic calculators and other electronic storage devices will not
be permitted where the above provisions have not been made.
MASTER OF ENGINEERING IN MECHANICAL
ENGINEERING (COURSEWORK)
Course Code: EMME
CRICOS Code: 047452F
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aim of this course is to provide students with an opportunity to
achieve in-depth comprehension of engineering fundamentals and
advanced skills of research and development essential in modern
practice of Mechanical Engineering.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Admission to the course may be granted to the following applicants:
• holders of a Four Year Bachelor of Mechanical Engineering
degree, or an equivalent, accredited for Graduate membership
of the Institution of Engineers, Australia, having either an
Honours degree or an ordinary degree with significant
professional industrial experience.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
276
• applicants with overseas degree in Mechanical Engineering at
least at Bachelor level and judged by the School of
Architectural, Civil and Mechanical Engineering to be of
excellent standard.
• Applicants with qualifications at least at Bachelor level in other
engineering and science disciplines with a minimum of three
years industrial experience.
In addition, full fee international students must provide evidence of
proficiency in the English Language:
• IELTS – an overall band score of 6+;
• TOEFL – a minimum score 0f 550+ and a TWE (Test of Written
English) score of 5+.
COURSE DURATION
The Course is offered over a period of two years full time.
Applicants of exceptional standard may get exemption of Semester1
and may complete the course in one-and-a-half years full time.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Semester Points
(exemption of one or more subjects in this Semester is considered on
a case by case basis).
VMY5682 Experimental Techniques and
Signal Processing 1 15
VMC5672 Numerical Techniques and
Programming 1 15
VMW5682 Manufacturing Materials 1 15
VCP5610 Project Management Planning
and Control 1 15
VMC 5771 Computer Aided Engineering 2 15
VMV 5781 Advanced Dynamics and Vibration 2 15
VMF 5881 Advanced Fluid-Thermodynamics 2 15
VMW 5771 Research techniques 2 15
VMV5782 Computational Dynamics 3 15
VMT5882 Computational Fluid Dynamics 3 15
VME5782 Specialist Elective 3 15
VMP 5872 Research Project 3 15
VMR 5781 Minor Thesis 4 60
ASSESSMENT
Assessment of the coursework will be a combination of
examinations, written assignments, tests, and laboratory work. To
achieve a successful Minor Thesis student will have to demonstrate
competence in research of an engineering problem, reviewing
literature, collecting and analysing data, drawing conclusions and
writing the thesis. Assessment of the Minor Thesis is entirely based
on the thesis by two examiners, at least one is external to the
University.
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
277
SCHOOL OF BIOMEDICAL SCIENCES
The Biomedical Sciences group (encompassing the four major
research areas: Muscle Physiology, Nutrition, Health & Lifestyle, and
Reproductive Physiology) has active research within two strategic
research areas of strength within the University: Medical
Biotechnology, and Rehabilitation, Exercise and Sport Science.
These areas have a major focus on the use of state-of-the-art medical
research techniques to investigate the functioning of the human body
in both health and disease. Specific expertise includes reproductive
physiology, molecular biology, cancer, genetics exercise, muscle
metabolism and physiology, nutrition, lifestyle management and
rehabilitation. This expertise provides the opportunity to learn a
wide variety of valuable skills within a project tailored to satisfy
students’ interests.
MUSCLE PHYSIOLOGY
Exercise is one of the most common human pursuits. From the
weekend jogger to the professional athlete, the way in which our
muscles produce and utilise energy is of the utmost importance. In
addition, optimising skeletal muscle function and recovery from
injury is also essential. The Exercise Metabolism Unit (EMU) is part
of the Centre for Rehabilitation Exercise and Sports Sciences
(CRESS) within Victoria University. The major focus of their work
includes: muscle metabolism and fatigue in normal and hot
conditions; muscle metabolism in endurance and sprint training;
regulation of calcium and force production in skeletal muscle,
metabolic control and adaptations to exercise; recovery from
muscle; and exercise and muscle function in cardiac, respiratory
and muscle disease, and ageing associated changes in skeletal
muscle DNA damage and repair.
The Muscle Cell Biochemistry Laboratory is funded by the National
Health and Medical Research Council (NH&MRC) and the
Australian Research Council (ARC), Australia’s two top funding
bodies. The major focus of their work includes: Biochemistry of
single muscle fibres, and physiological and pathophysiological
conditions associated with glycogen depletion or sugar excess in
muscle fatigue, ageing and diabetes.
NUTRITION
We are what we eat is a simple statement. However, it is of extreme
importance to our general health. Whether it is the intake for
growing bodies in children or adolescents, or maintaining a healthy
lifestyle in the elderly, nutrition is important to everyone in their day-
to-day lives. The major focus of this area is: nutritional intakes in pre-
school children, the role of antioxidants in protecting DNA from age
associated damage, and analysis of n-3 PUFA and the health
benefits of consumption of seafood, especially shellfish
HEALTH AND LIFESTYLE
Wellness is a new area of research that examines individuals well-
being and levels of health. Particular interests are community
awareness of and attitudes towards, as well as the effects of, issues
relating to the general health of the population, such as genetic
engineering of food and immunisation. This research area
encompasses the health of infants and children as they mature
through puberty to adolescents; of adults as they reproduce and
mature to mid-life, and of older people. Health concerns are
highlighted in each of these life cycle/reproductive stages. Studies
in the area of family health include: parenting transition; the
aetiology and consequences of perinatal depression; the nature of
neurotransmittors in heroine addicts; the clinical management of
drug dependence; the aetiology of schizophrenia; the use of
proteins in saliva as markers to assess stress, pain and inflammation;
and the assessment of gas pollutants in indoor environments. The
major focus of this area is: biological markers, psychosocial factors,
stress, coping style and the immune system, and the effect of
hormone replacement therapy and exercise on bone and
cardiovascular parameters.
REPRODUCTIVE PHYSIOLOGY
The Biomedical Sciences group has a very strong background in
research into all facets of reproduction and perinatal development.
This research unit links projects on women’s health, implantation
and embryo development, foetal development and parturition, and
family health. The current areas of research include:
WOMEN’S HEALTH
From puberty to late post-menopause, has become an important and
popular area of reproductive research. Studies in this area include:
the role of steroid and peptide hormones in the regulation and
function of menstrual and reproductive cycles and the
interrelationships between physiological and psychological
parameters in response to stressors on the regulation of the
menstrual and reproductive cycles;.
IMPLANTATION AND EMBRYO DEVELOPMENT
Studies into implantation and embryo development include: the role
of steroid hormones and other factors in the successful establishment
of pregnancy; the development of the neural tube of the embryo;
and the growth and differentiation of the placenta;
FOETAL DEVELOPMENT AND PARTURITION
By the time of birth, the foetus must have developed sufficiently to
adapt to its extrauterine environment. Often, infants who are
delivered prematurely have numerous medical problems which
require very expensive intensive care. Studies into foetal
development and parturition include: growth and development of
the foetal and neonatal lung; diabetes during pregnancy; rupture of
foetal membranes during term and pre-term labour, the initiation of
parturition; and parenting of premature infants.
FOETAL PROGRAMMING OF ADULT DISEASE
An exciting area of research investigating the factors and
mechanisms during foetal development which pre-determine what
adult diseases the foetus will develop in adult life. Research has
shown strong relationships between small size at birth and the
development of high blood pressure, cardiovascular disease and
diabetes as an adult.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
278
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
279
SCHOOL OF COMPUTER SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS
The School embraces the disciplines of Computer Science,
Mathematics, Statistics and Operations Research. See the School
website at http://csm.vu.edu.au for details.
Exploding technology ensures that research in computing and
computer science is constantly changing and developing. The
computing research emphasis includes visual information systems,
database systems, computer networking and communications. The
mathematicians have a broad spectrum of interests, with major
research outputs in information theory and coding, theory of
inequalities applied in numerical and Fourier analysis, image
processing, and differential and integral equations. The research
group in mathematical inequalities and applications (RGMIA) is the
focus of an international collaboration of leading mathematicians in
the area.
Additional areas of research focus include, reliability, experimental
design, statistical process control, and the theory and application of
object-oriented languages. There is also interest in optimal pricing
policies.
School staff members are active in a number of research projects
supported through the co-operation of industrial bodies and national
research organisations.
The School has a number of specific research areas such as:
• Internet technologies;
• visual information systems;
• network multimedia and databases;
• analysis of inequalities, information theory;
• coding & cryptography;
• financial and risk modelling;
• image processing;
• industrial process modelling;
• education within the discipline areas.
POSTGRADUATE PROGRAMS BY RESEARCH
The School offers the following research degrees:
• Doctor of Philosophy;
• Master of Science (Research).
Research topics compatible with the School’s facilities and staff
expertise are negotiated between students and supervisors. A
number of research programs are available in the above areas. In
addition, applicants with interests in similar areas are encouraged
to discuss them with the School, telephone (03) 9919 4492.
A booklet with more specific research details for the benefit of
prospective students is available on request.
MINIMUM STANDARDS OF ENTRY
Applicants should have formal qualifications and experience at least
equivalent to an Australian four year Bachelor’s degree with
Honours in an appropriate discipline. Applicants wishing to
undertake a PhD who do not already possess a Master’s degree will
normally be expected to enrol initially for a Master’s degree and
will be considered for transfer to PhD candidature after one year of
study.
All overseas applicants must provide evidence of proficiency in the
English language:
• IELTS – an overall band score of 6.5, subject to individual
profile; or
• TOEFL – a score of 550+, and a Test of Written English (TWE)
score of 5+.
PROGRAM DURATION
Candidates will undertake research in one of the above areas and
will be examined by dissertation (thesis). Candidates may be
required to undertake course work as part of the overall higher
degree program. Any such subjects will be specified at the time of
commencement.
A full-time research Masters degree will normally take up to two
years and a PhD degree is likely to take a minimum of three years.
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY
Course Code: EPHC, EPLC, EPOT
MASTER OF SCIENCE (RESEARCH)
Course Code: SRHC, SRLC, SROT
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Semester Points
RCM8001 Research (Full-Time) 1 48
RCM8002 Research (Full-Time) 2 48
RCM8011 Research (Par-Time) 1 24
RCM8012 Research (Part-Time) 2 24
COURSEWORK PROGRAMS
The School offers a range of coursework programs at postgraduate
level:
• Graduate Diplomas in:
− Computer Science
− Computer and Mathematical Sciences
− Multimedia Information Networking
− Software Engineering
• Master of Science in:
− Computer Science
− Computer and Mathematical Sciences
− Software Engineering
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
280
GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN COMPUTER
SCIENCE
Course Code: SGCS
GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN COMPUTER AND
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES
Course Code: SGCM
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The Graduate Diploma programs are designed for graduates who
want to acquire professional competence in Computer Science
and/or the Mathematical Sciences.
Each Graduate Diploma develops graduates who have a sound
conceptual foundation, including practical understanding of recent
developments in computer technology and how these may be
applied to solve a wide range of problems in business and industry.
The Graduate Diploma in Computer and Mathematical Sciences
offers a strong mathematical sciences component.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Entry to each course is open to applicants with a first degree.
Preference will be given to applicants whose degree contains major
studies in a quantitative discipline. Other applicants whose
occupation or experience indicates that they have the capacity to
succeed may be accepted into the course.
COURSE DURATION
Each course is offered on both a full-time (one year) and a part-time
basis. Part-time students will normally take two years to complete the
course. Lectures will normally be offered in the evenings, however,
some of the subjects are available during the day.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Two streams of subjects are available:
• Computer Science;
− Computer Programming;
− Information Systems;
− Multimedia & Networking;
− Software Engineering;
• Mathematical Sciences;
− Production and Distribution Management;
− Modelling for Finance;
− Data Analysis.
The courses provide maximum flexibility allowing specialisation in
either one or a combination of the two streams.
To complete a Graduate Diploma, students are required to pass four
Computer Science subjects and four Mathematical subjects.
Credit
Semester Points
COMPUTER SCIENCE SUBJECTS
RCM5800 Object Oriented Programming GD1 1 12
RCM5802 Information Systems 1 12
RCM5805 Communication and Networks 1 12
RCM5821 Introduction to Multimedia Systems 1 12
2 x Approved Electives in
Computer Science 2 24
2 x Approved Electives 2 24
Total 96
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCE SUBJECTS
RCM5800 Object Oriented Programming GD1 1 12
RCM5802 Information Systems 1 12
2 x Approved Electives in
Mathematics 1 24
RCM5805 Communication and Networks 2 12
2 x Approved Electives in
Mathematics 2 24
1 x Approved Electives in CS 2 12
Total 96
PROGRESSION REGULATIONS
The School’s Academic Committees (Examiners' Meetings) will, at
the end of each semester, consider the results and progress of all
students enrolled in the course.
Progression is based on the following guidelines:
(i) Where any subject must be repeated, enrolment in that subject
must be at the first opportunity following the initial failure.
(ii) Students will not normally be allowed to enrol in any subject for
which at least a H3 grade has not been attained in any of the
pre-requisite subjects.
UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS
These regulations should be read in conjunction with Victoria
University's Statute 6.4.1. – Unsatisfactory Progress. The following
regulations apply to both full-time and part-time students.
(i) The following shall constitute unsatisfactory progress:
(a) failure in at least 50 per cent of the assessed subjects for
which a student has enrolled in a semester of study,
(b) failure in any subject twice,
(c) transgression of a conditional enrolment stipulation and
agreement.
(ii) Where a student's progress is unsatisfactory, the Departmental
Academic Progress Committee may recommend the following:
(a) a restricted and conditional enrolment only be approved,
(b) exclusion from the course.
(iii) A student who wishes to appeal against the Department's
written recommendation is required to do so in accordance
with the University's Statutes. The procedures to be followed in
lodging a submission, hearing of submissions and
communicating the results of hearings are set out in the
University's Statutes.
(iv) Excluded students have no right of re-admission to the course
from which they were excluded. Students who have been
excluded may apply for re-admission not less than one calendar
year from the date of exclusion. The student must provide, with
his or her application, evidence of changed circumstances
which significantly improve the applicant's likelihood of
academic success.
GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN MULTIMEDIA
INFORMATION NETWORKING
Course Code: SGMN
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aim of this course is to impart fundamental knowledge and
training to people with non-computing backgrounds in the
application and development of Multimedia Information Networks.
The fundamental knowledge provides students with the ability to
adapt to different computing platforms, application environments
and rapid technological advancements encountered in the
workplace.
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
281
Students will be able to gain employment in the Network
Management area, as well as in the areas of Multimedia systems
development, and Multimedia applications.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course an applicant must have
successfully completed an undergraduate degree in a non-computing
discipline. Equivalent academic standing based on successful
completion of recognised courses and industrial experience may
also be considered sufficient for admission to the course.
COURSE DURATION
Graduate Diploma in Multimedia Information Networking will
require one year of full-time study, or equivalent part-time study.
Classes will be scheduled to cater for part-time students.
COURSE STRUCTURE
The course will cover the following four areas, each comprising two
subjects:
• computer systems and programming;
• information systems;
• data communication and networks;
• multimedia systems.
The subjects offered in the course are:
Credit
Semester Points
RCM5800 Object Oriented Programming GD1 1 12
RCM5802 Information Systems 1 12
RCM5805 Communication and Networks 1 12
RCM5821 Introduction to Multimedia Systems 1 12
RCM5807 Advanced Information Systems 2 12
RCM5820 Network Systems Administration 2 12
RCM5822 Networked Multimedia Systems 2 12
RCM5824 Object Oriented Programming GD2 2 12
Total 96
PROGRESSION REGULATIONS
The School’s Academic Committees (Examiners' Meetings) will, at
the end of each semester, consider the results and progress of all
students enrolled in the course.
Progression is based on the following guidelines:
(i) Where any subject must be repeated, enrolment in that subject
must be at the first opportunity following the initial failure.
(ii) Students will not normally be allowed to enrol in any subject for
which at least a H3 grade has not been attained in any of the
pre-requisite subjects.
UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS
These regulations should be read in conjunction with Victoria
University's Statute 6.4.1. – Unsatisfactory Progress. The following
regulations apply to both full-time and part-time students.
(i) The following shall constitute unsatisfactory progress:
(a) failure in at least 50 per cent of the assessed subjects for
which a student has enrolled in a semester of study;
(b) failure in any subject twice;
(c) transgression of a conditional enrolment stipulation and
agreement.
(ii) Where a student's progress is unsatisfactory, the School
Academic Progress Committee may recommend the following:
(a) a restricted and conditional enrolment only be approved;
(b) exclusion from the course.
(iii) A student who wishes to appeal against the School’s writte
recommendation is required to do so in accordance with the
University's Statutes. The procedures to be followed in lodging
a submission, hearing of submissions and communicating the
results of hearings are set out in the University's Statutes.
(iv) Excluded students have no right of re-admission to the course
from which they were excluded. Students who have been
excluded may apply for re-admission not less than one calendar
year from the date of exclusion. The student must provide, with
his or her application, evidence of changed circumstances
which significantly improve the applicant's likelihood of
academic success.
GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN SOFTWARE
ENGINEERING
Course Code: SGSE
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The Graduate Diploma program is designed for graduates who
want to acquire professional competence in software engineering.
The Graduate Diploma program develops graduates to have a
sound knowledge and technical skills in the areas of software
specification, design, implementation and management. This
program has strong programming and software engineering
components.
Successful students can articulate with full credit into the Master of
Science in Software Engineering program.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Entry to this course is open to applicants with a first degree in
computing. Preference will be given to applicants whose degree
contains major studies in a quantitative discipline. Other applicants
whose occupation or experience indicates that they have the
capacity to succeed may be accepted into the course.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered on both a full-time (one year) and a part-time
basis. Part-time students will normally take two years to complete the
course. Lectures will normally be offered in the evenings, however,
some of the subjects are available during the day.
COURSE STRUCTURE
To complete the Graduate Diploma in Software Engineering requires
the successful completion of four cores subjects and four elective
subjects.
Credit
Semester Points
RCM6822 Internet Programming 1 12
RCM6840 Software Engineering 1 1 12
2 x Approved Electives in
Computer Science 1 24
RCM5824 Object Oriented Programming
GD2 2 12
RCM6841 Software Engineering 2 2 12
2 x Approved Electives in
Computer Science 2 24
Total 96
PROGRESSION REGULATIONS
The School’s Academic Committees (Examiners' Meetings) will, at
the end of each semester, consider the results and progress of all
students enrolled in the course.
Progression is based on the following guidelines:
(i) Where any subject must be repeated, enrolment in that subject
must be at the first opportunity following the initial failure.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
282
(ii) Students will not normally be allowed to enrol in any subject for
which at least a H3 grade has not been attained in any of the
pre requisite subjects.
UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS
These regulations should be read in conjunction with Victoria
University's Statute 6.4.1. – Unsatisfactory Progress. The following
regulations apply to both full-time and part-time students.
(i) The following shall constitute unsatisfactory progress:
(a) failure in at least 50 per cent of the assessed subjects for
which a student has enrolled in a semester of study,
(b) failure in any subject twice,
(c) transgression of a conditional enrolment stipulation and
agreement.
(ii) Where a student's progress is unsatisfactory, the Departmental
Academic Progress Committee may recommend the following:
(a) a restricted and conditional enrolment only be approved,
(b) exclusion from the course.
(iii) A student who wishes to appeal against the Department's
written recommendation is required to do so in accordance
with the University's Statutes. The procedures to be followed in
lodging a submission, hearing of submissions and
communicating the results of hearings are set out in the
University's Statutes.
(iv) Excluded students have no right of re-admission to the course
from which they were excluded. Students who have been
excluded may apply for re-admission not less than one calendar
year from the date of exclusion. The student must provide, with
his or her application, evidence of changed circumstances
which significantly improve the applicant's likelihood of
academic success.
MASTER OF SCIENCE IN COMPUTER SCIENCE
Course Code: SMCS
MASTER OF SCIENCE IN COMPUTER AND
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES
Course Code: SMCM
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The Masters programs develop a sound theoretical knowledge of
contemporary Computer Science techniques and/or the techniques
in one specified field of study from the Mathematical Sciences.
Emphasis is also placed on the application of these techniques in
areas of business and industry.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course an applicant must have
successfully completed an appropriate degree or an equivalent
combination of qualifications and experience.
Applicants must be competent in tertiary level mathematics and
computing.
Applicants with any of the following qualifications may apply for
credits against specific coursework subjects up to the indicated
maximum.
(a) A degree in computer science (4).
(b) A four year honours degree in computer science (12).
(c) A pass degree (without a major in computer science) followed
by an appropriate graduate diploma (8).
(d) A combination of qualifications and experience equivalent to
(a), (b), or (c) above.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered on a full-time basis over two years or on an
equivalent part-time basis.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Semester Points
Year 1
4 x Approved Electives in Computer Science 1 48
4 x Approved Electives in Computer Science 2 48
Year 2
4 x Approved Electives 1 48
RCM6103 Major Thesis, or 2 48
RCM6102 Minor Thesis, and 2 24
2 x Approved Electives 2 24
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCE SUBJECTS
Year 1
2 x Approved Electives in Computer Science 1 24
2 x Approved Electives in Mathematics 1 24
2 x Approved Electives in Computer Science 2 24
2 x Approved Electives in Mathematics 2 24
Year 2
2 x Approved Electives in Computer Science 1 24
2 x Approved Electives in Mathematics 1 24
RCM6103 Major Thesis, or 2 48
RCM6102 Minor Thesis, and 2 24
2 x Approved Electives 1 24
Total 192
Students must obtain a pass in14 semester units and a thesis
equivalent to two semester units; or 12 semester units and a thesis
equivalent to four semester units.
For the award of MSc in Computer Science, at least 8 units must be
selected from the Computer Science stream. For the award of MSc
in Computer and Mathematical Sciences, at least 6 units must be
selected from the Mathematical Sciences stream.
THESIS
Where possible the candidate will be encouraged to choose a topic
related to his/her own work situation.
RCM6102 – 24 credit points
RCM6103 – 48 credit points
PROGRESSION REGULATIONS
The School’s Academic Committees (Examiners' Meetings) will, at
the end of each semester, consider the results and progress of all
students enrolled in the course.
Progression is based on the following guidelines:
(i) Where any subject must be repeated, enrolment in that subject
must be at the first opportunity following the initial failure.
(ii) Students will not normally be allowed to enrol in any subject for
which at least a H3 grade has not been attained in any of the
pre-requisite subjects.
UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS
These regulations should be read in conjunction with Victoria
University's Statute 6.4.1. – Unsatisfactory Progress. The following
regulations apply to both full-time and part-time students.
(i) The following shall constitute unsatisfactory progress:
(a) failure in at least 50 per cent of the assessed subjects for
which a student has enrolled in a semester of study,
(b) failure in any subject twice,
(c) transgression of a conditional enrolment stipulation and
agreement.
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
283
(ii) Where a student's progress is unsatisfactory, the School’s
Academic Progress Committee may recommend the following:
(a) a restricted and conditional enrolment only be approved,
(b) exclusion from the course.
(iii) A student who wishes to appeal against the School’s written
recommendation is required to do so in accordance with the
University's Statutes. The procedures to be followed in lodging
a submission, hearing of submissions and communicating the
results of hearings are set out in the University's Statutes.
(iv) Excluded students have no right of re-admission to the course
from which they were excluded. Students who have been
excluded may apply for re-admission not less than one calendar
year from the date of exclusion. The student must provide, with
his or her application, evidence of changed circumstances
which significantly improve the applicant's likelihood of
academic success.
MASTER OF SCIENCE IN SOFTWARE
ENGINEERING
Course Code: SMSE
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The Master of Science in Software Engineering provides students
with the basic knowledge and technical skills in the areas of
software specification, design and implementation. Specific skills
pertinent to the development and management of large software
projects. Human communication skills including the professional
presentation of ideas, designs and solutions, and the documentation
associated with software development projects. Human
communication skills including the professional presentation of
ideas, designs and solutions, and the documentation associated with
software development projects. Management skills, in relation to: a
software project from concept to delivery; the units derived during
software development; people, as part of a team and as a leader.
The ability to deal with constantly changing technology by using
knowledge and understanding of concepts and applying them to
real problems in a variety of contexts. Professional awareness,
including social and legal responsibility and ethics.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course an applicant must have
successfully completed an appropriate degree or an equivalent
combination of qualifications and experience.
Applicants must be competent in tertiary level mathematics and
computing (which may have to be demonstrated in special tests).
Applicants with any of the following qualifications may apply for
credits against specific coursework subjects up to the indicated
maximum:
(a) A degree in with major studies in software engineering(4)
(b) A four year honours degree in (12)
(c) A pass degree (without a major in software engineering)
followed by software engineering graduate diploma (8)
(d) A combination of qualifications and experience equivalent to
(a), (b), or (c) above.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered on a full-time basis over two years or on an
equivalent part-time basis.
For candidates given credit, the minimum duration must be at least
the equivalent of one and a half years of full-time study following a
three year degree.
COURSE STRUCTURE
To complete the Master of Science in Software Engineering requires
the successful completion of eight cores subjects, six elective subjects
and a minor thesis, (2 subject equivalence), or eight core subjects,
four elective subjects and a major thesis, (4 subject equivalence).
Credit
Semester Points
Year 1
RCM6840 Software Engineering 1 1 12
RCM6701 Internet Data Management 1 1 12
2 x Approved Electives in CS 1 24
1 x Approved Elective 1 12
RCM6841 Software Engineering 2 2 12
RCM6843 Software Engineering Project 2 12
RCM6702 Internet Data Representation 1 2 12
Year 2
RCM6846 Object Oriented Design 1 12
RCM6842 Advanced Topics in Software Engineering 1 12
RCM6845 Object Oriented Technology 1 12
1 x Approved Elective 1 12
RCM6102 Minor Thesis, or 2 24
2 x Approved Electives, and 2 24
RCM6103 Major Thesis 2 48
Total 192
PROGRESSION REGULATIONS
The School’s Academic Committees (Examiners' Meetings) will, at
the end of each semester, consider the results and progress of all
students enrolled in the course.
Progression is based on the following guidelines:
(i) Where any subject must be repeated, enrolment in that subject
must be at the first opportunity following the initial failure.
(ii) Students will not normally be allowed to enrol in any subject for
which at least a H3 grade has not been attained in any of the
pre-requisite subjects.
UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS
These regulations should be read in conjunction with Victoria
University's Statute 6.4.1. – Unsatisfactory Progress. The following
regulations apply to both full-time and part-time students.
(i) The following shall constitute unsatisfactory progress:
(a) failure in at least 50 per cent of the assessed subjects for
which a student has enrolled in a semester of study,
(b) failure in any subject twice,
(c) transgression of a conditional enrolment stipulation and
agreement.
(ii) Where a student's progress is unsatisfactory, the School’s
Academic Progress Committee may recommend the following:
(a) a restricted and conditional enrolment only be approved,
(b) exclusion from the course.
(iii) A student who wishes to appeal against the School’s written
recommendation is required to do so in accordance with the
University's Statutes. The procedures to be followed in lodging
a submission, hearing of submissions and communicating the
results of hearings are set out in the University's Statutes.
(iv) Excluded students have no right of re-admission to the course
from which they were excluded. Students who have been
excluded may apply for re-admission not less than one calendar
year from the date of exclusion. The student must provide, with
his or her application, evidence of changed circumstances
which significantly improve the applicant's likelihood of
academic success.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
284
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
285
SCHOOL OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
The School of Electrical Engineering is the amalgamation of the
former Department of Electrical and Electronic Engineering and the
Department of Applied Physics.
The School currently enrol some 30 PhD and Masters research
Students and more than 200 coursework Masters students. A major
proportion of the School’s postgraduate students are from overseas.
The School has world class research laboratories and facilities,
especially in the Telecommunication, Microelectronics and Optical
Technology areas. The School’s Centre for Mobile and
Microelectronics is part of the Australian Telecommunication
Collaborative Research Centre program.
The staff and students in the School of Electrical Engineering are
active in the following research areas:
• mobile communications;
• optical technology;
• microelectronics;
• robotics;
• telecommunication;
• automation and energy systems.
POSTGRADUATE PROGRAMS BY RESEARCH
The School offers the following research degrees:
• Doctor of Philosophy;
• Master of Engineering;
• Master of Science.
Research topics compatible with the School’s experimental facilities
and staff expertise are negotiated between student and supervisors.
A number of research programs are available in the above areas. In
addition, applicants with interests in similar areas are encouraged
to discuss them with the School, telephone (03) 9919 4703.
MINIMUM STANDARDS OF ENTRY
Applicants should have formal qualifications and experience at least
equivalent to an Australian four year Bachelor’s degree with
Honours in an appropriate discipline. Applicants wishing to
undertake a PhD who do not already possess a Master’s degree will
normally be expected to enrol initially for a Master’s degree and
will be considered for transfer to PhD candidature after one year of
study.
All overseas applicants must provide evidence of proficiency in the
English language:
• IELTS – an overall band score of 6.5, subject to individual
profile; or
• TOEFL – a score of 580+, and a Test of Written English (TWE)
score of 5.5.
PROGRAM DURATION
A full-time research Masters Degree will normally take up to two
years and a PhD degree is likely to take a minimum of three years.
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY
Course Code:EPHC, EPLC, EPOT
MASTER OF ENGINEERING (RESEARCH)
Course Code: ERIT, EROT
MASTER OF SCIENCE (RESEARCH)
Course Code: SRHC, SRLC, SROT
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Semester Points
VEE8001 Research (Full Time) 1 48
VEE8002 Research (Full Time) 2 48
VEE8011 Research (Part Time) 1 24
VEE8012 Research (Part Time) 2 24
or
RPH8001 Research (Full Time) 1 48
RPH8002 Research (Full Time) 2 48
RPH8011 Research (Part Time) 1 24
RPH8012 Research (Part Time) 2 24
Postgraduate Programs by Coursework
The School offers a range of coursework programs at postgraduate
level:
Graduate Certificate in:
• Microelectronic Engineering;
• Systems and Control Engineering;
• Telecommunication Engineering;
Graduate Diploma in:
• Microelectronic Engineering
• Systems and Control Engineering
• Telecommunication Engineering
Master of Engineering in:
• Electrical and Electronic Engineering
• Microelectronic Engineering
• Systems and Control Engineering
• Telecommunication Engineering
Master of Engineering Science in:
• Computer and Microelectronic Engineering
Double Degrees:
• Master of Engineering in Microelectronic Engineering/Master
of Engineering Science in Computer and Microelectronic
Engineering
PROGRESSION REGULATIONS
These regulations should be read in conjunction with Victoria
University's Statute 6.4.1. – Unsatisfactory Progress.
(i) The following shall constitute unsatisfactory progress:
(a) failure in at least 50 per cent of the assessed subjects for
which a student has enrolled in a semester of study,
(b) failure in any subject twice,
(c) transgression of a conditional enrolment stipulation and
agreement.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
286
(ii) Where a student's progress is unsatisfactory, the Departmental
Academic Progress Committee may recommend the following:
(a) a restricted and conditional enrolment only be approved,
(b) exclusion from the course.
(iii) A student who wishes to appeal against the Department's
written recommendation is required to do so in accordance
with the University's Statutes. The procedures to be followed in
lodging a submission, hearing of submissions and
communicating the results of hearings are set out in the
University's Statutes.
(iv) Excluded students have no right of re-admission to the course
from which they were excluded. Students who have been
excluded may apply for re-admission not less than one calendar
year from the date of exclusion. The student must provide, with
his or her application, evidence of changed circumstances
which significantly improve the applicant's likelihood of
academic success.
SUPPLEMENTARY ASSESSMENT
(i) Supplementary assessment is not normally available in any
subject or course of the School, other than for reasons of
Special Consideration of illness or other cause.
(ii) In special circumstances the Head of School may authorise
supplementary assessment in one or more subjects.
(iii) Supplementary assessment may be initiated by a subject
Examination Board or the School, where appropriate special
grounds are seen to exist.
(iv) Supplementary assessment will require application,
authorisation, and the payment of fees as defined by the School
from time to time.
GRADUATE CERTIFICATE IN
MICROELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
Course Code: ETMI
GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN MICROELECTRONIC
ENGINEERING
Course Code: EGMI
MASTER OF ENGINEERING IN
MICROELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
Course Code: EMMI
The major role of professional engineers in the Australian workforce
is to act as agents for change through the development of
technically sound, economically viable and socially acceptable
solution to complex and new technical problems.
In this context, the microelectronics engineer today is faced with
many challenges brought about by the rapid advances in computer,
multimedia and telecommunication technology. The Master of
Engineering course in Microelectronic Engineering addresses all
aspects of this technology, from high level specification of
microelectronic systems, through implementation alternatives, and
the effective use of design tools, to realisation of integrated circuits.
The course aims to produce engineers with the necessary skills and
practical experience to satisfy the requirements of the
microelectronics industry. An important feature of the course is the
opportunity it provides for the students to design their own
integrated circuits.
The Chipskills program is a Victorian Government initiative that
seeks to develop a range of professional and vocational training
programs in areas relevant to the semiconductor industry. The
project involves Victoria University, RMIT University, Industry and
Victorian State Government.
Development and delivery of this course is shared between each of
the partner universities.
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The general aims of the course are to provide graduates with:
(a) high levels of both logical and lateral thinking development so
that the graduates can lead constructive change through
innovation;
(b) the ability to use a multi-disciplinary engineering philosophy
towards the synthesis, design and integration of solutions; and
(c) a level of professional development in confidence, judgement
and experience such that the implementation of proposed
solutions proceeds successfully.
The specific aims of the course are to:
(a) develop integrated circuit design expertise in embedded
systems, digital, mixed signal and system-on-chip systems
design and verification;
(b) develop a basic understanding of the device physics, the
fabrication process and the testing to the level needed by IC
designers;
(c) develop the advanced technical and algorithmic skills necessary
to master state of the art microelectronic technology;
(d) develop research skills necessary to obtain specialist knowledge
of issues pertinent to integrated circuit design;
(e) cultivate logical and lateral thinking that leads to creation and
innovation in the pursuit of solutions to engineering problems.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Admission to the course normally requires a four year Bachelor of
Engineering degree in Electronic Engineering or Computer
Engineering or Communication/Telecommunication Engineering or
a four-year Bachelor of Science (Honours) degree in an appropriate
field, or an equivalent qualification.
Applicants with a three year Bachelor of Science degree (in
appropriate field) or a Bachelor of Engineering degree in another
field may also be considered for admission on the condition that
they may be required to take additional (preliminary) subjects that
will strengthen their knowledge and skills in digital systems, analog
electronics and microprocessor systems.
Full fee paying international students must have qualifications which
are equivalent to those listed above. In addition they must provide
evidence of proficiency in the English language as assessed by:
• IELTS – an overall band score of 6.5, subject to individual
profile; or
• TOEFL – a score of 580, and a Test of Written English (TWE)
score of 5.5.
A panel comprising of academics from each of the partner
universities will carry out student selection into this course.
COURSE DURATION
The duration of the course, in normal mode of delivery, is one and a
half years full-time or part-time equivalent for Masters course.
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
287
COURSE STRUCTURE
The Master of Engineering course is structured to allow students to
exit at different academic levels with either, Graduate Certificate,
Graduate Diploma or Master of Engineering qualifications. The
completion of the Graduate Certificate in Microelectronic
Engineering requires successful completion of four units, Graduate
Diploma in Microelectronic Engineering requires successful
completion of either eight units or six units and minor project, and
Master of Engineering in Microelectronic Engineering requires
successful completion of either eight units and major project or ten
units and minor project.
Credit
Points
Year 1
Core Units
VEH6002 Integrated Circuit Design 12
VEH6003 EDA tools and Design Methodology 12
JRM6001 HDL and High Level Synthesis 12
JRM6013 Project Management and Entrepreneurship 12
Electives
JRM6005 Embedded Systems Design 12
JRM6006 Emerging Topics in IC Design 12
JRM6010 Introduction to Microsystems Technology 12
JRM6011 Introduction to Semiconductor
Device Fabrication 12
JRM6012 Semiconductor Device Physics 12
JRM6015 Special Electives* 12
VEH6004 Digital System Design 12
VEH6007 Advanced VLSI Design 12
VEH6008 VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems 12
VEH6009 Reliability and Testability in IC Design 12
VEH6014 RF Design 12
VEH6015 Special Electives* 12
VEH6016 Verilog HDL 12
VEH6017 Digital System Design with Verilog 12
VEH6018 Analog & Mixed Signal Design 12
VEH6020 Minor Project 24
VEH6030 Major Project 48
*Note: All Special Electives for Chipskills program are to be
approved by the Course Directors (RMIT & VU).
ASSESSMENT
Assessment will be a combination of written assignments, tests,
laboratory work, project work and examinations. Supplementary
assessment is not normally available in any unit except at the
discretion of the Head of School/Department of the University
offering the unit and under exceptional circumstances.
GRADUATE CERTIFICATE IN SYSTEMS AND
CONTROL ENGINEERING
Course Code: ETSY
GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN SYSTEMS AND
CONTROL ENGINEERING
Course Code: EGSY
MASTER OF ENGINEERING IN SYSTEMS AND
CONTROL ENGINEERING
Course Code: EMSY
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The objective of this group of courses is to provide opportunities for
suitably qualified persons to acquire skills and expertise necessary
to undertake research and development in the field of automation
and control engineering.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Admission to the course requires a four year Bachelor of
Engineering degree in Electrical & Electronic Engineering or an
equivalent.
Full-fee paying international students are required to have
qualifications equivalent to above, and in addition, they must
provide evidence of proficiency in English Language, as assessed
by; (a) International English Language Testing System – an overall
band score of 6+ subject to individual profile, or, (b) Test of English
as a Foreign Language – a score of 550+, and a Test of Written
English score of 5+.
COURSE DURATION
The duration of the course, in the normal mode of delivery, is one
and half year for Master of Engineering, one year for Graduate
Diploma, and a half year for Graduate Certificate.
COURSE STRUCTURE
The course is unit based and consists of two core subjects (each of
one unit), a set of elective subjects (each of one unit), a minor
project (of two units), and a major project (of four units). A unit is
worth 12 credit points.
The eligibility for the Graduate Certificate requires the successful
completion of the two core subjects and two elective subjects.
The eligibility for the Graduate Diploma requires the successful
completion of either (a) the two subjects and six elective subjects, or
(b) the two core subjects, four elective subjects, and a minor subject.
The eligibility for the Master of Engineering requires the successful
completion of either (a) the two core subjects, eight elective subjects,
and a minor project, or (b) the two core subjects, six elective
subjects, and a major project.
Credit
Points
Year 1
ACE1913 Professional Communication 12
Core Subjects
VEA6310 Linear Systems and Control 12
VEA6320 Optimal Filtering and
Parameter Estimation 12
Elective Subjects
VEA6311 Modelling and Computer Control 12
VEA6321 Fuzzy and Neural Control 12
VEA6331 Robotics and Programmed Control 12
VEA6341 Measurement Technology 12
VEA6351 Power Systems Operation and Control 12
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
288
VEA6312 Model Based Process Control 12
VEA6322 Process Instrumentation and Control 12
VEA6332 Electronic Control of Motors 12
VEA6342 Power Distribution Systems 12
VEA6352 Digital Simulation of
Protection Systems 12
Projects
VEA6350 Minor Project 24
VEA6300 Major Project 48
ASSESSMENT
Assessment will be based on a combination of written assignments,
laboratory exercises, project work, and formal examinations.
Supplementary assessments are not normally available.
GRADUATE CERTIFICATE IN
TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Course Code: ETTT
GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN
TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Course Code: EGTE
MASTER OF ENGINEERING IN
TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
Course Code: EMTT
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The objective of the course is to provide opportunities for suitably
qualified persons to acquire skills and expertise necessary to
undertake research and development in the field of
telecommunication engineering.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Admission to the course requires a four year Bachelor of
Engineering degree in Electrical & Electronic Engineering, or an
equivalent.
Full-fee paying international students are required to have
qualifications equivalent to above, and in addition, they must
provide evidence of proficiency in English Language, as assessed
by; (a) International English Language Testing System – an overall
band score of 6+ subject to individual profile, or, (b) Test of English
as a Foreign Language – a score of 550+, and a Test of Written
English score of 5+.
COURSE DURATION
The duration of the course, in normal mode of delivery, is one and a
half year for Master of Engineering, one year for Graduate
Diploma, and a half year for Graduate Certificate.
COURSE STRUCTURE
The course is unit based and consists of two core subjects (each of
one unit), a set of elective subjects (each of one unit), a minor
project (of two units), and a major project (of four units). A unit is
worth 12 credit points.
The eligibility for the Graduate Certificate requires the successful
completion of the two core subjects and two elective subjects.
The eligibility for the Graduate Diploma requires the successful
completion of either (a) the two subjects and six elective subjects, or
(b) the two core subjects, four elective subjects, and a minor subject.
The eligibility for the Master of Engineering requires the successful
completion of either (a) the two core subjects, eight elective subjects,
and a minor project, or (b) the two core subjects, six elective
subjects, and a major project.
The minor project may be substituted with the project subjects.
Credit
Points
Core Subjects
VET6510 Communication Theory 12
VET6520 Digital Communication Principles 12
Elective Subjects
VET6511 Data Network Analysis and Design 12
VET6521 Digital Switching and
Signalling Systems 12
VET6531 Wireless Communication Subsystems 12
VET6541 Multimedia and Internet Technology 12
VET6551 Microwave Electronic Circuit Design 12
VET6561 Local Area and Broadband Networks 12
VET6512 Intelligent Networks and Network
Management 12
VET6522 Telecommunication Tariff
Structures and Teletraffic Engineering 12
VET6532 Microwave and Satellite
Communication Systems 12
VET6542 Mobile and Personal
Communication Systems 12
VET6552 Computer Networks and
Networking Software 12
VET6562 Digital Signal Processing 12
Project Subjects
VET6501 Communication System Modelling
and Simulation 1 12
VET6502 Communication System Modelling
and Simulation 2 12
Projects
VET6550 Minor Project 24
VET6500 Major Project 48
ASSESSMENT
Assessment will be based on a combination of written assignments,
laboratory exercises, project work, and formal examinations.
Supplementary assessments are not normally available.
MASTER OF ENGINEERING IN ELECTRICAL
AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
Course Code: EMEE
The Master of Engineering in Electrical and Electronic Engineering
(Coursework) was introduced in 1988 and was revised in 2004.
The course is application oriented and is intended for those who
aspire to senior technical positions in various specialised areas of
Electrical and Electronic Engineering.
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The objective of the course is to provide opportunity for practising
electrical and electronic engineers to:
• broaden their technological base from their first degree to a
chosen area of specialisation;
• obtain an in-depth understanding of the relevant theoretical
principles involved in the chosen area of specialisation;
• develop skills necessary to carry out independent research and
development work related to the chosen areas of specialisation;
• acquire expertise and keep abreast with the latest
developments in the chosen area of specialisation.
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
289
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Admission to the course requires a four year Bachelor of
Engineering degree in Electrical & Electronic Engineering, or an
equivalent.
Full-fee paying international students are required to have
qualifications equivalent to above, and in addition, they must
provide evidence of proficiency in English Language, as assessed
by; (a) International English Language Testing System – an overall
band score of 6+ subject to individual profile, or, (b) Test of English
as a Foreign Language – a score of 550+, and a Test of Written
English score of 5+.
COURSE DURATION
The duration of the course, in normal mode of delivery, is two years
for full-time students and a part-time equivalent for part-time students.
COURSE STRUCTURE
The course is unit based and offers a range of study units
comprising of core and elective subjects (each of one unit) in a
chosen area of specialisation, a research project (of four units), and
a project management program (of four units). A unit is worth 12
credit points. The completion of the course requires the completion
of 16 units comprising of four core subjects in a chosen area of
specialisation, four elective subjects in the chosen area of
specialisation, four other units at Masters level from any Masters
programs, and, either a research project in the chosen area of
specialisation, or the project management program.
Credit
Points
AUTOMATION ENGINEERING SPECIALISATION
Core Subjects
VEA6311 Modelling and Computer Control 12
VEA6312 Model Based Process Control 12
VEA6321 Fuzzy and Neural Control 12
VEA6322 Process Instrumentation and Control 12
Elective Subjects
VEA6331 Robotics and Programmed Control 12
VEA6332 Electronic Control of Motors 12
VEA6341 Measurement Technology 12
VEA6342 Power Distribution Systems 12
VEA6351 Power Systems Operation and Control 12
VEA6352 Digital Simulation of Protection Systems 12
COMPUTER ENGINEERING SPECIALISATION
Core Subjects
VEC6111 Computer Technology 12
VEC6112 Advanced Microprocessors 12
VEC6121 Object Oriented Software 12
VEC6122 Operating Systems & Multiprocessing 12
Elective Subjects
VEC6131 Computer Interconnection Hardware 12
VEC6132 Digital System Modelling
and Simulation 12
VEC6141 Software Engineering 12
VEC6142 Managing Software Projects 12
VEC6151 Data Base and Query Systems 12
VEC6152 Applied Knowledge Systems 12
MICROELECTRONIC ENGINEERING SPECIALISATION
Core Subjects
VEH6001 HDL and High Level Synthesis 12
VEH6002 Integrated Circuit Design 12
VEH6003 EDA Tools and Design Methodology 12
VEH6004 Digital System Design 12
Elective Subjects
VEH6007 Advanced VLSI Design 12
VEH6008 VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems 12
VEH6009 Reliability and Testability in IC Design 12
VEH6014 RF Design 12
VEH6016 Verilog HDL 12
VEH6017 Digital System Design with Verilog 12
VEH6018 Analog & Mixed Signal Design 12
Other Microelectronic electives as approved by course co-ordinator.
PHOTONIC ENGINEERING SPECIALISATION
Core Subjects
VPP6511 Fibre Optic Communication Systems 12
VPP6512 Advanced Fibre Optics 12
VPP6521 Optics and Lasers 12
VPP6522 Digital Communication over
Optical Networks 12
Elective Subjects
VPP6531 Quantum Optics 12
VPP6532 Optical Fibre Sensors 12
VPP6541 Optical Materials 12
VPP6542 Data Acquisition 12
TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING SPECIALISATION
Core Subjects
VET6501 Communication System Modelling
& Simulation 1 12
VET6502 Communication System Modelling
& Simulation 2 12
VET6510 Communication Theory 12
VET6520 Digital Communication Principles 12
Elective Subjects
VET6511 Data Network Analysis & Design 12
VET6512 Intelligent Networks & Network
Management 12
VET6521 Digital Switching and Signalling Systems 12
VET6522 TelecomTariffs and
Teletraffic Engineering 12
VET6531 Wireless Communication Subsystems 12
VET6532 Microwave & Satellite Communication
Systems 12
VET6541 Multimedia & Internet Technology 12
VET6542 Mobile & Personal Communication
Systems 12
VET6551 Microwave Electronic Circuit Design 12
VET6552 Computer Networks & Networking
Software 12
VET6561 Local Area & Broadband Networks 12
VET6562 Digital Signal Processing 12
Project Subjects
VEE6000 Research Project 60
VEE6050 Project Management Program 60
ASSESSMENT
Assessment will be based on a combination of written assignments,
laboratory and project works, and formal examinations and
presentations. Supplementary assessments are not normally
available.
MASTER OF ENGINEERING SCIENCE IN
COMPUTER & MICROELECTRONIC
ENGINEERING (COURSEWORK)
Course Code: EMCE
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The computer systems engineer today is faced with many challenges
brought about by the rapid advances in computer multimedia and
telecommunication technology. The recent development of computer
systems engineering has already established a firm foundation for a
need of qualified engineers in this high technology industry.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
290
The Master of Engineering Science course in Computer Systems
Engineering addresses all aspects of this technology. From high level
specification of computer and microelectronic systems, through
implementation alternatives, to realisation of chips and also
introduces students to the anticipated demands of Information
Technology in the twenty first century. Course material is drawn from
a variety of backgrounds and includes: Integrated Circuit Design
Methodologies, Digital and Analog Circuit Design, and Computer
System Design and Implementation. The course aims to produce
engineers with the necessary skills and practical experience to
satisfy the requirements of the microelectronics industry. An
important feature of the course is the opportunity it provides for the
students to design their own integrated circuits. The specific aims of
the course are to: provide an integrated foundation for electrical
disciplinary studies and course specialisation into the area of
Computer Systems Engineering; develop the advanced technical
skills necessary to master state of the art microelectronic technology;
develop research skills necessary to obtain specialist knowledge of
subjects pertinent to a given field of study; cultivate logical and
lateral thinking that leads to creation and innovation in the pursuit of
solutions to engineering problems.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Admission to the course requires a four year Bachelor of
Engineering degree in Electrical & Electronic Engineering or a four
year Bachelor of Applied Science (Honours) degree in an
appropriate field, or an equivalent.
Applicants with a three year Bachelor of Applied Science degree (in
an appropriate field) or a Bachelor of Engineering degree in
another field may also be considered for admission on the condition
that they may be required to complete some preliminary subjects
that will strengthen their knowledge and skills in Computer Systems
Microelectronic Engineering.
Full-fee paying international students are required to have
qualifications equivalent to those above, and in addition, they must
provide evidence of proficiency in English Language, as assessed
by;
• IELTS – an overall band score of 6.5, subject to individual
profile; or
• TOEFL – a score of 580, and a Test of Written English (TWE)
score of 5.5.
COURSE DURATION
The course is of one year duration for full-time students and a part-
time equivalent for part-time students.
COURSE STRUCTURE
The course is unit based and consists of research projects (2 units), a
core unit and elective subjects. The completion of the course requires
successful completion of two units of research project, the core unit
and at least five units of elective subjects of which at least three must
be from Computer and Microelectronics Engineering disciplines.
Credit
Points
Project Subjects
VEH6101 ASIC Design 12
VEH6102 Custom IC Design B 12
Core Subject
VEH6003 EDA Tools and Design Methodology 12
Elective Subjects
VEH6002 Integrated Circuit Design 12
VEH6003 EDA tools and Design Methodology 12
VEH6004 Digital System Design 12
VEH6007 Advanced VLSI Design 12
VEH6008 VLSI Digital Signal Processing Systems 12
VEH6009 Reliability and Testability in IC Design 12
VEH6014 RF Design 12
VEH6015 Special Electives* 12
VEH6016 Verilog HDL 12
VEH6017 Digital System Design with Verilog 12
VEH6018 Analog & Mixed Signal Design 12
VEH6111 Digital Circuit Design 12
VEH6121 Basic IC Design/Devices 12
VEH6122 Custom IC Design A 12
VEH6132 Integrated Circuit Testability 12
VEH6142 Emerging Technologies 12
VEH6151 VHDL and High Level Synthesis 12
VEH6152 Advanced Microprocessors 12
plus other discipline electives as approved by the course
co-ordinator.
ASSESSMENT
Assessment will be based on a combination of written assignments,
laboratory exercises, project works, tests, and examinations.
MASTER OF ENGINEERING IN
MICROELECTRONIC ENGINEERING/MASTER
OF ENGINEERING SCIENCE IN COMPUTER
AND MICROELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
Double Degree
Course Code: EMMC
The major role of professional engineers in the Australian workforce
is to act as agents for change through the development of
technically sound, economically viable and socially acceptable
solution to complex and new technical problems.
In this context, the microelectronics engineer and/or the computer
systems engineer today is faced with many challenges brought
about by the rapid advances in computer, multimedia and
telecommunication technology. The double degree in Master of
Engineering in Microelectronics Engineering & Master of
Engineering Science in Computer and Microelectronic Engineering
course addresses all aspects of this technology, from high level
specification of microelectronic and computer systems, through
implementation alternatives, and the effective use of design tools, to
realisation of integrated circuits and advanced computer
architectures. The course aims to produce engineers with the
necessary skills and practical experience to satisfy the requirements
of the microelectronics and the computer systems industry.
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The general aims of the course are to provide graduates with:
(a) high levels of both logical and lateral thinking development so
that the graduates can lead constructive change through
innovation;
(b) the ability to use a multi-disciplinary engineering philosophy
towards the synthesis, design and integration of solutions; and
(c) a level of professional development in confidence, judgement
and experience such that the implementation of proposed
solutions proceeds successfully.
The specific aims of the course are to:
(a) develop integrated circuit design expertise in embedded
systems, digital, mixed signal and system-on-chip systems
design and verification, and advanced computer systems
architecture
(b) develop a basic understanding of the device physics, the
fabrication process and the testing to the level needed by IC
designers and computer systems engineers;
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
291
(c) develop the advanced technical and algorithmic skills necessary
to master state of the art microelectronic technology and
computer system;
(d) develop research skills necessary to obtain specialist knowledge
of issues pertinent to integrated circuit design and computer
systems;
(e) cultivate logical and lateral thinking that leads to creation and
innovation in the pursuit of solutions to engineering problems.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Admission to the course normally requires a four year Bachelor of
Engineering degree in Electronic Engineering or Computer
Engineering or Communication/Telecommunication Engineering or
a four year Bachelor of Science (Honours) degree in an appropriate
field, or an equivalent qualification.
Applicants with a three year Bachelor of Science degree (in
appropriate field) or a Bachelor of Engineering degree in another
field may also be considered for admission on the condition that
they may be required to take additional (preliminary) subjects that
will strengthen their knowledge and skills in digital systems, analog
electronics and microprocessor systems.
Full fee paying international students must have qualifications which
are equivalent to those listed above. In addition they must provide
evidence of proficiency in the English language as assessed by;
• IELTS – an overall band score of 6.5, subject to individual
profile; or
• TOEFL – a score of 580, and a Test of Written English (TWE)
score of 5.5.
A panel comprising of academics from the university will carry out
student selection into this course.
COURSE DURATION
The duration of the double degree, in normal mode of delivery, is
two years full-time or part-time equivalent.
COURSE STRUCTURE
The double degree in Master of Engineering in Microelectronics
Engineering & Master of Engineering Science in Computer and
Microelectronic Engineering course is structured to allow students to
exit at five different academic levels with either, Graduate
Certificate, Graduate Diploma, Master of Engineering Science
(Computer & Microelectronic Engineering), Master of Engineering
(Microelectronic Engineering) or Double Degree – Master of
Engineering (Microelectronic Engineering)/Master of Engineering
Science (Computer & Microelectronic Engineering) qualifications.
The completion of the Graduate Certificate in Microelectronic
Engineering requires successful completion of four units, Graduate
Diploma in Microelectronic Engineering requires successful
completion of either four core units and four microelectronics
electives or six units (of which at least four are microelectronic
electives) and minor project, Master of Engineering Science
(Computer & Microelectronic Engineering) requires successful
completion of four core units and four computer systems electives,
Master of Engineering (Microelectronic Engineering) requires
successful completion of either four core unit, six microelectronics
electives and a minor project or four core units, four microelectronics
electives and a major project. The Double Degree – Master of
Engineering (Microelectronic Engineering)/Master of Engineering
Science (Computer & Microelectronic Engineering) requires
successful completion of either four core unit, six microelectronics
electives, four computer systems electives and a minor project or
four core units, four microelectronics electives, four computer systems
electives and a major project.
Credit
Points
Core Units
JRM6001 HDL and High Level Synthesis 12
JRM6013 Project Management &
Entrepreneurship 12
VEH6002 Integrated Circuit Design 12
VEH6003 EDA tools and Design Methodology 12
Microelectronics Elective Subjects
JRM6005 Embedded Systems Design 12
JRM6006 Emerging Topics in IC Desig 12
JRM6010 Introduction to Microsystem
Technology 12
JRM6011 Introduction to Semiconductor
Device
Fabrication 12
JRM6012 Semiconductor Device Physics 12
VEH6007 Advanced VLSI Design 12
VEH6008 VLSI Digital Signal
Processing Systems 12
VEH6009 Reliability and Testability in IC Design 12
VEH6014 RF Design 12
VEH6018 Analog and Mixed Signal Design 12
VEH6102 Custom IC Design B 12
VEH6111 Digital Circuit Design 12
VEH6121 Basic IC Design/Devices 12
VEH6132 Integrated Circuit Testability 12
Computer Elective Subjects
VEH6004 Digital System Design 12
VEH6005 Embedded Systems Design 12
VEH6016 Verilog and High Level Synthesis 12
VEH6017 Verilog Digital System Design 12
VEH6101 ASIC Design 12
VEH6122 Custom IC Design A 12
VEH6142 Emerging Technologies 12
VEH6151 VHDL and High Level Synthesis 12
VEH6152 Advanced Microprocessor 12
plus other discipline electives as approved by the course
co-ordinator.
Project Units
VEH6020 Minor Project 24
VEH6030 Major Project 48
ASSESSMENT
Assessment will be a combination of written assignments, tests,
laboratory work, project work and examinations. Supplementary
assessment is not normally available in any unit except at the
discretion of the Head of School/Department of the University
offering the unit and under exceptional circumstances.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
292
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
293
SCHOOL OF HEALTH SCIENCES
The School of Health Sciences provides educational opportunities
for graduates and other suitably qualified health professionals.
The School of Health Sciences has excellent facilities and
experienced staff and has developed considerable research
expertise. The School of Health Sciences has been particularly pro-
active in developing cross-discipline research with other Faculty
Schools and in establishing projects specific to the needs of its local
community. Three major disciplines are represented in the School of
Health Sciences; these are Osteopathic Medicine, Paramedic
Sciences, and Chinese Medicine.
COURSE OFFERINGS
In 2006, the School of Health Sciences will offer the following
postgraduate programs:
Campus* Full-time Part-time
Graduate Diploma in Complementary
Therapies S Y Y
Graduate Diploma in Western Herbal
Medicine C n/a Y
Master of Health Science
– Intensive Care Paramedicine ZA Y Y
– Osteopathy C Y n/a
– Osteopathy (for Medical Practitioners) C n/a Y
– by Coursework I,S Y Y
– by Minor Thesis S Y Y
– by Research S Y Y
Doctor of Philosophy S Y Y
*Campus C=City Flinders Lane S=St Albans ZA=Internet
GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN
CLINICAL CHINESE MEDICINE
Course Code: HGCM
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aims of the course are to:
• provide an opportunity for students to revise and consolidate
their clinical knowledge in Chinese Medicine;
• develop and extend students' existing clinical experience;
• further students’ knowledge of research design and
methodology; and
• further students’ knowledge of and skills in health counselling.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must have
successfully completed a three year Diploma in either Acupuncture
or Chinese Herbal Medicine (including the relevant biomedical
sciences) from a formal Chinese Medicine program; or equivalent.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over one year on a full-time or part-time
equivalent.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Students will complete 5 core subjects and will choose either
Acupuncture or Chinese Herbal Medicine as their specialisation.
Credit Hours
Points per week
Semester One
HHR0001 Introduction to Research Design & Methods 12 3
HHT5001 Advanced Chinese Medicine
Clinical Practice 1 12 8
plus Chinese Herbal Medicine Stream Units
CHINESE HERBAL MEDICINE STREAM
HHI5001 Clinical Internal Medicine 12 4
RFB5115 Clinical Pharmacology & Pathology
for Chinese Herbal Medicine 12 4
or
ACUPUNCTURE STREAM UNITS
HHK5001 Sports & Musculo-Skeletal Medicine
for Acupuncturists 12 4
RBM5125 Human Bioscience for Acupuncturists 12 4
Semester Two
HHT5002 Research Project 12 5
HHT5003 Counselling Skills for Chinese
Medicine Practice 12 4
HHT5004 Advanced Chinese Medicine
Clinical Practice 2 12 8
plus either Chinese Herbal Medicine Stream Unit
CHINESE HERBAL MEDICINE STREAM
HHI5002 Clinical Chinese Medical
Gynaecology and Dermatology 12 4
or
ACUPUNCTURE STREAM UNIT
HHK5002 Gynaecology & Obstetrics for
Acupuncturists 12 4
Course Total 96 520
GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN
COMPLEMENTARY THERAPIES
Course Code: HGCT
(This course is currently under review.)
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course aims to provide students with the opportunity to:
• explore a range of conceptual and practical approaches to
health and healing;
• develop innovative approaches to assisting individuals and
groups in the healing process;
• develop skills in planning, implementing and evaluating
complementary medicine and healing therapies;
• develop competence in a range of complementary medicine
and healing therapies; and
• critically appraise a range of complementary medicine and
healing therapies.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must hold an
undergraduate degree, or equivalent qualification, in health, social
sciences or education.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
294
Applicants who, in pursuit of their occupation, or by other means
recognised and approved by the School, can demonstrate their
ability to undertake successful study at a postgraduate level may
also apply for entry to the course.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over two years on a part-time basis. Full-time
study may be available depending on demand.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit Hours
Points per week
Year One
Semester One
HHG5115 Philosophical Concepts of Healing 12 3
HHG5125 Theoretical Foundations of Healing 1 12 3
Semester Two
HHG5135 Healing 1: Colour, Sound and
Movement 12 4
HHG5145 Theoretical Foundations of Healing 2 12 3
Total Year One 48 156
Year Two
Semester One
HHG5245 Healing 2: Tactile Therapies 12 4
HHR0001 Introduction to Research Design
and Methods 12 3
Semester Two
HHG5255 Healing 3: Approaches to
Healing Skills 12 4
HHG5265 Research Project 12 3
Total Year Two 48 168
Course Total 96 324
GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN
PREPARED CHINESE MEDICINES
Course Code: HGPC
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course aims to:
• provide an opportunity for qualified Acupuncturists to establish
and develop knowledge and skills in Chinese Herbal Medicine
(CHM); and
• make available to qualified Acupuncturists a safe and effective
adjunctive therapy to their practice of Acupuncture.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission applicants must hold a degree, or
equivalent qualification, in Traditional Chinese Acupuncture,
deemed appropriate by the School of Health Sciences.
Some applicants may be required to undertake a bridging course in
academic skills.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over one year on a full-time basis or part-time
equivalent.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit Hours
Points per week
Semester One
HHH5105 Introduction to Chinese Herbal
Medicine 12 3
HHH5115 Clinical Pharmacology for Herbal
Medicine 12 3
HHH5125 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 1 12 3
HHH5135 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 2 12 3
Semester Two
HHH5225 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 3 12 3
HHH5235 Clinical Specialities (PCM) 12 3
HHH5245 PCM Clinical Practicum 24 8
Course Total 96 338
MASTER OF HEALTH SCIENCE –
OSTEOPATHY
Course Code: HMOS
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aims of this course are to equip graduates with:
• the diagnostic skills required by a primary health care
practitioner;
• the ability to assess the health status of the patient, including
physical, socio-economic and psychological aspects;
• the ability to formulate and prescribe a suitable and safe
treatment program;
• skills in a full range of osteopathic techniques;
• an awareness of the application of osteopathic principles
relevant to patient management;
• the ability to interact with other health care providers and
advisers for the benefit of the patient, including an awareness
of the need to gain informed consent;
• communication skills related to the patient and other persons,
to maintain inter-professional co-operation and respect;
• an awareness of the cost effectiveness of osteopathic treatment;
• an awareness of the support systems that are available and an
ability to take part in a multi-practitioner research program;
• an awareness of the need for continuing self education;
• clinical proficiency and an ability to manage all aspects of
osteopathic patient care; and
• an awareness of their professional and personal responsibilities
and an ability to effectively organise and manage their
working environment.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must have
satisfactorily completed the Bachelor of Science – Clinical Sciences,
or equivalent.
Students will be required to undergo a Victoria Police check before
commencing clinical placement units. Police checks need to be
conducted annually throughout the programme. Prospective and
continuing students should be aware that not passing relevant
police checks may restrict access to clinical placements necessary
for graduation.
At the commencement of the course students must complete the Level
2 First Aid Certificate update.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over two years on a full-time basis.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit Hours
Points per week
Year One
Semester One
HHD4185 Clinical Diagnosis & Management 5 12 6
HHL4181 Research 1 12 5
HHO4187 Osteopathic Science 7 8 5
HHS4183 Psychology & Social Science 3 8 4
HHU4187 Clinical Practicum 7 8 210*
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
295
Semester Two
HHD4286 Clinical Diagnosis &
Management 6 12 6
HHL4282 Research 2 12 5
HHO4288 Osteopathic Science 8 8 5
HHU4288 Clinical Practicum 8 8 210*
HHY4285 Pathology 5 8 2
Total Year One 96 788
Year Two
Semester One
HHD5187 Clinical Diagnosis &
Management 7 12 10
HHL5183 Research 3 12 5
HHO5189 Osteopathic Science 9 12 5
HHU5189 Clinical Practicum 9 12 219*
Semester Two
HHD5288 Clinical Diagnosis &
Management 8 12 7
HHL5284 Research 4 12 5
HHO5280 Osteopathic Science 10 12 7
HHU5280 Clinical Practicum 10 12 219*
Total Year Two 96 802
Course Total 192
*Total Semester Hours f o r Unit
Check subject details with course co-ordinator.
CLINICAL PRACTICUM
Clinical practicum is direct student/patient contact supervised by
registered osteopaths and medical practitioners. In order to register
as an osteopath, students must complete the minimum attendance
requirements for clinical units over the full five years of the
combined Bachelor of Science–Clinical Sciences and Master of
Health Science–Osteopathy courses. This will be achieved
cumulatively by an increasing commitment of time to clinically
based learning as students progress through the course and their
clinical skills increase. Clinical practicum during the Master degree
consists of 324 hours in year one and 412 hours in year two
(including holiday hours and external placement).
As the teaching clinics are required to operate 50 weeks per year,
in order to maintain a public service and provide essential
continuity of patient care, students will be expected to supplement
any deficit in clinical practicum hours outside semester hours. The
arrangement of clinical hours will be flexible and may vary from
year to year dependent upon resources, patient availability and
student development.
During the clinical practicum students will develop and enhance the
following skills within the supervised clinical setting: interpersonal
and communication skills; history taking; general observation;
clinical methods; general medical and osteopathic examination;
data analysis and interpretation; pathological diagnosis;
radiological diagnosis; special investigations; osteopathic treatment
and management; and professional behaviour and ethics.
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
Registration and regulation of osteopaths is a function of State
Registration Boards in a similar way to the regulation of other health
professions such as medicine and dentistry. Graduates of this
course will be eligible to apply to be registered as osteopaths in
Victoria. The course also has the support of the Australian College
of Physical Medicine.
MASTER OF HEALTH SCIENCE
(BY MINOR THESIS)
Course Code: HMHM
This course will appeal to health practitioners from a variety of
disciplines who have a desire to further studies via a minor thesis in
their particular area of practice.
These areas may include:
• Ambulance Services;
• Community Health;
• Emergency Services;
• Health Sciences;
• Mental Health Workers;
• Paramedic Sciences;
• Sociology of Health;
• Tactile Therapies;
• Culture Issues in Health;
• Gerontology – Aged Care Services; and
Women’s Health.
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aims of the course are to:
• provide opportunities for students to extend their knowledge
and enable ongoing critical analysis of primary health care;
• encourage students’ further investigation and reflection in a
specific area of professional interest; and
• enhance students’ ability to apply research knowledge in a
collegial environment.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must have
satisfactorily completed, at an average grade level of second class
honours (H2), a Graduate Diploma in Health Sciences, or
equivalent, as approved by the School of Health Sciences.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over one year on a full-time basis or part-time
equivalent.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit Semester
Points Hours
Semester One
Full-time
HFR0001 Advanced Quantitative Research Methods or16 39
HFR0002 Advanced Qualitative Research Methods 16 39
HHT1127 Minor Thesis (full-time) 32 117
Semester Two
HHT1137 Minor Thesis (full-time) 48 156
Course Total 96 588
Part-time
HFR0001 Advanced Quantitative Research Methods 16 39
HFR0002 Advanced Qualitative Research Methods 16 39
HHT1147 Minor Thesis (part-time) 8 36
HHT1157 Minor Thesis A (part-time) 24 36
HHT1158 Minor Thesis B (part-time) 24 36
HHT1159 Minor Theis C (part-time) 24 36
Course Total 96 222
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
296
MASTER OF HEALTH SCIENCE
(BY RESEARCH)
Course Code: HRNS
The School of Health Sciences offers the Master of Health Science
(by Research). Staff are able to supervise research projects in a
broad range of health and related areas, some of which are listed
below. It is suggested that applicants explore their research interests
with the Course Co-ordinator and contact with appropriate staff will
be facilitated. A thesis on an approved topic will be required.
AREAS OF SPECIALISATION
• Acupuncture;
• Ambulance Services;
• Chinese Herbal Medicine;
• Clinical Practice;
• Complementary Therapies;
• Cultural Issues and Health;
• Emergency Services;
• Health Administration;
• Health Counselling;
• Health Education;
• Natural Medicine;
• Osteopathic Medicine;
• Rehabilitation;
• Traditional Chinese Medicine;
• Western Herbal Medicine;
• Women’s Health.
COURSE DURATION
The course normally requires two years of full-time study or part-time
equivalent.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the Master of Health Science (by
Research) applicants must hold a degree in health science, or a
related area, or equivalent, as approved by the School of Health
Sciences.
DEGREE REQUIREMENTS
The research thesis must be original work conducted under the
supervision of the student advisor/s and with the approval of the
Postgraduate Studies Committee of the University.
The thesis of the candidate will be examined externally by
examiners of high academic standing in the area of the candidate’s
thesis topic.
Coursework may be required of candidates to further enhance the
knowledge of a specific topic relevant to the field of study. Such
coursework would run concurrent to the research.
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY
Course Code: HPHS
The School of Health Sciences offers PhD research programs in
many areas of specialisation such as:
• Acupuncture;
• Ambulance Services;
• Chinese Herbal Medicine;
• Clinical Practice;
• Complementary Therapies;
• Cultural Issues and Health;
• Emergency Services;
• Health Counselling;
• Health Education;
• Health Administration
• Natural Medicine;
• Osteopathic Medicine;
• Rehabilitation;
• Traditional Chinese Medicine
• Chinese Medicine;
• Western Herbal Medicine;
• Women’s Health.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission of the Doctor of Philosophy applicants must
have a Master degree or a four-year undergraduate degree with
honours at first class (H1) or upper second class (H2A) level.
Applicants who do not meet the normal admission requirements,
may be admitted upon demonstration of exceptional background
and experience.
COURSE DURATION
The course normally requires three years of full-time study or part-
time equivalent.
DEGREE REQUIREMENTS
The research thesis must be original work conducted under the
supervision of the student advisor/s and with the approval of the
Postgraduate Studies Committee of the University.
The thesis of the candidate will be examined externally by
examiners of high academic standing in the area of the candidate’s
thesis topic.
Coursework may be required of candidates to further enhance the
knowledge of a specific topic relevant to the field of study. Such
coursework would run concurrent to the research.
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
297
SCHOOL OF MOLECULAR SCIENCES
POSTGRADUATE PROGRAMS BY RESEARCH
The School offers the following research degrees:
• Doctor of Philosophy;
• Master of Science
The research activities in the School of Molecular Sciences (SMS)
can be broadly classified into the three areas in which it conducts its
undergraduate Bachelor of Science programs, namely:
• Biotechnology
• Medical, Forensic and Analytical Chemistry
• Nutrition, Food and Health Science
Indeed, the SMS continuously strives to incorporate the latest
research findings in its undergraduate teaching programs. In the
School of Molecular Sciences, research is performed within the
following specific research groups:
• Biotechnology
• Food Science
• Synthetic Chemical and Analytical Science
These groups interact strongly with each other as well as engaging
with a wide range of local and international universities,
government and private research groups, centres and organisations.
Examples of external collaborators include:
• Agrifood Technology
• Australian Government Analytical Laboratory (AGAL)’
• Australian Wine Research Institute
• Carlton and United Breweries Ltd
• Centre for Packaging, Transportation and Storage (Victoria
University)
• CSIRO
• Deakin University
• Department of Primary Industries
• Flinders University of South Australia
• Food Sciences Australia
• Monash University
• Polychip Pharmaceuticals Pty Ltd
• State Chemistry Laboratory (SCL)
• The Royal Women’s Hospital
• The University of Auckland, New Zealand
• The University of Melbourne
• Victoria Institute of Biotechnology (VIB)
• Victoria Forensic Science Centre
• Vital Health Sciences Pty Ltd
The School of Molecular Sciences research activities are supported
by world-class facilities and are conducted by highly qualified and
experienced research staff. The SMS has a wide range of research
projects in the above areas and has attracted both private and
government financial support for its programs. Much of the research
attracts industry funding on a collaborative or contractual basis,
however, there is much scope to develop projects of a fundamental
nature as well.
BIOTECHNOLOGY RESEARCH GROUP
Research within the Biotechnology Research Group (BRG) involves a
broad range of biotechnology disciplines, including microbiology,
cell culture, biochemistry, reproductive biology and molecular
biology. Specific expertise within the BRG includes protein
chemistry, enzymology, gene expression, genetic engineering, gene
discovery, fermentation technology, food and anaerobic
microbiology. Research topics include:
• Forensic investigations using genetic polymorphisms.
• Probing the molecular basis of cancer.
• Improving antibody yields from a hybridoma cell line.
• Molecular characterisation and utilisation of genes and proteins
associated with tolerance to cell stressors such as metal ions,
ethanol and heat.
• Using recombinant DNA and molecular techniques to improve
ethanol yield and productivity during fermentations for beer,
wine and industrial ethanol production.
• Improving the efficiency and adaptability of microbial
processes used for environmental sustainability, including
bioethanol from lignocellulosic wastes and bioremediation.
• Premature rupture of fetal membranes and the initiation of birth
in women.
CHEMICAL SYNTHESIS AND ANALYTICAL
SCIENCE RESEARCH GROUP
The Chemical Synthesis and Analytical Science (CSAS) research
group encompasses research activity in the general area of synthetic
organic chemistry and applied analytical chemistry. The group has
major research interests in the following areas:
• analysis of environmental pollutants
• environmental chemistry
• separation and analysis of trace constituents of commercial
materials, metallic ores and biological substances
• development of novel instrumentation for atomic analysis and
wine science
• polymer stabilisation and degradation
• polymer packaging science
• landfill technology
• waste minimisation
• applied analytical and inorganic chemistry and separation
technology
• biocatalysis in the synthesis of materials of commercial
importance
• occupational and environmental health and safety
• preparation of vitamins and neutraceuticals with increased
bioavailability
• chemical education
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
298
FOOD SCIENCE RESEARCH GROUP
The Food Science Research Group (FSRG) is a recognised key
research unit within the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science.
The unit facilitates an integrated, multidisciplinary approach to
research and brings together much of the Faculty’s resident expertise
in the broad areas of microbiology, biochemistry, biotechnology
and food science and technology, as well as incorporating the
expertise of the analytical biochemistry and chemistry, sensory
analysis, rheology and nutrition.
The current areas of research interest in the FSRG include:
GRAIN SCIENCE AND PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY
Physical properties, chemical composition, enzymology and quality
attributes including: pigments in wheat; analysis of flour milling
streams for quality attributes; biochemical characteristics of starch;
functional properties and food applications of wheat and legumes
and their components; baking and other processing technologies.
MICROBIOLOGY, DAIRY AND FERMENTATION TECHNOLOGY
Probiotics and functional foods; food and industrial applications of
lactic acid bacteria; isolation and characterisation of natural
antimicrobials; bacteriocins; Mozzarella cheese using exopoly
saccharide producing starter cultures, fat replacers, modified
starches. Development of cheddar cheese, yoghurt and soy yoghurt
incorporating probiotic culture.
FOOD BIOCHEMISTRY AND BIOCHEMICAL ANALYSIS
Enzymatic and non-enzymatic deteriorative changes with respect to
fruit and vegetable processing; enzyme analysis; immobilised
enzyme and cell technologies; enzyme catalysis in supercritical and
organic solvents; extractive and fractionation technologies, including
membrane processing and supercritical fluid extraction of
agricultural and food produce; NIR analysis of foods.
FRUIT AND VEGETABLE SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
Physical and chemical properties, enzymes in fruits and vegetables,
other processing and storage technologies including modified
atmosphere packaging, coatings, and processed products. Analysis
of fresh fruit and vegetable processing with an aim to minimize
energy use. Anthocyanins as functional ingredient and their fate
during preservation and processing of fruits and vegetables.
FATS AND OILS
Optimisation of processing parameters of frying. Analysis of
nutritional parameters in a range of vegetable oil based products.
HERBS AND SPICES
Chemical analysis of groups of herbs and spices to determine if they
contain common components known to cause allergic reactions in
certain individuals.
WINE ANALYSIS
Chemical composition analysis of red and white wines for quality
attributes and authenticity The School has a wide range of research
projects in the above areas and has attracted good financial
support for its programs. Much of the research attracts industry
funding on a collaborative or contractual basis, however there is
broad scope to develop projects of a fundamental nature as well.
The School works closely with the Food Marketing and Packaging
and polymer units of the university and with external organisations
including Food Science Australia and Agrifood Technology.
COURSEWORK PROGRAMS
The School offers the following postgraduate coursework programs:
• Graduate Diploma in Environmental Management
• Master of Science in Environmental Management
• Master of Science (Food Science)
• Master of Science in Biotechnology (Biotechnology and
Bioinformatics Streams)
GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN ENVIRONMENTAL
MANAGEMENT
Course Code: SGEM
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course is aimed at producing graduates with a good
understanding of contemporary environmental problems and
solutions. A mixture of coursework will be provided including solid
waste management, water pollution control and environmental law.
COURSE DURATION
The course will be offered in full-time and part-time modes.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
The normal entry requirement is a relevant degree or diploma, but
special admission may be granted for applicants without the
required qualifications but with a number of years of relevant
industrial experience.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Points Hours
SESSION 1
RCS5111 Principles of Environmental
Science and Management 12 36
RCS5121 Environmental Law & Standards 1 12 36
RCS5131 Water Pollution Monitoring
& Liquid Waste Management 12 36
RCS5172 Solid Waste Management 12 36
SESSION 2
RCS5100 Research Methodology 12 36
RCS5132 Environmental Law & Standards 2 12 36
RCS5141 Air Quality Management 12 36
RCS5192 Cleaner Production Technology
& Waste Minimization 12 36
ASSESSMENT
Assessment will consist of assignments, field reports, class
presentations and end-of-semester examinations.
MASTER OF SCIENCE IN ENVIRONMENTAL
MANAGEMENT
Course Code: SMEM
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The Masters program is designed to enhance the students’ range of
knowledge in environmental waste management and pollution
control, to provide additional skills in research and development
and to enable a focusing of practical skills into a specific research
area which may be related to the candidates’ current employment.
COURSE DURATION AND STRUCTURE
The Masters program consists of a coursework component that is
equivalent to the Graduate Diploma and a research project
component. Both components are available on a part-time basis.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Points Hours
SESSION 1
RCS5111 Principles of Environmental Science
& Management 12 36
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
299
RCS5131 Water Pollution Monitoring & Liquid
Waste Management 12 36
RCS5172 Solid Waste Management 12 36
RCS5121 Environmental Law & Standards 1 12 36
SESSION 2
RCS5141 Air Quality Management 12 36
RCS5192 Cleaner Production Technology &
Waste Minimization 12 36
RCS5132 Environmental Law & Standards 2 12 36
RCS5100 Research Methodology 12 36
SESSION 1 AND/OR 2
RCS6000 Project 48 150
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
The normal entry requirement is a four year Bachelor of Science
Degree or a three year Bachelor of Science Degree with relevant
experience.
ASSESSMENT
Assessment for the will consist of assignments, field reports, class
presentations, end-of-semester examinations and a project report.
MASTER OF SCIENCE (FOOD SCIENCE)
Course Code: SMFS
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course is designed to provide professional training in food
science and technology for graduates in science, applied science,
engineering, agricultural and other related disciplines who may or
may not have had previous formal training in this area.
The course seeks to equip graduates with the necessary knowledge
and skills required to operate effectively in the food industry at
various management levels. The course is designed not only to train
recent graduates as food technologists, but also to enable those
already employed in the food and associated industries to enhance
their professional status.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course an applicant must have
satisfactorily completed a four year science based undergraduate
degree, or a science based honours degree, or a three year science
based undergraduate degree plus relevant employment experience.
Applicants who do not meet these qualifications may be admitted
after the completion of an approved course of pre-study, or on
submission of such other evidence of academic, professional or
vocational attainment to indicate that the applicant possesses the
educational preparation and capacity to pursue the course.
COURSE DURATION
The course requires the successful completion of a program of
compulsory and elective subjects, totalling a minimum of 192 credit
points.
Subject to demand, the course is offered on a full-time basis over
two years or equivalent part time.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit Hours
Points per week
Year 1
(a) Core subjects – 128 credit points
RBF6730 Preservation and Processing Technology 16 6
RBF6750 Food Safety and Quality Assurance 16 6
RBF6720 Food Microbiology 16 6
RBF6710 Food Analysis 16 6
RCM6760 Research Practice, Ethics and
Communication in Food Science
and Technology 16 6
RBF6920 Major Project-1 16 12
RBF6925 Major Project-2 16 12
RBF6760 Chemistry of Foods 16 6
(b) Elective subjects (commodity) – 48 credit points selected from
the following:
RBF6721 Fruit & Vegetable Science and Technology 16 6
RBF6722 Grain Science & Technology 16 6
RBF6723 Muscle Food Science and Technology 16 6
RBF6724 Dairy Science and Technology 16 6
(c) Elective subjects (general) – 16 credit points selected from the
following or relevant subjects complementary to objective of the
course:
RBF6910 Minor Project 16 6
RBF6745 Food Product Development 16 6
RBF6740 Special Topics in Food Technology 16 6
RBF6930 Industry Training 16 6
RBF3240 Functional Foods 12 5
MASTER OF SCIENCE – BIOTECHNOLOGY
(BIOTECHNOLOGY AND BIOINFORMATICS
STREAMS)
Course Code: SMBT
COURSE OBJECTIVES
This Masters program is designed to provide students with skills,
knowledge and expertise in the field of Biotechnology and related
areas. The specific aims of the course are to provide students with:
(a) A sound knowledge at an advanced level of the scientific
principles underlying the basis of the biotechnology industry
and research.
(b) Problem solving skills
(c) The skills to use and locate information on problems relating to
biotechnology from textbooks, scientific journals and the
Internet.
(d) The skills to develop a research project proposal which will
include a summary of the techniques and methodology required
for a research proposal.
(e) Excellent oral and written communication skills including
discussions on intellectual property, commercialization and
ethical considerations.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Applications will be considered from graduates who have
completed an undergraduate degree, comprising the equivalent of
at least three years full-time study in an approved area of study.
Eligible areas include Biology, Chemistry, Biochemistry, Biomedical
Sciences, Veterinary Science, MBBS and other related fields.
Academic performance will be required to be, on average, at least
at credit level in the undergraduate degree. A substantial amount of
laboratory work will be required to have been completed in the
undergraduate degree so that students are already proficient in
basic biological, microbiological and chemical laboratory
techniques. In addition, there will be the normal requirement for a
minimum score of 6.5 in the IELTS English language test.
COURSE DURATION
The duration of the course is two years full-time with the option of a
part-time equivalent.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
300
COURSE STRUCTURE
This Biotechnology course consists of two streams, Biotechnology
and Bioinformatics, each of which involves a total of 16 subjects
totaling 192 credit points for the course. In the first year of the
degree, students for each stream are required to take 8 core
subjects. In the second year of the degree students in the
Biotechnology stream are required to choose elective subjects from
group B and four others from groups B or C.. Students in the
Bioinformatics stream must take four core subjects, choose four
electives from group Bs or C. Other subjects from the School of
Molecular Sciences or other schools may also be taken as electives,
subject to approval by the Course Co-ordinator.
Credit
Semester Points
BIOTECHNOLOGY AND BIOINFORMATICS STREAMS
(Group A, Core Subjects)
Year 1
RMS5110 Molecular Genetics Theory 1 12
RMS5120 Applied Genetic Engineering 1 12
RMS5140 Bioprocessing Technology Principles 1 12
RMS5145 Bioprocessing Technology Applications 1 12
RMS5130 Functional Genomics & Bioinformatics 2 12
RMS5135 Functional Genomics and
Bioinformatics Applications 2 12
RMS5160 Intellectual Property and Commercialization 2 12
RMS5150 Ethics and Regulatory Affairs in
Biotechnology 2 12
Year 2
Elective subjects for Biotechnology Stream
(Group B, Choice of four)
RMS6130 Bioinformatics 1 1 12
RMS6170 Drug Design and Development 1 12
RMS6142 Biotechnology Research Methods 1 12
RCM6980 Statistical Methods for Biological Research 1 12
RMS6135 Bioinformatics 2 2 12
RMS6145 Protein Production, Purification and Analysis 2 12
RMS6140 Cell Culture and Fermentation Technology 2 12
RMS6141 Animal and Plant Biotechnology 2 12
Core Subjects for Bioinformatics Stream
RMS6130 Bioinformatics 1 1 12
RCM5800 Object Oriented Programming 1 12
RMS6135 Bioinformatics 2 2 12
RCM6607 Statistical Computing 2 12
Other Electives
(Group C, from other schools and faculties)
RCM5800 Object Oriented Programming 12
RCM6607 Statistical Computing 12
RCM5802 Information Systems 12
RCM5803 Data Structures and Programming 12
RCM5602 Quality Management and Statistics 12
BMO5600 Project Management 12
BLO6502 Law for Management 12
BLB3129 Intellectual Property Law 12
BHO6505 Marketing Management 12
BEO5304 International Business Operations 12
PACKAGING AND POLYMER RESEARCH
UNIT
COURSES OFFERED
The Packaging and Polymer Research Unit offers postgraduate
courses leading to the award of:
• Doctor of Philosophy
• Master of Engineering (Research)
• Master of Engineering Science in Packaging (Coursework)
A wide variety of research projects are available. Most programs
offer participation in industry projects.
Additionally, the Unit is currently developing a program for a
degree qualification in packaging.
The Unit also offers a variety of short training courses on various
topics relevant to the packaging science and technology domain. In
addition the Unit offers the following undergraduate subjects in
Packaging Technology, available within the School of Architectural,
Civil and Mechanical Engineering:
EMU4401 Transportation Dynamics
EMU4402 Design and Testing of Containers
FOCUS
The Packaging and Polymer Research Unit (PPRU) has strong
associations with scientists and engineers from Schools across the
Faculty as well as the wider University. Its purpose is to complement
the University’s educational courses as relevant to packaging
technology with research programs in areas concerned with the
packaging and distribution of goods. Through the Sustainable
Packaging Alliance, a strategic R&D initiative in collaboration with
RMIT Centre for Design and Birubi Innovation, the Unit’s research
focus is very much driven by the need to develop environmentally,
economically and socially sustainable packaging systems. In
addition to its research program and education activities, the Unit
undertakes technical studies and testing for industry clients
Victoria University is unique in Australia in having dedicated
considerable resources toward high quality research in packaging,
which is an important part of one of the University’s areas of
research focus.
MISSION
The mission of the Unit is to be a leading, internationally-recognized
provider of education, research and related services in packaging
and polymer science and technology.
The Unit is particularly mindful of its role in the development of
partnerships with industry, commerce and government through
collaborative research, consultancy, educational and training
programs and dissemination of technical information. It has
established a variety of research collaborations and networks with
various research organizations in Australia and overseas.
RESEARCH ACTIVITIES
The Unit’s research program is very much driven by the needs of
industry, government and community that are identified through the
Sustainable Packaging Alliance. Research programs currently in
progress include anti-microbial and active food packaging; the use
of recycled materials in food contact applications; environmental
impact evaluation and strategy development; measurement, analysis
and laboratory simulation of distribution environments; odour
characterization and oxidative stability of polymer materials;
development of new techniques for sustainable packaging design
and evaluation; and others.
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
301
INTERNATIONAL PROGRAMS: OFFSHORE
PROGRAM CONDUCTED IN NETHERLANDS
MASTER OF ENGINEERING SCIENCE IN
PACKAGING (COURSEWORK)
Course Code: EMPK
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Points Hours
RPK6001 Development of Packaging Systems 16 36
RPK6002 Marketing Research 12 27
RPK6003 Costing Methodologies and Impacts 8 18
RPK6004 Investment/Capital Analysis and Budgeting 12 27
RPK6005 Quality Assurance and Management 8 18
RPK6006 Operational Strategies 12 27
RPK6007 Business and Marketing Strategy 12 27
RPK6008 Packaging Strategy Development
and Implementation 16 36
RPK6009 Development Project/Minor thesis 48
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
302
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
303
SCHOOL OF NURSING AND MIDWIFERY
The School of Nursing and Midwifery is a leader in clinical nursing
education. A feature of the Graduate programs within the School is
the focus on contemporary nursing and health care practice.
Programs include an articulated Masters degree, which includes exit
points at Graduate Certificate and Graduate Diploma level, Master
of Midwifery, Graduate Diploma in Substance Abuse, Master of
Nursing (Research) and PhD.
Discipline focus areas are in cancer nursing, palliative care,
orthopaedics, paediatrics, neurology, cardiothoracic and accident
and emergency nursing.
The Graduate Diploma in Substance Abuse is designed for health
care practitioners from a range of disciplines. Our lively research
culture is generating interest from industry and professional
organisations.
COURSE OFFERINGS
In 2006, the School of Nursing and Midwifery will offer the
following postgraduate programs:
Campus* Full-time Part-time
Graduate Diploma in Substance Abuse Studies F Y Y
Master of Nursing S Y Y
incorporating
Graduate Certificates in:
– Cardiothoracic Nursing S Y Y
– Cancer Nursing S Y Y
– Emergency Nursing S Y Y
– Gerontic Nursing S Y Y
– Neuroscience Nursing S Y Y
– Orthopaedic Nursing S Y Y
– Paediatric Nursing S Y Y
Graduate Diplomas in:
– Cardiothoracic Nursing S Y Y
– Cancer Nursing S Y Y
– Emergency Nursing S Y Y
– Gerontic Nursing S Y Y
– Neuroscience Nursing S Y Y
– Orthopaedic Nursing S Y Y
– Paediatric Nursing S Y Y
Master of Midwifery S n/a Y
incorporating:
– Graduate Diploma in Midwifery S Y Y
Master of Health Science
– Mental Health S Y Y
Master of Public Health Nursing S Y Y
incorporating
– Graduate Certificate in Public Health
Nursing S Y Y
– Graduate Diploma in Public Health
Nursing S Y Y
Master of Nursing (by Research) S Y Y
Doctor of Philosophy S Y Y
*Campus S=St Albans F=Footscray Park
GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN SUBSTANCE ABUSE
STUDIES
Course Code: HGSA
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aim of the course is to provide students with a broad
understanding of theories, treatment methods, health promotion skills
and therapeutic intervention techniques that would allow them to
make a positive contribution in the area of substance abuse through
appropriate direct intervention and referral.
The course is designed to be both a useful stand alone qualification
and to articulate with several other graduate courses offered within
the University.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
This course is a multi-disciplinary program and is open to all health
care professionals or individuals working in the area of substance
abuse.
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must normally hold
a bachelor degree. Applicants who do not meet the normal
admission requirement, but who possess appropriate professional
experience and meet such other requirements as are perceived
appropriate by the School, may be considered. These requirements
may include the completion of selected nursing and/or other
subjects from the undergraduate degree program, or a preparation
for study program.
Applicants may be required to attend an interview and would need
to demonstrate to an academic panel adequate preparation to
undertake studies at a higher level.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over one year on a full-time basis or part-time
equivalent, depending on demand.
COURSE STRUCTURE
The part-time structure is as follows:
Credit Hours
Points per week
Year One
Semester One
HNS5010 Theories of Addiction 12 3
HNS5020 Treatment of Substance Abuse 12 3
Semester Two
HNS5030 Health Promotion/Prevention
in Substance Abuse 12 3
HNS5040 Therapeutic Interventions 12 3
Total Year One 48 144
Year Two
Semesters One and Two
HNM6122 Clinical Project 48 3
Course Total 96 180
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
304
MASTER OF NURSING
Course Code: HMPN
Incorporating –
GRADUATE CERTIFICATES
AND GRADUATE DIPLOMAS IN
– CANCER NURSING
– EMERGENCY NURSING
– GERONTIC NURSING
– NEUROSCIENCE NURSING
– ORTHOPAEDIC NURSING
– PAEDIATRIC NURSING
– NURSING MANAGEMENT
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The Master of Nursing has been developed for nursing graduates
who wish to undertake studies in clinical speciality areas of nursing
within a range of health care settings, with specific aims to:
• produce nurse specialists with expertise in their area of
specialty with diagnostic and decision making skills to solve
complex patient care problems in the work environment;
• produce nurse professionals with skills to investigate, challenge
and develop current practices;
• develop skills to analyse and critique contemporary theories
that inform practice;
• enhance students’ ability to analyse social and political
dynamics within the current health care environment;
• produce nurse professionals who not only adapt to the
changing needs within the health care environment, but who
will also engage in political processes to facilitate institutional
and social change;
• develop skills to form collaborative relationships with agencies
and other health care professionals; and
• provide the opportunity for students to develop a knowledge of
self and explore a range of world views.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must normally:
hold an undergraduate degree in Nursing or equivalent; and
be registered with the Nurses Board of Victoria as a Division 1
Nurse; and
be working in the area of specialisation at the time of application.
Applicants who do not meet the normal admission requirements will
be considered if they are eligible for registration as a Division 1
Nurse with the Nurses Board of Victoria; have relevant professional
experience in Nursing, as approved by the School; and meet such
other requirements as are perceived appropriate by the School.
These requirements may include the completion of selected nursing
and/or other subjects from the undergraduate degree program, or a
preparation for study program.
COURSE DURATION
The Master of Nursing is offered over three semesters on a full-time
basis or part-time equivalent.
COURSE STRUCTURE
The Program provides for multiple entry and exit points. Upon
completion of the first semester of study students may exit with the
Graduate Certificate in their chosen area of specialisation. Upon
completion of the second semester of study students may exit with
the Graduate Diploma in their chosen area of specialisation. The
third and final semester of study completes the articulated sequence
of study leading to the Master of Nursing.
Credit Hours
Points per week
Semester One
HNR0001 Introduction to Research Design
and Methods 16 3
Specialisation Subject Level 1 16 3
Specialisation Subject Level 2 16 3
Total 48 117
Semester Two
HNG5001 Issues & Policies in Professional
Practice 16 3
Specialisation Subject Level 3
COURSEWORK STREAM
HNM6118 Evidence Based Practice in
Specialised Nursing 16 3
MINOR THESIS STREAM
HFR0001 Advanced Quantitative Research
Methods or 16
HFR0002 Advanced Qualitative Research
Methods 16 3
Semester Two Total 48 117
Exit point for the Graduate Diploma in Specialisation Nursing
Semester Three
COURSEWORK STREAM
HNM6119 Leadership & Management in
Specialised Nursing 16 3
HNM6029 Clinical Specialised Project 16x2 32 6
MINOR THESIS STREAM
HHA6115 Minor Thesis (Full-Time) 48 9
Semester Three Total 117
Cumulative Course Total 96
SPECIALISATION SUBJECTS
Level 1
HNA5001 Gerontic Nursing Studies 1 16
HNE5001 Emergency Nursing Studies 1 16
HNM5001 Cancer Nursing Studies 1 16
HNN5001 Neuroscience Nursing Studies 1 16
HNO5001 Orthopaedic Nursing Studies 1 16
HNP5001 Paediatric Nursing Studies 1 16
HNM5004 Nursing Management 1 16
Level 2
HNA5002 Gerontic Nursing Studies 2 16
HNA5003 Gerontic Nursing Studies 3 16
HNE5002 Emergency Nursing Studies 2 16
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
305
HNM5002 Cancer Nursing Studies 2 16
HNN5002 Neuroscience Nursing Studies 2 16
HNN5003 Neuroscience Nursing Studies 3 16
HNO5002 Orthopaedic Nursing Studies 2 16
HNO5003 Orthopaedic Nursing Studies 3 16
HNP5002 Paediatric Nursing Studies 2 16
HNP5003 Paediatric Nursing Studies 3 16
HNM5005 Nursing Management 2 16
HNM5006 Nursing Management 3 16
Level 3
HNE5003 Emergency Nursing Studies 3 16
HNM5003 Cancer Nursing Studies 3 16
MASTER OF MIDWIFERY
Course Code: HMMW (not offered in 2006)
Incorporating –
GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN MIDWIFERY
Course Code: HGMW (not offered in 2006)
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The aim of the program is to prepare graduates who will be
expected to provide comprehensive midwifery care. The program
seeks to:
• provide students with learning experiences to enable them to
competently care for women during the childbearing continuum
according to the ACMI Competency Standards for Midwives
(1998)
• enhance students personal and professional growth within the
discipline of midwifery; and,
• provide eligibility for endorsement as a midwife on the Division
1 Register with the Nurses Board of Victoria.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
GRADUATE DIPLOMA
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must:
• be registered or be eligible to register with the Nurses Board of
Victoria as a Division 1 Nurse;
• hold an undergraduate degree in Nursing or an equivalent;
and
• hold a current practicing certificate from the Nurses Board of
Victoria
• have a minimum of one years' clinical experience following
registration as a general nurse.
Applicants who do not meet the normal admission requirements but
who possess appropriate education qualifications, work or life
experiences which would enable them to successfully undertake the
course, will be considered.
Applicants must demonstrate that they possess the educational
preparation and capacity to pursue graduate studies.
Additional requirements for admission to the course may be
prescribed by the School.
MASTER OF MIDWIFERY
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must normally:
be registered with the Nurses Board of Victoria as a Division 1
Nurse, with endorsement as a Midwife; and
hold a current annual practising certificate from the Nurses Board of
Victoria.
Applicants must also satisfy the School that they posses the
educational preparation and capacity to pursue graduate studies.
Additional requirements for admission to the course may be
prescribed by the School. Admission will be at the discretion of the
Head of School.
COURSE DURATIONS
The course is offered over four semesters. Semesters one and two
comprise the Graduate Diploma in Midwifery and are offered on a
full-time basis or part-time equivalent. The third and fourth semesters
complete the articulated sequence of study leading to the Master of
Midwifery and are offered on a full-time or part-time equivalent.
COURSE STRUCTURE
GRADUATE DIPLOMA
The course consists of six subjects, some incorporating clinical
practice. The clinical practice component will consist of short and
long term agency supervised placements. Supervision will be
provided by experienced Midwives.
Credit Hours
Points Clinical Theory
Semester One
HNM5010 Sociopolitical Aspects of
Midwifery 12 39
HNM5021 Psychosocial Context of
Maternity 12 36
HNM5011 Primary Care Midwifery (F/T) 24 72
182
or
HNM5012 Primary Care Midwifery (P/T) 24 72
Semester Two
HNR0001 Introduction to Research Design
and Methods 8 36
HNM5020 Collaborative Midwifery (F/T) 24 72
182
or
HNM5023 Collaborative Midwifery (P/T) 15 72
HNM5022 Consolidation of Midwifery Practice 16 160
Course Total 96 255
524
MASTER OF MIDWIFERY
The Master of Midwifery comprises the Graduate Diploma plus one
of the following pathways:
Credit Hours
Points per week
PATHWAY 1 – PRACTICE FOCUS
Semester One
HNM6011 Counselling in the Health Care
Context 8 36
Semester Two
HNM6012 Advanced Practice: Counselling 16 36
HNM6013 Project 24 72
Pathway 1 Total 48 144
PATHWAY 2 – RESEARCH FOCUS
Semester One
HNM6040 Research Planning 12 36
Semester Two
HHA6115 Minor Thesis (Full-Time) 48 117
or
HHA6116 Minor Thesis (Part-Time) 12 117
Pathway 2 Total 96 153
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
Graduates from this program will be eligible for endorsement as a
Midwife with the Nurses Board of Victoria. Graduates may also
apply for membership of the Australian College of Midwives Inc.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
306
MASTER OF PUBLIC HEALTH NURSING
Course Code: HMPH
Incorporating –
GRADUATE CERTIFICATE IN PUBLIC
HEALTH NURSING
Course Code: HTPU
GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN PUBLIC
HEALTH NURSING
Course Code: HGPU – not offered in 2006
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The course aims to prepare graduates with:
• enhanced knowledge and skills for professional practice as
specialist nurses in public and community health;
• knowledge and skills to enable them to participate fully in a
cross disciplinary public health team;
• ability to integrate knowledge relevant to nursing and public
health and apply this to public health issues;
• enhanced educational and personal skills for life long learning
• the ability to respond with authority to global health needs and
issues.
COURSE DURATION
The course is offered over three semesters on a full-time basis or
part-time equivalent. Upon successful completion of the first semester
of study students may exit with the Graduate Certificate in Public
Health Nursing. Upon successful completion of the second semester
of study students may exit with the Graduate Diploma in Public
Health Nursing. The third and final semester of study completes the
articulated sequence of study leading to the Master of Public Health
Nursing.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the course applicants must hold an
undergraduate degree in Nursing, or equivalent, and be registered
with the Nurses Board of Victoria. In addition, applicants choosing
to undertake the Maternal and Child Health stream must be currently
endorsed as a midwife by the Nurses Board of Victoria.
Applicants who do not meet the normal admission requirements will
be considered if they are eligible for registration as a Division 1
Nurse with the Nurses Board of Victoria, have relevant professional
experience in Nursing, as approved by the School, and meet such
other requirements as are perceived appropriate by the School.
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit Hours
Points per week
Semester One
HNM6011 Counselling in the Health Care
Context 12 3
HNU5003 Psychosocial Issues of the Family 12 3
HNU5004 Health Promotion and Education 8 3
HNU5001 Health and Development
of the Young Family*#
or
HNU5002 Health and Development in
Childhood and Adolescence*# 16 3
Semester Two
HNU5005 Issues of Professional Practice 8 3
HNU5006 Public Health: Policy and Practice 8 3
HFR0001 Advanced Quantitative Research Methods
or
HFR0002 Advanced Qualitative Research Methods16 3
HNU5001 Health and Development
of the Young Family*#
or
HNU5002 Health and Development in
Childhood and Adolescence*# 16 3
Semester Three
HHA6115 Minor Thesis (Full-Time) 48 117
HHA6116 Minot Thesis (Part-Time) 24
* Professional field work practice is not included in these hours.
# Subjects requiring two semesters of study. Thus, the subject taken in
semester one must also be taken in semester two.
PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION
Graduate will be eligible for membership with the Public Health
Association (PHA); Health Promotion Special Interest Groups of
PHA; School Nurses Special Interest Group, ANF; Maternal & Child
Health Nurses Special Interest Group, ANF; Royal College of
Nursing Australia.
MASTER OF NURSING (BY RESEARCH)
Course Code: HRNR
COURSE OBJECTIVES
The Master of Nursing (by Research) is offered to students who have
demonstrated the ability to undertake extensive study and research
in a focused area of nursing. Although expected to demonstrate a
high degree of independence, the student works under the guidance
of a qualified and experienced supervisor. While the successful
completion of this qualification depends entirely upon the
examination of the thesis, the School of Nursing also places great
emphasis on the development of research skills and background
knowledge deemed necessary for successful completion of the
research project.
AREAS OF SPECIALISATION
Staff within the School will supervise research in a number of areas
of specialisation including:
• acute care nursing;
• community health nursing;
• mental health;
• midwifery;
• neuroscience nursing;
• nursing education;
• nursing theory and clinical practice;
• ontology and epistemology of caring;
• professional nursing issues;
• substance abuse;
• women’s health.
These areas of study are not exhaustive and applicants are advised
to contact the School directly to discuss their proposed area of
study.
COURSE DURATION
Completion of the Master of Nursing (by Research) normally
requires two years of full-time study or part-time equivalent.
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
307
COURSE STRUCTURE
Credit
Points
Semester One
HNM6800 Research Thesis (Full-Time) 48
HNM6801 Research Thesis (Part-Time) 24
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the Master of Nursing applicants must
hold an undergraduate degree in nursing or equivalent.
Some students may be required to undertake additional studies in
specific areas, for example advanced research subjects.
DEGREE REQUIREMENTS
In order to be awarded the Master in Nursing (by Research) students
must undertake an appropriate research design subject, or any other
subject, as required by the School; have their candidature approved
by the Faculty; and successfully complete a thesis undertaken with
appropriate supervision.
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY
Course Code: HPNU
The School of Nursing and Midwifery offers PhD research
supervision in the following areas:
• Acute Care
• Mental Health
• Public Health
• Family Health
• Ontology and Epistemology of Caring
• Human Health and Illness experiences
Students who have areas of interest in nursing other than those listed
are nevertheless encouraged to discuss enrolment possibilities with
the School, which can facilitate co-supervisory links with other
schools or institutions.
ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS
To qualify for admission to the Doctor of Philosophy applicants must
have:
• a Master degree; or
• a four-year undergraduate degree with honours normally at
upper second class level (H2A) or equivalent;
• exceptional related research experience.
Some students may be required to undertake additional studies in
specific areas, for example advanced research subjects.
COURSE DURATION
Completion of the Doctor of Philosophy normally requires three
years of full-time study or part-time equivalent.
DEGREE REQUIREMENTS
In order to be awarded the Doctor of Philosophy students must
undertake an appropriate research design subject, or any other
subject as required by the School; have their candidature approved
by the University and present their proposal to an appropriate
research committee; and successfully complete a thesis undertaken
with appropriate supervision. Students must receive a satisfactory
progress report each semester.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
308
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES
309
SUSTAINABILITY GROUP
The Sustainability group has broad research interests, encompassing
topics of interest to students with a focus on the conservation of
species, their habitats and the biological impacts of pollution and
other aspects of global change such as the greenhouse effect.
Research in this group also includes the ecology of aquatic (marine,
estuarine and fresh water) and terrestrial (grasslands and wet
forests) ecosystems, in some cases with an emphasis on practical
implications for improved management practices. Primary areas of
specialisation are environmental leadership, ecology of freshwater
wetlands, invertebrate systematics and biogeography, microbial
ecology of aquatic systems, ecology and management of exotic
marine pests and ecotoxicology of marine systems.
Staff in the Sustainability group are recognised internationally in
their areas of specialisation, and publish in international and
Australian refereed scientific journals. In recent years, staff in this
group have had considerable success obtaining externally reviewed
research grants, totalling in excess of $400,000.
Well-equipped laboratories are available for research activity with
marine biology projects enjoying access to the Queenscliff
laboratories of the Victorian Marine Science Consortium and the
aquatic laboratory at VU St Albans Campus. A 4WD vehicle is
available for field-based research projects, and modern field
equipment such as GPS, various meters (O2, light, etc.) are also
available.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
310
311
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
For Learning Outcomes of each of the following subjects, visit the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science website at www.vu.edu.au or
telephone the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science on (03) 9919 4191.
APT1025 INDIVIDUAL AWARENESS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Admission to the Graduate Diploma in Counselling
or consent of the course co-ordinator
Content Discovery of self: investigation of fear of self-revelation and
defence mechanisms; personality testing (Myer-Briggs); concept of
individual growth. Exploration of potentially difficult discussion topics
including death and dying, suicide, sexual concerns including loss
and sexual potency and/or organs, AIDS and safe sexual practices;
rape, incest and violence; anger; depression; religion; cross cultural
issues and ethnic identity (may vary according to group). Format of
classes includes group participation, basic introduction to group
dynamics, building communication skills in the group, setting ground
rules.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer
Subject Hours Two hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Autobiography exploring one’s personal growth and
counselling philosophy; Journal reflecting on process of classes.
Minimum of 80% attendance is required (subject to change).
APT1035 THEORIES AND TECHNIQUES OF COUNSELLING
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Admission to the Graduate Diploma in
Counselling, or consent of the course co-ordinator.
Content This unit will focus on an exploration of the theoretical
issues and practical skills associated with a range of counselling
paradigms. Person Centred, Gestalt, Existential, Behavioural,
Cognitive Behavioural and Psychodynamic theories will be
addressed. Through role plays and class activities, students will be
encouraged to develop their own counselling skills and reflect on
their personal development as counsellors.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Theory paper 50%, counselling demonstration, 50%.
AXH5001 THE UNIVERSITY IN HISTORY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Participants will be assisted in developing their skills to
trace the role of universities and other centres of learning in the
evolution of particular societies, to analyse the range of policy
choices in the development of universities, to understand the
development of specific disciplines and their connection to wider
social contexts and to construct scenarios for the future of the
university ideal. They will be enabled to do this through a study of
topics including: the university ideal in classical antiquity and the
medieval university; Eastern and Islamic traditions of learning; the
nineteenth-century revival of the university; the golden age of the
European intellectual; Oxbridge and the British Empire; American
developments and the multi-versity; nation building and the
university; The Cold War universities; theories of education and
economic development; the impact of the New Right; and the future
of Australian universities.
Required Reading To be advised.
Recommended Reading Altbach, P. ed 1991. International
Higher Education: An Encyclopedia. NY: Garland. Ben-David, J. &
Zloczower, A. 1962. Universities and Academic Systems in Modern
Societies. European, Journal of Sociology. 3. pp. 45–84. Bourdieu,
P. 1988. Homo academicus. Cambridge: Polity Press. Buchbinder,
H. 1993. The Market Oriented University and The Changing Role of
Knowledge, Higher Education. 26. pp. 331–48. Clark, B. 1987.
The Academic Life: Small Worlds, Different Worlds. Princeton:
Carnegie Foundation. Cobban, A.B. 1975. The Medieval
Universities: Their Development and Organisation. London: Methuen.
Collins, J. & Pottras, T. 1994. Built to Last: Successful Habits of
Visionary Companies. London: Random House. Foucault, M. 1970.
The Order of Things: An Archaeology of The Human Sciences.
London: Tavistock. Guttmann, A. 1987. Democratic Education.
Princeton: Princeton University Press. Higher Education: The Lessons
of Experience.1994. Washington, DC: The World Bank. Lomnitz, L.
1979. Hierarchy and Peripherality: The Organisation of the Mexican
Research Institute. Minerva 17 pp. 527–48. Manguel, A. 1996. A
History of Reading, New York: Viking. Ruegg, W. ed 1996. A
History of the University in Europe. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press. Wertheim, M. 1995. Pythagoras’ Trousers: God,
Physics and the Gender Wars. NY: Times Books. Williams, B. The
Rise and Fall of the Binary Systems in Two Countries and the
Consequences for Universities. Studies in Higher Education. 17. no.
3. pp. 281–93.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week per
semester.
Assessment Class paper, 30%; literature search, 10%; essay plan,
10%; major essay of 5000 words or participants will reflect on a
current policy issue in the light of historical perspectives, 50%.
BAO5735 ADVANCED FORECASTING, PLANNING AND CONTROL
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The subject aims to develop studies’ ability to analyse and
present solutions to financial planning and management problems
using a range of methods including spreadsheet and modelling, data
analysis and forecasting techniques, information and decision
support systems and executive information systems. Hands on use of
appropriate software will be an essential feature of the subject and
assessment tasks.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Equivalent to 36 hours per semester normally to be
delivered as a combination of lecture, seminar, tutorial and/or
workshop or a delivery mode as approved by the Faculty of Business
and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Internal assessment, 100%. Students are expected to
satisfactorily complete each component of the assessment to gain a
pass in the subject. Supplementary assessment will not be available.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
312
BEO5544 HUMAN RESOURCE ECONOMICS
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content This subject introduces students to the economic principles
of the allocation of human resources within organisations and the
wider economy. It will equip them with skills necessary to analyse the
likely outcomes of specific human resource decisions. Topics include;
supply and demand for labour and labour markets; disadvantaged
labour market groups; the impact of unions on wages; payment
systems and productivity; and the impact of wage fixing systems on
the broader economy.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Norris, K., 1996, The Economics of
Australian Labour Markets, Longman Cheshire. Norris, K., and
Wooden, M., The Changing Australian Labour Market, EPAC,
Background Paper No. 11, AGPS. Whitfield, K., and Ross, R.,
1996, The Australian Labour Market, Harper Educational.
Class Contact Equivalent to 36 hours per semester normally to be
delivered as a combination of lecture, seminar, tutorial and/or
workshop or a delivery mode as approved by the Faculty of Business
and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Class paper, 30%; research paper, 30%; test, 40%.
Students are expected to satisfactorily complete each component of
the assessment to gain a pass in the subject. Supplementary
assessment will not be available.
BLO5513 LAW OF EMPLOYMENT
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The aims of the subject are: to assist students to become
familiar with aspects of employment law relevant to human resource
management and industrial relations; to provide students with an
understanding of the skills necessary to deal with legal problems
which may arise in the world of work. The subject includes contract
of employment; termination of employment; health and safety; and
equal opportunity law.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer
Class Contact Equivalent to 36 hours per semester normally to be
delivered as a combination of lecture, seminar, tutorial and/or
workshop or a delivery mode as approved by the Faculty of Business
and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Two case studies, 50% each. Students must
satisfactorily complete each part of the assessment to gain a pass in
the subject. Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BLO5537 BUSINESS LAW
Campus City Flinders.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content This subject aims to provide students with a working
knowledge and overview of the Australian legal system and to
provide students with an appreciation of contract and tort law issues
– students in their working life should be able to avoid problem
situations, and be more aware of the need for reform in particular
areas. The subject includes: an introduction to the law, an
examination of the litigation process, onus of proof, the sources of
law in Australia, precedent, the court system and tribunals in
Victoria; criminal law and the law of tort as it relates to business; a
study of the law of negligence with a particular emphasis on
professional liability for negligent statements and advice; the
definition and nature of a contract including examination of the rules
of offer and acceptance, termination of offers, rules of consideration,
revocation of offer and acceptance, intention to be legally bound,
certainty and terms; a study of breach of contract an examination of
the different remedies available under the law; the interaction of tort
law with contract; statutory schemes relating to contract with
particular reference to the Trades Practices Act 1974 (Cth) and to
the Goods (Sales and Leases) Act 1981 (Vic); discharge of contract
by different occurrences such as frustration, mutual agreement,
illegality and mistake.
Required Reading Graw, S., An Introduction to the law of
contract, 4th edn, LBC. Parker, D and Box, G. Basic Law for Business
Students, 4th edn. Latimer, P. Australian Business Law, CCH. Various
other references and Acts of Parliament to be advised.
Class Contact Equivalent to 36 hours per semester normally to be
delivered as a combination of lecture, seminar, tutorial and/or
workshop or a delivery mode as approved by the Faculty of Business
and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Midsemester test, 20%; essay, 20%; ; final
examination, 60%. Students must satisfactorily complete each part of
the assessment to gain a pass in the subject. Supplementary
assessment will not be available.
BLO6502 LAW FOR MANAGEMENT
Campus City Flinders. Kuala Lumpur, Singapore, China,
Bangladesh.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content An introduction to law, including historical origins of our
legal system, the sources of law, the doctrine of precedent and the
court hierarchy, the adversary system. Also examination of types of
precedent, history of tort of negligence and the rules of statutory
interpretation and the identification of the essential elements in the
formation of a contract. Examination of the elements of contract
including the distinction between a condition, a warranty and an in
nominate term. Examination of Misrepresentation, Duress, Undue
influence, Unconscionability. Consideration of the concept of a tort
and the difference between the types of tort. Different types of
business structures; sole traders; partnerships, joint ventures;
incorporated and unincorporated associations and company law; a
survey of the legal rules regulating administrative action.
Required Reading Latimer, P., Australian Business Law (latest
edn), CCH.
Class Contact Equivalent to 36 hours per semester normally to be
delivered as a combination of lecture, seminar, tutorial and/or
workshop or a delivery mode as approved by the Faculty of Business
and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Assignment, 40%; class participation, 10%;
examination, 50%. In order to be awarded a pass in this subject,
students must satisfactorily complete each component of the
assessment. Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BMO5537 TOPICS IN EMPLOYEE RELATIONS MANAGEMENT
Campus City Flinders.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The subject aims to provide students with an opportunity to
study in School, issues of contemporary importance in industrial
relations. On completion of the subject, students should be able to
critically examine issues and identify their impact on industrial
relations and examine the change process as well as understanding
the options for dealing with change. It will include topics such as
new technology, industrial democracy, women and the labour
market, occupational health and safety, and contemporary reforms
to organisations.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Kitay & Lansbury, R. 1997, Changing
Employment Relations in Australia, OUP, Melbourne.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
313
Class Contact Equivalent to 36 hours per semester normally to be
delivered as a combination of lecture, seminar, tutorial and/or
workshop or a delivery mode as approved by the Faculty of Business
and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Two class papers, 50%; research essay, 50%. Students must
satisfactorily complete each component of the assessment to gain a pass in
the subject. Supplementary assessment will not be available.
BMO5589 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS AND THE BUILDING INDUSTRY
(ENGINEERING SERVICE SUBJECT)
Campus City Flinders.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content An introduction to industrial relations and a study of policy
questions and techniques associated with the practice of industrial
relations, specifically in the building industry. Topics covered include
the industrial relations framework, the parties to industrial relations,
negotiation principles, conflict resolution, industrial awards, legal
aspects of employment and contemporary industrial relations issues.
Required Reading Alexander, R. & Lewer, J. 1998,
Understanding Australian Industrial Relations, 5th edn, Harcourt
Brace, Sydney.
Class Contact Equivalent to 36 hours per semester normally to be
delivered as a combination of lecture, seminar, tutorial and/or
workshop or a delivery mode as approved by the Faculty of Business
and Law. Subject equal to 15 credit points.
Assessment Essay, 30%; class assignment and test 70%. Students
must satisfactorily complete each component of the assessment to
gain a pass in the subject Supplementary assessment will not be
available.
HDR0001 INTRODUCTION TO RESEARCH DESIGN AND METHODS
Campus St Albans, Footscray Park, Flinders Lane, Distance
Education
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The content of this subject will provide an introduction to
research methods and design for the social sciences. This will
include a review of the scientific methods and ways of knowing,
quantitative and qualitative paradigms, questionnaire design and
evaluation, validity and reliability of research designs, ethical issues
and evaluation of the research design of published papers. The
subject will also include an introduction to sampling and methods of
data collection and analysis for quantitative and qualitative research.
The study of quantitative methods will focus on experimental,
correlational and survey designs and of the corresponding methods
of data analyses including descriptive and inferential statistics,
correlation and regression and hypothesis testing. The qualitative
research designs to be studied in some detail will be drawn from
case study, ethnography, grounded theory, phenomenology,
historical research, philosophical research and action research. The
role of the researcher in collecting qualitative data will be discussed
along with methods of analysing qualitative data.
Required Reading Aron, A & Aron, E. (1999) Statistics for
psychology (2nd ed). New Jersey: Prentice Hall. Baumgartner, T. &
Strong, C. (2001). Conducting and reading research in health and
human performance. Boston, MA: WCB/McGaw Hill. Burns, N. &
Groves, S. (2001). The practice of nursing research: conduct,
critique and utilisation (4th ed). Sydney: Saunders. Maxwell, J.A.
(1996). Qualitative research design. Sage: Thousand Oaks.
Streubert, H.J. & Carpenter, D.R. (1999). Qualitative research in
nursing: Advancing the humanistic imperative (2nd ed) Philadelphia:
Lippincott. National Health and Medical research Council. (1999).
National statement on ethical conduct in research involving humans.
Canberra: Commonwealth Government. Victoria University. (2000)
Handbook of candidature research proposals. Victoria University.
Wiersma, W. (2000) Research methods in education (7th ed)
Needham Heights, MA: Allyn and Bacon.
Subject Hours Two-hour seminar and one-hour tutorial per week
for one semester.
Assessment A research proposal, or approved assignments
related to research literature and processes in professional practice
(4000 words for Graduate Diploma students; 5000 words for
Masters students) 100%.
HFR0001 ADVANCED QUANTITATIVE RESEARCH METHODS
Campus Footscray , St Albans, City Flinders Lane (as per student
enrolment)
Prerequisite(s) One of HER0001 Introduction to Research Design
and Methods, HHR0001 Introduction to Research Design and
Methods, HNR0001 Introduction to Research Design and Methods,
HPR0001 Introduction to Research Design and Methods or
equivalent.
Content This subject provides a detailed examination of advanced
quantitative methodologies, design and analyses as key elements of
the research process, with an emphasis on the importance of
experimental design and statistical decision making. The subject
covers such topics as: the general linear model, analysis of variance
and covariance, statistical power, multivariate designs including:
multiple regression analyses, multivariate analysis of variance, and
factor analysis. The subject also introduces students to the use of
nonparametric data analyses and underlying reasons for choosing
nonparametric over parametric statistical tests. Students will also
receive practical experience in data analysis using the SPSSx
computer package, however, the focus of the course will be on
statistical analyses as a part of the total research process.
Required Reading Aron, A. & Aron, E.N. (1994). Statistics for
Psychology, (2nd Ed.) Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. Hair, J.F.,
Anderson, R.E., Tatham, R.L. & Black, W.C. (1995). Multivariate
Data Analysis with Readings, (4th Ed.) New Jersey: Prentice-Hall,
Inc. Coakes, S.J. & Steed, L.G. (1999). SPSS: Analysis without
Anguish, Versions 7.0, 7.5., 8.0 for Windows. Brisbane: John
Wiley & Sons. National Health and Medical Research Council.
(1999). National Statement on Ethical Conduct in Research Involving
Humans. Canberra: Commonwealth Government. Victoria
University. (2000). Handbook of Candidature Research Proposals.
Victoria University.
Subject Hours Two hour seminar and one hour tutorial per week
for one semester.
Assessment Research proposal or critique (50%); data analysis
project (50%).
HFR0002 ADVANCED QUALITATIVE RESEARCH METHODS
Campus Footscray , St Albans, City Flinders Lane
Prerequisite(s) HER0001 Introduction to Research Design and
Methods; HHR0001 Introduction to Research Design and Methods;
HNR0001 Introduction to Research Design and Methods; HPR0001
Introduction to Research Design and Methods or equivalent.
Content This subject provides students with advanced knowledge
and skills in qualitative research methodologies and procedures.
Topics include: major paradigms and theoretical perspectives of
qualitative research; major qualitative research methodologies eg
ethnography, grounded theory, phenomenology,
poststructural/critical research, action research, case studies etc.
Technique and procedures of advanced skills in data collection
including participant and non-participant observational strategies,
individual and group interviewing techniques, and unobtrusive
strategies such as document analysis. Techniques for qualitative data
analysis include using computers in qualitative data analysis.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
314
Credibility and trustworthiness issues, ethical issues, and writing up
of qualitative research will be discussed.
Required Reading Denzin, N.K. & Lincoln, Y.S (Eds.).
(2000).Handbook of Qualitative Research. Thousand Oaks:
SagePublications. Erlandson, D.A., Harris, E.L., Skipper, B.L., Allen,
S.D. (1993). Doing Naturalistic Inquiry: A Guide to Methods.
Newbury Park, CA: Sage. Minichiello, V., Aroni, R., Timewell, E., &
Alexander, L. (1995). In-depth Interviewing: Principles. Techniques,
Analysis, (2nd Ed.) Melbourne: Longman. National Health and
Medical Research Council. (1999). National Statement on Ethical
Conduct in Research Involving Humans. Canberra: Commonwealth
Government. Victoria University. (2000). Handbook of Candidature
Research Proposals. Victoria University.
Subject Hours Two hour seminar and one hour tutorial per week
for one semester.
Assessment Seminar paper on research design of a proposed
project (50%); A written report on the process of data collection and
analysis (50%).
HHA6115 MINOR THESIS (FULL-TIME)
HHA6116 MINOR THESIS (PART-TIME)
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Completion of Level 5 subjects or equivalent.
Content The minor thesis is intended to provide students with an
opportunity to undertake independent inquiry into an area of
personal interest and applicable to their professional development.
The thesis will be a research paper of not less than 15,000 words
and not more than 20,000 words. It will report on independently
conducted research which demonstrates the student’s ability to
clearly define a research question, to undertake a critical review of
the relevant literature. Data selection, collection and analysis skills
should also be demonstrated. The thesis should involve a high
standard of written communication skills. The chosen topic should
allow the candidate to utilise a methodology applicable to a
research question. It is intended that the topic chosen for
investigation will be in consultation with an appropriate supervisor
who will oversee the conduct of the research.
Required Reading Higgins, R. (1996). Approaches to Research:
A Handbook for Those Writing a Dissertation. London, Kingsley.
Subject Hours Regular meetings with thesis supervisors.
Assessment One 15,000–20,000 word paper.
HHC5531 CLINICAL PRACTICE 1
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The aim of the subject is to introduce students to
osteopathic healthcare in the clinical setting, initially by observation
of osteopathic practice, and later by the use of osteopathic diagnosis
and treatment in their own practices. By the end of the subject
students should be developing the ability to apply osteopathic
concepts of diagnosis and treatment to their own patients in a
clinical setting. content will include: Introduction to osteopathic
clinical practice. To initially observe the osteopathic approach to
health care provision and later apply osteopathic principles to the
assessment and treatment of patients in their own practices. Clinical
application of skills and attributes developed in the subjects:
Osteopathic History & Principles 1, Osteopathic Diagnosis 1,
Osteopathic Technique 1. Review of clinical cases by preparation
and presentation of the clinical case book. Integration of medical
and osteopathic approaches to patients with musculoskeletal pain
and/or dysfunction. Supervised interaction and treatment of patients
in the osteopathic medicine clinic and by mentoring with registered
osteopathic practitioners in their own and osteopathic practices in
their locality.
Required Reading Greenman P (1989) Principles of Manual
Medicine Williams and Wilkins Baltimore; Stoddard A (1983)
Manual of Osteopathic Practice Hutchinson 2nd Ed London; Ward
RC (Editor) (1997) Foundations for Osteopathic Medicine Williams
and Wilkins.
Recommended Reading Di Giovanna E L and Schiowitz E
(1991) An Osteopathic Approach to Diagnosis and Treatment
Lippincott Philadelphia.
Subject Hours City Campus clinic attendance @ 8 hours per
residential unit (2 residential units per annum). Practice based
learning 108 hours per annum. Practice based learning comprises:
36 hours of fieldwork spent with registered osteopathic practitioners
completed over the year. There will be a close
supervisory/mentoring relationship between selected local
osteopathic practitioners and the student. 72 hours in their own
practices applying osteopathic principles to the care of patients.
Detailed casebooks will be kept outlining the presentation,
examination, assessment, diagnosis, treatment, and outcomes. Each
case will require discussion of osteopathic principles and practice
referenced to standard osteopathic and medical texts, and research
literature.
Assessment Evidence of completion of hours, satisfactory reports
from supervisors/mentors, examination of case-studies x 8, 100%
HHC5532 CLINICAL PRACTICE 2
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHO5501 Osteopathic History & Principles 1,
HHO5511 Osteopathic Technique 1, HHO5521 Osteopathic
Diagnosis 1, HHC5531 Clinical Practice 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject aims to consolidate the students’ ability to
work with osteopathic diagnosis and treatment techniques in a
clinical setting, and to integrate the knowledge acquired in all
subjects of the course. By the end of this subject the students should
have the skills necessary to begin using osteopathic approaches on a
regular basis with patients in their own clinics, and also have the
necessary knowledge to pursue further postgraduate studies in
osteopathy. content will include: Continuation of clinical practice
subject allowing further development and refinement of osteopathic
clinical skills in relation to the provision of patient care.
Reinforcement of integrated clinical thought processes in the
provision of holistic health care. Full case ‘work ups’ with oral
presentations to peers. Integration of all academic course elements to
provide for the provision of osteopathic health care to the benefit of
patients.
Subject Hours City Campus clinic attendance @ 8 hours per
residential unit (one residential unit). Practice based learning 80
hours per annum. Practice based learning comprises: 36 hours of
fieldwork spent with registered osteopathic practitioners completed
over the year. There will be a close supervisory/mentoring
relationship between selected local osteopathic practitioners and the
student. 44 hours in their own practices applying osteopathic
principles to the care of patients. Detailed casebooks will be kept
outlining the presentation, examination, assessment, diagnosis,
treatment, and outcomes. Each case will require discussion of
osteopathic principles and practice referenced to standard
osteopathic and medical texts, and research literature.0
Assessment Examination of case-studies x 6, 30%; Final clinical
practice examination, 70% – short cases – long case – objective
structured clinical exam.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
315
HHD4739 DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING 1
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The aim of the subject is to teach students the theory
underlying radiological examination modalities, and to teach the
recognition of pathological entities in a variety of imaging types. At
the end of this subject the students should have an understanding of
the theory and physics of various radiological examinations, and be
able to recognise the radiological signs of common pathologies.
content will include: Physics of imaging. Imaging modalities,
methods, safety procedures and regulations. Requesting
radiographs. Normal variants. Congenital anomalies. Scoliosis.
Trauma – fractures, dislocations etc. Infections. Arthritides. Tumour
processes. Vascular abnormalities. Metabolic and endocrine
abnormalities incl. Osteoporosis and Paget’s disease. Soft tissue
pathologies. Respiratory disease. Abdominal viscera and visceral
disease.
Recommended Reading Rather than use a single text, students
should access a wide variety of texts, atlases and CD-ROMs from the
following list and library resources. Yochum, T.R. and Rowe, L.J.
1996, Essentials of Skeletal Radiology (2nd ed.) Vols 1 and 2,
Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore. Chew F. 1997, Skeletal Radiology:
The Bare Bones, (2nd ed.) Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore. Hughes J,
Hughes, M, 1997, Imaging: Picture tests. Churchill Livingstone,
Edinburgh. Mace JD, Kowalczyk N 1994, Radiographic pathology
for technologists (2nd ed.), Mosby, St. Louis. Redhead, DN, 1995,
Imaging: Colour guide, Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.
Subject Hours One one-hour lecture per week for the first semester.
Two hours per week for the second semester comprising one one-
hour lecture and one one-hour workshop/tutorial or equivalent.
Assessment Written response slide exam at end of semester one,
100%; viva voce examination at end of semester two, 100%.
HHD4779 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 3
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHD3579 Clinical Diagnosis and Management 2;
or equivalent.
Content The aim of the subject is to teach the students to recognise
the clinical presentations of conditions affecting the named systems,
and to understand the clinical tests and orthodox management
protocols for them. By the end of the year the students should be
able to recognise the clinical signs and symptoms of typical
conditions affecting the named systems, carry out appropriate
examinations, be able to interpret clinical tests, and understand the
medical management of these conditions. Content will include: The
cardiovascular, respiratory and gastrointestinal systems will be
covered during the first semester and the endocrine, genito-urinary,
renal and haematological systems in the second semester. Case
studies will be employed to facilitate student learning. The focus will
be on the clinical presentation of conditions of the above-mentioned
body systems with emphasis on the following areas: recognition of
life-threatening conditions: the detailed clinical examination of the
above-mentioned body systems: laboratory tests and special
investigations which are commonly employed in the diagnosis of
conditions affecting the above-mentioned body systems: important
differential diagnostic pathways: a brief review of the orthodox
medical management of conditions affecting the above systems.
Required Reading The set of prepared Lecture notes is the only
prescribed text for this course
Recommended Reading Hart D (ed) (1986) French's Index of
Differential Diagnosis Wright Pub Bristol. Rubenstein D and Wayne
D (1991) Lecture Notes on Clinical Medicine Blackwell Scientific
Publications Oxford. Bates B (1991) A Guide To Physical
Examination and History Taking (Fifth Edition) J.B. Lippincott
Company, Philadelphia. Dorland's Illustrated Medical Dictionary
(1988) Saunders and Co Philadelphia. Hoppenfeld S (1976)
Physical Examination of the Spine and Extremities Appleton-Century-
Crofts New York. Swash and Mason (1989) Hutchinsons Clinical
Methods Balliere Tindal London. Seidel H (1995) Mosby’s Guide to
Physical Examination Mosby St Louis. Walker H K, Dallas Hall W
(1980) Clinical Methods Butterworths London. Edwards C.R.W,
Bouchier, IAD, Haslett, C and Chilvers ER (1995), Davidson’s
Principles and Practice of Medicine (17th ed.) Churchill Livingstone,
New York.
Subject Hours Four hours per week or equivalent for two
semesters comprising lectures, tutorials/workshops and practicals.
Assessment Semester one: Written examination, 30%;
practical/viva voce, 20%. Semester two: Written examination, 30%;
practical/viva voce, 20%.
HHD5739 CLINICAL DIAGNOSIS AND MANAGEMENT 4
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHD4779 Clinical Diagnosis and Management 3;
or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to teach the students to recognise the
clinical presentations of conditions affecting the named systems, and
to understand the clinical tests and orthodox management protocols
for them. By the end of the year the students should be able to
recognise the clinical signs and symptoms of typical conditions
affecting the named systems, carry out appropriate examinations, be
able to interpret clinical tests, and understand the medical
management of these conditions. The content will include relevant
issues in Paediatrics, Obstetrics, Otolaryngology and Psychiatry,
Geriatrics and Dermatology, and common clinical presentations.
One hour each week will be spent discussing issues that will arise
when working as an Osteopath.
Required Reading There are no specific required texts.
Determining the appropriate resources will depend on individual
learning needs. Important resources will be referred to during the
relevant sessions. Students can refer to any appropriate text or
learning resources in order to answer their group-determined
learning needs.
Subject Hours Five hours per week for two semesters of small
group discussion forums.
Assessment Written examination, 50%; assignment (2000 words)
50%.
HHD5749 DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING 2
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHD4739 Diagnostic Imaging 1; or equivalent.
Content The subject consolidates and expands on the knowledge
acquired in HHD4739 Diagnostic Imaging 1. Application to specific
body regions. By the end of the course the students should not only
be able to recognise the radiological presentation of typical
pathologies, but should also be aware of variations as seen in
different body regions. Content will include: Review of pathologies
by region using all imaging modalities. Skull, cervical spine, thoracic
spine, chest, lumbar spine, abdomen incl. foetal screening, pelvis
and hips, upper and lower limb.
Required Reading As for HHD4739 Diagnostic Imaging 1.
Recommended Reading As for HHD4739 Diagnostic Imaging
1.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
316
Subject Hours Two hours per week for one semester comprising
problem-based self-directed workshop sessions with problems set by
tutor.
Assessment Written response slide exam, 50%; viva voce exam,
50%.
HHG5115 PHILOSOPHICAL CONCEPTS OF HEALING
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Approaches to healing throughout the world are
embedded in notions of reality, truth, and values about health and
illness. The subject explores the philosophies that underpin the major
traditions of health and healing. Students are provided with the
opportunity to explore and critically appraise the various
philosophies. Areas of inquiry will include the general principles of:
Oriental Medicine: Chinese and Japanese healing; Ayurveda and
Yoga: Indian and Pranic healing; Naturopathy: European natural
therapy; Australian Aboriginal healing; Western healing;
Shamanistic healing practices. The opportunity to explore the
philosophies underlying health and healing practices will provide a
broad foundation for the study of the sensory and cognitive healing
approaches in the course.
Required Reading Capra, F. (1983). The turning point: Science,
society and the rising culture. London: Fontana.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester
comprising lectures, tutorials seminars and self-managed learning.
Assessment Personal reflective journal; class participation/group
work (40%); assignment (2000 words) (60%). To obtain at least a
Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (assignment) may be
re-attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to
be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.
HHG5125 THEORETICAL FOUNDATIONS OF HEALING 1
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HHG5115 Philosophical Concepts of Healing; or
equivalent.
Content This subject provides a theoretical foundation for the study
of a range of approaches to health and healing examined during the
course. Students will critically appraise the increasing body of
literature and research related to the environmental, social,
psychological and spiritual dimensions of health and illness. The
subject provides a framework that unifies the diverse approaches to
healing. The principles informing the understanding of innate healing
tendencies and the interconnection of mind and body are studied.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six hours for one semester
comprising lectures, tutorials seminars and self-managed learning.
Assessment Two written assignments (50% each). To obtain at
least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of assessment
must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items (written
assignments) may be re-attempted and resubmitted once only.
Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any resubmission will be
50%.
HHG5135 HEALING 1: COLOUR, SOUND AND MOVEMENT
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject will facilitate the exploration of the concept of
health and healing through exposure to the creative processes
involved in visual, aural and kinaesthetic techniques. Health and
healing are seen in their broadest dimensions as the
interconnectedness of the entire living system with the environment.
The power of music, art and movement to influence a person and the
interaction between environment is explored. The therapeutic effects
of self expression to develop individual capacities to their full
potential are examined through the use of colour, sound and
movement. The focus of the subject is on the maintenance of
wellness, rather than a focus on pathology and illness.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, tutorials, seminars, and self-managed
and experiential learning in the field.
Assessment Fieldwork presentation and journal, (40%); major
assignment, (60%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally
all components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment item (assignment) may be re-attempted and resubmitted
once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on any
resubmission will be 50%.
HHG5145 THEORETICAL FOUNDATIONS OF HEALING 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The subject further develops students’ knowledge of
approaches to health and healing. Individual, group and family
counselling theories are examined from both an Oriental and
Western perspective. Within the counselling environment cultural
differences will be explored and appropriate techniques applied.
Required Reading Corey, G. (1991) Theory and practice of
counselling and psychotherapy. (4th ed.). Pacific Grove, California:
Brooks/Cole.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester
comprising lectures, tutorials seminars and self-managed learning
Assessment Personal reflective journal, (30%); theory paper
(40%); evidence of participation (skills demonstration, evidence of
reading, class discussion) (30%). To obtain at least a Pass in the
subject, normally all components of assessment must be attempted
and passed. Failed assessment item (theory paper) may be re-
attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to
be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.
HHG5245 HEALING 2: TACTILE THERAPIES
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHG5135 Healing 1: Colour, Sound and
Movement; or equivalent.
Content This subject provides the opportunity to further develop the
knowledge and skills gained in Healing 1. The central focus of this
subject is the conceptual and skill development of touch as a healing
therapy. The therapeutic use of touch is a powerful healing tool
utilised in may cultures to enhance growth and development in the
young, promote and maintain well being, and to heal and comfort
the sick. The conceptual, metaphysical and functional basis of
Therapeutic Touch, Swedish massage and Shiatsu is studied from
both an historical and contemporary perspective. The key principles
of the therapeutic use of self, music, colour, scent and movement will
be integrated into this unit.
Required Reading Krieger, D. (1993) Accepting your power to
heal: The personal practice of therapeutic touch. Santa Fe: Bear and
Co. Montagu, A. (1986). Touching. NY: Harper and Row.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, tutorials seminars, self-managed
learning and fieldwork.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
317
Assessment Practical examination (40%); field experience and
personal reflective journal (20%); written assignment (40%). To
obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all components of
assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed assessment items
(practical examination and written assignment) may be re-attempted
and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained
on any resubmission will be 50%.
HHG5255 HEALING 3: APPROACHES TO HEALING SKILLS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHR0001 Introduction to Research Design and
Methods; or equivalent.
Content This subject builds on the key theoretical frameworks
introduced in Theoretical Foundations of Healing Practice. Students
are exposed to a broad range of techniques designed to teach
individuals skills in maintaining well-being and equilibrium. The
meaning of health and well being is explored in the context of the
link between stress arousal and the disease process. A combination
of approaches which influence healing skills are examined, for
example the concept of stress as described by Cannon, Lazarus,
Selye, Spiegal and Solomon. Various relaxation responses will be
explored. The skills of autogenic training, progressive relaxation,
deep muscle relaxation, visual imagery, biofeedback, self-awareness
techniques and body breathing exercises are explored. The
application of these skills is discussed in relation to a range of
situations.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours A minimum of forty-eight (48) hours for one
semester comprising lectures, tutorials seminars, self-managed
learning and fieldwork.
Assessment Seminar presentation (20%); essay (40%);
experiential workshop or fieldwork (40%). To obtain at least a Pass
in the subject, normally all components of assessment must be
attempted and passed. Failed assessment item (essay) may be re-
attempted and resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to
be obtained on any resubmission will be 50%.
HHG5265 RESEARCH PROJECT
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHR0001 Introduction to Research Design and
Methods or equivalent.
Content This subject is the culminating unit and provides students
with the opportunity to further develop and apply the knowledge and
understanding acquired in previous subjects of the course. Students
will use the proposal developed in HHR 0001 Introduction to
Research Design and Methods and implement a literature-based
project, which critically analyses an area of professional interest
relevant to complementary medicine and healing therapies. The aims
and objectives of this subject will be introduced to the students at the
commencement of the course to allow for reflection and preparation
for the continuation of the project.
Recommended Reading Byrne, C. (1992). Complementary
therapy: Research methods in complementary medicine. Nursing
Standard 6, 54–6.
Subject Hours A minimum of thirty-six (36) hours for one semester
comprising lectures, tutorials, seminars and self-managed learning.
Assessment Submission of completed project (5000 words)
(100%). To obtain at least a Pass in the subject, normally all
components of assessment must be attempted and passed. Failed
assessment item (completed project) may be re-attempted and
resubmitted once only. Maximum possible marks to be obtained on
any resubmission will be 50%.
HHH5105 INTRODUCTION TO CHINESE HERBAL MEDICINE
Campus City Flinders or St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HHH5115 Clinical Pharmacology for Herbal
Medicine; or equivalent.
Content The aim of this subject is to provide students with a
detailed understanding of the theoretical foundations of Chinese
herbal classifications and individual herbs. Specific attention will be
given to 100 of the most common individual herbs, their energetic
actions and functions, clinical application, combinations,
preparations, precautions and contra-indications and TGA
regulations as they currently exist in Australia.
Required Reading Acts of the Victorian Parliament 1994,
Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, Melbourne, The Law Printer.
Bensky, D. and A. Gamble, 1986, Chinese Herbal
MedicineMateria Medica, Seattle, Eastland Press. Bensky, D. and
R. Barolet, 1990, Chinese Herbal MedicineFormulas and
Strategies, Seattle, Eastland Press. Commonwealth of Australia,
1989, Therapeutic Goods Act 1989, Canberra, AGPS. Department
of Health Sciences, TCM Unit 1997, Pharmacy and Clinical
Procedures Manual, St Albans, Victoria University of Technology.
Drugs, Poisons: Wildlife Protection (Regulation of Exports and
Imports) Act 1982, Register of Acupuncture and TCM Code of
Ethics.
Recommended Reading Geng, J. Huang, W. Ren, and X. Ma,
1991, Practical Traditional Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology,
Medicinal Herbs, Beijing, New World Press. Maciocia, G. 1994,
The Practice of Chinese Medicine. The Treatment of Diseases with
Acupuncture and Chinese Herbs, London, Churchill-Livingstone.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester comprising of lectures and seminars.
Assessment Three-hour examination, 50%; assignment (2000
words), 50%. Students will be required to gain a pass in all
assessment components.
HHH5115 CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY FOR HERBAL MEDICINE
Campus City Flinders or St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HHH5105 Introduction to Chinese Herbal
Medicine; or equivalent.
Content This subject provides students with the opportunity to
develop an understanding of the principles underlying the actions of
drugs, poisons and xenobiotics relating to the use of Herbal
Medicine. The subject will provide an overview of the scope of
pharmacology and toxicology with particular emphasis on the
interrelationships between herbs and drugs. Topics addressed will
include concentration response relationships, adsorption of drugs
and xenobiotics, and drug and xenobiotic distribution. The
metabolism of xenobiotics including roles in drug elimination,
detoxification, production of toxic and mutagenic intermediates,
excretion, pharmacokinetics and clearance will also be addressed.
The students understanding of drugs used in major diseases in
relation to drug mechanisms, basic pharmacokinetics, adverse
reactions and interactions known to occur with herbal remedies will
also be enhanced. Students will be introduced to the current
scheduling process for therapeutic products.
Required Reading Keys, J. 1976, Chinese Herbs. Their Botany,
Chemistry and Pharmacodynamics, London, Charles E Tuttle. Evans,
W. C., 1996, Trease and Evans’ Pharmacognosy, 14th edn.,
London, WB Saunders. Poisons and Controlled Substances Act.
Standard for the Uniform Scheduling of Drugs and Poisons.
Galbraith, A. S. Bullock and E. Manias, 1997, Fundamentals of
Pharmacology, 2nd edn., Addison-Wesley Longman, Australia.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
318
Recommended Reading Bisset, N. G., ed., Herbal Drugs and
Phytopharmaceuticals, London, CRC Press. Bone, K. 1996, Clinical
Applications of Ayurvedic and Chinese Herbs, Phytotherapy Press,
Warwick Qld. Chang, H. M. and But, P. P-H. eds., 1987,
Pharmacology and Applications of Chinese Materia Medica, Vol. 1
and Vol. 2, World Scientific Publishing. Duke, J. A., 1992,
Handbook of Biologically Active Phytochemicals and their Activities,
London, CRC Press. Goyen, M., 1991, The Australian Guide to
Prescription Drugs, Reed Books, Balgowlah, NSW. Harborne, J. B.
and Baxter H. 1993, Phytochemical Dictionary A Handbook of
Bioactive Japanese Journal of Pharmacology. Huang, K. C. 1993,
The Pharmacology of Chinese Herbs, Boca Raton, CRC Press. Rang,
R. R. and Dale, M. M., 1991, Pharmacology, London, Churchill
Livingstone.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester comprising lectures and tutorials.
Assessment Two-hour examination, 50%; written assignment
(2000 words), 50%.
HHH5125 FORMULAS AND STRATEGIES (PCM) 1
Campus City Flinders or St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHH5105 Introduction to Chinese Herbal
Medicines, HHH5115 Clinical Pharmacology for Herbal Medicine;
or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HHH5135 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 2; or
equivalent.
Content This aim of this subject is to provide students with a
detailed understanding of the theoretical foundations and clinical
reasoning patterns of the following Chinese herbal classifications;
diaphoretics (jie biao ji), harmonisers, (he jie ji), heat eliminators
(qing re ji), purgatives (xie xia ji) and internal warming formulae
(wen li ji). Students will be provided with the opportunity to explore
and understand the theoretical underpinnings of the representative
formula(e) for each of the herbal classifications, the energetic
patterns associated with each of the respective formulae, the
theoretical and clinical reasoning patterns explaining the
development of modifications to principal formulae, appropriate
dosage, treatment strategies, precautions, contra-indications and the
issue of patient compliance. In exploring the theoretical foundations
of the construction of herbal formulae significant attention will be
given to classical sources and modern interpretations to inform
student learning. The unit of study also concentrates on the various
forms in which prepared Chinese medicines are delivered: pills,
powders, soup mixes, decoctions, wines and external applications
such as plasters.
Required Reading Bensky, D. and A. Gamble, 1986, Chinese
Herbal MedicineMateria Medica, Seattle, Eastland Press. Bensky,
D. and R. Barolet, 1990, Chinese Herbal MedicineFormulas and
Strategies, Seattle, Eastland Press.
Recommended Reading Acts of the Victorian Parliament 1994,
Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, Melbourne, The Law Printer.
Commonwealth of Australia, 1989, Therapeutic Goods Act 1989,
Canberra, AGPS. Department of Health Sciences, TCM Unit 1997,
Pharmacy and Clinical Procedures Manual, St Albans, Victoria
University of Technology. Hsu, Hong-yen and Hsu, Chau-shin, 1980,
Commonly Used Chinese Herb Formulas With Illustrations,
California, Oriental Healing Arts Press. Hua, Tuo, 1993, Master
Hua’s Classic of the Central Viscera. A Translation of Hua Tuo’s
Zhong Zang Jing, (trans. Yang, Shou-zhong), Boulder, Blue Poppy
Press. Ki, Suno, 1987, The Canon of Acupuncture Ling Shu,
California, Yuin University Press. Li, Dong-yuan, 1993, Treatise of
the Spleen and Stomach. A Translation of the Pi Wei Lun, (trans.
Yang Shou-zhong and Li Jian-yong), Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Liu,
Y. C., 1988, The Essential Book of Traditional Chinese Medicine,
Vol. 1, New York, Columbia University Press. Maciocia, G. 1994,
The Practice of Chinese Medicine. The Treatment of Diseases with
Acupuncture and Chinese Herbs, London, Churchill-Livingstone. Ni,
Mao Shing, 1995, The Yellow Emperors Classic of Medicine,
Boston, Shambala. Song, Nong, ed., 1996, Chinese Medicated
Liquor Therapy, Beijing, Beijing Science and Technology Press. State
Administration of TCM 1995, Advanced Textbook on Traditional
Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology, Vol. 1, Beijing, New World
Press. State Administration of TCM 1995, Advanced Textbook on
Traditional Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology, Vol. 2, Beijing,
New World Press. Wu, Jing Nuan, 1993, Ling Shu or Spiritual
Pivot, Washington, The Taoist CentreYen, K. Y., 1992, The
Illustrated Chinese Materia Medica, Taipei, SMC Publishing Inc.
Zhang, Z. J. 1986, Treatise on Febrile Diseases Caused by Cold: A
Classic of Traditional Chinese Medicine, (trans. Luo Xi Wen),
Beijing, New World Press.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester comprising of lectures and seminars.
Assessment Two-hour examination, 50%; written assignment
(2000 words), 50%. Students will be required to gain a pass in all
assessment components.
HHH5135 FORMULAS AND STRATEGIES (PCM) 2
Campus City Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHH5105 Introduction to Chinese Herbal
Medicines, HHH5115 Clinical Pharmacology for Herbal Medicine;
or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HHH5125 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 1; or
equivalent.
Content This aim of this subject is to provide students with a
detailed understanding of the theoretical foundations and clinical
reasoning patterns of the following Chinese herbal classifications;
tranquillising/sedation formulae (an shen ji), qi regulators (li qi ji),
xue regulators (li xue ji), dampness resolving (qu shi ji) and wind
damp eliminators (qu feng shi ji). Students will be provided with the
opportunity to explore and understand the theoretical underpinnings
of the representative formula(e) for each of the herbal classifications,
the energetic patterns associated with each of the respective
formulae, the theoretical and clinical reasoning patterns explaining
the development of modifications to principal formulae, appropriate
dosage treatment strategies, precautions, contra-indications and the
issue of patient compliance. In exploring the theoretical foundations
of the construction of herbal formulae significant attention will be
given to classical sources and modern interpretations to inform
student learning. Attention will be given to the various forms in which
prepared Chinese medicines are delivered: pills, powders, soup
mixes, decoctions, wines and external applications such as plasters.
Required Reading Bensky, D. and A. Gamble, 1986, Chinese
Herbal MedicineMateria Medica, Seattle, Eastland Press. Bensky,
D. and R. Barolet, 1990, Chinese Herbal MedicineFormulas and
Strategies, Seattle, Eastland Press.
Recommended Reading Acts of the Victorian Parliament 1994,
Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, Melbourne, The Law Printer.
Commonwealth of Australia, 1989, Therapeutic Goods Act 1989,
Canberra, AGPS. Department of Health Sciences, TCM Unit 1997,
Pharmacy and Clinical Procedures Manual, St Albans, Victoria
University of Technology. Hua, Tuo, 1993, Master Hua’s Classic of
the Central Viscera. A Translation of Hua Tuo’s Zhong Zang Jing,
(trans. Yang, Shou-zhong), Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Institute of
Chinese Materia Medica and China Academy of Traditional Chinese
Medicine 1989, Medicinal Plants in China, Manila, World Health
Organisation, Regional Office for the Western Pacific. Ki, Suno,
1987, The Canon of Acupuncture Ling Shu, California, Yuin
University Press. Li, Dong-yuan, 1993, Treatise of the Spleen and
Stomach. A Translation of the Pi Wei Lun, (trans. Yang Shou-zhong
and Li Jian-yong), Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Maciocia, G. 1994,
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
319
The Practice of Chinese Medicine. The Treatment of Diseases with
Acupuncture and Chinese Herbs, London, Churchill-Livingstone. Ni,
Mao Shing, 1995, The Yellow Emperors Classic of Medicine,
Boston, Shambala. State Administration of TCM 1995, Advanced
Textbook on Traditional Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology, Vol.
1, Beijing, New World Press. State Administration of TCM 1995,
Advanced Textbook on Traditional Chinese Medicine and
Pharmacology, Vol. 2, Beijing, New World Press. Unschuld, Paul,
1986, Medicine in China. A History of Pharmaceutics, Berkeley,
University of California Press. Wu, Jing Nuan, 1993, Ling Shu or
Spiritual Pivot, Washington, The Taoist Centre. Xu, Xiang Cai, ed.,
1990, English-Chinese Encyclopaedia of Practical TCM, Vol. 21,
Clinical Dialogue, Beijing, Higher Education Press. Yen, K. Y.,
1992, The Illustrated Chinese Materia Medica, Taipei, SMC
Publishing Inc. Zhang, Z. J. 1986, Treatise on Febrile Diseases
Caused by Cold: A Classic of Traditional Chinese Medicine, (trans.
Luo Xi Wen), Beijing, New World Press.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester comprising of lecture and seminar.
Assessment Two-hour examination, 50%; assignment (2000
words), 50%. Students will be required to gain a pass in all
assessment components.
HHH5225 FORMULAS AND STRATEGIES (PCM) 3
Campus City Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHH5125 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 1,
HHH5135 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 2; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HHH5235 Clinical Specialities (PCM); or
equivalent.
Content This aim of this subject is to provide students with a
detailed understanding of the theoretical foundations and clinical
reasoning patterns of the following Chinese herbal classifications;
tonification formulae (bu yi ji), anti-asthmatic/phlegm resolvers (ding
chuan ji/shou hua tan zhi he), resuscitation formulae (kai qiao ji),
dyspepsia relieving (xiao dao ji) and astringents (shao lian ji).
Students will be provided with the opportunity to explore and
understand the theoretical underpinnings of the representative
formula(e) for each of the herbal classifications, the energetic
patterns associated with each of the respective formulae, the
theoretical and clinical reasoning patterns explaining the
development of modifications to principal formulae, appropriate
dosage treatment strategies, precautions, contra-indications and the
issue of patient compliance. In exploring the theoretical foundations
of the construction of herbal formulae significant attention will be
given to classical sources and modern interpretations to inform
student learning. The unit of study also concentrates on the various
forms in which prepared Chinese medicines are delivered: pills,
powders, soup mixes, decoctions, wines and external applications
such as plasters.
Required Reading Bensky, D. and A. Gamble, 1986, Chinese
Herbal MedicineMateria Medica, Seattle, Eastland Press. Bensky,
D. and R. Barolet, 1990, Chinese Herbal MedicineFormulas and
Strategies, Seattle, Eastland Press.
Recommended Reading Acts of the Victorian Parliament 1994,
Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, Melbourne, The Law Printer. Chen,
S. and Li, F. 1993, Clinical Guide to Chinese Herbs and Formulae,
London, Churchill-Livingstone. Commonwealth of Australia, 1989,
Therapeutic Goods Act 1989, Canberra, AGPS. Department of
Health Sciences, TCM Unit 1997, Pharmacy and Clinical Procedures
Manual, St Albans, Victoria University of Technology. Hua, Tuo,
1993, Master Hua’s Classic of the Central Viscera. A Translation of
Hua Tuo’s Zhong Zang Jing, (trans. Yang, Shou-zhong), Boulder,
Blue Poppy Press. Institute of Chinese Materia Medica and China
Academy of Traditional Chinese Medicine 1989, Medicinal Plants in
China, Manila, World Health Organisation, Regional Office for the
Western Pacific. Ki, Suno, 1987, The Canon of Acupuncture Ling
Shu, California, Yuin University Press. Li, Dong-yuan, 1993, Treatise
of the Spleen and Stomach. A Translation of the Pi Wei Lun, (trans.
Yang Shou-zhong and Li Jian-yong), Boulder, Blue Poppy Press.
Maciocia, G. 1994, The Practice of Chinese Medicine. The
Treatment of Diseases with Acupuncture and Chinese Herbs, London,
Churchill-Livingstone. Ni, Mao Shing, 1995, The Yellow Emperors
Classic of Medicine, Boston, Shambala. State Administration of TCM
1995, Advanced Textbook on Traditional Chinese Medicine and
Pharmacology, Vol. 1, Beijing, New World Press. State
Administration of TCM 1995, Advanced Textbook on Traditional
Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology, Vol. 2, Beijing, New World
Press. Unschuld, Paul, 1986, Medicine in China. A History of
Pharmaceutics, Berkeley, University of California Press. Wu, Jing
Nuan, 1993, Ling Shu or Spiritual Pivot, Washington, The Taoist
Centre Xu, Xiang Cai, ed., 1990, English-Chinese Encyclopaedia of
Practical TCM, Vol. 21, Clinical Dialogue, Beijing, Higher Education
Press. Yen, K. Y., 1992, The Illustrated Chinese Materia Medica,
Taipei, SMC Publishing Inc. Zhang, Z. J. 1986, Treatise on Febrile
Diseases Caused by Cold: A Classic of Traditional Chinese
Medicine, (trans. Luo Xi Wen), Beijing, New World Press.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester comprising of lecture and seminar.
Assessment Two-hour examination 50%; one assignment of 2000
words, 50%. Students will be required to gain a pass in all
assessment components.
HHH5235 CLINICAL SPECIALITIES (PCM)
Campus City Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHH5125 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 1,
HHH5125 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 2; or equivalent.
Corequisite(s) HHH5225 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 3; or
equivalent.
Content This aim of this subject is to provide students with a
detailed understanding of the theoretical foundations and clinical
reasoning patterns of the following specialist areas of practice in
Chinese medicine: obstetrics and gynaecology, paediatrics, and
orthopaedics and traumatology. Students will be provided with the
opportunity to explore, understand and assess critically the
theoretical underpinnings of the representative formula(e) for each of
the herbal classifications, the energetic patterns associated with each
of the respective formulae, the theoretical and clinical reasoning
explaining the development of modifications to principal formulae,
treatment strategies, appropriate dosage, precautions, contra-
indications and the issue of patient compliance. In exploring the
theoretical foundations of the construction of herbal formulae
significant attention will be given to classical sources and modern
interpretations to inform student learning. The unit of study also
concentrates on the various forms in which prepared Chinese
medicines are delivered: pills, powders, soup mixes, decoctions,
wines and external applications such as plasters.
Required Reading Maciocia, Giovanni, 1994, The Practice of
Chinese Medicine. The Treatment of Diseases with Acupuncture and
Chinese Herbs, London, Churchill-Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Acts of the Victorian Parliament 1994,
Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act, Melbourne, The Law Printer.
Bensky, D. and A. Gamble, 1986, Chinese Herbal
MedicineMateria Medica, Seattle, Eastland Press. Bensky, D. and
R. Barolet, 1990, Chinese Herbal Medicine-Formulas and Strategies,
Seattle, Eastland Press. Commonwealth of Australia, 1989,
Therapeutic Goods Act 1989, Canberra, AGPS. Department of
Health Sciences, TCM Unit 1997, Pharmacy and Clinical Procedures
Manual, St Albans, Victoria University of Technology. Feng, T.,
1983, Treatment of Soft Tissue Injury with Traditional Chinese and
Western Medicine, Beijing, People’s Medical Publishing House
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
320
Press. Flaws, B., 1985, Tieh Ta Ke: Traditional Chinese
Traumatology and First Aid, Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Flaws, B.,
1991, Fire in the Valley. The TCM Diagnosis and Treatment of
Vaginal Diseases, Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Flaws, B., 1993, Path
of Pregnancy, Vol. 1, A Handbook of Traditional Chinese
Gestational and Birthing Diseases, Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Geng,
J. Huang, W. Ren, and X. Ma, 1991, Practical Traditional Chinese
Medicine and Pharmacology, Medicinal Herbs, Beijing, New World
Press. Hsu, Hong-yen and Hsu, Chau-shin, 1980, Commonly Used
Chinese Herb Formulas With Illustrations, California, Oriental
Healing Arts Press. Hua, Tuo, 1993, Master Hua’s Classic of the
Central Viscera. A Translation of Hua Tuo’s Zhong Zang Jing, (trans.
Yang, Shou-zhong), Boulder, Blue Poppy Press. Li, Dong-yuan,
1993, Treatise of the Spleen and Stomach. A Translation of the Pi
Wei Lun, (trans. Yang Shou-zhong and Li Jian-yong), Boulder, Blue
Poppy Press. Shen, De-hui and N. Wang, 1995, Manual Of
Dermatology in Chinese Medicine, Seattle, Eastland Press. State
Administration of TCM 1995, Advanced Textbook on Traditional
Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology, Vol. 1, Beijing, New World
Press. State Administration of TCM 1995, Advanced Textbook on
Traditional Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology, Vol. 2, Beijing,
New World Press. Zhang, T. and B. Flaws, trans., 1987, Secret
Shaolin Formulae for the Treatment of External Injury, Boulder, Blue
Poppy Press. Zhang, Z. J. 1986, Treatise on Febrile Diseases
Caused by Cold: A Classic of Traditional Chinese Medicine, (trans.
Luo Xi Wen), Beijing, New World Press. Zheijiang College of
Traditional Chinese Medicine 1991, A Handbook of Traditional
Chinese Gynaecology, 2nd. edn), Boulder, Blue Poppy Press.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester comprising of lecture and seminar.
Assessment One two-hour examination, 50%; one assignment of
2000 words, 50%. Students will be required to gain a pass in all
assessment components.
HHH5245 PCM CLINICAL PRACTICUM
Campus City Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHH5225 Formulas and Strategies (PCM) 3,
HHH5235 Clinical Specialities (PCM) ; or equivalent.
Content This subject provides students with the opportunity to
integrate, consolidate and apply the information studied in the
previous theoretical subjects under the instruction and guidance of
an experienced practitioner of Chinese Herbal Medicine. Students
will undertake diagnosis, clinical assessment and develop herbal
prescriptions within the clinical setting.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Bensky, D. and A. Gamble, 1986,
Chinese Herbal MedicineMateria Medica, Seattle, Eastland Press.
Bensky, D. and R. Barolet, 1990, Chinese Herbal
MedicineFormulas and Strategies, Seattle, Eastland Press. Acts of
the Victorian Parliament 1994, Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act,
Melbourne, The Law Printer. Commonwealth of Australia, 1989,
Therapeutic Goods Act 1989, Canberra, AGPS. Department of
Health Sciences, TCM Unit 1997, Pharmacy and Clinical Procedures
Manual, St Albans, Victoria University of Technology. Drugs,
Poisons: Wildlife Protection (Regulation of Exports and Imports) Act
1982, Register of Acupuncture and TCM Code of Ethics.
Subject Hours The equivalent of eight hours per week for one
semester, comprising workshop practicums and case conferences.
Assessment Two practical assessments, satisfactory/unsatisfactory;
one journal report of clinical practice undertaken by the student in
consultation with an experienced practitioner of Chinese Herbal
Medicine, satisfactory/unsatisfactory. Students will be required to
gain a pass in all assessment components.
HHI5001 CLINICAL INTERNAL MEDICINE
Campus City Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject examines in detail traditional Chinese internal
medicine (Nei Ke) based on the system of 52 disorders as specified
in the major classic Jin Gui Yao Lue. The traditional classifications
and treatment of illnesses – gan mao, ke sou, fei wei, fei yong, xiao
zheng, chuan zheng, fei zheng, fei lao, tan yin, zi han, dao han,
xue zheng, jing ji, zheng chong, xiong bi, xian zheng, wei tong, ye
ge, ou tu, e ni, xie xie, li ji, huo luan, fu tong, bian bi, zhu chong,
xie tong, huang dan, ji ju, gu zhang, tou tong, xuan yun, zhong
feng, jing bing, ying liu, nue ji, shui zhong, lin zheng, bi zheng, wei
zheng, nei shang fa re, xu lao, ben tun qi, bu mei, duo mei, jian
wang, jue zheng, yu zheng, dian kuang. Categories of clinical
significance will be emphasised and additional disorders of
relevance to clinical practice in Australia will be examined. The need
to individualise prescriptions is stressed and case histories from the
class are used to demonstrate this aspect.
Required Reading Zhang Zhong-jing (circa 150 AD), Luo, X-W
(trans) and Chi, J-L (rev) (1986). Synopsis of Prescriptions from the
Golden Cabinet (jin gui yao lue). Beijing: New World Press. State
Administration of TCM (1996). Advanced textbook on Traditional
Chinese Medicine and Pharmacology, Vol III. Internal Medicine.
Beijing: New World Press. Tian Delu and Zou Jianhua (Eds.) (2000).
Traditional Internal Chinese Medicine. Beijing: Academy Press.
Recommended Reading Chen, S. and Li, F. (1993). Clinical
Guide to Chinese Herbs and Formulae. London: Churchill-
Livingstone. Macioca, G. (1994). The Practice of Chinese Medicine,
The Treatment of Diseases with Acupuncture and Chinese Herbs.
London: Churchill-Livingstone. MacLean, W. and Lyttleton, J. (1998).
Clinical Handbook of Internal Medicine. Sydney: UWS Macarthur.
Yan, W. and Fischer, W. (1997). Practical Therapeutics of
Traditional Chinese Medicine. Brookline: Paradigm.
Subject Hours Two two hour seminars per week for one semester.
Assessment Two seminar presentations (each 25%); one
assignment of 1,500 words (20%); final exam (30 %). A pass must
be gained for each component of the Assessment
HHI5002 CLINICAL CHINESE MEDICAL GYNAECOLOGY AND
DERMATOLOGY
Campus City Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHI5001 Clinical Internal Medicine; or equivalent.
Content The development of TCM gynaecology and dermatology;
physiology; pathology, aetiology, diagnosis, differentiation of
gynaecological conditions; therapeutic principles and methods.
Disorders include: menopathies, vaginal disorders, gestational
disorders, post-partum disorders, miscellaneous diseases. Case
studies. Selected materia medica. With regard to dermatology
disorders include: eczema, dermatitis, psoriasis, fungal diseases and
other frequently encountered skin disorders. Case studies. Selected
materia medica.
Required Reading Flaws, B. (1997). A Handbook of Menstrual
Diseases in Chinese Medicine. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Macioca,
G. (1988). Obstetrics & Gynaecology in Chinese Medicine.
Melbourne: Churchill-Livingstone. Shen De-Hui, Wu Xiu-Sen and
Wang, Nissi (1995). Manual of Dermatology in Chinese Medicine.
Seattle: Eastland.
Recommended Reading Flaws, B. (1991). Fire in the Valley: The
TCM Diagnosis and Treatment of Vaginal Diseases. Boulder: Blue
Poppy Press. Flaws, B. (1993). Path of Pregnancy, Vol 1. A
Handbook of Traditional Chinese Gestational and Birthing Diseases.
Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Liang J-H. (1988). A Handbook of
Traditional Chinese Dermatology. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Xu,
Xiang Cai (Chief Ed.) (1990). Chinese Encyclopaedia of Practical
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
321
TCM, Vol 12. Gynaecology. Beijing: Higher Education Press. Xu,
Xiang Cai (Chief Ed.) (1990). English-Chinese Encyclopaedia of
Practical TCM. Vol 16. Dermatology. Beijing: Higher Education
Press. Yang, Shou-zhong and Liu, Da-we (trans.) (1992). Fu Qing-
zhu’s Gynecology. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Zhejiang College of
Traditional Chinese Medicine (1991). A Handbook of Traditional
Chinese Gynaecology, 2nd edn. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press.
Subject Hours Four hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Two seminar presentations (each 25%); assignment of
1,500 words (20%); final exam (30 %). A pass must be gained for
each component of the assessment.
HHK5001 SPORTS & MUSCULO-SKELETAL MEDICINE FOR
ACUPUNCTURISTS
Campus City Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHK5115 Acupuncture & Moxibustion 1; or
equivalent.
Content This subject consolidates and further develops the student’s
skills in the Chinese Medical approach to sports performance
enhancement and the diagnosis, treatment and management of
sports injuries and musculo-skeletal disorders. The material covered
will include the application of acupuncture, moxibustion, cupping,
electro-acupuncture, point injection therapy, needle threading;
through & through needling, needle embedding, tui na, laser
therapy, magnet therapy, gua sha, ointments, poultices, plasters,
exercise & rest, shi liao and nutritional supplements.
Required Reading Legge, D. (1990). Close to the bone. Woy
Woy NSW: Sydney College Press.
Recommended Reading Chen, J. and Wang, N. (Eds.) (1988).
Acupuncture Case Histories from China. Seattle: Eastland Press.
Chen, JD and Xu, H (1996). The Historical Development of Chinese
Diet Pattern and Nutrition from the Ancient to the Modern Society.
World Review of Nutrition and Dietetics, Vol 79. Basel Karger.
Chen, JD et al. (1990). The effects of Actinidia Sinensis Planch (Kiwi)
drink supplementation on athletes training in hot environments. The
Journal of Sports Medicine and Physical Fitness, 30(2), 181-184
(Abstract). Chen, JD et al. (1994). Effects of Kiwi compound
preparation on exercise performance (Abstract). Asian Sport
Sciences Congress, Hiroshima. No 446, 185. Chen, JD et al.
(1995). Hawthorn (Shan Zha) drink and its lowering effect on lipid
levels in human and rats. In Simopoulos A.P. (Ed), Plants in Human
Nutrition. World Review of Nutrition and Dietetics, Vol 77, 147-
154. Basel, Karger. Chen, Y. and Deng, L. (Eds.) (1989). Essentials
of Contemporary Chinese Acupuncturists' Clinical Experiences.
Beijing: Foreign Languages Press. Clogstoun-Wilmott, J. (1987).
Food in Traditional Chinese Medicine. Journal Chinese Medicine,
24, 25-30. Deadman, P. and Al-Khafaji, M. (1998). A Manual of
Acupuncture. Essex: Journal of Chinese Medicine Publications. Ellis,
N. (1994). Acupuncture in Clinical Practice. London: Chapman &
Hall. High, D. (1991). The treatment of Zhong Feng. (Unpublished
IRP) Victoria University of Technology, St. Albans. Low, R. (1987).
The acupuncture treatment of musculo-skeletal conditions.
Northamptonshire: Thorsons Publishing. Vangermeersch, L. (1994).
Bi Syndrome. Brussels: Satas. Watson, K (1988). Chinese Food
Therapy. The Australian Journal of Traditional Chinese Medicine, 4
(1). Xu H et al. (1993). Effects of Poris Cocos (Fuling) preparation on
reducing body fat and weight (Abstract). International Conference on
Sports Medicine. Beijing China. Yin, H. et al (1992). Fundamentals
of Traditional Chinese Medicine. Beijing: Foreign language Press.
Subject Hours The equivalent of four hours per week for one
semester comprising seminars, practical demonstrations, practice
workshops and student presentations.
Assessment One oral practical assessment (35%); one test (35%);
and one assignment (30%). A pass must be gained in each
component of assessment.
HHK5002 GYNAECOLOGY AND OBSTETRICS FOR ACUPUNCTURISTS
Campus City Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHK5155 Acupuncture & Moxibustion 2; or
equivalent.
Content Gynaecology: This subject consolidates and further
develops the student’s skills in the Chinese medical approach to
gynaecology and obstetrics. Topics covered will include: the
development of Chinese medical gynaecology; gynaecological
physiology; pathology, aetiology, diagnosis, differentiation of
gynaecological conditions; therapeutic principles and methods,
disorders including menopathies, vaginal disorders, gestational
disorders, post-partum disorders, miscellaneous diseases, and case
studies. Obstetrics: Acupuncture obstetrics including
contraindications & precautions, acupuncture treatment of disorders
during pregnancy and labour, acupuncture induced labour,
acupuncture assisted birth, the treatment of pain, anxiety and other
conditions during labour, pre and post-natal care, the acupuncturist
as part of the neonatal health practitioner team, birth options and
settings; cultural perspectives on birth and birthing.
Required Reading Flaws, B. (1997). A Handbook of Menstrual
Diseases in Chinese Medicine. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Maciocia,
G. (1997). Obstetrics and Gynecology in Chinese Medicine.
London: Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading California Acupuncture College.
(1981). Acupuncture and Herbs for Obstetrics. Los Angeles:
California Acupuncture College. Flaws, B. (1991). Fire in the Valley:
The TCM Diagnosis and Treatment of Vaginal Diseases. Boulder:
Blue Poppy Press. Flaws, B. (1993). Path of Pregnancy, Vol 1: A
Handbook of Traditional Chinese Gestational and Birthing Diseases.
Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Flaws, Bob (1993). Path of pregnancy
Vol. 2: A handbook of traditional Chinese postpartum diseases.
Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Hou Jing-Lun (ed) (1995). Acupuncture
and moxibustion therapy in gynecology and obstetrics. Beijing:
Science and Technology Press. Low, R. (1990). Acupuncture in
gynaecology and obstetrics. Wellingborough: Thorsons. Watson, K.
(1988). Acupuncture and obstetrics. The Australian Journal of
Traditional Chinese Medicine, 4(3). Watson, K. (1988). An
introduction to TCM gynaecology. The Australian Journal of
Traditional Chinese Medicine, 4(2). Wolfe, H.L. (1993). How to
have a healthy pregnancy, healthy birth with traditional. Xu, Xiang
Cai (Chief Ed.) (1990). Chinese Encyclopaedia of Practical TCM,
Vol 12: Gynaecology. Beijing: Higher Education Press. Yang, Shou-
zhong and Liu, Da-we (trans.) (1992). Fu Qing-zhu’s Gynecology.
Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Yun Jin Hakin, Chris (trans & Ed.) (1998).
Handbook of obstetrics and gynecology in Chinese medicine: An
integrated approach. Seattle, WA: Eastland Press. Zhejiang College
of Traditional Chinese Medicine (1991). A Handbook of Traditional
Chinese Gynaecology, 2nd edn. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press.
Subject Hours The equivalent of four hours per week for one
semester comprising seminars, practical demonstrations and practice
workshops.
Assessment Seminar presentation (25%); assignment of 1,500
words (25%); final exam (50%). A pass must be gained in each
component of assessment.
HHL3919 PHARMACOLOGY 1 (OSTEOPATHY)
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) RBF2739 Biochemistry 2; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to make osteopathic students aware of the
development and testing process for drugs, and to acquaint them
with the actions, interactions, adverse effects and implications for the
osteopath of the drugs most commonly seen in osteopathic patients.
By the end of the subject the students should have an understanding
of the development and testing process for drugs and basic
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
322
pharmacological concepts such as pharmacokinetics and dynamics.
They will have begun a detailed study of drug categories which will
be continued in HHL4929 Pharmacology 2. Content will include:
The development & testing process for drugs. Trends in drug
research. The approval process and the Pharmaceutical Benefits
Scheme. Generics vs. brands – reasons for differences in prescribing
habits. Pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics. Toxicology issues.
Overview of major drug categories, with emphasis on the
implications for the osteopath – analgesics, non-steroidal anti-
inflammatories, cortico-steroids, oral contraceptives and derivatives,
drugs used in infection control, hypnotics and anxiolytics.
Required Reading HHL3919 Pharmacology 1 CD ROM – VUT.
Students should also obtain a copy of the most recent edition of
MIMS or the Australian Drug Guide.
Recommended Reading B Katzung (2001) Lange’s Basic and
clinical pharmacology, McGaw Hill-New York.
Subject Hours Equivalent of two hours per week for one semester
comprising self-directed study from dedicated CD ROM and
tutorial/workshop sessions.
Assessment Written examination, 100%.
HHL4029 NUTRITION AND DIET 1
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHL3919 Pharmacology 1; RBF2739 Biochemistry
2; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to introduce students to nutritional theory
and revise the physiology of nutrition. To consider the relationship of
food to disease and obtain an overview of eating disorders. At the
completion of the subject students should have an understanding of
the role of food in disease, what constitutes a balanced diet, and
what factors may be involved in eating disorders. content will
include: Definition and terms. The balanced diet – omnivore,
vegetarian etc. Diet and disease. Nutritional deficiency; aetiology,
pathogenesis, prevention and dietary treatment. Obesity. Anorexia
and Bulimia. Introduction to concepts of dietary therapy.
Required Reading Wahlqvist, Mark L.(ed.) 1997, Food and
Nutrition Australasia, Asia and the Pacific, Allen and Unwin, St.
Leonards. Brown, Judith E., 1990, The Science of Human Nutrition,
Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, USA. Garrow, J.S. and James W.P.T.,
(eds.) 1996, Human Nutrition and Dietetics, 9th ed., Churchill
Livingstone, New York. Mahan, L. Kathleen and Escott-Stump, Sylvia
(eds.), 1996, Krause’s Food, Nutrition, and Diet Therapy, 9th ed,
W.B. Saunders Company, Philadelphia.
Subject Hours Two hours per week for one semester comprising
one one-hour lecture and one one-hour tutorial or equivalent.
Assessment Written examination, 60%; assignment, (2000 words)
40%.
HHL4929 PHARMACOLOGY 2 (OSTEOPATHY)
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHL3919 Pharmacology 1 (Osteopathy) ; or
equivalent.
Content The subject aims to expand and consolidate knowledge
acquired in the subject HHL3919 Pharmacology 1. By the end of the
course students should have an understanding of the actions,
interactions and adverse effects of the major drugs seen in
osteopathic practice, and should have an understanding of referral
procedures and ethical issues. Content will include: Continuing
overview of major drug categories – actions, indications, contra-
indications, interactions, adverse effects and implications for the
osteopath of the following drugs: Drugs used in gastro-intestinal
problems and cardiovascular conditions. Drugs affecting the central
nervous system. Drugs used in endocrine disorders. Cytotoxics and
immunosuppressants. Immunisation and the immunisation debate.
Recreational drugs and effects of substance abuse.
Required Reading As for HHL3919 Pharmacology 1.
Subject Hours Equivalent of two hrs per week for one semester
comprising self-directed study from dedicated CD ROM and
tutorials/workshops.
Assessment Written examination, 100%.
HHL4939 RESEARCH 1
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHM3439 Biometry 3; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to assist and facilitate the preparation of
a proposal and ethics documentation for the minor thesis required
for the completion of the Master of Health Science – Osteopathy
course. By the end of the year the students should have successfully
completed their Masters by coursework proposals and ethics
documents, and should be working on data collection. content will
include: Preparation of a research project proposal and ethics
documentation including the necessary literature search. The project
itself is to be completed during Year 1 of the Masters Degree either
as a minor dissertation or as a paper for publication. The project will
need to be presented to the Ethics and Research Committee and
passed by that committee prior to being implemented.
Required Reading As for HHM3439 Biometry 3.
Recommended Reading This will depend on the research topic
to be undertaken. It should have some reference to osteopathy.
Subject Hours Two hours of tutorial/workshop & two hours self-
directed study with access to supervisors per week for semester one.
two hrs self-directed study with access to supervisors per week for
semester two.
Assessment Oral presentation of project proposal, acceptance of
proposal 50%and ethics documentation, 50%
HHL5049 NUTRITION AND DIET 2
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHL4029 Nutrition and Diet 1; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to study the role of various nutrients in
both health and disease and to investigate the concept of food as
medicine and consider naturopathic concepts. By the end of the
course the students should have sufficient knowledge to able to
recognise nutritional deficiencies and eating disorders in patients,
and to act appropriately in those situations. The following topics will
be discussed in lectures, Carbohydrates, Fats, Proteins, Vitamins,
Minerals, The Healthy Diet, Diet and Disease, Food Hygiene and
Naturopathic concepts. Tutorials will address issues arising from
both the core tutorial exercise of keeping a food diary for one week
which is subsequently analysed and from topics that are stimulated
by lectures and discussion.
Required Reading As for HHL 4029 Nutrition and Diet 1.
Subject Hours Two hours per week or equivalent for one semester
comprising lectures and tutorials/workshops.
Assessment Food diary, 40%; assignments, 60%.
HHL5959 RESEARCH 2
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHM3439 Biometry 3; HHL4939 Research 1; or
equivalent.
Content The subject aims to facilitate the successful completion of
the Masters of Health Science – Osteopathy minor thesis. By the end
of this course the students should have completed their minor thesis,
and will have acquired the research skills necessary for further
research projects. The minor research thesis which was prepared
during in the year one of the Master of Health Science – Osteopathy,
should be completed and written up for assessment. All students are
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
323
expected to complete the project as a minor thesis or paper for
publication. Supervisors will assist where necessary.
Required/Recommended Reading Aron, A. & Aron, E.N.
(1999) Statistics for Psychology. 2nd Ed. Prentice Hall, New Jersey;
Burdess, N. (1994) The Really Understandable Stats Book. Prentice
Hall, Australia; Campbell MJ, Machin D (1993) Medical statistics: A
commonsense approach, 2nd ed. John Wiley & Sons, Chichester,
UK; Coakes SJ and Steed LG (2003) SPSS : analysis without anguish
: version 11.0 for Windows John Wiley & Sons, Milton, Qld;
Domholdt E (2000) Physical Therapy Research. Principles and
Applications. 2nd ed. WB Saunders, Philadelphia, PA; Graziano,
A.M., & Raulin, M.L. (1989) Research methods: A process of
inquiry. Harper Collins, New York; Jenkins, S., Price, C.J. & Straker,
L. (1998) The Researching Therapist. A practical guide to planning,
performing and communicating research. Churchill Livingstone;
Kuzma, J. (1990) Statistics in Health Sciences. Mayfield, California;
Munro B H (1997) Statistical methods for health care research, 3rd
ed. Lippincott, Philadelphia, PA. Any other reading will depend on
the topic to be undertaken, which will form the basis of the review of
literature, methodology and discussion.
Subject Hours Five hours per week over two semesters. This is
independent research in addition to regular meetings with student
supervisors throughout the duration of the subject.
Assessment Oral Presentation of Project: 30%; Written
presentation of Thesis (12,000-20,000 words) or Treatise (4000-
5000 words): 70%. All work will be assessed by examiner(s)
selected by the Subject co-ordinator who are independent of the
work submitted.
HHM6800 RESEARCH THESIS (FULL-TIME)
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to a Masters by Research or
Doctor of Philosophy program.
Content This subject, the aim of which is to enable students to
competently research an area of study utilising knowledge and skills
gained in previous studies, consists of a project carried out by
students on an individual basis. The project is expected to be an
investigation of an approved topic, followed by the submission of a
suitably formatted thesis in which the topic is introduced and
formulated; the investigation described in detail; results and
conclusions from the study elaborated; and an extended discussion
presented. Students may be required to undertake some lecture
courses, as specified at the time of commencement.
Required Reading To be advised by supervisor.
Subject Hours Independent research in addition to regular
meetings with the student supervisors.
Assessment The thesis will normally be assessed by at least two
expert examiners from an appropriate area of expertise.
HHM6801 RESEARCH THESIS (PART-TIME)
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to a Masters by Research or
Doctor of Philosophy program.
Content This subject, the aim of which is to enable students to
competently research an area of study utilising knowledge and skills
gained in previous studies, consists of a project carried out by
students on an individual basis. The project is expected to be an
investigation of an approved topic, followed by the submission of a
suitably formatted thesis in which the topic is introduced and
formulated; the investigation described in detail; results and
conclusions from the study elaborated; and an extended discussion
presented. Students may be required to undertake some lecture
courses, as specified at the time of commencement.
Required Reading To be advised by supervisor.
Subject Hours Independent research in addition to regular
meetings with the student supervisors.
Assessment The thesis will normally be assessed by at least two
expert examiners from an appropriate area of expertise.
HHO4589 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 4
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHO3175 Osteopathic Science 5; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to expand the scope of students’ technical
and clinical skills, building on the foundations gained in the HBOS
course. Additional osteopathic techniques will be taught, there will
be a continuing emphasis on preventive care, including clinical
ergonomics, and there will be an introduction to patient
management skills. By the end of this subject the students should
have further expanded their technical range, and should be aware
of aspects of patient and practice management which will then be
studied further in year two of the Master of Health Science –
Osteopathy. Content will include: the various models of osteopathic
treatment. Strain/Counterstrain and functional techniques. Clinical
ergonomics for osteopaths, incl. occupational health. Problems of
patient management – time management, treatment of infants,
children the elderly and disabled, osteopathy and the law, medical
letter and report writing, the role of osteopathy in overall healthcare
management. Presentation of patient information – case
conferencing.
Required Reading Jones LH 1994 Strain and Counterstrain,
American Academy of Osteopathy, Colorado. Johnston WL and
Friedman HD, 1991 Functional Methods, American Academy of
Osteopathy, Indianapolis. Pheasant S, 1991 Ergonomics, Work and
Health, Macmillan, London.
Recommended Reading D’Ambrogio KJ and Roth GB, 1997
Positional Release Therapy, Mosby, St. Louis.
Subject Hours Five hours per week or equivalent for two semesters
comprising lectures, tutorials/workshops and practical sessions.
Assessment Semester one: practical examination, 30%;
assignment 2000 words, 20%. Semester two, practical examination,
30%; assignment 2000 words, 20%.
HHO5501 OSTEOPATHIC HISTORY & PRINCIPLES 1
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The subject aims to introduce students to the historical
origins and development of osteopathy as a therapy, to its
theoretical principles and the research basis for osteopathic theory,
and to the concepts underlying osteopathic diagnosis and
therapeutic approaches. At the conclusion of the subject students
should have an understanding of osteopathic history and theory, and
should have developed an understanding of the principles of
osteopathic diagnosis and osteopathic therapeutics. Content will
include: Terminology. Historical development of osteopathic
medicine as a primary health care field. Philosophy of osteopathic
health care to include examination of osteopathic principles both
theoretical and those that have some evidence based upon research.
Development of the conceptual framework for osteopathic practice.
Consideration of the functioning of the individual as a whole. ART
Asymmetry, Range of motion, Tissue texture change and the
application of this principle to patient care. The historical context
and development of the ‘osteopathic lesion’ and its implication to
osteopathic practice and health. Somatic dysfunction, its diagnosis
including barrier principles. Somatic dysfunction and its relationship
to disease causation/treatment. Deviations of health or 'wellness'
into metabolic, hormonal, neural, enzymatic, psychological etc
disturbances and the osteopathic treatment approach to each.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
324
Integration of the osteopathic treatment prescription.
Contraindications to osteopathic care both absolute and relative.
Required Reading Basmajian JV & Nyberg R Editors 1993
Rational Manual Therapies. Baltimore Williams and Wilkins.
Greenman P 1989 Principles of Manual Medicine Baltimore
Williams and Wilkins. Kuchera M 1994 Osteopathic Considerations
in Systemic Dysfunction Greyden Press OH. Ward RC Editor 1997
Foundations for Osteopathic Medicine Williams and Wilkins
Baltimore.
Recommended Reading Hoag J M 1969 Osteopathic Medicine
McGraw-Hill New York. Korr I M 1969 The Physiological Basis of
Osteopathic Medicine Post-graduate Institute of Osteopathic
Medicine New York. Korr I M 1978 Ed. The Neurological
Mechanisms of Manipulative Therapy Plenum Press New York and
London. Neumann H D 1989 Introduction to Manual Medicine
Springer-Verlag Berlin. Willard F H & Patterson M M Ed. 1994
Nociception and the Neuroendocrine-Immune Connection American
Academy of Osteopathy Athens Ohio. Selected articles from the
Journal of the American Osteopathic Association and other
osteopathic journals.
Subject Hours 10 hours per residential unit for two residential
programs, comprising lectures, tutorials and workshops
Assessment 3000 word assignment, 30%; written examination,
70%.
HHO5502 OSTEOPATHIC HISTORY & PRINCIPLES 2
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHO5501 Osteopathic History & Principles 1,
HHO5511 Osteopathic Technique 1, HHO5521 Osteopathic
Diagnosis 1, HHC5531 Clinical Practice 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject aims to consolidate and further develop
knowledge acquired in the subject HHO5501 Osteopathic History
and Principles 1. It will explore the theoretical and research basis of
osteopathy, consider the various ‘models’ of osteopathic treatment,
and explore the role that osteopathic considerations may play in
systemic dysfunction. The role of Registration Boards, professional
associations and their codes of conduct will also be discussed. By
the end of this subject the students should have a thorough
understanding of the theoretical basis of osteopathy, have a grasp of
the various models of osteopathic treatment, and be developing an
understanding of how osteopathic techniques and approaches may
be used in the management of systemic conditions. They will also
understand the roles of the Registration Boards and professional
associations and their codes of conduct. Content will include: The
neurophysiological mechanisms underpinning osteopathic principles
and practice. Further exploration of the different ‘models’ used by
osteopaths to formulate a diagnosis and prescribe osteopathic
treatment. The historical development of these ‘models’ and review of
research that may or may not validate practice: Parasympathetic and
sympathetic control, Zink patterns, Chapman's reflexes, Lymphatic
techniques, Visceral osteopathy, Cranial osteopathy. Osteopathic
considerations in systemic dysfunction. The responsibilities of
practitioners in professional practice. The norms of conduct expected
by the Registration Boards and by colleagues in the Osteopathic and
allied professions. Professional societies. Code of Ethics. Advertising
restrictions.
Required Reading Greenma 1989 Principles of Manual
Medicine Williams and Wilkins Baltimore. Kuchera M 1994
Osteopathic Considerations in Systemic Dysfunction Greyden Press
OH. Ward RC Editor 1997 Foundations for Osteopathic Medicine
Williams and Wilkins Baltimore.
Recommended Reading Hoag J M 1969 Osteopathic Medicine
McGraw-Hill New York. Korr I M 1969 The Physiological Basis of
Osteopathic Medicine Post-graduate Institute of Osteopathic
Medicine New York. Neumann H D 1989 Introduction to Manual
Medicine Springer-Verlag Berlin. Selected articles from the JAOA.
Subject Hours 10 hours per residential unit one residential unit
comprising lectures, tutorials and workshops.
Assessment 3000 word assignment, 30%; written examination,
70%.
HHO5509 OSTEOPATHIC SCIENCE 5
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHO4589 Osteopathic Science 4; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to complete the teaching of osteopathic
techniques; to further emphasise preventive care via exercise
prescription, and to teach the students the business and
administrative skills required to run a practice. By the end of this
subject the students should be competent in a broad range of
osteopathic techniques, and should be able to advise patients on a
broad range of preventive healthcare options. They should have the
business and administrative skills necessary to open and run their
own practices. content will include: Reinforcement of ethical and
interprofessional issues. Visceral osteopathy. Cranio-sacral
osteopathy. Advanced osteopathic technique – refinement and
further development of techniques. Practice management – how to
set up and operate a practice, incl. accounting and tax planning.
Exercise prescription for specific purposes and conditions.
Orthopaedic surgical procedures and their implications for
osteopaths. The osteopath in practice – public health issues, the
healthcare system and the place of osteopathy, government health
policy and the economic imperative in healthcare.
Required Reading Barral, JP and Mercier P 1988 Visceral
Manipulation, Eastland Press, Seattle. Sutherland, W.G., Teachings
in the Science of Osteopathy, A. Wales ed., Rudra Press, NY.
Magoun, H.I. 1976, Osteopathy in the Cranial Field, Journal
Printing Co., Kirksville.
Recommended Reading Di Giovanni, E. and Schiowitz, S., An
Osteopathic Approach to Diagnosis and Treatment, J.P. Lippincott,
Phil. Sutherland, W.G., With Thinking Fingers, The Cranial
Academy Printing Co., Kirksville Mo. Retzlaff, E.W. and Mitchell,
F.L., 1990 The Cranium and Its Sutures, Springer-Verlag, Germany.
Subject Hours Six hours per week or equivalent for two semesters
comprising lectures, practicals and workshops.
Assessment Semester one: practical examinations, 40%; Semester
two: practical examinations, 40%; assignment 2000 words, 20%.
HHO5511 OSTEOPATHIC TECHNIQUE 1
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject aims to introduce students to basic osteopathic
techniques for both soft tissues and articular structures, including
articulatory, muscle energy and high velocity, low-amplitude thrust
techniques, and to develop the palpatory skills needed fort heir
successful application. On completion of the subject the students
should be able to locate and assess dysfunctional tissues, and should
be able to apply the techniques taught to most areas of the
musculoskeletal system. They should also be aware of
contraindications to the use of these techniques. content will include:
Technique will include the development of high level palpatory skills
to facilitate an awareness of the characteristics of both normal and
dysfunctional tissues. Spinal segmental palpatory examination. Basic
soft tissue techniques applicable to the musculoskeletal system. The
use of long and short leverages to induce motion within the
musculoskeletal system. Articulatory techniques as applicable to:
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
325
Appendicular skeleton, Cervical spine, Thoracic spine, Lumbar spine,
Pelvis. High Velocity Low Amplitude HVLA thrust techniques for the
appendicular skeleton and non-junctional areas of the spinal column.
Introduction to Muscle Energy Techniques MET – principles and
application to all soft tissues and joints of the body to normalise
mechanics. Absolute and relative contraindications to the use of
these techniques.
Required Reading Beal M C Ed 1989 The Principles of Palpatory
Diagnosis and Manipulative Technique American Academy of
Osteopathy Newark Ohio. Greenman P 1989 Principles of Manual
Medicine Baltimore Williams and Wilkins. Hartman L 1997
Handbook of Osteopathic Technique 3rd Ed. London Chapman &
Hall. Mitchell F L 1995 The Muscle Energy Manual. Vol 1. MET
Press East Lansing, Michigan. Ward RC Editor 1997 Foundations for
Osteopathic Medicine Baltimore Williams and Wilkins.
Recommended Reading Di Giovanna E L and Schiowitz E 1991
An Osteopathic Approach to Diagnosis and Treatment Lippincott
Philadelphia. Fryette H H 1954 Principles of Osteopathic Technic
Academy of Applied Osteopathy Carmel California. Graham K E
Outline of Muscle Energy Techniques Okalahoma College of
Osteopathic Medicine and Surgery. Mitchell F L, Moran P S and
Pruzzo N A 1979 An Evaluation and Treatment Manual of
Osteopathic Muscle Energy Procedures Valley Park Mo 63088
Mitchell, Moran and Pruzzo Associates. Stoddard A 1980 Manual
of Osteopathic Technique Hutchinson 3rd Ed London. Walton W J
1989 Osteopathic Diagnosis and Technique Procedures American
Academy of Osteopathy. Wernham G and Waldman M An
Illustrated Manual of Osteopathic Technique Maidstone Osteopathic
Clinic.
Subject Hours 50 hours for residential unit 1 and residential unit
2, comprising lectures, practical labs and workshops. Optional
elective component: This elective must be eligible for the award of
continuing medical education CME credits from statutory osteopathic
accrediting agencies and be agreed by the course co-ordinator.
Exemption will be for attendance hours only. Students will be
expected to successfully complete all examinations.
Assessment Practical & viva voce examinations, 100%.
HHO5512 OSTEOPATHIC TECHNIQUE 2
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHO5501 Osteopathic History & Principles 1,
HHO5511 Osteopathic Technique 1, HHO5521 Osteopathic
Diagnosis 1, HHC5531 Clinical Practice 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject aims to expand the range of osteopathic
manual techniques that the students can use, and will include
additional high velocity, low amplitude thrust techniques for
junctional areas, plus introduction to osteopathic indirect techniques,
and the cautions and contraindications for these. By the completion
of this subject, the students will have a basic grounding in all of the
commonly used osteopathic techniques, and will have an awareness
of their appropriate application and the contraindications to their
use. Content will include: Further development of osteopathic
palpatory skills with awareness of the nature of the forces used;
analysis of skills into categories of rhythmic, low velocity stress and
thrust techniques. Development of the ability to formulate a suitable
treatment program for a variety of patients and clinical conditions
considering age, occupation, life style etc. Further development of
osteopathic skills and the use of leverages in osteopathic treatment
regimes. High Velocity Low Amplitude HVLA thrust techniques to the
junctional areas of the spinal column. To include: Atlanto-occipital
joint, Atlanto-axial joint, Cervico-dorsal junction, Dorso-lumbar
junction, Lumbo-sacral articulation. HVLA thrust techniques to the ribs
and pelvis. Continued development of skills in the application of soft
tissue, articulation and muscle energy techniques. Introduction to the
following technical approaches: Fascial release, Neuromuscular
technique/inhibition, Functional technique, Strain/counterstrain,
Visceral osteopathy, Cranio-sacral techniques. Common and less
common clinical presentations – the various osteopathic treatment
approaches to these.
Required Reading Barral J P and Mercier P 1988-1989 Visceral
Manipulation Vols 1 and 2 Eastland Press Seattle. Greenman P
1989 Principles of Manual Medicine Williams and Wilkins
Baltimore. Hartman L 1997 Handbook of Osteopathic Technique 3rd
Ed. Chapman & Hall London. Kendall F and McCreary E 1983
Muscles, Testing and Function Williams and Wilkins Baltimore.
Owens C 1963The Endocrine Interpretation of Chapman's Reflexes
Academy for Applied Osteopathy Carmel California.
Recommended Reading Chaitow L 1988 Soft Tissue
Manipulation Thorsons Publishing Group Wellingborough. Di
Giovanna E L and Schiowitz E 1991 An Osteopathic Approach to
Diagnosis and Treatment Lippincott Philadelphia. Janda V 1983
Muscle Function Testing Butterworth London. Jones L Strain and
Counterstain American Academy of Osteopathy. Lewit K 1985
Manipulative Therapy in Rehabilitation of the Motor System
Butterworths London. Magoun H I 1976 Osteopathy in the Cranial
Field Journal Printing Co Kirksville. Retzlaff E W and Mitchell F L The
Cranium and its Sutures Springer-Verlag. Stoddard A 1980 Manual
of Osteopathic Technique Hutchinson 3rd Ed London. Stoddard A
1983 Manual of Osteopathic Practice Hutchinson London.
Sutherland W G Teachings in the Science of Osteopathy Ed by
Wales A Rudra Press. Sutherland W G The Cranial Bowl Mankato
Free Press Co. Sutherland W G Contributions of Thought USA
Collected by the Cranial Academy. Sutherland W G With Thinking
Fingers Kirksville Mo The Cranial Academy Printing Co. Travell J and
Simons D Myofascial Pain and Dysfunction – The Trigger Point
Manual Vol 1 Butterworths Baltimore. Tucker C The Mechanics of
Sports Injuries Blackwell Scientific Publications Oxford. Walton W J
1989 Osteopathic Diagnosis and Technique Procedures American
Academy of Osteopathy.
Subject Hours 50 hours per residential unit one residential unit
comprising lectures, workshops and practical labs.
Assessment Practical & viva voce examination, 100%.
HHO5521 OSTEOPATHIC DIAGNOSIS 1
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject aims to teach students the skills required to
take an osteopathic case history and carry out a full osteopathic
physical examination. By the conclusion, the students should be able
to take a full osteopathically-oriented case history and carry out an
osteopathic physical examination using observation, palpation and
motion testing. Content will include: The osteopathic case history.
Emphasis will be placed upon the role of predisposing, precipitating
and maintaining factors in the development of an osteopathic
diagnosis and prognosis. The importance of observation of the
patient prior to palpatory examination will be stressed. Special
attention will be placed upon: Erect and sitting posture, Gait,
Occupational and environmental stresses. Recognition of
contraindications to the use of osteopathic techniques from the
history, examination, and special investigations. The importance of
segmental spinal examination in the formulation of a
mechanical/motion diagnosis. Osteopathic considerations in
systemic dysfunction.
Required Reading Di Giovanna E L and Schiowitz E 1991 An
Osteopathic Approach to Diagnosis and Treatment Lippincott
Philadelphia. Greenman P 1989 Principles of Manual Medicine
Williams and Wilkins Baltimore. Stoddard A 1983 Manual of
Osteopathic Practice Hutchinson 2nd Ed London. Ward RC Editor
1997 Foundations for Osteopathic Medicine Baltimore Williams and
Wilkins.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
326
Recommended Reading Cailliet R 1987 Soft Tissue Pain and
Disability F A Davis Philadelphia. Cailliet R 1987 Low Back Pain
Syndrome F A Davis Philadelphia. Cailliet R 1987 Knee Pain and
Disability F A Davis Philadelphia. Cailliet R 1987 Neck and Arm
Pain F A Davis Philadelphia. Walton W J 1989 Osteopathic
Diagnosis and Technique Procedures American Academy of
Osteopathy.
Subject Hours 15 hours for residential unit 1 and residential unit
two comprising lectures, workshops and practical labs.
Assessment Practical examinations, 50%; assignments, 50%.
HHO5522 OSTEOPATHIC DIAGNOSIS 2
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHO5501 Osteopathic History & Principles 1,
HHO5511 Osteopathic Technique 1, HHO5521 Osteopathic
Diagnosis 1, HHC5531 Clinical Practice 1; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to consolidate and further develop
knowledge acquired in the subject HHO5521 Osteopathic
Diagnosis 1. Consideration will be given to causes of orthopaedic
and osteopathic dysfunction, to the formulation of osteopathic
differential diagnoses, and to the formulation of a comprehensive
osteopathic treatment plan. The students will be able, at the end of
the subject, to carry out full orthopaedic and osteopathic assessment
of patients, to formulate osteopathic differential diagnoses, and to
devise a treatment plan suitable for individual patients, taking all
safety aspects into consideration. Content will include: Evaluation of
musculoskeletal system dysfunctions. Osteopathic differential
diagnosis. Formulation of structured and sequenced treatment
prescriptions arising from osteopathic diagnosis. Detection of
somatic dysfunction. Abnormalities of spinal mechanics: congenital,
acquired and developmental. Osteopathic considerations in systemic
dysfunction. Review of literature and manipulative therapy critique.
Required Reading Greenman P 1989 Principles of Manual
Medicine Williams and Wilkins Baltimore. Stoddard A 1983
Manual of Osteopathic Practice Hutchinson 2nd Ed London. Ward
RC Editor 1997 Foundations for Osteopathic Medicine Williams and
Wilkins Baltimore.
Recommended Reading Di Giovanna E L and Schiowitz E 1991
An Osteopathic Approach to Diagnosis and Treatment Lippincott
Philadelphia. Walton W J 1989 Osteopathic Diagnosis and
Technique Procedures American Academy of Osteopathy.
Subject Hours 15 hours per residential unit for both residential
programs comprising lectures, tutorials and workshops.
Assessment Practical examination, 50%; assignment, 50%.
HHR0001 INTRODUCTION TO RESEARCH DESIGN AND METHODS
Campus Footscray Park, St Albans, City Flinders Lane
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The content of this subject will provide an introduction to
research methods and design for the social sciences. This will
include a review of the scientific methods and ways of knowing,
quantitative and qualitative paradigms, questionnaire design and
evaluation, validity and reliability of research designs, ethical issues
and evaluation of the research design of published papers. The
subject will also include an introduction to sampling and methods of
data collection and analysis for quantitative and qualitative research.
The study of quantitative methods will focus on experimental,
correlational and survey designs and of the corresponding methods
of data analyses including descriptive and inferential statistics,
correlation and regression and hypothesis testing. The qualitative
research designs to be studied in some detail will be drawn from
case study, ethnography, grounded theory, phenomenology,
historical research, philosophical research and action research. The
role of the researcher in collecting qualitative data will be discussed
along with methods of analysing qualitative data.
Recommended Reading Baumgartner, T.A. & Strong, C.H.
(1994). Conducting and Reading Research in Health and Human
Performance. Dubuque, IA: Wm. C. Brown Communications, Inc.
Bell, J. (1993). Doing Your Research Project. (2nd Ed.) Birmingham:
Open University Press. Burns, N. & Grove, S. (1997). The Practice of
Nursing Research: Conduct, Critique and Utilization (3rd Ed.).
Sydney: Saunders. Maxwell, J. A. (1996). Qualitative Research
Design. Thousand Oaks: Sage. Munro, B. H. (1997). Statistical
Methods for Health Care Research (3rd Ed.). USA: Lippincott.
National Health and Medical Research Council (1999). National
Statement on Ethical Conduct in Research Involving Humans.
Canberra: Commonwealth Government. Thomas, J.R. & Nelson, J.K.
(1996) Research Methods in Physical Activity (3rd edition)
Champaign, Ill.: Human Kinetics. Victoria University. (2000).
Handbook of Candidature Research Proposals. Victoria University.
Wiersma, W. (2000). Research Methods in Education: An
Introduction (7th Ed.). Needham Heights, Ma.: Allyn and Bacon.
Subject Hours Two hour seminar and one hour tutorial per week
for one semester.
Assessment A research proposal, and/or approved assignments
related to research literature and processes in professional practice
(3000 words for Graduate Diploma students; 5000 words for
Masters, PhD students) 100%.
HHS4039 PSYCHOLOGY AND SOCIAL SCIENCE 2
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHS3171 Psychology and Social Sciences 1; or
equivalent.
Content The subject aims to develop the interpersonal skills
required of a practitioner in practice, and to develop an
understanding of the psychology of pain and how pain may be
managed as well as introduction to psychopathology. By the end of
the subject the student should have a broad understanding of the
factors affecting successful communication with a patient, and the
psychology of pain and pain management as well as an
understanding of psychopathology. Content will include:
Communication skills – attending and listening, feedback, empathy,
probing, identifying and clarifying problems, ethics. Psychology of
pain and pain management – pain theories and measurement,
psychosocial factors, placebos and expectations, description and
categories of pain, managing acute and chronic pain,
multicomponent pain treatment.
Required Reading Communication skills , the psychology of pain
and psychopathology cover widely differing areas of psychology
and are not adequately covered by single texts. A range of book
and journal article references will therefore be supplied as
appropriate for each topic, and students are in addition encouraged
to read widely on the subject.
Subject Hours Two hours per week for two semesters comprising
lectures and tutorials/workshops.
Assessment Assignments Semester One: Assignment (videotape)
50%. Semester Two: written exam 25%, written report 25%
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
327
HHT1127 MINOR THESIS (FULL-TIME)
HHT1137 MINOR THESIS (FULL-TIME)
HHT1147 MINOR THESIS (PART-TIME)
HHT1157 MINOR THESIS (PART-TIME)
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The minor thesis provides students with an opportunity to
extend their knowledge and ability to critically analyse issues
specific to primary health care and to engage in independent inquiry
in an area of professional interest. The thesis will be a research
paper and will provide evidence of independent research which
demonstrates the ability to define a problem, undertake a detailed
literature review, develop a research design appropriate to the topic
and collect and analyse, interpret and present data. The thesis
should demonstrate a high standard of written communication skills.
A supervisor will be appointed to support and oversee the student’s
research according to guidelines established by the Department of
Health Sciences.
Required Reading To be advised by supervisor.
Subject Hours HHT1127 Minor Thesis (full-time), nine hours per
week in semester one; HHT1137 Minor Thesis (full-time), twelve
hours per week in semester two; HHT1147 Minor Thesis (part-time),
three hours per week in semester one; HHT1157 Minor Thesis (part-
time), six hours per week in semesters two, three and four.
Assessment One 15,000–20,000 word paper.
HHT5001 ADVANCED CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE 1
Campus St Albans or Metropolitan Clinics
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The clinical experience is the prime source of client contact
for the student. The clinical internship is designed in a way that the
student can work as a prime contact practitioner under supervision in
the Health Practice Unit or other approved setting. The clinical setting
will provide opportunities for the student to incorporate and utilise
the knowledge base relevant to their Chinese medical specialty in
order to enhance their skills as a practitioner. The Chinese
relationship between medical knowledge and its role in health
maintenance and illness prevention. Case conferencing sessions
whereby students practice experience.
Required Reading Macioca, G. (1994). The Practice of Chinese
Medicine, the Treatment of Diseases with Acupuncture and Chinese
Herbs. London: Churchill-Livingstone. MacLean, W. & Lyttleton, J.
(1998). Clinical Handbook of Internal Medicine. Sydney: UWS
MacArthur.
Recommended Reading Acts of the Victorian Parliament (1994).
Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act. Melbourne: The Law Printer. Beer,
S. (Ed.) (1998). Clinical Policies & Procedures Manual. St Albans:
TCM Unit, School of Health Sciences, Victoria University. Brookline:
Paradigm. Chen, S. and Li, F. (1993). Clinical Guide to Chinese
Herbs and Formulae. London: Churchill-Livingstone. Commonwealth
of Australia (1989). Therapeutic Goods Act 1989. Canberra: AGPS.
Drugs, Poisons: Wildlife Protection (Regulation of Exports and
Imports) Act 1982. Flaws, B. (1993). How to Write a TCM
Prescription. Boulder: Blue Poppy Press. Register of Acupuncture and
TCM. Code of Ethics. Skin Penetration Regulations, TBA. Yan, W. &
Fischer, W. (1997). Practical Therapeutics of Traditional Chinese
Medicine.
Subject Hours Eight hours per week for one semester consisting of
clinic and case conferencing.
Assessment practical case reports (30%); oral exam (30%);
practical exam (20 %); satisfactory report from clinical supervisor
(20%); and completion of required hours. a pass must be gained for
each component of the assessment.
HHT5002 RESEARCH PROJECT
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHR0001 Introduction to Research Design and
Methods; or equivalent.
Content Students will undertake an approved literature based study
resulting in the production of a scholarly paper, on an approved
Chinese medicine, suitable for publication in an
academic/professional journal.
Required Reading Anderson, J. and Poole, M. (1995). Thesis
and Assignment Writing, 2nd edn. Brisbane: John Wiley & Sons.
Recommended Reading Birch, S. (1997). Testing the claims of
traditionally based acupuncture. Complementary Therapies in
Medicine, 5, 8-12. Birch, S. and Hammerschlag, R. (1996).
Acupuncture Efficacy: A Summary of Controlled Clinical Trials.
Tarrytown, NY: The National Academy of Acupuncture and Oriental
Medicine. Bowling, A. (1997). Research Methods in Health:
Investigating health and health services. Philadelphia: Open
University Press. Brown, S.J. (1999). Knowledge for Health Care
Practice: A guide to using research evidence. Philadelphia: W.B.
Saunders Company. Denzin, N. and Lincoln, Y. (2000). Handbook
of Qualitative Research. (2nd. ed.). Thousand Oaks, Ca: Sage.
Ernst, E. and White, A. (Eds.) (1999). Acupuncture: A scientific
appraisal. Oxford: Butterworth-Heinemann. Ernst, E. and White, A.R.
(1997). A review of problems in Clinical Acupuncture Research.
American Journal of Chinese Medicine, 25(1), 3-11. Garvey, M,
Rogers, C., Ryan, D., Congxing, Y., Zaslawski, C. (1997). Toward
development of appropriate clinical trial methodology for
acupuncture: Considerations and design of a research project on
stress. American Journal of Acupuncture, 25(2/3), 161-167.
Greenhalgh, T. (1997). How to read a paper: The basics of
evidence based medicine. London: BMJ Publishing Group. Lewith,
G. and Aldridge, D. (Eds.) (1993). Clinical Research Methodology
for Complementary Therapies. London: Hodder & Stoughton. Morse,
J. & Field, P. (1995). Qualitative research methods for health
professionals, 2nd edn. Thousand Oaks: Sage. Nester, B.W.
(1999). An Examination of Critical Issues in Traditional Chinese
Acupuncture Research. Unpublished Doctor of Philosophy thesis.
Victoria University of Technology. Polgar, S. and Thomas, S. (1995).
Introduction to Research in the Health Sciences, 3rd edn. Melbourne:
Churchill Livingstone. Ryan, D. (1999). Practitioner focussed
research. Pacific Journal of Oriental Medicine, 14, 6-8. Scheid, V.
(1993). Orientalism Revisited – Reflections on Scholarship, Research,
and Professionalism. The European Journal Of Oriental Medicine,
1(2), 22-33. Vincent, C. and Furnham. (1997). Complementary
Medicine: A research perspective. Chichester: John Wiley & Sons.
Watson, K. (1991). The philosophical basis of traditional Chinese
Medicine and the implications for its clinical evaluation. Journal of
Chinese Medicine, 36, 14-17.
Subject Hours The equivalent of 65 hours for one semester
comprising of seminars, independent research and mentorship.
Assessment The presentation of one scholarly paper of 4000-
5000 words, on an approved CM topic, suitable for publication in
an academic/professional journal (100%).
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
328
HHT5003 COUNSELLING SKILLS FOR CHINESE MEDICINE PRACTICE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content An introduction to the role of being a counselor. The
counselor/client relationship. The following theories will be covered;
Psychoanalytic, Alderian, Existential, Person Centred, Gestalt,
Reality, Behavioral, Cognitive, Family systems, Ego State Therapies,
as well as meditation, relaxation therapy. Ethical and legal issues of
counselling.
Required Reading Corey, G. (1997). Theory and Practice of
Counselling and Psychotherapy, 5th edn. California, USA:
Brooks/Cole Pub Co. Corsini, R. J. and Wedding, D. (Eds.)(1996).
Current Psychotherapies, 5th edn. Illinois: F.E. Peacock Publisher Inc.
Recommended Reading Grof, S. and Bennett, H.Z. (1990). The
Holotropic Mind. San Francisco: Harper Collins. Hammer, L. (1990).
Dragon Rises, Red Bird Flies. New York: Station Hill Press. Wilber,
K. (1975). Psychologia perennis: The spectrum of consciousness. The
Journal of Transpersonal Psychology, 7(2). Wilber, K. (1989). The
Spectrum of Consciousness. Wheaton, Illinois: Theosophical
Publishing House. Additional reading as directed by the lecturer.
Subject Hours The equivalence of 39 hours per semester over one
semester of 13 weeks.
Assessment Seminar presentation (25%); class participation
(25%); written theory assignment of 2000 words (50%). A pass must
be gained for each component of the assessment.
HHT5004 ADVANCED CHINESE MEDICINE CLINICAL PRACTICE 2
Campus St Albans or Metropolitan Clinics.
Prerequisite(s) HHT5001 Advanced Chinese Medicine Clinical
Practice 1; or equivalent.
Content The clinical experience is the prime source of client contact
for the student. Having gained clinical experience in the subject
Clinical Practice. The student will undertake a continuing clinical
internship under the guidance and direction of an experienced
Chinese medical clinician in the Health Practice Unit. The clinical
setting will provide opportunities for the student to incorporate
theoretical knowledge in the practice situation to enhance their skills
as a practitioner.
Required Reading Macioca, G. (1994). The Practice of Chinese
Medicine, The Treatment of Diseases with Acupuncture and Chinese
Herbs. London: Churchill-Livingstone. MacLean, W. & Lyttleton, J.
(1998). Clinical Handbook of Internal Medicine. Sydney: UWS
MacArthur.
Recommended Reading Acts of the Victorian Parliament (1994).
Therapeutic Goods (Victoria) Act. Melbourne: The Law Printer. Beer,
S. (Ed.) (1998). Clinical Policies & Procedures Manual. St Albans:
TCM Unit, School of Health Sciences, Victoria University. Chen, S.
and Li, F. (1993). Clinical Guide to Chinese Herbs and Formulae.
London: Churchill-Livingstone. Commonwealth of Australia (1989).
Therapeutic Goods Act 1989. Canberra: AGPS. Drugs, Poisons:
Wildlife Protection (Regulation of Exports and Imports) Act 1982.
Flaws, B. (1993). How to Write a TCM Prescription. Boulder: Blue
Poppy Press. Register of Acupuncture and TCM. Code of Ethics. Skin
Penetration Regulations, TBA. Yan, W. and Fischer, W. (1997).
Practical Therapeutics of Traditional Chinese Medicine. Brookline:
Paradigm.
Subject Hours Eight hours per week for one semester consisting of
clinic and case conferencing.
Assessment Practical case reports (30%); oral exam (30%);
practical exam (20 %); satisfactory report from clinical supervisor
(20%); and completion of required hours. A pass must be gained for
each component of the assessment.
HHU4129 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 4
Campus City Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s HHU3175 Clinical Practicum 5; or equivalent.
Co-requisite(s HHD4779 Clinical Diagnosis and Management 3;
HHO4589 Osteopathic Science 4; HHY4639 Pathology 3; or
equivalents.
Content This subject further improves and consolidates students’
clinical skills in the same areas of diagnosis, technique and patient
management. At the completion of the subject, students should have
progressed in their diagnostic and technical skills to the point where
they are increasingly able to take responsibility for patients as
primary clinicians. In addition to this, the subject advances the
student skills in: osteopathic technique, medical and osteopathic
diagnosis, and case management; to develop integrated problem-
based thought; counselling and nutritional assessments; to introduce
students to business practice; increase responsibility as primary
clinicians. The subject will also include practical sessions relating to
case oriented medical and osteopathic evaluation and management;
written and oral case presentations; radiological and other
investigative tutorials; and field visits.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours At least eight (8) hours per week for 40 weeks, plus
100 hours of external placements. Total: At least 420 hours of
attendance.
Assessment Completion of required hours of attendance (420
hours) (hurdle requirement); skill assessments and patient contacts (as
recorded in clinical diary); presentation of full case histories;
completion of patient referral and health practitioner referral letters;
clinical skills tasks; end of course combined practical and oral
examination (hurdle requirement).
HHU5129 CLINICAL PRACTICUM 5
Campus City Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HHD4400 Clinical Diagnosis & Management 4;
HHO4589 Osteopathic Science 4; HHU4129 Clinical Practicum 4;
HHY4404 Pathology 4; or equivalents.
Content Further advancement of skills in medical and osteopathic
diagnosis, ethics and business practice, advanced technique skills,
and total case management. Reinforcement of integrated clinical
thought from a holistic perspective via case conferencing; with
written and oral presentations to peers; tutorials on advanced skills
in dealing with difficult and problematic cases; and in advanced
investigative skills (radiological, medical). Field visits to health care
facilities and external placements.
Required Reading As for HHU4129 Clinical Practicum 4, plus:
Greenman, P, (2003). Principles of manual medicine. NY: Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins.
Recommended Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Subject Hours Semesters One and Two: At least eight (8) hours
per week clinical sessions for 40 weeks, plus two hours per week
case conferencing workshops for 24 weeks; 30 hours of holiday
hours; 40 hours of external placements. Total: At least 438 hours of
attendance.
Assessment Completion of required hours of attendance and
patient contacts over two semesters (as recorded in clinical
diary)(438 hours) (hurdle requirement); 2 x tutor assessments of
consultations; completion of patient referral and health practitioner
referral letters; clinical skills tasks; 2 x end-of-course combined
practical and oral examinations (hurdle requirements); one 3-hour
written examination. Where the final examination is failed, a
supplementary examination will be offered. The maximum possible
mark on the supplementary examination will be 50%.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
329
HHW5105 MATERIA MEDICA 1
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject will introduce students to phytochemical and
pharmacological principles as they relate to herbal medicines. In
addition this subject will enable students to identify fresh plant
materials used in herbal medicine. Teaching will focus on the nature
of the bioactive principles and their interaction with human
pathological processes where possible. Emphasis will be on the
pharmacology of herbal medicine as it pertains to clinical practice.
The subject will cover the main classes of phytochemical compounds.
Attention will be given to the toxicity of plants and their constituents.
Required Reading Harden, G. and Williams, J. 1979, How to
Identify Plants, Tamworth University of New England. Willard, T.
1992, Textbook of Advanced Herbology, Wild Rose College of
Natural Healing, Calgary.
Recommended Reading Der Marderosian, A. and Liberti, L.E.
1988, Natural Product Medicine, George F Stickley, Philadelphia.
De Smet, P., Keller, K., Hansel and Chandler, R.F. 1993, Adverse
Effects of Herbal Drugs vols 1, 2, Springer-Verlag, Berlin. Duke, J.A.
1992, Handbook of Biologically Active Phytochemicals and Their
Activities, CRC Press, Boca Raton. Lewis, W.H. and Elvin-Lewis, M.P.
1977, Medical Botany: Plants Affecting Man’s Health, Wiley-
Interscience, New York. Stumpf, P.K. and Conn, E.E. (eds) 1981,
The Biochemistry of Plants: A Comprehensive Treatise vols 1–8,
Academic Press, New York. Tyler, V., Brady, L. and Robbers, J.
1988, Pharmacognosy 9th edn, Lea and Febiger, Philadelphia.
Subject Hours 39 hours for one semester.
Assessment Examination, 70%; field report, 30%.
HHW5115 MATERIA MEDICA 2
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHW5105 Materia Medica 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject will introduce the student to the materia
medica of Western Herbal Medicine and to the clinical application
of individual plants. The subject will examine in detail the
phytochemistry, history, horticulture, ecology, actions, indications,
combinations, contra-indications and toxicity of the principal western
herbal medicines used in clinical practice. Skills in medicinal plant
research will also be introduced.
Required Reading Ellingwood, F. 1983, American Materia
Medica, Therapeutics and Pharmacology, Eclectic Medical
Publications, Portland. Hoffman, D. 1992, The New Holistic Herbal,
Findhorn Press, Findhorn.
Recommended Reading Bradley, P. (ed.) 1992, British Herbal
Compendium vol 1, BHMA, Bournemouth. British Herbal Medicine
Association 1982, British Herbal Pharmacopoeia vols 1–3, BHMA,
London. Felter, H.W. 1983, The Eclectic Materia Medica
Pharmacology and Therapeutics, Eclectic Medical Publications,
Portland. Felter, H.W. and Lloyd, J.V. 1983, King’s American
Dispensatory vols 1, 2, Eclectic Medical Publications, Portland.
Holmes, P. 1989, Energetics of Western Herbs vols 1, 2, Artemis
Press, Colorado. Murray, M. 1992, The Healing Power of Herbs,
Prima Publishing, Rocklyn. Tyler, V.E. 1987, The New Honest
Herbal, George F. Stickley, Philadelphia. Wren, R.C. 1988, Potter’s
New Cyclopaedia of Botanical Drugs and Preparations, Essex,
Saffron Walden.
Subject Hours 39 hours for one semester.
Assessment Medicinal plant monograph, 70%; examination,
30%.
HHW5125 HERBAL THERAPEUTICS 1
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content In this subject students are introduced to the underlying
principles that inform the therapeutic practice of Western Herbal
Medicine. Students are also introduced to the treatment and
management of diseases affecting the various organs and organ
systems of the body using Western herbal medicines. The
identification of conditions and presentations requiring immediate
referral will be addressed.
Required Reading Ah Ket, G. 1990, Herbal Treatment for
Common Ailments, Compendium, Melbourne. Weiss, R.F. 1988,
Herbal Medicine, Beaconsfield Publishers, Beaconsfield.
Recommended Reading Alstat, E., Eclectic Dispensatory of
Botanical Therapeutics, Eclectic Institute, Portland. Ellingwood, F.
1983, American Materia Medica, Therapeutics and Pharmacology,
Eclectic Medical Publications, Portland. Mowbray, D. 1990, Next
Generation Herbal Medicine, Keats Publishing, New Canaan,
Connecticut. Murray, M. and Pizzorno, J. 1989, Textbook of
Natural Medicine, Bastyr College, Seattle. Werbach, M.R. and
Murray, M.T. 1994, Botanical Influences on Illness: A Sourcebook of
Clinical Research, Third Line Press, Tarzana.
Subject Hours 39 hours for one semester.
Assessment Examination, 50%; assignment, 50%.
HHW5135 CLINICAL PRACTICUM (WHM) (FULL-TIME)
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The clinical practicum is the prime source of client contact
for the student. The student will undertake a clinical practicum
throughout their course under the direction of experienced Western
Herbal Medicine practitioners in their private clinics or other suitable
agencies. The clinical setting will provide opportunities for the
student to incorporate and utilise the theoretical knowledge gained
in order to enhance their skills as a practitioner.
Subject Hours Two hours per week for four semesters.
Assessment Satisfactory completion of this subject will require
satisfactory reports from all clinical supervisors throughout the
duration of this subject, Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory.
HHW5145 HERBAL THERAPEUTICS 2
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHW5125 Herbal Therapeutics 1; or equivalent.
Content In this subject the principles and practice of treating
disease using Western herbal medicines are further developed. The
application of Western herbal medicines to particular conditions
affecting the various organs and organ systems of the body will be
further developed.
Required Reading Ah Ket, G. 1990, Herbal Treatment for
Common Ailments, Compendium, Melbourne. Weiss, R.F. 1988,
Herbal Medicine, Beaconsfield Publishers, Beaconsfield.
Recommended Reading Alstat, E., Eclectic Dispensatory of
Botanical Therapeutics, Eclectic Institute, Portland. Ellingwood, F.
1983, American Materia Medica, Therapeutics and Pharmacology,
Eclectic Medical Publications, Portland. Mowbray, D. 1990, Next
Generation Herbal Medicine, Keats Publishing, New Canaan,
Connecticut. Murray, M. and Pizzorno, J. 1989, Textbook of
Natural Medicine, Bastyr College, Seattle. Werbach, M.R. and
Murray, M.T. 1994, Botanical Influences on Illness: A Sourcebook of
Clinical Research, Third Line Press, Tarzana.
Subject Hours 39 hours for one semester.
Assessment Examination, 50%; assignment, 50%.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
330
HHW5155 CLINICAL PRACTICUM (WHM) (PART-TIME)
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The clinical practicum is the prime source of client contact
for the student. The student will undertake a clinical practicum
throughout their course under the direction of experienced Western
Herbal Medicine practitioners in their private clinics or other suitable
agencies. The clinical setting will provide opportunities for the
student to incorporate and utilise the theoretical knowledge gained
in order to enhance their skills as a practitioner.
Subject Hours Two hours per week for four semesters.
Assessment Satisfactory completion of this subject will require
satisfactory reports from all clinical supervisors throughout the
duration of this subject, Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory.
HHW5165 MATERIA MEDICA 3
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHW5105 Materia Medica 1; or equivalent.
Content This subject will complete the study of individual plant
medicines and their clinical application. The preparation of tinctures,
fluid extracts, and external applications will also be covered.
Attention will be given to simple laboratory separation procedures
and quality control.
Required Reading Ellingwood, F. 1983, American Materia
Medica, Therapeutics and Pharmacology, Eclectic Medical
Publications, Portland. Hoffman, D. 1992, The New Holistic Herbal,
Findhorn Press, Findhorn.
Recommended Reading Balows, A. 1991, Manual of Clinical
Microbiology 5th edn, American Society for Microbiology,
Washington DC. Boyer, R.F. 1993, Modern Experimental
Biochemistry 2nd edn, Benjamin & Cummings Publishing Co.,
California. Bradley, P. (ed.) 1992, British Herbal Compendium vol
1, BHMA, Bournemouth. British Herbal Medicine Association 1982,
British Herbal Pharmacopoeia vols 1–3, BHMA, London.
Cembrowski, G.S. and Carey, R.N. 1989, Laboratory Quality
Management: QC and QA, Raven Press. Felter, H. W. 1983, The
Eclectic Materia Medica Pharmacology and Therapeutics, Eclectic
Medical Publications, Portland. Felter, H.W. and Lloyd, J.V. 1983,
King’s American Dispensatory vols 1, 2, Eclectic Medical
Publications, Portland. Holmes, P. 1989, Energetics of Western
Herbs vols 1, 2, Artemis Press, Colorado. Murray, M. 1992, The
Healing Power of Herbs, Prima Publishing, Rocklyn. Tyler, V.E.
1987, The New Honest Herbal, George F. Stickley, Philadelphia.
Wichtl, M. 1994 (trans N.G. Bisset), Herbal Drugs and
Phytopharmaceuticals: A Handbook for Practice on a Scientific Basis
2nd edn, Medpharm GmbH Scientific Publishers, Stuttgart. Wren,
R.C. 1988, Potter’s New Cyclopaedia of Botanical Drugs and
Preparations, Essex, Saffron Walden. Zubay, G. 1993,
Biochemistry, W.M.C. Brown Publishers, Dubuque.
Subject Hours 39 hours for one semester.
Assessment Examination, 50%; practical Assessment, 50%.
HHW5175 HERBAL THERAPEUTICS 3
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHW5125 Herbal Therapeutics 1; or equivalent.
Content In this subject the principles and practice of treating
disease using Western Herbal Medicine is further developed. The
application of Western herbal medicines to particular conditions
affecting the various organs and organ systems of the body will
further developed. Students will also explore the many facets of the
client/practitioner relationship.
Required Reading Ah Ket, G. 1990, Herbal Treatment for
Common Ailments, Compendium, Melbourne. Mowbray, D. 1993,
Herbal Tonic Therapies, Keats Publishing, New Canaan Connecticut.
Murray, M. 1992, The Healing Power of Plants, Prima Publishers,
Rocklyn California. Pizzorno, J. and Murray, M. 1989, Textbook of
Natural Medicine, Bastyr College, Seattle. Additional reading to be
advised.
Recommended Reading Alstat, E., Eclectic Dispensatory of
Botanical Therapeutics, Eclectic Institute, Portland. Ellingwood, F.
1983, American Materia Medica, Therapeutics and Pharmacology,
Eclectic Medical Publications, Portland. Weiss, R.F. 1988, Herbal
Medicine, Beaconsfield Publishers, Beaconsfield. Werbach, M.R.
and Murray, M.T. 1994, Botanical Influences on Illness: A
Sourcebook of Clinical Research, Third Line Press, Tarzana.
Subject Hours 39 hours for one semester.
Assessment Assignment, 50%; oral Assessment, 50%.
HHY4404 PATHOLOGY 4
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of HBOS HHY3174
Pathology 4.
Content The content will include the key pathologies commonly
affecting the neural tissues.
Required Reading Chandrasoma P, Taylor C R., 1997 Concise
Pathology 3rd Ed. McGraw-Hill/Appleton & Lange Kumar V, Fausto
N. Abbas A K., 2003 Robbins & Cotran Pathologic Basis of Disease
7th Ed W.B. Saunders Company. Churchill Livingstone; Underwood
J C E (ed)., 2000 General and Systematic Pathology 3rd Ed.
Churchill Livingstone; Young B, Stevens A, Lowe J S., 2002
Wheater's Basic Histopathology: A Colour Atlas and Text 4th Ed.
Churchill Livingstone.
Recommended Reading Adams J C., 1983 Outline Of Fractures
: Including Joint Injuries Churchill Livingstone Apley A G. Warwick
D. Nayagam S., Solomon L., 2001 Apley's System Of Orthopaedics
And Fractures 8th Ed Edward Arnold Berkow R. (Ed), Beers M H.
(Ed), 2003 The Merck Manual 17th Ed. John Wiley & Sons Cyriax
J., 1998 Textbook of Orthopaedic Medicine: Diagnosis of Soft
Tissue Lesions 8th Ed. W B Saunders MacSween R N M., Whaley
K., 1992 Muir's Textbook of Pathology 13th Ed. Edward Arnold
Publishers; McCance K, Huether S E., 1993 Pathology: The
Biological Basis for Disease In Adults and Children 2nd Ed. Mosby-
Year Book
Subject Hours Semester Two: Lecture: 1 hour per week; Tutorial: 1
hour per week.
Assessment Two hour written examination.
HHY4639 PATHOLOGY 3
Campus City Flinders
Prerequisite(s) HHY3629 Pathology 2; or equivalent.
Content The subject aims to teach the pathological processes and
risk factors for typical conditions affecting the named systems, and to
develop an understanding of the orthodox medical management of
these conditions. At the completion of the subject students should
have a broad understanding of the risk factors for, and the
pathology underlying the named conditions, and should be aware of
orthodox management protocols. content will include: Application of
the fundamental pathological concepts taught in Pathology 2 to
disease processes in specific organs and body systems. Particular
emphasis will be given to those conditions which are common and
those which are of special interest to Osteopaths. The risk factors
associated with common disease. The development of the
pathological process through dysfunction to disease. The clinical
presentations of common pathological conditions. The orthodox
medical approach to diagnosis, prognosis and principles of
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
331
management. Recognising common life-threatening conditions.
Giving preventive health advice about common disease. Semester
one will cover common and life-threatening diseases affecting the
Cardiovascular, Respiratory and Gastrointestinal and endocrine
systems. Semester two will cover the renal, genitourinary and
haematological systems.
Required Reading McCance K.L., Huether S.E. (1998)
Pathopysiology, (3rd ed), Mosby, St Louis. Edwards C.R.W,
Bouchier, IAD, Haslett, C and Chilvers ER (1995), Davidson’s
Principles and Practice of Medicine (17th ed.) Churchill Livingstone,
New York. Cotran R.S., Kumar V. Robbins S.L. (1989) Robbins
Pathological Basis of Disease (4th ed.) W.B. Saunders Company,
Philadelphia. Chandrasoma P, Taylor C.R. (1995) Concise
Pathology (2nd ed.) Prentice-Hall International, Underwood J.C.E.,
(ed.) (1992) General and Systemic Pathology Churchill Livingstone,
Edinburgh
Subject Hours Three hours per week for two semesters comprising
two one-hour lectures and one one-hour tutorial/practical workshop
sessions or equivalent.
Assessment Semester one written examination, 35%; class
presentation (either semester one or semester two), 30%; written
examination, semester two, 35%.
HNA5001 GERONTIC NURSING STUDIES 1
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject will introduce the student to major biological,
psychological and sociological theories relating to ageing. The
emphasis on ageing as a normal process is designed to both
promote a positive view of ageing and to enable students to
differentiate between changes associated with the ageing process
and those associated with pathology when assessing clients and
managing nursing care across a variety of health care contexts. An
introductory consideration of major psychopathological and
pathophysiological changes potentially encountered by ageing
individuals will be undertaken by way of contrasting them with
normal ageing. Topics to be addressed include: ageing
demographics; ageing and physical function; ageing and cognition;
life stages; ageism; polypharmacy; social relationships and ageing.
Required Reading Ebersole, P & Hess, P (1998). Toward Healthy
Ageing, 5th edn. St Louis: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Bengston, V. & Shaie, W (Eds.) (1999).
Handbook of Theories of Ageing. New York: Springer Publishing
Co. Budge, M. (1998). Age Matters. Sydney: MacLennan & Petty.
Cavanaugh, J. & Whitbourne, S. (Eds.) (1999). Gerontology: An
Interdisciplinary Perspective. New York: Oxford University Press.
Health Ageing Task Force. (2000). Commonwealth, State and
Territory Strategy on Healthy Ageing. Canberra: Commonwealth
Department of Health and Aged Care.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week over one
semester organised according to the teaching mode used.
Assessment Assignment of 3000 words (60%); class paper of
2000 words (40%).
HNA5002 GERONTIC NURSING STUDIES 2
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Building on the concept of ageing as a normal process
introduced in Gerontic Nursing Studies 1, this subject will introduce
the student to the nursing assessment and management of major
pathophysiological and psychopathological alterations to health
status associated with ageing. Topics include the consideration of
more common pathologies such as arthritis, osteoporosis, airways
disease, cardio-vascular disease, confusion, delirium, depression,
and dementia. Practice interventions for associated concerns such as
reduced mobility, malnutrition, incontinence, pain, sensory
impairment, challenging behaviours, and functional and organic
disorders associated with alterations in mental health will also be
addressed.
Required Reading Hogstel, M. (2001). Gerontology: Nursing
Care of the Older Adult. Albany, N.Y.: Koch, S., Garratt, S. (2001)
Assessing Older people: a practical guide for professionals. Sydney:
McLennan & Petty.
Recommended Reading Australian Pharmaceutical Advisory
Council. (2000). Integrated Best Practice Model for Medication
Management in Residential Aged Care Facilities, 2nd edn.
Canberra: Department of Health and Aged Care. Butler, R., Lewis,
M. & Sutherland, T. (1998). Ageing and Mental Health: Positive
Psychosocial and Biomedical Approaches, 5th edn. Boston: Allyn &
Bacon. Eliopolous, C. (2001). Gerontological Nursing, 5th edn.
Philadelphia: Lippincott. Hogstel, M. (1995). Geropsychiatric
Nursing, 2nd edn. St Louis: Mosby. Molony, S., Waszynski, C. &
Lyder, C. (Eds). (1999). Gerontological Nursing: An Advanced
Practice Approach. Stamford, Connecticut: Appleton & Lange.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week over one
semester organised according to the teaching mode used.
Assessment Assignment of 2500 words (50%); case study of
2000 words & class presentation (50%).
HNA5003 GERONTIC NURSING STUDIES 3
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HNA5001 Gerontic Nursing Studies 1; HNA5002
Gerontic Nursing Studies 2; or equivalent.
Content This subject will introduce students to dominant issues in
caring for older adults. Ethico-legal, socio-cultural, and political
influences on the experience of ageing and the provision of aged
care in a variety of contexts will be considered. Topics include: the
operation of the aged care system; multidisciplinary approaches to
care; the interface between community, sub-acute, acute, and
residential aged care sectors; resource distribution; ethnicity and
ageing; health promotion; consent; decision making; carer issues;
elder abuse.
Required Reading Borowski, A., Encel, S. & Ozanne, E. (Eds).
(1997). Ageing and Social Policy In Australia. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press.
Recommended Reading Crowley, P. (2000). Ageing Gracefully:
An Overview of the Economic Implications of Australia's Ageing
Population Profile. Canberra: Department of Health and Aged Care.
Johnson, T. (Ed). Handbook on Ethical Issues in Ageing. Westport,
Connecticut: Greenwood Press. Johnstone, M. (1999). Bioethics: A
Nursing Perspective, 3rd edn. Sydney: Harcourt. Minichiello, V.,
Chappell, N., Kendig, H. & Walker, A. (1996). Sociology of
Ageing: International Perspectives. Australia: ISA Research
Committee on Ageing. Hudson, R., Richmond, J. (2000), Living
dying caring. Melbourne: Ausmed publications. Cluning, T., Ageing
at home. Melbourne: Ausmed. Nichol, B., Lonergan, J. & Mould, M.
(2000). The Use of Hospitals by Older People: A Casemix Analysis.
Canberra: Department of Health and Aged Care.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week over one
semester organised according to the teaching mode used.
Assessment Assignment of 3000 words (60%); seminar paper of
2000 words (40%).
HNE5001 EMERGENCY NURSING STUDIES 1
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The content includes: priorities and principles of
emergency nursing; triage; advanced health assessment; disaster
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
332
planning; pathophysiology and clinical assessment of traumatic and
non-traumatic disorders of the neurological, respiratory,
cardiovascular, renal, endocrine, haematological, gastrointestinal,
musculoskeletal and integumentary systems; penetrating injuries;
multiple trauma; burns; shock and infection; pain relief;
environmental emergencies; obstetric emergencies; poisoning;
communication and culture; drug overdose/substance dependence;
sexually transmitted diseases; legal issues; sexual assault; crisis
intervention, violence and aged abuse; psychiatric emergencies.
Required Reading Bickley, L.S. (2003). Bates’ Guide to Physical
Examination and History Taking (8th ed) Philadelphoa:
J.B.Lippincott. Cameron, P. Jelinek, G. Kelly, A.M. Murray, L. and
Heyworth. J. (eds) (2000). Textbook of Audlt Emergency Medicine.
Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Fulde, G.W.O (1998). Emergency
Medicine: The principle and practice (3rd ed). Sydney: MacLennan
and Petty. Kidd, P.S. Sturt, P and Fultz J. (eds). (2000). Mosby’s
Emergency Nursing Reference. StLouis: Mosby. McCance, K.L. and
Huether, S.E. (2001). Pathophysiology: The biological basis for
disease in adults and children (4th ed). StLouis: Mosby. McQuillan,
K.A. Von Rueden, K.T. Harstock, R.L. Flynn, M.B. and Whalen, E.
(2002). Trauma Nursing: from resuacitation through rehabilitation
(3rd Ed). Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders. Newberry, L. (Ed) (2003).
Sheehy’s Emergency Nursing Principles and practice (5th ed). St
Louis: Mosby. Sheehy, S.B. Danis, J.S. Blansfield, D.M. and
Gervasini, A.G. (1999). Manual of Clinical Trauma Care: the first
hour (3rd ed). St Louis: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Adreoni, C.P. and Klinkhammer, B.
(2000). Quick Reference for Paediatric Emergency Nursing:
Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders. Aehlert, B. (2002). ECGs Made Easy
(2nd ed). St Louis Mosby. Briggs J.K. (ed). (2002) Telephone Triage
Protocols for Nurses (2nd ed). Philadlephia: W.B Saunders. Brown
A.F.T. (2001). Emergency Medicine: Diagnosis and Management
(3rd Ed).Melbourne: Butterworth-Heinemann. Browne, G.J. Choong,
R.K.C. Gaudry, P.L. and Wilkins, B.H. (1997). Priniciples and
Practice of Children’s Emergency Care. Sydney’ MacLennan and
Petty. Canover, M.B. (2003). Understanding Electrocardiography
(8th ed). StLouis: Mosby. Dolan, B. and Holt, L. (eds). (2000).
Accident and Emergency: theory into Practice Edinburgh: Bailliere
Tindall. Harrison, R. and Daly, L. (2001) Acute Medical
Emergencies: A nursing guide./Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Holleran, R.S. (ed). (2003) Air and Surface Patient Transport:
Principles and Practice (3rded). ?St.Louis: Mosby. Huszar, R.J.
(2002). Basic Dysrhythmias (3rd ed). St Louis: Mosby. Moloney-
Harmon, P.A. and Czerwinski, S.J. (2003). Nursing Care of the
Paediatric Trauma Patient. Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders.Proehl, J.A.
(1999). Emergency Nursing Procedures (2nd ed). Philadelphia W.B.
Saunders. Seidel, H.M. Ball J.W. Dains, J.E and Benedict, G.W.,
(2003) Mosby’s Guide to Physical Examination (5th ed). StLouis:
Mosby. Sheehy, S.B. and Lenehan, G.P. (1999). Manual of
Emergency Care (5th ed). St.Louis: Mosby. Soud, T.E. and rogers,
J.S. (1998). Manual of Paediatric Nursing. St Louis: Mosby.
Subject Hours Thirty-nine hours for one semester.
Assessment Clinical project: 70% (2500-3000 words);
Examination 30%; Clinical Journal Satisfactory/Unsastisfactory.
Students must pass each component of the assessment, including the
clinical journal, in order to pass this subject.
HNE5002 EMERGENCY NURSING STUDIES 2
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The content includes: paediatric conditions and
emergencies; critical examination and analysis of emergency nursing
through fieldwork and current case studies; radiographic studies;
principles of teaching and learning; management in emergency
nursing and planned change in the health care system and its effects
on emergency nursing care; ethics in emergency nursing care;
multidisciplinary team approach.
Required Reading Bickley, L.S. (2003). Bates’ Guide to Physical
Examination and History Taking (8th ed) Philadelphoa:
J.B.Lippincott. Cameron, P. Jelinek, G. Kelly, A.M. Murray, L. and
Heyworth. J. (eds) (2000). Textbook of Audlt Emergency Medicine.
Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Fulde, G.W.O (1998). Emergency
Medicine: The principle and practice (3rd ed). Sydney: MacLennan
and Petty. Kidd, P.S. Sturt, P and Fultz J. (eds). (2000). Mosby’s
Emergency Nursing Reference. StLouis: Mosby. McCance, K.L. and
Huether, S.E. (2001). Pathophysiology: The biological basis for
disease in adults and children (4th ed). StLouis: Mosby. McQuillan,
K.A. Von Rueden, K.T. Harstock, R.L. Flynn, M.B. and Whalen, E.
(2002). Trauma Nursing: from resuacitation through rehabilitation
(3rd Ed). Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders. Newberry, L. (Ed) (2003).
Sheehy’s Emergency Nursing Principles and practice (5th ed). St
Louis: Mosby. Sheehy, S.B. Danis, J.S. Blansfield, D.M. and
Gervasini, A.G. (1999). Manual of Clinical Trauma Care: the first
hour (3rd ed). St Louis: Mosby.
Recommended Reading Adreoni, C.P. and Klinkhammer, B.
(2000). Quick Reference for Paediatric Emergency Nursing:
Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders. Aehlert, B. (2002). ECGs Made Easy
(2nd ed). St Louis Mosby. Briggs J.K. (ed). (2002) Telephone Triage
Protocols for Nurses (2nd ed). Philadlephia: W.B Saunders. Brown
A.F.T. (2001). Emergency Medicine: Diagnosis and Management
(3rd Ed).Melbourne: Butterworth-Heinemann. Browne, G.J. Choong,
R.K.C. Gaudry, P.L. and Wilkins, B.H. (1997). Priniciples and
Practice of Children’s Emergency Care. Sydney’ MacLennan and
Petty. Canover, M.B. (2003). Understanding Electrocardiography
(8th ed). StLouis: Mosby. Dolan, B. and Holt, L. (eds). (2000).
Accident and Emergency: theory into Practice Edinburgh: Bailliere
Tindall. Harrison, R. and Daly, L. (2001) Acute Medical
Emergencies: A nursing guide./Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Holleran, R.S. (ed). (2003) Air and Surface Patient Transport:
Principles and Practice (3rded). ?St.Louis: Mosby. Huszar, R.J.
(2002). Basic Dysrhythmias (3rd ed). St Louis: Mosby. Moloney-
Harmon, P.A. and Czerwinski, S.J. (2003). Nursing Care of the
Paediatric Trauma Patient. Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders.Proehl, J.A.
(1999). Emergency Nursing Procedures (2nd ed). Philadelphia W.B.
Saunders. Seidel, H.M. Ball J.W. Dains, J.E and Benedict, G.W.,
(2003) Mosby’s Guide to Physical Examination (5th ed). StLouis:
Mosby. Sheehy, S.B. and Lenehan, G.P. (1999). Manual of
Emergency Care (5th ed). St.Louis: Mosby. Soud, T.E. and rogers,
J.S. (1998). Manual of Paediatric Nursing. St Louis: Mosby.
Subject Hours Thirty-nine hours for one semester.
Assessment Clinical project: 70% (2500-3000 words);
Examination: Theory 30%; Clinical Journal
satisfactory/unsatisfactory (1000–1500 words). Students must pass
each component of the assessment, including the clinical journal, in
order to pass this subject.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
333
HNE5003 EMERGENCY NURSING STUDIES 3
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HNE5001 Emergency Nursing Studies1;
HNE5002 Emergency Nursing Studies 2; or equivalent.
Content As there are a variety of role expectations of advanced
emergency practitioners, it is imperative that each student determines
the clinical learning required to achieve expertise in clinical
emergency nursing. As each student's learning experience at the
time of entry to this subject is seen as unique and dynamic, this unit
recognises the need for self-determination of learning modalities.
Therefore the content includes: the diversity of the clinical
environment in specialised emergency nursing practice; role of the
advanced emergency nursing practitioner: leader, manager,
educator, researcher, and collaborative consultant in the health care
team. Further, as per contract developed by the student in
collaboration with a lecturer, students are expected to spend their
clinical learning experience in a related area but outside their
current clinical practice, to further expand their clinical learning
experience to achieve expertise and skills as an advanced
practitioner in emergency nursing.
Required Reading Castledine, G. & McGee, P. (1998).
Advanced Specialist Nursing Practice. Oxford: Blackwell Science.
Palmer, A., Burns, S. & Bulman C. (1994). Reflective Practice in
Nursing – The growth of the Professional Practitioner. London:
Blackwell Science.
Recommended Reading Byers, S. R. (1997). The Executive
Nurse: Leaders for new health care transitions. Albany: Delmar Pub.
Girven, J. (1998). Leadership and Nursing. London: MacMillan.
Hamer, S. & Collison, G. (1999). Achieving Evidence-Based
Practice. Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall. Hamric, A. B. & Spross, J.
(Ed.). (1989). The Clinical Nurse Specialist in Theory and Practice
(2nd ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott. Hickey, J., Ouitmette, R. &
Venegoni, S. (1996). Advanced Practice Nursing: Changing Roles
and Clinical Applications. Philadelphia: Lippincott. Pridham, K.
(1990). Why Clinical Field Study? Nursing Outlook,38(1),26-30.
Snyder, M. & Mirr, M. P. (1995). Advanced Practice Nursing: A
Guide to Professional Development. New York: Springer Pub.
Subject Hours Seven hours comprising of seminars and thirty-two
hours clinical learning experience.
Assessment Contract with supervisor: Hurdle requirement
ungraded: students are required to submit a written contract of the
clinical learning experience they wish to undertake before they set
out to achieve their contractual clinical learning. Clinical Project:
100% (3000–3500 words); Clinical Journal
satisfactory/unsatisfactory (1000–1500 words).
HNG5001 ISSUES AND POLICIES IN PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The content of the subject includes the dynamic health care
system; regulation and policy development on nursing practice; the
nature of the health care system, including responsibility for the
development of neophytes, collegiality and body of nursing
knowledge; and a range of environmental influences that impact on
the health of communities.
Required Reading Australian Institute of Health and
Welfare.(1998). Australia’s Health 1998: The Sixth Biennial Health
Report of the Australian Institute of Health and Welfare. Canberra:
AGPS. Hunt, S. & Parkes, R.(Ed).(1999). Nursing and the quality use
of medicines. St Leonards: Allen & Unwin. Robinson, J., Gray, A. &
Elkan, R.(Ed).(1992). Policy issues in nursing. Buckingham: Open
University Press. McMurray, A. (1999). Community Health and
Wellness: a Socioecological Approach. Sydney: Mosby Publishers
Australia Pty Ltd.
Recommended Reading Antrobus, S. & Kitson, A. (1999).
Nursing leadership: influencing and shaping health policy and
nursing practice. Journal of Advanced Nursing. 29(3), 746-750.
Baker,H. (1999). Quality use of medicine: changing the system. In
Hunt, S., & Parkes, R.(Eds). (1999). Nursing and the Quality Use of
Medicines. St Leonards: Allen & Unwin. Cheek, J. & Gibson, T.(
1997). Policy matters: critical policy analysis and nursing. Journal of
Advanced Nursing, 25(4), 668-672. Castledine, G., & McGee,
P.(Eds.) (1998). Advanced & Specialist Nursing Practice. Oxford:
Blackwell Science. Gardner, H.(Ed.) (1997). Health Policy in
Australia. Melbourne: Oxford University Press. Gray, J.A.M. (1998).
Evidence-Based Healthcare: How to make Health Policy and
Management Decisions. New York: Churchill Livingstone. Hewison,
A. (1999). The new public management and the new nursing:
related by rhetoric? Some reflections on the policy process and
nursing. Journal of Advanced Nursing, 29(6), 1377-1384. Maslin-
Prothero, S. & Masterson, A. (1998). Continuing care: developing a
policy analysis for nursing. Journal of Advanced Nursing. 28(3),
548-553. Spurgeon, P. & Hennessy, D. (1999). Health Policy and
nursing: influence, development and impact. Basingstoke:
Macmillan.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
one 2-hour lecture and one hour tutorial/workshop/group
discussion.
Assessment Presentation 40%; written assignment 60% (3000
words)
HNG5003 AGEING: HEALTH AND ILLNESS
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HNA 5001 and HNA 5002
Content: As there are a variety of role expectations of advanced
gerontic nurse practitioners, it is imperative that each student
determines the clinical learning required to achieve expertise in
clinical gerontic nursing. As each student's learning experience at
the time of entry to this subject is seen as unique and dynamic, this
unit recognises the need for self-determination of learning
modalities. The content includes students’ exploration of the diversity
of the clinical environment in specialised gerontic nursing practice;
role of the advanced gerontic nurse practitioner: leader, manager,
educator, researcher, and collaborative consultant in the health care
team. Students are expected to spend their clinical practicum in a
related area but outside their current clinical practice, to further
expand their clinical learning experience. Students select the related
clinical practicum. Then students prepare a written contract of the
clinical practicum they wish to undertake, before they set out to
achieve their contract clinical practicum. The written contract should
also include a projected clinical project which forms the clinical
outcome. The contract is written in collaboration with the appropriate
lecturer.
Required Reading: Castledine, G. and McGee, P. 1998.
Advanced Specialist Nursing Practice. Oxford: Blackwell Science.
Ebersole P., & Hess,(2001). Geriatric Nursing and Healthy Aging.
St. Louis: Mosby. O'Neil, P. A. (2002). Caring for the older adult.
Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders. Palmer, A., Burns, S. & Bulman, C.
1994. Reflective Practice in Nursing- The growth of the Professional
Practitioner. London: Blackwell Science.
Recommended Reading Byers, S. R. (1997). The Executive
Nurse: Leaders for new health care transitions. Albany:Delmar Pub.
Girvin, J. (1998). Leadership and Nursing. London: Macmillan.
Hamer, S. & Collison, G. (1999). Achieving Evidence-Based
Practice. Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall. Hickey, J., Ouitmette, R. &
Venegoni, S. (1996). Advanced Practice Nursing: Changing Roles
and Clinical Applications. Philadelphia:Lippincott. Snyder, M. &
Mirr, M.P. (1995). Advanced Practice Nursing: A Guide to
Professional Development. New York:Springer Pub.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
334
Subject Hours 7 hours seminar work 32 hours clinical learning
experience.
Assessment Contract with facilitator: Hurdle requirement
ungraded. Students are required to submit a written contract of the
clinical learning experience they wish to undertake before they set
out to achieve their contractual clinical learning. Clinical Project::
80% (3000- 3500 words); Clinical Reflective Journal:20% (1000-
1500 words)
HNG6120 CLINICAL PROJECT
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Completion of one Group A subject, one Group B
subject and an approved elective, or equivalent.
Content This clinical project is intended to allow the student to
pursue his/her area of study in the clinical setting. The student will
be required to define the focus of the study (such as physiological
healing, pain management, continence management or managing
change in clinical practice), identify relevant aims and objectives,
arrange study placement and conduct the study. The project will
include evaluation of the nursing care and reflection on this, as part
of the ongoing process of evaluation of nursing practice in care of
the older person. It is expected that a current literature review and
outcomes of the study, together with the evaluation of the study will
be included.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Subject Hours The project will be undertaken in consultation with
the Course Co-ordinator.
Assessment The project will include a written paper of not more
than 7500 words and be a piece of scholarly work.
HNM5001 CANCER NURSING STUDIES 1
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject will introduce the students to the major
cancers, their aetiology, diagnosis and treatment. The major
therapeutic modalities as well as alternative therapies will be dealt
with such that the student is able to build a knowledge base for
future education of self and the public.
Required Reading McCorkle, R. (Ed). (1996). Cancer Nursing: a
textbook. (2nd Ed.) Philadelphia: W. B.Saunders & Company.
Recommended Reading Burke, M. B. (1996). Cancer
chemotherapy: a nursing process approach Boston: Jones & Bartlett
Publishers. Chernecky, C, Berger. B.J. (1998) Advanced and critical
care oncology nursing: managing primary complications
Philadelphia: Saunders. Dodd, M. J. (1996). Managing the side
effects of chemotherapy and radiation (3rd Ed.). San Francisco:
UICSF Press. Dow, K. H. & Hilderley, L. J. (1997). Nursing care in
radiation oncology (2nd Ed.). Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders &
Company. Johnson B L, (1998) Handbook of oncology nursing. (3rd
Ed.) Boston: Jones & Bartlett. Glare,P. Cartmill, J. Harnett, P. (1999)
Oncology: a case-based manual. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Groenwald S, Hansen Fosse M, Goodman M & Henke Yarbro C.
(2000) Cancer nursing, NY Stanley Thornes. Groenwald, S L (1998)
A Clinical guide to cancer nursing: a companion to Cancer nursing,
(4th Ed.) Boston: Jones and Bartlett.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester organised according to the teaching mode used.
Assessment Class presentation 30%; Assignment 70% (3000
words).
HNM5002 CANCER NURSING STUDIES 2
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The aim of this subject is to introduce the student to the
major and common symptoms associated with cancer and its
treatment. Methods of assessment and invention will be reviewed
with the aim of developing more effective nursing practice. Such
topics as oncology emergencies, immunosuppression, fatigue,
nausea and vomiting and pain included.
Required Reading McCorkle, R. (Ed) (1996). Cancer Nursing: a
comprehensive textbook (2nd Ed.). Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders &
Company.
Recommended Reading Australia. Department. of Health and
Family Services. (1998) Cancer control towards 2002: the first stage
of a nationally co-ordinated plan for cancer control: based on the
report. Canberra Commonwealth Department of Health and Family
Services. Mathers, C. (1998). Health system costs of cancer in
Australia – an analysis of costs, service use, incidence and mortality
by type of cancer Canberra Australian Institute of Health and
Welfare. Australian Institute of Health and Welfare (1998) Health
system costs of cancer in Australia. Canberra: Australian Institute of
Health and Welfare. Bishop, J. F., (1999) Cancer facts: a concise
oncology text – Amsterdam: Harwood Academic. Groenwald, S. L.
(1997). Cancer: principles and practice (4th Ed.). Boston: Jones &
Bartlett. Groenwald, S. L. (1998). A clinical guide to cancer nursing:
A companion to cancer nursing. Boston: Jones and Bartlett. National
Health and Medical Research Council (Australia) (1999) The
prevention, early detection and management of colorectal cancer.
[Canberra]: NHMRC.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester organised according to the teaching mode used.
Assessment Class presentation 30%; Case study 70% (2500 –
3000 words).
HNM5003 CANCER NURSING STUDIES 3
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HNM5001 Cancer Nursing Studies 1; HNM5002
Cancer Nursing Studies 2; or equivalent.
Content The psychosocial impact of cancer and its treatment on the
patient and the family will be the focus of this subject, addressing
such topics as quality of life, death and dying, communication and
crisis intervention, body image, sexuality and mood changes. The
role of counselling in cancer nursing practice will be introduced.
Required Reading McCorkle, R. (Ed) (1996). Cancer Nursing: a
comprehensive textbook (2nd Ed.). Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders &
Company.
Recommended Reading Aguilera, D C. (1998). Crisis
Intervention: Theory and Methodology, (8th Ed.). Mosby: St Louis.
Barraclough, J., (1999) Cancer and emotion: a practical guide to
psycho-oncology (3rd Ed.) Chichester; New York: J. Wiley. Barrett,
A., Voute, P. A.,Kalifa, C (1998) Cancer in children: clinical
management (4th Ed.) Oxford – Oxford University Press. Brammer,
L.M. & MacDonald, G. (1996). Therapeutic Psychology:
Fundamentals of Counselling and Psychotherapy (6th Ed.).
Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall. Geldard, L.D. (1998). A
Training Manual for Counsellors: Basic Personal Counselling, (3rd
Ed.) Sydney, Prentice Hall. Greaves, M. F Cancer (2000): The
evolutionary legacy – Oxford: Oxford University Press. Gregory, D.&
Russell, C. K., (1999) Cancer stories on life and suffering –
Montreal: McGill-Queen's University Press. Ivey, A.E., Ivey, M.B., &
Simek-Downing, L. (1997). Counselling and Psychotherapy:
Integrating Skills Theory and Practice (4th Ed.) Boston: Allyn and
Bacon. Keon, J (1999) The truth about breast cancer: a 7-step
prevention plan – Mill Valley, Calif.: Parissound Publishing. Kirk, J &
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
335
Kefford, R (2000) Cancer in the family: risks and management –
Medical Journal of Australia, 172: 529-530. Maguire, G. P. (1999)
Breaking bad news: explaining cancer diagnosis and prognosis,
Medical Journal of Australia, 171: 288-289. Newell, S & Sanson-
Fisher, R. W. (2000) Australian oncologists' self-reported knowledge
and attitudes about non-traditional therapies used by cancer
patients, Medical Journal of Australia, 172: 110-113. Schou K. C.,
Hewison, J., (1999) Experiencing cancer: quality of life in treatment
Buckingham – Open University Press. Simon, D (1999) Return to
wholeness: embracing body, mind, and spirit in the face of cancer –
New York J. Wiley. Wooddell, M. J. (1998) Women confront
cancer: making medical history by choosing alternative and
complementary therapies – New York: New York University Press.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester organised according to the teaching mode used.
Assessment Class presentation 30%; Case study 70% (3000
words).
HNM5004 NURSING MANAGEMENT 1
Prerequisite Nil
Campus St Albans
Content The subject provides senior nurses with educational
opportunities to explore the role of a nurse manager and to develop
their knowledge base and clinical expertise in the field of nursing
management at a ward or unit level.
Required Reading Cuthbert, M., Duffield, C & Hope,J.(1992).
Management in Nursing,, Sydney, Harcourt Brace Jonovich,
Publishers. Huber, D. (ed). (2000). Leadership and Nursing Care
Management, Sydney, A Harcourt Health Services Company, W.B.
Saunders Company. Marrelli, T.M. (1999), The Nurse Manager’s
Survival Guide, Practical Answers to Everyday Problems, 2nd
edition. St Louis, Mosby. Trinder, L.,&Reynolds, S. (eds), (2000).
Evidence-Based Practice: A critical appraisal. Oxford, Blackwell
Science. Victorian Department of Human Services. (1998). Victoria –
Public Hospital Policy and Funding Guidelines, 1998-1999.
Department of Human Services, Melbourne.
Recommended Reading American Organisation of Nurse
Executive (AONE), (1996). The Role and Functions of the Hosptial
Nurse Manager. Nursing Management, 23(9), 36-38 Butler, J.R.
(1992). Patients, Policies and Politics: Before and After Working for
Patients, Buckingham: Open University Press. Dawes. M.(ed).
(1999). Evidence-Based Practice: a Primer for Health Care
Professionals. Edinburgh, Churchill Livingstone. Genovich – Richards,
J., & Carissimi, D. (1996). Developing Nurses’ Managerial
Competence. Nursing Management, 17(3), 36-38. Kermode, M.
(1995). Patients’ experiences of nursing interventions during
hospitalisation with an Aids-defining illness, Australian Journal of
Advance Nursing. Lewis-Ford, B.(1999). Management Techniques:
Coping with Difficult People. Nursing Management, 24(3), 36-38.
Mintzberg, H. (1995). The Nature of Managerial Work. New York:
Harper & Rowe. Mohan, J. (2002). Planning, Markets and
Hospitals, London, Routledge O’Halloran, V.E. (1996). Teaching
Management Skills in the Clinical Setting: An Essential Curriculum
Component. Journal of the New York State Nurses Association,
27(4), 7-9. Zaleznik, A. (1992). Managers and Leaders: Are They
Different? Harvard Business Review, 70 (2), 126-135. Mintzberg, H.
(1995). Managing as Blended Care, Journal of Nursing
Admistration, 24(9), 29-39.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester organized according to the teaching mode used.
Assessment Examination: 30%, Essay/Assignment 60% (2000-
2500 words), seminar presentation 10%
HNM5005 NURSING MANAGEMENT 2
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite HNM5004 Nursing management 1
Content This subject builds on the content covered in Nursing
Management 1. the subject aims to expand further on the knowledge
gained in previous studies. It aims to encourage students to examine
management at ward/unit level critically, and to generate and apply
specialised knowledge of human resources management through the
process of linking theoretical knowledge with their nursing practice.
Required Reading Cuthbert, M., Duffield, C & Hope,J.(1992).
Management in Nursing,, Sydney, Harcourt Brace Jonovich,
Publishers. Huber, D. (ed). (2000). Leadership and Nursing Care
Management, Sydney, A Harcourt Health Services Company, W.B.
Saunders Company. Marrelli, T.M. (1999). The Nurse Manager’s
Survival Guide, Practical Answers to Everyday Problems, 2nd
edition. St Louis, Mosby. Palmer, G.R.,& Short, S.T. (2002). 3rd
Edition. Health Care and Public Policy- An Australian Analysis.
Australia, MaCmillan Publishers, Pty Ltd.
Recommended Reading American Organisation Of Nurse
Executive (Aone). (1996). The Role And Functions Of The Hosptial
Nurse Manager. Nursing Management, 23(9), 36-38. Butler, J.R.
(1992). Patients, Policies And Politics: Before And After Working For
Patients, Buckingham: Open University Press. Dessler, G. (1996).
4th Edition, Organisation Theory, Integrating Structure And
Behavious. New Jersey: Prentice Hall. Genovich – Richards, J., &
Carissimi, D. (1996). Developing Nurses’ Managerial Competence.
Nursing Management, 17(3), 36-38. Jackson, T. & Sevil, P. (2000).
Problems Incounting And Paying For Multidisciplinary Outpatients
Clinics, Australian Health Review, Vol.20, No.3, 38-59. Kermode,
M. (1995). Patients’ Experiences Of Nursing Interventions During
Hospitalisation With An Aids-Defining Illness, Australian Journal Of
Advance Nursing. Lewis-Ford, B.(1999). Management Techniques:
Coping With Difficult People. Nursing Management, 24(3), 36-38.
Mintzberg, H. (1995). The Nature Of Managerial Work. New York:
Harper & Rowe. Mohan, J. (2002). Planning, Markets And
Hospitals, London, Routledge O’halloran, V.E. (1996). Teaching
Management Skills In The Clinical Setting: An Essential Curriculum
Component. Journal Of The New York State Nurses Association,
27(4), 7-9. Renwick, M, And Harvey,R (1989). The Organisation Of
Quality Assurance In Australian Hospitals, Australian Health Review,
12(3), 16-27. Stoner, J. A. F., Collins, R.R. And Yetton, P. (1996).
Management In Australia, 4th Edition, New Jersey: Prentice Hall.
Tierney, Mj., Grant, L.M. And Mazique, S.I (1990). Cost And
Accountability And Clinical Nurse Specialist Evaluation, Nursing
Management, 21 (5): 26-31. Young, L.C. And Hayne, A.N. (1998).
Nursing Administration From Concepts To Practice, Sydney, W.B
Saunders. Zaleznik, A. (1992). Managers And Leaders: Are They
Different? Harvard Business Review, 70 (2), 126-135. Victorian
Department Of Human Services. (1998). Victoria – Public Hospital
Policy And Funding Guidelines, 1998-1999. Department Of Human
Services, Melbourne
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester organized according to the teaching mode used.
Assessment Examination: 30%, Essay/Assignment: 60% (2000-
2500 words), Seminar Presentation: 10%.
HNM5006 NURSING MANAGEMENT 3
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite HNM5004 Nursing Management 1, HNM5005
nursing management 2
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
336
Content This subject provides students with the opportunity to
explore, refine and expand expertise in clinical judgement, to
critically examine the processes or strategies in use. It also aims to
enable students to apply theoretical knowledge to the management
of a word/unit.
Required Reading Byers, S,R. (1997). The Executive Nurse:
Leadership For New Health Care Transitions. Albany: Delmar
Publishers. Cuthbert, M., Duffield, C & Hope,J.(1992). Management
in Nursing,, Sydney, Harcourt Brace Jonovich, Publishers. Huber, D.
(ed) (2000). Leadership and Nursing Care Management, Sydney, A
Harcourt Health Services Company, W.B. Saunders Company.
Marrelli, T.M. (1999). The Nurse Manager’s Survival Guide,
Practical Answers to Everyday Problems, 2nd edition. St Louis,
Mosby. Pesut, D, J & Herman, J. (1999). Clinical Reasoning: The Art
& Science Of Critical & Creative Thinking. Albany: Delmar
Publishers. Victorian Department of Human Services.(1998). Victoria
– Public Hospital Policy and Funding Guidelines, 1998-1999.
Department of Human Services, Melbourne.
Recommended Reading Benner, P. (1984). From Novice to
Expert. Excellence and Power in Clinical Nursing Practice. California
Addison: Wesley Publishing Company.Butler, J.R. (1992), Patients,
Policies and Politics: Before and After Working for Patients,
Buckingham: Open University Press. Castledine, G., & McGee,
P.(Eds) (1998). Advanced & Specialist Nursing Practice. Oxford:
Blackwell Science.Dessler, G (1996). 4th Edition, Organisation
Theory, Integrating Structure and Behavious. New Jersey: Prentice
Hall. Cuthbert, M., Duffield, C.,& Hope, J. (1992). Management in
Nursing, London, WB Saunders. Genovich – Richards, J., &
Carissimi, D. (1996). Developing Nurses’ Managerial Competence.
Nursing Management, 17(3), 36-38. Jackson, T. & Sevil, P. (2000).
Problems inCounting and Paying for Multidisciplinary Outpatients
Clinics, Australian Health Review, Vol.20, No.3, 38-59. Johns, C.,
& Freshwater, D. (1998). Transforming Nursing Through Reflective
Practice. Oxford: Blackwell Science. Kermode, M. (1995). Patients’
experiences of nursing interventions during hospitalisation with an
Aids-defining illness, Australian Journal of Advance Nursing. Lewis-
Ford, B.(1999). Management Techniques: Coping with Difficult
People. Nursing Management, 24(3), 36-38. Mintzberg, H. (1995).
The Nature of Managerial Work. New York: Harper & Row.
Mohan, J. (2002). Planning, Markets and Hospitals, London,
Routledge O’Halloran, V.E. (1996). Teaching Management Skills in
the Clinical Setting: An Essential Curriculum Component. Journal of
the New York State Nurses Association, 27(4), 7-9. Renwick, M,
and Harvey,R (1989). The Organisation of Quality Assurance in
Australian Hospitals, Australian Health Review, 12(3), 16-27.
Stoner, J. A. F., Collins, R.R. and Yetton, P. (1996). Management in
Australia, 4th Edition, New Jersey: Prentice Hall. Tappen, R,M.,
Weiss, S, A & Whitehead, D, K (1998). Essentials Of Nursing
Leadership and Management. Philadelphia: F.A Davis Company.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester organized according to the teaching mode used.
Assessment Presentation (equivalent 2000 words) 40%, Written
Assignment (2500 to 3000 words) 60%
HNM5101 INTERVIEW AND ASSESSMENT METHODS IN MENTAL
HEALTH CONTEXTS
Campus St Albans/Off-Shore
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Development of advanced interviewing skills with
consumers and families; Development of advanced assessment skills
with consumers and families; Advanced psychiatric mental status
examination; Standardised assessment instruments, including
consumer self-assessment; Advanced risk assessment; Concept of
history giving (by the consumer) as opposed to history taking;
Culturally sensitive interviewing and assessment; Recovery focused
interviewing and assessment methods.
Required Reading Gelder, M., Mayou, R., & Cowen, P. (2001).
Shorter Oxford Textbook of Psychiatry (4th ed.). Oxford: Oxford
University Press. Trzepacz, P. T., & Baker, R. W. (1993). The
psychiatric mental status examination. New York: Oxford University
Press.
Recommended Reading American Psychiatric Association
(2000). Manual of mental disorders (4th ed.), (Text Revision).
Washington DC: APA; Barker, P. (1997). Assessment in psychiatric
and mental health nursing: in search of the whole person.
Cheltenham, England: Stanley Thornes. Couglin, K. M. (ed.) (2000).
Behavioural outcomes and guidelines sourcebook: a practical guide
to measuring, managing and standardizing mental health and
substance abuse treatment. New York: Faulkner & Gray. Keegan, L.
(1998). Psychiatric Mental Health Nursing: Understanding the client
as well as the condition. Humboldt State University, Arcata,
California: Delmar Publisher; Peplau, H. E. (1988). Interpersonal
relations in nursing. Houndsmill, Basingstoke, Hampshire, United
Kingdom: MacMillan. Strub, R. L., & Black, F. W. (2000). The
mental status examination in neurology. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis.
World Health Organisation (1992) The ICD-10 Classification.
Geneva: WHO.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester organised according to the teaching mode used.
Assessment Written assignment 65% (2700-2900 words) Class
presentation 35% Simulated interview and assessment activity
(Ungraded: Pass/Fail)
HNM5102 COGNITIVE BEHAVIOUR THERAPY IN SEVERE MENTAL
ILLNESS 1
Campus St Albans/Off-Shore
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Theoretical background of cognitive behaviour therapy;
Principles of cognitive behaviour therapy in mental health; Critical
analysis of the interprofessional use of cognitive behaviour therapy
in severe anxiety and depression in mental health settings;
Interprofessional application of cognitive behaviour therapy in
people with severe anxiety and depression in mental health settings;
Culturally sensitive cognitive behavioural therapy in severe anxiety
and depression; Consumer self-determination in cognitive
behavioural therapy; Recovery focused cognitive behaviour therapy.
Required Reading Dobson, K. S. (ed.) (2001). Handbook of
cognitive behaviour therapy. New York: Guildford Press. Haddock,
G., & Slade, P. D. (eds.) (2000). Cognitive-behavioural interventions
with psychotic disorders (2nd ed.). London: Routledge. Simos, G.
(ed.) (2002). Cognitive behaviour therapy: a guide for the practising
clinician. Hove, United Kingdom: Brunner-Routledge.
Recommended Reading Fowler, D. R. (1995). Cognitive
behaviour therapy for psychosis: theory and practice. Chichester,
England: Wiley. King, M., Davidson, O., Taylor, F., Haines, A.,
Sharp, D., & Turner, R. (2002). Effectiveness of teaching general
practitioners skills in brief cognitive behaviour therapy to treat
patients with depression: randomised controlled trial. British Medical
Journal, 324, 947-951. Lam, D., & Gale, J. (2000). Cognitive
behaviour therapy: teaching a client the ABC model – the first step
towards the process change. Journal of Advanced Nursing, 312,
444-452. Meichenbaum, D. (1997). Cognitive-behaviour
modification: an integrative approach. New York: Plenum Press.
Morgan, H., Sumich, H., Hickie, I., Naismith, S., Davenport, T., &
Whitten, D. (1999). A cognitive–behavioural therapy training
program for general practitioners to manage depression.
Australasian Psychiatry, 7(6), 326-328. Nelson, H. E. (1997).
Cognitive behavioural therapy with schizophrenia: a practice
manual. Cheltenham, England: Stanley Thornes. Sheldon, B. (1995).
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
337
Cognitive-behavioural therapy: research, practice, and philosophy.
London: Routledge.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester organised according to the teaching mode used. 10 hours
observation of the practise of cognitive behaviour therapy in a
clinical setting.
Assessment Critical analysis paper 65% (2700-2900 words).
Class presentation 35% Objective Simulated Clinical assessment
(Ungraded: Pass/Fail)
HNM5103 EVIDENCE BASED PRACTICE
Campus St Albans/Off-Shore
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Accessing and using evidence based data bases;
Appraising a systematic review of the literature; Utilise basic statistics
for appraisal of systematic reviews, including statistical significance,
chance, probability, confidence intervals, pitfalls in analysis;
Appraising the professional application of a meta analysis to an
aspect of professional practice; Recovery from mental illness that
enhances consumer self-determination and social connectedness;
Culturally sensitive evidence based professional practice.
Required Reading Stevens, A. (ed.) (2000). The advanced
handbook of methods in evidence based healthcare. London: Sage;
Trinder, L., & Reynolds, S. (eds.) (2000). Evidence-based practice: a
critical appraisal. Oxford: Blackwell Science.
Recommended Reading Burns, A. S., Lawlor, B., & Craig, S.
(1999). assessment in old age psychiatry. London: Martin Dunitz.
Corcoran, J. (2000). Evidence-based social work practice for
families: a lifespan approach. New York: Springer. Crombie, I. K.
(1996). The pocket guide to critical appraisal. London: BMJ
Publishing. Davidson, L., Stayner, D. A., Nickou, C., Styron, T. H.,
Rowe, M., & Chinman, M. L. (2001). ‘Simply to be let in’: Inclusion
as a basis for recovery. Psychiatric Rehabilitation Journal, 24(4),
375-389. Dawes. M. (ed.) (1999). Evidence-based practice: a
primer for health care professionals. Edinburgh: Churchill
Livingstone. Evidence-based mental health (Online version).
ebmh.bmjjournals.com Friedland, D. J. (ed.) (1998). Evidence-based
medicine: a framework for clinical practice. Stamford, CT: Appleton
Lange. Guyatt, G., & Rennie, D. (ed.) (2002). Users’ guides to the
medical literature: essentials of evidence-based clinical practice. The
Evidence-Based Working Group. Chicago, Illinois: AMA Press Le
May, A. (1999). Evidence-based practice. London: Nursing Times
Books. Lunt, A. (2000). Recovery: Moving from concept toward a
theory. Psychiatric Rehabilitation Journal, 23(4), 401-405.
McKenna, H., Cutcliff, J., McKenna, P. (2000). Evidence-based
practice: demolishing some myths. Harrow, Middlesex, England:
Scutari Projects Ltd. Munetz, M. R., & Frese III, F. J. (2001). Getting
ready for recovery. Psychiatric Rehabilitation Journal, 25(1), 35-43.
Newell, R., & Gournay, K. (eds.) (2000). Mental health nursing: an
evidence-based approach. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Rowland, N., & Goss, S. (eds.) (2000). Evidence-based counselling
and psychological therapies: research and applications. London:
Routledge. Smith, M. K. (2000). Recovery from a severe psychiatric
disability: Findings of a qualitative study. Psychiatric Rehabilitation
Journal, 24(2), 149-159. Speer, D. C. (1998). Mental health
outcome evaluation. San Diego, California: Academic Press. Taylor,
M. C. (2000). Evidence-based practice for occupational therapists.
Oxford: Blackwell Science.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester organised according to the teaching mode used.
Assessment Essay about evidence based practice 35% (1800-
2000 words). Appraisal of a systematic review of the literature on a
nominated topic 65% (2700-2900 words)
HNM5104 FIELDWORK: MENTAL HEALTH PRACTICE
Campus St Albans/Off-Shore
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Student will undertake 120 hours of clinical practice and
engage in reflective practice with a mentor. One 3-hour introduction
to the subject.
Required Reading Martyn, H., & Atkinson, M. (eds.) (2000).
Developing reflective practice: making sense of social work in a
world of change. Bristol, England: Policy Press. Rolfe, G., Feshwater,
D., & Jasper, M. (2001). Critical reflection for nursing and the
helping professions: a user's guide. Basingstoke, England: Palgrave.
Recommended Reading Dobson, K. S. (ed.) (2001). Handbook
of cognitive behaviour therapy. New York: Guildford Press. Gamble,
C., & Brennan, G. (2000). (eds.) Working with serious mental
illness: a manual for clinical practice. Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall.
Geyman, J. P., Deyo, R. A., & Ramsey, S. D. (eds.) (2000).
Evidence-based clinical practice: concepts and approaches. Boston,
MA.: Butterworth-Heineman. Haddock, G., & Slade, P. D. (eds.)
(2000). Cognitive-behavioural interventions with psychotic disorders
(2nd ed.). London: Routledge. Kilpatrick, A. C., & Holland, T. P.
(1999). Working with families: an integrative model by level of
need. Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon. Lindblad-Goldberg, M., Dore, M.
M., & Stern, L. (1998). Creating competence from chaos: a
comprehensive guide to home-based services. New York: W. W.
Norton. Lynch, E. W., & Hanson, M. J. (eds.) (1999). Developing
cross-cultural competence: a guide for working with children and
their families. Baltimore, MD: Paul H. Brooks Publishing. Simos, G.
(ed.) (2002). Cognitive behaviour therapy: a guide for the practising
clinician. Hove, United Kingdom: Brunner-Routledge. Stevens, A.
(ed.) (2000). The advanced handbook of methods in evidence
based healthcare. London: Sage. Treatment Protocol Project (2000).
Management of mental disorders (Vol. 1), (3rd ed.). Sydney: World
Health Organization Collaborating Centre for Mental Health and
Substance Abuse. Treatment Protocol Project (2000). Management
of mental disorders (Vol. 2), (3rd ed.). Sydney: World Health
Organization Collaborating Centre for Mental Health and Substance
Abuse.
Subject Hours Ideally, fieldwork should take place in a setting in
which the student is not employed. In exceptional circumstances, the
student may negotiate with the subject co-ordinator to undertake the
fieldwork in his or her workplace. This is conditional upon the
student providing satisfactory evidence that the subject objectives
can be achieved in his or her workplace.
Assessment Case management study, comprising (a) Interview
and assessment 40% (1900-2100 words); (b) Case management
report 60% (2800-3000 words). Achievement of clinical
competencies (Ungraded: Pass/Fail)
HNM6011 COUNSELLING IN THE HEALTH CARE CONTEXT
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject will provide education and training in effective
communication skills for interaction with health professionals,
colleagues and client populations. Health communication and how
individuals deal with health related issues will be explored. A small
range of major counselling theories will be examined and training in
brief counselling strategies will be provided. An understanding of
how social, cultural and developmental contexts impact on the
counselling relationship will be discussed. Emphasis will be placed
on group work theory and practice.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
338
Required Reading Brown, A. (1992) Group Work 3rd ed.
England, Ashgate Publishing. Company. Byrne, D.& A. Byrne,
(1996) Counselling Skills for Health Professionals. Melbourne,
Macmillan Education. Egan, G. (1999) The Skilled Helper. Pacific
Grove, Brooks Cole. Faulkner, A. (1998) Effective Interaction with
Patient. New York, Churchill Livingstone. Hoff, L.A. (1994) People in
Crisis: Understanding and Helping. Sydney, Addison –Wesley.
Johnson , D.W. & Johnson, F. P. (1997) Joining Together: Group
Theory and Group Skills Boston, Allyn & Bacon. Nelson-Jones, R.
(1992) Lifeskills Helping: a textbook of practical counselling and
helping skills. (3rd ed.) London, Holt Rinehart & Winston. Pauwels,
A. (1995) Cross –Cultural Communication in the Health Sciences.
Melbourne, Macmillan Education. Ryle, A. ( 1995) Cognitive
Analytic Therapy: developments in theory and practice.New York,
Wiley.
Recommended Reading Bor, R. Miller, R. Latz, M. & Salt, H.
(1998) Counselling in Health Care Settings. London, Cassell.
Greenspan, M. (1993) A New Approach to Women & Therapy.
New York, McGraw-Hill. Scott, J., Williams, M.G.& Beck, A.T.
(1991) Cognitive Therapy in Clinical Practice. London,
Routledge.Vallis, T.M., Howes, J.l. & Miller, P.C. (1991) The
Challenge of Cognitive Therapy Plenum Press. Zeig, J. Gilligan, S.
(eds) (1990) Brief Therapy: Myths, methods and metaphors.New
York. Brunner/Mazel.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours a week structured learning session and one hour
workshop/group work
Assessment Class presentation of a case study and written report
(1000 words) 40% Written Assignment on a selected theoretical
approach to counselling 60% (2000 words)
HNM6040 RESEARCH PLANNING
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Corequisite(s) HHA6115 Minor Thesis (full-time) or HHA6116
Minor Thesis (part-time); or equivalent.
Content The aim of this subject is to provide students with the
opportunity to plan for successful conduct of research. Whilst the
major emphasis of this subject will focus on planning, students will
also explore alternative theoretical and conceptual frameworks
relevant to an area of inquiry, and methods which might best
address the research problem proposed for investigation. Students
will also be expected to develop a persuasive argument supporting
both the feasibility and novelty of the topic of inquiry. The topics
covered in this subject will result from negotiation between the
student and supervising lecturer and will be influenced by the needs
of individual students. Topics which would be expected to be
considered include the role of literature reviews, how to clarify a
research problem, method(s) of inquiry relevant to the problem and a
writing research proposal.
Recommended Reading Recommended readings are negotiated
and are influenced by the nature of the proposed research topic of
inquiry. Victoria University (VU), (1992). Continuing to Educate Rita:
Women and Postgraduate Study. VU, (1993). Code of Conduct for
Research. VU: Office for Research. Australian Nursing Federation,
Royal College of Nursing, Australia, Florence Nightingale
Committee, Australia, New South Wales College of Nursing, Royal
College of Nursing, Australia. (1992). Nursing Research Targets,
Proceedings of the National Nursing Research Targets Project, April
1991-August 1992.
Subject Hours Whilst students will not necessarily attend formal
classes, they will meet with a supervisor on a regular basis. The
nature of the work required could be estimated as equivalent to three
contact hours per week with an expectation that additional and
related work will proceed on an ongoing basis.
Assessment Assignment, 2000 words; research proposal. A
satisfactory standard must be achieved in both pieces of assessment
to achieve an ungraded pass in the subject.
HNM6109 WORKING WITH GROUPS IN HEALTHCARE CONTEXTS
Campus St Albans, Off-Shore
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Historical and theoretical underpinning of group work;
Benefits of group work with people who have mental illness; Types of
group work and application in mental health settings; Components
of small groups; Group development; Managing conflict in groups;
Establishing, running and evaluating psychotherapeutic groups in
mental health settings; Clinical de-briefing of group work with their
mentor; Group roles; Culturally sensitive group work; Consumer self-
determination and social connectedness in group work; Recovery
focused group work.
Required Reading Brabender, V. (2002). Introduction to group
therapy. New York: Wiley. Brandler, S., & Roman, C. P. (1999).
Group work: Skills and strategies for effective interventions. New
York: Haworth Press. Howe, M. C., & Schwartzberg, S. L. (2001). A
functional approach to group work in occupational therapy.
Philadelphia: Lippincott.
Recommended Reading Andrews, H. B. (1995). Group design
and leadership: strategies for creating successful common-theme
groups. Boston, MA: Allyn & Bacon. Benjamin, J., Bessant, J., &
Watts, R. (1997). Making groups work: rethinking practice. St.
Leonards, NSW: Allen & Unwin. Bertcher, H. J., & Maple, F. F.
(1996). Creating groups. Thousand Oaks, California: Sage. Free,
M. L. (1999). Cognitive therapy in groups: guidelines and resources
for practice. Chichester, England: John Wiley. Hodgkinson, B. et al.
(1999). Comparing the effectiveness of individual and group
therapy in the treatment of depression. Adelaide: Joanna Briggs
Institute for Evidence Based Nursing and Midwifery. Kymissis, P., &
Halperin, D. A. (eds.) (1996). Group therapy with children and
adolescents. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press.
MacKenzie, R. (1997). Time-managed group therapy: effective
clinical applications. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press.
Northen, H., & Kurland, R. (2001). Social work with groups. New
York: Columbia University Press. Shaw, J., & Robertson, C. (1997).
Participatory video: a practical approach to using video creatively in
group development work. London: Routledge. Rose, S. D. (1998).
Group therapy with troubled youth: a cognitive behavioural
interactive approach. Thousand Oaks, California: Sage. Yalom, B.
(ed.) (1998). The Yalom reader: selections from the work of a master
therapist and storyteller/Irvin D. Young. New York: Basic Books.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester organised according to the teaching mode used.
Assessment Written proposal to establish a group 35% (1800-
2000 words) Written evaluation of a group process 65% (2700-
2900 words)
HNM6110 NURSING AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject provides an overview on ways in which the
discipline of nursing has been influenced by various philosophies of
science. In addition, it will examine changing trends in scientific
methods of inquiry and their influence on nursing’s epistemology.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Capra, F. 1982, The Turning Point:
Science Society and the Rising Culture, Fontana, London. Meleis,
A.I. 1991, Theoretical Nursing: Development and Progress 2nd edn,
Lippincott, Philadelphia.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
339
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
one two-hour lecture and one one-hour tutorial.
Assessment Written assignment (4000 words), 70%; seminar
presentation, 30%
HNM6112 COGNITIVE BEHAVIOUR THERAPY IN SEVERE MENTAL
ILLNESS 2
Campus St Albans, Off-Shore
Prerequisite(s) HNM5102 Cognitive behaviour therapy in severe
mental illness 1
Content Summary of principles of cognitive behaviour therapy;
Principles of cognitive behaviour therapy in psychotic illness, eating
disorders, and obsessive compulsive disorder; Critical analysis of the
interprofessional use of cognitive behaviour therapy in psychotic
illness, eating disorders, and obsessive compulsive disorder in
mental health settings; Interprofessional application of cognitive
behaviour therapy in people with psychotic illness, eating disorders,
and obsessive compulsive disorder in mental health settings;
Culturally appropriate cognitive behavioural therapy in people with
psychotic illness, eating disorders, and obsessive compulsive
disorder; Consumer self-determination and social connectedness in
cognitive behaviour therapy; Recovery focused cognitive behaviour
therapy.
Required Reading Cormac, I., Jones, C., & Campbell, C.
Cognitive behaviour therapy for schizophrenia (Cochrane Review).
In: The Cochrane Library, Issues 2, 2002. Oxford: Lucas, S., &
Wade, T. (2001). An examination of the power of the voices in
predicting the mental state of people experiencing psychosis.
Behaviour Change. 18(1), 51-57. Wykes T., Tarrier., N., & Lewis,
S. (eds.) (1998). Outcome and innovation in psychological treatment
of schizophrenia. New York: John Wiley.
Recommended Reading Birchwood, M. (1995). Early
intervention in psychotic relapse: Cognitive approaches to detection
and management. Behaviour Change. 12(1), 2-19. Bruch, M., &
Bond, F. W. (eds.) (1998). Beyond diagnosis: case formulation
approaches in CBT. Chichester, England: John Wiley. Haddock, G.,
Devane, S., Bradshaw, T., McGovern, J., Tarrier, N., Kinderman, P.,
Baguley, I., Lancashire, S., Harris, N. (2001). An investigation into
the psychometric properties of the Cognitive Therapy Scale for
Psychosis. Behavioural and Cognitive Psychotherapy. 29(2), 221-
233 Haddock, G., Sellwood, W., Tarrier, N., & Yusupoff, L. (1994).
Developments in cognitive-behaviour therapy for persistent psychotic
symptoms. Behaviour Change. 11(4): 200-212. Kavanagh, D. J.
(1995). An intervention for substance abuse in schizophrenia.
Behaviour Change. 12(1), 20-30. Kingdon, D., Turkington, D., John,
C. (1994). Cognitive behaviour therapy of schizophrenia: The
amenability of delusions and hallucinations to reasoning. British
Journal of Psychiatry. 164(5), 581-587 Chadwick, P., & Birchwood,
M. (1996). Cognitive therapy for delusions, voices and paranoia.
Chichester, England: Wiley. Williams, C. (2001). A response to a
case of Lacanian psychosis: A cognitive behaviour therapy
perspective. European Journal of Psychotherapy –Counselling and
Health. 4(2), 215-224.
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester organised according to the teaching mode used.
Assessment Written proposal about establishing cognitive
behaviour therapy program 45% (2200-2400 words) Critical
analysis paper 55% (2500-2700 words) Objective Simulated
Clinical assessment (Ungraded: Pass/Fail)
HNM6118 EVIDENCE BASED PRACTICE IN SPECIALISED NURSING
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject considers the rationale for evidence based
nursing practice, the skills that are needed to conduct a meta-
analysis, and the approaches that can be used to appraise a
systematic review. The focus of the meta analysis will be on recovery
from acute illness.
Recommended Texts Craig, J.V. & Smyth, R. L. (2002). The
evidence-based practice-manual for nurses. Edinburgh: Churchill
Livingstone. Hammer, S. & Collison, G. (1999). Achieving evidence-
based practice: A handbook for practitioners. Edinburgh: Bailliere
Tindall in Association with Royal College of Nursing.
Recommended Reading Cheek, J. (2000). Postmorden and
Poststructural Approaches to Nursing Research. California: Sage
Publications, Thousand Oaks. Dawes. M.(ed) (1999). Evidence-
based practice: a primer for health care professionals. Edinburgh:
Churchill Livingstone. Friedland, D.J. (ed). (1998). Evidence-based
medicine: a framework for clinical practice Stamford, CT: Appleton
Lange. Geyman,J.O., Deyo,R.A., & Ramsey, S.D. (eds.). (2000).
Evidence-based clinical practice: Concepts and approaches. Boston,
MA: Butterworth-Heineman. Guyatt, G.,& Rennie, D. (eds). (2002).
Users’ guides to the medical literature: Essentials of evidence based
clinical practice. The Evidence-Based Working Group. Chicago,
Illinois: AMA Press. Le May, A. (1999). Evidence-based practice.
London, Nursing Times Books. Mckenna, H., Cutcliff, J., McKenna,
P. (2002). Evidence-based practice: emolishing some myths.
Middlesex, England: Scutari Projects Ltd, Harrow. Miller, M.A.,
Babcock, D.E, (1996) Critical thinking applied to nursing, St Louis,
Mosby. Roberts, K (1999), ‘Through a looking glass’, Clinical
Nursing Research, 8(4), 299-301. Roberts,K., Brittin,M.&
deClifford,J (1995), ‘Boomering pillows and respiratory capacity in
frail elderly women’ Clinical Nursing Research, 3(2), 157-165.
Stevens, A. (ed). (2000). The advanced handbook of methods in
evidence based healthcare, London: Sage.
Subject Hours 39 hours
Assessment Part 1- 35%; Part 2- 65%.
HNM6119 LEADERSHIP AND MANAGEMENT IN SPECIALISED
NURSING
Campus St Albans/Offshore
Perequisite(s) Nil
Content The content of the subject includes component of specialist
settings: change theory and process in acute health care
organization; organisation structures and their effects on
communication; role of nurse manager in specialised nursing
practice; human resource challenge; principles of teamwork;
management and leadership principles; budgeting and costing;
models of leadership and management in specialised practice.
Required Reading Byers, S,R 1997 The Executive Nurse:
Leadership For New Health Care Transitions. Albany: Delmar
Publishers Pesut, D, J & Herman, J 1999 Clinical Reasoning: The Art
& Science Of Critical & Creative Thinking. Albany: Delmar
Publishers Tappen, R,M., Weiss, S, A & Whitehead, D, K 1998
Essentials Of Nursing Leadership and Management. Philadelphia:
F.A Davis Company
Recommended Reading Benner, P. (1984) From Novice to
Expert. Excellence and Power in Clinical Nursing Practice. California
Addison: Wesley Publishing Company. Castledine, G., & McGee,
P.(Eds) (1998), Advanced & Specialist Nursing Practice. Oxford:
Blackwell Science. Cutbert, M., Duffield, C.,& Hope, J, (1992),
Management in Nursing, London, WB Saunders. Johns, C., &
Freshwater, D (1998) Transforming Nursing Through Reflective
Practice. Oxford: Blackwell Science
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
340
Subject Hours The equivalent of three hours per week for one
semester organised according to the teaching mode used.
Assessment Presentation (equvalent to 2000 words) – 40%
Written Assignment (2500 to 3000 words) 60%.
HNM6122 CLINICAL PROJECT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The clinical project is the culmination of the depth and
breadth of the course on Substance Abuse and is intended to allow
the student to pursue his or her own area of study in the clinical or
other settings. It is intended that the work of the student will be
original and carried out under the guidance of a supervisor. The
student will be required to choose the focus of their study, such as
program evaluation, efficacy of a particular treatment modality,
psychosocial or other factors relating to substance abuse. The student
will present relevant aims and objectives and arrange the study
placement and conduct the study under the guidance of the
supervisor.
Required Reading No required reading, as each student will
explore a topic of their choosing.
Subject Hours This subject will be taken over two semesters and
the hours will be undertaken in consultation with the supervisor.
Assessment A current literature review equivalent to 2500 words
(30%) will be included and the project will be of 7500 words in
length (70%).
HNM6209 CLINICAL SPECIALISED PROJECT
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Master of Nursing (Specialisation) at Graduate
Diploma level.
Content The clinical project is intended to be a scholarly
independent and creative piece of work in an area of student
personal/professional interest in the field of his/her specialisation. It
can be in any of the broad spectrums of nursing and nursing
practice, for example: specialised clinical nursing practice,
professional nursing practice or nursing/patient education. Student
identifies an issue or poses a question, undertakes an
exhaustive/extensive relevant literature review, reflects on the
theoretical underpinnings and plans for an implementation of change
to achieve excellence in practice. The project will be undertaken in
consultation with the relevant nursing specialisation course
co-ordinator or another appropriate designated facilitator.
Required Reading As defined by the choice of the topic for the
clinical project
Subject Hours The student will be expected to devote the
equivalent of a 6-hour week to the subject. The format is variable to
meet students’ needs.
Assessment Two Parts:1. A written proposal of the clinical project:
Word limit =1000 Mark 10%Clinical Project comprising an
exhaustive relevant literature review and an implementation plan:
Words Limit: 9000 Mark = 90%.
HNM6800 RESEARCH THESIS (FULL-TIME)
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to a Masters by Research or
Doctor of Philosophy program.
Content This subject, the aim of which is to enable students to
competently research an area of study utilising knowledge and skills
gained in previous studies, consists of a project carried out by
students on an individual basis. The project is expected to be an
investigation of an approved topic, followed by the submission of a
suitably formatted thesis in which the topic is introduced and
formulated; the investigation described in detail; results and
conclusions from the study elaborated; and an extended discussion
presented. Students may be required to undertake some lecture
courses, as specified at the time of commencement.
Required Reading To be advised by supervisor.
Subject Hours Independent research in addition to regular
meetings with the students supervisors.
Assessment The thesis will normally be assessed by at least two
expert examiners from an appropriate area of expertise.
HNM6801 RESEARCH THESIS (PART-TIME)
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to a Masters by Research or
Doctor of Philosophy program.
Content This subject, the aim of which is to enable students to
competently research an area of study utilising knowledge and skills
gained in previous studies, consists of a project carried out by
students on an individual basis. The project is expected to be an
investigation of an approved topic, followed by the submission of a
suitably formatted thesis in which the topic is introduced and
formulated; the investigation described in detail; results and
conclusions from the study elaborated; and an extended discussion
presented. Students may be required to undertake some lecture
courses, as specified at the time of commencement.
Required Reading To be advised by supervisor.
Subject Hours Independent research in addition to regular
meetings with the students supervisors.
Assessment The thesis will normally be assessed by at least two
expert examiners from an appropriate area of expertise.
HNN5001 NEUROSCIENCE NURSING STUDIES 1
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The topics for this unit of study include: Pathophysiological
and diseases processes relating to neuromedical and neurosurgical
conditions. Perspective in Neuroscience Nursing such as major
changes in health care delivery and implications for Neuroscience
patients and nursing practice, the continuum of care and models of
neuroscience nursing practice. Assessment and evaluation of
neuroscience patients such as diagnostic procedures and laboratory
tests for neuroscience patients including anatomical and
physiological imaging techniques of the brain, cerebrospinal fluid
and spinal procedures, cerebrovascular studies, testing of special
senses and nervous system electrical activity and conduction.
General and Specific Considerations of Neuroscience Nursing in
nutritional support, fluid and electrolytes, pharmacological
management, behavioral and psychological Responses to
Neurological Illness. The subject also include Management of
Unconscious Patient including theory and management of ICP,
management of patients undergoing neurosurgical procedures,
management of patients with injury to the neurological system, i.e.
craniocerebral injury, vertebral and spinal cord injuries, peripheral
nerve injuries, back pain, inter-vertebral disc injury and multiple
trauma with neurological complications.
Required Reading Hickey, J.V. (1997) Clinical Practice of
Neurological and Neurosurgical Nursing (4th Edition). Philadelphia:
Lippincott.
Recommended Reading Brenton, A.L., Sivan, A.B., Hamsher,K.,
Varney, N.R., & Spreen, O. (1994). Contributions to
neuropsychological Assessment (2nd Edition). New York: Oxford
University Press. Bates, B. (1995). A guide to physical examination
and history taking (6th Edition). Philadelphia: J.B. Lippincott. Fuller,
G. (1993) Neurological Examination made easy. New York:
Churchill Livingstone. Westermoreland, B.F., Benarroch, E.E.,
Daube, J.R., Reason, T.J., & Sandok, B.A. (1994). Medical
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
341
neurosciences: An approach to anatomy, pathology, and physiology
by systems and levels. Boston: Little Brown. Williams, J.L.,
Schneiderman, H., & Algranati, R. S. (1994). Physical diagnosis:
Bedside evaluation of diagnosis and function. Baltimore: Williams
and Wilkins.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hour lectures and one hour tutorial.
Assessment Neurological Case Study Assignment 30% (2000–
2500 words); Seminar Presentation 25%;Examination 30%; Clinical
Journal 15% (1000 – 1500 words).Students must pass each
component of the assessment, including the clinical journal in order
to pass this subject.
HNN5002 NEUROSCIENCE NURSING STUDIES 2
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject provides the participants with advanced
knowledge in advanced neuropathophysiology and understanding
the complexity of patients with tumors of the neurological system
including principles and treatment utilizing both surgical and medical
approaches. Cerebrovascular diseases such as transient ischaemic
attacks and ischaemic stroke and various classifications of cerebral
aneurysms are discussed. The subject also include nursing
management of patients with headaches, seizures in terms of
classification and identification of epilepsy, infections of the nervous
system including meningitis, encephalitis and other viral organisms.
Neurological conditions relating degenerative processes and cranial
nerve disorders are discussed. Psychological, organic and physical
considerations of Alzheimer’s disease, Multiple Sclerosis,
Myasthenia Gravis, Parkinson’s Disease, Guillian Barre’ Syndrome
are also included in this subject.
Required Reading Hickey, J.V. (1997) Clinical Practice of
Neurological and Neurosurgical Nursing (4th Edition). Philadelphia:
Lippincott.
Recommended Reading Adam, R.D. & Victor, M. (1993).
Principles of Neurology (5th Edition). New York: McGraw-Hill.
Bates, B. (1995). A guide to physical examination and history taking
(6th Edition). Philadelphia: J.B. Lippincott. Gilbert, M. (1990).
Epidural spinal cord compression and carcinomatous meningitis, in
B.C Decker, Current therapy in neurologic disease. (3rd Edition).
Washington, DC: B.C Decker (pp 232-236). Kistler, J.P, Crowell,
R.M., Pile-Spellman, J., & Heros K.C, (1993). Management of
subarachnoid haemorrhage. New York: Raven. Rengachary, S.S &
Wilkins, R.H. (1994). Principles of neurosurgery. New York:
McGraw Hill. Westermoreland, B.F., Benarroch, E.E., Daube, J.R.,
Reason, T.J., & Sandok, B.A. (1994). Medical neurosciences: An
approach to anatomy, pathology, and physiology by systems and
levels. Boston: Little Brown.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hour lectures and one hour tutorial.
Assessment Neurological Case Study Assignment 30% (1500 –
2000 words); Neurological Workbook Log 20% (1000 – 1500
words); Examination 35%; Clinical Journal 15% (1000 – 1500
words). Students must pass each component of the assessment
including the clinical journal in order to pass this subject.
HNN5003 NEUROSCIENCE NURSING STUDIES 3
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HNN5001 Neuroscience Nursing; HNN5002
Neuroscience Nursing 2; or equivalent.
Content This subject aims to critically analyze in depth
Neuroscience Nursing by examining the related significant
development of neuroscience nursing practice within the profession,
concurrent with the addition of new treatment options through the
review of recent research, examination in the access, efficacy, cost,
ethical implications and management models for neuroscience
nursing practice. The subject includes the framework, concepts and
philosophy of rehabilitation and education of Neuroscience patient.
Nursing management and treatment of AIDS and Cranial Nerve
Diseases such as trigeminal neuralgia, facial palsy, miniere’s
disease, glossopharyngeal neuralgia and amyotrophic lateral
sclerosis are included in this subject.
Required Reading Hickey, J.V. (1997) Clinical Practice of
Neurological and Neurosurgical Nursing (4th Edition). Philadelphia:
Lippincott.
Recommended Reading Adam, R.D. & Victor, M (1993)
Principles of Neurology (5th Edition). New York: McGraw-Hill.
Bates, B. (1995). A guide to physical examination and history taking
(6th Edition). Philadelphia: J.B. Lippincott. Gilbert, M (1990).
Epidural spinal cord compression and carcinomatous meningitis, in
B.C Decker, Current therapy in neurologic disease. (3rd Edition)
Washington, DC: B.C Decker (pp 232-236). Kistler, J.P, Crowell,
R.M., Pile-Spellman, J., & Heros K.C, (1993) Management of
subarachnoid haemorrhage. New York: Raven. Rengachary, S.S &
Wilkins, R.H. (1994), Principles of neurosurgery. New York:
McGraw Hill. Westermoreland, B.F., Benarroch, E.E., Daube, J.R.,
Reason, T.J., & Sandok, B.A. (1994). Medical neurosciences: An
approach to anatomy, pathology, and physiology by systems and
levels. Boston: Little Brown.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hour lectures and one hour tutorial.
Assessment Case study assignment 40% (2000–2500 words);
Examination 40%; Clinical Journal 20% (1000–1500 words).
Students must pass each component of the assessment, including the
clinical journal in order to pass this subject.
HNO5001 ORTHOPAEDIC NURSING STUDIES 1
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The content includes: Principles and practice of
orthopaedics and orthopaedic nursing; advanced health assessment;
musculo-skeletal assessment; traction application and management;
POP and synthetic casting application and management;
pathophysiology and clinical assessment of musculo-skeletal
disorders which include traumatic disorders and non-traumatic
disorders such as: fractures, inflammatory diseases, degenerative
diseases, and complications; orthopaedic investigations; principles
and practice of immobilisation; principles of management and care
of individuals with post traumatic orthopaedic disorders; principles
of management and care of individuals with non-traumatic
orthopaedic disorders; concept, principles and aims of
rehabilitation, and the role of the nurse in rehabilitation
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
342
Required Reading Apley,A.G. & Solomon,L. (2000). Apley's
System of Orthopaedics and Fractures. Oxford: Butterworth-
Heinemann. Folick,M., Carini-Gracia,G. & Birmingham,J. (1994).
Traction: Assessment and Management. St Louis: Mosby. Hamer, S.
& Collinson, G. (ed). (1999). Achieving Evidence-Based Practice- A
handbook for practitioners. Edinburgh, Scotland: Bailliere Tindal.
Estee, M.E. (1998). Health Assessment & Physical Assessment.
Albany: Delamer.Magee, D. (1997). Orthopaedic Physical
Assessment. 3rd Ed. Philadelphia: Saunders. Maher,A.; Salmond,S.
& Pellino T. (1998). Orthopaedic Nursing 2nd Ed. Florida: W B
Saunders Co. Schoen D.C. (2000). Adult Orthopaedic Nursing.
Philadelphia: Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins. Tortora, G. &
Grabowski, S. R. (2000). Principles of Anatomy and Physiology. 9th
Edition. New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. ( CD.ROM included).
Recommended Reading Adam,J.C. (2000). Outline of Fractures.
(11th Ed). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Brinker, M. & Miller, M.
(1999). Fundamentals of Orthopaedics. Philadephia: W.B.
Saunders. Broughton, N. S.(ed). (1997). A Textbook of Paediatric
Orthopaedics. London: W.B. Saunders. Crowther, C. (1999).
Primary orthopaedic Care. St. Louis: Mosby. Dee, R., Hurst, L.C.,
Gruber, M.A. & Kottmeier, S.A. (1997). Principles of Orthopaedic
Practice. New York: McGraw-Hill. McRae, R. (1994). Practical
Fracture Treatment. (3rd Ed). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Ruiz,
E. & Cicero, J.J. (1995). Emergency Management of Skeletal
Injuries. St. Louis: Mosby. Yeoman, P.M. & Spengler, D.M. (1996).
Orthopaedic Practice. Oxford: Butterworth-Heinemann.
Subject Hours Thirty-nine hours for one semester.
Assessment Clinical project 60% (2500–3000 words);
Examination 30%; Clinical Journal 10% (1000 words). Students must
pass each component of the Assessment, including the clinical
journal, in order to pass this subject.
HNO5002 ORTHOPAEDIC NURSING STUDIES 2
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The content includes: ambulatory techniques and devices
and the role of physiotherapy; principles and functions of Orthoses,
and appropriate nursing assessment and intervention associated with
specific orthoses; management in orthopaedic nursing and planned
change in the health care system and its effects on orthopaedic
nursing care; critical examination and analysis of orthopaedic
nursing through fieldwork and current case studies; radiographic
studies; multi-disciplinary team approach and communication;
principles and methods of pain management in orthopaedic
nursing.; leadership in orthopaedic nursing; spinal cord injury;
paediatric disorders; oncological processes; and metabolic bone
diseases.
Required Reading Apley,A.G. & Solomon,L. (2000). Apley's
System of Orthopaedics and Fractures. Oxford: Butterworth-
Heinemann. Folick,M., Carini-Gracia,G. & Birmingham,J. (1994).
Traction: Assessment and Management. St Louis: Mosby. Hamer,S.
& Collinson, G. (ed). (1999). Achieving Evidence-Based Practice- A
handbook for practitioners. Edinburgh, Scotland: Bailliere Tindal.
Estee, M.E. (1998). Health Assessment & Physical Assessment.
Albany: Delamer. Magee, D. (1997). Orthopaedic Physical
Assessment. 3rd Ed. Philadelphia: Saunders. Maher,A.; Salmond,S.
& Pellino T. (1998). Orthopaedic Nursing 2nd Ed. Florida: W B
Saunders Co. Johnstone, M.J. (1999). Bioethics-a nursing
perspective. Syndney: Harcourt. Brace & Co. Schoen D.C. (2000).
Adult Orthopaedic Nursing. Philadelphia: Lippincott, Williams &
Wilkins. Tortora, G. & Grabowski, S. R. (2000). Principles of
Anatomy and Physiology. 9th Ed. New York: John Wiley & Sons,
Inc. (CD.ROM included).
Recommended Reading Adam,J.C. (2000). Outline of Fractures.
(11th Ed). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. Brinker, M. & Miller, M.
(1999). Fundamentals of Orthopaedics. Philadephia: W.B.
Saunders. Broughton, N. S.(ed). (1997). A Textbook of Paedictric
Orthopaedics. London: W.B. Saunders. Crowther, C. (1999).
Primary orthopaedic Care. St. Louis: Mosby. Dee,R., Hurst,L.C.,
Gruber,M.A. & Kottmeier,S.A. (1997). Principles of Orthopaedic
Practice. New York: McGraw-Hill. McRae,R. (1994). Practical
Fracture Treatment. (3rd Ed). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Yeoman,P.M. & Spengler, D.M. (1996). Orthopaedic Practice.
Oxford: Butterworth-Heinemann. Zejdlik,P.C. (1992). Management
of Spinal Cord Injury. 2nd Ed. Boston: Jones & Bartlett Pub.
Subject Hours Thirty-nine hours per semester.
Assessment Clinical Project 60 % (2500–3000 words);
Examination 30%; Clinical Journal 10% (1000 words). Students must
pass each component of the Assessment, including the clinical
journal, in order to pass this subject.
HNO5003 ORTHOPAEDIC NURSING STUDIES 3
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HNO5001 Orthopaedic Nursing Studies 1;
HNO5002 Orthopaedic Nursing Studies 2; or equivalent.
Content As there are a variety of role expectations of advanced
orthopaedic nurse practitioners, it is imperative that each student
determines the clinical learning required to achieve expertise in
clinical orthopaedic nursing. As each student's learning experience
at the time of entry to this subject is seen as unique and dynamic,
this unit recognises the need for self-determination of learning
modalities.
Therefore the content includes: the diversity of the clinical
environment in specialised orthopaedic nursing practice; role of the
advanced orthopaedic nurse practitioner: leader, manager,
educator, researcher, and collaborative consultant in the health care
team. Further, as per contract developed by the student in
collaboration with a lecturer, students are expected to spend their
clinical learning experience in a related area but outside their
current clinical practice, to further expand their clinical learning
experience to achieve expertise and skills as an advanced
practitioner in orthopaedic nursing.
Required Reading Castledine, G. & McGee, P. (1998).
Advanced Specialist Nursing Practice. Oxford: Blackwell Science.
Palmer, A., Burns, S. & Bulman, C. (1994). Reflective Practice in
Nursing- The growth of the Professional Practitioner. London:
Blackwell Science.
Recommended Reading Byers, S. R. (1997). The Executive
Nurse: Leaders for new health care transitions. Albany: Delmar Pub.
Girvin, J. (1998). Leadership and Nursing. London: Macmillan.
Hamer, S. & Collison, G. (1999). Achieving Evidence-Based
Practice. Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall. Hickey, J., Ouitmette, R. &
Venegoni, S. (1996). Advanced Practice Nursing: Changing Roles
and Clinical Applications. Philadelphia: Lippincott. Snyder, M. &
Mirr, M.P. (1995). Advanced Practice Nursing: A Guide to
Professional Development. New York: Springer Pub.
Subject Hours Seven hours comprising seminar and thirty-two
hours of clinical learning experience.
Assessment Contract with supervisor: Hurdle requirement
ungraded. Students are required to submit a written contract of the
clinical learning experience they wish to undertake before they set
out to achieve their contractual clinical learning. Clinical Project:
80% (3000–3500 words); Clinical Journal 20% (1000–1500
words).
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
343
HNP5001 PAEDIATRIC NURSING STUDIES 1
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Topics include: perspective of paediatric nursing; human
growth and development; advanced health assessment of the child
and family; principles and practice of paediatric health assessment
skills; pathophysiology and clinical assessment of the
child/adolescent with endocrine, neurological, musculo-skeletal,
respiratory, cardio-vascular, gastro-intestinal, renal, oncological and
plastic disorders; paediatric surgery; principles of paediatric nursing
research; impact of hospitalisation on the child and family; principles
of managing children and families with special needs.
Required Reading Ball, J.,& Bindler, R.(1998). Paediatric
Nursing: Caring for Children. Norwalk: Appleton & Lange. Bickley,
L.S., (1999). Bates’ Guide to Physical Examination and History
Taking(7th ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott. Olds, S., London,M., &
Ladewig, P. (2000). Maternal-Newborn Nursing (6th ed.). New
Jersey: Prentice Hall Health. Robinson, M. J., & Robertson, D.M.
(Ed). (1999). Practical Paediatrics (4th ed.). London: Churchill
Livingstone. Wong, D. (1998). Whaley & Wong’s Nursing Care of
Infants and Children (6th ed.). St Louis: Mosby Year Book Inc.
Recommended Reading Avery, M.E., & First, L. R.(1994).
Pediatric Medicine. Baltimore: Williams & Williams. Bowden, V, R.,
Dickey, S, B., & Greenberg, C, S.(1998). Children and their
Families: The Continuum of Care. Philadelphia: W.B.Saunders
Company. Campbell, A.G.M., & McIntosh, N.(1992). ForFar and
Aneil’s Textbook of Paediatrics (4th ed.). London: Churchill
Livingstone. Hamer, S., & Collinson, G.(1999). Achieving Evidence-
Based Practice: A Handbook for Practitioners. Edinburgh: Bailliere
Tindall/Royal College of Nursing. Hull, D., & Johnston, D.I. (1993).
Essential Paediatrics. New York: Churchill Livingstone. Kelly,
S.J.(1994). Paediatric Emergency Nursing(2nd ed.). Connecticut:
Appleton & Lange. Levene, M.I.(Ed). (1991). Jolly’s Diseases of
Children.(6th ed). Oxford: Blackwell Scientific Publications. Letts,
R.M.(1994). Management of Paediatric Fractures. New York:
Churchill Livingstone. McCance, K., & Huether, S,E.(1998).
Pathophysiology: The Biologic Basis for Disease in Adults and
Children(3rd ed.). Philadelphia: Mosby Year Book Inc. Johnstone,
M, J. (1999). Bioethics-a nursing perspective. Sydney: Harcourt
Brace & Co. Pillitteri, A. (1999). Maternal & Child Health Nursing
(3rd ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott. Skale, N. (1992). Manual of
Paediatric Nursing Procedures. Philadelphia: Lippincott. Vaughan-
Cole, B., Johnson, M., & Walker, B.(1998). Family Nursing Practice.
Philadelphia: W.B.Saunders Company.
Subject Hours Thirty-nine hours for one semester.
Assessment Clinical project 60% (2500–3000 words);
Examination 30%; Clinical Journal 10% (1000 words). Students must
pass each component of the assessment, including the clinical
journal, in order to pass this subject.
HNP5002 PAEDIATRIC NURSING STUDIES 2
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Further topics include: principles of teaching and learning;
management in paediatric nursing; and effects on paediatric nursing
care; critical examination and analysis of paediatric nursing practice
through fieldwork and current case studies; coping mechanism and
strategies in the management of distress parents, psychosocial and
cultural aspects; ethical and legal responsibility; communication and
pain management in paediatric nursing.
Required Reading Ball, J.,& Bindler, R.(1998). Pediatric Nursing:
Caring for Children. Norwalk: Appleton & Lange. Bickley, L.S.,
(1999). Bates’ Guide to Physical Examination and History Taking(7th
ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott. Olds, S., London,M., & Ladewig, P.
(2000). Maternal-Newborn Nursing (6th ed.). New Jersey: Prentice
Hall Health. Robinson, M. J., & Robertson, D.M. (Ed). (1999).
Practical Paediatrics (4th ed.). London: Churchill Livingstone. Wong,
D. (1998). Whaley & Wong’s Nursing Care of Infants and Children
(6th ed.). St Louis: Mosby Year Book Inc.
Recommended Reading Avery, M.E., & First, L. R.(1994).
Pediatric Medicine. Baltimore: Williams & Williams. Bowden, V, R.,
Dickey, S, B., & Greenberg, C, S.(1998). Children and their
Families: The Continuum of Care. Philadelphia: W.B.Saunders
Company. Hamer, S., & Collinson, G.(1999). Achieving Evidence-
Based Practice: A Handbook for Practitioners. Edinburgh: Bailliere
Tindall/Royal College of Nursing. Levene, M.I.(Ed). (1991). Jolly’s
Diseases of Children.(6th ed.). Oxford: Blackwell Scientific
Publications. Letts, R.M.(1994). Management of Paediatric Fractures.
New York: Churchill Livingstone. Kelly, S.J.(1994). Paediatric
Emergency Nursing(2nd ed.). Connecticut: Appleton & Lange.
McCance, K., & Huether, S,E.(1998). Pathophysiology: The Biologic
Basis for Disease in Adults and Children(3rd ed.). Philadelphia:
Mosby Year Book Inc. Johnstone, M, J. (1999). Bioethics-a nursing
perspective. Sydney: Harcourt Brace & Co. Olds, S., London,M., &
Ladewig, P. (2000). Maternal-Newborn Nursing (6th ed.). New
Jersey: Prentice Hall Health. Pillitteri, A. (1999). Maternal & Child
Health Nursing (3rd ed). Philadelphia: Lippincott. Skale, N. (1992).
Manual of Paediatric Nursing Procedures. Philadelphia: Lippincott.
Vaughan-Cole, B., Johnson, M., & Walker, B.(1998). Family
Nursing Practice. Philadelphia: W.B.Saunders Company. Wong, D.
(1998). Whaley & Wong’s Nursing Care of Infants and Children(6th
ed.). St Louis: Mosby Year Book Inc.
Subject Hours Thirty-nine hours for one semester.
Assessment Clinical project 60% (2500–3000 words);
Examination 30%; Clinical Journal 10% (1000 words). Students must
pass each component of the assessment, including the clinical
journal, in order to pass this subject.
HNP5003 PAEDIATRIC NURSING STUDIES 3
Campus St Albans, Off Campus
Prerequisite(s) HNP5001 Paediatric Nursing Studies 1;
HNP5002 Paediatric Nursing Studies 2: or equivalent.
Content As there are a variety of role expectations of advanced
paediatric nurse practitioners, it is imperative that each student
determines the clinical learning required to achieve expertise in
clinical paediatric nursing. As each student’s learning experience at
the time of entry to this subject is seen as unique and dynamic, this
unit recognises the need for self-determination of learning modalities.
Therefore the content includes: the diversity of the clinical
environment in specialised paediatric nursing practice; role of the
advanced paediatric nurse practitioner: leader, manager, educator,
researcher, and collaborative consultant in the health care team.
Further, as per contact developed by the student in collaboration
with a lecturer, students are expected to spend their clinical learning
experience in a related area but outside their current clinical
practice, to further expand their clinical learning experience to
achieve expertise and skills as an advanced practitioner in
paediatric nursing.
Required Reading Castledine, G, and McGee, P. (1998).
Advanced Specialist Nursing Practice. Oxford: Blackwell Science.
Palmer, A., Burns, S, and Bulman, C.1(994). Reflective Practice in
Nursing-The growth of the Professional Practitioner. London:
Blackwell Science.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
344
Recommended Reading Byers, S.R. (1997). The Executive
Nurse: Leaders for new health care transitions. Albany: Delmar
Publisher.
Girvin, J.(1998). Leadership and Nursing. London: Macmillan.
Hamer, S. and Collison, G. (1999). Achieving Evidence-Based
Practice. Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall. Hickey, J., Ouitmette, R. and
Venegoni, S. (1996). Advanced Practice Nursing: Changing Roles
and Clinical Applications. Philadelphia: Lippincott. Snyder, M. and
Mirr, M.P. (1995). Advanced Practice Nursing: A Guide to
Professional Development. New York: Springer Publisher.
Subject Hours Seven hours of seminar work and 32 hours clinical
learning experience.
Assessment Contract with supervisor: Hurdle requirement
ungraded. Students are required to submit a written contract of the
clinical learning experience they wish to undertake before they set
out to achieve their contractual clinical learning. Clinical Project:
80% (3000–3500 words); Clinical Journal 20% (1500–2000
words).
HNR0001 INTRODUCTION TO RESEARCH DESIGN AND METHODS
Campus St Albans, Footscray Park, Flinders Lane, Distance
Education
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The content of this subject will provide an introduction to
research methods and design for the social sciences. This will
include a review of the scientific methods and ways of knowing,
quantitative and qualitative paradigms, questionnaire design and
evaluation, validity and reliability of research designs, ethical issues
and evaluation of the research design of published papers. The
subject will also include an introduction to sampling and methods of
data collection and analysis for quantitative and qualitative research.
The study of quantitative methods will focus on experimental,
correlational and survey designs and of the corresponding methods
of data analyses including descriptive and inferential statistics,
correlation and regression and hypothesis testing. The qualitative
research designs to be studied in some detail will be drawn from
case study, ethnography, grounded theory, phenomenology,
historical research, philosophical research and action research. The
role of the researcher in collecting qualitative data will be discussed
along with methods of analysing qualitative data.
Required Reading Aron, A & Aron, E. (1999) Statistics for
psychology (2nd ed). New Jersy: Prentice Hall. Baumgartner, T. &
Strong, C. (2001). Conducting and reading research in health and
human performance. Boston, MA: WCB/McGaw Hill. Burns, N. &
Groves, S. (2001). The practice of nursing research: conduct,
critique and utilisation (4th ed). Sydney: Saunders. Maxwell, J.A.
(1996). Qualitative research design. Sage: Thousand Oaks.
Streubert, H.J. & Carpenter, D.R. (1999). Qualitative research in
nursing: Advancing the humanistic imperative (2nd ed) Philadelphia:
Lippincott. National Health and Medical research Council. (1999).
National statement on ethical conduct in research involving humans.
Canberra: Commonwealth Government. Victoria University. (2000)
Handbook of candidature research proposals. Victoria University.
Wiersma, W. (2000) Research methods in education (7th ed)
Needham Heights, MA: Allyn and Bacon.
Subject Hours Two hour seminar and one hour tutorial per week
for one semester.
Assessment A research proposal, or approved assignments
related to research literature and processes in professional practice
(3000 words for Graduate Diploma students; 5000 words for
Masters students) 100%.
HNS5010 THEORIES OF ADDICTION
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject considers a range of traditional and non
traditional theories of substance use, dependence and addiction.
Definitional, physiological, pharmacological, psychological and
social perspectives are examined. A variety of interventions and
treatments will be considered in the context of the range of theories
of substance use, dependence and addiction.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Hamilton, M., Kellehear, A. and
Rumbold, G. (1998). Drug use in Australia. Melbourne: Oxford
University Press. Thombs, D. (1999). Introduction to Addictive
Behaviours (2nd Edn.). New York: Guilford Press. Doweiko, H.
(1999). Concepts of Chemical Dependency (4th Edn.). Melbourne:
Brooks/Cole. Clarke, J. C. and Saunders, J. B. (1988). Alcoholism
and Problem Drinking, Theories and Treatment. Sydney: Pergamon
Press.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment One written assignment of 2,500 words (60%), and
one presentation (40%)
HNS5020 TREATMENT IN SUBSTANCE ABUSE
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject considers the approaches to treatment
available and the setting in which treatment occurs for the range of
addictions and substance abuse problems prevalent in Australia.
Traditional and non traditional medical/pharmacological
interventions will be examined alongside the range of psychological,
social and spiritual interventions currently in place. This subject also
examines the legal and ethical context in which substance use and
treatment occurs.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Doweiko, H. E. 1999 Concepts of
Chemical Dependency, (4th edn.) Brookes/Cole Pub. Pacific Grove.
Hamilton, M., Kellehear, A., & Rumbold, G. (eds.) 1998 Drug Use
in Australia: A Harm Minimisation Approach, Oxford University
Press, Melbourne. Hulse, G. K., & Basso, M. R. 1999 Reassessing
Naltrexone Maintenance as a Treatment for Illict Heroin Users, Drug
and Alcohol Review, 18[3]: 263-269. Hulse, G. K., & Basso, M. R.
2000 The Association between Compliance and Daily Supervision,
Drug and Alcohol Review, 19[1]: 41-48. Kosten, T.R. 1997
Conclusions and Future Directions in Treatment Matching. In S. M.
Stine, & T. R. Kosten (eds.) New Treatment for Opiate Dependence,
Guilford Press, New York. van den Boogert, K. and Davidoff, N
(eds.) 1999, Heroin Crisis: Key Commentators Discuss the Issues and
Debate Solutions to Herion Abuse in Australia, Bookman Press,
Melbourne.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment One written assignment of 2,500 words, 60%; class
presentation, 40%.
HNS5030 HEALTH PROMOTION/PREVENTION IN SUBSTANCE ABUSE
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject considers basic principles and practices in
health promotion and prevention related to substance abuse. Current
models related to health promotion and prevention principles related
to harm minimisation will be considered with emphasis on the impact
of substance use on individuals, families and communities. Each
student will contract to develop and present a health
promotion/prevention program related to substance abuse.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
345
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Ely,K. Dilemmas, decisions and
directions in drug eduction. A review of drug education literature.
Drug education support for schools. Labonte, R.Dr., 1997, Power,
Participation and Partnership for Health Promotion. Victorian Health
Promotion Foundation, Carlton. Plant, M (ed),Single, E (ed),
Stockwell,T (ed) 1997. Alcohol: Minimising the harm: what works?
London: Free Association Press. Burrows, C 1994. Clued up too-
Helping young people with drug issue. South Melb, Australian Drug
Foundation.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment One written assignment of 2,500 words, 60%;
presentation of a health education/patient education session, 40%.
HNS5040 THERAPEUTIC INTERVENTIONS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject considers the skills and knowledge related to
therapeutic communication with clients who have drug and alcohol
problems. Counselling models related to dealing clients with
substance abuse problems will be addressed, with specific focus on
Motivational Interviewing. This subject has an emphasis on practical
competencies for the student.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer
Recommended Reading Kennedy,E and Charles, C. 1992. On
Becoming a Counselor. A basic guide for non professional
counselors. Crossroad, New York. Lockley, P. 1999. Counselling
heroin and other drug users. 1999. Free Association books, London.
Benshoff,J. and Janikowski, T. 2000. The Rehabilitation Model of
Substance Abuse Counselling. Brooks/Cole. Australia. Miller, W.R.
and Rollnick, S. 1991, Motivational Interviewing, The Guilford Press,
New York. Prochaska, J., Di Clemente, C. and Norcross, J. 1992, In
Search of How People Change, Applications to Addictive
Behaviours, American Psychologist, September, pp. 1102-1114.
Wanigaratne, S., Wallace, W., Pullin, J., Keaney, F. and Farmer, R.
1990, Relapse Prevention for Addictive Behaviours. A Manual for
Therapists, Blackwell Science, London.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment 2500 word assignment, 60%; presentation based on
core skills, 40%.
HNU5001 HEALTH AND DEVELOPMENT OF THE YOUNG FAMILY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The subject is developed within a wholistic model of health
and emphasises the connections between all aspects of human
experience. Semester One: Principles and application of primary
health. The role of the Maternal and Child Health Nurse in a
culturally diverse society; development and maintenance of the
therapeutic relationship; working in a multidisciplinary team; utilising
the principles of community development. The well woman
(pregnancy, post partum and early parenting years). Health
maintenance; role transition. Determinants and processes of normal
child physiological growth and development 0-6 years. Assessment
skills and processes with children 0-6 years; screening tools; critical
observation; documentation; referrals. Physiological growth and
developmental deviations, delays and dysfunctions. Promotion and
maintenance of health and well being of children and their families.
Nutritional requirements of the child 0-6 years; breast feeding;
formula feeding; balanced and appropriate diet. Immunisation
processes. Semester Two: Theory and application of key social and
behavioural models, including Erikson, Piaget, Freud, Bandura,
Brazelton, Chess and Birch, Ainsworth, Caldwell etc. Separation and
attachment theory. Determinants and processes of normal child
psychosocial, and cognitive growth and development 0-6 years.
Developmental deviations, delays and dysfunctions. Family
dynamics; assessment and support. Parenting skills. Sexuality.
Interventions for families and groups with special needs, including
NESB, single parents; children with developmental delays and/or
disability; post partum depression; family dysfunction.
Required Reading Broom, B. Ingalls, A. Novak, J. Salerno, M.
(1999) Maternal and Child Nursing, 9th edn. Saint Loiuis, MO.:
Mosby. Commonwealth Department of Health and Aged Care
(2001) Immunisation Myths and Realities: Responding to Arguments
Against Immunisation- A Guide For Providers, 3rd Edn. Canberra:
Author. Green, M. Palfrey, J. (2000) Bright Futures: Guidelines for
Health Supervision of Infants, Children and Adolescence. Arlington,
VA.: National Center for Education in Maternal and Child Health.
Health and Community Services (2000) Maternal and Child Health
Program Resource Guide 2000-2001. Melbourne: Victorian
Government Department of Human Services. Maternal and Child
Health Nurses, Special Interest Group, Australian Nursing
Federation (Victorian Branch). (1999). Standards of Professional
Practice for Maternal and Child Health Nurses. Melbourne: Allegro
Press. Victorian Government. (1993) Children and Young Person’s
(Further Amendment) Act 1993. Wyly, M. (1997). Infant
Assessment. Boulder, CO. Westview Press.
Recommended Reading Chicchetti, D. Rappaport, J. Sandler, I.
Weissberg, R. (2000) The promotion of Wellness in Children and
Adolescents. Washington, DC: Child Welfare League. Craig, W.
(2000) Childhood Social Development. Malden, Mass.: Blackwell.
Goldberg, S. (2000) Attachment and Development. London: Arnold.
Kagan, R. (1996) Turmoil to Turning Points: Building Hope for
Children in Crisis Placements. London: W W Norton. McCain, M.
and Mustard, J. (1999) Reversing the Real Brain Drain: Early Years
Study. Final Report. Toronto: Children’s Secretriat, Publications
Ontario. Murray Thomas, R. (2000) Comparing Theories of Child
Development, 5th edn. Belmont, Ca.: Wadsworth. Perry, B. (1998)
Maltreated Children: Experience, Brain Development and the Next
Generation. London: W W Norton. Placksin, S. (2000) Mothering
the New Mother: Women’s Feelings and Needs After Childbirth: A
Support and Resource Guide, 2nd edn. New York: Newmarket.
Riordan, J. (1999) Breastfeeding and Human Lactation, 2nd edn.
Boston: Jones and Bartlett. Thureen, P. Deacon, J. O’Neill, P.
Hernandez, J. (1999) Assessment and Care of the Well Newborn.
Sydney, W.B. Saunders. Wright, L. Leahey, M. (1999) Nurses and
Families: A Guide to Family Assessment and Interventio, 3rd. edn.
Philadelphia: Davis, F. A. Co.
Subject Hours Semester One: The equivalent of 39 hours,
comprising lectures, tutorials, workshops and seminars plus 100
hours of professional practice fieldwork. Semester Two: The
equivalent of 39 hours, comprising lectures, tutorials, workshops and
seminars plus 100 hours of professional practice fieldwork.
Assessment Semester One: 1 x two hour examination (60%);
assignment of 3000 words (40%); professional practice. Fieldwork
report hurdle requirement. Semester Two: 1 x two hour examination
(60%); assignment of 3000 words (40%); professional practice.
Fieldwork report hurdle requirement.
HNU5002 HEALTH AND DEVELOPMENT IN CHILDHOOD AND
ADOLESCENCE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Semester One: The subject is developed within a holistic
model of health and emphasises the connections between all aspects
of human experience. Principles and application of primary health
care and community development within the school and community.
The role of the Public Health Nurse in a culturally diverse society.
Development and maintenance of the therapeutic relationship,
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
346
including issues related to the multidisciplinary team. The well young
person: determinants and processes of normal psychosocial and
physiological growth and development from six to eighteen years.
assessment skills and processes with young people, including
screening tools, critical observation, documentation and referrals.
Immunisation issues within the school and wider community.
Semester Two: Role transition to adolescence and adulthood:
relationships; individuation. Sexualities. Promotion and maintenance
of health and well being of young people and their families in a
range of community settings, including rural locations. Mental health
issues. Developmental deviations, delays and dysfunctions. Social
issues of concern, including child abuse, substance abuse, early
school leavers, youth unemployment. Building healthy school
communities; ethical, legal and political issues within the school
community. Leadership, roles and relationships within a
multidisciplinary team.
Required Reading Department of Human Services. (1998) Health
of Young Victorians. Melbourne: Public Health and Development,
Victorian Government. Junn, E. Boyatzis, C. (2000) Child Growth
and Development. Maidenhead, Berks.: McGraw-Hill. McCain, M.
and Mustard, J. (1999) Reversing the Real Brain Drain: Early Years
Study. Final Report. Toronto: Children’s Secretariat, Publications
Ontario. World Health Organisation. (1997) Promoting Health
Through Schools: Report of a WHO Expert Committee on
Comprehensive School Health Education and Promotion. Geneva:
WHO. Wright, L. and Leahey, M. (1999) Nurses and Families: A
Guide to Family Assessment and Intervention, 3rd edn. Philadelphia:
Davis, F. A. Co. Victorian Government. (1993) Children and Young
Person’s (Further Amendment) Act 1993.
Recommended Reading Chicchetti, D. Rappaport, J. Sandler, I.
and Weissberg, R. (2000) The Promotion of Wellness in Children
and Adolescents. Washington, DC: Child Welfare League. Cobb,
N. (2000) Adolescence, Continuity, Changes and Diversity.
Mayfield Publishing Co. Court, J. (1995) You and your Teenager.
Pymble, NSW.: Angus and Robertson. Craig, W. (2000) Childhood
Social Development. Malden, Mass.: Blackwell. Dryfoos, J. (2000)
Safe Passage: Making It Through Adolescence in a Risky Society:
What Parents, Schools and Communities Can Do. Oxford: Oxford
University Press. Fuller, A. (2000) Raising Real People: A Guide for
Parents of Teenagers. Camberwell, Vic.: ACER. Green, M. Palfrey, J.
(2000) Bright Futures: Guidelines for Health Supervision of Infants,
Children and Adolescence. Arlington, VA.: National Center for
Education in Maternal and Child Health. Howard, J. (1998) Bringing
Up Boys: A Parenting Manual for Sole Mothers Raising Sons.
Camberwell, Vic.: ACER. Lew, A. (1996) A Parent’s Guide to
Understanding and Motivating Children. Newton Center, MA.:
Connexions Press. Micheletto, G. (1992) Sexuality in Context:
Integrated Units for Grades 4-6. Mount Waverley: Dellastra. Murray
Thomas, R. (2000) Comparing Theories of Child Development.
Belmont, Ca.: Wadsworth. Pillitteri, A. (1999) Child Health Nursing:
Care of the Child and the Family. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams
& Wilkins. Rigby, K. (1996) Bullying in Schools and What to Do
about It. Camberwell: ACER.
Subject Hours Semester One: The equivalent of 39 hours,
comprising lectures, tutorials, workshops and seminars plus 100
hours or the equivalent of one day per week for 13 weeks
mandatory professional practice fieldwork. Semester Two: The
equivalent of 39 hours, comprising lectures, tutorials, workshops and
seminars plus 100 hours or the equivalent of one day per week for
13 weeks mandatory professional practice fieldwork.
Assessment Semester One: 1 x two hour examination (60%);
assignment of 3000 words (40%); professional practice. Fieldwork
report hurdle requirement. Semester Two: 1 x two hour examination
(60%); assignment of 3000 words (40%); professional practice.
Fieldwork report hurdle requirement.
HNU5003 PSYCHOSOCIAL ISSUES OF THE FAMILY
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject takes a lifespan perspective of family
development and considers intergenerational and cross-cultural
issues as these impact on the health and well being of individual
family members including: Foundations of family development and
models of assessment; Parent-child interactions, positive parenting to
neglect and maltreatment; Making and breaking partnerships;
Making families – biopsychosocial and cultural influences; Stress in
families and in parenting roles and intergenerational issues; Mental
health/illness in families; Families coping with disabilities; Family
relationships and infants and preschoolers; Family relationships with
school-aged and adolescent children; Family lifestyles combining
parenthood and employment.
Required Reading Sarantakos, S. (1996) Modern Families: an
Australian text. Macmillan. Weeks, W & Wilson, J. (1995) Issues
Facing Australian Families. Longman Australia.
Recommended Reading Haggerty, R. J.; Sherrod, L. R.;
Garmezy, N. & Rutter, M. (1995) Stress, Risk and Resilience in
Children and Adolescents. Longman Australia. Gotlib, Ian &
Wheaton, Blair (Eds.) Stress and Adversity Over the Life Course:
Trajectories and Turning Points. NHMRC (1997). Depression in
Young People. Clinical Practice Guidelines. Neurological, Psychiatric
and Developmental Disorders. Institute of Medicine. Pryor, J. &
Rodgers B. (2001). Children in Changing Families: life after parental
separation. Blackwell. Women's Mental Health: An Evidence Based
Review. World Health Org, Geneva. URLs: www.aifs.org.au
www.aihw.org.au
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
one two-hour structured teaching-learning session and one hour
workshop/group discussion/guided learning.
Assessment Class presentation (35%); written assignment (65%).
HNU5004 HEALTH PROMOTION AND EDUCATION
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The subject content includes an analysis of health
promotion knowledge; the relevance of theory to practice; the
development of health promotion in Australia; the application of
models of health promotion to the development of health promotion
interventions; exploration of the settings approach to health
promotion in relation to own area of nursing practice; planning and
evaluation in health promotion.
Required Reading Labonte, R. (1997). Power, Participation and
Partnerships for Health Promotion. Melbourne: VicHealth.
Recommended Reading Ewles, L. & Simnett, I. (1999).
Promoting Health: A practical guide, 4th edn. Edinburgh: Bailliere-
Tindall. Hawe, P., Degeling, D. & Hall, J. (2000). Evaluating Health
Promotion: A Health Workers Guide. Artarmon: MacLennan & Petty.
King, L., Hawe, P., & Wise, M. (1996). From Research Into Practice
in Health Promotion: a review of the literature on dissemination.
Australia: Sydney University Press. Nutbeam, D. & Harris, E. Theory
in a Nutshell: A Guide to Health Promotion Theory. O’Connor, M. &
Parker, E. (1995). Health Promotion: Principles and Practice in the
Australian Context. St Leonards: Allen & Unwin. Rollnick, S., Mason,
P., Butler, P. (2000). Health Behaviour Change. Edinburgh: Churchill
Livingstone. Waddell, C. & Petersen, A. (Eds) (1996). Just Health:
Inequality in Illness, Care & Prevention. Melbourne: Churchill
Livingstone. Wass, A. (2000). Promoting Health: The primary health
care approach, 2nd edn. Sydney: Harcourt Saunders.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
347
Websites Australian Centre for Health Promotion
www.achp.health.usyd.edu.au/index.html; Health Promotion Journal
of Australia www.hpja@vichealth.vic.gov.au; Internet Journal of
Health Promotion iuhpemel@worldnet.fr; Monash Health Promotion
Unit www.med.monash.edu.au/general-practice/health promotion.
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
one two hour lecture and one hour tutorial/workshop/group
discussion.
Assessment Development of a Health Education Package relevant
to own area of nursing practice (40%); class presentation (15%);
written assignment: (45%).
HNU5005 ISSUES OF PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) HNU5001 Health and Development of the Young
Family; HNU5002 Health and Development in Childhood and
Adolescence; or equivalent.
Content The focus of this subject is the development of the requisite
skills essential for leadership in independent professional practice.
Emphasis will be placed on the expansion of professional confidence
through skill and knowledge development in those areas requiring
critical analysis and independent decision making. content will
include an exploration of ethical, legal and political issues in the
field; the nurse as change agent; interprofessional roles and
relationships; outreach, networking and case management; the
development (including needs analysis, implementation and
evaluation) of programs for individuals, families and groups with
special needs; the role of advocacy; the development and
application of reports and grants; quality assurance.
Recommended Reading Fatout, M. Rose, S. (1995) Task
Groups in the Social Services. Thousand Oaks: Sage. Forrester, K.
Griffiths, D. (2001) Essentials of Law for Health Professionals.
Sydney: Harcourt. Hamer, S. Collinson, G. (1999) Evidence-Based
Practice: A Handbook for Practitioners. Sydney: Balliere Tindall in
association with Royal College of Nursing. Johnstone, M. (1999)
Reporting Child Abuse: Ethical Issues for the Nursing Profession and
Regulating Authorities. A Report for the Nurses Board of Victoria.
Melbourne: RMIT University. Mackey, R. Edgecombe, G. (1997)
Quality improvement: A Distance Education Package for Maternal
and Child Health Nurses. Melbourne: Department of Human
Services. National Health and Medical Research Council. (1993)
Review of Child Health Surveillance and Screening. Canberra:
Australian Government Publishing Service. Siemen, D. (1999)
Competition, Consumer Choice and Effective Provision of Human
Services; Comments for the People Together Hearings on
Competitive Tendering of Human Services. Fitzroy, Vic: Brotherhood
of St Laurence. Snyder, M. Mirr, M. (1995) Advanced Nursing
Practice: A Guide to Professional Development. New York: Springer
Publishing Co.
Subject Hours Six two hour lectures and one four hour round table
seminar.
Assessment Development and submission of a proposal of 3000
words (graded). Participation in a round table seminar (hurdle
requirement).
HNU5006 PUBLIC HEALTH: POLICY AND PRACTICE
Campus St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The content of the subject includes an exploration of the
meaning of health to lay and professional people and its relevance
to public health; the history of public health policy and practice to
the present day `new public health’ movement; the development of
public health in Australia and related political influences; an
exploration of the ethical issues relevant to public health;
globalisation in public health.
Required Reading Baum, F. (1998). The New Public Health: An
Australian Perspective. Melbourne: Oxford University Press.
Recommended Reading Beaglehole, R. & Bonita, R. (1997).
Public Health at the Crossroads. Cambridge: Cambridge University
Press. Gardner, H. (Ed). (1997). Health Policy in Australia.
Melbourne: Oxford University Press. Gillies, P. (1997). Social
Capital: recognizing the value of society. Health Lines: 15: 17.
Lawson, J. (2000). Public Health In Australia: An Introduction.
Sydney. McGraw-Hill. Legge, D., Wilson, G., et al (1996). Policies
for a Healthy Australia. Canberra: Commonwealth Department of
Human Services and Health. National Public Health Partnership
(1997). Public Health in Australia. Melbourne: National Public
Health Partnership. Palmer, G. & Short, S. (2000). Health Care &
Public Policy: An Australian Analysis, 3rd edn. Melbourne:
Macmillan Publishers. Petersen, A. (1998). The New Genetics and
the Politics of Public Health.Critical Public Health, 8(1), 59-72. Public
Health Association of Australia (1997). Policy Statements 1998.
Canberra: Public Health Association of Australia. Socio-economic
Determinants of Health: towards a national research program and a
policy and intervention agenda. (1999) QUT. The Role of Local
Government in Public Health. Consultation Paper. National Public
Health Partnership. Nov 2000.
Websites Centre for Development and Innovation in Health
www.cdih.org.au/; National Public Health Partnership
hna.ffh.vic.gov.au/npphp/; Public Health Association of Australia
Inc. www.pha.org.au/; Public Health Nursing Blackwell Science
Electronic Format www-
au.ebsco.com/online/direct.asp?JournallD=103596; World Health
Organisation www.who.ch/; VicHealth www.vichealth.vic.gov.au;
WWW VL Public Health: Health Promotion
www.1db.org/vl/top/top-hpr.htm
Subject Hours Three hours per week for one semester comprising
one two hour lecture and one hour tutorial/workshop/group
discussion.
Assessment Presentation (40%); written assignment exploring a
relevant Public Health issue (60%).
HPR8200 RESEARCH THESIS (SCIENCE BASED) (FULL-TIME)
Campus City Flinders, Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to a Masters by Research or
Doctor of Philosophy program.
Content This subject, the aim of which is to enable students to
competently research an area of study utilising knowledge and skills
gained in previous studies, consists of a project carried out by
students on an individual basis. The project is expected to be an
investigation of an approved topic, followed by the submission of a
suitably formatted thesis or performance in which the topic is
introduced and formulated; the investigation described in detail;
results and conclusions from the study elaborated; and an extended
discussion presented. Students may be required to undertake some
lecture courses, as specified at the time of commencement.
Required Reading To be advised by supervisor.
Subject Hours Independent research in addition to regular
meetings with the student supervisors.
Assessment The thesis will normally be assessed by at least two
expert examiners from an appropriate area of expertise.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
348
HPR8210 RESEARCH THESIS (SCIENCE BASED) (PART-TIME)
Campus City Flinders, Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to a Masters by Research or
Doctor of Philosophy program.
Content This subject, the aim of which is to enable students to
competently research an area of study utilising knowledge and skills
gained in previous studies, consists of a project carried out by
students on an individual basis. The project is expected to be an
investigation of an approved topic, followed by the submission of a
suitably formatted thesis or performance in which the topic is
introduced and formulated; the investigation described in detail;
results and conclusions from the study elaborated; and an extended
discussion presented. Students may be required to undertake some
lecture courses, as specified at the time of commencement.
Required Reading To be advised by supervisor.
Subject Hours Independent research in addition to regular
meetings with the student supervisors.
Assessment The thesis will normally be assessed by at least two
expert examiners from an appropriate area of expertise.
JRM6001 HDL AND HIGH LEVEL SYNTHESIS
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Completed Digital Systems at undergraduate level
or equivalent.
Content Hardware modelling and design flow, Features
requirements of Hardware Languages (structural and behavioural),
Abstract Models, Compilation and Optimisation Techniques.
Hardware Description Language VHDL and/or Verilog. Architectural
– Level Synthesis and Optimisation Modelling, the Fundamental
architectural synthesis problems, Area and performance estimation,
Data path and Control Unit Synthesis, Synthesis of Pipelined Circuits.
Synthesis Techniques, Logic synthesis and optimisation, FPGAs
synthesis, folding and partitioning, Multi-level logic synthesis
techniques; Structured layout styles, Local and global
transformations. State machine synthesis techniques. High level
synthesis techniques: Strategies for high level synthesis, Scheduling
and allocation operations. High-level optimisations. Realisation using
FPGAs and CPLDs. Coding standards. Industry Standard EDA Tools.
Required Reading Chang, K.C., 1999, Digital Systems Design
with VHDL and Synthesis, IEEE. Appropriate IEEE/IEE Journal Papers.
Recommended Reading Dewey, A.M., 1996, Analysis and
Design of Digital Systems with VHDL, PWS Kent. Jerraya, A.A.,
Ding, H. and Kission, P., 1996, Behavioural Synthesis and
Component Reuse with VHDL, Kluwer.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week lectures and two hours per week of laboratory
exercises and project.
Assessment Assignment and laboratory exercises, 20%; project,
50%; and final examination, 30%.
JRM6005 EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Completed Microprocessor Systems at
undergraduate level or equivalent.
Content Overview of embedded systems. Embedded system design
cycle and system modelling. Embedded system hardware and
software. Real-time embedded system. Embedded system
specification and verification. Hardware/software co-design,
partitioning and tradeoffs. Embedded development tools. Analysis
and design methods using graphical notations eg. UML,
implementation considerations, testing strategies and construction of
test cases, software engineering environments and CASE tools.
Embedded system design and verification.
Required Reading Baron, C., Geffroy, J. and Motet, G., 1997,
Embedded System Applications, Kluwer. Appropriate IEEE/IEE
Journal papers.
Recommended Reading Short, K., 1996, Embedded System
Design, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week lectures and two hours per week of laboratory
exercises and project.
Assessment Assignment and laboratory exercises, 30%; project,
40%; and final examination, 30%.
JRM6006 EMERGING TOPICS IN IC DESIGN
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content New technologies such as: Silicon carbide high-power
devices, Quantum based devices, quantum wells and quantum dots
Nanometer MOSFETSs, Wide bandgap materials and devices,
Plasma-wave electronics, Ferroelectric devices. Overview of new
process technologies. Deep sub-micron technology and noise. Ultra-
high-speed devices, including microwave and optical devices. New
Systems-Level Architectures, such as: Nanowire arrays,
Neuromorphic architectures, Reconfigurable architectures, Wafer-
scale systems, Memory systems. New EDA tools and future
technology projections. EMC: regulations, measurement and testing,
Design issues related to EMC.
Required Reading Dimitrijev, S., 2000, Understanding
Semiconductor Devices, Oxford University Press. Appropriate Journal
Papers.
Recommended Reading Nebel, W. and Mermet, J., 1998, Low
Power Design in Deep Submicron Electronics, Kluwer. I.E.(Aust),
1999, Electromagnetic Compatibility, Institute of Electrical Engineers.
Timp, G.L., 1998, Nanotechnology, Springer Verlag.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week lectures and two hours per week of workshops
and seminars.
Assessment Assignments, 30%; seminars, 40%; and research
project, 30%.
JRM6010 INTRODUCTION TO MICROSYSTEM TECHNOLOGY
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content MOS and MEMS processes. Bulk and surface silicon
micromachining. LIGA techniques. Analog and digital interfacing
circuits and sensors. EDA tools for MEM design and implementation.
MEMS device modelling. Packaging issues. Replication processes.
Hybrid design methodology and techniques.
Required Reading Maluf, N., 2000, An Introduction to
Microelectromechanical Systems Engineering, Artech. Appropriate
Journal Papers.
Recommended Reading Trimmer, W., 1997, Classics in
Micromechanics and Mems, IEEE. Gardner, J., 2000, Microsensors
Mems and Smart Devices : Technology Applications and Devices,
John Wiley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week lectures and two hours per week of laboratory
exercises.
Assessment Assignments, 20%; laboratory exercises, 30%;
project, 30 and final examination, 20%.
JRM6011 INTRODUCTION TO SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE FABRICATION
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Fundamental principles of fabrication processes, physical
and chemical models for crystal growth, oxidisation, ion
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
349
implantation, etching, deposition, lithography and metallisation.
Emphasis is on practical aspects of silicon device fabrication,
including wafer cleaning, photolithography, etching, oxidation,
diffusion, ion implantation, chemical vapour deposition, physical
sputtering and wafer testing. Imperfections in semiconductors, crystal
growth, solid solubility, alloying and diffusion, ion implantation,
oxide masking, and epitaxy. Practical and fundamental limits to the
evolution of the technology of MOS and bipolar devices. How are
integrated circuits fabricated and what future changes are likely? The
implications for device performance caused by material properties
and fabrication techniques. Fabrication techniques for bipolar and
MOS-devices, and the electrical performance of devices based on
these techniques. Comparison of fabrication technologies for silicon
and gallium arsenide devices. Processes and fabrication equipment
to be studied will include oxidation/diffusion, CVD reactors,
photolithography, plasma etching, vacuum evaporator, ion
implantation, etc. Introduction to computer modelling of processing
steps such as etching., lithography, diffusion, implantation (eg
SUPREME).
Required Reading Levinshtein, M. and Shur, M., 1997,
Semiconductor Technology: Processing ad Novel Fabrication
Techniques, John Wiley. Appropriate Journal Papers.
Recommended Reading Rimini, E., 1995, Ion Implementation:
Basics to Device Fabrication, Kluwer. Cambell, S.A., 1996, The
Science and Engineering of Microelectronic Fabrication, Oxford Uni.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week lectures and two hours per week of laboratory
exercises.
Assessment Assignments, 20%; laboratory exercises, 30%; and
final examination, 50%.
JRM6012 SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE PHYSICS
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Fundamentals of carrier transport, generation,
recombination and storage in semiconductors. The quantum
mechanical foundations of the properties of solids. Types of solids
and crystal structure. Lattice vibrations, elastic and thermal properties
of solids, surface properties. The energy band theory of solids.
Semiconductor equilibrium and non-equilibrium statistics. Quantum
mechanical transitions, optical absorption, radiative and non-
radiative recombination. Quantum processes in reduced
dimensionality structures. Carrier lifetimes. Optical absorption in
metals and semiconductors. Semiconductor heterostructures.
Semiconductor junctions including the principles of operation of the
p-n junction. Metal semiconductor ohmic and Schottky junctions.
Electrical, structural and optical characterisation.
Required Reading Yu, P.Y. and Cordana, M., 1999,
Fundamentals of Semiconductors: Physics and Materials Properties,
Springer Verlag. Appropriate Journal Papers.
Recommended Reading Sze, S., 1997, Modern Semiconductor
Device Physics, J. Wiley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week lectures and two hours per week of laboratory
exercises.
Assessment Assignments, 20%; laboratory exercises, 30%; and
final examination, 50%.
JRM6013 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Quality standards and compliance issues. Managing QA.
Human Resources issues. Occupational Health and Safety
requirements. Overview of project management strategy, project life
cycle, scope, integration, scheduling, risks, budget, etc. Creativity
and innovations. Business plans. IP issues and commercialisation
process. Entrepreneurial organisation and strategy. Venture capital
and marketing. Case studies.
Required Reading Current available text book – students to be
advised. Appropriate journal papers.
Recommended Reading Yuzuriha, T., 1999, How to succeed as
an Engineer: A Practical Guide to Enhance Your Career, IEEE.
Badiru, A., 1995, Industry’s Guide to ISO9000, John Wiley.
Verkoeyen, C.M.R. and Nikkonen, A.I., 1997, Management
Training in High-Tech and R&D: Concepts for Enterprizes, Kluwer.
Tinerillo, P.C., 1999, Project Management, Auerbach.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Assignments, 20%; seminar presentations, 10%;
project, 30%; and final examination, 40%.
JRM6015 special electives
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) As per chosen elective.
Content As per chosen elective.
Required Reading As per chosen elective.
Recommended Reading As per chosen elective.
Class Contact As per chosen elective.
Assessment As per chosen elective.
RBF6710 FOOD ANALYSIS
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to the Master of Science in Food
Science and Technology.
Content This subject provides an introduction to the laboratory
analysis of the chemical, physical and biochemical properties of
foods and food components. The subject covers: the reasons for
analysing foods; food composition tables and databases; sampling
and sample preparation; the proximate analysis system; water
activity; analyses of proteins, carbohydrates, lipids, vitamins,
minerals and pigments; the use of enzyme based assays for food
components; rheology, texture, viscosity and colour of foods –
principles and recent developments in analysis; enzymes as
processing aids and as deteriorative agents – measurement of food
enzymes.
Required Reading Egan, H., Kirk, R.S. and Sawyer, R., 1991,
Pearson’s Composition and Chemical Analysis of Foods, 9th edn,
Longman Scientific and Technical Group UK Ltd., Harlow. Fennema,
O.R. (ed), 1996, Food Chemistry, 3rd edn, Marcel Dekker Inc.,
New York.
Class Contact Three hours per week comprising two hours of
lectures/tutorials and one hour of practical laboratory work for one
semester.
Assessment Assignments and tests 30%, practical work 20%, final
examination 50%.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
350
RBF6720 FOOD MICROBIOLOGY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to the Master of Science in Food
Science and Technology.
Content This subject provides an introduction to food microbiology
with particular reference to the role of microorganisms in food
processing, food spoilage and food-borne disease. The subject
includes: Ecology, biochemistry, isolation, enumeration and
identification of bacteria, yeasts and fungi associated with foods and
beverages. Microbial food spoilage and its control: ecology of food
spoilage, characteristics of major spoilage organisms, spoilage
control Food borne infections and food poisoning: microbiology of
common food-borne pathogenic bacteria, their detection and
enumeration. Indicator organisms. Control and prevention of food
borne disease. Mycotoxins. Hygiene and sanitation. Microbial
fermentations: biochemistry of fermentation, food preservation by
fermentation, fermented products. Waste treatment. Introduction to
biotechnology and its applications in food production and
processing. Microbiological examination of foods and
microbiological quality control: sample preparation and plans, sub-
lethal injury, standard and rapid methods, specifications, HACCP
concept.
Required Reading Jay, J.M., 1996, Modern Food Microbiology,
4th edn, Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York.
Class Contact Six hours per week comprising three hours of
lectures and tutorials and three hours of practical work for one
semester.
Assessment Assignments and tests 30%, Practical work 20%, final
examination 50%.
RBF6721 FRUIT AND VEGETABLE SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to the Master of Science in Food
Science and Technology.
Content This subject introduces students to the principles and
technology of fruit and vegetable processing and to recent
developments in the processing of these commodities. Topics
covered include: The fruit and vegetable industry: plant physiology;
the biochemistry of fruit ripening; diseases; maturity prediction and
testing; post-harvest handling and storage, chilling and freezing,
canning, microwave processing, cooking and dehydration; changes
in quality. The juicing of fruit and vegetables, product deterioration,
blanching treatments, product quality, quality assurance, and legal
requirements.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturers.
Recommended Reading Arthey, D. and Dennis, C., 1997,
Vegetable Processing, John Wiley & Sons, New York. Arthey, D.
and Ashurst, P.R., 1996, Fruit Processing, Blackie Academic and
Professional, Glasgow. Salunkhe, D.K. and Kadam, S.S., 1995,
Handbook of Fruit Science and Technology, Production,
Composition, Storage, and Processing, Marcel Dekker Inc., New
York.
Class Contact Six hours per week comprising lectures, tutorials,
practical work and/or field trips for one semester.
Assessment Assignments and tests 30%, practical work 20%, final
examination 50%.
RBF6722 GRAIN SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to the Master of Science in Food
Science and Technology.
Content This subject will provide students with an understanding of
the principles and practices involved in the technology of food
cereals and legumes. Topics covered include: Cereal and legumes of
the world – nutritional, physical, compositional and biochemical
characteristics. The characteristics of grain proteins and starches;
protein functionality; the starch granule. The milling of cereals and
legumes – cleaning, conditioning, the concept of starch damage and
the control of mill product quality. Flour quality, analytical
approaches, quality control, grain sprouting and end use suitability.
Dough development. The technology of baking, ingredients used and
their functional properties. International breadmaking processes and
equipment. Storage, packaging and staling of cereal products. The
preparation of flat breads, traditional Asian noodles and steamed
breads and other Asian grain based products. The technology of
breakfast cereals including enrichment. The processing of starch,
gluten, glucose syrups and use of enzymes. The processing of pasta,
malted barley products, rice, oats, maize, sorghum and rye. Current
trends in cereal and pulse processing. The application of molecular
genetics to quality improvement in grains.
Required Reading Hoseney, R.C., 1994, Principles of Cereal
Science and Technology, 2nd edn, American Association of Cereal
Chemists, St Paul, Minnesota.
Class Contact Six hours per week comprising lectures, tutorials,
practical work and/or field trips for one semester.
Assessment Assignments and tests 30%, practical work 20%, final
examination 50%.
RBF6723 MUSCLE FOOD SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to the Master of Science in Food
Science and Technology.
Content This subject aims to study the physical, chemical and
biochemical parameters of muscle foods which have effect on the
processing, technology and final quality of the product. The subject
covers: The meat industry; Anatomical microstructure and
histochemical characters of muscle; Muscle pigments; Post-mortem
biochemistry of muscle; Conversion of muscle to food by processing
– slaughtering, chilling, freezing, curing, emulsifying, smoking,
fermenting, canning and others. The assessment of product quality.
Special religious requirements and the processing of muscle foods to
meet these values; By-product processing.
Required Reading Hedrick, H.B., Aberle, E.D., Forrest, J.C. and
Judge, M.D., 1994, Principles of Meat Science, 3rd edn,
Kendall/Hunt Publishing Co., Dubuque.
Class Contact Six hours per week comprising lectures, tutorials,
practical work and/or field trips for one semester.
Assessment Assignments and tests 30%, practical work 20%, final
examination 50%.
RBF6724 DAIRY SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to the Master of Science in Food
Science and Technology.
Content This subject provides a study of the science and technology
associated with the processing of milk and milk products. The subject
covers: Structure of the Dairy Industry; Effects of heat treatment on
milk; Processing of milk to various dairy products: Advances in
testing of milk and milk products; Quality management of milk and
dairy products; Starter cultures and friendly bacteria; Advances in
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
351
dairy fermentation; UHT of milk and milk products; Membrane
technology; Nutritional issues in dairy product development; Dairy
ingredients.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturers.
Recommended Reading Kosikowski, F.V. and Mistry, V.V.,
1997, Cheese and Fermented Milk Foods, Vol. I and II, F.V.
Kosikowksi, Westport, CT. Marshall, R.T. and Arbuckle, W.S.,
1996, Ice Cream, 5th edn, Chapman and Hall, New York.
Robinson, R.K., 1993, Modern Dairy Technology, Elsevier Applied
Science Publishers, New York. Webb, B.H., Johnson, A.H. and
Alford, J.A., 1982, Fundamentals of Dairy Chemistry¸ AVI Publishing
Co., Westport, CT.
Class Contact Six hours per week comprising lectures, tutorials,
practical work and/or field trips for one semester.
Assessment Assignments and tests 30%, practical work 20%, final
examination 50%.
RBF6730 PRESERVATION AND PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to the Master of Science in Food
Science and Technology.
Content This subject provides an introduction to the principles and
technology of food processing and preservation by traditional and
modern techniques and their effects on the safety, appearance and
nutritional quality of foods and the implications of processing and
preservation methodologies on the physical, chemical,
microbiological and nutritional quality of foods. This subject covers:
A brief history of the food processing industry. A basic introduction
to unit operations. Preservation by moisture control: water activity,
intermediate moisture foods, concentration, dehydration and freeze
drying. Preservation by heat treatment: pasteurisation, sterilisation,
canning. Preservation by chilling and freezing. Chemical
preservation and fermentation. Preservation by irradiation. Modified
atmospheres. Influence of processing on product safety, quality and
nutritional value of foods. Principles of food packaging, packaging
requirements.
Required Reading Fellows, P., 1990, Food Processing
Technology: Principles and Practice, Ellis Horwood, Chichester.
Recommended Reading Ackermann, P., 1995, Food and
Packaging Materials – Chemical Interactions, Royal Society of
Chemistry, Cambridge. Gould, G.W., 1995, New Methods for
Food Preservation, 1st edn, Blackie Academic and Professional,
New York.
Class Contact Six hours per week comprising lectures, tutorials,
practical work and/or field trips for one semester.
Assessment Assignments and tests 30%, practical work 20%, final
examination 50%.
RBF6740 SPECIAL TOPICS IN FOOD TECHNOLOGY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to the Master of Science in Food
Science and Technology.
Content This subject allows students to develop and study a
selected aspect of food science and technology and requires the
conduct of a project on the selected topic. This project is not
laboratory based but is designed to allow students to research the
literature on a topic of interest to themselves. The project will be
carried out on an individual basis under the supervision of a Food
Technology staff member of the School of Life Sciences and
Technology and a member of industry where appropriate. The
subject includes: Design and development of the study, collection
and analysis of data and submission of a written report. Presentation
of a seminar on the topic. Subject to approval, the project may be
related to the students’ work situation and/or may involve plant
based work.
Required Reading Students will be responsible for reviewing the
current literature on their project topic.
Class Contact Three hours per week comprising tutorial work and
self-directed learning activities for one semester.
Assessment Oral presentation 20%; Written report 80%.
RBF6745 FOOD PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to the Master of Science in Food
Science and Technology.
Content This subject provides an introduction to the systematic
methods used in the development of new products, market research,
product design and specification and evaluation of product
development project. This subject covers: Development of aims,
objectives and constraints; Collection and analysis of marketing and
technical information required for product development; Product idea
generation; Screening of new product ideas; Product concept
development and testing; Marketing-strategy development, Product
development process (project planning, formulation development,
process development, shelf-life testing): Consumer testing: Market
trial methods and estimation of market size; Product specifications
(raw materials, process, finished product); Packaging and labelling,
product evaluation, product costing and pricing; Production
planning; Market development and product launch.
Required Reading Baker, R.C., Hahn, P.W. and Robbins, K.R.,
1988, Fundamentals of New Food Product Development, Elsevier
Science Publishers BV, Amsterdam.
Recommended Reading ANZFA, 1997, Food Standards Code,
Australian Government Publishing Service, Canberra. Earle, M. and
Anderson, A., 1985, Product and Process Development in the Food
Industry, Harwood Academic Publishers, New York. Moskowitz,
H.R., 1988, New Directions for Product Testing and Sensory
Evaluation, Food and Nutrition Press Inc., Westport. Urban, G.L. and
Hauser, J.R., 1993, Design and Marketing of New Products, Prentice
Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ.
Class Contact Three hours per week comprising lectures/tutorials
and practical work for one semester.
Assessment Assignments and tests 20%, practical work 30%, final
examination 50%.
RBF6750 FOOD SAFETY AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to the Master of Science in Food
Science and Technology.
Content This subject provides an introduction to the concepts and
principles of food safety and quality assurance, food legislation,
food standards, sensory and objective evaluation of foods and
conduct of objective and sensory evaluation tests on foods. The
subject covers: sensory attributes and sensory evaluation; sensory
perception, use of sensory and objective evaluation in quality control
and product development, experimental design and analysis,
questionnaire design, taste panels, shelf-life assessment; food law:
Australian and International food standards codes, food hygiene
regulations, micro-biological standards and codes of practice, the
development and underlying principles of food standards, Codex
standards, export standards; food additives, types, functions,
toxicological evaluation and regulations governing usage; toxic
substances and contaminants; hygiene and sanitation in food
processing and production, techniques for evaluation of food
processing plants; quality assurance principles and systems:
parameters of food quality and its evaluation and control, role of
quality assurance, concepts of total quality control (TQC) and total
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
352
quality management (TQM), good manufacturing practice, sampling
plans, specification writing, hazard analysis and critical control point
(HACCP) concept, product recall procedures, Australian and
International quality systems.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturers.
Recommended Reading ANZFA, 1997, Food Standards Code,
Australian Government Publishing Service, Canberra. Hubbard,
M.R., 1996, Statistical Quality Control for the Food Industry,
Chapman and Hall, New York. Marriott, N.G., 1994, Principles of
Food Sanitation, 3rd edn, Chapman and Hall, London. Stone, H.
and Sidel. J.L., 1993, Sensory Evaluation Practices, 2nd edn,
Academic Press Inc., San Diego.
Class Contact Six hours per week comprising lectures/tutorials and
practical work for one semester.
Assessment Assignments and tests 20%, practical work 20%, final
examination 60%.
RBF6910 MINOR PROJECT
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to the Master of Science in Food
Science and Technology.
Content This subject allows students to conduct a research project
of their own design, analyse and interpret data and communicate
research findings clearly and concisely in both oral and written form.
This subject covers: Conduct of a project on an aspect of food
science and technology; Design and development of the study,
collection and analysis of data and submission of a written report;
Presentation of a seminar on the research work. Subject to approval,
the project may be related to the student’s work situation and/or
may involve laboratory or plant based work.
Required Reading Students will be responsible for reviewing the
current literature on their project topic.
Class Contact Six hours per week of laboratory/tutorial work for
one semester.
Assessment Oral Presentation 20%, Written reports 80%.
RBF6920 MAJOR PROJECT 1
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to the Master of Science in Food
Science and Technology.
Content In this subject students will conduct a research project of
their own design, analyse and interpret data and communicate
research findings clearly and concisely in both oral and written form.
The project will be carried out on an individual basis under the
supervision of a Food Technology staff member of the School of
Molecular Sciences and a member of industry where appropriate.
The subject involves: Conduct of a a thorough literature search on
current issues in food science and technology; Design and
development of the study;; Presentation of a seminar on the research
work. Subject to approval, the project may be related to the student’s
work situation and/or may involve laboratory or plant based work.
Required Reading Students will be responsible for reviewing the
current literature on their project topic.
Class Contact Twelve hours per week of laboratory/tutorial work
for one semester or Six hours per week of laboratory/tutorial work
for one semester.
Assessment Oral presentation 20%, Written reports 80%.
RBF6925 MAJOR PROJECT 2
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to the Master of Science (Food
Science).
Content Conduct of a project on an aspect of food science and
technology; Design and development of the study, collection and
analysis of data and submission of a written report; Presentation of a
seminar on the research work. Subject to approval, the project may
be related to the student’s work situation and/or may involve
laboratory or plant based work.
Required Reading Students will be responsible for reviewing the
current literature on their project topic.
Recommended Reading Students will be responsible for
reviewing the current literature on their project topic.
Class Contact 12 hours per week comprising 1h of tutorial and 3h
of practical laboratory work.
Assessment Oral presentation (20 min Power point presentation),
20%; Written report (5000 words), 80%.
RBF6760 CHEMISTRY OF FOODS
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to the Master of Science (Food
Science)
Content The basic components forming the structure of food
products consist of the natural materials assembled in relationships
that can be altered by the presence of additives, ingredients and
processing. The subject covers the composition and macrostructure of
food, and the relationships between the basic components and
structure and the additives. This will include the interactions between
emulsifiers and flavours within a food matrix, and interactions
between water-proteins, water, lipids, protein-proteins, protein-lipids,
protein-carbohydrates, and carbohydrate-lipids. This subject will also
address the influence of processing on basic components and
interactions among food components.
Required Reading Fennema, O.R.(ed), 1996, Food Chemistry,
3rd ed, Marcel Dekker Inc., New York
Recommended Reading Sikorski, Z.E. 2002. Chemical and
Functional Properties of Food Components, 2nd Edition, CRC Press,
Boca Raton; Anilkumar, G.G. (ed.) 1995. Ingredient interactions
(Effect on food quality). Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York
Class Contact Six hours per week comprising of three hrs of
lectures and three hrs of tutorials and practical work
Assessment Practical work, 20%; 2 Assignments (3000 words
each), 30% (2x15%); Final examination (1x3 hrs) 50%.
RBF6930 INDUSTRY TRAINING
Campus Werribee (the unit will be offered at various food
companies).
Prerequisite(s) Successful completion of two semesters of study or
equivalent.
Content The unit will be based on a project agreed upon by an
industry partner and a supervisor from the School of Molecular
Sciences. An example of project will include impact of various types
of starter cultures on acidity and resulting shelf life of yoghurt. Such
type of project is proposed to be carried out at Nestle Dairy.
Another example will include impact of exo-polysaccharide
production on sensory properties of dairy foods. This type of project
is suited for National Foods.
Required Reading The required reading will depend upon the
type and nature of project students are undertaking. The names of
text books will be provided depending on the type of work students
are doing.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
353
Recommended Reading Students will be required to read
relevant websites and concerned company’s profile. The web sites
will depend upon the nature of the project students will be
undertaking. The students will have to read annual report and
relevant information of the company.
Class Contact 6 hours per week for 12 weeks for a total of 72
hours, subject to availability and approval by the course
co-ordinator.
Assessment Report of approximately 3000 words (80%); based
on industry training or a project and an oral presentation (20%).
RBT8001 RESEARCH THESIS – SEM 1 (FULL-TIME)
RBT8002 RESEARCH THESIS – SEM 2 (FULL-TIME)
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to a Master of Science or
Doctor of Philosophy program.
RBT8011 RESEARCH THESIS – SEM 1 (PART-TIME)
RBT8012 RESEARCH THESIS – SEM 2 (PART-TIME)
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to a Master of Science or
Doctor of Philosophy program.
RCM5601 STATISTICAL FORECASTING
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) RCM1614 or equivalent
Content Introduction to forecasting- Overview, reason for use,
procedure, basic steps. Basic forecasting tools – Plots, numerical
summaries, Measuring forecast accuracy, prediction intervals.
Smoothing methods – Moving averages, exponential smoothing,
Holt’s, Winters’ and damped-tren models. Decomposition methods –
Classical Decomposition and Census methods. Mixed models.
Regression models. Time series analysis: autocorrelation patterns,
Box-Jenkins methods for ARIMA models. Transfer functions
application to ‘real’ data. Uses of forecasting methods in practice.
Real world issues.
Required Reading Nil.
Recommended Reading Bowerman, B. and O’Connell, R.
1993, Forecasting and Time Series – An Applied Approach, 3rd
edn, Duxbury. Chatfield, C., 1996, The Analysis of Time Series, 5th
edn, Chapman and Hall. Cryer, J.D., 1986, Time Series Analysis,
Duxbury. Diebold, F.X., 2001, Elements of Forecasting, 2nd edn,
South Western. DeLurgio, S.A., 1998, Forecasting Principles and
Applications, McGraw Hill. Kendall, M. and Ord, J.K., 1990, Time
Series, 3rd edn, Edward Arnold. Makriadakis, S., Wheelwright,
S.C. and Hyndman, R.J., 1998, Forecasting – Methods and
Applications, 3rd edn, Wiley. Makriadakis, S. and Wheelwright,
S.C., 1989, Forecasting Methods for Management, 5th edn, Wiley.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and one one-hour laboratory.
Assessment Project, 40%; Examination, 60%.
RCM5602 QUALITY MANAGEMENT AND STATISTICS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Two undergraduate statistics subjects.
Content Fundamental ‘quality’ and quality management’ issues.
Specifications and the loss function. Process capability and statistical
process control. An introduction to feedback control. Factorial
experiments and fractional designs. Taguchi methods.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hour mix of lectures, tutorials, practice and
laboratory classes.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; Mid-semester tests, 20%.
RCM5800 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING GD1
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Programming language; basic object oriented concepts;
programming, algorithm development and elementary data structures
objects and classes.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours of lectures and one one-hour practical.
Assessment Will be based on a combination of examination,
assignments, tests and presentations according to a formula to be
provided during the first week of classes.
RCM5802 INFORMATION SYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Database concepts and design methodology; hierarchical,
network and relational models; relational approach and relational
calculus; object-oriented approach to database design; conceptual
models and query interfaces; database management and
administration functions, shared access control, security, recovery
and query interfaces; study and use of fourth generation languages
for query, update and report generation.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours of lectures and one one-hour practical.
Assessment Will be based on a combination of examination,
assignments, tests and presentations according to a formula to be
provided during the first week of classes.
RCM5803 DATA STRUCTURES AND PROGRAMMING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCM5800 Object Oriented Programming GD1
Content Program development and testing using Software
Engineering principles; object oriented programming languages;
organisation and manipulation of data; the software environment;
object oriented design and analysis. Abstract data types.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
one one-hour lecture and one two-hour practical.
Assessment Will be based on a combination of examination,
assignments, tests and presentations according to a formula to be
provided during the first week of classes.
RCM5805 COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Introduction – types of networks, master/slave polling
networks, equality networks, circuit switches and packet switched
networks, topologies, network structure, costings; layered design of
networks and the ISO reference model – protocols, interfaces,
communication techniques, multiplexing; public networks in Australia
– Datel, DDS, Austpac, etc.; local area networks – transmission
media, topologies, access control, comparison of local area network
products; PC Networks – servers, workstations, network disks,
directory structure, network security, access control and file locking.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours of lectures and one one-hour laboratory work.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
354
Assessment Will be based on a combination of examination,
assignments, tests and presentations according to a formula to be
provided during the first week of classes.
RCM5807 ADVANCED INFORMATION SYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong.
Prerequisite(s) RCM5802 Information Systems or equivalent.
Content Data analysis and modelling using the Enhanced Entity-
Relationship model and normalisation. Constraints beyond the EER
model, and advanced data modeling issues. Database transactions:
concept, ACID properties, specification. Transaction processing:
commit and rollback, concurrency control, locking, scheduling, and
recovery. Database application development using embedded SQL.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Elmasri, R. and Navathe, S.B., 2004,
Fundamentals of Database Systems, 4th edn, Addison Wesley.
Bernstein, A., and Lewis, P.M., In Ed. 2005, Databases and
Transaction Processing, An Applications Oriented Approach,
Addison Wesley.
Class Contact Two hour lecture and one hour laboratory per week.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; test, 20%.
RCM5813 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content LISP; knowledge representation – semantic nets, problem
solving, search, frames; knowledge based systems – rule-based
systems; logic programming; developing an expert system.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours of lectures and one one-hour practical.
Assessment Will be based on a combination of examination,
assignments, tests and presentations according to a formula to be
provided during the first week of classes.
RCM5820 NETWORK OPERATING SYSTEMS ADMINISTRATION
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCM5805 Communication and Networks.
Content Overview of computer networks. Architecture of a specific
network operating system, e.g. Server 2003, Network operating
system components and their installation. Workstation and server
configurations. Network applications. Network administration.
Performance monitoring and tuning. Hands-on network installation
and administration.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and one one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 50%; assignment and tests, 50%.
RCM5821 INTRODUCTION TO MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content History and fundamentals of multimedia systems.
Hypertext, CD-ROM based interactive multimedia. Components of a
multimedia system: voice, graphics, animation, images, audio, and
full-motion video. Standards for image compression. Multimedia
operating systems. Multimedia databases. Multimedia authoring.
Multimedia applications: educational systems, virtual environments,
multimedia conferencing, knowledge-based multimedia systems.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Hofstetter, F.T., 2001, Multimedia
Literacy, 3rd edn, McGraw-Hill.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester, comprising
one one-hour lectures and one two-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; assignments, 20%.
RCM5822 NETWORK MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCM5821 Introduction to Multimedia Systems.
Content Components of networked multimedia systems. Multimedia
object servers. Multimedia network topologies.
Protocols and network services for multimedia. Distributed and
collaborative multimedia systems. Application of ATM networks to
distributed multimedia. Managing distributed objects. Networked
Multimedia applications: video on demand systems, medical image
database systems, networked virtual environments, multimedia
conferencing.
Required Reading Sharda, N., 1999, Multimedia Information
Networking, Prentice-Hall.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and one one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; assignments, 20%.
RCM5824 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING GD2
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong
Prerequisite(s) RCM5800 Object Oriented Programming GD1
Content This subject provides practice to object oriented
programming and methodology using advanced features and the
application programming interface of the Java programming
language. A deeper discussion of classes and objects,
encapsulation, polymorphism, inheritance, relationships among
classes of objects and programming with related classes along with
exception handling, multithreading, file I/O and building GUI
components.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours of lectures and one one-hour laboratory.
Recommended Reading. Deitel, H.M., and Deitel, P.J., 2005,
Java How to Program, 6th edn, Prentice-Hall.
Assessment Final examination, 75%; assignment and laboratory,
25%.
RCM6101 INDUSTRY PROJECT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The project work gives the students: an opportunity to work
on a complex real-life problem; experience in liaising with industrial
personnel from various sections of the sponsoring company;
experience at defining a problem in precise terms; experience in
searching the literature and using library facilities; experience at
presenting reports in both written and verbal forms. In all cases,
students operate individually under the supervision of a staff member
and tackle a problem using appropriate methods of statistical
analysis. Typical project areas are: multivariate data analysis;
quality control studies; econometric modelling; time series
forecasting; reliability modelling; design and analysis of
experiments; production scheduling; A.I. application in industry;
database construction; systems analysis and design; development of
expert systems.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Six hours per week for one semester comprising
individual supervision.
Assessment Will be based on a combination of examination,
assignments, tests and presentations according to a formula to be
provided during the first week of classes.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
355
RCM6102 THESIS (2 UNITS) (FULL-TIME)
(FOR ONE SEMESTER)
RCM6103 THESIS (4 UNITS) (FULL-TIME)
(FOR ONE SEMESTER)
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The aim of this subject is to enable students to competently
research an area of study utilising knowledge and skills gained in
previous studies, and it consists of a project carried out by students
on an individual basis. The project is expected to be an investigation
of an approved topic, followed by the submission of a suitably
formatted thesis in which the topic is introduced and formulated, the
investigation described in detail, results and conclusions from the
study are elaborated, and an extended discussion presented.
Required Reading To be advised by supervisor.
Class Contact No formal class contact, however, there will be
regular meetings with the students’ supervisors.
Assessment The thesis will normally be assessed by at least two
examiners from an appropriate areas of expertise.
RCM6105 THESIS (1 UNIT) (PART-TIME)
(FOR TWO SEMESTERS)
RCM6106 THESIS (2 UNITS) (PART-TIME)
(FOR TWO SEMESTERS)
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The aim of this subject is to enable students to competently
research an area of study utilising knowledge and skills gained in
previous studies, and it consists of a project carried out by students
on an individual basis. The project is expected to be an investigation
of an approved topic, followed by the submission of a suitably
formatted thesis in which the topic is introduced and formulated, the
investigation described in detail, results and conclusions from the
study are elaborated, and an extended discussion presented.
Required Reading To be advised by supervisor.
Class Contact No formal class contact, however, there will be
regular meetings with the students’ supervisors.
Assessment The thesis will normally be assessed by at least two
examiners from an appropriate areas of expertise.
RCM6501 IMAGE PROCESSING ALGORITHMS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content An introductory subject which covers the fundamental
algorithms used in image processing and pattern recognition. The
topics include: point, algebraic and geometric operations; smoothing
and edge detection, linear convolution, median and max/min filters,
segmentation, Hough methods, morphological operations; image
coding and compression. Introduction to pattern recognition
algorithms. Artificial neural networks for pattern recognition, face
recognition.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures/practicals/tutorials.
Assessment Will be based on a combination of examination,
assignments, tests and presentations according to a formula to be
provided during the first week of classes. Final examination, 70%;
assignments and laboratory works, 30%.
RCM6606 TIME SERIES ANALYSIS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) RCM5601 or equivalent.
Content Review of Basic Time Series and Forecasting Concepts.
Time Series Regression. Box-Jenkins Models and their Identification.
Concepts of Stationarity. Theoretical Autocorrelations and Partial
Autocorrelations. Seasonal and Non-Seasonal ARIMA Models.
Invertibility. Mutlivariate Transfer Functions. Cross-Correlations.
Intervention models. Combining Models. Cyclical Forecasting
Methods. Long-Term Forecasting. Real world applications.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer
Recommended Reading Bowerman, B.L. and O’Connell, R.T.
1993, Forecasting and Time Series – An Applied Approach, 3rd
edn, Duxbury. Chatfield, C. 1996, The Analysis of Time Series, 5th
edn, Chapman and Hall. Cryer, J.D. 1986, Time Series Analysis,
Duxbury. Kendall, M. and Ord, J.K., 1990, Time Series, 3rd edn,
Edward Arnold. Diebold, F.X., 2001, Elements of Forecasting, 2nd
edn, South Western. Makridakis, S., Wheelwright, S.C. and
Hyndman, R.J., 1998, Forecasting – Methods and Applications, 3rd
edn, Wiley. Makridakis, S. and Wheelwright, S.C., 1989,
Forecasting Methods for Management, 5th edn, Wiley. Wei, W.S.,
1990, Time Series Analysis, Addison Wesley.
Class Contact Three hours per week comprising two hours lecture
and one hour laboratory.
Assessment Final examination, 50%; project, 50%.
RCM6607 STATISTICAL COMPUTING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Lecture Program Data manipulations using an appropriate
language. What packages are available? Similarities and
differences in what they can do. Writing macros or their equivalent.
Producing graphical displays. (Including EDA). Statistical modelling.
Creating useful output. Working with input from various sources.
Using the Bootstrap. Using the Jackknife. Testing assumptions about
data distributions. Practical program: laboratory sessions are
designed to give students practical experience in using computers for
statistical purposes.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
lecture and practical.
Assessment Will be based on a combination of examination,
assignments, tests and presentations according to a formula to be
provided during the first week of classes.
RCM6702 INTERNET DATA REPRESENTATION 1
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) RCM6822 Internet Programming or equivalent
subject.
Content DRL data access and use; Metadata, such as Resource
Description Framework; DRL tools; DRL definition and declaration,
such as XML Schema; Parsers and validators; Presentation of DRL
data; Research applications of the DRL.
Required Reading Birbeck, M., et al, 2001, Professional XML,
2nd Edition, Wrox Press Ltd.
Recommended Reading http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-xml;
http://www.xml.com/
Class Contact Two hour lecture and one laboratory/tutorial per
week.
Assessment Final examination, 70%; Assignments, 30%.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
356
RCM6710 INTERNET DATA MANAGEMENT 1
Campus Footscray Park, Sydney, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) RCM2313 or Internet Programming subject.
Content Introduction to Class; Introduction to ASP.NET; Introduction
to Visual Studio.NET; Using Server Controls; Using ASP.NET Rich
Controls; Using Visual Basic.NET Within an ASP.NET Page;
Managing Data Sources; Building Data-Driven ASP.NET
Applications; Building Data-Driven Web Applications; Configuring
an ASP.NET Application; Troubleshooting and Deploying an
ASP.NET Application.
Required Reading Introduction to ASP.NET, Kathleen Kalata, ©
2002 Course Technology, 0-619-06321-1.
Recommended Reading ASP.NET by Example, Steven A. Smith,
© 2002 Que, 0-7897-2562-2 Beginning ASP.NET using C#, Chris
Ulman, Chris Goode, Juan T. Llibre, Ollie Cornes et al, © 2001
Wrox Press, 1-861006-15-2.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester, comprising
one two-hour lecture and one one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment 15% Labs 35% Assignment 25% Mid-Semester Test
25% Final Test In order to pass, students must obtain at least 25% of
Labs and Assignment, and 25% of Tests in this subject.
RCM6760 RESEARCH PRACTICE, ETHICS AND COMMUNICATION IN
FOOD SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to the Master of Science (Food
Science).
Content Biometrical techniques in Food Science and Technology.
Theories of research process and ethics. Creativity in research and
the concepts of discovery and innovation. Experiment organisation,
data collection, critical evaluation and result interpretation. Methods
of communicating research findings.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturers.
Recommended Reading R. G.D. Steel, J. H. Torrie and D. A.
Dickey. 1996 Principles and procedures of statistics: A biometrical
approach. McGraw-Hill: New York; Rao, P.S.R.S. 2000. Sampling
Methodologies with Applications. CRC Press, Boca Raton; David R.
Cox, D.R. and Reid R. 2000. The Theory of the Design of
Experiments. CRC Press, Boca Raton; Spier, R. 2001. Ethics, Tools
and the Engineer. CRC Press, Boca Raton.
Class Contact Six hours per week comprising 3h of lectures and
3h of tutorials/practicals.
Assessment Assignments, 20% (2 x 10); Practical work, 30%;
Final exam (1 x three hrs), 50%.
RCM6811 INFORMATION NETWORKING 1
Prerequisite(s) RCM5805 Communications and Networks or
equivalent.
Content Introduction to information networks; communication
fundamentals; communication protocols; network architectures;
network design; modelling and simulation of networks; network
services; network management.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week comprising two hours of
lectures and one one-hour tutorial.
Assessment Will be based on a combination of examination,
assignments, tests and presentations according to a formula to be
provided during the first week of classes.
RCM6760 RESEARCH PRACTICE, ETHICS AND COMMUNICATION IN
FOOD SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
Campus Location (s) Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for entry to the Master of Science (Food
Science)
Content Biometrical techniques in Food Science and Technology.
Theories of research process and ethics. Creativity in research and
the concepts of discovery and innovation. Experiment organisation,
data collection, critical evaluation and result interpretation. Methods
of communicating research findings.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer
Recommended Reading R. G.D. Steel, J. H. Torrie and D. A.
Dickey. 1996 Principles and procedures of statistics: A biometrical
approach. McGraw-Hill: New York; Rao, P.S.R.S. 2000. Sampling
Methodologies with Applications. CRC Press, Boca Raton; David R.
Cox, D.R. and Reid R. 2000. The Theory of the Design of
Experiments. CRC Press, Boca Raton; Spier, R. 2001. Ethics, Tools
and the Engineer. CRC Press, Boca Raton.
Class Contact Six hours per week for one semester comprising
3hours of lectures and 3hours of tutorials/practicals
Assessment Assignments, 20% (2 x 10); Practical work, 30%;
Final exam, 1 x three hrs, 50%.
RCM6819 USER INTERFACE DESIGN
Campus Hong Kong, Footscray Park.
Prerequisite(s) RCM6822 Internet Programming
Content Cognitive frameworks for HCI. Interaction styles. Help and
error messages. Direct manipulation. Prototyping, Evaluation of the
interface. Multimedia authoring. Computing Supported Co-operative
Work. Usability testing. Prototyping. Rapid application development.
User testing. Software metrics
Required Reading Preece, J., Roger, Y., Sharp, H., 2002,
Interaction Design, Wiley.
Recommended Reading Shneiderman, B., 1997, Designing the
User Interface, Addison Wesley. Nielsen, J. 1993, Usability
Engineering, AP Professional, Cambridge. Norman, D., 1990, The
Design of Everyday Things¸ Doubleday, New York. Nielson, J.,
2000, Designing Web Usability, New Riders, Indianapolis.
Class Contact 13 x three hour lectures/tutorials.
Assessment Assignment, 40%; final examination, 60%.
RCM6821 DECISION SUPPORT TECHNOLOGY
Campus Hong Kong, Footscray
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Processes and phases of organisational decision making
and modelling. Online analytic processing (OLAP) vs online
transaction processing (OLTP). Decision support framework and
applications. Data requirements and benefits of decision support
systems. Structure, components and types of decision support
systems. Data mining concepts. Data warehouse vs production
systems. Warehouse data characteristics and requirements. Data
fusion and data scrubbing. Data models for data warehouse and
data mart. Star schemas and hypercubes. Multidimensional analysis
ROLAP MOLAP and HOLAP. Data warehouse administration.
Warehouse database management technology.
Recommended Reading Inmon WH, 2002, Building the Data
Warehouse, 3rd edn, Wiley
Class Contact Three hours per week two hours lecture and one-
hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination 70%. Assignment/Test 30%.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
357
RCM6822 INTERNET PROGRAMMING
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong
Prerequisite(s) Competency in Java.
Content HTML (and XHTML). JavaScript. Object-oriented
programming in JavaScript. Communication between
HTML/JavaScript and an applet. Adapting an applet for
communication with HTML/JavaScript. Cascading style sheets (CSS).
Using layered pages to achieve dynamic effects (DHTML).
Communications: Java applications for internet communication;
creating simple browsers and servers. Server-side programming:
response to a client-submitted form; CGI; PHP; XML; XSL; RMI.
Linking mobile telephones to the internet via WAP/WML technology.
Required Reading Deitel, Deitel and Nieto, 2001 or later,
Internet and World Wide Web: How to Program, Prentice Hall. D.R.
Watson’s five hypertexts on Internet Programming, all available on
the school’s intranet at s:\samples\scm6822\Launcher.html
or http://melba.vu.edu.au/∼scm6822/
Recommended Reading Flanagan, D., 2001, JavaScript: The
Definitive Guide, 4th edn, O’Rielly. Vaswani, V, 2003, XML and
PHP, Prentice Hall. Welling, L. and Thomson, L., 2001, PHP and
MySQL Web Development, SAMS. Deitel and Deitel, 2001, E-
Commerce: How to Program, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Two hour lectures and one hour laboratory per
week
Assessment Final Examination 58%, mid-semester practical test
30%, laboratory 12%.
RCM6823 DATABASE DESIGN, MANAGEMENT AND ADMINISTRATION
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong
Prerequisite(s) Good knowledge of relational databases; basic
understanding of UNIX.
Content Database Environment. Database planning, design and
administration. Methodology – physical database design. Database
integrity and security. Transaction management. Distributed
database systems.
Required Reading Connolly, T. and Begg, C.,2004, Database
Systems: A Practical Approach to Design, Implementation and
Management, 4th edn, Addison-Wesley.
Recommended Reading Abbraham Silberschatz, Henry F. Korth
S. Sudarshan, Database System Concepts, Fifth Edition, 2005
McGraw Hill. Elmarsi R. and Navathe S, Fundamentals of Database
Systems, 4/e, 2000, Addison Wesley.
Class Contact Two hour lectures and one hour laboratory per
week.
Assessment Final Examination, 70%; Assignment, 30%.
RCM6825 MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Introduction to Multimedia RCM5821
Content The aim of this subject is to develop a clear understanding
of the processes and current methodologies used in the design and
development of multimedia systems. The subject introduces some
new 3D web graphics technologies related to multimedia system
development, including java 3D and Virtual Reality Modeling
Language (VRML)
Required Reading to be advised by the lecturer
Recommended Reading England, E. and Finney, A., Managing
Multimedia: Project Management for Web and Covergent Media –
Book 1 – People and Processes, 3rd edn, Addison-Wesley, Harlow,
England. Hartmand, J., Wernecke, J., The VRML2.0 Handbook,
Addison-Wesley.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester, comprising
two one-hour lectures and one one-hour laboratory.
Assessment Final Examination, 50%; Project, 50%.
RCM6827 RESEARCH PERSPECTIVES IN COMPUTER SCIENCE
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Enrolled Honours Student
Content Writing a research proposed, performing a literature
review, writing a thesis, giving presentations, human research ethics,
intellectual property.
Required Reading To be advised
Recommended Reading To be advised
Class Content Four per week for one semester
Assessment A mix of written and oral presentations
RCM6830 KNOWLEDGE ENGINEERING AND E–COMMERCE
TECHNOLOGY
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong
Prerequisite(s) Competency in a programming language.
Content This subject introduces students to concepts of knowledge
and systems engineering with particular emphasis on electronic
commerce systems. A study is made of the current and past
technologies that have enabled the recent growth and establishment
of electronic commerce. The supporting technologies needed for the
three-tiered architecture of electronic commerce sites, i.e. front end
interfaces, middleware and backend servers together with their
databases, are investigated in detail and form the basis of practical
exercises.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Nelson, A. & Nelson, W.H., 2002,
Building Electronic Commerce with Web Database Constructions,
Addison-Wesley.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two one-hour lectures and one one-hour laboratory/tutorial.
Assessment Final examination, 80%; assignment/tests, 20%.
RCM6841 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING 2
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) RCM6844 Software Engineering 1.
Content This subject reviews the software engineering knowledge
areas, analyse software process improvement methods and
introduces new progresses of software engineering. Topics include
capability maturity models, requirement management, project
planning, project tracking and oversight, configuration management,
quality assurance, and agent oriented software engineering.
Required Reading
Recommended Reading Schach, S.R., 2005, Object Oriented
and Classical Software Engineering, 6th edn, McGraw Hill. James R.
Persse, 2001, Implementing the Capability Maturity Model, John
Wiley & Sons; Roger S Pressman, 2004, Software Engineering: A
Practitioner’s Approach, 6/e, McGraw Hill; Ian Sommerville, 2004,
Software Engineering, 7/e, Addison Wesley.
Class Contact Two hours lecture and one hour laboratory/tutorial
per week for one semester.
Assessment Final examination, 70%; assignment, 30%. Students
must obtain at least 40% standard in the assignment and at least
40% on the final examination, and obtain an overall mark of 50%.
RCM6842 ADVANCED TOPICS IN SOFTWARE ENGINEERING
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Malaysia, Singapore
Prerequisite(s) RCM6841 Software Engineering 2.
Content Analysis, discussion and implementation of issues from
research papers in an area of Software Engineering. For instance,
papers on Goal-based methods in Scenario-based Design. Topics
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
358
include: Analysing Requirements, Prototyping, Usability Evaluation,
etc.
Recommended Reading Rosson, M., and Carroll, J., 2002,
Usability Engineering: Scenario-Based Development of Human-
Computer Interaction, Morgan Kaufman. IEEE Software; ACM
Transactions on Software Engineering and Methodology.
Class Contact Two hour lecture and one hour laboratory per week.
Assessment Contributions to projects, laboratories and seminars,
50%; assignments, 50%.
RCM6843 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING PROJECT
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) RCM6841 Software Engineering 2.
Content Each student will work on a project as a member of a
software development team. Students will be required to present
written reports and give oral presentations during the course of the
project. Projects will focus on industrial and business applications
and will incorporate areas such as user interface development,
database management systems, networking, web based and general
application development environments.
Recommended Reading Research articles in Software
Engineering; Course notes and relevant textbooks.
Class Contact Three hours per week, primarily in the laboratory.
Assessment Performance in project oral presentations, 30%;
Quality of submitted reports, 70%.
RCM6844 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING 1
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Malaysia.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content This subject covers software engineering knowledge in
areas of software management, software verification and validation.
Review topics including software process and software life-cycle
models, software process improvement, requirement, classical
analysis and design, object oriented analysis and design. Detailed
topics include inspection, review, software testing, software
estimation, prject planning, prject personnel and organization.
Recommended Reading Persse, 2001, Implementing the
Capacity Maturity Model, Wiley. Schach, S., 2005, Object
Oriented and Classical Software Engineering, 6/e, McGraw Hill;
Roger S Presssman, 2004, Software Engineering: A Practitioner’s
Approach, 6/e, McGraw Hill; Ian Sommerville, 2004, Software
Engineering, 7/e, Addison Wesley; Jeff Tian, 2005, Software
Quality Engineering: Testing, Quality Assurance and Quantifiable
Improvement, Wiley.
Class Contact Two hours lecture and one hour laboratory/tutorial
per week for one semester.
Assessment Final examination, 70%; assignment, 30%. Students
must obtain at least 40% standard in the assignment and at least
40% on the final examination, and obtain an overall mark of 50%.
RCM6845 OBJECT ORIENTED TECHNOLOGY
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) Two semesters of Java programming.
Content JavaBeans Component Model – Overview, Introspection,
Properties of Beans; Networking – InetAddress Class, URL Class,
URLEncoder Class, URLConnection Class, Sockets, Server Sockets,
Datagram Clients/Servers; Servlet overview and architecture,
HttpServlet Class, HttpServletRequest Interface, HttpServletResponse
Interface, Handling HTTP get and post Requests, setting up the
Apache Tomcat Server, deploying a web application, session
tracking; JSP Overview, scripting components, standard actions,
directive, custom tag libraries; EJB Overview, session beans, EJB
transactions.
Required Reading Deitel, H.M., Deitel, P.J., 2003, Java How to
Program, 5th Ed., Prentice Hall.
Recommended Reading Deitel, H.M., Deitel, P.J., and Santry, S.
E., 2002, Advanced Java 2 Platform – How to Program, 1st Ed.,
Prentice Hall; Horstmann, C. S., Core Java 2, 2002, Volume II-
Advanced Features, Softsoft Press (Prentice Hall); Steflik, D.
Sridharan, P. and Steflik, R., 2002, Advanced Java Networking,
2nd Ed., Softsoft Press (Prentice Hall); Eckel, B., 2003, Thinking in
Java, 3rd ed., Prentice Hall (free electronic format available). Sun
tutorials, which cover most topics.
Class Contact Two hours lecture and one hour laboratory/tutorial
per week for one semester.
Assessment Final examination, 70%; Practical/Assignment, 30%.
Students must obtain at least 40% standard in the practicals and
assignment and at least 40% on the final examination, and obtain
an overall mark of 50%.
RCM6846 OBJECT ORIENTED DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Malaysia
Prerequisite(s) RCM5824 Object Oriented Programming GD2 or
equivalent.
Content Unified Modeling Language (UML); Introduction to Rational
Rose; Unified Method and the design of the domain layer; Concepts
of persistence and transactions in an OO context; Interaction layer
design considerations; Introduction to an Object Oriented
development environment and OODBMS (JADE); Implementation
and deployment models; Packages, subsystems and models; Design
patterns and frameworks.
Required Reading Priestley, M. (2003). ‘Practical Object-
Oriented Design with UML’, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill.
Recommended Reading T. Quatrani, 2002, Visual modelling
with Rational Rose 2002 and UML, Addison-Wesley; R. Pooley & P.
Stevens, 2000, Using UML, Software Engineering with Objects and
Components, Addison-Wesley; S. Bennett, S. McRobb, & R. Farmer,
1999, Object-Oriented Systems Analysis and Design, McGraw Hill;
I. Jacobson, G. Booch, & J. Rumbaugh, 1999, The Unified Software
Development Process, Addison-Wesley.
Class Contact Two hours lecture and one hour laboratory/tutorial
per week for one semester.
Assessment Final examination, 70%; assignment, 30%. Students
must obtain at least 40% standard in the assignment and at least
40% on the final examination, and obtain an overall mark of 50%.
RCM6902 MATHEMATICAL PROGRAMMING 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Consent of lecturer.
Content Overview of mathematical programming; review of linear
constraints, convexity; the primal and dual problems; the simplex
method, slack variables, optimality, post-optimality and sensitivity
analysis, integer (linear) programs; commercial packages for
mathematical programming, Applied LP Models.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures/tutorials.
Assessment Will be based on a combination of examination,
assignments, tests and presentations according to a formula to be
provided during the first week of classes.
RCM6904 SIMULATION
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Problem formulation using the concepts of entities,
attributes, files, events etc. Generating random numbers from
discrete and continuous distributions. Practical coding experience
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
359
using SLAMII including debugging and verifying that the translated
model executes as intended. Systems approach, flow diagram and
problem analysis for discrete event systems. Network modelling
involving queuing, resources, pre-emption, priorities and machine
breakdown. Design and analysis of simulation experiments. Practical
coding experience using SLAMII.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures/tutorials.
Assessment Will be based on a combination of examination,
assignments, tests and presentations according to a formula to be
provided during the first week of classes.
RCM6905 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content A selection of topics from the following. Standard Flow
Shop and Job Shop Scheduling Techniques, Project Scheduling and
Management-Finding a critical path, PERT calculations, Time/Cost
Trade-offs in reducing total project time, Crashing and indirect costs,
Time-Charting and Resource leveling, Use of MSProject, EXCEL and
Leuin Scheduling Systems. Project Risk Analysis. Materials
Requirement Planning, Current Trends in Scheduling and real-Time
Computing Systems. Emphasis will be on real-world
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures and tutorials.
Assessment Will be based on a combination of examination,
assignments, tests and presentations according to a formula to be
provided during the first week of classes.
RCM6906 OPTIMISATION TECHNIQUES
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Consent of lecturer.
Content Lecture Program Topics: Decision Tree and AHP; Maximal
flow problems, Shortest-route problem, Minimal spanning tree
problem, Estimating network flows; Queuing. Theory; Combinatorial
Models: CSP, SCP, & BPP. Spreadsheet Analysis.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
lectures/tutorials.
Assessment Will be based on a combination of examination,
assignments, tests and presentations according to a formula to be
provided during the first week of classes.
RCS5100 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Experimental design, statistics in research, data analysis,
computer applications and software, literature analysis and critical
appraisal, ethics in research, scientific writing and data
presentation. Qualitative data analysis.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Ackoff, R.L. 1984, Scientific Method:
Optimizing Applied Research Decisions, Malabar. Alley, M. 1987,
The Craft of Scientific Writing, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs.
Calnan, J. 1984, Coping with Research: The Complete Guide For
Beginners, William Heinemann Medical Books, London.
Dominowski, R.L. 1980, Research Methods, Prentice-Hall,
Englewood Cliffs.
Class Contact one hour/week x 26 weeks3 hours per week for
one semester– lectures and computer labs.
Assessment Continuous assessment by assignments only.
RCS5111 PRINCIPLES OF ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND
MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Basic principles of environmental science. The physical,
chemical and biological aspects of the atmosphere, hydrosphere
and the geosphere. Distribution and transport of pollutants in and
between the three systems. Causes and effects of environmental
problems. Environmental fate of toxicants including bioconcentration
and biomagnification. Application of toxicology in environmental
science and management. Techniques in environmental impact
assessment. Principles of resource management. Contaminated site
assessment and restoration. Bioremediation. Environmental
management systems. Current trends in environmental management.
Social and economic aspects of environmental issues. Environmental
ethics and economics.
Required Reading There are no standard textbooks for this
subject. Reading to be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Cunningham, W. P. and Cunningham,
M. A. 2004, Principles of Environmental Science, 3rd Edition,
McGraw-Hill Higher Education, ISBN: 0072919833; Friedman, F.
B. 2003, Practical Guide to Environmental Management, 9th
Edition, Environmental Law Institute, Washington DC 20036, ISBN:
1-58576-047-1.
Class Contact Three hours of lectures per week for one semester.
Assessment Assessment will be by four assignments (4 x 10% =
40%) and one end of semester exam (60%). Each assignment has a
1,000 word limit (no more than 10 pages) and may be
supplemented with an appropriate number of figures, charts and/or
tables. Assignments and assignment deadlines will be spread evenly
across the semester. There are no special conditions for exams.
RCS5121 ENVIRONMENTAL LAW AND STANDARDS 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The legal framework. Environmental law in Australia. Acts
of Parliament and subordinate legislation. Commonwealth and state
responsibilities. Air quality standards and objectives. Health and
safety laws. Case studies in Victoria.
Required Reading Bates, G.M. 1983, Environmental Law in
Australia, Butterworths, Melbourne. Gilpin, A. 1980, Environmental
Policy in Australia, Queensland University Press, Brisbane.
Class Contact Three hours of lectures per week for one semester.
Assessment Continuous assessment by assignments, presentations
and reports.
RCS5131 WATER POLLUTION MONITORING & LIQUID WASTE
MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The specific problems associated with pollution of the
ocean, coastal regions, lakes, rivers and streams, reservoirs and
ground water. Water quality monitoring and the statistical design of
water quality monitoring programs. Sustainable water management
techniques. The Geographical Information System. The nature and
sources of liquid waste. Domestic and industrial liquid wastes.
Sewage and sewage management infrastructure, including the grass
filtration method. Inorganic and organic waste treatment in the
lagoon and septic tank systems. Treatment plant design. Microbial
breakdown of organic wastes. By-products of sewage treatment,
tertiary treatment of effluent. Pathogens in wastewater. Algal blooms.
Legislative considerations. Case studies.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
360
Required Reading There are no standard textbooks for this
subject. Reading to be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Nathanson, J.A. 2002, Basic
Environmental Technology: Water Supply, Waste Management, and
Pollution Control, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall, ISBN: 0130930857.
Class Contact Three hours of lectures per week for one semester.
Assessment Assessment will be by four assignments (4 x 10% =
40%) and one end of semester exam (60%). Each assignment has a
1,000 word limit (no more than 10 pages) and may be
supplemented with an appropriate number of figures, charts and/or
tables. Assignments and assignment deadlines will be spread evenly
across the semester. There are no special conditions for exams.
RCS5132 ENVIRONMENTAL LAW AND STANDARDS 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Discharge licence, Water quality criteria, standards and
objectives. Laws regarding solid waste disposal. Law enforcement.
Case studies in Victoria.
Required Reading Bates, G.M. 1983, Environmental Law in
Australia, Butterworths, Melbourne. Gilpin, A. 1980, Environmental
Policy in Australia, Queensland University Press, Brisbane.
Class Contact Three hours of lectures per week for one semester.
Assessment Continuous assessment by assignments, presentations
and reports.
RCS5141 AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Atmospheric properties and air pollution. Air pollutant
transport at the micro, meso and macro scales. Global climate
change as a result of anthropogenic activities. Factors contolling the
spread of contaminants in the atmosphere. Effects of air pollution on
visibility, weather, climate, vegetation and human health. EPA and
SEPP policies and controls; Class 1, 2 and 3 pollutants. Health risk
assessment. Computer modelling of air pollution with AUSPLUME.
Gaussian plume analysis. Pollutant dispersal from stacks. Odour
monitoring and control. Air pollution monitoring and control
equipment. Indoor Air pollution. Case studies.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours of lectures or computer labs per week
for one semester.
Assessment Assignments, 40%; examination, 60%.
RCS5172 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Nature and sources of solid wastes; hazardous waste
handling; incineration; landfills; other disposal alternatives;
monitoring and control.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Assignment and site visit reports, 40%; examination,
60%.
RCS5192 CLEANER PRODUCTION TECHNOLOGY AND WASTE
MINIMISATION
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The concept and history of the Cleaner Production
approach. ‘End-of-pipe’ versus Cleaner Production. Cleaner
Production and regulatory authorities. The Cradle-to-Grave concept.
Process design and life cycle analysis. Waste minimization and
recycling. Environmental auditing, the ‘eco-audit’. Worldwide
attitudes and approaches to Cleaner Production. Detailed case
studies and analysis.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester, consisting of
lectures and site visits.
Assessment Assignment and site visit reports, 40%; examination,
60%.
RCS6000 PROJECT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.Normally requires completion of one full year
of coursework equivalent to the Graduate Diploma in Environmental
Management. In some circumstances a limited number of coursework
subjects may be taken concurrently with the project.
Content A program of approved research and enquiry into an area
related to environmental management. The project may be
conducted on or off campus and may involve an industry partner.
Required Reading To be advised by project supervisor(s)
Recommended Reading To be advised by project supervisor(s)
Class Contact 150 hrs of research activity over the course of the
program
Teaching Method Academic and/or Industry supervision
Assessment By examination of a completed project report,
normally in the range of 12,000 to 20,000 words
RFB5115 CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY & PATHOLOGY FOR CHINESE
HERBAL MEDICINE
Campus City Flinders, St Albans
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Clinical Pharmacology: This subject provides students with
the opportunity to develop an understanding of the principles
underlying the actions and interactions of drugs, poisons and
xenobiotics relating to the use of Herbal Medicine. The subject will
provide an overview of the scope of pharmacology and toxicology
with particular emphasis on the interrelationships between herbs and
drugs. Topics addressed will include concentration response
relationships, adsorption of drugs and xenobiotics, and drug and
xenobiotic distribution. The metabolism of xenobiotics including roles
in drug elimination, detoxification, production of toxic and
mutagenic intermediates, excretion, pharmacokinetics, and clinical
aspects will also be addressed. Clinical Features For Disease:
Aetiology, pathogenesis, morphology and clinical manifestation of
disease processes occurring in the organ systems, with emphasis on
the clinical manifestations and differentiation of symptoms rather
than on detailed pathological changes; Main pathology tests used
for organ systems; Demonstration of simple diagnostic techniques
that will cover the following areas. Pacticum and demonstration: use
of stethoscope, sphygmomanometer; differentiation of DVT pain and
other pain; palpitation of internal organs; urine testing with dip-stick;
use of ophthalmoscope and audiometer; visual inspection of the
throat; inspection of skin lesions for neoplastic change; looking at
blood film; looking at X-rays and computerised tomography (CAT)
scans.
Required Reading Clinical Pharmacology: Keys, J. 1990,
Chinese Herbs. Their Botany, Chemistry and Pharmacodynamics,
London, Charles E Tuttle. Evans, W. C., 1996, Trease and Evans’
Pharmacognosy, (14th. edition), London, WB Saunders. Poisons and
Controlled Substances Act. Standard for the Uniform Scheduling of
Drugs and Poisons. Galbraith, A. S. Bullock and E. Manias, 2000,
Fundamentals of Pharmacology, Addison-Wesley Longman,
Australia. Clinical Features For Disease: Dains Joyce, L. Ciofu-
Baumann and P. Scheibel 1998, Advanced Health Assessment and
Clinical Diagnosis in primary care, St. Louis, MO: Mosby. Lorenz, P
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
361
(1985). Differential Diagnosis 3rd ed. Wentworth Falls: Sockal
Science Press. Scheib, M C, Tiller, D J & Firkin, F C. (1986). A
System of Signs 4th ed. Wentworth Falls: Social Science Press.
Talley, N & O'Connor, S. (1989). Clinical Examination – A Guide to
Physical Diagnosis Sydney: MacLennan & Petty.
Recommended Reading Clinical Pharmacology: Bisset, N. G.,
(ed.), Herbal Drugs and Phytopharmaceuticals, London, CRC Press.
Bone, K. 1996, Clinical Applications of Ayurvedic and Chinese
Herbs, Phytotherapy Press, Warwick Qld. K. Chan and L. Cheung,
2000, Interactions between Chinese herbal medicinal products and
orthodox drugs, Harwood Academic Publishers. Chang, H. M. and
But, P. P-H. (eds), 1987, Pharmacology and Applications of Chinese
Materia Medica, Vol. 1 and Vol. 2, World Scientific Publishing.
Duke, J. A., 1992, Handbook of Biologically Active Phytochemicals
and their Activities, London, CRC Press. Goyen, M., 1991, The
Australian Guide to Prescription Drugs, Reed Books, Balgowlah,
NSW. Harborne, J. B. and Baxter H. 1993, Phytochemical
Dictionary A Handbook of Bioactive. Huang, K. C. 1993, The
Pharmacology of Chinese Herbs, Boca Raton, CRC Press. Rang, R.
R. and Dale, M. M., 1991, Pharmacology, London, Churchill
Livingstone.
Subject Hours Clinical Pharmacology: The equivalent of two hours
per week for one semester comprising lectures and tutorials. Clinical
Features For Disease: The equivalent of two hours per week for one
semester comprising lectures and tutorials.
Assessment Clinical Pharmacology: One two hour examination
(50%); one written assignment of 2000 words (50%). Clinical
Features For Disease: Class tests of practical skills, assignments and
threshold tasks (60%); end of semester exam to assess understanding
of diagnostic methods and required knowledge (40%).
RMS5110 MOLECULAR GENETICS THEORY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content This subject will cover principles of and developments in
molecular biology, gene structure and function, and molecular
genetics. The theoretical component will include topics such as
prokaryotic and eukaryotic genome structure, multigene families,
genomic rearrangements including transposable elements,
methylation and imprinting of DNA and repair mechanisms. The
subject will also cover theoretical aspects of genetic engineering or
recombinant DNA technology such as plasmid biology, cloning
vectors and recombinant cloning strategies, and ethical concerns
related to these technologies.
Required Reading Watson, J.D., Baker, T.A., Bell, S.P., Gann,
A., Levine, M. & Losick, R.,2004, Molecular Biology of the Gene,
5th Edition, Benjamin-Cummings/Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory
Press, San Francisco, CA, USA.
Recommended Reading Klug, W.S. & Cummings, M.R., 2003,
Genetics: A Molecular Perspective, Pearson Education Inc., Upper
Saddle River, NJ, USA. Lewin, B., 2003, Genes VIII, 1st edn,
Prentice-Hall. Glick, B.R. & Pasternak, J.J., 2003, Molecular
Biotechnology: Principles and Applications of Recombinant DNA,
3rd edn, ASM Press, Washington, DC, USA.
Class Contact Three hours of class contact time per week
consisting of lectures and tutorials.
Assessment One assignment (3000 words, 50%); tests (5x15 min,
10%)and final examination (3 h, 40%).
RMS5120 APPLIED GENETIC ENGINEERING
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) or Co-requisite RMS5110 Molecular Genetics
Theory.
Content This subject will cover practical aspects of molecular
genetics and recombinant DNA technology. This will include more
practical aspects of topics covered in Molecular Genetics Theory
such as such as plasmid biology, cloning vectors and recombinant
cloning strategies, Northern and Southern blotting, PCR and DNA
sequencing. Applications of these techniques in plant, animal
biotechnology and in human applications will be discussed.
Required Reading Brown, T.A., 2001, Gene Cloning and DNA
Analysis, 4th edn, Blackwell Science Ltd, Oxford, UK. Glick, B.R. &
Pasternak, J.J., 2003, Molecular Biotechnology: Principles and
Applications of Recombinant DNA, 3rd edn, ASM Press,
Washington, DC, USA.
Recommended Reading Thieman, W., and Palladino M., 2004,
Introduction to Biotechnology. Benjamin and Cummin. Miesfeld, R.L.,
1999, Applied Molecular Genetics. Wiley-Liss Publications.
Class Contact Three hours per week practicals or workshops for
one semester.
Assessment Practical work (70%); One assignment (3000 words,
30%).
RMS5130 FUNCTIONAL GENOMICS AND BIOINFORMATICS THEORY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) or Corequisite Molecular Genetics
Content Topics covered include genome and proteome analysis,
expression analyses such as microarrays, proteome analysis such as
2-D electrophoresis, MALDI-TOF and ESI analysis. The bioinformatics
section will cover sequence analysis using worldwide databases
such as GenBank, EMBL and KEGG. It will examine how the
databases have been organized, what they contain and programs
available to analyse the data from them. Programs used for
sequence similarity searching, alignment of sequences, in silico PCR
primer design, translation and finding of protein motifs will be
examined.
Required Reading Campbell, A.M. & Heyer, L.J., 2003,
Discovering Genomics, Proteomics & Bioinformatics, Pearson
Education, Benjamin-Cummings, San Francisco, CA, USA.
Recommended Reading Primrose, S.B. & Twyman, R.M., 2003,
Principles of Genome Analysis and Genomics, 3rd edn, Blackwell
Publishing, Malden, MA, USA. Liebler, D.C., 2002, Introduction to
Proteomics. Humana Press, Inc. Totowa, NJ, USA. Kanehisa, M.,
2001, Post-Genome Informatics, Oxford University Press, Oxford,
UK.
Class Contact Three hours lectures/tutorials per week for one
semester.
Assessment One written assignment (3000 words, 30%); tests (5x
15min, 10%) and final examination (3 h, 60%)
RMS5135 FUNCTIONAL GENOMICS & BIOINFORMATICS
APPLICATIONS
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) or Corequisites Molecular Genetics Theory,
Functional Genomics & Bioinformatics Theory
Content This subject will complement the theoretical subject,
Functional Genomics and Bioinformatics Theory (which is a pre- or
co-requisite for this subject). It will consist of hands-on practicals or
workshops using data generated from genome and proteome
analysis experiments. The computer laboratory exercises will include
analysis of gene array data, sequence database searching using
data mining tools such as BLAST and FASTA, as well as analysis
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
362
tools such as ORF finder, Flip-Six-Frames, BestFit and ClustalW and
PCR-Prime. Structure-function relationships will also be examined in
selected proteins from the PDB database, and using programs such
as Rasmol, Chime or Protein Explorer.
Required Reading Campbell, A.M. & Heyer, L.J. Discovering
Genomics, Proteomics & Bioinformatics. Pearson Education,
Benjamin-Cummings, San Francisco, CA, USA (2003).
Recommended Reading Primrose, S.B. & Twyman, R.M., 2003,
Principles of Genome Analysis and Genomics, 3rd edn, Blackwell
Publishing, Malden, MA, USA. Sensen, C.W. (Ed), 2002, Genomics
and Bioinformatics, Wiley-VCH, Weinheim, Germany. Westermeier,
T. & Naven, T., 2002, Proteomes in Practice, Wiley-VCH, Freiburg,
Germany.
Class Contact Three hours of practical workshops or computer
sessions per week for one semester.
Assessment Practical exercises and reports (40%); assignment
(3000 words, 30%); final examination (2h, 30%).
RMS5140 BIOPROCESSING TECHNOLOGY PRINCIPLES
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Principles of biochemical engineering, material and energy
balance, fermentation technologies, bioreactor design and
applications, harvesting and purification of bioproducts, filtration
systems and commercial-scale applications of biological-based
systems.
Required Reading Shuler, M.L. & Kargi, F., 2002, Bioprocess
Engineering: Basic Concepts, 2nd edn, Prentice-Hall.
Recommended Reading Yang, X.H. & Tang, J., 2002,
Advances in Bioprocess Engineering, World Scientific Publications.
Class Contact Three hours per week of lectures/tutorials.
Assessment One assignments (3000 words, 30%); examination
(3h, 70%).
RMS5145 BIOPROCESSING TECHNOLOGY APPLICATIONS
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) or Co-requisite Bioprocessing Technology
Principles
Content Laboratory-scale experiments will be conducted that train
students in the areas of downstream processing, plant and algal
products, heat-exchange, fermentation, fluid flow, enzyme
engineering, biomass conversion and sustainable energy systems.
Required Reading Shuler, M.L. and Kargi, F., 2002, Bioprocess
Engineering: Basic Concepts, 2nd edn, Prentice – Hall Inc.
Recommended Reading Ratledge, C. & Kristiansen, B., 2001,
Basic Biotechnology, Cambridge University Press.
Class Contact three hours/week of laboratory practicals.
Assessment Laboratory reports (100%).
RMS5150 ETHICS AND REGULATORY AFFAIRS IN BIOTECHNOLOGY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content This unit will examine social and technical issues in
biotechnology from an ethical viewpoint. Environmental and human
impacts of genetic engineering will be discussed. The obligations to
patients and the community will be described in the regulations
governing manufacture and clinical trials of new drugs. Comparisons
will be made between drugs and devices, human and veterinary
products, and different national systems.
Required Reading Sana, L., 2002, Textbook of Research Ethics:
Theory and Practice, Kluver Academic Publishers.
Recommended Reading S-C. Chow & J-P. Liu, 2003, Design
and Analysis of Clinical Trials: Concepts and Methodology, 2nd
edn, John Wiley.
Websites for the US Food and Drug Administration, the European
Agency for the Evaluation of Medicinal Products, and the Australian
Therapeutic Goods Administration, and others, will be referred to
throughout this unit.
Class Contact. Three hours lectures per week for one semester.
Assessment One assignment (3000 words, 50%); final
examination (3h, 50%).
RMS5160 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY AND COMMERCIALISATION IN
BIOTECHNOLOG
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content This unit of study will examine the need for patent
protection, patent procedures in Australia, the USA and Europe, and
methods of patent searching. Laboratory practices needed in
protecting discoveries will be described, as well as the defence of
intellectual property (IP) rights. The various options for commercial
development will be compared, including licensing, partnerships,
and start-up companies. The problems of raising finance will be
demonstrated with the preparation of a business plan. Case studies
will be used to illustrate both IP and commercialisation issues, and all
students will prepare a business plan for a biotechnology product.
Required Reading Biotechnology Intellectual Property Manual.
Commonwealth of Australia (2001).
Williams, S. (2003) Lloyds TSB Small Business Guide, 17th edition.
Vitesse Media, PLC.
Recommended Reading Ernst & Young – Global Biotechnology
Report, 2002. Websites such as http://pctgazette.wipo.int,
http://www.derwent.co.uk, http://www.ipaustralia.gov.au, and
others will be utilised throughout this subject.
Class Contact Three hours per week lectures/tutorials for one
semester.
Assessment One assignment (3000 words, 50%); final
examination (3h, 50%).
RMS6130 BIOINFORMATICS I
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) or Corequisite(s) Molecular Genetics Theory,
Functional Genomics and Bioinformatics Theory, Functional
Genomics and Bioinformatics Workshops
Content Topics will include sequence alignment methods,
substitution scores and gap penalties, the HMM model, recognition
of motifs and patterns, phylogenetic data analysis and tree-building
methods, detection of functional sites in DNA such as ORFs and
CpG islands, folding classes in proteins, protein structure prediction
and homology modelling.
Required Reading Lesk, A.M., 2002, Introduction to
Bioinformatics, Oxford University Press, UK.
Recommended Reading Baxevanis, A. D. & Ouellette, B. F.,
2001, Bioinformatics: a Practical Guide to the Analysis of Genes
and Proteins, Wiley-Interscience, New York, USA. Krane, D.E. &
Raymer, M.L., 2003, Fundamental Concepts of Bioinformatics,
Benjamin-Cummings, San Francisco, CA, USA.
Class Contact Three hours per week of lectures and/or computer
laboratory for one semester.
Assessment Practicals and workshops (50%), tests (5 x 15min,
10%) and final examination (2 hours, 40%).
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
363
RMS6135 BIOINFORMATICS II
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) or Corequisite(s) Molecular Genetics Theory,
Functional Genomics & Bioinformatics Theory, Functional Genomics
& Bioinformatics Workshops, Bioinformatics I
Content Topics will include sequence assembly and finishing, large-
scale genome analysis, simple and integrated genome and proteome
circuits. In addition, examples of how the programming language,
Perl, is used for biological analysis will be examined, such as the use
of Perl modules and subroutines to find a common ancestor, splice
junction recognition and enzyme kinetics.
Required Reading Lesk, A.M., 2002, Introduction to
Bioinformatics, Oxford University Press, Oxford, UK.
Krane, D.E. & Raymer, M.L., 2003, Fundamental Concepts of
Bioinformatics, Benjamin-Cummings, San Francisco, CA, USA.
Recommended Reading Baxevanis, A. D. & Ouellette, B. F.,
2001, Bioinformatics: a Practical Guide to the Analysis of Genes
and Proteins, Wiley-Interscience, New York, USA. Tisdall, J., 2001,
Beginning Perl for Bioinformatics, O'Reilly & Associates.
Class Contact Three hours per week of lectures and/or tutorials
with some computer laboratory demonstrations.
Assessment Practicals and workshops (30%); tests (5 x 15 min,
10%) and final examination (3h, 60%).
RMS6140 CELL CULTURE AND FERMENTATION TECHNOLOGY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content This subject will provide students with knowledge in the
cultivation of microogranisms and higher eukaryotic cells at the
small-scale laboratory and commercial scales. This includes plant
culture, microbial fermentations and animal cell culture techniques.
Topics will include batch, fed-batch and continuous cultures and
bioreactors. The technology of stem cells will also be introduced and
ethical issues regarding these will be discussed.
Required Reading Bryce, C.F.A., 1999, Fermentation
Microbiology and Biotechnology, T&F STM.
Recommended Reading Butler, 2004, Animal Cell Culture and
Technology, 2nd edn, Bios Scientific Publications.
Freshney, R.I., 2000, Culture of Animal Cells: A Manual of Basic
Techniques, 4th edn, Wiley-Liss.
Sharp, J., Crowly, B.R., and Kwok K.H., 1995, Plant Cell Culture,
TAFE Productions.
Class Contact three hours/week comprising lectures and practical
work each alternate week.
Assessment Three practical reports (40%); final examination (3h,
60%).
RMS6141 ANIMAL AND PLANT BIOTECHNOLOGY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Molecular Genetics Theory.
Content This subject will provide an in-depth understanding of how
animal productivity and efficiency have been improved using
technology such as embryo transfer, embryo splitting, in vitro
fertilisation and cloning; principles of genetic engineering as applied
to a wide range of plant species including wheat, canola oil and soy
beans; use of transgenic technology to produce novel proteins and
other biomolecules for the pharmaceutical industry.
Required Reading Houdebine, L.M., 2003, Animal Transgenesis
and Cloning, John Wiley & Sons.
Slater, A., Scott, N.W. & Fowler, M.P., 2003, Plant Biotechnology:
The Genetic Manipulation of Plants, Oxford University Press.
Recommended Reading Kiessling, A.A. & Anderson, S.C.,
2003, Human Embryonic Stem Cells: An Introduction to the Science
and Therapeutic Potential, Jones & Bartlett Publications.
Lindsey, K., 1998, Transgenic Plant Research, T&F STM
Class Contact Class contact will be three hours per week for one
semester.
Assessment One assignment (3000 words, 30%); one test (20%)
and final examination (3h, 50%).
RMS6142 BIOTECHNOLOGY RESEARCH METHODS
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The content of this subject will include information on how
to write a literature review, information on how to source the most
appropriate techniques and methodology that are used in the
biotechnology industry and to provide a framework for formulating a
research proposal. Other items covered will include information on
the critical analysis of research papers, the importance of milestones
for the research project and an overview of statistical methods that
will be used to interpret the data. The subject will also include
information on preparing seminar presentations, on techniques for
preparing and presenting budgets and preparing ethic approval
applications.
Required Reading Ader, H.J. & Mellenbergh, G.J., 1999,
Research Methodology in the Social, Behavioural and Life Sciences :
Designs, Models and Methods, Sage Publications.
Recommended Reading Carey, S.S., 1997, A Beginner's Guide
to Scientific Method, Wadsworth Publishing.
Class Contact Class contact will be three hours per week including
lectures, tutorials and workshops for one semester.
Assessment Assessment for this subject will include two
assignments (2000 words each, 30% each), a seminar presentation
(15%) and a final examination (2h, 25%).
RMS6145 PROTEIN PRODUCTION, PURIFICATION & ANALYSIS
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Topics covered in the subject will include protein
production in mammalian, bacterial, yeast and insect cell expression
systems, protein purification and characterization using methods
such as SDS-PAGE, purification using affinity and ion-exchange
chromatography, protein crystallization, determination of protein
structure, principles of X-ray crystallography and NMR in
determining the structure of biological molecules including proteins.
Required Reading Switzer, R. L. & Garrity, L.F., 2000,
Experimental Biochemistry, W.H. Freeman & Co., New York, USA.
Wilson, K. & Walker, J. M., 2000, Principles and Techniques of
Practical Biochemistry, Cambridge University Press, New York, USA.
Recommended Reading Lesk, A., 2001, Introduction to Protein
Architecture: The Structural Biology of Proteins, Oxford University
Press.
Class Contact Three hours a week lectures, tutorials or practicals.
Assessment Practical reports (20%); one assignment (3000 words,
30%); final examination (3h, 50%).
RMS6170 DRUG DESIGN & DEVELOPMENT
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) First year undergraduate chemistry.
Content The concept of drugs and drug targets; drug action at
proteins, nucleic acids and receptors; structural considerations; drug
discovery, design and development; drug-target interactions;
pharmacokinetics and quantitative structure-activity relationships
(QSAR); combinatorial synthesis and computational chemistry in
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
364
medicinal chemistry; specific drugs such as antibacterials, opium
analgesics, etc.; case studies with respect to rational drug design.
Required Reading Patrick, G.L., 2001, An Introduction to
Medicinal Chemistry, 2nd edn, Oxford University Press Inc., N.Y.
USA.
Recommended Reading Leach, A.R., 2001, Molecular
Modelling, Principles and Applications, 2nd edn, Pearson Education
Ltd.
Hehre, W.J., 2003, A Guide to Molecular Mechanics and Quantum
Chemical Calculations by Wavefunction Inc.
Kaplan, L.A., Pesce, A.J. & Kazmierczak, S.C., 2003, Clinical
Chemistry, 4th edn, Mosby.
Class Contact Two hours lectures and one hour computer
laboratory per week for one semester.
Assessment One assignment (3000 words, 20%); one test (I h
each, 20% each) and final examination (3h, 60%).
RPK6001 DEVELOPMENT OF PACKAGING SYSTEMS
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The module consists of theories, overviews, calculations,
cases and assignments, etc. The student will be provided with new
theories as well with the application of formerly addressed theories.
The content will address: Management of packaging development
processes, involved disciplines and their activities, planning and
control; The packaging chain, most relevant issues, trends and
developments; Relevant legislation and the way to involve it into the
development process; Tools to be used in the development process;
Overview of principles of packaging equipment, accuracy, tooling,
conditions, efficiency, etc; Steps, activities, pitfalls in development
processes of packaging systems.
Required Reading Ten Klooster, R. Packaging Design. A
methodological development and simulation of the design process.
2002. Delft University of Technology, Delft, The Netherlands; Hand-
outs, books (to be advised by lecturer)
Recommended Reading Soroka, Walter. Fundamentals of
Packaging Technology. Revised UK Edition.1996. The Institute of
Packaging, Melton Mowbray, United Kingdom.
Class Contact 36 hours, equivalent to three hrs lecturing time per
week for one semester. Normally to be delivered in block residential
teaching modes.
Assessment Assignment: 50%; Presentation: 50%.
RPK6002 MARKETING RESEARCH
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The student is provided with the following concepts,
theories, technologies and opinions, etc.
Goals and limitations of marketing research; Different market
research techniques, such as qualitative and quantitative research,
desk research, field research; Researching of cost level feasibility in
the market; Product concept testing; In-home use testing; Nielsen-
store; Association techniques; Multi-attribute modeling; etc.
Required Reading Opatow, L. (1989). Marketing Research as a
Strategy tool, in Packaging Strategy, Meeting the Challenge of
Changing Times, Harckham, A.W. (Ed). Technomic Publishing Co.,
Lancaster, Penn., USA; Hand-outs, literature (to be advised by
lecturer).
Recommended Reading Kooiker, R. (2003). Marktonderzoek.
Wolters-Noordhoff, Groningen, the Netherlands.
Class Contact 27 hours, equivalent to two hrs lecturing time per
week for one semester. Normally to be delivered in block residential
teaching modes.
Assessment Written group assignment: 70%; Group presentation:
30 %.
RPK6003 COSTING METHODOLOGIES AND IMPACTS
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The subject provides insight in the following concepts,
theories, technologies and opinions, etc.
Historic and standard costs; Methods of cost classification; Cash
flow; Fixed and variable costs; Absorption and direct costing,
actively based costing; Cost interpretation; Cost price calculation.
Required Reading Zimmerman, Jerry. (2003). Accounting for
Decision Making and Control, fourth edition. Irwin/McGraw-Hill,
Boston, USA; Hand-outs, literature (to be advised by lecturer).
Class Contact 18 hours, normally equivalent to 1,5 hrs lecturing
time per week for one semester. Normally to be delivered in block
residential teaching modes.
Assessment Written assignment: 50%; Examination: 50 %.
RPK6004 INVESTMENT/CAPITAL ANALYSIS AND BUDGETING
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) The subject ‘Costing methodologies and impacts’ is
expected to have been studied (not necessarily successfully
completed).
Content The subject provides insight in a number of relevant
investment concepts, theories, technologies and opinions, such as:
Character of cash flow and cash flow analyses; Rating
methodologies: Net Present Value, Break-even, Payback and
discounted Payback Period, Average Return on Book Value of
Accounting Rate of Return, Internal Rate of Return, Profitability Index
of Present Value Ratio; Eight steps and four components of
investment decisions; Methodologies for understanding insecurities
and risks (such as Simulation and Scene-analyses); CAPM and
WACC; Project risks and returns.
Required Reading Brealy, Richard & Myers, Stewart. (2002).
Principles of corporate finance. McGraw-Hill. Boston, USA; Hand-
outs, cases (to be advised by lecturer).
Class Contact 27 hours, equivalent to two hrs lecturing time per
week for one semester. Normally to be delivered in block residential
teaching modes.
Assessment Examination: 100%.
RPK6005 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND MANAGEMENT
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) The subject ‘Costing methodologies and impacts’ is
expected to have been studied (not necessarily successfully
completed).
Content The following content will be delivered:
The concept of ‘quality’; Quality as an ability of products, processes
and organisation to perform as necessary; Principles of quality
management in the product realisation process (design, develop,
produce); Quality management models (such as EFQM,
ISO9001:2000); Quality improvement programs (such as Kaizen,
Six Sigma); The most common methods and techniques to control
and improve the quality of processes and organization; Quality
management in the supply chain.
Required Reading Oosterhoorn, A., Oosterhoorn, A.D. (2004).
111 instrumenten voor kwaliteitsverbetering. Kluwer, Deventer, the
Netherlands; Hand-outs, literature (to be advised by lecturer).
Class Contact 18 hours, 1,5 hrs lecturing time per week for one
semester. Normally to be delivered in block residential teaching
modes.
Assessment Case-study assignment: 100%.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
365
RPK6006 OPERATIONAL STRATEGIES
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Students have studied the following subjects:
Development of Packaging Systems, Costing methodologies and
Impacts, Investment/Capital Analysis and Budgeting, Business &
Marketing Strategies.
Content The subject provides insight in the following concepts,
theories, technologies and opinions, etc.:
Strategic operational issues; Strategic operational decision areas;
Horizontal and vertical concepts of integration; Ins and outs of make
or buy decisions; Strategic matters of quality control; Continuous and
discontinuous improvement processes; Competence building and
competence management.
Required Reading Johnston, Robert. Chambers, Stuart. Et.al.
(1997). Cases in Operations management. Financial Times
Management, London, United Kingdom; Hand-outs, literature (to be
advised by lecturer).
Class Contact 27 hours, normally equivalent to three hrs lecturing
time per week for one semester. Normally to be delivered in block
residential teaching modes.
Assessment Case study assignment, 100 %.
RPK6007 BUSINESS AND MARKETING STRATEGY
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) The student has studied the following subjects:
Investment/Capital Analyses and Budgeting, Marketing research.
Content The following content (theory, content, discussion, cases)
will be delivered:
Trends in external environment on macro- and meso-level; Models of
Porter and Kottler; Operational, tactical and strategic planning;
SWOT-analysis, GAP-analysis; Key-inputs; Port folio-analysis
including product-life-cycle influences; Competition vs. ‘the rules of
the game’; Needs analysis.
Required Reading Urban, Glenn L., Hauser, John R. (1993).
Design and Marketing of New Products. Prentice Hall, Englewood
Cliffs, NJ, USA; Hand-outs, literature (to be advised by lecturer).
Class Contact 27 hours, equivalent to two hrs lecturing time per
week for one semester. Normally to be delivered in block residential
teaching modes.
Assessment Written assignment: 100%.
RPK6008 PACKAGING STRATEGY DEVELOPMENT AND
IMPLEMENTATION
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Being the cap-stone subject it is required that
students have studied the subjects of: Development of Packaging
Systems, Marketing Research, Costing Methodologies,
Investment/Capital Analysis and Budgeting, Quality Assurance and
Management, Operational Strategies, Business and Marketing
Strategy.
Content The subject examines existing concepts, theories and
opinions on the development and implementation of corporate
packaging policies and related strategies. New theories will be
explored, discussed and assessed.
The subject will focus on the applicability of formerly addressed
theories on packaging issues. For instance:
The direct correlation of packaging strategy with the character and
philosophy of the company and target market as well as with the
anticipated technological and societal developments; Different
disciplines of packaging policy; The relation of packaging policy to
marketing, finance, operations and internal and external
environment; Case presentations.
Required Reading Olsmats, C. The Business Mission of
Packaging, Packaging as a Strategic Tool for Business Development
towards the Future. PhD Thesis, 2002. Abo Akademi University
Press, Abo, Finland; Hand-outs, cases (to be advised by lecturer).
Recommended Reading Doyle, Mona (ed). (1996). Packaging
Strategy: winning the consumer. Technomic, Lancaster, UK.
Class Contact 36 hours, equivalent to three hrs lecturing time per
week for one semester. Normally to be delivered in block residential
teaching modes.
Assessment Written group assignment,70 %; Group presentation,
30 %.
RPK6009 DEVELOPMENT PROJECT/MINOR THESIS (OFFSHORE)
Campus The Netherlands
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content To be advised by Lecturer.
Required Reading To be advised by Lecturer.
Class Contact To be advised by Lecturer.
Assessment To be advised by Lecturer.
VCC8001/8001 RESEARCH THESIS (FULL-TIME, SEM1/2)
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The subject will enable students to: identify a research
problem and critically review the relevant literature; determine
appropriate methods to study the problem; collect, and analyse
data, and generate results using suitable statistical and analytical
techniques; draw conclusions, critically evaluate the process
undertaken and make recommendations for future research and for
practice; present the results of the research undertaken, both clearly
and accurately in a written thesis. The research topic chosen will
allow the candidate to develop a methodology and to apply it to an
appropriate problem or situation. The thesis will normally be from
15,000 to 25,000 words. It will report on independently conducted
research which demonstrates the student’s ability to clearly define a
problem, to undertake a detailed literature search and review the
literature on the topic area. The student shall also demonstrate both
the ability to develop and/or apply models to study the problem and
good data selection, collection and analysis skills. Students will
normally be supervised by an academic member of the Department
of Civil and Building Engineering and by a joint supervisor external
to the Department. The external supervisor will be an academic from
another Department of Victoria University or from another institution
or an industry practitioner.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Twelve hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Before commencing actual research, students must
complete, to the satisfaction of the research supervisor, a paper
critically reviewing the literature and providing a clear outline of the
proposed research methodology to complete the thesis. The final
thesis will be assessed by two examiners with expertise in the area
of the research. These examiners may be internal or external to the
Department or the institution and will not include the supervisors.
Students may be asked to present themselves for oral or written
examination by these examiners, at the examiners’ discretion. Each
examiner will independently recommend one of the following
outcomes to his/her assessment of the thesis; (a) pass without further
examination; (b) pass, subject to corrections to the satisfaction of the
Department’s Research and Graduate Studies Committee; (c)
candidate to pass a written or oral examination to pass thesis; (d)
deferred for resubmission after major revision; (e) fail. In the event
that there is disagreement between the examiners, a third examiner
will be appointed.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
366
VCC8011/8012 RESEARCH THESIS (PART-TIME, SEMESTER 1/2)
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The subject will enable students to: identify a research
problem and critically review the relevant literature; determine
appropriate methods to study the problem; collect, and analyse
data, and generate results using suitable statistical and analytical
techniques; draw conclusions, critically evaluate the process
undertaken and make recommendations for future research and for
practice; present the results of the research undertaken, both clearly
and accurately in a written thesis. The research topic chosen will
allow the candidate to develop a methodology and to apply it to an
appropriate problem or situation. The thesis will normally be from
15,000 to 25,000 words. It will report on independently conducted
research which demonstrates the student’s ability to clearly define a
problem, to undertake a detailed literature search and review the
literature on the topic area. The student shall also demonstrate both
the ability to develop and/or apply models to study the problem and
good data selection, collection and analysis skills. Students will
normally be supervised by an academic member of the School of the
Built Environment and by a joint supervisor external to the
Department. The external supervisor will be an academic from
another Department/School at Victoria University or from another
institution or an industry practitioner.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Six hours per week for two semesters.
Assessment Before commencing actual research, students must
complete, to the satisfaction of the research supervisor, a paper
critically reviewing the literature and providing a clear outline of the
proposed research methodology to complete the thesis. The final
thesis will be assessed by two examiners with expertise in the area
of the research. These examiners may be internal or external to the
School or the institution and will not include the supervisors. Students
may be asked to present themselves for oral or written examination
by these examiners, at the examiners’ discretion. Each examiner will
independently recommend one of the following outcomes to his/her
assessment of the thesis: (a) pass without further examinations; (b)
pass, subject to corrections to the satisfaction of the School’s
Research and Graduate Studies Committee; (c) candidate to pass a
written or oral examination to pass thesis; (d) deferred for
resubmission after major revision; (e) fail. In the event that there is
disagreement between the examiners, a third examiner will be
appointed.
VCC8040 PROJECT WORK (FULL-TIME)
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The subject enables students to: identify a project problem
and critically review relevant literature; determine appropriate
methods to study the problem; collect, and analyse data, and
generate results using suitable statistical and analytical techniques;
draw conclusions, critically evaluate the process undertaken and
make recommendations for future research and for practice; present
the results of the project undertaken, both clearly and accurately in a
written report. The report topic chosen will allow the candidate to
develop a methodology and to apply it to an appropriate problem or
situation. The report will normally be from 8000 to 15,000 words. It
will detail the problem, relevant literature, analysis conducted,
conclusions and recommendations. Students will be supervised by an
academic member of staff and where appropriate by a supervisor
from another institution or from industry.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Six hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Assessment will be by project work and report.
VCP5600 PROJECT MANAGEMENT FUNDAMENTALS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The subject will introduce and define project management
as applicable to the concept, development design and
documentation, construction and maintenance, of buildings and to
introduce participants to Project Management – the emerging
profession. The subject examines the following topics. Introduction to
Project Management: PM in building industry; definitions of the
Management and Project Management. Construction industry in
economy and the building industry; the building process in private
sector. Structure of building industry – historically and the current
trends; managerial perspective; trend towards construction/project
management. Analytical model of building industry: operational
model of building industry, urban geography and Australia – bird’s
eye view. Building process in public sector; past history and current
trends in management of public projects. Comparison of
performance public/private sectors; overview of future
developments. The interrelationship between owner, developer,
financial sources, designers and contractors. Government body as
owner/developer; invest financiers as owner/users. Government
control and regulations applicable to buildings. (New BCA.) Role
and task of functional activities of project managers: setting of
project objectives; feasibility analysis; setting of budget; control of
contract time and quality; risk apportionment between various
parties. Design to user requirements: planning for life-cycle of the
facility; management of small to medium size projects; role
descriptions of project manager, architect, consultants and owners.
Environmental and social constraints. Preparation EIS for building
development project. Case studies illustrating the various aspects of
project management.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading International Journal of Project
Management. Adams, J.R. and Campbell, B.W., Roles and
Responsibilities of the Project Manager. Bennett, J., Construction
Project Management. Bennett, J., Flanagan, R. and Norman, G.,
Japanese Construction Industry. Dell’Isola, A.J. and Cus, P.E., Value
Engineering in the Construction Industry. Fellows, R., Longford, D.,
Newcombe, R. and Urry, S. 1983, Cost Planning of Buildings, 5th
edn. Forster, G. 1981, Construction Site Studies – Prediction,
Administration and Personnel. Kerzner, M., Project Management – A
Systems Approach to Planning, Scheduling and Controlling. Nesbit,
J., Megatrends 2000. O’Brien, J., Value Analysis in Design and
Construction. Wearne, S.H., Control of Engineering Projects.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Assignments, 20%; group project, 40%; examination,
40%. Students must attain a mark of 50% in each assessable
component to pass this subject. Supplementary assessment will not
be available.
VCP5610 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PLANNING AND CONTROL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VCP5600 Project Management Fundamentals
(normally).
Content The subject will review the development process of a
project from its inception through to feasibility and go-ahead
decision; detail design documentation, construction commissioning
and life cycle planning; evaluate the role and function of Project
Management in this process; explain the purpose and to detail the
theoretical basis of various techniques used for planning and
managing the building process. The subject content includes:
Systems approach to project planning; basic principles and theory of
systems analysis; current trends in community project planning.
Overview of subject and introduction to project. Management of a
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
367
‘Public Interest Project’. Preparation of financial feasibility of a
building project: factors involved, issues to be considered at concept
stage; introduction of a case study. Capital decision making for
project managers; cost concepts and cost factors. Project control and
cost planning at feasibility and design stage. Cost versus quality
assurance. Project control during construction phase; breakdown of
the project for estimating, budgeting and financial control; project
term planning; networks and other scheduling techniques; resource
levelling; line of balance concepts. Project cost planning and control
in public sector; pre-construction cost control, construction cost
control; N.P.W.C. cost control method: data support system to cover
– contingency, indexation and methods of monitoring and reporting.
Project team planning: duties and responsibilities of the project
manager. Planning techniques for high rise building construction,
multi-activity chart; principles of production engineering applied to
repetitive processes in building construction; special problems of
high-rise design and construction. Principles of decision analysis;
review of mathematical theory; application to decision process under
uncertainty. Value engineering concepts and its application to
building design and construction; application of value analysis in
project management. Role and responsibilities of client’s member on
P.M. team; risk sharing at various stages of project between the
parties involved in the process; role of P.M. in client awareness of
risks and rewards.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Adams, J.R. and Campbell, B.W., Roles
and Responsibilities of the Project Manager. Bennett, J., Construction
Project Management. Bennett, J., Flanagan, R. and Norman, G.,
Japanese Construction Industry. Dell’Isola, A.J. and Cus, P.E., Value
Engineering in the Construction Industry. Fellows, R., Longford, D.,
Newcombe, R. and Urry, S. 1983, Cost Planning of Building, 5th
edn. Forster, G. 1981, Construction Site Studies – Prediction,
Administration and Personnel. Kerzner, M., Project Management – A
Systems Approach to Planning, Scheduling and Controlling. Nesbit,
J., Megatrends 2000. O’Brien, J., Value Analysis in Design and
Construction. Wearne, S.H., Control of Engineering Projects.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment One major group project, 40%; two individual
assignments, 20%; examination, 40%. Students must attain a mark
of 50% in each assessable component to pass this subject.
Supplementary assessment will not be available.
VCP5620 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND CONTRACTS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VCP5600 Project Management Fundamentals
(normally).
Content The subject will develop an understanding and
appreciation of management environment in Australia; evaluate
current state of standard forms of contracts and its relevance to
procurement of buildings by project management techniques. The
subject examines formal organisational structures; role of project
manager. Evaluation of managerial thought; management process –
human and organisational aspect; human behaviour in
organisations; current trends in organisational structure; comparison
of U.S. and Australian management scene; overview of Australian
management trends in construction industry. An introductory
examination of the Australian legal system. The role of Parliaments
and the process of passing and the effect of legislation. The authority
and the hierarchy of the Courts. General principles of contract law.
An examination of the new draft form of AS2124 form of contract
and the JCC form of contract. A comparison of standard forms of
contract. An outline of the law relating to the principles concerning
project management. Examination of the different types of project
management. Formation of a contract. Terms of a contract.
Avoidance. Discharge of a contract. Remedies. Quantum merit.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Carroll, D.T. 1983, ‘A disappointing
search for excellence’, HBR, Nov-Dec. Dinsmore, P.C. 1984, Human
Factors in Project Management, Amacom, New York. Drucker, P.F.
1989, ‘Management and the world’s work’, HBR, Sep-Oct.
Gellerman, S.W. 1989, ‘Why ‘good’ managers make bad ethical
choices’, HBR, Jul-Aug. Hurst, D.K. 1984, ‘Of boxes, bubbles and
effective management’, HBR, May-June. Kanter, R.M. 1991,
‘Championing change: an interview with Bell Atlantic’s CEO
Raymond Smith, HBR Jan-Feb. Klein, J.A. 1984, ‘Why superiors
resist employee involvement’, HBR, Sep-Oct. Kotter, J.P. 1990,
‘What leaders really do’, HBR, May-June. Mintzberg, H. 1981,
‘Organisation design: fashion or fit’, HBR, Jan-Feb. Peace, W.H.
1986, ‘I thought I knew what good management was’, HBR, Mar-
Apr. Peter, L.J. and Hull, R. 1970, The Peter Principle, Pan Books,
London. Peters, T. 1988, Thriving on Chaos, Pan Books, London.
Purcell, T.V. 1980, ‘Reprise of ethical investors’, HBR, Mar-Apr.
Quinn, J.B. 1985, ‘Managing innovation: controlled chaos’, HBR,
May-June. Quinn Mills, D. 1985, ‘Planning with people in mind,
HBR, July-Aug. Robbins, S.P. 1983, Organisation Theory: The
Structure and Design of Organisations, Prentice Hall, Engelwood
Cliffs, New Jersey. Runcie, J.C. 1980, ‘By days I make cars’, HBR,
May-June. Shashkin, M. and Morris, W.C. 1984, Organisational
Behaviour, Concepts and Experiences, Reston Publishing Company,
Reston, Virginia. Skinner, W. 1981, ‘Big hat, no cattle: managing
human resources’, HBR, Sep-Oct. Stevenson, H.H. and Gumpert,
D.E. 1985, ‘The heart of entrepreneurship’, HBR, Mar-Apr. Tichy, N.
and Charan, R. 1989, ‘Speed, simplicity, self-confidence: an
interview with Jack Welch’, HBR Sep-Oct. Uyterhoeven, H. 1989,
‘General managers in the middle’, HBR, Sep-Oct. Walton, R.E.
1985, ‘From control to commitment in the workplace’, HBR, Mar-
Apr. Wrapp, H.E. 1967, ‘Good managers do not make policy
decision’, HBR, Sep-Oct, reprinted Jul-Aug, 1984. Wuthnow, R.
1982, ‘The moral crisis in American capitalism, HBR, Mar-Apr.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment By assignments and projects and class participation.
Assignment 1, 30%; exercises and assignments, 60%; class
participation, 10%. Students must attain a mark of 50% in each
assessable component to pass this subject. Supplementary
assessment will not be available.
VCP5705 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content This subject will develop students’ skills in the use of a
number of software packages in the areas of General Project
Management Information Systems and Specialised Project
Management Information Systems. Students will gain appreciation of
where computer packages can aid the project management process
for feasibility and sensitivity analysis, planning and monitoring and
information processing and decision support functions. The subject
content includes the decision to computerise, hardware and software
procurement considerations, current computer usage in this industry;
overview of computer hardware and software, current computer
trends; overview of Project Management Information Systems
(spreadsheet/financial modelling, planning and resource control,
Data Base Management Systems (DBMS), and 4th Generation
Languages (4GLs)); detailed investigation of at least two software
packages from item above; managing change and introduction of
computers, the machine/human interface, training and installation
problems and opportunities simulation modelling as an alternative to
traditional, activity based management systems; trends in CAD and
its impact on Project Management; quality control and Project
Management Information Systems.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
368
Recommended Reading Construction Computing Journal,
Chartered Institute of Building, UK. The Australian Project Manager
Journal, The Australian Institute of Project Management. Australian
Personal Computing. Australian PC-WORLD. Australian PC-USER.
Curtin, D.P., Microcomputers (Software and Applications), Prentice
Hall International Editions. Long, L. and Long, N., Microcomputers,
Prentice Hall International Editions. Software Manuals.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Individual assignment, 15%; group assignment
presentation, 5%; report, 40%; examination, 40%. Students must
attain a mark of 50% in each assessable component to pass this
subject. Supplementary assessment will not be available.
VCP5716 PROJECT DEVELOPMENT ANALYSIS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The subject will develop skills and techniques to asses and
manage building property and to appreciate the role and objectives
of developers and property managers. Subject content examines
Management of property in the economy: An overview: typology of
property relationship between project management and Property
Management. Feasibility and economic issues in development of
property: Elements of a property development feasibility study.
Parameters of property investment. Decisions including market
analysis and financial evaluation techniques. Property investment
criteria and considerations. Management of the development
process (a client perspective): client briefing; formation of project
team; design management, construction and financial management,
project marketing. Financial feasibility – Case study and methods of
evaluation. Law and property management – Strata titles; standard
mortgage clauses; standard lease agreements. Land valuation and
techniques for valuing property. Market survey and predictions –
impact of macro-economic conditions on decisions to develop;
marketing of space. Sources of finance, taxation, cash flow and
forms of ownership. Management of leasehold, rental and home unit
properties. Shopping centre development and management.
Computer applications on financial feasibility analysis. Insurance,
obsolescence, maintenance and replacement considerations.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Cooper, P., Real Estate Investment –
Strategy, Analysis and Decisions, 2nd edn, Watford. Fellows, R. et
al, Cost Planning of Buildings. Hutchenson, J.M., Property
Development and Management, University of N.S.W., Land
Economics Review, Department of Land Economics, University of
Technology, Sydney. Rost, R.O. and Collins, H.G., Land Valuation
and Compensation in Australia.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Assignments, 15%; group project, 45%; examination,
40%. Students must attain a mark of 50% in each assessable
component to pass this subject. Supplementary assessment will not
be available.
VCP5726 PROJECT PROCUREMENT MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The subject will develop an understanding of modern
building technology with respect to build-ability and user-ability, by
examining both construction material interaction and the effect of
design criteria on the final quality of the building. The subject content
provides an overview of modern technology and the problems that
have arisen from it, the lessons to be learned from them and how to
try and avoid similar pitfalls in the future. Examine the sources of
literature and research material relating to building construction.
Examine modern building materials and the problems that are being
encountered in their use, including concrete, cement sheet,
brickwork, etc. Modern design – current considerations and modern
technology including the use of computer based design methods.
Building materials and their modern usage, including aluminium,
steel and plastics; looking at usage and cost considerations. Low
energy buildings, solar energy. Earth covered construction,
membrane structures. Modern formwork systems. Fire protection
approach to building. On-site considerations. Material handling –
crane, hoists, concrete control, concrete pumping and mix design
criteria, safety factors and cost implications. Modern construction
techniques.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Astill, A.W. and Martin, L.H., Materials
of Construction, Longman. Chudley, R., Construction Technology
Vols 1-2, Longman. Everett, A., Mitchells Building Construction,
Batsford. Foster, H., Structure of Fabrics, Batsford. Ryder, G.H.,
Building Construction, MacMillan. Stround, F.J., Structure and Fabric
Vol 1, Batsford. Victorian Timber Framing Manual, Timber Promotion
Council. Ward, H., Fundamental Building Materials, University of
NSW Selected Notes on the Science of Building, EBS (NSW).
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Assignments, 15%; group project, 45%; examination,
40%. Students must attain a mark of 50% in each assessable
component to pass this subject. Supplementary assessment will not
be available.
VCP5736 FACILITY LIFE CYCLE COSTING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content A description of and the need for consideration of lifecycle
costing; maintainability and efficiency. Terotechnology: why we
need to use terotechnology in building industry; economic and
technical factors – measures of performance; present state of
knowledge. An integrated treatment of design, specification,
construction use, maintenance and re-use phases for building and
the effect on the life-cycle costs of the building. Discounting theory.
Time value of money; discounting formulae; inflation; depreciation,
taxation; before and after-tax project return; evaluation methods for
economy studies. Theory of life-cycle cost optimisation. Basis of
theoretical analysis of costs; total life-cost concepts; maintenance
costs and capital costs; energy costs and capital costs; taxation and
other factors; constraints; technical and others. Practice of life-cycle
cost optimisation. Case study; practical issues; introduction; outline
of factors to be considered in building obsolescence and
refurbishment; market aspects; physical aspects and limitations;
authorities and regulatory constraints; economic constraints.
Measurement and the assessment of utilisation of resources during
each phase of the building process. Design phase (including brief
documentation); construction phase; functional (occupational) life; re-
evaluation as to refurbish or demolish phase. Asset management
using an integrated planning and budgeting approach. Need for an
integrated system; provision of funds at regular intervals and/or in
emergency situations; fabric of building and other services; total
assets management; case-studies – Latrobe system, others.
Operational control. Control systems; identification of effective,
preventive and remedial measures. Establishment of a maintenance
policy. Preventive maintenance; corrective maintenance; records and
register for maintenance as a control tool; accounting and costs
records and audits. Degradation of buildings. Identification of
maintenance approaches for building structure, fabric, equipment
and plant; nature and causes of degradation. Information and
management systems. Building services supervisory system;
description Local Monitoring and Control Systems (LMCS); Central
Supervisory Systems (CSS). Building engineering services information
and management systems; functions; commercially available
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
369
packages; selection, evaluation of benefits. Case study presentation
and review.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Bromilow, F.J. 1981, Building
Maintainability and Efficiency – Research and Practice, CSIRO Div.
Bldg. Res., Highett. Bromilow, F.J., Dwyer, P.W., Pawsey, M.R.,
Taylor, R.J. and Tucker, S.N. 1984, A National System for Building
Life Cycle Cost Data Recording, NCRB, Highett. Culvenor, R.G. and
Dwyer, P.W. 1981, Standard Terminology for Building Maintenance
Management in Australia, CSIRO Div. Bldg. Res., Highett. Dell’Isola,
A.J. and Kirk, S.J. 1982, Life Cycle Costing for Design Professionals,
McGraw Hill, New York. Flanagan, R. and Norman, G. 1984, Life
Cycle Costing for Construction, Surveyors Publications, London.
Manuel, C.M., Paul, V.D. and Joseph, J.D., Value of Management
for Construction, Wiley Publications, New York. Morrow, L.C. 1966,
Maintenance Engineering Handbook, McGraw Hill, New York.
Pilcher, R. 1973, Appraisal and Control of Project Costs, McGraw
Hill, London. Schofield, C.G., Computers in Maintenance
Management, IES Publications, Sydney. Seeley, I.H. 1976, Building
Maintenance, Macmillan, London. Wright, M.G., Discounted Cash
Flow, McGraw Hill Book Co.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Assignment, 20%; group project, 40%; examination,
40%. Students must attain a mark of 50% in each assessable
component to pass this subject. Supplementary assessment will not
be available.
VCP5745 BUILDING REGULATORY MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The subject will develop a suitable background and
understanding of by-laws and regulations that apply to building
activities in Victoria. Subject content includes authorities controlling
building activities; role and function of the building surveyors;
contents and interpretation of various by-laws and regulations
governing building activities such as: Local Government Acts,
Building Code of Australia, Water and Sewerage Acts, Health Act,
Labour and Industry Act, Lifts and Crane Act, Scaffolding Act,
Environmental Protection Act, By-laws governing fire protection,
Strata and Cluster Titles Act, Housebuilder’s liability, Land use and
development strategy, Guide to administrative procedures, Planning
guidelines, Townscape and heritage considerations, Checklist of
requirements in a major development, The role of various
professional disciplines. General introduction to BC Act. Definitions.
Relationship to other Acts, new Acts. Building Approvals process.
Introduction to BCA, Part A. Classes of buildings Parts C, D, F and
G. Accreditation: Protection of adjoining property. Enforcement.
BCA and plan check. Fire as hazard to life and property. Overview
of current knowledge in fire start and spread in buildings. Overview
of fire safety and regulations in Australia; current practices in
regulation and building control; fire safety in new proposed Code.
Overview of planning schemes in Victoria. Need for a Uniform
Planning Scheme; need for optimisation of planning process. Local
Government planning officials’ views on a rational new system;
industry perception of the planning system’s current operation;
possibility of planning being accomplished by certification.
International – scene and practice – what can we learn from it.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Various By-laws and Regulations.
Building Code of Australia. Site Health and Safety Manual,
M.B.A.V.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Assignments, 20%; examination, 70%; class
participation, 10%. Students must attain a mark of 50% in each
assessable component to pass this subject. Supplementary
assessment will not be available.
VCP5800 TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VCP5600 Project Management Fundamentals
(normally).
Content To equip participants in the subject with basic requirements
of a telecommunications project and provide an understanding of
differences between generic and telecom project management:
Telecommunications trends and practice. ITU standards.
Management of Telecommunications infrastructure projects. Landline
projects. Wireless projects. Telecommunications services projects
management. Software-based projects. Data and IP services projects.
Telecommunications project initiation. Project life cycle.
Telecommunications laws and regulations. Tender and contract
management. Requirements and change management. Quality
control, compativility and interconnection requirements. Risk analysis
and amangement. Project integration management. Testing and
telecommunications network management.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Pruitt, J.B., Telecommunications Project
Management (Intertec Pub. Corp./Telephony). Terplan, K.,
Communication Networks Management, 2nd edn, Prentice Hall.
Spohn, D.L., Data Network Design, McGraw Hill, International
Telecommunication Union TSS Recommendations.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Assignments, 20%; group project, 40%; examination,
40%. Students must attain a mark of at least 50% in each assessable
component to pass this subject.
VDS8100 FOUNDATIONS OF KNOWLEDGE IN ENGINEERING &
SCIENCE
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Beijing.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The subject introduces students to concepts and procedures
associated with sources of knowledge. In particular, it considers
empiricism, which attempts to describe, explain and make
predictions based on observations of the real world. It will deal with
the collection of valid and appropriate data relevant to specific
research questions, and will explore, at an advanced level, a range
of qualitative and quantitative methodologies.
Required Reading Dependent on students area of professional
expertise.
Recommended Reading Nil.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester or
equivalent.
Assessment Examination(3 hour), 50%; Individual Research
Project and presentation, 25%; Group Research Project and
presentation, 25%.
VDS8110 STRATEGY AND INNOVATION IN ENGINEERING & SCIENCE
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Beijing.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Leading engineers and scientists use strategic decision
making to find innovative solutions to current problems, to clarify
conflicting priorities and evaluate new opportunities and to
streamline and focus research activities. The subject is designed to
examine current issues associated with key facets of strategy and
innovation., including the strategic decision making process,
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
370
information technology support and approaches to innovation
adoption.
Required Reading Dependent on students area of professional
expertise.
Recommended Reading Nil.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester or
equivalent.
Assessment Examination(3 hour), 50%; Individual Research
Project and presentation, 25%; Group Research Project and
presentation, 25%.
VDS8120 PROJECT AND PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Beijing.
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Project and performance management combines the study
of the planning, co-ordination and completion of complex projects
with the scientific study and application of knowledge concerning the
measurement of performance, its use in decision making and
demonstrating accountability. The subject is designed to examine
current issues associated with key facets of project and performance
management and the role of the professional engineer and scientist
in project and performance management. Focus will be on the legal,
ethical and cost effectiveness of major technological research
projects.
Required Reading Dependent on students area of professional
expertise.
Recommended Reading Nil.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester or
equivalent.
Assessment Examination(3 hour), 50%; Individual Research
Project and presentation, 25%; Group Research Project and
presentation, 25%.
VDS8200 PROFESSIONAL STUDIES 1 IN ENGINEERING & SCIENCE
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Beijing.
Prerequisite(s) VDS8100 Foundations of Knowledge in
Engineering & Science, VDS8110 Strategy and Innovation in
Engineering & Science.
Content The subject introduces students to concepts and procedures
associated with sources of knowledge in their field of expertise. In
particular, it considers empiricism, which attempts to describe,
explain and make predictions based on observations of the real
world. It will deal with the collection of valid and appropriate data
relevant to specific research questions in their field of expertise, and
will explore, at an advanced level, a range of qualitative and
quantitative methodologies.
Required Reading Dependent on students area of professional
expertise.
Recommended Reading Nil.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester or
equivalent.
Assessment Examination(3 hour), 50%; Individual Research
Project and presentation, 25%; Group Research Project and
presentation, 25%.
VDS8210 PROFESSIONAL STUDIES 2 IN ENGINEERING & SCIENCE
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Beijing.
Prerequisite(s) VDS8100 Foundations of Knowledge in
Engineering & Science, VDS8110 Strategy and Innovation in
Engineering & Science
Content The subject introduces students to concepts and procedures
associated with sources of knowledge in their field of expertise. In
particular, it considers empiricism, which attempts to describe,
explain and make predictions based on observations of the real
world. It will deal with the collection of valid and appropriate data
relevant to specific research questions in their field of expertise, and
will explore, at an advanced level, a range of qualitative and
quantitative methodologies.
Required Reading Dependent on students area of professional
expertise.
Recommended Reading Nil.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester or
equivalent.
Assessment Examination(3 hour), 50%; Individual Research
Project and presentation, 25%; Group Research Project and
presentation, 25%.
VEA6300 MAJOR PROJECT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEA6310, VEA6320
Content Each student will undertake an individual research under
the guidance of an academic staff on a suitable topic, over the
duration of a semester. Lectures, seminars, and regular meetings will
be held collectively to expose students to research related matters
such as Research Methodology, Literature Reviews, Feasibility
Studies, Experiment Design, Modelling and Simulation Techniques
and Tools, Results Validation and Decision Making, Report Writing,
Structured Documentation, and Scientific Presentation.
Required Reading To be advised by the supervisor of the project.
Recommended Reading To be advised by the supervisor of the
project.
Class Contact Twelve hours per week for one semester, comprising
three hours per week group seminar, three hours per week (on
average) individual meetings, discussions, etc. with the respective
supervisors, and six hours per week independent study.
Assessment Regular seminar presentations (3 seminars, each of
20 min. duration) 30%; Final report (Approximately 25,000 words)
50%; Final presentation (of 40 min. duration) 20%. Final report is to
be examined by an external examiner who could also be present at
the final presentation.
VDS8220 RESEARCH PROPOSAL PREPARATION AND WRITING
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Beijing.
Prerequisite(s) VDS8120 Project and Performance Management.
Content The subject introduces students to the issues involved in the
production of research in technological fields. It will enhance
knowledge, personal skills and competencies in conducting research
in the broad engineering and science setting. Topics include:
conceptualisation of research problems, theoretical formulation and
contextualisation, problems and pitfalls in research development,
analysis of past research, operationalisation of research problems to
test hypotheses, measurement and levels of measurement,
procedures for data collection, analysis and presentation, report
writing and dissemination of research findings. It is an activity based
subject that includes the appointment of a provisional supervisor and
the production of a research proposal.
Required Reading Dependent on students area of professional
expertise.
Recommended Reading Nil.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester or
equivalent.
Assessment Presentation of the research proposal at a peer review
seminar 100%.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
371
VDS8300 ENGSCD DISSERTATION
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Beijing.
Prerequisite(s) Completion of coursework component of EngScD.
Content The uncovering of new knowledge either by the discovery
of new facts, the formulation of theories or the innovative
reinterpretation of known data and established ideas. The final thesis
is expected to be well written and to reveal an independence of
thought and approach, a deep knowledge of the field of study and
to have made a significant original contribution to knowledge.
Required Reading Dependent on students area of professional
expertise.
Recommended Reading Nil.
Class Contact Not applicable.
Assessment Dissertation(approximately 60,000 words), 100%.
VDS8310 RESEARCH PROJECT A
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Beijing.
Prerequisite(s) Completion of coursework component of EngScD.
Content Students under supervision are expected to analyse and
report on data or information collected during the research phase,
and to explore the implications of the study for theory and practice in
some aspect of engineering and science.
Required Reading Dependent on students area of professional
expertise.
Recommended Reading Nil.
Class Contact Not applicable.
Assessment Research Project( approximately 30,000 words),
100%.
VDS8315 RESEARCH PROJECT B
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Beijing.
Prerequisite(s) Completion of coursework component of EngScD.
Content Students under supervision are expected to analyse and
report on data or information collected during the research phase,
and to explore the implications of the study for theory and practice in
some aspect of engineering and science.
Required Reading Dependent on students area of professional
expertise.
Recommended Reading Nil.
Class Contact Not applicable.
Assessment Research Project( approximately 30,000 words),
100%.
VDS8316 RESEARCH PROJECT C
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Beijing.
Prerequisite(s) Completion of coursework component of EngScD.
Content Students under supervision are expected to analyse and
report on data or information collected during the research phase,
and to explore the implications of the study for theory and practice in
some aspect of engineering and science.
Required Reading Dependent on students area of professional
expertise.
Recommended Reading Nil.
Class Contact Not applicable.
Assessment Research Project( approximately 25,000 words),
100%.
VDS8320 RESEARCH PAPER A
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Beijing.
Prerequisite(s) Completion of coursework component of EngScD.
Content The paper will report on independently conducted research
that demonstrates the students ability to clearly define and conclude
an engineering and science problem.
Required Reading Dependent on students area of professional
expertise.
Recommended Reading Nil.
Class Contact Not applicable.
Assessment Research Paper ( approximately 15,000 words),
100%.
VDS8325 RESEARCH PAPER B
Campus Footscray Park, Hong Kong, Beijing.
Prerequisite(s) Completion of coursework component of EngScD.
Content The paper will report on independently conducted research
that demonstrates the students ability to clearly define and conclude
an engineering and science problem.
Required Reading Dependent on students area of professional
expertise.
Recommended Reading Nil.
Class Contact Not applicable.
Assessment Research Paper ( approximately 15,000 words),
100%.
VEA6310 LINEAR SYSTEMS AND CONTROL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) A knowledge of linear control systems covered in a
standard B.Eng. course.
Content Linear dynamical systems. State space representations of
linear systems. System gain and direction. Controllability,
observability, and Kalman’s canonical decomposition. State
feedback and output injection. Hankel matrix of a linear system and
irreducible realizations. Hankel singular values, balanced
realization, model reduction via balanced truncation. Coprime
factorizations of transfer function matrices. Youla-Kucera
parametrization of all stabilizing controllers. Analytical design of
controllers. Formulation of modern optimal control problems.
Required Reading S. Skogestad and I. Postlethwaite, 2002,
Multivariable Feedback Control: Analysis and Design, John Wiley,
London.
Recommended Reading C.T. Chen, 1984, Linear System Theory
and Design, Holt-Saunders, New York. T. Kailath, 1980, Linear
Systems, Prentice-Hall, New York.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester. This
includes two hours of lecture per week, one hour of tutorial and one
hour of laboratory for every two weeks.
Assessment Two Class Tests (1 hr each) 20%; Final Examination
(3 hrs) 80%. A pass in each component is necessary for a subject
pass.
VEA6311 MODELLING AND COMPUTER CONTROL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEA6310 or equivalent subjects.
Content Overview of computer control. Sampling of continuous-time
signal. Computer-oriented mathematical models; discrete-time
systems. Linear regression model and system identification. Analysis
of discrete-time control systems. Translation of analog design. State-
space design methods. Implementation of digital controllers.
Introduction to adaptive control.
Required Reading Astrom, K.J. and Wittenmark, B., Computer
Controlled Systems, Prentice Hall, 1990.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
372
Recommended Reading Johansson, R., System Modeling and
Identification, Prentice Hall, 1993.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester. This
includes two hours of lecture per week, one hour of tutorial and one
hour of laboratory for every two weeks.
Assessment Tests, 20%; Examination, 80%. A pass in each
component of assessment is required for a subject pass.
VEA6312 MODEL BASED PROCESS CONTROL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEA6310 or equivalent subjects.
Content Overview of model based control design. Model
complexity and the model building process. Design of robust control
systems by the internal model control method; performance and
robustness trade-off. Difficulty in the realisation of continuous-time
Smith Predictors; design of the unified predictive controller (UPC).
Analysis of design parameters and tuning of the UPC.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Morari, M. and Zafiriou. E., Robust
Process Control, Prentice Hall, 1989. Soeterboek, R., Predictive
Control – A Unified Approach, Prentice Hall, 1992. Johansson, R.,
System Modeling and Identification, Prentice Hall, 1993.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester. This
includes two hours of lecture per week, one hour of tutorial and one
hour of laboratory for every two weeks.
Assessment Tests, 20%; Examination, 80%. A pass in each
component of assessment is required for a subject pass.
VEA6320 OPTIMAL FILTERING AND PARAMETER ESTIMATION
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) A knowledge of linear control systems covered in a
standard B.Eng. course.
Content A probabilistic framework for filtering and parameter
estimation in systems and control. Modelling of noise and
disturbance as random processes, Gauss-Markov signal models.
Conditional expectation and minimum error solutions to filtering
problems. The discrete-time Kalman filter and innovations. The
principle of orthogonal projection. Recursive parameter estimators.
The maximum-likelihood estimator and the EM-algorithm. The
extended Kalman filter.
Required Reading Poor, H.V., 1994, An Introduction to Signal
Detection and Estimation, Springer-Verlag, New York.
Recommended Reading Anderson B.D.O. and Moore, J. B.,
1979, Optimal Filtering, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester. This
includes two hours of lecture per week, one hour of tutorial and one
hour of laboratory for every two weeks.
Assessment Two Class Tests (1 hr each) 20%; Final Examination
(3 hrs) 80%. A pass in each component is necessary for a subject
pass.
VEA6321 FUZZY AND NEURAL CONTROL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Co-requisite Nil
Content Introduction to fuzzy sets and fuzzy logic theory. Fuzzy set
operations. Theoretical fundamentals of fuzzy control: the structure of
a fuzzy logic controller, the rule base, the inference engine, choice
of fuzzification and defuzzification procedures. Introduction to
different neural networks and neural-fuzzy controllers. Software and
hardware tools of neural-fuzzy control. Neural-fuzzy controller
design using software packages. Applications of neural-fuzzy
control.
Required Reading Reznik, L., Fuzzy Controllers, Butterworth-
Heinemann, Oxford, 1997. Passino, K.M. and Yurkovich, S., 1998,
Fuzzy Control, Addison-Wesley
Recommended Reading Driankov, D., Hellendoorn, H., and
Reinfrank, M., An Introduction to Fuzzy Control, Springer-Verlag,
1995. IEEE, The Theory and Applications of Fuzzy Logic, (set of
videotapes), IEEE, 1993. IEEE, Fuzzy Logic and Neural Networks for
Control Systems, (videotape), IEEE, 1992.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester. This
includes two hours of lecture per week, one hour of tutorial and one
hour of laboratory for every two weeks.
Assessment To be advised by lecturer.
VEA6322 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Process linear systems and control and goals. Process
characteristics and system parameters. Controller modes, control
structures and algorithms. Process instrumentation. Distributed control
systems. Networking in process control, monitoring, planning, and
system management. Specification and selection of process control
hardware and software.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester. This
includes two hours of lecture per week, one hour of tutorial and one
hour of laboratory for every two weeks.
Assessment Laboratory exercises, 20%; Examination, 80%. A
pass in each component of assessment is required for a subject pass.
VEA6331 ROBOTICS AND PROGRAMMED CONTROL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed an undergraduate degree in
Engineering or Science
Content Overview of robotics. classification, control methods, drive
mechanisms. Programming and applications of specific robots.
Manipulator kinematics: Homogeneous transforms, Denavit-
Hartenberg representations of jointed link systems. Analysis of
various robot configurations. Euler angles. Inverse kinematic
solutions. Robotic vision: Vision systems, introduction to image
processing, Hough Transform methods, Stereo vision. Programmable
Logic Controllers: Introduction to PLCs, programming and
applications. Neural Networks: Introduction of NNs and
applications to robotics.
Required Reading McKerrow, P.J., Introduction to Robotics,
Addison Wesley, 1991.
Recommended Reading PLC and Robotics Manufacturers
Handbooks. Fu, K.S., Gonzalez, R.C., and Lee, C.S.G., Robotics:
Control, Sensors, Vision and Intelligence, McGraw Hill, 1987.
Koren, Y., Robotics for Engineers, McGraw Hill, 1985. Paul, R.P.,
Robot Manipulators, MIT Press, 1981.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester. This
includes two hours of lecture per week, one hour of tutorial and one
hour of laboratory for every two weeks.
Assessment Assignments and laboratory exercises: 60%;
Examination: 40%. A pass in each component of assessment is
required for a subject pass.
VEA6332 ELECTRONIC CONTROL OF MOTORS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Co-requisite Nil
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
373
Content Review of basic principles of electromagnetism and electric
motors. Models of induction motors. Reference frame
transformations. Inverters; power switches, Six Step and PWM types.
Harmonics and their elimination. Scalar control techniques. Vector
control techniques. Rotor flux orientation schemes, and their
requirements for implementation. Current controlled inverters.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Mohan, N., Undeland, T.M., and
Robbins, W.P., Power Electronics, John Wiley, 1995.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester. This
includes two hours of lecture per week, one hour of tutorial and one
hour of laboratory for every two weeks.
Assessment Tests/Assignments, 20%; Examination, 80%. A pass
in each component of assessment is required for a subject pass.
VEA6341 MEASUREMENT TECHNOLOGY
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Application of electronics for instrumentation of real plant.
Analogue devices used for signal conditioning and processing.
Techniques for dealing with interference. Interfacing digital and
analogue circuits. Transducers and their application.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Bentley, J., 1995, Principles of
Measurement Systems, Longman. Stanley, W.D., Operational
Amplifiers with Linear Integrated Circuits, Merrill, 1994.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester. This
includes two hours of lecture per week, one hour of tutorial and one
hour of laboratory for every two weeks.
Assessment Tests/Assignments: 40%; Examination: 60%. A pass
in each component of assessment is required for a subject pass.
VEA6350 MINOR PROJECT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEA6310, VEA6320
Content Each student will undertake an individual research on a
topic allocated to him or her under the supervision of an academic
staff over the duration of a semester. Regular meetings will be held
between the students and their supervisors in the form of seminars
where students will report their progress in the form of formal
presentations. In addition, informal meetings between students and
their supervisors will take place as and when required. In the
process, the student will be exposed to research related matters such
as Research Methodology, Literature Reviews, Feasibility Studies,
Experiment Design, Modelling and Simulation Techniques and Tools,
Results Analysis and Validation, Report Documentation and
Presentation.
Required Reading To be advised by the supervisor of the project.
Recommended Reading To be advised by the supervisor of the
project.
Class Contact Six hours per week for one semester, comprising
three hours per week group seminar, and three hours per week (on
average) individual meetings, discussions, etc. with respective
supervisors.
Assessment Regular seminar presentations (3 seminars, each of
20 min. duration) 30%; Final report (Approximately 12,000 words)
50%; Final presentation (of 30 min. duration) 20%.
VEC6142 MANAGING SOFTWARE PROJECTS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEG5011 Software Engineering.
Content The subject will develop and improve the skills required to
successfully plan and manage software development efforts. The
subject content includes: the role of specification in the product life
cycle; systems analysis and design; feasibility study and
development cycle; the applicability of DP techniques to technical
program management; defining software requirements,
documentation; preparation of good project plans, size and function
point metrics and their use in estimation of time and costs;
implementing management controls for design and integration; the
use of standard project management techniques and software
packages; team working, codes of practice, whole life costing,
system support plans; hardware/software integration and testing,
product support and maintenance, controlling changes to software
and documentation; control of the programming support
environment. The assignment and laboratory work consists of design,
analysis and management of a large scale software project.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
approximately 65% lectures/tutorials and 35% laboratory.
Assessment Examination, 50%; assignments and project work,
50%.
VEC6152 APPLIED KNOWLEDGE SYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The subject provides an introduction to Knowledge Based
Systems. It gives an overview of expert systems, neural networks,
knowledge programming and natural language systems and
examines software associated with these. The subject will familiarise
the students with a number of techniques for applying knowledge
based systems to real world problems in the control, monitoring and
planning domains, including how to select appropriate tools to
analyse problems.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Patterson, D. W., Introduction to
Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems, Prentice Hall, 1990.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester. This
includes two hours of lecture per week, one hour of tutorial and one
hour of laboratory for every two weeks.
Assessment Tests/Assignments: 35%; Examination: 65%. A pass
in each component of assessment is required for a subject pass.
VEE6000 RESEARCH PROJECT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completion of at least eight units of the course.
Content Each student will undertake an in-depth investigation of a
topic allocated in the student’s area of specialisation, over the
duration of a semester, under the guidance of an academic
supervisor. The student will produce a report and present it to an
audience as a publication. In the process the student will be exposed
to research related matters such as research methodology, literature
surveys, problem definition, feasibility studies, experiment design,
modelling and simulation, analysis of results, formulation of
conclusions, documentation, and presentation.
Required Reading To be advised by the supervisor of the project.
Recommended Reading To be advised by the supervisor of the
project.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
374
Class Contact Twelve hours per week for one semester comprising
three hours per week group seminar, three hours per week group
meetings and discussions with fellow researchers and project
supervisors, and six hours per week of independent study.
Assessment Regular seminar presentations (3 seminars, each of
20 min. duration) 30%; Final Report (Approximately 25,000 words)
50%; Final presentation (of 40 min. duration) 20%.
VEE6050 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROGRAM
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completion of at least eight units of the course.
Content
Unit 1 Project definition. Project management definition. Relationship
to other management disciplines. Project phases. Project life cycle.
Examples of project life cycle. Project stake holders. Organizational
influences. Key general management skills. Social, economic, and
environmental influences. Project management processes. Initiating,
planning, executing, controlling, and closing. Process interactions.
Unit 2 Project integration management. Project plan development
and execution. Integrated change control. Project scope
management. Initiation, scope definition, scope planning, scope
verification, and scope change control. Project time management.
Activity definition, activity sequencing, activity duration estimating,
schedule development, and schedule control. Project cost
management. Resource planning, cost estimating, cost budgeting,
and cost control. Project quality management. Quality planning,
quality assurance, and quality control.
Unit 3 Project human resource management. Organizational
planning. Staff acquisition. Team building. Project procurement
management. Procurement planning, procurement solicitation, source
selection, contract administration, and contract closure. Project
communication management. Communication planning, information
distribution, performance reporting, and administrative closure.
Project risk management. Risk identification, qualitative risk analysis,
quantitative risk analysis, risk management planning, risk response
planning, risk monitoring and control.
Unit 4
Systems approach to project management. Project proposals.
Business case, rationale, feasibility, and cost/benefit analysis.
Project selection. Project selection models. Project evaluation. Project
management organization. Project manager selection. Project team
establishment.
Required Reading Project Management Institute, 2000, A Guide
to Project Management Body of Knowledge, Newton Square,
Pennysylvania, USA.
Recommended Reading Kerzner, H., 2001, A Systems
Approach to Planning, Scheduling, and Controlling, 7th edition,
John Wiley. Futrell, R.T., Shafer, D.F., and Shafer, L.I., 2002,
Quality Software Project Management, Prentice-Hall. Meredith J.A. &
Mantel, S.J.,1995, Project Management, 3rd edition, John Wiley.
Class Contact For each unit: Three hours per week, comprising
lectures, tutorials, seminars, and group activities.
Assessment For each unit: Class Test (Two Hours) 20%;
Assignment (report not exceeding 5000 words) 20%; Final
examination (Three Hours) 60%.
VEH6001 HDL AND HIGH LEVEL SYNTHESIS
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Completed Digital Systems at undergraduate level
or equivalent.
Content Hardware modelling and design flow, Features
requirements of Hardware Languages (structural and behavioural),
Abstract Models, Compilation and Optimisation Techniques.
Hardware Description Language VHDL and/or Verilog. Architectural
– Level Synthesis and Optimisation Modelling, the Fundamental
architectural synthesis problems, Area and performance estimation,
Data path and Control Unit Synthesis, Synthesis of Pipelined Circuits.
Synthesis Techniques, Logic synthesis and optimisation, FPGAs
synthesis, folding and partitioning, Multi-level logic synthesis
techniques; Structured layout styles, Local and global
transformations. State machine synthesis techniques. High level
synthesis techniques: Strategies for high level synthesis, Scheduling
and allocation operations. High-level optimisations. Realisation using
FPGAs and CPLDs. Coding standards. Industry Standard EDA Tools.
Required Reading Chang, K.C., 1999, Digital Systems Design
with VHDL and Synthesis, IEEE. Appropriate IEEE/IEE Journal Papers.
Recommended Reading Dewey, A.M., 1996, Analysis and
Design of Digital Systems with VHDL, PWS Kent. Jerraya, A.A.,
Ding, H. and Kission, P., 1996, Behavioural Synthesis and
Component Reuse with VHDL, Kluwer.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week lectures and two hours per week of laboratory
exercises and project.
Assessment Assignment and laboratory exercises, 20%; project,
50%; and final examination, 30%.
VEH6002 INTEGRATED CIRCUIT DESIGN
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Completed Digital Systems at undergraduate level
or equivalent.
Content Overview of MOS and sub-micron technology, scaling and
signal integrity, IC design techniques. CMOS cell design: device-
level design constraints, gate design, pas transistor circuits,
sequential circuits, mask level design. Layout considerations, design
rules and mask level design. Circuit optimisation techniques. ASIC
and custom design, synchronous system design. Timing issues in VLSI
circuit design. Design of VLSI system sub-systems: Arithmetic and
logic processing elements, adders, counters, I/Os, buffers, data path
design and layout, etc. Chip floor planning. Basic analog building
blocks. Design tradeoffs-cost, power and performance. Testability
and yield.
Required Reading Rabaey, J.M., 1996, Digital Integrated
Circuits – A Design Perspective, Prentice Hall. Appropriate IEEE/IEE
Journal papers.
Recommended Reading Eshraghian, K. and Weste, N.H.E.,
1993, Principles of CMOS VLSI Design – A Systems Perspective,
Addison Wesley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
one hour per week lectures and three hours per week of laboratory
exercises and project.
Assessment Assignment and laboratory exercises, 30%; project,
50%; and final examination, 20%.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
375
VEH6003 TOOLS AND DESIGN METHODOLOGY
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Completed Digital Systems at undergraduate level
or equivalent.
Content EDA design flow environment. Tool integration. Embedded
development tools. Back-end IC design flow and tools. Front-end IC
design flow and tools. Hardware/software co-design and co-
verification. Functional design and verification. Mixed signal design
flow. Simulation and verification. Test bench design. Prototyping.
Required Reading Current available text book- students to be
advised.
Recommended Reading Chang, H., Cooke, L., Hunt, M.,
Martin, G., McNelly, A. and Todd, L, 1999, Surviving the SOC
Revolution – A Guide to Platform-Based Design, Kluwer Academic.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
one hour per week lectures and three hours per week of
laboratory/workshop and project.
Assessment Assignment and laboratory exercises, 60%; research
project, 40%.
VEH6004 DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Completed JRM6001 or equivalent.
Content Review of combinational and sequential circuit analysis
and design using PLDs, ALUs, FPGAs and ROM. Functional
decomposition and symmetric functions. Iterative circuits. Algorithmic
state machine design approach. Register Transfer Language (RTL)
design techniques. Asynchronous systems: micro-pipelines,
asynchronous microprocessor. RISC architectures and the influence
on VLSI technology. Parallel processing structures. VLSI processor
arrays. Content addressable and associate memories. Systolic and
wavefront arrays. Application driven architecture. Self-timed logic.
Advanced Micro based design.
Required Reading Current available text book – Student to be
advised.
Recommended Reading Nelson, et. Al., 1998, Digital Logic
Circuit Analysis and Design, Prentice Hall. Katz, R.H., 1994,
Contemporary Logic Design, Addison Wesley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week lectures and two hours per week of laboratory
exercises.
Assessment Assignment and laboratory exercises, 30%; project,
40%; and final examination, 30%.
VEH6006 EMERGING TOPICS IN IC DESIGN
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content New technologies such as: Silicon carbide high-power
devices, Quantum based devices, quantum wells and quantum dots
Nanometer MOSFETSs, Wide bandgap materials and devices,
Plasma-wave electronics, Ferroelectric devices. Overview of new
process technologies. Deep sub-micron technology and noise. Ultra-
high-speed devices, including microwave and optical devices. New
Systems-Level Architectures, such as: Nanowire arrays,
Neuromorphic architectures, Reconfigurable architectures, Wafer-
scale systems, Memory systems. New EDA tools and future
technology projections. EMC: regulations, measurement and testing,
Design issues related to EMC.
Required Reading Dimitrijev, S., 2000, Understanding
Semiconductor Devices, Oxford University Press. Appropriate Journal
Papers.
Recommended Reading Nebel, W. and Mermet, J., 1998, Low
Power Design in Deep Submicron Electronics, Kluwer. I.E.(Aust),
1999, Electromagnetic Compatibility, Institute of Electrical Engineers.
Timp, G.L., 1998, Nanotechnology, Springer Verlag.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week lectures and two hours per week of workshops
and seminars.
Assessment Assignments, 30%; seminars, 40%; and research
project, 30%.
VEH6007 ADVANCED VLSI DESIGN
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) VEH6002 or equivalent.
Content Overview of design flow, requirement specification,
configuration management issues. Design and simulation using
industry standard EDA tools. Use full-custom design tools to generate
circuit layout, design rule checking, design verification and
simulation. Input/output ports. Layout generators, parameterised
cells, PLA generator, Silicon compilation, Data path compiler,
Placement and routing. Clock distribution techniques. Layout analysis
including design rules, DRC, circuit extraction, etc. Equivalence
checking. Simulation: logic simulation, delay modelling, fault
simulation. Mixed analog/digital system specification, integration
issues. VHDL – AMS. System-level specification, validation and
analysis. Reusable IP blocks. System-on-a-chip (SOC) design issues
including software, hardware and IP blocks. Design verification and
SOC testing. Test bench design.
Required Reading Silveira, L.M., Devadas, S. and Reis, R.,
1999, VLSI: Systems on a Chip, Kluwer. Appropriate IEEE/IEE
Journal Papers.
Recommended Reading Rabaey, J.M., 1996, Digital Integrated
Circuits – A Design Perspective, Prentice Hall. Eshraghian, K. and
Weste, N.H.E., 1993, Principles of CMOS VLSI Design – A Systems
Perspective, Addison Wesley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
one hour per week lectures and three hours per week of laboratory
exercises and project.
Assessment Assignment and laboratory exercises, 30%; project,
50%; and final examination, 20%.
VEH6008 VLSI DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Completed DSP course at undergraduate level.
Content Overview of DSP: FFT, DFT, Z-transform and sampling
theory. FIR and IIR filter design and implementation. Interpolation,
decimation and multi-rate systems. Adaptive filtering and
applications. DSP software building blocks, nonlinearity and choice
of sampling rate. DSP hardware: architecture, processing blocks
(multipliers, ALU, MAC, barrel shifters). Pipelining and parallel
processing, power consumption and reduction. Folding and
unfolding applications: sampling period reduction, designing digit-
serial hardware, time-multiplexed design. Systolic array design.
Algorithmic strength reduction. Advanced DSP software and
hardware. DSP system design.
Required Reading Keshab, K.P., 1999, VLSI Digital Signal
Processing Systems: Design and Implementation, Jacaranda Wiley.
Appropriate IEEE/IEE Journal Papers.
Recommended Reading Bayoumi, M.A., 1994, VLSI Design
Methodology for DSP Architectures, Kluwer.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week lectures and two hours per week of laboratory
exercises and project.
Assessment Assignment and laboratory exercises, 30%; project,
40%; and final examination, 30%.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
376
VEH6009 RELIABILITY AND TESTABILITY IN IC DESIGN
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) VEH6001, EEH6002 and VEH6003 or
equivalents.
Content Reliability: parallel and serial reliability, failure rates.
Reliability as affected by smaller dimensions and faster devices,
thermal considerations. Redundancy and fault tolerance. Design for
device reliability. Functional and formal verification and fault
modelling. Hardware/software co-design, co-verification and co-
simulation. Timing and power analysis. Design for testability and
ATPG and fault coverage tools Layout issues for testability. Testing
methodologies (In-circuit, Built in self test), Boundary Scan Testing.
Memory testing, BIST of RAMs, RAM interconnection testing, Scan
based testing of multimegabit memories, external and internal testing
of megabit DRAMs. Comprehensive testing of multistage
interconnection networks. Embedded system testing. Board-level
interconnect testing. Test bench design.
Required Reading Lala, P.K., 1997, Digital Circuit Testing and
Testability, Academic Press. Appropriate IEEE/IEE Journal Papers.
Recommended Reading Lee, M.T.C., 1997, High-Level Test
Synthesis of Digital VLSI Circuits, Artech. Mazumder, P.,
Chakreborty, K., 1996, Testing and Testable Design of High Density
Random Access Memories, Kluwer.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week lectures and two hours per week of laboratory
exercises.
Assessment Assignment and laboratory exercises, 60%; and final
examination, 40%.
VEH6010 INTRODUCTION TO MICROSYSTEM TECHNOLOGY
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content MOS and MEMS processes. Bulk and surface silicon
micromachining. LIGA techniques. Analog and digital interfacing
circuits and sensors. EDA tools for MEM design and implementation.
MEMS device modelling. Packaging issues. Replication processes.
Hybrid design methodology and techniques.
Required Reading Maluf, N., 2000, An Introduction to
Microelectromechanical Systems Engineering, Artech. Appropriate
Journal Papers.
Recommended Reading Trimmer, W., 1997, Classics in
Micromechanics and Mems, IEEE. Gardner, J., 2000, Microsensors
Mems and Smart Devices: Technology Applications and Devices,
John Wiley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week lectures and two hours per week of laboratory
exercises.
Assessment Assignments, 20%; laboratory exercises, 30%;
project, 30 and final examination, 20%.
VEH6011 INTRODUCTION TO SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE FABRICATION
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Fundamental principles of fabrication processes, physical
and chemical models for crystal growth, oxidisation, ion
implantation, etching, deposition, lithography and metallisation.
Emphasis is on practical aspects of silicon device fabrication,
including wafer cleaning, photolithography, etching, oxidation,
diffusion, ion implantation, chemical vapour deposition, physical
sputtering and wafer testing. Imperfections in semiconductors, crystal
growth, solid solubility, alloying and diffusion, ion implantation,
oxide masking, and epitaxy. Practical and fundamental limits to the
evolution of the technology of MOS and bipolar devices. How are
integrated circuits fabricated and what future changes are likely? The
implications for device performance caused by material properties
and fabrication techniques. Fabrication techniques for bipolar and
MOS-devices, and the electrical performance of devices based on
these techniques. Comparison of fabrication technologies for silicon
and gallium arsenide devices. Processes and fabrication equipment
to be studied will include oxidation/diffusion, CVD reactors,
photolithography, plasma etching, vacuum evaporator, ion
implantation, etc. Introduction to computer modelling of processing
steps such as etching., lithography, diffusion, implantation (eg
SUPREME).
Required Reading Levinshtein, M. and Shur, M., 1997,
Semiconductor Technology: Processing ad Novel Fabrication
Techniques, John Wiley. Appropriate Journal Papers.
Recommended Reading Rimini, E., 1995, Ion Implementation:
Basics to Device Fabrication, Kluwer. Cambell, S.A., 1996, The
Science and Engineering of Microelectronic Fabrication, Oxford Uni.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week lectures and two hours per week of laboratory
exercises.
Assessment Assignments, 20%; laboratory exercises, 30%; and
final examination, 50%.
VEH6012 SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE PHYSICS
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Fundamentals of carrier transport, generation,
recombination and storage in semiconductors. The quantum
mechanical foundations of the properties of solids. Types of solids
and crystal structure. Lattice vibrations, elastic and thermal properties
of solids, surface properties. The energy band theory of solids.
Semiconductor equilibrium and non-equilibrium statistics. Quantum
mechanical transitions, optical absorption, radiative and non-
radiative recombination. Quantum processes in reduced
dimensionality structures. Carrier lifetimes. Optical absorption in
metals and semiconductors. Semiconductor heterostructures.
Semiconductor junctions including the principles of operation of the
p-n junction. Metal semiconductor ohmic and Schottky junctions.
Electrical, structural and optical characterisation.
Required Reading Yu, P.Y. and Cordana, M., 1999,
Fundamentals of Semiconductors: Physics and Materials Properties,
Springer Verlag. Appropriate Journal Papers.
Recommended Reading Sze, S., 1997, Modern Semiconductor
Device Physics, J. Wiley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week lectures and two hours per week of laboratory
exercises.
Assessment Assignments, 20%; laboratory exercises, 30%; and
final examination, 50%.
VEH6013 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Quality standards and compliance issues. Managing QA.
Human Resources issues. Occupational Health and Safety
requirements. Overview of project management strategy, project life
cycle, scope, integration, scheduling, risks, budget, etc. Creativity
and innovations. Business plans. IP issues and commercialisation
process. Entrepreneurial organisation and strategy. Venture capital
and marketing. Case studies.
Required Reading Current available text book – students to be
advised. Appropriate journal papers.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
377
Recommended Reading Yuzuriha, T., 1999, How to succeed as
an Engineer: A Practical Guide to Enhance Your Career, IEEE.
Badiru, A., 1995, Industry’s Guide to ISO9000, John Wiley.
Verkoeyen, C.M.R. and Nikkonen, A.I., 1997, Management
Training in High-Tech and R&D: Concepts for Enterprizes, Kluwer.
Tinerillo, P.C., 1999, Project Management, Auerbach.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Assignments, 20%; seminar presentations, 10%;
project, 30%; and final examination, 40%.
VEH6014 RF DESIGN
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Completed Analog Electronics at undergraduate
level.
Content Basic concepts of wireless communication systems design.
Transceiver architectures. VLSI design issues and layout techniques in
wireless transceiver design. Radio circuits, LNAs, oscillators, mixers,
limiters, phase detectors, frequency synthesisers, PLLs and power
amplifiers. Low voltage low power design techniques and design
flow for analog and mixed signal circuits and systems. OpAmps,
comparators, A-to-D and D-to-A conversion circuits. Noise analysis
and design tradeoffs – cost, power and performance. Students will
develop hands-on experience in design, simulation, verification and
implementation using industry standard EDA tools.
Required Reading Farag, E.N. and Elmasry, M.I., 1999, Mixed
Signal VLSI Wireless Design: Circuits and Systems, Kluwer.
Appropriate IEEE/IEE Journal papers.
Recommended Reading Laker, K.H. and Sansen, W.M.C.,
1994, Design of Analog Integrated Circuits and Systems, McGraw
Hill.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week lectures and two hours per week of laboratory
exercises and project.
Assessment Assignment and laboratory exercises, 30%; project,
50%; and final examination, 20%.
VEH6016 VERILOG HDL
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed Digital Systems at undergraduate level
or equivalent.
Content The role of HDL in design, Top-down introduction to
Verilog, Verilog for description of logic circuits, Verilog language
constructs, behavioural modelling, logic level modelling, concurrent
process and switch level modelling. Timing analysis, synthesis and
test benches.
Required Reading Thomas, D.E and Moorby, P.R., 1998, The
Verilog Hardware Description Language, Kluwer.
Recommended Reading Seidman, B., 2001, Introduction to
Verilog, IEEE. Nababi, Z., 2001, Verilog Computer based training
course, McGraw Hill.
Class Contact four hours per week for one semester, comprising of
two hour lecture and two hours of tutorial/laboratory and project
work.
Assessment Assignments and laboratory exercises, 20%; project,
30%; final examination, 50%.
VEH6017 DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN WITH VERILOG
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed EEH6016/EEH6001 or equivalent
Content Introduction to Verilog and digital systems design for VLSI,
combinational and sequential circuits, design verification,
algorithmic state machine design, finite state machine specifications
in Verilog, hierarchical modelling concepts, synchronous and
asynchronous systems, pipelined architectures, processor
architectures, clocks timing and clock distribution, synthesis and
advanced concepts in brief.
Required Reading Palnikar, S. & Goel P., 2003, Verilog HDL: A
Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis, Prentice Hall PTR.
Recommended Reading Thomas, D.E and Moorby, P.R., 1998,
The Verilog Hardware Description Language, Kluwer. Nelson, et al.,
Digital Logic Circuit Analysis and Design, Prentice Hall. Katz R.H.,
1994, Contemporary Logic Design, Adison Wesley.
Class Contact four hours per week for one semester, comprising of
two hour lecture and two hours of tutorial/laboratory and project
work.
Assessment Assignments and laboratory exercises, 35%; project,
33%; final examination, 30%.
VEH6018 ANALOG & MIXED SIGNAL DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park
Co-requisite(s) EEH6003 – EDA Tools & Design Methodology and
studied Analog electronics at undergraduate level.
Content The design of CMOS analog and mixed-signal integrated
circuits is covered. Design concepts of high speed low power
amplifiers, filters, sample and hold circuits, comparators, digital to
analog and analog to digital converters are fully analysed. Noise
and performance analysis and design tradeoffs – cost, power and
performance. Students will develop hands-on experience in design,
simulation, verification and implementation using industry standard
EDA tools.
Required Reading Razavi, B., 2001, Design of analog CMOS
integrated circuits, McGraw Hill International Edition.
Recommended Reading Paul R. Gray and Robert Meyer, 2001,
Analysis and design of Analog integrated circuits, 4th edn, John
Wiley and Sons. R. Jacob Baker, 2002, CMOS Mixed signal circuit
design, IEEE Press/Wiley Inter-Science.
Class Contact four hours per week for one semester, comprising of
one hour lecture and three hours of laboratory and project work.
Assessment Assignments and laboratory exercises, 20%; project,
50%; final examination, 30%.
VEH6020 MINOR PROJECT
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Completed EEH6001, EEH6002, EEH6003 or
equivalent.
Content It is expected that the majority of industry-based students
will undertake projects as part of their normal employment, where
relevant opportunities exist and suitable resources and supervision
can be guaranteed. A project can be structured to be the equivalent
of two units of study. Projects would b expected to demonstrate a
good working knowledge in chip design and implementation.
Students must demonstrate their ability to integrate and draw upon
their coursework studies relevant to the project. A dissertation of no
less than 10000 words must be submitted and will be examined by
one examiner selected by the examining panel for this module.
Commercial in-confidence programs can be undertaken, with
appropriate restrictions on publication and choice of examiners.
Intellectual property of projects initiated by a company and
undertaken in that company will remain with the company. All other
projects will be subject to the Intellectual Property policy of the
relevant university partner.
Required Reading Current available text – students to be advised.
Appropriate IEEE/IEE Journal materials.
Recommended Reading Rabaey, J.M., 1996 Digital Integrated
Circuits – A Design Perspective, Prentice Hall. Chang, K.C., 1999,
Digital Systems Design with VHDL and Synthesis, IEEE. Chang, H.,
Cooke, L., Hunt, M., Martin, G., McNelly, A. and Todd, L., 1999,
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
378
Surviving the SOC Revolution – A Guide to Platform-Based Design,
Kluwer Academic. Appropriate IEEE/IEE Journal papers.
Class Contact Eight hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Assessment will be based on project progress and
demonstration, 20%; Final project demo 30%; final report, 40% and
an oral poster presentation, 10%.
VEH6030 MAJOR PROJECT
Campus Chipskills Partner Universities
Prerequisite(s) Completed EEH6001, EEH6002 and EEH6003 or
equivalents.
Content It is expected that the majority of industry-based students
will undertake projects as part of their normal employment, where
relevant opportunities exist and suitable resources and supervision
can be guaranteed. Collaboration with international partners will
also be encouraged. A project can be structured to be the equivalent
of four units of study. Projects would be expected to demonstrate
mastery in chip design and implementation at a level considered no
less than that of an experienced practitioner in the field. Students
must demonstrate their ability to integrate and draw upon their
coursework studies relevant to the project. A dissertation of no less
than 15000 words must be submitted and will be examined by two
examiners selected by the examining panel for this module.
Commercial in-confidence programs can be undertaken, with
appropriate restrictions on publication and choice of examiners.
Intellectual property of projects initiated by a company and
undertaken in that company will remain with the company. All other
projects will be subject to the Intellectual Property policy of the
relevant university partner.
Required Reading Current available text – students to be advised.
Appropriate IEEE/IEE Journal materials.
Recommended Reading Rabaey, J.M., 1996 Digital Integrated
Circuits – A Design Perspective, Prentice Hall. Chang, K.C., 1999,
Digital Systems Design with VHDL and Synthesis, IEEE. Chang, H.,
Cooke, L., Hunt, M., Martin, G., McNelly, A. and Todd, L., 1999,
Surviving the SOC Revolution – A Guide to Platform-Based Design,
Kluwer Academic. Appropriate IEEE/IEE Journal papers.
Reuse with VHDL, Kluwer.
Class Contact Sixteen hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Assessment will be based on project progress and
demonstration, 20%; Final project demo 30%; final report, 40% and
an oral poster presentation, 10%.
VEH6101 ASIC DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Co-requisites VEH6151 VHDL and High-level Synthesis or
equivalent
Content Introduction and project overview: Use of Mentor Graphics
and Summit IC Design tools. System design: Behavioural simulations.
RTL design. ASM design. Development of gate level designs.
Autoplacement and autorouting. Back-annotation. and resimulation.
Program gate array and test.
Required Reading Selected papers from IEEE/IEE Journal. To be
advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Yalamanchili, S., 1998, VHDLStarters
Guide, Prentice Hall. Lipsett, R., 1989, VHDL Hardware Descriptive
Language, Klewer Academic Publications. Perry, D.L., 1994, VHDL,
McGraw Hill.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
one hour per week of lecture and three hours per week of
tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Assignments 20%; Research Project 80%.
VEH6102 CUSTOM IC DESIGN B
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEH6121 Basic IC Design or equivelent
Content The students will use modern integrated CAD software to
accomplish schematic capture, simulation, layout, extraction, place
and route and design verification. Mixed analog/digital system
specification. Design and simulate circuit using schematic capture
tools and HSPICE. Use of Mentor Graphics. Full-custom design tools
to generate circuit layout, design rule checking, design verification
and simulation. Input/output pads. Layout generators. Layout
analysis. Placement and routing. Testing.
Required Reading Selected papers from IEEE/IEE Journal. To be
advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Gopalan, K., 1996, Introduction to
Digital Microelectronic Circuits, IRWIN. Shoji, M., 1996, High-
Speed Digital Circuits, Addison Wesley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
one hour per week of lecture and three hours per week of project
Assessment Assignments, 20%; Project, 80%.
VEH6111 DIGITAL CIRCUIT DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed Digital Design at undergraduate level
or equivalent.
Content ASM design approach, Synthesis by programmable
devices. Asynchronous systems: Micropipelines, Asynchronous
microprocessor. RISC architectures and the influence on VLSI
technology. Parallel processing structures. Artificial neural networks.
VLSI processor arrays. Content addressable and associated
memories. Systolic and wavefront arrays. Application driven
architecture.
Required Reading Mano, M.M. and Kime, C.R., 1997, Logic
and Computer Design Fundamentals, Prentice Hall.
Recommended Reading Prestopnik, R.J., 1994, Digital
Electronics – Concepts and Applications of Digital Design, Saunders
College Publications. Wakerley, J.F., 1994, Digital Design Principles
and Practices, Prentice Hall. Katz, R.H., 1994, Contemporary Logic
Design, Addison Wesley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week of lecture and two hours per week of
tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Assignments and laboratory exercises 30%, Project
40%; final examination 30%.
VEH6121 BASIC IC DESIGN/DEVICES
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Completed Digital Design at undergraduate level
or equivalent..
Content Bipolar and CMOS structures. Logic design: Introduction to
CMOS circuit design: Switch level analysis of NMOS and CMOS
structures., CMOS logic gates using static and dynamic logic,
Precharging techniques, latch up, pass transistor/transmission gate
logic. PLA logic: static and dynamic design. Memory. Design of
subsystems using sequential logic.
Required Reading Weste, N. and Eshragian, K., 1993,
Principles of CMOS VLSI Design, Addison Wesley.
Recommended Reading Allen, P.E. and Holberg, D.R., 1989,
CMOS Analog Circuit Design, HRW. Haskard, M.R. and May, I.C.,
1990, Analog VLSI Design NMOS and CMOS, Prentice Hall.
Pucknell, D.A. and Eshraghian, K., 1994, Basic VLSI Design System
and Circuits, Prentice Hall.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
379
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week of lecture and two hours per week of
tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Test, assignments and laboratory exercises 40%, final
examination 60%.
VEH6122 CUSTOM IC DESIGN A
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEH6121 Basic IC Design/Devices or equivalent
Content CMOS cell design: device-level design constraints, Circuit
optimisation techniques, gate matrix method. Review of tools for low-
level cell design: Mentor Graphics circuit design and verification
tools, HSPICE and PSPICE simulation tools. Basic analog building
blocks. Timing issues in VLSI circuit design. Design of VLSI system
sub-systems: Arithmetic and logic processing elements, adders,
counters, etc, data path design and layout. Chip floorplanning.
Required Reading Gopalan, K., 1996, Introduction to Digital
Microelectronic Circuits, IRWIN.
Recommended Reading Weste, N. and Eshragian, K., 1993,
Principles of CMOS VLSI Design, Addison Wesley. Haskard, M.R.
and May, I.C., 1990, Analog VLSI design NMOS and CMOS,
Prentice Hall. Pucknell, D.A. and Eshraghian, K., 1994, Basic VLSI
Design System and Circuits, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
one hour per week of lecture and three hours per week of research
project.
Assessment Assignments, 40%; project, 60%.
VEH6132 INTEGRATED CIRCUIT TESTABILITY
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEH6001, VEH6002 and VEH6003 or
equivalents.
Content System partitioning, Layout and testability, Design for
testability. Defects and fault models. Functional and structural testing.
Test access. DFT techniques. Fault simulation and automatic test
pattern generation. Ad-hoc DFT. Scan-path DFT. Built-in self test
(BIST). Boundary scan DFT.
Required Reading Buchanan, W., 1997, Microelectronic
Systems – Design, Modelling and Testing, Arnold.
Recommended Reading Pucknell, D.A. and Eshraghian, K.,
1994, Basic VLSI Design System and Circuits, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week of lecture and two hours per week of
tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Assignments and laboratory exercises 60%, final
examination 40%.
VEH6142 EMERGING TECHNOLOGIES
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Yield of integrated circuits: Random distribution of defects,
continuous and discrete distributions of defect density. Reliability:
Failure rate, MTBF, accelerated testing. Fault tolerance: Static and
dynamic redundancy. Processing and qualification of high reliability
circuits, Group III-IV ICs and optoelectronics. GaAs IC design
techniques. Advanced silicon VLSI technology. Advanced processing
methods: Deep UV lithography, direct E-beam writing, X-ray
lithography, Ion beam writing, silicon MBE, advanced etching
techniques.
Required Reading Selected papers from IEEE/IEE Journals. To be
advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Gopalan, K., 1996, Introduction to
Digital Microelectronic Circuits, IRWIN. Shoji, M., 1996, High-
Speed Digital Circuits, Addison Wesley.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising of
one hour per week of lecture and three hours per week of research
project.
Assessment Assignments, 40%; final project, 60%.
VEH6151 VHDL AND HIGH LEVEL SYNTHESIS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Introduction to VHDL: traditional design methods,
hardware, abstraction. Language elements: basic terminology,
entity, modeling of architecture, data objects and types, operators.
Packages and libraries. Logic synthesis techniques: Logic synthesis
and optimisation. PLA synthesis, folding and partitioning. Multi-level
logic synthesis techniques: Structured layout styles, Local and Global
transformation. Finite state machine synthesis techniques. High level
synthesis techniques: Strategies for high level synthesis, Scheduling
and allocation operations. High-level optimisations. Realisation using
FPGAs and CPLDs.
Required Reading Yalamnachili, S., 1998, VHDL – Starters
Guide, Prentice Hall.
Recommended Reading Lipsett, R., 1989, VHDL Hardware
Descriptive Language, Klewer Academic Publications. Coelho, D.R.,
1989, The VHDL Handbook, Klewer Academic Publications. Perry,
D.L., 1994, VHDL, McGraw Hill.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week of lecture and two hour per week of
tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Assignment & laboratory exercises 20%, project 50%;
final examination, 30%.
VEH6152 ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VEH6111 Digital Circuit Design
Content 68020 programming model, data organisation,
addressing modes and instructions sets. Exception processing, stack
frames, parameter passing and procedure calls. Software
development for embedded systems. External bus behaviour and
design of decoders, Stack and BERR circuitry using PLDs. Interfacing
memory and peripheral devices. Embedded microcontroller devices
– architecture, features, peripherals and programming. Coprocessor
interface and memory management.
Required Reading Selected papers from IEEE/IEE Journals. To be
advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading MC68020 32 Microprocessor User’s
Manual, Motorola, Prentice Hall. Tabak, D., RISC Systems, Research
Studies Press.
Class Contact Four hours per week for one semester comprising
two hours per week of lecture and two hours per week of
tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Test, assignments and laboratory exercises 40%, final
examination 60%.
VET6500 MAJOR PROJECT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VET6510, VET6520
Content Each student will undertake an individual research under
the guidance of an academic staff on a suitable topic, over the
duration of a semester. Lectures, seminars, and regular meetings will
be held collectively to expose students to research related matters
such as Research Methodology, Literature Reviews, Feasibility
Studies, Experiment Design, Modelling and Simulation Techniques
and Tools, Results Validation and Decision Making, Report Writing,
Structured Documentation, and Scientific Presentation.
Required Reading To be advised by the supervisor of the project.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
380
Recommended Reading To be advised by the supervisor of the
project.
Class Contact Twelve hours per week for one semester, comprising
three hours per week group seminar, three hours per week (on
average) individual meetings, discussions, etc. with the respective
supervisor, and six hours per week independent study including
laboratory and library activity.
Assessment Regular seminar presentations (3 seminars, each of
20 min. duration) 30%; Final report (Approximately 25,000 words)
50%; Final presentation (of duration 40 min.) 20%; Final report is to
be examined by an external examiner (who could also be present at
the final presentation).
VET6501 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM MODELING AND SIMULATION 1
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Introduction to research methodology. System modeling.
Simulation procedures. MATLAB and its application in the design
and simulation of communication subsystems.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Preliminary assignments, 40%; final assignment, 60%.
VET6502 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM MODELING AND SIMULATION 2
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Introduction to OPNET and other industry standard
simulation tools and their application in telecommunication systems
modelling and simulation.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester.
Assessment Preliminary assignments, 40%; final assignment, 60%.
VET6510 COMMUNICATION THEORY
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Signal theory. Fourier transform. Bandwidth. Sampled
signals. Discrete Fourier transform. Random signals. Autocorrelation,
cross-correlation, and power spectral density functions. Noise.
Entropy. Measurement of information. Channel capacity. Shannon’s
theorem. Cascaded channels. Channel coding. Source coding. Data
compression. Compression algorithms. Data encryption. Encryption
algorithms. Markov processes. Queues. Networks of Queues.
Required Reading Carlson, A.B., Crilly, P.B., & Rutledge, J.,
2001, Communication Systems, McGraw Hill.
Recommended Reading Haykin, S., 2001, Communication
Systems, 4th edition, John Wiley.
Class Contact Three hours per week, comprising lectures, tutorials
and seminars.
Assessment Class test (Two Hours) 20%; Assignment (report not
exceeding 5000 words) 20%; Final examination (Three Hours) 60%.
VET6511 DATA NETWORK ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Overview of data networks. Network topologies. Physical
layer interface. Synchronous and asynchronous systems. Link layer
protocols. HDLC, frame relay and ATM. Error control procedures.
Transmission efficiency. Types of switching. Virtual circuits. Network
and transport layer protocols. X.24, IP and TCP. Point to point and
multipoint systems. Access protocols. Token ring, token bus and
ethernet. LANs. Bridges, routers, and gateways. Simple queuing
models for data networks. Little’s theorem. Networks of queues.
Routing and flow control in data networks. Network congestion.
Capacity assignment. Topological design of data networks.
Minimum spanning tress. Heuristic algorithms. Network reliability.
Required Reading Bertsekas, D and Gallager, R., Data
Networks, 2nd edn, Prentice-Hall. Tanenbaum, A., Computer
Networks, 3rd edn, Prentice-Hall.
Recommended Reading Minoli, D., 1993, Broadband Network
Analysis and Design, Artech House. Hsu, J.Y., 1996, Computer
Networks: Architecture, Protocols, and Software, Artech House.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hour lecture and one hour tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Tests/Assignments: 40%; Examination: 60%. A pass
in each component of assessment is required for a subject pass.
VET6512 INTELLIGENT NETWORKS AND NETWORK MANAGEMENT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Intelligent network platforms. Reference models for open
distributed processing (ODP). Components and framework of ODP.
ISO and ITU-T standards. Agent technology. Mobile agents. Impacts
of IN, TMN and TINA. Interactive programming. JAVA and COBRA.
Risks and threats facing intelligent networks. New service demands.
Future network evolutions. Network management standards and
issues. Network security and security management.
Required Reading Thorner, J., 1995, Intelligent Networks, Artech
House
Recommended Reading Lewis, L., 1996, Managing Computer
Networks, Artech House.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hour lecture and one hour tutorial/laboratory
Assessment Tests/Assignments: 40%; Examination: 60%. A pass
in each component of assessment is required for a subject pass.
VET6520 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION PRINCIPLES
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Overview of digital modulation techniques: FSK, QPSK,
QAM, CPM, OFDM; their spectral analysis and BER performance
calculation in AWGN. Maximum-Likelihood Sequence Estimation
(MLSE) detector and MAP detector for linear modulations.
Carrier and Symbol Synchronization techniques. Decision-Directed
Phase Locked Loop (PLL) and Non-Decision-Directed PLLs. Maximum-
Likelihood Timing Estimation. Joint estimation of carrier phase and
symbol timing.
Convolutional codes. Transfer function. Optimum decoding using
Viterbi Algorithm. Error probability for soft-decision decoding of
convolutional codes. Coded modulation; Trellis Coded Modulation
(TCM). Space-Time Coding for MIMO systems.
Channel equalization. Blind equalizations based on maximum
likelihood (ML) criteria, stochastic gradient algorithm, and higher
order signal statistics.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
381
Multi-user Communications. Direct sequence CDMA. Frequency
hoping CDMA. RAKE receivers.
Required Reading Proakis, J.G., 2002, Digital Communications,
4th edition, McGraw-Hill International.
Recommended Reading Kurzweil, J, 2000, An Introduction to
Digital Communications, John Wiley. Haykin, S., 2001,
Communication Systems, 4th edition, John Wiley.
Class Contact Three hours per week, comprising lectures, tutorials
and seminars.
Assessment Class test (Two Hours) 20%; Assignment (report not
exceeding 5000 words) 20%; Final examination (Three Hours) 60%.
VET6521 DIGITAL SWITCHING AND SIGNALLING SYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Historical development of telecommunication switching
systems. Switching system limitations. Single and multistage switches.
Limited availability switches. Digital switching principles. Time and
space switching matrices. Modern generation of electronic
exchanges. Network hierarchy. Routing operations. Local and
national networks. Tandem networks. Modern PABX systems. Voice
and data traffic integration. Concept of ISDN. Signalling systems in
telecommunication networks. CCS No. 7 signalling system.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hour lecture and one hour tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Tests/Assignments: 40%; Examination: 60%. A pass
in each component of assessment is required for a subject pass.
VET6522 TELECOMMUNICATION TARIFF STRUCTURES AND
TELETRAFFIC ENGINEERING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Basic telecommunication tariff structures and their
formulation. Engineering, Economic, Social, and Political
considerations in tariff policy setting. Global operation and
international agreements. Local, interstate and international call
accounting. Inter-carrier call accounting. Network operator, service
provider and customer partnerships. Service differentiation between
voice, data and ISDN connections. Tariff policies in broadband,
interactive multimedia and Internet connections. Tariff regimes in
cellular mobile systems. Teletraffic engineering principles. Queuing
theory. Loss Systems Delay systems. Availability. Dynamic
equivalence. Erlang’s formulas. Network dimensioning. Dynamic
routing. Minimum network design. Network traffic management
techniques. Network management.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Saito, H., 1995, Teletraffic
Technologies, Artech House.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hour lecture and one hour tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Tests/Assignments: 40%; Examination: 60%. A pass
in each component of assessment is required for a subject pass.
VET6531 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SUBSYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject will provide a theoretical and practical
understanding of wireless communication systems and the
subsystems involved in them. It provides an overview of existing
wireless systems with special reference to its hardware
implementation. Subject content will include the following:
Propagation modelling at UHF. Path loss, slow fading and fast
fading. Okumura’s model. Delay spread, coherence bandwidth, and
level crossing rate. Multipath propagation. Interference cancellation.
Antennas. Antenna gain, radiation resistance, and phased array
antennas. Base station antennas for cellular mobile systems. Low
profile portable antennas. Modulation and coding for the mobile
channel. FM, CPM, GMSK, and QPSK. Bit error rate and error flow.
Channel equalisation. The effect of space, time and frequency
diversity. Spread spectrum. CDMA, TDMA and FDMA.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Parsons and Gardiner, Mobile
Communication Systems, Blackie. Lee, W.C.Y., Mobile
Communications Engineering, McGraw Hill.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hour lecture and one hour tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Tests/Assignments: 40%; Examination: 60%. A pass
in each component of assessment is required for a subject pass.
VET6532 MICROWAVE AND SATELLITE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Principles of modern microwave systems planning and
design. Microwave propagation. Beam bending, K-factor and
Fresnel zone clearance. Free space loss calculation. Multipath
propagation. Component characterisation. Microwave antennas,
oscillators, amplifiers, mixers, filters, isolators. Modulation schemes
for analog and digital radio systems. Multiplexing techniques and
system loading effects. Microwave link planning and design
techniques. Noise budget calculations. Reliability calculations.
Evolution of satellite technology and applications. Satellite
communication systems for both domestic and international traffic.
Satellite links and access methods. Satellite orbits. Elevation angles.
Geo-stationary orbits. Communication satellite design. Satellite
antenna systems. Global beam and spot beam antennas. Beam
shaping techniques. Polarisation and frequency re-use techniques.
System EIRP and figure of merit Effects of system non-linearity.
FDMA, TDMA, SCPC and SPADE system design. Satellite link
design. Up-link, down-link and loss calculations. Multichannel system
calculations. On-board regeneration. Link power control Propagation
delay and echo cancellation. Direct broadcasting satellites. VSAT
Networks. Mobile satellite networks. GEO, LEO and MEO systems.
Satellite system management. Frequency co-ordination and
regulation.
Required Reading Elbert, B., 1992, Introduction to Satellite
Communication, Artech House.
Recommended Reading Elbert, B., 1990, The Satellite
Communication Applications Handbook, Artech House.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hour lecture and one hour tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Tests/Assignments: 40%; Examination: 60%. A pass
in each component of assessment is required for a subject pass.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
382
VET6541 MULTIMEDIA AND INTERNET TECHNOLOGY
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Co-requisite Nil
Content Characteristics and requirements of multimedia
telecommunication services. Media integration. Multimedia
communications supporting technologies. Digital audio, image, and
video compression principles. techniques, and standards. Super high
definition images. Image capture systems. Image processing and
image coding algorithms. End-to-end quality of service guarantee
and management for audio and video communications. Network
support of multimedia communications. Multimedia transport
protocols. End system architectures. Multimedia servers. Networked
multimedia synchronisation requirements and mechanisms.
Multimedia workstations and servers. Information super highways.
Internet. HTML. Java and objected oriented programming.
Required Reading Lu, G., 1996, Communication and Computing
for Distributed Multimedia Systems, Artech House.
Recommended Reading Minoli, D., 1995, Distributed
Multimedia Through Broadband Communication Services, Artech
House.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hour lecture and one hour tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Tests/Assignments: 40%; Examination: 60%. A pass
in each component of assessment is required for a subject pass.
VET6542 MOBILE AND PERSONAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Overview of cellular systems. Capacity calculation. Cell
site engineering. Cell splitting and sectoring. FDMA, TDMA and
CDMA systems. Spectral efficiency considerations. Air link interface.
Radio resource management. Mobility management. Handover.
Cellular traffic. Cell enhance. Cellular networking. Micro and macro
cellular systems. AMPS, DAMPS, JDC, DECT and GSM systems.
Hyper LANs. Mobile data networks. Mobile satellite services. The
wireless enterprise. PMR. PCS. Options for deliver of PCS.
Standardisation. Security issues. International development and
perspectives of PCS. Regulatory environment. Emerging and Future
PCS.
Required Reading Faruque, S., 1994, Cellular Mobile Systems
Engineering, Artech House.
Recommended Reading Hadden, A., 1996, Personal
Communication Networks: Practical Implementation, Artech House.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hour lecture and one hour tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Tests/Assignments: 40%; Examination: 60%. A pass
in each component of assessment is required for a subject pass.
VET6550 MINOR PROJECT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VET6510, VET6520
Co-requisite Nil
Content Each student will undertake an individual research on a
topic allocated to him or her under the supervision of an academic
staff over the duration of a semester. Regular meetings will be held
between the students and their supervisors in the form of seminars
where students will report their progress in the form of formal
presentations. In addition, informal meetings between students and
their supervisors will take place as and when required. In the
process, the student will be exposed to research related matters such
as Research Methodology, Literature Reviews, Feasibility Studies,
Experiment Design, Modelling and Simulation Techniques and Tools,
Results Analysis and Validation, Report Documentation and
Presentation.
Required Reading To be advised by the supervisor of the project.
Recommended Reading To be advised by the supervisor of the
project.
Class Contact Six hours per week for one semester, comprising
three hours per week group seminar, and three hours per week (on
average) individual meetings, discussions, etc. with respective
supervisors.
Assessment Regular seminar presentations (3 seminars, each of
20 min duration), 30%. Final report (Approximately 12,000 words)
50%. Final presentation (of 30 min. duration), 20%
VET6551 MICROWAVE ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT DESIGN
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Co-requisite Nil
Content This subject will provide an introduction to microwave
electronic circuit design based around the ‘Microstrip’ transmission
line structure. Students will be given small design projects to
complete operating at the frequencies relevant to mobile
communications (ie. 0.9 to 3 Ghz). Extensive use will be made of
Agilent’s simulation and design package, ADS and other software
packages in this course. Subject content: A review of basic
transmission line theory. A review of microwave transmission
structures. A discussion of corrections for microstrip discontinuities. a
review of the Smith Chart. Consideration of matching requirements
for small signal amplifiers. A review of matching techniques. Bias
circuit design and power amplifier design. Passive RF Components.
Required Reading Gonzadez, G., 1984, Microwave Transistor
Amplifiers – Analysis and Design, Prentice-Hall.
Recommended Reading Fooks, E.H. and Zakerevicius, A.,
Microwave Engineering Using Microstrip Circuits, Prentice Hall.
Vendelin, G.D., Pavio, A.M. and Rhode, U.I., Microwave Circuit
Design Using Linear and Nonlinear Techniques, Wiley Inter Science.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
one hour lecture and two hour tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Assignments: 60%; Examination/test: 40%. A pass in
each component of assessment is required for a subject pass.
VET6552 COMPUTER NETWORKS AND NETWORKING SOFTWARE
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Co-requisite Nil
Content Computer systems architecture and organisation.
Communication controllers. Ports and buffers configuration and
management. Computer networking principles. Network operating
systems. Computer communication protocol architecture, their
design, verification and implementation. Internetworking. Network
layer protocols. Ip. Internet addressing and route management.
Address resolution protocols. Transport service primitives.
Connection establishment and release. Connection management.
Time management. Network performance issues. Internetwork
transport protocols. TCP and UDP. Port numbers. Domain naming
systems. Interior and exterior gateways. Network management
protocols. Electronic mail. Simple mail transfer protocols. File transfer
protocol. Network file systems. Terminal emulation. Telnet.
Required Reading Pabrai, U.O., 1995, UNIX Internetworking,
Artech House.
Recommended Reading Freer, J., Communications and
Networks, 2nd edn, IEEE Press. Stevens, W.R., TCP/IP Illustrated;
Vol 1,2 and 3, Addison Wesley.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hour lecture and one hour tutorial/laboratory.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
383
Assessment Tests/Assignments: 40%; Examination: 60%. A pass
in each component of assessment is required for a subject pass.
VET6561 LOCAL AREA AND BROADBAND NETWORKS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Co-requisite Nil
Content Local Area Network architecture and design. IEEE802
standard. Medium Access Control and Logical Link Control functions.
Token ring, token bus, and Ethernet. Optical fiber LANs. FDDI.
Metropolitan Area Networks. Bridges, routers and gateways. LAN
performance analysis. Broadband network architecture and
characteristics. Characterization of ISDN services. Overview of ITU-T
recommendations. ISDN interfaces and functions. ISDN protocol
architecture and ISDN connections. B-ISDN standards, services, and
requirements. ATM networks. SONET and SDH. ATM cell switch
fabric. ATM traffic. Control of ATM traffic and resource
management. Connection admission control. Congestion control,
flow control, and error control. ATM adaptation layer. ATM network
management architecture. Implementation of ATM network elements.
Required Reading To be advised by the lecturer.
Recommended Reading Halsall, F., 1996, Data
Communications, Computer Networks and Open System, 4th edn,
Addison WesleyChen. T.M. and Liu, S.S., 1994, ATM Switching
Systems, Artech House. Minoli, D. and Alles, A., 1996, LAN, ATM,
and LAN Emulation Technologies, Artech House.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hour lecture and one hour tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Tests/Assignments: 30%; Examination: 70%. A pass
in each component of assessment is required for a subject pass.
VET6562 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Co-requisite Nil
Content The subject will provide a theoretical and practical
understanding of digital signal processing techniques. Particular
emphasis is placed on its applications to telecommunication circuit
design and implementation. The subject examines the following
topics. Aliasing. Quantisation. Signal reconstruction distortion.
Dynamic ranges. Round-off errors. IIR digital filter design. Bilinear
transformation and impulse invariant methods. FIR digital filter
design. Windowing. Frequency sampling. Minimum phase and
linear phase filter design. Effect of sampling rate variation.
Decimation and interpolation. Adaptive filtering. LMS algorithm and
its application. SO implementations of modulators, oscillators,
limiters, phase shifters and other circuits. Design of modems, voice
coders, image processors, and antenna beam formers.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Class Contact Three hours per week for one semester comprising
two hour lecture and one hour tutorial/laboratory.
Assessment Tests/Assignments: 40%; Examination: 60%. A pass
in each component of assessment is required for a subject pass.
VMC5672 NUMERICAL TECHNIQUES AND PROGRAMMING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Computer arithmetic and errors. Linear algebra, matrix
decomposition, solution of linear equations, eigenvalue problems.
Non-linear equations. Curve fitting, splines. Partial differential
equations, parabolic, elliptic and hyperbolic equations.
Implementation by computer programming.
Required Reading Press et al, 2002, Numerical recipes in C++:
The art of scientific computing, Cambridge University Press. Schilling
and Harris, 2000, Applied numerical methods for engineers,
Brooks/Cole. Jordan and Smith, 1999, Nonlinear ordinary
differential equations, Oxford.
Recommended Reading Chapman, 2002, MATLAB
programming for engineers, Brooks/Cole. Kreyszig, 1998,
Advanced engineering mathematics, Wiley.
Class Contact Three hours weekly (one lecture, two tutorials/
computer based laboratory) for 12 week
Assessment Final assessment, 50% (Five assignments on computer
implementation of numerical algorithms, each of 2500-5000 words
10% each). Final Examination, three hours, (50% of final
assessment). Students must attain a mark of at least 50% in each
component to pass this subject.
VMC5771 COMPUTER AIDED ENGINEERING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Solid modelling: bottom-up modelling, top-down modelling.
Key points, lines, areas, volumes Solid Modelling primitives. Boolean
operations. Solid modelling from imported CAD files. Rigid body
motion analysis: virtual prototyping processes Model hierarchy,
objects, measures, constraints, parts, joints, forces. Markers,
construction points, sensors. Finite Element Analysis: formulation of
element. Meshing techniques. Static Stress Analysis. Post Processing
and graphic presentation of results. Integrated workbench, animation
and simulation of engineering problems.
Required Reading Zeid, 2004, Mastering CAD/CAM, McGraw-
Hill. Fung and Tong, 2001, Classical and Computational Solid
Mechanics, World Scientific. Zienkiewicz and Taylor, 2000, Finite
Element Method, Vol 1-3, McGraw-Hill.
Recommended Reading Moaveni, 1999, Finite Element
Analysis, Prentice Hall. Cook, 1995, Finite Element Modelling for
Stress Analysis, Wiley. Manuals of the following software: ADAMS,
SOLIDWORKS, PRO/ENGINEER, ANSYS, ABAQUS, NASTRAN.
Class Contact Three hours weekly for 12 weeks, comprising of one
lecture and two tutorials.
Assessment Three assignments, 60% (each of 20% based on
analytical and computational works and report of 5000-7500
words); three-hour final examination, 40% (open book). Students
must attain a mark of at least 50% in each component to pass this
subject.
VME5782 SPECIALIST ELECTIVE
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VMW5771 Research Techniques.
Content One of the following topics, subject to staff availability:
VMM5782Composite materials design, VMF5882 Flow
measurement techniques, VMS5772 Optimization, VMV5772
Transportation and packaging dynamics.
Required Reading As recommended by the lecturers.
Recommended Reading As recommended by the lecturers.
Class Contact Three hours weekly comprising of lectures, tutorials
and laboratory for 12 weeks
Assessment As specified by the Lecturer of the Specialist Elective
chosen.
VMP5872 RESEARCH PROJECT
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VMW5771 Research Techniques
Content Methods of formulating research problem, literature survey.
Techniques of poster presentation, final report, research seminar.
Carrying out a research project oh choice: acquiring data,
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
384
processing data. Presenting findings in seminar, by poster
presentation and writing research report.
Required Reading Evans, 1995, How to write a better thesis or
report, Melbourne University Press.
Recommended Reading Beer, D., and McMurrey, D., 1997, A
guide to writing as an Engineer, Wiley.
Class Contact Lectures, tutorials and project presentation in the
form of poster and seminars, three hours per week for 12 weeks.
Assessment Project presentation, 40% (Project proposal 10%,
poster presentation 10%, seminar presentation 20%); Final Report,
60%. Students must attain a mark of at least 50% in each component
to pass this subject.
VMR5781 MINOR THESIS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Research Project
Content Carrying out research under supervision for a minor thesis
and writing the thesis.
Required Reading As recommended by the supervisor.
Recommended Reading As recommended by the supervisor.
Class Contact As arranged and recommended by the supervisor.
Assessment Based entirely on the thesis by two examiners, at least
one is external to the university.
Vms5772 optimization
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VMC5771 Computer Aided Engineering.
Content Design variables, objective functions and constraints.
Unconstrained and constrained optimisation. Classical methods
based on calculus. Linear and nonlinear programming. Optimality
criteria methods. Shape and Topology optimisation problems in
engineering. Multi-objective optimisation in engineering. Genetic
algorithm, reproduction, crossover and mutation. Applications in
sizing, shape and topology structural optimization problems, and
problems of planning and management of water resources.
Required Reading Bendsoe and Sigmund, 2003, Topology
optimisation, Theory, Methods and Applications, Springer-Verlag.
Poli and Langdon, 2002, Foundations of genetic programming,
Springer-Verlag.
Recommended Reading Chong, 1996, An introduction to
optimisation, John Wiley & Sons. Haftka and Gurdal, 1992,
Elements of Structural Optimization, Kluwer Academic Publishers.
Goldberg, 1989, Genetic algorithm in search, optimisation and
machine learning, Addison-Wesley. ANSYS Manuals.
Class Contact Three hours per week comprising of two lectures
and one tutorial for 12 weeks.
Assessment Three assignments, 60% (each of 20%, on
implementing optimisation algorithms to solve optimisation problems
with a report of 4000-5000 words.); one three-hour final
examination, 40%. Students must attain a mark of at least 50% in
each component to pass this subject.
VMT5882 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content The numerical schemes used for CFD, their accuracy and
stability limit. Turbulence models: eddy viscosity concept, k- model,
RNG models; turbulence models near the wall. Boundary and initial
conditions specification, wall boundary, open boundary, inlet and
exit; How to divide the computation domain into small regions; Grid
generation and near wall requirement; CFD simulations for smoke
spread during a fire in building, air-conditioning system, air flow
inside an engine manifold and exhaust system. Basic concept of LES
and DNS, their applications and limitations.
Required Reading Chung, 2002, Computational Fluid Dynamics,
Cambridge University Press. Fletcher, C.A.J., 1988, Computational
Techniques for Fluid Dynamics, Springer-Verlag. Patankar, S.V.,
1980, Numerical Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Hemisphere.
Recommended Reading Anderson, 1995, Computational Fluid
Dynamics, McGraw-Hill.
Class Contact Three hours of lectures, tutorials, and computer-
based laboratory per week for 12 weeks.
Assessment Two assignments, 20% (each of 10%, 2500-5000
words); one one-hour test, 10%; laboratory, 20%; final three-hour
examination, 50%. Students must attain a mark of at least 50% in
each component to pass this subject.
VMV5781 ADVANCED DYNAMICS AND VIBRATIONS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Vibration of linear multi degree of freedom (MDOF)
system, discrete systems, Lagrange equations and Hamilton’s
principles, continuous systems. Vibration of undamped and damped,
free and forced vibration. Stiffness matrix, mass matrix and damping
matrix. Damping mechanisms. Numerical methods in solving
dynamics problems, Rayleigh’s method, Eigenvalue problems.
Random Vibration Analysis. Non-linear systems, Duffing’s method.
Required Reading Rao, 2004, Mechanical Vibrations, Pearson
Prentice Hall. Newland, 1989, Mechanical Vibration Analysis and
Computations, Longman.
Recommended Reading Hart and Wong, 2000, Structural
Dynamics for Structural Engineers, Wiley. Ginsberg, 2001,
Mechanical and Strucrural Vibrations, Wiley. Manuals of MATLAB.
Class Contact Three hours weekly of lectures and tutorials,
laboratory for 12 weeks.
Assessment Three assignments, 30% (each of 10% based on
analytical and numerical analysis and a report of 2000-3000
words); laboratory, 20%; one three-hour open book examination,
50%. Students must attain a mark of at least 50% in each component
to pass this subject.
VMV5782 COMPUTATIONAL DYNAMICS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VMV5781 Advanced Dynamics and Vibration.
Content Finite element method in vibration. Response analysis in
harmonic, transient and random vibration. Implicit and explicit
computational techniques. Frequency analysis, non stationary signals
and transient analysis. Non-linear systems. Vibration testing and
experimental modal analysis, frequency response functions,
receptance, mobility, accelerance. Spatial-modal-response models of
mechanical systems. Structural modification.
Required Reading He and Fu, 2001, Modal Analysis,
Butterworth-Heinemann. Bendat and Piersol, 2000, Random Data:
Measurement and Analysis, Wiley. Newland, 1996, Introduction to
Random, Spectral and Wavelet Analysis, Addison-Wesley.
Recommended Reading Maia and Silva, 1998, Theoretical and
Experimental Modal Analysis, Research Studies Press. Ewins, 1995,
Nodal Testing: Theory and Practice, Research Studies Press. Randall,
1987, Frequency Analysis, Bruel & Kjaer. McConnell, 1995,
Vibration: Testing Theory and Practice, John Wiley &Sons Inc.
Manuals of ICATS, LMS, ANSYS, ABAQUS, MATLAB
Class Contact Three hours per week for 12 weeks, comprising of
lectures, tutorials, experimental laboratory and computer-based
laboratory.
Assessment Three assignment, 20% (each of 10% and 2500-
5000 words); laboratory, 20%; one three-hour final examination,
50%. Students must attain a mark of at least 50% in each component
to pass this subject.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
385
VMW5682 MANUFACTURING MATERIALS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Advanced topics in the following areas: Fabrication
processes in casting, cutting and solid shaping and their relationship
to polymeric, ceramic and metallic materials. Selection of materials
for clean manufacturing.
Required Reading DeGarmo, P.E., Black, T.J., and Kohser A.R.,
2002, Materials and processes in Manufacturing, Wiley. Rojter, J.,
2004, Manufacturing Materials, Victoria University.
Recommended Reading Groover, 2002, Fundamentals of
Modern Manufacturing, Wiley. Journal Articles as prescribed from:
Industry and Engineering; Journal of Manufacturing Technology;
Materials World; Journal of Environmental Engineering;
Manufacturing Science; Journal of Materials Science and
Engineering.
Class Contact Lectures, tutorials and seminars, three hours/week
for 12 weeks
Assessment Three assignments, 60% each of 4000-5,000 words;
two two-hour tests, 40%.
VMW5771 RESEARCH TECHNIQUES
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content An overview of the history of engineering and scientific
research. An introduction to the philosophy of science and the ideas
of Popper, Kuhn, Feyerabend and others. Design and Analysis of
Experiment. Error and uncertainty. Statistical Data Analysis. Taguchi
method for design and experiments.
Required Reading Montgomery, D.C., 2001, Design and
Analysis of Experiments, Wiley. Roy, 2001, Design of Experiments
using the Taguchi Approach, Interscience.
Recommended Reading Roy, 1990, A primer on the Taguchi
Method, Society of Manufacturing Engineers. Chalmers, 1999,
What is this thing called science?, 3rd edn, University of
Queensland Press. Hellman, 1998, Great feuds in science: Ten of
the liveliest disputes ever, John Wiley and Sons.
Class Contact Three hours per week of lectures, tutorials and
laboratory-based assignments for twelve weeks.
Assessment Four assignments, 40% (each of 10%, of 2500-5000
words); final three hour examination, 60%. Students must attain a
mark of at least 50% in each component to pass this subject.
VMY5682 EXPERIMENTAL TECHNIQUES AND SIGNAL PROCESSING
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Nil.
Content Engineering measurement theory and fundamentals;
Instrumentation for mechanical processes; Signal conditioning and
dynamic response of measurement systems; Data acquisition
systems; Frequency filters. Interfacing with computers. Signal theory;
Time domain analysis; Synchronous averaging, probability
distribution estimates and statistical parameters; Frequency domain
analysis: Fast Fourier Transform (FFT); Shock Response Spectrum;
Frequency response functions, coherence, signal-to-noise ratio; Non-
stationary signals; Non-Gaussian signals.
Required Reading Boashah, 2003, Time frequency signal
analysis and processing, Elsevier. Bendat and Piersol, 2000,
Random data, Analysis and measurement procedures, Wiley.
Randall, 1987, Frequency analysis, Bruel & Kjaer.
Recommended Reading Beckwith, T., et al, 1993, Mechanical
Measurements, Addison Wesley. Cacko, J., Bily, M., Bukoveczky, J.,
1988, Random Processes: Measurement, Analysis, and Simulation
(Fundamental Studies in Engineering, Vol 8), Elsevier Science Ltd.
Class Contact Two-hour lecture weekly. One-hour laboratory
session/tutorial fortnightly
Assessment Five assignments (50%) based on laboratory
exercises. Final three-hour examination (50%). Students must attain a
mark of at least 50% in each component to pass this subject.
VPM5000 INTERMODAL FREIGHT MARKETS – DYNAMICS AND
STRUCTURE
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject is concerned with the way in which rapidly
restructuring logistics and freight handling systems are impacting on
the efficiency and effectiveness of service providers in integrated and
intermodal freight markets. It focuses particularly on developing
concepts, skills and techniques that will assist transport professionals
and managers in intermodal freight handling firms not only to
understand the economic and competitive drivers in the market place
but also how to define their corporate ‘product’ and the way in
which they do business. The subject meshes principles with practice
and is developed within a framework or a detailed understanding of
the Australian freight industry and its operations and practice, and it
is informed also by extensive experience in Southeast Asian and
Pacific Rim countries, in the United States and in Europe.
Required Reading Course Handbook provided to each student.
Recommended Reading Begg, D., et al., 1998, Economics,
McGraw Hill. Cox, A. and Hines, P., 1997, Advanced Supply
Management, Earlsgate Press. Department of Primary Industries and
Energy, 1998, Chains of Success, AGPS. Handfield, R.B. and
Nichols, E.L., 1999, Introduction to Supply Chain Management,
Prentice Hall. Gattorna, J.L. and Walters, D.W., 1996, Managing
the Supply Chain, Macmillan. Muller, G., 1995, Intermodal Freight
Transportation, ENO Transportation Foundation and International
Association of North America, Lonsdowne. Porter, M.E., 1990, The
Competitive Advantage of Nations, Macmillan. Porter, M.E., 1996,
What is Strategy?, Harvard Business Review Nov-Dec. Poirier, C.E.,
1999, Advanced Supply Chain Management, Berrett-Kochler.
Quiggin, J., 1996, Great Expectations: Microeconomic Reform and
Australia, Allen and Unwin.
Class Contact Forty five hours of block mode teaching.
Assessment Case study and seminar presentation, 10%; Syndicate
group project, 40%; Research report, 50%.
VPM5001 INTEGRATING INTERMODAL FREIGHT SYSTEMS
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) VPM5000 Intermodal Freight Markets – Dynamics
and Structure.
Content This subject focuses on the need to create seamlessness in
transport services and operations that span complex networks
involving different modes and many interface points – depots,
terminals, warehouses, ports, for example. It recognises that
intermodal efficiency may not be easily achieved; and that action
may be required on many fronts – including operational capacity
matching, alliance formation, information and e-Business
streamlining, rationalising chain structures, eliminating market
structure inefficiency and harmonising policies and policy
frameworks. Particular attention is paid to capacity measurement,
provision and adjustment in freight networks; to efficiency costs and
pricing frameworks; to ways and means of achieving efficient chain
and supply chain structures; and to overcoming policy and
regulatory constraints. This subject draws heavily not only on the
Australian freight industry but also on international experience.
Required Reading Course Handbook provided to each student.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
386
Recommended Reading Cox, A. and Hines, P., 1997,
Advanced Supply Management, Earlsgate Press. Department of
Primary Industries and Energy, 1998, Chains of Success, AGPS.
Frankel, E., 1997, Developing Standard Congestion Measures for
Intermodal Transport, APEC Ibid. Handfield, R.B. and Nichols, E.L.,
1999, Introduction to Supply Chain Management, Prentice Hall.
Gattorna, J.L. and Walters, D.W., 1996, Managing the Supply
Chain, Macmillan. Kajewski, L.J. and Ritzman, L.P., 1996,
Operations Management, Strategy and Analysis, Addison Wesley.
Muller, G., 1995, Intermodal Freight Transportation, ENO
Transportation Foundation and International Association of North
America, Lonsdowne. Ortuzar, J.D. and Williamsen, L.G., 1994,
Modelling Transport, John Wiley & Sons. Phillips, L.W., 1991,
Building Market-Focused Organisations, Executive Education
Program, University of California. Poirier, C.C., 1999, Advanced
Supply Chain Management, Berrett-Kochler. Porter, M.E., 1990, The
Competitive Advantage of Nations, Macmillan. Rowe, A.J. et.al.,
1994, Strategic Management: A Methodogical Approach, Addison-
Wesley. Taha, H.A., 1997, Operations Research; An Introduction,
Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Forty five hours of block mode teaching.
Assessment Case study and seminar presentation, 10%; Syndicate
group project, 40%; Research report, 50%.
VPM5002 DEFINING STRATEGIES FOR INTERMODAL FREIGHT
SYSTEMS
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject builds on the concepts, skills and techniques
developed in VPM5000 and VPM5001. In those subjects students
examined the nature of the intermodal freight market and the role of
the intermodal service provider in it; and the ways and means of
managing to achieve seamless and efficient operations. In this
subject the guiding questions are strategic ones and focus on
positioning the firm for the future. More particularly, the subject
develops a strong understanding of the notion of strategy and of an
adequate conceptual framework within which to define strategies. It
also outlines some quite specific attributes of strategy for intermodal
firms and for the effective achievement of integrated freight networks.
This subject draws heavily not only on the Australian freight industry
but also on international experience.
Required Reading Hamel, G. and Prahalad, C.K., 1994,
Competing for the Future, Harvard Business School Boston. Course
Handbook provided to each student.
Recommended Reading Department of Primary Industries and
Energy, 1998, Chains of Success, AGPS. Johnson, G. and Scholes,
K., 1999, Exploring Corporate Strategy, 5th edn, Prentice Hall.
Kanter, R.M., 1989, When Giants Learn to Dance, Simon and
Schuster. Kanter, R.M., 1990, The Change Masters: Corporate
Entrepreneurs at Work, Unwin. Kaplan, R.M., 1997, On the
Frontiers of Management, Harvard Business School Press. Kaplan,
R.S. and Norton, D.P., 1996, The Balanced Scorecard: Translating
Strategy into Action, Harvard Business School Press. Mintzberg, H.,
1994, The Rise and Fall of Strategic Planning, Prentice Hall.
Transportation Research Board and National Research Council,
1998, Public Options for Intermodal Freight Transportation, National
Academy Press.
Class Contact Forty five hours of block mode teaching.
Assessment Case study and seminar presentation, 10%; Syndicate
group project, 40%; Research report, 50%.
VPM5003 ADVANCED CHAIN SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content This subject focuses on managing firms in chain systems to
achieve fully integrated, rather than highly segmented and atomistic
chains. It is concerned with ways and meand of trading off system
efficiency and costs in such a way as to deliver maximum customer
value under varying economic and policy scenarios. This unit will ad
further to the students’ understanding of process mapping, the design
of static and dynamic KPls and dynamic modelling solutions for
efficient chains.
Required Reading Current available text book – student to be
advised.
Recommended Reading Poirier, C.C., 1999, Advanced Supply
Chain Management, Berrett-Kochler Publications. Reddy, R. and
Reddy, S., 2001, Supply Chains to Virtual Integration, McGraw Hill.
Cox, A., et al., 2002, Supply Chains, Markets and Power,
Routledge. Handfield, R.B. and Nichols, E.L., 1999, Introduction to
Supply Chain Management, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Teaching for each unit is over a five day block.
Assessment A seminar paper, 10%; Group syndicate work, 40%;
Research report, 50%.
VPM5004 FINANICAL AND INVESTMENT PLANNING IN CHAIN
SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Third party service providers, like other firms, must
understand the relationship between the costs of investments and the
use of capital and the benefits of investment. The timing of
investments, cost/price relationships and the risks associated with
investment are of exceptional importance to business success. This
unit focuses on these issues and introduces students to concepts,
financial modelling and technique for developing investment
scenarios.
Required Reading Current available text book – student to be
advised.
Recommended Reading Kaplan, R.S. and Norton, D.P., 1996,
The Balanced Scorecard, Harvard University Business Press. Bureau
of Transport Economics, 1999, Facts and Furfies in Benefit-Cost
Analysis: Transport, Canberra. Begg, D., et al., 1994, Economics,
McGraw Hill. Braley, R.A. and Myers, S., 1996, The Principles of
Corporate Finance, McGraw Hill. Keown, P. and Martin, S., 1993,
Basic Financial Management, Prentice Hall. Ballou, R.H., 1992,
Business Logistics Management, Prentice Hall.
Class Contact Teaching for each unit is over a five day block.
Assessment A seminar paper, 10%; Group syndicate work, 40%;
Research report, 50%.
VPM5005 STRATEGY, STRATEGIC OPTIONS AND BUSINESS SUCCESS
IN CHAIN SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content Rapid and continuing changes in complex intermodal and
chain systems are resulting in significantly increased competitive
pressures for third party service provider firms. What strategic
options are available to stakeholder firms? And on what basis can
the traditional ‘transport provider’ firms achieve sustained business
success? This unit examines in depth the basis for business success
and examines particularly the notions of market andsupply chain
power and draws on current research into real-world examples to
provide guidance for stakeholder firms.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
387
Required Reading Current available text book – student to be
advised.
Recommended Reading Cox, A., et al., 2002, Supply Chains,
Markets and Power, Routledge Bruce, R., 2000, Creating your
Strategic Future, Harper Business. Kaplan, R.S. and Norton,
D.P.,1996, The Balanced Scorecard, Harvard Business School Press.
Kaplan, R.S. and Norton, D.P., 2001, The Strategy-Focused
Organisation, Harvard Business School Press.
Class Contact Teaching for each unit is over a five day block.
Assessment A seminar paper, 10%; Group syndicate work, 40%;
Research report, 50%.
VPP6511 FIBRE OPTIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for admission to Master’s course.
Content Review of basic optical theory: Optical fibres. Attenuation
in silica optical fibres. Modes in slab waveguides. Modes in optic
fibres. Dispersion and distortion in optical fibres. Sources for optical
fibre systems. Detectors for fibre optic systems. Noise in detector
systems. Fibre optic communication systems. Fibre fabrication.
Required Reading Palais, J.C. 2005, Fibre Optic
Communications, 5th edn, Prentice-Hall, NJ.
Recommended Reading Printed Lecture Notes. Senior, J.
1992,Optical Fiber Communications, 2nd edn, Prentice Hall,
London. Gowar, J. 1993, Optical Communication Systems, Prentice
Hall, London. Cheo, P. 1990, Fibre Optics – Devices and Systems,
Prentice Hall, NJ. Rogers, A.J. 2001, Understanding Optical Fiber
Communications, Artech House, Boston.
Class Contact 36 hours lectures/tutorials/laboratories
Assessment Two assignments (each assignment report not
exceeding 5000 words) 10% each; Two laboratory reports (word
length of each not exceeding 2500 words) 10% each; Final
examination (Two Hours) 60%.
VPP6512 ADVANCED FIBRE OPTICS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VPP6511 Fibre Optic Communication Systems
Content Maxwell’s Equations for waveguides, boundary conditions
and eigenvalue equations, planar dielectric waveguides and their
modes, cylindrical dielectric waveguides and their modes, LP mode
description, Gaussian approximation, dispersion in multimode and
single mode fibres, normal mode theory of single mode fibre
couplers. Role of optical amplifiers. Use of Bragg gratings for
switching and dispersion compensation. Design and operation of
current systems including those using dense wavelength division
multiplexing.
Required Reading Jones, W.B. 1988, Introduction to Optical
Fiber Communication Systems, Holt Rinehart and Winston, New
York.
Recommended Reading Buck, J.A. 1995, Fundamentals of
Optical Fibres, John Wiley & Sons, New York. Snyder, A.W. and
Love, J.D. 1983, Optical Waveguide Theory, Chapman & Hall,
London. Senior, J.M. 1992, Optical Fiber Communications, 2nd
edn, Prentice Hall, NJ. Marcel Dekker, New York. Othonos, A. and
Kalli, K. 1999, Fiber Bragg Gratings: Fundamentals and
Applications in Telecommunication and Sensing, Artech House,
Boston. Powers, J. 1997, An Introduction to Fiber Optic Systems,
2nd edn, Irwin, Chicago.
Class Contact 36 hours lectures/tutorials.
Assessment Four assignments (each assignment report not
exceeding 5000 words) 10% each. Final examination (Two Hours)
60%.
VPP6521 OPTICS AND LASERS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for admission to Master’s course.
Content Interaction of radiation with matter; absorption,
spontaneous emission and stimulated emission. Population inversion,
net gain. Introductory ideas of optical cavities, threshold. Time
behaviour of laser output, burst-mode and Q-switched pulses.
General requirements for CW output. Rate equations. Overview of
laser materials and pumping methods. Examples of gas, solid state
and semiconductor lasers. Laser Oscillators. Line broadening
mechanisms, inhomogeneous and homogeneous broadening, gain
saturation. Laser output versus input. Laser amplifiers. Optical
resonators. Short pulse techniques. Tunable laser techniques. Non-
linear optics – second harmonic generation and parametric
oscillation. Laser applications. Laser safety and laser hazards. Fibre
lasers and optical amplifiers.
Required Reading Verdeyen, J.T. 1995, Laser Electronics, 3rd
edn, Prentice-Hall International, USA.
Recommended Reading Koechner, W. 1995, Solid State Laser
Engineering, Springer-Verlag, Germany. Digonnet, M.J.F. 2001,
Rare Earth Doped Fiber Lasers and Amplifiers, 2nd edn, Marcel
Dekker, New York.
Class Contact 36 hours lectures/tutorials/laboratories.
Assessment Two assignments (each assignment report not
exceeding 5000 words) 10% each. Two laboratory reports (word
length of each not exceeding 2500 words) 10% each; Final
examination (Two Hours) 60%.
VPP6522 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS OVER OPTICAL NETWORKS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VPP6511 Fibre Optic Communication Systems
Content Fibre Optic transmission systems. Issues of chromatic
dispersion, fibres and operational wavelengths, sources and
receivers. LANs, Gigabit and 10 gigabit Ethernet, WANs, MANs,
power budget. Protocols for modern communication systems –
SONET/SDH: Architecture and protocols, speeds, architecture
layers, network elements, rings, switching, restoration, and diversity.
WDM and DWDM: special fibres, erbium-doped fibre amplifier
(EDFA), tunable laser diode at 1550 nm. Practical issues in Optical
Networking, non linearities, Raman amplifiers. Future trends.
Required Reading Goralski, W. 2001, Optical Networking &
WDM, SPIE, Bellingham WA
Recommended Reading Bernstein, G., Rajagopalan, B. and
Saha, D. 2004, Optical Network Control, Addison Wesley, Boston.
Sexton, M., and Reid, A. 1992, Transmission Networking: SONET
and the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy, Artech House, Boston, MA.
Rahman, M.A. 1998, Guide to ATM Systems and Technology,
Artech House, Boston, MA. Manuals for optical network design
software.
Class Contact 36 hours lectures/tutorials/laboratories exercises.
Assessment Two assignments (each assignment report not
exceeding 5000 words) 10% each. Two laboratory reports (word
length of each not exceeding 2500 words) 10% each; Final
examination (Two Hours) 60%.
VPP6531 QUANTUM OPTICS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for admission to Master’s course.
Content Photoelectric effect and spontaneous emission. de Broglie
Waves: wave-particle duality, Heisenberg’s Uncertainty Principle,
properties of matter waves. Schroedinger Wave Equation: wave
functions, expectation values, eigenfunctions, zero potential,
potential steps and barriers, tunnelling, particle in a box, simple
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
388
harmonic oscillator. One electron atoms: eigenfunctions and
eigenvalues, probability densities, orbital angular momentum,
electron spin, orbital and spin magnetic dipole moments, spin-orbit
interaction, total angular momentum. Multielectron atoms and the
Periodic Table of the Elements. The interaction of radiation with
matter including angular momentum and selection rules.
Spectroscopy of optical materials.
Required Reading Taylor, J.R., Zafiratos, C.D. and Dubson, M.A.
2003, Modern Physics for Scientists and Engineers, 2nd edn,
Prentice Hall, NJ.
Recommended Reading Eisberg, R. and Resnick, R. 1985,
Quantum Physics of Atoms, Molecules, Solids, Nuclei and Particles,
2nd edn, Wiley, USA. Mandl, F. 1992, Quantum Mechanics,
Wiley, UK. Schleich, W.P. 2001, Quantum in Phase Space, Wiley,
Germany
Class Contact 36 hours lectures/tutorials/laboratories exercises.
Assessment Two assignments (each assignment report not
exceeding 5000 words) 10% each. Two laboratory reports (word
length of each not exceeding 2500 words) 10% each; Final
examination (Two Hours) 60%.
VPP6532 OPTICAL FIBRE SENSORS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) VPP6511 FIBRE OPTIC COMMUNICATION
SYSTEMS
Content Introduction and basic concepts, materials interactions in
optical fibre sensors, fibre optic components, special optical fibres
for sensors, interferometric sensors, fibre-optic gyroscope, intensity
and wavelength-based sensors, multiplexed and distributed sensors.
Fibre Bragg gratings for strain or temperature measurement.
Applications of fibre sensors, e.g. smart structures.
Required Reading Grattan, K.T.V. and Meggitt, B.T. 1995-1999,
Optical Fiber Sensor Technology Volumes 1-4, Chapman & Hall,
London and Kluwer Academic, Dordrecht, Netherlands.
Recommended Reading López-Higuera, J.M. 2002, Handbook
of Optical Fibre Sensing Technology, Wiley, Chichester, UK. Dakin,
J. and Culshaw, B. 1988-1997, Optical Fibre Sensors Volumes 1-4,
Artech House Inc. Norwood, MA. Othonos, A. and Kalli, K. 1999,
Fiber Bragg Gratings: Fundamentals and Applications in
Telecommunication and Sensing, Artech House, Boston.
Class Contact 36 hours lectures/tutorials/laboratories exercises.
Assessment Two assignments (each assignment report not
exceeding 5000 words) 10% each. Two laboratory reports (word
length of each not exceeding 2500 words) 10% each; Final
examination (Two Hours), 60%.
VPP6541 OPTICAL MATERIALS
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for admission to Master’s course.
Content General Properties. Propagation of E/M waves in
dielectric media; models of the refractive index; dispersion,
absorption and the refractive index; frequency dependence;
scattering; cross-sections. Properties of Lens Materials Commonly
used materials in the ultra-violet, visible and infrared regions;
transmittance, dispersion and the refractive index; environmental
properties; examples. Solid State Laser Materials Host materials:
crystalline materials, semiconductors, active ions; colour centres.
Non-linear Materials Electro-optic effect; magneto-optic effect. Thin
Film Materials Substrates. Optical damage mechanisms; self-
focusing; damage thresholds; specification of cosmetic surface
quality of optical components.
Required Reading Pedrotti, F.L. and Pedrotti L.S. 1993.
Introduction to Optics, 2nd edn, Prentice Hall, NJ
Recommended Reading Hecht, E.H. 2002, Optics, 4th edn,
Addison-Wesley, USA. Born, M. and Wolf, E. 1999, Principles of
Optics, 7th (expanded) edn, Pergamon Press, Oxford. Weber, M.J.,
1988, Handbook of Laser Science and Technology Vol IV, Optical
Materials: Part 2, CRC Press. Klocek, P. 1991, Handbook of Infrared
Optical Materials, Marcel Dekker Inc. NY. Melles Griot Catalogue:
Optics Guide, 2003, Melles Griot. Koechner, W. 1992, Solid State
Laser Engineering, 3rd edn, Springer-Verlag, Berlin. Palik, E.D. and
Ghosh, G. 1999, The Electronic Handbook of Optical Constants of
Solids, Academic Press, San Diego. Simmons, J.H. and Potter, K.S.
2000, Optical Materials, Academic, London.
Class Contact 36 hours lectures/tutorials.
Assessment Four assignments (each assignment report not
exceeding 5000 words) 10% each.
Final examination (Two Hours) 60%.
VPP6542 DATA ACQUISITION
Campus Footscray Park
Prerequisite(s) Eligibility for admission to Master’s course.
Content In this subject, students will learn advanced features of
modern data acquisition and computer interfacing software, such as
LabView. Students will be assigned projects that will involve the
automation of an experiment, both in terms of the hardware and
software requirements.
Required Reading Essick, C., 1998, Advanced Labview Labs,
Prentice-Hall NJ.
Recommended Reading Labview Manuals, National Instruments
Class Contact 36 hours including 24 hours of laboratory classes,
12 hours of lectures/tutorials.
Assessment Two assignments (each assignment report not
exceeding 5000 words) 10% each. Laboratory project (report not
exceeding 10,000 words) 80%.
VQB5611 RISK ASSESSMENT AND HUMAN BEHAVIOUR
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The subject introduces students to basic fire engineering
design concepts through presentation of a range of fire safety
evaluation methods including timeline analysis and provides students
with the necessary knowledge about occupant communication and
response submodels and subsystems as a basis for assessing the
necessary input data for a risk assessment model. The subject covers
the impact of fire on society – life and cost. Basic fire growth and
spread, people behaviour and time effects. Fire statistics and
statistical analysis. Probability, reliability, quality assurance and
engineering economics. An introduction to risk management. NFPA
fire safety concepts tree, NFPA 101 fault trees, event trees.
Environmental psychology, human behaviour during emergencies,
occupant characteristics. Fire cues and automatic cues, occupant
responses. Behavioural response models, human information
processing. Human performance; ergonomics, biomechanics and
movement studies. Toxic gases, fractional incapacitating dose.
Egress, evacuation calculations and models.
Required Reading A very comprehensive set of course notes is
provided for each subject and topic; these contain further references
and reading material. Building Code of Australia, 2004, Australian
Building Codes Board. Australian Building Codes Board, 2001, Fire
Safety Engineering Guidelines. DiNenno P.J. (ed.) 2002, The SFPE
Handbook of Fire Protection Engineering, Third edn, National Fire
Protection Association, USA. Warren Centre (University of Sydney),
1989, Fire Safety and Engineering Project Report. Building
Regulation Review Task Force, 1991, Draft National Buildings Fire
Safety Systems Code. Drysdale, D., 1999, An Introduction to Fire
Dynamics, 2nd edn, John Wiley and Sons, London
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
389
VQB5621 FIRE GROWTH, DETECTION AND EXTINGUISHMENT
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The subject provides students with basic information on fire
technology and explains the initiation and development of fires
including an understanding and facility in the application of the
range of detection systems and of manual and automatic
extinguishing subsystems in terms of: mechanism of extinguishment;
detection performance; component modelling; response time
assessment; reliability criteria, redundancy and the effect of
maintenance; performance testing. The subject covers the combustion
process and the fire triangle. Heat transfer mechanism, combustion
of gases and vapours and fire plumes. Combustion of liquids and
solids, fire toxicity and products of combustion. Fire behaviour of
materials and products and fire retardants, fire test methods. Fire
initiation and development. Pre and Post flashover enclosure fires.
Mathematical modelling of enclosure fires (zone and field models).
Management of fire initiation and development and implications to
performance design. Detection and extinguishment, principles of
detection and alarm. Fire detection and alarm systems, water based
extinguishment. Fire engineering design for extinguishment, system
reliability. Fire brigade response and operations.
Required Reading A very comprehensive set of course notes is
provided for each subject and topic; these contain further references
and reading material. Building Code of Australia, 2004, Australian
Building Codes Board. Australian Building Codes Board, 2001, Fire
Safety Engineering Guidelines. DiNenno P.J. (ed.) 2002, The SFPE
Handbook of Fire Protection Engineering, Third edn, National Fire
Protection Association, USA. Warren Centre (University of Sydney),
1989, Fire Safety and Engineering Project Report. Standards
Australia, 1995, AS 2118, Automatic Fire Sprinkler Systems, parts
1-12. Drysdale, D., 1999, An Introduction to Fire Dynamics, 2nd
edn, John Wiley and Sons, London.
VQB5632 SMOKE AND FIRE SPREAD, FIRE SAFETY SYSTEM DESIGN
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The subject provides students with an understanding of the
mechanisms and impediments to the spread of smoke and fire in
buildings and provides a knowledge of the behaviour, analysis and
design for the movement of fire in buildings. The subject covers
smoke movement, buoyancy, principles of smoke hazard
management. Smoke spread. Smoke hazard management
subsystems. Flame spread, modelling of flame spread and fire
growth. Barrier system performance. Structural fire performance.
External fire spread and heat radiation. Fire Safety system design
principles, quantitative risk assessment. Fire Safety Risk assessment,
definition of methodology. Estimation of performance parameters,
expected risk to life and fire cost expectation.
Required Reading A very comprehensive set of course notes is
provided for each subject and topic; these contain further references
and reading material. Building Code of Australia, 2004, Australian
Building Codes Board. Australian Building Codes Board, 2001, Fire
Safety Engineering Guidelines. DiNenno P.J.(ed) 2002, The SFPE
Handbook of Fire Protection Engineering, Third edn, National Fire
Protection Association, USA. Drysdale, D.1999, An Introduction to
Fire Dynamics, 2nd edn, John Wiley and Sons, London. Milke, J.A.
and Klote, J.H., 1998, Smoke Management in Large Spaces in
Building, Building Control Commission of Victoria and BHP Co Ltd,
Melbourne.
VQB5642 PERFORMANCE CODES METHODOLOGY AND STRUCTURE
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content The subject introduces the student to the principles,
methodology and scope of performance based codes including a
conceptual framework and historical background and provides the
student with an understanding of the structure of performance design
and approval and background and refresher material essential to an
understanding of further subjects in the course.
The subject covers: Conceptual framework of performance
regulations; life safety, illness and injury, health, safety and amenity
and asset protection. Historical background, ISO6241, NKB,
international approaches, NZ model, equivalency concept. State
legislation and the model building act (administrative framework).
The Performance Based Code of Australia and Australian Standards
(technical framework). Process and procedural matters; legal issues,
documentation, joint and several tortfeasor liability. Integrated
approvals; impact of performance regulation on other approvals.
Fire Code Reform Centre (FCRC) overview and submodels. Risk
management and assessment, an overview. Other PBCA
performance designs. Through life performance and maintenance.
Essential services recognition and documentation. Quality assurance
and the building permit/inspection process.
Required Reading A very comprehensive set of course notes is
provided for each subject and topic; these contain further references
and reading material. Building Code of Australia, 2004, Australian
Building Codes Board. Australian Building Codes Board, 2001, Fire
Safety Engineering Guidelines. References: Building Regulation
Review Task Force, 1991, Micro economic reform: Fire Regulations.
Mills, Oakley and McKay, 1991, The Model Building Act, legislative
aims and options. Warren Centre (University of Sydney), 1989, Fire
Safety and Engineering Project Report. Building Regulation Review
Task Force, 1991, Draft National Buildings Fire Safety Systems
Code. NKB Nordic Committee on Building Regulations, 1978,
Structure for building regulations NKB report no 34. Helen Tippett,
Industry Research Group, School of Architecture, Victoria University
of Wellington (NZ), Building Controls in New Zealand: The Control
Systems and its economic impact. Building Control Commission,
1988, BIC Working Paper No 2, Defining Building Controls.
International Standards Organisation, ISO 6241-1980, Performance
Standards in Buildings – Contents and Preparation. Standards
Australia, Quality Assurance Series, AS 9000, 9001, 9002.
Australian Uniform Building Regulations Co-ordinating Council,
1986, Building Code of Australia, first draft. Australian Uniform
Building Regulations Co-ordinating Council, 1988, The Building
Code of Australia, second draft. Australian Building Codes Board,
1990, The Building Code of Australia.
VQB5751 FIRE TECHNOLOGY MODELLING
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) VQB5621 and VQB5632
Content The subject provides students with an understanding of the
details of modelling fire growth and spread in buildings. The subject
covers development of the design fire; fire spread models; smoke
movement models; atriums and large spaces; network modelling;
computational fluid dynamics models; post-flashover compartment
fire models; and model validation.
Required Reading Selected chapters from DiNenno, P.J., 1995,
SFPE Handbook of Fire Protection Engineering, 2nd edn, NFPA,
Boston.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours of lectures per week for
thirteen weeks.
Assessment Four written assignments, 10%, 10%, 30% and 50%.
Page limits: 10% – four pages, 30% – 12 pages, 50% – 20 pages.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
390
VQB5761 FIRE SAFETY SYSTEMS MODELLING
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) VQB5611, VQB5621 and VQB5632
Content The subject provides students with an understanding of the
details of modelling of active, and passive, building fire safety
subsystems, and the details of human behaviour modelling. The
subject covers detection and sprinkler operation predictions;
modelling of barrier failure; structural fire safety; human behaviour
modelling; suppression models; and a fire brigade intervention
model.
Required Reading Selected chapters from DiNenno, P.J., 1995,
SFPE Handbook of Fire Protection Engineering, 2nd edn, NFPA,
Boston.
Class Contact Equivalent to three hours of lectures per week for
thirteen weeks.
Assessment Four written assignments, 10%, 10%, 30% and 50%.
Page limits: 10% – four pages, 30% – 12 pages, 50% – 20 pages.
VQB5772 FIRE SAFETY SYSTEM DESIGN
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Fire Safety System Design: VQB5751, VQB5761
and VQB5642.
Content The subject provides a description of various approaches
used for the design of the safety in buildings, with particular
emphasis placed on a fire safety system (FSS) performance model.
The FSS model uses a risk assessment methodology to assess the risk
to life safety and the expected losses, and to incorporate this risk
assessment as part of the design procedure for the fire safety in
buildings. The subject covers: introduction, alternative design
approaches, fire engineering design code framework, risk
assessment methodology, and description of a fire safety system
(FSS) model and its parameters; risk to life submodel and economic
submodel. Description of the various submodels comprising the FSS
model-namely: fire initiation and growth submodel, smoke spread
submodel, fire spread submodel, occupant communication and
avoidance submodel, fire brigade submodel. In-service performance.
Application of fire safety system models.
Required Reading A very comprehensive set of course notes is
provided for each subject and topic; these contain further references
and reading material. DiNenno, P.J. (ed.) 2002, The SFPE
Handbook of Fire Protection Engineering, Third edn, National Fire
Protection Association, USA. Draft National Building Fire Safety
Systems Code, commissioned by the Building Regulations Review
Task Force 1989, Fire Engineering Guidelines, Fire Code Reform
Centre, March 1995, Fire Safety and Engineering, Technical Papers
Books 1 and 2, The Warren Centre for Advanced Engineering,
University of Sydney. Working Party on Fire Engineering. Guidelines
for Chemical Process Quantitative Risk Analysis, prepared for Centre
for Chemical Process Safety of the American Institute of Chemical
Engineers, New York, 1989.
Class Contact Three hours of lectures per week for one semester.
Assessment Assessment will be made on the basis of assignments.
Four assignments, each 25%. Supplementary assessment will not be
available.
VQB5782 FIRE SPREAD AND FIRE SAFETY SYSTEM DESIGN PROJECT
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Fire Spread and Fire Safety System Design Project.
Co-requisite(s) VQB5772 Fire Safety System Design.
Content The first part of this subject provides an understanding of
the mechanisms of and impediments to the spread of fire in
buildings, and to provide a knowledge of the behaviour, analysis
and design of the available subsystems for the management of fire
spread. The subject covers: introduction and overview; reliability of
smoke and fire management subsystems; mechanisms, timing and
probability of fire spread; modelling fire spread; fire spread
management subsystem; design of fire spread subsystem. In the
second part of the subject Fire Safety System design project will
apply knowledge gained during the course to the analysis and
design of a cost-effective fire safety system for a proposed building
project.
Required Reading A very comprehensive set of course notes is
provided for each subject and topic; these contain further references
and reading material. DiNenno, P.J. (ed.) 2002, The SFPE
Handbook of Fire Protection Engineering, Third edn, National Fire
Protection Association, USA. Draft National Building Fire Safety
Systems Code, commissioned by the Building Regulations Review
Task Force 1989, Fire Engineering Guidelines Fire Code Reform
Centre, March 1995, Fire Safety and Engineering, Technical Papers
Books 1 and 2, The Warren Centre for Advanced Engineering,
University of Sydney. Working Party of Fire Engineering Fire
Engineering for Building Structures and Safety, The Institution of
Engineers, Australia. Klote, J.H. and Milke, J.A. 1992, Design of
Smoke Management Systems, American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers Inc. and Society for
Fire Protection Engineers, Atlanta, USA. Milke, J.A. and Klote, J.H.,
1998, Smoke Management in Large Spaces in Building, Building
Control Commission of Victoria and BHP Co Ltd, Melbourne.
Class Contact Three hours of lectures per week for one semester.
Assessment Assessment will be on the basis of submission of
required assignments and a project. Assessment of the Fire Safety
System Project will be on the basis of submission of a major report.
Project submission, 70%; assignments, 30%. Supplementary
assessment will not be available.
VQT5790 INDUSTRIAL EXPERIENCE (FULL-TIME)
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content No formal content; students will be required to provide
evidence of appropriate industrial experience in Australia,
acceptable to the Head of the Centre.
Required Reading Nil
Class Contact No set contact hours, but a minimum of 32 hours
per week of industrial experience is required for one semester.
Assessment Evidence of appropriate industrial experience in the
form of a letter from the employer detailing the experience.
VQT5791 INDUSTRIAL EXPERIENCE (PART-TIME)
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Nil
Content No formal content; students will be required to provide
evidence of appropriate industrial experience in Australia,
acceptable to the Head of the Centre.
Required Reading Nil
Class Contact No set contact hours, but a minimum of 16 hours
per week of industrial experience is required for two semesters.
Assessment Evidence of appropriate industrial experience in the
form of a letter from the employer detailing the experience.
POSTGRADUATE SUBJECT DETAILS
391
VQT6050 BUILDING FIRE RESEARCH (FULL-TIME)
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Students are normally expected to have completed
the Graduate Diploma in Building Fire Safety and Risk Engineering
with an Honours average.
Content The thesis will normally be from 15,000 to 25,000 words.
It will report on independently conducted research which
demonstrates the student’s ability to clearly define a problem, to
undertake a detailed literature search and review the literature on
the topic area. The student shall, where appropriate, demonstrate
both the ability to develop and/or apply models to study the
problem together with appropriate data selection, collection and
analysis. Students will normally be supervised by an academic
member of staff and by a co-supervisor external to the Centre. The
external supervisor will be an academic from the University or from
another institution or a practitioner.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Allen, G.R. 1973, A Graduate
Student’s Guide to Theses and Dissertations, Jossey-Bass Pub.,
Washington DC. Anderson, B.F. 1966, The Psychology of
Experiment: An Introduction to the Scientific Method, Wadsworth
Pub. Co., Belmont CA. Feyman, R. 1965, The Character of Physical
Law, MIT Press, Cambridge, Mass. Katz, J. and Hartnett, R.T. 1976,
Scholars in the Making, Ballinger Pub. Co., Cambridge, Mass.
Koefod, P.E. 1964, The Writing Requirements for Graduate
Degrees, Prentice-Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey.
Madsen, D. 1983, Successful Dissertations and Theses: A Guide to
Graduate Student Research from Proposals to Completion, Jossey-
Bass Pub., Washington, DC. Schenck, H. 1979, Theories of
Engineering Experimentation, Hemisphere Pub. Co., Washington
DC. Winer, B.J. 1962, Statistical Principles in Experimental Design,
McGraw-Hill, New York.
Class Contact Regular contact will be made by arrangement with
the supervisor.
Assessment Before commencing actual research, students must
complete, to the satisfaction of the research supervisor, a paper
critically reviewing the literature and providing a clear outline of the
proposed research methodology and resources required to complete
the thesis. The final thesis will be assessed by two examiners with
expertise in the area of the research. These examiners may be
internal or external to the Centre or the University and will not
include the supervisors. Students may be asked to present themselves
for oral or written examination by these examiners, at the examiner’s
discretion.
VQT6060 BUILDING FIRE RESEARCH (PART-TIME)
Campus Werribee
Prerequisite(s) Students are normally expected to have completed
the Graduate Diploma in Building Fire Safety and Risk Engineering
with an Honours average.
Content The thesis will normally be from 15,000 to 25,000 words.
It will report on independently conducted research which
demonstrates the student’s ability to clearly define a problem, to
undertake a detailed literature search and review the literature on
the topic area. The student shall, where appropriate, demonstrate
both the ability to develop and/or apply models to study the
problem together with appropriate data selection, collection and
analysis. Students will normally be supervised by an academic
member of staff and by a co-supervisor external to the Centre. The
external supervisor will be an academic from the University or from
another institution or a practitioner.
Required Reading To be advised by lecturer.
Recommended Reading Allen, G.R. 1973, A Graduate
Student’s Guide to Theses and Dissertations, Jossey-Bass Pub.,
Washington DC. Anderson, B.F. 1966, The Psychology of
Experiment. An Introduction to the Scientific Method, Wadsworth
Pub. Co., Belmont CA. Feyman, R. 1965, The Character of Physical
Law, MIT Press, Cambridge, Mass. Katz, J. and Hartnett, R.T. 1976,
Scholars in the Making, Ballinger Pub. Co., Cambridge, Mass.
Koefod, P.E. 1964, The Writing Requirements for Graduate
Degrees, Prentice-Hall Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey. Madsen,
D. 1983, Successful Dissertations and Theses: A Guide to Graduate
Student Research from Proposals to Completion, Jossey-Bass Pub.,
Washington, DC. Schenck, H. 1979, Theories of Engineering
Experimentation, Hemisphere Pub. Co., Washington DC. Winer, B.J.
1962, Statistical Principles in Experimental Design, McGraw-Hill,
New York.
Class Contact Regular contact will be made by arrangement with
the supervisor.
Assessment Before commencing actual research, students must
complete, to the satisfaction of the research supervisor, a paper
critically reviewing the literature and providing a clear outline of the
proposed research methodology and resources required to complete
the thesis. The final thesis will be assessed by two examiners with
expertise in the area of the research. These examiners may be
internal or external to the Centre or the University and will not
include the supervisors. Students may be
asked to present themselves for oral or written examination by these
examiners, at the examiner’s discretion.
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
392
393
RECOGNITION – RPL/RCC, CREDIT
TRANSFER AND ADVANCED STANDING
Victoria University recognises that valuable learning takes place
outside the University through:
• study towards formally recognised qualifications (either fully or
partially completed) such as a degree, diploma, or certificate
(this is referred to as credentialed study);
• short courses, offered by professional bodies, voluntary
associations, workplaces, trade unions, government agencies
and/or community groups, that do not lead to formal
qualifications (or non-credentialed learning);
• work experience; and
• life experience.
Recognition of Prior Learning (RPL) or Recognition of Current
Competency (RCC) is an assessment process whereby the learning
that students have achieved through study and life/work experience is
matched against the learning that would be covered in specific units
of study.
Students are encouraged to think broadly about their experiences as
in addition to providing entry into a course, students’ prior learning
may enable them to be granted credits for units of study within that
course.
Victoria University has established the following processes to
facilitate the recognition of learning achieved outside the University:
Pathways, Credit Transfer, and Recognition of Prior Learning or
Recognition of Current Competencies.
By recognising students’ past experiences and achievements, the
University ensures that students do not repeat the skills and
knowledge they have already achieved.
In this way students are able to shorten the length of their course,
saving time and money. They study at the appropriate level, are
encouraged to continue their learning and achieve their educational
goals with maximum efficiency.
Students who have already successfully completed any of the units
of study in the course in which they are enrolling may be eligible for
credit transfer. Under Recognition of qualifications issued by
another RTO, Victoria University will recognise Qualifications and
Statements of Attainment issued by any Australian Registered
Training Organisation.
PATHWAYS
Victoria University is widely recognised as a national leader in
developing pathway arrangements for students, particularly between
the TAFE and higher education sectors.
Standardised pathways are formally approved links between courses
in different sectors or within the same sector. ‘Articulation’ describes
the links or pathways between courses. Students who take
advantage of pathways are called articulating students.
Pathways allow for students to move from:
• secondary school to TAFE;
• TAFE to TAFE;
• TAFE to higher education;
• higher education to TAFE;
• higher education to higher education;
• workplace to TAFE or higher education;
• private training organisation to TAFE or higher education;
• international courses to TAFE or higher education.
Examples of pathways include:
• credit/exemptions – for example students who have successfully
completed the Advanced Diploma of Business (Accounting) will
receive credit for twelve units of study in the Bachelor of
Business (Accounting), if they gain entry into that degree course;
• entry only – for example students who have successfully
completed Science for Nurses (Gateway to Nursing and the
Health Sciences) gain entry into the Certificate IV in Health
(Nursing) if they meet particular entry criteria for the Certificate
IV in Health (Nursing).
Pathways may also link courses in the same or different disciplines.
Students who meet the conditions specified in the pathway will be
granted the benefits specified in the pathway provided they have
met the entry requirements.
Note that students who have not completed their initial course may
still obtain credit in recognition of the relevant units of study
successfully completed.
Credentialed
Study
Non-Credentialed
Study
Work
Experience
Life
Experience
Pathways
Credit Transfer
Assessment through
Recognition of Prior Learning or
Recognition of Current Competencies (RPL/RCC)
TYPE OF LEARNING
RECOGNITION PROCESSES
VICTORIA UNIVERSITY 2006
394
APPLICATION PROCESS
Students who believe that they are eligible for RPL/RCC, credit
transfer or entry or credit through a pathway are advised to
approach their Faculty or Department Office for further information
including relevant application form. Forms are also available from
the Centre for Commencing Students and Student Administration.
Students are encouraged to discuss their application with their
teacher/lecturer before it is submitted. Departments will provide
information about the evidence that is required.
Students should provide details of any prior study when they:
• apply to enter a course;
• are interviewed in the Centre for Commencing Students; or
• enrol.
Students eligible for entry or credit on the basis of a formally
approved pathway will be identified at the time of enrolment. Any
credit may be granted at the time of enrolment.
The University will endeavour to process applications for RPL/RCC or
credit transfer as soon as possible. Processing time depends on the
complexity of the application but should take no more than four
weeks.
FEES
An Assessment Fee may be charged where an external board/party
is involved in the RPL/RCC assessment process.
A fee will apply to fee for service programs.
TAFE applicants will be notified of any applicable fees in writing.
NOTIFICATION
Applicants will receive in writing the results of their application for
RPL/RCC or credit transfer or assessment.
RIGHT OF APPEAL
Applicants have the right to appeal the outcome of their application
or the process. Refer to the relevant Faculty or Department Office for
advice on the process for lodging appeals.
SELECTION CRITERIA FOR ARTICULATING
STUDENTS – FACULTY OF HEALTH,
ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
The Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science at Victoria University
is supportive of the provision of articulation pathways for students
entering one of the faculty's Bachelor award programs from a TAFE
background.
When considering articulating students, the Faculty of Health,
Engineering and Science takes into account the selection criteria set
under the policy and procedures of the University.
395
ADMISSIONS, ENROLMENTS,
EXAMINATIONS, GRADUATIONS
AND ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
STUDENT SERVICES DEPARTMENT
The Student Services Department’s responsibilities feature
administrative and professional services that range from admission to
graduation, encompass the spectrum of dual sector offerings and
relate to international and domestic students.
The Department is made up of a Director’s Office and three
Branches. In summary the key groupings are as follows:
Office of the Director: responsible for department wide
operations of finance, staffing, policy and quality assurance as well
as specialist childcare services that support the student experience
through the provision of childcare at key campuses.
Student Administration: responsible for the key processes that
feature a focus on statutory, system and student progress across the
dual sectors including the key events of admission, enrolment,
assessment and graduation.
Student Liaison: responsible for face-to-face student liaison
through student service centres at all campuses, a student contact
centre providing telephone and web services, and specialist services
of student advocacy and representation.
Student Support: responsible for professional services that
support and enhance the student experience including counselling,
health, housing, financial and international student support as well
as sport and recreation services.
Children's Services: offers childcare services to staff and students
at four University-operated centres including: Footscray Park
Childcare, Footscray Nicholson Children's Centre, Newport
Children's Centre, Werribee Children's Centre. The centres aim to
maintain a high-quality, caring environment where children have
access to a range of educational programs that meet their individual
developmental and creative needs.
Further details about what the above sections can offer
students can be found on the Student Services website at:
www.vu.edu.au/services
STUDENT SERVICE CENTRES
Student Service Centres are located at most campuses. These centres
offer a full range of student administration services to students as well
as providing ‘self help’ computers for student use.
Casual space for student use is also provided at some Student
Service Centres.
WEB BASED SERVICES
Victoria University offers a number of e-based self help resources for
students.
AskVU is a web-based frequently-asked-questions database designed
to assist current and prospective Victoria University students and staff
with relevant questions. Initially this will include student
administration questions related to enrolments and fees, but will
develop over time to include other areas such as admissions,
graduations, examinations etc.
AskVU allows users to:
• search for answers in an extensive database of frequently asked
questions;
• ask a question to the Student Contact Centre; and,
• manage inquiries in a personal portal called 'Your History',
where all your questions and askVU responses will be stored.
AskVU is accessed at: www.askvu.vu.edu.au
MyVU is a web-based portal for the use of current students that
allows students to:
• check enrolment details;
• apply for a course online;
• apply for scholarships online;
• apply for graduation online;
• view student results online.
MyVU is accessed at: www.myvu.vu.edu.au
CONTACT FOR ALL ONSHORE STUDENT ADMINISTRATION ENQUIRIES
Telephone: (03) 9919 1900
Website: www.askvu.vu.edu.au
STUDENT ADMINISTRATION AT OFFSHORE LOCATIONS
Graduation and Offshore Student Administration provides the student
administration services for all offshore programs for both sectors. The
University has partnerships with several organisations to enable
programs to be delivered in offshore teaching sites such as
Bangladesh, China, Hong Kong, Indonesia, Malaysia, New
Zealand, Singapore, Thailand, and Vietnam.
GRADUATION AND OFFSHORE STUDENT ADMINISTRATION
Telephone: 61 3 99192846
Fax: 61 3 99192853
Email: offshoreadmin@vu.edu.au
Website: www.vu.edu.au
Located: Room 4C, 141, St Albans Campus
HOW TO APPLY FOR A VICTORIA
UNIVERSITY COURSE
TAFE COURSES AND UNDERGRADUATE DEGREES
Applications for the majority of undergraduate degrees offered by
Victoria University should be made through the Victorian Tertiary
Admissions Centre (VTAC). Applications for study at TAFE certificates
level I, II, and III should be made directly to Victoria University. For
TAFE qualifications above these levels, applications for full-time study
should be made through VTAC. Those seeking to study any TAFE
course part time should apply directly to Victoria University.
VICTORIA UNIVERSITY 2006
396
For the latest course information and application forms, visit
www.vu.edu.au/admissions. Prospective students can apply directly
to Victoria University online for many courses that are not run
through VTAC. Many courses at Victoria University also provide for
on-line application at: www.myvu.vu.edu.au
POSTGRADUATE DEGREES
Victoria University offers a diverse range of postgraduate programs
in a number of disciplines by either coursework or research. In
general, prospective students must have completed a degree, with
honours, from a recognised tertiary institution to be eligible for
postgraduate research programs; or a degree from a recognised
tertiary institution to be eligible for postgraduate coursework
programs.
PREQUISITES AND EXTRA REQUIREMENTS
Some courses require applicants to complete specific requirements
before they can be considered for entry. For example: completion of
particular academic studies, attendance at an interview, presentation
of a portfolio, or completion of a supplementary information form.
These prerequisites and extra requirements are updated and
published each year at www.vu.edu.au and in the VTAC Guide.
CENTRE FOR COMMENCING STUDENTS
As a future student, you can visit the Centre for Commencing
Students (CCS) for course information and advice. You can pick up
brochures for each higher education and TAFE course, covering all
levels of study from certificate to post graduate courses. CCS staff
are available to answer your queries, and a career counsellor will
help you find the right career and course for you. Appointments can
be made by contacting the CCS by email at CCS@vu.edu.au or by
phoning (03) 9919 4110.
If you require more information:
• contact the CCS by email at ccs@vu.edu.au, by phoning
(03) 9919 4110 or visit the CCS resource area, Building C,
Victoria University, Footscray Park Campus, Ballarat Road,
Footscray;
• pick up a course brochure from the CCS;
• read VU’s Guide for Parents, Transition from School to
University and What if? information, available from the CCS;
• read VU’s higher education or TAFE handbooks. They contain
detailed course information and are available in school libraries
and from school careers advisers, or can be viewed online at
www.vu.edu.au;
• visit the VU stands at local or metropolitan career expos; and
• come along to VU’s Open Day, Sunday 13 August 2006,
Footscray Park Campus, Ballarat Road, Footscray,
10am – 4pm.
PORTFOLIO PARTNERSHIP PROGRAM
Victoria University’s Portfolio Partnership Program (PPP) is an
alternative-entry scheme available only to Year 12 students attending
a participating secondary college in Melbourne’s western
metropolitan region and the City of Hume, and Macedon Ranges
and Moorabool Shires. As an alternative-entry process to the
University, the PPP looks beyond the ENTER score – it is based on
criteria other than ENTER and middle-band selection. The PPP
requires applicants to submit a portfolio that is used for selection to
courses offered in the program.
The portfolio enables students to demonstrate:
• their goals and achievements;
• previous studies;
• work experience;
• skills and personal qualities;
• examples of their work; and
• other evidence that indicates a commitment to a proposed study
area.
The PPP is for students who:
• have been consistent achievers in senior secondary years;
• have demonstrated the potential to succeed at university;
• have a strong vocational commitment; and
• have a strong preference for one of VU’s PPP courses.
Applicants may only apply for one course via the PPP by
submitting their portfolio and ensuring the course is included in
their VTAC application. For further details of available PPP courses
view www.vu.edu.au/PPP or contact the Centre for Commencing
Students (CCS):
Email: CCS@vu.edu.au
Telephone: (03) 9919 4110
COURSE ENTRY
INDIGENOUS AUSTRALIANS
The University has a flexible admissions and selection policy for
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples. Direct applications
may be assessed on an individual basis by the Centre for
Commencing Students and course selection officers, with the
assistance of VU’s Moondani Balluk. In situations where students are
required to apply for courses through VTAC, Aboriginal and Torres
Strait Islander people should also complete the University’s
Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander profile form, available at:
www.vu.edu.au/admissions.asp
For more information contact Indigenous staff
Email: moondani.balluk@vu.edu.au
Telephone: (03) 9919 2891
SPECIAL ENTRY AND ACCESS SCHEMES
VTAC SEAS APPLICANTS
VTAC have introduced a system wide umbrella program called
Special Entry Access Scheme (SEAS).
For all VTAC courses, Victoria University will consider SEAS
applications providing the applicant has lodged an application with
VTAC and completed a VTAC SEAS form with appropriate
supporting statements and/or evidence
DIRECT APPLICANTS WHO APPLY FOR SPECIAL CONSIDERATION
Applicants who apply directly to the University should indicate in
their application form if they are seeking any special consideration
due to their life circumstances and if there are any circumstances
which they believe have affected their ability to reach their full
educational potential
CATEGORIES FOR SPECIAL CONSIDERATION FOR VU COURSES
Mature Age Entry – applicants who have accumulated relevant
experience since leaving school or since meeting tertiary entrance
requirements.
ADMISSIONS, ENROLMENTS, EXAMINATIONS, GRADUATIONS AND ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
397
Non-English Speaking Background – for an applicant who has
arrived in Australia within the last 10 years and speaks a language
other than English at home and considers the impact of a non-English
speaking background on academic performance for entry to tertiary
studies.
Recognition as an Indigenous Australian – applicants with an
Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander background, who can
demonstrate association with an Indigenous community.
Difficult Family Circumstances – applicants who have been prevented
from reaching their educational performance potential because of
their family circumstances, which must be long term and severe.
Disadvantaged Socio-Economic background – applicants who have
suffered educational disadvantage as a result of their socio-economic
circumstances.
Rural or isolated Applicants – applicants who have suffered
educational disadvantage as a result of either undertaking their
secondary schooling in a rural or isolated area and/or are required
to move from such an area to undertake the tertiary course of their
choice.
Women in Non-traditional areas – courses where women are
significantly in the minority of students eg Engineering and
Information Technology.
BASIS FOR SPECIAL CONSIDERATION
Selection will take into account the applicant’s provision of with
appropriate supporting statements and/or evidence identifying the
following:
• the recency of the condition;
• the duration of the condition;
• the timing of disruption;
• the nature and severity of the condition.
NEED HELP?
The latest information regarding application procedures for
individual courses, and the relevant forms, can be obtained from
www.vu.edu.au/admissions.
Alternatively, contact the Admissions Office:
Email: admissions@vu.edu.au
Telephone: (03) 9919 2286
FLEXIBLE LEARNING
Victoria University offers a broad range of courses, from Certificate I
to PhD. The University also offers bridging and preparatory
programs for entry into courses). Different courses fit into the
Australian Qualifications Framework. See section on AQF below.
The University is committed to establishing multiple course entry and
exit points. Multiple entry points enable individuals to enter a course
at a level that meets their educational needs. Multiple exit points
provide students with the flexibility to exit at different stages of a
course with qualifications. This flexibility accommodates work and
other commitments that learners face throughout a lifetime. Victoria
University encourages lifelong learning by recognising an
individual’s past experiences and achievements. Recognition of Prior
Learning (RPL)/ Recognition of Current Competency (RCC) and
Credit Transfer facilitate movement along Articulation Pathways
arrangements developed by the University and may save students
time and money.
ARTICULATION PATHWAYS
Victoria University is a leader in the development of Articulation
Pathways. Articulation Pathways link courses within and between the
TAFE and higher education sectors. Articulation Pathways specify
how previous study (usually in a related field) may be recognised
and credited. For example, students who have completed the
Advanced Diploma of Accounting may be eligible for up to 12 unit
of study credits if they gain entry into the Bachelor of Business –
Accounting. This means it may take them less time to complete the
degree. Information about Articulation Pathways is available at
www.vu.edu.au (through the Centre for Commencing Students home
page link). Articulation Pathways from university to vocational
education and training qualifications are also becoming increasingly
popular as a way of gaining industry experience needed to increase
employment opportunities.
RECOGNITION POLICY (RPL/RCC)
Credit Transfer recognises a course or courses a student has
previously undertaken and enables the student to gain credit in
another course. Students who believe they maybe eligible for Credit
Transfer should apply for it when they have accepted a place in a
course and have enrolled and not when the teaching period
commences. A Recognition Policy has been implemented which
outlines the process for Recognition of Prior Learning (RPL) and
Recognition of Current Competency (RCC) applications.
RPL/RCC is an assessment process that applies to individuals who
may have prior study, or other relevant experience, but who do not
have access to Credit Transfer arrangements for the chosen course.
The RPL/RCC process recognises previous study by matching
learning that has been achieved through study, life and work
experience against learning that would be covered in specific units
of study or modules. Students are encouraged to discuss possible
Credit Transfer and RPL/RCC applications with the course co-
ordinator at enrolment. For more information on Articulation
Pathways, Credit Transfer and RPL/RCC contact the
Centre for Commencing Students:
Email: CCS@vu.edu.au
Telephone: (03) 9919 4110
AUSTRALIAN QUALIFICATIONS FRAMEWORK
The Australian Qualifications Framework (AQF) is a system of
thirteen national qualifications in schools, vocational education and
training (TAFE and private providers), and the higher education
sector (mainly universities). The framework links all these
qualifications and is a highly visible, quality-assured national system
of educational recognition which promotes lifelong learning and a
seamless and diverse education and training system.
MODES OF STUDY
Most Victoria University courses can be studied either full time or
part time. Part-time study allows students to further their employment
opportunities or interests while meeting work, family or other
commitments. A small number of courses also offer fleximode study,
whereby students may undertake study via a combination of
delivery/attendance methods, including:
• workplace learning;
• distance education;
• workshops;
• accelerated or decelerated learning.
VICTORIA UNIVERSITY 2006
398
NEW APPRENTICESHIPS
New Apprenticeships is a joint Federal and State Government
initiative aimed at providing structured on- and off-the-job training to
those interested in obtaining a nationally recognised qualification,
while employed either full time or part time. Victoria University is a
major New Apprenticeships provider and offers training in the
following industry areas and many more:
• aged and disability care;
• animal studies;
• art and design;
• automotive;
• building and construction;
• chemical and oil;
• childcare;
• civic construction;
• community services;
• computer systems;
• electrical and electronics;
• engineering;
• food processing;
• hairdressing and beauty;
• hospitality;
• industrial skills;
• information technology;
• retail and wholesale;
• sales and marketing;
• security.
For further information about the Australian Government Incentives
Program available through the New Apprenticeships Program, and
what New Apprenticeships can do for you and your employer,
contact Jobs Plus New Apprenticeships Services:
Website: www.jobsplusnac.com.au
Telephone: (03) 9919 8533
UNDERGRADUATE DEGREES
In general, undergraduate degree courses require three to four years
of full-time study, depending on the program selected. These courses
are generally open to students who have completed VCE or
equivalent.
Certain courses require previous study in selected disciplines, such
as mathematics or physics. See individual courses, found in the
‘Course Information’ section of this guide, for details and
prerequisites.
HONOURS DEGREES
To qualify for a bachelor degree with honours, students must
complete an additional year of study in which they undertake in-
depth theoretical studies and gain supervised research experience
relevant to their chosen discipline. Students may enrol in an honours
year if they complete an appropriate undergraduate degree and
achieve consistently high-level results across the first three years of
study.
COMBINED AND JOINT DEGREES
Combined degrees combine the core components of two disciplines
of study – taken from either one or two faculties – into a single
program of study. The program is undertaken over a four- or five-
year period and the graduating student receives two degrees, for
example: Bachelor of Arts – Asian Studies/Bachelor of Business –
International Trade. Joint degrees integrate two degrees, each of
which is run independently by two different schools, departments or
faculties. The program is undertaken over a three- or four-year period
and the graduating student receives a single degree, for example:
Bachelor of Business – Marketing/Applied Economics.
POSTGRADUATE COURSES
NORMAL ENTRY
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY (PhD)
To be eligible for admission a person must have:
• a masters degree; or
• a four-year bachelor degree with honours or honours degree
with a superior performance at 1st Class or 2A honours level; or
• a three-year bachelor degree together with a postgraduate
diploma that is an extension of the discipline contained in the
undergraduate qualification and at a level considered to be
equivalent to 1st Class or 2A honours, as determined by the
Head; or
• been enrolled in a masters by research program and shown
exceptional ability in the conduct of the first stages in a project
and been approved for transfer into a PhD program by the
Committee for Postgraduate Studies on the recommendation of
the Head.
For admission to a PhD program a student must provide evidence
acceptable to the Head of a capacity to undertake research in the
discipline.
MASTERS DEGREE
To be eligible for admission applicants must have:
• qualified for a first degree of the University (or such other
degree as the Department may deem equivalent for this
purpose) at a standard considered by the Department to be
sufficiently meritorious; or
• qualified for any other award judged by the Department to be
of a relevant and appropriate standard; and
• produced evidence of professional experience through which
they have developed their applied knowledge of the relevant
field of study, and which satisfies the Department that they have
the capacity to undertake study for the degree of master; and
• fulfilled any other conditions relating to prerequisite study which
the Department may have imposed in respect of their admission
to candidature.
GRADUATE DIPLOMAS AND GRADUATE CERTIFICATES
To be eligible for admission applicants must normally have
successfully completed a degree or diploma and may be required to
attend an interview or selection test.
ADMISSIONS, ENROLMENTS, EXAMINATIONS, GRADUATIONS AND ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
399
UNDERGRADUATE COURSES
NORMAL ENTRY
Persons applying for entry to higher education undergraduate
courses (other than those listed below under Direct Application) to
study either full-time or part-time must apply through the Victorian
Tertiary Admissions Centre.
While the VTAC Guide to Undergraduate and TAFE Courses is
available from newsagents, a convenient and comprehensive
application service is available from their website at:
www.vtac.edu.au
Persons applying through VTAC should note that the VTAC rules, by
which the University is bound, provide that no selection authority
shall take into account the preference for that course as indicated by
the applicant. This means that even if an applicant has indicated a
lower preference for the course concerned than other applicants,
there shall be no prejudice and each applicant will be considered
equally.
PREREQUISITES AND EXTRA REQUIREMENTS
Some higher education undergraduate courses have special
prerequisites for enrolment. Where this is the case, these
requirements are published two years in advance in the Victorian
Tertiary Education Requirements (this is published as a supplement in
the press) and for the following year in the VTAC Guide.
For some higher education undergraduate courses, the application
process requires applicants to complete a Supplementary Information
Form available from the relevant Faculty Office, the Admissions
Office or the University web site: www.vu.edu.au/admissions. These
courses are identified in the VTAC Guide.
SPECIAL ENTRY
Persons applying for admission to a University course under Special
Entry (except those applying for readmission) should obtain an
application form from the Centre for Commencing Students.
However, persons seeking Special Entry must also apply to VTAC
unless the course comes under the Direct Applications category.
READMISSION TO THE UNIVERSITY
Students who are currently enrolled in an award course may apply
directly to the University for admission to another course for the
following teaching period. Students seeking readmission to the
University should contact the Faculty or School administering the
relevant course or Student Administration.
All other students who were previously enrolled at the University but
whose enrolment has lapsed, or who have been excluded from their
course because of unsatisfactory progress, may reapply for
admission to the same or another course in any subsequent
academic year. These students should apply using the standard
procedures for that course. Such applicants for readmission to the
University will have to meet the selection criteria applying to their
intended course.
The selection process will take account of:
• the person’s previous academic performance at the University
and their commitment to complete the course; and
• whether the circumstances which led to the person’s previous
unsatisfactory progress or to their allowing their previous
enrolment to lapse have changed or improved.
If selected for readmission such students will be subject to the course
requirements in effect at the time of re-entry and may have special
conditions attached to their re-admission.
PART-TIME ADMISSION
Persons applying for admission on a part-time basis to Higher
Education undergraduate courses and TAFE courses should follow
the application procedures set out above. Where a form is to be
lodged with the University as well as with VTAC, applicants should
indicate their intention to study part-time on the form.
POSTGRADUATE COURSES
MASTERS BY COURSEWORK, GRADUATE
CERTIFICATES AND GRADUATE DIPLOMAS
All persons seeking admission to postgraduate studies in the
University (except for the Graduate Diploma of Education) must
apply direct to the University.
Application forms for graduate certificates, graduate diplomas and
masters by coursework are available from the Student Administration
Admissions Office at the St Albans Campus or Faculty offices on the
campus where the course is offered.
DOCTOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Prospective students should contact the Faculty of Business and Law
office at either the Footscray or City campuses for application
details.
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY AND MASTERS DEGREES BY RESEARCH
Those persons interested in pursuing a research degree are advised
to contact the Postgraduate Studies Officer in the Faculty or
Department in which they wish to study to discuss research interests
and to determine the availability of suitable supervisors and facilities
relevant to the proposed research.
Once the Department has confirmed that the applicant is eligible to
enrol, an Application for Enrolment Form must be completed and
lodged along with the necessary enrolment forms at Student
Administration.
DIRECT APPLICATIONS
All direct applications for admission to award courses must be on
appropriate University application forms, available from the
University. Telephone (03) 9919 2286 for details or via
www.vu.edu.au/admissions.
CLOSING DATES FOR DIRECT APPLICATIONS
Applicants lodging direct applications should contact the relevant
Faculty or School for closing dates. Direct applicants should note that
the selection process will be facilitated by lodging application forms
at the earliest possible date, with the required accompanying
documentation attached.
SELECTION PROCEDURES
Applicants may be required to complete a literacy and/or numeracy
exercise as part of the selection procedure and may be given the
opportunity to attend an interview as part of the selection procedure.
DOCUMENTATION
Direct applicants currently attempting Year 11 or Year 12 subjects
should lodge their applications by the due date and then send a
copy of their results when they become available. Other applicants
who have attempted Year 11 or Year 12 should attach a certified
copy of certificates.
All persons seeking admission to a course leading to one of the
above awards who did not complete VCE must support their
application with documentary evidence proving they have the
educational qualifications referred to in their application. All
VICTORIA UNIVERSITY 2006
400
documents should be in the form of certified copies and if documents
are in a language other than English, officially certified translations
together with certified copies of original documents are required. The
University will retain all such evidence. Original documents should
never be sent but must be available on request and may be required
at a later stage of the selection process (e.g. during interview).
If a direct applicant has undertaken previous tertiary studies the
applicant must attach a certified copy of the full transcript of his or
her academic record(s) obtained at the previous institution(s). Please
do not send original documents.
UNIT OF STUDY CREDITS AND ADVANCED STANDING CREDIT FOR
PREVIOUS TERTIARY STUDIES
Students who have completed unit(s) of study at another tertiary
institution may be granted credit for equivalent units in Victoria
University courses. A unit of study credit will allow a student an
exemption from a course unit of study, while the value of that unit of
study will still be counted towards their award.
Applications for credit for previous tertiary study must be
accompanied by certified documentary evidence of the units of study
passed, together with details of these units of study for comparison
with the Victoria University course. Please note that the University
may seek information from the other tertiary institutions about the
applicant. The process is as outlined in the University’s Recognition
Policy.
COURSE VARIATION BY SPECIAL APPROVAL
In cases where credit for units of study of a student’s course is not
appropriate, the Dean of the Faculty or Head of the School or
Department responsible for the student’s course may grant a
variation to course requirements by special approval. A course
variation substitutes alternative units of study of similar content and
duration for units of study normally required within a student’s
course.
The purpose of Course Variation by Special Approval is to avoid
repeating curriculum material where it is deemed that a student will
not gain substantial educational benefit from one or more of the
normal requirements of the course, but where the student does not
meet all the criteria for unit of study exemption.
APPLICATION PROCEDURE
Applicants for admission to courses at Victoria University should
indicate on their application form if they wish to apply for credit.
Applicants applying for credits are also encouraged to complete an
Application for Credit Transfer Form. All such applications must be
lodged before the end of the second week of the relevant teaching
period.
Processing of applications for unit of studycredit may take several
weeks. This process will be facilitated by the applicant providing all
relevant information when lodging an application.
The following documents must be included in an application:
• a completed Application for Credit Transfer Form. This form is
available from Student Administration or the relevant Faculty;
• a copy of the applicant’s academic record from the previous
institution(s);
• where available, a description of the unit of study as published
in the Handbook of the applicant’s previous institution, e.g. if
applying for an exemption in Economics 1 at Victoria University
on the basis of a pass in Economics at Monash University in
2005, the applicant should attach a copy of the unit of study
description of the unit from the 2005 Monash University
Handbook; and
• any other material that applicants wish to submit in support of
their application.
TIME LAPSE BETWEEN STUDIES
Normally, credits for studies in a previous course of study will not be
considered if studies were undertaken more than 10 years prior to
the application. Courses linked to fields in which there is rapid
change in technology and/or knowledge may set a maximum time
limit of less than ten years. In cases where it can be demonstrated
that relevant skills have been maintained and, where appropriate,
updated, the above time limit restrictions may be waived by the
appropriate Dean or TAFE Deputy Director on the recommendation
of the appropriate Head of School or Department.
SCHOLARSHIPS
Scholarships are available to Higher Education (undergraduate) and
TAFE students studying full-time who meet one or more of the
following criteria:
• are on a low income;
• have dependent children;
• have moved from a rural or regional area to study;
• have an Indigenous background;
• are returning to study;
• have completed Year 12 in the Western Region of Melbourne;
• experience other significant educational disadvantages.
Eligibility criteria will apply.
Scholarships vary in value from $1000 per annum to $4000 per
annum. Apply online once you have enrolled or re-enrolled in a
course at www.vu.edu.au/scholarships
Applications for 2006 open 5th December 2005 and close
10th February 2006.
Visit our website for further details: www.vu.edu.au/scholarships
or phone (03) 9919 2581
ENROLMENT
WHAT YOU NEED TO ENROL
• Your Letter of Acceptance or VTAC Offer Letter
(new students only)
• Your Tax File Number (TFN)
• Photo identification
• Proof of citizenship – an original or certified copy of any of the
following:
− Birth Certificate;
− Birth Extract;
− Passport;
− Certificate of Citizenship;
− Letter of Grant of Australian Citizenship;
− Change of Name documents (if necessary).
If you are an Australian Permanent Resident please present an
original or certified copy of any of the following:
− Passport showing Permanent Residency (PR);
− Certificate of Permanent Residency (PR);
− Change of Name documents, if necessary.
If you are enrolling into a TAFE course you will also need to bring
along full payment of fees or part payment if on concession or
applying for a fee extension.
TAFE students applying for a fee concession are also required to
bring relevant documentation to support their application. Details
about the documentation required can be found at the VU website
www.vu.edu.au/student_services
ADMISSIONS, ENROLMENTS, EXAMINATIONS, GRADUATIONS AND ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
401
PROOF OF QUALIFICATIONS
Admission and enrolment are conditional upon proof of stated
qualifications. All claims of qualifications that have been obtained
outside the University should be supported by appropriate
documentary evidence, certified copies of which should accompany
the application for admission. These copies will be retained by the
University.
APPROVAL OF COURSE OF STUDY
All courses of study (i.e. individual student’s unit of study selection)
must be approved by the Faculty, School or Department responsible
for administration of the student’s course before enrolment
registration will be accepted by the University. Students should take
particular note of the administrative arrangements for enrolment.
ENROLMENT FORMS
All students commencing or continuing studies at Victoria University
must complete the relevant official enrolment and statistics form(s).
These form(s) must be approved and signed by an authorised officer
of the relevant School or Department.
Victoria University is committed to protecting and maintaining the
privacy, accuracy and security of your personal information and
complies with the University’s published privacy policies,
commitments, guidelines and procedures, which conform to and
support all privacy obligations that bind the University. The University
is compelled by law to supply some statistics – for example, it must
supply statistics to the Bureau of Statistics. Statistics supplied to
outside bodies will be in the form of aggregate figures only; the
outside body concerned will be unable to identify any student by
name. Only the Australian Taxation Office is supplied with the
names, addresses, birth dates and HELP liability of relevant students
of the University.
CONFIRMATION OF ENROLMENT
Confirmation of course and unit of study enrolment will be issued to
higher education students each teaching period and to TAFE
students, upon enrolment. Students should check their enrolment
details carefully and notify Student Administration without delay of
any errors or amendments using an Enrolment Amendment Form.
Enrolment Amendment forms are available from Student
Administration website, Faculty, TAFE School and/or Student Service
Centres. They may be lodged at any Student Service Centre.
ENROLMENT REGISTRATION AND VALIDATION
An enrolment is registered by the University when it is appropriately
approved and entered onto the University’s database by an
authorised officer.
ENROLMENT PROCESSING TYPES
Student enrolments can be processed in one of three ways:
Formal Commencing VTAC students and International Students.*
Enrolments are conducted at a centralised venue on campus.
Express Limited to smaller groups of students as negotiated by individual Education Units.
Enrolment processing will be undertaken at your campus Student Service Centres.
Batched Enrolments where the data entry of enrolment details and the production of a student
invoice are done at a time other than when a student’s academic authorisation has
been approved by the relevant TAFE School or Faculty.
*Applies to international students who (i) enrol in the week before
teaching period 1 and 2 and (ii) a late session on Monday of
week 1 of teaching period 1 and 2.
CAN’T ATTEND A SCHEDULED ENROLMENT SESSION?
Where students are unable to attend the designated re-enrolment
session, they must arrange for a proxy to enrol on their behalf.
The Enrolment by Proxy form is available on the VU website:
www.vu.edu.au/Services/Student_Administration/Commonly_Used_
Forms/. Please ensure that you carefully read the information on the
back of the form.
If you do not enrol or arrange a proxy, you will lose your place in
your course and will be placed on a waiting list for re-instatement
into your course.
COURSE TRANSFER
An enrolled student wishing to transfer to a course of study in
another Faculty, School or Department must apply for admission to
the intended course of study on the appropriate form. Where this
course transfer is approved, the student will be withdrawn from the
previous course and enrolled into the new course.
LAPSED ENROLMENT
Past students of the University who are not on approved Leave of
Absence (or deferment) from the University and who have not
enrolled at the University for the previous semester, automatically
forfeit their student place at the University and must re-apply for
admission according to the procedure set down for new students.
STUDENT IDENTITY CARD
An identity card (ID card) with your student number, photograph and
signature will be issued to you once you have completed your
enrolment.* This card should be carried with you at all times, as you
may be asked to produce it at any time.
Your card is required in the following instances:
• admission to examinations;
• re-enrolment;
• library services;
• computer centre services; and
• travel and other concessions.
Your ID card number is a unique number and should be quoted on
all correspondence with the University. Proof of identity is required
prior to the issuing of your ID card. Cards can only be replaced by
paying a fee and taking another form of photo identification to a
Student Service Centre on campus.
In addition, University ID cards may be used to operate photocopiers
and access other services.
*Students new to VU are required to provide proof of citizenship
prior to issuing an ID card.
CONTINUING STUDENTS
Students who have been enrolled for the previous teaching period
should comply with the re-enrolment requirements set down by the
relevant Faculty, School or Department. Particular attention should be
paid to University re-enrolment schedules.
ENROLMENT ENQUIRIES
Enrolment enquiries should be directed to AskVU@vu.edu.au or to
any Student Service Centre on campus.
Enrolment enquiries from students studying offshore should be
directed to offshoreadmin@vu.edu.au
VICTORIA UNIVERSITY 2006
402
ENROLMENT VARIATIONS AND COURSE
WITHDRAWAL
HIGHER EDUCATION STUDENTS
Students wishing to vary their enrolment should complete an
Application for Unit of Study Amendment Form. Students should
lodge the form at any Student Service Centre.
Students who withdraw from a unit of study before the census date
do not incur a liability e.g. HECS-HELP/FEE HELP liability for those
units of study.
Students who withdraw from units of study after the census date, but
before the late withdrawal date, do incur a liability e.g. HECS-
HELP/FEE HELP liability but not an academic penalty for those units
of study.
Students who withdraw from units of study after census date incur a
liability, e.g. HECS-HELP/FEE HELP liability and an academic
penalty of ‘WN’.
If special circumstances occur after census date and studies cannot
be continued, a student can apply for:
• Student Learning Entitlement (SLE) re-credited; and/or
• HELP debt remitted; and/or
• a refund of any up-front payments towards Student
Contribution/Tuition fees.
Eligible students must apply in writing within 12 months from the
date of withdrawal.
Students wishing to totally withdraw from studies should complete an
Application for Course Leave of Absence, Deferment or Withdrawal
Form, obtain approval from the Faculty or Department responsible
for administration of the course, and lodge the approved form at any
Student Service Centre. Withdrawal from units of study or courses
will not automatically be permitted after census dates in each
teaching period.
If a student withdraws from enrolment at the University during the
year without being granted leave of absence, it will be necessary to
re-apply for admission to the course to recommence studies at any
later stage. In such circumstances, re-admission is not automatic.
TAFE STUDENTS
TAFE students wishing to vary their enrolment should complete the
appropriate form within four weeks of the course start date.
RULES FOR VARYING AN ENROLMENT
Students must enrol in a course of study or for a unit of study during
official enrolment periods.
Acceptance of late enrolments and late variations (but not course
withdrawals) will be accepted based on the following table:
TAFE Unit(s) of Study On the first business day of the second week from the
course start date after this time, program manager
approval is required.
Higher Ed Unit(s) of study in a
standard teaching period
On the first business day of the second week of the
semester.#
Higher Ed unit(s) of study in a
non-standard teaching period
To the end of the first week.#
Cross Institutional Subject to Faculty approval and no later than census
date for a given teaching period.
Research Subject to Faculty approval.
Short courses less than 2 weeks duration Subject to Department approval.
Short courses greater than 2 weeks duration To the end of the first week of the course start date.
#Higher Education students will be entitled to lodge a late unit(s) of
study addition and Reduced/Overload Study form up to the end of
the fourth week of a standard teaching period or the end of the
second week for a non-standard teaching period. This is subject to
academic approval and payment of relevant fine.
Students who do not comply with the enrolment and re-enrolment
requirements, including the payment of relevant fees, will be
required to pay a late enrolment fee and where appropriate, a
reinstatement of enrolment fine. Details about Student Administration
fees and charges can be found at the VU website. www.vu.edu.au/
services/student_administration/Enrolment_and_Fee_information
LEAVE OF ABSENCE AND DEFERMENT
Leave of Absence, for periods of up to one year initially, may be
granted by the Faculty or School responsible for the administration of
a student’s award course. A student must submit an Application for
Course Leave of Absence, Deferment or Withdrawal form available
from the Enrolment & Fees website or the relevant Faculty, School or
any Student Service Centre.
Deferments will only be available to students who have not
commenced their studies. Applications must be made within seven
days from the date of offer being made to the student. It should be
noted that not all faculties will offer deferment.
UNDERGRADUATE AND POSTGRADUATE COURSES
A completed Application for Course Leave of Absence, Deferment or
Withdrawal form including a recommendation from the appropriate
School or Department should be approved by the Faculty or School
prior to the enrolment census date for the teaching period in which
the leave is to commence.
The Faculty or School will advise students in writing regarding the
outcome of their application.
Where leave of absence is approved for Higher Education students
after the relevant enrolment census date, students will remain liable
for HECS contributions in respect of their enrolment in that teaching
period.
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY AND MASTERS BY RESEARCH
Students should approach the Postgraduate Studies Unit, Footscray
Park Campus for advice regarding application for leave of absence.
Application forms can be obtained from the Unit or any Student
Service Centre.
PERSONAL DETAILS
Students who change their name, address or emergency contact
must do this in writing by completing a Personal Data Amendment
form available from a campus Student Contact Centre.
Students requiring a change of name must produce documentary
evidence (e.g. marriage certificate, statutory declaration) in addition
to completing a Personal Data Amendment form.
ENROLMENT RELATED FEES AND CHARGES
Students are required to pay all the fees for which they have been
assessed including:
• the General Service Fee, inclusive of a building levy
(if applicable);
• Tuition fees; and
• Student Contribution amount (if applicable).
Some Higher Education students will be eligible to defer their Student
Contribution amount/Tuition Fees through a Higher Education Loan
Program (HELP).
ADMISSIONS, ENROLMENTS, EXAMINATIONS, GRADUATIONS AND ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
403
PAYMENT OF FEES IS REQUIRED BY THE DUE DATE AS SPECIFIED
ON THE TAX INVOICE.
Students are required to pay their releavtn fees by the due date as
outlined in their invoice. TAFE concession Students are required to
pay the minimum fee (expected to be $70) at the time of their
enrolment.
Students who are experiencing financial difficulties and are unable
to complete payment of their fees on time should seek advice from
Student Services Department.
GENERAL SERVICE FEE (GSF)
These fees are paid to the University to fund a variety of non-
academic and general services, activities and facilities of benefit to
all students. The amount is determined by the students enrolment load
to a maximum amount of $300 for the year. It should be noted that
this fee may be subject to future legislative changes and are subject
to Council approval.
The detailed GSF amounts for students (excepting full fee students) is:
• For enrolment in higher education units of study:
− $2.61 per 0.01 equivalent full-time student load;
− A building levy of $40 for enrolment at one or more of the
University’s Australian campuses.
• For enrolment in Technical and Further Education units of study:
− $0.362 per student contact hour (SCH);
− A building levy of $40 for enrolment at one or more of the
University’s Australian campuses;
− A building levy of $4 for students enrolled in Industrial
Skills Training Centre part courses;
− TAFE concession students undertaking government funded
courses pay an $18 GSF.
ONSHORE, OFF CAMPUS STUDENTS
Onshore students enrolled in either higher education or TAFE courses
for delivery by off campus mode are required to pay the minimum
GSF.
TAFE TUITION FEES
Fees will be implemented in line with Ministerial Directions. For
2006, a tuition contribution of $1.31 per enrolled hour applies with
a minimum amount of $52 to a maximum of $839.
HIGHER EDUCATION TUITION FEES
Undergraduate and Postgraduate units of study are grouped into
Student Contribution (SC) bands based on demand for the discipline
and the cost of teaching the unit. A students liability also depends on
their relative study load as determined through their equivalent full
time study load (EFTSL) and whether they have continuous study in
their course of study prior to 2005. Further information can be
accessed at: www.goingtouni.gov.au
Specific details of VU student contribution amounts and
tuition fees for domestic students is available at:
www.vu.edu.au/Courses/Fee_Guide
EXEMPTIONS
In cases of hardship, students can contact Student Support staff at
your campus.
REFUND OF FEES
HIGHER EDUCATION DOMESTIC STUDENTS
If you have withdrawn from your Course or any subjects or taken an
approved Leave of Absence, the table below will help you work out
any refund of fees you may be eligible for.
An administration charge of $10.00 is payable for refunds of the
General Services Fee, except when transferring to another institution.
This is deducted from the refund payable.
Type of fee
Before Sem 1
census date
After Sem 1 census
date but before
Sem 2 census date
After Sem 2
census date
General services fee/
base fee
Refund for
applicable semester/s
No refund for Sem 1,
but refund of Sem 2
component
No refund applicable
Student contribution/
help – upfront payment
Full refund for
applicable semester/s
No refund for Sem 1,
but full refund of
Sem 2 component
No refund applicable
Student contribution/
help – deferred liability
Reduction of liability for
applicable semester/s
No reduction of liability
for Sem 1, but full
reduction of liability
Sem 2
No reduction of liability
applicable
Non-award tuition fees Full refund for
applicable semester/s
No refund for Sem 1,
but full refund of
Sem 2 component
No refund applicable
Full fee tuition fees Full refund for applicable
semester/s
No refund for Sem1,
but full refund of
Sem 2 component
No refund applicable
University fees Review and/or
report fees
If your result is upgraded a fee has been charged,
it may be refundable
TAFE DOMESTIC STUDENTS
If you have withdrawn from your Course or any Units of Study, the
table below will help you work out any refund of fees you may be
eligible for. Students transferring to another institution within 4 weeks
of the course start date are eligible for a full refund, proof must be
provided with the application.
Type of fee
Before course
start date
After course
start date
Before refund date
(4 weeks after
course start date)
After refund date
(4 weeks after
course start date)
General services
fee/base fee
$18 retained unless you are taking up a place at
another institution
No refund
Tuition fees $52 retained unless you are taking up a place at another
institution
No refund
Materials fees Full refund • No refund if you have attended classes
• $20 administration fee retained if you have not attended
classes
Full fee
course fees
• $100 administration fee retained if you withdraw up to 5 days prior to
the course start date
• No refund if you withdraw less than 5 days prior to the course start date
• Full refund if the university cancels the course
CROSS INSTITUTIONAL ENROLMENT
STUDENTS OF VICTORIA UNIVERSITY
Special arrangements can be negotiated whereby students studying
towards a recognised higher education award may be given specific
approval to undertake studies outside their awarding institution to
count towards completion of course requirements. Such
arrangements are termed ‘Cross Institutional Enrolment’.
VICTORIA UNIVERSITY 2006
404
The Course Co-ordinator of the relevant faculty and VU International
in the case of an international student, must approve the Cross
Institutional enrolment. Approval will not be given for more than one-
half of a student’s course to be undertaken at another institution.
Approvals must be completed prior to the teaching period census
date.
A student of the University who undertakes an approved cross
institutional course is required on completion of the unit to provide a
copy of the results to the relevant VU Faculty Office to confirm
completion of the Unit of Study(s) and and in order for the
appropriate grade to be entered against their external Unit of Study
enrolment and to avoid delays when applying to graduate.
Where the host institution administers a Commonwealth Supported
place in respect of a cross institutional enrolment that is approved by
this University to count towards completion of a course, that part of
the student’s Unit of Study enrolment at this University relating to the
cross institutional studies will be exempt from student contribution
liability. Such liability will be payable at the other institution where
the Unit of Study is undertaken.
STUDENTS OF OTHER INSTITUTIONS
Students who have been admitted to higher education award
courses at other tertiary institutions will, under certain circumstances,
be permitted to undertake studies at the University to count towards
completion of those courses. Admission of cross institutional students
is subject to funding, timetabling and class size considerations, and
requires the approval of the Head of School or Department
responsible for teaching the Units of Study concerned.
Students of other institutions wishing to apply for enrolment should
obtain written approval from the Director Student Services (or
equivalent) at their home institution, verifying their enrolment status,
indicating the nature of the studies to be undertaken, and certifying
that the studies, if successfully completed, will count towards the
award.
Students who have produced documentation required in accordance
with the previous paragraph will be exempted from payment of the
GSF normally required upon enrolment at the University, on the basis
that they have already paid such a fee elsewhere. Students will
normally be required to accept liability in respect of Units of Study
undertaken at this University. However, students should not be
required to accept liability more than once in respect of any
particular component of enrolment.
HIGHER EDUCATION COMMONWEALTH SUPPORTED STUDENTS
A Commonwealth Supported place is a higher education place for
which the Commonwealth makes a contribution towards the cost of
the students education. Commonwealth Supported students will
generally be required to contribute to the cost of their education
through a student contibution amount. The student contribution
amount applicable for Unit of Study offered at Victoria University is
available at: www.vu.edu.au/Courses/Fee_Guide/
WHO IS ELIGIBLE TO BE COMMONWEALTH SUPPORTED?
Students are eligible to be Commonwealth Supported if they are:
• an Australian citizen;
• a New Zealand Citizen who will be resident in Australia for the
duration of the unit of study;
• the holder of a permanent visa who will be resident in Australia
for the duration of the unit.
Particular rules in relation to this eligibility have been determined by
the Commonwealth government and can be viewed at:
www.goingtouni.gov.au
HIGHER EDUCATION LOAN PROGRAM (HELP)
Loan programs exist for higher education students as outlined in
Higher Education Support Act 2003 (HESA). Eligible students have
access to deferred payment arrangements through the Higher
Education Loan Programme (HELP).
The HELP scheme consists of three loans:
• HECS-HELP;
• FEE-HELP;
• OS-HELP (only available to undergraduates).
As well as the HELP scheme, there are a number of Commonwealth
and privately funded scholarship opportunities available to eligible
students to assist with the costs associated with undertaking higher
education. For further information on loan programs please visit the
Going To Uni website: www.goingtouni.gov.au
HECS-HELP ASSISTANCE
There are two forms of HECS-HELP assistance as follows:
• a HECS-HELP Loan made available by the Australian
Government to eligible Commonwealth Supported students to
assist in the payment of their Student Contribution amount;
• a HECS-HELP discount of 20 per cent is available to all students
who make upfront payments of $500 or more, towards their
Student Contribution amount directly to their Higher Education
Provider prior to Census Date.
HECS-HELP – WHO IS ELIGIBLE?
Students are eligible for HECS-HELP assistance if they:
• are enrolled in a unit of study as a Commonwealth Supported
student; and
• meet the citizenship or residency requirements as outlined in the
HESA; and
• submit a completed Request for Commonwealth support and
HECS-HELP form; and
• supply their Tax File Number if they intend to defer their Student
Contribution amount through a HECS-HELP loan; or
• pay 80 per cent of the Student Contribution amount directly to
the Higher Education Provider.
FEE-HELP ASSISTANCE
FEE-HELP is a loan scheme that assists eligible students to pay their
tuition fees. FEE-HELP can cover all or part of a student’s tuition fees,
up to a lifetime limit of $50,000, the amount is indexed each year
by DEST.
FEE-HELP – WHO IS ELIGIBLE?
Students are eligible for FEE-HELP assistance if they:
• are undertaking study at an eligible higher education provider
or Open Learning Australia; and
− meet the citizenship or residency requirements as outlined
in the HESA; and
− are enrolled in an eligible unit of study on the census date;
and
− are not Commonwealth Supported in relation to the unit;
− have submit a completed Request for FEE-HELP assistance
form;
− meet the Tax File Number Requirements; and
− have not exceeded the FEE-HELP limit.
OS-HELP ASSISTANCE
OS-HELP is a loan scheme to assist eligible undergraduate students
to undertake some of their course of study overseas.
OS-HELP is not available to students undertaking their whole course
outside Australia
ADMISSIONS, ENROLMENTS, EXAMINATIONS, GRADUATIONS AND ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
405
OS-HELP – WHO IS ELIGIBLE?
The following table outlines who is eligible for OS-HELP assistance:
Eligibility Requirements
Citizenship You must be:
• An Australian citizen, or
• The holder of a permanent humanitarian visa.
Enrolment conditions You must be:
• Enrolled in an undergraduate course of study, and
• Enrolled in full-time study with an overseas higher education institution
or the overseas campus of victoria university for study commencing on
or after 1 January 2005 and for which you will be outside of Australia
while undertaking the study.
Course of study You must:
• Have successfully completed at least one year (equivalent full-time) of
your course of study in Australia as a Commonwealth-supported/HECS
student or as a merit-based equity scholarship holder; and
• Have the overseas study count as credit towards the course of study you
are enrolled in; and
• Still have at least one half year (equivalent full-time) of study yet to
complete in your course when you return from overseas.
Previous OS-HELP loans You must not have:
• Received OS-HELP on more than one other occasion, and
• Been granted an OS-HELP loan from another provider for the same or
overlapping period.
Application for OS-HELP loans are to be made directly to the
Education Abroad Unit, with the forms located on the VU Internet.
Further information can be provided by contacting the Education
Abroad Unit on.
Email: educationabroad@vu.edu.au
Telephone: (03) 9919 1296
STUDENT LEARNING ENTITLEMENT AND CHESSN
Students eligible for a Commonwealth Supported place will receive
a Student Learning Entitlement (SLE), providing access to seven or
more years of equivalent full-time study load in a Commonwealth
supported place. Commonwealth Supported Students will be
allocated a Commonwealth Higher Education Student Support
Number (CHESSN) allowing them to monitor their SLE balance.
Students can access information relating to their SLE balance via the
Going to Uni website at: www.goingtouni.gov.au
TAX FILE NUMBERS
HANDLING OF TAX FILE NUMBERS BY UNIVERSITY STAFF
Tax File Numbers submitted by students or received from the
Australian Taxation Office will be kept secure and confidential and
no unauthorised person will be permitted access to this information.
COLLECTION OF TAX FILE NUMBER INFORMATION BY THE
UNIVERSITY
If a student provides a Tax File Number that does not conform to the
specifications provided by the Australian Taxation Office, the
responsible University Officer has the authority not to accept or
process the student’s enrolment.
If a student fails to provide a Tax File Number or a Certificate of
Application from the Australian Taxation Office by the enrolment
census date, then the responsible University Officer has the authority
to cancel the student’s enrolment.
COMMUNICATION FROM THE UNIVERSITY
TO STUDENTS
TAX INVOICE
The University will issue a Tax invoice to each student detailing:
• the student’s personal details;
• the course of study the student is enrolled in; the units of study
the student is enrolled in for the current teaching period;
• the Effective Full Time Student Load (EFTSL) or Student Contact
Hours (SCH) for each unit(s) of study for Higher Education and
TAFE students respectively; and
• details of applicable fees due that may include Amenities and
Services fees; Material and Ancillary fees; Student Contribution
amounts and/or Tuition Fees;
• Payment methods.
COMMONWEALTH ASSISTANCE NOTICE
Higher Education Commonwealth Assisted Students are issued with a
Commonwealth Assistance Notice (CAN) within 28 days of Census
Date for each teaching period of study. Students are required to
check the enrolment information provided on the CAN and inform
the University in writing within 14 days of generation of the CAN if
they identify incorrect information. If the University does not receive
any feedback from a student within 14 days of the CAN being
issued, the student’s enrolment record as shown on the CAN is taken
to be correct and the student will incur the Student Contribution
and/or Tuition Fees for each Unit of Study listed on the CAN.
ASSESSMENT
A candidate becomes eligible for assessment in a unit of study only
when enrolled in that unit. Candidates will be considered as having
entered for assessment in all units of study for which they have
enrolled.
A student will be deemed to have enrolled for assessment in a unit of
study unless such enrolment has been formally withdrawn by the
specified date. Application for timely unit of study withdrawals must
be made on the appropriate University form. Total withdrawal from
a course of study must be approved by the Faculty, School or
Department responsible for administration of the student’s course by
the specified date.
All defined fee payments must be completed before any enrolment or
assessment is validated and/or confirmed by the University. The
enrolment of those students who do not complete payment within the
required timeframe will be cancelled. Students are notified of an
enrolment cancellation by mail. A student will only be reinstated to
the course where authorisation from the Faculty or TAFE School’s
Administration office has been obtained, a reinstatement fee and all
outstanding fees have been paid.
When students enrol at the commencement of the academic year, a
provisional enrolment for Semester Two is registered. It is important
to note that the Faculty or TAFE School administering each course of
study has the power to amend, restrict or cancel provisional semester
enrolments.
All enrolled students are eligible for assessment in each of the units
of study in which they are enrolled. In most units of study offered by
the University there will be more than one assessment task or
component of assessment during a teaching period.
VICTORIA UNIVERSITY 2006
406
The components of assessment for each unit of study will vary but
may include attendance, examinations, tests, exercises, practical
tasks, essays, assignments, articles, theses or other work.
More precise details of the assessment for each unit of study will be
provided by the School or Department Examination Board for that
unit of study not later than two weeks after commencement of
teaching in the unit of study. These details will include:
• the nature of each component of assessment;
• the approximate length or extent of each of the components;
• the approximate due date for each component;
• the proportion of total marks assigned to each component; and
• the standard deduction of marks for late submission.
The Examination Board for each unit of study will consist usually of
the Head of the relevant School or Department (as Chairperson) and
the examiners for the unit of study. Usually there will only be one
examiner for each unit of study who will be one of the members of
staff teaching the unit of study. The examiner(s) will be appointed by
the end of the second week in each teaching period. The examiners
may be assisted in correcting work by assistant markers appointed
by the Chairperson of the Examination Board.
The University has adopted rules in relation to assessment and the
supervision of assessment. These rules form Part 1 of the Schedule to
a Statute of the University (Statute 6.3.1—Assessment). A copy can
be obtained from the Governance and Policy Branch, telephone
(03) 9919 4022.
ASSESSMENT IS AVAILABLE ONLY TO STUDENTS OF THE
UNIVERSITY
Students cannot have results for an examination in a unit of study in
which they have not formally enrolled; check carefully your
Enrolment Registration and Commonwealth Assistance notices to
ensure that your enrolment is correct in every detail.
A WORD OF WARNING
Do not leave things to the last minute. You may receive little
sympathy if you approach staff during the examination period
regarding a problem that has affected your enrolment status or
hampered your performance throughout the teaching period.
If circumstances force you to ‘drop’ a unit of study, make sure you
apply to withdraw from that unit of study at the earliest possible time
and at least before the deadline specified byStudent Administration.
If you do not complete the assessment for a unit of study for which
you are enrolled you will receive a ‘Fail’ grade in that unit of study
even if you have not attended classes in that unit of study. You will
also incur a HELP liability for the unit of study.
EXAMINATION TIMETABLE
The final examination timetable is posted on University noticeboards
and web site www.vu.edu.au approximately five weeks before the
examination period begins. It is your responsibility to check this
timetable for any clash, and to refer any clash enquiries to
examinations@vu.edu.au or telephone (03) 9919 4523.
You will not be given special consideration if you misread the
examination timetable and miss an examination, nor will you be
entitled to another examination.
No information about the examination timetable will be given by
telephone.
CONDUCT OF EXAMINATIONS
Enquiries about examinations may be directed by email to
examinations@vu.edu.au or to the Student Service Centre on your
campus.
Unless otherwise indicated on the published timetable, examination
sessions will normally commence at:
9.30am morning examination sessions
2.00pm afternoon examination sessions
6.00pm evening examination sessions
Students will be admitted to the examination room at those times and
given fifteen minutes at the commencement of the session for the
purpose of reading the paper. Any variation of this practice will be
notified to students in the printed timetable. As a rule, no writing,
note making or marking of the paper in any way is permitted in this
reading time. A member of the academic or teaching staff will be
present at the beginning of each examination session at the
examination venues to answer any inquiries about the question
paper.
Before entering the examination room, students must ascertain their
individual seat numbers from lists posted on noticeboards at the
examination venues and web site www.myvu.vu.edu.au. Lists are
posted on the University website at least two weeks prior to the
commencement of examinations. Any student who has not been
allocated a seat number should report immediately to a Student
Service Centre before the commencement of the examination
session.
No student may enter the examination room more than half an hour
after the commencement of the session or leave the examination
room until half an hour after the commencement of the session or
during the last quarter of an hour of the session.
You may bring into the examination room: pens, ink, pencils, rulers,
erasers and mathematical instruments (see below for use of
calculators and electronic devices).
You may not bring into the examination room any book, paper or
other material that has not been specifically authorised for use at that
particular examination: if, during an examination, you are found to
be in possession of such material, you will be reported as having
breached examination rules and may face disciplinary action.
You are strongly advised not to bring to examinations any
unnecessary clothing, papers, books, bags, handbags, wallets,
folders, valuables or other personal items. You will not be permitted
to bring into the examination room any bag, handbag, folder, pencil
case, calculator case, pager or similar item. You are warned of the
possibility of theft. The University accepts no responsibility for loss of
or damage to any item left outside of or brought into an examination
room.
You must bring your student identity card or other photographic
identification such as driver’s license or passport to each of your
examinations. Checks will be conducted in examination venues to
verify the student’s identity and any discrepancies will be dealt with
University Statutes.
Further information about the conduct of the examinations is given in
the Rules and Regulations published with the examination timetable
and on the University web site at: www.vu.edu.au/Services/
Examinations/Rules_and_Regulations/
ADMISSIONS, ENROLMENTS, EXAMINATIONS, GRADUATIONS AND ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
407
ACADEMIC MISCONDUCT
Students should note that the University regards academic
misconduct as a very serious matter. Students found guilty of
academic misconduct could be excluded from the University. The
period of exclusion will vary depending on the circumstance of
individual cases.
The following are some of the actions which have resulted in students
being found guilty of academic misconduct:
• taking unauthorised materials into an examination;
• submitting work for assessment knowing it to be the work of
another person;
• improperly obtaining prior knowledge of an examination paper
and using that knowledge in the examination;
• disobeying any reasonable instruction of a supervisor;
• directly or indirectly assisting other students or accepting
assistance from any person other than a supervisor.
Possible penalties if found guilty of academic misconduct are
referred to in Statute 2.7 and include:
• a formal reprimand;
• forfeiture of the whole or part of any assessment in the unit of
study to which the misconduct relates;
• the imposition of a fine of not more than $500;
• suspension or exclusion from the course in which the student is
enrolled.
SPECIAL CONSIDERATION
Students may apply for special consideration if their work during a
teaching period or examination or other assessment has been
gravely affected by illness or other serious cause.
Application must be made no later than three days after the date of
submission of the assessment for which special consideration is
sought. Applications seeking an extension of time to complete a
component of assessment should be made to the relevant School or
Department. All other applications should be made to the relevant
Faculty Manager concerned or to the TAFE Executive Officer.
Where students have been prevented by illness or other cause from
making application within the three-day period they can make a late
application setting out the reasons why the application could not be
made earlier.
A successful application for special consideration may result in the
student being allowed to undertake supplementary or further
assessment.
Students will not be given special consideration for misreading the
examination timetable.
STUDENTS WITH DISABILITIES – ALTERNATIVE ASSESSMENT
ARRANGEMENTS
Students with an ongoing disability should immediately register with
Disability Services in the Equity and Social Justice Branch of the
University once enrolled in their course. Students with a temporary
disability, which puts them at a disadvantage in written
examinations, should advise the relevant Faculty Manager or the
TAFE Executive Officer and also register with Disability Services at
the beginning of the teaching period of study or immediately after
their disability is known to discuss alternative arrangements for
examinations.
Alternative assessment arrangements could include extra time, a
separate room or use of adaptive equipment in examinations.
USE OF LINGUISTIC DICTIONARIES
Students may apply to use an English language dictionary in an
examination during the first 2 years of enrolment in the University if:
• the student has arrived from a non-English-speaking country
within the last five years;
• the student has regularly attended an approved program
designed to improve their language skills.
These are general guidelines only and criteria may vary with
individual unit of study assessment requirements. An Application to
Use a Dictionary Form is available from campus Student Contact
Centrres and must be presented together with a registered
dictionary. The concerned lecturer must then approve this form. After
the completion of this process, students are required to bring this
form along with the dictionary to the examination venue.
USE OF ELECTRONIC DICTIONARIES
The use of electronic dictionaries is not permitted.
USE OF COMPUTERS AND ELECTRONIC CALCULATORS
Faculties, Schools and teaching Departments are responsible for
determining which materials will be allowable for use in
examinations. Students should refer to individual unit of study guides
for details about the use of calculators and electronic devices.
Generally, students will be allowed to bring into an examination
room only pens, pencils and non-electronic mathematical instruments
unless otherwise specified in the unit of study guide.
FURTHER ASSESSMENT
Before the results of assessment for any component of assessment are
published, the examiners may administer a further component of
assessment to resolve any doubts as to whether a student has
reached the required standards, or about the grade to be awarded
to the student.
This means it is vital that students ensure they can be easily
contacted between the time a component of assessment is completed
and results are published.
NOTIFICATION OF RESULTS
The final results for any unit of study will not be officially notified to
students before the completion of assessment in that unit of study and
their formal publication. No information regarding results will be
given by telephone.
A further component of assessment – oral, written or practical – may
be administered by the examiners in any unit of study at short notice
and before the publication of results. Students should therefore
ensure that they can be easily contacted until the publication of
results.
REVIEW AND REPORTS
Students may apply to have an assessment of any work remarked or
to be given a report on their assessed work. These applications may
be subject to a fee.
Applications must be made to the Chairperson of the relevant
Examination Board within seven days of the day upon which the
results of assessment were published or become available for
collection.
Students will be notified of the results of any review of their work.
VICTORIA UNIVERSITY 2006
408
UNIT OF STUDY ASSESSMENT AND GRADING
Grades for Year 2006 are as follows:
GRADES FOR ASSESSED UNITS OF STUDY (INCLUDING THESIS)
Grades for Honours Unit(s) of Study, Theses and Units of Study taken
in Postgraduate Courses, Grades for Honours Years, Honours
Degrees, Degrees with Honours and Degrees of Master, are all
assessed as a whole.
H1 First Class Honours, 80 per cent –100 per cent
H2A Second Class Honours, Upper 70 per cent – 79 per cent
H2B Second Class Honours, Lower 60 per cent – 69 per cent
H3 Third Class Honours, 50 per cent – 59 per cent
N Fail, 0 per cent – 49 per cent
S Ungraded Pass
GRADES FOR OTHER UNITS OF STUDY
HD High Distinction, 80 per cent –100 per cent
D Distinction, 70 per cent – 79 per cent
C Credit, 60 per cent – 69 per cent
P Pass, 50 per cent – 59 per cent
N1 Fail, 40 per cent – 49 per cent
N2 Low Fail, 0 per cent – 39 per cent
S Ungraded Pass*
U Ungraded Fail
*S Ungraded Pass may also be used to represent the grade
Recognition for Prior Learning.
COMPETENCY – BASES GRADES (TAFE)
CC Achieved Outstanding Competency
CP Achieved Competency – Highest Grade Awarded
PP Achieved Competency
NN Competency Not Achieved
CODES FOR INCOMPLETE ASSESSMENT
X Continuing Unit of Study
L Not Yet Assessed – Special Cause**
(Higher Education Units of Study only)
RO Result Outstanding
**An L grade is required to be converted to a final result grade
within one teaching period and prior to the commencement of the
following academic year, otherwise the assessment automatically
lapses to a Fail.
ADDITIONAL CODES
SC Satisfactory Completion of Class Hours
UC Unsatisfactory Completion of Class Hours
SE UoS Exemption/Credit Transfer
E1 Exempt Semester 1 (full year UoS)
E2 Exempt Semester 2 (full year UoS)
CE Joint Course/Complementary Enrolment
(result issued by other institution)
NT Not Assessable
(Short Course Module or Short Course Unit) (TAFE only)
NY Not Assessed (Internally approved, or Nationally
Accredited, Module or Unit) (TAFE only)
WN Withdrew – Failed
WD Withdrew – Without Academic Penalty
WL Withdrew – Late
VC VCE
TA TAFE Preparatory Assistance
S Recognition of Prior Learning/Recognition of Current
Competencies
COURSE ASSESSMENT AND GRADING
Special provisions are made on a course-by-course basis for
students who encounter difficulties with academic progress. The
provisions for Stage Completion and Faculty Passes detailed below
should be read in conjunction with the course-specific progress
regulations that appear in the Faculty Details of Courses.
STAGE COMPLETION
Some courses are formally divided into stages. These are identified in
the details of courses.
Following final assessment in all units of study within a course
semester, course year or other defined course stage, a student may
receive a stage grading as follows:
• stage completed, all units of study passed;
• stage completed by compensation.
Stage completion by compensation will only be granted to a student who,
though not passing all individual units of study, has aggregated grades
above pass level and at a standard appropriate for progression to the
subsequent course stage. Stage completion by compensation is not a pass
in the unit of study and might not be recognised by all appropriate
professional bodies.
Procedures for stage gradings in particular courses are as
recommended by academic course departments or faculties and
approved by the University.
MAXIMUM TIME FOR COMPLETION OF AWARDS
The policies set out below represent the basic rules relating to the
granting of a University award. Additional rules or requirements set
by the Faculty are included in the Faculty section of this Handbook.
PARTIALLY COMPLETED COURSES
Where a student enters a University course by transfer from incomplete
studies at another institution, that student must complete at least the final
full-time year (or equivalent) of the course to qualify for the University
award. This applies to all courses that are longer than one year of
equivalent full-time study in duration.
This means, for example, that a student entering a three-year course
having previously completed over two years of a comparable award at
another institution can receive, at a maximum, two years’ advanced
standing in the Victoria University course.
COMPLETED COURSES – MAXIMUM ADVANCED STANDING
A student who has qualified for a VU degree or diploma must complete, at
a minimum, the equivalent of at least one year’s full-time study in order to
qualify for any subsequent University qualification at a comparable level.
MAXIMUM TIME FOR THE COMPLETION OF AWARDS
To be eligible for the award of a Degree, Diploma, Associate
Diploma, Advanced Certificate or Certificate, a student is required to
complete all course requirements within the course progression
regulations within the University. maximum periods of time, unless
such provision is specifically waived for that student by the University.
Maximum times for completion of awards are as follows:
• Certificate 5 years
• Advanced Certificate 5 years
• Associate Diploma* 8 years
• Undergraduate Diploma 10 years
• Undergraduate Degree of 3-years duration full-time 10 years
• Undergraduate Degree of 4-years duration full-time 10 years
• Graduate Diploma 6 years
• Graduate Certificate 3 years
*Including time taken to complete preliminary Advanced
Certificate year where applicable.
ADMISSIONS, ENROLMENTS, EXAMINATIONS, GRADUATIONS AND ACADEMIC PROCEDURES
409
The time periods are taken from the beginning of the first teaching
period for which the student was enrolled in the course, until the
completion of all course requirements, and may include time elapsed
due to deferment, suspension or voluntary withdrawal from the
course.
Note: The maximum completion times apply in the absence of
specific course requirements. For specific courses, shorter maximum
time periods can be specified, and where this is the case, the shorter
time limit will apply.
ACADEMIC PROGRESSION
UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS
The demand for tertiary study places exceeds the number of places
available. Every year a considerable number of applicants fail to
gain entry to the University. It is assumed that every person selected
into an award course has the capacity to succeed. However, if
students do not progress satisfactorily, they will be asked to show
cause as to why they should be permitted to continue in the course.
An important aim of the University is to assist its students to succeed.
Therefore, students should make use of the free counselling services
provided if they are encountering problems or difficulties that are
affecting their studies. These difficulties could include problems in
organising time, financial difficulties, personal problems or
difficulties in writing and presenting assignments and essays.
On the recommendation of the relevant Faculty or School, the
University may specify academic progression rules for each
individual course. Students should carefully read the progression
rules relating to their course of study as detailed in the relevant
section of the Handbook or in course regulations.
A student who fails to make satisfactory progress in a course of
study is liable for exclusion from that course. This applies where a
student does not achieve a satisfactory performance on a
component of assessment, fails to attend without good reason for
the performance of a component of assessment, or does not
perform a component of assessment. In these cases, the relevant
Faculty, School or Department, after investigating the circumstances
and allowing the student to be heard, either personally or through
a representative, may notify the student in writing that he or she has
made unsatisfactory progress in a unit of study.
In addition to notifying the student of unsatisfactory progress, the
relevant Faculty or School may also notify the student that it intends
to make a recommendation to the Academic Board or the Board of
TAFE that the student be excluded or suspended from the course or
only be allowed to continue under certain specified conditions. As
a general policy, the following will form part of all award course
progression regulations within the University.
Students may not:
• enrol in any sequential unit of study without having passed all
prerequisite units of study; or
• enrol in any unit with a co-requisite unit of study without
having either previously passed the co-requisite unit of study or
enrolling simultaneously in the co-requisite unit of study.
In reaching its decision about what action should be recommended
with respect to unsatisfactory progress by a student, the faculty or
school may establish one or more committees to consider the
circumstances and hear any submission that a student wishes to
make.
After receiving a recommendation from a faculty or school, the
Academic Board or the Board of TAFE, as appropriate, may
exclude or suspend the student from a course.
Alternatively, the relevant Board may specify the conditions under
which the student may continue in a course.
Special arrangements will apply to doctoral students and students
undertaking masters degrees by research who should seek advice
on those arrangements from their supervisors.
Any student who is notified of unsatisfactory progress should seek
assistance from Student Services staff or the Student Union at the
earliest opportunity.
DISCIPLINE
The University will act to protect good order and the rights of
individuals within its confines. To this end, a formal process will be
followed to deal with any alleged breach of discipline or misconduct.
The University operates within the provisions of a Statute dealing with
discipline (Statute 4.1—Discipline). A copy can be obtained from the
Governance and Policy Branch, telephone (03) 9919 4022.
PLAGIARISM
Paragraph 11(3)(d) of the Schedule to Statute 6.3.1—Assessment
states that a student shall not, during or in connection with the
performance of any component of assessment, submit or represent
the whole or part of published or unpublished material, written or
prepared by some person or persons other than that student, as
being the work of that student.
Any student committing a breach of this rule shall be guilty of a
disciplinary offence and all further proceedings will be conducted in
accordance with Statute 4.1—Discipline, and Statute 2.7—The
Discipline Committee.
GRADUATION PROCEDURES
This information relates to graduation from Certificate, Advanced
Certificate, Associate Diploma, Diploma, Advanced Diploma,
Bachelors, Graduate Certificate, Graduate Diploma, Masters and
Doctoral awards of the University.
Upon satisfying all the requirements of an award course a student is
regarded as a graduand and is eligible to become a graduate.
When you have completed or nearly completed a course you are
required to submit an Application for an Award form. You can apply
online through myVU at http://myvu.vu.edu.au. Alternatively, forms
can be collected from and handed in at the Student Service Centre at
any campus of Victoria University or downloaded from the University
website and sent directly to:
Graduation and Offshore Student Administration
Telephone: 61 3 9919 2846
Fax: 61 3 9919 2853
Email: graduate@vu.edu.au
Website: www.vu.edu.au/graduation
Located: Room 4C, 141, St Albans Campus.
Forms must be submitted before the set closing date.
Graduation ceremonies in 2006 are scheduled as follows:
• 16 February 2006: Malaysia
• 20 February 2006: Hong Kong
Applications close 14 October 2005
Attendance closes 11 January 2006
• 5 to 9 June 2006: Melbourne Convention Centre
Applications close 27 January 2006
Attendance closes 5 May 2006
• 1 to 3 November 2006: Melbourne Convention Centre
Applications close 18 August 2006
Attendance closes 29 September 2006
A graduation fee applies if you decide to attend a graduation
ceremony.
VICTORIA UNIVERSITY 2006
410
ACADEMIC DRESS
The wearing of academic dress on ceremonial occasions is one of
the traditions that is attached to universities. Victoria University has
based its academic dress on the basic style of Oxford. It consists of a
gown, a cap or bonnet, and a hood which represents the discipline
of the degree.
CERTIFICANTS
A black gown and black cap together with a black stole faced in
tangerine.
DIPLOMATES AND GRADUATE CERTIFICANTS
A black gown and black cap together with a black stole faced in the
discipline colour.
BACHELORS
A black gown and black cap with a black hood half lined with the
discipline colour. The hood for the honors degree also has a white
band on the edge of the hood.
MASTERS
A black gown and black cap with a black hood fully lined with the
discipline colour.
Discipline colours:
Ruby Arts
Ultramarine Business or Business Administration
Cherry Education
Silver Grey Engineering
Old Rose Health Science
Parchment Law
Pansy Music
Buff Psychology
Spectrum Green Science or Applied Science
Gold Social Work
DOCTORATES
A black bonnet with a gold cord and scarlet gown with a facing of
the discipline colour and black hood fully lined in the discipline
colour as follows:
Adonis Blue Doctor of Business
Cherry Doctor of Education
Graphite Doctor of Engineering
Pearl White Doctor of Laws
Ruby Doctor of Letters
Sapphire Doctor of Philosophy
Old Gold Doctor of Psychology
Spectrum Green Doctor of Science
Sky Blue Doctor of the University
The academic dress for indigenous Australians is the habit of their
award together with a calf length black and red silk stole that has
gold tassels, a map of Victoria in gold silk and ‘Victoria University’
embroidered in gold on the left end of the stole, and the sun in gold
silk and ‘Ngaga Jindi Woraback’ embroidered in gold on the right
end of the stole.
CREDIT POINTS
The credit point system provides a uniform basis for establishing unit
of study relativities and values within a course. The objectives of the
credit point system are to:
• simplify and standardise the relativities and values within a
course in relation to EFTSL;
• provide a uniform measure of total student workload across all
higher education programs; and
• allow students to make informed judgements on their likely
workload in units of study across various disciplines.
WHAT IS A CREDIT POINT VALUE?
The value of a credit point is determined by the total student effort
involved in the completion of a unit of study and includes private
study hours, tutorial or laboratory work, library and research work
together with formal class contact hours. The credit point value of a
unit of study reflects its academic weight and the total amount of
effort relative to other units of study within a course. There is no link
between credit points and contact hours.
WHAT TYPE OF CREDIT POINT SYSTEM?
The University has introduced a standard course value system of
credit points. This means that all courses within the higher education
sector of the University will have the same number of credit points for
each year of a course.
HOW MANY CREDIT POINTS?
The University has adopted from 2006 a system of 96 credit points
for each year of a course. Thus a three-year degree program will
equal 288 credit points, a four-year degree 384 credit points and so
on.
HOW CAN I IDENTIFY MY ENROLMENT LOAD?
0–35 credit points per semester will equal a part-time load
36−48 credit points per semester will equal a full-time load
0−70 credit points per year will equal a part-time load
71−96 credit points per year will equal a full-time load.
EFTSL
All universities are required to calculate individual student enrolment
load per year of a course. The Department of Education, Science
and Training (DEST) expresses the value of an enrolment load as a
percentage of 1, which is considered to be the total value of a
standard, full-time course load. This unit of measurement is referred
to as an Equivalent Full-Time Student Load or EFTSL.
411
SERVICES AVAILABLE TO STUDENTS
STUDENT CAREER DEVELOPMENT
Student Career Development provides an innovative range of
services to Victoria University students. These services include:
• Online Career Services and Resources –
website: www.vu.edu.au/careers
• Online job vacancy service – www.vu.edu.au/careers
• Career Development Programs
• Career Counselling
• Employment Services
• Career Resource Centres
Careers Counselling appointments are available for students at most
campuses by phoning (03) 9919 4944.
ONLINE CAREER SERVICES AND RESOURCES
Visit our website, www.vu.edu.au/careers, to access career and
employment information, workshops, employment opportunites and
employer events. Put your career online by developing an Eportfolio
at myeportfolio.vu.edu.au. Email your resume or career question to
careers@vu.edu.au for feedback and answers from VU Careers
Educators.
CAREER DEVELOPMENT PROGRAMS
These include Student Career Portfolio development, job search skills
workshops, Employability Skills Development Programs, Young
Achievement Australia, Industry Mentoring programs and in-class
programs. Visit www.vu.edu.au/careers to see what’s on this month.
EMPLOYMENT SERVICES
Victoria University’s online jobs board can be accessed through
www.vu.edu.au/careers Register on the site now for automatic
notification of a wide variety of jobs and regular event updates via
email.
Meet prospective employers at the the annual Careers Fair for
students held on 30 March 2006. Its free, its easy and the employers
come to you! Watch the website for details of other employer
campus visits.
WHERE ARE WE?
Student Career Development, Footscray Park: Building M, level 4
On most other campuses, Student Career Development is
co-located with Student Services.
Telephone: (03) 9919 4944
Website: www.vu.edu.au/careers
Email: careers@vu.edu.au
CHILDREN’S SERVICES
Victoria University has Children’s Centres located on five campuses –
Footscray Nicholson, Footscray Park, Newport, St Albans
(Jindi Woraback) and Werribee. In addition, there is a preschool
located on the Melton Campus.
Each Centre provides educational programs which respond to the
children’s social, emotional, physical, cognitive and creative needs.
Nutritious meals and snacks are provided for the children throughout
the day. All of the University Children’s Centres have been assessed
as providing the highest level of care by the National Childcare
Accreditation Council.
All Centres provide a funded and integrated preschool program with
a qualified Early Childhood (Kindergarten) teacher.
Families using the University’s Children’s Centres are eligible to
apply for Child Care Benefit (CCB) through the Family Assistance
Office (FAO) – formerly Centrelink. The FAO is responsible for
assessing family income and determining the percentage of Child
Care Benefit families receive. For further information please contact
your local Family Assistance Office.
CITY FLINDERS AND CITY KING CAMPUSES
Telephone: (03) 9919 4098
For further information on finding suitable childcare, telephone
Children’s Services, on (03) 9284 8801.
FOOTSCRAY NICHOLSON CAMPUS
Telephone: (03) 9919 4098
The Footscray Nicholson Campus Children’s Centre is located on the
Ground Floor, Hoadley Building, Albert Street, Footscray. The Centre
caters for a maximum of 39 children aged six weeks to six years on
a full-time (weekly), daily, sessional (half day) and occasional care
basis. The Centre is open from 7.45am to 5.45pm, Monday to
Friday and offers a funded preschool program incorporated within
the educational progam.
FOOTSCRAY PARK CAMPUS
Telephone: (03) 9919 4578
The Footscray Park Campus Children’s Centre is located at 8
Geelong Road, Footscray. The Centre caters for a maximum of 37
children aged six weeks to six years on a full-time (weekly), daily,
sessional (half day) and occasional care basis. The Centre is open
from 7.45am to 5.45pm, Monday to Friday and offers a funded
preschool program incorporated within the educational program.
ST ALBANS CAMPUS (JINDI WORABACK CHILDREN’S CENTRE)
Telephone: (03) 9364 6855
The Jindi Woraback Children’s Centre is located at the Willis Street
entrance of the St Albans Campus and is operated by a
Management Committee consisting of representatives from the
University and parents. The Centre caters for a maximum of 115
children aged from two weeks to six years on a full-time (weekly),
daily, sessional (half day) basis. The Centre is open from 7.00am –
6.00pm, Monday to Friday and offers a funded preschool program.
MELTON CAMPUS
Telephone: (03) 9747 7500
The Brookfield Preschool operates from the Melton Campus
Children’s Centre and is located at the Wilson Road entrance of the
Campus. The Centre offers sessional kindergarten programs for three
and four-year-old children.
VICTORIA UNIVERSITY 2006
412
NEWPORT CAMPUS
Telephone: (03) 9919 8476
The Newport Campus Children’s Centre is located in Building K,
Champion Road, Newport. The Centre caters for a maximum of 40
children aged six weeks to six years on a full-time (weekly), daily,
sessional (half day) and occasional care basis. The Centre is open
from 7.45am – 5.45pm, Monday to Friday. The Centre provides a
funded preschool program incorporated within the educational
program.
WERRIBEE CAMPUS
Telephone: (03) 9919 8098
The Werribee Campus Children’s Centre is located in Hoppers Lane,
Entrance Gate 1, Building 9, Werribee. The Centre caters for a
maximum of 45 children aged six weeks to six years on a full-time
(weekly), daily, sessional (half day) and occasional care basis.
The Centre is open from 7.15am – 6.15pm, Monday to Friday and
offers a funded preschool program incorporated within the
educational program.
GRADUATING STUDENTS
Graduation and Offshore Student Administration processes all
sealed awards for the University. When you have completed or
nearly completed a course, you are required to submit an
Application for an Award form. You can apply online through myVU
at: myvu.vu.edu.au.
Alternatively, forms can be collected from and handed into the
Student Service Centre at any campus of Victoria University or
downloaded from the University website. The organisation of
graduation ceremonies, both onshore and offshore, is also the
responsibility of this section.
Graduation and Offshore Student Administration
Telephone: 61 3 9919 2846
Fax: 61 3 9919 2853
Email: graduate@vu.edu.au
Website: www.vu.edu.au
Located: Room 4C, 141, St Albans Campus
SCHOOL OF HEALTH SCIENCES
TEACHING CLINICS
The Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science operate clinics at the
St Albans and City Flinders (Flinders Lane) Campuses. These clinics
offer treatments in acupuncture, osteopathy, paediatric osteopathy,
Chinese herbal medicine, naturopathy, homoeopathy and massage.
Both clinics are open to the general public as well as the University
community at reduced cost treatments.
For further information or bookings, phone (03) 9919 2625 or
(03) 9919 1111.
INDEPENDENT ACCESS:
STUDENTS WITH A DISABILITY
Students with a disability have access to disabled parking, library
resources and equipment, including support staff, faculty and
department contact officers, and educational assistance through
Student Learning Services. Students requiring in-class supports,
teaching accommodations and/or applications for alternative
assessment arrangements for examinations need to register with
Disability Services (DS) in the Equity & Social Justice Branch.
Students must register with DS each year, and as early as possible,
to ensure adequate supports and up-to-date information and
resources are available. A Disability Resource Room is located at St.
Albans Campus providing access to adaptive technology as well as
services such as the transcribing of text into electronic or Braille
format.
Further information, registering and advice can be obtained by
contacting Disability Services in the Equity and Social Justice Branch
on (03) 9919 2193 or via email on disability@vu.edu.au.
Students with a disability seeking services such as personal and
vocational counselling, careers advice, accommodation, chaplaincy,
financial advice and scholarship information should contact Student
Support (see section below).
ORIENTATION
Orientation is held for new students before the start of first semester
each year. A wide range of events are organised to provide
opportunities for students to meet each other and to gain an
awareness of the activities and services provided by the University.
An Orientation Information satchel is provided for new students
including the The Survival Guide which includes information about
the services available to students and a range of other
extracurricular activities. Further information can be obtained at
www..vu.edu.au or www.vustudents.org .au
MOONDANI BALLUK
(INDIGENOUS SERVICES)
Support for Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people is available
through the Equity and Social Justice Branch. The two main aims of
Indigenous Services Moondani Balluk is to fully support self
determination and self management for Aboriginal and Torres Strait
Islander people, families and community organisations; and to
increase the access, participation, success and retention rates for
Australian Indigenous people in the University’s programs.
Moondani Balluk staff can assist students with course advice,
Abstudy, academic support, employment and careers advice, social
support, housing, counselling and discrimination advice.
For further information, contact Moondani Balluk on
(03) 9919 2836 or email Moondani.Balluk@vu.edu.au.
SERVICES AVAILABLE TO STUDENTS
413
STUDENT SUPPORT
Student Support provides services to students in a variety of ways.
Staff provide educational support, personal and educational
counselling, financial information and advice, money management,
housing, health services, and Chaplaincy.
Student Support offices are located on most campuses and are open
Monday to Friday during normal working hours, or after hours by
appointment. For further information contact Footscray Park campus
on (03) 9919 4418, St Albans campus on (03) 9919 2399,
Footscray Nicholson campus on (03) 9919 8801
or visit our webpage: www.vu.edu.au/ss.
ACCOMMODATION
The University Student Housing Service is primarily a web based
service which assists students with locating, securing and
maintaining suitable accommodation by providing extensive
information on the Student Housing Database and Housing web
pages located on the University web site. The ‘Housing Web’ can be
located at: www.vu.edu.au/ss/housing/ and holds a current listing
of all accommodation offered to the University. The Housing Web
also provides a wide range of tenancy rights information and other
information such as Real Estate Agent lists and Student Village
information. It provides links to a wide range of appropriate housing-
related services including share accommodation, public transport
and emergency housing services. Accommodation offers can be
placed directly onto the Housing Web.
The Housing Officer and Student Assistance Officers can provide
tenancy advice and referral as well as assistance with general
housing information. Student Support staff can assist with
accommodation inquiries. For further information, contact the Student
Support offices telephone: (03) 9919 4418, (03) 9919 8801,
(03) 9919 2399, (03) 9919 4420 or email housing@vu.edu.au.
CHAPLAINCY
Contact the ecumenical Chaplain for compassionate and spiritual
support to your life issues, irrespective of religious affiliations.
Contact Student Support (03) 9919 2292, (03) 9919 2399 or visit
www.vu.edu.au/Students/Student_Services/Chaplaincy/index.asp.
REFLECTION CENTRE
The Reflection Centre at St Albans provides a gathering area as well
as a personal quiet space for everyone, irrespective of religious
affiliation. Meditation, prayer and multi-faith services are conducted
at the centre located at 1L101.
COUNSELLING – PERSONAL
Counsellors can help students optimise their emotional, social and
academic well being. Students are invited to discuss any personal,
family or relationship matters with one of the counsellors. Some
examples of issues that may be discussed include loneliness,
difficulty adjusting to life at the University, relationships, sexuality,
family difficulties, grief and loss, self confidence and anxiety.
Counselling can be contacted by telephoning (03) 9919 4418 or
(03) 9919 2399 or (03) 9919 8801.
COUNSELLING – EDUCATIONAL
This can include helping students organise their study time and
develop study plans, assistance with anxiety about exams and class
presentation, applications for special consideration, and support
mature age students returning to study. Referrals can also be made
for assistance with maths, essay writing and other study skills.
Counselling can be contacted by telephoning (03) 9919 4418 or
(03) 9919 2399 or (03) 9919 8801.
FINANCIAL ADVICE
Financial advice is available to students experiencing financial
difficulties. As well as helping students to work out ways of
budgeting and planning, the financial advisor/counsellor can assist
with claims for Centrelink payments and fee extensions.
Other assistance includes emergency relief, rent assistance and
various forms of Centrelink benefits.
YOUTH ALLOWANCE/AUSTUDY/PES APPLICATIONS
The Youth Allowance/Austudy/Abstudy schemes provide assistance
to Australian citizens and permanent residents who are enrolled in
approved courses at universities, TAFE institutes and other approved
institutions in Australia. (Generally, Youth Allowance is for persons
up to age 25, Austudy for students over 25). Abstudy is a payment
for Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander students. The Pensioner
Education Supplement (PES) is an additional payment available to
students on certain Centrelink payments.
Assistance is subject to a means test and to certain conditions,
including a minimum study load. Part time students under 21 years of
age should note there is a provision for the payment of Youth
Allowance for the sum of other approved activities such as job
seeking, volunteer work, or training in addition to part time study.
Ask the financial advisor/counsellor or seek a Centrelink interview.
A student who is eligible and qualifies for assistance may receive a
living allowance and under special circumstances a fares allowance
and rental assistance. Students may also apply for a Centrelink
Advance Loan – an amount of up to $500.00 advance on future
instalments, recovered over six months; this can only be done once
in a calendar year.
Claim forms for Centrelink student payments are available on
Campus, at secondary schools and Centrelink offices. Students are
advised to lodge their initial claim with the nearest Centrelink office
as soon as they enrol or re-enrol. Payees continuing in their current
course will not have to submit another claim, but should return the
Review Form sent to them within the stipulated time. Note that there
is no provision for back pay if a student is not currently receiving
benefits. It is important that an application for Austudy/Youth
Allowance/Abstudy be lodged as soon as possible.
LOANS
Student Support administers a loan scheme for enrolled students of
the University who can demonstrate a genuine need. Loans are
available for the purchase of books, computers and other course
related materials, medical expenses, housing expenses and other
purposes in accordance with the Student Loan Fund Policy.
Application forms and information sheets are available on campus
from Student Support on most campuses.
VICTORIA UNIVERSITY 2006
414
PRAYER ROOMS
There are dedicated prayer rooms available on most campuses – see
campus location maps or www.vu.edu.au/ss website for their
locations.
INTERNATIONAL STUDENT ADVISERS
Three International Student Advisers provide services and programs
such as Orientation, Induction and Return Home for international
students primarily in Higher Education. They are also available to
provide individual assistance and support.
TAFE international students may access Student Support services in
the manner described for other services.
Further information is available at:
Footscray Park Campus: (03) 9919 4418
St Albans Campus: (03) 9919 2399
Footscray Nicholson Campus: (03) 9919 8801
VU INTERNATIONAL SERVICES
TAFE International Services are available at the Footscray
Nicholson Street Campus, telephone: (03) 9919 8517.
Services for AusAid sponsored students are available through
Footscray Park Campus, telephone: (03) 9919 4780 or
(03) 9919 4782.
Further information is available at:
Footscray Park Campus, telephone: (03) 9919 4777
St Albans Campus, telephone: (03) 9919 2399
City Flinders Campus, telephone: (03) 9919 1159
Further information relevant to international students is available
from Victoria University International at the City Flinders Campus,
telephone: (03) 9919 1164.
HEALTH ADVICE
There are two health advisers at the University, who are Division 1
Registered Nurses. Typical issues that people consult the health
advisors about include:
• General health and wellbeing;
• Lifestyle issues;
• Women's health;
• Drug use issues;
• Men's health;
• Nutrition;
• Chronic illnesses;
• Family planning and sexual health;
• Pregnancy testing;
• Assistance with dressings;
• Vaccinations (at Footscray Park Campus).
The health advisors can also be contacted through Student Support
on (03) 9919 4418 or (03) 9919 2399.
MEDICAL CENTRE
A Medical Centre is located at Student Support at the Footscray Park
Campus in Building M, Level 2. Doctors consult on a sessional basis
Monday to Thursday during Higher Education teaching time. All
consultations are bulk billed on presentation of a Medicare card. For
international students the Medical Centre bills Medibank Private
direct. This means international students do not have to pay after
their consultation provided they have their current Medibank Private
card with them and they fill out a claim form at the Medical Centre.
For appointments phone Student Support on (03) 9919 4418 or
drop in to Student Support.
DRUG EDUCATION
Substance use and abuse is an issue of considerable concern in the
general community. The University has a drug education officer who
can provide information on drug related issues and provide advice
on how to find treatment and counselling services in the community.
Education sessions on these issues can be organised for groups of
students by contacting the drug education officer on
(03) 9919 8886.
FIRST AID
First aiders are located on all campuses of the University.
Lists of first aiders can be located on the University intranet:
http:/intranet.vu.edu.au/hr/ohs/firstaid/htm
First aiders may provide assistance with:
• Anybody collapsing or becoming unconscious
• Difficulties with breathing or chest pain
• Any injury that is bleeding
• Suspected fractures
• Sudden illness, etc
If in doubt contact the Ambulance (0) 000
Don’t forget to advise your location and the nature of the emergency.
If possible have someone meet the ambulance.
Health and emergency centres close to each campus are listed on
the University intranet: http:/intranet.vu.edu.au/hr/ohs/firstaid/htm
STUDENT LEARNING SERVICES [SLS]
Student Learning Services helps students adjust to the demands of
TAFE and degree studies. Help is frequently provided for students in
areas such as: English expression and grammar; planning and
writing essays, case studies and reports; oral presentations; exam
preparation and so on. In addition, support is available in basic
maths, statistics and science. Workshops, drop-in sessions and
online materials are provided for undergraduate students, and
individual consultations and workshops are available for
postgraduate students. The service aims to achieve two things: to
help students with their immediate study needs and to give them the
skills to successfully tackle similar tasks in future.
Program enquiries and bookings: telephone (03) 9919 4744.
For details of current programs and online materials for under-graduate
students, visit our website at: http://tls.vu.edu.au/sls/intro.htm, or email:
studentlearning@vu.edu.au or phillip.moore@vu.edu.au
SERVICES AVAILABLE TO STUDENTS
415
TEACHING AND LEARNING SUPPORT
Teaching and Learning Support’s purpose is to support the building
and improving of learning, teaching, career development and work
experiences for students, and professional and career development
of staff of Victoria University, with particular emphasis on its diverse
and cross sectoral nature, through:
• enhancing students' learning capabilities and English language
skills;
• supporting the staff of the University through professional
development, and building VU's educational processes;
• strengthening the interface between the University's students, the
world of work and building and supporting opportunities for the
University's graduates;
• using research to improve learning and teaching and providing
support for practitioner led research into learning and teaching.
The Teaching and Learning Support Charter commits TLS to
providing excellence in teaching and learning support services that
add value to the University community.
We are committed to providing excellent support services for
teaching and learning for the University community and its clients by:
• responsive innovative practice;
• continual evaluation and improvement of our services;
• acknowledgement of and respect for diversity;
• working together to achieve optimal outcomes.
The TLS comprises of the following four Centres:
• Postcompulsory Education Centre;
• Student Career Services;
• Staff Learning and Education Development;
• Student Learning Services.
The Teaching and Learning Support can be contacted by telephone:
(03) 9919 5256 or email: tls@vu.edu.au or visit our website:
http://tls.vu.edu.au
Belinda McLennan
Pro Vice-Chancellor (Teaching and Learning Support)
POSTCOMPULSORY EDUCATION CENTRE (PEC)
The Postcompulsory Education Centre (PEC) was established in
January 2005 to provide a University-wide focus for educational
research, particularly that related to the area of cross-sectoral and
postcompulsory education.
The mission of PEC is to:
• conduct research into aspects of postcompulsory education, with
an emphasis on cross-sectoral educational policy and practice;
• support practitioner-led research with the aim of developing the
scholarship of learning and teaching across the University;
• co-ordinate research into postcompulsory education across the
University; and
• contribute to the development of University educational policies
that are informed by practice-based research.
PEC has an explicitly cross-sectoral focus, with a particular emphasis
in the VET-higher education interface. Its research focus is
substantially internal, although it will also seek external grants for
more wide-ranging studies.
The Postcompulsory Education Centre can be contacted by telephone:
(03) 9919 5455.
Professor Roger Gabb
Director, Postcompulsory Education Centre
STUDENT CAREER SERVICES
Student Career Services (SCS) provides services to the university and
its community designed to maximise career outcomes for students.
These include:
• careers education and employment opportunities for VU students
and graduates;
• work placement arrangements and exposure to VET programs
for senior secondary students in the western suburbs of
Melbourne;
• support for Learning in the Workplace activities;
• recruitment services on behalf of employers.
The Student Career Services can be contacted by telephone:
(03) 9919 4052.
Joanne Tyler
Director, Student Career Services
STAFF LEARNING AND EDUCATIONAL
DEVELOPMENT (SLED)
The Centre for Staff Learning and Education Development (SLED)
comprises seven Units structure as three functional groupings. Each
Functional grouping has a core focus being:
• the Staff College (comprising Quality Teaching and Innovation
Unit; Educational Professional Development Unit; and Staff
Career and Professional Development Unit);
• online technologies and flexible delivery (comprising Flexible
Learning Unit and Educational Technology Support Unit); and
• educational products and curriculum services
(comprising Courses and Pathways Unit).
The Staff Learning and Educational Development can be contacted by
telephone: (03) 9919 8455.
Tess Demediuk
Director, Staff Learning and Educational Development
STUDENT LEARNING SERVICES (SLS)
The Centre for Student Learning Services (SLS) aims to enhance
students’ learning capabilities and English language skills by
providing:
• English language and academic skills support for students from
Certificate 1 to postgraduate including classes, workshops,
drop-in times, self-access & online materials, team teaching,
guest lectures, tutorials and individual appointments;
• English language preparatory courses for international students
on and off shore;
• English language testing for international students on and off
shore;
• assistance and advice for VU staff in developing and
implementing strategies for supporting students, including NESB
and international students;
• advice on policy development in such areas as student learning
support, English language and communication issues, academic
transition and academic peer mentoring.
The Student Learning Support can be contacted by telephone:
(03) 9919 4744.
Dr Amanda Pearce
Director, Student Learning Support
VICTORIA UNIVERSITY 2006
416
SPORT AND RECREATION
FACILITIES AND SERVICES
A range of sport, recreation and fitness facilities and services are
provided by the University, including:
• sport and fitness centres at Footscray Park, St Albans,
Sunbury and Werribee campuses;
• a 25-metre swimming pool at the Footscray Park;
• first-class athletics track and rugby field at the Werribee;
• multi-purpose sports halls at Melton, Footscray Park and
Footscray Nicholson campuses;
• tennis courts at Werribee, Footscray Park and St Albans.
Sporting equipment is available from the sport and recreation facility
on your campus. Programs and services include:
• Orientation Festival including Host Day, the ‘O Party’ and a
range of campus events including free entertainment, food,
stalls, club and sport information days;
• sporting opportunities including club sport, campus sport, cross
campus and representative competitions;
• major events including parties, club nights and balls;
• trips and tours including learn to surf, skiing trips, Great Ocean
Road tour, Phillip Island tour and the big ten-day trip to Central
Australia;
• regular campus entertainment including performers, film
screenings, club events, information days, free food and stalls;
• clubs and societies including social interest, cultural, faculty and
course-based groups;
• student competitions such as the Diary Cover Competition and
Art Prize.
For further information go to www.vu.edu.au/services or pick up a
Sport and Recreation Handbook from your campus Student Service
Centre.
STUDENT ORGANISATIONS
The peak student representative body at the University is the Victoria
University Student Union Inc (VUSU Inc). The International Students
Association and the Victoria University Postgraduate Association
represent all international and postgraduate students respectively.
VUSU PRESIDENT OFFICE
(03) 9919 5053
VUSU EXECUTIVE OFFICE
(03) 9919 4811
INTERNATIONAL STUDENTS ASSOCIATION
(03) 9919 4730
STUDENT REPRESENTATION SECTION
General Enquiries (03) 9919 4360
CITY FLINDERS
Student Union Office (03) 9919 1204
FOOTSCRAY NICHOLSON
Student Union Office (03) 9919 8534
FOOTSCRAY PARK
Student Union Office (03) 9919 4056
Resource Centre (03) 9919 4302
ST ALBANS
Student Union Office (03) 9919 2809
WERRIBEE
Student Union Office (03) 9919 8238
TRAVEL CONCESSIONS
Rail and bus concession application forms are available at the start
of each academic year from VU Student Union (Resource Centres).
417
COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
This section lists all the courses offered by Victoria University in higher education and TAFE.
Note: All courses are offered subject to confirmation of funding and authority to conduct, and minimum enrolment levels.
List correct as at October 2005.
UNDERGRADUATE COURSES AND PROGRAMS
CAMPUS CODES
B=Sunbury J=City King D1=BJU Northern Jiaotong, China
C=City Flinders K=Kuala Lumpur D2=Shenyang, People’s Republic of China
CQ=Queen Street M=Melton D3=Liaoning University, China
D=China K1=Sunway University, Malaysia D6=UIBE, China
E=Echuca O=Off campus D7=Renmin University, Beijing, China
F=Footscray Park P=Singapore D8=Tianjin, The People’s Republic of China
G=Renim University of China P1=Sumbershire, Singapore 22=SIBA, Thailand
H=Hong Kong S=St Albans 23=Kasetsart University, Thailand
H1=College of IT, Hong Kong W=Werribee 24=Khon Kaen, Thailand
H3=Chinese University of Hong Kong, Hong Kong DA=Tianjin University of Commerce, China 31=BETS, Bangladesh
H5=HKIT, Hong Kong DB=CUFE, China 61=EDENZ College, New Zealand
I=Internet DE=Harbin University, China 71=Alpha Beta Colleges, Sydney
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
Campus Full-time Part-time
FACULTY COURSES
Bachelor
– Business/Science F/S/W Y Y
– Engineering/Business F Y Y
– Engineering/Science F/S/W Y Y
– Engineering/Laws F Y Y
– Engineering/Arts F/S Y Y
– Science/Laws F/S/W Y Y
– Science/Arts F/S Y Y
Certificate
– Foundation Studies F/S Y Y
SCHOOL OF ARCHITECTURAL, CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Bachelor of Engineering
– Architectural Engineering F Y Y
– Building Engineering F Y Y
– Civil Engineering F Y Y
– Mechanical Engineering F Y Y
– Robotic Engineering F Y Y
Bachelor of Technology
– Building Surveying F/S Y Y
SCHOOL OF BIOMEDICAL SCIENCES
Bachelor of Science
– Biomedical Sciences S Y Y
– Occupational Health & Safety I Y Y
– Nutritional Therapy S Y Y
Bachelor of Science (Honours)
– Biomedical Sciences S Y Y
Double Degree
– Science/Psychology S Y Y
UNDERGRADUATE COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
418
SCHOOL OF COMPUTER SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS
Bachelor of Science
– Computer Science F/H/D7 Y Y
– Computer & Mathematical Sciences F Y Y
– Computer Science & Aviation F Y Y
– Internet Technologies & Applications F Y Y
– Information Technology F Y Y
– Computational Financial Mathematics F Y Y
Bachelor of Science (Honours)
– Computer Science F Y Y
– Computer & Mathematical Sciences F Y Y
INTERNATIONAL PROGRAM (OFFSHORE)
Bachelor of Science in:
– Computer Science H/K Y Y
– Internet Technologies & Applications H/K Y Y
– Information Technology K Y Y
EXTERNAL PROGRAM
Bachelor of Science in Computer Science 71 Y Y
SCHOOL OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
Bachelor of Engineering
– Electrical & Electronic Engineering F Y Y
Bachelor of Engineering Science
– Electrical & Electronic Engineering F Y Y
Bachelor of Science (Honours)
– Computer Technology F Y Y
– Physics F Y Y
SCHOOL OF HEALTH SCIENCE
Bachelor of Chinese Medicine (Acupucture & Herbs) S Y Y
Bachelor of Health Science
– Clinical Dermal Therapies J n/a Y
– Natural Medicine S,ZA Y Y
– Paramedic (3yr pre-service) S,I Y n/a
– Paramedic (1yr conversion) ZA,H Y Y
– Chinese Medicine S Y n/a
– Naturopathy & Homoeopathy S Y Y
Bachelor of Science
– Clinical Sciences (Osteopathy) C Y n/a
SCHOOL OF MOLECULAR SCIENCES
Bachelor of Applied Science
– Chemistry W N Y
Bachelor of Science
– Biotechnology W Y Y
– Medical, Forensic & Analytical Chemistry W Y Y
– Nutrition, Food & Health Science W Y Y
Bachelor of Science (Honours)
– Biology (Biotechnology) W Y Y
– Nutrition & Food Science W Y Y
– Chemical & Environmental Sciences W Y Y
SCHOOL OF NURSING AND MIDWIFERY
NON AWARD SHORT COURSES
Bridging Course (Division 2) S Y n/a
Bridging Course (Graduate Entry) S Y n/a
AWARD COURSES
Bachelor of Nursing
– (Pre-Registration) S Y Y
– (Graduate Entry) S Y Y
– (Division 2 Entry) S Y Y
Bachelor of Health Science
– Nursing (Post-Registration) S Y Y
– Nursing (Honours) S Y Y
Bachelor of Midwifery S Y Y
UNDERGRADUATE COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
419
SUSTAINABILITY GROUP
Bachelor of Science
– Ecology & Sustainability S Y Y
Bachelor of Science (Honours)
– Ecology & Sustainability S Y Y
Note: The details of the programs, courses and subjects set out in this Handbook might change after publication. To ensure that the information
about Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science courses is still accurate, contact the Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science Student
Centre: telephone (03) 9919 4516; facsimile: (03) 9919 4513; email: hes@vu.edu.au; website: www.vu.edu.au
FACULTY OF ARTS, EDUCATION AND HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
Campus Full-time Part-time
GENERALIST DEGREE PROGRAMS
Bachelor of Arts – Footscray F Y Y
Bachelor of Arts – St Albans S Y Y
SPECIALIST DEGREE PROGRAMS
Bachelor of Arts (Advocacy & Mediation) F Y Y
Bachelor of Arts (International Community Development) S Y Y
Bachelor of Arts (Community Development) – Australian Stream (3rd year only) S Y Y
Bachelor of Arts (Computer Mediated Art) S Y Y
Bachelor of Arts (Criminal Justice Studies) F Y Y
Bachelor of Arts (Human Services) S Y Y
Bachelor of Arts (International Studies) F Y Y
Bachelor of Arts (Legal Studies) F Y Y
Bachelor of Arts (Multimedia) S Y Y
Bachelor of Arts (Performance & Multimedia) F Y Y
Bachelor of Arts (Professional Writing) S Y Y
Bachelor of Communication (Public Relations) S Y Y
Bachelor of Multimedia Systems K Y Y
Bachelor of Psychology (Arts stream) F Y Y
Bachelor of Psychology (Interpersonal & Organisational) S Y Y
Bachelor of Social Work (Preliminary Year) S Y Y
Bachelor of Social Work S Y Y
Bachelor of Science (Psychology) S Y Y
COMBINED DEGREE PROGRAMS
Bachelor of Arts (International Studies)/Bachelor of Business (International Trade) F Y Y
Bachelor of Arts (Psychology)/Bachelor of Business (Human Resource Management) F Y Y
Bachelor of Arts/Bachelor of Science S Y Y
Bachelor of Arts/Diploma of Liberal Arts F Y Y
Bachelor of Exercise Science & Human Movement/Bachelor of Psychology F Y Y
Bachelor of Business (Electronic Commerce)/Bachelor of Arts (Multimedia) F Y Y
Bachelor of Business (Marketing)/Bachelor of Psychology F Y Y
Bachelor of Business (Tourism Management)/Bachelor of Arts (International Studies) F Y Y
Bachelor of Engineering/Bachelor of Arts F Y Y
Bachelor of Laws/Bachelor of Arts F Y Y
Bachelor of Science/Bachelor of Psychology S Y Y
Bachelor of Arts/Bachelor of Science S,F Y Y
HONOURS PROGRAMS
Bachelor of Arts (Honours) S,F Y Y
Bachelor of Arts (Honours) Computer Mediated Art & Multimedia S Y Y
Bachelor of Arts (Honours – Psychology) F Y Y
Bachelor of Multimedia Systems (Honours) F Y N
Bachelor of Psychology (Honours) F Y Y
Bachelor of Science (Honours – Psychology) F Y Y
Bachelor of Applied Science (Honours) – Human Movement F Y n/a
Bachelor of Arts (Honours)
– Performance Studies
– Sport Administration B Y Y
– Recreation Management F Y Y
UNDERGRADUATE COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
420
SCHOOL OF EDUCATION
Bachelor of Arts
– Computer Mediated Art S Y Y
– Early Childhood Education M n/a Y
– Youth Studies F Y Y
Bachelor of Education (streams)
– Pre-Service Program P–12 F,M,B Y n/a
– Mathematics Teaching P–12 F Y N
– Science Teaching P–12 F Y N
– Contemporary Communication & Technology P–12 M Y N
– Outdoor Education P–12 M Y N
– Physical Education – Primary M Y N
– Creativity and the Arts P–12 S Y N
– Prep – 12 accelerated program S Y N
– Post-Registration (Year 4) B Y Y
Bachelor of Education (Nyerna Studies) Program E Y Y
Bachelor of Arts (Nyerna Studies) E Y Y
Diploma of Community Services – Youth Work E Y Y
Associate Diploma of Arts – Recreation/Fitness Leadership E Y Y
Bachelor of Arts
– Performance Studies F Y n/a
– Performance & Multimedia F Y n/a
– Recreation Management/Bachelor of Business – Sports Administration B Y Y
– Sports Administration/Bachelor of Business – Management B Y Y
– Sports Administration/Bachelor of Business–Marketing B Y Y
Bachelor of Recreation Management F,M Y Y
Bachelor of Applied Science (Honours) – Human Movement F Y n/a
Bachelor of Arts (Honours) F,S Y Y
– Performance Studies F Y Y
– Sport Administration B Y Y
– Recreation Management F Y Y
– Computer Mediated Art S Y Y
– Computer Mediated Art & Multimedia (Honours) S Y Y
– Early Childhood Education M n/a Y
– Youth Studies F Y Y
Bachelor of Arts (Nyerna Studies) continuing students only E Y Y
SCHOOL OF HUMAN MOVEMENT, RECREATION AND PERFORMANCE
Bachelor of Exercise Science
– Human Movement F Y Y
– Human Movement/Bachelor of Psychology F Y Y
– Human Movement/Bachelor of Arts Sport Administration F Y Y
Bachelor of Applied Science – Physical Education (Secondary) F Y Y
Bachelor of Applied Science - Sports Science (Golf) Full fee only F Y tba
Bachelor of Applied Science – Sports Science (Tennis) F,M Y tba
Bachelor of Arts
– Performance Studies F Y n/a
– Performance & Multimedia F Y n/a
– Recreation Management/Bachelor of Business – Sports Administration B Y Y
Sports Administration
– Sports Administration/Bachelor of Business – Management B Y Y
– Sports Administration/Bachelor of Business – Event Management B Y Y
– Sports Administration/Bachelor of Business–Marketing B Y Y
Bachelor of Recreation Management F,M Y Y
Bachelor of Applied Science (Honours) – Human Movement F Y n/a
Bachelor of Arts (Honours)
– Performance Studies
– Sport Administration B Y Y
– Recreation Management F Y Y
Bachelor of Recreation Management F,M Y Y
Note: The details of the programs, courses and subjects set out in this Handbook might change after publication. To ensure that the information
about Faculty of Arts, Education and Human Development courses is still accurate, contact the Faculty Manager on (03) 9919 2369.
UNDERGRADUATE COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
421
FACULTY OF BUSINESS AND LAW
Campus Full-time Part-time
SCHOOL OF ACCOUNTING AND FINANCE
Bachelor of Business
– Accounting F,W,DB,K1,D2,61 Y Y
– Banking & Finance F,K1,D2 Y Y
– Accounting/Banking & Finance F,K1,D2 Y Y
– Accounting/Hospitality Management F Y Y
– Accounting/Information Systems F Y Y
– Banking & Finance/International Trade F Y Y
– Small Business & Entrepreneurship F Y Y
Bachelor of Business Combined Degrees
– Fasttrack BBus Accounting/TAFE Accounting W Y N
SCHOOL OF APPLIED ECONOMICS
Bachelor of Business
– Financial Risk Management F,K1,H1,DB,DA,23 Y Y
– Global Logistics & Transport W, H1,23 Y Y
– International Business W Y Y
– International Commerce D3 Y N
– International Trade F,K1,D6,22,H1,D2,23 Y Y
– Music Industry F,K1 Y Y
– Retail Management F,K1 Y Y
– Applied Economics/International Trade F Y Y
– Financial Risk Management/Accounting H1,D2 Y N
– Financial Risk Management/Banking & Finance H1,D2 Y N
– Financial Risk Management/Global Logistics & Transport H1,DB Y N
– Financial Risk Management/International Trade F,H1,DA Y Y
– Global Logistics & Transport/Accounting H1 Y N
– Global Logistics & Transport/International Trade H1 Y N
– International Trade/Retail Management F Y Y
– Music Industry/Event Management F Y Y
– Retail Management/Marketing F Y Y
Bachelor of Business Honours Degrees
– Bachelor of Business (Honours) Applied Economics C Y Y
– Bachelor of Business (Honours) International Trade C Y Y
– Bachelor of Business (Honours) Retail Management C Y Y
Bachelor of Business Combined Degrees
– BA International Studies/B Bus International Trade F Y Y
SCHOOL OF HOSPITALITY, TOURISM AND MARKETING
Bachelor of Business
– Event Management B Y N
– Hospitality Management F,K1,H1 Y Y
– Hotel, Restaurant & Catering Management F Y Y
– Marketing F,B,K1 Y Y
– Tourism Management F,K1,H1 Y Y
– Hospitality/Event Management F Y Y
– Hospitality Management/Human Resource Management F Y Y
– Hospitality/Tourism Management F,H1 Y Y
– Marketing/Applied Economics F Y Y
– Marketing/Electronic Commerce F,K1 Y Y
– Marketing/Event Management B Y N
– Marketing/International Tourism K1 Y N
– Marketing/International Trade F,K1 Y Y
– Marketing/Hospitality Management F Y Y
– Marketing/Tourism Management F Y Y
– Music Industry/Marketing F Y Y
– Tourism Management/Event Management F Y Y
Bachelor of Business Combined Degrees
– BBus Tourism Management/ BA International Studies F Y Y
– BBus Tourism Management /BA Recreation Management F Y Y
– BBus Marketing/BA Psychology F Y Y
– BA Sports Administration/BBus Event Management B Y Y
– BA Sports Administration/BBus Marketing B Y Y
UNDERGRADUATE COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
422
SCHOOL OF INFORMATION SYSTEMS
Bachelor of Business
– Computer Systems Management W,H3,K1
– Electronic Commerce F,W,K1 Y Y
– Information Systems F,K1 Y Y
– Electronic Commerce/Music Industry F Y Y
– Electronic Commerce/ International Trade F Y Y
Bachelor of Business Honours Degrees
– Bachelor of Business (Honours) Information Systems C Y Y
Bachelor of Business Combined Degrees
– B.Bus Electronic Commerce/Bachelor of Science W Y Y
– BBus Electronic Commerce/BA Multimedia F Y Y
– Bachelor of Engineering/BBus Electronic Commerce F Y Y
SCHOOL OF LAW
Bachelor of Laws
– Law CQ Y Y
– Graduate Entry CQ Y Y
– Legal Practice Management F Y Y
Bachelor of Laws/Bachelor of Business
– Bachelor of Laws/BBus Accounting F Y Y
– Bachelor of Laws/BBus Applied Economics F Y Y
– Bachelor of Laws/BBus Banking & Finance F Y Y
– Bachelor of Laws/BBus Electronic Commerce F Y Y
– Bachelor of Laws/BBus Event Management F Y Y
– Bachelor of Laws/BBus Human Resource Management F Y Y
– Bachelor of Laws/BBus International Trade F Y Y
– Bachelor of Law/B.BusManagement F Y Y
– Bachelor of Laws/BBus Marketing F Y Y
– Bachelor of Laws/BBus Music Industry F Y Y
– Bachelor of Laws/BBus Tourism Management F Y Y
Bachelor of Laws Combined Degrees
– Bachelor of Laws/Bachelor of Arts F Y Y
– Bachelor of Laws/Bachelor of Science F Y Y
– Bachelor of Engineering /Bachelor of Laws F Y Y
SCHOOL OF MANAGEMENT
Bachelor of Business
– Management F,B,DA,K1 Y Y
– Human Resource Management F,B,K1 Y Y
– Service & Human Resource Management B Y Y
– Strategic & Financial Management F Y Y
– Management/Marketing B Y Y
Bachelor of Business Honours Degrees
– Bachelor of Business (Honours) Management C Y Y
Bachelor of Business Combined Degrees
– BA Psychology/BBus Human Resource Management F,S Y Y
– BA Sports Administration/BBus Management B Y Y
Note: The details of the programs, courses and subjects set out in this Handbook might change after publication. To ensure that the information
about Faculty of Business and Law courses is still accurate, contact the Faculty of Business and Law Executive Officer on (03) 9919 4471.
423
POSTGRADUATE COURSES
FACULTY OF HEALTH, ENGINEERING AND SCIENCE
Campus Full-time Part-time
FACULTY COURSES
Masters Qualifying Program F Y Y
Master of Engineering and Science F Y Y
Doctor of Engineering Science F Y Y
CENTRE FOR ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY AND RISK ENGINEERING
Doctor of Philosophy W Y Y
Master of Engineering (Research) W Y Y
Master of Engineering (Coursework)
– Building Fire Safety & Risk Engineering W n/a Y
Graduate Diploma
– Building Fire Safety & Risk Engineering W n/a Y
Graduate Certificate
– Performance-based Building & Fire Codes W n/a Y
SCHOOL OF ARCHITECTURAL, CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Doctor of Philosophy F Y Y
Master of Engineering (Research) F Y Y
Master of Engineering (Coursework)
– Project Management F Y Y
– Mechanical Engineering F Y Y
Graduate Diploma
– Project Management F Y Y
Graduate Certificate
– Project Management F Y Y
SCHOOL OF BIOMEDICAL SCIENCES
Doctor of Philosophy S Y Y
Master of Science (Research) S Y Y
SCHOOL OF COMPUTER SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS
Doctor of Philosophy F Y Y
Master of Science (Research) F Y Y
Master of Science (Coursework) F Y Y
– Computer Science F Y Y
– Computer & Mathematical Sciences F Y Y
– Software Engineering F Y Y
Graduate Diploma
– Computer Science F Y Y
– Computer & Mathematical Sciences F Y Y
– Multimedia Information Networking F Y Y
– Software Engineering F Y Y
SCHOOL OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
Doctor of Philosophy F Y Y
Master of Engineering (Research) F Y Y
Master of Science (Research) F Y Y
Master of Engineering (Coursework)
– Microelectronic Engineering F Y Y
– Electrical & Electronic Engineering F Y Y
– System & Control Engineering F Y Y
– Telecommunication Engineering F Y Y
Master of Engineering Science (Coursework)
– Computer & Microelectronic Engineering F Y Y
Graduate Diploma
– Microelectronic Engineering F Y Y
– System & Control Engineering F Y Y
– Telecommunication Engineering F Y Y
Graduate Certificate
– Microelectronic Engineering F Y Y
POSTGRADUATE COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
424
– System & Control Engineering F Y Y
– Telecommunication Engineering F Y Y
Double Degree (Coursework)
Master of Engineering in Microelectronic Engineering /
Master of Engineering Science in Computer & Microelectronic Engineering F Y Y
SCHOOL OF HEALTH SCIENCES
Graduate Diploma in Complementary Therapies S Y Y
Graduate Diploma in Western Herbal Medicine C n/a Y
Master of Health Science
– Intensive Care Paramedicine ZA Y Y
– Osteopathy C Y n/a
– Osteopathy (for Medical Practitioners) C n/a Y
– by Coursework I,S Y Y
– by Minor Thesis S Y Y
– by Research S Y Y
Doctor of Philosophy S Y Y
SCHOOL OF MOLECULAR SCIENCES
Doctor of Philosophy W Y Y
Master of Science (Research) W Y Y
Master of Science (Coursework)
– Environmental Management S Y Y
Graduate Diploma
– Environmental Management S Y Y
Master of Science (Coursework)
– Food Science W Y Y
– Biotechnology W Y Y
PACKAGING AND POLYMER RESEARCH UNIT
International Program (Offshore)
Master of Engineering in Packaging (Coursework) Y Y
SCHOOL OF NURSING AND MIDWIFERY
Graduate Diploma in Substance Abuse Studies F Y Y
Master of Nursing S Y Y
incorporating
Graduate Certificates in
– Cardiothoracic Nursing S Y Y
– Cancer Nursing S Y Y
– Emergency Nursing S Y Y
– Gerontic Nursing S Y Y
– Neuroscience Nursing S Y Y
– Orthopaedic Nursing S Y Y
– Paediatric Nursing S Y Y
Graduate Diplomas in
– Cardiothoracic Nursing S Y Y
– Cancer Nursing S Y Y
– Emergency Nursing S Y Y
– Gerontic Nursing S Y Y
– Neuroscience Nursing S Y Y
– Orthopaedic Nursing S Y Y
– Paediatric Nursing S Y Y
Master of Midwifery S n/a Y
incorporating
– Graduate Diploma in Midwifery S Y Y
Master of Health Science – Mental Health S Y Y
Master of Public Health Nursing S Y Y
incorporating
– Graduate Certificate in Public Health Nursing S Y Y
– Graduate Diploma in Public Health Nursing S Y Y
Master of Nursing (by Research) S Y Y
Doctor of Philosophy S Y Y
Note: The details of the programs, courses and subjects set out in this Handbook might change after publication. To ensure that the
information about Faculty of Health, Engineering and Science courses is still accurate, contact the Faculty of Health, Engineering and
Science Student Centre: telephone (03) 9919 4516; facsimile; (03) 9919 4513; email: hes@vu.edu.au; website: www.vu.edu.au.
POSTGRADUATE COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
425
FACULTY OF ARTS, EDUCATION AND HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
Campus Full-time Part-time
HIGHER DEGREES BY RESEARCH
Master of Arts by Research S,F, Y Y
Master of Education by Research F,M,B Y Y
Master of Applied Science by Research F Y Y
Master of Social Work by Research S Y Y
Doctor of Education by Research F,2 Y Y
Doctor of Philosophy by Research S,F, Y Y
POSTGRADUATE PROGRAMS BY COURSEWORK
Graduate Certificate in Asian & Pacific Studies (General Stream) F Y Y
Graduate Certificate in Asian & Pacific Studies (Community Development Stream) S Y Y
Graduate Certificate in Communication (Public Relations) C Y Y
Graduate Certificate in Community Services F Y Y
Graduate Certificate in Arts (History) F Y Y
Graduate Certificate in Arts (Politics & International Studies) F Y Y
Graduate Certificate of Public Advocacy & Action S N Y
Graduate Diploma in Asian & Pacific Studies (General Stream) F Y Y
Graduate Diploma in Asian & Pacific Studies (Community Development Stream) S Y Y
Graduate Diploma in Community Services F Y Y
Graduate Diploma in Communication (Public Relations) C Y Y
Graduate Diploma in Communication and Professional Writing
Graduate Diploma in Counselling S N Y
Graduate Diploma in Counselling (Child & Adolescent) S N Y
Graduate Diploma in Arts (History) F Y Y
Graduate Diploma in Arts (Politics & International Studies) F Y Y
Graduate Diploma in Arts (Social Research Methods) F Y Y
Graduate Diploma in Modern Languages S,F N Y
Graduate Diploma in Psychological Studies S N Y
Graduate Diploma in Psychology F Y Y
Graduate Diploma of Public Advocacy & Action S Y N
Master of Counselling S N Y
Master of Arts in Asian & Pacific Studies (General Stream) F N Y
Master of Arts in Asian & Pacific Studies (Community Development Stream) S N Y
Master of Arts (Community Services) F Y Y
Master of Arts in Communication C Y Y
Master of Arts in Communication and Professional Writing
Master of Applied Psychology
– Community Psychology Stream F Y Y
– Sport Psychology Stream F Y Y
Master of Psychoanalysis S N Y
Master of Psychology
– Clinical Psychology Stream S Y Y
– Clinical Neuropsychology Stream S Y Y
Master of Public Advocacy & Action S Y Y
Doctor of Psychology
– Clinical Psychology Stream S Y Y
– Clinical Neuropsychology Stream S Y Y
Doctor of Applied Psychology
– Community Psychology Stream F Y Y
– Sport Psychology Stream F Y Y
– Health Psychology Stream F Y Y
FACULTY COURSES
Graduate Programs in Aged Services incorporating
– Graduate Certificate in Aged Services C,O Y Y
– Graduate Diploma in Aged Services Management C,O Y Y
– Graduate Diploma in Dementia Care & Service C,O Y Y
– Master of Health Science – Aged Services C,O Y Y
SCHOOL OF EDUCATION
Graduate Programs in Aged Services incorporating
– Graduate Certificate in Aged Services C,O Y Y
– Graduate Diploma in Aged Services Management C,O Y Y
– Graduate Diploma in Dementia Care & Service C,O Y Y
– Master of Health Science – Aged Services C,O Y Y
POSTGRADUATE COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
426
Graduate Diploma in Secondary Education F-B Y N
Graduate Program in TESOL & Literacy incorporating
– Graduate Certificate in TESOL F N Y
– Graduate Certificate in Literacy F N Y
– Graduate Diploma in TESOL F,V Y Y
– Graduate Diploma in TESOL & Literacy F Y Y
– Master of TESOL F,V Y Y
– Master of TESOL & Literacy F Y Y
Master of Education (Specialisation)– Tertiary Education (available to VU teaching staff only) F Y Y
– Digital Technologies Education F Y Y
– Educational Leadership F Y Y
– Experiential Learning F Y Y
– Professional Development F Y Y
– Work Based Learning F F Y
SCHOOL OF HUMAN MOVEMENT, RECREATION AND PERFORMANCE
Graduate Diploma in Athlete Career Education (not offered 2006) ZA Y Y
Graduate Diploma in Exercise & Sport Sciences F Y Y
Graduate Program in Ageing, Disability & Recreation Management incorporating
– Graduate Certificate in Ageing, Disability & Leisure F Y Y
– Graduate Certificate in Ageing, Disability & Recreation Management F Y Y
– Graduate Diploma in Ageing, Disability & Recreation Management F Y Y
– Master of Arts – Ageing, Disability & Recreation Management F Y Y
Graduate Program in Exercise Rehabilitation incorporating
– Graduate Diploma in Exercise for Rehabilitation F Y Y
– Master of Applied Science – Exercise Rehabilitation F Y Y
Graduate Program in Loss & Grief incorporating:
– Graduate Certificate in Loss & Grief Education C Y Y
– Graduate Certificate in Loss & Grief Counselling C* Y Y
– Graduate Diploma in Loss & Grief Counselling C* Y Y
Graduate Program in Sport & Recreation Management incorporating
– Master of Arts – Sport & Recreation/Project Management F,H Y Y
– Master of Arts – Sport & Recreation Management F Y Y
– Master of Arts – Sport & Recreation Management (by coursework) F,H Y Y
– Graduate Program in Sport Business incorporating
– Graduate Diploma in Sport Business C Y Y
– Master of Sport Business C Y Y
Master of Applied Science
– Exercise Rehabilitation F Y Y
– Human Performance (by coursework) F Y Y
– Human Performance (by Research) C,F Y Y
Note: The details of the programs, courses and subjects set out in this Handbook might change after publication. To ensure that the information
about Faculty of Arts, Education and Human Development courses is still accurate, contact the Faculty Manager (03) 9919 2369.
FACULTY OF BUSINESS AND LAW
Campus Full-time Part-time
VICTORIA GRADUATE SCHOOL OF BUSINESS
Master of Business Administration C,P1,K1,31,D1 Y Y
Doctor of Business Administration C,D1,K1,P1 Y Y
Master of Business by Research C Y Y
Doctor of Philosophy C Y Y
SCHOOL OF ACCOUNTING AND FINANCE
Graduate Certificate in Accounting C,P1,D2 Y Y
Master of Business in Accounting C Y Y
Master of Business in Finance C Y Y
Master of Business in Professional Accounting C,P1 Y Y
Master of Business by Research C Y Y
Doctor of Philosophy C Y Y
SCHOOL OF APPLIED ECONOMICS
Graduate Certificate in Statistics C Y Y
Graduate Certificate in Retail Management P1
Graduate Diploma in Retail Management P1
Master of Business in Business Economics C Y Y
Master of Business in Financial Risk Management C Y Y
POSTGRADUATE COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
427
Master of Business in International Trade C,24,D6 Y Y
Master of Business in International Music & Entertainment Business C Y Y
Master of Business Global Logistics & Transport C,H1,23 Y Y
Master of Business in Retail Management P1 Y
Master of Business by Research C Y Y
Doctor of Philosophy C Y Y
SCHOOL OF HOSPITALITY, TOURISM AND MARKETING
Master of Business in Hospitality Management C Y Y
Master of Business in Hospitality Management (Professional Practice) C Y Y
Master of Business in Hospitality & Tourism Education C Y Y
Master of Business in Hospitality & Tourism Management C Y Y
Master of Business in Hospitality & Tourism Marketing C Y Y
Master of Business in Marketing C Y Y
Master of Business in Sports Tourism C Y Y
Master of Business in Tourism Management C Y Y
Master of Business by Research C Y Y
Doctor of Philosophy C Y Y
SCHOOL OF INFORMATION SYSTEMS
Graduate Certificate in Enterprise Resource Planning Systems C Y Y
Graduate Diploma in Business Computing C Y Y
Graduate Diploma in Enterprise Resource Planning Systems C Y Y
Master of Business in Enterprise Resource Planning Systems C,P1,D1,K1,H3 Y Y
Master of Business E-Commerce/Marketing C Y Y
Master of Business in Information Systems C Y Y
Master of Business in Electronic Commerce C Y Y
Master of Business in Network Management C Y Y
Master of Business in Information Systems and ERP C Y Y
Master of Business in Enterprise Application Integration C Y Y
Master of Business by Research C Y Y
Doctor of Philosophy C Y Y
SCHOOL OF LAW
Graduate Certificate in Australian Immigration Law C Y Y
Master of Comparative Commercial Law C Y Y
Master of Regulatory & Criminological Studies C Y Y
Master of International Commercial Law C Y Y
Master of Laws C Y Y
Master of Taxation CQ Y Y
Master of Business by Research C Y Y
Doctor of Juridical Science C,CQ Y Y
Doctor of Philosophy C Y Y
SCHOOL OF MANAGEMENT
Graduate Diploma in Industrial Relations/HRM C Y Y
Master of Business in Event Management C Y Y
Master of Business in Industrial Relations/HRM C Y Y
Master of Business in Management Practice C Y Y
Master of Contracting and Project Management C Y Y
Master of Business by Research C Y Y
Doctor of Philosophy C Y Y
SIR ZELMAN COWEN CENTRE
Graduate Diploma in Commercial Arbitration C,CQ Y Y
Graduate Diploma in Notarial Practice C,CQ Y Y
Graduate Diploma in Superannuation Law & Practice C,CQ Y Y
Note: The details of the programs, courses and subjects set out in this Handbook might change after publication. To ensure that the information
about Faculty of Business and Law courses is still accurate, contact the Faculty of Business and Law Manager on (03) 9919 1336.
POSTGRADUATE COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
428
429
TAFE COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
STAFF LEARNING AND EDUCATIONAL DEVELOPMENT
Course in ICT Skills for Teachers 21335VIC
Certificate IV in Training and Assessment TAA40104
Diploma of Training and Assessment TAA50104
Certificate IV in Vocational Education and Training 15559VIC
Diploma of Vocational Education and Training 15560VIC
Graduate Certificate in Vocational Education and Training 21205VIC
SCHOOL OF BUSINESS AND SERVICE INDUSTRIES
ADMINISTRATIVE AND LEGAL STUDIES DEPARTMENT
Certificate III in Business Administration BSB30201
Certificate IV in Business Administration BSB40201
Diploma of Business Administration BSB50201
Certificate III in Business BSB30101
Certificate IV in Business BSB40101
Advanced Diploma of Business (Legal Practice) 21618VIC
Certificate III in Business (Legal Administration) BSA30200
Certificate IV in Business (Legal Services) BSA40200
Diploma of Financial Services (Conveyancing) FNB50601
Advanced Diploma of Financial Services (Conveyancing) FNB60301
Certificate III in Local Government LGA30104
Certificate IV in Local Government LGA40104
Certificate IV in Local Government Administration LGA40204
Certificate IV in Government (Court Services) PSP40404
Diploma of E-Business BSB51101
FINANCIAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT
Diploma of Accounting FNB50202
Advanced Diploma of Accounting FNB60202
Certificate IV in Financial Services FNS40104
Diploma in Financial Services FNS50104
Advanced Diploma in Financial Services FNS60104
Course in Property (Agent's Representative) 21524VIC
Certificate IV in Property (Real Estate Agency Practice) 21525VIC
Certificate IV in Training and Assessment TAA40104
Diploma of Training & Assessment TAA50104
HOSPITALITY AND TOURISM DEPARTMENT
Certificate I in Hospitality (Operations) THH11002
Certificate I in Hospitality (Kitchen Operations) THH11102
Certificate II in Hospitality (Operations) THH21802
Certificate II in Hospitality (Kitchen Operations) THH22002
Certificate III in Hospitality (Commercial Cookery) THH31502
Certificate III in Hospitality (Catering Operations) THH32902
Certificate III in Hospitality (Operations) THH33002
Certificate IV in Hospitality (Supervision) THH42602
Diploma of Hospitality Management THH51202
Advanced Diploma of Hospitality Management THH60202
Certificate II in Tourism (Operations) THT20502
Certificate III in Tourism (Retail Travel Sales) THT30202
Certificate III in Tourism (International Retail Travel Sales) THT30302
Certificate III in Tourism (Tour Wholesaling) THT30502
Certificate III in Tourism (Visitor Information Services) THT30602
Certificate III in Tourism (Guiding) THT30902
Certificate III in Tourism (Operations) THT31002
Certificate IV in Tourism (Sales & Marketing) THT40102
Certificate IV in Tourism (Operations) THT40202
Certificate IV in Tourism (Guiding) THT40302
Diploma of Tourism (Marketing and Product Development) THT50102
Diploma of Tourism (Operations Management) THT50302
Advanced Diploma of Tourism Management THT60102
TAFE COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
430
LEADERSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS
Certificate II in Security Operations PRS20103
Certificate III in Security Operations PRS30103
Certificate III in Investigative Services PRS30303
Diploma of Business Facilitation 21542VIC
Certificate III in Business (Frontline Management) BSB30504
Certificate IV in Business (Frontline Management) BSB41004
Diploma of Business (Frontline Management) BSB51004
Certificate I in Funeral Services WRS10202
Certificate III in Funeral Services (Funeral Operations) WFS30202
Certificate IV in Funeral Services WFS40102
Certificate II in Small Business (Operations/ Innovation) 21530VIC
Certificate IV in Business (Small Business Management) BSB40401
Certificate II in Retail Cosmetic Sales WRB20304
Certificate II in Retail Operations WRR20102
Certificate III in Retail Supervision WRR30102
Certificate III in Retail Operations WRR30202
Certificate IV in Retail Management WRR40102
Diploma of Retail Management WRR50102
Certificate II in Wholesale Operation WRW20101
Certificate III in Wholesale Operations WRW30101
Certificate IV in Wholesale Management WRW40101
Diploma of Wholesale Management WRW50101
Graduate Certificate in Management 21365VIC
Graduate Certificate in Leadership in Education and Training 21554VIC
MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING DEPARTMENT
Certificate III in Business (Sales) BSB30301
Certificate III in Business BSB30101
Diploma of Business BSB50101
Certificate IV in Business (Advertising) BSB40601
Diploma of Business (Advertising) BSB50601
Advanced Diploma of Business (Advertising) BSB60501
Certificate IV in Business Development BSB40501
Diploma of Business Development BSB50501
Advanced Diploma of Business Development BSB60401
Certificate IV in E-Business BSB41201
Diploma of E-Business BSB51101
Advanced Diploma of E-Business BSB60701
Certificate IV in Business (Human Resources) BSB40801
Diploma of Business (Human Resources) BSB50801
Advanced Diploma of Business (Human Resources) BSB60301
Certificate III in Business (International Trade) BSB32004
Certificate IV in Business (International Trade) BSB42004
Diploma of Business (International Trade) BSB52004
Advanced Diploma of Business (International Business) 21613VIC
Certificate IV in Business Management BSB41101
Diploma of Business Management BSB50401
Advanced Diploma of Business Management BSB60201
Certificate IV in Business (Marketing) BSB40701
Diploma of Business (Marketing) BSB50701
Advanced Diploma of Business (Marketing) BSB60601
Certificate IV in Business (Public Relations) 21639VIC
Advanced Diploma of Business (Public Relations) 21640VIC
Certificate III in Customer Contact ICT30102
Certificate IV in Unionism BSB41804
Diploma of Unionism BSB51804
PERSONAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT
Certificate III in Beauty Services WRB30104
Certificate IV in Beauty Therapy WRB40104
Diploma of Beauty Therapy WRB50104
Certificate II in Hairdressing WRH20100 [Pre-Apprenticeship]
Certificate III in Hairdressing WRH30100
Certificate IV in Hairdressing WRH40100
Diploma of Hairdressing Salon Management WRH50100
Certificate II in Make-up Services WRB20204
TAFE COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
431
Certificate IV in Make-up CUF40203
Diploma in Make-up CUF50203
Certificate IV in Massage HLT40302
Diploma of Remedial Massage HLT50302
Certificate II in Modelling 21456VIC
Certificate II in Nail Technology WRB20104
Certificate III in Nail Technology WRB30204
Advanced Diploma of Naturopathy HLT60502
SCHOOL OF ENGINEERING, CONSTRUCTION AND INDUSTRIAL SKILLS
AUTOMOTIVE TECHNOLOGY UNIT
Certificate II in Automotive Manufacturing (Various Streams) AUM20100
Certificate II in Automotive Technology Studies 21560VIC
Certificate I in Automotive AUR10105
Certificate II in Automotive Vehicle Servicing AUR20505
Certificate II in Automotive Vehicle Body AUR20905
Certificate III in Automotive Mechanical Technology AUR30405
Certificate III in Automotive Specialist AUR30605
Certificate III in Automotive Vehicle Body AUR30805
Certificate IV in Automotive Technology AUR40205
BUILDING AND CONSTRUCTION DEPARTMENT
Certificate II in Engineering – Production [Boatbuilding Pre-Apprenticeship] MEM20198
Certificate II in Engineering - Production Technology [Boatbuilding – Traineeship] MEM20298
Certificate III in Marine Craft Construction [Apprenticeship] MEM30603
Certificate II in Building and Construction (Bricklaying) [VCE/VCAL VET In Schools] 21393VIC
Certificate II in Building and Construction (Bricklaying – Pre-Apprenticeship) 21393VIC
Certificate III in General Construction (Bricklaying/Blocklaying) [Apprenticeship] BCG30698
Diploma of Building SA3475
Certificate IV in Building SA3477
Advanced Diploma of Building Design and Project Administration 40355SA
Diploma of Building Design and Technology 40356SA
Certificate IV in Residential Drafting 40357SA
Diploma of Building Surveying BCG50103
Advanced Diploma of Building Surveying BCG60103
Certificate II in Building and Construction (Carpentry – Pre-Apprenticeship) 21393VIC
Certificate III in General Construction (Carpentry – Framework/Formwork/Finishing) [Apprenticeship] BCG30798
Certificate II in Furnishing (Pre-Apprenticeships in – Cabinet Making/Wood Machining/Furniture Polishing) 21278VIC
Certificate III in Furniture Making LMF30302
Certificate III in Furniture Making (Cabinet Making) LMF30402
Certificate III in Furniture Making (Wood Machining) LMF30502
Certificate IV in Applied Design (Furniture) 21528VIC
Certificate II in Joinery/Shopfitting/Stairbuilding (Pre-Apprenticeship) 21533VIC
Certificate III in Off-Site Construction (Joinery-Timber/Aluminium/Glass) BCF30200
BUILDING SERVICES AND SPECIAL TRADES DEPARTMENT
Certificate II in Building and Construction (Painting and Decorating – Pre-Apprenticeship) 21393VIC
Certificate III in General Construction (Painting & Decorating)[Apprenticeship] BCG30498
Certificate II in Drainage BCP20103
Certificate III in Plumbing BCP30103
Certificate II in Sign Writing 21398VIC
Certificate III in Off-Site Construction (Signwriting/Computer Operations) BCF30700
Certificate IV in Sign Technology 21399VIC
ELECTROTECHNOLOGY AND COMPUTER SYSTEMS DEPARTMENT
Certificate I in Electrotechnology [Engineering] UTE10102
Certificate II in Electrotechnology [Shared Technology] 21583VIC
Certificate II in Electrotechnology Servicing [Computer Assembly] UTE20504
Certificate II in Electrotechnology Servicing [Security Systems] UTE20504A
Certificate III in Electrotechnology Communications [Broadcast] UTE30402
Certificate III in Electrotechnology Computer Systems [Networks] UTE30599
Certificate III in Electrotechnology Entertainment and Servicing [Video] UTE30702
Certificate III in Electrotechnology Systems Electrician UTE31199
Certificate IV in Electrical Motor Control] 2406ANC
Certificate IV in Electrotechnology Computer Systems UTE40499
Advanced Diploma of Computer Systems Engineering UTE60199
Advanced Diploma of Electronic Engineering [Analogue and Digital] UTE60399
TAFE COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
432
ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY DEPARTMENT
Certificate II in Engineering Studies 21566VIC
Certificate III in Engineering Studies 21565VIC
Certificate I in Engineering MEM10198
Certificate II in Engineering – Production MEM20198
Certificate II in Engineering – Production Technology MEM20298
Certificate III in Engineering – Production Systems MEM30198
Certificate III in Engineering – Mechanical Trade MEM30298
Certificate III in Engineering – Fabrication Trade MEM30398
Certificate III in Engineering – Technician MEM30598
Certificate IV in Engineering MEM40103
Diploma of Engineering Technology 21621VIC
Advanced Diploma of Engineering Technology 21622VIC
Certificate III in Competitive Manufacturing MCM30104
Certificate IV in Competitive Manufacturing MCM40104
Diploma of Competitive Manufacturing MCM50104
Certificate IV in Logistics and Supply Chain Principles 21638VIC
Certificate III in Marine Craft Construction MEM30603
Certificate IV in Design Technology (Marine Vessels) 21467VIC
Diploma of Design Technology (Marine Vessels) 21465VIC
Advanced Diploma of Design Technology (Marine Vessels) 21463VIC
Certificate IV in Construction and Repair Technology (Marine Vessels) 21468VIC
Diploma of Construction and Repair Technology (Marine Vessels) 21466VIC
Advanced Diploma of Construction and Repair Technology (Marine Vessels) 21464VIC
INDUSTRIAL SKILLS TRAINING CENTRE
Certificate III in Motor Vehicle Driver Trainer (Car) 21370VIC
Certificate III in Motor Vehicle Driver Trainer (Heavy Vehicle) 21381VIC
Certificate III in Civil Construction (Plant) BCC30198
Certificate III in Civil Construction (Road Construction & Maintenance) BCC30298
Certificate III in General Construction BCG31398
Certificate I in Transport and Distribution (Administration) TDT11102
Certificate II in Transport and Distribution (Administration) TDT21102
Certificate III in Transport and Distribution (Administration) TDT31102
Certificate IV in Transport and Distribution (Administration) TDT41102
Certificate III in Transport and Distribution (Mobile Cranes Operations) TDT30902
Certificate I in Transport and Distribution (Rail Operations) TDT10402
Certificate II in Transport and Distribution (Rail Operations) TDT20402
Certificate III in Transport and Distribution (Rail Operations) TDT30402
Certificate IV in Transport and Distribution (Rail Operations) TDT40402
Certificate I in Transport and Distribution (Road Transport) TDT10202
Certificate II in Transport and Distribution (Road Transport) TDT20202
Certificate III in Transport and Distribution (Road Transport) TDT30202
Certificate IV in Transport and Distribution (Road Transport) TDT40202
Certificate I in Transport and Distribution (Stevedoring) TDT10302
Certificate II in Transport and Distribution (Stevedoring) TDT20302
Certificate III in Transport and Distribution (Stevedoring) TDT30302
Certificate IV in Transport and Distribution (Stevedoring) TDT40302
Certificate I in Transport and Distribution (Warehousing and Storage) TDT10102
Certificate II in Transport and Distribution (Warehousing and Storage) TDT20102
Certificate III in Transport and Distribution (Warehousing and Storage) TDT30102
Certificate IV in Transport and Distribution (Warehousing and Storage) TDT40102
Certificate IV in Logistics and Supply Chain Principles 21638VIC
Diploma of Logistics Management TDT51002
SCHOOL OF FURTHER EDUCATION, ARTS AND EMPLOYMENT SERVICES
ACCESS PROGRAMS DEPARTMENT
Certificate I in ESL (Entry) 21496VIC
Certificate I in ESL (Access) 21497VIC
Certificate II in ESL (Access) 21498VIC
Certificate III in ESL (Access) 21499VIC
Certificate IV in ESL (Access) 21500VIC
Course in Preliminary Spoken and Written English 90989NSW
Certificate I in Spoken and Written English 90994NSW
Certificate II in Spoken and Written English 90993NSW
Certificate III in Spoken and Written English 90992NSW
Certificate I in General Education for Adults (Introductory) 21249VIC
TAFE COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
433
Certificate I in General Education for Adults 21250VIC
Certificate II in General Education for Adults 21251VIC
Certificate III in General Education for Adults 21252VIC
Certificate I in Information Technology ICA10101
Certificate II in Information Technology ICA20199
EMPLOYMENT AND TRAINING SERVICES DEPARTMENT
Certificate I in ESL (Access) 21497VIC
Certificate II in ESL (Access) 21498VIC
Certificate III in ESL (Access) 21499VIC
Certificate I in Horticulture RTF10103
Certificate II in Horticulture RTF20103
Certificate I in Music Industry (Foundation) CUS10101
Certificate II in Music Industry (Foundation) CUS20101
Certificate II in Retail Operations WRR20102
Certificate I in Transition Education 15494VIC
Certificate I in Vocational Preparation 21625VIC
Certificate I in Vocational Studies (Media) 21263VIC
Certificate I in Work Education 21108VIC
Course in Workforce Re-entry Skills 21364VIC
Victorian Certificate of Applied Learning (Foundation) 21352VIC
Victorian Certificate of Applied Learning (Intermediate) 21353VIC
Victorian Certificate of Applied Learning (Themed) 21353VICA
FURTHER EDUCATION PROGRAMS DEPARTMENT
Diploma of Further Education 21015VIC
Certificate IV in Further Education 21014VIC
Diploma of Liberal Arts 21220VIC
Certificate IV in Liberal Arts 21219VIC
Victorian Certificate of Education 2200LZV
Certificate III in ESL (Further Study) 21501VIC
Certificate IV in ESL (Further Study) 21502VIC
Course in Preparation for Tertiary Studies (Arts) 21380VIC
MUSIC DEPARTMENT
Certificate IV in Music CUS40101
Certificate IV in Music Industry (Technical Production) CUS40201
Certificate IV in Music Industry (Business) CUS40301
Diploma of Music CUS50101
Diploma of Music Industry (Technical Production) CUS50201
Diploma of Music Industry (Business) CUS50301
VISUAL ART, DESIGN AND MULTIMEDIA DEPARTMENT
Advanced Diploma of Arts (Graphic Design) 12862VIC
Diploma of Arts (Graphic Arts) 12861VIC
Diploma of Arts (Visual Art) 12857VIC
Certificate IV in Design CUV40303
Advanced Diploma of Multimedia [Streams in Interactive Media and Games Development] CUF60501
Diploma of Multimedia CUF50701
Certificate IV in Multimedia CUF40801
Certificate III in Multimedia CUF30601
Certificate II in Multimedia CUF20601
VOCATIONAL EDUCATION PROGRAMS DEPARTMENT
Course in Gateway to Nursing and Health Sciences 21379VIC
Certificate III in ESL (Employment) 21503VIC
Certificate IV in ESL (Access) 21500VIC
Certificate IV in ESL (Further Study) 21502VIC
Certificate IV in ESL (Professional) 21505VIC
Certificate II in Library/Information Services CUL20104
Certificate III in Library/Information Services CUL30104
Certificate IV in Library/Information Services CUL40104
Diploma of Library/Information Services CUL50104
Advanced Diploma of Library/Information Services CUL60104
Certificate IV in Professional Writing and Editing 21123VIC
Diploma of Arts (Professional Writing and Editing) 21124VIC
TAFE COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
434
SCHOOL OF HUMAN SERVICES, SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
CHILD STUDIES DEPARTMENT
Certificate III in Children’s Services CHC30402
Certificate IV in Out of School Hours Care CHC40402
Diploma of Out of School Hours Care CHC50202
Diploma of Children’s Services CHC50302
Advanced Diploma of Children's Services CHC60202
Diploma of Community Services Management CHC51602
Advanced Diploma of Community Services Management CHC60402
Advanced Diploma of Community Services Work CHC60302
HEALTH SERVICES DEPARTMENT
Certificate IV in Health (Nursing) 21358VIC
Course in Medication Administration for Division 2 Registered Nurses in Victoria 21506VIC
Course in First Aid Level 1 - Emergency Life Support 21592VIC
Course in First Aid Level 2 - Provide First Aid 21593VIC
Certificate IV in Training and Assessment TAA40104
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY DEPARTMENT
Certificate I in Information Technology ICA10101
Certificate II in Information Technology ICA20199
Certificate III in Information Technology (Software Applications) ICA30199 [Web pages]
Certificate III in Information Technology (General) ICA30299
Certificate III in Information Technology (Network Administration) ICA30399
Certificate IV in Information Technology 21488VIC
Certificate IV in Information Technology (Network Management) ICA40399
Certificate IV in Information Technology (Client Support) ICA40199
Certificate IV in Information Technology (Technical Support) ICA40599
Diploma of Information Technology (Computer Science) 21378VIC
Diploma of Information Technology (Software Development) ICA50299
Diploma of Information Technology 21489VIC
Dual Diploma of Information Technology (Website Development) ICA50601 and
Diploma of Information Technology (Internetworking) ICA50701
SCIENCE AND BIOTECHNOLOGY DEPARTMENT
Certificate IV in Science 21239VIC
Certificate II in Animal Studies RUV20104
Certificate III in Animal Technology RUV30104
Certificate III in Captive Animals RUV30204
Certificate III in Companion Animal Services RUV30304
Certificate IV in Veterinary Nursing RUV40404
Diploma of Animal Technology RUV50104
Certificate I in Conservation and Land Management RTD10102
Certificate II in Conservation and Land Management RTD20102
Certificate III in Conservation and Land Management RTD30102
Certificate IV in Conservation and Land Management RTD40102
Diploma of Conservation and Land Management RTD50102
Advanced Diploma of Conservation and Land Management RTD60102
Certificate III in Laboratory Skills PML30104
Diploma of Laboratory Technology PML50104
Certificate III in Local Government LGA30104
Certificate IV in Meat Processing (Leadership) MTM40100
Certificate IV in Meat Processing (Quality Assurance) MTM40300
Diploma of Meat Processing MTM50100
Advanced Diploma of Meat Processing MTM60100
Certificate I in Food Processing FDF10103
Certificate II in Food Processing FDF20103
Certificate III in Food Processing FDF30103
Certificate IV in Food Processing FDF40103
Diploma of Food Processing FDF50103
Certificate III in Health Service Assistance (Hospital/Community Health Pharmacy Assistance) HLT31402
Certificate IV in Occupational Health and Safety BSB41604
Diploma of Occupational Health and Safety BSB51604
Advanced Diploma of Occupational Health and Safety BSB61004
Certificate II in Racing (Stablehand) RGR20102
TAFE COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
435
SOCIAL AND COMMUNITY STUDIES DEPARTMENT
Certificate III in Home and Community Care CHC30202
Certificate III in Aged Care Work CHC30102
Certificate IV in Aged Care Work CHC40102
Certificate IV in Service Co-ordination (Ageing and Disability) CHC40202
Certificate III in Disability Work CHC30302
Certificate IV in Disability Work CHC40302
Advanced Diploma of Disability Work CHC60102
Certificate IV in Alcohol and Other Drugs Work CHC41702
Diploma of Alcohol and Other Drugs Work CHC51102
Certificate IV in Justice 21212VIC
Diploma of Justice 21213VIC
Advanced Diploma of Justice 21214VIC
Certificate IV in Community Services (Lifestyle and Leisure) CHC41602
Diploma of Community Services (Lifestyle and Leisure) CHC50802
Certificate IV in Marriage Celebrancy CHC41502
Certificate III in Community Services Work CHC30802
Diploma of Community Development CHC51402
Diploma of Community Welfare Work CHC50702
Certificate III in Youth Work CHC30602
Certificate IV in Youth Work CHC40602
Diploma of Youth Work CHC50502
Foundations of Counselling 3113QB0104
Certificate III in Ambulance Communications (Call Taking) HLT31902
Certificate III in Non-emergency Patient Transport HLT30202
Certificate IV in Basic Emergency Care HLT41002
Certificate IV in Ambulance Communications (Despatch) HLT41102
Diploma of Paramedical Science (Ambulance) HLT50402
SPORT, RECREATION AND PERFORMANCE DEPARTMENT
Certificate III in Visual Arts & Contemporary Craft CUV30103
Diploma of Arts (Small Companies and Community Theatre) 21052VIC
Certificate III in Arts Administration CUV30403
Certificate IV in Arts Administration CUV40503
Certificate III in Fitness SRF30204
Certificate IV in Fitness SRF40204
Diploma of Fitness SRF50204
Certificate II in Sport (Career Orientated Participation) SRS20203
Certificate III in Sport (Career Orientated Participation) SRS30203
Certificate IV in Sport (Development) SRS40503
Diploma of Sport (Development) SRS50503
Certificate II in Sport and Recreation SRO20103
Certificate III in Sport and Recreation SRO30103
Certificate IV in Sport and Recreation SRO40103
Diploma of Sport and Recreation SRO50103
Diploma of Community Recreation SRC50201
Diploma of Event Management THT50202
Graduate Certificate in Career Counselling for Elite Performers (Dance, Music, Sport) 21237VIC
TAFE COURSES AT VICTORIA UNIVERSITY IN 2006
436
